JP2019130144A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To reduce the control load.SOLUTION: Display information of a display mode to be displayed by display means is determined from a plurality of pieces of display information by display information determination means, and among the display information determined by the display information determination means, information corresponding to the data amount in at least two or more pieces of display information is determined by data amount determination means. On the basis of the determination result determined by the data amount determination means, the display mode displayed on display means is variably controlled by variable control means. Furthermore, since the display information determination means determines the display information at least at two or more timings, the control load for displaying the display mode can be reduced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 519

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, an arrangement that displays various images and moving images on a display device has been proposed.

JP 2013-090780 A

  However, there is a problem that the load on display control and the like increases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a game capable of reducing the control load.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that display information determining means for determining display information of a display mode to be displayed on the display means from a plurality of display information, and the display information determining means determining the display information. Data amount determining means for determining information corresponding to the data amount in the display information of at least two or more of the display information, and a display to be displayed on the display means based on the determination result determined by the data amount determining means Variable display means for controlling the aspect in a variable manner, and the display information determination means determines the display information at at least two timings.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the data amount determination means is based on a total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in a predetermined first period. This is to determine whether a specific condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the determination means capable of executing determination, the effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the effect execution Means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed by the means, and the display information determining means displays the effect executed by the effect executing means. The display mode to be displayed is determined.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, among the display information determining means for determining display information of the display mode to be displayed on the display means from a plurality of display information, and the display information determined by the display information determining means, A data amount discriminating unit that discriminates information corresponding to the data amount in at least two or more of the display information, and a display mode to be displayed on the display unit is varied based on a discrimination result discriminated by the data amount discriminating unit. Variable display means for controlling, and the display information determining means determines the display information at at least two timings.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the data amount determining means determines whether or not a specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in a predetermined first period.

  Therefore, there is an effect that a problem that the control load increases can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, it is advantageous to a player when a determination means capable of executing determination, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means. Privilege display means for providing a privilege, and the display information determination means determines a display mode displayed in the effect executed by the effect execution means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect cannot be executed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a). FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device when viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device when viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is XIVc− in FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in a XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of a drive device, (b) is a side view of the drive device in the arrow XVIIb direction view of Fig.17 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a cancellation | release member and a rotation claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotating plate member, (c) is a side view of a cancellation | release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a cancellation | release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is a side view of the tilting apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a side view of the tilting apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a). It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the arrow LIXc direction view. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibration apparatus in the LXa-LXa line | wire of Fig.59 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission apparatus 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line | wire of Fig.59 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of a right disk cam, (b) is a back perspective view of a right disk cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam in the LXVb-LXVb line in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line in FIG. 66 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIb direction view of Fig.67 (a). It is. (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of Fig.6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIIb direction view of Fig.68 (a). It is. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disc member, a ring member, and the 2nd transmission member of a left disc cam. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a right disk cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of a ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of a right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, (f) FIG. 78 is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the state where the inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (opening) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame in the state where the inner frame was opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state where the inner frame was closed with respect to the outer frame and the front frame was opened (deployed). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where a front frame was removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame illustrated by disassembling components disposed below the window portion of the front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame illustrated by disassembling the constituent members disposed below the window portion of the front frame. (A) is a disassembled rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the bundling movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the bundling movable member are shown side by side. (A) is the partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner part of a front frame, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line | wire of Fig.94 (a). (A) is the partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner part of a front frame, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line | wire of Fig.95 (a). (A) is a rear schematic view schematically showing the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a binding movable member and the harness. It is a back surface schematic diagram shown typically, (d) is an upper surface schematic diagram of Drawing 96 (c). (A) And (b) is a top surface schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a bundling movable member, and a harness which illustrate a bundling movable member and a harness typically. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a 1st bending area | region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side surface schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line | wire of Fig.115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper frame member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper frame member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front side assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear side assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of FIG. 124 (a). It is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction view, and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction view of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a fragmentary sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper side frame member, the main body frame, and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the front side assembly, rear side assembly, upper side frame member, main body frame, and upper side board member in the CXXVb-CXXVb line. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of a game board, (b) is a front view of an inner frame. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line | wire of FIG.127 (b). (A) And (b) is the side view of the board surface support apparatus and game board which showed the board surface support apparatus and game board typically. (A) is a front perspective view of a board surface support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) is a front perspective view of a board surface support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board | substrate surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board | substrate surface support apparatus. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a ball launch unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launch unit. (A) And (b) is an exploded front perspective view of a ball launch unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a ball launching unit showing the ball delivery status by the ball feeding device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball launch unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of a ball launch unit, (b) is a front perspective view of a cutting metal member showing the relationship between the yarn and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of the ball launch unit, the inner rail, and the outer rail after the launch of the ball. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation apparatus in the CLIV-CLIV line | wire of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, (b) is an exploded back perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center axis | shaft rotation apparatus and a loose-fitting apparatus. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a center axis | shaft rotation apparatus and a loose fitting apparatus. It is a back perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a second effect member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. (D) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. (D) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. (D) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is the partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a back surface perspective view of the loose-fitting apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal motion apparatus. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal motion apparatus. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is the elements on larger scale of the slit member and slide member in another example of 12th Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the inner frame in 14th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in 15th Embodiment, (b) And (c) is a rear view of a fraud detection apparatus. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 2C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 2C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically representing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIc of FIG. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically representing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the light guide member which represents typically the upward concave part provided in a light guide member in the area | region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front view of a front frame. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line | wire of FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, (b) is a rear perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a schematic cross section of a right side reinforcement rib, (b) is a schematic cross section of a left side reinforcement rib. (A) is a top view of a lower plate unit, (b) is a front view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a right view in the arrow L direction view of a lower plate unit, (b) is a left view in the arrow R direction view of a lower plate unit. It is a rear view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit taken along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. (C) is sectional drawing of the lower pan unit in the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). 229 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the upper production device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the upper effect device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the upper production device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the upper effect device. (A) is a front view of a rear unit, (b) is a front view of an electrical decoration board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rear unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rear unit. (A) is the fragmentary member in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241, an electrical decoration board | substrate, a back surface supporting member, and the fragmentary sectional view of an audio equipment, (b) is the division member in the CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an audio equipment. (A) is the fragmentary member in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 241, an electrical decoration board | substrate, a back surface support member, and the fragmentary sectional view of an audio equipment, (b) is the division member in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an audio equipment. (A) is the fragmentary member in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241, an electrical decoration board | substrate, a back surface support member, and the fragmentary sectional view of an audio equipment, (b) is the division member in the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an audio equipment. It is a side surface schematic diagram of an upper production apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the rear unit in the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line | wire of Fig.241 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit and a guided unit, (b) is a rear view of a division unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit, (b) is a rear view of a division unit. (A) is a front view of a board guide unit, (b) is a rear view of a board guide unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the division unit and guided unit in the CCLIVa-CCLIVa line of FIG. 251 (b), (b) is the division unit and guided unit in the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG. 251 (b). (C) is sectional drawing of the division unit and the guided unit in the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line | wire of FIG. 251 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a partition unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member, (b) is a rear view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member, (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an optical transmission unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an optical transmission unit. (A) is a front view of a transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is It is a right view in the arrow L direction view of a transparent cylindrical member, (e) is a rear view of a transparent cylindrical member. (A) is a front view of an optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. FIG. 6E is a right side view in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 5E is a rear view of the optical transmission unit. 241 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, the acoustic device, and the optical transmission unit, taken along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. (A) is the front schematic diagram which illustrated typically the arrangement | positioning of a 1st illumination part, (b) is the front schematic diagram which illustrated typically the arrangement | positioning of the light visually recognized through an optical transmission unit. . It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device. (A) is a front view of a base member and an electrical decoration substrate, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is a It is a top view of a base member, (e) is a bottom view of a base member, (f) is sectional drawing of the base member and electrical decoration board in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line | wire of Fig.269 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a covering unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a covering unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the light reception member in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), (b) is the elements on larger scale of the light reception member in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). (A) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is sectional drawing of the horizontal production | presentation apparatus in the CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa line | wire of FIG. 274 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the light-receiving member in the CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb line | wire of FIG. 274 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (A) is sectional drawing of the base member in the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line | wire of FIG.272 (b), an electrical decoration board | substrate, and a light receiving member, (b) is the base member in the CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb line | wire of FIG.272 (b), It is sectional drawing of an electrical decoration board | substrate and a light receiving member, (c) is sectional drawing of the base member, electrical decoration board | substrate, and light receiving member in the CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line | wire of FIG.272 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the base member, the electrical decoration board | substrate, and light receiving member which show the cross section of Fig.280 (a) typically. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is sectional drawing of the production | presentation apparatus in the CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa line | wire of FIG. 282, (b) is a schematic diagram of the electrical decoration board | substrate of the production | presentation apparatus in the arrow CCLXXXIVb direction view of FIG. 284 (a). It is a side view of the cover in a 19th embodiment. 229 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit according to the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229. FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front frame, operation device, and lower platen unit in 21st Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a vibration apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a vibration device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is a front perspective view of a covering member. It is a front view of a covering cover member. (A) is a top view of a lower dish unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the lower dish unit in the CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb line | wire of FIG. 296 (a). It is a rear view of a lower plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the lower pan unit in the CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII line | wire of Fig.296 (a). (A) is the partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit which shows a lower plate unit typically, (b) is the partial side surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit in the arrow CCXCIXb direction view of FIG. 299 (a). is there. (A) is the partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit which illustrates a lower plate unit typically, (b) is the partial side surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit in the arrow CCCb direction view of FIG. 300 (a). is there. It is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit which illustrates a lower plate unit typically. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 22nd embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state where the front frame was opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state where a front frame was removed. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. (A) is an enlarged front view of the game board in the range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lottery unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lottery unit. (A) is the side view of the engaging member which visually recognized the engaging member from the rotating shaft direction, (b) is the front view of the engaging member in the arrow CCCXIIb direction view of FIG. (c) is sectional drawing of the engaging member in the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line | wire of FIG. 312 (b). It is a disassembled back perspective view of a main body member, an engaging member, and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the lottery unit in the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line of FIG. 312 (b). (A) is a top view of the operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 33 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in FIG. 302. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front cover. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front cover. (A) is a front view of an electrical decoration board | substrate and a board | substrate fixed board, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrical decoration board | substrate and board | substrate fixed board in the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line | wire of Fig.331 (a). (A) is a front view of an electrical decoration board | substrate and a board | substrate fixing plate, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrical decoration board | substrate and board | substrate fixing board in the CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line | wire of Fig.332 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front unit and the rear unit of the first operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the front unit and the rear unit of the first operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st displacement member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 1st displacement member. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. It is a rear view of a front unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st operation | movement unit in the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line of Fig.339 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st operation | movement unit in the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line of Fig.344 (a). is there. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the gear with a pin and the same phase member, (b) is a front perspective view of the gear with the pin and the same phase member on the left side, and the gear with the pin and the same phase member on the right side. It is a rear perspective view. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd displacement member. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 2nd displacement member. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a rear unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a rear unit. It is a rear view of a rear unit. FIG. 356 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit along the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line in FIG. 356 (a). It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotation angle of the gear with a pin on the basis of an initial angle, and the same phase member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a 2nd operation unit and a back case. It is a front exploded perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the production unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotating body of the effect unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the rotating body of the effect unit. It is a rear view of a 1st rotation member. (A) is a front exploded perspective view of a support part, (b) is a front exploded perspective view of a 2nd support part. (A) is a back surface exploded perspective view of a support part, (b) is a back surface exploded perspective view of a 2nd support part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a top view of an upper cover part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, (b) is a front view of an upper cover part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 376 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member. (D) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the direction of arrow D of Drawing 376 (c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 377 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member. (D) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 377 (c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 378 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member. (D) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378 (c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 379 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member. (D) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of Drawing 379 (c). (A) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380 (a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, FIG. 38D is a top view of the effect unit when viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. (A) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381 (a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, FIG. 38D is a top view of the effect unit when viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. It is a front view of a cyclic | annular front cover and a rotary body. It is an upper surface schematic diagram which shows typically the 1st rotation member in 23rd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the front unit in 24th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing in the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line | wire of FIG. 339 (a) of the 1st operation | movement unit in 25th Embodiment, (b) is the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line | wire of FIG. 344 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st operation | movement unit in the line corresponding to. (A) And (b) is a front view of the displacement apparatus in 26th Embodiment. (A) And (b), It is a rear view of the rear unit in 27th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a rear unit. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the display aspect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the back mode with the low expectation degree of a probability change state among the back modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the back mode with high expectation degree of a probability change state among the back modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. Among the back modes displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the first control example, an example of the display mode of the back mode in which at least the continuation of the probability change state is determined until all the reserved balls at the start of the change are digested is shown. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the start of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the low expectation attack pattern in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the 1st It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the attack pattern of high expectation in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed typically the transition of the state after the end of probability variation big hit in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in execution of the press stop effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in case a player performs the first operation (pressing) with respect to a PUSH button during execution of the press stop effect displayed on a display apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in execution of the chance charge effect produced by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the 3rd in a 1st control example. In a symbol display apparatus, it is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the chance charge effect performed after the stop of a chance charge symbol. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of completion | finish of the chance charge effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the spirit gauge consumption displayed on a display apparatus. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect in execution of the variable display production in which the press stop production | generation in the 1st control example was set. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in execution of the interruption repeated striking effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the output mode of the sound during execution of the continuous hit operation with respect to a PUSH button in execution of the interruption repeated hit effect in the 1st control example, (b) is 1st control. It is the figure which showed typically about the correspondence of the execution timing of a continuous hit operation, and the subtraction number of a monster during execution of the interruption continuous hit effect in an example. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation | variation display effect in which the interruption repeated striking effect in the 1st control example was set. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the pending | holding batch change effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when a player presses a PUSH button during execution of the hold batch change production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the special symbol jackpot random number table in a 1st control example, (b) shows the prescription | regulation content of the normal hit random number table in a 1st control example typically. (C) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the fall lottery table in a 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is a special chart 1 jackpot table in the first control example It is the figure which showed regulation content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) constitutes the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the table for normal use. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the table for probability variation and time reduction which comprises the variation pattern selection table in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the 1st control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. is there. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the back mode lottery table in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the pending | holding change lottery table in a 1st control example, (b) showed the prescription | regulation content of the change point calculation table in a 1st control example typically. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the batch change lottery table in a 1st control example, (b) showed the prescription | regulation content of the chance charge lottery table in a 1st control example typically. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the continuation suggestion effect selection table in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the interruption continuous hitting lottery table in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation in a 1st control example. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in a 1st control example, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the audio | voice output apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press stop effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption repeated impact production process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the batch change effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the charge consumption process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop operation detection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous strike operation detection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the change operation detection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the holding | drawing advance notice lottery process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation suggestion effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode lottery process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation aspect selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the round performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the number command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the command executed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the interruption process. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit command processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the interruption command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the temple search mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning the small hit A during the temple search displayed. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning the probability change middle jackpot displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the 2nd control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol display in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of probability change medium and small hitting A winning displayed on an apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in stray child mode predetermined timing (99th rotation after big hit) production displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd control example, (b) is the 2nd It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the pattern which is winning by falling in the lost child mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the example of control. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the speech mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the speech mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of a depression effect among the variable operation effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the figure in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of a push-up effect among the variable operation effects displayed with a 3 symbol display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of a touch effect among the variable operation effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the change change stand-by effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the 2nd control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol display in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the post-holding change stand-by effect displayed with an apparatus. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation production in the 2nd control example (special drawing winning pattern in the 1st period). (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation production in the 2nd control example (special drawing prize pattern in the 2nd period). It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in the 2nd control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, and (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot 2 in the second control example. It is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the table typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the prescription content of 2 tables for special figure 2 jackpots in the 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the small hit random number 2 table in a 2nd control example, (b) is a figure showing prescription | regulation content of the small hit type selection 2 table in a 2nd control example (C) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the short-time end condition selection table in a 2nd control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. is there. (A) is the figure which showed typically the correspondence of each symbol in a 2nd control example, (b) is the line mode related table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure, (c) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the serif state setting table in a 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the character selection table in a 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the serif selection table in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the operation effect switching table in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation processing at the time of disconnection performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable operation effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd period setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable operation detection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable production management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable operation means management process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the holding | drawing advance notice lottery process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the execution timing setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the speech mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode lottery process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rear mode setting process after completion of the time-shortening performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the volume level selection screen displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode at the time of error occurrence It is. (A) is the figure which showed the example of a display of the original image data in a 3rd control example, (b) is the figure which showed in the 3rd control example, (c) is the 3rd control example. (D) is a figure showing a display example of low resolution image data in the third control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the original image data displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the low-resolution image data displayed. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. is there. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the image point discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press stop effect process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the batch change effect process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume adjustment process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the holding | drawing advance notice lottery process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the image point setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the simple image creation process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the image switching process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. 5 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) is a diagram showing an image layer, (b) is a diagram showing a background A image, (c) is a diagram showing a background B image, and (d) is an inversion It is the figure which showed the image, (e) is the figure which showed the accessory image. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for virtual effects in the 4th control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist A in the 4th control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist B in the 4th control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content corresponding to the display data table A in a 4th control example, (b) is the content corresponding to the display data table B in a 4th control example typically. FIG. (C) is the figure which showed typically the content corresponding to the display data table C and D alternate display in a 4th control example, (d) is the content corresponding to the display data table E in a 4th control example. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is the elements on larger scale of the right side area of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is the elements on larger scale which showed a mode that the electrically-driven accessory in the 5th control example was open | released and a game ball passes a sensor. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which urges the winning of a ball during the common figure displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (b) It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode which suppresses the winning of a ball | bowl. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the state in which the drive scenario A in the 5th control example is set, (b) is an example of the state display mode in which the drive scenario C is set. It is the shown schematic diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in the 5th control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in a 5th control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the type selection table per common figure set to ROM of the main controller in the 5th control example, (b) is a common figure in the 5th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the opening operation | movement content of the electrically-driven accessory based on a hit classification and a game state. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the beating scenario selection table set to ROM of the main controller in a 5th control example, (b) is the content of the drive scenario in a 5th control example. FIG. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 5 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the control process per common figure performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the win-related process per common figure performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 6th control example. It is the elements on larger scale of the right side area of the pachinko machine in the 6th control example. It is the elements on larger scale of the distribution winning device when the game ball is stored in the storage valve of the distribution winning device in the sixth control example. It is an enlarged view of the distribution winning device when the storage valve of the distribution winning device in the sixth control example is driven. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in a 6th control example, (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the drive scenario in a 6th control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of 6 tables for special figure 1 jackpots set to ROM of the main controller in the 6th control example, (b) is the main in the 6th control example. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of special table 2 jackpot table set in the ROM of the control device, and FIG. 8C is a diagram according to the universal map set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the opening operation | movement content of the electrically-driven accessory based on a classification and a game state. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 65 in the La-La line of FIG. 577 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 65 in the Lb-Lb line of FIG. 577 (c). And (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65. (A) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state where the switching member is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path, and (b) is a special view in which the flow path solenoid is inactive. It is a rear view of the back cover body which shows the state which the opening piece of the entrance of a discharge flow path has block | closed the guidance piece of the switching member. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is the display aspect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 7th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the jackpot displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is the entrance to the 2nd entrance in the jackpot It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode at the time of detecting. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the door breakthrough mode effect performed with the start of the ending period after all rounds of jackpots were completed in the 7th control example, (b) These are the schematic diagrams which showed an example of the display mode at the time of breaking through the 1st door in door breakthrough mode production. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of failing to break through the 4th door in the door breakthrough mode production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when succeeding in breaking through all doors in the door breakthrough mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the display mode in the case of shifting to probability changing mode, and the state of a specific winning opening, and (b) is the second reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding | compatible relationship between the display mode and the state of a specific winning opening when shifting to the normal mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example. It is the figure which showed regulation content typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is the main control in a 7th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the table for special figure 1 (C) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the special figure 1 out (normal) table, (d) is the special figure 1 out (probability) table prescription. It is the figure which showed the content typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription content of the table for special figure 2 big hits (4 fluctuations or less), (b) is the figure which prescribes the prescription contents of the table for special figure 2 big hits (5 fluctuations or more). (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 deviation (4 fluctuations or less) table, and (d) is a special figure 2 deviation (5 fluctuations or more). It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the table for use. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in the 7th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in the 7th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the 7th control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in the 7th control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in the 7th control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning medium prize winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the small hit end performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is the round performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the number command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in an 8th control example, (b) is the main control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of this. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd per random number table set to ROM of the main controller in the 8th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in the 8th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the 8th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state command setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination processing at the time of execution performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the breakthrough mode selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 8th control example. (A) is the figure which illustrated the case where in a modification of the 8th control example, the storage valve is in the protruding state (the state where three balls as the upper limit number are stored above the storage valve). Yes, (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is buried in the modification of the eighth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the modification of an 8th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the jackpot opening displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth control example, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the ninth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in 1 round of jackpots displayed by. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of completion | finish of 1 round of jackpot displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 9th control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol in a 9th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the interval after 1 round of jackpot displayed on a display apparatus. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in a 9th control example, (b) is the 1st type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 9th control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the open scenario selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 9th control example, (b) is the main control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example, (b) is the promotion effect lottery table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. (C) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the open scenario selection process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion effect lottery process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the ninth control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of the jackpot opening displayed in the modification of a 9th control example, and the reach | removal out of reach, (b) is a figure which shows 9th control. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st round of jackpot displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the modification of an example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect in the modification of a 9th control example, (b) is super in the modification of a 9th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of a detachment | leaching. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 10th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a table of special hitting hit table in the tenth control example. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the table for special hit | disappearance loss in a 10th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in a 10th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 11th control example. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed the operation | movement content of the distribution member in the 11th control example. Schematic representation of the correspondence between the opening / closing operation of the open / close door of the V winning device and the switching of the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the V winning device is guided in the eleventh control example It is the shown schematic diagram. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect with the highest expectation degree of the pullback mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in an 11th control example, (b) is the figure in the 11th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode which is displayed with a 3 symbol display apparatus and the expectation degree of the pull-back mode is medium. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode with the lowest expectation degree of the pull-back mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in an 11th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the eleventh control example. It is the figure which showed regulation content typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in an 11th control example, (b) is the main control in an 11th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the small hitting type selection table set to ROM of the apparatus, (c) is prescription | regulation of the short time number selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 11th control example. It is the figure which showed the content typically. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh control example, and (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the used special figure 2 per table, (c) is for special figure 2 out of order (normal / retraction) set to ROM of the main controller in the 11th control example It is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the table typically, (d) is the prescription | regulation content of the table for special figure 2 out (renzo) set in ROM of the main controller in the 11th control example typically FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the common figure fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in an 11th control example, (b) is the main control in an 11th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of an apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically the mode transition method in the 11th control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example, (b) is the expectation degree selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 5 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time-short frequency update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hits start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 5 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage detection process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a small hit in the normal mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 12th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a diagram of the first per random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is the figure which showed regulation content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 12th control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the small hit type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 12th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 12th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the short time number selection table set to ROM of this. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the small hit prescription number selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 12th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in the 12th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the mode transition method in the 12th control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example, (b) is the rank-up lottery table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the short time frequency update process 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hits start process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back surface setting process after completion | finish performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hits related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree update process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the mode transition method in the 13th control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a jackpot in super-continuous change mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 13th control example, and (b) is the 13th control It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in case the number of remaining small hits in a super-continuous change mode is small displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in an example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is the first random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth control example. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small hit random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection 13 table set to ROM of the main controller in the 13th control example, (b) is the main in the 13th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the probability variation and time-saving number selection table set to ROM of the control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a small hit type selection 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is a small for normal / short time in the thirteenth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the hit classification selection table, (c) is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the table for probability variation / latent probability in a 13th control example typically. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in a 13th control example, (b) is the table for special figure 2 per 13th control example. It is the figure which showed regulation contents typically, (c) is the figure which showed the regulation contents of the special figure 2 out (normal) table in the 13th control example typically, and (d) It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the table for special figure 2 deviation (probability change / short time / latency probability) in 13 control examples. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the common figure fluctuation pattern selection 13 table set to ROM of the main controller in the 11th control example, (b) is the main in the 13th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of a control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hits start process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 13 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 13 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pullback transfer process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 13 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hits related process 13 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 13th control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the long press effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 14th control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically about the correspondence of the voice mode and display mode at the time of performing a long press continuously during long press production in the 14th control example, (b) In the 14th control example, it is the figure showing typically the correspondence of the voice mode and display mode at the time of pressing down interrupted in the middle of long press production. (A), (b) is the figure which showed typically about the correspondence of the transition of the number of gauges at the time of long press production, and elapsed time in the 14th control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the correspondence of the audio | voice aspect and display aspect in execution of a probability change continuation suggestion effect in a 14th control example, (b) is a probability change in a 14th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the correspondence of the audio | voice mode and display mode in case holding becomes 0 during execution of a continuation suggestion effect. In the 14th control example, it is the figure which showed typically the correspondence of the audio | voice aspect and display aspect in the case of winning a jackpot during execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourteenth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the suggested suggestion table. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example, (b) is the reproduction speed selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 14 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the long press effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the long press execution process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the long press start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo fluctuation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 14 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation effect setting process 14 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the win process during suggestion production performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in the 14th control example. In the modification of the 14th control example, it is the figure which showed typically the correspondence of the audio | voice mode and display mode in case holding becomes 0 during execution of a continuation suggestion effect.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIG. 1 to FIG.
4, the first embodiment of the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”).
An embodiment when applied to 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable in front of the front, with the side provided with the opening / closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. Front view (in order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15)
1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the left and upper two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable to the front near side with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. ing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2).
This is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed in (see) or when changing the contents of the effect of super reach.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, the electric decoration portions 29 to 3 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs.
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, the front view of the front frame 14 (FIG. 1).
(Refer to) In the upper left part, a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, a lending of a ball is performed according to the operation. Done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is formed on a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, variable winning device 330, through Gate 67,
The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
It is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. General winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, variable display unit 8
0 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
Can be visually recognized from the front side. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
And an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails in front of the game board 13 (a winning opening is provided,
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 61 (FIG. 2
The return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the), and the situation where the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide path again is prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured such that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second
It is configured so that it can be used properly depending on whether or not a winning opening 640 has been won. In particular,
When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates,
When the ball has won the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. Multiple L
The ED is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by the combination of the emission colors.

In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B,
Not only will the lottery result be a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change,
In the case of a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R regular jackpot” is the maximum number of rounds after 15 jackpots,
While shifting to the low-probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a short-time state.

In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, the state of the game that is neither probable nor short-lived (
Neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up).

During probability change and short time, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the second prize opening 64
The time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during the probability change or the short time, and the second prize opening 640 is not changed.
It is also possible to change at least one of the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the opening is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per one time. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640.
The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that displays the variation of the third symbol in synchronization with the variation display in FIG. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

When the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640.
Is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal.
Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
The symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Through gate 67
The number of assembling is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Also, the first symbol display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of balls to be held, so that the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. (Refer to Fig. 4) A lottery lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is first.
This is shown by the symbol display device 37B.

Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment,
The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640 are the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won differs from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, a prize to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize slot 64 The number of balls may be three and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second winning port 640 may be five.

The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State) and the ball is the second winning entrance 6
It will be easy to win 40.

As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second pattern is higher during probability change and during shorter time than normal,
In addition, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is short, “○” is displayed in the variation display of the second symbol.
The number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”).
) It is more advantageous for the player to aim at winning big wins by obtaining many opportunities for winning big wins by winning at the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, during a certain change or during a short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 allows the second prize opening 64.
Since the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state and easy to win the second winning port 640, the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning port 640. The ball is fired (so-called “right-handed”) to pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and at the same time, aiming to win a 15R positive change by winning the second prize opening 640 This is advantageous for the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state,
The specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116.
Are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100-10
4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material, and is intended to peel off the seal seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11.
2 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 allows the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 3
The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display on the 7A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device is executed.

Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
Work area). Note that the RAM 203 retains data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has
The payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the opening / closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, and the MPU 201 outputs signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the PU 211, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is the pachinko machine 10
Even after the power is turned off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be held (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is provided with the payout control device 1.
11 but is not connected to the main controller 110.

When the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 has a ball launch unit 112 that has a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
a is controlled. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (
The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the operation handle 51 is not operated), and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display control device 114 such as display) or notice effect
The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 performed in is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 22
5, a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to each other. Other equipment 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the sound lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226, and also in correspondence with the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81.
Is used to control the display of the variation effect of the third symbol. Further, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and the RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a reference). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 is an AC 2 supplied from the outside.
Taking in the voltage of 4 volts, various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20
It generates a 12 volt voltage for driving a solenoid, a motor, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are generated. Necessary voltages are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, a power failure (
The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed normally and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG.
00 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in front view (that is, the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed into the player, and is provided in a region configured by a receiving recess 17a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a so that at least a finger of a hand can easily enter. Thereby, the player can make preparations to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is disposed on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following explanation, explanation is given on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 (b) is a view of VI of FIG. 6 (a).
FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line b-VIb. FIG.
FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed in a first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a faces in the up-and-down direction. In FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is moved from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a faces upward and rearward by rising up around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, a specific display on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (for example, a display “press button”).
This is what the player will do when appears.

Here, for example, when the tilting device 310 is pushed by a method of dropping the hand downward as in the case of pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a push-in operation with a method of dropping his / her hand downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to cause the method to drop the hand vigorously downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 is damaged can be reduced.

With reference to FIG.8 and FIG.9, the difference in the appearance of the tilting apparatus 310 in a player viewpoint is demonstrated. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand that pushes in the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's viewpoint in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it cannot be seen in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player viewpoint). As a result, the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31.
Since the area of 1i is configured to gradually increase, and accordingly, the amount of light of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) disposed inside the operation device 300 is gradually increased,
The difference in the amount of light that can be visually recognized by the player between the first state and the second state (degree of light and darkness) increases, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side surface of the little finger near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist around the shaft), The tilting device 310 can be pushed and operated comfortably with the palm integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the side surface portion on the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to cause the method of dropping the hand vigorously downward.
Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 is damaged can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG.
FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is pivotally supported so that the tilting device 310 can rotate around a shaft portion 314 disposed at the rear end portion.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that gives a direct impact to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 32 that detect a pushing operation from the first state.
4R is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds the tilting device 310 from the lower side.

In this way, by placing a sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310, a voice coil motor for applying a driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner region of the lower frame member 320 can be used largely to tilt. The device 310 can be accommodated in the lower frame member 320. This
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG.
FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR <b> 1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear side end (the back side end in FIG. 12), and the tilting thereof. The lower frame member 320 which has the lower bearing part 323 which supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from the lower side and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and the lower frame member 320 which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the upper side. A member having a recessed portion disposed facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is disposed between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. And tilting device 3
10, the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement in the second state and the lower frame member 320 are fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 constituting the link mechanism are provided with a driving force. A driving device 340 for transmitting, and a protective cover device 3 that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and that protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from the left and right sides and the rear.
50 is mainly provided.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the near side, and a bottom plate portion 321 that is inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321. The horizontal part 3 comprised from the plate-shaped member arrange | positioned horizontally in the back | upper side upper end part
22, a semicircular receiving portion opened upward in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, a lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from below, and a bottom plate portion 321 below The left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R are arranged in a pair on the side.
And an opening 325 that is an opening that is formed by cutting a portion disposed below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position in the left-right direction of the bottom plate portion 321.

The bottom plate portion 321 is in contact with the tilting device 310 so as to determine the moving end of the tilting device 310 and has a plurality of openings. Through the openings, the portion of the tilting device 310 is the bottom plate portion 3.
21 can pass through.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a formed at the front center portion, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325.
The insertion hole 321c is provided mainly symmetrically on the left and right sides.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a position in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size that allows the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects to the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is provided with detection pieces 311gL and 311 that are projected from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
It is a through hole configured to allow gR to be inserted. Detection piece 31 protruding from detection hole 321b
1 gL and 311 gR are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c is configured to have a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, and is formed in a U-shape that extends upward from the upper surface and has an open portion on the near side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are provided on the bottom plate portion 32 of the lower frame member 320.
The separation distance from 1 (the position of the detection groove) is the same at the left and right.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) in which a detection unit can be inserted. And a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

The opening 325 is a through-hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the driving device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the lateral width is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f so as to protrude to the upper front side (see FIG. 17B).
LED device 341 by pushing up drive device 340 upward after passing through
f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the LED device 341f to the rotating claw member 34
Compared with the vertical width including up to 7, the vertical width of the opening 325 can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is disposed so as to face the opening 331 that is an opening that is hooked by the extending portion 311 h that extends from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 configured to have a semicircular shape with the lower side opened and supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured such that it can be divided in the vertical direction and is covered in three directions except the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351 A voice coil motor 352 supported on the bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibration surface directed diagonally forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side And a detection sensor 353R.

FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make the right detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center visible.

The voice coil motor 352 has a vibrating surface with a lower frame member 3 in an assembled state (see FIG. 10).
The bottom plate portion 321 is disposed in a posture substantially parallel to the 20 bottom plate portions 321. Accordingly, when the tilting device 310 projects the projecting protruding portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340. Disk cams 344L, 3 of the driving device 340
44R is arrange | positioned in the aspect arrange | positioned inside the detection groove | channel of detection sensor 353L, 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disc cams 344L and 344R serve as detection sensors 353L and 3
It can be detected whether or not the disc grooves 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase by detecting whether or not they are arranged in the detection groove 53R.

In the present embodiment, the left and right disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, so that the detection sensors 353L and 35
There are two specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG.
) Is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of the arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a plan view of FIG. XIVc
It is sectional drawing of the tilting device 310 in the -XIVc line. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 has a case main body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and an upper and lower opening, and a cover on the upper opening of the case main body 311. A lid 312 that is fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front end portion of the lid 312 and hangs downward, and a mode that is sandwiched between rear ends of the case body 311 and the lid 312. The case body 3 at the rear ends of the shaft body 314, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft section 314, the case body 311 and the lid 312.
11 and a ring-shaped ring member BR1 that fixes the lid 312 indivisiblely.

The case main body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is inclined downward from the back side toward the near side in the first state, an opening portion 311b that is opened at the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending from the flange extending downward along the edge of the shaft to the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d that is a semicircular recess in cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. An insertion groove 311e, which is a groove disposed at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f that is formed in a hook shape and engages the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending in a pair of left and right below the bottom plate portion 311a, and a predetermined amount from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side. A protective lens member 311i formed from a light-transmitting material and having a shape extending along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and disposed on the upper side of the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a. And an overhanging protruding portion 311j that protrudes downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player, the bottom plate portion 311a
This is a portion that abuts the 20 bottom plate portions 321 on the surface.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is the guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340.
It is a cylindrical member inserted through 45b, and has a role as a part for transmitting a driving force to and from the driving device 340.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. However, the overhang length is made longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the front end of the right detection piece 311gR to the front end of the left detection piece 311gL with the shaft portion 314 as the center is approximately 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22)) and the push-in end (see FIG. 23), the left detection piece 311gL is projected in comparison with the right detection piece 311gR.

The extending portion 311h is a portion that protrudes from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position that is locked to the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). It is comprised by the aspect.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14A).
(See FIG. 14C), the player can easily release (load easily) the load when the player pushes the tilting device 310.
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging projecting portion 311j is projecting at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a, and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
In a state in which is pushed in (see FIG. 29), the tip is inserted through the transmission hole 321a and the tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 31.
2b is fixed to the top plate member 312a, and the LED device 34 in the first state (see FIG. 6).
And a cylindrical member 312c composed of a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding 1f.

While the cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 with the rigidity in the axial direction, the cylindrical member 312c cylinders light irradiated from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6). While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated in a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is configured to have a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. In addition, a spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right torsion portions, both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the torsion portion, and a center portion 315b connecting the pair of torsion portions, .

  Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17A is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the driving device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a skeleton by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a driving motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343)
Left disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344R) and connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344
And a release member 346 that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341 and abuts against the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the disc cam 344 in the rotation direction. And a rotating claw member 347 that is pivotally supported coaxially with the releasing member 346 and relatively moves as the releasing member 346 rotates, and a coil spring shape that generates a biasing force in a direction in which the rotating claw member 347 is tilted down. A first spring SP1 that is a spring member of the first member and a release member 34
2 and a second spring SP2 that is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in a direction in which they are separated from each other.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward on the left and right and is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the top.
41a, a shaft support hole 341b that is drilled at the same position of the plate portion opposed to the motor accommodating portion 341a and supports the disc cam 344, and an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. A shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b, an extension portion 341d that extends from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and a motor The illumination support part 341 extended toward the front upper direction from the accommodating part 341a.
e and an LED device 341f that is disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and in which an LED light source is disposed.

The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and refracts light (
A portion that refracts light). Thereby, it becomes possible to irradiate the light of the LED device 341f uniformly upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 has a motor housing portion 34 inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.
The fixing member 342a fastened and fixed to 1a is provided.

The fixed member 342a supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the rotation gear of the drive motor 342 is pivotally supported and the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotation gear.

The arm member 345 is drilled in a perfect circle shape at one end and is pivotally supported in a shaft support hole 345a that is pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344 and a rectangular shape in the other end. And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where an end portion on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a contacts the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 is rotated one or more times at the opposite end portion. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft bar 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft bar 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and is supported by the cylindrical member 343a and a drive motor 342.
A transmission gear 343b that meshes with the rotation gear of the motor, a movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the columnar member 343a by an axial movement, and the movable clutch 343c. And a coil spring 343d that presses against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has a D-shaped fixing portion 3 for fixing the disc cam 344 to both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2, and the right fixing part 343a2 is formed longer to the center side than the left fixing part 343a1. Here, the fixed portion 343a2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
When 43c moves against the urging force of coil spring 343d, it is formed with such a length that it can move to a position where it does not interfere with transmission gear 343b.

The transmission gear 343b includes a circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted;
And a clutch portion 343b2 in which irregularities are formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the axis from the surface opposed to the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the column member 343a even when the column member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
43c1 and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to have recesses and projections along the axial center at a circumferential position around the shaft from a surface opposed to the transmission gear 343b and configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2. .

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have an apex angle of about 100.
It is composed of angle-shaped convex portions and concave portions.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot be rotated relative to the columnar member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b of the transmission gear 343b is disabled.
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted through the movable clutch 343c to the cylindrical member 34.
3a. Thus, the disk cam 3 is rotated by rotating the drive motor 342.
44 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

The movable clutch 343c is normally connected to the transmission gear 3 by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.
It is arrange | positioned in the position close | similar to 43b, and the engagement relation of clutch part 343b2, 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when the axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
It is configured to be movable along a direction 43a2 away from the transmission gear 343b.

The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the disc cam 344 has a left mirror cam 344L and a right disc cam 344R that are substantially mirror-shaped.
Since only the positions 44eL and 344eR are described, only the left disc cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20A is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disc cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. is there. 20A and 20B show a state where the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and at the center position of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a projecting in a cylindrical shape in the inner direction, a circular rib 344b projecting inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and outside the circular rib 344b As a rib having a lower height than the circular rib 344b, the rib is projected inward and 2
Engaging ribs 344c having portions projecting radially outward at the locations, and circular ribs 344b
And the engaging rib 344c are projected in a cylindrical shape outwardly and the arm member 3
It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d connected to 45 (see FIG. 18) and a detection hole 344eL formed near the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R is different from the right disc cam 344R only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position that forms an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other is configured by mirroring the shape of the left disc cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a cross section D whose inner periphery engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
It is comprised from the shape of a character, and the outer periphery is comprised by the shape fitted in the shaft support hole 341b (refer FIG. 18). That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can contact the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c protrudes radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed. From the overhanging portion 344c1, the first drawing-in portion 344c1 that retracts radially inward at a position shifted from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (in this embodiment, angle θ1 = 50 °), and the first overhanging portion 344c1. At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), a second overhanging portion 344c3 that overhangs radially outward again, and the second overhanging portion 344c.
And a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a position shifted from the angle 3 by an angle θ3 (in this embodiment, an angle θ3 = 20 °).

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is disposed at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right sides, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21A shows a state in which the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346. FIG. 21B shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 is rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates by contacting the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide long hole 347b). (See FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), From the projecting pin 346b projecting in the thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a And an engagement portion 346d configured as a portion protruding with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is engaged with the engaging rib 34 of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
4c (refer FIG. 20) is a part comprised so that contact | abutment is possible. In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 346
Since the outer periphery of d is formed to be curved, contact with the engagement rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongate hole 347b drilled so as to be able to guide the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 along the size (including a movement locus of the protruding pin 346b inside) and the second spring SP2.
The end of the first spring (see FIG. 18), the insertion hole 347c through which the end of the shaft is inserted, the flange 347d that protrudes downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and And a pull-down hole 347e that is drilled so as to be inserted.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is disposed at the terminal position in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 21A clockwise) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the push-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion When a load in the push-up direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotating claw member 347 until the small angle state shown in FIG.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an operation example in the case where the player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 show the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand who operates the tilting device 310 repeatedly is shown.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311 a has a hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347.
To be hooked. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is the right detection sensor 32.
It is arranged in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an operation of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31 is moved.
0 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is operated repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval at which the player repeatedly hits, the torsion spring 31 is used.
5 is not in time for the tilting device 310 to return, and the push-in operation is performed at a halfway position, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in this embodiment, if the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is resisted against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 to be pushed down (see FIG. 18), and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. For this reason, there are problems that the product cost increases and space saving cannot be achieved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by a vibration operation is disposed at a position facing the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. The

As shown in FIG. 24, the tilting device 31 is driven without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extending direction from the state shown in FIG.
The return operation of 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the voice coil motor 352 is always driven. For example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the player Since an unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state is calculated for a predetermined period. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hitting operation. This
The player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (turning operation) from the first state will be described. 25 to 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG.

25 shows a state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in FIG.
25 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25 and the rotary claw member 347 is changed in posture. In FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is changed from the state shown in FIG. Only the forward rotation direction and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is shown in FIG.
FIG. 29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates. FIG. 29 shows a state where the player has pushed the tilting device 310 from the state of FIG. 28 to the end position, and FIG. 30 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. When the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount, the engagement rib 34
A state where the second projecting portion 344c3 of 4c has reached the second initial state in which the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is contacted is illustrated. 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
The position of 10 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes in the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312.
The upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside 2c. Therefore, the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, while a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction can be secured. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c can have an effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and an effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

26, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. ), The first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, so that the release member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward direction to a position where the engagement with the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 is released.

The posture change of the release member 346 is caused by the first retracting portion 344c2 and the engaging portion 34 of the engaging rib 344c.
Since the disk cam 344 is maintained until it faces the state 6d, the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27),
When the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 27) by the urging force of the first spring SP1. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a state where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG.

In this state, the tilting device 31 when the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be viewed from the player's viewpoint is in the first state.
Since it increases compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (the direction toward the player).
Irradiation is possible. Therefore, when the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, the LED device 3
The traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f can be changed, and the light effect can be improved.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the up and down reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated backward by the same amount ( FIG.
The angle D1 shown in FIG. 28 is obtained by repeatedly performing the operation of rotating in a clockwise direction (8 clockwise).
In this range, the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down. Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 with respect to the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player with respect to the operation device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes corresponding to the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly operates up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is moved to the LED device 3.
Since it is arranged on the front side of 41f (left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of light emitted from the LED device 341f is expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction, but also in the left-right direction (vertical direction in FIG. 28). Can do.

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction (front direction) toward the player, and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push in the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction in which the tilting device 310 is lowered (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c). Only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only a load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating pawl member 347, thereby rotating the pawl. The member 347 is rotated in the backward direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and subsequently, the tilting device 310 is pushed in, whereby the bottom plate portion 311a is moved into the bowl-shaped portion 347d.
, The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Accordingly, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the upward direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, the player moves the tilting device 31 from the state where the tilting device 310 shown in FIG.
When the player releases his hand after depressing 0, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats the movement in the expansion direction and the movement in the reduction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 generates a driving force for assisting the raising of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and the purpose is to perform a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position. Can be used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting protruding portion 311 j of the tilting device 310 is the lower frame member 320.
The contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only in a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 and pushes it into the terminal end.

Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, whether or not vibration by the voice coil motor 352 is generated at the end of the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is pushed in,
Only the player who has pushed the tilting device 310 into operation can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operation means is lowered.

On the other hand, this embodiment is configured in such a manner that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, when the jackpot is confirmed, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled so as to produce a vibration effect, so that the player can improve the expectation when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the tilting device 310 is improved. The value as a prefetching means can be improved.
Thereby, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as the operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, the disc cam 344 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the second overhanging portion 344c1.
By rotating the disc cam 344 by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) until it comes into contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the drive device 340 can be set in the second initial state. .

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 contacts the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 and the engagement rib 344c abut.

29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 29), and the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reversely rotates. By this method, the driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is moved forward (see FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347.
It can be rotated counterclockwise).

Next, referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (turning motion) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (turning operation) through the second state.

31 to 34 show the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 31, the disc cam 344 is moved forward from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31) by rotating them counterclockwise) is illustrated. In FIG. 32, the disk cam 344 is changed from the state shown in FIG.
Is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state as shown in FIG.
2 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 reciprocates from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG.
In FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG.
In FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand that pushes in the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 and the disc cam 344. Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be lifted with a low resistance, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed to about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state where the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released) by about 10 degrees. Position in which 310 can be placed in the second state (the disc cam 344 is 180 ° from the first initial state.
Rotated posture). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state from the state of FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disk cam 344 obstructs the state change (the disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 enters the second state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the reverse rotation direction ( FIG.
The angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is obtained by repeating the operation of rotating in the clockwise direction.
In this range, the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down. Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 with respect to the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player with respect to the operation device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes corresponding to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is moved to the LED device 3.
Since it is arranged on the front side of 41f (left side in FIG. 33), the irradiation range of light emitted from the LED device 341f is expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33) Can do.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, as the vertical movement mode of the tilting device 310, the vertical movement shown in FIG.
Two types of up-and-down motions (turning motions) including the up-and-down motions shown in FIG. 33 can be performed immediately after the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Accordingly, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be created.

Thereby, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, difference in expectation of jackpot), and the tilting device 310
It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push in the tilting device 310. In the state shown in FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311
c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being loaded with the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only a load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of reaching the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, so that the rotating claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the bowl-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (FIG. 34 clockwise) and subsequently pushing in the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Accordingly, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the upward direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, the player moves the tilting device 31 from the state where the tilting device 310 shown in FIG.
When the player releases his hand after depressing 0 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310
Can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, after the player pushes in, the rotary claw member 3
The operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by 47 will be described. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (turning movements) of the tilting device 310 or continuously perform one of them.

35 to 37 show the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is moved backward from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) by rotating it in the clockwise direction is illustrated, and in FIG. 36, the rotating cam 344 is in the reverse rotation direction (in FIG. A state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) until it rotates to the position where the disc cam 344 contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated in FIG. The disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of the 50 is turned on is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of the player's hand that can swing from the top to the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c is engaged with the engaging portion of the release member 346. 346d abuts. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346, but the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide long hole 347b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotating claw member 347 is fixed as shown in FIG.
The posture shown in FIG.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 35 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotary claw member 347 Regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotation cam 344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 5, the driving device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

In the present embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the second initial state shown in FIG. 36 is passed. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, as described above, it is possible to perform the up and down operation (turning operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2.

Here, the player who pushes in the tilting device 310 can perform an operation of keeping the hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special indication such as “long press”. is there.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by forgetting to release the hand that pushed the excessive tilting device 310 that concentrates on the production, but in this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (turning operation) in the range of the angle D2,
The posture of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the state where the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
5)) while the ON state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 is tilted below the first state), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. The left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is controlled in such a manner that the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 that is turned on.

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not move up when the player's hand is placed above the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG.
7 is caused by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is kept on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation), the burden on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) is kept on when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be controlled so as to immediately reversely return to the state shown in FIG. Thereby, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and it is not necessary to apply a useless load on the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a device for preventing the destruction of the driving device 340 will be described. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. In FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is in a state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state.
The player's hand that holds and fixes the upper side of the main body cover 351 is not shown in FIG. 39.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grasps and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34 is used.
Therefore, the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, the drive motor 342
If there is a high load between the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely with respect to the transmission shaft bar 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so that it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disc cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, whereby the clutch portion 343b.
The power is transmitted through 2, 343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. Thereby, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. Thereby, the drive motor 3
It is possible to prevent the 42 from failing.

When the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °).
When the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 is not in the ON state (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, to stop the gripping operation, for example, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while notifying by displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and to notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and to stop the drive motor 342 early,
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other, a phase shift occurs.
The initial phase of the drive motor deviates from the initial phase of the disc cam 344 having the same phase as that of the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled from the state before the phase shift occurs (by the number of steps or the like), the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the drive device 340 has entered the state, it can be determined that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state, and therefore the control of the drive motor 352 is resumed using that state as the initial position (of the drive motor 342). By resetting the initial phase, control is performed with the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 aligned again even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. It can be performed.

Thereby, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342 is provided.
It is possible to prevent a deviation between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be appropriately operated to produce an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 40, the disc cam 3 is changed from the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 41 illustrates a state in which 44 rotates 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction), and FIG. 41 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 further rotates in the arrow CCW direction from the state illustrated in FIG. Further, in FIG. 42, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward from the state shown in FIG. 38 (arrow CW direction).
FIG. 43 shows a state where the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CW direction from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 31
0 rises toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 3, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain that state in the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only due to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 42 toward the state shown in FIG.
Is rotated in the arrow CW direction, even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, Member 3
No load in the direction of pushing up 47 is generated. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, FIG. 38 to FIG. 40 and FIG.
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 4, both appear to be the same operation, and after the first state, the subsequent movements are different from those in FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state is expressed as a drive motor 342.
(See FIG. 39). However, the player notices the mode of control being performed due to the difference in the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342, and the effect to be executed from now on. There is a risk that it will be grasped by the player and the player's interest will be lost. The tilting device 3
When the operation of suddenly stopping 10 is performed by the sudden stop of the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the operation of the tilting device 310 thereafter is changed, the drive motor 342 is driven.
Since the direction of the rotation is different only in its direction, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of the rotation by its driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the production changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state,
Since the player can grasp the change in the expectation level of the production, the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38), and the player moves toward the first state by the drive motor 342. The movement of the tilting device 310 can be watched over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 and the drive are driven by the player operating incorrectly when driving the drive motor 342. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to produce an effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the drive motor 3 is provided when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped.
The burden given to 42 can be eliminated, and the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, even when the player performs an operation of pushing down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 performs an up / down motion without being regulated by the rotating claw member 347 (third motion mode). explain.

44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 44, the disc cam 3 from the first initial state of the driving device 340 (see FIG. 25).
A state in which 44 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated, and the first
The disc cam 344 is at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
The outline of the tilting device 310 after rotating in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is indicated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are the engaging portions of the releasing member 346. By rotating the disc cam 344 in a reciprocating manner while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is changed to the reverse direction (
44 (clockwise in FIG. 44), the tilting device 31 is maintained in the state shown in FIG.
When 0 moves up and down, even if the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 are not engaged, and the tilting device 310 is released when the player releases the hand.
Can move upward from the first state (a position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310), and an operation mode in which the vertical movement is continued can be implemented. .

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only after the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether it was moving up or down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode (the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and released. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the hand is released after the tilting device 310 is pushed in). Assuming that the expectation level of the jackpot is high, not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the hand from the tilting device 310, the expectation level of whether or not the jackpot will be hit is recognized. Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings when the player pays attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described. However, in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. A slide claw member 23 when the release member 2346 is pushed up
48 is configured in such a manner as to slide. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

FIG. 45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
5 (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

In FIG. 46A, the rotating plate member 2347 is attached to the second spring S with respect to the release member 2346.
FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the angle of rotation is increased to the end position in the biasing direction of P2, and in FIG. 46B, the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2. The small angle state is shown. The state in which the release member 2346 rotates by contacting the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 3
46b is located in the middle position of the guide slot 347b) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47).
As a functional member pivotally supported by FIG. 47), a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a tilting device 2310 (FIG. 47) are disposed on the opposite side of the releasing member 2346 across the rotating plate member 2347. And a slide claw member 2348 configured to be slidable along an arcuate trajectory centered on the rotation axis. In addition, about the structure which has the function similar to 1st Embodiment in the cancellation | release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted to the rail portion 2347f, and a front end at the upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that is projected in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 45) and a thickness portion of the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b (a vertical direction in FIG. 47 (a)) are arranged to overlap. A reinforcing portion 2348c formed of a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a projecting pin 2348d that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c mainly. Prepare.

The curved portion 2348a has a width that is slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is connected to the rail portion 2.
It is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being fitted into the 347f.

The hook-shaped part 2348b is similar in shape to the hook-shaped part 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a bottom plate portion 2311 of a tilting device 2310 described later.
It is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that adsorbs a.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotating plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. This is a portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

The projecting pin 2348d is a columnar member that is inserted into the functional long hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is configured by a metal rod that is inserted and fixed into the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, so that the projecting pin 2348 d becomes the functional long hole 23.
The slide claw member 2348 slides and is pushed by the side surface of 46e.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide long hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c,
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348 and a support long hole 2347g through which the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted are provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is rotated in the forward direction (see FIG. (46 counterclockwise) in the state of being arranged at the end position (see FIG. 47)
It is formed from the curved shape along the circular arc centering on.

The support long hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47), similarly to the rail portion 2347f. Protruding pin 2348 in support long hole 2347g
When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved in a state where d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support long hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from wobbling. it can.

The release member 2346 includes a functional long hole 2346e, which is a long hole drilled in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the protruding pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and the first long hole is configured by a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. A hole 2346e1, and a second slot 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first slot 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a,
Is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 is moved to the rail portion 234.
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the release member 2346 remains as it is without the time delay for the movement of the release member 2346. Reflected in speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 quickly slides, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also reduced.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional long hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

That is, in the present embodiment, the slide claw member 2 is moved by rotating the release member 2346.
Even if 347 slides, the slide claw member 2347 is not slid due to the slide claw member 2347 being pulled when the angle is large. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the rising of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 47, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is the release member 234.
FIG. 48 shows a state where the disc cam 344 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 47 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47), and the release member 2346 is engaged. The state in which the portion 346d is pushed up is shown. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG. 48, and the release member 2346 is moved to the second spring SP.
The state returned by the urging force of 2 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and is made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-like part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 23 is operated.
Since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by the posture change of 10, the tilting device 2310 does not apply a large load to the slide claw member 2348.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-like part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

Accordingly, the sliding claw member 2348 is slid at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, so that the sliding claw member 2348 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be lifted and moved at a speed different from that when the tilting device 2310 is lifted and the lifting movement restriction is canceled (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation modes increase, the association between the operation modes and the jackpot expectation level makes it easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a pre-reading means. The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-like portion 234 of the slide claw member 2348 is raised.
The tilting device 2310 is attracted by the magnetic force between the magnet 823 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310.
Therefore, by securing a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when the player places his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from being lifted by the weight of the hand. 48 (even if the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, FIG.
In the state shown in FIG. 2, the tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner in which the player's hand is lifted.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to make a difference in the load in the upward direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing in the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of prefetching, so the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 for the player is increased. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pressed by the player or is pressed by the player. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (the rotation of the tilting device 3310). And a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position perpendicular to the axis and positioned at the center position in the rotation axis direction on the opposite side of the right detection piece 311gR. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR,
Compared with the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment, the extension length is shortened.

51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG.
1 (a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51 (b), the tilting device 331 is set.
A state in which 0 is being pushed in is illustrated. 51 (a) and 51 (b).
In order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated in phantom lines, while the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated in solid lines. While being illustrated, the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is OFF and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is located on the left detection sensor 324L.
The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).
.

By detecting the change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where it is pushed to the pushing end, it is in the middle of pushing. Or whether it is in the middle of returning.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where it is pushed to the pushing end, The left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG.
2 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG.
In FIG. 2 (b), a state in which the tilting device 3310 is moving from the pushing end to the first state is illustrated. 51A and 51B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), in a state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 3 is inserted.
11 gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state where it is disposed at the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where it is pushed to the pushing end, but this is the left side detection. Sensor 324L is ON and right detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state has changed from the state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to tilt the tilting device 3.
When an auxiliary load for raising 310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is tilted while the tilting device 3310 is moving upward rather than causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving downward. The collision with the device 3310 can provide a load that effectively lifts the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of rising and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state.
The rising speed of 310 becomes slow. In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 3310 repeatedly, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 3310 can be used by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 is lifted only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 3310
Can be performed comfortably.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player. However, the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the tilting device 4310 detects an operation speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that protrudes in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding protrusion 311j of the case body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the push-down operation of the operation device 4300 in time series. In FIG. 54A, the tilting device 431 is used.
0 is set to the second state, and in FIG. 54 (b), the tilting device 4310 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a).
Is pushed and the front detection piece 4311k passes through the lower detection sensor 4321e downward. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is directed in a direction in which the front detection piece 4311k can pass. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54B by pushing the tilting device 4310 from the state shown in FIG. 54A, the front detection piece 4311k is detected by the upper detection sensor 4.
321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are sequentially passed. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether or not the voice coil motor 352 is driven is selected based on the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the pushing length becomes long (because the period during which acceleration is applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with an operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means for decelerating, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure when the player pushes in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the pushing end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak power or a player who decides to push in gently, the reaction force always becomes large near the push-in position, and it becomes a burden of the push-in operation, and it is easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e.
Determines whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the timing interval at which it is switched between the ON state and the OFF state, so that a strong reaction force is applied to the tilting device 4310 until it is not necessary. Can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the interval of the timing at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is On the other hand, when the above-described timing interval is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

Thereby, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. Push-in operation is possible.

Further, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the tilting device 4310 is operated.
As a reaction force against this, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied at the pushing end. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the protruding protrusion 3 of the tilting device 4310 is provided.
The voice coil motor 352 is driven before 11j projects below the lower frame member 4320, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310. The

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of pushing out the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.
And the voice coil motor 352 collide with each other, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

55 (a) and 55 (b) is a side view of the operation device 4300. FIG. Note that FIG.
5A illustrates a state where the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55B illustrates a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end.

Further, in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), for easy understanding, the lower frame member 4 is used.
320, the outer shape of the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 is illustrated by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at a high speed, the overhanging projection of the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of the tilting device 4310 reaching the pushing end from the first state. The installation portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting protruding portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 has a structure in which a load is applied by electromagnetic force rather than a structure in which a load is applied by friction as in the case of a disc brake, so that damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L is The reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased by gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state.

Accordingly, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state toward the push-in end while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 contacts the voice coil motor 352. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the push-in end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats the movement in the expansion direction and the movement in the reduction direction). This
After the tilting device 4310 is pushed down to the end, and the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can transmit the vibration.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position.

Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 31 is vibrated by vibrating the voice coil motor 352.
In the fifth embodiment, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment transmits vibration to the player who pushes in the zero, and the weight member 5 is arranged on the lower frame member 5320 at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
A drive motor 5411 that rotates 412 is provided, and based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411, vibration is transmitted to a player who touches the lower frame member 5320. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, a difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, compared to the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320, and the drive device 340 is provided.
Is a driving device 5340, and the voice coil motor 35 is provided from the protective cover member 350.
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured similarly to the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft bar 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 is a transmission device 5 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 configured to receive a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and made of a flexible material, and formed into a bottomed dish shape whose upper surface is opened, and is flexible to the weight member 5412. The member 5420 and the lower frame member 53 are accommodated while being divided.
And a housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the 20 bottom plate portion 5321.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is a fan shape and whose rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 is supported by a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan. And mainly.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixed portion 5411a which is disposed in a pair of left and right sides on the side where the shaft extends and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is pivotally supported eccentrically with the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the gravity center position of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the opposite side of the drive motor 5411 inserted along the axial direction, and a main body portion 5421 in an assembled state. And a rib-like leg portion 5422 projecting in a pair of rib shapes and a rib-like leg portion 5422 projecting left and right on the open side of the main body portion 5421. Posture maintenance unit 5423 in which fixing unit 5411a is embedded
And a protruding leg portion 5424 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 into a pair of columns.

The main body 5421 has a container-shaped depth that is the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end surface on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end surface on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-like legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body 5421, and the rib-like legs 5422 on the left and right sides are equivalent to the arrangement of the posture maintaining parts 5423 on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance increases as compared to the lower rib-like leg 5422.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projecting in a columnar shape, the load can be easily concentrated at one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, the flexible member 54 with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting of the tilting device 310.
The resolution of the degree of deformation of 20 can be made fine.

In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 is adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and the weight member 5.
412 is accommodated in the second accommodating portion 5432, and the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5 are accommodated.
And a concave groove 5433 which is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface 432.

The depth of the 1st accommodating part 5431 is flexible member 54 until the lower rib-like leg part 5422 sticks to the bottom.
When 20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (an assembly load release state), the protruding leg 5424 protrudes from the upper surface.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed outward from the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and is a flexible member. When 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth interferes with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The groove 5433 has a width that is slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth that extends slightly below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. The

59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). )
FIG. 60 is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Also,
In FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first region S51, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310, is pushed into the player by three times from the first state, An ending line S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the ending position, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59A, the projecting leg 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the center axis of the arc of the lower bearing 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
The deformation amount of the projecting leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change (see FIG. 56) can be secured to the maximum.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second housing portion 5432 in the assembly load release state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the projecting leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center line of the lower frame member 5320 in the extending direction view. For this reason, the convex leg 5424 can be pushed right and left evenly on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (tilting left and right on the paper surface in FIG. 59B) when pushed. The convex leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59C, the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a protruding leg portion 5424.
A pair of through-holes 5321d are formed so as to be inserted. Since the through hole 5321d has a width in the left-right direction that is slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg 5424, deformation of the protruding leg 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Therefore, the deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 is suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the protruding leg portion 5424 is suppressed.
Can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

FIG. 60A and FIG. 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. In FIG. 60A, the assembly load release state is illustrated, and FIG.
In 0 (b), the assembled load state after the protruding leg 5424 is pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). Illustrated. In addition, the external shape of the 2nd accommodating part 5432 and the weight member 5412 is illustrated with an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 60A and FIG. 60B, the vibration device 540 is released from the assembly load release state.
When a load is applied to 0 and an assembly load state is reached, the protruding leg 5424 and the lower rib-like leg 5
As 422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60B, the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force that pushes back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 comes closer to the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position, the tilting device 310 is operated. The impact when 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be reduced.
Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at a high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state where the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in becomes slow. In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 310 repeatedly, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 effectively, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load release state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even when driving of the drive motor 5411 is started in the assembly load released state, vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and the housing member 543.
Transmission to zero is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60B, the main body 542 of the flexible member 5420 in the assembled load state.
1 is configured in such a manner that displacement is allowed up and down by deforming the upper protruding leg 5424 and the lower rib-like leg 5422.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed on the lower side of the main body part 5421 changes to a state of being compressed further up and down, and the rib-like leg 5422 is slightly cured. Therefore, the vibration attenuation effect by the rib-like leg 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portion 54 is formed.
22 extends along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and is arranged in a pair of left and right at regular intervals from the central axis to the left and right, so that the flexible member 5420 moves downward, so that the rib-like leg portion The end of the outer side in the radial direction of 5422 is deformed in such a manner that it moves to the left and right outwards (the one with the smaller resistance at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-like leg 5422) (see FIG. 60B).
In this case, since the protruding direction of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed on the lower side of the main body 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-like leg 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second storage portion 5432 collide with each other is reduced to the rib-like leg portion 54 below the main body portion 5421.
22 can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of 22. Thereby, the position shift of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a).

61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) illustrates a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation shaft. In b), a state in which the gravity center position of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation shaft is illustrated. Note that FIG.
In FIG. 1 (a) and FIG. 61 (b), the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player, and the terminal area S52.
The state of the vibration device 5400 in the state of occupying is shown.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed on the upper side in the assembly load state, the drive motor 5411 is rotated to a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. An axis is placed. In the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in an assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof is the second accommodating portion 543.
2 abuts (rubs). Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the assembly load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, the weight member 5412 is generated as a repulsive force.
A force is generated to move the button upward (FIG. 61 (b) upward). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 approach and separate from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward ). Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5 together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412.
420 moves upward, and the flexible member 5420 can reinforce the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310).

As described above, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is set to the flexible member 542.
The force that pushes back the tilting device 310 is adjusted by a combination of a force generated as an elastic recovery force of 0 and a force generated separately from the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts to contact the convex leg 5424, the terminal region S52 (FIG. 59).
The elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force that pushes back the tilting device 310 until it reaches (see (a)), and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the weight member 5412.
And the repulsive force between the second housing portion 5432 and the force that pushes back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force to push back the tilting device 310 can be increased particularly in the vicinity of the termination region S52, so that the lightness of the operation of the tilting device 310 and the mitigation of the impact during the pushing operation can be favorably achieved. This adjustment can be performed in a state where the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) varies depending on the detection timing. ) Is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight members 5412 is changed based on the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 is used to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
It is desirable to increase the load applied to the tilting device 310. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 61B).

As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 is set so that the rotation shaft thereof is the second housing portion 543.
2 can be raised from the lower end of the inner wall 2 to a position raised by a radius Ra upward. Thereby, compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61A) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered from the state shown in FIG. 61A), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is set. The movable region of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the convex leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper part of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Accordingly, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although description is omitted in the present embodiment, a force to push back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A). In addition, it is possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the member occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed and the transmission range of the vibration can be expanded. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to, for example, a portion touching the housing of the pachinko machine 10 other than the portion touching the tilting device 310.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing or a part of the side of the hand can be used. The vibration can be transmitted to the player. Thereby, the situation where a vibration is not transmitted to a player can be avoided.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the player tilts the device 310 (see FIG. 56).
Only when the vibration device 5400 forms an assembly load state.
412 and the accommodation member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the player's pushing operation is detected. Therefore, it is possible to easily transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the player.

That is, when the player performs a push-in operation in such a manner that the player releases his / her hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse-pushing manner), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated until the player releases his / her hand (the start of vibration is not in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect due to the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in and ready to generate vibrations, vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pushing of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the player can experience the effect by vibration.

Further, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431. Therefore, the drive motor 5411 is previously provided.
Even if it is driven, vibration can be prevented from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, the state in which vibration is transmitted by the pushing of the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 is different from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in a disc cam 5344 and a transmission shaft bar 5343. Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, and thus the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disk cams 5344 composed of a left disk cam 5344L and a right disk cam 5344R.

FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. The right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 534
Since 4L has a symmetrical shape, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft bar 5343 are disposed at a connection portion with the transmission shaft bar 5343. It is.

In other words, the right disc cam 5344R has a circular rib 344 at the center position from the disc portion.
A cylindrical tube extending to the side where b is disposed, and an axially symmetric elongated hole shape up to about half the extending distance along the axial direction of the supporting cylindrical portion P1 An elongated hole C1 recessed from the disk part and an axial end of the support cylinder part P1 recessed by the elongated hole C1 extend toward the disk part along the axial direction. And a pair of sandwiching arm portions A1.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter thereof equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft bar 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is the same in the axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole recess C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

The long hole recess C1 is formed so that the shape of the recessed cross section is slightly longer than the width of the clamping arm A1. Therefore, the clamping arm portion A1 has a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the long hole recess C1 (
It is configured to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction).

Moreover, the surface which the long hole recessed part C1 opposes is comprised from the shape engaged with D shape of the fixing | fixed part 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. Thereby, the cylindrical member 5
It is possible to prevent the 343a from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The sandwiching arm portion A1 is formed from a surface of a pair of arm portions facing each other's arm,
An engagement convex portion A1a that protrudes in a direction approaching the counterpart arm portion is provided. Engaging projection A1a
Is engaged with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a during connection with the transmission shaft bar 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

The distal end shape of the engagement convex portion A1a is the engagement groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
It is comprised from the shape corresponding to 4 circular arc shape. Thereby, compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured long.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the shaft in the vicinity of the shaft. The side surface of the opening side of C1 and the surface position are arranged.

Thereby, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63 (b)) with respect to the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65 (b)). reference). Therefore, on the outer side of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63 (b)), the length that the cylindrical member 5343a protrudes from the recessed surface portion C2 as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a,
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for inserting the e-ring (a space necessary for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disk cam 5344R (a direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced.
Thereby, the design freedom degree of the shape of the right disc cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft bar 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows a transmission shaft bar 5343.
FIG. A difference between the transmission shaft bar 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a columnar member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a includes a fitting groove 5343a3 from a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and a fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side when viewed from the front.
And a clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixed portion 5343a1 and a groove into which the e-ring is fitted and a disc cam 534 by the e-ring.
4 when the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the fitting groove 5343a3, and the fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction. And an engagement groove 5343a4 which is a groove with which the portion A1a is engaged. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Since the e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a part of the cylindrical member 5343a having a diameter partially increased by the e-ring, the cylinder is inserted before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter being uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the axial support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the axial support hole 341b with the e-ring. And the e-ring can prevent the disc cam 5344 from shifting in the axial direction.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft bar 5343, the disc cam 5344 is provided.
Can be assembled to the transmission shaft bar 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft bar 5343, the columnar member 5343a is defined as the side where the engagement convex portion A1a is disposed on the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344. From the opposite end, the engagement groove 5
It inserts to the position where engagement convex part A1a fits into 343a4. At this time, the engaging groove 5343a4
Before the engagement projection A1a is inserted into the position where the engagement projection A1a is fitted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement projections A1a, so that the pair of engagement projections A1a can be pushed apart from each other. In this manner, the clamping arm A1 is elastically deformed. After that, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a is fitted into the engaging groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft bar 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65B).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft bar 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing breakage in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

FIG. 65A is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65B is a right disc cam 53 along the LXVb-LXVb line in FIG.
44R is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65A. FIG. 66 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is a view of L in FIG. 66 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the right disc cam 5344R in the XVIb-LXVIb line.

FIG. 66 shows a deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player overloads the unloaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position spaced from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R, and the disc In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging projection A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the columnar member 5343a or the right disc cam 5344R, the columnar member 5343a is configured such that it can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 are opposed to each other, the resistance of the column member 5343a to fall down is reduced. On the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected,
Since the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R, the resistance of the shaft member 5343a to fall down is increased.

Accordingly, when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (for example, when the player forcibly presses down (pulls up) the tilting device 310), the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62) When the load for restricting is applied), the direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of small resistance, and therefore FIG.
As shown in (a) and FIG. 66 (b), when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R,
On the plane parallel to the plane of the disc portion, the disc portion is tilted about the support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. Thereby, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is compared with the position shown in FIG. 65A along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R.
Displace.

67 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a). 4 is a partial rear view of a device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67 (a), for easy understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R that is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft bar 5343 is illustrated by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to collapse. The outline of the finished state is illustrated with imaginary lines.

In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is shown enlarged. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67A, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to operate, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the player is restricted from displacing the tilting device 310. As a result, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L about to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-described shaft collapse deformation, so that the load can be reduced.

In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after the axis collapse deformation is illustrated by an imaginary line. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft collapse deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to move and the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd, only the dimension Rd
The axial support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d will be displaced,
In order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R is deformed to fall down.

Due to the shaft tilting deformation, the connecting pin 344d is tilted with respect to the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67 (a), so that the center Pb on the base side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the protruding tip side are right-round. The position is displaced along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment is the right disc cam 534.
Since the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the drive motor 342 (
62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the disc cam 5344 is axially deformed, the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, and therefore the player drives the driving motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but in the direction to repel it, the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotary claw member 347 is stopped and stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321,
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 in the direction to repel it. The disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347
Act on. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first is independent of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344.
Of the elastic force of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disc cam 5344
It is possible to increase the elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the.
Thereby, the load that the release member 346 applies to the disk cam 5344 can be increased.
Since the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
5 can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344.

In the present embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a line-symmetric shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point (a direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point). Since the elongated hole C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the direction of displacement of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can fall down and deform with resistance.

68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68 (a). 4 is a partial rear view of a device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 68B, illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. In FIG. 68 (a), in order to facilitate understanding,
The outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R that is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft bar 5343 is shown by a solid line, and the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R that has been overloaded and tilted is shown by an imaginary line.

68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and is tilted down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is shown.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 5344 regardless of whether or not the tilting device 310 is in the second state.
The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the tilting of the R axis, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The matters described as the right disc cam 5344R are also the same as the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped by the player, resulting in overload. When,
The right disk cam 5344R is tilted with respect to the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting operation with respect to the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
2 is driven for a period in which the right disk cam 344R rotates once, the detection hole 3 of the right disk cam 344R is
44eR passes the right detection sensor 353R, but when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right detection sensor 353R and the input to the right detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, the right disc cam 3 in a state where no overload has occurred until the occurrence of overload is detected.
Since a period required to rotate the 44R by a predetermined angle is required, there is a problem that detection of an overload is delayed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted with respect to the axial direction (see FIG. 66B), the overload is caused. The occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, the engagement rib 34 is provided between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c.
A method using the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is illustrated (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66 (a)).
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. In addition, the input unit is arranged in such a manner as to protrude toward the support cylinder part P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65B), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 65). 66 (b)). Thereby, it can be judged at an early stage whether the disc cam 5344 is overloaded by determining the output from the notification device E1.

Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344, the engagement rib, and the engagement rib. 344c is composed of another member and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, a difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disc cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured to have a mirror shape with respect to the left disc cam 6344L, so the description of the left disc cam 6344L. The description of the right disk cam 6344R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L is similar to the first embodiment in that the circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d,
And a detection hole 344eL, and a disk member 6344L1 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
And a ring member 6344L2 that is pivotally supported coaxially with the disk member 6344L1 and rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

The disc member 6344L1 has an annular shape in the axial direction at a position where the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is disposed at the center position of the disc portion and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided so as to project along.

The ring member 6344L2 has an annular main body 6344g having a ring shape that has the same outer peripheral diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and whose inner peripheral diameter is slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and its circular shape. A lid plate portion 6344h that is disposed at an axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. Receiving gear teeth 6344i that are formed on the radially outer side of the thickened portion.

Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the annular main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, whereby the central shaft portion 344a. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be rotatable relative to the center.

The end surface of the annular body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is an annular rib 63.
44f abuts. Thereby, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the disk member 634 is formed on the surface.
Compared with the case of contacting 4L1, the contact area can be reduced, and the frictional resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disc member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be performed smoothly.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i mesh with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Accordingly, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In the present embodiment, the rotational speed of the ring member 6344L2 is set to be the disk member 6344L1.
(The disk member 63 is rotated while the ring member 6344L2 is rotated three times).
The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i is set in such a manner that 44L1 rotates once).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft bar 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348 disposed in a posture parallel to the columnar member 343a.
a and a second fixed to the auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The ring member 63 is fixed to the transmission gear 6348b and both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348.
And a reduction transmission gear 6348c meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is composed of a plurality of types.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36. In FIG. 72, the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the backward direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction). Is illustrated. In FIG. 73, FIG.
The state in which the ring member 6344L2 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is moved by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the fixed position by the rotating claw member 347 is released, and the reaching position when the tilting device 310 moves up instantaneously (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) is the second state. It was limited to the position (refer FIG. 34) to arrange | position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connection pin 344d that is a support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, the engagement rib 344c, The tilting device 31 can be changed.
The number of zero arrival positions can be increased.

That is, when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG.
10 rises instantaneously by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) in the case where the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the case where the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. Do not wait for the rotation of 344)
It is possible to change the position to reach and reach.

Thereby, for example, when the gaming machine is configured in a manner in which the expectation degree of the effect is changed by the difference in height that the tilting device 310 rises instantaneously from the first state and reaches, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation on whether to increase the degree of expectation when the tilting device 310 rises higher or to raise the degree of expectation when the tilting device 310 has a lower rising arrival position.

However, by keeping the rising position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation reaches the maximum, the expectation degree is reached. Can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the player can easily understand the difference in expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is lifted, so that the player watches the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. Can be directed. Therefore, the tilting device 3
Regardless of the ten presentation modes, the game method of operating the tilting device 310 in a disorderly manner can be suppressed.

Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, the disk cam 7344 has a disk member. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which relative rotation is possible. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above,
The description is omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, characteristics of a disc cam 7344 used as an alternative to the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment.
(B) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is an LX view of FIG. 74 (a).
FIG. 75B is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R along the line XVa-LXXVa, and FIG.
FIG. 75A is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74 (a). The right disc cam 7344L is configured by a mirror-symmetric shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R has a disk member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a into which the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1.
44R2 and an engaging member 7 having an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and that fits into the equally recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3.

The disc member 7344R1 is formed from a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center,
A detection hole 344eR is formed in a flange-shaped portion extending radially outward from the cup edge.
And the engagement rib 344c is partially omitted (the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first
It is a member comprised from the shape which abbreviate | omits between the drawing-in parts 344c2.

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state with a surface and is a first circular recessed portion 7 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recessed portion 7420 that is a circular recessed portion having a diameter smaller than that of the first circular recessed portion 7410 and deep in the axial direction, a first projecting portion 344c1, and a first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 pierced in the radial direction therebetween, and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430, radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1). And a fixed protrusion 7440 that is provided in a protruding manner.

The insertion hole 7430 is from an intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first drawing-in portion 344c2.
A first elongated hole 7431 that is a long rectangular elongated hole portion along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at the shifted position, and an end of the first elongated hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1. The second long hole 74 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and the second elongated hole 74 with the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
And a return portion 7433 configured to project to the 32 side.

The dimension of the second long hole 7432 in the width direction (short direction) is smaller than the dimension of the first long hole 7431 in the width direction (short direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. direction(
It is made smaller than the dimension in the short direction.

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 has the second elongated hole 743.
2 is formed to be movable outward.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and is configured with a protruding height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a)
These are front views of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (b) shows the ring member 7344R2.
76 (c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 is connected to the connecting pin 3.
Ring-shaped plate portion 7510 having a ring plate shape in which 44d is projected, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
A thick-walled portion 7520 that extends in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner peripheral surface and has a star-shaped through-hole formed at the center portion thereof.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recess portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recess portion 7410. The Thereby, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the relative rotation resistance from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

The thick wall portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (do not interfere with) the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75A). However, it is made slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This prevents the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive while the engagement member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75A) in the assembled state. can do.

The thick-walled portion 7520 is recessed at an equal interval in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, equally divided by 5) outwardly in the deformed through-hole 7521 formed in the axial direction and radially outward. And an equally-divided recessed portion 7522.

The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is formed on a radially outer side than the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Composed.

77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a front view of FIG. 77 (a).
) Is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is disposed radially outside the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)). Arc-shaped plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction and the rear side end portion of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 (FIG. 77 (
b) an extending portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end portion), and an engagement extending along the front-rear direction (FIG. 77 (b) left-right direction) from the extending tip of the extending portion 7620. Part 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring disposed on the side of the arcuate plate part 7610 facing the engaging part 7630.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing projection 7611 that is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 7630 on the side surface on the inner peripheral side.

The extended portion 7620 is a portion inserted through the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state,
When the coil spring CS1 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip has an extension length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a width dimension that is slightly shorter than the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick wall portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

With reference to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described. FIG. 78 (a)
FIG. 78 is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is an arrow LXX in FIG. 78 (a).
FIG. 78C is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of VIIIb, FIG. 78C is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78D is an arrow LXXVIII in FIG. 78C.
FIG. 78 (e) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R when viewed in the direction d, and FIG.
344R is a front view, and FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e).

In FIGS. 78 (a), 78 (b), 78 (c), and 78 (d), the disk member 7 is used.
FIG. 78 (e) and FIG. 78 (f) show a state where only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into 344R1, and in FIGS. 78 (e) and 78 (f), the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344 are added to the disk member 7344R1.
A state in which R3 is inserted is illustrated. In order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 78 (b),
In FIG. 78 (d) and FIG. 78 (f), the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown.

As an assembling method of the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging member 734 is inserted into the first long hole 7431.
The 4R3 engaging portion 7630 is inserted (see FIGS. 78A and 78B). As described above, the dimension in the width direction of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the engaging part 7630, so that the engaging part 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

Next, in the depth direction of FIG. 78 (d) along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the engaging portion 7 is provided.
The engagement member 7344R3 is slid to a position where the positions of 630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide with each other.

In this moved position, the fixed projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 is restrained from being displaced in the circumferential direction (FIG. 78 (d) left-right direction) of the disk member 7344R1 and engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

Further, the engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward from the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78B). Next, when the engagement member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engagement member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

In a state where the second elongated hole 7432 enters the inside, the tip of the return portion 7433 comes into contact with the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3. The contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). ) (See FIG. 78 (d)), the movement of the extending portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Thus, the engaging member 73
Since the movement of 44R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the position of the engaging member 7344R3 from shifting during operation.

After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734 is then operated.
In a state in which 4R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1, the disk member 734
The ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of 4R1. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the direction D7 directed radially outward by the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

The right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled by the process described above. In addition,
The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetric shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79A, 79B, 80A, 80B, and 81, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are used.
In addition, the disk cam 7344 is shown as the center, and other unnecessary parts are not shown.

The rotation claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the length of the guide long hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be a movement end at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c contacts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 is different from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is cut obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (FIG. 79 (a) clockwise). Are illustrated in time series.

In FIG. 79A, the release member 7346 is engaged with the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R.
FIG. 79 (b) illustrates a state in which the right disk cam 7344R further rotates from the state illustrated in FIG. 79 (a).
In (a), a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end of pushing is illustrated, and in M6-2 (b), the disk member 73 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a).
FIG. 81 shows a state in which 44R1 further rotates in the backward direction. In FIG. 81, from the state shown in FIG. 80B, the right disk cam 7344R rotates in the backward direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 becomes the release member 7.
The state after separation from 346 is illustrated. 79 (a), 79 (b), and 80.
FIG. 80A and FIG. 80B show a state (small angle state) in which the release member 7346 reaches the end of the range in which the release member 7346 can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347.

As shown in FIG. 79A, in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start to contact, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. The engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The state of projecting outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the release member 734 is provided on the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3.
In the state where the six engaging portions 346d abut, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state.

In the present embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form the arcuate plate portion 7610 in a small angle state. The first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 3 of the inner peripheral surface and the engaging rib 344c
The disc cam 7344 is arranged in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 is rubbed against the release member 346 in a state where it abuts against the 44c2 (see FIG. 80A).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the release member 7346 is rotated toward the small angle state by the rotation of the disc cam 7344, and when it becomes impossible to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member. From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backward rotation direction cannot be continued. Therefore, based on the rotation of the disc cam 7344. The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80A). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is disposed radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

For this reason, the circumferential load is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 734 from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a).
Even if 4R1 is rotated, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to the shift of the rotation amount, the engaging portion 7630 is provided with the equally-divided concave portion 75 that was originally arranged.
22 moves to another different equally recessed portion 7522, so that the phase of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 relatively rotate by the amount of one recessed portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the engagement member 73 is rotated.
44R3 and the release member 7346 are released from contact with each other, so that the engagement member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, and the engagement portion 7630 is again accommodated in the equally recessed portion 7522. In this process, one equally recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated shifts.

That is, by passing the process shown in FIG. 81 from FIG. 79 (a), the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided. It can be relatively shifted by an arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

Referring to FIG. 82, engaging member 73 when disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction.
The operation of 44R3 will be described. 82 (a), FIG. 82 (b), FIG. 83 (a) and FIG.
FIG. 3B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are shown in the center, and other unnecessary parts are not shown.

82 (a) to 83 (b) show the time series of how the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 82 (a) counterclockwise direction). In FIG. 82A, the release member 734
6 and the state immediately before the engagement of the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R is illustrated, and in FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 comes into contact with the release member 7346 from above and starts to descend. 83A shows a state where the disc cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82B, and in FIG. 83B, the release member 7346 and A state after the engagement member 7344R is separated is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 move in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 82 (a) timepiece. When rotating in the rotation direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 are caused by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 is only loaded in the forward direction.

Therefore, a load that pushes the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction does not occur, and the engagement member 7344 is between the contact of the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 until it is separated.
R3 maintains a state of protruding outward in the radial direction. Therefore, when the disc cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented from rotating relative to each other.

By switching the rotational direction of the disc cam 7344 from these configurations, the disc member 7
It is possible to switch whether or not 344R1 and ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform an effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment. Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81) that causes relative rotation.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
The disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other in a state where the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are maintained.

As a result, a state not attracting attention by the player (a state in which the tilting device 310 stops)
It can be used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place that is not visible to the player.

With reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, according to the present embodiment, it will be described that a plurality of types of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 (disc cam 7344).
FIG. 85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced (without rotating the member). In FIG. 85, from the state shown in FIG.
79 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one of the equally recessed portions 7522 through the process described in FIG.
In both cases, the state where the second overhanging portion 344c3 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the rotating claw member 347 from the first state.
By releasing the fixation by the above, it is possible to change the moving range in which the tilting device 310 moves immediately (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2).

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced rearward and lower than the position shown in FIG. It moves to a state where it sinks below the two states.

Therefore, the tilting device 3 from the first state is released by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347.
It is possible to change the position at which 10 reaches immediately by the ascending operation (without rotation of the disc cam 7344). Thereby, the kind of effect by operation | movement of the tilting apparatus 310 can be increased, and the attention power as an effect device of the operation device 7300 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86 to FIG. 179, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described.

Although the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper will be described as the rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, refer to FIG. 86) indicate pachinko machines 8010.
The vertical direction, horizontal direction, and front-rear direction are respectively shown. The definition of this direction is shown in FIG.
The same applies to the description with reference to the previous drawings.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. 88 shows the back pack 92 in a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. Inner frame 1
FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing an open state (deployed) with respect to FIG.
These are the front perspective views of the pachinko machine 8010 which shows the state which closed the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, and open | released (expanded) the front frame 14, FIG. 90 is a pachinko machine in the state which removed the front frame 14. FIG. In FIG. 90, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed with a wooden plate material as upper and lower sides and an aluminum plate material as left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (such as the hinge 18) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member to have was equipped in the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side in the front view is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side), and the right side is the rotation front end side. It can be rotated forward as (opening / closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side in the front view is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is rotated. The moving tip side (opening / closing tip side) can be rotated backward.

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the rotating tip, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are locked to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, an unlocking operation is performed by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010. Respectively.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). When the metal plate having the holes engages with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front side end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a pivotal support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is recessed in a size that allows fitting. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in the configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column is larger). Is supported on the support pin 19a having a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. Various members on the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a (lighting portions 8029 to 8033, etc.)
The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing the units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in front view (see FIG. 86). This window 1
Since 4c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire area of the front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, game board 1
3 is visible from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window portion 14c and transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) for integrating the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And. The fixed frame is made of synthetic resin and transparent glass 16a.
, 16b is formed in an annular shape that is slightly larger than 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a, 16b are bonded to a fixed frame, whereby the glass unit 16 is formed as an integrated multilayer glass.

The glass unit 16 is colorless and transparent formed by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. However, the glass unit 16 is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. The glass unit 16 may be formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored and transparent instead of being colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the front frame 14, a plurality of electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14c. These illumination parts 8029-8
In 033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. The lighting unit 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c includes a light emitting unit that is turned on at a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls, and a light emitting unit that is turned on during payout of the prize ball.

In addition, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects corresponding to the gaming state. . Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged to bulge toward the near side and are arranged in parallel up and down.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 50
Has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and that guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to divide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 into portions for storing the game balls in a plurality of locations, and as a configuration having only one storage unit that eliminates the lower plate 50 and uses only the upper plate 17. Also good.

An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (the storage area for game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. This operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as around the lower plate 50 in addition to the upper plate 17.
It may be provided at a plurality of locations, may be a push button type switch as an operation method, and may be configured such that information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 that communicates with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 that communicates with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( 92).

At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner at the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving portion 143 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed. By partitioning 143 left and right by the partition wall 144, a passage entrance of the front door side upper dish passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 are formed.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging a game ball that has not reached the game area out of the game balls launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the lower plate 50 as a foul ball.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul balls received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flow down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and are then discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected not to the lower plate 50 but to the upper plate 17 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17.

The foul ball passage portion 145 joins a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player performing a ball removal operation. Formed as follows.

On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are wiring connectors that conduct electricity to the lighting unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the inner substrate and one end of the lighting units 8031 and 8032 through the front frame 14. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the part is connected is connected is disposed, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

The part covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14 has a wiring through groove 14h communicating with the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031 passing through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn out from 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn back through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It is.

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of FIG. 89) to the electric decoration unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450. It is possible to easily insert / remove the connector of the conductive wiring and the connector in which one end portion is connected to the internal substrate of the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032 with respect to the electronic substrate 14i.

A multi-functional cover member 171 attached to the front end of the front frame 14 is provided as a pair on the upper and lower sides of the front end of the inner frame 12 and holds the base plate 60 of the game board 13.
It is a positional relationship that opposes the device on the upper side of 0 (see FIG. 126) and can be brought into contact with each other depending on the situation, details of which will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14 is a container-shaped member formed of a resin material with the front side opened, and is formed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and between the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in a space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 is configured to have a cross-sectional area that decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation front end side to the rotation base end side, and a lower wall portion 173a that configures the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring, An upper wall portion 173b which is arranged in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and is opposed to the upper side of the lower wall portion 173a and which forms the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. Consists of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion disposed in contact with the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173 are arranged. An upper extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be further bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (wave shape corresponding to one cycle of the sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. Projects to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring in the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. The possibility that the wiring is disconnected can be reduced.

On the back side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173 c (front frame 14) of the long cover member 173.
Part of the main body frame 14a that is a part of the main body frame 14a and a plate part that is vertically long on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A reverse cup portion 178 having a reverse cup shape that is open downward is disposed.

For example, the reverse cup portion 178 is a portion that improperly spreads the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and takes measures against fraudulent acts that are caused to enter the game area. It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the reverse cup shape of the reverse cup portion 178 from below. Since the progression of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

Moreover, since the reverse cup part 178 and the elongate cover member 173 are formed from a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire having a heated tip is entered and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the reverse cup portion 178 is heated by the heat.
The long cover member 173 is melted in the same manner as can be passed through the reverse cup portion 178.
Will also melt. And since the wiring accommodated in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned out by passing the piano wire whose tip is heated through the long cover member 173, by detecting that the wiring is disconnected. , Making it easier to detect fraud.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the reverse cup portion 178 is configured with a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts (closes) with each other on the surface. Moreover, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped downward, the piano wire can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a when entering the reverse cup portion 178 from below. When the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, the long cover 173 can be melted with a high probability, so that it is possible to easily detect fraud.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap that is forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire becomes a wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a is shaped to match the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire is Guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire proceeds in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip of the front frame 14 (
Therefore, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing an increase in the reaction force given to a person who performs fraud via the piano wire. By disposing a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to find out the misconduct before the person who performs the misconduct escapes and to easily secure the person who performs the misconduct. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who performs the cheating cannot determine it, so it is assumed that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window portion 14c
(Until the front of the piano wire is visible from the front side through), it is possible to make the operation of inserting the piano wire deeper naturally (without causing the suspicion that the piano wire is not inserted well). . Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the person who performs the fraud notices that the fraud is detected and tries to escape.

The detection device may be a device constituted by a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be disposed in the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be disposed on the back side of the operation handle 51. In the case of being disposed on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed on the operation handle 51 may also be used for the determination of the entry of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launch unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 includes an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. Launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so that it is emitted toward the area between
And a ball feeder 720.

The ball feeder 720 launches the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) into the launch rail 730.
Feed one at a time. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on a projecting path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, when an electrical signal is input to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 is moved to the firing rail 7.
It moves toward the game ball on 30 and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launch unit 112a is not limited to the launch solenoid 701, and a launch motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launch unit 112a will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged on the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the firing rail 730. It is installed. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole penetrating in a front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided. The dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage section 161 and a main body side lower dish passage section 162. The main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 are
A passage is internally provided so that one end is opened toward the back side so that it can communicate with a through-hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened downward. The curved path is changed by 90 degrees (changed from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration,
The sphere paid out from the payout device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in a closed state, the front frame 1 is placed on the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160.
The payout ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided at 4 enters. A front door side upper dish passage part 141 is disposed below the main body side upper dish path part 161, and a front door side lower dish path part 142 is disposed below the main body side lower dish path part 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower part of the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161.
In addition, a shutter 163 for restricting the outflow of game balls from the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 is provided. The shutter 163 has a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages to prevent the game ball from flowing out,
It is provided so that it can be switched to both positions with an allowable position that allows the game ball to flow out.

Further, a biasing member (coil spring or the like) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the biasing member is biased when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 remains in the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 or the main body side lower dish passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls spill out is avoided. Yes.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the front door side upper dish passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 and the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In addition, the board | substrate 167 is comprised by a separate board | substrate in the location in which the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arrange | positioned, and the location in which the connector CN3 is arrange | positioned. The connectors CN1 and CN2 are connected to the main controller 1.
The connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113. by.

With reference to FIG.91 and FIG.92, the part below the window part 14c of the front frame 14 is demonstrated. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled, and FIG. 92 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 illustrated by disassembling components disposed below 14c. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the main body frame 14 is located below the window 14 c of the front frame 14.
On the front side of c, the operation device 300 is disposed at the front side of the upper plate 17, obliquely above and to the right of the lower plate 50 and at the center in the left-right direction of the front frame 14.
A covering cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 so as to cover the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured with a left-right width that is approximately the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right end portions, and a main body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and the main body bending thereof. Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right central portions of the portion 371 and the end portion in the left and right direction toward the sides close to each other in the width direction, and joins at the lower end of the extension and joins the front view V Hanging part 372 configured in a letter shape, main body bending part 371 and hanging part 3
A transparent member 373 that is a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by 72 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body bending portion 371 or the hanging portion 372, and the main body bending portion 371. The left side plane support part 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end part, the right side plane support part 375 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the right end part of the main body bending part 371, and the right side plane support part 375 from the back side It is mainly provided with a support groove 376 that is a groove that is recessed and has a recessed width that increases toward the back side (tapered).

The main body bending portion 371 has a curved shape with a rounded front side edge, and has a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17 as a rear side edge, and the upper plate in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). 1
7, the rear left edge 371 a that abuts the front side edge in the front-rear direction, and the shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 that is connected to the rear left edge 371 a. A rear middle edge 371b that contacts the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a rear middle edge 37
A rear right edge portion 371c that is connected to the front side edge of the ball lending operation unit 40 in the assembled state and is in contact with the ball lending operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state; Is mainly provided.

The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body bending portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported and is disposed at the right corner portion of the front frame 14.
This is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by being formed into a shape that does not create a gap with respect to 0 (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The hanging portion 372 has a recessed portion 1 at a position in front of a recessed portion 15a described later.
A screw inserted from below is screwed into the bottom plate on which 5a is formed, so that the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed is fastened and fixed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion that can transmit the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and can produce an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. At the same time, it is disposed close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, light is irradiated upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e).
6 LEDs that emit light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e)
Are arranged in two.

Of the LED device 341 f, the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320 and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373. To do. On the other hand, tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310, and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373. .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared with that when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting the control to change the amount of light), and in accordance with the state change of the tilting device 310. An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed (in a stepwise manner), while the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Light that can be visually recognized through the translucent part 373 according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310 by controlling the light amount to change weakly (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the first state to the second state. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

The left side plane support portion 374 abuts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electric decoration unit 8031 and the electric decoration unit 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support part 374 toward the electric decoration part 8031. . Thereby, the position shift to the downward direction of the electrical decoration part 8031 can be suppressed.

The right plane support portion 375 is in contact with the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration unit 8032 and the electrical decoration unit 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support 375 toward the electrical decoration unit 8032. . Thereby, the position shift to the downward direction of the electrical decoration part 8032 can be suppressed.

In addition, although mentioned later for details, the electrical decoration part 8031 and the electrical decoration part 8032 are the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 abuts on the lower surface of 0 and is displaced downward, the illumination part 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400. for that reason,
According to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illumination part 8031, the illumination part 8032, and the covering cover 370 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. It is possible to disperse the force necessary to support

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end portion of the electric decoration portion 8032 entering from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in a state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right plane support portion 375. And the position matches.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration unit 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, an assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. Separate fixing portions for fastening the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is disposed on the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a). The passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is fastened and fixed in such a manner as to cover the passage forming unit 140 from the back side (with the main body frame 14a sandwiched by another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17)). Fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or sandwiching the main body frame 14a with another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17 or the like) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

Even if the sheet metal member 150 has a situation in which the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a situation in which a wire or a piano wire heated at the tip is pressed and melted) has occurred. 14 functions as an entry preventing member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 from the front side. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even when a wire heated at the tip is pressed, and the illustrated wire can be prevented from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower and upper left and right sides of the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the opened front side is a passage forming unit. 140 is mainly provided with a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140, and a flat plate-like plate-like portion 152 that covers the lower surfaces of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower and upper left and right sides of the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end of 145,
Even when it is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the exemplified wire is the passage forming unit 1.
It is possible to prevent the vehicle from entering beyond 40.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surfaces of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, the wire exemplified in the passage formation unit 140 is pressed to the right of the lower plate 50 to open a through hole. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized member from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the exemplified wire is pressed against a place where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and back is reduced accordingly (a place obliquely above the recessed portion 15a). The case where a through-hole is opened by being performed and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit rear member 155 that is fastened from the rear side to the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140, and the cylinder lock 20 is disposed in the operation unit rear member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the vertical position.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back member 155 is a member configured to increase the size in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left and right long plate members. A through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can be passed therethrough, and the through hole 1
56, and a pair of insertion holes 157 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the operation unit rear member 155 to the main body frame 14a is inserted, and a portion (left end) overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140. And a pair of connecting insertion holes 158 that are drilled side by side, and an opening / closing restricting portion 159 that protrudes to the back side on the rotation base end side with respect to the through hole 156.

The connection insertion hole 158 is a connection portion 1 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140.
48 and is arranged so as to match in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is connected to the upper connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that matches the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
58 is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides in the front-rear direction with a protruding portion 148a that protrudes on the back side in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58. And a screwing portion 148b formed as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the projecting portion 148a is passed through the upper connection insertion hole 158, so that the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit back surface are By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation portion back member 1 can be easily formed.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

In addition, an L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming a left side edge and a lower side edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the region, and the extending wall portion. 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the wall portion 158a and the L shape that can contact the surface vertically and horizontally are formed.

Therefore, as positioning when assembling the operation portion back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved with respect to the extending wall portion 148c. By making contact with the left and right surfaces, the position and posture of the operation portion back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The open / close restricting portion 159 is a portion that is opposed to the front and rear of the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
The front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.
There exists an effect which controls that 4 will be in a closed state.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and is formed of a synthetic resin, and is a cross-sectional view in the extending direction in order to ensure rigidity. The shape is formed in a U shape. Therefore, it is harder to bend than when it is formed into a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity compared to the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped opening. Can be reduced. Accordingly, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portion of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, the strength is dependent on the main body frame 14a, so there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible is used. It is possible to ensure the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 while improving formability.

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing regulating portion 159 is not limited to a U-shape, as long as it is a shape that can ensure rigidity and maintain the shape. For example, it may be a curved (wave) shaped cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section as compared to a flat cross section.

Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not a part of the operation portion back member 155 but the main body frame 14.
You may comprise from the metal part extended from the another member fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a to the back side by bending from a to the back side. However, as in this embodiment,
When the opening / closing regulating portion 159 is made of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 is prevented from being chipped or dented when coming into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. can do. Thereby, the operator who changes the state of the board surface support apparatus 600 and detaches the game board 13 can reduce the risk of injury by touching the chipping or dent made in the board surface support apparatus 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock disposed on the rotation distal end side beyond that. A long interval between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 locations can be secured. Therefore, in a state where the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13, the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotating front end side are locked by mistake is reduced. it can.

As a path through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a path through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is followed.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operation device 300 is formed in the wiring through hole 14 that is drilled in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is connected to the protective cover device 350 (
The operation device 300 is connected via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right corner of the right outer peripheral wall of FIG.

Thereby, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured in a substantially case shape. This makes it difficult to prevent foreign matters such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

It should be noted that liquid is considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels uncomfortable with the game result may apply drinking water or the like to the pachinko machine 10. that time,
The operation device 300 at a reasonable position is likely to become a prey that can be drunk with water, and when no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 1).
3) may break down.

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in this embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it becomes the separable independent structure, it can prevent that liquids, such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300, permeate into the back side of the main body frame 14a.

In addition, on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300), a recessed portion 15a is recessed in a T shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep bottom recessed portion.
It is not a complete case, and gaps are formed in some places (see, for example, FIG. 13,
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to a gap and pass through the inside of the operation device 300,
The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the liquid falling below the operation device 300.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 serves as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor housing portion 341e and the illumination support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is driven by the drive motor 3.
42 can be directly applied to prevent failure.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but the other part is covered with the bottom plate portion 321. The liquid stays attached to the vibration surface (upper surface), and the attached liquid flows down downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibration surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

With the above-described configuration, even if the player on the way home is sprayed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play a game as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, the maintenance time of the operation device 300 can be prevented from pressing business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the bundling movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the bundling movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. 93 to 9
6 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG.

93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93B, the bundling movable member 180 in the released state is illustrated on the upper side, and the bundling movable member 180 in the fixed state is illustrated on the lower side.

The bundling movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and that are extended leftward from the upper end of the upper extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92).
The harness HN2 connected to the lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) is guided to the bundling movable member 180 without a relay substrate, and is respectively bundled to the bundling movable member 180.

On the other hand, each illumination part 8029-8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86).
Each of the harnesses connected to each other is connected (assembled) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN is connected to the relay board.
3 goes to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The bundling movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface in the rotational direction of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A) A pair of highly flexible bundling arms 183 extending from the opposite side) and a movable arm 182
Is a U-shaped portion as viewed from above and can be engaged with the binding arm portion 183, which is disposed on the other side surface (the side surface facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of locking portions 184
And a temporary fixing portion 185 that extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arm portions 183 and has an opening.

The bundling movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the bundling arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with lower flexibility (high rigidity) than at least the bundling arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross-section whose upper side is substantially horseshoe-shaped and has a fixed portion 181a having a through-hole through which a screw passes in the center, and a left and right lower corner portion of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d side. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion that extends downward from the lower edge of the front-side end portion of the fixed portion 181a and has an extended tip that curves close to the plate member 14d side 181c and a plate-like support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a
(See FIG. 96 (a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion that is a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d and is formed in a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head portion of the screw to be fastened. 181e,
Is mainly provided.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 including through holes arranged at positions where the bundling movable member 180 is fixed to coincide with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

When a screw that penetrates the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to a corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of detent protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thus, the binding movable member 180 can be prevented from rotating around the screw that penetrates the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing can be prevented.
The attitude with respect to d can be determined.

The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d.
In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding down by narrowing the distance between the extended end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. An area (the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation by a shape curved along the arranged circle.
It is possible to ensure a large cross-sectional area of the region sandwiched between 1c.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182 and the cylindrical fastening portion 181.
As for e, the outer peripheral surface fits in the part of the base end side of the movable arm part 182, and pivotally supports the movable arm part 182 (refer FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion that is shaped so as to be smoothly connected to the plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape that is connected to the opposite side of the shaft support position of the base end portion 182a.

The base end portion 182a includes left and right end portions (portions where the straight line connecting the shafts is parallel to the plane OS1) and back side end portion (the uppermost portion of the plane OS1 and the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion that is fitted over the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the rotational direction extend from the approaching portion. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the same side, and the separation distance between the side walls gradually decreases as it approaches the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained with higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept that does not intend elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept that intends elastic deformation (low rigidity) depending on the situation. .

Since the pair of binding arms 183 are each configured in the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, a small width portion 183a formed with a width equivalent to the width of the base near the tip portion and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. Note that, in the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into a through-hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93B).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm 182 side, and the large opening 1
It mainly includes a small opening 184b formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 across the 84a and having a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the bundling arm 183 to pass without depending on the position of the bundling arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the bundling arm 183 to pass therethrough. The large width portion 183b has a size that cannot be passed (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to move relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm portion 183 is disposed on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 is reduced). ,
When it is desired to lock the binding arm portion 183 with respect to the locking portion 184, the inner area size (tightness) surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging the binding arm portion 183 on the small opening 184b side. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 includes a through-hole through which the binding band can be inserted at the center thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band is inserted into the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is an XCIVb of FIG. 94 (a).
-XCIVb line is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14, FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is FIG. a) XCV
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the front frame 14 in a b-XCVb line.

94 (a) and 94 (b) illustrate a state where the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b). In b)
The state where the movable arm portion 182 rotates in the direction away from the plate member 14d and abuts against the vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range) is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 has an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (
It is configured to be able to rotate about 160 degrees around a vertical axis). This angle is normally used according to the situation of pachinko machines 8010 installed at amusement stores (the situation where there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010 if the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more). This is sufficiently larger than the turning angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and does not exceed the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no, the possibility that the movable arm part 182 may deteriorate and break due to elastic deformation can be reduced.

Next, a support mode of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Harness HN1-HN
3 is supported by the bundling movable member 180 so that the arrangement is regulated. For example, it is possible to prevent the pin 3 from being accidentally sandwiched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnected.

FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

96 (a) and 96 (b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening opened leftward at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14. The That is, since the horizontal line of the intermediate stopper portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extending wall portion 173c are the same, it is extended from the upper extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c in the vicinity of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e that is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, the upward extending wall 173c sandwiching the intermediate stopper 181c
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side to the movable arm portion 18 of the binding movable member 180
It can be set along the shape of 2. Thereby, FIG. 96 (b) and FIG. 96 (d)
), The shape of the bent portion of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18 is provided.
The region surrounded by 3 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, particularly when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, the disconnection by the harnesses HN1 to HN3 being bent can be prevented.

97 (a) and 97 (b) show a front frame 14, an inner frame 12, a bundling movable member 180, and harnesses HN1 to HN schematically showing the bundling movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
3 is a schematic top view of FIG. 97A shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97B shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. A member fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 is schematically shown by a solid line. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the bundling movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b),
The base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e so that the inner frame 12
And the front frame 14 can be opened and closed, so that a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving the durability (FIG. 9).
6 (b) and FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 have the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12.
In the vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (in FIG. 96 (d),
It is routed along a path that passes near the vicinity of the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182). That is, the harness HN1 can be routed by forcing the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to bypass.
It is possible to prevent the curved portions of 1 to HN3 from approaching the rotating front end side of the front frame 14.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the operator's work during the work performed by opening and closing the front frame 14, and the harness H when the front frame 14 is closed.
It is possible to improve the fit of N1 to HN3 (the fit that is bent only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). The intermediate stopper 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3. For example, the tip of the wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup 178. Thus, it is possible to take measures against an illegal act of causing the wire to enter between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted to penetrate the wire, and the wire is advanced to the game area side, if the wire proceeds vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the wire becomes hot. A harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by the intermediate stopper 181c
It is pressed against N1 to HN3. Therefore, harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

When the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly detected by controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen), etc. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a person who performs an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be launched even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. Disappear. For this reason, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraud is detected after the fraud has been performed (it is possible to detect fraud early).

In this case, after making the wire enter the game area and messing with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easy to win a prize illegally), the ball is moved to the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. Since it is possible to disable the launch of a ball against a person who performs an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is impossible to perform a specific fraud.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, the operation of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button when the harness HN2 is burned out. 43 (see FIG. 89) cannot be operated. Therefore, those who commit fraud are
Since the fraudulent acts may cause the banknotes inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the remaining amount of spheres of the card to be collected, the deterrence against fraudulent acts is exerted. be able to.

In addition, in order to eliminate the possibility that it will not be possible to collect the banknotes inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the amount of the sphere of the card balance, Even though the remaining amount of the unit) is 0 yen, since the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, the gaming machine side can easily recognize the cheating.

In the first place, when the harness HN2 is disconnected, the card unit (ball rental unit) (
In a gaming machine store where a disconnection error (CR error) (not shown) is output, the disconnection error (C
By checking (R error), it is possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
The outer shape of 0 and the outer shape of the sphere guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145. In this embodiment, the front door side lower dish passage portion 1
The lower end of 42 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53 at the left of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145 is the remaining portion at the right of the ball guide opening 53. The partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy an area (area of about 1/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53).
It is partitioned by.

The front door side lower pan passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages respectively extended from the dispensing ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the balls can flow toward the lower plate 50. Thus, the S-shaped paths SL1, S are directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once.
L2 is provided.

The S-shaped path SL1 allows the flow path length of the front door side lower dish passage part 142 to be increased while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that it stays in the front door side lower dish path part 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. Thereby, the window part 14c (refer FIG. 86).
Since the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical size of the lower plate 50, the vertical size of the game area and the production region can be secured large, and the lower plate 50 (and its Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the upstream side, the stress of replenishing the ball to the player (if the ball for 50 minutes in the lower tray is gone, the stress is due to being required to refill the ball from a thousand boxes) ) Can be configured.

The front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, NEb2 as regions where the extending direction is bent in the vertical direction and the left-right direction, respectively. It has features. That is, the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending portion in which the right and left of the characteristic part are reversed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1. Region NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NE disposed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 with the right and left sides of the characteristic portions reversed.
b2. In the description of the characteristic part, the characteristic of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. The ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner that intersects with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extends closer to the extending end from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the side wall Na. A proximity wall Nc that mainly includes the walls Na,
Nb and Nc are extended from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed such that the surface Nc1 opposite to the ceiling wall Nb is curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the wire HM (a small diameter metal typified by a wire or a piano wire) inserted illegally. The details will be described later. The proximity wall Nc has a gap Nin between the extended lower end and the side wall Na so that the wire H
It is set larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM illegally inserted due to the shape of the first bending region NEa1.
Can be prevented from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an approach path for the wire HM to be illegally inserted, the front door side lower dish passage portion 14 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance.
In this case, a person who performs an illegal act is a wire H
It is made to advance, pressing M on the side wall of the front door side lower dish channel | path part 142. FIG.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who performs an illegal act, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, while the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142, so that it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, a pair of bending regions NEa1,
By arranging NEa2 so as to be reversed right and left, the wire HM can be made to enter the gap Nin without any leakage.

An example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin is shown in FIG. Note that the tip position of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (clamped), further progress of the wire HM can be prevented, and further, the wire HM can be prevented from being held, and illegal acts can be detected quickly. it can.

On the other hand, even when the wire HM does not get caught and further advances, when the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the tip bulges in a posture in which the tip is directed downward.
Even if it advances, the front-end | tip of the wire HM will advance below. Therefore, wire HM
Is disposed on the upstream side of the dispensing ball receiving portion 143, and the foul ball receiving portion 146
It is possible to prevent a game area arranged upstream of the game from being reached.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 64
It is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from gaining unauthorized profits by forcing illegal movements such as 0a (see FIG. 2) and making it easier to win illegally by obtaining unauthorized payout balls. .

Returning to FIG. The foul sphere passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the merge region CE where it joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (in this embodiment, twice or more). Thereby, when the sphere flowing down the ball extraction passage 147 is arranged in the merge region CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enters the merge channel CE (the balls enter the merge region CE at the same time). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched and engaged by the upper and lower wall portions can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the merge region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The passage portion 145a is set such that the left-right width is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere.
The rear side bottom plate portion 40 is formed so as to project to the front side as it goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back-side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is located at the surface position with the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140. The back side bottom plate portion is set to a surface position with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

In other words, the foul ball passage portion 145 is located in the upstream region of the passage portion 145a.
The front-rear width is set to be larger than that in the region on the downstream side of 5a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a slightly larger front-rear width than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul sphere passage portion 145 is set to have a slightly smaller front-rear width than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 145
In the case where the sphere stays, the upstream side of the passage portion 145 can arrange the plurality of spheres so that the number of stagnation can be increased. Arrangement is prevented (slightly shifts from left to right and up and down), so that two balls can be prevented from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to restrict the entry of the balls into the passage portion 145a one by one. Accordingly, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the merge region CE at the same time. The possibility of being caught between the upper and lower wall portions can be reduced.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left side wall portion, and the flow surface of the sphere faces rightward. An inclined plate portion 146a that is inclined downward, and a foul ball receiving portion 1 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a.
46, the passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate portion 146a.
A curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the plate 40 toward the back side and curves upward in a manner in which the extending direction is directed toward the back side.

While the sphere is guided to the foul sphere passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the foul ball receiving portion 1 is operated by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b.
The passing position of the sphere passing through 46 to the front side can be brought close to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the sphere rolling down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the blocking portion 146b prevents the sphere from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can do.

Thereby, the period until the sphere that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the upper and lower bounds of the sphere can be finished before the sphere reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because variation in the vertical position of the sphere can be reduced), the foul sphere passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow smoothly.

The foul ball passage portion 145 has a range (for example, the passage portion 145a) that forms the S-shaped path SL2.
), The passage width is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool having a larger outer shape from passing through the foul sphere passage portion 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the electrical decoration unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit that is formed to be elongated in the left and right directions, and the left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration part 8031 and the electric decoration part 8032. In this lower support structure, like the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, the tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side to the front side is formed at the lower end portion of the right end portion of the upper panel unit 400. (See FIG. 118), and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed on the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50
0 is concatenated.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the assembly order to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) respectively provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into the left and right are used as the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. The heavy plate units 500R, 5 are configured with the parts sandwiched and fitted.
00L can be prevented from separating from side to side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, the main body frame 14a on the front side of the main body frame 14a.
The upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the front panel unit 400 and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member for sandwiching the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 122) is provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 14e1.

The fastening portion 14e1 includes a through hole into which a screw is inserted from the back side, and the screw that passes through the through hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, thereby This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 104, the main body frame 14a.
A state in which the right panel unit 500 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by screws inserted from the back side into the insertion holes drilled in the main body frame 14a is disassembled, and the upper panel unit 400 and the upper side plate member 14e are illustrated. In addition, illustration of the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

The cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a as an actual assembly procedure. In the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510.
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 is a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 is a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are overlapped in the left-right direction, and these heavy plate units 50.
The upper and lower plate-like support plate portions 510 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) are mainly provided.

The heavy plate unit 500 is inserted into the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side with screws.
L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate 510, and in this state, the support plate 510 is attached to the main body frame 1.
4a is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending an extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right side edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and is assembled. (Fig. 86
The fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a is in contact with the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, the board member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511, A plurality of cover side through holes 513 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and the lens side through And a pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b that overlaps with the base plate member 512 in a front view, and a portion of the base plate member 512 that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

The base part 511b is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R.
Can be brought into contact with each other in the width direction (see FIG. 115 (b)).
The fall of 0R in the left-right direction can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extending portion 51 is more than the base portion 511b.
1a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extending portion 511
On the front side of a, the outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the fixed plate 5
11 on the left side surface of the base portion 511b and the surface side surface of the base portion 511b, the back surface side end portion of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back surface side end portion of the support plate portion 510. The inner surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of the support plate 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512 a are arranged on a row that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) adjacent to each other. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512 a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes are parallel to each other from the back of the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light irradiated from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light source 540 and exits from any surface of the light guide member 540. The light entry / exit and the route thereof will be described later.

The cover side through-hole 513 is a hole through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back surface side while positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 disposed in the inner cover member 520. When the screw is fastened to the back fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 is attached to the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The lens-side through hole 514 is a hole through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back surface side while positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 disposed in the outer lens member 550. When the screw is fastened to the back fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 is supported by the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 is set to have a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding portion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice as long as the diameter of the protruding portion 566. Accordingly, it is possible to improve work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side (projecting portion 566). Even when the position is shifted up and down by about the diameter of the protrusion 566, the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. As a result, the protrusion 566
Is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount of positional deviation, positional deviation can be eliminated and fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left double plate unit 500L includes a window portion 14c (FIG. 86).
The inner cover member 520 is formed from a resin material that does not transmit light and constitutes the right edge of
And an inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R is a light guide member 540 disposed to face the left heavy plate unit 500L.
An outer lens member 550 that is faced to the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction, and whose front side end is opposed to the front-rear direction and is formed of a light-transmissive white resin material, and the outer lens member The light guide member 54 is disposed on the right side of 550 and is formed from a resin material that does not transmit light.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. 110 is a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, and each of the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 that is formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 that is disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 5.
30 and a plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and are formed longer than the short fastening portions 525. The outer cover member 560 is a cylindrical portion that is inserted into the lens member 530 and the inner cover member 520.
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the screw are screwed, and a plurality of back fastening portions protruding from the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 from the back side are screwed. 527
And mainly.

The main body plate 521 has a corrugated front end portion 521a, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the rear base portion 521b in the corrugated short width portion (portion approaching the rear side). Is provided.

The back side base portion 521b is a base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
b An inner side surface 521b1 that contacts the left side surface (matches the shape) is provided.

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion disposed so as to be inclined leftward toward the back side, and the opening 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals gradually increase from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different so that the effect of light can be achieved.
Can be different for each.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction, and recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. A fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by inserting screws at two locations at the upper end portion and at one location at the lower end portion.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in parallel at four locations, and the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
It functions as a window for visually recognizing Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right from the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at a boundary portion between the back side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion is the design shape in the present embodiment, the inner cover member 52.
The 0 surface (left side surface) corresponds to a portion protruding leftward (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is curved in a design shape, rightward, between the above-described boundary portions.
In other words, the surface of the back side base 521b is formed in a wave shape that undulates from side to side as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding to the design-like surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a concavity that tends to be a dead space is formed on the reverse side of the design-like projecting portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively utilized by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (the inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520. Efficiency can be improved.

The inner lens member 530 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions follows the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a main body plate portion 5 that is formed in a vertically long plate shape.
The front end portion 531a of the 31 has a wave shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520.

The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is drilled in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve forming the wave shape. And a support hole 531 through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the front side portion of the wave shape of the front side end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied in the vicinity of 31b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the rear portion of the wave shape of the front side end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540 is disposed on the back side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is reinforced by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even when a load is applied in the vicinity of 31c, the support hole 531c can be prevented from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 includes a through-hole 531d that is drilled in the left-right direction in a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. When the long fastening portion 526 is inserted through the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edge portions of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction.
b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended in a manner to fill a gap between the light guide member 540 and the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is,
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it goes to the back side. And a triangular shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes a protruding portion 533 that is formed to protrude from the main body plate portion 531 to the left in a manner that passes through the opening 524. The overhang portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a that is formed in a wave shape on the side opposite to the overhang side and has a shape that scatters light on the wave-like curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and is formed on the left and right side surfaces as a halftone dot pattern in which concave portions that change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LEDs 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear side end portion of the light guide member 540 is changed in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a).
) Is a processed part for changing the light from the light into uniform surface light. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a to thereby guide the light guide member 5.
The light is emitted from the surfaces of the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of a base circle of about 1 mm are dispersedly arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but preferably has transparency, acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), polycarbonate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, amorphous polyester resin, amorphous olefin type. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
Acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound). Among these, the light guide member 540 has a high average luminance and a small decrease in luminance distribution by using an acrylic resin in particular.
Can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the light guide member 540 is set such that the thickness of the end portion on the LED 512a side is 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retainability after the heat bending process is improved, and a practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end portion is slightly shifted to the back side from the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 and left and right. Also formed from undulating wave shapes.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. For the degree of wave shape,
Although there is no particular limitation, the curvature radius (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm in the curved surface portion.
It is preferable that: By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that can give a three-dimensional degree of freedom while maintaining good practical mechanical properties with less distortion after hot bending. .

The details of the wave shape that undulates from side to side will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the inner cover member 520
In a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the left side, and positioned rightward at a position between the positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c (distant from the inner cover member 520). Wave shape.

As described above, the wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot-bending a substrate on which a concave portion is formed. As a method of the thermal bending process of the present invention, a concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (curved surface in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin serving as a substrate +10 to 40 ° C.)
This is done by pressing the substrate against a mold having a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be set to 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to a deflection temperature under load of + 40 ° C. or lower and a melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process It can suppress that the reflection angle of fluctuates. Thereby, the brightness fall in a light-guide plate and the nonuniformity of brightness distribution can be prevented. Moreover, the distortion to a light-guide plate can be suppressed by setting it as such heating temperature conditions.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate, and the main body plate portion 5.
41, and a fastening portion 542 that extends in the vertical direction from the upper and lower end portions of 41 and through which a screw fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a recess 541 a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, there is no portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is formed of a single plate without a hole at least on the inner side of the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of staging the effect of light through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially in the surface position with the rear side end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 has a main body plate portion 551 that is formed in a vertically long plate shape, and is disposed at the upper and lower end portions of the main body plate portion 551 so that the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is fitted and supported. Internal fitting 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and an area that is surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553, protrudes to the right and passes through the outer cover member. A projecting portion 554 that is visible, a plurality of through-holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion that protrudes from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. And a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions is similar to the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551 a that extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wave shape and is slightly displaced from the front end of the light guide member 540 on the front side. In the present embodiment, the front side end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. The

The front side end portion 551a is at the switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve forming the wave shape,
A plurality of protruding portions 551b are provided so as to protrude to the front side and are fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

To the surface on the side opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540 of the front side end 551a, to the front side,
An infinite number of bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) bulging in a semicircular shape when viewed from the side are formed. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter light emitted from the front side end face of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are spaced apart at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission at the front side end face can be a strip-like light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep depth of a shape that is recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhang portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a back fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided in the outer lens member 550, and is not provided in the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the arrangement of the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). it can). Thereby, the area | region (left area | region of the right panel unit 500) facing a player can be expanded.

The main body plate portion 551 is formed so that the surface facing the light guide member 540 is curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). 5
40 and the main body plate portion 551 come into contact with each other on the surface (see FIG. 114B).

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is disposed to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate 510,
It is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced, and light can be incident on the light guide member 540 with high accuracy from the LED 512a.

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. And a plurality of screws having a longitudinal width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a long hole portion formed in an oval shape having a lateral width longer than the vertical width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. An upper receiving portion 562 having a screw receiving portion 562a and a lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561, a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520,
A lower side to be fastened having a screw receiving portion 563a which is formed in a long hole shape having a slightly larger vertical width than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side. The long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front side end portion of the portion 563 and the main body plate portion 561
26 having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal hole length longer than the vertical width and from the opposite side. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening portion 565 having an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a projecting projection from the main body plate portion 561 to the back side And a plurality of protruding portions 566.

The upper fastening portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at the vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at the vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed on the covering cover 3
70 (see FIG. 92) is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the support groove 376 are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 has a shape that protrudes to the front side by the covering cover 370. However, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (
It is formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang portion 554). Therefore, a path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening portion 565 and the overhang portion 554 can be narrowed, so that an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

112 and 113, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500
A method for assembling R will be described. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). FIG. 113A is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113A.

112 (a) and 112 (b) illustrate a state in which the protruding portion 551b is disposed on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) illustrate the protruding configuration. Part 55
A state in which 1b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state in which the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact with each other in the left-right direction (FIG. 11).
2 (b)), the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

Thus, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the protruding portions 551b and 551 are provided.
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c into the support hole 531b, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front side end of the right panel unit (
It is possible to reduce the number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 and that are fastened to the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, thereby blocking the light by the screws. Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end face of the light guide member 540 can be easily seen in a strip shape extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the screw (fastening location) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that it is erroneously introduced at the time of fastening. The light guide member 540 is subjected to a load applied to the optical member 540.
The range in which there is a risk of damage can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged to the vicinity of the front side front end (near the tapered front end) of the right panel unit 500 can be expanded. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually recognized in the vicinity of the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer to the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and , The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R,
Surfaces that are parallel to each other are formed along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces can be in contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left double plate unit 500L.
Since it functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving in the front-rear direction with respect to the right double plate unit 500R, the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 includes the left heavy plate unit 5 on the support plate portion 510.
When the 00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled by fastening and fixing, at least two procedures are conceivable.

The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a right heavy plate unit 500R. Is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, and then the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.
In this method, the left heavy plate unit 500L is fastened and fixed to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. The two procedures can be similarly employed when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, the assembly and disassembly can be performed in two procedures, so that the operator who performs maintenance or the like can select the right panel unit 50 in either procedure depending on the location of the part that needs to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble and assemble 0, and to shorten the work time.

In both cases, the left heavy board unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R are used for disassembling the left heavy board unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R.
Need to slide each other in the plane direction. Protruding portions 551b and 551c and support hole 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the fitting. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

As described above, the configuration in which the projecting portions 551b and 551c are fitted to the support hole 531b is obtained by prying open (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). This is useful for preventing fraudulent acts entering the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the 500.

That is, when fixing the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 by fastening a screw, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screw, and fraud can be easily performed. As in this embodiment, the left double plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate 510, and if the screws are not removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the left By making it difficult to disassemble the heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the production will be described. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c),
The illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. It can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114B), light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side) at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the outer lens member 550 side from the light guide member 540 at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to can be diffused and used for production.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the aspect of the light effect (condensed or diffused) executed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

In addition, the difference in the aspect of the effect of light does not arise only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 by region or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 by region, it is possible to vary the aspect of the light effect on both the left and right sides. .

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the side of the opening 524 at a position facing the opening 524, and the curvature radius of the concave shape changes corresponding to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the second opening from the top in correspondence to the fact that the vertical width increases as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
> R2) Similarly, the curvature radius R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the curvature radius R2 (R1>R2> R3).

As a result, even when there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512 a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512 a that emit the condensed light for each opening 524 is different, so that it can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be changed can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out of the shape is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower openings 524 can be increased, and the effect of the light can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lower openings 524 is directed to the player's eyes. The light can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 114C, the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as a length connecting the midpoint of the upper side of the opening 524 and the midpoint of the lower side in a side view. The width of the opening 524 disposed opposite to the portion of the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 disposed opposite to the portion of the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the curvature radius R3. The width of the opening 524 arranged to face is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion of the curvature radius R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the curvature radii R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524. Thereby, the part (for example, curvature radius R) where the light condensing degree is weak.
1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while at a location where the degree of light collection is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3). The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1, so that light does not enter the opening 524 too much. Therefore, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform by the configuration of the present embodiment.

In addition, the center point of each curvature radius R1-R4 shown in FIG.114 (b) is a point corresponding to the focus of the light radiate | emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each vertical width W1-W4 in an up-down direction. Is disposed at a substantially intermediate position.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the region KE at the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is a belt-like region extending in the front-rear direction and is defined as a region where the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG.
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above the E, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent below the area KE. Therefore, in the region KE, the LED 512
The light irradiated in the front-rear direction from a is a left side view of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114 (c)).
In the reference), the process proceeds in a state hidden in the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is reflected by the inner cover member 520.
Therefore, even if the light collecting action is lowered, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, in the region KE, the light guide member 54 has a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface.
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

Further, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, where light is diffused inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560 and light is condensed. Can be formed. Thereby, the production effect of the effect of the light visually recognized through the opening 565 can be improved.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light viewed through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light viewed through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. .

For example, the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE is turned OFF, and the other LEDs 5
It is also possible to irradiate light inside the opening 524 and the opening 565 without any gap by turning on 12a. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 on the upper and lower sides of the region KE is a concave surface, so that the light emitted rightward from the upper and lower positions of the region KE crosses on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually recognized in the area KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Accordingly, the overhang portion 554 (FIG. 106).
The light emission mode of (see) can be sharpened.

Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE is turned ON, and a corresponding portion (a portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) compared to the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the light amount is weak. An effect may be performed using the light reaching the front end.

That is, it cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521 c, but the front side end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530.
31a (see FIG. 105) is provided with a light effect that can be visually recognized (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500), and the player's eye position is set by setting a high expectation degree for the effect. The right panel unit 500 can be moved to the side farther from the game board 13 than the front side end. Thereby, the degree of tiredness of the player's eyes can be reduced, and the player can play a long game without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, while being viewed by the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Accordingly, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while the player who is cheating is not noticed, so that the player who is cheating escapes. Can be prevented.

In addition, by reversing the left and right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the region KE may be visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line | wire of (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. It should be noted that the front end of the light guide member 540 (LED 512)
The portion farthest from a) is designed with a thickness of 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining the mechanical strength, and the left-right width dimension is reduced with a similar gradient over the entire vertical region.

Therefore, the front side end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 that faces the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is compared with the end face of the portion that faces the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end surface on the 12a side becomes long, the taper is excessively reduced, and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a difference between the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower parts of the support hole 531b and is recessed at the back side, the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b are arranged.
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portion, the portion in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is easier to be seen darker than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 54 at a portion arranged to face the support hole 531b.
Since the width dimension (thickness) of the end surface of the light guide member 540 at the portion opposed to the support hole 531c is formed larger than the end surface of 0, the light irradiated from the LED 512a is received. Therefore, a large area of the light emitting surface can be secured.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is changed to the support hole 53.
The amount of light visually recognized in the vicinity of 1b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows can be reduced. Accordingly, the front side end portion 531 of the inner lens member 530 is obtained.
With a as the forefront, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front side end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily uniformed vertically (small difference in strength).

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 is visible. In addition, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It spreads and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540.
While the arrangement of 2a is constant, the light emission modes (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540. In other words, the player can visually recognize light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is the inner lens member 53.
115 is bent as shown in FIG. 115 (b) so that it is refracted not to the side but to the player side (see the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b). The imagination in FIG. 115 (b). The line arrow
An example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540 is shown). Thereby, it can be made easy to make a player visually recognize light, and the production effect of a light emission effect can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14.
The fitting grooves 522b and 562b are fixed to the main body frame 14a via e and disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof (see FIGS. 108 and 109).
The unit is fitted to and supported from below, and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410. An electric decoration unit 401 disposed on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410; a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e; ,
Is mainly provided. 117 and 118, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit in which a model name or the like is decorated on the front side surface.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By enclosing the LED to emit light,
Produce with light.

The electric decoration unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wave shape on the rear outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally long plate shape from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion protruding in a tubular shape from the waved wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 and inside the tubular shape A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the corrugated wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and fastened with screws inserted into the upper frame member 410. Is mainly provided.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear plate-like members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is arranged on the electronic board,
The electronic substrate is fixed to the main body 402.

The wavy wall 403 meshes with the wavy wall 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the electric decoration unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
This is a part that improves the workability of 01 assembly.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the wave-like wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, a laterally long groove shape that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 vertically is formed in the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 so as to be recessed.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body portion 402 is disposed is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws being fastened to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space that encloses the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and the inner side access. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an upper frame member 41.
FIG. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
A main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a lower edge plate member that is formed from a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411 420, the right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side to the position protruding from the opening 414 to the front side is inserted into the main body member 411 from the back side, and pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back side. A lens member 440 that mainly regulates falling off to the back side and constitutes the electric decoration portion 8033 is mainly provided.

The body member 411 is an elongated member on the left and right sides where openings for allowing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450 to pass are formed on both the left and right sides, and the speaker cover 27 is disposed to cover the openings. Thus, on the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wave shape in a top view, and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the electrical decoration unit 401, than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405 A support through hole 413 that is formed in a slightly larger inner shape;
And an opening 414 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall 412 is formed in a wave shape substantially the same as the wavy wall 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401. Thereby, the position alignment of the left-right direction at the time of fitting the electrical decoration unit 401 in the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper side frame member 410 can be performed easily.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted through the support through-hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Accordingly, the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, since the other end of the wiring whose one end is connected to the electronic substrate included in the electrical decoration unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through-hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
Thereby, the support through-hole 413 can be used for positioning with respect to the upper frame member 410 of the electrical decoration unit 401.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed in front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has the LED 14 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
e2 is provided, and the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the LED 14e2 through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 that is formed in a wave shape in a top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side on the lower right corner bottom surface, and a recessed groove from the back side on the lower left corner bottom surface. A supported groove 418, a fastening portion 419 that is disposed in a symmetrical position in the vicinity of the upper end portion and can be screwed in, and a second screw that can be screwed in a position closer to the top and bottom. The fastening part 419b is mainly provided.

The wavy side 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall 422 formed at the lower edge front side end). Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state (FIG. 86).
2), a load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electric decoration portion 8031, and the fitting state (
In FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 40 is interposed through the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed.
A load (weight or the like) given from 0 can be applied to the electric decoration unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where a screw inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape to a position where it does not reach the tip portion from the base portion. The enlarged rib 419a is provided.

As will be described later, the enlarged rib 419a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 by screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a, so that the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are connected to the main body frame 14a. (See FIG. 125A), details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are provided with three identically shaped ribs at 120 ° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screws to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes a fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and a recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at a lower position of the main body member 411.
2, 482 (refer to FIG. 122), and formed at positions corresponding to the recessed portions 462, 482 (refer to FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 in the upper position of the main body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a corrugated wall portion 422 formed in a wave shape in a bottom view at the lower edge front side edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the corrugated wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from its extended end, and has a cross-section L
A plurality of L-shaped extending portions 423 formed in a letter shape, and a plurality of holes that are vertically spaced from each other at equal distances from the left and right center positions (the upper end position of the curved shape) of the main body plate portion 421. And an opening 424 composed of a small-diameter through hole.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in front and back, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at a position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on each other, and the strength can be improved.

The opening 424 is formed in the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
1 is an opening through which vibration waves (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 1 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 are passed (released to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings that allow vibration generated toward the front side in the speaker assembly 450 to pass therethrough.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally-long rectangular through hole 430R2 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
The light irradiated to the lens member 440 through is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is shown by an imaginary line for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted through the connection holes 469, and left and right ends. The lower end portion is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Note that the speaker assembly 450 is a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 45 having substantially symmetrical shapes.
Since it is composed of 0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the speaker assembly 4
Description of 50L is omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-type speaker) 451 that is an acoustic device that converts an electric signal into an audible sound wave and can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through-hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is provided. A front assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in front view;
Rear assembly 48 that forms a space with front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)
0 is mainly provided.

The speaker 451 closes the through-hole 466 of the front assembly 460 so as to close the front assembly 460.
The speaker 451 emits a production sound in connection with the game.
A through-hole in which an upper end plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) is formed with a speaker connection line 453 (for example, an electric wire made of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) extended at one end connected to And the terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102).
(See FIG. 4), the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is connected.

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 covered with 54 is attached to the front assembly 460 in a state where the front surface portion is aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received. Can be reproduced and output with high sound quality. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 is a main body portion 46 that is formed in a cup shape that is long in the left-right direction and is open on the back side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 that are recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463 b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 An extending plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the upper and lower width outside, and the main body 461
A wiring passage recess 464 that is recessed from the rear end to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 461, and a speaker 451 at the right side of the main body 461. A through-hole 466 that passes through in a circular shape, a plurality of passage-forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and a rear assembly 480 A plurality of fastening portions 468 to which the screws are fastened, a connection hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted, and the front end side body A front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the portion 461T.

The main body 461 is divided into a left and right direction as a region divided into a base end side main body 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left and right direction of the base end side main body 461B (FIG. 12).
The main body 461M is provided mainly with an intermediate main body portion 461M provided on the left side of the first main body 461M, and a front-end side main body portion 461T provided on the middle side in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. Note that the base end side main body 461B, the intermediate main body 461M, and the distal end side main body 461T are continuously formed with spaces formed between the rear assembly 480 and the rear end assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in front view. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that does not turn back on the inside (an edge portion on which no flange or the like is formed).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Is done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 463
The screws inserted through a are connected to the joint holes 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back side of the main body frame 14a.
4e through-holes 4e3 (see FIG. 102) and through-holes 483a of the rear assembly 480.
And passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a is screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened as the screw is tightened. Pressed against the rear assembly 480. Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material sandwiched therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. Accordingly, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and a gap can be prevented from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess portion 464 is visible.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are assembled, The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through hole 465 is an LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through hole through which light irradiated from 2 toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage forming rib 467 is in contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, and bends a plurality of times in a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (
123). This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front side end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being generated on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (a little outside the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 has a main body portion 48 that is formed in a cup shape that is long in the left-right direction and is open on the front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the upper and lower widths, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 An extending plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 481 toward the outer side in the vertical width, and the main body 481
From the wiring pressing convex part 484 projecting to the front side, the light passing through hole 485 formed penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body part 481, and the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body part 481 A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape toward the front side, and a fastening portion 4 of the front side assembly 460
68, a plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the front-rear direction, and a front concave portion 471 of the front assembly 460 at positions corresponding to the front-rear direction from the front side to the rear side And a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward the head.

The main body 481 extends in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 with respect to the outer shape of the back side plate. Front side wall part 48 formed from a shape fitted on the inner side surface of rear side wall part 461H of
1H is provided.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion that is fitted by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer periphery thereof, so that air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction that an acoustic effect is reduced by the sound leakage from an outer peripheral position can be suppressed.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary convex portions protruding from the front side of the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right sides with an interval through which the speaker connection line 453 can pass. 481Ha is provided.

The auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage concave portion 464 from being displaced when the rear side assembly 480 is assembled to the front side assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha have a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (front end side) (see FIG. 124C), the speaker connection line 45
Even if 3 deviates from the wiring passage recess 464 and shifts to the left and right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 during the assembly process, and the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as that of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed part, Comprising: It utilizes for positioning between fastening part 14e1.

The extending plate 483 includes a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 483
The screws inserted through a are connected to the joint holes 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back side of the main body frame 14a.
4e is inserted into the joint fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102), and the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46 are inserted.
It passes through the zero through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R extends from the back side of the main body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex part 484 is provided along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body part 481 and is formed with a width that fits in the wiring passage recessed part 464, and more than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recessed part 464. The speaker connection line 453 is projected with a projecting length that is slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

That is, the speaker connection line 4 is formed in the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464.
By passing 53, the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 is compressed, and a gap is formed between the opening formed surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the speaker connection line 453. This can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
Generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction that a sound effect is reduced by the sound leakage from the opening for letting it pass can be suppressed.

The light passing through hole 485 is an LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through hole through which light irradiated from 2 toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passing through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape whose sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and is in contact with each other without a gap between the front assembly 460 and a plurality of spaces in a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is the rib which forms the bending channel | path (refer FIG. 123) which turns around. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and the front side wall portion 481H.
The front and rear end portions and the surface position are formed. That is, the rear side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is the main body portion 48.
1 is connected to the back side plate. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage-forming rib 487 is designed with a dimension such that a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at the front end thereof in contact with the passage-forming rib 467. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is loaded with a compressive force toward the back side from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming rib 4 is caused by the compressive force.
67 and 487 close the gap between them while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction (FIG. 124 (b)).
reference).

At this time, if the left and right rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 is weak and may bend to the left and right, there is a possibility that the compression force does not work well and the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased in the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). The strength can be strengthened by the side wall portion 461H. Therefore, the rigidity in the left-right direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be prevented from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 is satisfactorily closed. Can do.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed in a shape that is reversed in the front-rear direction with the front recessed portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (a little outside the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening 424 It is arranged at a position surrounding the outer shape.

123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a rear assembly 48. FIG.
FIG. 123 (a) and 123 (b), for ease of understanding,
The speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the state where the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 that are opposed to each other are developed with their surfaces facing each other facing toward the front side of the paper is illustrated. That is, the contact positions of the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 can be obtained by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) vertically drawn at the center of the paper. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the base end side main body 46 of the front side assembly 460 is placed inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic path as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the distal end side main body 461T. The acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately shifted up and down toward the left side. And rib portions 467a and 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (5 locations in the present embodiment).
467c, 467d, 467e.

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467 are assembled during assembly.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being sandwiched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Since each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected with the main body part 461 and the back side wall part 461H, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d.
, 467e can reinforce the rigidity of the main body 461.

Each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e forms a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 passes in cooperation with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451 is formed.
In this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123A as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is generated on the left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is disposed on the L side and is closest to the left-right direction is disposed on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrows L and U directions).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side (for example, the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b)). When the rib portion 467c) is disposed on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (the direction of the arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When 67e is alternately arranged up and down, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a vertically bent path, and the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws is ensured longer than the left and right width of the space. can do.

Thereby, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, and the generation of the stationary wave due to the vibration wave Ws is suppressed. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 is performed by the recessed portions 462, 463b.
Can also be generated. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It is possible to proceed in the direction of arrows L and U.

Accordingly, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembly.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming rib 487 has a wiring pressing convex portion 4 for holding the wiring.
The rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 4 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to 84 and arranged alternately at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment) in the vertical direction toward the left side.
87d and 487e.

Since each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected with the main body part 481 and the front side wall part 481H, each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d.
, 487e, the rigidity of the main body 481 can be enhanced.

Here, each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is the front side assembly 4
The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of 60 are formed in a shape that coincides in the front-rear direction, and are opposed to each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

In addition, since the effect | action of each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is similar to the effect | action of the rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e mentioned above, description is abbreviate | omitted.

In the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 is performed by the recessed portions 482, 483b.
Can also be generated. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Accordingly, the recessed portion 48 is provided.
2, 483b has an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembly.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are aligned vertically. In addition, the vertical width is expanded at a distance from the speaker 451, and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471,491. Thereby, an acoustic effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451
Is assembled by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is
Advancing toward the distal end side main body 461T which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction in search of the outlet. Tip side body 4
The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in order, and the speaker set. Sound is emitted to the outside of the solid 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the back surface portion of the speaker 451 is the internal path of the speaker assembly 450, the recessed portion 47.
The sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is directly in contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening formed by the openings 1491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120). It can be played and output with high sound quality without blurring.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase thereof, so that the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front surface of the speaker 451 is recessed 471,491. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by the above. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out with the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. This
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is capable of performing a presentation full of realism,
The player's interest and excitement about the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so that the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The inner space of 450 is used as an enclosure and discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, the effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side can be appropriately provided to a player who plays a game on the front side of the front frame 14.

Tuning the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be done by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rear assembly 48 of the front assembly 460 are provided.
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path that avoids the zero rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e. Therefore, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
7d and 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are individually set in the arrangement and the length in the vertical direction, whereby the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned.

In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 4 of the front assembly 460 are provided.
67d, 467e and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of the rear assembly 480.
In addition to the above purpose, d and 487e are disposed in a portion to which a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450.

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are disposed in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by a load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

Further, the extended plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125 (a)).
7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are disposed closer to the extending plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463 and 48.
When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, screws are inserted into the fastening portions 419 inserted through the three through holes 463a and 483a.
By bringing 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
Zero deformation can be prevented. That is, each rib part 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by 7d.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned below in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is connected to the upper side plate member. In a state before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the speaker assembly 45
The 0 recessed portions 462 and 482 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
482, an upward load is applied from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. In this embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent attempt to illegally allow a wire, a piano wire, or the like to enter the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424. It can be easily suppressed.

In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally entered into the game area and a nail or the like is deformed. In this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 has the front concave portion 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The opening gap formed by the wiring pressing protrusion 484 is closed by the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is made to enter the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, the speaker assembly is passed through an opening different from the portion where the wire enters. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the wire, the piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speakers 451. The distance between the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, which is a portion where the speaker assembly 450 enters the speaker assembly 450, can be increased.

Therefore, even when such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be reduced, and it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of fraudulent profits.

124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (c). FIG. 124A is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R when viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124A, and FIG. 124D is an arrow CXXI in FIG. 124A.
It is a partial bottom view of speaker assembly 450R in the Vd direction view. Note that FIG.
) And FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated with an imaginary line for easy understanding, while the speaker connection line 453 is omitted in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c). .

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 is tapered so as to incline toward the back side. The outer side surface 481Ho of the front side wall 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124 (b)).
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back surface side and an inner side surface 461H.
It is made into the shape fitted in i in an assembly state. Thereby, the work efficiency of the operation | work which inserts the front side wall part 481H of the rear side assembly 480 in the back side wall part 461H of the front side assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. Since the compressive force acts from the rib part 487c toward the rib part 467c by the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, the gap between the rib parts 467c, 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M has a shorter front-rear dimension than the base end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the distal end side main body 46
Compared to 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be reduced (squeezed) in the intermediate main body 461M. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the front end side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. It is ensured greatly in a mode that bulges in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body 461T and discharged at a low speed. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved, for example, it is possible to easily hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

125 (a) shows the front assembly 46 along the line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124 (a).
FIG. 125B is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e. FIG. 125B is a front assembly 460 along the CXXVb-CXXVb line in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has through holes 463a,
The screw inserted through 483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, whereby the front assembly 460 is secured.
The rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are portions sandwiched between the main body frame 14a.
In other words, the enlarged rib 419a is disposed at the front surface position of the extension plate 463, thereby preventing the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (by passing through without being brought into contact with the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction), so that the front side assembly 460 is provided.
The upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened and fixed without using the rear assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together with the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is provided at the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

In addition, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the back side is disposed inside). In the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is the recessed portion 462.
It is arranged inside 482 (the part extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In the present embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively.
A conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 arranged at 450L can be avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as a transparent sound without causing the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 and the upper side plate member 14e of the rear assembly 480 are brought into contact with each other on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A), while the speaker assembly 450 In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected to the front side in a portion disposed opposite to the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480. The projecting portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to abut (stick) on the entire surface of the upper side plate member 14e, and in particular, the abutting mode is in line contact with the lower end portion.

In this case, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be disposed, or a glass member may be disposed. Alternatively, a concrete member may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, the thickness can be increased.

Moreover, it is desirable that it is a member with high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like are applicable. When these members are used, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, regarding the shape, it may be provided in a long plate shape, may be provided in a spike shape, or may be provided in a manner dotted in a rounded shape. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating state.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is arranged in the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back of the lower end of 0. For example, the rear surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surfaces of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the speaker assembly 4 may be used.
It may be 50 side faces or front faces.

For example, when arranged on the back surface of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a cylindrical shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. You may position by. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator can be dispensed with, and functions as the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator by tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the acoustic effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member to be applied (the load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is not connected to the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123A) or the connecting hole 469.
And a screw inserted into a through-hole disposed on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction and the through-hole disposed at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through-hole is disposed. Thus, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e.

The upper frame member 41 is fixed to the upper side plate member 14e of the upper frame member 410.
In addition to the screw inserted through the through hole 483a, 0 is a fastening portion 14e1 (FIG. 1) of the upper side plate member 14e.
00), a screw inserted from the back side is screwed into a fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, since the load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450, by firmly fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted through the through hole 483a (adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above is as follows.
This can also be said to be related to the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . Note that FIG.
In (b), the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed is shown.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portion 12a,
12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced apart from each other for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward from the right end portion of the rear end surface disposed opposite to the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the left is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on the surface.

The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a cup shape with an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front end surface formed on one surface so as to be able to contact the back surface of the game board 13, and a central portion opened. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end portion disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in such a posture that the elastic support portion 12b1 projects to the front side as it goes to the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 is joint with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a.
A taper shape that expands to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction is formed. Thereby, workability | operativity when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128 (a) and 128 (b) show CXXVIIIa-CXXV in FIG. 127 (b).
FIG. 129 (a) and FIG. 129 (b) are side views of the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13, respectively. It is. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 that has started to push the left end portion into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128 (b) and 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In FIGS. 128 and Z39, for ease of understanding,
A part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 on the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent.
Is slipped between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid in a posture rotated around an axis directed in the vertical direction with respect to the inner frame 12, so that the left end front support on the near side is supported. Although there is a possibility that the part 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is formed on the left end front support part 12a.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other
Can be reduced. Thereby, workability | operativity can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the left end portion of the game board 13 (in detail, the inclined surface 12a
1, the game board 13 is rotated so as to be closer to the inner frame 12. In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed opposite to the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 depends on the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
Regulated by 2c. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90).
The guide rib 1 supports the game board 13 from below and has a front upper end cut as an inclined surface.
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 when viewed from above. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed without delay by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 ° as an angle larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game shop. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
The workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved without depending on the rear inclination of 013.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the post-inclination at the time of installing the game store. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides.
The inclined surface 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 that are arranged one above the other and are released later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It contacts the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the release state, the board surface support device 600 is configured such that the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 (the portion disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are the game board 13.
Therefore, the workability of the assembly work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 to the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 through the game board 13, and the board surface support device 60
0 changes to a fixed state described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
At the time of fixing, the upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 change their states almost simultaneously.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and the vertical position is restricted. FIG. 129 (a
) And FIG. 129 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not contact the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (the game board 13 is a board surface). The vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the panel surface support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum, so that the post-rotation claw member 64 via the game board 13 according to the lever principle.
The force required to apply a load to 0 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a less powerful operator can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 has a left end portion that is a left end front support portion 12a.
And since it is supported at the upper and lower two places by the left end rear support part 12b (see FIG. 126), for example,
When the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 when the right end of the game board 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in a fixed state). Even if it exists, the grade which the game board 13 falls forward can be made low.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is caused by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is the support portion 12a.
12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end of the lower end is restricted by the support bottom 12c.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13
The game board 13 is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13 while being connected to various members arranged on the game board 13 and wires connected to various devices. A floating connector 13a and a receiving connector 12d disposed on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower panel support device 600 and connected to the control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like on the back are connected. The game board 13 is connected in the rotation direction.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in a posture that inclines in a manner in which the connection direction is directed in a direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a panel support device 600 that is disposed in the vicinity of the right corner of the inner frame 12 such that a pair of upper and lower sides face each other. In addition, since a pair of upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 having the same configuration are disposed facing each other, only one panel surface support device 600 will be described, and the description of the other panel surface support device 600 will be omitted.

130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. Note that FIG.
In (a) and FIG. 130 (b), a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13 is illustrated, and in FIG. 131 (a) and FIG. 131 (b), the game board 1 by the board support device 600 is shown.
The release state in which the fixing of 3 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 60
Reference numeral 0 denotes a frame member 610 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, a pre-rotation claw member 620 that is rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 that is inserted and fixed to the frame member 610, and its rotation. A restriction front claw member 630 that is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is disposed on the front side of the front claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the rotation front claw member 620, and is disposed on the back side of the rotation front claw member 620. The post-rotation claw member 6 that is rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.
40 is mainly provided.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are opposed to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line through the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 at the upper front side of the support hole 612. The plate portion 6 extends along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612.
An arc recess 614 that is recessed from below in 11 a and a plate portion 61 at a position vertically above support hole 612.
A rod-shaped regulating rod 615 inserted and fixed in 1a and a screw extending from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and inserted into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). And a pair of fixing plates 616 that are fastened and fixed to each other.

The support hole 612 is a through hole into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
Is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-like member having an enlarged diameter on the proximal end side of the insertion, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion distal end side is pressed, thereby supporting hole 612.
Fixed to. The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P.
Since 63 is the same, description is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Like the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner portion to form a T shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed in a straight line so as to penetrate the plate part 621a opposed to the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the upper front corner of the plate part 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621
and a pair of support holes 624 that are formed in a straight line on the back side of a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the pre-restricting claw member 63 is simultaneously used.
The second shaft member P62 is inserted into the 0 supported hole 632, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.
Is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion opposed to the left and right, and is a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front and rear direction.
And a pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view, and an upper edge of the plate portion 621a are connected to each other by an extending portion 621a2 extending in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, a back side extending plate 621c extending from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b with an inclination of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b, and an extension Part 621a
2, a hanging back plate 621d extending perpendicularly to the plate 621a from the back side end toward the opposite plate 621a, and a bottom back plate 621d from the bottom end of the hanging back plate 621d. A front-side extending plate 621e that is inclined to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface.

The drooping back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed to be at right angles to each other.

The rear surface side extending plate 621c is disposed on the lower surface thereof so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is brought into contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134 (a)). By retracting upward from NBb, the torsion spring NBb becomes the main body plate portion 611.
Begins to abut.

Thus, when the worker starts to push the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the operator side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

The drooping back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front-side extending board 621e functions as a guide for inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back board part 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that separates the lower end portion of the claw member 640 after rotation from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The pre-restricting claw member 630 is a body plate portion 631 formed in a shape of a side view when the sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner portion, and a part of the body plate portion 631, which is opposed to the left and right And a pair of supported holes 632 that are formed in a straight line through the plate portion 631a and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connection plate 631b that connects the plate portion 631a and is inclined from the lower end portion to the front side. And an inclined extending plate 633 that extends and a curved surface 634 that is curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extending plate 633 is a plate portion disposed to face the front frame 14, and is a board surface support device 600.
This is the portion that is closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and thereby, a free posture change of the claw member 630 before restriction is restricted.

The post-rotation claw member 640 has a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when the sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at the corner portion, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, and is opposed to the left and right. From the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported plate portions 641a and the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed so as to penetrate the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are supported by the third shaft member P63, from the rear side. An inclined extending plate 643 that is inclined and extended is mainly provided.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

The inclined extending plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and has an inclination angle that contacts the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129 (a)). It is formed.

134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. Further, FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG.
In (b), the layout of the multi-functional cover member 171 and the game board 13 fixed to the board support apparatus 600 are shown in phantom lines.

That is, in FIG. 134 (a), the release state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 135 (b).
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is shown in the figure. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the claw member 640 after rotation rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 only by pushing the claw member 640 after rotation to the rear side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward relative to the first shaft member P61. Accordingly, the claw member 640 after rotation can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with an urging force in a direction approaching the drooping back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force is applied, the pre-restricting claw member 630 is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand,
When the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 come into contact with each other, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated.

That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), as the panel surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the pre-rotation claw member 6
20, the front side on which the extended portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, while the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises on the front side in a manner to be separated from the drooping back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulation rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634 and is the second shaft member P.
While in contact with the resistance portion 634a intersecting with a circle centered at 62 (FIG. 134 (a) to FIG. 13).
5 to (a)), the front-side end of the claw member 630 before regulation rises with the tilting operation of the claw member 620 before rotation. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the movement direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistive portion 634b that is a portion that is connected to the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 is disposed to face the restriction rod 615,
When the restriction rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are not in contact with each other in the circular direction around the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the pre-restriction claw member 630 is released, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is moved to the inclined extending plate 633 side. The tip portion is disposed close to the drooping back plate portion 621d (FIGS. 135 (a) to 135).
(See (b)).

Angle range (FIG. 134 (a) to FIG. 135 (a) in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and operates.
In the range between), even if a downward load, which is a load in a direction in which the front side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted, is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630, it operates with the downward load. Since the posture change of the pre-restricting claw member 630 is a posture change toward the direction opposite to the downward load (posture change in the rising direction), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the pre-restriction claw member for the downward load The posture change of 630 is restricted.

In addition, the game board 13 is in contact with the back surface of the rear-side extending plate 621c, so that the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 as long as the game board 13 is not pushed into the back.

Thereby, a downward load is applied to the pre-restricting claw member 630 so that the pre-rotation claw member 620 is applied.
Can be prevented from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied from the front frame 14 to the pre-restriction claw member 630, the pre-rotation claw member 620 can be prevented from tilting. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship in contact with the inclined extending plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 when the panel surface support device 600 is released. The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length of the inclined extending plate 633, and the inclination angle are set.

In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side when the game board 13 abuts on the back side of the back side extension board 621c, the back side extension board is used. 621c
And rubbing friction occurs between the game board 13 and the game board 13. Thereby, the game board 1 in the state of FIG.
It is possible to prevent 3 from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139) described later applies a load to the game board 13,
By the reaction, it is possible to suppress the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the panel surface support device 600, the front rotation claw member 620 is rotated by the load from the front frame 14. Depending on the manner in which the multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 are in contact with each other, the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. May occur.

The board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle, and in this state, the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).
Is closed, the distance between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 may be shortened, which may hinder the game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the multifunction which is arrange | positioned by the front frame 14 by employ | adopting the structure which suppresses that the nail | claw member 620 before rotation rotates with the load from the front frame 14 (refer FIG. 89). When the cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, it can be made to notice the store clerk who was performing the operation | work which closes the front frame 14 that the board | substrate surface support apparatus 600 is not the fixed state.

Recognizing this, the store clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-restriction claw Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the case where the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively, The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunction cover member 171 projects to a position where it can come into contact with the claw member 630 before regulation, and in the state shown in FIG. The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured such that the posture is not regulated by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear-side extending plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13. No.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-restricting claw member 630 immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is in a fixed state, the front side end of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. Yes.

Thereby, when the game board 13 is arrange | positioned in the position just before making the board | substrate surface support apparatus 600 into a fixed state (For example, it is a case where the force in which a store clerk pushes in the game board 13 is not enough, 9
The case where the front frame 14 is not closed until the case is stably installed), in this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 is changed to the panel surface support device 600.
When a load is applied to the board surface support device 600, the board surface support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extending plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 1).
34 (a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 back. That is, the game board 13 displaces the claw member 640 after rotation, and accordingly, the claw member 620 before rotation is rotated, thereby changing the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front face of the game board 13 and the face of the board back support plate portion 621d facing the game board 13 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. In this state, the game board 13
Is moved (tilted) while pushing down the hanging rear plate 621d, the torsion spring NBb applied to the pre-rotation claw member 620 via the claw member 640 after rotation. Is applied as a resistance against the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 135A, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Accordingly, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the reaction board 13 reacts with the reaction.
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end of the plate from moving (tilting) to the front side.

In addition, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed opposite to the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the arc, the non-resistance portion 634b comes into contact with the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 to the front side is increased accordingly.

Thereby, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b),
The possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) by the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is in the state shown in FIG.
A curved surface is formed such that the radius around the second shaft member P62 gradually increases from the portion in contact with the portion toward the portion in contact with the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b).

Thereby, from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the inclined extending plate 633 is pushed to the back side by the multi-function cover member 171, and the pre-rotation claw member 620 is rotated to rotate the second shaft member P62.
Is displaced, the non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the pre-regulation claw member 630 is vigorously close to the drooping back plate 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship that separates from the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extending plate 633. However, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunction cover member 171 is moved to the pre-regulation claw member 630 or the inclined extending plate 633. Then, the board surface support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support apparatus 600.
That is, in the state where the back side surface of the back side extended plate 621c is not in contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is connected to the multifunction cover member 171. (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 until the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board). The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

In the case where the panel surface support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extending plate 633 is used.
Is pulled upward and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the restriction rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the restriction rod 6 in the rotation direction).
15 is not in contact), so that the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force,
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board surface support device 600 can be brought into a released state.

Note that when the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the claw member 640 after rotation that is displaced (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), in the released state, the game board 1
3 is in contact with the lower surface of the rear-side extending plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. Thereby, when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the release state, the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side can be solved.

In addition, the upper and lower panel support devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth in accordance with the state change of the board support device 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back positions of the game board 13 are different from each other. The load applied to the game board 13 may be excessive.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-restriction claw member 630 that is operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, the pre-rotation claw member 620, and the post-rotation claw member 64.
The operation of 0 does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the pre-rotation claw member 6 that supports the game board 13 as compared with the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced.
20 and the amount of displacement of the claw member 640 after rotation is smaller.

Therefore, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 in the case of displacing the pre-regulation claw member 630 to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615). Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 at the locations supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Moreover, the same effect also arises because the post-rotation claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation claw member 620. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (FIG. 13).
4 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in a direction to widen the angle between the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said.

Accordingly, since the amount of displacement of the gaming board 13 pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the amount of displacement of the claw member 620 before rotation, the gaming board at the place supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 disposed on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 show CXXXVI- of FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI line. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

136, the released state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 137, and in FIG. 138, the board surface support device 600 is moved from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle (about 25 °). ) In FIG. 139, the rotated state is illustrated immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Is done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing regulating part 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, FIG. 136 and FIG.
The opening / closing regulating portion 159 viewed in cross section at 37 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the panel surface support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing regulating portion 159 and the panel surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing regulating unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the game board 13
Although the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed in a state in which the game board is removed, the front frame 14 is restricted from being closed in the state where the game board 13 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing regulating portion 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, so that the operation board back member 155 above the game board 13 and the opening / closing regulating unit 159 is interfered. Is avoided. Therefore, when the board surface support device 600 is fixed, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, the front frame 14 is disposed at the closed position (FIG. 1).
38), the opening / closing restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extending plate 633 of the panel surface support device 600.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load on the inclined extending plate 633 toward the back side, the rotation direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the restriction rod 615. (FIG. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (FIG. 138).
Since the reaction force becomes excessive when the direction (counterclockwise direction) is reversed, it is as described above that it is difficult with a normal load (see FIG. 134B).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in a state where the game board 13 is disposed, there is a possibility that the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extending plate 621c may contact each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state just before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening / closing regulating portion 159 The inclined extending plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes.

Further, in this state, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load on the inclined extending plate 633 toward the back side, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the restriction rod 615. Direction (FIG. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the front claw member 630 (FIG. 13).
(8 counterclockwise direction) is not reversed, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, the front frame 14 is pushed in, so that the pre-restriction claw member 630 is pushed in via the opening / closing restriction portion 159, and the board surface support device 600 is obtained.
Can be fixed, so that the front frame 14 is allowed to close.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member for closing the rear surfaces of the ball launch unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b)
These are back perspective views of ball launching unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. 143 (a) shows a state where the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) shows a state where the ball receiving member 731 is reversed after being disassembled. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b)
Only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die-casting and a base member centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A closed state in which the front surface of 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142 (a)) and an open state in which the front surface of the base member 710 is opened (FIG. 23 (
a) a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 that is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between
And mainly.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 with a hook that elastically deforms. The base member 710 is disposed on the front side of the base member 710 and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to regulate the attitude of the launch solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, the launch rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launch solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731 A plurality of fastening portions 716 that are cylindrically projected to the front side at a middle position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges straight from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which screws for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 are screwed. Mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning projections 719 are mainly provided.

The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-like portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 7 that is formed so as to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction.
13, a protruding portion 714 protruding to the front side near the right side of the locking portion 713, and an adsorption force generating solenoid 741 in a closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)). And a failure determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), and the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing flat surface 714a that is disposed to face the side surface 724c and is parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface that is opposite to the facing flat surface 714a and that is inclined to the right as it goes to the back surface side. A surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the failure determination convex portion 715 is not in contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741 but is loosely fastened ( In the state of being lifted from the cover member 721), it is in contact with the cover member 721, and is formed with a convex height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, It can be noticed that the fastening of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the failure of the ball launch unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing and fixing the suction force generation solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed in advance.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the base member 711,
Switching that is controlled so that the state changes between a restricted state that restricts the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the cover member 721 and a permissible state that allows the flow of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) to the firing rail 730. The apparatus 740 is mainly provided.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side in the drawing in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) is opened from a light-transmitting resin material, and a pair of loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. , A hook portion 723 formed like a bowl on the opposite side of the rod-shaped portion 722, and a ball P at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722.
8 (refer to FIG. 144) is arranged in a positional relationship such that a ball passage opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a size that can pass 8 and a slightly protruding upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passage opening 724. And a shaft bar 72 that pivotally supports the cutting metal member 725 and the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.
6 is mainly provided.

The switching device 740 includes a suction force generation solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726.
41 is a ball guide arm member 742 that rotates depending on whether magnetic force is generated or not, and a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742, and is attracted to the attracting force generating solenoid 741. A metal plate 743, a guide inclined portion 744 that is a part of the ball guide arm member 742, is disposed below the ball passage opening 724, and is inclined downward as it is away from the ball passage opening 724, and upward from the base of the guide inclination portion 744 The hemisphere P8 is extended by a distance that can be accommodated, and the extended end is a shaft rod portion 72.
6 is mainly provided with a regulation projecting portion 745 projecting toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The sphere passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144), and the falling plate portion 724 is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction.
a, a rib portion 724b that is disposed to face the upper side of the flow-down plate portion 724a, extends downward in a rib shape from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724, and inclines downward as the extended distal end surface moves toward the back side,
A left inner surface 724 that is connected to the left end portion of the falling plate portion 724a and has a surface formed along the vertical direction.
c. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward and toward the right.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), when the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724, the sphere P8 contacts the inclined surface 714b, and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, sphere P8
Flows down from the cutting metal member 725 in a manner to be separated in the left-right direction, so that the cutting metal member 7
The ball P8 and the cutting metal member 725 can be prevented from colliding with each other while the ball 25 is disposed so as to protrude to the inside of the ball passage opening 724.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a sphere P8 (FIG. 14).
4) is provided with ball receiving members 731 which are arranged with an interval shorter than the diameter.

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 is parallel to the elongated direction and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a that is formed as a long hole along the direction and allows a fastening screw to pass therethrough
In the same manner as the bulging portion 716a, the bulging portion 716a is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) and has a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a. And a regulating groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protruding height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through-hole 731a is fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716, the ball receiving member 731 is expanded.
6a can be slid along the straight line in which the bulges are formed, and as a result, the ball P8 (FIG. 14) can be slid.
4) can be adjusted (separation distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P 81 (operation handle 51
The firing intensity when the (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount can be easily adjusted.
Since the restriction groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be made unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, a rolling plate portion 730a formed in a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and extending obliquely upward to the left, And mounting plate portions 730b and 730c suspended from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a.
A plurality of (two in this embodiment) 0b and 730c are attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted through attachment holes 732 formed therein.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, so that sound, vibration, etc. caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and a ball P8 (FIG. 146 (b
))), The ball P8 is guided upward by contacting the front and rear two locations on the circumferential surface.

FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the ball sending state by the ball feeding device 720 in time series. Note that FIG. 144 (a) to FIG.
In (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a restricted state (a state where the supply of power to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guiding arm member 742 is descended by gravity). The restriction overhanging portion 745 is disposed at a position corresponding to the back-side open end of the ball passage opening 724, abuts against the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back-side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (power is supplied to the attracting force generation solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the restriction overhanging portion 745 is changed. Retreats above the sphere and the flow restriction of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows into the upper portion of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P <b> 8 is in contact with the front side wall of the base member 711, so that the further flow is restricted, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the restricted state again, the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. Is done. Thereby, the sphere P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the firing rail 730.

Note that the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), so that the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 is also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Is controlled. Accordingly, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The sphere P8 entering the sphere passage opening 724 is a sphere supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a sphere stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721. The cutting metal member 725 includes a through hole 725a through which a screw that is screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a falling plate portion 724a. The lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower blade portion 725b has a sharp cut at the tip, and the same plate as the base end side plate of the lower blade portion 725b Upper blade 72 extending from
5c.

The upper blade part 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side with respect to the lower blade part 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate part 724a. In addition, the lower side of the upper blade part 725c is inclined downward toward the base end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade part 725b is inclined upward as it goes toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in front view.

The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to the sphere. Next, referring to FIGS. 146 and 147, the sphere P
A description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the yarn 8 and entered.

FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG.
46 (a) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit 112a as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb, FIG. 147 (a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
12a is a partial front view of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. FIG. Note that FIG. 146 and FIG.
In FIG. 7, in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of some components of the ball launch unit 112a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the sphere P guided to the firing rail 730
8 stays in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). From this state, a current is applied to the firing solenoid 701, and the plunger 702 projects vigorously. The launching force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the yarn Y8 left at hand is moved and the yarn Y8 is pulled while the ball P8 is placed in the game area. An illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening by loosening is known.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the sphere P8 is configured to be cut using the momentum of the sphere P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is disposed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the yarn Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture toward the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the launch rail 730 passes under the falling plate portion 724a.
When the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the rolling ball P8, the middle portion of the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a, so the upper blade that the yarn Y8 protrudes above the falling plate portion 724a. It enters the lower side of the portion 725c and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

When the player holds the front end (the other end) of the yarn Y8, a load associated with the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8, so that the yarn Y8 is applied to the yarn Y8. A large tensile force is applied. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening can be prevented.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 will not be cut because sufficient tension is not applied to the yarn Y8. In this case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area, It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal motion device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The configuration is substantially the same.

An effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is disposed on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advancing / retreating operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advancing / retreating operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancing / retreating operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, And a petal motion device 800 is connected to one end of the petal motion device 800 and the other end of the design display device 81. Of the arm gear 9 is supported on the back plate 1100.
The drive side arm member 910 that rotates by the drive force of the drive motor 921 being transmitted through the drive unit 24, and the drive motor 92 that generates the drive force that drives the drive side arm member 910.
1 and a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 921 to the driving side arm member 910, and a sliding operation in the left-right direction in conjunction with the rotation of the driving side arm member 910. A thin plate-like slide plate 930, a thin plate-like second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operation device on the left and right sides of the drive side arm member 910. And a long plate-like driven arm member 950 that connects the 800 members.

Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 shows the petal operating device 80.
0 is a front view, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device 800 along the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operating device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and the overall shape is hidden in other members and does not appear in the figure. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-like portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position to the right of the upper end of the central body portion of the support base material 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 moves forward through a small gap formed in the support base material 801. The first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

There is an opening 8 at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central body portion of the support base 801.
01P is drilled, disposed on the right side of the opening 801P, and extends rearward into a pair of cylinders.
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and having a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a detection arc plate 88 of a loose fitting device 880 described later is provided.
A donut-shaped recessed portion 801D that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.
(See FIG. 152) is formed.

Central motor 804 of support substrate 801 (see FIG. 152) to which central motor 804 is fixed.
An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening a vertically long, roughly oval area in the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion that constitutes the upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion that constitutes the region below the upper portion.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that extends a little longer in the vertical direction as a whole, but the petal operation device 800 is disposed so as to be movable up and down as described later.
The operation space can be reduced when the support base 801 is formed in a shape that is long in the vertical direction, rather than in a shape that is long in the left and right.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively concentrically disposed so as to overlap the position of the opening 801P as will be described later, and the third gear 830G and the third gear 810, respectively.
Since it is linked and linked to G, it can be placed at any position as long as it is the outer periphery of each of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. It arrange | positions through the 2nd gear 830G and the 3rd gear 810G, respectively (refer FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, collecting the weight in the right half of the petal motion device 800 supported in a slightly tilted position toward the front side prevents the left half on the opposite side from drooping downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an interval between the support base 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801 from being opened. Thus, the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base material 801 is not shown for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, the petal 802 is made of a resin that is formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, constituting the flower of the hibiscus as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 is provided on the back side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape extending in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
4).

On the surface of the petal 802, irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed, and the periphery also has an irregular shape in front view. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape and have slightly different irregularities, but are roughly formed in the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is not particularly formed with a boundary between the inner region and the specific color (red) is darkened. Coloring is done.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802 </ b> S extending in a cylindrical shape rearward and having a screw hole inside at two locations, the vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side of each petal 802 and the central portion in the radial direction. Yes.

The petal 802 has a rear side portion 80 relative to the rear side portion 802a arranged on the rounded front end side (counterclockwise in front view, right side in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b arranged from 2a to the sharp edge side of the tip (clockwise in front view, left side of FIG. 157 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is disposed closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The front side portion 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the rear side portion 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802 are gathered at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175).
b can be made to be a positional relationship in which the front and rear are overlapped, so that the shape difference (size difference) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) becomes significant. be able to.

The five petals 802 have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 at the center as a whole (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 has the five petals 8 described above.
This is a long plate-shaped resin member which is fixed to 02 and separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and further has a shape in which an outer peripheral edge portion extends forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arrangement state (near the inner periphery)
A pair of screw-in portions 803 </ b> S extending in a cylindrical shape rearward and having screw holes therein are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (short direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be substantially surface positions on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a that are perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extend rearwardly from the rear side of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extend to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. Thus, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), on the rear side of each flat plate member 803, there are screw insertion holes inside at two locations corresponding to the screwing portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 on the front side.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portions 803H of the flat plate members 803 are respectively inserted into the screw insertion portions 8 of the corresponding petals 802.
02S is abutted from the front, and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802, respectively.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a front shape in which the same five shape portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the center portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in both the front and rear directions.

Returning to FIG. The rear peripheral wall 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front and rear, respectively, in two places adjacent to each other in five places that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and one in the middle of the three places excluding the two places. A positioning boss 81 is formed from the leading edge of the above-mentioned five places where the screw-in part 813S is not formed, and a screw-in part 813S having a screw hole inside is formed integrally.
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwing portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One purpose of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to linearly extend outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the central slit 81 with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811.
4 extends along a direction D12 that is inclined counterclockwise by an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in this pachinko machine 8010) in a front view.

Both side slits 815 are formed on both sides of the central slit 814 so as to extend in parallel with a slight gap.

In this way, a set of three slits of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 on both sides thereof is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). In addition, each edge part of the center slit 814 and the both-side slit 815 may be formed in the front view round shape (semicircle shape), and may be formed in the rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the both-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side among the four corners of the three slits are both-side slits. In the extending direction of 815, the shape is a little rectangular (a rectangular cut is formed). This rectangular extension part (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815. Is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

Thereby, the circular plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Accordingly, the central slit 814 and the side slits 81
It can suppress that the flat plate in which 5 is formed deform | transforms into the circumferential direction or an axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are provided.
Since each of the sets extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are made to face each other. Further, the slit member 81 is arranged more densely.
The outer shape of 0 is made compact.

In other words, tentatively, five sets of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are circular openings 811.
When it is arranged and formed so as to extend along the direction D12 inclined as described above, rather than the case where it is arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 Thus, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 can be laid out more closely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slide member 820 is disposed in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, the thickness of which is small at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip is formed in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front. Extending from the center of the slide member 820, a central portion bulging larger than the effect portion at a position between the extended portions, a screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extended portion, and the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 that protrudes from the center and is inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner protruding from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 has a posture in which the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 and the longitudinal direction intersect at right angles. And it arrange | positions so that it may extend over the both-side slits 815.

Meanwhile, the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 of the slit member 810 include
The screwing portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side. In the fully inserted state, the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, a screw with a washer (washer head screw) 824 is inserted into the screw insertion hole 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and is screwed into and fixed to the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803.

As a result, the slide member 820 interposes the slit member 810 therebetween, and the flat plate member 8.
03 fixed to the rear side. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the side slits 815 of the slit member 810. Inserted without gaps.

Accordingly, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is guided by the guide pin 8.
Therefore, the slide rib 803a is regulated so as to slide and move in a posture facing a certain outside direction without turning around the center.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. FIG.
FIG. 161A and FIG. 161B are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the fourth gear 880G is not shown. Note that FIG.
In the description of 0 and FIG. 161, FIG. 155 and FIG.

As described above, the rotary plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side in the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disc having a circular pivot support opening 831 at the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 that extends forward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 and is formed around the peripheral wall on the front surface side.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall is
Along with the surface direction of the rotating plate 830, the rotating plate 830 is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to have a shape extending so as to be closed like a long loop in a front view.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot support opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed to drop.

From the position where the guide rail 832 contacts the outside of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831,
It extends toward the front clockwise direction along a substantially intermediate direction between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and then arcs further toward the front clockwise direction than the intermediate direction. While curving, it extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the end on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the center end is formed so as to be continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion projects from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 to the front side.

Four other guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot support opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and the five guide rails 832 as a whole are equally spaced from each other. It extends so as to spiral from the periphery to the outside.

On the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the periphery of the pivot support opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on the outer periphery thereof is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is driven to rotate by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so as to externally fit the pivot opening 831 to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear end portions of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 in the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830. As a result, the pivot support opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotating plate 830 is pivoted smoothly and smoothly.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the second gear 830G is disposed behind the second gear 830G.
The third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 810b are provided at positions corresponding to the three screw-in portions 813S in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156) at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. Each positioning hole 810c is formed.

The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G that is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is disposed.
On the other hand, the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by being inserted into the positioning hole 810c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the screw insertion portion 813S (FIG. 1) through the screw insertion hole 810b.
56)) and is fixed.

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked and linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off and the rotating plate 830 Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotation device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 fastened and fixed to the support base 801 (see FIG. 154) and a loosely fitting device 880 that is loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotation device 850 and the loose-fitting device 880. FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loosely fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of a cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand in diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are a front screw portion 857 having screw holes inside at two positions on the left and right sides of the lumen portion 856, and the lumen portion 856 side from the front screw portion 857. A holding portion 858 that is drilled toward the back surface in a shape having a counterbore at a position shifted to the back, and two support protrusions 859 that extend in a columnar shape slightly forward are formed integrally with each other. . The front-side front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base portion of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner circumferential surface of the lumen portion 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing positions, and extends further to the rear than the rear side end of the shaft portion 852. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. In addition, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screwing portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is disposed on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
Is placed. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

The LED board 861 is formed with a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851.

The front side positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and the screw is passed through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861.
The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 by being screwed into the front screwing portion 857 of the 51.

The LED board 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 so that the screwed portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 can be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 162, the front side surface of the LED board 861 has a central location and a number of locations arranged on the concentric circles extending in multiples (double) around the one location at an equal interval. LE
D865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light forward.

In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861, lateral LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED substrate 861. It is supposed to be. Note that the lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. A connector connecting portion 867 is disposed and fixed rearward on the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861.

A central decorative member 868 is disposed on the front side of the LED substrate 861. Central decorative member 868
Is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-like base into a cylindrical shape on the back side, and forms a screw hole into which a screw can be screwed in the center. A pair of screwed portions 869 is provided.

The screwing portion 869 is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 across the D board 861.
The screw-in part 869 that has passed through is abutted from the front side, and a screw is screwed into the screw-in part 869 from the back side of the flange 855, whereby the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retaining member for the LED board 861.

The loose-fitting device 880 has a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter A main body cylindrical member 883 that is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and is loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to be rotatable relative to each other.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 883S extending in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear, and having a screw hole in the inside, at one of two locations out of four at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a is extended from the tip edge of the place where the screw-in part 883S is not formed among the four places described above.

The main body cylindrical member 8 is provided at four locations corresponding to the screw-in portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a.
83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is protruded in a rib shape in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a protruding length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a, and in the axial direction. Sliding rib 88 extending over
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED substrate 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) and the decorative member 884 are externally attached. A back cover 886 that is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with a bottom that rises to the front side of the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, and comes into contact with the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side to be fastened and fixed. Are disposed.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated on the front and back surfaces (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surface is mirror-like. Therefore, for example, a light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 disposed on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The decoration member 884 is a member that produces a light emission effect by irradiating light from the LEDs 865 and 866 disposed on the LED substrate 861. The decoration member 884 forms a hibiscus flower shape and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed from a resin material having a property, and a back side plate portion formed from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, forming a disk shape with a peripheral wall rising to the back side on the back side. And an opening 885 is formed in the central portion so that the central decorative member 868 can be inserted.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is disposed and fixed concentrically.
It is engaged with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the support base 801 and mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshed with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is connected to the intermediate gear 8
It rotates in the reverse direction to the third gear 810G via 08.

A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G.
On the periphery of 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two screw insertion portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a, respectively. Yes.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G that is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotation device 850, and is positioned relative to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the screw insertion portion 883S (FIG. 16) through the screw insertion hole 880b.
3) and is fixed by screwing.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and being slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that extends to the back side in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plate 880d has five identically-shaped plates arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The arcuate plate 880d for detection has a donut-shaped recessed portion 80 in the assembled state (see FIG. 154).
It is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C that is housed in 1D (see FIG. 152) and that is disposed so as to be able to detect a member that passes through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, the detection arcuate plate 88 no matter which posture the fourth gear 880G starts to rotate from.
It is possible to detect a rotation angle corresponding to an arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72 °) (minimum angle 7).
2 ° detection can be performed, and a rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 that protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is supported by the support base 801.
The rear screwing portion 853 that is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in FIG. 152 (not shown) and positioned so as to further protrude rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is formed on the screw insertion portion 801S of the support base 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting into the insertion hole and fixing with screws.

At this time, a wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led backward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward with respect to the support base member 801, and as shown in FIG. 154, the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 is fixed.
The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted on the slit member 810 and the front peripheral wall portion 8 is fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.
12 is attached so as to be fitted.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 has eight locations along the circumferential direction, and screwed portions 883S,
Since it bulges locally by the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b, it comes into linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, not in plane, thereby the slit member 810. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is pivotally supported smoothly and freely.

FIG. 164 shows the petal motion device 800, the driving side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. FIG. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advances and retreats) when a load in the vertical direction is applied from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS.
2 is referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened and fixed to the innermost deep part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13. A support column 1110 protruding in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side above the support column 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the left and right central positions Rail fixing portion 1130 disposed on the rail, and the rail fixing portion 1130
And a support long hole 1140 that is formed as a long hole that inclines downward as it approaches the rail fixing portion 1130 on the opposite side of the support column 1110.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that pivotally supports the drive side arm member 910 so as to be rotatable.
In the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front side end portion, a pair of left and right holes that are formed so that screws can be screwed in, and a pair of upper and lower sides on the same plane as the tip edge of the screwed portion 1111 on the front side And a positioning boss 1112 extending to the center.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-like main body member bent in a U shape when viewed from the back, and is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and is also a support column. A rotation shaft hole 911 that is pivotally supported by 1110, a connecting convex portion 912 that protrudes in a stepped columnar shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long body member, and a long A transmission elongated hole 913 that is formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the long body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the petal operation device 800 is supported at the other end of the long body member. And a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes a rotation of an arm gear 924 that includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that projects radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, the support column 1110 is rotated about the axis.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion that accommodates the gear of the transmission means 920, and is configured by three circular concave portions that are continuously provided while slightly intersecting. The gear accommodating portion 1120 is disposed on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. The first housing portion 1121 and the second housing portion 11 connected to the first housing portion 1121
22 and the third housing portion 112 in which the arm gear 924 that is disposed on the opposite side of the first housing portion 1121 with the second housing portion 1122 interposed therebetween and that is fitted to the driving side arm member 910 is housed.
3 is mainly provided.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked in front and back and supported so as to be slidable up and down. And a positioning boss 1132 that fits the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Arranged on the line.
The posture of the petal operating device 800 is maintained constant by the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R.

The support long hole 1140 is a long hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° in a front view. An extending wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by the support long hole 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

The supported convex portion 951 is loosely fitted with a cylindrical collar, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported on the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is the support elongated hole 114.
It is formed slightly smaller than 0 width.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940. is there.

The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) supported long holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the shape of a long hole extending left and right. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving side arm member 910 by a base end side long hole 932 drilled in the front-rear direction in the shape of a long hole extending in the up-down direction provided on the left end side, and provided on the right end side. Then, it is connected to the second effect member 940 through a front end side insertion hole 933 that is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base end side long hole 932 is extended vertically downward from a lower end of the stopping portion 932a, and a stopping portion 932a formed along a trajectory in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 at the upper end portion. The displacement part 932b is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a cylindrical portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape in front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in front view, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-like member fastened and fixed to the supporting pillar portion 1150 having a fastening plate portion 1001S which is disposed at a position corresponding to the supporting pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; and a slide plate 930 The supporting projections 1002S are provided in a cylindrical shape toward the back side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported long holes 931, and are formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner when viewed from the front. In addition, a shaft support hole 1003S for rotatably supporting the second effect member 940, a circular arc recess 1004S formed in a circular arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S are also provided. And the same center Ridge 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the arc shape
And mainly.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported long hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange from the tip thereof is the support convex portion 1002S.
And a supported long hole 931, and in this state, a screw for retaining the screw is inserted from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S to support the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner. The

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotation operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The protrusion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a convex height that can be abutted when displaced from the regular position or bent. Is done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion that is formed with a lower end portion that is divided into two forks and an upper end portion that is formed in a circle centered on the pivoted column portion 941. A supported column portion 941 that is provided in a cylindrical shape and is supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary projection that is disposed close to the supported column portion 941 and protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. Part 942;
Is mainly provided.

The supported column 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. An insertion portion 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). The shaft support hole 943 has the shaft support 941 sandwiching the collar.
When a disc-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is disposed at the tip in a state of being inserted into S, a screw is screwed into the threaded portion 941a, whereby the lid member 94 is inserted.
5 plays the role of retaining. Thereby, the 2nd production member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular and resin collar is fastened and fixed to the distal end, thereby preventing the auxiliary convex portion 942 from coming out of the slide plate 930. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal end side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. Thereby, even if the 2nd production member 940 seems to bend, the auxiliary | assistant convex part 942 contact | abuts to the circular arc recessed part 1004S, and it can suppress a bending deformation by producing resistance.

This will be described with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 includes three screwing portions 1161 configured to allow screws to be screwed when a plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921 is fastened.
A detection sensor 1162 that detects a flange portion 926 that projects outward from the arm gear 924 within a predetermined angle range, and a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates an urging force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 are rotatable. The shaft support 1163 to be supported, the cover support portion 1164 disposed in a triangular shape in front view so as to be able to support the substrate cover 1000C at the lower right of the support slot 1140, and the substrate cover 10 disposed in the vicinity of the cover support portion 1164.
A wiring stopper 1165 hidden in the front view at 00C and a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed are mainly provided.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is disposed in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 disposed at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken by long-term use,
Even if the portion that restricts counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 from the front is missing,
The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be restricted by the screwing portion 1006S.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100 that are stacked and fixed to each other and fastened to each other. 1000C, side substrate 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. Thereby, even when the heavy apparatus such as the petal operation apparatus 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910, vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S can be easily suppressed. Can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168 to FIG. 173, description will be given of the ascending / descending operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900. FIGS. 168, 170 and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900 and the back plate. FIG. 169 is a front view of FIG.
71 and 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

168 and 169 show a state in which the drive side arm member 910 is disposed on the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is disposed at the connecting position of the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal end side long hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the driving side arm member 910 is illustrated.
The state where is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in the state where the drive side arm member 910 is disposed at the end of the movement range, the transmission long hole 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is the inner fitting convex part 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151), and extends in the tangential direction of the circle around the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, the internal fitting convex portion 9
Since only 25 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 maintains a range in which the posture is maintained (a range in which the drive side arm member 910 rotates idly), the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 can be reduced.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates in advance of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, in the range of FIG. 172 and FIG. 173, the driving side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked so that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized. Can be made.

Here, as the second effect member 940 moves in a manner of projecting toward the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, it is as if the second effect member 940 is the petal motion device 8.
It can be visually recognized as operating following 00.

Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG.
FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (b).
Fig. 176 (c) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, Fig. 176 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and Fig. 176 (d) is a slit member. FIG. 810 is a front view of 810 and a rotating plate 830.

FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG.
FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (b).
Fig. 178 (c) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, Fig. 178 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and Fig. 178 (d) is a slit member. FIG. 810 is a front view of 810 and a rotating plate 830.

FIG. 179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG.
FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered and moved to the lowest position as shown in FIG. 172, the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIG. 174 and FIG.
The expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179 through the expanding position shown in FIG. 178, and the rotation operation (second operation) is further performed in the fully open position. It is configured to perform the operation (third operation) and to return to the initial position (collection position).

In the initial position (collection position), as shown in FIG.
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is the central slit 81 in the slit member 810.
4 is located at the inner end (end of the circular opening 811 side), and as a result, as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are gathered together most toward the central decorative member 868 at the center. It is in a concentrated state that constitutes a flowering hibiscus flower as a whole.

When the petal 802 is at the initial position (concentration position) as described above, the central motor 804 performs the first operation.
When the gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view as indicated by an arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) is interlocked with the gear 804G to rotate the rotating plate 83.
0 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in the rear view as indicated by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 through the pivot support opening 831 with a small frictional resistance, the rotation plate 830 can easily surround the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. On the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is interposed via the third gear 810G. Since braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the above-described rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque that is small enough to cause the rotating plate 830 to move initially.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially, the rotating plate 8 is first used.
Only 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view as indicated by the arrow A11 as shown in FIG.
Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 moves the slit member 81 as shown in FIG.
Since it is regulated by the zero central slit 814, the slide pin 823 moves along the central slit 814 linearly guided from the inner end to the outer side.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that a slight torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque, and accordingly While the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 is moved to the central slit 8 along with the rotation of the rotating plate 830.
14 linearly moves outward along the line 14.

Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation that radially expands outward from the gathering position. In this expanding operation, the slit member 8
As shown in FIG. 177, the ten central slits 814 extend along the direction D12 inclined by the angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. Although a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 becomes relatively high due to this inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin 830 is driven by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, if it is assumed that there is no inclination and the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow. Further, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. Any decrease is even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the center end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. 177. After this, it extends outwardly while curving in an arc shape in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front direction D15, and extends outwardly with five guide rails 832 so as to spiral outward as a whole. .

As the guide rail 832 is inclined in the clockwise direction in front view as described above, the slide pin 82 is moved.
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the guide rail 832
Is more curved in an arc from the direction D15 toward the front view in the clockwise direction, the slide pin 823
Both the decrease in load and the decrease in movement speed become more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-described central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by being inclined in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front and further curved in an arc.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, when a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while reducing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 at the expense.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little possibility of deviation. For this reason, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured.

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure the power transmission while the central slit 8
14, the role sharing is performed such that the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slide pin 823 is moved to the central slit 81.
4 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five petals 802 are radially expanded to the fully open position to be in the fully open state, and the expansion operation is completed.

In this fully opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 are moved so as to be radially dispersed, so that the positions are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. A petal 802 is disposed on the surface. Thereby, compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 are integrally viewed like a hibiscus flower that is slightly larger (see FIG. 178 (b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 and cannot move further beyond the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 is thereafter moved.
Is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, so that the rotating plate 830 cannot rotate further in the same direction as before by a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state after the expanding operation can be maintained.

When the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotating plate 830. When the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction in front view as indicated by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in the fully opened state as indicated by the arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if the rotation power is continuously applied to the rotating plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expansion operation, the expansion operation immediately continues so that the rotation operation is not interrupted. Can be migrated.

When the petal 802 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the fully open state as indicated by the arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) as indicated by an arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Accordingly, the decorative member 884 is compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped.
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position 84 becomes larger, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made higher than the actual rotational speed.

The above rotation operation is finished, and the first motor 804G is moved by the central motor 804,
When it is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, but only the rotating plate 830 is first shown in FIG. As shown by arrow A15 in b), it is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, whereby a converging operation in the direction opposite to the expanding operation is performed.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 to the inner end which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 are moved from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 at the center. As a result, they are gathered and returned to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to return to the gathering state, and the gathering operation is completed.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800. However, the central motor 804 is continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. Then, the first motor 804 is operated by the central motor 804 again.
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petal 802
However, as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b), it rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view in the concentrated state.

When the petal 802 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view in the concentrated state as indicated by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in the front view) as indicated by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate to. Accordingly, the decorative member 884 is compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped.
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position 84 becomes larger, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made higher than the actual rotational speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above from this gathering operation to the rotation operation,
It is possible to make a transition after stopping once, or to make a transition immediately so as to be continuous without any delay.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the passage formation unit 140 and the plate member 14d with walls closed on all sides. However, the passage formation in the ninth embodiment is described. The unit 9140 has a notch 9145 in the wall that forms the foul ball passage 9145.
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. A difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball launch unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in that the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the front The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage formation unit 9140 toward the back side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 having a thin plate shape in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent to the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2,
The depth of the recess is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper stopper convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back side, and the upward direction generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. Configured to withstand loads.

This thin blade portion 9153 allows the yarn Y8 to pass through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8 to illegally manipulate the ball inside the game area and to obtain illegal profits. This is arranged for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, possible frauds will be described.

Returning to FIG. As described above, the ball launch unit 112a of the eighth embodiment.
Is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the sphere by utilizing the launching moment of the ball. When the firing momentum is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. A ball could be fired without it.

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and is discharged to the lower plate 50 through the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball directly enters the game area.

On the other hand, for example, when considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, a sphere P fixed to one end of the yarn Y8.
8 is weakly launched, and in the state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the yarn Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the wire is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is disposed on the back side (the firing solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725. Even if punched out, the yarn Y8 is not cut into the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is struck out vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance is the foul ball passage 1
45, is discharged to the front side of the player, and stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who performs an illegal act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2) or the like can be repeated, and illegal profits can be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when an illegal act is performed using the yarn Y8 with the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, the thin blades are inserted into the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

That is, when a person who performs an illegal act pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 is rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153, so that the yarn Y8 is damaged, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, the notch 9145 exposing the thin blade portion 9153 as in the present embodiment.
b is formed closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the yarn Y8 is approached when the yarn Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the yarn Y8 is placed inside the notch 9145b when the yarn Y8 is pulled. The yarn Y8 can be rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin blade portion 9153 abuts on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance to an upward load. Thereby, when the yarn Y8 is pulled, the thin blade portion 9153 is prevented from warping or bending when the thin blade portion 9153 is given a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145. be able to. Therefore, the thin plate blade 915 from the yarn Y8
Most of the load applied to 3 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin blade portion 9153. Thereby, since it can prevent that the thin blade part 9153 collides with the ball | bowl P8 and it breaks, it can improve the durability of the thin blade part 9153.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is disposed below the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who performs the cheating is afraid to detect the cheating, the ball P
After gripping 8, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example,
It is easy to perform illegal acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8 while keeping it in a pants pocket. In this case, the state in which the yarn Y8 extends to the player side through the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) is maintained. At this time, the yarn Y8 is stretched through a position about the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the lower plate 5 is moved from the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142.
When the ball discharged to 0 collides with the lower plate 50 and jumps around, the lower plate 50 (FIG. 1) while stepping on the yarn Y8 disposed on the front side of the ball guide opening 53 or hitting the yarn Y8. ) To the right and then flow down through the bottom opening located behind the ball removal lever 52. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the rising limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower dish Passage 9
It is possible to increase the possibility that the ball discharged from 142 to the lower tray 50 contacts the yarn Y8 and damage the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

Third, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a that is inclined downward toward the right is formed. The right inclined surface 9142a can easily give a rightward speed to the sphere discharged from the sphere guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142.

Thereby, before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 is reduced, the yarn Y8
You can point the ball toward That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give a velocity component in the right direction (facing the foul ball passage portion 9145) to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower plate 50. It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 is the ball guide opening 5.
3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is the remaining area (right and left of the ball guide opening 53 on the right side of the ball guide opening 53). Occupying a region of about 1/3 of the width dimension), the boarding restriction step 9053a is formed at the boundary.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142, and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. It connects with the left end part (left end side) of the lower bottom part near the exit of the bulb | ball channel | path part 9145, and it is comprised as a plane part extended in a perpendicular direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed above the riding restriction step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the front door side lower dish passage portion 91 is formed by the space V9.
42 and the foul ball passage portion 9145 communicate with each other. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 before flowing through the sphere guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the sphere can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

In addition, the vertical width of the climbing restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and contacts the climbing restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the climbing restriction step 9053a allows the passage of the sphere in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (the direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (the direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the passage formation unit 140 and the plate member 14d with walls closed on all sides. However, the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

FIG. 184 to FIG. 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. In FIG. 184, a state where the passage formation unit 10140 is viewed from the upper right is illustrated, and in FIG. 185, a state where the passage formation unit 10140 is viewed from the upper left is illustrated, and in FIG. 186, the passage formation unit 10140 is illustrated at the left. A state viewed from obliquely below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 has a notch 10 that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion on the upper side of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c. And the sheet-metal member 10150 is provided with the thin plate-shaped thin-plate blade parts 10153 and 10154 extended to the front side in the aspect which covers the downward direction of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the end portion of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recess direction, and the recess depth is approximately the same as twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180). The In addition, the notch 10145c includes a through hole formed in the front and rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape in a front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary convex part 1 projecting from the back side to the back side
4d2. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not illustrated in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)), and thereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is spherical. The radius Ra is about P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 101
Since the ball flowing down 45 can be prevented from colliding with the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 from being cracked or chipped by colliding with the ball P8. It is possible to improve the durability of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154.

The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex part 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving part 146 (to the right). Accordingly, the width (front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 in the notch 10145c is the passage portion 14.
The closer to 5a, the wider. As a result, the yarn Y8 disposed in the passage portion 145a is turned into the thin blade portion 1
It becomes easy to enter the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 which is a gap where 0153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is the first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a portion constituting a forked blade portion, the first thin plate blade portion 10153
Is extended to the left in a manner that slightly tilts upward from the right end of the front side edge. As a result, an acute concave portion 1015 having a deep concave portion between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.
5 is formed.

The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members disposed for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute angle recess 10155 is disposed on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the yarn Y8 enters the acute angle recess 10155, and the yarn Y8
Can be easily damaged.

The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the yarn Y8 pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who performs an illegal act. Can easily enter the deep portion of the acute-angle recess 10155.

The plate-like portion provided to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
Is configured to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged facing the left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 is bent in the left and right reverse direction. The That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

For example, a person who commits cheating tries to avoid the detection of cheating by releasing the ball P8 that has come out, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage 10145 and is discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right reverse direction is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation where the backflowing sphere P8 is caught by the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stopped.

As a result, the ball P8 and the yarn Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the yarn Y
Increasing the time that 8 is exposed to the game area can accelerate the detection of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (such as glue or tri-mochi) may be disposed in the deep portion of the acute angle recess 10155 so as to adhere to the yarn Y8 that has entered the acute angle recess 10155. In this case, even when the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that came to the person who performs the fraud is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member disposed in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is played in the game area. Since the thread Y8 is not discharged and is maintained on the spot, the unauthorized detection using the thread Y8 can be accelerated.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) whose launch intensity is weak and has not reached the game area is discharged to the lower dish 50. However, the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment uses a foul ball. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have an arc shape similar to that of the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A tip member 206 is formed and placed proximate to the ball launch unit 112a.
2a and a guide member 2062b formed between the front end member 2062a and the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship in which the sphere has a gap V11 having a flowable width.

A foul ball passage 2062c communicated with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. Foul ball passage 2
062c is formed with a width that is slightly larger than the width through which one sphere can pass through, and a spare of the return sphere preventing member 68 is disposed above the sphere.

In the present embodiment, the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. Formation is omitted. That is, a ball paid out from a payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 is supplied to the upper plate 17 exclusively via the main body side upper plate passage portion 161. When the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) that is arranged to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device The payout of the ball from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball that has passed through the foul ball path 2062c is also transferred to the payout device 133 (
A ball paid out from FIG. 87 is also supplied to the upper plate 17. For this reason, as described above, a ball is bonded to both ends of the yarn Y8, and one yarn is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c to thereby provide the yarn Y8.
When thinking about fraudulent behavior that causes the player to enter the game area through the foul ball passage 2062c,
The action of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the paying ball against the yarn Y8 can occur regardless of the accumulation of the balls of the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut early.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed at the upper part of the foul ball path 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilted gate member 68a is disposed on the near side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back side to the front side of the guide member 2062b and has a screw groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed into the inner wall. A blocking plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the front end of the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is positioned in front of the blocking plate 2062b4.
In the state where b1 is in contact, the long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole previously drilled as an attachment hole in the base member 68b1 and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position of the through hole. Is inserted into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 and the return ball preventing member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed such that the upper surface and the left surface that are in contact with the guide member 2062b have the same shape as the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is recessed to the extent that the guide member 20
It is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d is a gradient that descends toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the gradient increasing unit 206
A straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface 2d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the sphere is It intersects with the tip member 2062a at about 1/3 lower side.

With this configuration, when a ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is retracted from the path of the sphere, and it is possible to avoid the collision between the lower end portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d and the sphere. On the other hand, when the ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball that rolls on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball moves the gap V11 to the left and right. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is between the closing plate 2062b4,
An incision 206 having a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (in this embodiment, about 2 mm).
Recessed to the back side to a position where 2b1 can be formed. The place where the cut 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side when viewed from the front side is closer to the front side than the side surface 2062d1,
A semicircular cutout 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

Thus, since the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in the front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cuts 2062b1 are formed, similarly to the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment, It is possible to cause the yarn Y8 to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of an illegal act performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends of the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the notches 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notches 2062b1 when subjected to a load pulled at both ends (FIG. 190 (
a)). In this state, the yarn Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that rubbing occurs with the long screw B11 and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

In the present embodiment, the cut 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cut 2062b1 from being disposed at a position where the ball to be fired contacts the outer rail 2062 (the vertical lower part of the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the ball to be fired. It is possible to prevent the direction of the sphere from being affected.

In addition, a person who performs an illegal act through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 that protrudes to the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 18), the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted, so that the yarn Y8 approaches the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 close to the player side. Therefore, by arranging the cuts 2062c closer to the front side, the yarn Y8 can easily enter the cuts 2062c than when the cuts 2062c are arranged closer to the rear side.

In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button type switch SW11 having a detection portion protruding downward is disposed. The button type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a.
N-OFF can be switched.

190 (a) and 190 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190A, the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68 is shown.
A state in which the weight portion 68a2 side is inclined to the foul ball passage 2062c side with a weight of 2 is shown in FIG. 190 (b), the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the gate member 68a
A state in which the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the opening / closing portion 681 tilts toward the foul ball path 2062c is shown. Also,
In FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown as a reference and the button type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch SW11 is turned on. It is shown that it is OFF.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing sphere, and gives a resistance enough to hold the sphere passing through the foul sphere passage 2062c. Not. This is because the sphere flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul sphere passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening / closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state returns to the state shown in 190 (a), the foul ball passage 20 is next.
This is because the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) can be restored by the time when the ball is guided to 62c (at the shortest, 0.6 seconds later).

On the other hand, the return ball preventing member 68 is a great resistance against an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that travels while filling a passage like an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball through the foul ball passage 2062c to reach the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) to be planted on the game board 13, holding a ball and placing it in a winning opening, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emitting a laser from the leading end It is possible to cheat (cut the nail).

FIG. 191 is a partially enlarged front view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outline of an apparatus such as an endoscope that illegally enters is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the sphere, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is moved forward. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is rejected by the distal end portion of the endoscope) is shifted to the state shown in FIG. 190A, the state is connected to the distal end portion of the endoscope. The insertion part (long flexible part) is arranged below the weight part 68a2 and the weight part 68a.
2 will be maintained in the pushed-up state. Therefore, it is difficult to eliminate the opening / closing portion 68a1, and the distal end portion of the endoscope can be prevented from proceeding further.

Here, when the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the interior, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1 is maintained.
By performing control so that an alarm is sounded when 1 is maintained for a predetermined time in an OFF state, an illegal act can be detected at an early stage.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in an OFF state, control may be performed so that the ball payout from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button type switch SW11 is immediately turned off.
Since it is set to N (see FIG. 190 (a)), the period during which the dispensing of the ball from the dispensing device 133 stops can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.
On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state where the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

Note that the member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is not necessarily the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in the present embodiment, the return ball preventing member 68
When the return ball prevention member 68 on the side disposed on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, the replacement can be performed at an early stage. Thereby, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, the effect of being able to play a role of preventing fraud before the replacement and the trouble of searching for the storage location can be saved. The effect that can be produced. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Whether the return ball prevention member 68 breaks or bends and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraud prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of breakage of the return ball prevention member 68. The fraudulent party knows if the exchange was done, and
Even if it is exchanged, the deterrence of fraud can still be maintained by not knowing the degree of damage.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully open position has been described. However, the petal operating device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can perform the rotating operation even at the expanding position. It is comprised by the aspect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose-fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. Fig. 192
As shown in FIG. 4, the back cover 2886 of the loose-fitting device 2880 is a flange portion 2 that extends radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment.
887 and a restricting portion 2888 that protrudes from the extending front end of the flange portion 2887 to the back side. The loose-fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is the loose-fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
In comparison with 80, there is only a difference in the back cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 can protrude from the front side portion 802b to a position where it can not come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In the present embodiment, a case where a single flange portion 2887 and a single restricting portion 2888 are arranged will be described. However, they may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, operations of the flange portion 2887 and the restriction portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal motion device 2800. FIG.
4A and 194B are partial enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the operation example of the petal operation device 2800 is illustrated in time series, and FIG. 193 (a), FIG. 194 (a), FIG. 193 (b), and FIG.
) Shows the state of each simultaneous point.

In FIG. 194 (a) and FIG. 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section for convenience, and a pair of screwed portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803 in the same cross section.
S is viewed in cross-section. Moreover, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is outlined (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwed portions 2803S arranged inside the both-side slits 815 are formed on the surfaces facing each other on the other side screwed portions with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. An inclined surface 2803T that is inclined in a manner away from 2803S is provided.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
Inclined. The effect | action which the control part 2888 gives to the petal 802 is demonstrated.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is disposed outward in the radial direction along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the restricting portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 abut, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

When the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in a normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a) (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815). From FIG. 194 (b), the central slit 814
In addition, it is possible to change the posture to the inclined posture inclined with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. Petal 8
In 02, a posture change occurs as much as possible.

As described above, when the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 change their postures,
While the load from 88 is received, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the sliding member 2820 has only a small sliding rib 803a in contact with the both-side slits 815, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed,
The slide member 2820 can move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a as the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 280 as the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides.
Since 3T is contact | abutted (pressed), respectively, frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in the frictional resistance becomes significant. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both directions in the short direction of the both-side slit 815, an increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. .

Accordingly, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820 is provided.
, 815 with respect to movement in the longitudinal direction, the sliding resistance 28 increases.
20 does not wait for the end of the slits 814 and 815 to reach the slide pin 823.
The torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and the inclined posture) The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a size between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by shaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, from the state shown in FIG.
Start rotating counterclockwise in front view. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 is separated from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal motion device 2800. In FIG. 195, FIG.
A state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at a position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is the oil damper 805 (
Therefore, the petal 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the expanded position.

196 (a), 196 (b), and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. FIG. 196 (a), 196 (b), and 197 illustrate the movement of the petal 802 from the expanding position to the concentration position in time series.

In FIG. 196 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the restricting portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196 (b),
The restriction portion 2888 advances the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to the normal posture.

Further, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 from the slide pin 823. The rotational movement of 802 is stopped, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the petal 802 can be automatically rotated at the position where the petal 802 is being expanded and then returned to the concentration position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is expanded at a position where it abuts on the restriction portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). Therefore, the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petal 802 can be moved to the fully open position and can be rotated at the fully open position.

In addition, the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 is such that the petal 802 does not contact the petal 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position, or even if it contacts the petal 802 that rotates at the fully open position.
It is possible to prevent the restricting portion 2888 from obstructing the rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position by setting the position where the restricting portion 2888 can pass through by a slight change in posture and can receive the load. it can.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, the petal 802
Can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to a star-shaped pattern or a distant position, and the petal 802 expands to the maximum and rotates by the difference in perspective. It is possible to make a difference between performing the rotation operation and performing the rotation operation halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect with different jackpot expectations depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petal 802. The pattern of the mold can function as a production part. Thereby, the restriction part 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be disposed at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

It may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the big hit expectation) that the petal 802 is in contact with the restriction portion 2888 and slightly changes its posture in the fully open position. In this case, depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or rotating while causing a slight change in posture in contact with the restricting portion 2888, the meaning content transmitted to the player can be changed. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 contacts the restriction portion 2888 was the tip position.
If the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion when the posture of the petals 802 changes is changed. Therefore, even when the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the posture of the petal 802 is changed can be changed in a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199.
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanding position has been described. However, the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates along with the rotary plate 830 and a case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 show an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 in the time series when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a). Also,
198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the rotating plate 83 is used.
The placement and shape of the zero guide rail 832 is illustrated in phantom lines.

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate together with the resistance exceeding the resistance, the description is omitted here.

In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, for convenience, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, since the slide pin 823 is inserted into the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). In the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815 are provided on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this manner.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is formed on the wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814.
Of the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the central slit portion 815 disposed on the front side clockwise direction of the central slit 814, and the front side clockwise side The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in a manner that widens the width in the short direction of the both side slits 815 in the wall portion of the wall, and the radial direction of the both side slits 815 that are disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front The slits 81 on both sides of the wall portion extending in the clockwise direction in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.
5 is mainly provided with a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in a manner that widens the width in the short direction.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the clockwise concave portion 3815a is a flat plate member 280.
And 3 slide ribs 803a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is a slide member 2820.
The rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the guide pin 822 (FIG. 19).
8 (a) lower side).

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is formed by the flat plate member 28.
The rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of 03 (
198 (a) lower side) is formed continuously.

The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b has a concave depth deeper than that of the clockwise concave portion 3815a and a radial length longer than that of the central concave portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in front view will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG.
Starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (the direction in which the slide rib 803a at the right end enters the recessed portion 3815a in the clockwise direction) (FIG. 198 (b)).

Accordingly, the contact between the wall portion of the both-side slit 815 on the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). Rotating counterclockwise as viewed from the front, with the first abutting portion between 3810 and 3810 as a fulcrum (FIGS. 199 (a) and 199 (b)
)reference).

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 28 described above are used.
During the rotation of 03, the contact between the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a, and the screw-in portion 280
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a concave depth so that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not contact the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A rotation-side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . Thereby, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching the posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal, When the slide rib 803a on the center side in the radial direction accommodated in the both-side slits 815 on the clockwise side contacts the wall portion of the both-side slit 815, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the concave portion 3815a in the clockwise direction.
However, it moves from the concave base end of the clockwise concave portion 3815a to the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194).
Therefore, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the radial center by continuously rotating the rotating plate 830 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830. The rotation plate 830 can be independently rotated to switch the case where the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

Thereby, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform operations that could not be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 194 (b) )), Until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 280
3 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (rotational motion rotating around the slit member 3810) is present (FIGS. 195 and 196).
(See (a) and FIG. 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 198 ( a)), the posture of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 199 (b)).
. That is, the rotating operation (rotating operation that rotates along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is returned. Can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 198 (a)), rotating plate 830 in an arbitrary state (phase or posture)
The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are assembled from the positions of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 that is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) by rotating clockwise from the front. The movement can be started toward the position.
Accordingly, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (FIG. 1).
93 (a)) is rotating (see FIG. 198) during the expansion (see FIG. 195), and then the petals 802 are arranged in various ways toward the collection position (see FIG. 197). Therefore, the operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without an opening has been described. However, the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment is the lower frame member 8320.
A plurality of through-holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202 (a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) illustrates the tilting device 310 as the first state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment is a lower frame member 8 in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 is not described, and the other configurations are almost already described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the rest of the configuration will be described with some supplementary explanation.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion that is disposed to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is drilled in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. In the left and right sides of the first through-hole 8326a and the vibration device 5400, the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined with a horizontally-long rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310. A pair of second through-holes 8326b that are drilled along the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third holes that are drilled in a cross-sectional shape of a vertically long rectangle in front view at the left and right corners. And a through hole 8326c.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has a purpose of facilitating passage of the liquid such as the above-described drinking water and a purpose of facilitating removal of coin-like foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. Is a through-hole. The coin-shaped foreign object is, for example, for a player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is an obstacle to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless by an interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
It may be inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 between zero.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, a slight gap V13, V14 is formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, while the gap V13.
, V14 is more likely to be inserted.

In particular, in this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear side end portion of the ring member BR1 (
14 (b)) is configured to rotate about the axis, that is, the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end, so the longer the longitudinal direction of the tilting device 310, It is configured to easily shift (deform) from side to side in the vicinity of the front side end. In addition, this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misregistration using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, or misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Deformation) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310.
However, even when the design is such that the gap V13 is not large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1-yen coin), the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right (for example, the left). The gap V13 formed on the other side (for example, on the right side) is the tilting device 310 during normal use.
A gap V1 having a size obtained by adding up a gap V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the frame.
3, the size can be such that a coin-like foreign object can be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 during normal use and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-like foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right, a coin-like foreign object can be inserted.

Further, the front-to-rear gap V14 between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 also uses the backlash in the vicinity of the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310.
By applying a load toward the back side to 10 and shifting the position (deformation), the gap V14 can be easily expanded, so that a coin-like foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14.

In the present embodiment, either the left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330.
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts in a state where a coin-like foreign matter is inserted in the front-rear direction gap V14, the coin-like foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and 202 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted in the left and right sides toward the center in the vertical direction, it is easy to fit the fingers of the player. While a good operational feeling can be created, a portion in which the coin-like foreign matter fitted into the gap V13 projects outward from the constriction of the case body 311 in the second state (see FIG. 202 (a)). A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, and it becomes easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated in a state where coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem occurs in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-like foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be performed by the operation device 8300, so the gap V13,
When it is detected that a coin-like foreign matter has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately. However, in the state where the through-hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, the operation device 300 is used to remove the coin-like foreign matter. It was necessary to disassemble.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-like foreign matters through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

FIG. 203 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG.
3 (a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
03 (c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203 (d) is a diagram of FIG. 203 (a).
) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along line CCIIId-CCIIId,
FIG. 203 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203 (a).

The first through-hole 8326a has a horizontal center that is the same as the horizontal center of the vibration device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width that is greater than the horizontal width of the vibration device 5400 (refer to the first housing portion 5431 of FIG. 58). The Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the center of the left and right of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through-hole 8326a is extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
It is arranged below the upper surface of the reference). For this reason, when a coin-like foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (left and right as viewed in the vertical direction in the second state) The tilting device 3 is formed by being curved toward
Inclination D81 that inclines downward toward the left and right center in the first state of 10 and the tilting device 310
, The coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through-hole 8326a along the slope D82 inclined downward toward the front side (see FIG. 201).

Accordingly, the size required for the size of the first through hole 8326a can be suppressed to the minimum necessary while easily removing the coin-like foreign matter, so that the design freedom of the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured as compared to the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is the tilting device 310 in the first state.
The portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) is set to be larger than the size of the object assumed as a coin-like foreign object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a left-right width and a vertical width of about 30 [m.
m].

Note that the first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell 313a is an LED device 341f.
This is a portion that transmits light emitted from (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, the spherical shell 31
Except for 3a, the plate portion of the lens member 313 connected to the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 is mirror-finished in this embodiment (the member subjected to mirror-finishing is fixed) The light that has passed through the spherical shell 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state using the first through-hole 8326a, there is a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visible to the player. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the amount of light by the first through-hole 8326a, the central portion in the left-right direction can be viewed brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is disposed at a position that partially closes the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than the case where there is no foreign matter (coin-like foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the coin-like foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 using the light amount or the shadow of the coin-like foreign matter as a clue, so the coin-like foreign matter is not noticed. Member 832
The possibility of remaining at 0 can be reduced. This effect is obtained by the first through hole 832.
The same is true not only when viewed through 6a, but also when viewed through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b allows the coin-shaped foreign matter that falls on the bottom plate portion 321 to fall on the bottom plate portion 32.
It is comprised as a through-hole which can discharge | emit in the direction along 1 surface. Therefore, in this embodiment, the right and left width of the second through-hole 8326 is about 30 [mm] and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that can discharge the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 500-yen coin). The width in the normal direction is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through-hole 8326b is disposed near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-like foreign object has fallen downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321. Coin-like foreign matter can be removed.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water that flows along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibration device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be used to discharge outwardly before.

The third through-hole 8326c has a central axis disposed along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20).
3 (a)), coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 is formed as a through-hole that can be removed in an upright state (posture).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be formed so as to be able to discharge coin-like foreign matter as viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. In the present embodiment, The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

When removing the coin-like foreign matter, the cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830 is removed.
Only by exposing 0 in front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can pass through holes 8326a to 8326c.
Can be accessed. The covering cover 370 is provided with the fastening portion 3 of the main body bending portion 371.
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with screws inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed with screws inserted vertically. Therefore, the cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the work time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to easily remove the coin-like foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that is opened to the right outward at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)).
. Including the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit and receive signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-like foreign matter cannot be taken out, it is easy to operate by removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353 after removing the screws that fasten the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14. Therefore, if the replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-like foreign object is sandwiched can be quickly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

Thereby, even if the operation | movement of the pachinko machine 10 stops because normal operation | movement is not performed and the operation | movement of the pachinko machine 10 stops because a coin-like foreign material enters into the operation device 8300, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted quickly.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the case where the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, the board support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is disposed so as to be able to contact the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged in such a manner that it receives a load from the front frame 14 via the front / rear displacement member 2652. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment along the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. Note that FIG.
In FIG. 204 (a), the front frame 14 is shown open to the inner frame 12 (the front frame 14 is not shown), and in FIG. 204 (b), the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. The state is illustrated. In FIG. 204A, the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204B, the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is disposed so that the front side of a plate portion (plate portion disposed on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be displaced vertically. The vertical displacement member 2651
A front-rear displacement member 2652 that is disposed so as to be able to contact the lower end of the rear end and is supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the front-rear displacement member 26
52 is a portion that is sandwiched from above and below so that it can be displaced at two locations in the front and back, and is in contact with a support portion 2654 fixed to the plate portion 611a, and the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653, to the front and rear displacement member 2652 to the front side. An urging member 2655 such as a coil spring for applying an urging force directed thereto;
Is provided.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), it contacts the torsion spring NBb. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is slightly spaced from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. Is set.

The front / rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)) and pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward. And a rear position (see FIG. 204B).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a which is inclined downward toward the distal end side is formed at the rear distal end portion of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from the vertical downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position.
52 is an inclined surface that is continuously connected to a vertically lower position of the up-and-down displacement member 2651 in a state where 52 is disposed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is provided at a position in front of the front / rear displacement member 2652 so as to move up and down.
Is set at the lower position, and the tilt angle and the forming range are set so that the vertical displacement member 2651 is at the upper position at the rear position of the front / rear displacement member 2652.

With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 from the back side by the claw member 640 after rotation can be increased, and the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate part 621d before the claw member 620 before rotation can be easily maintained. The distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses and fixes the game board 13 to the drooping back plate part 621d.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, and therefore, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient is employed for the torsion spring NBb than the spring employed in the eighth embodiment. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, and is necessary when the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600. Can reduce the force to become, so the operator's freedom of choice, and
Workability can be improved.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
In response to injustice in which the reverse cup portion 178 is melted with a heated piano wire and enters the inside as it is, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are wound above the reverse cup portion 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3
In the fifteenth embodiment, the fraud detection device 2280 detects that the burnout is detected by the heated piano wire, but the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment is melted by the heated piano wire. In addition, the heat is detected and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are prevented from being burned out.

FIG. 205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment.
FIGS. 205B and 205C are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. Note that FIG.
FIG. 20B shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape.
In FIG. 5 (c), the state of returning to the tensile shape (the memorized shape) by applying heat is shown. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is connected to the main body box 2
A cross-sectional view is taken at a front and rear intermediate position 281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape in which the back side and the bottom side are open, and the reverse cup unit 2
A main body box portion 2281 overlaid on top of 178, and a back cover member 2282 attached from the back side so as to cover the rear side opening of the main body box portion 2281.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2282.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, and has a reverse cup portion 217.
An extension portion 2283 that contacts the left surface of the eight wall portion 2178a, a narrow portion 2284 that extends from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner portion, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrow portion 2284 A projecting portion 2285 that protrudes upward from the rear, and a concave portion that is recessed from the back side on the left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281, with one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 and the other end of the main body box A first conducting portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281, and a main body box portion 228.
1 is housed in a recess recessed from the back side on the right side wall, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and has a first conduction. A second conducting portion 2287 formed with a length capable of contacting the upper surface of the portion 2286, and a torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conducting portion 2287 against the first conducting portion 2286;
A shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 and is supported by the projecting portion 2285 and disposed below the second conducting portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are connected to a portion projecting outside the main body box portion 2281 by one end of separate wirings by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main controller. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conduction part 2286 and the second conduction part 2287 is released from the state where the first conduction part 2286 and the second conduction part 2287 are brought into contact with each other (see FIG. 205B) (FIG. 205 ( c)), the conduction is cut off,
It is controlled so that an error signal is output with the disconnection of the continuity as an input.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, a warning is output at a loud volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Thus, it is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game.

Details of fraud detector 2280 will be described. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left and upper sides of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the reverse cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, compared with the eighth embodiment, the place where the wall portion 2178a is formed is shifted to the left, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the reverse cup portion 2178. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extension portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains on the long cover 173 as it is. It is possible to prevent penetration.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 disposed in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. Guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and maintains the shape after deformation in a low temperature state, and has a characteristic of returning to a previously memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (about 80 °) about the melting point of the reverse cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conduction portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion. The connection with 2287 is released and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted through a guide long hole 2282a formed in the longitudinal direction of the back cover member 2282 in the front-rear direction, and on the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state, the operator pushes the extending portion 2288a downward to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the shape memory (see FIG. 205B). ) Again. That is, even after a fraud is detected, it can be used repeatedly for early detection of the fraud.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Even though the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved to form a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted on both sides has been described. The right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes concave portions having different shapes for each region. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave shape that is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C schematically shows a downward concave portion 2543c provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically, and FIG. 206 (d) is a guide schematically showing a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206E is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, and FIG. 206E is an upward concave portion 254 that is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206A. The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206A, the support plate 510 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in line with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

The concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described in the eighth embodiment. In this embodiment, the concave portions 254 are provided for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of 3 can be changed.

That is, with reference to the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530, a region CCVIb disposed above and on the inner lens member 530 side and a region CCVI disposed above and on the outer lens member 550 side.
The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between c, a region CCVId disposed below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVIe disposed below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the region CCVIb. The upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is in a posture in which a plane is arranged on the lower side and the front side (opposite side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
The light incident on is not easily reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIb and is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction that is inclined upward as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the region CCVIc. The downward concave portion 2543c is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c has a posture in which a plane is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on is not easily reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the downward concave part 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the region CCVId. The downward concave portion 2543d is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has a posture in which a plane is arranged on the upper side and the front side (opposite side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side, The convex part used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on is not easily reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the downward concave part 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550, and the emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), an upward concave portion 2543e is formed in the region CCVIe. The upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing the sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is in a posture in which a plane is arranged on the upper side and the front side (opposite side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on is not easily reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e exclusively refracts light at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIe and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a direction that is inclined upward as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, from this portion, the inner lens member 5
The light emitted to 30 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels substantially in the horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction of collecting light, and the light travels toward the outer lens member 550. Can be made. That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in a flat plate shape, it is possible to give a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted from both surfaces thereof, so that the right panel unit 250
The production effect of the light emission effect can be improved while suppressing the left and right width of 0.

Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the bottom surface of the lower dish unit 15 is formed flat has been described. However, in the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower dish unit 6400. Thus, the transportability of the front frame 10014 provided with the lower dish unit 6400 is improved. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment.
These are front perspective views of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the front side of the page is the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is the rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 shown in FIG. 207, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR,
F-B indicates the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operation device 1030 in which the swinging device member 10310 is arranged in the upward position in FIG.
0, a lower pan unit 6400 that is arranged below the operation device 10300 and covers the lower side of the front frame 10014, a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right parts of the front frame 10014, and mainly performs a light emission effect, An upper effect device 6500 that covers an upper part of the frame 10014 and mainly performs a light emission effect and a sound effect is mainly provided.

In addition, the glass unit 16 mentioned above is arrange | positioned in the area | region enclosed by the horizontal production | presentation apparatus 6700 and the top production | presentation apparatus 6500, and the above-mentioned each game area where a game ball flows down is comprised on the back side of the glass unit 16. This is the same as the embodiment. In FIG. 207, the illustration of the state of the back side of the glass unit 16 is omitted in FIG. 207, and the illustration of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is shown in FIG. Omitted, the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) is visible from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is disposed.

FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In FIG. 209, a direction view along the longitudinal direction of the lever member of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) (a radial view of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operation device 10300) is illustrated. The

The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 that are formed in a thin plate shape and are flexible enough to be deformable. As shown in FIG. 209, the housing recess 17a is formed as a substantially left-right symmetrical recess in which the degree of depression toward the back side increases toward the left-right center, and the left-right center of the housing recess 17a and the operation device The left and right centers of 10300 are arranged so as to coincide with each other.

The rear side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves to the back side as it approaches the left and right center. In other words, the fitting position moves to the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014a) side of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the left-right center.

Therefore, by shortening the front-rear position from the metal main body portion 10014a to the fitting position at the left and right center position where the amount of load transmission during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be large,
It is possible to suppress the displacement of the operation device 10300 in the vertical direction (load direction) by suppressing the vertical displacement of the fitting position.

On the other hand, the left and right positions where the amount of load transmission during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be small (
In the position left and right from the center), even if the front and rear positions from the metal main body portion 10014a to the fitting position are lengthened, there is no hindrance to the effect of suppressing the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300,
Further, by arranging the fitting position in this way, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal main body 10014a, so that a wide arrangement area for the upper plate 17 and the frame button 22 is secured. can do.

FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In FIG. 210, the outer frame 1
1, a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened to the front side around the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 is illustrated.

The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion that is pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. By removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 1
0014 can be separated from the inner frame 12. Since the newly described configuration is disposed in the front frame 10014, the following description will be given focusing on the front frame 10014.

FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is a front frame 1001.
4 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 211 and 212 show a state where the lower pan unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are detached from the front frame 10014.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal main body portion 10014a configured integrally with the front door mounting bracket 58. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 include the metal main body portion 10014a. Fastened and fixed to. That is, the lower plate unit 6400
In addition, the operation device 10300 is also configured with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens to the metal main body portion 10014a side (back side), and penetrates the metal main body portion 10014a at a position corresponding to the fastening portion. A hole is drilled. A lower plate unit 6400 is formed by inserting a fastening member (male screw) from the back side of the metal main body 10014a into the through hole, screwing it into the fastening portion, and tightening.
Or, the operation device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operation device 10300 is held in a state of being sandwiched between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17 is connected to the operation device 10.
The operation device 10300 is held from the upper rear side of 300, and the lower dish unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from the lower front side of the operation device 10300. Hereinafter, a configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described in order.

FIG. 213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is a front frame 1001.
4 is an exploded front view of FIG. In FIGS. 213 and 214, the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower dish unit 6400 are not shown. In FIG. 213, the operation device 10
300 is disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a and is shown in a direction view from the back side, and in order to facilitate understanding, an assembly direction line that connects the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and the fastening portions thereof. Is illustrated with imaginary lines.

When the operation device 10300 is assembled to the front frame 10014 so as to be fitted from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De arranged below the inner case member 10330 is the front frame 10014.
It contacts so that it may ride on the upper surface of the plate-shaped convex part T10 which protrudes in plate shape at the front side.

A bottom member De that is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is disposed below the operation device 10300. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) that is open to the front side, and a recessed portion De2 that is open on the side opposite to the inner case member 10330 (lower side) and on the back side. Prepare.

The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the rear side where the lower part is opened.
In other words, the operation device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014 by fitting the plate-like convex portion T10 and the concave portion De2. Further, since the plate-like convex portion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-like convex portion T10. In addition, the fitting here is
Regardless of the presence or absence of a gap, it is sufficient that the bottom member De can be aligned with the plate-like convex portion T10.

At the tip of the plate-like convex portion T10, a pair of left and right protrusions are formed so as to protrude in a thin cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a fastening screw can be screwed in between the pair of cylindrical protrusions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of columnar projecting portions are inserted into a recess recessed in the corresponding wall portion (front side wall portion) of the recessed portion De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-like convex portion T10 and the bottom member De. The fastening screw screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into an insertion hole drilled at a corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and the plate-like convex portion T10 is tightened by tightening the fastening screw. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, the recessed portion De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De rides on the plate-like convex portion T10, while the front half on the opposite side (see FIG. 215 (a)) has a plate-like support. The portion 6426 is disposed above the flat plate-like portion 6426a. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is formed of the resin member 6427.
The flat plate-like portion 6426a is disposed so as to face the resin member 6427 so as to be in contact with the resin member 6427.

In addition, the situation where contact is possible is not limited in any way. For example, the operation device 10300 may normally be in contact with the resin member 6427 by its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De are usually separated from each other, while a load is applied to the operation device 10300, The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be in contact with each other when the operation device 10300 is displaced downward by executing a vibration effect.

After the operation device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, a fastening screw inserted from the back side is fastened to the front frame 10014, whereby the operation device 10300 is moved to the front frame 1.
It is fixed to 0014.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening portions 10333 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed therein, and the fastening portions 10333 thereof.
It is a metal plate which is covered by one of them, and is mainly provided with a metal plate portion 10334 which is provided with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and which can receive a compressive force when fastened and fixed.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge portion of the insertion hole H10a formed with a diameter capable of inserting a fastening screw into the metal main body portion 10014a. An intermediate plate made of a hard resin is disposed on the front side of the metal main body 10014a. However, a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 is inserted through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal main body 10014a.

Here, the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 where the metal plate portion 10334 is disposed.
The through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger in the periphery of the intermediate plate than in the other insertion hole H10a. The shape of the through hole is designed to be a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that is covered on the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

Thereby, along with fastening the operation device 10300 to the front frame 10014,
The metal plate portion 10334 can be closely attached to the metal main body portion 10014a. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be electrically connected, the same role as a so-called ground wire can be provided. Thereby, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be ensured.

Further, by disposing the metal plate portion 10334 in between, the metal plate portion 10334 can have a washer function. Thereby, the operation device 10300 is attached to the metal main body 1001.
It can be firmly fixed to 4a.

In addition, the shape of the metal plate part 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, instead of forming the through hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the claw is formed so as to be displaced forward and backward, the function of a spring washer can be provided, and the fastening strength can be increased.

Locations where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are insertion holes 6801R,
It is concentrated on the back side except for 6801L. By concentrating the places necessary for fastening on the back side, the design freedom on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is a problem since the operation device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a load in the sinking direction (downward) is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted that suppresses the sinking displacement on the front side of the operation device 10300 while concentrating the fastening portion on the back side. This will be described in turn below.

First, the operation of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side is fitted with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the front side portion of the operation device 10300 is restricted from moving in the vertical direction by the fitting portion 6426d, and the sinking displacement is suppressed.

Next, operations of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are
A portion projecting in a plate shape is provided on the rear side edge of the upper half portion disposed on the back side of the swing operation member 10310.

That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-like overhanging portion 10321c that projects in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half, and a plurality of partial overhanging portions 103 that further project from the plate-like overhanging portion 10321c.
21d.

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10322c that projects in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half. The right front cover 10322 has a partial overhang 1032.
A portion corresponding to 1d is not formed, and the periphery of the plate-like protruding portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the partial overhanging portion 10321d
It is configured as a part to be inserted and fitted into a. Here, the housing recess 17 of the present embodiment.
The configuration of a will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the housing recess 17a includes a lower edge overhanging portion 10017b with a lower edge overhanging the left and right sides of the housing recess 17a with a substantially equal overhang width, and a left and right side of the housing recess 17a. On both sides, the lower edge overhanging portion 100 is protruded to the front side at a position slightly spaced from the plate thickness of the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c below the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b.
A plurality of opposing overhanging portions 1 that are disposed to face 17b and form grooves between the lower edge overhanging portions 10017b.
0017c, a plurality of positioning holes 10017d drilled in the front-rear direction as long holes with the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the surface position, and a hole in the front-rear direction at a position side by side with the right facing overhanging portion 10017c. And a relief hole 10017e to be provided.

When the operation device 10300 is assembled to the housing recess 17a, the plate-like overhanging portion 10321 is used.
c, 10322c is inserted into the groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c, and the plurality of partial overhanging portions 10321d are respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, thereby the left front cover 10321 and The right front cover 10322 is fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a.

In this case, the plate-like overhang portions 10321c and 10322c are the lower edge overhang portions 10017b.
And the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are restrained from being displaced in the vertical direction by being fitted in a groove between the opposite overhanging portion 10017c.

In addition, the plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d are inserted (fitted) into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily aligned with respect to the housing recess 17a. It is possible to suppress the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, the housing recess 17a is formed in an open arch shape on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are in contact with each other and accommodated inside the arch,
The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction or the rear side direction.

With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is set to the upward position, and the position shift of the operation device 10300 when the player applies a backward load to the swing operation member 10310 is suppressed. (Return to the original position at an early stage).

Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, it is mainly operated with the left hand. In a general gaming posture (a posture facing directly to the pachinko machine 10010), the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 10010 are arranged. In operating the operation device 10300 to be arranged, the left hand is stretched diagonally right forward, and therefore it is rare that the load during the operation does not have a horizontal component.

Therefore, since a load in the left and right direction is applied to the swing operation member 10310 at the same time as the load in the rear direction, the operation device 10300 may be displaced in the rear and left and right directions.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arched portion of the housing recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are disposed therebetween, so that the operation device 10300 is displaced. The restoring force of deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 that can occur is the operation device 10300 in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction.
Is caused to return to the original position. Thereby, even if position shift arises in the operation device 10300, a position can be returned at an early stage.

From the above configurations, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 103 with respect to the housing recess 17a.
The displacement of 22 can be suppressed. That is, the operation device 10 for the housing recess 17a.
It is possible to suppress the displacement of 300.

The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which a fixed assembly portion 6802 (described later) of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be disposed at a position where the fixed assembly portion 6802 projects outward from the plate-shaped projecting portion 10321c.

Next, the periphery of the operation device 10300 will be described. First, the operation device 1030
The outline of the internal structure of 0 will be described. 215 (a), 215 (b), and 216 (a)
) And 216 (b) show the operation device 1 on the CCXVa-CCXVa line in FIG.
FIG.

FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is disposed in the upward position (initial position in the present embodiment). FIG. 215 (b), FIG. 216 (a) and FIG.
In b), the swing operation member 10310 is in a downward position (a pushed-down position in the present embodiment).
A state of being arranged in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), the operation device 10300 includes a lever support shaft on which a lever member 10340 that supports the swing operation member 10310 with a shaft support rod 10363 is fixed to the inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported at 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is centered on the shaft support rod 10363 and the displacement accompanying the movement of the shaft support rod 10363 disposed on the arc locus centering on the lever support shaft 10331d1. Displacement is possible in a manner combined with displacement in the rotational direction, and the displacement is generated by a player's operation.

That is, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 disposed at the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swing operation member 10310 can be pushed in a manner of rotational displacement around the pivotal support rod 10363. (Push-in operation).

Further, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 disposed at the upward position and applying a load toward the lower side on the front side, the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. (Push-down operation).

In the state where the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the downward position, the posture correcting device 1
0312 (the action of applying a load in a direction away from the wall member 10322b to the swing operation member 10310), the posture in which the swing operation member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (reverse rotation position, The posture rotated backward by an angle θ17y from the initial position with respect to the lever member 10340). Therefore, since the angle of the posture change of the swing operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotation displacement of the lever member 10340. .

Further, the swing operation member 1010 is in a state where the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the downward position.
When an operation (push operation) is performed to push the lens member 10317 that is supported by 310 so as to be displaceable, the swing operation member 10310 is rotationally displaced about the pivotal support rod 10363 due to a load at the time of operation, and falls forward. Displace the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 in the direction Y17c
(See FIG. 216 (b)).

As described above, in this embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to apply loads for operation from a plurality of directions.
These displacement modes can also be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is driven to rotate about the lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. Thus, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down and disposed at the downward position, the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

A vibration device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed at the tip of the lever member 10340. The vibration of the vibration device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. Configured to be communicated.

The vibration device 10366 is a device that operates a pair of members close to and away from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force, and is a bobbin member that is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound (
And a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member. A pressing member connected by a disk-shaped plate (member disposed on the lens member 10317 side)
And mainly. The pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction in the inner cylinder.

The vibration device 10366 is configured to generate linear vibration along a direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. In addition, in the present embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to coincide with the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

Accordingly, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by making maximum use of the vibration energy of the vibration device 10366, and the presentation effect by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be improved.

Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. FIG. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 10300.

As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are disposed behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. Left front cover 1032
1 and the right front cover 10322 have outer end portions (end portions on the opposite side of the swing operation member 10310).
Is bent, the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swing operation member 10310 side. Accordingly, a large space can be secured around the swing operation member 10310, so that the movable range of the swing operation member 10310 can be secured and the player can hold the swing operation member 10310. Space for inserting fingers can be secured.

Moreover, since the curvature of the end portion is configured in a series so as to surround the swing operation member 10310,
Designability can be improved, and deformation of the curved portion can be divided and caused as a whole, so that the allowable width of deformation of the curved portion can be widened.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322
Are separated from the inner case member 10330 by the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L drilled in the front-rear direction so that the fastening screws fastened to the left and right ends of the housing recess 17a can be inserted, and the fastening screws. Fixed assembly 680 for impossible fixing
2 is provided.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6 arranged at both left and right ends.
801R and 6801L are fastened and fixed to the accommodating recess 17a. The left and right ends are locations farthest from a load (mainly a load along a plane passing through the center in the left-right direction and perpendicular to the left-right direction) applied to the operation device 10300, and the load is not easily transmitted. 6801R
, 6801L, and the fastening screw fastened to the receiving recess 17a can be prevented from being loosened.

The fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed on the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG.
321 and the center of the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction (plate-like projecting portions 10321c, 10322)
c is a position shifted to the right side from the most rear side). That is, the left front cover 10
321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that is disassembled at the left and right centers, the left front cover 10321 is formed to the right side beyond the left and right centers, and the formation of the right front cover 10322 remains at a position on the right side of the left and right centers. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322.

In the present embodiment, the boundary on the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is shifted from the center in the left-right direction, so that one member (the book) is placed in the central portion (the portion located on the rearmost side) of the housing recess 17a. In the embodiment, since the left front cover 10321) can be inserted to complete the alignment with the housing recess 17a, the assembly can be facilitated as compared with the case where the alignment is performed by both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when operating the operation device 10300. Here, at the positions on the back side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, a swing operation member 10310 as a position to be operated by the player can be disposed in close proximity (particularly an upward position (FIG. 21
8), the fastening screw may be loosened due to transmission of a load during operation of the operation device 10300. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the fixed assembly 6802 is shifted from the left and right center where the load during operation is maximized to the left and right, thereby reducing the transmitted load compared to the load during operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws in the fixed assembly 6802.

In this manner, the fixed assembly 6802 is shifted from the left and right center to the left and right, and the left front cover 1032
By similarly shifting the boundary between the first front cover 10322 and the right front cover 10322, the assembling efficiency can be improved, and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be prevented.

Note that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 both have a fixed assembly 680.
2, the inner case member 10330 is not directly fastened and fixed. That is, the fixed assembly 680
2, the fastening screw inserted through the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

However, with respect to the inner case member 10330, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is provided with the inner case member 1.
It is inserted through a through-hole formed in the upper plate portion of 0330 (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 220), and the upper plate portion is held between the fixed assembly portion 6802 from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1 are compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, respectively.
The fastening points formed at 0322 can be reduced.

Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with a lot of fastening portions, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are hardly bent due to the rigidity of the fastening screw, and may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, the thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced in order to make it easier to bend while maintaining the fastening portion. In this case, however, the durability is deteriorated or illegal acts are caused. There is a risk that.

On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening points as in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be sufficiently bent without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screw. Accordingly, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively reducing the thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operation device 10300. FIG.
FIG. 222 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 10300. 219 and 22
As shown in FIG. 0, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are the left cover member 103.
23 and the right cover member 10324 can be disassembled to the left and right in an integrated state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is formed of the left cover member 10.
The right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 10324 at one point (adjusted elongated holes 10323a and 10324a) in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 is relative to the left cover member 10323 with respect to the right front cover 103.
22 can be moved relative to the right cover member 10324, respectively, so that the assembly positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily adjusted. This will be described below.

The operation device 10300 is disposed on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the back side is formed in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively provided with adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a which are formed in the front upper and lower ends and are elongated in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction.

The adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are formed due to molding variation or the like. Even when the shapes vary, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1032 with respect to the swing operation member 10310
The position of 2 in the left-right direction can be easily adjusted.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have adjustment long holes 10323a and 1032 respectively.
It is fastened and fixed to 4a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 has a fitting recess 10322a that is recessed in the right direction from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 that contacts the left front cover 10321, and the fitting recess 10322a is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction. A wall member 10322b mounted in a manner, and a state in which the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (FIG. 217).
In the reference), the wall member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a by stopping the leftward movement by the end face of the left front cover 10321.

With such a configuration, when the wall member 10322b is replaced, the right front cover 10322 is replaced.
The wall member 10322b can be replaced simply by removing the wall member (the wall member 10322b
This is a place where the load from the posture correcting device 10312 (see FIG. 215) is repeatedly received). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, the procedure of the assembly work will be described. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 103
22 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively (FIG. 2).
21 and FIG. 222 to FIG. 219 and FIG. 220), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover are fixed by fastening the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 after being fastened and fixed. 10322 is aligned,
Thereafter, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed.

Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10323 are bothered when the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is corrected. The fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 is loosened, and the left cover member 1032
3 and the right cover member 10324 need to be corrected by shifting the arrangement.

In anticipation of this, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not securely tightened to the inner case member 10330 but are tightened and fixed weakly to fix the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1.
When determining the position of 0322, after the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed (downstream of the assembly procedure), the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 103 are fixed.
Since the return of the work procedure of fastening 24 to the inner case member 10330 (upstream side of the assembly procedure) occurs and the work itself becomes complicated, it is not preferable in terms of simplification (simplification) of the work.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be moved relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so that the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are disposed on the inner case. After the fastening to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, the assembling work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 respectively include shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R in which the front edge portion is opposed to the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344. The shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have a role of closing a gap generated between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and a piano wire enters the gap to enter the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against an illegal act to be attempted or a mischievous act of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is shifted due to the influence of an operation load (impact) and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion are operated during operation of the operation device 10300. 6803L and 6803R may be rubbed and resin shavings may be generated. Resin shavings have little effect as long as they are small, but if a large amount of clogging occurs in the detection groove of a light transmission type switch represented by the so-called photocoupler type, shavings may block the light and induce false detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of selection of switches that can be adopted is limited.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1
Since the fixed assembly portion 6802 as the fastening location of 0322 is disposed at a position left and right away from the left and right center position (location where the load during operation and the load during operation occurs at the maximum), the impact transmitted to the fastening location The load can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult to loosen the fastening screw.

Thereby, since it can suppress that the positional relationship of shielding board part 6803L, 6803R and guide part 10344a shifts, generation of resin shavings can be prevented, and false detection can be controlled. In the present embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation in the reverse direction of the swing operation member 10310, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

When the swing operation member 10310 is pushed in the backward direction, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is shielded. Therefore, it is determined that the push operation has been performed. be able to. In the present embodiment, since no load is applied to the detection switch FC and the metal plate MB, durability can be improved as compared with the case where a load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are shield plates 6803L and 6803R.
Curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the lower plate portion, and lower plate portions 6805L formed continuously as fan-shaped plate portions on the lower side of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, 6805R.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have curved shapes (that is, lever support shafts 10331d1 (FIG. 215) whose surfaces on the back side can come into contact with curved portions on the upper front side of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. A circular arc shape having a central angle of about 90 degrees with reference to the center.

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are protruding interference portions 68 that protrude from the back surface to the back surface.
05a. The protruding interference part 6805a has a left cover member 13331 in the left-right direction.
And arranged slightly inside the inner edge portion Rm1 of the right cover member 13332, and is formed so as to protrude from the front side surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 to the back side in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the protruding interference portion 6805a is provided with a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 1032.
2 and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are assembled (see FIG. 220), the displacement to the left and right outer sides is restricted by the inner edge Rm1. Therefore, since the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced outward in the left-right direction, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being disassembled in a manner that they are separated from each other.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are connected to the outer peripheries of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R.

The left front cover 10321 includes fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L that are formed at the right end portion so that fastening screws can be screwed in and are arranged in a plurality of directions. The right front cover 103
22 is an insertion hole 68 that is provided in the upper and lower portions at the left end and is drilled so that a fastening screw can be inserted.
02R, 6807R, 6808R.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by a plurality of fastening portions and insertion holes that are distributed in the vertical direction (the direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). Thereby, the load and impact accompanying operation of the operation device 10300 can be disperse | distributed to each fastening part, and generation | occurrence | production of the loosening of a fastening screw can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of displacement in the position of the break between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, a design portion that is easily visible to the player (particularly,
Lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and connecting curved portions 6806L and 68 that are easily visible in a front view.
06R, see FIG. 207) can be prevented from degrading. These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that the insertion hole H23a drilled in the left-right direction is sandwiched in a portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and is fixed with the inner case member 10330 sandwiched by fastening screws. . In addition, it is not the so-called “co-fastening” mode, but is fastened and fixed in such a manner that the tip of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L contacts the left surface of the plate portion where the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, the compression load is not generated in the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed by fastening.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even when the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to a load applied to the operation device 10300, the operation of the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be made independent as long as the gap is within the above-described gap. Therefore, when a minute displacement that may occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs, the fixed assembly 6
It can be avoided that 802 is similarly displaced.

It should be noted that the extending length of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compression load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed during fastening. . In this case, since the restoring force of the portion of the insertion hole H23a increases the fastening force, the fixed assembly 6
Loosening of the fastening screw at 802 can be avoided.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole H23b that is drilled in the left-right direction in a portion that protrudes to the front side of the inner case member 10330 is screwed. The left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing in the fastening screws. In the present embodiment, the place where only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed is only the fastening place by the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to a fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable along the left-right direction in a portion protruding to the front side of the inner case member 10330. By screwing in the fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is moved to the inner case member 1.
Fastened to 0330. In the present embodiment, the place where only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed is the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807.
It is only the fastening part by R.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In the present embodiment, the place where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed is only the fastening place by the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion and the insertion hole are formed at a plurality of locations along the formation direction of the facing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.
The combination of objects to be fastened is different. Accordingly, in assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at a time, so that the assembling work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure will be described below.

First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed even at one place, one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is prevented from being detached from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 1021 is fastened and fixed in such a manner that a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b.
321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330, and when the right front cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed in such a manner that a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R. Can be fixed to the inner case member 10330.

Next, the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10.
If it attaches to 330 and is similarly fastened and fixed at one place, a state where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330 can be configured.

After this, although there is no designation in the order, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fixed to the inner case member 10 by screwing the fastening screws in the fixing assembly 6802 and fastening them.
330 can be integrally fixed. Also, the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R
Then, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other by screwing and fastening the fastening screws.

In this way, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled to each other only by fastening the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330 by forming a portion for fastening the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to each other, The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the fastening operation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the fastening screws are all inserted from the right to the left. Therefore, the efficiency of the fastening operation can be improved as compared with the case where the insertion direction of the fastening screw is configured in both the left and right directions.

The screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Operation device 103
00 is a direction along the plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 because the operation direction of each operation unit is the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.
00 is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of each operation unit. That is, when a load or impact during operation occurs along the operation direction, a component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being loosened due to a load or an impact when the operation device 10300 is operated.

In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation parts (including a part that operates by operation. For example, the swing operation member 10310, the lens member 10317, and the lever member 103 are included.
40), but all the operation parts are designed to operate in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Therefore, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, when the operation portion does not move on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, when there is an operation portion that pushes in the left-right oblique direction), A direction (for example, an intermediate angle direction) found as a balance (average) of operation directions may be set as a fastening direction, or an operation part with a high frequency of operation instructions is targeted (operation instructions rarely occur) The direction of fastening may be set by ignoring the operation part to be performed.

223 (a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223 (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220) between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. Except for the part to be formed and the part in which the fitting recess 10322a is formed, they are in contact with each other over a plurality of surfaces arranged opposite to each other.

In the contact portion, a plate-like portion extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visually recognized by the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending rightward along the lower surface thereof (see FIG. 223 (a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlap portion 6803La, the shielding plate portion 68 is supported.
It is restricted that 03R is displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. Thereby, it can prevent that a clearance gap produces between shielding board part 6803R, 6803L, and can suppress that a liquid passes between shielding board parts 6803R, 6803L.

In the present embodiment, an inner case member 10330 disposed below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), and a lever member 10340 in which the rear side portion is accommodated.
Preventing liquid from touching a drive motor that drives the lever member 10340, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, and an electric system (substrate, etc.) that drives the drive motor. Can do.

In addition, the cuts of the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the left and right center of the swing operation member 10310, while the cuts (joint surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are the swing operation members. It is arranged on the same surface as the center position of the left and right 10310. Therefore, even when the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, it is possible to prevent the liquid from immediately reaching the break between the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330.

Further, in the present embodiment, the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is disposed closer to the left side with respect to the left and right center of the inner case member 10330 (the inner case member 10).
330 corresponding to the bulging portion from the left, see FIG. 218), shielding plate portions 6803R, 6803L
Even when the lower part between the two is wet, the inner case member 10330 is used as a liquid to wet the part.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive motor from getting wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb that extends to the right along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate portion 6805R is supported from behind by the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. Thereby, it can prevent that a clearance gap produces between lower board part 6805R, 6805L, and can suppress that a liquid passes between lower board part 6805R, 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support portion 6426 (
If a larger amount of liquid continues to pass, it passes between the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 and the main body box portion 6421 of the lower dish forming member 6420 and flows toward the through hole 6412. There is a possibility of flowing along the recessed shape portion 6414. In particular, the through hole 6
When the liquid flows downward from 412, the liquid flows downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may hit the player or wet the thousand boxes.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower dish forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430, it is easy to prevent the passage of liquid by sandwiching without any gap. As in the embodiment, by suppressing the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid is applied to the player or wets the thousand boxes. A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R,
The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R include a streak-like portion D23 formed in a streak shape so as to be pushed from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streak-shaped portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and a convex portion on the rear surface from the formation mode.

The streak portion D23 includes shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, and curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
And it has a role as a part which adjusts the rigidity of lower plate part 6805L, 6805R. That is,
Compared to the case where the plate is formed as a thin plate, the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the streak D23 is maintained (or reduced) and the rigidity along the direction in which the streak D23 is formed is improved. (anisotropy). This will be described using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are disposed between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and serve as a portion that fills the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be able to be displaced downward by a slight amount due to a load or impact during operation in order to prevent an excessive reaction force returned to the player during operation. On the other hand, for the purpose of making the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the housing recess 17a is configured to be undisplaceable.

That is, a gap may be generated between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a when the operation device 10300 is operated. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are extended in the vertical direction (elastically deformed and bent), so that it is possible to cope with a change in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a. Can be prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the streak-shaped portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed (direction in which the load during operation is mainly directed), thereby reducing the vertical deformation resistance. Since it is increased (because the rigidity is increased), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of vibration at the time of shape restoration or the deformation more than necessary. As described above, the design of the streak portion D23 in the present embodiment is performed for the purpose of taking measures against problems that may occur during operation of the operation device 10300.

Since the streak portion D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R is formed in a U shape in front view,
When a downward load is applied at the center, it will endure upward (a pulling force is generated) on both the left and right sides. That is, even when a downward load is applied during operation of the operation device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be returned early.

On the other hand, even if a load is generated in the direction orthogonal to the streak-shaped portion D23, the load transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the downstream side is caused by the allowable deformation based on the flexibility of the resin. Can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R include an end streak portion D24 formed in a streak shape so as to be extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streak-like portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface from the formation mode.

The end streak portion D24 mainly includes a left and right streak portion D24a formed on the left and right sides and a central streak portion D24b formed on the center side, and is formed as a measure against loads in different directions.

The left and right streak portion D24a is a streak portion disposed on the upper side of the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side), and is formed in a shape that is inclined downward toward the back side. This downward inclination corresponds to the direction of the load such as an operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, the connecting curved portion 6 is formed by the left and right muscle portions D24a.
By improving the rigidity of 806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a, the resistance force to the operation load can be improved.

In addition, as for the inclination angle of the left and right stripe part D24a, the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is formed in a stepwise manner when the one arranged on the left and right side is larger than that arranged on the left and right center side. That is,
Streaks extend in multiple directions. Thereby, regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load when the lens member 10317 is operated.

In addition, the formation width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is as follows.
Those arranged on the left and right sides are shorter than those arranged on the left and right center side. That is, since the forming width is shortened toward the side corresponding to the force with a large inclination with respect to the front-rear direction (left and right side), the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is reduced and the resistance force is increased. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve resistance to a load in a direction with a large inclination with respect to the front-rear direction as a direction in which the load during operation tends to increase (the direction in which the hand is swung down).

On the other hand, the central streak portion D24b is a streak portion disposed on the lower side from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side) and has a shape that rises and slopes toward the back side. Formed from. This rising inclination is caused by the operation device 10300 (inner case member 10330).
Corresponds to the direction of load at the time of falling forward.

In other words, the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is made to be central by the central muscle D24b.
By improving in the direction of 24b, it is possible to improve the resistance against the forward displacement of the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330) due to the load at the time of the tilt operation around the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. .

Further, the central streak portion D24b is formed by seven in total, one at the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central streak portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right central sides as they go to the back side. As a result, even when the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330) is tilted forward by a load at the time of the tilting operation around the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if a displacement in the left-right direction occurs, Resistance to displacement (resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. Thereby, especially in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the bending in the left-right direction (deformation expanding and contracting along the left-right direction) is more significant than the bending in the vertical direction (deformation extending and contracting along the vertical direction). It becomes a big deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower dish unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edge of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of the lower edge) The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in such a manner that is displaced downward.
When the upper and lower middle portions and upper edge portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are bent in the left-right direction, the load (stress) applied to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be released (stress). To avoid concentration).

Even in such a case of bending deformation, the lower edge overhanging portion is formed so that the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. 10017b and the opposite overhanging portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are formed longer in the front-rear direction, so the left front cover 10321 is formed. And right front cover 1032
It is possible to make it difficult for a gap to be formed between the housing 2 and the housing recess 17a.

Further, by making the bending ease of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R different depending on the direction, the downstream side of the load generated by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 and the operation of the operation device 10300 (V-shaped design member 6450, see FIG. 232), it is possible to change the ease of transmission to the direction of vibration or load.

That is, vibration along the vertical direction and operation load can be easily transmitted to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while vibration and operation in the horizontal direction can be performed. A load (for example, a load generated when a hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when the ball is transferred from the lower plate 50 to the upper plate 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50. Can be difficult. Thus, the swinging operation member 10 is not intended by the player.
It is possible to prevent vibrations and loads from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50 until a load is applied to 310 to give the player an uncomfortable feeling.

Further, on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, connecting curved portions 6806L and 680 are provided.
When 6R is continuously formed, a plate-like projecting portion 10321c formed on the upper edge thereof,
10322c is inserted between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposite overhanging portion 10017c, which are long on the left and right (see FIG. 214).

Here, in the comparison between the shape of the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the shape of the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposed overhanging portion 10017c, the vicinity of the left and right end portions is shifted in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like. (For example, when the front upper ends of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R protrude from the front side of the housing recess 17a), the plate-like protruding portions 10321c and 10322
It is preferable to be able to cope with a molding error by deforming so that the curve of c is loosened (the left and right end portions are displaced to the back side).

In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the streak portion D23 is formed along the top and bottom of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, the lateral rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R is compared with the vertical stiffness. Is lowered. Therefore, the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c
Since the deformation of the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R when the plate is deformed to the side where the curve is loosened, the plate-like overhanging portion 1
The deformation width of 0321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, the size of the molding error that can be handled can be increased.

As described above, the streak portion D23 takes measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled by not improving (weakening) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the formation direction (left and right direction). be able to.

For these reasons, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10 are formed by the streak portion D23.
It is possible to cope with both a problem that can occur when the 322 is assembled (same as when the operation device 10300 is assembled; see FIG. 213) and a problem that can occur when the operation device 10300 is operated.

Returning to FIG. 212, description will be made. In the present embodiment, the metal main body 1001 of the front frame 10014.
On the lower left side front portion of 4a, a flat plate portion (spherical guide opening 5 along the metal main body portion 10014a).
3 (see FIG. 214) and the upper side of the flat plate portion, the front side is bent so as to be bent at the upper end portion configured to be inclined downward toward the right. A back cover portion 10014b formed from a resin material is provided in a mode including an extended plate-like upper plate portion. That is, the back cover portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane orthogonal to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The back cover portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is brought into contact with (connected to) the flat plate portion at the rear end portion, and is brought into contact with (connected to) the upper plate portion at the right end portion thereof. In the area (space) formed on the side where the lower plate 50 and the back cover portion 10014b are opposed to each other, balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 or so-called foul balls are stored. Will be. Next, details of the lower plate unit 6400 constituting the lower plate 50 will be described.

FIG. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower dish unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower dish unit 6400. In FIG. 225, each part of the lower dish unit 6400 is illustrated at an angle looking up from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower dish unit 6400 is configured to cover the front side of the metal main body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212) in a manner that covers the metal main body 1.
A covering base member 6410 fastened and fixed to the 0014a, a lower plate forming member 6420 fitted to the covering base member 6410 from above to form the lower plate 50, and a plate attached to the covering base member 6410 from below. And a ball discharge device 6430 that is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 6420, and a lower plate forming member 64 from the back side at the left end of the covering base member 6410.
An intermediate holding member 6440 that is assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that allows the 20 to be prevented from being detached, and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a on the opposite side (rear side).
And a V-shaped design member 6450 that is disposed in the upper part on the front side of the covering base member 6410 and is formed in a V-shape in front view from a resin material.

The covering base member 6410 has a main body portion 6411 formed in a substantially box shape with a lower bottom surface formed in a substantially flat shape and opened on the back surface and an upper surface, and a slight skeleton portion on the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411. A through hole 6412 that is formed to be left through, a projecting shape portion 6413 that protrudes downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the center side in the left-right direction of the main body portion 6411 with respect to the through hole 6412, and the protrusion On the back side of the provided shape portion 6413, the protruded shape portion 641 is provided.
3 is mainly provided with a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the plate thickness in 3 is substantially equal to the other part of the main body portion 6411.

By forming the recessed shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the protruding shape portion 6413. This can be suppressed. The projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at a place where the operation device 10300 is held from below, and will be described in detail later.

The through hole 6412 has a size substantially the same as the size of the bottom surface shape of the lower plate 50 described later, and is formed to be much larger than the size of the bottom surface port 6432 that is opened by sliding the ball removal lever 52.

Thus, by forming the through-hole 6412 large in advance, the covering base member 6410 is formed.
The ball discharge speed from the lower plate 50 can be made to correspond to the ball discharge speed corresponding to the playability realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without exchanging.

That is, the discharge speed of the sphere from the lower plate 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom surface port 6432,
For example, when the size of the through hole 6412 is equal to the size of the bottom surface port 6432, the discharge speed of the sphere cannot be increased further. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the through hole 6412 is used.
If the size of the bottom surface port 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom surface port 6432 is changed within a range not exceeding the through hole 6412 (design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430). If the change is made), the discharge speed (discharge mode) of the balls from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the covering base member 6410. In other words, without changing the appearance of the lower tray unit 6400 visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).
The discharge speed (discharge mode) of the sphere can be changed.

The demand for changing the ball discharge speed is not limited to the case where the playability of the pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game store, when the pachinko machine 10010 is installed in a mode that requires the payout ball to be transferred to a thousand box, and when it is installed in a mode that does not require the payout ball to be transferred to a thousand box (so-called “personal”) In the case of).

If it is necessary to transfer the payout ball to the Thousand Box, the ball is likely to overflow from the Thousand Box if the ball is discharged at high speed, so the ball discharge is designed to be slower than the specified speed. It is desirable that

In the present embodiment, the bottom surface port 6432 is formed from a circular opening having a diameter of about 35 [mm]. From the comparison between the opening area and the shape of the sphere (spherical shape having a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of balls discharged simultaneously from the opening is limited to about seven.

On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the payout sphere to the thousand-thousand box, there is no concern about the overflow of the sphere from the thousand-thousand box, so that the upper limit of the desired discharge speed of the sphere greatly changes in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the dispensed ball flows into an automatic counter disposed in each pachinko machine 10010. Therefore, as an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed, it is built in the automatic counter. The operating speed of the ball sink device is illustrated.

Thus, by forming the through-hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the discharge speed of the sphere can be changed without changing the design in front view, while the main body 6
There exists a possibility that the intensity | strength of 411 may fall. In particular, the bottom surface portion of the main body portion 6411 is a portion to which a load (mainly a downward load) when a player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted. However, there is a possibility that the load is limited to the extent that it can withstand the load during operation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that compensates for the strength reduction due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the lines illustrated by the imaginary lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 as fastening directions in a manner of sandwiching the covering base member 6410 from above and below. The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430. Thereby, the surrounding part of the through hole 6412 (for example, a frame part elongated in the left and right positions behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower dish forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430.

In addition, the design aspect by which the edge part of the through-hole 6412 is pressed down by the lower plate | board formation member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, the lower plate forming member 6420
Also, the design may be such that the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 abuts the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 before the ball discharge device 6430 is fastened (in a state of being arranged at the fastening preparation position) (see FIG. 233). Before, there is a gap between each other, but a design mode in which the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw and pressure can be applied may be used.

Further, the pressed portion does not have to be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, and may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, particularly in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the projecting shape portion 64
13 on the right side) and the rear side portion (long plate portion disposed behind the through hole 6412) that may receive an impact every time it is opened and closed, a large load is likely to occur. It is preferable to incorporate.

Thus, by sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower dish forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430, the strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be sufficiently ensured,
The bottom surface port 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about a decrease in strength due to the formation of the bottom surface port 6432. That is, the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the bottom surface port 6432 can be improved.

The lower plate forming member 6420 is a main body box portion 64 formed in a substantially box shape in which the lower plate 50 has its upper surface opened.
21, a discharge port 6422 opened in the vertical direction on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, an L-shaped plate portion 6423 projecting in an L shape from the back side of the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, and an L shape thereof On the inner side (front side) of the range surrounded by the plate part 6423, a plurality of fastening parts 6424 projecting in a cylindrical shape downward and fastened with fastening screws for fastening the ball discharge device 6430 and the edge part of the discharge port 6422 are based. A pair of guide ribs 6425 extending as ribs along the left-right direction as ends, a plate-like support portion 6426 extending rightward from the right end portion of the main body box portion 6421, and the plate-like support portion 642
6 and a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of the main body 6.

The discharge port 6422 is formed at a position that is the front end and the right end of the lower plate 50. The bottom upper surface of the lower plate 50 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 6422, and the ball that has flowed into the lower plate 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flows down toward the discharge port 6422. Since the outlet 6422 is disposed on the front side close to the player, the balls can be smoothly taken out from the lower plate 50 even when the number of balls stored in the lower plate 50 is small.

The discharge port 6422 is a plate-like support portion 6426 that is likely to generate a load from the operation device 10300.
However, the countermeasures are taken in combination with the ball discharge device 6430, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the protruding length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is different in the left and right positions, but this corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411 is formed in a substantially flat shape, while the lower plate 50 is formed to be inclined downward as the lower surface of the lower bottom portion moves to the right. In order to make contact with the upper surface of the edge of 6412)
The protruding length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 needs to be shortened toward the right, and it corresponds to that. With this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end portion (lower end portion) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 (contacted by line contact or surface contact). )

There are two fastening portions 6424 at the front side end portion where the load from the player is likely to occur, and the front frame 10.
One location is formed at the rear side end where load is likely to occur when 014 is opened and closed. By providing a fastening part preferentially at a place where a load is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent the position of the lower plate forming member 6420 from being displaced due to the fixing being shifted when the load is generated while limiting the fastening part. .

Further, since the fastening portion 6424 is disposed in the vicinity of the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the through hole 641 is provided.
L-shaped plate portion 6423 and covering base member 6410 while being fastened inside 2 (ie, fastened without forming a separate through-hole for positioning a fastening screw passing through main body portion 6411). The contact with the edge of the through-hole 6412 can be easily maintained (relative position can be easily maintained). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower dish forming member 6420 while making it unnecessary to form through holes other than the through holes 6412.

The guide rib 6425 is used for both the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball removal lever 52 and the purpose of reinforcing the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is considered that the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50 is formed in a plate shape that is long on the left and right, and reinforcement along the left and right direction is required.
Since the ball removal lever 52 slides in the left-right direction that coincides with the longitudinal direction, the movement guide of the ball removal lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50 are suitably realized.

Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed as a pair as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Moreover, even if one is damaged, there is no problem in use as long as the other remains, so that the service life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane or silicone, or other flexible and moderate repulsive force (shape restoring force)
There may be a member with.

The ball discharge device 6430 has a plate-like main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-described ball removal lever 52 is disposed.
And a circular bottom opening 6432 formed through the main body plate portion 6431 in the vertical direction and a fastening portion 6424 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6424. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 to be tightened, and the fastening holes 6433
And a fitting frame portion 6434 that has an outer shape of the frame that is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410.

The ball release lever 52 includes a gripping portion 52a that projects forward so that the player can operate in a manner that slides left and right, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). And a pair of rib-like portions protruding upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extending along the left-right direction, and the guided rib 52 guided by the guide rib 6425.
c, and they are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom surface port 6432 is disposed to face the discharge port 6422 of the lower dish forming member 6420 in the vertical direction, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball removal lever 52 is disposed therebetween. As described above, since the ball removal lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 when not operated, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening is determined. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

Thereby, since it can prevent that the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432 become weak,
As in the present embodiment, the durability of the lower dish unit 6400 is reduced while adopting a configuration in which the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 are disposed near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (disposed close to the operation device 10300). This can be prevented.

The detail of the fastening mode of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 includes a flange portion 6431a that projects outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (a plane side and left and right both sides) excluding the front side. The fitting frame portion 6434 is in an assembled state (FIG. 2).
07)), and is fitted into the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 with a gap,
When the ball discharging device 6430 is fitted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the flange portion 6431 a comes into contact with the lower surface portion of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be contacted in the front-rear and left-right directions from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is As described above, it contacts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction.

In this way, the ball discharging device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharging device 6430, and are fastened after the positions of the respective components are aligned. Each component can be fixed by tightening a fastening screw through the hole 6433. Therefore, assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 is a portion through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the covering base member 6410 is inserted, and has a plurality of through holes 6441 protruding from the front side, and a metal main body portion 10014a (
A plurality of fastening portions 6442 that are fastened and fixed to the back side, and a left upper end portion of the covering base member 6410 and the front-rear direction. And an interference portion 6443 that is a portion that interferes with the plate and is formed in a plate shape.

226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower dish unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower dish unit 6400. In FIG. 226 and FIG. 227, FIG. 224 and FIG.
The state which decomposed | disassembled the V-shaped design member 6450 from FIG.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape in which the back side is opened and the opening width is narrowed toward the left and right center, and the V-shaped main body portion 6451 is disposed downward toward the left and right center;
A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted into the lower edge of the main body portion 6451, a positioning portion 6453 formed in the vicinity of the center of the lower edge of the main body portion 6451, and the left and right sides of the main body portion 6451 A plurality of overhang fastening portions 6454 are formed in the vicinity of the end portion so as to be able to be screwed into the back side, and are formed in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 at the right side portion of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451 and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the left side portion of the main body portion 6451 and aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451. And a plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456.

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed with higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. Thereby, the person who performs a fraudulent act can limit the location where the through hole is easily formed in order to allow the unauthorized member to enter the pachinko machine 10010. That is, compared with the case where a through-hole is made in the V-shaped design member 6450, the left front cover 10
Since the degree of difficulty is lower in the case of making a through hole in the 321 or the right front cover 10322, it is possible to direct an unauthorized through hole to the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322.

For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of points that are regularly checked to find fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the through hole is highly likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. Thereby, compared with the case where it is necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450 and the cover 10321 and 10322 equally, a check burden can be reduced.

The main body portion 6451 is formed of a thin wall and can be bent and deformed in a direction of narrowing the groove width (can be bent and deformed in a state of being crushed up and down). The V-shaped design member 6450 corresponds to the operation device 103.
Since it is engaged with the lower edges of the 00 front left cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the vertical displacement that may occur when operating the operation device 10300 is transmitted via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is bent and deformed in the direction of narrowing the groove width of the main body portion 6451, whereby the operation device 1030 is deformed.
At least a part of the vertical displacement of 0 can be absorbed by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450.

That is, at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 is transferred to the V-shaped design member 6.
After operating with a deformation of 450, it can be transmitted downstream (eg, laying foundation member 6410). Therefore, since the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the covering base member 6410 disposed below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, the amount of displacement of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 is determined by the operation. In addition, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning portion 6453 includes a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the left side with respect to the left and right center, and a plate-like projecting portion projecting in a plate shape on the back side on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering base member 6410 when a fastening screw is screwed in a state where the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 enters from the front side into a recess formed on the front side. is there. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in a manner approaching from the back side of the covering base member 6410 (an example of the movement trajectory of the V-shaped design member 6450 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 226 and 227).

It should be noted that at least a part of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in this embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6
452) is not visible in the assembled state when viewed from the insertion direction of the fastening screw in the lower plate forming member 6420 (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the lower plate forming member 6420 is the covering base member 641.
In the state assembled to 0, the fastening screws inserted into at least some of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the lower plate forming member 6420 is a stage before disassembling the V-shaped design member 6450 from the covering base member 6410. Therefore, it is possible to increase the man-hours required for disassembling the V-shaped design member 6450.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is drilled in the front-rear longitudinal portion 6426c, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction, and a fastening screw that is screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted, and the lower right fastening portion 6453L is inserted by the screwing. And an insertion portion 6426c1 to be fixed. In addition, the insertion portion 6426
The operation device 10300 is arranged in such a manner that c1 is shielded from the back (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, as a premise for disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the insertion portion 6426c1 from a position where it is shielded. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the necessary man-hours such as removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower dish forming member 6420. Thereby, the V-shaped design member 6450 can be removed illegally, and an illegal action entering the inside through the created gap can be suppressed.

The plate-like projecting portion 6453R is a front vertically long portion 6426 of the plate-like support portion 6426 in the assembled state.
It contacts the upper surface of c (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-like protruding portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-like support portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-like supporting portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-like protruding portion 6453R.

Thereby, for example, even when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is lifted from the player and applied with a load in the lifting direction, the fitting recess De1 (
Since the fitting portion 6426d is fitted to the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 219).
With the displacement in the upward direction, the front side portion of the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, the operation device 10300
Can be suppressed.

The left and right overhang fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws inserted through resin intermediate members (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 are screwed. The rear side of the fastening portion 6453L (the side close to the metal main body 10014a).

The right-side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left-side reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs for reinforcing the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and are thinly deformable by themselves so that the displacement is transmitted downstream due to their own deformation. It also has a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) for suppressing the above. As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is arranged denser than the right reinforcing rib 6455. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

228 (a) is a schematic sectional view of the right reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the left reinforcing rib 6456. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 228 (a) and FIG. 228 (b), the cross section in the plane which divides the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 in the thickness direction is illustrated. The reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed to have a common thickness, and are designed to change the dimension in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction corresponding to the groove width of the main body portion 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back side, and is a coupling portion coupled to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. 645
5a and the upper facing portion 6 that is disposed to face the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in parallel and forms a gap.
455b and a lower facing portion 6455c that is opposed to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 so as to be inclined in such a manner that the separation width increases toward the back side.

The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion to which the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Main body 645
1 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, so that contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be distributed at the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load resistance of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. Accordingly, the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 after fitting can be prevented from being separated from the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can be prevented from colliding with each other and being rubbed. Therefore, generation | occurrence | production of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The lower facing portion 6455c is closer to the operation device 10300 (back side, right front cover 103).
22, the distance from the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 is increased toward the side where the displacement tends to increase), so that the allowable amount of downward displacement of the right reinforcing rib 6455 itself can be increased, and the displacement It is possible to avoid collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 at the time of occurrence.

Accordingly, the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, so the right front cover 10
The rate at which the displacement or load transmitted through 322 is transmitted to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the downstream side of the right reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322 (
Although the operation handle 51 is disposed on the lower right side), the right reinforcing rib 6455 plays a role as a buffer member, so that loads, displacements, and vibrations associated with operation and driving of the operation device 10300 are caused to the operation handle 51. The transmitted rate can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to secure a gameability in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling uncomfortable.

As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back surface side, and is a coupling portion coupled to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. 645
6a and the upper facing portion 6 which is disposed to face the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in parallel and forms a gap.
456b and an overhanging portion 6456 that projects to the back side from the back side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451.
c and the lower facing portion 64 that is disposed to face the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in parallel and forms a gap.
56d.

The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion to which the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Main body 645
1 and the upper facing portion 6456b are disposed substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to avoid contact with the left front cover 10321 at a single point and to distribute the load at the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. Accordingly, the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting can be prevented from being separated from the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can be prevented from colliding with each other and being rubbed. Therefore, generation | occurrence | production of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The overhanging portion 6456c is separated from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the back side (
An upper edge portion inclined downward) is provided. As a result, the overhanging portion 6456c is provided with the left front cover 103.
21 is not a portion that always contacts the lower edge portion of 21 but a portion that first contacts when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the overhanging portion 6456c
When the amount of displacement of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large, it can function as a portion (fail safe) for suppressing the displacement.

Note that the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at the surface position of the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, since the length of the front-rear position where the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be increased, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the back cover portion 10014b when the back cover portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 is inserted between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. It is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 are in contact with the back cover portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the back cover portion 10014b can be reduced. .

Accordingly, the arrangement of the back cover portion 10014b can be easily maintained, so that the space above the lower plate 50 (a space in which a sphere is stored and where a player may put his hand)
Can be prevented from being narrowed.

That is, the back cover portion 10014b is provided with the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450.
However, the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side through the left front cover 10321 can be prevented from displacing the back cover portion 10014b. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface constituting the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball to generate abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is densely arranged on the right reinforcing rib as compared to the arrangement interval 6455. Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load.
In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand touching the ball stored in the upper plate 17 disposed on the left side is likely to be applied, and load unevenness tends to occur on the left and right sides. It is possible to deal with uneven loads.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different shapes of loads can be accommodated by making the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 different in shape. That is, in the right reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6455c to interrupt the transmission of the load, so that an instantaneous load or impact via the operation device 10300 can be prevented. Can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 supports the load by distributing the load, so that even when the weight is applied for a long time via the upper plate 17, It is possible to prevent the covering portion 10014b from being displaced. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 64 are provided so as to be able to cope with a load state that is likely to cause a problem.
56 shapes are designed.

229 (a) is a top view of the lower dish unit 6400, FIG. 229 (b) is a front view of the lower dish unit 6400, and FIG. 230 (a) is a bottom view of the lower dish unit 6400. 230 (b) is a rear view of the lower dish unit 6400, FIG. 231 (a) is a right side view of the lower dish unit 6400 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231 (b) is a lower dish unit. It is a left view in the arrow R direction view of 6400.

As shown in FIGS. 229 (a) and 230 (b), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is arranged in a manner straddling the recessed shape portion 6414 of the covering base member 6410 from side to side. The plate-like support portion 6426 is placed so as to be in surface contact with the upper surface of the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411, while being arranged away from the recessed shape portion 6414. Hereinafter, details of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be described.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are the main body portion 641 of the covering base member 6410.
1 is a part constituting the front and back of a part that bulges (extends) downward from the lower surface, similar to the deformation when a part of 1 is pressed from above, and the shape of one of the front and back is similar to the other ing. In other words, the bottom view of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the top view are formed as shapes whose scales are changed by an amount that can ensure the plate thickness of the main body portion 6411. The Therefore, the other shape can be easily imagined from one shape.

As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the protruding shape portion 6413 gradually increases in the left-right width toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (a), the plate-like support portion 64 of the lower plate forming member 6420.
26 is disposed closer to the front side than the center in the front-rear direction of the recessed shape portion 6414, and therefore supports the plate-like support portion 6426 at a location where the left and right widths of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are large. be able to. As a result, when the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced in such a manner that it sinks downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially bent sufficiently, but details will be described later.

Here, in a game-enabled state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-like support portion 6426, and the player operates the operation device 10300, so that the plate-like support portion 642 is placed.
6 can be displaced up and down. In relation to this displacement, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are made of a resin material, and the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 64 of the covering base member 6410 are formed.
There is a possibility that shavings may be generated when a load is generated, collides with, or rubs between the two.

When the shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, the shavings enter into the gap and the clearance cannot be secured, so that a malfunction may occur, or the shavings enter the detection area of the detection sensor and cause false detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, generation of shaving powder can be suppressed or the generation amount thereof can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-like support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

That is, a load in the push-down direction is applied to the operation device 10300, and the plate-like support portion 6426 is provided.
Is displaced by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, the displacement of other portions such as the main body portion 6411 can be made unnecessary.

On the other hand, a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300, and the plate-like support portion 642 is provided.
6 is lifted and displaced by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232) and converted into deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450, the displacement of other parts such as the main body 6411 Can be made unnecessary.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. With such a configuration, the main body portion 6411 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the lower surface of the protruding portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is
It is formed as an inclined plane that rises and slopes toward the front side. This configuration works favorably when, for example, the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is often placed on the floor of concrete or flooring in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is in contact with the floor. At this time, it is considered that it is preferable that the entire lower surface is in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoiding load concentration. However, in this case, there is a possibility that floor stains adhere to the entire lower surface. Although the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is a position that is difficult for a player to see, it is preferable to avoid the adhesion of dirt as long as it is a product.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the projecting shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises upward toward the front side. When the installation shape portion 6413 comes into contact with the floor surface, a gap is generated between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411. Therefore, the location where the dirt comes in contact with the floor surface is projected.
It can be limited to. Accordingly, when the game store side installs the front frame 10014 in a playable state, it is only necessary to wipe off the dirt of the protruding shape portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

Further, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hook portion for hooking a finger when carrying the front frame 10014. Conventionally, since the lower plate portion is arranged at the center of the left and right of the front frame, it is easy to hang a hand on the lower plate portion and lift the front frame and assemble it to the back frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). Although it was possible, in the front frame 10014 of the present embodiment, the lower plate 50 is arranged on the left side in the left-right direction (opening / closing axis side).
It is difficult to assemble.

On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by catching the hand on the operation handle 51, the weight of the front frame 10014 is applied to the base side of the operation handle 41, which may damage the operation handle 51. Is not preferred.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the front frame 100 is hooked on the bottom surface of the lower dish unit 6400.
The projecting shape portion 641 that also functions as a finger-hanging portion so that it can be recommended to lift 14.
3 is arranged at the left and right center position. An operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by catching the protruding shape portion 6413 to lift the front frame 10014 and pivotally supporting the front frame 10014 on the rear frame.

And by setting the work procedure to include the work of wiping off the dirt before and after the time of putting the finger,
It is possible to make the worker aware of the location where the dirt needs to be wiped off in connection with the carrying operation. Therefore, forgetting to wipe off the dirt can be prevented.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a gap that is not excessive or deficient in correspondence with the amount of deformation expected in the projecting shape portion 6413. More specifically, the gap between the main body 6411 and the floor surface increases from the shape of the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 toward the front side. This increases in width as the protruding shape portion 6413 moves toward the front side. This corresponds to an increase in the deformable amount (deflection amount) due to the load.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor surface, the projecting shape portion 6413 is formed on the front frame 10014.
Even when it is bent and deformed by the weight of, the gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor can be easily secured. On the other hand, when the projecting shape portion 6413 is bent and deformed to the limit, and there is no gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 may easily come into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411.

Accordingly, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor surface is heavier than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor surface, a part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on.

In addition, the deformable amount is formed larger toward the front side of the projecting shape portion 6413. It works well even during game execution. For example, when exchanging a thousand boxes, a store clerk of the amusement shop slides the thousand boxes back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the projecting shape portion 6413. At this time, the thousand boxes and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 are moved. May collide. If the impact or load caused by the collision is accumulated in the component member as fatigue, the component member is destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may be difficult to continue the game. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting shape portion 64 increases toward the front side where it can easily collide with the car box.
13 is configured such that the deformable amount is large. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the impact and load caused by the collision with the car box by deformation (deflection deformation), and the breakage of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the projecting shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed so as to rise toward the front side (see FIG. 231 (a)). Thereby, the possibility that the thousand box and the main body part 6411 collide with each other on the left and right sides of the projecting shape part 6413 when the thousand box is replaced can be reduced. Thereby, since possibility that the lower bottom face of the main-body part 6411 will be damaged can be made low, it can be made easy to maintain a player's comfortable game environment.

FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower dish unit 6400. In FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 is shown, and the other operation devices 1 are shown.
The outer shape of 0300 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edge portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 (upper facing portions 6455b and 6445) of the V-shaped design member 6450.
56b (see FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (b))).

The main body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the back, and the reinforcing rib 645 is formed.
5 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the main body portion 6451, and therefore the reinforcing rib 6455.
, 6456 is directed in a direction (upward oblique direction) having a directional component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left and right centers. For example, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6
The restoring force from the bending deformation of 456 is directed in the upward oblique direction.

Accordingly, not only the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 but also the horizontal displacement can be dealt with. For example, even when the movement direction of the operation portion (for example, the swing operation member 10310) of the operation device 10300 does not have a horizontal component as in the present embodiment, the downward load applied by the player is left and right. When the load is applied, the entire operation device 10300 may be displaced downward and may be slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can respond to the lateral displacement of the operation device 10300 by bending and deforming based on their curved shape (absorbing the lateral displacement or restoring force) Further, the operation device 10300 can be returned to the position before the displacement at an early stage when the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the left and right center. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the design (see FIG. 207) in the front view of the front frame 10014.

233 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 along the CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa line in FIG. 229 (a), and FIG. 233 (b) is a CCX in FIG. 229 (a).
FIG. 233 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 along the line XXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb, and FIG. 233 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc of FIG. 229 (a). In FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c),
The vicinity of the edge of the through-hole 6412 in the cross section is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), in the assembled state of the lower dish unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 protrudes from the lower dish forming member 6420 (in the rear side portion, the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423). It is pressed against the installation end portion (lower end portion) and the ball discharge device 6430 (the flange portion 6431a thereof). Thereby, the surrounding part of the through-hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower dish forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430.

The inner side surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is the fitting frame portion 64.
34 (see FIG. 224) is formed in a shape that can be contacted in the front-rear and left-right directions from the outside, and the L-shaped plate portion 6
As described above, the lower end portion of 423 contacts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233 (c)). Thereby, since the edge part of the through-hole 6412 can be reinforced, the design freedom of the through-hole 6412 can be improved.

As described above, the ball removal lever 52 has the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6 when not operated.
Therefore, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening can be reduced by the rigidity of the closing plate portion 52b (see FIG. 233 (b)).

Thereby, since it can prevent that the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432 become weak,
As in the present embodiment, the durability of the lower dish unit 6400 is reduced while adopting a configuration in which the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 are disposed near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (disposed close to the operation device 10300). This can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed such that the width is increased and the recessed depth is increased toward the front side. That is, the concave shape portion 6414 is formed to be more easily bent toward the front side.

Accordingly, sufficient bending performance can be imparted to the recessed shape portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 is likely to be large. Generation | occurrence | production of the situation where the covering base member 6410 which supports the operation device 10300 with a load is damaged (for example, it breaks) can be suppressed. This will be described in detail.

As described above, the operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes. An operation timing and an operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the player has a role of operating the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification to draw the player into the game. Here, the frequency for each operation mode in the notification is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until the specific reach effect is executed (see FIG. 215 (a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, a notification prompting an operation in the display effect (notification such as “Press the button!”)
The player performs a push-in operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 for an operation on the screen, a stage change, and the like. Therefore, most of the load generated by the operation is a load generated when the lens member 10317 is pushed in and operated in the direction Y17a (FIG. 2).
15 (a)). Since the occurrence frequency of notification is high, the occurrence frequency of this load is increased.

On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is drive-controlled so as to displace the swing operation member 10310 up and down. For example, the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at a downward position. In such a state (see FIG. 215 (b)), notification for prompting the operation is executed.

The operation direction in this case is a direction Y17b that is further inclined by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction compared to the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the upward position (see FIG. 215 (b)).
Thus, a load along the direction Y17b is generated. Since the occurrence of notification is limited to the execution of a specific reach production, the occurrence frequency is low.

That is, the load occurrence frequency along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the load occurrence frequency along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the recessed shape portion 6
The shape of 414 is configured such that the width is increased and the recessed depth is increased toward the front side, so that the load response performance is increased toward the front side.

In other words, compared to the case where the shape is common in the front-rear direction, it can be configured so as to be able to cope with the difference in the frequency of occurrence of the load in the right place, resulting in excessive deformation or insufficient deformation due to the applied load. It can be made easy to avoid being easily damaged.

Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side where the frequency of occurrence of the load during operation is high are both on the front side, so that the concave shape portion 6414 becomes wider toward the front side. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is reversed, and in this case, the concave shape becomes wider toward the back side. Compared to a common shape in the front-rear direction, by forming in the deep bottom, it can be configured so that it can cope with the difference in load occurrence frequency in the right place, and too much deformation due to the applied load It can be made easy to avoid the occurrence of damage or insufficient deformation due to insufficient deformation.

As shown in FIG. 233 (b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-like portion 64.
26b is in contact with the main body 6411 in the vertical direction at positions on the left and right outer sides than both left and right width ends of the recessed shape portion 6414.

Thereby, compared with the case where drooping plate-shaped part 6426b contact | abuts on the upper edge part of the recessed shape part 6414, the ratio transmitted to the recessed shape part 6414 of the load from the operation device 10300 can be made low. . Thereby, it can suppress that the recessed shape part 6414 is damaged by the load at the time of operating the operating device 10300.

Further, as a countermeasure to the load, not only the bending of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the recessed shape portion 6
Since the bending of the plate-like portion from the upper edge portion of 414 to the contact position of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 can also be utilized, the allowable load can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit 6400 taken along the CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV line of FIG. 229 (a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 includes a flat plate-like portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed and the flat plate-like portion 6 thereof.
A hanging plate-like portion 6426b that hangs downward from the left and right and rear edge portions of 426a, and a portion that is coupled to the front side edge of the flat plate-like portion 6426a and is taller than the flat plate-like portion 6426a. The front longitudinally long portion 6426c, which is open at the bottom, and a fitting portion 6426d that extends from the front longitudinally long portion 6426c to the back side and is fitted with the operation device 10300 are mainly provided. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are referred to as appropriate.

The flat plate-like portion 6426a is formed wider than the left and right widths of the recessed shape portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half of the recessed shape portion 6414. A drooping plate-like portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 (up and down).
That is, the flat plate-like portion 6426a does not abut on the main body portion 6411 and is formed in a U shape in a bottom view (
(See FIG. 225) The extending end of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b contacts the main body portion 6411, whereby the position of the flat plate-like portion 6426a with respect to the covering base member 6410 is determined.

Thus, the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the hanging plate-like portion 6426b are not in a block shape,
Since the lower part is formed in a box shape, the flat plate part 6426a and the hanging plate part 6426 are formed.
“b” is configured to be easily bent and deformed. Accordingly, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are bent and deformed by a load via the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the hanging plate-like portion. 6426b can be bent and deformed, and a plate-like support portion 6426 and a covering base member 6410 (a main body portion 6411, a protruding shape portion 6413, and a recessed shape portion 6414) disposed below the operation device 10300 are provided. Further damage can be prevented.

The hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends to the top surface of the bottom of the main body portion 6411, but does not extend until it enters the recessed shape portion 6414. That is, a space is generated between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 (see below the rear end portion of the flat plate-like portion 6426a in FIG. 234). Thereby, since the state without a framework can be maintained inside the recessed shape portion 6414, the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, the space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even when liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower dish unit 6400, the liquid that has traveled behind the plate-like support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering the back can be weakened. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy for the liquid to enter the front frame 10014.

The front vertically long portion 6426c is connected to the operation device 1 by a fitting portion 6426d extending to the back side.
This is a portion that receives a load through 0300, and the lower part on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load applied from the player to the operation device 10300 is reduced.
Since the load can be distributed not only by 411 but also by the V-shaped design member 6450, the load applied to each component can be weakened.

In addition, a space is also generated between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. Thereby, since it is possible to maintain a state where there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414,
The deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, the space between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even when liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower dish unit 6400, the liquid that has traveled behind the plate-like support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering the back can be weakened. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy for the liquid to enter the front frame 10014.

The fitting portion 6426d is a portion that is elongated in the lateral direction so as to be fitted with the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) and receives a load from the operation device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-like reinforcing ribs 6426d1 coupled to the lower surface and the front vertical portion 6426c formed on the extending base end side.

Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can endure even when a load is applied to displace the operation device 10300 downward. As a result, the displacement of the operation device 10300 can be prevented from occurring excessively.

Here, the operation member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load accompanying the operation or vibration of the player's operation member 10300 is caused by the plate-like support portion 642 via the resin member.
6, the plate-like support portion 6426 is supported on the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In the present embodiment, since the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the front side (see FIG. 234), the front and rear in the direction of the load transmitted from the operation member 10300 to the main body portion 6411. The direction component can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid a problem that may occur when the load generated from the operation device 10300 is transmitted to the back side (the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) shakes, affecting the flow-down mode of the fired ball, or the board box 10
It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as breakage of the substrate due to 0 to 104 or the load being transmitted to the electronic substrate.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235 to FIG. 264, the upper effect device 6500 will be described. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. In FIGS. 235 and 236, the lower plate unit 640 described above is used.
0 and the operation device 10300 are not shown, and the upper rendering device 6500 is the metal main body 10.
The state disassembled forward from 014a is shown.

As shown in FIG. 235, the top effect device 6500 is a sound device 661 arranged in a pair of left and right.
0 is a device that covers the front side of 0, and an electric decoration board 657 in which light emitting means such as LEDs are disposed.
0 and each constituent member serving as an intermediate for delivering light emitted from the LED to the player are disposed.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in the separation direction with respect to the metal main body portion 10014a is disposed on the back side of the upper effect device 6500.
Thereby, the fastening force of the fastening screw which fixes the upper production | presentation apparatus 6500 to the metal main-body part 10014a can be increased (it clamps and fixes stably).

FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the top effect device 6500, and FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 237 and FIG. 238, the top effect device 6500 is shown.
A state in which the upper lid member 6510 is disassembled upward is shown.

The upper production device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 that occupy the front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and front units 6520 to 6550.
The rear units 6560 to 6580 disposed behind the 6550 are mainly provided.

The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper effect device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is configured as a semi-elliptical plate-like portion obtained by dividing a long ellipse on the left and right. Portion 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 that are vertically drilled in the vicinity of the front side edge of main body plate portion 6511 and configured to allow fastening screws to pass therethrough, and extend downward from the back side portion of main body plate portion 6511 A plurality of fastening portions 6513 are formed so that a female screw hole is formed from the back surface of the extending tip, and a fastening screw inserted into the metal main body portion 10014a can be fastened to the female screw hole.
And mainly.

The upper lid member 6510 has a metal main body 10014 on the back side where the fastening portion 6513 is extended.
The other components of the top effect device 6500 are supported by fastening screws fastened to a and inserted through the insertion holes 6512. That is, the mechanical displacement of the upper lid member 6510 can be used to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper rendering device 6500.

The fastening portion 6513 has a plate-like plate portion 6513 connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on the front side.
a. Thereby, it can suppress that the main body board part 6511 deform | transforms in the aspect which falls forward, or is displaced.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is disposed to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125 (a) described above, the fastening portion 419 is the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a is the enlarged rib 4.
19a), the upper lid member 6510 can prevent the acoustic device 6610 from being detached from the metal main body 10014a.

The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side, and a concavo-convex shape portion 6514 formed so as to protrude downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. This uneven portion 651
4 makes it possible to increase the force resisting the load in the direction perpendicular to the plane as compared with the case where the upper cover member 6510 having the same thickness is formed of a flat plate member having a smooth surface (the shape can be easily maintained). it can).

FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper effect device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an upper effect device 6.
FIG. In FIGS. 239 and 240, the top effect device 6500 is shown.
The upper cover member 6510 is not shown, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are disassembled in front of the rear units 6560 to 6580. In the present embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 are inclined frontward and downward with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 (see FIG.
The upper effect device 6500 is configured to be disassembled by moving it in the direction in which the extension plate portion 6552 is formed and the direction along the surface), but details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have a role of receiving, refracting, and transmitting light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs, and the rear units 6560 to 6550.
6580 has a role as a light emitting means such as an LED and a role of supporting an electric decoration board on which the light emitting means such as an LED is disposed. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

FIG. 241 (a) is a front view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and FIG.
FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear units 6560 to 6580 have a plurality of partition members 6560 formed in a manner of partitioning the internal space into a plurality of front views, and a plurality of LEDs that irradiate the partition member 6560 with light. A pair of the electric decoration board 6570 to be disposed and a pair of layers arranged on the back side of the partitioning member 6560 and having a slight gap with respect to the electric decoration board 6570 in the inner region of the outer shape and surface-supporting in the outer portion. The back support member 6580 is mainly provided.

Note that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the electric decoration board 6570 can be maintained, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are supported so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap. Means that.

The partition member 6560 is disposed in close proximity to the front side of the electrical decoration board 6570, and the electrical decoration board 6.
The light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 of 570 is configured to be divided from the vicinity of the electric decoration board 6570. By dividing in this way, the light emitted from each illumination unit 6574-6576 can be visually recognized for each division, and the light emission mode of the light emitted from each illumination unit 6574-6576 is greatly different. However, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced.

The partition member 6560 includes an opposing plate portion 6561 disposed to face the electric decoration board 6570, a central light hole 6562 formed in the left and right central portion of the opposing plate portion 6561, and an opposing plate portion 656.
Left and right light holes 6563 drilled in the left and right lower portions, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted through the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of extended portions to the back surface of the opposing plate portion 6561 Opposing plate portion 6561 in a rectangular tube shape surrounding large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and central light hole 6562
A central cylindrical portion 6566 extending to the front side, a long cylindrical shape surrounding the left and right light hole 6563, a left and right cylindrical portion 6567 extending to the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561, and a T-shape in front view A plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 that is formed from a plate-shaped portion and that couples the counter plate portion 6561, the central tube portion 6666, and the left and right tube portions 6567 on the front side of the counter plate portion 6561 is mainly provided.

The opposing plate portion 6561 is a flange portion 6 that protrudes from the upper edge portion to the back side in a left-right elongated shape.
561a to 6561c. The first flange portion 6561 a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portion 6561b is formed as a pair of left and right, and the first flange portion 6
It extends from the left and right end portions of 561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564 from the position where the cut is made.
The third flange portion 6561c is formed as a left and right pair, and extends from a position opposite to the end portion of the second flange portion 6561b across the fastening portion 6564 to the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the plate-like coupling portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the electric decoration board 6570, and the cut is disposed at least on the electric decoration board 6570. It is comprised in the location where the light irradiated from LED to be leaked is hard to leak. In other words, this place is a place where even if light is incident from the outside, the light is not easily mixed with the light emitted from the LED.

The cut between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a location between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563, and the electric decoration board 6 is deliberately formed.
A portion where no LED is arranged at 570 is a break. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from a break.

The cut between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is a fastening portion 65.
64 is formed at a place where the replacement part is arranged, and a part where an alternative part for blocking light is arranged is cut. That is, even if light travels to a break, light that attempts to pass through the break is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that occurrence of an event of light leaking from the break can be suppressed.

Here, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a series of unbroken portions, but in that case, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c cannot sufficiently secure rigidity, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 It is necessary to counteract only the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fastens the fastening portion 6564 to the downward load applied to the member arranged in front of the partitioning member 6560, assuming gravity or a load given by the player. Occurs. In this embodiment, as the number of the fastening portions 6564 increases, not only the number of work steps for fastening the fastening screws increases, but also the surface area of the electrical decoration board 6570 decreases, and the locations where the LEDs can be arranged are limited. This reduces the design freedom of 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into a length that can ensure the rigidity, it is possible to counter the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 with the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, and the number of work steps can be reduced and the degree of freedom in designing the electrical decoration board 6570 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In the present embodiment, the shape of the top effect device 6500 is
It is formed from a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the left and right center when viewed from above (
(See FIG. 237). In general, since a load (for example, a hanging load) given by the player is applied at the front side end of the upper effect device 6500, the load given by the player at the left and right central portion of the upper effect device 6500 is maximum. And gradually decreases as it approaches the left and right ends.

On the other hand, the lengths of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are different from each other. More specifically, the left and right lengths of the second flange portion 6561b disposed on the left and right sides of the first flange portion 6561a formed on the center portion where the load is maximized are made longer,
In addition, the third flange portion 6561c disposed on the left and right sides of the second flange portion 6561b is longer than the left and right lengths of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left and right length is the shortest at the left and right center,
It gradually becomes longer as it approaches the left and right ends. Thereby, a counter force can be generated without excess or deficiency in the load applied to the upper effect device 6500.

Thereby, since the deformation | transformation and displacement of the division member 6560 can be suppressed, the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the division member 6560 and the electrical decoration board 6570 can be maintained stably. Note that the relative relationship (positional relationship) is maintained by the electric decoration board 657 by deformation or displacement in the separation direction.
It is not limited to the case where the force to hold 0 is reduced and the electric decoration board 6570 is prevented from being displaced, but the electric decoration board 6570 is damaged by deformation or displacement in the approaching direction, and the electric decoration board 6570 is destroyed. It also includes the case of preventing deformation.

The central light hole 6562 and the right and left light hole 6563 are arranged on the electric decoration board 6570.
These are a plurality of through holes drilled corresponding to the pattern. The central light hole 6562 is a single L
While configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of the ED, the right and left light holes 6563 are:
It is configured as a set of through holes having a size surrounding a plurality of LEDs.

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude from the fastening portion 6564 to the back side. Accordingly, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560 is inserted.
And the rear support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylinder portion that extends to the front side in the shape of a cylinder having the same diameter, and includes an insertion hole 6565a that is drilled through the bottom of the tip so that a fastening screw can be inserted. This insertion hole 656
A fastening screw that passes from the back side to the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into 5a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partition unit 6540 described later. By being configured in this way,
The process of inserting the fastening screw through the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear units 6560-6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240).

The central cylinder portion 6566 and the left and right cylinder portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear side end portions of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central tube portion 6566 and the left and right tube portions 6567 is incident on the front units 6520 to 6550.

The plate-like coupling portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper effect device 6500, and the central cylinder portion 6566. The upper surface is disposed at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the. As a result, the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 takes charge of the load prior to the central cylindrical portion 6566, so that occurrence of a situation where a load is applied to the central cylindrical portion 6566 can be suppressed, and the central cylindrical portion 6566 is deformed or displaced. Can be easily avoided.

The plate-like coupling portion 6568 is extended downward until the plate-like portion reaches the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. Accordingly, when a load is transmitted to the plate-like coupling portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the load is also resisted by the resistance force generated by the plate-like portion reaching the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. can do. In this case, since it is formed of a plate-like portion, a counter force can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-like portion itself, so that the displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 can be suppressed.

The electrical decoration board 6570 is a so-called printed board, and is a plate-like board portion 6571 and a portion that is perforated or notched in the board portion 6571 and is a fastening portion 656 of the partition member 6560.
4, a fastening insertion portion 6572 through which the substrate 4657 is inserted, a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 through which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted, and a plurality of portions disposed at the left and right central portions of the substrate portion 6571. The first illumination unit 6574 formed from LEDs (illustrated by a uniform rectangle in FIG. 241 (b)) and a plurality of LEs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illumination unit 6574
A second illumination unit 6575 formed from D and disposed near the upper and lower central portions of the substrate unit 6571,
It mainly includes a third illumination unit 6576 that is arranged symmetrically along the lower end of the substrate unit 6571 and a connector 6577 that connects electrical wiring (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), each illumination unit 6574-6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side along the front-rear direction, and is relative to the partition member 6560. It is arranged according to the general positional relationship. That is, the first illumination unit 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second illumination unit 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light hole 6563, and the third illumination unit 6576 is below the partition member 6560. They are respectively arranged at positions below the edge. Thereby, each illumination part 6574-6576 makes the separate area | region divided by the division member 6560 shine. The first illumination unit 6574 and the second illumination unit 6575 illuminate the inner region of the partition member 6560, while the third illumination unit 6576 has the partition member 6560.
Shine the outer area of the.

Note that the third illumination unit 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partition member 6560 in front view. As will be described later, the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 is received by the light receiving member 65.
58 proceeds diagonally downward, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 is blocked by the partition member 6560, thereby the third illumination unit 6576.
And the partition member 6560 can be arranged to overlap at least partially in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the base plate portion 6571 is such that the fastening portion 65 of the partition member 6560 at the fastening insertion portion 6572.
64 and the back support member 6580 are designed in such a dimension that a fastening force does not act. In other words, the electric decoration board 6570 is not fastened and fixed, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 65.
80 is supported.

The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed from a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) in a front view. As a result, the assembly efficiency can be improved, but details will be described later.

The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, and is a pair of members that are substantially symmetrical with each other, and the front plate portion 6 that is disposed to face the electric decoration board 6570.
581, a flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the front plate portion 6581 to the front side, and an upper plate portion having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending in a plate shape to the back side 6583
And a rear box portion 6584 formed in a box shape connected to the left and right edge portions (edge portions on the opposite side of the side where the pair of members face each other) and the lower edge portion of the front plate portion 6581 and opened to the back side, Pair of rear box 6
A lower surface box portion 6585 that is a portion of 584 and has a smooth upper surface on the side close to the rear surface box portion 6584 of the mating side and is opened downward, and the lower surface box portion 6585 and the front plate portion 65
81, a counter plate portion 6586 that is opposed to the mating member (back support member 6580), and a cut that penetrates vertically between the counter plate portion 6586 and the lower surface box portion 6585. And a notch portion 6587 which is a notch.

The front plate portion 6581 has a plurality of fastening supports in which an oblong rib that can support the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. A through hole formed in a vertically long oval shape with a left and right width slightly longer than the diameter of the portion 6581a and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560, and is disposed at a position overlapping the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front and rear direction. A plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c that are mainly drilled in the lower edge portion that constitutes the boundary between the plurality of positioning holes 6581b and the rear box portion 6584, and through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted; Similar to the screw insertion portion 6581c, the rear box portion 658
4 and is formed in a long hole shape along the lower edge portion constituting the boundary with the front unit 6520 to 6550.
Wiring holes 658 that are drilled at locations corresponding to the plurality of positioning elongated holes 6581d used for positioning of the electrical connection board and the connector 6577 of the electrical decoration board 6570, and allow electrical wiring to pass back and forth.
1e.

The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction constituting the minor axis, and the partition member 656.
The outer width of the right and left direction is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the 0 fastening portion 6564, while the electric decoration board 65
It is made longer than the left-right width of 70 fastening insertion parts 6572. Accordingly, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted into the inside of the oval rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the electric decoration board 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the oval rib. (See FIG. 244 (a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and the front unit 6520.
It is opened along the moving direction of ˜6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244 (a) and 246 (b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 include a screw insertion portion 6581c and a positioning long hole 6581.
It is assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclination direction in which d is formed, and the fastening screw is screwed in along the downward inclination direction (see FIG. 247).

Thereby, compared with the case where it opens in the front-back direction, it becomes easy to avoid interference with the front units 6520-6550 and the electrical decoration board 6570, and the screw insertion part 6581c and the positioning long hole 65 become easy.
Since the position of 81d can be brought close to the electric decoration board 6570, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed with the same size, a wide arrangement area of the electric decoration board 6570 can be secured,
When the electric decoration board 6570 is formed in the same size, the area | region which forms the screw insertion part 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d can be narrowed (it can form compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surfaces of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (hanging direction load) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the forward tilt of the partition member 6560.

The upper plate portion 6583 is provided at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238), and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a that are recessed to be fitted to the fastening portion 6513. Fitting recess 6
The upper and rear sides of 583a are opened and formed in a rectangular shape in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513).

The rear box portion 6584 has a projecting portion 6584a that projects to the front side of the front plate portion 6581 and a sound transmission unit 6 made of punching metal that covers an opening formed in the projecting portion 6584a.
584b, a light receiving portion 6584c formed of a light transmitting member disposed at the right end portion of the overhang portion 6584a of the right side member, and a position near the center of the upper end portion (position near the front plate portion 6581). A pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d that are provided so as to generate a biasing force in a direction repelling from the metal main body 10014a in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), and an insertion hole 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 ) And a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws inserted through are fastened.

The overhanging portion 6584a is formed in a shape in which the upper edge portion follows the lower edge shape of the electric decoration board 6570 (
241), the upper surface constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520 to 6550.

The sound transmission unit 6584b is a part through which a sound wave generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) passes. The sound transmission unit 6584b is disposed at a position facing the vibration film 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

The light receiving portion 6584c receives light emitted from the illumination portion 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED disposed in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and shows the player as a light emitting effect. It is. In the present embodiment, the illumination unit 10014c is an electric decoration board 65.
The light emission is controlled in a manner different from 70. That is, while the lighting effect of the illumination board 10070 is executed at the time of a fluctuation effect with a high probability of occurrence, a normal fluctuation effect and a reach effect, a demonstration effect, or the like, the light emission effect of the illumination unit 10014c has a probability of occurrence. It is executed when a production that is extremely low and extremely advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the lighting unit 10014c can be improved.

The lower surface box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from below, and is a fastening portion 658 to which a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the metal main body portion 10014a is fastened.
5a.

The notch portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 formed vertically on the lower surface of the left and right center portion of the acoustic device 6610 (the portion farthest away from the vibration film 6611). Form. That is, the support plate portion 10014 that supports the back side of the acoustic device 6610.
The sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the through hole formed by d and the notch 6587.

The sound that passes through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as the sound that goes to the back side with the vibration of the vibration film 6611, contrary to the sound that goes to the front side with the vibration of the vibration film 6611. The sound is emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 to the outside through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the bass reflex speaker duct). By providing a plurality of paths for emitting sound in this way, sounds having different timbres can be generated simultaneously.

FIG. 244 (a) shows the partition member 6 along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG.
560, the electrical decoration board 6570, the back surface support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610, FIG. 244 (b) is the partition member 6560, the electrical decoration board 6570, and the back surface support member 6580 in the CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb line of FIG. FIG. 245 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the electrical decoration board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the audio device 6610 in the CCXLVa-CCXLVA line of FIG. 245 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the electrical decoration board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. 241, and FIG. 246 (a) is a CCXLVIa of FIG. -Division member 6560 in the CCXLVIa line, electrical decoration board 6 70 is a partial cross-sectional view of the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610, and FIG. 246 (b) shows the partition member 6560, the electrical decoration board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view.

In FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is shown enlarged. As can be seen from this enlarged view, the upper end of the illumination board 6570 and the flange portion 6
A slight gap is formed at the lower edge of 582. Accordingly, even when the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the electrical decoration substrate 6570 from vibrating (vibration width) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580. .

As shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a), the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 with the electric decoration board 6570 in between. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the electric decoration board 6570. That is, the illumination board 657
0 only aligns the fastening insertion part 6572 with the fastening part 6564, and is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the fastening part.

Further, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a are in contact with the back surface of the electric decoration board 6570, while the partition member 6560 is separated from the electric decoration board 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. In other words, in the present embodiment, the electrical decoration board 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, so
70 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (for example, tilted displacement).

Further, the lower edge portion of the electric decoration board 6570 is not supported by the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. The same applies to FIGS. 244 (b) to 246 (b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the electrical decoration substrate 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape so that a gap can be formed below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an oval shape so that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (FIG. 244 (a
)reference). It will be described that the formation of the partition member 6560 to the back support member 6580 is facilitated by forming in this way.

As in the prior art, for example, the fastening support portion 6 has an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564.
When the rib of 581a is formed, it is necessary to assemble the partition member 6560 in a state where the vertical and horizontal positions are aligned with the back support member 6580.

However, in this embodiment, since the electric decoration board 6570 is disposed between the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 in an unfixed state, the back surface support member 6580 of the electric circuit board 6570 is assembled when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to align the position with respect to, and there is a possibility that the operation becomes difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b are vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) as described above. Therefore, even if the vertical alignment is not accurate, it can be assembled.

As an example of the assembly order, first, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is attached to the electric decoration board 65.
The electric decoration board 6570 is attached to the partition member 6560 so as to be inserted through the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the 70. At this time, the arrangement of the electric decoration board 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 is the large-diameter insertion portion 65.
It is not necessary to determine in the longitudinal direction of 73, and an arbitrary position may be sufficient.

In the present embodiment, the flange members 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can be brought into contact with the electrical decoration board 6570, so that the partition member of the electrical decoration board 6570 is assembled when the electrical decoration board 6570 is assembled to the partition member 6560. The positional deviation with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is replaced with the fastening support portion 65 of the back support member 6580.
It penetrates inside the rib of 81a. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a is not necessarily determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at an arbitrary position. That is, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning that allows the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) to pass through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242), positioning with a sufficiently long vertical allowable width). The working efficiency of inserting 6564 into the inside of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a can be improved.

Next, the partition member 6560 is moved in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a with respect to the back support member 6580, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, a fastening screw is screwed (see FIG. 244 (a)).

In this state, even if the position of the electric decoration board 5670 is shifted, the partition member 6560 is lowered by its own weight to a position where the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 is supported by the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 (see FIG. 244 (b)). And the back support member 6580.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is generally difficult to align the electric decoration board 6570 in which the electric decoration board 6570 is disposed between the partition member 6560 and the back support member in an unfixed manner. By forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape in which the oval shape is halved) while being an assembly mode. As a result, the assembly efficiency can be improved. In addition, even if the electric decoration board 5670 is displaced, it is configured to be corrected to the original position by its own weight.
It is possible to prevent the production effect of the light emission effect during the game from deteriorating over a long period of time due to the displacement of the illumination board 5670.

With reference to FIG. 245 (b), the enlarged hole 6562a will be described. Central light hole 6562
Are arranged in an inverted T-shape at the left and right central parts (4 places, see FIG. 241), and enlarged holes 6562a are arranged in a substantially bowl shape (substantially bowl shape) outside (8 places). Referring to FIG. 241), a direct entry hole 6562b is mainly provided. The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through-hole that allows light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 to pass therethrough, and a portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is on the front side (side away from the light source). It is formed so as to be inclined in such a manner that the facing interval widens as it goes toward.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light radiate | emitted from the 1st illumination part 6574 can be prescribed | regulated. That is, how the light is shown to the player can be changed according to the design mode of the enlarged hole 6562a (inclination angle of the inner wall, raised height, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the tip of the portion raised to the front side of the enlarged hole 6562a is raised to a position where it abuts against the closing portion 6521c of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (see FIG. 263). Thereby, the light that has passed through the enlarged hole 6562a can be incident on the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

246 (a) shows a screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246 (b) shows a positioning slot 6581d. The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are
As described above, it is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled and fixed to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along this inclination direction.

Front unit 6520-6 along screw insertion portion 6581c and positioning slot 6581d
Since 550 is assembled | attached, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of a structural member can be improved compared with the case where it assembles | attaches in the front-back direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the electric decoration board 6570 can be positioned to the extent that it covers the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so that the size of the electric decoration board 6570 can be ensured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, the size of the rear box portion 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 accommodated can be secured.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the vibration membrane 6611 of the speaker is disposed. Can be formed (FIGS. 235 and 24).
6).

As shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning long hole 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is in the front-rear direction. Is formed along (not inclined) because the resin mold used in manufacturing the back support member 6580 is in the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are provided on the back support member 658.
It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same pulling direction as the fastening support portion 6581a, the fitting recessed portion 6583a, and the like formed at zero. In the present embodiment, this pulling direction is used as the fastening support portion 6581a.
And the screw insertion portion 658 due to the setting in the same front-rear direction as the forming direction of the fitting recessed portion 6583a.
The shape of 1c and the positioning long hole 6581d is formed in an irregular shape (a shape whose shape changes in the hole forming direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through-hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back-side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated due to fastening. As for the shape of the screw insertion part 6581c, the thickness of the upper edge part of the part to which the load accompanying fastening is applied is
Since the thickness is reduced toward the center of the hole, a load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge and the other portions, and the fastening screw may be loosened depending on the use state and age.

In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be adopted,
Due to the difference in quality required for the fastening screws used in other fastening locations, the cost is increased. That is, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening location in question, the fastening screw cannot be made into a common part, resulting in high costs, but a fastening screw with a large head diameter at all fastening locations. If this is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, and this will increase the cost in terms of material costs.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610 that is opposed to the head of the fastening screw inserted through the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed in a recess shape on the front wall 6620 ( A retaining plate portion 6621 formed as a plate upper portion that is a part of a portion that is formed to be recessed and is parallel to the plate portion on which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area where the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the back support member 6580 and the back plate supporting member 6580. Further, when the fastening screw is loosened, the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in a direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced. Therefore, the further progress of the fastening screw is restricted, and the fastening screw falls off. Can be prevented.

The retaining plate portion 6621 is formed to have a size that is slightly spaced from the head of the screw when the fastening screw is not loose. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the advancement of the fastening screw is regulated by contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, the acoustic device 66
In the case of outputting sound from 10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520-6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

Further, the front wall 6620 has a fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 207) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207).
A plurality of contact avoiding recesses 6622 are provided to be recessed at the back position of the through hole of FIG.
The contact avoidance concave portion 6622 is inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and fastened to the fastening portion 6564 (FIG. 243).
The fastening screw is screwed into the head so that contact with the head of the fastening screw can be avoided (a dimension that allows a slight gap between the head and the head).

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. In addition, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the same front-rear direction as the resin mold drawing direction, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, and is sufficient. A fastening force can be generated. Therefore, the fastening support portion 65
Although it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted into 81a will be loosened, if the fastening screw is loosened, the contact avoiding recess 6622 has the same function as the retaining plate portion 6621 described above.
Can be generated.

That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the advancement of the fastening screw is regulated by contact, so that the gap between the contact avoiding recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, the acoustic device 66
In the case of outputting sound from 10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520-6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, it is possible to grasp the transmission of vibration generated when the head of the fastening screw comes into contact with the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoiding recess 6622 due to the loosening of the fastening screw. The occurrence of looseness can be noticed, and the situation where the fastening screw is left loose can be easily avoided.

For example, it is exemplified that noise is generated by vibration transmission or that vibration is detected.

As described with reference to FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), in this embodiment, the electric decoration board 65 is used.
70 is disposed in the vicinity of the back support member 6580 while being disposed without being fixed to the back support member 6580. Accordingly, the acoustic device 6610 and the electrical decoration board 6570 can be disposed close to each other with the back support member 6580 interposed therebetween, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 resulting from the vibration of the acoustic apparatus 6610 is transmitted to the electrical decoration board 6570. It is possible to avoid the substrate 6570 from being broken.

Here, the partition member 6560 is an effect portion of the electrical decoration board 6570 (that is, the illumination units 6574 to 6574).
6576), the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is narrowed for the purpose of ensuring a large proportion of the production portion on the surface of the electric decoration board 6570. It is easy to be done.

Therefore, the problem that the fixing of the partition member 6560 is likely to be insufficient is likely to occur, and without the countermeasure, the partition member 6560 may transmit the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580. When 6560 vibrates, there is a possibility that the production effect may be poor, the fastening portion may be loosened, or the partition member 6560 itself may be damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, suppression of the vibration of the partition member 6560 is aimed at by fixing the partition member 6560 from another direction. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper effect device 6500. In FIG. 247, the upper production device 65
The fastening location, the fastening direction, and the fastening direction of each component member of 00 are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T-shape, the T-shaped horizontal line indicates the head of the fastening screw,
A vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates a screw portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, in the top effect device 6500, the front units 6520 to 6550 surround the front and bottom surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and the front unit 6520 is surrounded by the front units 6520 to 6550.
The upper lid member 6510 is configured to be supported by the upper lid member 6510, but the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560. .

Thereby, it is avoided that the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 is reinforced. In this embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed from a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted through the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 is moved in the thickness direction ( It is easy to be displaced (deformed) in the vertical direction.

With this displacement (deformation), the front-rear direction width of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be bent with respect to the front-rear center, the front-rear interval of the insertion holes 6512 formed away from the front and rear is shortened. Thereby, the load which displaces the division unit 6540 to the back side arises, and the compression load to the front-back direction can be applied with respect to the division member 6560.

That is, since the partition member 6560 can be sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 and a load can be applied, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. Can do.

Here, even if the width in the front-rear direction of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened, the partition unit 6540
When the lower side is displaced to the front side (displaced away from the partition member 6560), the load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 tends to be insufficient, and the partition member 656
There is a possibility that the effect of suppressing the vibration of 0 is insufficient.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the displacement in the front-rear direction of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 is regulated by the guided unit 6550, the lower side of the partition unit 6540 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side. Accordingly, the partition member 656 is separated from the partition unit 6540.
Sufficient load given to 0 can be secured.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254 (a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 is used. The direction in which the vibration is transmitted can be the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

Thereby, the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the movement of the front and rear fastening locations in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. Therefore, guided unit 6550
Even if the vibration is transmitted to the front, the function of suppressing the displacement in the front-rear direction of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 can be sufficiently ensured.

As shown in FIG. 247, the sound device 66 that easily generates vibrations by devising the fastening portion.
The electric decoration board 6570 is arranged in the non-fixed state in the proximity of the electric decoration board 6570 to prevent the electric decoration board 6570 from being damaged, and the electric decoration board 6570 is connected to the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580).
) From the separation member 6560 that prevents the separation member 6560 from being separated from the allowable amount or more by the vibrations of the partition member 6560 can be suppressed.

That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintaining performance of the top effect device 6500 while improving the durability of the electric decoration board 6570 disposed in proximity to the acoustic device 6610.

In addition, for the purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in the present embodiment, the upper lid member 65 is used.
Corresponding to a displacement amount of 10. That is, the upper lid member 6510 has a fastening portion 6513.
The configuration in which the back side is fixed and extends in the form of a thin plate in the front-rear direction is easy to bend and bend in such a manner that the amount of displacement on the front side is larger than that on the back side.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end portion of the upper lid member 6510, the center of the curvature radius is arranged below the upper lid member 6510 from the shape of the upper lid member 6510, starting from the rear end portion. It can be curved and displaced. In this case, a tensile load in the front-rear direction is applied to the upper lid member 6510 itself, while a compressive load is applied to the other members disposed below the upper cover member 6510 itself.

Since the direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the front-rear direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but with respect to the front-rear direction as the displacement increases (towards the front side). It comes to follow the direction which inclines and descends toward the front side.

In the present embodiment, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is a direction inclined downward toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction, the fastening direction of the fastening screw and the top cover The direction of the compressive load generated with the displacement of the member 6510 can be brought closer.

As a result, the resistance to the compression load can be sufficiently generated at the fastening position, and the component of the compression load given in the shearing direction of the fastening screw (direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) is reduced, so that the fastening screw is broken. Can be suppressed.

The fastening screw whose fastening direction is formed in the direction of descending and tilting toward the front side is the plate guide unit 6.
When used for fastening 550, the plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the lower side and the back side of the electric decoration board 6570 (see the screw insertion portion 6581c and the like in FIG. 246 (a)). In the present embodiment, the electric decoration board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner and is easily displaced, but the plate guide unit 6550 can limit the displacement allowable amount of the electric decoration board 6570. That is, even if the electric decoration board 6570 is displaced, excessive displacement of the electric decoration board 6570 can be restricted by making it possible to contact the plate guide unit 6550 when the displacement amount is excessive.

In addition, since the plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the back side of the electric decoration board 6570 (the side where the acoustic device 6610 is arranged), the displacement of the electric decoration board 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the electrical decoration board | substrate 6570 approaches the acoustic apparatus 6610 as a vibration generation source.

In this embodiment, the fastening portions (fastening support portion 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction are gathered on the left and right center sides (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction descends toward the front side. Fastening portions (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the inclined direction are
They are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and they are not closely arranged.

Thereby, the influence which the deformation | transformation (displacement) which arises in one fastening part has on the other fastening part can be suppressed. In other words, even if the fastening portion along the front-rear direction is loosened and the displacement in the front-rear direction occurs, the affected part can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, so that it tilts downward. It can avoid that the load of the direction which inclines with a fastening direction (it follows the front-back direction) with respect to the fastening part which follows a direction arises. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the loosening of a screw can be suppressed.

In addition, by fixing a portion that is long in the front-rear direction, that is, the left and right center side, by a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction, it is possible to improve the resistance of the top effect device 6500 to a load in the push-down direction.

On the other hand, the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side is considered to have a lower resistance to the load in the push-down direction than the fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, by disposing the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are formed short along the front-rear direction, the resistance force against the load in the push-down direction is reduced. An arrangement area of the electric decoration board 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 can be secured while minimizing the influence of this.

FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line in FIG. 241 (a). The specific portion is shown in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 248, the electric decoration board 6570 has a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 with a partition member 6560.
The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 abuts in the left-right direction. In addition, the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right side portions of the partition member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back support member 6580, respectively, and the contact positions thereof are formed so as not to coincide with each other.

With this configuration, it is possible to improve the durability of the electric decoration board 6570 and adjust the ease of occurrence of displacement. This will be described in turn below. First, the improvement in durability of the electric decoration board 6570 will be described.

Here, when the front and back surfaces of the electrical decoration board 6570 are in contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 respectively at the same position in the front and back, for some reason (such as an error during resin molding or a fastening failure) When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is shorter than the thickness of the electric decoration board 6570, a compression force is applied to the electric decoration board 6570, and if the applied load is large, There is a risk of the decorative substrate 6570 breaking.

Further, even when a compression force is not applied to the electric decoration board 6570 at the time of assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, thereby causing a load (for example, a load in the compression direction). May be applied, and the electric decoration board 6570 may be broken by this load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positions of the front and rear surfaces of the electrical decoration board 6570 that contact the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 do not match front and rear (there is a position that contacts at a shifted position). Even if a load is applied to the electric decoration board 6570 in the above-described manner, the load is not a load that compresses the electric decoration board 6570 but a load that curves the electric decoration board 6570.
Therefore, since it can cope with the electric decoration board | substrate 6570 being bent and deform | transforming, possibility that the crack of the electric decoration board | substrate 6570 will arise can be made low.

Next, adjustment of the ease of occurrence of displacement of the electrical decoration board 6570 will be described. Illuminated board 6570
In this embodiment, the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 are inserted and are prevented from being displaced. (See FIG. 243).

In addition, since the electric decoration board 6570 is in contact (contact) with the large-diameter cylindrical part 6565 in the left-right direction, the contact resistance between the electric decoration board 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical part 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, it is a matter of course that the contact area is increased and a sufficient frictional resistance can be ensured.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the electrical decoration board 6570 in the vicinity of the left and right center portion of the electrical decoration board 6570. Therefore, even when a peripheral member vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 of the electrical decoration board 6570 can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and the fastening portion 6564 are not arranged on the left and right sides (particularly the lower side) of the electric decoration board 6570, a load that is compressed from the front and rear is not generated. Compared with the left and right center portion of 6570, it is possible to easily generate a displacement.

Therefore, when the surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the electric decoration board 65 is used.
It is possible to easily change the direction of light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576.

In the present embodiment, since the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, each acoustic device 66 is arranged.
Based on the ten vibration modes, the vibration mode of the electric decoration board 6570 changes. That is, when the sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 and the right side of the lighting board 6570 is preferentially vibrated, the sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 and the left side of the lighting board 6570 is preferentially vibrated. And when the sound is output from both left and right acoustic devices 6610
The electric decoration board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes when the left and right sides of the 570 are vibrated.

Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550, and FIG. 250 shows the front units 6520 to 6-6.
550 is an exploded rear perspective view of 550. FIG. Note that in FIGS. 249 and 250, the reference numerals of the detailed configurations are omitted for easy understanding.

In FIGS. 249 and 250, a light transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illumination board 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame that is formed so as to surround the light transmission unit 6520 and forms an outer frame. A state in which the member 6530, the partitioning unit 6540 that abuts the partitioning member 6560 in the front-rear direction and similarly partitions the light, and the guided unit 6550 guided to the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is illustrated. The

In the case of a light emission effect via the front units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520 is used.
Receives the light from the first illumination unit 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives the light from the second illumination unit 6575, and the guided unit 6550 receives the light from the third illumination unit 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

251 (a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252 (a) is a partition. FIG. 252 (b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540, FIG. 253 (a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253 (b) is a plate guide. It is a rear view of the unit 6550.

FIG. 254 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 along the line CCLIVa-CCLIVa of FIG. 251 (b), and FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 in the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of (b), FIG.254 (c) is CCLIVc-CCL of FIG.251 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 in the IVc line.

FIG. 255 is an exploded front perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

The partition unit 6540 is formed of a milky white light-transmitting resin material and formed in a substantially inverted triangle in a front view. The partitioning unit 6540 is formed to penetrate through the central part of the milky white member 6541 in the front-rear direction. Through-hole 65 formed so that the rear portion can be inserted.
42, a pair of fastening portions 6543, which are portions projecting inwardly of the through-hole 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the outer frame member 6530 to be inserted therethrough. Along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541, a plurality of insertion holes 6544, a pair of post-guide fastening portions 6545 that are cylindrically extended toward the back side and fastened with fastening screws that pass through the insertion holes 6565a of the partition member 6560 A pair of box-shaped light receiving parts 6 formed in a box shape opened to the rear side.
546 and a plate-like portion extending downward from the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, and a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 is pierced so as to be inserted. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547 in which insertion holes 6547b are formed, and a shape that covers the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, are milky white members 6541.
And a transparent covering member 6548 that is fitted and supported by the main body.

The partition unit 6540 is formed in a curved shape in which the front side edge portion swells to the front side in a top view like the upper lid member 6510, is formed in a substantially inverted triangle in the front view, and is centered on the back side in the side view. (See FIG. 254 (a)).

The milky white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a to which a fastening screw inserted through an insertion hole 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 is fastened. This fastening portion 6541
a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side in correspondence with the inclination of a contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520 described later. Accordingly, the front side end portion of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) can be brought into contact with each other, thereby preventing the posture of the optical transmission unit 6520 from changing. Can do.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole directed to the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed from the front side. Further, the post-guidance fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole directed to the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed from the back side.

The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion disposed opposite to the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the electric decoration board 6570. The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is disposed on the back surface of the front bottom portion and the upper surface of the lower plate portion. Is
A jagged decoration with a short left and right width is formed. This jagged shape is formed by a concavo-convex shape in which the protrusions having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

With this shape, light incident from the back side can be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface thereof can emit light uniformly in a front view.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape opened upward in the rear view shape, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. And a projecting rib 6547c projecting to the front side in a semi-oval shape surrounding the main body.

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

The insertion plate portion 6547 is a portion that receives a load generated by fastening by being formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the screwing portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted. Insertion plate part 6
The shape of the insertion hole formed in 547 is the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which a load accompanying fastening is applied in relation to the resin mold drawing direction (in this embodiment, the front-rear direction). The thickness is reduced toward the part (see FIG. 254 (b)).

In this case, load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge portion and the other portions, so that the partition unit 6540
There is a possibility that the fastening screw may be loosened when a small misalignment between the plate guide unit 6550 and the plate guide unit 6550 occurs repeatedly.

In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be adopted,
Due to the difference in quality required for the fastening screws used in other fastening locations, the cost is increased. That is, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening location in question, the fastening screw cannot be made into a common part, resulting in high costs, but a fastening screw with a large head diameter at all fastening locations. If this is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, and this will increase the cost in terms of material costs.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the plate guide unit 6550 for the partition unit 6540.
The positional deviation is prevented at a plurality of locations. That is, first, the plate guide unit 6
Since the threaded portion 6554a of 550 is supported by the projecting rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented from being displaced downward (see FIGS. 247 and 254 (b)).

Secondly, the upper end on the front side of the plate guide unit 6550 is connected to the milky white member 6541 by the locking convex portion 6.
The transparent covering member 6548 locked at 548b is engaged with the lower end on the back side in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 254 (b)). Thus, the partition unit 6 of the plate guide unit 6550
Displacement to the front side with respect to 540 can be prevented.

Third, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is the main body resin member 655 of the plate guide unit 6550.
1 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the surface (see FIG. 254 (b)). Thereby, the upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 relative to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

The partition unit 6 of the plate guide unit 6550 mainly by these first to third contact structures.
Since the displacement with respect to 540 can be suppressed, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screwing portion 6554a can be suppressed.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and has a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a extending in a plate shape toward the back side at the lower edge connecting portion of the V shape, and a back surface from the upper edge portion. A plurality of locking projections 6548b protruding in a plate shape to the side. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

A jagged decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548 a in the same manner as the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Thereby, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the cut-out portion can be supplemented by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a.
It is possible to emit light uniformly over 48 left and right directions.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

Here, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom plate-like portion is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the back side as the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 moves toward the back side (see FIG. 254 (c)). In order to form 6548a at the lower bottom surface and the surface position of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the back side in the same manner as the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. .

If this inclined surface is to be formed by the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, the mold drawing direction for forming the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. In other words, the removal direction is the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the through-hole 6542, and the direction in which it rises and tilts toward the back side in the vicinity of the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, so that the difficulty of mold design only increases. In addition, the manufacturing process may be complicated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but is formed by the transparent covering member 6548 instead (see FIG. 254 (c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, the white partition member 6560 is disposed opposite to the lower side plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 constituting the inclined surface, so that the transparent covering member 6548 is provided to the player. Can be visually recognized with a uniform color (white).

Thereby, the drawing direction of the molding die of the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 covered on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes in the front-rear drawing direction. The transparent covering member 654 has a shape (a shape in which the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in a direction of entering the inside of the partition unit 6540 in a front view).
The player can visually recognize the light emission of 8 in a uniform light emission mode.

In other words, while the partition unit 6540 is tapered toward the back side (upper and lower intervals are narrowed), the back surface portion of the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 65 that are adjacent to each other.
Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a 48 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a light emission effect in a uniform light emission mode. .

In this case, although it becomes difficult to set the direction of removing the molding die of the transparent covering member 6548 to the front-rear direction, the transparent covering member 6548 does not necessarily have a portion formed along the front-rear direction. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a (the direction of rising inclination) as the molding direction of the molding die, a manufacturing process in which the molding direction is resin-molded with a mold in the front-rear direction (one direction); The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured by a manufacturing process that does not change at all.

Therefore, the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and the portion visually recognized through the transparent covering member 6548 can be made to emit light uniformly.

The locking convex portion 6548 b is a portion that is locked to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking convex portion 6548 b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

The guided unit 6550 is formed from a colored and opaque resin material in a substantially V shape in a front view, and is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580.
And an extended plate portion 6552 that extends in the form of a plate on the back side along the lower edge of the left and right center portion of the main body resin member 6551, and a back side end portion of the extended plate portion 6552. A partition unit 6 arranged along a pair of left and right exhaust pressure passage holes 6553 and upper left and right edges of the main body resin member 6551.
A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 that are arranged to face the insertion plate portion 6547 of the 540 and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws, and a back support member 6580 that is arranged along the left and right lower edge portions of the main body resin member 6551.
A plurality of back side fastening portions 6555 to which fastening screws that pass through the screw insertion portions 6581c (see FIG. 241 (a)) are fastened and a back support member that protrudes in a rib shape between the back side fastening portions 6555 A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 to be inserted into 6580 positioning elongated holes 6581d (see FIG. 241 (a)), and a plurality of through holes 6 drilled in the front-rear direction in the left and right arm portions.
557 and a pair of light receiving members 6558 that are formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material and are fitted and fixed in the plurality of through holes 6557.

In the guided unit 6550, the direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the die removal direction. That is, each component is formed along an inclination direction that rises and inclines toward the back side or a direction perpendicular to the inclination direction.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553.

In the range where the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is opposed to the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235),
Rather than being formed as a single large hole, it is formed in a plurality of small hole shapes (formed in small ranges). Thereby, the fraud which makes thin wire materials, such as a piano wire approach, can be suppressed.

Further, the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed so that the hole width is narrowed toward the end of the hole and toward the back side. As a result, the fine wire can be clogged in the hole,
After entering the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553, the movement resistance of the fine wire can be increased when the fine wire is further advanced to the back or when a load is applied to a specific member. This
Since the time required for fraud can be extended, fraud can be suppressed.

The front side fastening portion 6554 includes a screwed portion 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and the screwed portion 65.
Positioning wall portions 6554b formed in a pair of wall shapes on the left and right of 54a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are arranged to face each other at an interval slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b.

The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and a cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction is formed in an L shape. Guided portion 6558a and a plurality of rear surface box-shaped portions 6558 formed in a box shape that bulges out on the front side of the guided portion 6558a and opens on the back side, and can be fitted into the through holes 6557.
b and the center side end of the guided portion 6558a (the end on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 face each other)
And an upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape along the upper edge toward the back side.

The light receiving member 6558 is a third illumination portion 6576 of the electrical decoration board 6570 (see FIG. 241 (b)).
It is a member which receives the light irradiated from. The above-mentioned decorative jagged shape is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. Thereby, since light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (
Even in the case of 1 to 2 in FIG. 241 (b), the entire rear box-like portion 6558b can be viewed as uniform light. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the feeling of the point light source can be diminished).

Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (an attitude in which the light traveling direction is in line with the assembly direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is the plate guide unit 6550). Can be attached in a posture that intersects the assembly direction of
Therefore, the light emitted along the front-rear direction from the LED disposed in the third illumination unit 6576 of the decoration board 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 is refracted when passing through the light receiving member 6558, and the light receiving member 6558 It can be made to advance in the direction inclined diagonally downward toward the front side.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The rear box-like portion 6558b is formed so that the bulging length to the front side is shorter in the object disposed on the left and right outer sides than in the object disposed on the left and right inner sides. As a result, the rear box-like portion 6
The front side of 558b is divided into a division unit 6540 and a guided unit 65 connected to the lower side thereof.
It can be formed along the curved shape of 50 front side edges.

The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 arranged to face the partition member 6560 is formed in a planar shape particularly in the extended plate portion 6552 at the center portion, and is not partitioned, so that the alignment with the partition member 6560 is performed. It's hard to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition that partitions the region above the extending plate portion 6552, so that the partition member 6560 can be easily aligned.

Returning to FIG. In the description so far, the second illumination unit 6575 arranged on the left and right.
And the part which receives the light irradiated from the 3rd illumination part 6576 was demonstrated. Hereinafter, the light transmission unit 6520 that is a portion that receives light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 will be described.

FIG. 257 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 257 (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.
8A is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258B is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530. FIG.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a colored (orange in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and has a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and the main body portion 653.
An opening 6532 that is drilled in the front-rear direction in a substantially saddle shape (substantially saddle shape) at the center of 1;
A protruding rib 6533 protruding in a rib shape on the back side in a shape along the lower edge of the main body portion 6531;
It mainly includes a plurality of fastening portions 6534 that are disposed at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so as to be capable of screwing fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6544.

Since the main body portion 6531 does not transmit light to the outer frame member 6530, a portion that transmits light inside the outer shape is limited to the opening 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 is the first
This corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the illumination unit 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed from a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 in front view (see FIG. 241 (a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 passes through the transparent cylindrical member 6521, but the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 differs depending on the front and rear positions. The player who visually recognizes the light having a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574 can be viewed.

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the lateral width becomes longer as the opening 6532 is approached (the left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light that is visually recognized from the front of the opening 6532 in the vicinity of the position overlapping the upper plate portion in the front-rear direction is visually recognized in a pattern that spreads laterally compared to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first illumination unit 6574 that emits light behind it while expanding the range of light visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range while suppressing the size of the first lighting unit 6574 (or the electric decoration board 6570). Details of the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 will be described later.

The protruding rib 6533 is notched at a position corresponding to the locking projection 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is disposed at a location where the formation of the locking projection 6548b is omitted. In the present embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking projection 6548b are formed on the same curve in front view (formed on the same shape as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). )

FIG. 259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The light transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent cylindrical member 6521 formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a plane disposed in the middle of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer periphery, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup shape covered with a transparent cylindrical member 6521 from a colorless and light-transmitting resin. A shielding member 6524 formed in a cylindrical shape so that the opposite side of the side covered with the cup-shaped member 6523 is formed from a colored (white in this embodiment) and light-impermeable resin material, and the shielding member 6524 A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion that can come into surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front side end portion, and an outer side that extends to the front side along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525 Frame extension And 526, mainly it comprises.

The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, has a shape in which the left and right wall portions are bent inward, and the LED disposed in the first illumination unit 6574 and the front and rear , A plurality of light receiving protrusions 6521b projecting from the rear outer part 6521a to the back side at positions facing the LEDs, and a rear outer part 6
A blocking portion 6521c that blocks a region surrounded by 521a, a plurality of light-transmitting holes 6521d formed in the blocking portion 6521c at positions opposed to the LEDs, at least the left and right widths of the upper wall and the left and right wall portions A main body cylinder portion 6521e that becomes longer as the distance goes to the front side, and a frame-like extension portion 6 that extends to the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body cylinder portion 6521e.
521f.

The light receiving protrusion 6521 b is a portion that is inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. That is, by reducing the interval between the partition member 6560 and the illumination board 6570 (FIG. 263).
Reference), the light from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 can be incident on the light receiving protrusion 6521b without leaving a gap as much as the thickness of the counter plate 6561 of the partition member 6560. As a result, total reflection can be easily generated.

As described above, the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 is incident at a close distance, is totally reflected, and travels to the front side, compared to the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 657 described above.
The light emitted from the 6 LEDs travels in the air by the area inside the recessed portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the rear-side box-shaped portion 6558b that are recessed toward the direction away from the LED, and is box-shaped. The front side wall portions of the light receiving portion 6546 and the rear box portion 6558b are caused to emit light. Therefore, the first illumination unit 65
The light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 has a low amount of light compared to the light emitted from 74, and the player can visually recognize the light as uniform light.

Further, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is formed is formed from a light-transmitting milky white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed is from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be changed stepwise.

The frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is generally formed in a shape similar to that of the rear outer shape portion 6521a. However, the outer shape of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is larger than the rear outer shape portion 652 due to the relationship through the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.
It is enlarged compared to the outer shape of 1a.

Therefore, compared with the size of the region where the LED in the first illumination unit 6574 is arranged,
The player can visually recognize the large area as light.

The shape of the extending tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is such that each portion is arranged at substantially the same distance from the bottom rear side surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extending tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is designed.
Thereby, the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light emission mode.

The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are drilled in a size that allows the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 to be inserted.

The cup-shaped member 6523 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape that can support the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened with a fastening screw that is inserted into the bottom portion. A pair of terminal fastening portions 6523a to which the portion 6543 is fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (decorative shape made of a protrusion having a triangular cross section) is formed on the cup-shaped back bottom, and a decorative shape portion thereof A flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523b.

The decorative shape portion 6523b diffuses and reflects the light irradiated from the back surface to the cup-shaped member 6523. Thereby, the player who views the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side can be visually recognized as surface emitting, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in the front view can be improved.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region opposite to the frame-like extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light that has passed through the thick inside of the frame-like extension portion 6521f is not reflected irregularly. Can be passed to the side. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the light traveling through the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f as clear light.

The shielding member 6524 has a rear side end portion formed in the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partition member 6560, and is recessed with a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a.

The contact plate portion 6525 is a fastening portion 6543 of the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 251 (a)).
A pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a drilled in such a size that can be inserted through the circular threaded portion.

The outer frame extending portion 6526 is formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so that the flange portion 6522 can be accommodated, and the extending length is equal to the thickness of the flange portion 6522,
The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the back-side plate-like portion of the cup-like member 6523.

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-like portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are accommodated inside the outer frame extending portion 6526 (see FIG. 258 (a)).
Therefore, the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be stably maintained. Further, the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 is the insertion hole 6.
Since 525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening portion 6523a are inserted and fastened in this order, the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the light transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end face of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylinder portion 6521e and advanced forward, and the front side end portion of the frame-like extension portion 6521f The cup-shaped member 6523 can be irradiated with the light. Cup-shaped member 6
523 is set to have a short interval with the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f, so that the cup-shaped member 6523 is provided.
The player who visually recognizes the light from the front side can be visually recognized in a light emission mode in which the light is emitted in a line shape (outline shape along the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523). Thereby, since the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above can be emphasized, a sharp light emission effect can be executed. This will be described in detail below.

FIG. 261 shows a six-sided view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows a six-sided view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state. Since the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured symmetrically, the left side view is not shown.

261 (a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261 (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261 (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member 6521. FIG. 261 (d) is a right side view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 261 (e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.

262 (a) is a front view of the light transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262 (b) is a top view of the light transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262 (c) is a bottom view of the light transmission unit 6520. 262 (d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262 (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. Note that FIG. 262 (e
), The illustration of the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261 (b) and 261 (d), the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the lower bottom surface are inclined so that the left and right widths and the vertical width gradually increase toward the front side. It is said. On the other hand, the portion that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface because the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylinder portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the back side resin mold is moved in the drawing direction (backward), but the outer shape portion 6521 formed on the rear side portion thereof.
If the inner surface of a has the same inclination, interference occurs when the resin mold on the back side is moved, so the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction ( (See FIG. 263).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylinder portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the front-side resin mold is moved in the drawing direction (front), but the frame shape formed on the front side portion thereof. If the outer surface of the extended portion 6521f has the same inclination, it interferes when the resin mold is moved. Therefore, the outer surface of the frame-like extended portion 6521f is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 263).

Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the front-side resin mold that is pulled out forward and the rear-side resin mold that is pulled out backward is configured by the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, and the above-described inclination on the one side before and after that When the non-inclined surface is formed on the other side, the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522 have a length in the front-rear direction of the non-inclined surface compared to the length in the front-rear direction of the inclined surface. And formed on the shorter side.

This makes it possible to suppress the change in the plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position while making the transparent cylindrical member 6521 have the gradually increasing shape as described above, so that the light passing through the thickness inside the transparent cylindrical member 6521 can be reduced. It is possible to suppress a change in the front-rear position of the traveling mode. Accordingly, when light is incident on the inside of the wall and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, the transparent tubular member 6 is then processed.
The total reflection can be easily repeated until the front end of 521 is reached, and light leakage can be suppressed, so that a player who sees the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side can see sufficient light.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that the vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. Accordingly, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 are assembled (see FIGS. 249 and 250), the fastening portion is connected to the guide recess portion 6524a as compared with the case where the vertical width is formed in the front-rear direction. Since 6543 (refer to FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembly can be reduced.

FIG. 263 shows the rear unit 65 in the CCLXIII-CCLXIII line of FIG.
60 is a partial cross-sectional view of an acoustic device 6610 and an optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. In FIG. 263, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged at the assembly position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light receiving projection 6521 b of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed by the partition member 6.
560 is formed in such a size that a slight gap is generated when passing through the direct insertion hole 6562b of 560, and the tip thereof is inserted to the surface position of the opposing plate portion 6561. As a result, the opposing plate portion 6561
The distance between the first illumination unit 6574 and the light receiving projection 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness.

The light receiving projecting portion 6521b is formed in a plate shape in which the direction along the shape of the back outer shape portion 6521a is the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the short direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 arranged to face each other.

Thus, in the short direction of the light receiving projection 6521b, only light that travels substantially straight from the first illumination unit 6574 to the front side (light having a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) is incident, and other light is incident. Can be prevented.

The light incident in this way easily travels to the front side through the thick inside of the transparent tubular member 6521,
Even when the light is reflected at the boundary, since the angle formed by the transparent cylindrical member 6521 and the light direction is small, total reflection is likely to occur, so that the light is weakened before reaching the front side end of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Can be suppressed.

The dimension in the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is set to be approximately twice the dimension in the short direction. Therefore, regarding the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis is compared with the case described in the thickness direction of the surface. Is also allowed to enter the light receiving protrusion 6521b.

On the other hand, the rear outer shape portion 6521a coupled to the longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b is not in contact with the opposing plate portion 6561 and is arranged with a slight gap. Accordingly, the first illumination unit 657
4, the light incident from the end face of the back outer shape portion 6521 a (light having a large angle between the optical axis and the traveling direction of the light) is reflected to avoid being viewed by the player. be able to.

That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize only the light passing through the light receiving protrusion 6521b and proceeding through the thickness of the main body cylinder portion 6521e, and cut the other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with respect to the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

The light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light receiving projection 6521b passes through the inside of the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the hole 6521d of the transparent tubular member 6521.
It passes through (see FIG. 260) and is irradiated to the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). This light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels in the air, so that the player can visually recognize it as uniform light.

Note that the raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the blocking portion 6521c are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, light can be prevented from leaking from the gap between the raised tip and the blocking portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the appearance of light that has passed through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 of the light transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264 (a) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first illumination unit 6574, and FIG. 264 (b) schematically illustrates the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. In the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, it passes through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (with total reflection). The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized in a shape in which the shape (substantially saddle shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a is enlarged.

In addition, as described above, the light in the thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 proceeds to the front side end without being weakened, and therefore the edge light emitting unit 6 also in the front view of the light transmission unit 6520.
The position corresponding to the arrangement of 574a emits strong light (emits light like a point light source).

Here, the distance between the light sources is longer than the distance L17b between the strong light emission positions in the front view of the light transmission unit 6520, as compared with the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting units 6574a. However, the visual effect of light tends to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the strong light emission arrangements of the visible light becomes longer than the actual arrangement distance L17a of the edge light emitting portion 6574a, so the number of LEDs actually arranged is increased. It is difficult to solve the problem even if the interval between the LEDs is reduced.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light from the edge light emitting portion 6574a is caused to travel radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (the longitudinal direction of the light receiving projection 6521b). The light emitted from the adjacent LEDs overlaps to reinforce the intensity of the light visually recognized at the position between the light sources.

Thereby, also in the location (between LEDs) where the LEDs of the first illumination unit 6574 are not arranged, it is possible to make the line-shaped light visible in front view of the light transmission unit 6520 (FIG. 2).
64 (b) imaginary line). Therefore, it is possible to improve the state where light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower end of the first illumination unit 6574 are the main body cylinder unit 652.
1e is disposed at the boundary between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 (FIG. 262).
(See (e)). Therefore, the light traveling on the upper side of the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above the optical axis, and the light traveling on the lower side of the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2, thereby allowing the frame-shaped extending portion 65 to pass.
It overlaps in the lower left and right center of 21f.

Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 264 (a), L is formed at the left and right center of the lower end portion of the first illumination unit 6574.
Although the ED is not arranged, as shown in FIG. 264 (b), the optical transmission unit 6
Through 520, line-shaped light is visible at the lower left and right centers.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the arrangement space of the first illumination unit 6574, the shape formed by the light that is visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520 is increased, in addition,
The degree to which light is visually recognized as a spot is weakened, and clear line-shaped light can be visually recognized.

Note that when the light transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the inside is made difficult to see due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so the light traveling inside the wall of the transparent tubular member 6521 It is difficult to grasp the position where the crossing points. Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is indefinite, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission effect from being lowered.

Further, if the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-like extending portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source is disposed between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. In other words, since it is possible to make an illusion that more LED light sources are provided than the actual number of LEDs, even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used. The production effect of the production can be improved.

A surface light emitting unit 6574b (first illumination unit 6) disposed inside the transparent tubular member 6521 in a front view.
The light emitted from the four LEDs on the left and right center sides of the 574 passes through the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the wall thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition, the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a disposed oppositely (FIG. 2).
45 (b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit 6574b is the surface light emitting unit 6574 in front view.
It is visually recognized as planar light spreading as a region A17 centering on the LED b. Further, the light is a decorative shape portion 6523b (FIG. 2) having a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523.
60), the light is diffusely reflected and is viewed as planar light in a front view.

That is, the region where the light emitted radially from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches (FIG. 264 (b)
The decorative shape portion 6 on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523 is not limited to the imaginary line).
A region where 523b is formed (for example, a region A17 and a frame-shaped extending portion 6521f in a front view)
The area between the two) can be brightly illuminated.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be viewed as light having different impressions, ie, edge-shaped light and planar light. In addition, by configuring so that the irregularly reflected light is irradiated to the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light,
It can be avoided that the boundary becomes dark. Therefore, it is possible to change the impression of the visually recognized light stepwise and continuously.

Here, various aspects are exemplified as a change in visually recognized light impression. For example, it may be a change in the impression of light emission such as light and dark or blinking, or a change in the color of light.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

As described above, the partition unit 6540 that is visually recognized from the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 has a curved shape that swells to the front side in the front view and the side view. for that reason,
The light that is visually recognized on the left and right of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left-right and up-and-down directions (direction in which the light is diffused with respect to the point on the back side).

Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 arranged at the lower left and right of the partition unit 6540 is such that the light passing through the light receiving member 6558 is from the position that the front side edge is located on the back side toward the outer side of the left and right sides. , Proceeds in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left and right and up and down directions (a direction of diffusion with respect to the point on the back side).

This makes it possible to give the player an impression that the light increases as the player gets closer to the player as compared with the case where the light is advanced only along the front-rear direction. Can be improved.

Next, the horizontal effect device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is a horizontal effect device 6700.
FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 265, illustration of the top effect device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 is omitted, and the direction view from the right oblique front in the state where the horizontal effect device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a is illustrated. In FIG. 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 is used.
A view of the direction from the diagonally left front is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 includes a metal main body 10014a.
The left and right vertically elongated portions are arranged on the front side, and are formed from a shape obtained by dividing a vertically long elliptical shape in half in a side view.

In the horizontal effect device 6700, a pair of devices having similar shapes are arranged on the left and right sides, but the internal configuration is the same. Therefore, the right horizontal effect device 6700 will be described in detail, and the left horizontal effect device 6700 will be described. Description is omitted.

The horizontal effect device 6700 so that the front-rear stacking relationship can be visually recognized at the upper end portion of FIG. 266.
Is configured in such a manner that covering units 6730 to 6760 covering the front side of the base member 6710 are disposed on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal main body 10014a.

The fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal main body 10014a will be described. When the base member 6710 is assembled to the metal main body portion 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning convex portion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning concave portion 10014e formed in the metal main body portion 10014a. Then, a fastening screw inserted into the through hole of the metal main body 10014a is fastened and fixed to a fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710.

Of the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. In other words, among the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700,
Except for the base member 6710, there is no component member that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side toward the game area, the position where the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position that is the surface position with the rear end portion of the base member 6710). Is formed. The rear end of the curved plate member 6750 is shown in FIG.
5, the glass unit 16 is disposed in close proximity to the front and rear as shown by the left unit.

Because of this arrangement, it is easy to produce an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the back side of the glass unit 16 can be visually recognized. can do.

FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700, and FIG.
FIG. In FIGS. 267 and 268, the covering units 6730-6
A state where 760 is disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 267, an electrical decoration board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to emit light is mounted is disposed on the front side of the base member 6710, and the electrical decoration board 672 is provided.
The covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 in such a manner as to cover 0 from the front side.

That is, the horizontal effect device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports the electrical decoration board 6720 controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the electrical decoration board 6720. A light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710 that
A covering unit 673 that receives light emitted from the light-emitting side unit and makes the player visually recognize the light.
And a light receiving side unit composed of 0 to 6760. First, the light emission side unit will be described.

FIG. 269 (a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720. FIG.
9 (b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG.
FIG. 269 (d) is a top view of the base member 6710, and FIG.
9 (e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710 and the electrical decoration board 6720 along the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line in FIG. 269 (a).

As shown in FIG. 269 (a) to FIG. 269 (f), the base member 6710 is formed of the electric circuit board 6.
720 is a flat support plate portion 6711 which is arranged opposite to the 720 and arranged on the back side of the electric decoration board 6720.
A frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting to the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the electric decoration board 6720, and positioning projecting to the front side from the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 Projecting portion 67
13, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 drilled so that fastening screws can be inserted at positions outside the electrical decoration board 6720 and close to the electrical decoration board 6720 in a front view, and insertion holes 6736 at two upper and lower positions. A pair of fastening parts 6715 to which fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and the support plate part 6
711 portion (step portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) that is long and vertically long in the region on the right side (opposite side of the window portion surrounding the gaming region, opposite side of the glass unit 16) from the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 From a plurality of alignment holes 6716 drilled as holes, an outer frame plate portion 6717 extending in a stepped plate shape from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side, and from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 And an inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape toward the back side.

The projecting tip of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 is disposed so as to face the back surface portion in the vicinity of the outer shape portion of the electric decoration board 6720 and is in surface contact with the electric decoration board 6720. Accordingly, a gap is provided between the back side of the portion excluding the vicinity of the outer shape portion of the electric decoration board 6720 and the support plate portion 6711 (see FIG. 269 (f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the electrical decoration substrate 6720.

Thereby, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transmitted to the metal main body 10014a can be transmitted to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transmitted to the electrical decoration board 6720 Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions such as malfunction of the electric decoration board 6720 due to high temperature.

The positioning protrusions 6713 are positioning holes 672 formed at two places on the electric decoration board 6720.
2 is a portion for aligning the electric decoration board 6720 with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the base board 6710 and the base board 67 are included in the base board 6720.
Positioning protrusion 6 with reference to the arrangement in the assembled state with 20 (see FIG. 269 (a)).
A positioning hole 6722 is formed at a position corresponding to 713.

The insertion hole 6714 is a fastening portion 67 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760.
44, and a fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 includes a cup-shaped portion that can be fitted from the front (
268), and a through hole through which a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed is inserted while being able to align them.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to two upper and lower fastening portions 6715.

The alignment hole 6716 is provided with protruding portions 6743 and 676 of the covering units 6730 to 6760.
6 (see FIG. 268) is a hole to be inserted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed in a substantially cup shape in which a pair of thin plate-like members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides (see FIG. 268). ), And fixed to the base member 6710 at the back side (edge-shaped portion).

Here, the coupling portion between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 is located at a portion (outer shape portion) that can be touched by the player, and a load applied by the player (for example, a collision of the player) It can be displaced by the load generated by doing so. As described above, the base member 6
710 is fixed at the thin-walled rear side end portion, so that when a load is applied in the thickness direction of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 (for example, the left-right direction), it is deformed,
There is a possibility that a positional shift with respect to the base member 6710 may occur. To prevent this,
Although the number of fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, there may be a problem that the number of man-hours for assembly work increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the increase in the number of the fixed portions is suppressed, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are inserted into the base member by inserting the protruding portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716. It is possible to suppress the position shift (position shift in the left-right direction) with respect to 6710.

In addition, the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is a frame-shaped protruding portion 671.
2 is arranged in close proximity to the outer side surface (the right side surface), so that even if a left load is applied to the flat plate member 6740 from the player, the flat plate member 6740 hits the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 with the surface. Therefore, the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, the covering units 6730 to 676
0 can be prevented from being deformed or displaced from the base member 6710.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the lateral rendering device 6700 while suppressing an increase in the number of assembly work steps. Note that the main body plate portion 6741 can disperse the load by providing the concave-convex forming portion 6741a in which a fine concave-convex shape is formed in a contact range with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. Details will be described later. .

The outer frame plate portion 6717 is disposed so as to face the right side surface of the metal main body portion 10014a and is in surface contact with and covers (covers) the right side of the metal main body portion 10014a. As a result, the metal main body 10014a
Can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recessed portion 6717a that is recessed from a part of the alignment holes 6716 in the front-rear direction. The support recess 6717 a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

The support recessed portion 6717a is formed to have a size that fits with the projecting portion 6743 or is opposed to each other with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, compared to the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area capable of supporting the projecting portion 6743 can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a). The 6740 can be prevented from being displaced with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported with respect to the base member 6710.

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion facing the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750, and is formed in a planar shape facing the game area side (inner side).

The electrical decoration board 6720 is a so-called printed board, and a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape.
A positioning hole 6722 drilled in two places on the main body plate portion 6721, and a main body plate portion 672
1 is mainly provided with a plurality of LED chips D1 mounted in an arbitrary pattern.

The main body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning protrusion 6713 (see FIG. 269 (c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722 to restrict the left / right / up / down movement, and the forward / backward movement is controlled by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). The movement is regulated by being sandwiched between

The LED chip D1 in the present embodiment is mounted with the same chip, but in relation to the region illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 269 (a) as the boundary of the region indicating the configuration of the light receiving side units 6730 to 6760. There are two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 includes an edge light emitting portion D1a disposed inside the imaginary line frame shown in FIG. 269 (a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b disposed outside the imaginary line frame. Prepare mainly. The difference between the light emitting portions D1a and D1b is that light emitted from the light emitting portion D1a is easily visible as line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, whereas light emitted from the light emitting portion D1b is easily visible as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode to be visually recognized by the player, which will be described later in detail.

Next, covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) arranged on the front side of the electrical decoration board 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760.

As is apparent from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268 and exploded from FIGS. 270 and 271, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are made of light-transmitting resin and pass through the inside. Can be refracted, and the light receiving member 6730 covers the electric decoration board 6720 from the front side.
It is comprised so that the front may be covered with another structural member.

FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272 (b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730.
FIG. 273 (a) shows the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a).
FIG. 273 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b).

FIG. 274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG.
FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730.

FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as seen from the left side.
2 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the right side, FIG. 274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274 (c) is a light receiving member. 6730
It is the back perspective view which looked at from the left side. Further, in FIG. 272 (b), the covering units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for easy understanding.

The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light transmissive resin material,
A light-receiving surface portion 6731 formed in a flat plate shape with an outer shape equivalent to the outer shape 20 and disposed opposite to the electric decoration board 6720, and bent from an inner edge (left side edge in FIG. 272) of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207). The inner extension portion 6732 that extends to the back side as described above, and the outer extension that extends to the back side so as to be bent from the outer edge (the right side edge in FIG. 274) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state. An installation portion 6733, a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) long ribs 6734 protruding from the back surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731, and a base end (light receiving surface portion 6731) of the long rib 6734 A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) fins 6735 extending from the front of the position where the front and back sides of the light receiving surface portion 6731 coincide with each other, and a fastening portion disposed at the upper and lower ends. 67 5 (see FIG. 269 (a)) is formed in a shape that can be fitted to a plurality of insertion holes 6736 through which the fastening screws are inserted, and a decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the curved plate member 6750. The fitting part 6737 is mainly provided.

The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and a decorative pattern with a complicated cut is formed on the back side. The decorative pattern is formed with long protrusions arranged along a plurality of concentric circles having different diameters, centering on a portion facing the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view of FIG. 274 (b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter projection at the position opposed to the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light irradiated from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731). 2
75 (b)), the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is similarly inclined (in an aspect in which light traveling along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted to the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731). FIG.
5 (b)).

Therefore, after the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is refracted in the vicinity of the shaft portion of the long protrusion and proceeds to the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, the large diameter further away from the axis of the long protrusion. A wide range of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 can emit light by being refracted at a location and proceeding to the front side.

Furthermore, on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape that is triangular in front view and whose substantially central portion swells to the front side is regularly and closely aligned, and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is a surface light emitting portion. A decorative recessed portion 6731a that is recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape is provided at the front side position of D1b.

By the decorative recessed portion 6731a, it is possible to increase or decrease the surface light emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 (a stepwise intensity can be applied). That is, since the light is collected on the center side of the concave portion due to the shape of the decorative concave portion 6731a, the decorative concave portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a stronger light emission mode than other portions.

The inner extending portion 6732 and the outer extending portion 6733 are configured such that the extending end portions are in contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720 in the front-rear direction, and the extending end portion of the inner extending portion 6732 extends over the entire top and bottom. While being in contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720, a portion that is not in contact with the extending end portion of the outer extending portion 6733 is formed.

That is, the outer extending portion 6733 includes a separation end portion 6733a that is formed so that the extending length is as short as the thickness of the electric decoration board 6720 and is not in contact with the electric decoration board 6720. In the present embodiment, the separation end portion 6733a can improve the entry and exit of air with respect to the region between the electrical decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, so that heat can be prevented from being trapped.

Further, like the inner extending portion 6732, when contacting the electric decoration board 6720 across the entire upper and lower sides, the LED chip D <b> 1 disposed so as to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electric decoration board 6720 is arranged on the inner side. It cannot be arranged behind the extending portion 6732. Therefore, the region where the LED chip D1 is disposed is limited as the plate thickness of the inner extending portion 6732 is increased.

On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the electrical decoration board 6720, the LED chip D1 is separated from the separated end 6 of the outer extending portion 6732.
It can be placed behind 733a. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum arrangement area of the LED chip D1 while sufficiently securing the plate pressure of the outer extending portion 6733.

The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the left side of the inner extension portion 6732 (on the side opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is densely provided with a semicircular cross-sectional protrusion. The concavo-convex shape is formed in such a manner that it is aligned with each other. Thereby, the light emitted to the left through the inner extending portion 6732 emits light (spreads radially), and it is possible to make the player easily recognize uniform light.

As will be described later, when a part of the light emitted from the electric decoration board 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, the intensity of the light changes for each region. That is, fin 6735
In the peripheral position of the edge portion, the light D1m in which both the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling through the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b are combined is visually recognized. At a position away from the light, the light traveling on the long rib 6734 does not reach, and the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized, and the light D1m is light D1m.
It is visually recognized as light stronger than 1p (the magnitude of the light corresponds to the length of the arrow).

Thereby, the magnitude of the intensity of light visually recognized via the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed for each region arranged vertically. In addition, the difference in the mode of the light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by changing the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, the color of the light viewed through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed up and down. It is possible to make it visually change by changing each area.

The long rib 6734 is disposed on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed with the same thickness without tapering back and forth. It is mainly provided with a plurality of linear ribs 6734a formed in a substantially straight shape when viewed from the back, and a V-shaped rib 6734b which is bent when viewed from the back and formed into a substantially V shape.

The side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the surface of the long rib 6734 is knurled on the line, when light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit light) and is unidirectional. Proceed to Therefore, the long rib 6
Since it can be avoided that the side surface of 734 emits light uniformly, when the horizontal effect device 6700 is viewed from the left-right direction, the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b The degree to which light is mixed and visually recognized can be lowered.

In other words, the long rib 6734 is formed as a portion that is long in the vertical direction and can be seen in the left-right direction, and suppresses light that has passed through the long rib 6734 from reaching the player's eyes in a surface-emitting manner. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right can easily recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The straight ribs 6734a are arranged in two pieces at the top and bottom, and are formed in such a manner that the straight ribs 6734a extend in a direction inclined toward the upper and lower central positions toward the left (the center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is connected to the inner extension 6732, while the right end 6734a2
Is spaced from the outer extension 6733.

Therefore, the light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can enter the inner extending portion 6732 directly through the left end portion 6734a1, while the light passing through the right end portion 6734a2 can be incident on the outer extending portion 6733. Light energy decreases in the gap between the two.

Thereby, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a is different. That is, the part visually recognized through the inner extension part 6732 is viewed brightly, and the part visually recognized through the outer extension part 6733 is visually recognized darkly.

As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left-right direction is deteriorated, while the left end portion 6 of the linear rib 6734a.
The light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through 734a1 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1. That is, the left end 6
In the vicinity of 734a1, it is visually recognized by the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a, and at the position away from the left end portion 6734a1 (position between), the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b Since it can be visually recognized, the player who visually recognizes the horizontal rendering device 6700 from the left-right direction can visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged at the upper and lower center position, and the intermediate connecting portion 673 near the bent position.
4b1 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, while both ends 6734b2 are connected to the outer extending portion 673.
3 apart. It should be noted that the bending position and the middle connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted.
This is because the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) is disposed opposite to the bending position.

That is, the position where the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a is received is determined as the intermediate connecting unit 6734b1.
By shifting from the edge, it is possible to suppress the light (main light) that is linearly irradiated in the front-rear direction from the edge light emitting portion D1a from entering the connection position, and thus the V-shaped rib 6734b.
Loss of light incident on the fin 6735 can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has a function similar to the function of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can be directly incident on the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, while light passing through the both end portions 6734b2 is allowed to enter the outer extending portion 6733. Light energy decreases in the gap between the two.

Thereby, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b is different. That is, the part visually recognized through the inner extension part 6732 is viewed brightly, and the part visually recognized through the outer extension part 6733 is visually recognized darkly.

As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is deteriorated, while the intermediate connection portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b is provided. The light that passes through and enters the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1. That is, it is visually recognized by the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a in the vicinity of the intermediate connection part 6734b1.
Since it can be visually recognized by the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b at a position away from the intermediate connecting part 6734b1 (position between), the horizontal effect device 67 from the left and right direction.
The player who visually recognizes 00 can visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

The fin 6735 is formed so that the thickness decreases from the extended proximal end toward the distal end side,
It mainly includes a tip bending fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a and a tip bending fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b.

The leading curved fin 6735a is curved at the upper and lower inner edges, and the left side surface (front frame 100).
14 is formed by densely forming notches in a triangular wave shape (a jagged shape) on the inner side surface, and the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bending fin 6735b is provided with an inclined surface in which the extended tip is inclined to the back side as it goes from the upper and lower ends to the center in the vertical direction, and intersects on the front side of the bent position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. The light diffusing portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (notch-shaped) notches on the inner surface of 10014, and the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that the extending length becomes shorter toward the left surface side. In particular, since the end portion on the left surface side of the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, a large amount of light (mainly emitted from the edge side light emitting portion D1a and emitted from the front side end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a). Light) is emitted from the fin 6735 in the vicinity of the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light is directed to the inner extension portion 6732 (back side, root side).
The left surface side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

In addition, the long rib 6734 and the inner extending portion 6732 are coupled behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731. The installation portion 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, it is possible to perform a light emission effect by combining the light passing through the long rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a. It is possible to improve the production effect of the light emission effect.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The passage mode of light passing through the side surface can be changed from the difference in the formation mode between the left side surface and the right side surface of the fin 6735. In other words, the light that passes through the left side can be seen as uniform light because of the surface light emission effect due to the notch, while the light that passes through the right side does not have the surface light emission effect, so it passes through the right side. Can be visually recognized as local light. Needless to say, the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 because of their shapes.

The insertion hole 6736 is in a state where one place is exposed in the assembled state (FIG. 266) of the horizontal effect device 6700, and only two places are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced by loosening the fastening screw inserted through the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

Accordingly, when the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is deviated (for example, vibration caused by the player's operation or the front frame 100).
14 can be performed without disassembling the horizontal effect device 6700, so that the maintainability is improved (the difficulty level is low and the time is shortened). )be able to.

The fitting portion 6737 is recessed in the left-right direction with an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side, and alignment and posture alignment between the light receiving member 6730 and the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. And a single concave portion 6737a provided so as to be further recessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are arranged while limiting the number of locations where the recesses 6737a on the inner extension portion 6732 side (locations where the fastening portions 6753 are disposed) to one. In addition, the positional deviation and the positional deviation with respect to the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

Here, in the case where the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal effect device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screws do not transmit light, so that the more fastening points there are, the more likely the shadows are to be generated. Therefore, the side effect device 67
Even if the surface area of 00 is formed large, light is divided at the fastening portion, and there is a concern that the effect effect of the light effect is lowered. On the other hand, if the number of fastening points is reduced, the supporting force will be reduced.
There is a possibility that the possibility that the horizontal effect device 6700 will be deformed from the base is increased by a load given by the player or a load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the fastening portion is limited to the concave portion 6737a, but the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protruding portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) are fitted to maintain the supporting force. ing.

As a result, the side effect device 6 on the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side.
While reducing the number of fastening points 700 (in this embodiment, fastening points disposed between the main body bending portion 6751 and the illumination board 6720 as light production points), the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 is improved. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the light is formed so as to be able to travel to the back side through the recess 6737a. This will be described with reference to FIG.

275 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal effect device 6700 along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274 (b), and FIG. 275 (b) is a diagram showing CCLXXVb- in FIG. 274 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the light-receiving member 6730 in a CCLXXVb line.

As shown in FIG. 275 (a), the recess 6737a is disposed in the same cross section as the intermediate coupling portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b disposed to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (FIG. 2).
81), and a striped decorative portion 6751 via a fastening portion 6753 fitted into the recess 6737a.
It is formed so that light can travel to the back side of the main body bending portion 6751 where e is formed. That is, light is formed so as to be able to travel toward the back side of the electric decoration substrate 6720 (the side opposite to the light irradiation direction).

Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a place where the fastening screw is fastened, and the fastening screw is likely to be a shadow, so it is considered unsuitable for a light-emitting effect, but in this embodiment, intermediate coupling is provided on both upper and lower sides of the fastening portion 6753. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light can avoid the fastening screw up and down so that the player can visually recognize the light while suppressing the influence of the fastening screw.
That is, by making light travel from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (thinned).

In FIG. 275 (b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is shown enlarged. Of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, the light traveling in a direction having a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the light receiving surface portion 6731 while being gently refracted, and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. At this time, it is further refracted and collected. Thereby, the emitted light intensity of the light visually recognized through the decorative recessed part 6731a can be increased.

As described above, the light emission mode on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731 is centered on the decorative recessed portion 6731a where the light intensity is increased by condensing, and the light intensity increases as the distance from the decorative recessed portion 6731a increases. It is set as the aspect which becomes low.

At this time, since the light is collected in the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered closer to the optical axis side as compared with the case where the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as a single item. D1
Compared with the case where the light irradiated from b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visually recognized light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the surface light emitting portion D is generated from light having a higher intensity (light visible in the vicinity of the decorative recessed portion 6731 a) than when the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D 1 b is viewed directly.
The intensity of the light is gradually reduced to light that is lower than the light directly seen from 1b,
The player can visually recognize the lights having different intensities through the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

Returning to FIG. 270, the member that covers the light receiving member 6730 will be described. On the front side of the light receiving member 6730, a cup-shaped member having an open back side is disposed. The flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be described.

FIG. 276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG. 277 shows the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6.
760 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right directions and combined by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled and fitted from the front side, whereby each member is fixed inseparably.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed from a colorless and transparent and light-transmitting resin, and a main body plate portion 6741 formed from a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an oval shape, and the main body plate portion 6741 are formed. A flat plate portion disposed on a plane translated from the plane to the left side, and a main body plate portion 6741
From the to-be-fitted plate part 6742 connected with a step on the front side edge, a plurality of projecting parts 6743 projecting from the back side end part of the main body plate part 6741 to the back side, and the projecting part 6743 A plurality of fastening portions 6744 that are arranged at spaced positions and are configured so that fastening screws can be screwed in from the back side.
And a plurality of insertion holes 6745 formed in the main body plate portion 6741 so as to allow a fastening screw to be inserted therethrough.
And mainly.

The main body plate portion 6741 is provided with a decorative shape that is recessed leftward from the left side surface, and protrudes rightward from the right side surface corresponding to the recessed portion, and the right end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 is , Body plate portion 674
Coincides with the right side of 1.

Concavity and convexity forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in such a manner that it is filled with hexagonal pyramids arranged to taper to the left, and has an effect similar to that of a reflector. Thus, the main body plate portion 6741.
Since the strength of the rear side portion (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, it can be cracked or applied by applying an external force. Can be prevented. Further, the flat plate member 67 is attached to the base member 6710.
40, the contact friction when sliding to assemble the assembly of the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760 can be reduced.

Therefore, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when the player receives an impact after the horizontal effect device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014 or when a load is applied when the front frame 10014 is opened or closed. In addition to being able to improve durability by making it difficult, assembly of the lateral effect device 6700 can be facilitated.

The to-be-fitted plate portion 6742 has a plurality of groove portions 6742a that are notched as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the right side surface, and a front-rear direction that is drilled in a direction along the groove portion 6742a between the main body plate portions 6741. Hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front / rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, details of which will be described later.

The protruding portion 6743 is a portion inserted through the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is inserted through the insertion hole 6714 (
It is a part fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through FIG. 269 (a).

In addition, the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are provided with the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730.
It is arrange | positioned in the position which adjoins by the front view on the outer side of the right edge. In particular, the fastening portion 6744 is the electrical decoration board 6.
720 and the light receiving member 6730 are arranged so as to enter the recesses (FIG. 269 (a), FIG. 2).
74 (b)), the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 673 with respect to the flat plate member 6740.
A position shift of 0 can be suppressed.

The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws that are screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are arranged at four locations in the vertical direction. The curved plate member 6750 is attached to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions.
The fastening portion 6 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is capable of being firmly fastened.
Even when 753 is small, it can be avoided that the fixing force is insufficient.

The curved plate member 6750 is disposed so as to face the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, is curved so as to swell leftward toward the back side, is formed to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, is colorless and transparent, and transmits light. Main body bending portion 6 formed of a conductive resin and having a plurality of stripe shapes on the inner surface
751 and a curved plate portion which is arranged to be translated from the main body curved portion 6751 to the right side, and is connected to the front side edge of the main body curved portion 6751 with a step, and is arranged opposite to the fitted plate portion 6742. The to-be-fitted plate portion 6752 and a plurality of fastening portions 6 configured so that fastening screws can be screwed in from the back side.
753, a plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6745, and fastening screws can be inserted in the front side edge portion of the main body bending portion 6751 so as to be inserted in the front-rear direction. A plurality of insertion holes 6755 and a plurality of insertion holes 6756 that are formed so that fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge portion of the fitted plate portion 6752.

The main body bending portion 6751 has a triangular shape that tapers toward the back side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the center of the upper and lower sides, and a decorative protruding portion 6751a that protrudes rightward from the right side surface, and the decorative protruding portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction, a flat partitioning part 6751c for partitioning the stripe shape with a flat surface, and a central flat part 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position And a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin strip shape on the inner surface near the rear end portion.

The decorative projecting portion 6751 a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. Further, the front-rear direction hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connection extending portion 6863 and the curved plate member 6750.

As a result, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion having both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion for aligning with the light receiving member 6730. Thereby, even if it is the structure where only one fastening part 6753 is arrange | positioned in the up-and-down center part like this embodiment, it can suppress that the curved board member 6750 wobbles.

The flat partitioning portion 6751c is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge portion of the distal curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. Thereby, when the light radiate | emitted from the front edge part of the front-end | tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from a front (refer FIG. 207).
Since the light passes through the flat partitioning portion 6751c, it can be visually recognized as clear light.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735a is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions partitioned by the flat partitioning portion 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be set to surface light emission, and the light can be blurred and viewed.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. Thereby, when the light emitted from the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207).
Since the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, it can be visually recognized as clear light.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be set as surface light emission, and the light can be blurred and viewed.

Similar to the mated plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the mated plate portion 6752 has a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side surface, and a main body bending portion 6751.
And a front-rear direction hole 6752b drilled in a direction along the groove portion 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the front / rear direction hole 6752b are provided with a curved plate member 6750 and a cover member 676.
A function of alignment with 0 is provided, but details will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that passes through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6773 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged in a manner of entering the recesses of the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269). a) and FIG. 274 (b)
)), It is possible to suppress displacement of the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750.

The fastening portion 6754 is a portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6745 is screwed, and is disposed at a position (four locations) corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the flat plate member 6740 has the base member 6 by the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744.
Since it is firmly fixed to 710, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced. As a result, the number of the fastening portions 6753 in the vicinity of the rear side end portion of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced. As a result, the number of places where the light is blocked by the fastening screws can be reduced. As a result, the light emission effect can be visually recognized without blocking the light. A large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through-holes through which fastening screws can be inserted from the back side, and guide wall parts 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening parts 6774 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side. It is formed (see FIG. 277).

As for guide wall part 6755a, 6756a, the inner surface of a diameter a little larger than the outer diameter of the fastening part 6774 of the cover member 6760 is the right side (side close to the flat plate member 6740) of the fastening part 6774.
Are formed so as to face each other. As a result, the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 2).
65) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6774 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 can be prevented from being inadvertently removed.

The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 as the fastening portion 6774 slides back and forth in a manner along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 is bent at the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6761 and the main body plate portion 6761 that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and is covered by the curved plate member 6750. A curved plate portion 6762 which is a curved plate portion having a shape that covers the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and a curved plate portion 6762 from two positions spaced apart from each other by a substantially equal distance from the vertical center position.
A connecting extension portion 6863 that extends to the left rear side and is connected to the extension end portion, and a fastening screw that is provided on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and that is inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750. A plurality of fastening portions 6774 that can be screwed in, and a fastening screw that is disposed at the rear side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762 and is inserted into the insertion hole 6714 near the upper end portion of the base member 6710. It mainly includes a base end fastening portion 6765 (see FIG. 279) formed so as to be able to enter, and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 that project from the back side end portion of the main body plate portion 6761 to the back side.

The main body plate portion 6761 is slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and protrudes leftward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6761a are provided.

The projecting rib 6761a is formed to project rearward from the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6742b. In other words, the overhanging portion is disposed to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and the movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted.
Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The curved plate portion 6762 is at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750.
The inside of the groove portion 6752a is slidable, and includes a plurality of protruding ribs 6762a that protrude toward the right in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction.

The protruding rib 6762a is formed so as to protrude rearward from the rear side edge portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and the protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the overhanging portion is disposed opposite to the right side surface of the main body bending portion 6751, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. Thereby, in the assembly state (FIG. 265) of the horizontal effect device 6700, the curved plate member 67 is obtained.
50 can be prevented from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760.

The connecting extension portion 6673 includes a protruding rib 6863a that protrudes rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear direction hole 6751b.

The projecting rib 6673a is formed to project rearward from the rear side edge portion at the coupling position of the coupling extension portion 6763, and the projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the overhanging portion is disposed to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6774 is configured as a portion that can restrict the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Inadvertent removal can be prevented.

Thus, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left and right. That is, the rightward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is restricted by the relationship between the projecting ribs 6762a and 6762a and the front and rear direction holes 6751b and 6752b.
The movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left is restricted by the relationship with 755a and 6756a. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The proximal end fastening portion 6765 is disposed at the rear side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw inserted into an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 can be screwed. Formed. That is, the insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269 (a)).
A fastening screw that passes through the base end fastening portion 6765 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765.
10 is fastened and fixed.

The protruding portion 6766 is a portion inserted through the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. In addition, the protruding portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 are provided on the electrical decoration board 6720 and the cover board 6760 that is disposed in a position close to the right edge or upper edge of the light receiving board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in front view. The positional deviation of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

FIG. 280 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illumination board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 along the line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in FIG. 272 (b).
) Is a base member 6710 in the line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb in FIG. 272 (b).
FIG. 280 is a cross-sectional view of the electrical decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, and FIG.
(B) CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line base member 6710, illumination board 67
And FIG.

As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the longitudinal interval between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is
The LED chip D1 is suppressed to a height that rises from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a is incident on the long rib 6734 without omission,
In addition, the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (see FIG. 281), and can be easily advanced to the front side.

Further, in a place where the long rib 6734 is not disposed, the front-rear distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be equal to or larger than the front-rear width (formation length) of the long rib 6734. Therefore, the area as a location where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be increased.

Thus, according to this embodiment, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are based on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially. This makes it easy to distinguish and distinguish the light.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a is the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
As a straight line-shaped light that travels with total internal reflection, or a long rib 6734
On the other hand, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is viewed through the light refracting surface portion of the light receiving surface portion 6731 and the inner extending portion 6732 while being viewed as light that brightens a small range in which light can travel. It is visually recognized as uniform light (light light).

Thereby, as compared with the production mode in which the lens for condensing the light emitted from the illumination board 6720 is disposed opposite to the illumination board 6720 and the gorgeous light is visually recognized with a small area, as in the conventional example. According to the above, it is possible to visually recognize light (planar light) spreading in the area of the electric decoration board 6720 while visually recognizing gorgeous light (line-shaped light) in a small area. And it can perform easily the effect which makes these different lights visually recognize only one or both visually. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in producing the light effect.

Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is employed for the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b By varying the color and brightness of the light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280 (b), the side surface in the plate thickness direction of the fin 6735 is the right side surface (front frame 1).
The outer surface of 0014 is the surface position in the front-rear direction with the long rib 6734, and the left side surface (front frame 10).
The inner surface of 014 is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front side end portion (closes to the right side surface).
Therefore, the normal line on the left side does not face right side (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electrical decoration board 6720, that is, a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction), but a direction having a component facing the front side. Facing. As a result, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 is not only directly beside,
It can also be directed to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280 (c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is changed to the inner extending portion 67.
Can proceed to 32. The progress of this light will be described using a schematic diagram.

FIG. 281 shows a base member 6710 and an electrical decoration board 67 schematically showing the cross section of FIG.
20 is a schematic diagram of 20 and a light receiving member 6730. FIG. In FIG. 281, arrows L <b> 23 a to L <b> 23 e that indicate light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D <b> 1 a are schematically illustrated.

The intensity of light emitted from the LED decreases as the angle between the surface of the electric decoration board 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface increases, but the light itself is irradiated radially. In the present embodiment, the subsequent arrival positions differ depending on the traveling direction of light.

The arrow L23a enters the end of the long rib 6734, and the long rib 6734 and the fin 67
35 shows the traveling direction of light that travels with total reflection inside 35 and reaches the front side end of fin 6735. Since the light that has reached the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, compared to the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surfaces of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. , Can reduce light energy loss. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting unit D1a is long, it is possible to make the player easily recognize light with sufficient brightness.

The arrow L23b is arranged on the left side (front frame 1001) before reaching the front side end of the fin 6735.
4 shows the traveling direction of light emitted from the side surface. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

An arrow L23c indicates a traveling direction of light that passes through the long rib 6734 and proceeds directly to the inner extending portion 6732 and emitted from the surface thereof. Since this light enters the long rib 6734 and no refraction occurs at the end face, and energy loss of light is suppressed, it can be viewed brightly. In addition, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

The arrow L23d indicates the light receiving surface portion 6 as a coupling position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
After reaching 731, the traveling direction of the light reflected without being able to travel inside the fin 6735 is shown. That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed so that the length in the thickness direction is shorter than the long rib 6734 toward the front side, and the left side surface (the front frame 100).
14 is formed with a jagged concave portion, so that the long rib 6 can be seen in the front-rear direction.
It is assumed that 734 partially protrudes from the fin 6735.

Therefore, the long rib 6734 and the light receiving surface portion 6 are similarly transmitted even in the front-rear direction.
It is not possible to enter the fin 6735 at all the coupling positions with the 731, and entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed in a part of the region (particularly, near the left side surface of the long rib 6734). Light that reaches this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

Thereafter, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extending portion 6732 and is emitted. Note that the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface-emitting manner.

Here, as illustrated in FIG. 281, the light indicated by the arrow L <b> 23 d includes light traveling to the back side of the electrical decoration substrate 6720. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the back side part of the electrical decoration board | substrate 6720 can be light-emitted by the electrical decoration board | substrate 6720 which equips the front side with LED chip D1 which irradiates light to the front side (at least electrical decoration). Light can travel to the back side of the substrate 6720 (see FIG. 281).

Then, the inner surface of the rear side end portion of the curved plate member 6750 disposed on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed in a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are arranged vertically in the rear view (see FIG. 276).
. Thereby, the light that travels in the direction of the arrow L23d and reaches the end on the back surface side of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted leftward in a uniform manner up and down, and the light can illuminate the glass unit 16 with this light.

Therefore, from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16, the glass unit 16
Since the light effect can be executed by combining the light irradiated toward the light and the light that has traveled by the arrow L23d, the degree of freedom in designing the effect by the light can be improved.

Note that according to the present embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be reduced. That is, at the time of incidence on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is indicated by the arrow L23c because of the difference in angle with the axis X23.
The light shown by the arrow L23 is brighter than the light shown by the arrow L23. However, the light shown by the arrow L23 causes an energy loss due to the transmitted light when reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, when the light reaches the inner extension portion 6732 Is visually recognized as light having substantially the same brightness. Thus, the difference in the brightness of the light accompanying an irradiation direction can be relieved, and the brightness of the inner side extension part 6732 can be made uniform easily back and forth.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 disposed on the left side, the configuration of the right horizontal effect device 6700 is mostly formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape (or similar shape). As a special portion that is not symmetrical, the formation of the long rib 6734 (projection on the back surface) is omitted (the formation of the fin 6735 is maintained). Thereby, the mode of the light effect is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is an adjustment for ensuring the visibility of the player. In other words, the effect of causing the light to travel to the fin 6735 is desired to be maintained on the left side, but on the other hand, it is intended to suppress the light from traveling toward the game area due to the light traveling on the long rib 6734.

That is, the intensity of light emitted from the lateral effect device 6700 to the inside (the game area side) is reduced in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the place where the launch ball enters the game area on the left side of the game area. Is aimed at. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the fired ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it can be prevented in advance that it is difficult to adjust the launch intensity and confirm the launch of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, the ball fired with the right strike (the strongest firing strength) almost always flows down, and it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the ball to adjust the firing strength. . In addition, since a number of game balls gathered in a short time will flow down continuously in a narrow area, by directing light to the spot and reflecting it to the game ball, the effect of producing effects using light Can be improved easily. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the light intensity on the right side of the game area, and by making it easier to emit light from the horizontal effect device 6700 to the game area (see the glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) as in this embodiment. It is possible to improve the production effect.

An arrow L23e is light emitted in a direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 and is irradiated in a direction having a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). Indicates the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner side surfaces of the left and right extending portions 6732 and 6733 or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 to emit light, but the long rib 6734 is used.
Is extended to a position very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a, and the intensity of the light traveling by the arrow L23e is very small in the first place, so that it can be configured as light that is difficult to be seen by the player.

Therefore, the light traveling effect along the arrow L23e can be visually recognized mixed with the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, thereby preventing the light effect from being lowered.

Returning to FIG. 280 (a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emission effect in the vicinity of the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b has a fitting portion 67 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1.
37 is connected to a recess 6737a formed inside 37 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, similar to the contents described above with the arrows L23c and L23d, part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both wall portions of the recess 6737a and reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737.

The concave portion 6737a is configured as a concave portion in which a fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753, so that the fastening screw is lighted in the vicinity of the concave portion 6737a. Therefore, there is a possibility that the effect of producing the light emission effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be performed by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 The number of fastening screws can be reduced while preventing misalignment, and the number of places where the effect of the lighting effect is reduced can be reduced.

In addition, the concave portion 6737a is disposed in the vicinity of the fastening screw so as to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extending portion 6732, whereby the fastening screw is provided. It prevents the neighborhood from becoming too dark. Thereby, the grade of the fall of the production effect of a light emission effect can be suppressed.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the illumination board 6 is placed on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 above the front frame 10014.
In the eighteenth embodiment, the pachinko machine 18010 according to the eighteenth embodiment has been described with respect to the front frame 18014 by providing the rendering device 18800 including the illumination board 18830 on the lower right side of the operation device 10300. The light emission effect can be executed also in the lower part. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 18010 according to the eighteenth embodiment.
These are front perspective views of the pachinko machine 18010. FIG. The pachinko machine 18010 has a front frame 180.
14 is different from the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment in that it is provided with an effect device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the seventeenth embodiment, and other configurations are the same, so only the effect device 18800 will be described. The description of other configurations is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, the rendering device 18800 is a device for light emission rendering in which the back side and the top surface side are coupled to the covering base member 6410 on the front side of the lower dish unit 6400, and the operation device 10300 It is disposed between the operation handle 51.

The effect device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light emission effect changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operation effect by structural ingenuity. Next, in order to explain the structural device, the internal structure of the rendering device 18800 will be described.

284 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device 18800 along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. 284 (b) is an arrow CCLXX in FIG. 284 (a).
It is a schematic diagram of the electrical decoration board 18830 of the rendering device 18800 in the XIVb direction view. In addition, in FIG. 284 (b), the support aspect of the electrical decoration board | substrate 18830 is typically shown.

As shown in FIG. 284 (a), the rendering device 18800 is arranged with a coupling base member 18810 coupled to the lower dish unit 6400 and a planar gap on the front side of the coupling foundation member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 that is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the coupling base member 18810, an electrical decoration board 18830 disposed in a gap between the coupling base member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the electrical decoration board 18830 A light receiving member 18840 which is formed so that light emitted from the LED chip D1 can travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a covering member 18 which is attached to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840.
850.

The joint base member 18810 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward as the wall surface on the front side facing the electric decoration substrate 18830 moves toward the back side. The inclination angle of the inclined surface is determined by the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 when the swing device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is disposed at the upward position and is in the pre-operation posture. The inclined surface is formed at an inclination angle that is parallel to the inclined surface.

The electrical decoration substrate 18830 is disposed in parallel with the front wall surface of the coupling base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the electrical decoration substrate 18830. The electrical decoration substrate 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 that is formed in a vertically long shape, and a plate spring 18832 that generates an upward biasing force.

The long hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted in order to support the electrical decoration substrate 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the length in the vertical direction of the long hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as a length (allowable length) that allows the electrical decoration substrate 18830 to be mechanically displaced.

The LED chip D1 is arranged in an arbitrary pattern (in this embodiment, a pentagonal apex) on the front side of the decorating substrate 18830, and irradiates light in the normal direction of the surface of the decorating substrate 18830. Therefore, the light irradiated from the LED chip D1 is irradiated in a direction that descends toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light in a direction along the front-rear direction.

That is, the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the light receiving member 18840, and therefore the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is inclined downward toward the front side (the player's line of sight). The direction effect of the light effect can be prevented from being lowered even in the direction away from the head.

The light receiving member 18840 is formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and the intermediate fixing member 1.
A plate-shaped portion 18841 configured to be able to close the opening on the front side of the 8820, and the plate-shaped portion 188;
And a plurality of extending plate portions 18842 extending in a plate shape from the back surface of 41.

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape whose front side is opened from a resin material having low light transmittance, protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the coupling base member 18810 side, and is fastened and fixed to the coupling base member 18810. 18821 and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 drilled at positions and sizes capable of receiving the extended plate portion 18842 at the bottom on the back side.

In the present embodiment, the extending plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape having the same cross section in the left-right direction, because the drawing direction of the resin mold of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the left-right direction. Therefore, L
Whereas the ED chip D1 is arranged at the apex of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged on the left and right at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with the common extended plate portion 18842. Thereby, the extended board part 18842 can be formed as a plate-like part with three different widths. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also drilled in shapes having different widths at the upper and lower portions.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a curved plate shape that gently bends although it begins to extend along the normal direction of the plate-like portion 18841. Although the curvature radius of the curve can be arbitrarily set, in this embodiment, the LED chip D1 of the electric decoration board 18830 is used.
To the extent that total reflection can be continued until the light irradiated from the laser beam reaches the plate-like portion 18841,
Designed with a curved shape with a large radius of curvature. As a result, the extending tip of the extending plate portion 18842 (
It is possible to make the light incident on the back side end portion) easily reach the plate-like portion 18841 while maintaining the intensity.

The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage at a part where the light effect is not desired on the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840, and can be realized in various modes. For example, a light shielding tape (insulating tape) formed so as to be capable of being pasted may be used, or a member formed in a cup shape from a resin material may be used.

In this embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side, and a pentagonal shape based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1 is provided at the bottom of the cup that is disposed on the front side. A plurality of through-holes 18851 are formed at the apex position for passing light.

Note that the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, and can be a similar shape having a slightly different size as described above. L
Considering the traveling mode of light emitted from the ED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important in designing the layout of the through holes 18851 than the layout of the LED chip D1. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is designed so that the through-hole 18851 is formed at a position that matches the position of the base of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in front view.

The operation of the rendering device 18800 will be described. As described above, the illumination board 18830 is movable in the first displacement direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is disposed with an allowable width corresponding to the long hole 18831, and the first displacement direction is the operation direction. Vibrating device 1036 of device 10300
6 coincides with the vibration direction Y17a.

That is, when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the electric decoration board 1883 is generated by the vibration.
0 is configured to be slidable. When the illumination board 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extended plate portion 18842 shifts, so the LED chip D1
It becomes difficult for light emitted from the light to enter the extended plate portion 18842.

In this case, even when the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the light is extended to the extended plate portion 18842.
Since the through hole 18851 is difficult to travel, the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark. That is, it cannot be determined whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes in a direction different from the first shift direction.

In this case, the influence on the electric decoration board 18830 by the vibration of the operation device 10300 is suppressed, and the electric decoration board 18830 is returned to the initial position (upper position) by the urging force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illumination board 18830, the LED chip D1 and the extended plate part 188 are provided.
42 is arranged opposite to the rear side end portion, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is extended to the extended plate portion 18.
It is formed so as to be incident on 842 and then travel to the front side by total reflection.

That is, even when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration effect in a state where light is emitted from the LED chip D1, even when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark, by pushing the swing operation member 10310, The through hole 18851 can be viewed brightly.

Therefore, when the vibration effect is performed and the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark, it is grasped by operating the swing operation member 10310 whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light. Can do. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled to emit light when a big hit occurs or when a transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Thus, the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light can be improved.

Thereby, since the player's willingness to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's willingness to participate is increased, and the player is actually The head operation member 10310 can be directed to operate.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the electrical decoration board | substrate 18830 was arrange | positioned on the outer side of the covering base member 6410 was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this. For example, the illumination board 18830
Is disposed in such a manner that it penetrates through the covering base member 6410 and enters the inside.
00 may be abuttable.

In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the electric decoration board 18830, and the electric decoration board 18830 slides and moves not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be constituted as follows.

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which a push instruction as a notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pushed in at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light (push operation), L
It is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp the presence or absence of light emission of the ED chip D1 in a front view.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed in (push operation) at a timing other than the notification, the notification advantageous to the player can be easily overlooked. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pushing operation to the lens member 10317 at a timing other than the timing at which the pushing instruction is generated, the operation device 10300 breaks down early, or the operation device is operated many times to generate noise. Annoying acts can be suppressed.

Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be divided into right and left is explained. However, the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment are
It is formed so that it can be divided back and forth. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, the upper cover 19321 and the lower cover 1932 are used.
2 is disposed so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configuration of the covers 19321 and 19322 has substantially the same shape as the above-described covers 10321 and 10322, and will be mainly described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

Covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be split on a split surface that coincides with reference line X19 shown in FIG. 285, and are inserted into insertion holes 19321a formed in upper cover 19321 in a direction perpendicular to the split surface. The cover 19322 is formed so as to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before the swing operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to the impact of vibration.

Further, since the swinging operation member 10310 has the same vibration direction Y17a as the pushing operation direction (push direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216 (a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw. Since the fastening direction is orthogonal to the side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being loosened by an impact generated by the operation of the lens member 10317.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in sectional view,
Although the case where the plate thickness is substantially constant in the inclined portion has been described, the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in the twentieth embodiment are slightly inclined slightly toward the vertical direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in this embodiment, the slopes of the left and right ends of the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are compared with the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the seventeenth embodiment. Is set to the up and down direction.

In addition, a lower end portion of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and an upper end portion (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment) (
And a concave base end) are arranged on the same line in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

The drooping plate-like portion 6426b of the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is the recessed portion 16.
Since the base end portion of 414 (the upper surface of the main body portion 6411) is contacted and supported, the support thickness in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the main body portion 6411 can be sufficiently secured at the support position. Main body 6411 due to a load during operation of operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207)
Can be suppressed.

In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the inclination of a right-and-left end part was changed compared with the protruding shape part 6413 and the recessed shape part 6414, it is not necessarily restricted to this.
For example, there is no inclination at all, and the left and right outer surfaces of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in a cross-sectional view). Even in this case, a sufficient support thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be ensured.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the direction of deformation when the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 receive an external force is formed by inclining in the shape of a reverse letter C when viewed in cross section. Can be easily directed. Thereby, compared with the case where it can deform | transform in both right and left directions, the degree of fatigue given by external force can be made low, and the plate part which forms the projecting shape part 6413 and the recessed shape part 6414 breaks early. This can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower dish unit 6400 can be improved.

Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the supply of electricity to the lower dish unit 6400 is not necessary has been described. However, the lower dish unit 21400 according to the twenty-first embodiment is configured to vibrate so as to be vibrated by electrical conduction. The apparatus 21500 is provided, and electricity supply to the lower dish unit 21400 is required. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above,
The description is omitted.

FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300, and the lower dish unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. In FIG. 287, the front frame 1001
4 is omitted, and the lower dish unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are
After being disassembled from the metal main body 10014a, it is shown in a direction view from the back side.

In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, assembly direction lines that connect the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and the fastening portions thereof are illustrated by imaginary lines, and further, electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibration device 21500 so as to be able to supply electricity. The arrangement relationship with respect to the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300, and the lower dish unit 21400 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 287, the bottom member 21 De whose design is changed from the above-described bottom member De is fastened and fixed to the lower bottom side of the operation device 10300. In addition to the configuration of the above-described bottom member De, the bottom member 21De includes an overhanging portion De3 that is formed to protrude to the right side.

The overhanging portion De3 has both a function of applying a load to the vibration device 21500 and a function of regulating displacement of the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibration device 21500. That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electric wiring 21513 is routed so as to crawl under the overhanging portion De3, so that the electric wiring 21513 and the right front cover are removed when the lower plate unit 21400 is removed for maintenance. It is possible to prevent rubbing with 10322.

While the overhanging portion De3 is formed with the back side inclined in a manner that becomes narrower toward the overhanging end,
The front side constitutes a plane parallel to the plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. With this configuration, the metal main body 1001 is provided on the back side of the overhang De3 while ensuring the rigidity of the overhang De3.
A gap between 4a can be created.

This gap allows the electrical wiring 21513 having a length necessary for removing the lower tray unit 21400 during maintenance (the wiring having a length that fills the length away from the metal main body portion 10014a) to the lower tray unit 21400. When not removed (metal body 1001
4a) and is used effectively as an area to be placed loosely. Thereby, compared with the case where the electric wiring 21513 is tightly arranged when the lower dish unit 21400 is not detached, the load that the electric wiring 21513 receives from the surroundings can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 287, the operation handle 51 is supported by being fitted into a handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left side edge portion of the handle support plate 21051 and the right side edge portion of the lower dish unit 21400 are overlapped in the front-rear direction.
The fastening portion is not formed over the entire area of the left edge of 1, and the connection with the lower dish unit 21400 is performed by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction) rather than fastening.

Therefore, the lower plate unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, and are configured to be relatively displaceable in the front-rear direction.

Thereby, compared with the case where the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 and the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire region, the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the left edge portion of the handle support plate 21051 from being displaced in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration device 21500 described later from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted from the lower plate unit 21400 to the player. For example, the transmission path of vibration transmitted to the player holding the operation handle 51 is not a route through the operation handle 51, but the lower tray unit with which the finger or arm of the player holding the operation handle 51 comes into contact. The route can be limited to the route via the right side surface of 21400.

FIG. 288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower dish unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower dish unit 21400. In FIGS. 288 and 289, the covering base member 21
410, the part corresponding to the fixed part of the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500 are illustrated in association with imaginary lines.

The covering base member 21410 has a main body 641 in addition to the configuration of the covering base member 6410 described above.
A plurality of (a pair in this embodiment) fastening portions 21415 are formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in a region on the right side of one recessed shape portion 6414. The fastening portion 21415 includes the vibration device 21.
Fastening screws inserted through a pair of upper and lower insertion portions 21535 are screwed into the right side of 500. That is, the right insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410.

The lower plate forming member 21420 includes the front vertical portion 6 in addition to the configuration of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above.
A plate-like portion extending upward from the upper surface of 426c is provided with a support hole 21428 drilled in the front-rear direction. The fastening hole 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 that is a connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500 is inserted into the support hole 21428.

The V-shaped design member 21450 has a plate-like protruding portion 6 in addition to the configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450 described above.
As an alternative to 453R (see FIG. 227), there is a fastening portion 21457 that protrudes in a columnar shape to the back side so that a fastening screw can be screwed in, and a plate-like portion between the fastening portion 21457 and the insertion hole 6452. And a connecting plate-like portion 21458 to be connected.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the fastening portion 21457 is inserted into the support hole 21428, and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is screwed in and fixed. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450.

Therefore, the vibration device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (the covering base member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, and the V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500.

Here, in the V-shaped design member 21450, as described above, the overhang fastening portion 6454 disposed at the left and right ends is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a via the intermediate member. for that reason,
It is structured substantially in the shape of a bag that opens to the back side, and is structurally harder than the covering base member 21410 that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a mainly at the back side edge.

That is, the covering base member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a at a plurality of positions at the lower end on the back side and the left end, while the number of fastening positions at the upper and right edges is suppressed (is not Even if it is limited to a small number), it is formed in a thin, substantially box-like shape (substantially bag-like), so that it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance) particularly at the right edge.

Further, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the front upper edge of the covering base member 21410, the vertical displacement (vertical direction) displacement of the covering base member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. , Degree of freedom of displacement of the covering base member 21410 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction)
Can be improved. Thereby, when the covering base member 21410 is displaced, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the lower plate 50 is displaced vertically and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 jumps.

According to the present embodiment, the rigidly configured V-shaped design member 21450 is a base (reference),
Covered base member 21410 that is more flexible (higher degree of freedom in displacement) than V-shaped design member 21450
Can be vibrated, and the covering base member 214 is driven by the vibration device 21500.
10 right side portions can be vibrated intensively (strong vibration).

In addition, since vibration transmission to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower dish forming member 21420 can be suppressed, the operation device 10300 vibrates due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, or the sphere stored in the lower dish 50 vibrates. It can be avoided that the device 21500 vibrates due to the vibration of the device 21500. From this, it can be said that the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be vibrated intensively (strong vibration) by driving the vibration device 21500.

The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in a long plate shape along the longitudinal direction of a shell-like overhang portion 21541 described later. Accordingly, the connecting plate-like portion 214 extends in the longitudinal direction of the shell-like overhanging portion 21541.
58 and the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other, and a large load generation area can be secured, so that stress concentration at the time of contact (during pressing) can be avoided.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is configured in a dimensional relationship that abuts (presses) the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298).
Therefore, vibration can be received through at least the contact position between the shell-like projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458.

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in the present embodiment. In other words, compared with the case where the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members, there is a possibility that the deviation from the design size of each member may be stacked, compared to the case where the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members. Deviation tends to increase. For this reason, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, and it becomes difficult to stabilize the vibration transmission intensity.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of dimensional deviation, no matter how the dimensional deviation occurs (whatever the size is within the limit value), the shell By designing the dimensions such that the protruding portion 21541 contacts the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 (if the interval is short, the protruding portion 21541 contacts while being deformed so as to be crushed), the shell shape can be stably formed. The overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore,
Vibration can be received stably.

In the present embodiment, the contact direction of the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 is set in the front-rear direction as in the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even when the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward by the operation of the operation device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced so as to slide with respect to the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541. Thus, it is possible to avoid the transmission of the push-down displacement. Therefore, the vibration device 21
500 can be prevented from being pushed down by operating the operation device 10300.

In the present embodiment, the place where the vibration device 21500 is disposed is the covering base member 21.
Since it is a flexible part 410, it is a part which is easily broken in the case of a fraudulent act that breaks the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 and enters the inside (for example, intrudes a thin metal wire). That is, in the present embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is disposed at a place where a person who performs an illegal act can easily select as an intrusion route.

Therefore, when the covering base member 21410 is broken, the vibration device 21500 may be broken or disconnected at the same time. In this case, the electrical wiring 21513 is disconnected from the vibration device 21500. When the sound lamp control device 113 detects this, control is performed so that an error signal is output, thereby making it possible to detect fraud early.

In addition, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided instead of the vibration device 21500. However, in the present embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is intentionally provided, and vibration is generated when an illegal act has not occurred. It can be used for production. That is, the vibration device 21500 can be used for both the vibration effect and the discovery of fraud (can be configured as a multi-functional device), so that the installation space of the device can be reduced.

290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500, and FIG. 291 is a vibration device 21.
FIG. As shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, the vibration device 2
1500 is formed of a vibration motor 21510 capable of generating vibration by being controlled so that the eccentric weight 21512 rotates, and a soft resin material (silicon resin or the like).
The cover member 21520 that covers 1510 and a material that is harder than the cover member 21520 (for example, a resin material or a metal material) and that can partially cover the cover member 21520 from the back side. The covering cover member 21530 formed and the covering member 21
A flat plate-like opposing plate member 2154 disposed opposite to the covering cover member 21530 with the 520 interposed therebetween.
0.

The covering cover member 21530 and the counter plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. That is,
A plurality of cover covers 21530 can be inserted through the threaded portions of the fastening screws (two in this embodiment).
The counter plate member 21540 includes a plurality of fastening portions 21542 formed so that the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 21532 can be screwed. Hereinafter, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 that are the objects to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described.

FIG. 292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520,
FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. In FIG. 294, the covering member 21520
The perspective view of the direction view looking down from diagonally forward is shown.

The vibration motor 21510 includes a main body portion 21511 whose shaft portion is rotationally controlled by energization, a fan-shaped eccentric weight 21512 that is fixed to the shaft portion and has a center of gravity disposed at a position different from the shaft portion, and a lower surface of the main body portion 21511. And an electrical wiring 21513 extending downward (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the lower surface).

The covering member 21520 includes a cylindrical main body portion 21521 formed in an inner cylindrical shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a ridge extending vertically along the back surface of the cylindrical main body portion 21521. A pair of protrusions 21522 formed as a cylindrical body 215
A plate-like protrusion 21523 projecting in a plate shape in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the cylinder 21, and the cylindrical main body 21
And an overhanging portion 21524 projecting downward from the lower surface of 521 in an oblong shape when viewed from below.

The overhang portion 21524 includes a main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and an electric wiring 21513.
Is formed in an oval shape having a size that surrounds the connection position in the bottom view, and the upper surface side is the electric wiring 21513.
Is recessed to accept.

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the overhanging portion 21524 is formed in a vertical direction in a recessed portion 21524a that is recessed downward from the lower surface side of the cylindrical main body portion 21521 and a region sandwiched by the recessed portion 21524a. A pair of preliminary holes 21524 drilled in the vertical direction at positions opposite to the wiring through holes 21524b to be drilled and the wiring through holes 21524b across the recessed portion 21524a.
c.

With the above configuration, the electrical wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through hole 21524b while being held in the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through hole 21524b. That is, in the present embodiment, the covering member 21520 has a function of preventing the electric wiring 21513 from being held down by its own weight, a function of bundling the electric wiring 21513, and the electric wiring 21.
The function of guiding 513 can be provided. Thereby, the number of required binding bands can be reduced, and material cost can be reduced and manufacturing man-hours can be reduced.

Further, when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, a gap is generated between the covering cover 21530 and the opposing plate portion 21540, so that the person who performs the assembling work can cover the covering member 2152.
It is possible to prevent forgetting to add 0. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting to assemble a member for holding the electric wiring 21513 as compared to a case where a binding band is separately prepared and the electric wiring 21513 is held.

In the present embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500
Is configured as a part of the other device 228, and vibration is controlled by a control signal transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

The preliminary hole 21524c is formed at a position corresponding to the connecting position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 in the vertical direction. That is, even when the electric wiring 21513 is about to come out of the main body portion 21511, the electric wiring 21513 can be pushed into the main body portion 21511 side by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c and pushing in the electric wiring 21513. it can. As a result, the electrical wiring 21513 can be prevented from falling off from the main body portion 21511.

In the present embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is disposed in the lower dish unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). Since the lower plate unit 21400 is formed to be detachable from the metal main body 10014a, if an operator who performs maintenance work accidentally removes the lower plate unit 21400 from the metal main body 10014a, the lower plate unit 21400 is connected to the electric wiring 21513. An excessive load may be applied and there is a risk of disconnection. Further, when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 occurs, the electric wiring 215
Even when an excessive load is applied to 13, there is a risk of disconnection.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the overhanging portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connecting position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 2 are formed.
It is possible to prevent the connecting position with 1511 from being excessively displaced.

Further, since the length of the electrical wiring 21513 held in the recessed portion 21524a is secured in front of the wiring through hole 21524b, this length can prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from being disconnected. Yes (can afford) In addition, electric wiring 2
Even if a load is applied to 1513, it is not in the connecting direction between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, but in the length direction of the electric wiring 21513 held in the recessed portion 21524 a (that is, the long direction of the overhanging portion 21524). Therefore, the electric wiring 21513 is connected to the main body 2.
It is possible to avoid falling off 1511.

In addition, as described above, even if the electric wiring 21513 falls off the main body portion 21511, the electric wiring 2151 can be easily obtained by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c.
3 can be reconnected to the main body 21511. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the maintenance work including the step of removing the lower dish unit 21400.

In the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the electric wiring 21513 is disposed on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511. Therefore, simultaneously with the operation of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the operation of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through hole 21524b can be performed, so that the efficiency of the assembling operation can be improved.

FIG. 295 is a front view of the covering cover member 21530. In the description of FIG. 295,
Reference is made to FIGS. 290 and 291 as appropriate. The covering cover member 21530 is composed of a main body 211531 that forms a frame whose front side and lower side are opened, the insertion hole 21532 described above, and the main body 2.
Receiving recess 21533 that is recessed on the front side of 1531 and receives the vibration motor 21510;
A plurality of ridges 21534 protruding inward from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533 and extending in the front-rear direction, and drilled in the front-rear direction at the vertical position of the insertion hole 21532, Covering base member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 2145
And a plurality of insertion portions 21535 through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to 0 (see FIGS. 288 and 289) can be inserted.

The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a that receives the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b that receives the main body portion 21511, and the weight receiving concave portion 21533a and the main body in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body portion 21511 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction. Receiving recess 2153
And a bearing insertion recess 21533c for connecting 3b.

The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed on the right side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c by an extra length compared to the left side. On the contrary, the protruding portion 21534 is provided with an extra length protruding on the right side compared to the left side, so that the protruding end of the protruding portion 21534 has a bearing insertion recess 21.
It arrange | positions in the substantially left-right symmetrical position with respect to 533c.

Thus, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520, when the vibration motor 21510 is held in a non-excited state (stopped state), the covering member 21520 is held at the protruding tip of the protrusion 21534, while the vibration motor 21
In the excitation state (vibration state) 510, the covering member 2 is formed by a deep recess formed on the right side of the main body receiving recess 21533b (a recess formed between the protrusions 21534 arranged in parallel vertically).
The deformation (displacement, flow) of 1520 can be dealt with. Thereby, the covering cover member 2
An overload can be prevented from being applied to 1530, and the durability of covering cover member 21530 can be improved.

Since the protrusion 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520 that is supported in contact with the protrusion 21534 on the left and right is affected by the engagement with the protrusion 21534 and the biting in. Therefore, it tends to occur in the front / rear / left / right (horizontal direction) and is suppressed in the up / down direction.

Therefore, even when the eccentric weight 21512 is disposed at the upper end of the main body portion 21511 and the main body portion 21511 tends to tilt with the lower end as a fulcrum when vibration occurs, the vertical component of the vibration is suppressed. The displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

The protruding portion 21534 has an aspect in which the protruding length increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (rear side) formed in a planar plate shape having a vertical width half that of the left and right side portions in the left and right intermediate portion of the main body portion 21551. The outer shape of the member 21520), the covering member 215
20 can be supported from the left and right sides and the back side.

In addition, the protrusion 21534 has an intermediate lower surface 2153 that constitutes the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21331a.
There is a back inclined portion 21534a that rises from the nearest protruding portion 21534 toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b below 1b.

The distance between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the protrusion portion 21534 just above it becomes narrower toward the back side. Therefore, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced to the back side and the covering member 21520 is deformed in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, compared to the case where the interval between the upper and lower protrusions 21534 is not narrowed, the rear inclined portion It is possible to increase the load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between the 21534a and the protrusion 21534 just above it. Thereby, it can prevent that the covering member 21520 is displaced too much to the back side.

The protrusion 21534 is not completely symmetrical and is partially displaced vertically. This makes it easier to avoid applying a load to the covering member 21520 from both the left and right directions on the same horizontal plane, as compared with the case where the protrusion 21534 is disposed at a completely bilaterally symmetrical position. The compression load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

In addition, you may arrange | position the protrusion part 21534 completely left-right symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material that is not brittle as the material of the covering member 21520.

The lower half of the back side wall portion of the main body portion 21551 is omitted. Therefore, the covering member 21
As a holding mode of 520, displacement of the covering member 21520 is restricted in the upper half portion of the main body portion 21531, while displacement of the covering member 21520 is allowed in the lower half portion of the main body portion 21531.

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced to the back side in accordance with the excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half portion of the protruding portion 21522 that is regulated by the upper half portion of the main body portion 21231, and the lower half portion that is allowed to be displaced. However, both proceed to the area opened in the lower half of the main body 21531 (
This works to improve the vibration effect of the vibration device 21500, details of which will be described later.

The plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported on the right side by the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 from below. Further, the left side portion is open to the covering cover member 21530, and is supported by the support extending portion 21543 of the counter plate member 21540 (FIG. 2).
91). Thereby, in addition to being able to support the own weights of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, an open portion accessible from the outside can be formed on the lower side of the covering member 21520.

That is, the covering cover member 21520 supports the lower surface of the covering member 21520 in such a manner that the covering cover member 21530 covers the lower part from the rear right side and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the front left side. The left rear part of the lower part of the member 21520 can be opened as an open part. The opening portion functions as a portion that ensures contact between the overhanging portion De3 and the covering member 21520.

The counter plate member 21540 is arranged to cover the cover member 2 from the open side of the cover member 21530.
1530 is a plate-like member disposed to face 1530, and is formed as a shell-like overhanging portion 21541 that is formed to protrude to the front side, the above-described fastening portion 21542, and a support extension that extends from the lower left end to the back side. And an installation portion 21543.

The shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is formed thin like the counter plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the tip of the overhanging portion and the covering member 21520. Therefore, the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is formed.
Even if a load in the direction to be pushed into the rear (backward direction) is given and the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is deformed, it can be avoided that a large load is transmitted to the covering member 21520.

FIG. 296 (a) is a top view of the lower dish unit 21400, and FIG. 296 (b) is a plan view of FIG.
96 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 21400 along the CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb line in FIG. 96, FIG. 297 is a rear view of the lower plate unit 21400, and FIG. 298 is FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the lower pan unit 21400 in the CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII line of (a).

As shown in FIG. 296 (b), the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the bottom member 21D.
When the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state), the projecting portion De3 slightly bites into the projecting portion 21522 (projection). The strip 21522 is slightly deformed).

By applying a load from the overhanging portion De3 to the protruding portion 21522, the vibration device 2150 is provided.
The arrangement of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 in 0 can be moved to the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position approaching the back side.

FIG. 299 (a) shows a lower plate unit 2140 schematically illustrating the lower plate unit 21400.
FIG. 299 (b) is a partial side schematic view of the lower dish unit 21400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCXCIXb of FIG. 299 (a), and FIG. 300 (a) is a lower dish unit 21400. FIG. 300B is a schematic partial top view of the lower dish unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower dish unit 214 in the direction of the arrow CCCb in FIG. 300A.
It is a partial side surface schematic diagram of 00.

299 (a) and 299 (b) illustrate a state in which the vibration device 21500 is disposed at the front limit position of vibration displacement, as in the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510. FIG.
In 0 (a) and FIG. 300 (b), the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state, and the vibration device 2
A state in which 1500 is disposed at the rear limit position of the vibration displacement is illustrated. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates to generate vibration, the vibration device 21500 is generated.
Is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body 21531 in the front-rear direction, and vibration is directly transmitted.

A vibration transmission mode of the vibration device 21500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 and 300. As described above, in the vibration device 21500, a plurality of parts are intentionally fastened and fixed to members having different rigidity. This is intended to effectively generate vibration of the vibration device 21500 in a specific part.

Specifically, if the member to which the entire vibration device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibration is excessively suppressed. On the other hand, if the member is too soft, the vibration may be excessively attenuated. Is fixed to a member on the hard side, and the vibration device 215 is set with the fixed position as an axis.
The soft side member fixed to the other part of 00 is configured to vibrate. Thereby, the part fixed to the other part of the vibration device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is a V-shaped design member 214.
50 (hard side) and the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is brought into contact with the connecting plate-like portion 21458, while the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the vibration device 21500 is covered with the base member 21410 (soft Side).

Therefore, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is applied so that the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotated) with the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (vibration axis). By being transmitted to 21410, a position close to the finger of the player who holds the operation handle 51 can be vibrated.

When the vibration device 21500 is displaced to the back side in accordance with the vibration of the vibration device 21500, the protruding portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the projecting portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the protruding portion 21522 receives a load from the overhanging portion De3 toward the front side, so that the vibration device 21500 returns to the front side as compared with the case where the overhanging portion De3 is not formed. Can be increased.

Further, when the vibration device 21500 is displaced in a manner of rotating backward with the left end portion as an axis along with vibration, the left plate-like protrusion 21523 is pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De along with this displacement (FIG. 300). (See (a)). As a result, the plate-like protrusion 21523 becomes the bottom member 21De.
Therefore, it is possible to increase the momentum at which the vibration device 21500 returns to the front in the rotational direction about the left end.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 whose displacement is restricted by the intermediate portion 21551 of the covering cover member 21530 can flow downward from the intermediate lower surface 21551b. Therefore, since the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened by concentrating the resin material constituting the covering member 21520 between the overhanging portion De3, the reaction force received from the overhanging portion De3 is increased. Can do. In addition, since the bottom member 21De provided with the overhanging portion De3 is not a member that is assumed to be displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to assume a situation in which the covering member 21520 is deformed due to the displacement of the overhanging portion De3.

Thereby, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 is reduced to the vibration motor 2.
It can be limitedly increased in 1510 excitation states. In this case, the operation device 10300 is operated, or the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 216).
When the vibration device 21500 is in a non-excited state at the time of vibration production, the vibration device 215
While the load generated between 00 and the overhanging portion De3 is kept small, it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the vibration device 21500 side. On the other hand, in the excitation state of the vibration motor 21510, the vibration device 21500 and the overhang portion The vibration device 2 is increased by increasing the load generated with the part De3.
The effect of assisting 1500 vibrations can be increased.

Therefore, when the vibration device 21500 is in a non-excitation state, the load transmitted to the vibration device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be sufficiently suppressed (the covering member 215).
On the other hand, when the vibration device 21500 is in an excited state, a load that is transmitted to the vibration device 21500 via the covering member 21520 is generated by compressive deformation (strain) in the protrusion 21522. (Reaction force) can be increased.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 21522 is a protrusion formed from a flexible resin material, the protrusion 2
It is possible to suppress the displacement of the overhanging portion De3 by pressing the 1522. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress vibration from being transmitted to the overhanging portion De3, it is possible to avoid vibration from being generated in the operation device 10300 due to vibration of the vibration device 21500.

When the vibration device 21500 is displaced to the back side in accordance with the vibration of the vibration device 21500 and then displaced so as to return to the front side, the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-like portion 21458. As a result, the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-like portion 21458 toward the back surface side, so that the vibration device 21500 is connected to the back surface as compared with the case where the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is not formed. The momentum of returning to the side can be increased.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the vibration device 21500 is configured to assist displacement in both the front and rear directions, the vibration device 21500 is in an excited state until the vibration becomes strong enough to be experienced by the player. This period can be shortened.

In the above description, the operation device 10300 is operated or the operation device 10300 is operated.
Although the state where the vibration device 21500 is de-energized at the time of the vibration effect of the vibration device 10366 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vibration device 21500
The operation of the operation device 10300 may be executed during the vibration.

In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 increases, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhanging portion De3 accompanying the operation of the operation device 10300, and
Since the direction of the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhang portion De3 intersects,
Interaction between the load generated from the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operation device 10300 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid occurrence of a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300 break down due to the simultaneous generation of loads from the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300.

FIG. 301 is a partial top schematic view of the lower dish unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower dish unit 21400. In FIG. 301, the state where the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end portion of the bearing insertion recess 21533c of the covering cover member 21530, that is, the state where the vibration motor 21510 is disposed at the right limit position of the displaceable region. Illustrated.

In this embodiment, since the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering cover member 21530 via the covering member 21520, the vibration motor 2 is deformed by the deformation of the covering member 21520 or the like.
1510 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the covering cover 21530. Further, as described above, the vibration device 21500 is displaced (rotated) by the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side with the left insertion portion 21535 (see FIG. 290) as a reference (vibration axis). The force is loaded to the right.

That is, when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 becomes intense, the vibration motor 21510 is displaced rightward by the centrifugal force generated in the vibration device 21500 (see FIG. 301). Covering cover 215
Since the protrusion 21534 formed on the right side of 30 is formed in a curved shape that moves toward the left at the rear side end (see FIG. 295), the vibration motor 21510 moves toward the right as the vibration motor 21510 moves toward the right. The resistance received from the covering cover 21530 when displacing to the back side increases. Thereby, the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, even when the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by the vibration motor 21510 being displaced in a direction crossing the main vibration direction (front-rear direction). Since the action occurs, the vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the vibration motor 21510 is stopped by the control). Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the vibration can be suppressed by the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 accompanying the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, the arrangement of the detection sensor for detecting the displacement due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510 can be eliminated. . As a result, the product cost of the lower dish unit 21400 in this embodiment can be reduced, and heat generated from the vibration motor 21510 can be dissipated through the wiring that is vacated by omitting the arrangement of the detection sensor. It can be used effectively as a space for doing things.

Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. Although the gaming machine frame has been mainly described in the first embodiment, the operation unit A300 visually recognized through the window portion 14c will be described in the twenty-second embodiment.

FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 according to the twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 is a base plate A cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
60, a number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62,
The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit A80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Fixed to.

The base plate A60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side. General winning entrance 6
3. The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit A80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board A13. Has been.

The front center portion of the game board A13 is connected to the inner frame 1 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
2 from the front side. The game board A13 is mainly described below with reference to FIG.
The configuration of will be described.

On the front of the game board A13, an outer rail 6 formed by bending a belt-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
2 is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The inner circumference 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board A13, and the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front of the game board A13 and includes two rails 61, 6
2 and a resin outer edge member A73 connecting between the rails (region where a winning opening etc. are arranged and the fired ball flows down).

In the present embodiment, the metal member 75 (see FIG. 308) is used as the outer edge member A73.
Is incorporated so that the strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is enhanced, which will be described in detail later.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the aim of disposing the general winning opening 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be described below.

In the present embodiment, in a normal game, the route passing through the left side of the third symbol display device 81 is the first.
The ball is fired aiming at winning the ball to the winning port 64, but the first winning port 64 is used.
A part of the sphere flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning port 64 without arriving at the game wins the general winning port 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. In other words, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of affecting the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning a prize at the general prize opening 63, the easier it is to generate a larger number of times of winning at the first prize opening 64 with a smaller number of balls during normal times.

On the other hand, in a game in which the time is shortened or the probability is changing, the ball is launched aiming at winning the ball to the second winning port 640 through the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the sphere flowing down the area on the right side of the second prize opening 640 without reaching the prize opening 640 wins the general prize opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. In other words, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of influencing the game during the probability change or the short time. For example, the higher the possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 63, the more the ball loss during probability change or shorter time can be suppressed.

Suppressing the loss of the ball, the next jackpot is won before the ball held on the upper plate 17 disappears, even if the game is not played in a firing mode that stops the ball firing in a timely manner during probability change (even if it is not hit) Therefore, it is possible to reduce stress (fatigue) experienced by the player with the game. Therefore, the number of revolutions until the next big hit frequently increases during probability change (for example, 10
Even in the case of 0 rotation or more), the player can comfortably execute the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is launched aiming to win the ball to the specific winning port 65a through the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second winning port 640 is used.
A part of the sphere flowing down the right area of the player flows down to the general winning port 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning port 65a side (left side) and wins the general winning port 63a. The winning ball accompanying the winning at the general winning opening 63 is paid out as a winning ball different from the winning ball at the specific winning opening 65a, so that the player can change the special gaming state by the special gaming state. In addition to the prize balls based on the number of prizes awarded to the specific prize opening 65a planned, prize balls based on the quantity awarded to the general prize opening 63 can be obtained.

In other words, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of increasing the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained by the player in the special game state. Here, as the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so that the elapsed time until the special gaming state ends tends to increase. In other words, the number of rounds and the number of counts in the special gaming state (the number of prizes awarded per round) are the same in terms of control, depending on the location, number and upstream flow path design of the general winning opening 63. However, it is possible to vary the time required for the end of the special gaming state (long or short) and the number of award balls (slightly) to be paid out to the player.

In addition, the display mode in the case of displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 in the special game state is not limited at all. For example, the number of payout winning balls based on winning in the specific winning opening 65a and the number of paying out winning balls based on winning in the general winning opening 63 may be displayed separately, or payout based on winning in the specific winning opening 65a. A total number of the number of winning balls and the number of payout winning balls based on winning in the general winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second pattern is higher during probability change and during shorter time than normal,
In addition, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is short, “○” is displayed in the variation display of the second symbol.
The number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 6 without the electric winning combination 6
4, the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit A80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning the first winning opening 64, It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during a certain change or during a short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 allows the second prize opening 64.
Since the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state and easy to win the second winning port 640, the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning port 640. The ball is fired (so-called “right-handed”) and passed through the through gate 67 to make the electric accessory 640a.
It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation big win by winning the 2nd prize opening 640 in addition to making the open state.

In the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is asymmetrical, and it is required that the ball be struck right and left according to the gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be symmetric (see FIG. 302).
. In this case, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or second winning port 640 by “left-handed”.
You can also aim. Therefore, depending on the game state (whether it is probable, short-running, or normal), the player can change the way the ball is fired between left-handed and right-handed. Can be made unnecessary. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

In this embodiment, an input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include a drive motor AMT1 and a drive motor AM.
T2 and a drive motor for moving the rendering unit A710 up and down are included.

FIG. 303 shows a pachinko machine A showing a state in which the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame 12.
10 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. 304 shows a state where the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12. In FIGS. 303 and 304, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board A13 are omitted for convenience.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 323, the structures of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 will be described. FIG. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600, and the operation unit A300, and FIG.
13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600, and the operation unit A300. In FIGS. 305 and 306, a part of the right side surface of the game board A13 is enlarged. In the description of FIGS. 305 and 306, FIG. 302 is referred to as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member that is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, fitted into a through hole 13a formed in the game board A13 from the front side, and fastened and fixed near the periphery.
A covering portion 86h covering the game board A13 and a covering portion 86h so that balls can be distributed on the left side.
From the upper end, a distribution extending portion 86a extending from the upper end portion to the front side, a left inclined portion 86b extending downward from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape inclined downward from the upper end portion, and A right inclined portion 86c extending downward from the covering portion 86h in a shape that is inclined downward toward the right, and its right inclined portion 8
A right channel forming wall portion 86d extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a manner extending downward from a position opposed to the return rubber 69 and connected to the lower end portion of 6c; Wall part 86d
A plurality of horizontal protrusions 86e protruding to the flow path side (right side) as protrusions extending in the front-rear width, and the right flow path forming wall part 86d in a positional relationship that is different from the horizontal protrusions 86e. And a plurality of front protrusions 86f protruding from the covering part 86h to the flow path side (front side) as protrusions extending over the flow path width in the region between the outer edge member A73 and the right flow path forming wall part 86d. A separation wall portion 86g that extends downward from the lower end portion and is configured to be separable from other portions at the lower right corner of the through hole 13a is mainly provided.

FIG. 307 (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302.
FIG. 307 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 along the line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb in FIG. 307 (a).

When the player turns the operation handle 51 rightward and plays a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), the distance between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is the distance at which the sphere can flow down (the diameter of the sphere is 11 m).
m, the distance is set to be a length having a slight gap of about 16 mm), so that the sphere flows down while contacting the right flow path forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73. Become.

More specifically, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is rebounded to the left and right center side of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69 and collides with the right flow path forming wall portion 86d. Right channel forming wall 86
Since d is formed as an inclined wall that descends downward as it goes to the right, the sphere flowing down by its own weight tends to flow down the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.

In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the lateral ridge 86e. In the present embodiment, the lateral protrusion 8
Since the projecting length of 6e is designed to be about 2 mm (a length less than 20% of the diameter of the sphere) and the arrangement interval is 16 mm (the same length as the flow path width), the deceleration of the sphere flowing down, It is possible to achieve a well-balanced prevention of the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the front ridge portion 86f is provided at an intermediate position between the plurality of horizontal ridge portions 86e.
Is formed with a protruding length (2 mm) similar to that of the horizontal protrusion 86e. Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of clogging of the balls while improving the speed reduction effect by setting the interval between the protrusions to be half of the channel width.

Normally, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in an amusement store, a slight amount (1
(Slightly weak) Installed laid down. Therefore, the covering portion 86h is arranged as an inclined wall that is inclined downward toward the front side, and the sphere that flows down by its own weight tries to flow down so as to roll on the covering portion 86h. Since it is configured in this way, the glass unit 16 side (front side)
Compared with the case where the projecting portion is formed from the cover portion toward the flow path, the collision between the front projecting ridge portion 86f projecting from the covering portion 86h and the sphere can be favorably generated. In FIG. 307 (b), in order to make it easy to grasp the inclination, the inclination angle of the game board A13 is shown larger than usual (about 5 degrees).

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion that is arranged to face the lottery unit A600, and the through hole 13a.
Among these areas, the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged is closed and separated. Hereinafter, the assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged, the through hole 13a of the game board A13
A small recess 13b that protrudes to the right from the substantially circular portion that receives the center frame A86, and a large recess 13c that protrudes to the lower right below the small recess 13b are formed. In this way, the small concave portion 13b and the large concave portion 13c as the arrangement region of the lottery unit A600 are replaced with the through hole 1.
Compared to the case where a plurality of independent through-holes are formed by forming as a recessed portion connected to the open portion that receives the center frame A86 of 3a (when occupying an area necessary as the width of the portion forming the boundary). A wide area that can be used as an arrangement area for the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 can be secured. Details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a back surface formed in a box shape whose front side is open from a bottom wall portion A311 and an outer wall portion A312 standing from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. Case A310 is provided.

The back case A310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening A311a at the center of the bottom wall portion A311. The opening A311a has a third symbol display device 81.
Corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 that are arranged in an internal space of the back case A310 in such a manner that a movable device having substantially the same configuration covers the upper peripheral edge of the internal space, and the first operation unit A400. The second operation unit A700 disposed on the lower side where the above arrangement is omitted is accommodated, and is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operation unit A400 is located on the bottom wall portion A311 of the rear case A310 at the position above the opening A311a and the left and right sides, and the second operation unit A700 is located at the position below the opening A311a. Arranged. 305 and FIG.
In 06, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 are connected to the rear case A31.
A state of being attached to 0 is illustrated.

The back case A310 extends as a flat plate along the back of the game board A13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front side end of the outer wall part A312 and faces the game board A13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 304). A support plate A313 is provided for support.

The support plate portion A313 is a columnar portion that protrudes from the back surface to the back surface side of the game board A13, and protrudes in a shape capable of positioning a fastening convex portion 13d in which a female screw portion is formed at the center. The positioning projection A313a is provided, and the positioning projection A313a has a substantially center position (fastening projection 13d).
An insertion hole A313b having a size capable of inserting a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening convex portion 13d is formed at a position matching the female screw.

That is, the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed by positioning the fastening projection 13d with the positioning projection A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening projection 13d. The rigidity of the A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole can be improved.

In addition, the shape of positioning convex part A313a is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, it may be a convex portion having an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening convex portion 13d (circular in the present embodiment), or the support plate portion A in consideration of workability during assembly.
The convex part along the ellipse shape along the direction in which 313 is formed may be sufficient. In addition, when the fastening convex portion 13d is formed in a rectangular column shape, it is naturally assumed that the positioning convex portion A313a has a shape along the rectangular shape correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in this embodiment, a large number of support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left and upper sides of the back case A310, and the formation of the support plate portions A313 is reduced on the right and lower sides. This is a result of designing in consideration of a balance between improvement in rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole and space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material as in the present embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 is visible through the game board A13. The entire back side of the game board A13 is effective as an effect area to be arranged. On the other hand, in the place where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the inner space of the back case A310 is eroded inward by the area in the front view of the support plate portion A313.
An area where the movable member can be disposed is narrowed. Therefore, if it is possible to maintain the strength problem even if the support plate portion A313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid limiting the arrangement range of the movable member by omitting the support plate portion A313. That is.

In the present embodiment, the large number of support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case A310, which is related to the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the launched ball, such as the game area. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed at a place other than the range where the fired sphere is visually recognized.

More specifically, in this embodiment, a ball launched from the launching device 112a (FIG. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball prevention member 68 to enter the game area. Introduced and thereafter configured to flow down the gaming area. In the ball game, the place where the most attention is likely to be gathered is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area opposite to the third symbol display device 81 with the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 in between ) Is usually low.

Therefore, as a range where the sphere cannot reach, the lower left and upper left with respect to the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right with respect to the upward convex arc It is thought that the player's attention to the will be low.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-described outer edge member A73 and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 at the lower left portion and the upper left portion with respect to the outer rail 62 are formed along the outer rail 62 and disposed on the front side of the game board A13. Since the block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material,
The rear side of the game board A13 cannot be viewed from the front side of the game board A13 via the outer edge member A73 and the block-like member 74.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is preferentially disposed at a place where these attentions are low or a place where the attention is not visible. In fact, the support plate portion A313 is formed near the corner portion of the back case A310, avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end portion of the outer rail 62, even in the left side portion and the upper portion where the support plate portion A313 is formed in a large amount. Is done.

In other words, the operation unit A3 is selected by selecting a portion where space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from a portion having low visibility (low performance ability) in the first place.
While the effect of ensuring the rigidity of 00 and the entire game board A13 is achieved, it is possible to ensure a wide area for entering the field of view of the player who focuses on the ball.

From this point of view, there is a common configuration in pachinko machines that rolls the ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a along the outer rail 62 and introduces it into the game area. It is easy to find the part and the upper right part. On the other hand, the rubber wrap 6 as a part that absorbs the kinetic energy of the sphere and adjusts the subsequent flow mode.
On the downstream side of 9, it is difficult to specify a common range where the sphere does not flow down.

That is, in the downstream of the return rubber 69, not only the relationship with the member forming the outer edge of the game area, but also the flow path of the ball changes depending on the configuration and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. Until the specifications on the game board A13 side are determined, the placement location of the support plate portion A313 cannot be determined.

Compared to the configuration of the game board A13 related to the performance of the pachinko machine A10, the operation unit A
Since 300 can be designed freely, the design of the operation unit A300 usually proceeds earlier than the design of the game board A13.
It is possible to carefully create an internal structure of zero. If the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs in the final stage of the development schedule, if the position of the support plate A313 is changed accordingly, not only the rear case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300 This leads to a change in the design of other devices arranged in the above, and increases the cost of the design change.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A is located at a position corresponding to the downstream side of the return rubber 69.
The formation of 313 is omitted. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

In addition, in the area downstream of the return rubber 69, the internal space of the back case A310 is avoided from being eroded by the support plate portion A313, and a sufficient space for arranging the first operation unit A400 for production is secured. The first action unit A and the path through which the sphere flows down
Since the range where 400 is arranged can be overlapped in the front and back, the first operation unit A400 can naturally enter the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed at the back position of the outer edge member A73 is:
It is formed on the inner side (left side) of the outermost right end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, support plate part A313 formed in the left side part of back case A310 is formed in the outer side (left side) rather than the left outermost short of outer wall part A312. That is, the form of formation of the support plate part A313 (formation direction with respect to the outer wall part A312) is left-right asymmetric.

Thereby, compared with the distance between the left outermost end of the outer wall portion A312 and the left end of the game board A13, the distance between the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312 and the right end of the game board A13 can be shortened. Therefore, the right end of the inner space of the back case A310 can be brought close to the right end of the game board A13.

The right outer wall portion A312 is not formed with a surface opposed to the game board A13 except for the support plate part A313, and the front edge is in contact with the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right outer wall portion A312 contacts the game board A13 by line contact.

A substantially lower half portion of the right outer wall portion A312 is provided with a cutout portion A312a that is cut out (formed with a cutout) toward the back side. This notch A312a is used for the lottery unit A60.
Notched below the upper edge of 0, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304),
A gap is formed between the game board A13.

By forming the notch A312a in this way, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the notch A312a is changed to the lottery unit A.
600 and the wiring connected to the variable winning device 65 can function as a wiring through that passes outside the rear case A310. Thereby, compared with the case where wiring is drawn up and down, possibility that a wiring will interfere with the 1st operation unit A400 and the 2nd operation unit A700 side can be made low.

Further, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be used as an arrangement space of a configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. In addition, as a configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65, for example, a solenoid for generating a driving force, a flow path for flowing a ball, a substrate for a light emitting effect, a detection sensor for detecting a ball, Other structures are exemplified. In the present embodiment, the second winning opening 6 of the lottery unit A600.
The discharge path ER through which the ball that won the prize 40 is discharged passes through the gap between the notch A312a and the game board A13 (see FIG. 317).

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the notch A312a, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (when the boundary of the light irradiated from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). Thus, the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board A13 can be made ambiguous. Thereby, it can avoid that the boundary of the light visually recognized through game board A13 depends on the shape of back case A310, and can improve the freedom degree of light emission effect.

The formation length (vertical direction length) of the notch A 312a is not limited at all. For example, the cutout portion A31 extends over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.
2a may be formed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game board A13 is provided on the right side of the back case A310.
When the rigidity at the right side of the game board A13 is considered,
The rigidity of the operating unit A300 cannot be relied upon.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, a metal plate member 75 made of metal is disposed on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. Hereinafter, the metal plate member 75 will be described.

FIG. 308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73, and the metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73, and the metal plate member 75. Note that in FIG. 308 and FIG. 309, for ease of understanding, the game board A13 is shown as a single unit, and illustration of other members disposed on the game board A13 is omitted.

The outer edge member A73 is formed of a resin material, and includes an arc wall portion 73a that forms an upper side and an inner side surface having an arc shape, and extends in a thin wall shape downward from a lower end portion of the arc wall portion 73a. A vertical wall portion 73b, and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with an upper surface that is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b toward the left. Thus, by configuring the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers substantially the entire vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 is formed of a plurality of members that are divided vertically. Assembling steps to the game board A13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b has a plurality of plate-like projecting portions 73b1 projecting in a plate shape toward the back side along the right surface portion.
And a columnar shape toward the back side at the joint portion between the plurality of bent portions 73b2 formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front side edge of the right surface portion, and the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c. A columnar projecting portion 73b3 that is projected and a fastening portion 73b4 that is provided alongside the columnar projecting portion 73b3 and that can be screwed in are provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arrangement interval of the plate-like projecting portions 73b1. Thereby, in relation to the metal plate member 75 described later, the holding force of the metal plate member 75 against the vertical wall portion 73b while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate member 75. Can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-like projecting portions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 of the metal plate-like member 75. Since a resistance force against bending can be generated, a load generated at one place can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 are arranged at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-like member 75 is bent can be evenly assigned.
It is possible to prevent an excessive load from occurring at any one of the locations.

The metal plate-like member 75 is folded back to the left at the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a and the main body plate portion 75a formed with no folds in the longitudinal direction, while the short side direction is folded a plurality of times. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the joints between the bent portion 75b, the main body plate portion 75a, and the bent portion 75b, and the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Through-hole 75d, and an insertion hole 75e that is provided in the plate portion provided with the through-hole 75d and stepped to the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way of folding the main body plate portion 75a. Therefore, the vertical wall part 73b can be efficiently reinforced by arranging it integrally with the vertical wall part 73b that is easily bent in the longitudinal direction.

The joint penetration part 75c is formed in a size that allows the plate-like projecting part 73b1 of the vertical wall part 73b to be inserted. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 through the joint penetration portion 75c.

When the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and the cylindrical projection is provided. Part 73b3
Is inserted through the through hole 75d. As described above, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned with respect to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

From the above configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed over the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate through the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and the front end portion engages with the game board A13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described.

The game board A13 receives a plurality of recessed portions 13e that are recessed so as to receive the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 on the right edge of the front surface, and the cylindrical protruding portions 73b3 on the upper side and the lower side of the recessed portions 13e. And a plurality of positioning holes 13f that are formed as long holes that are vertically long.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 are integrated with the game board A13, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 is received in the recessed portion 13e, and the circular protruding portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. And positioned. That is, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 7
3b3 is used not only for positioning with the metal plate member 75 but also for positioning with the game board A13. Thereby, the number of positioning can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 73b with sufficient rigidity, and the vertical wall The portion 73b can be formed thin enough to be easily bent in the left-right direction by itself.

Furthermore, since the deformation of the game board A13 can be suppressed by the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 (the rigidity can be improved), the game board can be used even when the game board A13 and the rear case A310 (see FIG. 306) are separated from each other. The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening protrusion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

Therefore, the small recess 1 is located at a position where the distance from the right end of the game board A13 is short (a position very close to the right end).
The right edge of 3b and the large recessed part 13c can be arrange | positioned. Accordingly, the right limit positions of the through hole 13a, the small recess 13b, and the large recess 13c with respect to the game board A13 can be moved to the right side, and the opening shape can be increased.

In this case, when the game area is formed using the game board A13 having the same vertical and horizontal width and the center frame A86 having the same opening size, the right end of the game area with respect to the game board A13 is set to the right. Therefore, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of design of the path through which the game ball flows down when left-handed (design freedom of the position of the nail, the position of the ball guide channel, the position of the ball passage, etc.).

Further, a distribution device (not shown) that causes the ball to flow down in the right-handed game (for example, a device that switches the path in the order of arrival of the ball and flows down), the lottery unit A600, and the variable winning device 65 (FIG. 305).
2) can be ensured in a large area, so that the degree of freedom in designing the distribution device (not shown), the lottery unit A600, and the variable winning device 65 can be improved.

FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 includes the above-described electric accessory 640.
a and a second winning opening 640 that is switched between a state in which a ball can pass and a state in which the ball cannot pass depending on whether the electric accessory 640a is in an open state or a closed state.

The lottery unit A600 includes a main body member A610 that is formed through the second winning port 640 and forms a flow-down path through which a ball flows down to the front side and is fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and the rear surface of the main body member A610. Engaging member A that is rotatably supported on the side and engages with the electric accessory 640a
620 and a driving device unit A63 that generates a driving force for operating the engaging member A620.
0, a covering member A650 that is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 and defines the flow path of the sphere, and a main irradiation that irradiates light to a region that is disposed on the back side of the main body member A610 and that corresponds to the flow path of the sphere Auxiliary irradiation apparatus A that irradiates light to an area that is disposed on the back side of apparatus A660 and body member A610 and that is less visible by covering member A650 and that is different from the flow path of the sphere.
670.

The main body member A610 is a main body plate portion A6 having a plane parallel to the front of the game board A13 on the front side.
11 and a left extending wall portion A61 extending in a wall shape from the left edge portion of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side.
2, a right extending obstacle wall portion A613 extending in a wall shape from the position including the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side, and a rectangular frame shape surrounding the second winning port 640 in a rear view. An extended rectangular frame A614 that extends to the back, a protruding receiving portion A615 that protrudes to the back side above the second winning opening 640 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extended rectangular frame A614 A main light emission holding frame A616 extending to the back side in a frame shape including a portion, and an auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 extending to the back side in a frame shape on the left side of the extension rectangular frame A614.

A through gate 67 is inserted and fixed at the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the sphere that is about to enter the lottery unit A600 is
It flows downstream through the through gate 67.

The left extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion disposed to face the separation wall portion 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall portion A612 are engaged (contacted) to ensure rigidity. As a result, the through hole 13a and the center frame A86 are also selected by the lottery unit A600.
The center frame A86 and the lottery unit A
600 can be stably held in a manner that suppresses the positional deviation of 600.

The right extending obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion constituting a rolling surface of a sphere. That is, lottery unit A
The sphere flowing down 600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extending obstacle wall A613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A614 includes a shaft support hole A614a drilled as a portion for rotatably supporting the engaging member A620, and the extended edge thereof can receive the front side end of the drive unit A630. Formed from shape. In other words, the driving device unit A63 is fastened with the extension end of the extending rectangular frame A614 being fastened in a state where the front side end portion of the driving device unit A630 is assembled.
0 is fixed to the extended rectangular frame A614.

The protrusion receiving portion A615 is configured to be able to come into contact with the engaging member A620 and the operation member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and is a part that defines the movement end position. Will be described later.

The main light emission holding frame A616 is a frame constituting an outer frame of light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is bored. This insertion hole A6
The fastening screw inserted through 16a is screwed into the fastening portion A652a of the covering member A650. As will be described later, the fastening portion A652a is formed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 in front view. Is done. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a to be visually recognized in a front view, and to avoid impairing the design of the lottery unit A600.

The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame constituting an outer frame of light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 when viewed from the front.

The engagement member A620 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole A614a of the extending rectangular frame A614.
The claw-like portion A622 disposed at the rotating tip portion is configured to be engaged with the electric accessory 640a. Thereby, it is comprised so that the state (an open state or a closed state) of the electrically-driven accessory 640a may arise with the change of the attitude | position of engagement member A620. Next, details of the engagement member A620 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 312 (a) shows the engaging member A620 viewed from the direction of the rotation axis J1.
FIG. 312 (b) is a front view of the engaging member A620 in the direction of the arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312 (a), and FIG. 312 (c) is a CCCXII in FIG. 312 (b).
It is sectional drawing of engagement member A620 in the c-CCCXIIc line.

The engaging member A620 is formed of a resin material having flexibility, and includes a pair of rotating arm portions A621 formed of a plate-like portion that intersects (orthogonally) the rotation axis J1, and a rotation tip of the rotating arm portion A621. A claw-shaped portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of projecting shaft portions A623 projecting from the rotating arm portion A621 in a columnar shape around the rotation axis J1, and a rotation base of the rotating arm portion A621 A base-side connecting rod portion A624 formed in a U-shape in a front view in a mode of being joined after being bent toward the mating side at the extended end, which is a rod-like portion extending in the radial direction from the end side. And a rod-like portion extending in a direction parallel to the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624 from the rotating distal end side of the rotating arm portion A621, and coupled after being bent toward the other side at the extending end portion. A front end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U shape in front view That.

The pair of rotating arm portions A621 are arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the sphere. Thereby, since the flow path of the sphere can be formed so that the sphere passes between the rotating arm portions A621 (see FIG. 313), the degree of freedom in designing the flow path of the sphere configured by the lottery unit A600 is improved. be able to.

The base end side connecting rod portion A624 includes a main body rod portion A624a formed from substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod, and a distal end side connecting rod portion A62 at an intermediate position between the main body rod portion A624a.
A projecting restriction portion A624b projecting toward the fifth side. The protrusion restricting portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting over-rotation of the engaging member A620, but will be described in detail later.

The distal end side connecting rod portion A625 is formed such that the cross sectional shape of the rod-like portion A625a extending in parallel with the rotation axis J1 is different from that of the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624. That is, the rod-shaped part A625a
The surface on the side facing the rotating arm portion A621 is formed in a flat shape that maintains the distance from the rotating arm portion A621, while the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is directed toward the rotating tip side. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that is inclined in a direction away from the rotating arm portion A621. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed such that the thickness increases and the rigidity becomes higher (the deformation resistance increases) toward the rotation tip side.

In addition, the rod-like portion A625a is concave in such a manner that the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is inclined toward the surface on the side facing the rotating arm portion A621 as it goes to the center side in the rotation axis J1 direction. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c provided.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed along the inclination of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed from the inclined direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the recessed surface A625c is different only in the thickness direction of the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 (the width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621). Visible as a point.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed corresponding to the shape of the operating member A632 so that the operating member A632 of the driving device unit A630 can be received. Details will be described later.

FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, the engaging member A620, and the drive unit A630. In FIG. 313, the engaging member A620 is the shaft support hole A6 of the main body member A610.
A state of being pivotally supported by 14a is illustrated.

Assembling of the engaging member A620 to the main body member A610 is performed by fitting the engaging member A620 inside the extending rectangular frame A614 in a state in which the engaging member A620 is subjected to a compressive force and deformed, and the projecting between the shaft support hole A614a and the engaging member A620. It is executed by removing the load and releasing the deformation in a state where the position with the installation shaft portion A623 is matched.

In other words, the engagement member A620 is grasped so as to be pinched by the fingers from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and a compressive force is applied to deform the arrangement shaft portion A623 so that the arrangement width becomes shorter than the inner width of the extended rectangular frame A614. The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by allowing the engaging member A620 to enter inside the extended rectangular frame A614, aligning the positions, and releasing the finger.

In the present embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed so as to be coupled by a proximal end side connecting rod portion A624 and a distal end side connecting rod portion A625 that are narrower and easier to deform than the rotating arm portion A621. Therefore, most of the deformation in the case of giving a load for assembling is the base end side connecting rod portion A624.
And can be generated in the distal end side connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, deformation of the rotating arm portion A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a can be suppressed, so that the engagement member A620 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to deformation during assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are connected not by a single rod-like portion but by a pair of rod-like portions (base end side connecting rod portion A624 and distal end side connecting rod portion A625), the load is released. After that, it can be easily avoided that the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 are shifted.

Furthermore, by disposing a rod-shaped portion that is wider than the rotating base end side on the rotating distal end side where the load during operation tends to increase among the pair of rod-shaped portions (see FIG. 312 (c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL It is possible to prevent the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 from shifting when they are operated by the driving force.

In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-like portion on the rotation base end side (see FIG. 312 (c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 required at the time of assembly is brought near the protruding shaft portion A623 on the rotation base end side. It can be generated intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engagement member A620 while realizing a stable operation using the engagement member A620.

As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engaging member A620 is in contact with the lower end of the projecting receiving portion A615, so that further rotation is restricted. As described above, the engaging member A 620 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and there is a possibility that the ball enters the second winning opening 640 in the open state of the electric accessory 640a. The ball that has entered the second winning port 640 is a surface that constitutes the engaging member A620 and the extended rectangular frame A614, and is disposed so as to face the engaging member A620. The inclined surface is inclined downward toward the back side. Flows down to the lower bottom inclined surface A614b formed as follows, and flows into the drive unit A630.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the rotating arm portion A621 is disposed with a longer interval than the diameter (11 mm) of the sphere, the sphere can flow between the opposing rotating arm portions A621. As a result, the engaging member A620 can be disposed in such a manner as to surround the flow path of the sphere from above, so that the engagement member A620 and the flow path of the sphere can be compactly disposed.

The drive unit A630 is held by a box-shaped main body box A631 whose front side is connected and fixed to the rear side end of the extending rectangular frame A614 of the main body member A610, and an upper portion of the main body box A631. An electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, an operating member A632 that slides forward and backward by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, a coil spring A633 that applies a biasing force to the operating member A632, and a lower portion of the main body box portion A631. And a detection sensor A634 for detecting passage of a sphere.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state, the operating member A632 is disposed at the front side position (see FIG. 314 (a)) by the biasing force of the coil spring A633, and the electromagnetic solenoid A
When the SOL is excited, the operating member A6 resists the urging force of the coil spring A633.
32 is driven and arranged at the back side position (see FIG. 314 (b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position in a state where a disk-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 comes into contact with the protruding receiving portion A615. Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described.

FIGS. 314 (a) and 314 (b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engaging member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIG. 314 (a) and FIG. 314 (b), only the electric component 640a, the engaging member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are illustrated for easy understanding, and other configurations for holding these members are illustrated. The illustration is omitted.

In FIG. 314 (a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state (electric component 640).
(closed state of a) is illustrated, and in FIG. 314 (b), the excitation state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (
The open state of the electric accessory 640a) is illustrated.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state and the operating member A632 is disposed at the front side position, the engaging member A620 is in a downward inclined posture (see FIG. 314 (a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in an excited state. Then, when the operation member A632 is disposed at the back side position, the engagement member A620 is in the upward inclined posture (see FIG. 314 (b)).

The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion A653 of the covering member A650,
An eccentric projecting portion 640b projecting from the position eccentric to the rotation shaft to the back side is provided.
The eccentric projecting portion 640b is disposed so as to be vertically contactable with the claw-shaped portion A622 of the engaging member A620, and the eccentric projecting portion 640b is displaced in conjunction with the claw-shaped portion A622. The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-like member. However, as can be seen from the fact that there are two sets of claw-like portions A622 of the engaging member A620, the electric accessory 640a is mutually connected. You may make it comprise from a pair of blade-shaped member which faces each other. In this case,
The engaging member A620 of this embodiment can be diverted.

Returning to FIG. 310 and FIG. The covering member A650 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween, and the main body plate portion A611 of the main body member A610. A main body plate portion A651 that constitutes a flow path of the sphere, a restriction wall portion A652 that protrudes in a wall shape toward the back side of the main body plate portion A651, and a rear surface of the main body plate portion A651. An electric accessory 640a that protrudes in a column shape to the side
And a shaft post-like portion A653 that pivotally supports the shaft.

The main body plate portion A651 has a high transmission range A651a in which the back side is easily visible in front view, and a low transmission range A651 in which the light transmission is lower than the high transmission range A651a and the back side is difficult to see.
b.

In the present embodiment, a high-permeability range A651a and a high-permeability range A651a are attached to the front side of the main body plate portion A651 by sticking a seal whose printing surface is designed in a form that configures a high-permeability range and a low-permeability range. The low transmission range A651b is configured, but the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by resin two-color molding,
The body plate portion A651 may be cut to roughen the surface to form a low-permeability range.

In the present embodiment, the high transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly the right side) of the sphere flow path, and the low transmission range A651b is provided with a regulation wall portion A652 that regulates the flow of the sphere. On the other side (mainly the left side). Thereby, while ensuring the visibility of the flow path of the ball, the field of view can be blocked so that the internal structure is not visually recognized by the player in a range where the ball does not flow down.

The restriction wall A652 is, for example, an insertion hole A616a for fastening and fixing with the main body member A610.
A fastening portion A652a into which a fastening screw inserted through is screwed is provided. Since the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening part A652a is made of metal and non-transparent, it is easy to make a shadow in a front view. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the fastening portion A652a is arranged outside the ball flow path, it prevents the shadow caused by the fastening screw from entering the ball flow path and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling. can do. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the flow-down mode of the ball from being scraped by the shadow of the fastening screw.

The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffusion plate A661 housed in the main light emission holding frame A616 of the main body member A610, an electric decoration board A662 in which light emission means A663 such as an LED is disposed on the diffusion plate A661 side, A rear lid portion A664 that is formed in an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the electrical decoration substrate A662, and is fastened and fixed to the rear side end portion of the main light emission support frame A616.

The diffusing plate A661 is a plate-like member having a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape of the main light emission holding frame A616, and having a diffusing shape for diffusing light on both the front and rear sides, from the outer edge toward the back side. A plurality of extending portions A661a extending in a plate shape are provided. The extending portion A661a has a diffusion plate A
This is a posture maintaining portion for preventing the diffusion plate A661 from tilting in a state where 661 is accommodated in the main light emission holding frame A616. When the diffusion plate A661 is about to tilt, any one of the extending portions A6
61a abuts on the inner side surface of the main light emission holding frame A616, and resistance in the direction of returning the tilt is generated, so that the attitude of the diffusion plate A661 is maintained.

In addition, in the state which assembled | attached main irradiation apparatus A660 to main-body member A610, it is electrical decoration board | substrate A66.
When the front surface of 2 is in contact with the extended end portion of the extended portion A661a, the diffusion plate A661 is prevented from coming out to the back side.

The outer shape of the electric decoration board A662 is substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the outer surface of the main light emission holding frame A616,
The outer shape of the rear lid part A664 is formed with an outer shape substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the electric decoration board A662.
In other words, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge portion of the electric decoration board A662 is held in such a manner as to be sandwiched from the front and rear by the main light emission holding frame A616 and the rear lid portion A664 (held by contact on the surface).

Thereby, even if the thickness of the rear lid portion A664 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A664 alone is low, the illumination board A662 can be stably held by utilizing the rigidity of the main light emission holding frame A616. it can.

Here, an insertion hole A616a through which the fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screw, it is necessary to remove the diffuser plate A661 from the main light emission holding frame A616. Therefore, mischief can be suppressed by increasing the man-hours required to remove the fastening screw.

Further, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transparent and easily shadows. However, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means A663 and light emitted from the light emitting means A663 on the back side of the fastening screw. A diffusion plate A661 capable of diffusing the light is disposed. Therefore, the shadow of the fastening screw can be thinned (diffused) by the diffused light, and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made inconspicuous.

In particular, the light emitting means A663 is disposed at a position where the insertion hole A616a does not overlap on the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the outer shapes projected in the front-rear direction do not overlap). Thereby, the shadow of a fastening screw can be made thin (a shadow is skipped), and the effect which can make the shadow of a fastening screw inconspicuous can be made more remarkable.

As described above, the main irradiation device A660 is disposed on the back side of the sphere flow path, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is irradiated to the sphere flow path. Light reaches the flow path. Therefore, it is possible to obtain light that is light and broader than light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without passing through the diffusion plate. This
A feeling of fatigue given to the eyes of a player who pays attention to the flow path of the ball can be reduced.

The auxiliary irradiation device A670 is arranged on the back side of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and is arranged on the back side of the electrical decoration board A671, and on the back side of the electrical decoration board A671. And a rear lid portion A673 formed from an outer shape substantially the same shape as the outer shape.

The electrical decoration board | substrate A671 is fixed in the holding | maintenance aspect similar to the holding | maintenance aspect of electrical decoration board | substrate A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge portion of the electric decoration board A671 is held in such a manner that it is sandwiched from the front and rear by the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and the rear lid part A673 (held by contact on the surface).

Thereby, even if the thickness of the rear lid portion A673 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A673 alone is low, the electric decoration board A671 can be stably held by utilizing the rigidity of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617. it can.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, the auxiliary irradiation device A670 has an electric decoration board A671.
A diffusion plate is not disposed on the front side of the. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is applied to the main body member A610 while maintaining the light emission intensity without being diffused.

Although light is irradiated in such a manner, in this embodiment, since the light emitting means A672 is disposed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b in front view, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is low. It is visually recognized by the player through the transmission range A651b. Therefore, since the player visually recognizes the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to avoid giving the player an excessive feeling of fatigue when he / she sees the light.

In addition, by setting the light to maintain the emission intensity, it is possible to prevent light from being completely blocked in the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to execute an effect of brightly illuminating the character with the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

FIG. 315 (a) and FIG. 315 (b) show the CCCXIIc-CCCXI of FIG. 312 (b).
It is sectional drawing of lottery unit A600 in the line corresponding to Ic line. In FIG. 315 (a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state, that is, the electric accessory 640a is closed (FIG. 31).
4 (a)) is illustrated, and in FIG. 315 (b), the excitation state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL,
That is, the opened state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314 (b)) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 315 (a), in the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the lower end portion of the disk portion at the tip of the operating member A632 and the recessed surface A625c of the engaging member A620 are in contact. Here, the disk portion of the operating member A632 advances to the front side to the extent that it is disposed opposite to the vicinity of the intermediate position in the width direction of the recessed surface A625c, and the longitudinal direction in which the recessed surface A625c moves the operating member A632. , The load applied from the engagement member A620 to the operation member A632 is mainly a load in the vertical direction (direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

Therefore, it is difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (withdrawing) the operating member A632 with a load from the engaging member A620, and therefore, the piano wire from the gap of the pachinko machine A10 can be made difficult. Thus, it is possible to take measures against an illegal act of changing the wire rod 640a into an open state by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Here, conventionally, pachinko machines have a function of outputting an error notification when an illegal act is detected, but an electromagnetic solenoid is provided by improperly applying a load to the movable accessory 640a visible from the front side. When the movable accessory 640 can be opened regardless of the state of the ASOL, the deterrence against fraud has not been sufficient.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine A10 of this embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is likely to change, the movable accessory 640a and the movable accessory 640a are connected via the eccentric protrusion 640b of the movable accessory 640a. Since the engaging member A620 is engaged (see FIG. 314 (a)), the engaging member A
In the configuration of the present embodiment in which the posture change of 620 is difficult, it is also difficult to open the movable accessory 640a by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Further, in the present embodiment, in response to the above-described fraudulent act that applies a load to the movable accessory 640a, in this embodiment, the concave surface A is formed so that the rod-shaped portion A625a becomes thicker toward the rotation tip side of the engagement member A620.
Since the engagement member A620 is forcedly displaced from the state of FIG. 315 (a) (for example, while deforming the distal end side connecting rod portion A625) from the state of FIG. 315 (a), the movement member A632 The abutting position of the rod-shaped portion A625a shifts to the thick side (rotating tip side), and the tip-side connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

Therefore, every time the engaging member A620 is raised and displaced in the upward direction, the engaging member A62 is further increased.
Since the load necessary for displacing 0 can be increased, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of opening the movable accessory 640a by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Further, the flat surface on the opposite side of the recessed surface A625c of the rod-shaped portion A625a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it goes to the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG.
When a is bent and deformed in the thickness direction by a load received from the operating member A632, the operating member A6
The reaction force applied to 32 can be directed in a direction of rising and tilting toward the front side.

Thereby, the load in the front-rear direction applied from the rod-shaped portion A625a to the operating member A632 can be generated as a load on the front side, and the operating member A632 is prevented from retracting backward due to the load from the rod-shaped portion A625a. Therefore, the engaging member A62 can be more reliably
The rising displacement of 0 can be regulated.

As shown in FIG. 315 (b), in the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the operating member A6.
The lower end of the disc portion 32 and the protrusion restricting portion A624b of the engaging member A620 are in contact with each other, so that the engaging member A620 further rotates (rises up) before colliding with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. Direction movement) is regulated. In other words, since the rotation of the base end side connecting rod portion A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the base end side connecting rod portion A624 is used as the main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as cracking or bending due to collision with the part.

FIG. 316 (a) is a top view of the operation unit A300, and FIG. 316 (b) is a diagram of FIG.
2 is a side view of the operation unit A300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG.
13 and a rear view of the operation unit A300.

As shown in FIGS. 316 (a) and 316 (b), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is disposed so as to protrude to the front side from the front end of the rear case A310. When the game board A13 is formed from a plywood board while the first operation unit A400 is arranged in this way, it is necessary to form a recess or hole to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400 on the back side of the game board A13. However, in this embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from the resin base plate A60, if the mold is manufactured by designing in advance in a shape that can avoid interference with the first operation unit A400, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in the present embodiment, the front plate of the first operation unit A400 is recessed from the back side to the front side along the left and right and top surfaces of the base plate A60 of the game board A13 (see FIG. 306). Interference between the game board A13 and the first operation unit A400 can be easily avoided while being configured to project to the front side of the front end of the back case A310. This
Since the arrangement of the first motion unit A400 can be brought closer to the player side, it is possible to improve the effect of rendering the first motion unit A400 to be visually recognized.

As shown in FIGS. 316 (b) and 317, the support plate portion A313 disposed on the upper portion of the back case A310 is disposed on the inner side (lower side) than the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall portion A312.
As a result, as compared with the case where the support plate portion A313 is disposed outside the outer wall portion A312 while the outer wall portion A312 at the center of the left and right sides where the support plate portion A313 is not disposed is moved further outward (upward). Thus, the upper end position of the back case A310 can be lowered.

That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in disposing the back case A310 with respect to the game board A13 while improving the degree of freedom in disposing the first operation unit A400 (or the second operation unit A700) with respect to the back case A310.

In addition, as described above, the left and right positions where the support plate portion A313 on the upper side of the back case A310 is disposed are located outside the game area in the front view, so that the support plate portion A313 is located below the outer wall portion A312. The influence (disadvantage) exerted on the game by being placed in can be suppressed to a minimum.

As shown in FIG. 317, unlike the left surface side, the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the right surface side of the back case A310 except for the upper end position. That is, the space occupied when the support plate portion A313 is disposed below the upper end position can be omitted, and accordingly, the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310 is brought closer to the right end of the game board A13. Can do.

FIG. 318 shows a game board A13 along the line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in FIG.
And it is a fragmentary sectional view of operation unit A300. As shown in FIG. 318, the base plate A60
Compared to the outer edge extending portion 60a extending to the back side along the outer edge, it is a region on the inner side of the outer edge extending portion 60a and in the region where at least a part of the game region overlaps the front and rear sides. The center overhanging portion 60b that projects to the outside has a shorter front-rear width.

Since the front end surface of the base plate A60 is formed on substantially the same plane, the front side of the rear side end of the center overhang 60b is arranged on the front side rather than the rear side end of the outer edge extending portion 60a. Thus, interference between the base plate A60 and the first operation unit A400 is avoided.

A recessed portion 60 that is recessed toward the front side between the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central overhanging portion 60b.
c is formed, and in the range where the recessed portion 60c is formed, the base plate A60 is formed thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central overhanging portion 60b. That is, the degree of decrease in the energy of the light passing through the base plate A60 is determined in the range where the recessed portion 60c is formed.
It can be made lower than 0a and the center overhanging portion 60b.

When the center frame A86 is covered on the front side of the base plate A60, the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap between the outer edge member A73 as shown in FIG. The gap is disposed at a position overlapping the recessed portion 60c when viewed in the front-rear direction. That is, the effect of suppressing the energy reduction of the light passing through the base plate A60 is
It can be maintained even on the front side of zero.

The light in which the energy reduction is suppressed is used for the effect of illuminating the sphere by irradiating the sphere flowing down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73. Thus, in this embodiment, since the light used in the effect of irradiating light on the sphere can reduce the degree of energy reduction when passing through the game board A13, it is effectively effective with weaker light. An effect of shining a sphere can be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, since the inner side surface of the outer edge member A73 is disposed outwardly from the inner side surface of the outer edge extending portion 60a of the base plate A60, the flow path of the sphere is recessed. Station 6
It can be easily arranged at a position overlapping with 0c in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, it is possible to easily irradiate the sphere with the light passing through the recessed portion 60c.

As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. As a result, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate member 75 can be configured to assist each other integrally and from the viewpoint of rigidity.

Further, the outer edge member A is utilized by utilizing the fact that light is reflected on the metal when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light.
The light emission intensity between 73 and the base plate A60 can be locally increased. In the light emission with locally increased intensity, the inner end (left end) in the width direction of the bent portion 75b is the outer edge member A7.
3 is generated at a position that can be visually recognized through the vertical wall portion 73b (FIG. 30).
8) (the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

Thereby, even in the case of irradiating light from the back side toward the entire upper and lower sides of the metal plate member 75, the portion where the emission intensity is locally increased is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, it is possible to easily concentrate the player's line of sight on the lottery unit A600 arranged to face the vertical wall portion 73b and the formation range of the channel above it.

319, 320, 321, and 322 are front views of the operation unit A300. In the description of FIG. 319, FIG. 320, FIG. 321, and FIG. 322, the descriptions of all the first operation units A400 and the plurality of first operation units A400 are five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, It means A400C, A400D. Also,
The first operation unit A400 may be described as a representative of the configurations and functions that can be commonly used in the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

In FIG. 319, all the first operation units A400 and the second operation units A700 are in the third state.
FIG. 32 illustrates a state in which the retracted state is maintained without protruding to the symbol display device 81 side.
At 0, all the first operation units A400 are excited and are projected to the 3rd symbol display device 81 side, and the second operation unit A700 is shown in a retracted state.

FIG. 321 shows a state in which all the first operation units A400 are kept in the retracted state, and the second operation unit A700 is extended to the third symbol display device 81 side.
22, some of the first operation units A400B, A400C are in the retracted state, the other first operation units A400, A400A, A400D are in the overhanging state, and the second operation unit A700 is maintained in the overhanging state. The situation is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 319 to FIG. 322, the plurality of first operation units A400 are provided to the player within a range defined by the colored (group blue in this embodiment) cover member A591.
Front cover A4 formed in a conspicuous color (in this embodiment, the front surface is gold-plated)
10 and the first displacement member A440 are configured to be mainly visually recognized, and the first displacement member A440 is configured.
Is arranged so that the edge on the 3rd symbol display device 81 side is closest to the adjacent first operation unit A400.

That is, the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a posture along the radiation that spreads from the inside (center) to the outside of the 3rd symbol display device 81, so The player's line of sight can be concentrated toward the inside of the third symbol display device 81.

The side surface on the third symbol display device 81 side of the first displacement member A440 is adjacent to the first displacement member A440.
As shown in FIG. 319, the lateral side surface of the first displacement member A440 (the side surface including the side surface adjacent to the adjacent first displacement member A440) is the tip side (the third symbol display device). 8
It is chamfered to taper as it goes to (1 side). Thus, the adjacent first displacement member A4
40 to avoid interference.

Although the chamfering start point is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, a straight line extending along the lateral surface of the first displacement member A440 extends from the adjacent first displacement member A440 in the same manner. Chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection that intersects with the straight line, but chamfering is performed immediately before the intersection. Thereby, while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440,
A wide range for visually recognizing the first displacement member A440 can be secured.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the retracted state of the first operation unit A400, the first displacement member A4.
40 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front-rear direction so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to the posture in which the light emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) is directed to the front side, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 in the front view. Can be suppressed, and the visual change can be increased while suppressing the amount of displacement in the front view.

This configuration is effective when there is a situation where the range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 is limited in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1. Details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, in the extended state of the first operation unit A400, the second displacement member A4.
While 90 is arranged at the overhanging position, the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhanging position (a position away from the third symbol display device 81).

More specifically, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front-rear direction so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second
In order to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490 from the state of interfering with the movement locus of the displacement member A490 (the retracted state of the first operation unit A400), it is closer to the game board A13 side and the front side than the second displacement member A490. The state changes to the state where the first operation unit A400 is extended (the overhanging state of the first operation unit A400).

As a result, the first displacement member A440 determines whether the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state.
Regardless of whether or not it is in the overhanging state, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect of emitting light to the player side without being blocked by the second displacement member A490. In particular, in the extended state of the first displacement member A440, the light emission mode of the long hole A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third symbol display device 81 can be switched, and the line of sight to the third symbol display device 81 is visible. The details are described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, in the second operation unit A700, the rendering unit A710 can move up and down toward the center of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the second operation unit A700
Includes a rotating body A720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the rendering unit A710, and the rotation of the rotating body A720 can execute a light emitting effect in which light travels in multiple directions. Will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 322, since each of the plurality of first operation units A400 includes an individual driving device, each first operation unit A400 can perform state change and state maintenance independently. That is, the combination that configures the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that illustrated in FIG. 322, and can be arbitrarily set.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one of the first operation units A400, or it is possible to execute the state change by the first operation units A400 that are different in order. For example, the state change can be executed in order from the lower left first operation unit A400 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, or the third first operation unit A400B in the clockwise direction from the lower left.
From the above, it is also possible to execute the state change sequentially in both directions. Thus, the first operation unit A
Various effects can be executed using 400.

Also, for example, the first operation units A400B and A4 that are in the retracted state in FIG.
Since the second displacement member A490 of 00C is arranged at the extended position, the second operation unit A700 is provided.
Are configured so that the first operation units A400B and A400C that may interfere with the second operation unit A700 are in the retracted state, and the other first operation units A400, A400A, and A400D are in tension. It can be in an out state. This
Compared to the case where all the first operation units A400 operate synchronously with the same drive device, the first
Variations in combinations of operations (states) between the operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 can be increased.

FIG. 323 is a front view of the operation unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As shown in FIG.
The front cover A410 of the operation unit A400 is arranged so that the game area can be effectively decorated. This will be described below.

First, when a game area is defined as an area in which a ball passing between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, a section in which the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are opposed to each other and guide the ball (ball launch unit) The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302) is not included in the game area, and the outer frame of the game area is the inner rail 61 in this section. Therefore, the outer end portion of the front cover A410 of the first operation units A400, A400A (from the lower left to the second one) disposed on the back side of the inner rail 61 is disposed in the vicinity (outside) of the inner rail 61. (It is not necessary to extend to the outer rail 62).

On the other hand, the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (particularly, the area where the right-handed ball flows down) is the outer rail 62. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation units A400B, A400C (third and fourth from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 is in the vicinity of the outer rail 62 (outside). Placed in.

Further, the outer frame of the game area in the area where the outer rail 62 is interrupted and the outer edge member A73 is disposed becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end portion of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400D (first lower right one) arranged on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner side surface (outward side) of the outer edge member A73. . In the present embodiment, this is the rear case A310.
The support plate portion A313 is omitted from the right middle portion of the rear case A at the right end of the game board A13.
Since the right end portion of 310 is brought close, it can be realized.

That is, by forming the inner area of the back case A310 close to the right end of the game board A13 in front view, the first operation unit A400D can be arranged close to the right end of the game board A13. As a result, a flow path (a flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, FIG. 3) disposed near the right end of the game board A13 as a flow path for the right-handed ball to flow down.
02)) and the outer side end of the front cover A410 is arranged on the outer side (right side) than the first side.
An operating unit A400D can be provided.

In other words, like a general right-handed machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not a symmetrical machine)
When the right-handed channel is extremely narrow compared to the left-handed channel and is arranged close to the right end of the game board A13, the right-handed channel is right-justified in the inner region of the back case A310 as in this embodiment. By configuring so that the movable device such as the first operation unit A400 can be disposed, the movable device can be disposed over the entire back side of the game area.

On the other hand, on the left side of the back case A310, a guide portion sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is formed in a front view, and the player's line of sight concentrates on this guide portion. Since it is difficult, even if the support plate portion A313 is provided on the left side of the back case A310 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of improvement in the decoration of the game area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is disposed on the left side of the back case A310, and the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the right side of the back case A310. It can be said that it is a choice.

As described above with reference to FIG. 323, since the plurality of front covers A410 are effectively arranged in the game area, a pattern or a figure to be visually recognized by a player who pays attention to the game area is displayed on the game board A.
13 and a plurality of front covers A410 that can be viewed through 13.

This makes it unnecessary to decorate the game area by sticking a sticker or the like on which a character or the like is printed on the surface of the game board A13. Also, the front cover A410
Since the area where the is arranged can be changed depending on the arrangement of the displacement members and the light emission mode of the light emitting means as a part of the first operation unit A400, as described above, the game board A
As compared with the case where a sticker or the like is pasted on 13, the variation of the aspect of decorating the game area can be increased. Details of the change in appearance will be described later.

Since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-like member 74 (see FIG. 305),
Even if a portion where the structure is exposed or a driving device is arranged here, it is possible to avoid deterioration in appearance.

As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first operation units A400 are disposed close to each other with a slight gap therebetween, and the cover member A591 disposed therebetween is adjacent to the first operation unit A400.
The first operation unit A400 is fastened and fixed in such a manner that they are connected to each other. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) first operation units A400 arranged around the third symbol display device 81 are coupled to each other to form an integrated structure.

Further, the outer side surface of the first operation unit A400 is disposed close to the inner side surface of the back case A310 (see FIG. 324). Accordingly, the rigidity of the entire first operation unit A400 can be improved, and the deformation of the back case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operation unit A400, so that the above-described back case A310 is reinforced. ,
It is possible to avoid overly relying on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308). Therefore,
Since the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate member 75 can be reduced, the design freedom of the metal plate member 75 can be improved.

Thus, it is possible to easily design a shape that facilitates noise suppression and grounding (see FIGS. 303 and 304) by contacting the inner surface of the inner frame 12 as the original function of the metal plate member 75. it can.

FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit A300. FIG. 324 illustrates a state in which a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) first operation units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 on the front side, and the second operation units A700 are attached to the rear case A310.

The first operation unit A400 is configured to be operable in a substantially common operation mode,
A plurality are arranged so as to surround a part of the inner space of the back case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves in the direction toward the center of the inner space of the back case A310 (direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the inner space of the back case A310). Configured to move in.

Therefore, for example, since the influence given by gravity can change in each first operation unit A400, in this embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the operation can be realized without depending on gravity.
Details will be described later. As described above, since each first operation unit A400 has a substantially common configuration, the first operation unit A400 disposed in the lower left will be described in detail, and the other first operation units A400 will be described. Omitted.

FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operation unit A400 is a substantially rectangular area covered with the front cover A410 in a front view, and a main body area A400b in which a light emission effect is mainly executed, and its main body It is comprised from the side area | region A400v side by side attached to the edge part of area | region A400b.

The side area A400v is not an area that is assumed to be visually recognized by the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blind cover member A591 is covered on the center side that may be visually recognized by the player, and the back side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

In this side-by-side area A400v, a configuration (for example, a drive motor AMT1, a detection sensor A426 for detecting a position, a wiring, a connector, and the like) that inevitably accompanies an effect executed in the main body area A400b is not intended for the player to visually recognize. By disposing, the main body region A400b can be utilized to the maximum extent for disposing the members assuming that the player can visually recognize the main body region A400b. That is,
Since the main body region A400b can be prevented from being eroded by a configuration that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player, a large member can be arranged by making full use of the width of the main body region A400b.

FIG. 327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400. 327 and 328 show a state in which the front cover A410 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 includes a front cover A41.
0 and the first displacement member A440 that can be displaced in a manner of entering between the front cover A410 and the front cover A410
And a rear unit BU disposed on the back side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 is formed of a shape in which a thin plate is bent in a U-shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU on the front side of the front unit FU, and is fastened and fixed to the rear unit BU. And a plurality of through holes A412 drilled at positions defined by the relationship with the front unit FU, and a guide part A413 for guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 has the above-described configuration, and hides most of the area of the front unit FU from the player while making the specific area visible through the through hole A412.
The function mainly guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

FIG. 329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG. 330 is a front cover A410.
FIG. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A41
0 is a layered arrangement on the back side of the production center part A411a of the main body part A411, and is arranged so as to face the production center part A411a, and is a light-transmitting resin in the form of a plate corresponding to the shape of the production center part A411a. A diffusing plate A415 made of a material and a light emitting means A416a such as an LED (shown in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 329) arranged opposite to the diffusing plate A415 and having the optical axis directed to the diffusing plate A415 side are arranged. Electric board A416 to be installed and its electric board A
A board fixing plate A417 that is arranged to face the board 416, fixes the electric decoration board A416, and is fastened and fixed to the front unit FU.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the diffusion plate A415, the electrical decoration substrate A416, and the substrate fixing plate A417 and the fact that the positional shift is suppressed by the configuration will be described.

The diffuser plate A415 is not fastened by a fastening screw or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body A411 and the substrate fixing plate A417 from the front and rear directions, and the axis corresponding position A415a disposed opposite to the light emitting means A416a on the back side. A wave pattern formed from protrusions having a shape concentrically extending around the center is formed, and is formed as a recessed portion A415b recessed inward from the outer edge and a through hole having a smaller diameter than the light emitting means. A plurality of small-diameter holes A415c and a plurality of protruding plate portions A415d protruding in a plate shape from the sides constituting the upper and lower ends to the back side.

The ridge that forms a wave pattern on the back side of the diffuser plate A415 is refracted by irradiating light irradiated to the axis corresponding position A415a side, and then proceeds in the radial direction of the circle centering on the axis corresponding position A415a. It is formed from a shape that advances to the front side. That is, the light incident on the axis-corresponding position A415a side is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a (outside in the radial direction), but not vice versa. That is, it is formed so as to prevent the light incident on the position away from the axis corresponding position A 415 a from traveling to the axis corresponding position A 415 a side.

The recessed portion A415b is a cutout formed in order to avoid interference of members, and in this embodiment, the purpose of avoiding interference with the screw head of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the electric decoration board A416 to the board fixing plate A417. Formed with.

The small-diameter portion 415c is difficult to see in front view, so that the through-hole A412 of the main body portion A411 is used.
(A position facing the plate portion of the main body A411), and the substrate fixing plate A41.
7 is a through-hole formed at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f of the diffusion plate A415,
Although it is utilized for position alignment of the electrical decoration board | substrate A416 and board | substrate fixing plate A417, the detail is mentioned later.

The projecting plate portion A415d is formed in the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 so that the diffusion plate A415 can be positioned with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417. The protruding plate portion A415d has a protruding length of about 4 mm and a width of about 10 mm, and has a certain degree of rigidity. Therefore, it has a certain degree of rigidity, so that a load generated during assembly or maintenance (for example, with other members) It is possible to prevent the projecting plate portion A415d from being bent or broken due to a load caused by collision, rubbing, etc., and the alignment function can be maintained for a long time.

The diffusing plate A415 has a wave pattern formed in the entire area on the back side and can perform a light diffusing function in the entire area, but is clearly divided into a first area AC1 and a second area AC2 from the production aspect. That is, the first area AC1 is an area that overlaps with the electrical decoration board A416 when viewed from the front, and the second area AC2 is an area that does not overlap with the electrical decoration board A416 when viewed from the front.

In the first area AC1, the optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the electric decoration board A416 passes, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light emitting mode as a strong light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second area AC2 is
It corresponds to a region formed so as to protrude from the right side wall A417a3 of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the outside (right side) of the substrate fixing plate A417, and the light axis of the light emitting means A416a of the electric decoration board A416 does not pass through, and the light emitting means. The light from A416a arrives weakened.

On the other hand, although 2nd area | region AC2 is equipped with the function which improves an effect effect in the light emission effect by 1st displacement member A440 of front side unit FU, the detail is mentioned later.

The illumination board A416 includes the above-described light emitting means A416a, a recessed portion A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large diameter holes A416c formed with a large diameter for positioning, and a small diameter through hole. A plurality of set fastening holes 416d arranged as a set of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back and connected to the ends of the wires, and an electric wiring F for supplying electricity to the first displacement member A440
Intermediate connector A416f to which C (in this embodiment, a flat cable) is connected
And mainly.

The light emitting means A416a is a position where the intensity of light visually recognized by the player is easily maximized. In this embodiment, the light emitting means A416a is preferentially disposed at a position that matches the position where the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 is formed in the front-rear direction. The Thereby, it is possible to easily secure the intensity of light visually recognized by the player through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of the fastening screw inserted through the through hole A417b in order to fasten and fix the board fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

The large diameter hole A416c is a through hole formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar portion A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417, and is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar part A417f through the large-diameter hole A416c, the electric decoration board A416 is obtained.
Can be aligned with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

The group fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through holes arranged vertically. Maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the fastening screw to be inserted into the upper through hole of the pair of through holes.

For example, as a maintenance measure, the main body A411 and the diffusion plate A415 are removed in a state where the first operation unit A400 is fixed to the rear case A310, and the failed electric decoration board A4.
16 is removed from the board fixing plate A417, and the normal electric decoration board A416 is removed from the board fixing plate A417.
Assuming that the work is attached to the electric board, the electric decoration board A416 is tilted forward by its own weight before fastening and fixing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper through hole (the side on which the displacement to the front side due to forward tilting is large) of the pair of upper and lower through holes of the set fastening portion A416d is fixed with the fastening screw. It is possible to return the posture in the backward fall direction with the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the posture of the electric decoration board A416 from being erroneously fixed at the time of maintenance fastening.

In addition, the lower through hole in the set fastening portion A416d is inserted into the columnar portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c protruding from the front side of the substrate fixing plate A417, and the positioning of the electrical decoration substrate A416 and the electrical decoration substrate A416. It has a function to perform temporary fixing. That is, even before the fastening screw is fastened, the lower through hole is hooked on the columnar part of the board fastening part A417c, so that the electric decoration board A416 can be prevented from falling by its own weight.

The connector A416e is arranged on the front side, and has a first connector A416e1 to which power supply and wiring for performing light emission control of the light emitting means A416a are connected, and wiring connected to the detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which a wiring connected to a second displacement member A490 disposed in the rear unit BU is connected.

In these connectors A416e, the position of the mating member to which the wiring is connected is fixed (first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2), and there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating member is movable ( For the reason of the third connector A416e3), it can be arranged at an arbitrary position. In the present embodiment, it is a position corresponding to the lower end portion of the electric decoration board A 416 and does not cause interference with other members and is not visually recognized by the player.
It is arranged at a location included in 400v.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440 as a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring is an area on the opposite side of the electric decoration board A416 with the board fixing board A417 (the board fixing board A417 and the guide plate portion A430 (FIG. 335)), the distance between the connectors (front-rear distance) is shortened. If the connector is misplaced, an excessive load is placed on the wiring. There is a risk of giving.

In this embodiment, unlike the connector A416e (in this embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A416e from below), the wiring may be in any direction.
The posture of f is changed to a direction A416x which is a moving direction of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.
And the direction in which the electric wiring FC can extend and contract (the flat cable band extends, can be easily bent, and is less likely to break).

The board fixing plate A417 has a main body part A417a that is formed in a box shape that is open on the front side and can accommodate the electrical decoration board A416, and a protrusion that receives the fastening part of the front unit FU on the back side of the main body part A417a. And a plurality of through-holes A417b configured to allow insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening part, a fastening part into which the fastening screw is screwed, and a plane common to the front end surface of the fastening part to the front side. A plurality of substrate fastening portions A417c configured by a set of protruding small-diameter columnar portions
And comprising.

The main body A417a of the substrate fixing plate A417 is parallel to the plate-like deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1 connected to the rear end portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c and the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1, and the front surface is the substrate fastening portion A417c. Shallow bottom plate-like part A4 formed on the same plane as the front end surface of the fastening part
17a2.

That is, the back surface of the electric decoration board A416 can be surface-supported by the front end surface of the fastening part of the plurality of board fastening parts A417c and the shallow plate-like part A417a2.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a sharply projecting portion A417d that projects from the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1 to the front side with a sharp tip, and the vertical width of the sharply projecting portion A417d at the lower left portion of the sharply projecting portion A417d. And an insertion hole A417e drilled in a rectangular shape with the same width.

The sharp overhanging portion A417d is disposed at the lower left portion of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and has a triangular cross-section in such a manner that the electrical wiring FC, which is a flat cable, is spaced apart from the electrical decoration board A416 by a thickness. It is formed as a linearly extending protrusion, and the extending direction of the protrusion intersects (perpendicularly) with respect to the direction A416x in a front view. And since the wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed to the back side through the insertion hole A417e,
The electrical wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is sandwiched between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protruding portion A417d.

In this way, by sandwiching and supporting the electric wiring FC between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharply extending portion A417d, a portion that receives the displacement of the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is provided in the intermediate connector A416f. From the position of the end of the electric wiring FC to be connected, the substrate fixing plate A41
7 and the sharp overhanging portion A417d. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring FC is dropped from the intermediate connector A416f.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a shallow plate-like portion A417 at a position corresponding to the large-diameter hole A416c.
A plurality of insertion columnar portions A417f protruding in a column shape from a2 to the front side, and a shallow plate-like portion A417
The projection of the diffusion plate A415 on a2, a plurality of through-holes A417g formed through at the boundary between the shallow bottom plate portion A417a2 and the deep bottom plate portion A417a1, and the side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body portion A417a to the front side. A plurality of notches A417h formed with a width capable of receiving the plate portion A415d and a front side end of the side wall A417a3 formed obliquely on the right side when viewed from the front, projecting toward the inside of the main body A417a Projecting pieces A417i
And comprising.

The insertion columnar portion A417f has a diameter slightly larger than the inner diameter of the large-diameter hole A416c of the electric decoration board A416c, exceeds the thickness of the electric decoration board A416, and protrudes from the flat surface formed by the tip of the side wall A417a3. And a small-diameter tip portion protruding from the tip of the large-diameter base portion with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffusion plate A415.

Thereby, alignment of the electric decoration board | substrate A416 and surface support of the diffusion plate A415 can be performed in a large diameter base part, and alignment of the diffusion board A415 can be performed in a small diameter front-end | tip part. That is, the diffusion plate A4
15 is aligned at the small-diameter tip, and is supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large-diameter base of the insertion columnar portion A417f. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that the attitude | position of diffuser plate A415 shift | deviates, although it is the aspect which is not fastened and fixed directly.

Through-hole A417g has a function which forms the passage of air and suppresses heat_generation | fever of electrical decoration board | substrate A416. In the present embodiment, the diffuser plate A415 is arranged in a manner that closes the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the electric circuit board A416, and since it is difficult to form an air passage to the front side, the through hole A417g on the back side. Is forming. Thereby, heat_generation | fever of the electrical decoration board | substrate A416 can be suppressed, without making the production effect by light emission means A416a low.

The notch A417h receives the protruding plate A415d of the diffusion plate A415 and receives the side wall A41.
Engage in a direction along 7a3. Thereby, even if the thin-diameter tip portion of the insertion columnar portion A417f breaks due to deterioration over time, or the thin-diameter tip portion falls off due to poor manufacturing, the diffusion plate A4
15 can be prevented from being displaced with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417 in the longitudinal direction of the protruding plate portion A415d (the direction along the formation direction of the side wall A417a3, the upper right direction). Therefore,
In the support mode in which the diffusion plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, it is possible to prevent the diffusion plate A415 from being displaced.

The protruding piece A417i is formed in a thin plate shape into which the electric decoration board A416 can enter between the shallow plate-like portion A417a2. In the present embodiment, in the assembled state, in addition to the protruding piece A417i being formed with a protruding length that interferes with the electrical decoration board A416 in front view, the protruding piece A417i.
Projecting downward (diagonally downward) from the side wall A417a3, even when the electric decoration board A416 is subjected to a load in the direction of falling forward due to gravity or the like, the protruding piece A417i is provided as the electric decoration board A416. Since the tip end side (upper right side) of the door is locked (stopped from the front side), it is possible to prevent the electrical decoration board A416 from falling forward.

The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the inner space of the operation unit A300, and the electric decoration board A4.
The displacement to the front side of 16 is controlled (a flutter is suppressed). Therefore, operation unit A3
The electrical decoration board A 416 can be stably fixed while omitting the arrangement of the fastening screw inside the 00 internal space. Accordingly, the operation unit A3 is likely to increase the player's attention.
The electric decoration board A416 is fixed to the board fixing plate A41 while avoiding the reduction of the light emitting effect by arranging the fastening screw inside the inner space of 00 (because a shadow is generated by the fastening screw).
7 can be stably fixed.

When assembling the electric decoration board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, the right edge of the electric decoration board A416 is inserted deeply into the shallow plate-like portion A417a2 and the protruding piece A417i, and inserted into the back. As a starting point, the electric decoration board A416 can be smoothly assembled by pushing it backward. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332.

FIG. 331 (a) is a front view of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.
1 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along the line CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb in FIG. 331 (a), and FIG. 332 (a) is an electric decoration board A416.
And FIG. 332 (b) shows the CCCX of FIG. 332 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the electrical decoration board | substrate A416 and board | substrate fixing plate A417 in the XXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line.

331 (a) and 331 (b) illustrate a state in which the electric decoration board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417. In FIGS. 332 (a) and 332 (b), the electric decoration board A416 is illustrated. Is shown assembled to the substrate fixing plate A417.

The decoration board A416 is chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the board main body A416g.
, A416h. The formation mode of the chamfered portions A416g and A416h corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent cutout portion A417h. That is, in response to the fact that the length to the notch portion A417h at the lower end is shorter than the length to the notch portion A417h at the upper end of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417, the electric decoration board A4
Compared to the first chamfered portion A416g at the upper end portion of 16, the second chamfered portion A416h at the lower end portion is formed with a shorter distance from the right side of the electrical decoration substrate A416.

In FIG. 331, compared with the state shown in FIG. 332, the electric decoration board A416 is the board fixing plate A41.
7 shows a state of being displaced upward along the slope of the left side of FIG. The extent of this displacement is such that the upper limit of the length of the space formed between the upper surface of the substrate fixing plate A417 by the first chamfered portion A416g is the first chamfered portion A416g in the state of FIG. The edge part of this enters the gap formed by the notch A417h.

In contrast to the state illustrated in FIG. 331, when the electric decoration board A416 is displaced downward, the upper limit of the length of the space formed between the lower surface of the board fixing plate A417 by the second chamfered part A416h is set. As shown in FIG. 332, the electric decoration board A416 can be shifted downward, and the edge portion of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the cutout portion A417h in the downwardly shifted state.

As described above, by forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the electric decoration board A416, the degree of freedom of the position of the electric decoration board A416 when the electric decoration board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417 can be improved. That is, the right side of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.
Even if the right side is not in the positional relationship as shown in FIG. 332, the electric decoration board A 416 can be inserted into the board fixing plate A 417 while allowing a slight vertical shift. This
The electric decoration board A416 can be easily inserted into the board fixing plate A417.

In order to change from the state shown in FIG. 331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the electric decoration board A416 may be tilted so as to approach the board fixing plate A417 with the right side as the axis of inclination. On this occasion,
As shown in FIG. 331, the board fixing plate A41 is passed through the large-diameter hole A416c of the electric decoration board A416.
As can be seen from the fact that the seven insertion columnar portions A417f are visible, the large-diameter hole 417c is guided by the tapered insertion columnar portion A417f (see FIG. 329), so that the electric decoration board A4
The position deviation of 16 in the vertical direction is corrected and falls within the state of FIG. Therefore, since the vertical displacement of the electric decoration board A416 is corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical movement of the electric decoration board A416,
The electric decoration board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

The notch A417h has a protruding plate A415 in the assembled state (see FIG. 325).
d is inserted and the gap is filled. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the electric decoration board A416 from entering the notch A417h after assembly. That is, for the notch A417h,
While having the function of widening the gap at the time of assembling the electric decoration board A416, after the assembled state, the function of maintaining the arrangement of the electric decoration board A416 can be provided by filling the gap.

As shown in FIG. 332 (b), in the state where the electric decoration board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the protruding piece A417i projects to the front side of the electric decoration board A416, and the electric decoration board A
Since it interferes with respect to the removal of 416, the right side of the electric decoration board A416 is the board fixing plate A41.
7 can be prevented from falling off.

In this embodiment, by preventing the decoration board A416 from falling off by such a retaining structure, in the present embodiment, the board fastening portion A417 is provided near the right side of the decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.
c is not arranged (the arrangement of the fastening screw is omitted). Thereby, it is possible to secure an arrangement area of the light emitting means A416a in the vicinity of the right side of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and it is possible to avoid a shadow from being generated by the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect in the vicinity of the right side of the electric decoration board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.

At the time of maintenance work in which the decoration board A416 becomes defective and the decoration board A416 is replaced, the decoration board A416 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 332 (b) to the board fixing plate A417 as shown in FIG. 331 (b). Need to tilt. At this time, the electric decoration board A416 is the board fixing plate A.
Since the periphery is surrounded by 417, it is difficult to directly tilt the electric decoration board A416. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is disposed on the front side, and the wiring board connected to the first connector A416e1 is pulled forward, so that the electric circuit board A416 can be easily attached. It can be tilted with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

Furthermore, since the first connector A416e1 is disposed at a position opposite to the right end (the end disposed opposite to the side wall A417a3) that is the starting point of the attitude change of the electrical decoration board A416,
The electric decoration board A is more efficiently due to the load applied to the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1.
416 can be rotationally displaced. In other words, the moment of the force applied to the electric decoration board A 416 due to the load applied to the wiring can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive (excessive) load to the electric decoration board A 416 and the wiring during the maintenance work.

FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU.
4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed in a box shape whose front side is opened, and is fixed in such a manner that the front unit FU covers the opened front side. That is, rear unit B
2nd displacement member A490 arrange | positioned at the front side of U is comprised so that the clearance gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU can be advanced / retreated.

As shown in FIG. 333, only one drive motor AMT1 is provided in each first operation unit A400. The driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is the front unit F
By being transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of U and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, the movable effect of the first operation unit A400 is executed.

In the present embodiment, the units that can be disassembled as a unit are simply called the front unit FU and the rear unit BU, and when performing a movable effect, the configuration of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. Do not work independently, but work in conjunction. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the rear unit BU.

FIG. 335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400. is there. That is, FIGS. 335 and B11 show the front cover A4.
FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the first operation unit A400 in a state where 10 is removed. In FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, illustration of the wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, the outline of the configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, the first operation unit A400 includes the front unit FU.
The support plate portion A420 formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive and colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and the support plate portion A42 formed from a light transmissive and colorless resin material.
The first displacement member A440 is disposed on the front surface side of the 0 with a gap in which the first displacement member A440 can advance and retreat, and the support plate portion A42.
Guide plate part A430 fastened to 0, its guide plate part A430 and support plate part A42
This is a first displacement member A440 that is guided by a gap between 0 and 0 to move forward and backward (slide displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344), and a mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440. The slide link A4 is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440.
50, a drive motor AMT1 fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420, and its drive motor AM
And a drive gear AMG1 fastened and fixed to T1.

Further, the first operation unit A400 constitutes the rear unit BU, and is in mesh with the drive gear AMG1, and the transmission gear group A460 in which each component rotates in accordance with the rotation of the drive gear AMG1, and its transmission The support box A 470 is formed in a box shape in which the gear group A 460 is rotatably supported and is light-transmissive and colored (black in this embodiment) from the resin material whose front side is opened.
A rear plate portion A480 that is formed of a light-transmitting and colorless resin material, is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A470 with a gap and is fastened and fixed to the support box portion A470, and the front surface of the support box portion A470. Forward and backward displacement (gap between the support plate part A420 and the support box part A470) formed on the side (
Rotating displacement, rotational displacement (see FIGS. 356 to 358), a second displacement member A490, and a rack and pinion mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the second displacement member A490 and the back side of the support box portion A470 And a rack and pinion A510 that is fastened and fixed to the main body.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a transmission mechanism on the back side across the plate-like portion (the bottom of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470) disposed on the back side thereof. (Slide link A450, rack pinion A510) is provided, and slide link A4 is provided in the gap between support plate portion A420 and support box portion A470.
50 and the second displacement member A490 are disposed together.

That is, the displacement members A440 and A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A45) with the plate-like portion interposed therebetween.
0, rack and pinion A510) are arranged in the front-rear direction, and the slide link A450 as the transmission mechanism of the first displacement member A440 on the front side,
Compared with the case where the displacement member A490 is disposed in the front and rear independent gaps, the arrangement of the plate members for forming the independent gaps can be omitted, and therefore the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be omitted. The front-rear width occupied by the displacement mechanism portion of the displacement member A490 can be suppressed. Thereby, since another production | presentation mechanism part can be arrange | positioned in the front-back clearance which can be formed in the part which can suppress the front-back width, the production effect of 1st action | operation unit A400 can be improved.

Next, each configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described in detail. As described above, the first operation unit A400 includes the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 having different displacement modes, and the configuration necessary for each displacement is partially different.
A configuration necessary for realizing the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be described, and the second displacement member A will be described later.
The remaining configuration required for 490 displacement will be described.

The support plate portion A420 constitutes a framework of the first operation unit A400 and is a portion that guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, and is a main body plate configured in a rectangular plate shape to which the drive motor AMT1 is fastened and fixed. A portion A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 formed as long holes extending in parallel with the direction A416x, a through hole A423 provided as a similar long hole in one of the guide holes A422, and parallel to the direction A416x A plurality of guide ridges A424 projecting on the front side as the ridges, and the main body plate portion A421 is recessed from the right side edge of the main body plate portion A421 along the direction A416x so that the recessed end portion faces the front side. A detection center for detecting that the recessed portion A425 formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the right edge of the first displacement member A440 and the first displacement member A440 are disposed at the initial position. The A426, the axis of the slide link A450 supporting hole A45
2 with a circular cross section that can support the shaft 2, and a shaft support portion A427 that protrudes from the main body plate portion A421 to the back side, and a cylindrical shape that protrudes from the main body plate portion A421 to the back side at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the transmission gear group A460. And a plurality of retaining cylindrical portions A428 provided.

The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a for guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440,
A plurality of second guide holes A for guiding the displacement of the guided projecting portion A455c of the slide link A450.
422b.

The extraction hole A423 is a through hole through which the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 passes toward the front side, and the spring hooking portion A455d projects to the front side of the main body plate portion A421 and is coil spring ASP1. Lock the end of the.

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is locked (hooked) to the lower left corner of the main body plate portion A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates a biasing force in the contracting direction (lower left direction).

The guide protrusion A424 spans the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electric wiring FC coupled to the first displacement member A440, and details thereof will be described later.

The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler type sensor that is disposed so that it can be determined that the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the initial position. In this embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but the slide link A45.
The position of the detected plate portion A455e of 0 is detected.

In the present embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are in the extended position. The arrangement of the detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

As a result, the member cost can be reduced and the space for disposing other displacement members can be twisted, while the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are already disposed at the extended position. In spite of this, it is also assumed that there is a problem that the drive motor AMT1 does not stop. On the other hand, even when the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, the first displacement member A44 is avoided by avoiding an overload at a location related to the displacement of the first displacement member A440.
Although measures are taken to maintain the arrangement of 0, details will be described later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A428 protrudes in a cylindrical shape formed with an inner diameter that is substantially half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460, and the protruding tip has a slight gap therebetween to transmit the transmission gear. Opposite the group A460. That is, the retaining cylindrical portion A428 is connected to the transmission gear A461.
Has a function of suppressing displacement in the axial drop-off direction.

In the present embodiment, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the shaft support portion of the transmission gear A461 (not shown). Therefore, as long as the screw is not loosened or dropped, it is possible to restrict the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the shaft-side dropping direction by the screw. As described above, in this embodiment, the screw and the retaining cylindrical portion A428 are configured to prevent the transmission gear A461 from coming off in two stages, so that the transmission gear A461 can be surely removed from the shaft. Can be prevented.

The guide plate portion A430 has a right side edge parallel to the right side edge of the main body plate portion A421, and the main body plate portion A4.
A plate-like main body plate portion A431 arranged to be opposed in a posture along a plane parallel to the surface formed by 21;
A plurality of elongated recesses A432 recessed in a long rectangular shape along the direction A416x on the back side of the main body plate portion A431, and toward the lower left along the direction A416x toward the right edge on the front surface of the main body plate portion A431. An inclined surface A433 that is inclined in a manner toward the front side and configured to be able to assist displacement of the first displacement member A440 (rear cover portion 443), and a recessed portion A of the support plate portion A420.
A guide plate portion A434 formed in an elongated plate shape along the direction A416x with a width corresponding to the width of 425.
And mainly.

The main body plate portion A431 includes a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a through which fastening screws are inserted in the peripheral portion. The left side edge of the main body plate portion A431 is supported by a surface (side) on the side wall portion A421a raised to the front side from the left side edge of the main body plate portion A421 of the support plate portion A420, so the left side of the main body plate portion A431. While the insertion hole A431a provided at the edge is one place, the guide plate A
430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420.

Further, the main body plate portion A4 as a position passing through the front and back when the first displacement member A440 moves back and forth.
In the right edge portion 31, only one insertion hole A431a is arranged at a substantially central position in the vertical width, so that the main body plate A43 is compared with the case where the insertion hole A431a is arranged at a biased position.
The first displacement member as compared with the case where a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a are arranged can be suppressed over the entire right edge portion, and the gap between the right edge portion 1 and the support plate portion A420 can be suppressed. A44
The design freedom of zero can be improved.

The long concave portion A432 is a concave portion that guides in a direction A416x that is a direction in which the displacement stop protruding portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and the displaceable length of the displacement stop protrusion portion A441e of the first displacement member A440. It is recessed with a length approximately equal to that. That is, the first displacement member A440
Is not only guided on the back side into the guide hole A422 of the support plate part A420, but also has a long recess A.
The front side is also guided by 432.

The guide plate portion A434 is an electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable on the right edge side.
Provided with a plurality of claw portions A434a arranged with a gap slightly wider than the thickness of the claw portion A.
The electrical wiring FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A440 is passed through the gap between 434a and temporarily fixed. By this. Electric wiring FC which is deflected and displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440
One end of the bending displacement can be the position of the claw portion A434a, and the position of the electric wiring FC on the left side of the claw portion A434a can be stabilized.

Therefore, the electrical wiring FC composed of a flat cable is connected to the guide plate portion A434.
Since the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A434 and the electric wiring FC is similarly displaced (see FIG. 346), the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A434 (see FIG. 346). Interference between the displacement member A440 and the electric wiring FC can be avoided. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338.

FIG. 337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. In FIG. 338, for the sake of convenience of explanation, it is shown in a different direction view from FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacement member A440 is a guided plate portion A4 that is a plate-like portion that is guided along the direction A416x between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430.
41, a colored plate (in this embodiment, gold-plated) and formed from a light-impermeable resin material, pivotally supported by the guided plate portion A441, and displaced in conjunction with the guided plate portion A441 The interlocking plate portion A442 that is a shape portion, and the interlocking plate portion A44 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442.
2, a rear cover portion 443 that forms a gap between them, a diffusion plate A444 that is formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material and is disposed opposite to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the diffusion plate A444 It is mainly provided with an electrical decoration substrate A445 that is disposed to face the back side of the diffusing plate A44 and is formed to have an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the diffusion plate A444.

Here, the interlocking plate part A442, the rear cover part 443, the diffusion plate A444 and the electrical decoration substrate A445 are
Since these are fixed together, these will be described first. That is, interlocking plate part A442
A plurality of positioning pins A442a protruding from the back surface of the diffusing plate A444 have a plurality of insertion holes A.
The interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444 are positioned relative to each other by being inserted through the 444a, and a plurality of positioning pins A444b protruding from the back surface of the diffusion plate A444 are provided on the electrical decoration board A44.
The diffusion plate A444 and the electrical decoration board A445 are positioned relative to each other by being inserted through the plurality of insertion holes A445a.

Then, the plurality of insertion holes 4 of the rear cover portion 443 are formed in the plurality of screw insertion portions A442b of the interlocking plate portion A442.
When the fastening screw that has passed through 43a is fastened and fixed, the diffusing plate A444 and the illumination board A445 are displaced between the interlocking plate part A442 and the rear cover part 443 so that the positioning pins A442a and A444b are not dropped (positioning). (Displacement less than the height of the pin).
Thereby, the diffusion plate A444 and the decoration board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting the fastening screw into the diffusion board A444 or the decoration board A445.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of projecting ribs 443b projecting to the front side in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear lid portion 443 abut against the electrical decoration substrate A445 and press against the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed in a dimensional relationship that causes a load. Due to this pressing force, diffusion plate A
444 and the electrical decoration substrate A445 can be stably fixed to the interlocking plate portion A442.

The electrical decoration substrate A445 includes a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as LEDs (illustrated in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 337) whose optical axis is directed to the diffusion plate A444 side on the front side.

The diffuser plate A444 has an axis-corresponding position A444 that is disposed opposite to the light emitting means A445b on the back side.
A wave pattern formed from protrusions having a shape extending concentrically around c is formed, and the outer edge of the wave pattern is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442.

On the front side of the diffusion plate A444, there is formed a fitting portion A444d that protrudes to the front side with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442. In the assembled state, the fitting portion A444d is fitted into the opening A442c. It is.

With this configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is used to diffuse the diffusion plate A444.
The player can visually recognize the light that has passed through the opening A442c among the light that has passed through.

The electrical decoration board A445 includes a connector A445c that is disposed on the back side and to which an electrical wiring FC composed of a flat cable is connected. The electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotating front end side of the interlocking plate portion A442.
As a result, the bending position of the electrical wiring FC can be configured on the rotating front end side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of the bending can be moderated.

The rear cover 443 includes a connector A445c and a circuit configuration device (not shown) (a capacitor, a resistor, etc.)
And a through hole A443d formed so as to penetrate in the direction of the direction A416x with respect to the vent opening 416c.

The tip of the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is disposed in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located. The electrical wiring FC passes through the through hole A443d and is routed to the back side of the rear lid portion 443. . As a result, the electric wiring FC can be sandwiched between the thin-diameter bar-shaped portion 443e that partitions the ventilation opening 443c and the through-hole A443d and the electric decoration board A445, so that the electric wire FC is electrically connected between the connector A445c and the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e. Wiring FC
Can be prevented from being displaced. Note that the through hole A443d also has a role of forming a space in which the electric wiring FC is disposed, and the electric wiring FC is compared with a case where the through hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x. Can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small-diameter bar-like portion 443e is formed so as to project toward the electric decoration board A445 side in the same manner as the protruding rib 443b. Therefore, the thin rod-shaped portion 443e and the electric decoration board A445
The interval between and will be narrowed. From such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point at which a load is applied from the rear lid portion 443 to the electrical decoration substrate A445. That is, only the projecting rib 443b and the small-diameter bar-like portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the electrical decoration board A445.

Thereby, even if the electrical wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to avoid the electrical wiring FC from being disconnected from the connector A445c.

Next, a connection mode between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 has a support shaft portion A442d that protrudes in an outer circular shape.
And a supported hole A442e, which is a circular opening coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and the interlocking plate portion A442 so as to be rotatable about an axis parallel to the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d. A roller member A442f that is a resin member and is formed in an outer circular shape.

The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b protruding in an outer circular shape from an upper end portion of the main body plate portion A441a, and a A shaft support hole A441c formed in a circular shape coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A441b and formed at the lower end of the main body plate portion A441a, and a long straight line from the front to the front side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of guide protrusions A441d to be provided, a plurality of displacement stop protrusions A441e to be projected to the front side in a long shape along the direction intersecting (orthogonal) the guide protrusion A441d, An inclined surface A441f that inclines toward the outer side (lower left side) toward the front side at a position opposed to the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative substrate A445, and the main body plate portion A4.
A plurality of guide grooves A4 formed as narrow grooves along the direction A416x on the back side of 41a
41g, a recessed portion A441h that is recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right side edge of the main body plate portion A441a, and a fastening portion that protrudes in a manner capable of fastening a fastening screw to the back side of the main body plate portion A441a. A441i.

The support shaft portion A441b and the pivoted support hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As an assembling method, the pivoted support hole A442e of the interlocking plate portion A442 is formed by the support shaft portion A441b.
After arranging the interlocking plate part A442 so as to be arranged in the shape of the axis of the interlocking plate part A along the axis
By moving 442 relative to the guided plate portion A441, the support shaft portion A is inserted into the supported shaft support hole A442e.
The support shaft portion A442d can be inserted into the shaft support hole A441c and the support shaft portion A442d can be inserted into the shaft support state. Note that the shaft support hole A442e and the support shaft portion A441b, and the shaft support hole A
441c and the support shaft portion A442d are configured to have a size in which a slight gap is formed between them so as to be rotatable.

In this embodiment, after the pivoting state of the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 is configured by the above method, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft portion A441b, and the screw Is configured to be larger than the inner diameter of the pivot support hole A442e, so that the interlocking plate portion A442 is prevented from coming off the guided plate portion A441.

The guide protrusion A441d is a small diameter portion for narrowing the contact area with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the main body plate portion A431 of the guide plate portion A430 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

The displacement preventing projection A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the long concave portion A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters the long concave portion A432 when the first operation unit A400 is assembled (see FIG. 324). It is formed with a protruding length.

When the guided plate portion A441 is disposed at the end of displacement, the formation position of the displacement preventing projection A441e is designed so that the displacement preventing projection A441e is disposed at the longitudinal end of the long recess A432. Is done. Therefore, even if the guided plate portion A441 does not stop normally at the end of displacement, the guided plate portion A4 is secured by locking the displacement preventing projection A441e with the long concave portion A432.
The displacement of 41 can be regulated.

The inclined surface A441f is an electric wiring F connected to the connector A445c of the electric decoration board A445.
It is a plane for receiving and guiding C. By being inclined, the guided plate part A
A load applied to the electric wiring FC with the displacement of 441 can be suppressed. Flat type (
The manner of bending of the electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable will be described later.

The guide groove A441g is a groove straddling the guide protrusion A424 of the support plate portion A420, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide protrusion A424. It has an overhanging part that projects in a circular shape. The distance between the tips of the overhanging portions is as follows.
The dimension is slightly longer than the thickness of the film. As a result, the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A4 are suppressed while preventing the extending direction of the guide groove A441g from deviating from the longitudinal direction of the guide ridge A424.
The frictional force generated between the first and second members 24 can be reduced.

The recessed portion A441h is a relief portion that is recessed in order to avoid interference with a portion that is used for fastening by a fastening screw that is inserted into the insertion hole A431a on the right side of the guide plate portion A430. Thereby, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the right end part of the to-be-guided board part A441 can be arrange | positioned on the right side rather than insertion hole part A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted into the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324) and is connected to the displacement side long hole A453 of the slide link A450.
That is, when the driving force is transmitted to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441 is displaced.

Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. The slide link A450 is connected to the support plate A42.
A long link A451 that is rotatably supported by the zero shaft support A427, and the long link A4
51 is a deformed slide member A4 that is connected to 51 and supported so as to be movable in parallel along the direction A416x.
55.

The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long bar, and a shaft support hole A452 drilled with a diameter that allows the shaft support portion A427 to be inserted, and a long side with reference to the shaft support hole A452. Displacement side long hole A453 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the end, and displacement side long hole A45
3 is a transmission side long hole A45 that is formed in a long hole shape along the longitudinal direction at the end opposite to the side on which 3 is disposed.
4.

The odd-shaped slide member A455 is disposed in the recessed portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421 that is recessed in front of the base end surface on which the shaft support portion A427 of the support plate portion A420 protrudes.
21 and a long link A451, and a plate-like main body plate portion A455a sandwiched between the main body plate portion A455a and a circular outer shape protruding from the back side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted into the transmission side long hole A454 of the long link A451. A plurality of guided projecting portions A455c projecting in a circular shape to the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted through the second guide holes A422b of the support plate portion A420,
A spring hooking portion A that protrudes in the shape of a tip from the front side of the main body plate portion A455a, is inserted into the hole A423 of the support plate portion A420, and the end portion of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked).
455d, a detected plate portion A455e formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection gap of the detection sensor A426, and a deformed transmitted portion A456 to which a driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460.

The transmission gear group A460 includes a pair of gears rotatably supported by the support box portion A470, and a pair of transmission gears A461 in which one gear meshes with the drive gear AMG1, and the pair of transmission gears A461. On the other hand, a gear A462 with a pin engaged with the opposite side of the drive gear AMG1
And an in-phase member A465 that follows the pin-equipped gear A462 in phase with each other.

The gear A462 with a pin is a transmission protrusion A that protrudes in an outer circular shape from an eccentric position to the front side.
463 and an arc wall A464 formed as an arc-shaped wall centering on the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 with the transmission projection A463 as a base end.

The arc wall portion A464 has a central angle of about 230 degrees, and the length formed on the front side is shorter than that of the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, the transmission protrusion A463 is also the arc wall portion A.
Similarly, 464 is a part that transmits the load to the deformed part A456, but the load generation point is different in the front-rear direction. That is, the load generation position via the transmission protrusion A463 (the intermediate point or the average point when a load is generated at a plurality of points) is more on the front side than the load generation position via the arc wall A464. It becomes. Since the displacement aspect of the first displacement member A440 can be described with the above-described configuration, the displacement aspect of the first displacement member A440 will be described below.

FIG. 339 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG. 319.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in a XIXc line.

In order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 339 (a), the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 339 (b), the transmission gear A461 and the electric wiring FC are not illustrated, and a pinned gear is provided. As for A462, only the transmission projection A463 and the arc wall A464 are shown, and in FIG. 339 (c), the front cover A410 is shown by an imaginary line. Also, in FIGS. 339 (a) and 339 (b), the illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted except for the case where it is specifically described.
The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

In FIGS. 339 (a) to 339 (c), the first displacement member A440 is driven by the drive motor AMT1.
The state of being arranged at the retracted position before the excitation is shown. In this state, the deformed slide member A455 is disposed on the outermost (left side), and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is the shortest. Therefore, the biasing force applied to the deformed slide member A455 from the coil spring ASP1 is shortened. Becomes the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the deformed transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the pin-equipped gear A462, and the main body plate portion A45 on the protruding position (upper right) side of the transmission protrusion A463.
A protruding plate portion A456a protruding in a plate shape from 5a to the rear surface side, and a protruding plate portion A456 with a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A463 on the retracted position (lower left) side of the protruding plate portion A456a.
a facing arrangement part A456b arranged opposite to a, and these projecting plate parts A456a and opposed arrangement part A
Insertion gap A456c formed between 456b.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is formed longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the same direction. In the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmission protruding portion A463 and the arc wall portion A46 are formed.
4 can be contacted in the moving direction.

The opposed arrangement part A456b can be brought into contact with the transmission protrusion A463a in the movement direction (
On the other hand, the arc wall portion A464 is not in contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 (does not overlap).
That is, the opposing placement portion A456b and the arc wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-rear gap.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to receive the transmission projection A463, and an escape portion A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission projection A463 is formed on the open end side. With this escape portion A456d, the forward and backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A463 with respect to the insertion gap A456c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

In FIG. 339 (b), the transmission gear A461 is not shown, but the actual assembled state (
In FIG. 324), a pair of transmission gears A461 having the same shape are arranged between the drive gear AMG1 and the pinned gear A462, and the drive force of the drive gear AMG1 is used as the pinned gear A4.
62.

As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the first displacement member A44 guided in the first guide hole A422a.
0 and the deformed slide member A455 guided by the second guide hole A422b are the long links A
451 is connected. That is, the long link A451 that rotates and displaces around the shaft support A427.
Thus, the first displacement member A440 and the deformed slide member A455 are displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x.

As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the detected plate portion A455e enters the detection gap of the detection sensor A426 in a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 339 (c), in the first displacement member A440, a roller member A442f is disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, and this roller member. The arrangement of A442f is the guide wall part A47 of the support box part A470.
1b and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the guided plate portion A44 is regulated.
The interlocking plate portion A442 is configured to rotate from the pivoted support hole A442e with the slide displacement of 1. Action diagrams for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in time series will be described.

FIG. 340 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in a XIXc line.

In FIG. 340 (a) to FIG. 340 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in the same position as viewed in the front-rear direction with respect to FIG.
A state where the guide wall portion A471b of 0 is in contact with the bent corner portion is illustrated.

The pinned gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the first angle d1 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 340. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 340 (b)).

In the present embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 at the initial angle d0 is configured to be parallel to the direction A416x, but is not limited thereto. .

For example, a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 at the initial angle d0 is inclined by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (only 10 degrees in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the pinned gear A462). It may be formed as a straight line. In this case, the section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section that does not apply a load in the traveling direction to the projecting plate portion A456a, so that an excessive driving resistance occurs immediately after the start of rotation. It can be avoided.

That is, a section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a running section, and the projecting plate portion A456a can be pushed forward after rotating 10 degrees from the initial angle d0. Suppression can be achieved. Further, when driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, a section of 10 degrees can be used as a deceleration section.

FIG. 341 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in a XIXc line.

341 (a) to 341 (c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in contact with the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

The pinned gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the second angle d2 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 341 (b)).

FIG. 342 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in a XIXc line.

FIG. 342 (a) to FIG. 342 (c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 is substantially perpendicular to the direction A416x.

The pinned gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the third angle d3 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 342. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 342 (b)).

In the present embodiment, in the state where the first displacement member A440 starts sliding movement along a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455. Since the configuration is such that (the direction parallel to the direction A416x) is substantially orthogonal, the slide displacement in one direction (same plane) of the first displacement member A440 can be executed smoothly.

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement side long hole A453 to the fastening portion A441i is set to one side (the lower side in the present embodiment) based on the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). It can be limited. Accordingly, the first displacement member A440 is compared with the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 during the slide displacement of the first displacement member A440. It is possible to suppress rattling of the slide displacement.

FIG. 343 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in a XIXc line.

In FIG. 343 (a) to FIG. 343 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f moves from the state of FIG. 342 (c) to the extended position of the first displacement member A440 (FIG. 3).
44 (c)) is shown in a state of being arranged at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement until reaching the state of 44).

The pinned gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the fourth angle d4 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 343. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 343 (b)).

FIG. 344 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in a XIXc line.

FIG. 344 (a) to FIG. 344 (c) show a state where the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated and the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the overhang position (also referred to as an overhang state).

The pin-equipped gear A462 rotates by the fifth angle d5 from the initial angle d0 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. With this rotation, the transmission projection A463 pushes the projection plate A456a, so that the deformed slide member A455 slides and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. The As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the opposed arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged so as to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A456b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 344 (b)).

When the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 starts to be displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the direction A416x. Here, since the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a are formed in a dimensional relationship that abuts in the direction A416x, the transmission protrusion A
Even after 463 is separated from the projecting plate portion A 456a, the arc wall portion A464 is provided with the projecting plate portion A.
The displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted in a state where it abuts on 456a.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the load applied from the protruding plate portion A456a to the arc wall portion A464 passes through the rotation shaft of the pinned gear A462, the pinned gear A462 is rotated by the load from the protruding plate portion A456a. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arc wall portion A464 is formed in a curved shape, the contact area between the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, the contact area can be set as line contact). Is 0). Therefore, when the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a can be reduced (theoretically, it should be set to zero). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the necessity of an extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the deformed slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 can be restricted only by the driving force necessary to rotate the pinned gear A462.

In addition, if the deformation due to wear of the resin material constituting the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a is taken into consideration, the contact area increases with time, and the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456 are increased.
It is considered that the frictional force generated with a increases. On the other hand, a countermeasure may be taken by applying a low friction seal to the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a or applying a lubricant (such as grease). In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be countered with a low friction seal or a lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 344 (b), the outer surface of the transmission protrusion A463 and the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotational axis of the pinned gear A462, It can be made difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the contact state with the projection A463 to the contact state with the arc wall portion A464.

FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the extended position, and the transmission protrusion A463 is in contact with the deformed transmitted portion A456.

The pin-equipped gear A462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 345 (see FIG. 360). Fig. 344
After this state, the transmission protrusion A463 does not push the protruding plate A456a and displaces in a non-contact manner with other members. Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the projecting plate portion A456a has a circular arc wall portion A.
Displacement is regulated by contacting with 464 and maintained in the state of FIG. 344 (b) (displacement in the return direction is regulated). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmission portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the overhang position.

As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmission part A456 is a position on the projecting position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, a portion where the load is applied to the deformed transmission portion A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (insertion gap A456c) is different from a portion where the load is applied to the deformed transmission portion A456 in FIG. As a result, the pin-equipped gear A462 unintentionally over-rotates, and the transmission protrusion A4
Even when an overload is generated in 63 or the deformed transmission part A456, it is possible to avoid the shape of the insertion gap A456c from changing. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is affected after an overload occurs.

In the state of FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the deformed slide member A455 is the direction toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (upper right direction).
Since the deformed slide member A455 is disposed at the end of the moving range in this direction, the deformed slide member A455 is prevented from being displaced by the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463.

Thus, while avoiding the displacement of the deformed slide member A455, the transmission protrusion A4
The load given from 63 can be relieved by elastic deformation (deflection or expansion / contraction) of the opposed arrangement part A456b.

As shown in FIG. 345, the location where the transmission protrusion A463 abuts is the side wall on the detected plate portion A455e side of the opposed arrangement portion A456b, and the transmission protrusion A463 is detected due to the contact.
5e is loaded. The present embodiment is configured such that the detected plate portion A455e is preferentially broken when an overload is generated in the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to excessive rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462. That is, the detected plate portion A455e is configured to be weaker than the transmission protrusion A463.

As a result, it is possible to avoid the destruction of the structure related to the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 in the structure of the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to the load caused by the excessive rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the deformed slide member A455 can be improved.

When the detected plate portion A455e is folded, the detected plate portion A455e is not detected by the detection sensor A426 even when the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position.
Based on the detection failure of 455e, it is possible to assume the possibility that over-rotation of the pinned gear A462 has occurred, and timely maintenance can be performed.

In addition, the design aspect of detected plate part A455e is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, each time a series of displacement operations of the first displacement member A440, the transmission protrusion A463 contacts the deformed transmitted portion A456, and the drive motor AMT1 is controlled to be excited until a slight load is applied. (For example, transmission protrusion A463)
It may be designed such that the detected plate portion A455e is bent by accumulating a load having the same number of contact times as the number of times of durable operation. In this case, in addition to the possibility of occurrence of over-rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462, it is possible to notify the replacement timing of the transmission protrusion A463, so that timely maintenance can be performed.

FIG. 346 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A400 along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339 (a), and FIG. 346 (b) is a diagram of the CCC in FIG. 344 (a).
It is sectional drawing of 1st operation | movement unit A400 in a XLVIb-CCCXLVIb line. FIG. 346 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted position (also referred to as the retracted state), and FIG. 346 (b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in the extended position (also in the extended state). Is shown).

As shown in FIGS. 346 (a) and 346 (b), the connector A of the first displacement member A440
An electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to 445c.
The electrical wiring FC is loosely disposed in the space between the guided plate portion A441 and the rear lid portion 443.

As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is an electric wiring FC.
It is formed so as not to abut. That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface A441f is drawn to a position slightly deeper than the end of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440) (the side away from the first displacement member A440). The inclined surface A4
The space | interval of 41f and electric wiring FC is securable.

The electrical wiring FC is retracted from the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 in the extended state of the first displacement member A440, while being placed in the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. The As a result, the space VE, which will be described later, can be used both as a space into which the electric wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, so that the space necessary for arrangement can be reduced.

The electrical wiring FC is arranged in a space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. As a result, the first displacement member A440 functions as a shielding unit that shields the field of view to the electric wiring FC, and the electric wiring FC is viewed from the front, rear, left, and right.
Can be prevented from being visually recognized. The space VE will be described.

The space VE is a surface on the side that the player can visually recognize when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state (
This is a back space formed in association with the inclined posture in which the opening A442c on the interlocking plate portion A442 side is formed) toward the third symbol display device 81 side. In this way, space V
E is easy because the first displacement member A440 is formed in a plate shape and the first displacement member A440 is configured in an inclined posture that is easy to show to the player in the retracted state in which the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front-rear direction. Formed.

On the other hand, this space VE is also a space into which a second displacement member A490, which will be described later, enters due to displacement. Therefore, it is preferable that the visibility in the front view can be widely maintained in consideration of the visibility of the second displacement member A490. Since the field of view in front view widens with an angle centering on the player's eyes, the outer space of the space VE is preferably formed so as to be inclined away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the back side. In the embodiment, the space VE is used for ease of manufacture.
(The boundary surface far from the third symbol display device 81) is formed as a non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the space VE generated for improving the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively used as a region where the wiring is loosened and arranged. As a result, the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is third with respect to the first displacement member A440 in the extended position.
It is not necessary to secure an area necessary for loosening the wiring when placed on the opposite side of the symbol display device 81 (in other words, an area between the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310 and the first displacement member A440). It can be.

Therefore, compared with the case where the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is disposed on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 in the extended position, the electrical wiring FC is placed inward of the rear case A310. While being able to be accommodated, the displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to (closed to) the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the first displacement member A440, the front surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 is disposed on the front limit line FL at the extended position (see FIG. 346 (b)), and the retracted position (FIG. 346 (a
In the displacement process up to (see)), at least a part (mainly, the protruding position side portion) of the interlocking plate portion A442 protrudes to the front side from the front limit line FL. This overhang is the first displacement member A44.
In the process in which 0 is displaced from the retracted position, the first displacement member A440 is moved to the retracted position (FIG. 339 (
c)) to the completion of the change in posture of the first displacement member A440 (see FIG. 342 (c)), particularly at the retracted position side (left side of FIG. 346) of the first displacement member A440. The first displacement member A440 can project to the front side beyond the front limit line FL.

Therefore, since it is necessary to form a space for avoiding a collision with the first displacement member A440 on the front side of the front limit line FL, the arrangement of the electric decoration board A416 is excessively separated from the first displacement member A440 (front side). However, in this embodiment, the electric decoration board A416 is used as the first.
By not forming the displacement member A440 on the retracted position side (left side of FIG. 346), the first displacement member A4 is formed.
A space for projecting 40 is formed. In addition, by forming only the diffusion plate A415 on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, an area where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the electrical decoration board A416 is visually recognized is provided. This avoids being limited to the formation range of A416.

Thus, while limiting the formation range of electrical decoration board | substrate A416, while spreading | diffusion board A415 protrudes and forms from the outer edge of electrical decoration board | substrate A416, electrical decoration board | substrate A416 and 1st displacement member A44 are formed.
It is possible to secure a sufficient range for visually recognizing the light emission effect by the electric decoration board A416 while narrowing the front-rear interval of the arrangement with 0.

With reference to FIG. 347 to FIG. 352, changes in the external appearance of the first operation unit A400 caused by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of the light emission effect. This change in the appearance is a change that occurs because the first displacement member A440 is configured to be partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 in a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the extended position (position after excitation). is there.

347 (a), 347 (b) and 348 are front views of the first operation unit A400. FIG. 347 (a) shows the retracted state of the first displacement member A440, and FIG.
b) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at an intermediate position of the displacement section (the position illustrated in FIG. 342), and FIG. 348 illustrates the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440. . In FIG. 347 (b) and FIG. 348, the front cover A41 of the first displacement member A440.
The shape of the portion hidden by 0 is illustrated by hidden lines.

On the back side of the front cover A410, a diffusion plate A415 for diffusing light emitted from the light emitting means A416a provided on the illumination board A416 is provided.
It is divided into the first area AC1 and the second area AC2 described above (see FIG. 330).

The first displacing means 440 is disposed at least on the back side of the diffusion plate A415 at the extended position, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and having passed through the opening A442c travels toward the diffusion plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacing means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping the first area AC1 when viewed from the front, the first area AC1 has an illumination board A41.
6 is disposed, the light having passed through the opening A442c is shielded by the electrical decoration board A416.

Therefore, the light that has passed through the opening A442c can reach the diffusion plate A415 in the second region AC2. In other words, in the second region AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) disposed on the electric decoration board A416 and diffused to the diffusion plate A415, and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440. (See FIG. 337) can be visually recognized in a mixed state with the light irradiated.

If it demonstrates in detail, the aspect of 2nd area | region AC2 will light the light emission means A416a, and light emission means A will be described.
A mode of turning off 445b, a mode of turning off the light emitting unit A416a and turning on the light emitting unit A445b, a mode of turning on both the light emitting unit A416a and the light emitting unit A445b, and a mode of turning off both the light emitting unit A416a and the light emitting unit A445b. It is configured to be switchable in at least four types.

In the present embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 is visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410, and the front cover A410 serves as the front cover A as the through hole A412.
A plurality of long holes A412a are formed at three locations on a straight line along the edge of 410 on the third symbol display device 81 side.

As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of long holes A412a, the central long hole A412a is disposed opposite to the opening A442c of the first displacing means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides thereof are open to the opening A442.
It arrange | positions outside c (it does not oppose). Thus, the light emitting means A is more visually recognized through the central long hole A412a than when viewed through the long hole A412a on both sides.
The visibility of light emitted from 445b can be increased.

For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the overhang position, the light emitting means A44.
The light irradiated from 5b can be made visible through the central long hole A412a, but not visible through the long hole A412a on both sides. Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b is visually recognized through the central long hole A412a, and the light emitting means A416 is seen through the long holes A412a on both sides.
The light emitted from a can be visually recognized (the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is difficult to visually recognize).

Here, the aspect (emission color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 is the first displacement member A440.
While the light emitting means A445b is turned off, it depends on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329). Therefore, even in the state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 348), if the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the influence on the light emission effect by the light emitting means 416b can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the extended position without causing a change in the form of the front cover A410 when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position 440, the long hole A412a formed at a position close to the third symbol display device 81 side in common with each first operation unit A400. Since the light emission mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

In addition, the effect of the change of the aspect visually recognized through through-hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 of the first operation unit A400 disposed in a set of five is disposed at the extended position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 disposed at the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent next to the first displacement member A440 is turned on and turned off at the next timing. Light emitting means A4 of the displacement member A440
The light emitting means A445b may emit light in such a manner that the light emitting means A445b is sequentially turned on in the clockwise direction, such as turning on 45b.

In this case, by leaving the light emitting means 416b to be lit, the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained, and only the aspect of the light that is visually recognized through the long hole A412a is sequentially changed clockwise. Can be executed.

Here, the light emission mode of the other first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be described. The first operation unit A400A is 2 clockwise from the lower left when viewed from the front.
The first operation unit A400B is a third unit clockwise from the lower left of the front view, and the first operation unit A400C is the fourth unit clockwise from the lower left of the front view. The first operation unit A400D is the fifth unit clockwise from the lower left of the front view. The main differences between the first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first operation unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the first operation units A400A, A400B, A40
Openings corresponding to the openings A442c of 0C and A400D are respectively defined as openings WA, WB, WC,
It is illustrated as WD, and the other components are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first operation unit A400 for convenience.

349 (a) and 349 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400A.
349 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at a midway position (the same position as the position shown in FIG. 342). In FIG. 349 (b), the first displacement member is shown. A4
A state in which 40 is arranged at the overhang position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 349 (a) and 349 (b), in the first operation unit A400A,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WA is configured to overlap the long holes A412a at both ends in front view. Furthermore, since the width of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (the retracted position side is longer), the opening WA and the both ends of the opening WA are closer to the extended position. The area overlapping with the long hole A412a can be increased. Thereby, arrangement | positioning of 1st displacement member A440 and the appearance of the light visually recognized through the long hole A412a can be changed interlockingly.

350 (a) and 350 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400B.
350A shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342). In FIG. 350B, the first displacement member A440 is shown. A4
A state in which 40 is arranged at the overhang position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 350 (a) and 350 (b), in the first operation unit A400B,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, in addition to being configured so that the opening WB may overlap the long holes A412a at both ends in front view, the width of the opening WB is along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. It is configured to change so as to repeat enlargement and reduction. This
The central long hole A41 during the displacement of the first displacement member A440 from the retracted position to the extended position.
The area where 2a and the opening WB overlap is configured so that the state shown in FIG. 350 (a) is maximized, decreases once with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and increases again in the state shown in FIG. 350 (b). can do. Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, a change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the central slot A412a can be configured in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

FIG. 351 (a) and FIG. 351 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400C.
FIG. 351 (a) shows a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at a midway position (the same position as the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351 (b) shows the first displacement member. A4
A state in which 40 is arranged at the overhang position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 351 (a) and 351 (b), in the first operation unit A400C,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WC may be configured to overlap with the long holes A412a at both ends in front view, and the width of the opening WC is along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. It is configured to change so as to repeat enlargement and reduction. That is, the opening W
C is widened in a tapered shape in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 near the upper end.

As a result, the area where the left and right elongated holes A412a overlap with the opening WC while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position is once decreased and increased again with the displacement of the first displacement member A440. It can be constituted as follows. Thus, the first displacement member A4
While 40 is displaced in one direction, the change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the long hole A412a at both ends can be configured in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

FIGS. 352 (a) and 352 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400D.
FIG. 352 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at a midway position (the same position as that shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352 (b) shows the first displacement member. A4
A state in which 40 is arranged at the overhang position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 352 (a) and 352 (b), in the first operation unit A400D,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WD branches in a front view. That is, the opening WD has a shape that branches in a manner that widens toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 near the lower end.

Thereby, it is possible to divide a range where the central long hole A412a and the opening WD overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, the mode of light that is visually recognized through the central slot A412a is divided into a plurality of ranges from the mode in which the entire center slot A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352 (a)). And can be changed to a mode of emitting light (see FIG. 352 (b)).

In the first operation unit A400D, the case where the central long hole A412a is divided by the edge of the opening WD has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, for the entire three long holes A412a, a range where light can be visually recognized may be divided. That is, when the three long holes A412a and the opening WD overlap with each other and uniform light can be visually recognized through the three long holes A412a, the opening WD has a central long hole A412 among the three long holes A412a.
By overlapping only with the long hole A412a at both ends without overlapping with a, the range in which the light can be visually recognized is divided into the central long hole A412a and can be switched to the case where it is limited to the long hole A412a on both sides. May be.

Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. The support box part A470 has a main body box part A471 formed in a box shape whose front and upper right sides are open, and a shaft hole through which the rotation shaft of the gear A462 with pin of the transmission gear group A460 is drilled. A472 and the second displacement member A4
A shaft support hole A473 formed so as to be able to support the shaft 90, a cutout portion A474 formed in a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole A473, and a columnar shape in the vicinity of the cutout portion A474. A fastening part A475 having a tip formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A482 of the rear plate part A480 can be screwed and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510 are slidably supported. Rack support part A476 and its rack support part A4
And a pinion support A477 that supports a pinion A517 that meshes with a slide rack A511 that is supported by 76.

The main body box portion A471 has a protruding wall portion A471a protruding in a wall shape from the back bottom edge portion to the back side,
The first operation unit A400 is assembled in a wall shape projecting from the front upper edge to the front side (FIG. 32).
4) and a protruding wall portion A471 on the opposite side of the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) across the notch portion A474 and the guide wall portion A471b disposed to face the roller member A442f.
a wiring guide part A471c arranged to face a.

Although the detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is guided in such a manner that the roller member A442f abuts on the edge portion of the guide wall portion A471b and slides or rolls (FIG. 339). To FIG. 344).

The wiring guide part A471c is designed so that the shape of the wiring HC, which will be described later, can be appropriately corrected, the details of which will be described later.

The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected through the shaft support hole A473 and the cutout portion A474. In particular, the notch A474 is formed to be wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, details of which will be described later.

The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions projecting to the back side of the main body box portion A471, and the support columnar portion A476a inserted through the support hole A512 of the rack pinion A510 and the slide rack A511 of the rack pinion A510. A stepped portion A476b extending in the slide movement direction (a direction parallel to the direction A416x) and formed in a stepped shape extending toward the back side from the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is disposed. Prepare.

The pinion support part A477 has a wall shape (plate) from the bottom part of the main body box part A471 to the back side along an arc centered on the pinion axis A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack pinion A510 is rotatably supported and the pinion axis A477a. Arc wall part A477b extended in the shape.

Through the shaft hole A472, the gear A462 with a pin of the transmission gear group A460 and the same phase member A
465 are connected. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the connection aspect of the gear A462 with a pin and the phase member A465 is demonstrated.

FIG. 353 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the phase member A465, and FIG. 353 (b) is a front perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the phase member A465, and the right side. It is a back perspective view of gear A462 with a pin and phase member A465. In FIG. 353 (a), the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same phase member A465 are illustrated in a posture in which the side where they are connected to each other is in front.

As shown in FIG. 353 (a), the pin-equipped gear A462 has a plurality of phase matching peripheral projections A that project from the surface on the side facing the phase member A465 toward the phase member A465.
462a.

The phase member A465 includes a phase matching diameter projection A465a projecting from the surface facing the pinned gear A462 toward the pinned gear A462, and an outer circular shape from the eccentric position to the back side. Protruding transmission protrusion A466, and arc wall A467 formed as an arc-shaped wall centering on the rotation axis of the same phase member A465 with the transmission protrusion A466 as a base end
With. Compared with the transmission protrusion A466, the arc wall A467 is formed shorter on the back side.

The phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a and the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a will be described. The phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a is formed with a plurality of arc-shaped wall portions by cutting along the axial direction in a circular wall portion around the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462.

The phase matching diameter protrusion A465a includes a protrusion protruding radially outward from a cylindrical protrusion having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the phase alignment peripheral protrusion A462a. It is formed so as to coincide with an angle (phase) at which a cut is made in the mating circumferential protrusion A462a. The gear A462 with the pin and the phase member A465 with the pin can be connected in a state where the phase of the phase member A465 with respect to the gear A462 with the pin is matched by allowing the ridge to enter the notch of the phase alignment circumferential protrusion A462a. A pinned gear A4 is inserted by inserting a fastening gear along the central axis of the pinned gear A462 and screwing it into the tip of the phase matching diameter projection A465a.
62 and the same phase member A465 can be fixed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the angle between the cuts of the phase alignment circumferential protrusion A462a is not equalized (120-degree interval if divided into three as in the present embodiment), but unequal, Pinned gear A462 and in-phase member A4 only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353 (b))
65 is connected.

That is, the angle between the cuts of the phase alignment circumferential protrusion A462a is 100 degrees, 120 degrees, 140 degrees.
When combined in degrees (by making them non-uniform), the pin A gear A462 and the same phase member A
The angular relationship that can be coupled to 465 can be limited to one type.

In the present embodiment, the notch of the phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a (phase matching diameter protrusion A
Although the case where 465a) is formed in three places has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be one or two, or may be a plurality of four or more, and can be appropriately selected in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same phase member A465.

Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. The rear plate portion A480 includes a main body plate portion A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material, and a fastening that is drilled in the main body plate portion A481 and screwed into a fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. A plurality of alignment protrusions A483 that protrude toward the outer peripheral side of the through hole A482 through which the screw is inserted and the arc wall part A477b of the support box part A470, and are used for alignment by contacting the outer peripheral side. And a plurality of projecting plate portions A484 projecting from the main body plate portion A481 to the front side so as to be in a plate shape along the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

The outer edge (the left edge in FIGS. 335 and 336) of the rear plate part A480 is in contact with the rear side end of the protruding wall part A471a of the main body box part A471. Only the installation plate portion A484 functions.

In contrast, the inner edge of the rear plate A480 (the right edge in FIGS. 335 and 336)
, The alignment projection A483 and the arc wall A477b are in contact with each other in a plurality of directions (
(Up / down / left / right direction) can be aligned. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide space near the outer edge portion by excluding the alignment portion from the vicinity of the outer edge portion while favorably aligning the rear plate portion A480 with the support box portion A470. In this embodiment,
This secured space is utilized as an arrangement space for the wiring HC (see FIG. 356 (a)), details of which will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A484 is disposed so that the protruding tip is close to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 (abuts or has a slight gap so that the wiring cannot pass) and is opposed to the rack pinion A.
It functions to divide the moving range of the 510 slide rack A511 and the outer area. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 from entering the moving range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. Details will be described later.

FIG. 354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A490 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and the shaft support hole A473 of the support box portion A470.
The shaft support plate A491 is pivotally supported by the shaft support plate A491, and the shaft support plate A491 is fitted to the shaft support plate A491 so as to cover the shaft support plate A491 from the front side. A light-emitting portion A493 composed of a covering member A492 formed of a colorless light-transmitting resin material and an LED or the like
an electrical decoration board A493 in which a is disposed and accommodated in the pivoted support plate A491 and the covering member A492;
Is provided.

The supported shaft A491 protrudes in a circular shape on the back side and is inserted into the supported shaft hole A473, and has a shorter projecting length than the supported shaft projection A491a. Fastening projections A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c that are pierced so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a long hole A491d that is drilled in a long rectangular shape along the radial direction of the pivot support projection A491a. , Insertion hole A491
a plurality of circular support portions A491e projecting to the front side in a circle (arc) shape centered on c, and a plurality of projections projecting to the front side in a narrow projecting shape along the side wall portion forming the outer periphery. And a thin projection A491f.

The circular support portion A491e and the thin projection A491f are in an assembled state of the second displacement member A490 (
In FIG. 335 and FIG. 336), the outer periphery of the electric decoration board A493 is contacted to support the electric decoration board A493 from the back side.

In particular, the narrow projection A491f is formed at a location where the shape of the electrical decoration board A493 to be accommodated is constricted, that is, at a place where the outer peripheral side wall of the pivoted support plate A491 is recessed inward, so the electrical decoration board. A portion where the shape of A493 can be confined can be selectively supported. Thereby, suppression of the deformation | transformation of the electrical decoration board | substrate A493 in the constricted location where it is assumed that rigidity becomes easy to fall because a width dimension becomes short can be aimed at, and it can avoid that the electrical decoration board | substrate A493 fractures | ruptures. .

The covering member A492 is inserted into the supported portion A493b of the electrical decoration board A493, and the insertion hole A4 is inserted.
A plurality of fastening portions A492a into which fastening screws inserted through 91c are screwed, and the fastening portions A49
In a position that forms a plurality of projecting support portions A492b projecting in the radial direction on the base side of 2a and coupled to the plate-like portion of the covering member A492, and a narrow projecting portion A491f of the pivot support plate A491, A plurality of narrow protrusions A4 projecting toward the back side in a narrow protrusion shape along the side wall forming the outer periphery.
92c.

With the above-described configuration, the outer periphery of the electric circuit board A493 is supported by the thin protrusions A491f and A492c, and the circular support part A491e and the protrusion support part A492b are provided around the fastening screw.
Is supported by As a result, the electric board A493 is supported by the pivot support plate A491 and the covering member A4.
It can be fixed to 92 well.

In addition, the support aspect of electrical decoration board | substrate A493 is not limited at all. For example, the electric circuit board A493 may be fixed by being applied with a load along the fastening direction, or a dimensional relationship that does not cause a compressive load (for example, the distance between the front and rear of the thin protrusions A491f and A492c is the electric circuit board. The electric decoration board A without any load by being formed with a dimensional relationship equivalent to the thickness of A493)
It is also possible to maintain the arrangement of 493.

The electrical decoration board A493 is provided on the back side with a plurality of light-emitting portions A493a, a plurality of supported portions A493b that are drilled or recessed so as to be non-interfering with the fastening portion A492a when viewed in the front-rear direction. And a board-side connector A493c to which an end portion (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board-side connector A493 is fixed in such a manner that the wiring extends along the long direction of the long hole A491d of the pivot support plate A491. The long hole A491d is long from the inner edge on the short side. A partition extending portion A491d1 extending in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the opposite inner edge portion becomes shorter than the width dimension of the board-side connector A493c (or a connected wire bundle), and the partition extending portion A491d1 As a reference, a ridge A491d2 is formed which is wide and protrudes from the opposite edge of the board-side connector A493c to the back side.

The visual recognition region side of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 355) on the basis of the partition extension portion A491d1.
A board-side connector A493c is disposed on the left side, and a board-side connector A49 is provided on the opposite side.
The wiring connected to 3c passes through the long hole A491d. That is, the board-side connector A493c
The wiring connected to is sandwiched between the partition extending portion A491d1 and the electrical decoration board A493 and supported.

Thereby, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, the displacement of the wiring between the board-side connector A493c and the partition extending portion A491d1 can be suppressed, so that the board-side connector can be displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced. The possibility that the wiring is disconnected from A493c can be reduced.

The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length enough to enter the cutout portion A474 of the support box portion A470. As a result, the wiring HC whose end is connected to the board-side connector A493c can be routed so as to rise toward the back side of the pivoted support plate A491 (in the projecting direction of the ridge A491d2). Can be prevented from contacting the notch portion A474 as compared with the case where the wire HC is disposed close to the back surface of the pivot support plate A491 and routed to the back surface of the support box portion A470. Therefore, disconnection of the wiring can be avoided.

In addition, since the protrusion A491d2 protrudes at a right angle with respect to the back surface of the pivoted support plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be brought to the right side, and contact with the wiring HC is avoided. Therefore, the width of the cutout portion A474 can be suppressed. Thereby, main part box part A4
Since a large area (area) on the fastening portion A475 side of 71 can be secured, the main body box portion A
The rigidity of 471 can be ensured and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the fastening portion A475 can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. Rack and pinion A510 has direction A416x
The slide rack A511 is slidably supported along the slide rack A511, and the gear portion of the slide rack A511 is engaged with the pinion shaft A477a of the support box A470, and is synchronized with the slide movement of the slide rack A511. A pinion A517 that rotates, and a reinforcing arm A518 that meshes with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the pinion A517.

The reinforcing arm portion A518 is connected and fixed to the second displacement member A490 described above, whereby the second
Displacement member A490 is supported by support box part A470 so that extraction is impossible. That is, the reinforcing arm A5
18 is fastened to the pivot support protrusion A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotation center position,
The reinforcing arm A518 is fastened to the fastening protrusion A491b at the rotation tip side (see FIG. 355). Therefore, rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm portion A518 is synonymous with rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 is formed in a plate shape along a pair of support holes A512 formed in a long hole shape extending along the direction A416x with a size that allows the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 to be inserted. A supported plate portion A513, a projecting plate portion A514 projecting in a plate shape toward the front side at a position away from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction of the support hole A512, and the same phase member A465 so as to face the same phase. The deformed part A5 to which the driving force is transmitted from the member A465
15.

In the support hole A512, the distal end small diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 is inserted, and the large diameter portion on the base end side is formed with a diameter larger than the width of the support hole A512. By disposing the large diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is likely to be displaced to the front side, the displacement can be prevented by the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. . As described above, the slide rack A511 is arranged so that the plate-like portions are opposed to each other with a gap of at least the height of the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a between the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 and the interval between them. It is configured to be slidable along the direction A416x while being maintained.

The supported plate portion A513 is disposed to face the rear side end portion of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap, and the protruding plate portion A514 is slightly spaced from the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471. Are arranged opposite each other. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is likely to be displaced to the front side, the supported plate portion A513 and the protruding plate portion A514 can prevent the displacement.

In addition, various things are illustrated as a cause which slide rack A511 displaces to the front-back direction. For example, a case where a player gives an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called “sticking”), a case where a minute particle is clogged in a gap, and the tooth resistance becomes excessive and an excessive load is generated at the tooth position, etc. The

FIG. 356 (a), FIG. 356 (b), FIG. 357 (a), FIG. 357 (b), and FIG. 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. In addition, FIG. 356 (a), FIG. 356 (b), FIG. 357 (a
In FIG. 357 (b) and FIG. 358, for the sake of easy understanding, the illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the plate portion of the slide rack A511 is broken so that the deformed transmitted portion A515 can be visually recognized. The state is illustrated. In FIG. 358, the same phase member A is shown for ease of understanding.
465 and the deformed part A515 are shown enlarged.

In FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b), and 358,
The second displacement member A490 is extended from the retracted position (see FIG. 356 (a)) (see FIG. 358).
The state of displacement to is shown in time series.

The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518. When the phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed forward, the driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm portion A518 via the pinion A517. Thus, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by the rotation of the same phase member A465.

  The in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pinned gear A462 as described above. Therefore, in synchronization with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described with reference to FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b), and 358, the above-described FIGS. The rotation of the pin-equipped gear A462 will occur, and these relationships will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356 (b), the irregularly shaped transmission part A515 is a part that engages with the same phase member A465, and the transmission protrusion A466 can enter and move independently (slide rack A).
A non-transmission recess A515a that is recessed so as to be movable without applying a load to the 511, a connection recess A515b that is a recess of the same depth connected to the end of the non-transmission recess A515a, and a connection recess A515b. Is also narrow and has a non-transmitting recess A5 with respect to the connecting recess A515b.
An insertion gap A515c, which is a recess having the same depth, connected to the opposite side of 15a, and a transmission protrusion A4
A projecting plate portion A515d projecting in a plate shape from the slide rack A511 to the front side on the retracted position (lower left) side than 66, and constituting the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c, and the projecting plate portion A5
On the overhanging position (upper right) side of 15d, it is arranged to face the protruding plate part A515d with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A466, and the opposed arrangement part A51 constituting the right side surface of the insertion gap A515c.
5e.

The projecting length of the projecting plate portion A515d is formed longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A515e in the same direction. In the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmission projecting portion A466 and the arc wall portion A46 are formed.
7 can be contacted in the moving direction.

The opposing placement portion A515e can be contacted (overlaps) in the movement direction with respect to the transmission protrusion A466, while it is not contacted (overlaps) in the movement direction with respect to the arc wall portion A467. That is, the opposing placement portion A515e and the arc wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-rear gap.

The side surfaces of the projecting plate portion A515d and the opposing placement portion A515e are configured as planes orthogonal to the moving direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) of the slide rack A511.

The connecting recess A515b has a function similar to that of the escape portion A456d of the deformed transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to receive the transmission protrusion A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A466. Thereby, the forward / backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A466 with respect to the insertion gap A515c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

Although not shown in FIG. 356 (a), FIG. 356 (b), FIG. 357 (a), FIG. 357 (b), and FIG. 358, the same phase member A465 is similar to the pin-equipped gear A462. The driving force of the AMT1 is transmitted by the driving gear AMG1 and the pair of transmission gears A461 to rotate (see FIG. 335). Hereinafter, the drive motor AMT1 is excited to drive the drive gear AMG1.
Will be described along the time series in which the second displacement member A490 is rotated from the retracted position toward the extended position.

In FIG. 356 (a), before the drive gear AMG1 is rotated, the slide rack A511 is disposed at the end of the moving range at the retreat position side, and accordingly the second displacement member A49.
A state in which 0 is arranged at the retracted position is illustrated.

In this state, the transmission protrusion A466 is moved in the direction of movement (direction A416x) with the deformed transmitted portion A515.
), The arcuate wall portion A467 is located on the upper right side in the moving direction (direction A416x) with respect to the projecting plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a disposed to face the projecting plate portion A515d. Abut from the (extension position side). Accordingly, the projecting plate portion A515 is formed by the arc wall portion A467.
Since the displacement of d can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from being unintentionally displaced by an external force applied when the drive motor AMT1 is in a non-excited (non-driven) state.

The contact point between the arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the phase member A465 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the load applied from the protruding plate portion A515d to the arc wall portion A467 passes through the rotation shaft of the same phase member A465, the same phase member A465 is rotated by the load from the protruding plate portion A515d. Can be prevented.

Further, since the arc wall portion A467 is formed in a curved shape, the contact area between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, the contact area can be set as line contact). Is 0). Therefore, when the same phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 356 (a), the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be reduced (theoretically, it is reduced to 0). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the necessity of an extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the same phase member A4
The displacement of the slide rack A511 can be restricted only by the driving force necessary to rotate the 65.

In addition, if the deformation due to wear of the resin material constituting the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d is taken into consideration, the contact area increases with time, and the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515 are increased.
It is considered that the frictional force generated with d increases. On the other hand, a countermeasure may be taken by attaching a low friction seal to the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d or applying a lubricant (such as grease). In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be countered with a low friction seal or a lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

Examples of the external force include gravity, a load generated by vibration during an earthquake, and a force generated when a player strikes or swings the pachinko machine A10.

FIG. 356 (b) shows a state where the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the connection recess A515b. From the state of FIG. 356 (a), FIG.
The phase member A465 is shifted from the initial angle d10 to the first angle d11 until it is displaced to the state of b).
However, the transmission protrusion A466 is still in the moving direction (
In the direction A416x).

On the other hand, the arc wall portion A467 is still in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a from the upper right (the protruding position side) along the movement direction (direction A416x). FIG.
6 (a) and 356 (b), since the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arc wall portion A467, the contact portion A467a is moved in the moving direction (direction A416x) of the slide rack A511. Does not displace. Therefore, even in the state of FIG. 356 (b), FIG.
Similarly to the state shown in FIG. 5, the arrangement of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the end of the moving range at the retracted position side.

As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposed arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 356 (b)).

FIG. 357 (a) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the insertion gap A515c. From the state of FIG. 356 (a), FIG.
), The in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the second angle d12, and the transmission protrusion A466 comes into contact with the protruding plate A515d.

In FIG. 357 (a), the straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission projection A466 and the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x) are parallel. That is, the transmission protrusion A466 has a portion farthest from the rotation center of the same phase member A465 and abuts the protruding plate A515d. Therefore, when the same phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. The restriction by the phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A5
11 can be displaced to the overhang position side (upper right side).

As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposed arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 357 (a)).

FIG. 357 (b) shows a state where the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 enters the insertion gap A515c. From the state of FIG. 356 (a), FIG.
The phase member A465 is moved from the initial angle d10 to the third angle d13 until it is displaced to the state of b).
Only rotate. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing placement portion A515e, so that the slide rack A511 slides and the slide displacement is pinion A517.
Is transmitted to the second displacement member A 490 via.

In FIG. 357 (b), the straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission projection A466 is orthogonal to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposed arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 357 (b)).

In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission projection A466 is opposed to the opposed arrangement portion A.
515e is pushed, the slide rack A511 is disposed at the end of the moving position in the overhang position, and the second displacement member A490 is disposed in the overhang position.

The phase member A465 rotates by the fourth angle d14 from the initial angle d10 (rotates one or more times) until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 356 (a) to the state of FIG. 358. With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the opposing placement portion A515e, so that the slide rack A5
11 is slid and the second displacement member A4 is displaced through the pinion A517.
90.

In FIG. 358, the straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission projection A466 and the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x) are parallel. That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

As described above, since the front-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposed arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the opposed arrangement portion A515e in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 358).

In FIG. 358, the transmission protrusion A466 has a portion farthest from the rotation center of the phase member A465 in contact with the opposing arrangement portion A515e. Therefore, when the phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. A511 may be displaced to the retracted position side (lower left side). In the present embodiment, the slide rack A511 is enlarged as shown in FIG.
Is arranged at the overhang position side end of the movement range, the rotation of the in-phase member A465 can be permitted from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358) to the allowable angle dd1.

That is, since the transmission protrusion A466 and the protruding plate A515d are in contact with each other only after the in-phase member A465 is rotated by the allowable angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion are protruded until the rotation of the allowable angle dd1. Since the platen portion A515d is not in contact with the load and no load is transmitted,
The arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the movement range on the projecting position side.

Therefore, in the series of displacement modes shown in FIGS. 356 to 358, the same phase member A46 is used.
5 is stopped at the fourth angle d14, the same phase member A465 is actually the fourth.
Even if the rotation exceeds the angle d14, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the movement range over the second displacement member A490 if the rotation angle exceeds the allowable angle dd1. Can be maintained in the overhang position.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not strict (allowable angle dd1
Even if there is the following error), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position, and therefore, the rotation speed of the same phase member A465 and the second displacement member A49 can be increased with a simple configuration.
It is possible to achieve a highly accurate displacement of 0 (the second displacement member A490 can be suddenly decelerated and stopped at the extended position without suddenly decelerating and stopping the same phase member A465).
.

In addition, when the rotation angle exceeding the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 is deliberately generated, the excess is driven toward the retracted position by the second displacement member A490 (when the driving direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

Further, when the transmission protrusion A466 of the same phase member A465 is arranged at the position of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission protrusion A466 and the opposing arrangement part A515e are moved to the slide rack A51.
1 in the moving direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x), the slide rack A51
It is possible to prevent 1 from returning to the retracted position side (bound displacement).

Thereby, since the rotation of the pinion A517 can be regulated in the state of FIG. 358 (return rotation can be prevented), it is fastened and fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 engaged with the pinion A517. The second displacement member A490 can be prevented from rotating back from the overhang position (see FIG. 358).

FIG. 359 shows the rear unit B on the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line of FIG. 356 (a).
It is sectional drawing of U. FIG. In FIG. 359, in order to facilitate understanding, the alignment protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is not shown, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated.

Hereinafter, the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of the wiring HC, FIGS. 356 to 358 are referred to as appropriate. Wiring H
C is an electrical wiring composed of a plurality of cables having a round cross section connected to the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is in a space surrounded by the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480. Arranged.

As shown in FIG. 359, the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the partition extension part A491d1 and the electrical decoration board A493, and extends along the protruding part A491d2 to the support box part A470. And a space surrounded by the rear plate portion A480.

As described above, since the protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length enough to enter the cutout portion A474 of the support box portion A470, the wiring HC is guided so as to be separated from the cutout portion A474. Contact with the notch A474 is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the wiring HC from rubbing against the notch A474.

On the other hand, when the wiring HC is guided to the protrusion A491d2, the wiring HC is guided so as to be close to the rear plate portion A480. Without measures, the wiring HC may rub against the rear plate portion A480 and may be disconnected in a short period of time. In this embodiment, however, the intermediate portion HC of the wiring HC is provided between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480.
The friction between the rear plate portion A 480 is suppressed by suitably entering a. This will be described in detail below.

In the present embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. More specifically, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the electric decoration board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around a winding portion A471a1 formed so that the binding band KB can be wound around an intermediate position of the protruding wall portion A471a. The side of the second displacement member A490 connected to the board side connector A493c is wound around the fastening portion A475 once around the binding position KB, and the tip thereof is connected to the board side connector A493c. .

The wire HC is loosened by being wound around the fastening portion A475 (FIG. 356 (a
))), The amount of displacement in the upward direction in which the wiring HC is separated from the fastening portion A475 (the direction in which the wiring HC bound by the binding band KB extends) can be suppressed. As a result, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

In the present embodiment, the place where the wiring HC is wound is the fastening portion A475, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process of fastening and fixing the rear plate portion A480 to the support box portion A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion A475 through the rear plate portion A480. In this case, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from dropping from the fastening portion A475 before the fastening and fixing are completed by the fastening screw in the middle of screwing.

In addition, at the time of fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box part A470 (the side where the fastening part A475 protrudes) faces upward, and the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475, and then the rear plate part A480 is mounted on the support box part A470. Since the assembly can be performed while preventing the wiring HC from drooping in the direction of gravity in the main body box portion A471, the assembly can be completed easily. . That is, as compared with the case where the fastening portion A475 is designed to be forced to be assembled in a downward posture, the assembly of the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480 is facilitated by winding the wiring HC around the fastening portion A475. Can be.

Since the winding part A471a1 is formed on the projecting end side of the projecting wall part A471a, the wiring HC temporarily secured by the binding band KB is guided (adjusted) to the rear plate part A480 side. Thereby, when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the wiring HC comes closest to the rear plate portion A480 in the upper part of the fastening portion A475 that is closest to the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 359).

Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while leaving a margin in the length of the wiring HC so that a tensile load is not applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wirings HC intersect each other. In the position, the end portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound in such a manner that the end portion of the wiring HC is slid between the already disposed wiring HC and the support box portion A470.

As a result, the intermediate portion HCa becomes the rear plate portion A480 of the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side.
A state of contact from the side can be configured (see FIG. 356 (a)), and the wiring HC is the protrusion A.
The degree of proximity to the rear plate A480 side can be suppressed by 491d2.

A displacement mode of the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced will be described.
The position of the wiring HC is not fixed between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 by the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480. Therefore, the wiring HC between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490
Since the displacement (bending) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is generated using the entire length of the wire, the load (fatigue) associated with the displacement can be made uniform, so that the wiring HC is locally large. A load can be avoided.

The board-side connector A493c is in a retracted position as compared to the pivot support protrusion 491a that functions as the rotation shaft of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 formed on the protruding position side of the second displacement member A490. Arranged on the side. In other words, when the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the retracted position, the substrate side of the support plate portion 420 that shields the line of sight toward the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 346 (a), right side) Connector A493 is provided.

Thereby, possibility that the wiring HC will protrude outside the outer shape of the support plate part A420 and the support box part A470 can be reduced. That is, by arranging the pivot support protrusion A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 close to the protruding position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), the wiring amount is secured while ensuring a large protruding amount of the second displacement member A490. It is possible to avoid the HC being visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 356 (a), the board-side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of the circle centered on the pivoted protrusion A491a. Then, the board-side connector A493c is arranged on one side with respect to a straight line connecting the center of the pivoted protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475 (lower right side, see FIG. 356 (a)). The case of being arranged on the other side (see the upper left side, see FIG. 358) is switched by the displacement of the second displacement member A490.

Thereby, the board-side connector A49 of the wiring HC in the forward path and the return path of the second displacement member A490.
It can suppress that a difference arises in the displacement mode of the part by the side connected to 3c. Thereby, since the fluctuation | variation of the load applied to the wiring HC can be suppressed, the disconnection of the wiring HC can be prevented.

Further, the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c can be easily shifted to the straight side connecting the center of the pivoted protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475. The amount can be reduced, and the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be described in detail below.

FIG. 357 (b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and is rotated about 45 degrees. In this state, the board-side connector A493
The direction in which the wiring HC connected to the c extends extends from the center of the pivot support protrusion A491a to the fastening portion A475.
Is substantially parallel to a straight line connecting the centers of the two.

In other words, in this embodiment, fastening part A475 is arrange | positioned on the bisector of the rotation angle of 2nd displacement member A490 which passes along the center of to-be-supported protrusion part A491. In other words, the fastening portion A475 as a position where the wiring HC is loosely wound is set at an intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490, so that the deformation amount (deflection amount) of the wiring HC can be minimized. .

In comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357 (a)), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be described. The portion that is in contact with the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 and the portion that is disposed below the fastening portion A475. It has risen slightly. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is disposed at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

That is, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357 (b) to the overhanging position side, the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side is between the intermediate portion HCa and the rear plate portion A480. While the effect of entering is not obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without rubbing the wirings HC.

Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state of FIG. 357 (b) to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 358, the wiring HC on the side connected to the board side connector A493c is in a posture along the left-right direction. Become. Therefore, as a load applied to the wiring HC, a load for maintaining the posture along the left-right direction is generated, which is compared with the case where the second displacement member A490 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 357 (a)). Thus, the influence of the load applied by the protrusion A491d2 on the arrangement of the wiring HC is reduced.

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa does not enter between the rear plate portion A480, an excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in this embodiment,
Only when there is a possibility that an excessive frictional force may be generated between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c, the intermediate portion HCa is inserted into the rear plate portion A480. An action of separating from the plate portion A480 is generated.

On the other hand, when the possibility of excessive friction is low, as shown in FIG. 357 (b),
By eliminating the front-rear overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c, it is possible to prevent excessive resistance from being generated in the displacement of the second displacement member A490. High speed displacement can be achieved.

In the extended state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be described in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 357 (b), and the second displacement member A490 is disposed above the fastening portion A475. The part is slightly lowered, and the part disposed below the fastening part A475 is slightly raised. That is, the displacement of the wiring HC is a displacement in a mode of approaching to the straight line connecting the center of the pivoted protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

As shown in FIG. 358, in a state where the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the extended position (that is, a state where the second displacement member A490 is rotated 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wiring HC comes into contact with the wiring guide portion A471c, thereby Is corrected. The wiring guide part A471c is designed for the purpose of reducing the load applied to the wiring HC in the corrected arrangement.

More specifically, in the extended state of the second displacement member A490, an arc that passes through the board-side connector A493c and contacts the lower end of the wiring guide portion A471c is a fastening portion A that is a passage for the wiring HC.
It is comprised so that it may pass between 475 and projecting wall part A471a. As a result, the wiring HC
It is possible to avoid an excessive load being applied to the wiring HC, and to improve the durability of the wiring HC.

FIG. 360 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465 with reference to the initial angles d0 and d10. In the description of FIG. 360, the angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate the rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465 unless otherwise described.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 is between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5,
The second displacement member A490 is continuously displaced and stopped after the fifth angle d5, while the second displacement member A490 is stopped from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12, while the second angle d12 to the fourth angle d.
Displacement continues until 14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotational angle range of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the phase member A465 that generate the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440 and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are used. Gear A462 with pin for generating
And the angle range which does not generate a driving force is inserted between the rotation angle ranges of the same phase member A465. Thereby, 1st displacement member A440 and 2nd displacement member A490 can be driven stably.

In addition, the setting mode of the angle range is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be configured with the same angle. In this case, the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced from the stopped state at the same time as the first displacement member A440 is switched from the state in which the displacement is continued to the stopped state. Accordingly, the first displacement member A440 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor AMT1.
And the second displacement member A490 are configured so as not to be displaced at the same time, so that a single drive motor AMT1 can be used to form a plurality of members (first displacement member A440 and second displacement member A
490) can be adopted, the load received by the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (it can be kept at a load applied from a single member).

For example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, the section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are configured to simultaneously generate the driving force of both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is formed. It can be limited to between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to the present embodiment, the member that causes the displacement at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12 is switched. Therefore, the pin-equipped gear A462 is used in an angle range on one side with respect to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12. And rotating the same phase member A465 by reversing one member (
While the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490 is stopped, the other member (second
The displacement member A490 or the first displacement member A440) can be reversed.

As described above, it is configured so that it is not necessary to add a large driving force in order to stop one member (first displacement member A440 or second displacement member A490). That is, at the contact position for restricting the displacement of one member, the members are contacted (rubbed) with each other by line contact, so that theoretically no frictional force is generated. Thereby, since the driving force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, a small drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

Further, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the drive motor AMT1 in reverse, only the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is generated, and the second displacement member A49.
A driving mode in which 0 is maintained in the retracted state is also possible.

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14. Accordingly, the pinned gear A462 and the phase member A4
The rotation is mechanically restricted when the sixth angle d6 rotates before the 65 rotates by the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 345). Accordingly, since the rotation does not exceed the allowable angle dd1, the second displacement member A490 is low even when the in-phase member A465 has a low accuracy of stopping at the fourth angle d14 and is easily overrotated (control mode). Overhanging position (Fig. 3
58).

The numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that slightly exceeds the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14 (for example, it may be set as an angle that exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees). good). In this case, the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 exceed the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd.
The rotation of the second displacement member A490 is stopped by the mechanical restriction when the rotation continues beyond the allowable angle dd1 and reaches the sixth angle d6 while allowing the rotation by one. Can be done.

As a result, an allowable amount with respect to a deviation in the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 (ie, the fourth
By performing stop control at an angle (allowable amount) slightly exceeding the angle d14, it is possible to avoid the second displacement means A490 from reaching the overhanging position and to ensure that the second displacement means A490 can be stopped at the overhanging position). In addition, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from being accidentally greatly displaced when the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 is unintentionally increased.

As described above, the arc wall portion A464 is formed with a central angle of about 230 degrees, so even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position (the fifth angle d) that restricts the first displacement member A440.
Since the arc wall portion A464 is disposed up to the position where the first displacement member A440 comes into contact with the first displacement member A440 at the position 5, the displacement restriction at the projecting position of the first displacement member A440 can be maintained. .

Note that the state in which the arc wall portion A467 of the phase member A465 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to the state in which the detection plate portion A455e is detected by the detection sensor A426 and is controlled to stop. There is little probability that the shift of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 is unintentionally large in the vicinity of the angular state where the wall portion A467 is in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d. Therefore, the arc wall portion A467 has a second displacement member A490 from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12.
Is formed at an angle smaller than the arc wall portion A464 (in the present embodiment, about 210 degrees) as the minimum angle range required to maintain the angle at the retracted position. Thereby, the material cost required for circular arc wall part A467 can be suppressed.

Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. 361 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700 and the back case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second motion unit A700 is formed with a left-right width that exceeds the left-right width of the display visual area of the third symbol display device 81, and is below the display visual area of the third symbol display device 81. Placed in.

FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second
The operation unit A700 is held by a rectangular plate member that is long in the left and right direction, and includes an elevating unit A701 that includes an elevating unit A702 configured to be capable of elevating, and a retracted position and an extended position by the elevating operation of the elevating unit A702. And an effect unit A710 configured to be operable (allowable to produce effects) in a plurality of modes.

The elevating unit A701 supports a left and right elongate elevating part A702 on the left and right, a pair of arm members A703 that are rotatably supported around the left and right end parts, and an arm member A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). And a pair of drive motors A704 that transmit the driving force to the motor.

As a mechanism for transmitting a driving force from the driving motor A704 to the arm member A703,
For example, a gear transmission mechanism is illustrated in which gear teeth are formed at the rotation shaft side end of the arm member A703, and a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 meshes with the gear teeth.

In addition, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body is provided which protrudes in the axial direction at a position where the pin inserted through the long hole is eccentric and has gear teeth formed on the outer periphery. A gear link transmission mechanism in which the gear teeth of the body and the gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 mesh with each other may be used.

Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at the end of the auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted into the long hole. A link transmission mechanism that transmits a driving force from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703 may be used.

In the present embodiment, the game board A disposed opposite to the front side of the second operation unit A700.
Corresponding to the shape of the back side of 13 being asymmetric (see FIG. 306), the drive motor A7
The arrangement of 04 is left-right asymmetric. That is, the gap (space) of the back side configuration of the game board A13
By inserting the drive motor A704 into the front, the front-rear width necessary for the arrangement of the game board A13 and the second operation unit A700 is reduced.

As described above, since there is a circumstance that it is desired to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 in accordance with the shape of the game board A13, in the present embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is employed rather than a link transmission mechanism. Is preferred.

FIG. 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the rendering unit A710, and FIG. 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the rendering unit A710. In FIGS. 364 and 365, the production unit A 710
Annular front cover A711 that divides the production range, and the annular front cover A711
A skirt-shaped upper cover A7 that is disposed below the upper lid portion A740 and is fastened and fixed to the upper lid portion A740, which will be described later.
12 and the upper cover A712, the elevator unit A7 is arranged so as to overlap the back side on the lower side.
A state in which the skirt-shaped lower cover A 713 fastened and fixed to the lifting unit 01 is disassembled and separated to the front side is illustrated.

In FIG. 364 and FIG. 365, an annular rear cover A714 that is formed in an annular shape that is substantially equivalent to the annular front cover A711 in the front-rear direction and forms an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 is fixed to the upper lid portion A740. A rotating body A720 that is rotatably disposed at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714 is illustrated.

The rotating body A720 is configured such that a member having a size that fits in a front view in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 is rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the annular rear cover A714. Light-emitting means A7 such as LEDs disposed on the plurality of electric decoration boards A715
The light emitted from 15a can be received. The light emitting means A715a is an electric decoration board A715.
Three are arranged at equal intervals in the side direction on one side of the pentagon formed by.

In the present embodiment, the illumination board A715 is composed of three LEDs arranged at equal intervals in one side of the pentagon, similarly to the light emitting means A715a, and directs the optical axis to the front side. Pre-light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting means A715b is formed of an annular front cover A71.
The annular front cover A711 is caused to emit light by irradiating light on the back side of 1. That is, the player can visually recognize the light-emitting effect through the light-transmitting portion partially formed on the annular front cover A711.

In the present embodiment, each of the five flat plate-shaped electric decoration boards A715 constitutes one side of the pentagon, the electric decoration board A715 above the rotating body A720 is in a horizontal posture, and the electric decoration boards below the left and right The light emitting means A715a is arranged in such a manner that the lower end portion of A715 faces the rotation axis side and the optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each electric decoration board A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotator A720 rotates, the rotating outer portion of the rotator A720 moves to the light emitting means A.
It can be configured to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from 715a. Thereby, since the traveling direction of the light when the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a is reflected by the rotating body A 720 can be changed with the rotation of the rotating body A 720, a gorgeous effect can be executed. .

In the present embodiment, the rotating body A 720 is used in order to facilitate the reflection of light.
The outer surface of 720 is plated (gold plating, silver plating, or the like). The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating and can be various other aspects. For example, a tape with a color that easily reflects may be attached.

As described above, since the rotator A720 rotates about the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotation axis is on the rotation axis of the rotator A720 regardless of whether the rotator A720 is rotated. The same spot is irradiated. In the present embodiment, the light passing recess A722a is formed at that location, so that the upper part of the rotating body A720 is opened and light passes therethrough.
Details will be described later.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are recessed portions A711a and A714a that constitute windows that allow light emitted from the light emitting means A715a to pass through the opposite edge.
And a semicircular recess A711b that is recessed in a semicircular cross section so as to surround the rotation axis of the rotator A720.
, A714b.

The inner peripheral surface of the ring excluding the window portion constituted by the recessed portions A711a and A714a and the other outer surface are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a and reflected by the rotating body A 720 can be further reflected by being applied to the annular front cover A711 or the annular rear cover A 714. Therefore, a plurality of lights emitted from the same light emitting means A 715a The player can visually recognize the light traveling (reflecting) from the point. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of the light emitting means A 715a provided while performing a gorgeous effect.

In this respect, it is possible to secure a wider area for reflecting other light (area where plating is performed) by forming the window necessary for transmitting the light from the light emitting means A 715a as small as possible. It is advantageous because it can be done. In the present embodiment, the recessed portions A711a and A714 are provided.
The shape of the window portion constituted by a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED constituting the light emitting means A 715a, and an area for reflecting the light without impairing the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a. Widely secured.

FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotator A720 of the rendering unit A710.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotator A720 of the effect unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, the illustration of the annular front cover A711, the upper cover A712, and the lower cover A713 of the rendering unit A710 is omitted.

Rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, and is a set of members that are respectively supported by a plurality of support portions A730 that support the plurality of rotating members, and have a pair of substantially hemispherical outer shapes. A first rotating member A721 and a second rotating member formed of a pair of members formed from a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmitting resin material in a shape that allows the outer side of the first rotating body 721 to rotate. A728.

The first rotation member A721 is divided into a front and a rear and formed from a resin material having a low light transmittance and having a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton, and a pair of shell portions A that are fastened and fixed to the support portion A730 at the lower side.
722, and an annular gear member A723 that is rotatably supported by an annular recess formed on the back side of the front shell portion A722, and gear teeth are engraved on the back side. And a gear tooth A724a that is disposed on the back side of the annular gear member A723 and rotatably supported in a manner sandwiched between the pair of shell parts A722, and is engraved on the shaft part. It mainly includes a central rotating member A724 to be engaged.

The pair of shell parts A722 are light-passing recesses A that are recessed in the direction away from each other at the upper part thereof.
722a. At least in the shell A722 on the front side, this light passage recess A72
2a is formed on both the upper and lower sides of the annular gear member A723, and is arranged in such a manner that most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side of the recessed end of the light passage recess A722a.

That is, even if the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a is viewed from the top, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visually recognized in the direction view, and therefore the central rotating member A724 disposed inside the annular gear member A723. Can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a, the annular gear member A72.
3 can prevent the light from being blocked, and the light can reach the central rotation member A724. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, the outline | summary of the operation | movement aspect of 1st rotation member A721 is demonstrated.

FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, in order to make the inside visible, the back side shell portion A722 is not shown, and for convenience of explanation, the support portion A7 is omitted.
A fixed gear SG that is non-rotatably disposed above 30 is illustrated in a state of meshing with the annular gear member A723.

An outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate around a rotating shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) extending in the vertical direction. When this rotation occurs, the relative position between the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG disposed inside the first rotating member A721 changes, and accordingly, the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG are relative to each other. Displaces (the meshing relationship changes).

In the present embodiment, the fixed gear SG is fixed to the tip of the shaft rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 so as not to rotate, so that the relative displacement with the fixed gear SG is ensured by the rotation of the annular gear member A723. . When the annular gear member A723 is rotated, the annular gear member A7 is rotated along with the rotation.
The central rotating member A724 meshed with 23 rotates. The rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 is
Since it extends in a direction (orthogonal direction) intersecting with an axis extending in the vertical direction (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) as the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721, the shell portion A of the first rotation member A721.
With the rotation of 722 (lateral rotation of the vertical axis), the central rotation member A724 rotates (vertical rotation of the horizontal axis) in a different manner. The relationship between the rotation directions will be described later.

The rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 is rotated with the rotation of the shell A722 (in synchronization with the rotation angle).
Since it keeps changing within the same plane, the central rotating member A724 can be seen to rotate around a plurality of upper, lower, left and right rotating shafts. Accordingly, by causing the shell A 722 to rotate in one direction, the central rotating member A 724 can be rotated in a plurality of directions.

In the present embodiment, the number of gear teeth A724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are the same number (both are 10), so the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell A722 and the central rotation member A724 are the same.
The absolute value of the rotation angle is synchronized. As a result, during rotation of the shell A722, each time the shell A722 is in a posture in which the ring shape is visible in front view as shown in FIG. As shown by 368, the disk portion is directed to the front side (returns). Therefore, the reproducibility of the rotation effect can be maintained.

Returning to FIG. 366 and FIG. The second rotating member A728 is the first rotating member A7.
21 is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical members that are fastened and fixed to the support portion A730 below the first rotation member A721. The first rotation member A7 passes through the outside of the first rotation member A721 from the lower side of the first rotation member A721.
A bar-shaped extending portion A formed in a bar shape extending upward in such a manner as to reach a position covering 21 from above.
728a.

The rod-like extending portion A728a is formed to be narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721,
Due to the difference in arrangement, a part of the first rotating member A721 is hidden and the first rotating member A721 is hidden.
Can be configured (when it does not overlap with the first rotating member A721), details will be described later.

The outer shapes of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are annular rear cover A7.
14 is configured to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of 14, and the vertical gap is shortened. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are moved in a state where the annular rear cover A714 is disposed. Inadvertent disassembly of pulling upward (disassembling) can be prevented.

As described above, the rotating body A720 includes a plurality of rotating members (first rotating member A721 and second rotating member A728) fastened and fixed to the support portion A730, and these are the support portions A7.
Rotates with 30 rotations. Next, the support portion A730 will be described.

FIG. 369 (a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG.
It is a front exploded perspective view of support part A735. FIG. 370 (a) is a rear exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370 (b) is a rear exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the support portion A730 is colored (white in this embodiment).
A first support portion A731 whose main body is formed in a cylindrical shape from a light-impermeable resin material, and an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support portion A731 from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material And a second support portion A735 configured as a set of divided bodies that are divided into two in the radial direction, and a box shape to be described later inside the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735. Part A7
A shaft rod portion A751 fixed to the shaft 50 is inserted, and a metal ring-shaped C-ring C1 and a fixed gear SG fixed to be non-rotatable by fitting with a deformed shaft at the tip side portion of the shaft rod portion A751 are removed. Supported by impossibility.

The first support portion A731 has a cylindrical main body portion having a through hole A731a that has an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the shaft rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and can be inserted into the shaft rod portion A751. A plurality of support plate portions A732 extending in a plate shape in both directions on a straight line from the upper end portion of the portion and formed with through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, and projecting downward from two positions at the lower end of the main body portion And a pair of projecting portions A733.

The projecting portion A733 is disposed at a position corresponding to a notch portion A772a of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting, and is formed with a width different from each other. The Thereby, compared with the case where the width of the pair of projecting portions A733 is the same, it is easier to perform the angle matching between the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 and the first support portion A731 at the time of fitting. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 369 (b) and 370 (b), the second support portion A735 includes a half cylinder portion A736 constituting a cylindrical portion and a plate extending in both directions on a straight line from the upper end portion of the half cylinder portion A736. And a plurality of semi-supporting plate portions A737 formed with through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The semi-cylindrical part A736 is provided with a recessed fitting part A736a that is recessed in a rectangular shape upward from the lower end at the center position of the arc at the lower end side part, and a rectangular shape protruding radially outward from the end of the arc. And a protruding fitting portion A736b.

The recessed fitting portion A736a is provided with an inner protrusion A762d (FIG. 3) of an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 described later.
73), and the protrusion fitting portion A736b is a protrusion that fits into the cutout portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760.

At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is disposed opposite to the inner wall of the cylindrical protruding portion A762b, and the inner wall is radially outward of the semi-cylindrical portion A736a. When the protrusion fitting part A736b is fitted to the notch part A762c, the divided body constituting the second support part A735 can be supported indivisiblely.

Further, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b are fitted in such a manner that the cutout portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the shaft rod portion A751 are in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of rotation. Accordingly, the rotation of the large-diameter gear LG12 also functions as a transmission unit for transmitting the rotation to the second support unit A735. Therefore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b can function both for preventing the division of the second support portion A736 and for transmitting the rotation to the second support portion A736.

On the inner surface of the semi-cylindrical portion where the semi-supporting plate portion A737 is formed, a groove portion A735a that is recessed along the circumferential direction is formed. By the groove portion A735a, the inner surface of the second support portion A735 and the first surface
The contact area with the outer surface of the support portion A731 can be reduced, and the generated frictional force can be reduced.

In particular, in the place arrange | positioned between half-support plate part A737, there exists a possibility that the load at the time of fastening fixation of 2nd rotation member A728 may arise, and an internal diameter may be tightened compared with the dimension at the time of design. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove portion A735 is provided at a position between the half support plate portions A737.
Since a is formed, the contact area can be reduced at a location where sliding friction is likely to occur between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731. Accordingly, the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 are suppressed while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove portion A735a.
The frictional force generated between the two can be effectively reduced.

The semi-supporting plate portion A737 includes a pair of assembling projections A737a projecting to the opposite side of the counterpart member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is divided, and a pair of positions projecting from one divided body. Fastening of the alignment protrusion A737b, the insertion hole A737c formed in the other divided body as a through-hole having a size through which the alignment protrusion A737b can be inserted, and the second rotating member A728 formed in the thickness direction A portion A728b (see FIG. 367) is provided with a pair of fastening holes A737d formed in a size that allows insertion.

The half support plate portion A737 is aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusion A737b through the insertion hole A737c, and is assembled from the outer side in the dividing direction.
367) are coupled to each other by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion A 728b and fastening the fastening screw. That is, since the fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the semi-support plate portion A737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

The assembly protrusion A737a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728 and used for positioning, and the protrusion interval is a pair of divided bodies constituting the second support part A735. Different from each other. That is, the interval between the assembling protrusions A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the front side is equal to the assembling protrusion A7 arranged on the divided body arranged on the back side.
It is wider than the interval of 37a.

By forming the assembly protrusions A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members constituting the second rotation member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second support portion A735. That is, only when assembled from the correct direction, the assembly protrusion A737a and the second rotation member A728 can be appropriately fitted. When the direction is incorrect, the assembly protrusion A737a Since the position of the two-rotating member A728 with the concave portion is not aligned and cannot be assembled, an error in the assembly direction can be noticed.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 is largely different in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and the other configurations are substantially the same, so it is intended to assemble with a pair of members at the time of handling,
There is a possibility that an error of assembling two of the members of the pair of members occurs. According to the present embodiment, since the formation interval of the assembly protrusion A737a is different (since it is not a common mode), both of the members of the second rotation member A728 assembled to the second support portion A735 are one member (combination of combinations). An error to be assembled as a member on one side can be noticed before the fastening screw is inserted.

The second support portion A735 is separated from the radial direction before disassembly by the cylindrical protrusion A of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760.
762b (see FIG. 366), the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A73.
The assembly of 5 is performed exclusively by translation in the axial direction, and the projecting portion A is accompanied by the translation.
733 is a notch A772a, and a recessed fitting portion A736a is an inner protrusion A762d (FIG. 373).
And the projecting fitting portion A736b is respectively fitted to the notch portion A762c. Here, the second support portion A735 is first assembled from the shape, and in this state, the first support portion A73 is assembled.
1 is assembled.

Here, the first support portion A731 and the second support portion are in a shape relationship with the mating member to be assembled.
The posture when assembled together with the support portion A735 is not an arbitrary posture, but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when assembling the first support portion A731, there is a possibility that the second support portion A735 may block the field of view and make it difficult to assemble the first support portion A731.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second support portion A735 is formed from a light transmissive resin material, and the first support portion A731 is formed from a light non-transmissive resin material.
After assembling, the inside of the second support part A735 can be visually recognized. In addition, the cylindrical extension part A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 for assembling the first support part A731 is the upper lid part A7.
40, the position where the projecting portion A733 of the first support portion A731 is fitted is not hidden by the upper lid portion A740, and can be configured to be easily visible.

Therefore, when the first support portion A731 is assembled, it can be easily adjusted to a suitable posture, so that the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 can be easily assembled.

Here, an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, are disposed (accommodated) between the box-shaped portion A750 and the upper lid portion A740 includes a through hole A that surrounds the central axis of the support portion A730.
Since the upper lid portion A740 is disassembled and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are modified, the shaft rod portion A751 fixed to the box-shaped portion A750 from the through hole A741 is provided. In order to extract, it is necessary to displace upper cover part A740 upward with respect to box-shaped part A750.

At this time, if the support portion A730 is still assembled, the support plate portion A732 and the semi-support plate portion A
737 cannot interfere with the displacement of the upper lid A740. Therefore, the upper lid A
Before disassembling 740, it is necessary to disassemble support portion A730. As described above, in order to disassemble the support portion A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C ring C1 and the fixed gear SG, and the fixed gear SG is disposed inside the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 368). ), It is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

As described above, in order to access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, it is necessary to disassemble a plurality of members in order, so that the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are illegally accessed. It is possible to make it easy to prevent fraudulent acts that cause malfunctions by tampering with the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid part A740 and the box-like part A750. In FIG. 371, a directional view looking down from above is illustrated, and in FIG. 372, a directional view looking up from obliquely below (direction view inclined 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid portion A740 includes a through hole A741 that is vertically drilled at the center of the left and right, and supports the transmission members of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped portion A750. A shape (shape such as irregularities) is formed.

The box-shaped portion A750 is formed in a box shape disposed below the upper lid portion A740 and opened at least on the upper surface side, and an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are disposed at the opened position. Fixed to the bottom plate portion A750a of the through hole A741 of the upper lid portion A740.
A shaft rod portion A751 made of metal (in this embodiment, made of brass) that extends in the vertical direction coaxially with the central axis of
And a first detection sensor A752 comprising a photocoupler type detection device disposed on the upper surface side of the box-shaped portion A750, and a photocoupler method disposed on the lower surface side of the box-shaped portion A750. A second detection sensor A753 comprising a detection device, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body portion projects and is fixed to the lower surface side, a drive gear AMG2 that rotates by excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and a bottom plate portion A750a. And a relay substrate A754 on which wires connected to the various sensors A752, A753, the drive motor AMT2, and the like are relayed.

373 and 374 show a box-shaped portion A750, an upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and a lower layer transmission mechanism A.
770 is an exploded front perspective view of 770. FIG. FIGS. 373 and 374 show the state in which the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is separated from the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 in the up and down direction, FIG. It is illustrated in a direction view looking up.

The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are both configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to two types (sizes) of gears. That is, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small small-diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small-diameter gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small-diameter gear PG1, and the small-diameter gear PG2. And a large-diameter gear LG1 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 includes a large-diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large-diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshed with the large-diameter gear LG11, and a small-diameter meshed with the large-diameter gear LG12. A small-diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as the gear PG1 and a large-diameter gear LG13 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2 meshed with the small-diameter gear PG11.

Large-diameter gears LG13, LG1 arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side as the upstream side
In addition, detected pieces A763 and A773 detected by the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753, respectively, are formed.

In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, the small-diameter gear is interposed, but since the large-diameter gear is disposed again on the downstream side, both the large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 rotate. The absolute value of the rotation angle in the case of the drive gear AMG2 is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of the drive gear AMG2.

In this embodiment, detected pieces A763 extending radially outward from the umbrella portion covering the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two equal intervals on the circumference (180 degree intervals). The detected piece A7 extending in the axial direction from the umbrella portion covering the gear teeth of the large diameter gear LG1 from below
73 are formed at equal intervals on the circumference at four locations (intervals of 90 degrees), so the first detection sensor A7
When the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both the second detection sensor A753 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372), the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection are detected again by rotating the drive gear AMG2 180 degrees. It returns to the state in which the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both of the sensors A753. Thus, in the present embodiment, the first detection sensor A75
2 and the detection timing of the second detection sensor A753 can be related.

On the other hand, the reason why the plurality of detection sensors of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are arranged is that timing for causing only one of the detection sensors to function occurs.
Details will be described later.

In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, since the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at a plurality of locations, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first for ease of understanding. . The lower layer transmission mechanism A770 is a box-shaped part A7.
50, the four gears AMG2, PG1, meshed with each other as described above.
A transmission mechanism composed of PG2 and LG1.

A plurality of recesses A771 for fitting are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side of the drive gear AMG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and a protrusion A that protrudes radially inwardly into one of the recesses A771.
771a is formed. As a result, the internal shape of one recess A771 is changed to the other recess A771.
It is formed so as to be different from the internal shape.

The small-diameter gear PG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension A772 that extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the upper surface so as to surround the shaft rod A751. At the upper end of the cylindrical extension A772, a pair of cutouts A772a cut out in a rectangular shape at a symmetrical position with the shaft rod A751 in between.
Is formed. This notch A772a is a part that fits with the protruding portion A733 of the support portion, and is formed as a notch having a different width corresponding to the formation mode of the protruding portion A733.

The large-diameter gear LG1 is disposed below the intermediate plate portion A750b formed in an upper layer than the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and upward extraction is restricted by the intermediate plate portion A750b. That is, in order to extract the large-diameter gear LG1, the second interfering in the vertical direction is viewed.
Since it is necessary to remove the detection sensor A753, it is possible to increase the number of man-hours required to extract the large-diameter gear LG1. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the large diameter gear LG1 is inadvertently extracted.

Further, since the intermediate plate portion A750b divides the region, it is possible to easily avoid contact between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the transmission of the driving force between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 (on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path).

Next, details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be described. The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is disposed in the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750, and as described above, the four gears LG11, which are engaged with each other,
The transmission mechanism includes LG12, PG11, and LG13.

The large-diameter gear LG11 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 transmits the driving force only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise as viewed from above) by the one-way clutch housed inside, and in the opposite direction (
When rotating counterclockwise (when viewed from above), it is configured to rotate idle, and includes a plurality of protrusions A761 protruding downward from the lower surface of the one-way clutch.

The protrusion A761 is a curved wall-shaped protrusion that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2, and the corresponding part A761a corresponding to the protrusion A771a has entered the radially inner side (radially outward). A linear shape with suppressed overhang). As a result, it is possible to configure so that the protrusion A771a of the drive gear AMG2 and the corresponding portion A761a of the large-diameter gear LG11 can be assembled only.

The large diameter gear LG12 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 has a cylindrical extending portion A of the small diameter gear PG2 at the center.
A through hole A762a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of 772 is formed, and a cylindrical protrusion A762b protruding in a large-diameter cylindrical shape from the upper surface side, and a shaft rod at the protruding end of the cylindrical protrusion A762b A pair of cutout portions A7 formed in a rectangular cutout at opposite positions across the central axis of the portion A751
62c and a pair of protrusions projecting along a straight line passing through the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 and orthogonal to the top surface with respect to a straight line passing through the cutout portion A762c and the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 in the top view. Inner projection A762d.

The cylindrical protrusion A762b receives the lower end portion of the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 366),
The second support portion A735 is a portion that restricts displacement in the dividing direction, and the notch portion A762c and the inner projection portion A762d are respectively provided with a projection fitting portion A736b and a concave fitting portion A736a of the second support portion A735. It is a part configured to be fitted and transmit driving force.

The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is formed over the pair of detected pieces A763 and the axial direction with the formation of the umbrella portion omitted from the detected pieces A763 in the same direction and at the same angular deviation. And a cylindrical functional portion A765 that is disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG13 so as to be coaxially rotatable and is configured to be relatively rotatable with the large-diameter gear LG13.

The columnar functional portion A765 includes a pair of rotation restricting protrusions A765a that are disposed at symmetrical positions across the rotation axis and are supported by a support groove A750c formed in a groove shape on the upper surface of the box-shaped portion A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) with respect to the large-diameter gear LG13 is accommodated in the cylindrical functional portion A765.

That is, when the load generated between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 is smaller (small) than the reference, torque transmission is maintained, and the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A7 are maintained.
In the case where the load generated with 65 is excessive, the transmission of torque is cut off.

In the present embodiment, the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 idles to shut off the drive force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. A torque limiter is used to generate resistance for ensuring the prevention of rotation of the motor. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions in the same manner as a resistance member that always generates resistance or a member that generates viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the driving gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the driving force is transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. Thus, the transmission of torque is interrupted, and the resistance from the large-diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so that the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter is in a state of transmitting torque at the start of rotation. After the rotation is continued to some extent (after a certain degree of rotation), the state is switched to the state where the torque transmission is released. So before that switchover occurs,
A large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In the present embodiment, an elongated gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the posture of the large-diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from above is the posture in which the detected piece A763 enters the gap of the first detection sensor A752 (FIG. 37).
3), the gear teeth that mesh with the small-diameter gear PG11 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise when viewed from above can be limited to specific gear teeth.

By forming the specific gear teeth as long gear teeth A764 in the axial direction, it is possible to reduce the load generated per unit length in the axial direction. As a result, the large-diameter gear LG13
It is possible to improve the durability.

The first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of targets by detecting the detected piece A763 of the large diameter gear LG13. First, first, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760
Is rotated to transmit the driving force and then stops, the upper layer transmission mechanism A76
It can be detected that 0 has stopped in an appropriate posture (angle).

Second, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idled to release the driving force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 (when the driving gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from above) ), It can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission functions well. That is, for example, when the driving force transmission is not sufficiently interrupted (idle) due to damage to the internal structure of the one-way clutch, or when the torque generation function of the torque limiter is insufficient due to a malfunction. When the driving force transmitted to the diameter gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 rotates.

When the drive gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first detection sensor A752 is notified by an error signal when the first detection sensor A752 detects that the detected piece A763 is displaced. Can be used to find problems occurring in one-way clutches and torque limiters.

Note that the mechanism for supplementing the cancellation of the driving force transmission using the one-way clutch with the function of the torque limiter as described above is effective when the transmitted driving force is directed horizontally as in this embodiment. is there. That is, in the present embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by a plurality of transmission members that rotate about a rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction, but in this configuration, gravity cannot be used.

When the transmitted driving force has a component in the gravitational direction, it is possible to use a structure that suppresses the movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is released using the weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted. In the embodiment, the self-weight cannot be used, and there is a possibility that the driving force may be transmitted even by a weak load generated in the idle direction in the releasing direction of the one-way clutch.

In addition, as a structure that suppresses displacement due to idling, it is conceivable to generate friction with other members. However, in this case, it is necessary to drive the member by generating a driving force that is greater than friction, so another problem occurs. May occur. From this point of view, the present embodiment employs a torque limiter so that release of driving force transmission accompanying switching of the driving direction can be reliably generated.

FIG. 375 (a) is a top view of the upper lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375 (b) shows the upper lid portion A740 and the box-shaped portion A750.
It is a front view of upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

With reference to FIGS. 375 (a) and 375 (b), transmission of the driving force of the driving motor AMT2 will be described. When the drive gear AMG2 is rotated by excitation of the drive motor AMT2, a protrusion A761 (FIG. 374) that fits into the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2.
See also rotate.

When the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates idle, and the ridge A761 and the large-diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. Thus, even when the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large-diameter gear LG11 maintains the state as it is.

In other words, the driving force is transmitted only in the lower transmission path DL1 transmitted through the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and the driving force transmission in the upper transmission path UL1 transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is blocked. Accordingly, only the cylindrical extending portion A772 rotates out of the cylindrical extending portion A772 and the cylindrical protruding portion A762b fitted to the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369), and the cylindrical protruding portion A762b remains as it is. maintain.

Thereby, in the assembly state (refer FIG. 362) of production | presentation unit A710, 1st support part A7 fitted to cylindrical extension part A772 among 1st support part A731 and 2nd support part A735.
31 (refer to FIG. 369) rotates and the second support portion A735 is maintained as it is, so that the first support portion A731 is fastened and fixed to the first support portion A731 among the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728. Only the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) rotates, and the second rotating member A728 maintains the state as it is.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is clockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the drive force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed in the large-diameter gear LG11, and the protrusion A761 and the large-diameter The gear LG11 rotates synchronously (integrally). That is, drive gear A
When MG2 rotates, the large diameter gear LG11 rotates in the same manner.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only in the lower transmission path DL1 but also in the upper transmission path UL1. Accordingly, the cylindrical extension A772 and the cylindrical protrusion A7 that fit into the support A730 (see FIG. 369).
Both 62b rotate.

Thereby, in the assembly state (refer FIG. 362) of production | presentation unit A710, both 1st support part A731 and 2nd support part A735 (refer FIG. 369) rotate, and it is 1st support part A73.
Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) fastened and fixed to the first and second support portions A735 respectively rotate.

Here, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be described. First, the second rotation member A728 (see FIG. 367) rotates by the drive transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the large-diameter gear LG
11 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, and the large diameter gear LG12 that meshes with the large diameter gear LG11 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above in the reverse direction. Clockwise.

Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) rotates by the drive transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise as viewed from above, the drive gear A
Since the small-diameter gear PG1 meshed with the MG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the small-diameter gear PG2 (see FIG. 373) meshed with the small-diameter gear PG1 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the first rotating member A721 The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from above.

That is, the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 is the shaft rod portion A751.
The direction is the opposite direction with the axis of rotation. Accordingly, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A7
Compared to the case where the rotation directions of the 28 are the same direction, the player can be made to visually recognize that they are rotating at a high speed (with a large angle change), or the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A7.
It is possible to make it easy to perform an effect that makes it appear as if it is rotating independently.

376 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376 (b) is a front view of FIG.
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in the arrow D direction view of 6 (a), FIG. 376 (c)
These are front views of 1st rotation member A721, FIG. 376 (d) is the arrow D of FIG. 376 (c).
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in a direction view.

376 (a) and 376 (b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, and in FIGS. 376 (c) and 376 (d), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is in the initial state. A state (first state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is shown.

FIG. 377 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377 (b) is a front view of FIG.
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in the arrow D direction view of 7 (a), and is FIG. 377 (c).
These are front views of 1st rotation member A721, FIG. 377 (d) is the arrow D of FIG. 377 (c).
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in a direction view.

In FIGS. 377 (a) and 377 (b), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the first.
FIG. 377 shows a state (second state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above.
(C) and FIG. 377 (d) show a state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above in the second state.

378 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378 (b) is a front view of FIG.
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in the arrow D direction view of 8 (a), and is 378 (c).
These are front views of 1st rotation member A721, FIG. 378 (d) is the arrow D of FIG. 378 (c).
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in a direction view.

In FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (b), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is third.
FIG. 378 shows a state (fourth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above.
(C) and FIG. 378 (d) show a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the fourth state in the top view.

FIG. 379 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379 (b) is a front view of FIG.
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in the arrow D direction view of 9 (a), FIG. 379 (c)
These are front views of 1st rotation member A721, FIG. 379 (d) is the arrow D of FIG. 379 (c).
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in a direction view.

In FIGS. 379 (a) and 379 (b), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the fifth.
FIG. 379 shows a state (sixth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above.
(C) and FIG. 379 (d) show a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the sixth state.

When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above in the seventh state, the first rotating member A7
21 returns to the initial state. That is, FIGS. 376 to 379 illustrate one section (one cycle) of the rotation of the first rotating member A721.

In the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376 (a)), the shell A72
The side viewed in front view 2 will be described as a front shell portion A722F, and the opposite side will be described as a back shell portion A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A7
24, the side visually recognized in front view is described as a member front surface A724F, and the opposite side is described as a member back surface A724B.

376 (a), 376 (c), 377 (a), 377 (c), and 378.
In (a), FIG. 378 (c), FIG. 379 (a), and FIG.
The optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A 715a of FIG.
FIGS. 376 (b), 376 (d), 377 (b), 377 (d), 378 (b),
In FIGS. 378 (d), 379 (b), and 379 (d), a predetermined virtual plane VS is illustrated. The optical axis KJ passes through the virtual plane VS.

In addition, in FIGS. 376 (d), 377 (d), 378 (d), and 379 (d), arrows HL and VL schematically showing the light reflection direction are shown. The arrow HL indicates the central rotating member A7
24 shows the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a arranged on the left and right sides of 24 is reflected by the shell A722 and the arrow VL is from the light emitting means A 715a arranged on the upper side of the central rotating member A724. The direction in which the irradiated light is reflected by the central rotating member A724 and travels is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 376 (d), 377 (d), 378 (d) and 379 (d),
Corresponding to one rotation of the first rotating member A721 counterclockwise when viewed from above, the direction of the arrow VL changes by one rotation clockwise when viewed from above. That is, in the present embodiment, the central rotating member A7
The light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a disposed above the light 24 is transmitted to the central rotating member A 724.
Can be advanced in the radial direction of the circle around the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721, and the direction can be changed in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the first rotating member A721.

This is difficult to achieve with, for example, a configuration in which the light emitting means is disposed on the side surfaces of the shell portion A722 and the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the shell A722, the change in the direction of light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotation direction as the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721.

Further, for example, since the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B.
When the light emitting means is disposed on the surface, the change in the traveling direction of the light irradiated in the normal direction of the surface does not change around the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721 (rotation having the rotation axis in the front-rear direction). Change of direction).

Therefore, an unexpected light emission effect can be executed as compared with the case where the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to adopt the light emission effect. For example, the rotation direction of the change in the traveling direction of the light and the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721 are reversed, so that the player can feel as if it is rotating at a higher speed than the actual rotation speed. You can feel it.

As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, the central rotating member A724 also rotates with the rotation of the first rotating member A721, but the surface visually recognized by the player is limited to the member front surface A724F. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), the fastening screw can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

That is, the member back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as a region for the player to visually recognize, but as a region for another purpose, regardless of its appearance (in this embodiment, the light is transmitted). It is possible to select a configuration that more easily achieves the purpose of reflection. For example, in the present embodiment, it is possible to cause light reflection utilizing the gloss of the surface of the fastening screw member by exposing the fastening screw.

In addition, the aspect of the member surface of a fastening screw can be set arbitrarily. For example, the fastening screw member surface may be painted black to make it easier to make a shadow, the fastening screw member surface may be painted in color to reflect the color, or the fastening screw may be LED A light emitting means such as the above may be attached.

The effect | action of the light irradiated to 1st rotation member A721 is demonstrated. In the following description, FIG. 364 is appropriately referred to. As described above, the electrical decoration board A715 including the light emitting means A715a that irradiates the first rotating member A721 with light is arranged so as to constitute each side of the pentagon, and is orthogonal to each side (inclined with respect to each other). The optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction of
The electrical decoration board | substrate A715 (refer FIG. 364) arrange | positioned above 1st rotation member A721 first is demonstrated, and the electrical decoration board | substrate A715 arrange | positioned at the left and right of 1st rotation member A721 is demonstrated later.

The illumination board A715 disposed above the first rotation member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. Regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721, this light passes through the light passage recess A722a and reaches the central rotating member A724. That is, the first rotating member A7
By irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electric decoration board A715 arranged above 21, it is possible to always keep the light on the central rotating member A724.

In the light emitting means A715a, when three LEDs are arranged side by side, the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can change depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. That is,
In the initial state (see FIG. 376 (b)), since the light passage recess A722a is formed in the same direction as the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is also rotated in the center. It is easy to reach the member A724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377 (b)), the light passing recess A722a does not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light irradiated from the left and right light emitting means A715a Since it is difficult to enter A722a, among the light emitted from the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 can be associated with the difference in the emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

In this point of view, in the initial state or the fourth state in which the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visible in front view, the electric decoration board A71 disposed above the central rotating member A724.
5 to maximize the intensity of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724.
In the second state and the sixth state where it is difficult to visually recognize the 24 member front surfaces A724F in a front view, the intensity of light that reaches the central rotating member A724 by being irradiated from the electric decoration board A715 disposed above the central rotating member A724 is minimized. It can be. That is, the visibility of the central rotating member A724 in front view and the intensity of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed correspondingly.

The electrical decoration board | substrate A715 arrange | positioned at the right and left of 1st rotation member A721 is equipped with the light emission means A715a by which the optical axis KJ is arrange | positioned on the plane (virtual plane VS) which passes along the rotating shaft of shell part A722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721.
Depending on the state of the rotating member A721, the location where the light reaches differs.

That is, the shell A722 is disposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376 (a) and 376 (b)) or the fourth state (FIG. 378 (a)).
) And FIG. 378 (b)))), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is the shell A72.
2 and will not reach the central rotating member A724.

The shell portion A722 is curved in such a manner that the width decreases toward the outer side in the radial direction at the outer peripheral edge portion, and the connection portion A722 that connects the edges of the opening of the shell portion A722 with a deformed arch-shaped bridge.
b. Therefore, even in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a to the shell portion A722 is bent at the outer peripheral edge portion of the shell portion A722 or the arch of the connecting portion A722b. It can be made to advance toward the player by reflecting on the curvature of the player.

In addition, the shell A 722 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a toward the player in a state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A 721 (reflected along the arrow HL). Therefore, the difference between the amount of light traveling to the player side in a state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state and the amount of light in other states can be emphasized. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized in a dark (pulse-like) state, and when the first rotating member A721 is slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotating member A724 is moved. It is possible to execute a light emission effect of switching to a brightly visible state.

On the other hand, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, not all of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell part A722 overlap, so at least a part thereof Of the light reaches the central rotating member A724.

Thus, the light emission means A of the electrical decoration board | substrate A715 arrange | positioned at the right and left of 1st rotation member A721.
A state in which the light emitted from 715a reaches the central rotary member A724, and the central rotary member A7
The state that does not reach 24 can be switched by the state of the first rotating member A721. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that allows the light reaching the central rotating member A724 to be visually blinked without controlling the light emission mode (for example, the flashing mode) of the light emitting unit A715a.

For example, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a can be visually recognized as blinking at different lighting or extinguishing times by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the lighting state ( It can be visually recognized as a light emission effect with a different blinking cycle).

In this case, when the central rotary member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven so that the central rotary member A724 rotates at a speed exceeding the speed (for example, 20 [rps]) at which an afterimage is generated, Regardless of the speed, the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized as if it has stopped, but the flashing cycle of the light applied to the central rotating member A724 can be varied depending on the difference in speed.

That is, the higher the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state or the fourth state, and the light emitting means A715a (center) by the shell A722. Since the period in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the rotating member A724 is blocked can be shortened, the blinking period of the light irradiated on the central rotating member A724 can be shortened. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the first rotating member A7
By changing the rotation speed of 21, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the blinking cycle of the light applied to the central rotation member A724.

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is in a state where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 are opposed to each other. The longitudinal direction overlaps the shell portion A722 when viewed in the rotational axis direction (or viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a). In the present embodiment, the central rotating member A
The longitudinal direction of 724 is defined as a direction parallel to the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B (for example, the arrow LR direction, the arrow UD direction, or the direction orthogonal to the arrow FB in FIG. 376 (a)). , The short direction is the direction connecting the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B (FIG. 37).
6 (b) arrow FB direction).

In other words, the central rotation member A724 has a shell A72 in the longitudinal direction when viewed in the rotation axis direction (or as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a) in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotation member A721.
The posture is to enter (contain) the inside of the wall thickness of 2. Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell A722 in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by shielding the light with the shell portion A722, it is possible to easily prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. For example, the light from the light emitting means A715a is the shell portion A722. , While the central rotating member A724 is not illuminated.

When the first rotating member A721 is rotated at a constant speed, the total (ratio) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is the rotational speed. It is the same regardless of whether Thereby, the brightness of 1st rotation member A721 visually recognized by a player can be prevented from changing because the rotation speed of 1st rotation member A721 changes. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at a high speed, it can be avoided that the first rotating member A721 is visually recognized darkly.

In the present embodiment, the first rotating member A72 is turned on with the light emitting means A715a turned on.
By rotating 1, it is possible to change the blinking cycle of the light reaching the central rotating member A 724. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need for forming a circuit for causing the light emitting means A 715a to blink while achieving the same effect as the case where the light emitting means A 715a itself blinks. Therefore, size reduction of the electrical decoration board | substrate A715 can be achieved.

As described above, the light emitting means A715a for irradiating light from above the central rotating member A724,
The light emitting means A715a that emits light from the left and right of the central rotating member A724 is the first rotating member A.
It is comprised so that it may differ how the 1st rotation member A721 is illuminated with respect to the state of 721. Therefore, the light emission effect illustrated below can be performed by controlling separately.

For example, the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIGS. 376 (a) and 376 (b)).
Alternatively, in the fourth state (see FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (b)), the central rotating member A7
The light emitting means A 715a disposed above the light source 24 is turned off, and the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724 is controlled to be turned on or blinking. A light effect that brightly illuminates A722 can be executed.

Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) disposed above the central rotating member A724 is turned on or blinked, and the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 is turned off. By controlling, it is possible to execute a light effect that brightly illuminates the central rotating member A724 and visually recognizes the shell A722 darkly.

Further, for example, light is irradiated from both directions in the left-right direction, but light is irradiated only from one side direction (upper side) in the vertical direction (reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side every half rotation). And a case where the light is reflected to the back side) can be used to execute a complicated light emission effect. For example, it is configured to emit blue light from the light emitting means A 715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724, and to emit red light from the light emitting means A 715a arranged above the central rotating member A 724, A player who is visually recognized from the front is switched between a situation where it is visually recognized with blue light and a situation where the blue light and the red light are mixed and seen every half rotation of the first rotating member A721. Can do.

In this case, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while executing the control to continuously turn on without blinking the light, the cycle in which the appearance of the light changes can be arbitrarily changed. .

An example of stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375 (b)), and the large-diameter gear LG1 disposed in the lower transmission path DL1. Since the detected piece A773 (see FIG. 374) is detected by the second detection sensor A753 at intervals of 90 degrees, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is rotated each time the first rotating member A721 rotates by 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. This determination is divided according to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721, the results are accumulated, and the accumulated result is separately determined, whereby the state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined.

That is, for example, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotational direction (positive direction) in which the shell A722 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, the detected piece A773 is the second detection sensor A75.
1 is added to the value of the cumulative counter every time it is detected at 3, while the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotational direction (reverse direction) in which the shell A722 rotates clockwise in a top view. Each time A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753, 1 is subtracted from the value of the cumulative counter.

If the value of the cumulative counter is a multiple of 0 or 4, it is in the initial state, (0 or 4
If it is (multiple of 0) +1, it is the second state, if it is (multiple of 0 or 4) +2, it is the fourth state, and if it is (multiple of 0 or 4) +3, it is determined that it is the sixth state. Can do.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, even when the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2 cannot be specified, the numerical value of the cumulative counter is determined and the stop control of the drive motor AMT2 is performed, so that the initial state, The first rotating member A72 in any of the second state, the fourth state, and the sixth state
1 can be stopped.

Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect so that the posture in which the first rotating member A721 stops has different meanings. For example, it can be used as a production means for notifying a difference in the degree of jackpot expectation or notifying time information (for example, the stop posture changes every 2 hours).

In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the to-be-detected piece A773 was formed in four places at equal intervals, it does not necessarily restrict to this. The arrangement of the detected pieces A773 may be non-uniformly spaced, may be formed at three places, at a plurality of five or more places, or may be formed at one place.

FIG. 380 (a) is a front view of the rendering unit A710, and FIG. 380 (b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 380 (c) is a top view of the rendering unit A710 when viewed in the direction of arrow D of 0 (a).
FIG. 380 is a front view of the rendering unit A 710, and FIG. 380 (d) is an arrow D in FIG. 380 (c).
It is a top view of effect unit A710 in the direction view.

FIG. 381 (a) is a front view of the rendering unit A710, and FIG. 381 (b) is a diagram of FIG.
FIG. 381 is a top view of the rendering unit A710 when viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG.
FIG. 38B is a front view of the rendering unit A 710, and FIG. 381 (d) shows an arrow D in FIG. 381 (c).
It is a top view of effect unit A710 in the direction view.

In FIGS. 380 and 381, the state of rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in time series. In other words, the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction that rotates counterclockwise as viewed from above, as shown in FIG.
FIGS. 381 (a) and 381 show the initial state of the first rotating member A721 in FIGS. 38 (a) and 380 (b), and the first state of the first rotating member A721 in FIGS. 380 (c) and 380 (d). (B
) Shows the second state of the first rotating member A721 in FIGS. 381 (c) and 381 (d).
The third state of the rotating member A721 is illustrated respectively.

When the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 as described above, and therefore the second rotating member A728 also performs the first rotation. Reverse rotation is performed at the same rotation angle as member A721.

That is, FIGS. 380 (a) and 380 (b) illustrate an initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-like extending portion A728a is disposed on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721.
c) and FIG. 380 (d), the rod-like extending portion A728a is 4 clockwise from the initial state as viewed from above.
A first state of the second rotating member A728 rotated by 5 degrees is shown in FIG. 381 (a) and FIG.
In (b), the rod-like extension portion A728a is rotated by 45 degrees clockwise from the first state as viewed from the top.
The second state of the rotating member A 728 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 381 (c) and 381 (d), the rod-like extending portion A 728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the second state in the top view.
The third state is illustrated.

Since the pair of rod-like extending portions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetric shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by further rotating 45 degrees clockwise from the third state as viewed from above. To do.

In FIG. 380 (b), FIG. 380 (d), FIG. 381 (b) and FIG. 381 (d), the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are schematic views (simple shape diagrams) for easy understanding. ) As an imaginary line.

Note that in FIGS. 380 (a), 380 (c), 381 (a), and 381 (c), the outer shape of the electric decoration board A715 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. 380 (b) and 380 (d) are illustrated. ), FIG. 381
In (b) and FIG. 381 (d), the virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A 728 moves along with the first rotating member A 728.
It passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the electric decoration board A715 (two boards arranged on the left and right) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A721. Therefore, similarly to 1st rotation member A721, the advancing aspect of the light irradiated from the light emission means A715a of electrical decoration board | substrate A715 is 2nd rotation member A7.
It can be changed corresponding to 28 rotations.

Here, unlike the shell part A722 of the first rotating member A721 formed from a resin material having low light transmission, the second rotating member A728 is formed from a light transmitting resin material. Instead of shielding light when passing through the optical axis, it acts to cause a change in the light refraction mode and the color of the light. In the present embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is formed of a blue resin material, the light that reaches the first rotating member A721 at a timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis is a color closer to blue. (Color mixed with blue).

In the present embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rod shape that extends in the direction along the rotation axis and bends along the circumferential direction of rotation, and the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724. It is configured not to overlap with all of the optical axes.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380 (d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the electric decoration board A 715 disposed on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A 724 and the second rotating member A 728 overlap, The optical axis of the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the electric decoration board A 715 and the second rotating member A 728 do not overlap, but on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 381 (d), the central rotating member A
The light axis A of the light emitting means A 715a arranged on the electric decoration board A 715 arranged on the lower left and right sides of the 724 overlaps with the second rotating member A 728, and the light emitting means A arranged on the other electric decoration board A 715.
The optical axis of 715a and the second rotating member A728 do not overlap. Note that FIG. 380 (b) and FIG.
In the state shown in 81 (b), the optical axis of any light emitting means A715a is the second rotating member A72.
8 is configured not to overlap.

Thereby, compared with the case where the optical axis of all the light emitting means A 715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724 and the second rotating member A 728 are switched between overlapping or not overlapping, the central rotating member A 724 is changed. It is possible to increase the types of light modes that arrive. That is, the second
A mode in which the light that has passed through the rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724, a mode in which only the light that reaches from the left and right upper side passes through the second rotating member A728, and a mode in which only the light that reaches from the lower left and right side is the second rotating member. A mode of passing through A728 can be increased.

In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off, or conversely, the second rotating member A728 and the optical axis. Is turned off by turning off the light emitting means A715a that overlaps the second rotating member A72.
The central rotating member A724 depends on whether the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the light is turned on.
You can change the appearance of. That is, the central rotating member A724 is replaced with the second rotating member A72.
It is possible to switch between emitting light in a mode in which eight colors are mixed or emitting light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A728.

In addition, since the direction of the optical axis overlapping the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the left and right upper side to the left and right lower side by the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, similarly, the second rotating member A7.
It is possible to switch the portion of the central rotating member A724 that emits light in an aspect in which 28 colors are mixed.

In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A7 in the top view.
28 is configured not to overlap the light passage recess A722a. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the central rotating member A724 does not depend on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, and does not pass through the second rotating member A728. A72
Head to 2a.

Therefore, for example, only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the central rotating member A724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715 disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724.
By configuring so that “a” is extinguished, it is possible to avoid the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 from being changed by the second rotating member A728.

If this is to be realized by the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724, the light emitting means A 715a is turned on at a timing when the second rotating member A 728 does not intersect the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715a, and the second rotating member A 728 is turned on. Although control (synchronization with rotation of 2nd rotation member A728) of turning off light emission means A715a at the timing which intersects with an optical axis is needed, in this embodiment, it is arranged above central rotation member A724. Such control can be made unnecessary by the action of the light emitting means A715a.

The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the player's field of view in a posture where the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is not facing the front and the rendering function of the central rotating member A724 is lowered. (Refer to FIG. 381 (a)), and the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 is configured to easily travel to the player. Thereby, the fall of the presentation function of rotary body A720 during rotation can be suppressed.

Here, since the rod-like extending portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetrical shape, the shape (outer shape) in the front view is switched at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, FIG.
The shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A 728 shown in FIG. 1 (a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A 728 rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a).

On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 rotating inside the second rotating member A728 does not become the same state at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state (see FIG. 377 (a)) shown in FIG. 381 (a), the sixth state (see FIG. 379 (a)) is obtained. In the present embodiment, as described above, the second rotating member A728 is replaced with the first rotating member A721.
In the posture (see FIG. 381 (a)) arranged before and after the first rotation member A721, the first rotation member A721 is partially hidden by the second rotation member A728.
It can be made difficult to determine whether 21 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, from the state where the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381 (a),
If the first rotating member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377 (a)) while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are rotated by 45 degrees synchronously, the first rotation is performed. The light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the member A721 is the central rotating member A.
The direction reflected by 724 is the direction facing the front side (see the arrow VL in FIG. 377 (d)), while the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized by the player, while the first rotating member A721.
Is in the sixth state (see FIG. 379 (a)), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 is the rear surface. Direction (see the arrow VL in FIG. 379 (d)), and the central rotating member A7
24 is visually recognized darkly by the player.

That is, changing the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (brightness of the central rotating member A724) while making the visible outer shape of the second rotating member A728 being displaced is equivalent.
It can be generated without changing the lighting mode of 715a. In this case,
When the second rotating member A728 stops in the state of FIG. 381 (a) by associating the difference between whether the central rotating member A724 looks bright or dark with, for example, the level of the big hit expectation degree of the special symbol lottery In addition, the expectation for the subsequent operation mode can be enhanced, and the attention to the rotating body A720 can be improved.

In this case, the second rotating member A728 is rotated 90 degrees in synchronization with the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a). The member front surface A724F of the central rotation member A724 rotates 90 degrees from the upward posture to the front-back posture. Accordingly, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728.
Until the rotation angle reaches 90 degrees, the direction of the light reflected through the central rotation member A724 gradually changes from the vertical direction to the front-rear direction (in synchronization with the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721). On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 reaches 90 degrees, the member front surface A724F faces the front-rear direction (the inclination with respect to the optical axis KJ from above disappears. ), The front-rear direction component of the direction of light reflected through the central rotating member A724 is close to 0, and the light reflection direction returns to the vertical direction.

Thus, in synchronization with the rotation of the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the central rotating member A724 is transmitted by the central rotating member A724. The component in the front-rear direction of the light when reflected is gradually increased. Accordingly, as the rotation time of the first rotation member A721 becomes longer, the first rotation member A
Since it becomes easy to determine whether the 721 is in the second state or the sixth state, the first rotating member A72 not only at the moment when the first rotating member A721 starts to rotate but also after the rotation.
High attention to 1 can be maintained.

In the present embodiment, from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a), the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in a direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise when viewed from above. The first rotating member A721 can be rotated as it is. In this case,
Since the light reflected by the central rotation member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotation member A728 and easily reaches the player's eyes, the central rotation member A724 is easily colored and visually recognized.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381 (a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways with an interval of 180 degrees, and is synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728 from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a). The first rotating member A721 can be rotated and the second rotating member A728 can be maintained from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a) while only the first rotating member A721 is rotated. As a way of showing the rotating member A724 to the player, a total of four ways of showing can be executed.

The light reflected through the central rotating member A724 not only functions to change the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also has a function of illuminating members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side through the central rotating member A724 (FIG. 377 (
In d), the light that illuminates the left channel (the channel configured in the left region with respect to the center of the left and right width of the game region) in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13. When light is reflected to the right front side through the central rotating member A724 (
In FIG. 376 (d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13, the right flow path (the flow path configured in the right area with respect to the center of the right and left width of the game area, mainly It can be used as light that illuminates brightly the flow path through which a sphere launched by right-handed shooting passes.

Further, for example, when light is reflected to the left rear side through the central rotating member A724 (FIG. 3).
78 (d)), it can be used as light for brightly illuminating the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B and the like disposed on the left side of the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the central rotating member A724 can be used. When the light is reflected to the right rear side through the first operation units A400C, A4 arranged on the right side of the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 379 (d)).
It can be used as light that brightly illuminates 00D and the like. Thus, the central rotating member A7
Since the light reflected via 24 can be switched in a direction toward different members, the player's line of sight can be guided to different members (locations) by switching the direction of the light.

Further, the second rotating member A728 is configured with a vertical length that can divide the inner region of the annular front cover A711 in front view into left and right (see FIG. 381 (a)). Thereby, in the state which 2nd rotation member A728 has stopped, for example, production unit A710
Is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 321) so that the display area of the third symbol display device 81 viewed through the inner region of the annular front cover A711 is divided into right and left. Can be partitioned. That is, the second rotating member A728 can be used not only as a member that performs an effect by a rotating operation, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when the second rotating member A728 is stopped.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. An effect of rotating the first rotating member A721 in a state where the display area of the display device is divided can be executed.

In the present embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in the counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from above, and is rotated in the reverse direction (first rotating member A7).
In the driving mode in which 21 is a clockwise rotation in a top view), the second rotation member A728 stops.

In other words, in one rotation direction, the first rotation member A721 has an action of arbitrarily changing the blinking cycle of the light reaching the central rotation member A724 by passing through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right. In the other rotation direction, in addition to the action of changing the blinking cycle, the second rotation member A728 passes through the optical axis arranged on the left and right, and the center rotation member A7
The light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching 24 can be changed.

Thus, the visibility of the light emission effect can be changed by changing the direction of the rotational drive. Since the frequency with which the second rotating member A 728 passes the optical axis depends on the rotational speed of the second rotating member A 728, variations in the change in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotating member A 724 are as follows. Depends on the resolution (number of switchable) of the rotational speed of the two-rotating member A728.

The rotational speed of the second rotating member A 728 naturally has an allowable limit, and this allowable limit defines the limit of variations in the light emission mode. In this embodiment, the rotational direction is made different. Since the second rotation member A728 is switched between operating and stopped, even if the rotation speed is the same, the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) reaching the center rotation member A724 can be changed by changing the rotation direction. Can be different.

Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 rotate only in one direction, or when the influence on the light does not change even if the rotating direction is different (for example, the second rotating member A7).
28, or only the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 is changed and the second rotating member A72 is changed.
8 is capable of doubling the change in the visibility of light reaching the central rotating member A724 as compared to the case of maintaining the rotation, etc., thereby increasing the variation in the appearance of the central rotating member A724. be able to.

The details of how the central rotating member A724 is visible will be described. As described above, the central rotating member A724 is kept in a posture in which the member front surface A724F faces the front side, while the member front surface A724.
The operation of flipping F upside down is repeated.

Therefore, when the central rotary member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven so that the central rotary member A724 rotates at a speed exceeding the speed (for example, 20 [rps]) at which an afterimage is generated, the central rotary member A724 is visually recognized as if the shape in which the top and bottom of the member front surface A724F are inverted is united in a front view. That is, in the present embodiment, the central rotating member A724 formed in a star shape having five corners is visually recognized as a star shape having ten corners.

In the present embodiment, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed in a vertically asymmetric shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 may be formed in a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape obtained by combining the vertically inverted shapes) and the shape of the member front surface A724F, it seems as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. Can be visually recognized.

In addition, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on one of the upper and lower sides with the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 as a boundary, and another shape can be recalled by inverting this shape or figure and combining them. You may do it.

For example, an equilateral triangular figure is drawn on the member front surface A724F in a mode in which one side overlaps the rotation shaft when viewed from the front above the rotation shaft of the central rotation member A724.
When 24 is rotated, the equilateral triangles are merged up and down so that a rhombus figure can be visually recognized, and the member front surface A724F is in a form in which the lower end portion overlaps the rotation shaft in front view above the rotation shaft of the central rotation member A724. By drawing the hiragana character “figure” (the figure) on the screen, when the center rotation member A724 is rotated, the inverted shape is merged up and down so that the character “figure” “3” is visually recognized. be able to. Thereby, an unexpected production can be executed.

In FIG. 382, an example of an effect using the second operation unit A700 will be described.
FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotator A720. Fig. 382
Then, the state where the production unit A710 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 321), that is, the third
A state in which the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720 are disposed on the front side of the symbol display device 81 is illustrated.

In FIG. 382, the second state of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (FIG. 381).
(See (a)), and in the region on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 and inside the annular front cover A711 (inside the circular opening), the third symbol display device 81 is shown. The image displayed by is shown.

That is, the third symbol display device 81 displays the second rotating member A728V on the rotating display. Thereby, even in a state where the second rotating member A728 is stopped, it is possible to make the player visually recognize as if the second rotating member A728 is rotating.

The means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, a transmissive liquid crystal may be arranged on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the state of the second rotating member A728 rotating with the transmissive liquid crystal may be displayed, or the front side or the back side of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed. The illumination plate may be arranged on the display plate, and the figure formed on the illumination plate may be combined with the image of the third symbol display device 81 so as to be visible as the second rotating member A728V on the display. You may make it display 2nd rotating member A728V on a display with the combination of the some display means containing a means.

In this state, when the light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the electric circuit board A715, the player expects a light effect mode in the rotating state of the second rotating member A728, but the stopped state of the second rotating member A728. Since the light effect can be executed in the mode, it is possible to execute a highly unexpected effect.

Further, this is not limited to the state in which the effect unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the extended position, and the same is true while the effect unit A710 is displaced up and down. For example, the rendering unit A710 is configured so that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be viewed through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 at the retracted position (FIG. 3).
20) On the other hand, in the overhanging position, the third symbol display device 8 passes through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720.
1 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 321).

That is, in response to the effect unit A710 moving upward toward the extended position, the annular front cover A711 is located on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728.
The display area of the third symbol display device 81 viewed through the inner area (inside the circular opening) gradually increases. By displaying the above-described second rotating member A728V on the display in the region of the third symbol display device 81 that is gradually recognized, the rendering unit A710 is moved up while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. To the player, the second rotation member A is given to the player.
It is possible to execute an effect that makes it feel that 728 has started rotating sometime (the effect can be performed using an optical illusion).

In this case, during the ascending operation of the rendering unit A710, the outer shape of the rotating body A720 that the player visually recognizes when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped. In the case where light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a, the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and the second rotating member A728 is stopped. The light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotator A720 to be visually recognized by the player can be changed. Thereby, a highly unexpected effect can be executed.

Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a has been described, but in the twenty-third embodiment, the member that passes through the optical axis KJ extends in the front-rear direction. The slide member A2729 moves in parallel. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 383 is a schematic top view illustrating the first rotating member A2721 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a back surface side position intersecting the virtual plane VS and a front side position not intersecting the virtual plane VS.

Therefore, even if the slide member A2729 is arranged at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the back side position, the intersection with the optical axis KJ can be eliminated by moving to the front side position, It is possible to change the way the light reaches the one rotation member A2721. Since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a slide movement in the front-rear direction, it is difficult for a player who visually recognizes the slide member A2729 from the front side to grasp that the slide member A2729 is moving.

That is, the aspect of the first rotating member A2721 when the LEDs constituting the light emitting means A715a are turned on while maintaining (remaining) the shape (outer shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729 in the front view. (How to shine) can be changed. Thereby, an unexpected production can be constituted without performing control which changes LED to light.

The material of the slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light transmissive resin material, may be formed from a light opaque resin material, or may be formed from a metal material.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, a pin-equipped gear A46
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer surface of the second arc wall portion A464 is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the transmission projection A463. However, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462 is connected to the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464. A plurality of outer-diameter projections A3 projecting in a semicircular cross section from the outside in the radial direction
464. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the length of the arcuate wall portion A464 in the circumferential direction into approximately five equal parts in the rear view.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, long holes (first long hole A422a, second long hole A422b, displacement side long hole A453, and transmission side long hole A45) formed to displace the first displacement member A440.
4) is formed in a length longer than that in the 22nd embodiment, so that the first displacement member A440 is configured to be displaceable beyond the displacement end on the overhang position side in the 22nd embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the deformed slide member A455 comes into contact with the arc wall portion A464 and is restricted from moving, whereby the first displacement member A440 stops at the extended position. When the pin-equipped gear A 3462 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the outer diameter protrusion A 3464 becomes the protruding plate part A 4.
The deformed slide member A455 is pushed upward from the state shown in FIG. 384 every time it comes into contact with 56a, and the long link A451 rotates accordingly, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the left from the extended position. It can be constituted as follows.

Thereby, in the timing (refer FIG. 360) which 2nd displacement member A490 displaces,
The first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced.

In FIG. 384, the size of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is shown at random, but is not limited thereto. For example, all of them may be provided with the same size, or outer shape protrusions A3464 of different sizes may be formed. In this case, it is not necessary that they are all different sizes.

In the present embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed so that the two closer to the transmission protrusion A463 are larger than the two farther from the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, the first displacement member A4
When the pin-equipped gear A 3462 is continuously rotated after the position 40 reaches the overhang position, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer shape projection A 3464 and the deformed slide member A 455 is less than the previous two times. 2 times becomes smaller. That is, the first displacement member A after reaching the overhang position
It is possible to produce so that the displacement of 440 (reciprocating minute displacement) is gradually settled.

From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so as to become smaller from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the arc wall part A464, or vice versa. Thereby, the effect that the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 gradually changes can be executed.

In addition, a recessed portion that is recessed radially inward from the arc wall portion A464 may be formed at a location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the deformed slide member A455 is attached to the coil spring SP1 in the lower left direction from the state shown in FIG. 384 every time the recessed portion is arranged to face the protruding plate portion A456a. The long link A451 is rotated with the force, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the right (retracted position side) from the extended position.

Further, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is set to the first operation unit A400, A400A, A.
400B, A400C, and A400D (see FIG. 319) may be different (shifted). Accordingly, the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C
, A400D when the operation timings of the drive motors AMT1 are synchronized (when the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start to operate at the same timing), the relationship with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 The timing at which the one displacement member A440 is displaced can be varied. That is, in a control mode in which the drive motors AMT1 are excited all at once,
The displacement (minute displacement) generated in the first displacement member A440 can be shifted with respect to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 with a deviation width defined in advance by the arrangement of the outer diameter protrusion A3464.

For example, each first operation unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A40
The timing at which each first displacement member A440 of 0D (see FIG. 319) reaches the overhang position (see FIG. 320) and the timing at which each second displacement member A490 reaches the overhang position (see FIG. 320) are the same. After the first displacement member A440 reaches the overhang position, the outer diameter protrusion A3
The generation timing of the displacement (minute displacement) generated in the first displacement member A440 in relation to 464,
Adjustment can be made so that the first operation unit A400 arranged at the lower left of the front view is sequentially generated clockwise.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight paying attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Further, as described above, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the mode of the light visually recognized through the long hole A412a (see FIG. 320), so that the player who visually recognizes the light can be changed. It is possible to easily guide the line of sight in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. For example, in the jackpot game (special game), an effect suggesting a right-handed run performed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like can be performed using the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440.

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A44.
Although the case where 0 displaces the back side of the electrical decoration board A416 has been described, the twenty-fifth embodiment includes a decorative member A4550 that is displaced toward the front side of the electrical decoration board A416. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 385 (a) shows FIG. 339 (first operation unit A4400 in the twenty-fifth embodiment).
FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line corresponding to the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG.
85 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A4400 along the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. 344 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 385 (a) and 385 (b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate portion A4551 that is displaceably disposed on the front side of the front cover A410, and a main body portion A411.
And a pair of guided portions A4552 guided by a long hole A4411b drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, and a pair of connecting arm portions A4553 formed outside the front cover A410. It is connected and fixed integrally.

Since the pair of guided portions A4552 are both inserted through the long hole A4411b,
The guided portion A4552 is only allowed to be displaced along the long hole A4411b. Thereby, the attitude | position change of decorative board part A4551 can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to sliding displacement in a direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extending direction of the long hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 includes a pair of projecting portions A4442g that project from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442 to the front side, and is the same as the configuration of the first displacement member A440 except for this.

In the present embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed so as to project inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can contact the protruding portion A4442g in the displacement direction. Thereby, the first displacement member A
The decorative member A4550 is interlocked with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the protruding portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 abut during the displacement of 4440.

The interlocking plate portion A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in posture while the guided plate portion A441 is displaced, and the guided portion A4552 is accompanied with the posture change.
The arrangement of the projecting portion A4442g is set so that the projecting portion A4442g can enter during this period.
As a result, the decorative member A455 is interlocked with the displacement of the first displacement member A4440 in both the forward and backward directions.
0 can be displaced in both forward and backward directions (FIG. 385 (a), both left and right directions).

According to this embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is disposed on the front side of the front cover A410, it is possible to configure a timing for hiding the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551.
Thereby, the light traveling through the through-hole A412 can be physically shielded.

Further, the first displacement member A4440 hidden behind the front cover A410 in the overhang position.
Unlike the case, the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged so as to be visible to the player without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 is configured such that the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 has a different shape in each first operation unit A4400, and these are configured so as to make a series of meanings in the retracted position. The hidden overhanging position can be used as a means for solving the problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize in a series of meanings, while also making it difficult to provide a sense of unity in the light emission mode.

That is, by similarly configuring the shape of the decorative plate portion A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 and the figure to be drawn, the first displacement member A4440 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the front cover A41.
The decorative plate portion A4551 can create a sense of unity of the first operation units A4440 in a state hidden by 0 (see FIG. 385 (b)).

Further, the light emitting means is previously placed at the same position on the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400 and visible through the through-hole A412 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is disposed at the extended position. A445b is disposed, and the light emitting means A445b is turned on all at once by the plurality of first operation units A4400 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is hidden as described above. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the long hole A4411b is formed using a gap region (region on the retreat position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by not forming the electrical decoration substrate A416. That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the electric decoration board A416 is designated as a decoration member A4550.
It can be effectively used as a space for arranging a structure for realizing the displacement.

The displaceable range of the decorative member A4550 is limited to the formation range of the long hole A4411b.
That is, not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decoration member A4550 can be displaced within a space created by limiting the formation range of the electric decoration board A416. Therefore, the number of members to be displaced can be increased in a range where the electrical decoration board A 416 is not formed (a corresponding range in front view).

In addition, before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, a change in posture (displacement in the front-rear direction) occurs in the first displacement member A4440. Therefore, a large displacement amount (displacement amount in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 can be ensured in a range where the electrical decoration board A416 is not formed (a corresponding range in front view).

In addition, the aspect of decoration member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, may be formed from a resin material having low light transmission, or an LED or an electrical decoration substrate may be disposed inside. Moreover, you may make it form the through-hole drilled in the decoration member A4550 in the front-back direction. Thereby, the light irradiated from electrical decoration board | substrate A416 through the through-hole can be made visible.

Next, a twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the twenty-second embodiment, the arcuate wall portion A464 is rotationally displaced along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion A463, so that the deformed slide member A45 is moved even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the deformed slide member A455.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 386 (a) and FIG. 386 (b) are front views of the displacement device A5000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 386 (a) illustrates a state in which the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is being displaced, and FIG. 386 (b) illustrates a state in which the displacement member A5001 is disposed at the end of displacement.

The displacement device A5000 is configured so as to be slidable along a straight line and is not shown.
A displacement member A5001 biased to the left by a coil spring or the like, and the displacement member A5
A transmission member A5002 to which a driving force for displacement along the displacement direction 001 is transmitted, a supported member A5003 that is rotatably supported at an end of the transmission member A5002, and a supported member A5003. Thin-walled portion A that extends from one end of each side to one side in the rotational direction and is connected to each other
5004, a roller member A5005 disposed at the end opposite to the end of the pivotally supported member A5003, and guide grooves A5006 and A5 through which the roller member A5005 is guided.
007.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 are first extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.
A region A5006 and a second region A5007 deviating from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 starting from the end of the first region A5006. In the present embodiment, the second region A
Although 5007 is configured in an arc shape, it may be any shape that deviates with respect to the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, and is not limited to an arc shape.

The operation of the displacement device 5000 will be described. While the roller member A5005 is guided through the first region A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed to the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386 (a)).

On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided in the second region A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386 (b)), the portion that contacts the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin portion A5004. In this state, the displacement member A5001 Can be controlled to the left.

Further, the outer shape of the thin portion A5004 is the second region A50 of the guide groove formed by the roller member A5005.
The position of the displacement member A5001 is unchanged in at least one section during the displacement of 07 (
By configuring the displacement member A5001 so that the contact position of the displacement member A5001 is unchanged in the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be restricted in the one section described above. .

Further, when the thin portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to be crushed toward the supported member A5003, the repulsive force of the deformed thin portion A5004 and the biasing force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. The displacement member A5001 can be maintained. Thereby, even after the contact between the pivot member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed.

Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. No. 22
In the embodiment, the case has been described in which the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening portion A475 so that the wiring HC is supported so as not to be detached from the fastening portion A475. However, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the support box portion A47 is supported.
A case will be described in which the wiring HC is supported so as to be relatively displaceable by the wiring guide member A 6560 supported so as to be displaceable to 0. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b) and 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 387 (a) shows a state where the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 388 shows a state where the second displacement member A490 is disposed at the extended position.
87 (b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 is disposed at an intermediate position (approximately 45 degrees rotation position) between the retracted position and the extended position. In FIG. 387 (a), FIG. 387 (b), and FIG. 388, the illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b) and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead, the wiring guide member A6560 is connected to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

The upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported by at least one of the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. In the present embodiment, the rear plate portion A480 is inserted in a through hole formed in the upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6506 with a support protrusion A6471d protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side of the support box portion A6470. By fixing, the wiring guide member A656
0 is pivotally supported by the support protrusion A6471d so as not to drop off.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in a long plate shape, and is fronted from the main body plate portion A6561 disposed opposite to the back surface of the support box portion A6470, the lower end portion of the main body plate portion A6561 and the middle abdomen. And a plurality of projecting portions A6562 projecting to the side (supporting box portion A6470 side).

The main body plate portion A6561 is disposed close to the rear plate portion A480. Thereby, main-body board part A6
Since the space on the front side of 561 can be increased, a large arrangement space for the wiring HC can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an extra load to the wiring HC.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing. In particular, in the present embodiment, the wiring HC is guided toward the back side (rear plate portion A480 side) by the protrusion A491d2 and the binding band KB, and a position between them (position sandwiched in the left-right direction). Since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed at the position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate portion A480, the main body plate portion A6561 can be disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480,
The rubbing between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, by setting the position where the wiring HC is pressed to the rear plate portion A480 side at a position overlapping the main body plate portion A6561, the main body plate portion A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It is possible to easily cause the situation to occur. In this case, since the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, wear of the wiring HC can be prevented and durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

A displacement mode of the wiring guide member A 6560 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 387 (a), the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387 (b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced, the board-side connector A493c has a small horizontal displacement and a large vertical displacement. It occurs in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring guide member A 6560 maintains the posture shown in FIG. 387 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 387 (b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC is caused by the upper protruding portion A.
6562. That is, the protruding portion A6562 can function as a portion that restricts the upper and lower displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, since the displacement of the board side connector A493c is mainly generated in the left-right direction, the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction, so that the wiring guide member A is pushed by the wiring HC.
6560 posture changes. In this case, the wiring HC has a sufficient margin with respect to the wiring guide member A.
Although it is wound around 6560, the lower limit of the displacement can be defined by the lower projection A6562. Accordingly, the wiring HC has excessive momentum and the pinion A517 and the reinforcing arm A5
It is possible to prevent entering (sagging down) the 18th side.

As described above, the portion where the wiring HC is wound (the protruding portion A656 on the front end side of the main body plate portion A6561).
By configuring the arrangement of 2) so that it can be changed, the design length of the wiring HC can be reduced compared to the case where the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is fixed (fastening portion A475, see FIG. 356 (a)). Can be shortened.

As a policy for changing the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound (the protruding portion A6562 on the front end side of the main body plate portion A6561), in the displacement from FIG. 387 (a) to FIG. 387 (b), The board-side connector A493c is displaced in a manner approaching the protruding portion A6552 (wiring H
C is displaced toward the projecting portion A6552), so that the portion wound around the projecting portion A6552 of the wiring HC is displaced toward the loose side, while the displacement from FIG. 387 (b) to FIG. Station A
The board-side connector A493c is displaced in a manner away from the 6552 (the wiring HC is the protruding portion A).
The portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 of the wiring HC is displaced to the tightening side. In the present embodiment, the wiring guide member A 6560 is shown in FIG.
) And FIG. 388 are configured to be displaceable when the state changes.

Therefore, when the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced toward the tightening side, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC toward the tightening side (
It can be said that the wiring HC is configured to be displaceable to the side where the wiring HC is expanded. As a result, it is possible to avoid an excessively small curvature radius of the portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 of the wiring HC, and it is possible to prevent excessive deformation (breaking, chipping, etc.) of the wiring HC. .

According to the present embodiment, the wiring guide member A 6560 disconnected from the second displacement member A 490.
Is displaced with the displacement of the wiring HC. Therefore, for example, it is a member that works in conjunction with the wiring guide member A 6560 and is arranged so that the player can see in any of the states of FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b), and 388 (for example, the third By providing a decorative member that can be extended to the symbol display device 81 side (right side of FIG. 387 (a)), it is possible to produce an effect with the decorative member that is displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wiring guide member A6560 are not completely interlocked, and the wiring guide member A6560 stops while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. Since the wiring guide member A 6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A 490 rotates further (because the timing of the displacement is shifted), it is as if the decorative member is the second displacement member A 490. It can be visually recognized as being displaced independently.

For convenience of explanation, the wiring HC is shown in a mode of winding once (a mode in which the wiring passes twice between the pair of projecting portions A6562), but is not limited thereto. For example, a plurality of protruding portions A
It may be configured such that the wiring HC passes only once (not wound) between 6562.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

Although the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, the torsion spring 3
15 can be made unnecessary.

Although the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the pushing end has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for production (for example, production of a “button that cannot be pushed” can be performed). it can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably disposed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to realize that the state of the “button that cannot be pushed” is not reached until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact can be changed, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. The degree to which the tilting device 310 is raised immediately after the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is changed can be changed. Therefore, more operating states of the tilting device 310 can be formed than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operation state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (the rising end can be sequentially switched). As a result, it is possible to produce effects in a complicated operation mode in which the rising position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing the deterioration of the drive motor 342 by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 that applies driving force to the tilting device 310.
Although the case where the operation timing is controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of the operation has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (
During the lowering operation), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation shaft, and immediately before the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end and starts to move upward. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started. In this case, while pushing the tilting device 310 repeatedly, the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward motion of the tilting device 310 can be increased. .

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the accommodating member 543 is attached to the tilting device 310.
0 may be fixed, and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside. Tilt device 31
In the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to 0, for example, the protruding leg portion 5424 is attached to the bottom plate portion 5321.
When the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 so that the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 is obtained. The weight member 5412 may be configured to switch whether or not it can contact the housing member 5430.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when operating the tilting device 310, the flexible member 5420 is operated by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher. The deformation amount of the weight member 5412 can be increased to form a state in which the weight member 5412 is in contact with the housing member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed down to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at a high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. The variation of the production can be increased.

For example, if the player is to operate the tilting device 310, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays “Press the button.” Or the like, but “Press the button. By displaying such as “Large chance”, it is possible to give the player an effect of specifying how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by determining whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method, the vibration is transmitted to the player.
It is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate the button (tilting device 310) by the specified pressing method, and to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Note that the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be reversed from the magnitude of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the deformation amount of the flexible member 5420 may be increased, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be in contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
Thereby, it can suppress that a player pushes in and operates the tilting device 310 by force, and the failure which generate | occur | produces by pushing the tilting device 310 in force can be prevented.

In the fifth embodiment, the case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 can be brought into contact with the housing member 5430 in a state where the tilting device 310 is not pushed,
The weight member 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot be brought into contact with the housing member 5430 on the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the moving end. In this case, the tilting device 31
While 0 is not operated, vibration can be transmitted to the player and the production can be lively,
The player can change the direction of the appearance in such a way that the vibration is stopped when the push is pressed.
Produce a sense of premiere that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode, except for the surrounding players. Can do.

As a variation of the production, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 cannot be brought into contact with each other, and the weight member 5
Although it is desired to generate both the case where 412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so as to be able to contact each other continuously, this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the disc cam 5344 is deformed by its axis falling, so that the disc cam 53 is deformed.
Although the case where the frictional force is generated by the contact between 44 and the release member 346 has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is drilled partially extends in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a larger frictional force is generated between the disk cam 5344 and the disk cam 5344 than when the disk cam 5344 contacts the operable release member 346. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which both the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to contact the front frame 14, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only the upper or lower panel support device 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, a portion of the multifunction cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not contact the board support device 600 disposed in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, the game board 13
Although the case where the up-and-down position does not change has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end portion thereof is the board surface support device 60 in the released state.
You may comprise so that it may arrange | position below the upper surface of 0 back side extended board 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is put on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extending plate 621c, and the game board is in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Accordingly, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of left and right bending. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
Just behind 3, it is preferable that a long path is formed in the front and rear because the discharge of the sphere becomes smooth. In addition, since the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by using a path that bends back and forth, the firing path and the foul ball passage portion 145 are prevented from interfering with each other. Can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example,
A position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is visually recognized lightly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not need to bend vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

Although the case where the path | route bent up and down was formed by the channel | path formation ribs 467 and 487 was demonstrated in the said 8th Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of top, bottom, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi are the back side wall portion 461H.
The speaker connection line 453 may be separated by about the diameter in the thickness direction. in this case,
Since the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched and sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the load in the direction of being pulled out of the speaker assembly 450 is exerted on the speaker connection line 453 by the sandwiching resistance. Even if it is connected, the speaker connection line 4
53 can be prevented from being detached from the speaker 451.

In addition, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the range of the projecting length corresponding to the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464, and more than that. In the length range, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, the range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the front end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber, and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the base body side 461B and the intermediate body part 461 are expanded by extending the width in the front-rear direction of the intermediate body part 461M to be equal to the base body part 461B and the distal body part 461T.
A large speaker room may be configured jointly with M and the front end side main body 461T.

Further, the base end side main body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the distal end side main body portion 461T. However, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the same volume may be used. Speaker 45
The arrangement of 1 is not limited to the left and right end portions, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be a position between the left and right end portions and the center in the left and right direction.

In the said 8th Embodiment, each rib part 467a-4 which comprises the channel | path formation rib 467,487.
67e, 487a to 487e, adjacent rib portions are open in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the base end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T, the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491). Although the case where they do not overlap with each other in the direction intersecting with the direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise so that adjacent rib parts (for example, rib part 467d and rib part 467c) may overlap in the left-right direction view. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, the front recessed portion 47 is provided.
By inserting a thin metal wire such as a piano wire from the opening formed by the 1 and the rear recessed portion 491, making it difficult to perform a fraudulent act of intruding the tip into the game area, and prolonging the time required for the fraudulent action, It is possible to suppress fraud. In addition, as suppression of fraudulent acts here, fraudulent acts themselves are suppressed, and fraud is gained by fraud (successful fraudulent acts).
The suppression of this is exemplified.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is connected to the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830.
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 may be engaged with each other. in this case,
Since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the collecting operation. it can. Thereby, the sliding operation of the petal 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and it is possible to improve the effect.

The loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a structure that expands and contracts with the rotation of the rotating plate 830 may be used, or a structure that rotates on a shaft different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830 may be used.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the driving side arm member 910 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940 are connected, so that the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing regulating unit 159 when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing regulating unit 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). (The right side of the board 13 is tilted to the front side), and the gaming board 13 arranged to face the operation unit rear member 155.
Since this part is also displaced to the front side, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 can be made to interfere with each other. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the board support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. 6
Whether or not 00 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation board back member 155 and the game board 13 that are arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board that is arranged above the inner frame 12 When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. Thereby, since the function which determines the state of the board | substrate surface support apparatus 600 installed in the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunction cover member 171, the freedom degree of design of the multifunction cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multi-function cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not contact the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600 (
It may be configured to be chamfered). In this case, the multi-function cover member 171 formed of synthetic resin collides with the metal board surface support device 600, whereby the multi-function cover member 171.
Therefore, the multifunction cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light applied to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is disposed on the right end and the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, it is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side and a case where the other surface is disposed on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate around a certain axis), it is possible to switch the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86. Further, the mode of light irradiated on the center frame 86 and the center frame 86
The production can be diversified by switching the correspondence with the moving accessory that projects inwardly.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LED 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 is caused to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 has a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and the other surface is Consider switching between the case where it is arranged on the front side. Inner cover member 52
When the 0-side surface faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory disposed opposite to the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the position closer to the end) emits light, while the outer cover member 560 side is illuminated. When the surface faces the moving agent side, the moving agent that is disposed so as to face the wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider range than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, the light emission location of the mobile accessory can be switched by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light.

In this case, for example, the production effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emission location. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving agent, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side changes on the moving agent side, while the surface changes on the outer cover member 560 side while shrinking and changing so as to fit in the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 The moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so that it expands (extends) in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500 at the timing of facing. Thereby, the change which changes the location which light-emits according to operation | movement of a moving accessory can be implement | achieved by switching the attitude | position of the right panel unit 500, making the change of LED512a which controls light emission unnecessary.

In the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the luminance is increased, the light amount is increased, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, a light emission target (liquid crystal or a moving accessory)
The light emission mode can be changed.

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed to the moving accessory or liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving accessory or liquid crystal). In this case, the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), so that a moving object or liquid crystal has a beam shape (
The light can be emitted in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving agent or the liquid crystal while irradiating light in a narrow width state. As a result, only the details of the mobile agent and the liquid crystal can be emitted, and a wide range of light can be emitted from positions away from the mobile agent and the liquid crystal.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 are provided.
Although the case where the yarn Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the above is described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as a configuration in which the sheet metal member is partially broken due to a load from the yarn Y8, the configuration is so weak that the folded portion falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position that passes when the folded portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and control is performed so as to forcibly stop the launch of the ball. It is possible to minimize the profits (losses incurred by the gaming machine hall) that can be obtained by those who perform cheating.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-like hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be disposed to make a resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion of the both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T,
You may form the recessed part of the grade which can enter the inclined surface 2803T. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance due to the inclined surface 2803T entering the recessed portion.

In the sixteenth embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the light traveling direction is set to the direction for collecting light or the direction for spreading light. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 depends on each region CCVIb.
Since all of the CCVIe are inclined upward, the light can be easily advanced toward the height of the line of sight of the person who is walking in order to select the aircraft to be played. As a result, the customer collection effect of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, regions CCVIc and CCV that are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. In this case, since the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player who is playing the pachinko 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined in the upward direction, the machine body to be played is selected. The light can be easily advanced toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking on the other hand, while the light traveling to the player side and the light emitted to the inner lens member 530 tilts downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to produce an effect in which the sphere stored in the upper plate 17 is illuminated with light to make the sphere look gorgeous. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in the vicinity of the left and right centers has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position may be changed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

Further, both a device formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and a device formed near the left and right center may be provided. That is, the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 corresponding to the operation load of the operation device 10300, and the problem with the front frame 10014 alone (
The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately to cope with ease of holding, durability, and the like.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable). It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) is acceptable. For example, an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound may be used, a vibration device that is configured so as not to be operated by the player and that produces a vibration effect, an electric circuit board that performs a light emission effect, or a board box It may be a thing that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a triangular or circular concave and convex portion may be formed in a top view. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount directed within the operation load of the operation device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. May be.

Moreover, even if it is the same groove shape, a several groove | channel may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while narrowing the width of the grooves, the same effect as in the case where one wide groove is formed with respect to reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300 can be obtained. Can do. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove is not necessarily along the front-rear direction.
It may be formed radially in top view.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 protrudes below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 so that it can be used as a finger rest when carrying the front frame 10014. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed longer in the vertical direction than the operator's finger carrying the front frame 10014. In this case, the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 64.
Since it is possible to put a finger in the gap between the front frame 14 (which can be used as a finger hook), the front frame 10014 can be easily carried.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the resin member 6427 is disposed below the operation device 10300 and the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 is reduced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a member (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) that generates an elastic urging force may be used, or a device for damping vibration such as a damper may be used.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not flexible or flexible, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the operation device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate unit 6400.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor has been described, but various aspects of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, a load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 from a rotating gear rotated by a drive motor by a simple gear mechanism load transmission, or a mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) that does not depend on the gear mechanism is interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the lever member 1 may be transmitted via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b.
By transmitting the load to 0340, it may be formed so that it can idle when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction orthogonal to the plane on which the operation device 10300 is subjected to an operation load. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when an operation part that does not move on the plane is provided (for example, when there is an operation part that pushes in a left-right oblique direction), the balance (average) of the operation direction of each operation part The direction to be found (for example, the intermediate angle direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the operation part with a high frequency of operation instructions is targeted (ignoring the operation part with rare operation instructions). The direction may be set. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the fastening loosening by the load at the time of operation can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are combined by fastening has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be combined with an adhesive, or may be combined by fitting with a matching shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the direction in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have high rigidity (the direction along the top and bottom) and the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 are along, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 may be the left-right direction. In this case, the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the generation of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, so that the design around the operation device 10300 can be dynamically changed when the vibration occurs. it can. Further, the mode of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, a linear motion type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof may be used.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed of a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, the left front cover 1 is configured by irradiating the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device.
As the shape of the 0321 and the right front cover 10322 changes, it is possible to produce an effect so as to change the appearance of light visually recognized via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which bending is easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 by forming the left and right muscle portions D24a with different inclinations, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by making the inclination angle of the left and right muscle parts D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity of the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle parts D24a and the direction in which the rigidity becomes weaker with respect to that direction. The difference can be increased.

In this case, for example, the left and right front covers 10321 and the right front are caused by the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is disposed in the upward position by setting the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a along the direction Y17a. While suppressing the bending of the cover 10322, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is disposed in the downward position is increased with respect to the bending. be able to. That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1 generated by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 due to the change in the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.
The degree of bending of 0322 can be varied.

Conversely, the formation direction of the left and right stripes D24a may be a direction along the direction Y17b.
In this case, when the swing operation member 10310 is disposed in the downward position, the vibration device 1036
6 suppresses the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration 6, while the left front due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is disposed in the upward position with respect to the bending. Cover 10321 and right front cover 103
The bending of 22 can be increased. That is, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be changed by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be detached from the inner case member 10330 and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1 are provided there.
A configuration in which 0322 is assembled may be used. In this case, when assembled to the inner case member 10330, it can be easily assembled by bending the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the displacement suppression effect by interference with the protrusion interference part 6805a and the inner edge part Rm1 can be made effective.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-like projecting portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 is in contact with the plate-like support portion 6426 in the upper and lower directions is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, and the fastening screw extends above the plate-like support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. You may comprise so that it may penetrate in the penetration hole formed in a part. In this case, the plate-like support part 642
The V-shaped design member 645 is used as a basis for the displacement not only during the upward displacement of 6 but also during the downward displacement.
0 can be transmitted, and the load can be distributed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 has covers 10321 and 103 into which the dimension of the gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b is inserted.
Although the case where it is formed with a thickness that can be fitted (a dimension relationship with almost no gap) with respect to the thickness dimension of 22 has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the thickness of the inserted cover 10321, 10322 may be shorter than the dimension of the gap (may be configured in a dimensional relationship in which a gap between members is formed during assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (the displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, the contact (collision) between the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 is prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in a flat plate shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the opposing plate portion 6 of the partition member 6560 is formed with a bowl-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge of the flange portion 6582.
561 may be formed in a shape that meshes with the shape, and may be fitted to each other during assembly. In this case, the partition member 65 is in a state where the partition member 6560 is positioned at the assembly position.
60 can be prevented from separating from the back support member 6580 to the front side.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the opposite side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in a cross-sectional view, but the point is that the interval increases toward the front side. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one side surface of both side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed in a curved shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the transparent covering member 654 formed from a colorless and transparent resin material.
By allowing the player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of 8 to visually recognize the color of the milky white member 6541 and the partitioning member 6560 arranged behind the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a, Although the case where the lower edge of the light receiving portion 6546 is configured to be visually recognized as a series of regions has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a may be formed in milky white in advance by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with the fastening screw in the fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the front side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the back side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set depending on the placement space required by the parts placed near the fastening position and the selection of the side on which displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the configuration in which the compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 in accordance with the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured to be driven in such a manner that its front-rear width can be changed, and the degree of compressive force that can be generated with the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 may be changed.

That is, if the front and rear widths of the partition member 6560 are shortened in such a manner that the rear side edge of the partition member 6560 is displaced to the front side, even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 A gap can still be generated between them, and a compressive force can be hardly generated. Since the compression force is less likely to be generated, the degree of holding the electric decoration board 6570 can be lowered. Therefore, the degree of displacement of the electric decoration board 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 is similarly deformed.

In other words, by controlling the front-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the electric decoration board 6570 in a situation where the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 can occur can be changed. Similarly, to the front side of the electric decoration board 6570 The appearance of the irradiated light can be changed.

Note that the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is shortened during normal times (a space between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is left), and the front-rear width is widened by drive control so that the partition member 6560 and the back support are supported. You may comprise so that it may be changed to the condition where a compressive force may arise between the members 6580.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that are supported by sandwiching the electrical decoration board 6570 have been described as being stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the electric decoration board 6570 is the back support member 6.
It may be arranged below 580, and the electric decoration board 6570 is a partition member 6560 (acoustic device 6).
Member detachable from 610), or the electric decoration board 6570 may be the partition member 6.
The light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 inserted through 560 may be inserted (fixed). In any case, it is possible to suppress vibration from the acoustic device 6610 being transmitted to the electrical decoration board 6570.

The back support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 disposed on the back side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is the front frame 1.
You may make it fix to 0014. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other.
In the closed state of 014, it is possible to easily replace the electrical decoration substrate 6570 sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 or to return the positional deviation.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the fastening screw is loosened by arranging the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 so as to face the head of the fastening screw and transmitting vibrations and generating abnormal noise when the fastening screw is loosened. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the light travels near the head of the fastening screw and the fastening screw is loosened, the shadow of the fastening screw may be viewed from the front side. In this case, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw by checking the presence or absence of a shadow, so in a noisy environment, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw was found compared to when grasping with abnormal noise. Can be made easier.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case in which the fastening direction of the fastening screw is set to be a direction inclined up and down with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it is good also as a direction which inclines to the left and right with respect to the front-back direction, and the location which inclines up and down or right and left may be mixed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 are formed from a shape extending linearly in a front view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed in a shape extending in a curve, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the side surface of the long rib 6734 is a smooth surface, and the case where light from the side surface is prevented from diffusing has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the long rib 6734 to prevent light leakage from the side surface. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in energy of light traveling to the fin 6735. Further, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light on the front side edge can be emphasized, and if a part of the side surface is covered (for example, using a light-shielding tape with a polka dot hole), Since the player can visually recognize the light according to the shape of the light shielding tape, the effect of light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

In the seventeenth embodiment, in the lateral effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010, the case where the long rib 6734 is not extended to the back side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, although the long rib 6734 extends to the back side, it may be formed so as not to be coupled to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Even in this case, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, light traveling in the front-rear direction through the long rib 6734 is emitted from the front side end of the fin 6735, thereby improving the light effect in the front view of the fin 6735. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (notch or the like) for emitting at least a part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735 may be formed.

For example, as shown in the present embodiment, the side surface is inclined in such a manner that the thickness gradually decreases as the fin 6735 moves toward the front side, so that the light of the fin 6735 reaches the front end of the front side of the fin 6735. It may be configured such that light can be easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 by being configured to easily reach the side surface repeatedly.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the base member 6710 is small, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto.
For example, it may be fixed by nail fitting or meshing based on the shape relationship. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the light effect from being lowered due to the shadow of the fastening screw.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electric decoration substrate 18830 slides due to the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be disposed close to the back side of the coupling base member 18810, and the electric decoration board 18830 may be slid by vibration of the speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction (direction along the direction Y17a) of the operation device 10300 is different from the vibration direction (generally the front-rear direction) of the speaker box, the displacement mode of the electric decoration board 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating a sound with a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, a silent effect that allows the player to hear the sound while maintaining the state in which the player cannot hear the sound can be performed. can do. At this time, the operation device 103 is configured such that the vibration of the electric decoration board 18830 is transmitted to the operation device 10300.
A player touching 00 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. Accordingly, for example, by controlling so that the silent effect is executed when a situation change advantageous to the player occurs, interest in touching the operation device 10300 can be improved.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electric decoration substrate 18830 is supported so as to be floatable (slidable) in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may make it support the electrical decoration board | substrate 6570 of the upper production | presentation apparatus 6500 so that floating is possible. In this case, the rod member fixed to the front frame 10014 and supported by the rod member extending to the front side from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 may be supported in a floating manner, or the rod member fixed to the wall portion of the acoustic device 6610. It may be supported so that it can float. Further, the sliding direction is not limited to up and down, and may be left and right or oblique.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be arranged along any one of the vibration directions Y17a, or between the vibration directions Y17a (for example, intermediate) The reference line X19 may extend along the direction of the angle.

In addition, the reference line X1 is considered in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the operation frequency of the lens member 10317.
Nine directions may be set. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and the other directions, the frequency of occurrence of vibrations and operations in the first direction is extremely high, and vibrations in other directions. Or the operation frequency is low, the reference line X along the first direction
By setting 19, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321 a and the fastening portion 19322 a.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is configured not to be transmitted to the operation device 10300 side has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 21410 is also applied to the operation device 10300.
You may comprise so that a vibration may be transmitted to the same extent as the vibration transmission to. In this case, the vibration device 2
By 1500, a plurality of objects can be vibrated.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the case has been described in which the front portion of the overhanging portion De3 to which the protruding portion 21522 is pressed in accordance with the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is formed by a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. It is not a thing. For example, you may form the front part of overhang | projection part De3 by the plane which inclines up and down with respect to the front-back direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied to the vibration device 21500 from the overhanging portion De3 (the normal direction of the front portion of the overhanging portion De3) is a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A component in the direction (vertical direction) intersecting the front-rear direction can be added to the displacement at the time (particularly the displacement toward the front side). Accordingly, since the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction, in addition to the case where the eccentric weight 21512 and the covering cover member 21530 collide in the front-rear direction, the vertical direction (protruding portion) A mode of collision in a non-guide direction that intersects the guide direction of 21534 can be configured, and the mode of vibration can be complicated.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 is formed along the front-rear direction, which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction orthogonal to the rotational axis of the eccentric weight 21512). Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the protrusion 21534 may be formed along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, may be formed along a curved line, or may be formed along a line having an arbitrary shape. . Thereby, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is generated can be arbitrarily set.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened through the support hole 21428 of the lower dish forming member 21420 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 is slightly increased, and the support hole 214 is
You may comprise so that fastening force may not be applied to 28. FIG. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate as the vibration device 21500 vibrates. Therefore, the vibration effect by the vibration device 21500 can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the support plate portion A313 is not formed on the side where the notch A312a is formed in the rear case A310 and the end surface is disposed opposite to the base plate A60 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the cutout portion A312a is formed. In this case, while maintaining the rigidity in the state where the base plate A60 and the back case A310 are assembled, it is possible to maintain the effect that the boundary of light visually recognized through the base plate A60 of the game board A13 can be made ambiguous. it can.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rear case A310 is formed in a box shape with the front side opened is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, back case A3
10 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), and the outer edge is composed of a columnar portion extending from the back side bottom portion to the front side (no wall portion is formed). You may do it. In this case, it is possible to secure rigidity by fastening and fixing the rear case A310 to the third symbol display device 81 and other movable units (the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700).

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the portion adjacent to the game board A13 on the right side is formed in a linear shape instead of a plane, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, in the case where the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) of one of the left and right may be set lower than that of the other.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the metal plate member 75 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the metal plate is the outer edge member A7.
3 may be arranged on the inner side (the game area side). In this case, the metal plate is formed along the inwardly curved shape of the outer edge member A73, so that the function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 with respect to the metal plate, and the game area are provided. And a function of guiding a sphere that flows down. Further, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be provided in the gap.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the front protrusion A86f that can contact the game ball is projected from the back side to the front side of the game area, but is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, a flange portion that extends from the front end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 to the game area side may be provided, and a protrusion may project from the rear surface side to the rear surface side of the flange portion. In this case, even when the game ball flows down at a position closer to the front side of the game area, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the game ball can be efficiently decelerated.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the front surface of the electric decoration board A416 and the protruding piece A417i do not come into contact with each other and the gap is open in the state where the electric decoration board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board A416
The front piece and the protruding piece A417i may be in contact with each other, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) is interposed between the front face of the electric decoration board A416 and the protruding piece A417i. You may comprise so that a load can be transmitted from protrusion piece A417i to electrical decoration board | substrate A416. Thereby, electrical decoration board | substrate A416 can be supported stably.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second area AC2 is disposed closer to the third symbol display device 81 side in the area of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operation unit A400, and the plurality of first operation units A4.
The case has been described in which the third symbol display device 81 is surrounded by the second area AC2 of 00 from the upper side, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second region AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third symbol display device 81, or may be configured to be displaceable so that the second region AC2 reaches the front and rear of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured in any arrangement.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electric decoration board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an electrical decoration substrate and a diffusion plate on which light emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light to the front side may be disposed on the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420. Thereby, it can comprise so that a light emission means may be hidden from a player by arrangement | positioning of 1st displacement member A440.

Further, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the electric decoration board A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Even if comprised in this way, there can exist the same effect. In this case, you may comprise so that the electrical decoration board | substrate A445 may not be arrange | positioned by 1st displacement member A440. For example, one or a plurality of through holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440, and light may pass through the through holes. According to this, since the position of the through hole changes due to the different arrangement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position where the light emitted to the back side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is the electric decoration board A416 or the diffusion plate A41.
Although the case where one side of 5 is displaced (electric decoration board | substrate A416 is not cut off by front view) was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, it may be displaced so as to pass through (cut through) the electric decoration substrate A416 or the diffusion plate A415 in front view. The entire first displacement member A440 does not need to enter the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view, and a part of the first displacement member A440 does not reach the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view. May be.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electric decoration board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first displacement member A4
40 does not have to be provided with the electric decoration board A445. In this case, by arranging an electric decoration board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating light on the front side, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear cover part A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate part A442 are arranged. It can be configured such that the player can visually recognize the light that has passed therethrough.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall portion A464 of the gear A462 with the pin even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the gear A462 with the pin is separated from the deformed slide member A455 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the arc wall portion A464 is not formed, the transmission protrusion A463 is provided.
Is disposed at a position away from the deformed slide member A455, and the arc wall portion A464 is
The shutter member configured as a member separate from the pin-equipped gear A462 is projected to the position where the gear was supposed to be disposed, and even if the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by contacting the shutter member, good.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the plurality of guided protrusions A455c arranged on the deformed slide member A455 are arranged shifted in the direction (left and right) intersecting the direction A416x. It is not limited. For example, a plurality of guided protrusions A45
5c may be arranged on the same straight line parallel to the direction A416x or in the direction A4.
You may arrange | position by shifting in the direction which cross | intersects 16x back and forth. In any case, the posture of the deformed slide member A455 can be stabilized.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the length of the arc wall A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 from the transmission projection A463 is shortened (at the same time, the projecting plate A456a is lengthened so as not to interfere with the arc wall A464).
By reducing the angular width of the deformed slide member A455 restricted by the arc wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 is moved in synchronization with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position toward the extended position. It can be displaced from the overhang position to the retracted position side. At this time, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member are adjusted by adjusting the length of the arc wall portion A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is accommodated in the section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained. Interference with A490 can be avoided.

In this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side, does it abut against the transmission projection A463 or does it abut against the end of the arcuate wall portion A464 opposite to the transmission projection A463? Depends on the operation mode of the pinned gear A462, that is, the drive mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the drive speed of the drive motor AMT1 (which may be constant speed or variable speed) and the stop timing to be different, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side is The case where the deformed slide member A455 (the deformed transmitted portion A456) is in contact with the arc wall portion A464 and the case where the deformed slide member A455 is in contact with the transmitting projection A463 can be made different.

Here, the deformed slide member A455 (which transmits the driving force to the first displacement member A440)
Although it is assumed that the deformed transmitted portion A456) contacts at least one of the arc wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, arc wall part A
In the case where 464 and the transmission protrusion A463 are in a predetermined arrangement, the direction A is greater than either
A fixed wall portion that protrudes toward the deformed slide member A455 (an deformed transmitted portion A456) along 416x may be formed. In this case, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side, the deformed slide member A455 (the deformed transmitted portion A456) is the arc wall portion A46.
4, the case of contacting the transmission protrusion A 463, and the case of contacting the fixed wall portion 463.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is disposed on the outer side of the rotation shaft of the second displacement member A490 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the reinforcing arm A518
The rotating shaft may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may pass through the inside of the cylinder to reach the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can prevent the portion of the wiring HC disposed on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) via the cylinder.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a flexible member formed of a flexible material in the same shape as the fastening portion A475 may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Also, the number of flexible members need not be one, and may be plural. In this case, even if the wiring HC is excessively pulled and comes into contact with the flexible member, the load generated on the wiring HC can be reduced by the deformation of the flexible member.

The wiring HC may be supported not by the fastening portion A475 but by a simple columnar portion (a portion not used for fastening). In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar part and the rear plate part A480. Also, main body box part A471, rear plate part A480
Alternatively, a binding band that is loosely wound around a fixed portion separately formed on the wiring guide member A 6560 or the like may be used. In this case, since the displacement of the wiring HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed for the binding band, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced.

Further, the fastening portion A475 is not fixed and may be configured to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to this,
Various embodiments are illustrated.

Further, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may be generated in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490. For example, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering the player's eyes by causing the second displacement member A490 to move in the opposite direction as it approaches the overhang position.

The fastening portion A475 may be displaced by a method in which the fastening portion A475 is displaceably supported by the elongated hole, or the fastening portion A475 may be configured to be tiltable with the main body box portion A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, the rear plate portion A480 is preferably formed with a guide groove, a notch or an interlocking portion so as to allow displacement of the fastening portion A475 while maintaining a coupling state with the fastening portion A475.

Further, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be configured as a pair of support wall portions that are formed in a wall shape on both upper and lower sides of the wiring HC and restrict passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall portion.

In the twenty-second embodiment, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the back side, and the other end is disposed on the front side of the board-side connector A493c. Although the case where it is connected to the third connector A416e3 from the back side has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be disposed inward on the side surface of the back case A310. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the substrate by extending to the side surface of the back case A310, the length necessary for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In addition, for example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be disposed on the rear plate portion A480 disposed on the back side of the substrate-side connector A493c. In this case, the length necessary for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, it is configured so as to be recessed from the end face of the detected plate portion A455e that contacts the transmission protrusion A463 toward the opposing placement portion A456b, and a pin-equipped gear A462.
The rotation angle may be allowed to exceed the sixth angle. In this case, since the same phase member A465 can rotate from the fourth angle d14 beyond the allowable angle dd1, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction. It can be displaced to the overhang position, and further returned to the retracted position side. Thus, by switching the driving (excitation) length of the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position, and the arrangement is maintained and the tension is maintained from the retracted position. It can be switched between a mode in which it is further displaced back to the retracted position side after being displaced to the exit position.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 have been described as paths through which driving force is transmitted by gears, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a cam, a gear belt, or a linear slider may be used.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case has been described in which the electric decoration board A715 for irradiating light to the rotator A720 is formed from a flat member, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example,
You may comprise as a sheet-like board | substrate formed in a sheet form from a flexible material. in this case,
A substrate having a light emitting means for irradiating light to the rotator A720 can be easily arranged on the circumference surrounding the rotator A720.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotating body A720 is disposed at a position that is always visible from the player has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, rotating body A7
20 may be configured to be movable to an invisible position where the player cannot see. In this case, the first rotating member A721 is moved to the second rotating member A7 in a state where the rotating body A720 is disposed at the invisible position.
28 by rotating horizontally on the vertical axis (second rotating member A 728 is stopped), starting synchronous rotation in that state, and moving to a position where the player can visually recognize it while continuing the rotation, The relative relationship between the rotating first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 can be noted. As a result, the rotation of the rotating body A720 is continued in the case where the effect of associating information (for example, the jackpot expectation) useful for the player with the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 at the time of stopping is executed. The attention to the rotating body A720 can be improved.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 operate independently has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the production unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 can be tilted forward from the lower end,
The rendering unit A71 when the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400 is in the extended position.
You may comprise so that production unit A710 may change to an inclination posture by raising / lowering 0 and contacting each other and receiving a load. In this case, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the posture of the effect unit A 710 by arranging the second displacement member A 490. In addition, the structure which can tilt down production unit A710 is not limited at all. For example, the production unit A 710 and the lift unit may be coupled with a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the lift unit.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the shell A722 is made of an impermeable material, and the first rotating member A
In the initial state or the fourth state of 721, the case where the light irradiated toward the central rotating member A724 is shielded has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, shell A72
You may comprise so that 2 may have a light transmissive part. Thus, the first rotating member A721
Can be finely adjusted between the posture and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 meshed with the fixed gear SG intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape that extends linearly (the radius of curvature is equivalent to infinity), and the rotation shaft of the gear member to be engaged may be arranged in parallel with the fixed gear SG. . A first effect member in which the rotation shaft of the gear member to be engaged intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG;
A complex effect can be executed by combining the second effect member whose rotation axis of the gear member to be engaged is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first area AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed near the outside of the operation unit A300 has been described. However, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto.
For example, the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inside of the operation unit A300 and the second area AC2 is formed in the operation unit by forming the electric circuit board A416 in a C shape that is recessed from the outside to the inside in a front view. You may form in the position near the outer side of A300. In this case, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight to a position closer to the outside of the operation unit A300.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is irradiated with light from the left and right and from above has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, rotating body A72
An illumination board is arranged below 0, and light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board is conducted to the second support part A735 and supported by the second support part A735. May reach the second rotating member A728, and may be visually recognized by the player after conducting the second rotating member A728. In this case, unlike the second support portion A735, the first rotating member A721.
Since the first support portion A731 that supports the light does not easily transmit light, the second rotating member A728 can be illuminated without causing the first rotating member A721 to shine.

This assumes an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed to the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A7 that can be disposed between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a.
Since 28 transmits light, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is transmitted to the second rotating member A728.
It is difficult to control so that the first rotation member A721 is not reached. Therefore, by causing the second support portion A735 to conduct and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to execute an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first supporting portion A731 disposed inside the rotating shaft is supported by the second supporting portion A735 disposed outside the rotating shaft. Although the case where it arrange | positions inside the rotating shaft of A728 was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the first rotation member A721 is rotated so that the opposite side to the side supported by the first support portion A731 is extended to the outside of the rotation shaft, and the second rotation member A728 is covered from the outside of the rotation shaft from the extended end side. An extending portion may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inner side of the rotating shaft can be configured to turn around the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected effect can be executed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the central rotating member A724 is rotationally displaced, whereby the light emitting means A7.
Although the case where the area of the central rotating member A724 in the optical axis direction view of 15a changes has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the central rotating member A724 expands in a state where the posture does not change, or the moving body projects from the inside, whereby the light emitting means A715.
The area of the center rotation member A724 in the view of the optical axis direction a may be changed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the shell A722 interposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the predetermined member may be configured to advance and retreat by direct movement (sliding movement) between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a. Further, the light emitting means A715a may be arranged on the predetermined member.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed to the central rotating member A724 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the light emitting means A
The optical axis 715a may be configured to swing around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the central rotary member A724 and the shell A722 are driven by the same drive source has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, separate driving may be used, or the timing of driving with the same driving source and the timing of separate driving may be switched.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is configured not to overlap all the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the second rotation member A728 may be configured by a plate-like member formed so as to cover a plane passing through the rotation axis when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and may be configured to generate timing that overlaps all of the optical axes. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724, the influence of the central rotating member A724 on the orientation of the second rotating member A728 can be increased.

In the twenty-second embodiment, when the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is changed in posture by 180 degrees, the shape in the front view is different, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may form from the shape where the shape in the front view becomes the same when the posture is changed by 180 degrees. Thereby, it can be made impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in the shape of the shell portion A722.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting means A 715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ facing the virtual plane VS has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. In this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not have to pass through the rotation axis of the rotator A720.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, or the light-emitting unit A715 may be configured to be displaceable. Alternatively, the virtual plane VS may be changed. In any case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is turned on is changed while suppressing changes in the outer shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729 in the front view. be able to.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, a gear A3462 with a pin for the deformed slide member A455.
Although the case where a plurality of contact positions are arranged in the circumferential direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, since the projecting tip of the transmission protrusion A463 is formed to have a large diameter, the position where the transmission protrusion A463 contacts the deformed slide member A455 and the position where the outer shape protrusion A3464 contacts the deformed slide member A455. May be configured to be displaced in the front-rear direction.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment described above, a pin-equipped gear A3462 with respect to the deformed slide member A455.
A case has been described in which the plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 abut at the same position, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the longitudinal direction of the protruding plate portion A456a (direction A416x in rear view)
The wall portion is further extended along the longitudinal direction from the inner end (opposite side of the detected plate portion A455e), and the wall portion orthogonal to the side surface of the extended portion in the rear view is a gear with a pin. A346
You may be comprised so that it may extend to 2 sides.

In this case, the orthogonal wall portion is not in contact with the arc wall portion A464, and the outer diameter protrusion A
By arranging to abut against the 3464, the pin slidably restrains the deformed slide member A455 from being displaced in the direction intersecting the direction A416x when the orthogonal wall portion and the outer diameter protrusion A3464 are brought into contact with each other. A load in the rotational direction (a load in the braking direction) can be generated in the attached gear A 3462.

Furthermore, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the short direction at the end in the longitudinal direction (in an L shape), the deformed slide member A455 can be displaced in the direction intersecting the direction A416x, and the displacement The first displacement member A440 may be configured to be displaced in conjunction with the movement. In other words, the deformed slide member A455 pushed to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has the second guide hole A3.
By entering the portion extending in the short direction of 422b, the transmission protrusion A455b becomes the direction A41.
Displacement may be performed in a direction intersecting 6x, and the displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451.

In this case, when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the short direction of the second guide hole A422b, the second guide hole A422b and the guided protrusion A455c are moved in the direction A416x.
The displacement along the direction A416x of the odd-shaped slide member A455 can be regulated by engaging with. Thereby, even after the contact between the projecting plate portion A456a and the arc wall portion A464 is released, the displacement along the direction A416x of the deformed slide member A455 can be restricted.

The displacement generated in the first displacement member A440 when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the short direction of the second guide hole A422b is not limited at all. For example, a displacement along the direction A416x may be generated, or a displacement in a direction intersecting the direction A416x may be generated.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has been described as a semicircular shape, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a rectangular shape, a triangular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, or an arbitrary shape may be used. On the other hand, considering the durability, it is preferable that the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is configured to taper (the width does not increase) toward the outer diameter.

The same applies to the case where a recess is formed instead of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. In other words, the shape may be any shape, but taper toward the inner diameter (the width does not increase).
It is preferable to be configured as described above.

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetric with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis, or may be asymmetric. In this case, when configured in an asymmetric shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction.

For example, in the rear view of the outer shape protrusion A3464, the side surface on the extended distal end side of the arc wall portion A464 (the opposite side of the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arc wall portion A464) is the extended base end side. Compared to the side surface of the arcuate wall A464 (on the transmission protrusion A463 side along the circumference of the arcuate wall A464), the arcuate wall A46
You may comprise so that the angle with respect to the outer peripheral surface of 4 may become small.

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by contacting the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition of rotating the pin-equipped gear A3462 at a constant speed is the opposite side of the retracted position (exceeding the extended position) from the extended position. The speed when moving toward the retracted position can be made larger than the speed when moving toward the projecting side. That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each displacement direction.

As a case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the opposite side of the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is a protruding shape, the first displacement member A440 may be displaced beyond the protruding position to the opposite side of the retracted position. In the case where a recessed portion is formed instead of the outer shape protruding portion A3464, the first displacement member A440 is moved along with the slide of the deformed slide member A455 by the size of the recessed portion.
In this example, the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position as the deformed slide member A455 is pushed out and slid to the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 after the displacement to the retracted position side.

Further, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position side, the outer diameter protrusion A
If 3464 is a projecting shape, the outer diameter projecting portion A3 is displaced after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position as the deformed slide member A455 slides by the projecting dimension.
When the contact between the 464 and the deformed slide member A455 is released, the deformed slide member A45 is released.
The case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position (retracted position side) as the slide 5 moves is illustrated, and when the concave portion is formed instead of the outer shape protrusion A3464, the concave portion As the deformed slide member A455 is displaced by the size of the installation portion, the first displacement member A4 is displaced.
A case where 40 is displaced from the overhang position to the retracted position side is illustrated.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed closer to the rear plate portion A480 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, main body plate part A6561
May be disposed at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (position close to the support box portion A6470), and the protruding portion A6562 may be protruded toward the rear plate portion A480. Also, the main body plate A65
61 may be configured to be thin (for example, in the form of a sheet). In this case, a wide area where the wiring HC is displaced can be secured.

Moreover, although the case where main-body board part A6561 was formed from elongate shape was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may have a wide plate shape. In this case, since a member can be disposed between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC in a wide range, the possibility that the rubbing can be suppressed by the displacement of the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 is increased. can do.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the projecting portion A6562 is fixedly disposed on the main body plate portion A6561 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protruding portion A6562 is held so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the protruding portion A is received by a load received from the wiring HC.
The main body plate portion A6561A may be configured to rotate in accordance with the displacement of the 6562. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the protruding portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the long hole (groove) is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. In connection with it, you may make it form in the shape which rotationally displaces main-body board part A6561. In this case, since the arrangement of the wiring guide member A 6560 can be appropriately changed according to the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide member A 6560, the load generated between the wiring HC and the wiring guide member A 6560 Can be moderately reduced.

Moreover, although the case where main-body board part A6561 was pivotally supported rotatably was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this. For example, a slide movement may be used, or a movement that combines rotation and slide may be used.

In addition, although the case where the second displacement member A490 is reciprocally rotated and displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slid, or the second rotation member A490 may be displaced more than one rotation.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A6470 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the main body plate part A
6561 is arranged on the front side of the support box portion A6470, while a through-hole (guide hole extending along an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the main body plate portion A6561) guides the protruding portion A6562 to the support box portion A6470. May be formed so that the protruding portion A6562 protrudes toward the back side of the support box portion A6470 through the through long hole. In this case, the support box part A6470 and the rear plate part A480.
Compared to the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the two, a space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate portion A6561 can be made open. Accordingly, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the wiring HC is displaced, and to improve the design freedom of the main body plate portion A6561 (for example, from the gap size between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480). Can also be configured as a thick member).

<First control example>
Next, various control examples applicable to the pachinko machine according to each of the embodiments described above will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 389 to 478, a first control example in the pachinko machine of each of the above embodiments will be described. Note that some of the configurations used in the first control example are given different reference numerals to the same configurations as those in the above-described embodiments. This explains the invention of the first control example in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific configuration is the same as the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, an outline (specification) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. In the first control example, the pachinko machine 10 has a first area (V area) in which a game ball can enter a variable winning device 65 that can enter a ball in the case of a big win in a special symbol lottery. , A second device (non-V region) different from the first region, and a distribution device (V) that distributes the game balls flowing into the variable winning device 65 to either the first region or the second region For example). At least one game ball enters (passes) into the first area during the jackpot of 1 to give a special symbol probabilistic state after the jackpot is over, while If no game balls enter one area, the short time state of the normal symbol is given after the jackpot ends until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times at the maximum. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed, the game can be performed in the expectation that the game balls are distributed to the first area (V area) by the distribution device (V combination).

  The distribution device (V combination) is basically maintained in an arrangement that allows game balls to be distributed to the second area (arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and a predetermined round (for example, 5) In the round), the game ball is changed to an arrangement in which the game balls can be distributed to the first area only during a specific period (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round and 5 seconds after the 10 seconds have elapsed). . By entering the game ball into the specific prize opening 65a during this specific period, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the first area, and the game state after the jackpot ends will change the advantageous special symbols. You can transition to the state.

  In the first control example, an opening / closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the sorting device during a specific period in the fifth round (for example, when 5 seconds elapse from the start of the fifth round to 9.5 seconds). A jackpot type (probability jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened / closed in the opening / closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds at the time of elapse and distribution between the specific periods Open / close pattern that makes it impossible to reach the device (for example, open / close pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the fifth round until 4.5 seconds have passed) A jackpot type (normal jackpot) at which the (large opening) 65a is opened and closed is provided. In the former jackpot type (probability jackpot), the game ball is easily moved to the first area by the sorting device simply by aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot. Since the jackpots can be distributed, after the jackpot is over, the probability of the special symbol is almost changed. On the other hand, in the latter jackpot type (usually jackpot), even if the game balls are continuously aimed at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot, Since it is distributed to the second region, the probability variation state is not given (time-short state is given).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when the special symbol is changed to the probable change state, whether or not the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied, the special symbol lottery state is to be dropped. The lottery is executed. More specifically, when the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied in the probability variation state of the special symbol, first, the lottery (fall probability 1/500) of whether or not to fall to the low probability state of the special symbol is executed. When the corresponding lottery result is reached, the jackpot lottery is executed with the lottery probability (1/250) in the low probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if it is not the lottery result corresponding to the fall, the high probability state of the special symbol The lottery lottery is executed with a lottery probability (1/125). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, regardless of whether it is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot, the normal symbol is in a short-time state until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the jackpot. It is set as the structure maintained by. In other words, if the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot is over, the lottery result corresponding to the fall falls before the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Instead, after the jackpot ends, the normal state of the normal symbol continues until the 100th special symbol lottery condition is satisfied. For this reason, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the operations other than the jackpot probability are almost the same, so is the special symbol low probability state or the special symbol probable state? Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, if the previous jackpot is a normal jackpot and the special symbol has a low probability since the end of the jackpot, or the previous jackpot was a probable jackpot, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times Even if it falls to a low probability state in the meantime, the player will continue to have a sense of expectation that the special symbol is in a probable state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. You can keep it. Therefore, motivation for the player's game can be maintained.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 302 and the like, the second entrance (second winning entrance) 640 flows down the channel provided on the right side in front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81. It is provided at a position where a ball can enter (a position where a game ball flowing down a flow path provided on the left side of the front view cannot enter (is difficult to enter)). In other words, the probability change state in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set, in which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is easily opened (that is, the game ball easily enters the second entrance 640) and In the short-time state, the game ball enters the second entrance 640 at a high rate (for example, 1 in 3 balls) by firing the game ball toward the right flow path when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game can be performed efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is difficult to open (that is, the game ball enters the second entrance 640). The position where the game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the 3rd symbol display device 81 can enter (the game that has flowed down the flow path provided on the right side of the front view) A game is played by a game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at a first entrance (first winning entrance) 64 provided at a position where the ball cannot enter (is difficult). Hereinafter, for simplification of description, launching a game ball toward the flow path on the left side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 is referred to as “left-handed”, and toward the flow path on the right side of the front view. Launching a game ball is called “right-handed”. In addition, the special symbol lottery executed based on the game ball entering the first entrance (first winning entrance) 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery (the special drawing 1 lottery). The special symbol lottery executed based on the game ball entering the second entrance (second winning entrance) 640 is referred to as the second special symbol lottery (the special drawing 2 lottery). ).

  Next, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this control example is demonstrated with reference to FIG. FIG. 389 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example, and FIG. 389 (b) is a third diagram in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the display content of the symbol display apparatus 81 typically. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 404), for example, the left, middle and right three display devices. A symbol row is displayed.

  The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “1” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as shields, swords, cloaks, etc. almost full front of the wooden box. In the lower right side, even numbers are small in green and added to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 404) described later is a big hit (big hit A to E), the same main symbol is displayed. A uniform display is performed, and a jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  Furthermore, if the winning jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the same main symbol with an even number will always be displayed, while if it is a promising jackpot, the same main symbol with an even number will be displayed. Either a variation display that aligns or a variation display that aligns the same main symbols with odd numbers is executed. That is, by executing the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are arranged, not only the big hit but also the probability change state after the big hit ends. In the first control example, when the probability variation is a big hit, the rate at which the variable display with the same main symbols with odd numbers is executed is set to a very low probability (for example, a rate of 1%). Yes. Thereby, the case where it can grasp | ascertain that it is a probable variation jackpot from the type of symbol arranged when winning the jackpot can be made rare. As described above, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot is completed, the normal symbol is kept in the short time state (distinguishing whether or not the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a is in a probable variation state). Since it is difficult to determine whether or not it is a promising jackpot from the types of main symbols that were arranged at the time of winning the jackpot, the lottery of special symbols will end 100 times after the jackpot ends During this period, it is possible to more frequently generate a situation in which it is not known whether the state is a probability variation state or a time reduction state. Therefore, the player's response to the fact that the player has been in a probable state from the end of the big win until the end of the 100 special symbol lotteries, whether the jackpot is a big win or a normal jackpot. Expectation can be sustained.

  As shown in FIG. 389 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the 3rd symbol when the 3rd symbol is variably displayed or when the 3rd symbol is stopped. An area Dm, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, a small area Ds2 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, an interrupt described later) During the execution of the continuous striking effect), it is constituted by a small region Ds3 for reducing and displaying the variation effect of the third symbol.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved spheres of the first special symbol). The small area Ds2 is an area that displays the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not yet been changed among the spheres that have entered the second entrance 640 (the number of reserved spheres in the second special symbol). Ds3 is an area in which the variation effect is reduced and displayed when a display effect different from the variation effect is executed in the main display area. By reducing and displaying the variation effect, it is possible to prevent the display effect different from the variation effect from being obstructed by the third symbol and becoming difficult to see.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 389 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the display indicating the expected degree of jackpot in the background of the third symbol Production and the like are executed.

  When a game ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display devices 37A and 37B), the number of times that the ball has entered is up to four times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37A and also in the small area Ds1. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the number of entered balls is held up to a maximum of 4, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37B and the small area Ds2 Also shown in In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number of the first special symbol, and in the small area Ds2, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number of the second special symbol. Is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small region Ds1 or the small region Ds2, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, Indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Moreover, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. FIG. 389 (b) illustrates a case where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero.

  In the first control example, the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 390 to FIG. 403, various entertainment effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 390 to FIG. 393, in the first control example, it is executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the gaming state (time-short state or probability changing state) in which the normal symbol time-short state is set. The display effect will be described. As described above, in the first control example, after the jackpot, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the short-time state and the probable state. It is composed. That is, even if the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the short-time state or the probability variation state, the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times after the last jackpot is finished unless the jackpot is won. In the meantime, it is configured to be maintained in a short time state of normal symbols. The normal symbol time-saving state is maintained even if the special symbol falls from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol until 100 times of execution, so the game set at the end of the jackpot Not only the state but also the timing when the special symbol falls from the probability variation state to the low probability state can be made difficult for the player to identify.

  However, if the state of the special symbol of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is a special symbol probable state or a low probability state) is configured to be completely indistinguishable, a game state in which a short time state of a normal symbol is set However, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous while the game continues, and that the player's interest in games will not be sufficiently improved. Therefore, the first control example is configured such that the player can predict the possibility of the probability variation state to some extent by the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, each time a special symbol variation display is executed, one back mode is selected from among three types of back modes that indicate the expected degree of probability change state, taking into account the gaming state at the time of execution. The configuration is set. Thereby, since the game nature which predicts the state of a special symbol from the mode of back mode is realizable, the interest to a player's game can be raised.

  First, with reference to FIG. 390 (a), a display mode (rear mode) with a relatively low expectation that the current state is the probability variation state will be described. As shown in FIG. 390 (a), when the rear mode (cave search mode) with a relatively low expectation level is set, a character 801 imitating an adventurer possesses a sword and a torch. A display mode for searching the cave is displayed. In addition, the number of lotteries of the remaining special symbols until the number of lottery times that the normal symbol time-saving state may end is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the normal symbol time-saving state). The display area 802 having a horizontally long rectangular shape for displaying the number of times of guarantee) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 390 (a), the case where 90 times is displayed as the guaranteed number of times is illustrated. That is, the state after the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times after the jackpot is finished is illustrated. Further, a horizontally elongated display area 803 is displayed below the front view of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Inside the display area 803, a horizontally elongated substantially oval right-handed image in which the characters “right-handed” are displayed is displayed on the left and right, and between these right-handed images, “cave search mode” is displayed. Is displayed. According to these display modes, the short time state of the normal symbol continues until at least 90 more special symbol lotteries are executed (the short time state may end when the 90 lotteries are finished), In addition, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the game should be performed by right-handed. In addition, compared to the temple search mode (see FIG. 390 (b)) described later and the super temple search mode (see FIG. 391), the display content is so plain that the player can intuitively change the probability. It can be understood that the possibility that the state continues is relatively low.

  FIG. 390 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the rear mode (temple search mode) with a high expectation degree in which the current state is a probabilistic state is set compared to the cave search mode. When the temple search mode is set, a display mode in which the character 801 imitating an adventurer searches the inside of the temple is displayed, and the characters between the right-handed images inside the display area 803 are “temple search mode”. Changed to The display content of the temple search mode is brighter than the cave search mode, and it is a display mode that makes it easy for players to hold a flashy impression, so that the expectation that the player is in a probable state is relatively high Can be understood intuitively.

  FIG. 391 is a diagram showing a display mode when the back mode (super temple search mode) indicating that the degree of expectation, which is the probability variation state, is higher than the temple search mode is set. When this super temple search mode is set, the word “CHANCE” is displayed on the temple pillar and a torch is placed on the temple pillar. Further, a display area 804 having a substantially circular shape on which characters “super” are displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the characters “temple search mode” in the display area 803. With these display modes, the player can have a more flashy impression than the temple search mode (see FIG. 390 (b)), so that the expectation of being in a probable state can be further improved. This super temple search mode is a back mode that can be set (shifted) only when the gaming state is a probable change state and the holding lottery result is not included in the hold. In other words, at the time of transition to the super temple search mode, not only the probability change state is confirmed, but at least the probability change state is confirmed until the reserved ball at the time of transition is digested, so the transition to the super temple search mode is made. By doing so, the player can be pleased.

  As described above, in the first control example, during the gaming state in which the short state of the normal symbol is set, the cave search mode in which the expectation of the probability variation state is relatively low, and the temple search mode in which the expectation of the probability variation state is relatively high And the super temple search mode 3 in which the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold and is confirmed until the change is confirmed (at least the probability change state continues until the hold is digested). One of the types of back modes is set at the time of execution of the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current gaming state from the back mode while the short time state of the normal symbol is set. Can be improved. In addition, since the super temple search mode is set, it is determined that the gaming state is a probable state, so if the player enters the super temple mode while predicting the probable state, On the other hand, it is possible to bring joy to the self-predictions. On the other hand, if the player enters the super-shrine mode despite having predicted that the special symbol has a low probability state, the player will have the pleasure of being set to a more advantageous gaming state than expected. You can make it. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of held balls can be executed with the jackpot probability of the probability change state). Therefore, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that a big hit will be made on hold.

  Next, referring to FIG. 392 and FIG. 393, in the first control example, a special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) without winning a jackpot in a state where the short time state of the normal symbol is set. The probability variation continuation suggestion effect executed when is executed will be described. FIG. 392 is a diagram showing a display mode at the start of this probability variation continuation suggestion effect. This probability change continuation suggestion effect is an effect for suggesting whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state, and is executed from the 96th change display effect to the 99th change display effect after the jackpot. That is, it is an effect that is executed until immediately before the 100th special symbol lottery, which is the guaranteed number of times in the short-time state, is executed. In the first control example, the remaining number of time reductions is subtracted when the special symbol starts to change in the time reduction state. That is, in the time reduction state, after the big hit, the number of time reductions becomes 0 at the start of the 100th variation display. Therefore, during the execution of the 100th variation display, the state where the time reduction state has already ended (transition to the normal state) Completed state). Therefore, it is configured to notify whether or not it is in the state of probability change by the 99th variation display effect that is surely maintained in the state of time reduction of the normal symbol even if it is in the state of probability variation. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the probability variation state continues until the result of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is confirmed (that is, it is a time-saving state from the operation of the electric accessory 640a). Therefore, it is difficult to find out whether or not the game is in a state of probability change), so that the player can be made to pay attention to the game by suggesting the probability change continuation suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 392, when the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is started, an effect in which the door 806 appears in front of the character 801 imitating an adventurer is executed. In addition, a display area 805 is displayed above the door 806 in which characters “Start door break mode!” And characters “Continue changing probability if the door breaks!” Are displayed. Further, the characters displayed between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are changed to “door breakthrough mode”. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if the character 801 can break through the door, it means that the probability variation state is continued. In this probability change continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode), an effect of attacking the door 806 is executed each time the change display is executed, and if the door 806 can be finally destroyed (breakthrough), the probability change state is reached. An effect that informs the continuation of is performed.

  FIG. 393 (a) is a diagram showing an effect aspect that suggests that the expectation level that the probability variation state continues is relatively low in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode). When this low-expected performance mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 393 (a), the character 801 imitating an adventurer performs an attack that cuts the door 806 with a sword, thereby destroying (breaking through) the door 806. ) The production to be performed is executed. On the other hand, FIG. 393 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect mode that suggests that the expected degree of the probability variation state is relatively high in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode). When this highly expected production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 393 (b), a character 801 that imitates an adventurer performs an attack that strikes the door 806 with a huge hammer, so that the door 806 is opened. An effect to destroy (breakthrough) is executed.

  It is intuitively obvious for many players that it is more effective to strike with a hammer than to cut with a sword, so it is more intuitive to strike with a hammer. The player can easily understand that the degree of expectation to break through the door 806 is high. Therefore, during execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion, a game can be performed in the hope that an effect of hitting the door 806 with a hammer will be executed more times. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, at the start of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, the 96th to 99th lottery results that are the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect are pre-read and the probability variation state is reached until the 99th special symbol lottery. Is determined, and when the probability variation state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the production scenario in which a highly anticipated attack pattern is likely to occur is increased. . On the other hand, if the 99th special symbol lottery is run before the short-running state (or after the previous jackpot has been short-running), a low-expected attack pattern occurs. It is configured to increase the selection rate of production scenarios that are easy to do. Thus, by setting it as the structure which sets an effect aspect based on the game state at the time of the end of an effect, the game state after the end of an effect can be alert | reported more correctly.

  Here, when the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is executed only based on the gaming state at the start of the production, the probability change continuation suggestion effect falls during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the probability variation state is notified. In spite of this, there is a risk that the short-time state may be terminated with the start of the 100th special symbol drawing. In this case, there is a possibility that the player will be distrusted with the pachinko machine 10 or the hall by contradicting the production contents and the actual operation. In addition, as a countermeasure, a method of constructing a probable continuation suggestion effect by an effect that is completed with one change is conceivable. However, in this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient effect period, so there are various effects. It becomes difficult to convert.

  In contrast, in the first control example, the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is configured to be executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the short time state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is displayed. The determination is made based on the gaming state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the probability variation effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the production mode while making it possible to accurately notify the gaming state at the end of the production. If the ball is in a probable state at the start of the production and the reserved ball up to the end of the production is not on hold, a production that is likely to generate a relatively high expectation attack pattern is selected. ing. This is because the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is lower than the probability of a jackpot, and it is extremely rare that the special symbol falls into a low probability state during the production period (a relatively high probability of the probability variation state). This is because the production ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 394, transition of various states after the probability variation big hit in the first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 394 (a), the transition of the state in the case of falling to the low probability state within 100 times after the end of the probability variation jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 394 (a), if the ball falls within 100 times, the special symbol will move to a low probability state at the time of the fall. Continue until it is done. Then, in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect executed in the 96th to 99th variation display effects, an effect that fails to break through the door 806 is executed, and the transition to the normal state is notified.

  On the other hand, FIG. 394 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the state when the special symbol lottery falls to the low probability state in the special symbol lottery 100 times or more after the probability variation jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 394 (b), when the jackpot falls after 100 hits, the normal symbol time-short state and the special symbol probability change state are maintained until the jackpot falls. Therefore, in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect that is executed over the execution period of the 96th to 99th variation display, an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door 806 is executed, and the continuation of the probability variation state is notified.

  In addition, in the first control example, as in the case of falling by the special symbol lottery after 100 times, even when the special symbol lottery is a big hit during the short time state of the normal symbol, The short time state of the symbol is configured to end. For this reason, if the short-time state is terminated within 100 special symbol lotteries (that is, within the guaranteed number of short-time states), the jackpot winning is determined at that time. On the other hand, when the time-short state is terminated after 100 times (that is, after the guaranteed number of times of the time-short state has elapsed), it means either a big hit or a fall. And since the probability of winning the jackpot (1/125) is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), even if the short-time state is terminated at the start of fluctuation after 100 times, it will be a jackpot Can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether or not the short-time state continues, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 395, a press stop effect in the first control example will be described. This press stop effect is an effect in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swing operation member 10310 is pressed. That is, it is an effect that the stop timing of each symbol row can be set to an arbitrary timing of the player by the operation timing of the player on the PUSH button 10317.

  FIG. 395 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the press stop effect. In this press stop effect, as shown in FIG. 395 (a), button images simulating the PUSH button 10317 (left button image 807aL, center button image 807aC, right button image) are displayed below each symbol row being displayed in a variable manner. 807aR) is displayed. Also, below each button image, an effective period gauge (left effective period gauge 807bL, central effective period gauge 807bC, right effective period gauge 807bR) indicating the remaining period during which the stop operation for each symbol row is effective is displayed. . With these display contents, the player can easily understand that each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

  FIG. 395 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player performs the first operation (pressing) on the PUSH button 10317 during the execution of the press stop effect. As shown in FIG. 395 (b), when the first operation (pressing) is executed, the left symbol sequence is stopped and displayed. When the second operation is executed within the operation valid period, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and when the third operation is executed, the central symbol row is stopped and displayed. In this way, by making it possible for the player to arbitrarily determine the timing of the symbol stop, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when it is set as the structure which stops and displays each symbol row | line | column according to a player's operation timing, if a player's operation is too early, time may be too much after all the symbol row | line stops. As a countermeasure, in the first control example, when the stop operation is executed three times early (for example, within 1 second after the start of the effective period), the central symbol row is not immediately stopped and displayed. And, it is set as the structure which suppresses that the period after a stop display becomes excessive by setting it as the structure which performs the stop display of a center symbol row | line | column through a specific production. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 396 (a), based on the execution of the third operation (pressing), a plurality of (including a symbol with a symbol “Chance Charge”) ( After three symbols have moved up and down in the central symbol row (ie after suggesting that any of the three symbols may be displayed as a stop symbol in the central symbol row) An effect in which symbols other than (chance charge symbol) are stopped and displayed (chance charge effect) is executed. In this way, depending on the length of the remaining operation effective period at the time when the central symbol sequence stop operation (the third press on the PUSH button 10317) is performed, the central symbol sequence is immediately stopped or displayed, or the chance charge By adopting a configuration that switches whether to fill in time with a turn-off effect, it is possible to suppress an unnaturally long state in which all symbol sequences are stopped and displayed. Therefore, a more natural rendering aspect can be realized.

  In the first control example, there is a separate effect of a pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the central symbol row in the press stop effect. In this case, the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed through the chance charge effect (see FIG. 396 (a)) regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is performed on the central symbol row. When the stop display of the chance charge symbol occurs, the chance charge effect (see FIG. 396 (b)) described later is developed. By setting an effect pattern in which the chance charge symbol is actually stopped and displayed, the operation stop effect is selected as a mere off-effect, and even if the chance charge effect is generated, the possibility of developing into a chance charge effect It can make a player think that there is. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 396 (b) and FIG. 397, the effect mode of the chance charge effect described above will be described. FIG. 396 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the chance charge effect is started. When the chance charge effect is started, a character 801 that imitates an adventurer is displayed at the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the surroundings are set to emit light (aurora). Is done. In addition, on the right side of the character 801, a vertically long substantially rectangular shape gauge KG is displayed. This feeling gauge KG is for displaying the accumulation of feeling of the character 801 in a meter format, and can be displayed in 1 to 6 steps. In addition, in the display area 805 displayed above the character 801, a character “The chance is stocked as the spirit is accumulated” is displayed. Further, the characters “Chance Charge remaining 5 times” are displayed in the display area 803. In the chance charge effect of 1, the character 801 tries to save the spirit five times, and the amount of the accumulated spirit is the amount of light around the character 801 (the amount of aura to wear) and the spirit gauge KG. It is notified by the meter amount. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that there is a case where the spirit is good enough to accumulate.

  FIG. 397 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect. As shown in FIG. 397 (a), in addition to the amount of light around the character 801 (the amount of aura to be worn) and the meter amount of the spirit gauge KG, the degree of accumulation of spirit is also determined by the characters displayed in the display area 805. Is notified. In the example of FIG. 397 (a), the state where the spirit is accumulated up to the fifth stage out of the six stages is illustrated, and the characters “charge level 5!” Are displayed in the display area 805. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand the amount of feelings finally accumulated.

  The spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is consumed to generate a certain chance-up effect at each timing until the reserved ball is consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. The chance-up effect is an effect that increases the degree of expectation of the jackpot, such as a change in the display mode of the number of reserved balls, the occurrence of a so-called pseudo-ream, the occurrence of a cut-in effect, Generation and the like. Note that the gas gauge is configured to be consumed until it becomes zero. That is, it is configured not to be consumed and discarded. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that it is possible to play a game while looking forward to what kind of chance-up effects will occur next. . Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG stored in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect. Then, after the end of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start of the chance charge effect (processing load when determining the number of gauges).

  FIG. 397 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the gas gauge is consumed. FIG. 397 (b) illustrates a case where a so-called hold change effect is executed as a chance-up effect by consuming 1 gauge of a spirit gauge. That is, as shown in FIG. 397 (b), the gauge amount of the gas gauge KG decreases (consumes) by one gauge, and at the same time, the display mode of the third reserved ball number symbol Hz3 in the small region Ds1 changes from white to blue. An effect that changes to (an increase in expectation) is executed. In this way, by reducing the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG and performing a certain effect (chance-up effect) that increases the degree of expectation of hitting, when the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG remains, , It is possible to make the game look forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 398, a description will be given of a change over time in the display mode (effect mode) in the variable display effect in which the press stop effect is set. First, referring to FIG. 398 (a), when the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol sequence) is executed after one second from the start of the effective period in the press stop effect that does not develop into the chance charge effect. The change with time of the production mode will be described. As shown in FIG. 398 (a), when the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, the normal display is maintained until 6 seconds elapse from the start of the change. Fluctuation display (fluctuation display in which each symbol row fluctuates at a high speed in the vertical direction) is executed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, a press stop effect (see FIG. 395 (a)) is started. When the third stop operation is executed after 1 second from the start of the effective period of the press stop effect (when 2 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 398 (a)), the left symbol sequence already stopped In addition to the right symbol row, the central symbol row is pseudo-stopped. Note that the pseudo stop display means that the display is displayed in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display (for example, a mode that vibrates with extremely small amplitude). This pseudo stop continues until the original stop display timing of the variable display (the timing at which the stop command is received from the main control device 110), and the symbol sequence is completely stopped and displayed at the stop display timing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 398 (b), in the press stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol sequence) is executed within 1 second from the start of the effective period. A description will be given of the change over time in the effect mode when the game is performed. As shown in FIG. 398 (b), when the fluctuation display in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, the normal display is maintained until 6 seconds elapse from the start of the change. The fluctuation display is executed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, a press stop effect (see FIG. 395 (a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed within a range of 1 second or less after the effective period of the press stop effect is started (in the example of FIG. 398 (b), when 0.5 seconds have elapsed), the chance charge effect is produced. After the execution (see FIG. 396 (a)), an effect is displayed in which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. As a result, even if three stop operations are executed at a relatively early stage after the start of the effective period, the period until the stop display can be connected (filled) by the chance charge production effect. The transition of the production mode up to the stop display can be shown in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a feeling of incongruity.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 398 (c), a description will be given of the change over time in the effect mode when the opportunity charge effect is developed. As shown in FIG. 398 (c), even when developing into a chance charge effect, the transition of the same effect mode as when the chance charge effect is not executed is performed until the press stop effect is executed. Then, in the variable display in which the chance charge effect is set, if the stop operation is performed three times in the press stop effect, the chance charge effect (FIG. 396 (a)) regardless of the timing of the third stop operation. After that, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, it develops into a chance charge effect.

  As described above, in the first control example, even with the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, the chance charge effect can be executed according to the end timing of the stop operation. Therefore, the chance charge effect is executed. The feeling of expectation for can be held more times. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 399 to FIG. 401, an interruption repeated striking effect, which is a type of interest effect in the first control example, will be described. This interrupted striking effect is an effect of a display mode as if an effect of a mode different from the display effect displayed so far suddenly interrupted during normal fluctuation display or reach fluctuation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399 (a), the image of the normal variation display effect is obtained by executing the interruption repeated striking effect during the execution of the normal variation display effect (see FIG. 389 (b)). A cut-in region CR in which the face of the monster is displayed up is formed (displayed). That is, as shown in FIG. 399 (a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a strip shape in the direction from the upper left to the lower right on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. . In the cut-in area CR, as shown in FIG. 399 (a), the display range occupies about 70% of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a monster is imitated in the center of the cut-in area CR. The displayed image is enlarged. In addition, a display area 805 in which the characters “monster group assault !!” are displayed (formed) above the image imitating a monster in the cut-in area CR. With these display contents, it is easy to understand that an effect completely different from the effect that was executed until the cut-in area CR was displayed (interrupted) was given to the player. Can be made. While the cut-in area CR is being formed (that is, while the interrupting and striking effect is being executed), the display effect that has been executed up to that point is interrupted. In other words, all the display effects of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR are temporarily stopped, and the effect mode is resumed from the situation at the time of interruption when the interrupting hit effect is ended. Note that the sound (music) can be switched between paused (suspended) or continued playback depending on the situation. In the first control example, when the interruption repeated hitting effect is executed during execution of the normal variation display, both the display mode and the voice mode are controlled to be interrupted until the end of the interrupting hitting effect, In the case where the interruption continuous striking effect is executed after the reach occurs (during the reach change), only the display mode is interrupted. This is because the flashy music (BGM) flows after the occurrence of reach compared to when the normal fluctuation display is executed, so that the relatively flashy BGM is interrupted, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. The purpose is to suppress the cuddling.

  After the cut-in area CR displaying the image or the like imitating a monster is formed after the interruption continuous hit effect is executed, the player is prompted to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (continuous hit). A display mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399 (b), a button image BG simulating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in area CR, and an operation on the PUSH button 10317 is effective below the button image BG. A gauge image GG indicating the remaining period in the gauge format is displayed. Also, above the button image BG, the characters “continuous hit” and an image of three arrows facing the PUSH button image BG are displayed. Further, a display area 808 is formed in which the characters “Reduce monsters by repeated hits!” Are displayed on the display area 805, and the characters “100 remaining” are displayed on the right side of the button image BG. Is displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the number of monsters can be reduced as the push button 10317 is pressed within the continuous hitting effective period.

  In the first control example, as the types of interrupted hitting effects, there are provided a plurality of types that are different in at least the number of monsters that can be reduced during the continuous hitting effective period (the lower limit value of the number of remaining monsters to be displayed). It has been. Basically, the greater the number of monsters subsided (the smaller the number of remaining monsters), the higher the jackpot expectation. More specifically, when the interrupting hitting effect is set for the jackpot fluctuation display, it is a type of effect that makes it possible to subdue all 100 monsters (set the number of remaining monsters to 0). While it is possible to select a mode, it is configured that the number of monsters cannot be reduced to 0 in the out-of-range variation display (only 3 can be reduced at most).

  In the first control example, the number of monsters subjugated (subtracted) by pressing the push button 10317 once is made variable according to the remaining effective period. More specifically, the longer the remaining effective period, the smaller the number of subjugation (subtraction number) by one press. By comprising in this way, even if it is a case where the player with the fast pace of continuous hitting is playing a game, it can suppress that the number of monsters of a minimum is subtracted early after the production start.

  Here, conventionally, an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by continuously operating an operation unit such as an operation button for a predetermined period is known as a kind of interest effect. In this operation effect, it is common that an upper limit value of the variable number of development modes (development times) is set for each production, and when the number of operation times becomes a specific number, the maximum development mode can be changed. Things were normal. However, in the production of such specifications, when a player with a high operation speed is playing a game, it will be developed (variable) to the upper limit stage in the production at an early stage. There was a problem that there was a possibility of detracting from the player's interest in the stage of showing. Furthermore, when a player with a slow operation speed is playing a game, the player operates the game before performing the specified number of operations to develop it to the upper limit of the development mode even though the player is actively operating. There is a possibility that the validity period will end and the player's interest will be impaired.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the number of monsters subjugated (subtracted) by pressing once is varied according to the length of the remaining effective period, and the longer the remaining effective period, Since it is configured so that the number of subjugation is reduced, even if it is pressed at a fast pace, it is possible to suppress the subjugation of the number of monsters at the early limit. That is, it is possible to suppress the subtraction of the number of monsters based on pressing with the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies that are likely to be set in the case of losing, and the loss of expectation for the player's jackpot. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In addition, even when a player with a slow pace of pressing is playing, if the pressing is performed in the second half of the continuous hitting effective period, it becomes easy to select a relatively large number of defeats, so it reaches between the lower limit number of monsters The possibility can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the interruption continuous striking effect even for a player who has a slow pace of pressing down, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 400 (a), in an effect in which continuous operation with respect to the PUSH button 10317 is effective, such as an interruption continuous hit effect, the operation (pressing) with respect to the PUSH button 10317 is performed within the continuous hit effective period of the effect. A description will be given of the output mode of the sound output each time it is detected. As shown in FIG. 400 (a), in order to reproduce audio data in the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 424), which will be described later, every time pressing (operation) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the continuous hitting effective period. Of the plurality of channels provided, the audio data corresponding to the pressing is reproduced for either CN2 or CN3. More specifically, when a press is detected for the first time in the continuous hitting effective period, the first voice data (first continuous hitting sound) is reproduced for CN2. The audio data corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound is composed of audio data from which the voice “Bicie” is output by being reproduced as shown in FIG. 400 (a). Further, when the second press is detected during the continuous hitting effective period, the second voice data (second continuous hitting sound) is reproduced for CN3. The audio data corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound is constituted by audio data from which a voice “basie” is output by being reproduced as shown in FIG. 400 (a). Thereafter, every time a press is detected, control for reproducing the sound data corresponding to the first continuous beating sound for CN2 and control for reproducing the sound data corresponding to the second continuous beating sound for CN3 are alternately performed. Repeated. As described above, the voice mode corresponding to the different voices is output every time the pressing is detected, so that the voice mode during continuous hitting can be diversified. In other words, since it is possible to suppress the sound mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the continuous hitting effective period. In addition, when the configuration is such that the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are reproduced alternately on a single channel (that is, the control for stopping the output of one sound being reproduced and outputting the other sound) Compared to the case of repeating), the other voice can be output while maintaining the state in which one voice is output (the first and second consecutive hit sounds are output in an overlapping manner). Therefore, the voice mode during continuous hitting can be made more lively. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are alternately played back on a single channel, if a player with a quick hit interval performs a continuous hit operation, the head portion of each audio data It becomes a monotonous voice mode that only repeats alternately. On the other hand, if a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of audio data is reproduced in order on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data on other channels is interrupted. Can be played. That is, a voice based on one voice data and a voice based on other voice data can be synthesized and output. Accordingly, since it is possible to easily output the sound other than the head portion in each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, every time a push on the PUSH button 10317 is detected, two types of audio data are alternately reproduced for two channels, thereby diversifying the audio mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are alternately played back to CN1 and CN2. Thereby, a voice aspect can be diversified more. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be reproduced in order for three or more channels. With this configuration, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). Therefore, the voice mode can be further diversified. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which changes the kind of audio | voice data output according to the space | interval of continuous hitting. Specifically, for example, when the player has a relatively short interval (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less) and the player is playing, three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sequentially sent to two channels. It is good also as a structure which reproduces | regenerates (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the sound output mode even in accordance with the repeated hitting interval, so that it is possible to realize the gameability of adjusting the repeated hitting interval. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the first control example, any one of the continuous hitting sounds is output in conjunction with the continuous hitting operation. However, under a predetermined condition, the continuous hitting sound may be output even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed. . More specifically, for example, when the last hit sound output in the effective period of the hit operation is the first consecutive hit sound, the second consecutive hit sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, the sound that is output last becomes the first continuous sound even though the first continuous sound and the second continuous sound are output as a set in response to the continuous operation. It is possible to prevent the voice mode from being halfway (that is, the second continuous hitting sound that is paired is not output). Therefore, the voice mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the last continuously output sound is the first continuous sound, the control for outputting the second continuous sound after the end is performed with a variable display (a lottery result) corresponding to a predetermined variation type (lottery result). For example, it may be configured to set only during execution of jackpot fluctuation. By configuring in this way, for a player who wants to know whether or not the variation type is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound that is output last during the interruption hitting effect is dared to be the first continuous hitting sound. Can be realized. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between successive hits by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a continuous hit operation is detected in a state where no sound is reproduced, the first continuous hit sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the playback of the next continuous hit operation is completed after the reproduction of one continuous hit sound is completed, only the first continuous hit sound is continuously output. It may be configured. By configuring in this way, a player who wants to diversify the voice mode can be repeatedly operated at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupted continuous hit effect is improved. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 400 (b), the correspondence relationship between the pressing timing in the continuous hitting effective period of the interrupting hitting effect and the monster subtraction number will be described. In the example of FIG. 400, description will be given by taking as an example a correspondence relationship in the type of interrupted hit effect of a type that can subdue a maximum of 100 monsters. FIG. 400B is a graph showing a correspondence relationship between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) at the time when the pressing of the push button 10317 is detected and the number of subjugated monsters (vertical axis). As shown in FIG. 400 (b), the later the timing of pressing, the greater the number of monster subtractions (the number of subjugations). Thereby, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to suppress the subjugation of the lower limit number of monsters at an early stage. That is, it is possible to suppress the subtraction of the number of monsters based on pressing with the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies that are likely to be set in the case of losing, and the loss of expectation for the player's jackpot. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In addition, even when a player with a slow pace of pressing is playing, if the pressing is performed in the second half of the continuous hitting effective period, it becomes easy to select a relatively large number of defeats, so it reaches between the lower limit number of monsters The possibility can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the interruption continuous striking effect even for a player who has a slow pace of pressing down, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Note that the correspondence relationship between the pressing timing and the monster subtraction number is not limited to that shown in FIG. 400 (b), and can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, even if aggressive strikes are made by reducing the inclination (for example, by half) with respect to the correspondence shown in FIG. It can make it more difficult to subtract monsters until it is. Therefore, since it is possible to make repeated hits more seriously, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the interrupted hitting effect. On the other hand, if the slope is increased, it is relatively easy to subtract the number of monsters until the number of monsters reaches the lower limit by repeated hits. It can be easily confirmed. Therefore, even players who are not good at continuous hitting can actively participate in the interruption continuous hitting effect. In the first control example, the correspondence relationship between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of the monster is a proportional relationship (primary function). However, the correspondence relationship is a quadratic function or a logarithmic function. Arbitrary correspondences of designers such as correspondences and exponential correspondences can be set. Also, the correspondence relationship may be different depending on the effect type of the interrupted strike effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize the gameability that allows the player to predict the degree of jackpot expectation from the transition of the number of subtractions in successive hits, and thus the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 401, a description will be given of the change over time of the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the interrupting hit effect is set. First, with reference to FIG. 401 (a), a description will be given of the change over time of the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the interrupting hit effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 401 (a), when a variation effect for which no interrupting strike effect is set is executed, a normal variation display is executed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal variation display is being executed, the variation display BGM (music 1) corresponding to the normal variation display is reproduced in a loop. This tune 1 is composed of three melody parts, A part, B part, and C part. By performing loop playback for 10 seconds, it will be exactly the end playback position after 10 seconds. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 401 (a), normal reach occurs when 10 seconds have elapsed, and changes to the normal reach variation display mode. When this normal reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 401 (a), the voice is switched to BGM (music 2) corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation. Similarly to the music 1, the music 2 is also set to have a playback time so as to end in accordance with the effect time of the normal reach effect by performing loop playback.

  On the other hand, in the variable display effect in which the interruption hitting effect occurs before the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 401 (b), at the time when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the normal variable display effect. The normal variable display effect is interrupted, and the interrupted continuous effect is started (interrupted). When the interruption continuous striking effect is executed, not only the display mode (normal fluctuation display effect) but also the voice (normal fluctuation display BGM) is interrupted. Then, when 9 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change (when 7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the interrupt continuous effect), the interrupt continuous effect is ended, and the normal variable display effect and the variable display BGM are resumed from the point of interruption. Thereafter, at the timing when 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation display is terminated and normal reach occurs. That is, normal reach occurs after normal fluctuation display is executed for a total of 10 seconds. After the development to normal reach, since it is the same as the transition of the display mode (see FIG. 401 (a)) in the variable display in which the interruption continuous hitting effect is not set, the description thereof is omitted here.

  Further, in the variable display effect in which the interrupting hit effect is generated after the normal reach effect is generated, as shown in FIG. 401 (c), after the normal variable display for 10 seconds is executed, it is developed into the reach effect. Up to this point, it is the same as the transition of the display mode of the variable display effect (see FIG. 401 (a)) in which the interrupted hit effect is not set. Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the development of the normal reach effect, the normal reach effect is interrupted and the interrupted hit effect is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the seven-second interruption continuous hit effect ends, the interrupted normal reach effect is resumed. In addition, when the interruption repeated striking effect is executed after the occurrence of reach, only the display mode is interrupted and the audio output mode is maintained as it is. That is, while the reproduction of the reach effect BGM is maintained, the interrupt repeated hit effect BGM is reproduced on the other channels (for example, CN2 to CN4). By comprising in this way, it can suppress that BGM for reach production which is comparatively lively suddenly interrupts, and makes a player feel uncomfortable.

  In the first control example, as the types of fluctuations in which normal reach occurs, normal reach (outgoing normal reach A, hit normal reach A) with a change time of 30 seconds and normal reach (outgoing normal reach B, hit normal reach B) with a change time of 37 seconds. ) And are provided. That is, different variation types with different variation times are set for 7 seconds, which is the production time of the interruption continuous hit effect. And the interruption repeated hitting effect is configured such that execution possibility is lottery only when the variation type is a variation type of 37 seconds. By configuring in this way, a combination of an effect mode (30-second effect mode) that can be set for a change pattern of 30 seconds and an effect mode of an interrupted hit effect is just 37 seconds of change time. Can be filled. That is, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect mode when the interrupting effect is set, so that display data and audio data can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, a plurality of types with different variation times of 7 seconds are set for a variation type that does not generate reach and a variation type that develops to super reach. It is set as the structure which can be set only with respect to. As a result, the combination of the effect mode that can be selected for the short variation type for 7 seconds and the effect mode of the interrupted rendition effect makes it possible to just fill the 7-second long variation time, thereby increasing the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10. The performance can be suitably executed.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the first control example, as the special symbol lottery is executed, the main controller 110 draws the variation time of the first symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. The determined variation time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 selects the change display effect of the effect period that matches the change time notified by the change pattern command, and synchronizes with the change display of the first symbol, thereby changing the change display effect of the third symbol. Is configured to execute. The fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 includes a basic time command indicating a basic fluctuation time and an additional time command indicating an additional fluctuation time, and is the fluctuation time longer by 7 seconds? Whether or not is notified is set by an additional time command. More specifically, when the variation pattern of the variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is added as the additional variation time. Be notified. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional variation time. . That is, it is configured to be able to identify whether or not the fluctuation type is 7 seconds longer by the notification content of the additional time command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation type is the lottery target for determining whether or not to execute the interruption continuous striking effect only by confirming the content of the additional time command. In addition, when it is decided to execute the interruption continuous striking effect, it is possible to fill the variation time just by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation time notified by the basic time command (fluctuation time shorter by 7 seconds). it can. Therefore, since the end timing of the effect mode and the end timing of the variable display effect can be easily matched without preparing an effect mode dedicated to the interruption continuous hit effect, a suitable effect mode can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 402 to FIG. 403, the hold batch change effect, which is a type of interest effect in the first control example, will be described. This reserved batch change effect is an effect that may be executed when there are a plurality of reserved balls, and at least a part of the reserved ball number symbols is a player's 1 This is an effect that is changed to a display mode with a high expectation based on the operation. In FIG. 402 to FIG. 403, there are four reserved balls, the second reserved ball number symbol Hz2 is changed to a blue display mode, and the third reserved ball number symbol Hz3 is changed to a green display mode. The case where the hold batch change effect is executed will be described as an example. In addition, as a display mode of the number of reserved balls, it is configured such that the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit in the order of white, blue, green, and red increases. The display mode of the number of reserved balls is basically the various types obtained based on the start winning when the starting winning (the first entering 64 or the second entering 640) is detected. It is determined based on a random value (counter value). More specifically, whether or not a special symbol lottery is executed and a variation type are predicted (prefetched) in advance from various random numbers acquired at the time of winning a start, and according to the prediction result (prefetched result). The lottery probability is used to determine which display mode is set for the number of reserved balls. In this lottery, control is performed such that the higher the expectation result corresponding to the lottery result, the higher the ratio set for the number of reserved balls with a higher expectation. Since the timing of the start winning prize varies depending on the game situation of the player (such as the pace at which the game ball is launched), the pending batch change effect is executed independently of the variable display effect. . In other words, it is an effect that may be executed over the variation periods of a plurality of variable display effects (there may be within one variation period).

  FIG. 402 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the time when the pending batch change effect is executed. This hold collective change effect may be executed when a plurality of hold balls exist when a new start winning is detected. When the hold batch change effect is executed, first, the hold change character HC suggesting the start of the hold batch change effect is framed in from the upper side of the display screen into the plane. As shown in FIG. 402 (a), the hold-change character HC is displayed in a form simulating a PUSH button 10317 in a portion corresponding to a face. With the display mode of the hold-change character HC, it is possible to suggest to the player in advance that an effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 is executed.

  After the reserved change character HC appears (frame-in), as shown in FIG. 402 (b), all the reserved ball number symbols Hz1 to Hz4 are changed to a display mode imitating a rock. That is, the expectation degree (display color of the reserved ball number symbol) indicated by the reserved ball number symbol is temporarily changed to a concealed state. In addition, a balloon image FG simulating a balloon is displayed above the hold-change character HC, and characters “Holding rank UP with button PUSH !?” are displayed inside the balloon image FG. By this display mode, the player can easily understand that the degree of expectation (display color) of any number of reserved balls is improved by pressing the PUSH button 10317 for the player. it can.

  FIG. 403 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the hold batch change effect. As shown in FIG. 403 (a), when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, the rocks around all the reserved ball numbers that have been changed to the display mode imitating the rocks are repelled, and the normal held ball An effect of returning to the display mode of several symbols is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation indicated by at least some of the reserved ball number symbols is higher than before the occurrence of the reserved batch change effect. In the example of FIG. 403 (a), the second reserved ball number symbol Hz2 set in the blue display mode before the execution of the hold batch change effect is changed to the red display mode through the hold batch change effect. Shows the case.

  By executing the hold collective change effect, it is determined that the expectation level indicated by at least one reserved ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's expectation for jackpot can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed which of the reserved ball number symbols will change (expectation will increase), the operation on the PUSH button 10317 will look forward to which of the held ball number symbols will change. Can be performed. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the push button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to a player's favorite timing. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  FIG. 403 (b) shows a state in which the hold change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the effective period of the hold batch change effect. When the hold change character HC fades out of the screen, even if the operation effective period in the hold batch change effect remains, the effective period is interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403 (b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, an effect (see FIG. 403 (a)) in which the degree of expectation of each number of reserved balls is changed is executed. There is no. The effect in which the mini character is absent is executed, for example, when another operation effect accompanied by an operation on the push button 10317 and a hold batch change effect compete. The absence of the pending change character HC corresponding to the pending batch change effect makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the operation valid period has been temporarily suspended. Therefore, in the hold batch change effect, it is possible to suppress a misunderstanding that the operation on the push button 10317 is misunderstood that the operation is effective, and the effect does not develop. Therefore, a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 404, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 404 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 405) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 405, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  The jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a special hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a special hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol, A stop type counter C3 used for selecting a stop type, a fall lottery counter C4 used for falling lottery from the probability variation state of a special symbol, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a special hit random number counter An initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of C1 is used. Further, the normal winning random number counter C5 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 434). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a ball entering the first ball inlet 64. In accordance with the timing, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the second entrance 640 is provided. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area, and a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a variation that are subject to lottery execution. Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a game ball is stored. The value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). The configuration is back. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 434).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special bonus random number counter C1 is A special symbol jackpot is determined when it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a special symbol having a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (special symbol). The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 407 (a)). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a game ball enters the first entrance 64, the value Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol reserved ball execution area). On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol reserved ball execution area. ).

  Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 Will be for the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-3” is a special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability. (See FIG. 407 (a)). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 4 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/250”. The random value (counter value) that is a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are eight random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “4 to 11” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability ( FIG. 407 (a)). Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 8 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/125”.

  Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. As shown in FIG. 408 (b), when the first special symbol lottery is won, and the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9”, the big hit type is “big hit A” (15 Round probability change jackpot). The jackpot type when the value is “10 to 49” is “Big Jack B” (5-round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “Big Jack C”. (5 rounds are usually big hits).

  On the other hand, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79” in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type is “big hit D” (15 rounds probable big hit). Further, the jackpot type when the value is “80 to 99” is “jackpot E” (15 round normal jackpot).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment has one jackpot type out of the five jackpot types (big hits A to E) depending on the type of special symbol and the random number value indicated by the special hit type counter C2. It is configured to be determined.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 250) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3. Stop types include, for example, “rear and forward reach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, or after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol is before and after the reach symbol. “Reach other than front / rear detachment” that stops at other times, “complete detachment” that does not cause reach, or the like is selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, it is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area). When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol holding ball execution area). Stored.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 434) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 409 (a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 409 and 410, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b used when the main controller 110 selects a fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 409 (a) shows the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 409 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202b in the first control example shows the symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal table 202b1 that is referred to for determining the variation time and the gaming state (probability variation state and short time state) in which the short state of the normal symbol is set, And at least a probability variation / shortening time table 202b2 referred to for determining the variation time.

  First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 409 (b). FIG. 409 (b) shows the specified contents of the normal table 202b1. In the normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the special symbol lottery results. For each variation pattern, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are defined. And the value is assigned. In addition, when the determination result is a win, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2), respectively. Is set. Specifically, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the determination result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is “0 to 50”. When the value of the obtained variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 180”, the normal reach A is defined as the variation pattern when the variation time is 30 seconds. When the normal reach A is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, when the normal reach A is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the interruption continuous striking effect (see FIG. 399) is not executed as described above. Further, when the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is “0 to 50” and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “181 to 198”, the normal reach B per variation time of 37 seconds as the variation pattern. Is stipulated. When the normal reach B is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when the normal reach B is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, whether or not to execute the interruption continuous striking effect (see FIG. 399) is drawn.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 409 (b), a variation pattern is included in the range where the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is “51 to 250” and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 150”. Super reach A is defined per 60 seconds of variation time, and super reach B is defined per variation time of 67 seconds when the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of “151 to 198”. In the hit super reach A, since the additional time is 0 seconds, there is no possibility that the interruption continuous hitting effect is executed. In the hit super reach B, an additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is sounded. Since it is notified to the lamp control device 113, whether or not to execute the interruption continuous striking effect is selected by lottery.

  Similarly, in the case where the symbol type is Special Figure 1 and the determination result is wrong, similarly, as shown in FIG. 409 (b), depending on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Thus, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 8 seconds to 67 seconds is set is defined. Also in the case of a deviation, in the variation pattern in which an additional time command corresponding to the additional time of 7 seconds is specified, whether or not to execute the interruption continuous striking effect is lottery in the sound lamp control device 113, while the additional time of 0 seconds. In the variation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to is defined, the interruption continuous striking effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 409 (b), when the symbol type is special figure 2, if the determination result is a hit (big hit D, big hit E), the value of stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type selection counter Regardless of the value of CS1, if the fluctuation pattern defines a long fluctuation A per fluctuation time of 150 seconds and the determination result is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 Regardless of the value, long fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds are defined. This is because when a right-handed strike is made in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the distribution of the jackpot in the normal state (that is, the ratio of the probability variation jackpot is high), The purpose is to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn at normal times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the specified contents of the probability variation / shortening time table 202b2 will be described. Also in the probability variation / time reduction table 202b2, as shown in FIG. 410, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 is set for each variation pattern. And the value of the variation type counter CS1 are assigned. In the probability variation / shortening time table 202b2, a relatively short variation time is easily set compared to the normal table 202b1, and the variation time common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Since the only difference is that it is configured to be selected, detailed description thereof is omitted here. By making it easy to set short fluctuation times, special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently than other game states during the probability variation state where the short time state of the normal symbol is set, and the short time state can do.

  Returning to FIG. 405, the description will be continued. The normal winning random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and reaches 0 (after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239)). Further, when the ordinary hit random number counter C5 makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C5. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is updated periodically, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol hit is defined in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 407 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is When the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the normal hit random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the normal symbol wins. In addition, the normal random number table 202c is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability (a normal symbol of the normal symbol) that has a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 407 (b)). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 407 (b), there are two random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the value is “5, 6”. In this manner, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 2 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/120”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is used. In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the normal random number counter C5 is within the range of “5, 6”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is determined. ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened “for 0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only once for "0.2 seconds x 1" when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a normal hit random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened “twice × 1 second”. Is done. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a is opened only “one second × two times”. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425). The update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 434).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 404, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 405, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 434), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 433). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 432) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 406 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data described above, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the normal hit random number table 202c, the jackpot type selection table 202d, the falling lottery table 202e, and the open At least a pattern selection table 202f is stored.

  The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407 (a)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, “0 to 3” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be a big hit in a low probability state of a special symbol, and a determination to be determined to be a big hit in a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol “4 to 11” is defined as the range of values (see FIG. 407 (a)). When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning matches with one of the determination values corresponding to the big winnings defined in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 407 (a)), It is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 408 (a)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is It is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the special hit type counter The jackpot type corresponding to the value of C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 408 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d is a special chart that is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery (the lottery of the special chart 1) is won. It comprises at least a jackpot table 202d1 and a special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 that is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (the lottery of the special figure 2). ing. First, the details of the special figure 1 big hit table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 408 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 408 (b), “special hit A” is defined in association with the range in which the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9” (see FIG. 408 (b)). This “big hit A” has 15 rounds, and after the big hit is finished, a probability variation state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set that allows the player to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V region). ) A big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “bonanza A” has the most rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol, and is given an advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot that is the most advantageous among the jackpots of the first special symbol It is a type.

  Further, the range of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit B” (see FIG. 408 (b)). This “big hit B” has five rounds, and after the big hit, the probability variation state is given (the open / close pattern that allows the player to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set). ) A big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 40 counter values that are “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of “big hit A”, this “big hit B” is a relatively advantageous big hit type because a favorable probability change state is given after the big hit.

  In addition, in the range where the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, “big hit C” is associated and defined (see FIG. 408 (b)). This “big hit C” has five rounds, and after the big hit, a short-time state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set that makes it impossible to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V area). It is a jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This “jackpot C” is the most unfavorable jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol because the number of rounds is the least and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a relatively unfavorable time-short state. .

  Next, details of the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 408 (c). As shown in FIG. 408 (c), “special hit D” is defined in association with the range where the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79” (see FIG. 408 (c)). This “big hit D” has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a probability variation state is given (an open / close pattern is set that allows the player to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V area). ) A big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 80% (80/100). This “big jackpot D” is the most advantageous jackpot type because it has the largest number of rounds in the jackpot and is given an advantageous probability variation state after the jackpot is over.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 408 (c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit E” in the range of “80 to 99” (see FIG. 408 (c)). ). This “big hit E” has 15 rounds, and after the big hit ends, a short-time state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set that makes it impossible to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V area). It is a jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 20 counter values that are “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 20% (20/100). This “bonanza E” is the jackpot type that is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot end because it has the most number of rounds in the jackpot but is given a disadvantageous short-time state after the jackpot ends.

  As described above, in the first control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability variation jackpot (jackpot A, B) is determined at a rate of 50%, while the second When the special symbol lottery is won, the probability variation jackpot (jackpot D) is determined at a rate of 80%. Therefore, when the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect the probability variation state. As described above, in the first control example, when the jackpot type is clearly indicated to the player, it is configured to be extremely rare (1% of the case when the probability variation jackpot is reached). Then, after the jackpot is over, the normal symbol is kept in a short-time state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the probability variation state or the short-time state is set until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends. Even if an unfavorable time-short state is set, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of a probable state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Also, if a big hit is made within 100 times, even if it is a big hit in the short time state, it can be made to appear as if it was a big hit during the probable change state, so the probability change state entered rather than the original The rate and the continuation rate can be felt as if they are high. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  The normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 407 (b)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, “5, 6” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol (see FIG. 407 (b)). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 407 (b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, refer to the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 acquired based on the game ball passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the normal hit random number table 202c. However, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol.

  The variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 409 (a)) is a data table in which determination values of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode are defined for each display mode. Note that details of the variation pattern selection table 202b are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The falling lottery table 202e is a data table in which the determination value of the falling lottery counter C4 determined to fall is defined. The value of the falling lottery counter C4 acquired when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 in the special symbol change state (when starting a prize) is the fall lottery table 202e. Is set so as to shift to a low probability state of a special symbol when it coincides with any of the determination values defined in (1).

  More specifically, two determination values “0, 1” are defined as determination values determined to fall in the probability variation state of the special symbol. Here, the falling lottery counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated in a range of “0 to 999”. Since there are two determination values that are determined to fall, among the 1000 values that the fall lottery counter C4 can take, the probability of falling (shifting to a low probability state of the special symbol) in the special symbol probability variation state Is 1/500 (2/1000).

  In the fall lottery table 202e in this embodiment, only a determination value (determination value for the probability variation state of the special symbol) for determining whether or not the symbol falls in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. The decision value for the low probability state is not defined. It is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the falling lottery table 202e and the regularly updated falling lottery counter C4 are compared, and whether or not the special symbol probabilistic state is shifted to the special symbol low probability state (falling). Is determined. That is, it is possible to make random the timing of transition from the probability variation state to the time-short state. Therefore, when the game shifts to the probability change state, the game can be performed while feeling tense with respect to not knowing when the probability change state ends. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, whether or not to shift (fall) from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is determined by lottery (determination). You may comprise so that a lottery (determination) is possible. For example, whether or not to shift from the normal symbol time-short state to the normal symbol normal state may be determined by a lottery executed for each variation. Thereby, since the number of continuations of the short time state of the normal symbol can be made random, the game can be performed while holding a sense of tension also in this case. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  The opening pattern selection table 202f is a data table in which data for setting a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is defined as the opening pattern (opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a) in the fifth round of jackpot. Although not shown in the figure, in the fifth round of probability variation jackpots (jackpots A, B, D), the sorting device (V combination) is arranged in a state of distributing the game balls to the first zone (V zone). Open period during which the game ball can reach the sorting device during the period (5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the fifth round) (5 seconds to 9 seconds after the start of the fifth round to 9. Data for setting (open period until 5 seconds elapse) is read out. On the other hand, in the fifth round of the normal jackpot (big hit C, E), the period during which the sorting device (V role) is arranged to distribute the game balls to the second zone (non-V zone) (start of the fifth round) Set the release period (4.5 seconds from the start of the fifth round to 4.5 seconds after the start of the fifth round) during which the game balls can reach the sorting device between the period immediately after and 5 seconds) Data for reading is read out.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 406 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 403 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 suspending ball number counter 203e, normal symbol suspending ball number counter 203f, hour / short-time counter 203g, probability variation flag 203h, jackpot start flag 203i, jackpot middle flag 203j, probability variation setting flag 203k, probability variation passing counter 203m, winning number counter 203p, remaining It has at least a ball timer flag 203q, a remaining ball timer 203r, a probability variation valid flag 203s, a probability variation valid timer 203t, a discharge number counter 203u, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas includes a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, Each value of the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are sequentially stored in ascending order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are the special symbols. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1, which are shifted (moved) to the reserved ball execution area (see FIG. 405) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  If the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the first control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning at the second entrance 640 is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal random number counter C5 is stored. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C5 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

  If the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Whenever a game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of fluctuating held balls increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 426).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (S211 in FIG. 426, S405 in FIG. 428). reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and every time a game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 426). Similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the number of held balls (figure display) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passing of the game ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 ( This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see S605 in FIG. 430).

  When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 431: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203g is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and every time a big win is reached, 100 is set at the end of the big win (FIG. 437). (See S1303). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, when a big win is obtained by drawing a special symbol, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the jackpot (see S310 in FIG. 427). By setting the value to be set to 0 at the start of the variable display showing the big hit, there is a possibility that the short-time state has been terminated, such as the normal symbol being out of the normal symbol during the short-time display. When there is a certain behavior, the expectation for jackpot can be improved. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  When a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203g and the state of the probability change flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more or the probability change flag 203h is on. For example, it is determined that the normal symbol is short. In this case, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the normal random number table 202c for high probability (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the normal symbol of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal random number table for low probability. A lottery is performed (see S610 in FIG. 430).

  The probability variation flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol certain variation state. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state. In addition, as described above, the normal symbol is in a short time state during the probability change state of the special symbol. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203h is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a certain variation state and that the normal symbol is in a short time state.

  The probability variation flag 203h is set to an initial value of off, and when a game ball enters the first area (V area) in the variable winning device 65 in the fifth round of the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot It is set to ON (see S1302 in FIG. 437). The probability variation flag 203h is set to OFF when the lottery result corresponding to the fall in the probability variation state (see S305 in FIG. 427) and when the big hit variation display is started (see S310 in FIG. 427). Is done.

  The probability variation flag 203h is referred to in the special symbol variation start process to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (see S302 in FIG. 427). Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (FIG. 427, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 427, S208), the probability variation flag 203h is referred to. If the probability variation flag 203h is on, first, the falling lottery is executed. If not falling, the first random number table 202a for high probability is used. Based on (see FIG. 407 (a)), a special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off, or if the probability variation flag 203h is on and it is determined that the fall has occurred by the fall lottery, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 407 (a)). ) To draw a special symbol.

  The probability variation flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short time state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 430). Specifically, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203h and the above-mentioned hour / minute counter 203g are referred to, and if the probability variation flag 203h is on or the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more, It is determined that the normal symbol is in the short-time state, and the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the normal probability random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407 (b)) (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is OFF and the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the second per random number table 202c for the low probability is used (FIG. 407 ( Based on (b)), a normal symbol lottery is performed (see S610 in FIG. 430). In the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 430). (See S620).

  The jackpot start flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203i is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start a jackpot. The jackpot start flag 203i is turned on when the end timing of the variable display indicating the jackpot is reached (see S217 in FIG. 426). The jackpot start flag 203i is set to off when the jackpot start is set (see S1103 in FIG. 435).

  The jackpot flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If this jackpot flag 203j is on, it means that it is a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not a jackpot. The big hit flag 203j is a big win by lottery of special symbols, and the big hit (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1103 in FIG. 435). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1305 in FIG. 437). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426), the jackpot flag 203j is referred to and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S201 in FIG. 426).

  The probability change setting flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability changing state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change state is determined by whether or not a gaming ball has entered the first area (V area) during the big hit game. Here, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first area (passing through the probability change switch provided in the first area), the probability change setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415 in FIG. 438). . On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1305 in FIG. 437). The probability variation setting flag 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  When the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch has passed before the power is turned off. May be configured to return to the officially set to ON. In this case, whether or not the probability variation switch has passed before the power is turned off can be determined based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203m described later has a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability variation setting flag 203k and turning on the power again in a state where the power is cut off, thereby reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203m is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch (entered in the V region) in one round during the jackpot game (one round of jackpot in this embodiment). . Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203m and a discharge number counter 203u described later. The probability variation passage counter 203m is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch has passed (detection of entering the V region is detected) (S1414 in FIG. 438). Further, after executing the process of determining whether or not the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1511 in FIG. 439). The probability variation passage counter 203m is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and the winning in the specific winning port 65a is detected. Based on the above, 1 is added and updated (S1403 in FIG. 438). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203p) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharging number counter 203u and the probability variation passing counter 203m) are equal. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S1511 in FIG. 439). The value of the winning number counter 203p is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203q is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball throwing period after one round is completed and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to ON, it means that it is a ball throwing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to ON, a later ball timer 203r, which will be described later, is added and updated by 1 (see S1505 in FIG. 439). The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether the time necessary for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for.

  The remaining ball timer 203r is necessary for discharging the game balls won in the variable winning device 65 when one preset round ends and the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether time has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 0.5 seconds. In this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the remaining ball timer. It is set as the upper limit value of 203r. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203r has reached the upper limit (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings. (S1507 in FIG. 439). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, the ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and the game ball is transferred to the sorting device (V character) at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round of the big hit C or big hit E. It is possible to suppress fraud that flows down.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203k is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch. You may make it the structure which is not set to. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probable state is provided improperly.

  The probability variation valid flag 203s is passed when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch (enters the V region) after the V role has been switched to an arrangement that cannot be assigned to the first region (V region). This is a flag for determining whether or not (incoming ball) is valid. When the probability variation valid flag 203s is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch.

  The probability variation valid timer 203t is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203s described above is set to ON. After the probability change valid timer 203t switches the V role to the non-V side arrangement, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability change switch. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has reached the V combination to pass through the probability change switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203t is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. Thereafter, even if the probability variation switch passes through the probability variation switch, it is determined as illegal and is not determined as passing.

  As a result, the game ball is illegally entered into the V region and passed through the probability change switch, the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch, or the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing through the radio wave. Or damage caused by fraud.

  The discharged number counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharged number counter 203u is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls (S1511 in FIG. 439).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

  Next, a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 411 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example.

  As shown in FIG. 411, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is roughly divided into three gaming states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, the probability variation state shown in the middle part of FIG. 411, and the time shortening state shown in the lower part of FIG.

  As described above, the normal state indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of a big hit is low, so that the game ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. (Electric combination 640a is difficult to be opened), so that the gaming state is most disadvantageous for the player. Further, as described above, the probability variation state indicates the probability variation state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol. The jackpot probability is high, and the right entry is made to the second entrance 640. Since the game balls enter frequently, the game state is most advantageous for the player. The short-time state indicates a low-probability state of a special symbol and a short-time state of a normal symbol. Although the jackpot probability is low, the game ball is moved to the second entrance 640 by making a right strike. Since the player frequently enters the game, the game state is relatively advantageous to the player.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, there is a possibility that the normal state is shifted to another state only when the jackpot is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 411, if the first special symbol is a big hit, and if either big hit A or B is selected as the big hit type, the game ball is moved to the V region in the fifth round of the big hit. On the condition that he entered the ball, after the jackpot is over, will shift to a probable change state. In jackpots A and B, a game ball can be made to enter the V region by simply making a right strike in five rounds. If no game ball enters the V area in the fifth round due to the player not launching a game ball in the fifth round, the game state after the big hit ends Is set. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, when the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is impossible (difficult to) to enter the game ball into the V region in the fifth round of the jackpot. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, it shifts to the short-time state.

  In addition, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 411, there is a possibility that, from the probability variation state to another state, not only when a big hit is made, but also when falling by a falling lottery, the game state may be shifted to another gaming state. Specifically, when the jackpot is set in the probability variation state and the jackpot E determined at a rate of 20% is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the short-time state. In addition, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall in the falling lottery is obtained 100 times before the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the probability variation state is set, the state shifts to the short-time state. Further, after the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times or more after the probability variation state is set, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery, the normal state is entered. On the other hand, if the jackpot is a jackpot in the probability variation state and the jackpot D determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot is again set to the probability variation state (the most advantageous probability variation state is looped). For this reason, in the probability variation state, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will be a big hit and a big hit D before it falls.

  In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 411, from the short-time state to another gaming state, in addition to the case where a big win is won, and when a special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot ends, Transition to the state. More specifically, when the jackpot is a jackpot in the short-time state and a jackpot D determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous probability change state. In addition, a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the previous jackpot is over, thereby shifting to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the jackpot E determined at a rate of 20% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is again set to the shortened state (shortest state Loop). In the short-time state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/250, which is the same as the normal state, so the possibility of winning the jackpot again within 100 times is not very high (it will be a big hit again at a rate of about 33%). . Therefore, when the time is short, the possibility of shifting to the normal state increases. As described above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the short-time state and the probability variation state (the operation other than the jackpot probability is the same, such as the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a), so the normal-state short-time state While is set, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the player is in a probable state. In other words, even if a short time state is set which is disadvantageous compared to the probability variation state (that is, it is easy to shift to the normal state), it is possible to make it seem as if the player is playing in the probability variation state. Motivation for games can be kept high. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the first control example, since it is possible to provide a novel game nature that goes back and forth between three kinds of game states, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 404, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric role. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an object is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 outputs signals output from the various switches 208. In addition, various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 432) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the game ball is set according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when an instruction to launch a game ball is given by the main control device 110. is there. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the game ball is off (not operated). The launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 performs display control such as output of sound in the sound output device 226, output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effect (variable display). The setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the device 114 is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, PUSH button 10317, etc. are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. 4A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a back mode lottery table 222b, a hold change lottery table 222c, a change point calculation table 222d, a batch change lottery table 222e, a chance charge lottery table 222f, and a continuous suggestion effect selection table. 222g and an interrupt continuous lottery table 222h.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The back mode lottery table 222b is data for drawing lots of changes in the back mode to indicate the expectation level in which the probability change state is set in the gaming state (probability change state, time reduction state) in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set. Is a specified data table. Details of the back mode lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the back mode selection table 222b.

  As shown in FIG. 413, in the back mode lottery table 222b, the current game state is a probable change state, and it is also confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold, In order to draw the change of the back mode in the state where the table for probability change to be referred to draw the change and the current game state is the probability change state, but the lottery result corresponding to the fall is included in the hold At least a table for falling and a table for falling already referred to in order to draw a change of the rear mode in a state where it has already fallen to the time-shortening state.

  As shown in FIG. 413, the back mode lottery table 222b is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y for each combination of the current back mode type and the back mode of the transition destination (after change). Has been. Here, the effect lottery counter 223y is composed of a random number counter whose value is periodically updated, and is updated to any value within the range of “0 to 99” at each update timing. Using the value of the effect lottery counter 223y, the effect modes of various effects are selected. The effect lottery counter 223y is provided with a separate independent random number counter for each type of effect for which the lottery is executed. That is, the effect lottery counter 223y is a general term for random number counters used for lottery of various effects.

  As shown in FIG. 413, in the probability variation continuation table, for the combination of the current back mode is the cave search mode and the destination back mode is the temple search mode (mode transfer from the cave search mode to the temple search mode) A range of values “0 to 19” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with it. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the effect lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20, so the current gaming state is In a state where the probability change state is not included and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold, the ratio of changing (changing) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20% (20/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 413, the value “20, 21” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 random numbers that the production lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is two, so the current gaming state is a probabilistic state. And in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the ratio of changing (changing) from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is 2% (2/100). In addition, when the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of “22 to 99”), the mode shift is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

  Thus, in the state where the cave search mode is set, when the probability variation continuation table is referred to (when the probability variation state is not included in the hold and the falling lottery result is not included), the fluctuation display is displayed. Each time it is executed, it shifts from the cave search mode to another mode at a rate of 22%. That is, the average number of times the cave search mode is continued is reduced to about 5 times. In other words, even if the cave search mode is set, the period of time set in the cave search mode is likely to be shortened because it shifts to another mode with a higher expectation in a relatively short period of time (a mode with a high expectation) ) Stay ratio is likely to be high). Therefore, the longer the period of stay in the mode with high expectation, the better the player's expectation that the probabilistic state is continuing, so the player's interest in the game can be improved. it can.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the probability variation continuation table, the value range “0” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the effect lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1, so the current gaming state is In a state where the probability change state is not included and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold, the ratio (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100). Also, as shown in FIG. 413, the value range “1-10” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 random values that the production lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10, so the current gaming state is a probable state. In the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the ratio (change) from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10% (10/100). When the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of “11 to 99”), the mode is not changed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

  Thus, in the state where the temple search mode is set, when the probability variation continuation table is referred to (when the probability variation state is not included and the falling lottery result is not included in the hold), the variation display is performed. Every time it is executed, it shifts to the cave search mode at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 10%, the probable state is confirmed and it is confirmed that the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. Transition to mode. That is, it is difficult to shift to the cave search mode with low expectation, and it is easy to shift to the super temple mode with high expectation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the probability variation continuation table, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. Further, for the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode, a range of values “0 to 4” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with it. Of the 100 random values that the production lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is five, so the current gaming state is a probabilistic state. In the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). Note that when the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, a range of “5 to 99”), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the super temple search mode is maintained.

  Thus, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, the mode is shifted to another mode only at a rate of 5%, and even if the mode is switched, the temple search with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. Since the mode is changed, the player can maintain his expectation for the probable change state even when the highest expectation level is changed from the super temple mode to another back mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-falling table, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range “0-4” of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 random numbers that the production lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current gaming state is a probable state, Moreover, in the state where the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the ratio of changing (changing) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Note that when the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, a range of “5 to 99”), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-falling table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range “0-9” of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 random values that the production lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10, so that the current gaming state is a probable state, Moreover, in the state where the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. In addition, when the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, a range of “10 to 99”), the mode shift is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the unfallen table, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range “0 to 99” of the effect lottery counter 223y. That is, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, if the non-falling table is referred to, it always shifts (falls) to the temple search mode. When the table for non-falling is referred to in the super temple search mode, it means that at the time of the previous fluctuation start, the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, and the new drop-off held before the start of the current fluctuation display This is only when the holding ball is the result of a lottery of falling. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained in spite of the fact that the fall lottery result is included, in this case, the structure is always shifted to the temple search mode.

  As described above, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the non-falling table (that is, the lottery result corresponding to the falling is included in the hold), the probability variation continuation table is referred to. The mode transition rate from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is lower than the case where the cave search mode is performed, and even if the mode is shifted to the temple search mode, the rate of falling to the cave search mode is high. That is, the staying rate in the cave search mode with low expectation is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property that predicts whether or not the current game state is a probabilistic state using the stay ratio in the cave search mode as a clue, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range “0, 1” of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random number values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is two, so the current gaming state is the short-time state. In this case, the ratio of changing (changing) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Note that when the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, a range of “2 to 99”), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range “0 to 29” of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 random values that the production lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30, so the current gaming state is a probabilistic state, Moreover, in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the hold, the ratio of changing (changing) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. In addition, when the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of “30 to 99”), the mode shift is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 413, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode in the fallen table. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range “0 to 99” of the effect lottery counter 223y. That is, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, when the fallen table is referred to, the transition to the temple search mode is surely made (falls) as in the case where the unfallen table is referenced. The case where the fallen table is referred to in the super temple search mode is only when the last change start time is in a probable variation state and the result of the special symbol lottery is a fallen lottery result. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained in spite of the fact that the fall lottery result is included, in this case, the structure is always shifted to the temple search mode.

  In this way, when the rear mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the fallen table (that is, in a short time state), the temple is further removed from the cave search mode than when the unfallen table is referenced. The mode transition rate to the search mode is low, and even if the mode is shifted to the temple search mode, the rate of falling to the cave search mode is greatly increased. That is, the staying rate in the cave search mode with low expectation is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property that predicts whether or not the current game state is a probabilistic state using the stay ratio in the cave search mode as a clue, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The reserved change lottery table 222c refers to the pre-read result executed based on the detection of the start winning for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and holds the number of reserved balls corresponding to the start winning. It is a data table referred when performing lottery of the display mode. Details of the pending change lottery table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 414 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the pending change lottery table 222c.

  As shown in FIG. 414 (a), in the hold change lottery table 222c, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y in which each hold symbol form (white, blue, green, red) is selected for each prefetch result (variation type). Are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), when the variation type is “out of length”, the white reserved symbol is in the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is “0 to 98”. A mode is defined in association with each other, and a blue reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the value “99” of the effect lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red reserved symbols. Therefore, when the pre-reading result is the extraordinary fluctuation type (the pre-fetching result is notified from the main control device 110 by the winning information command), 99% as the number of reserved balls corresponding to the starting win A white reserved symbol pattern is set at a ratio of (99/100), and a blue reserved symbol pattern is set at a ratio of 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of extraordinary deviation, a white reserved symbol pattern is set, and it is very rare that a hold change (a reserved symbol pattern other than white) is set.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), when the variation type is “out-going normal reach”, the white reserved symbol form is associated with the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is “0 to 94”. A blue reserved symbol pattern is defined in association with a range in which the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is “95 to 99”. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red reserved symbols. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is out of place and the variation type is normal reach, a white reserved symbol pattern is set at a rate of 95% (95/100) as the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the start winning prize, and 5% ( 5/100) is set as the blue reserved symbol form. That is, even in the case of detachment normal reach, the white reserved symbol pattern is set at a relatively high rate, and the rate at which the hold change (the reserved symbol mode other than white) is set is low.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), when the variation type is “outside super reach”, the white reserved symbol form corresponds to the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is “0 to 74”. A blue reserved symbol pattern is defined in association with the range “75 to 89”, and a green reserved symbol pattern is defined in association with the range “90 to 97”. , “98, 99” is defined in association with a red reserved symbol form. That is, in the case of the super-reach variation type in which the variation time is long and a relatively flashy (lively) production mode is executed, the ratio of the white reserved symbol mode is 75% (75/100) and others. And the ratio of the blue reserved symbol form becomes as high as 15% (15/100). Furthermore, it can be set to a green or red reserved symbol mode. That is, the ratio of the green reserved symbol pattern is 8% (8/100), and the ratio of the red reserved symbol pattern is 2% (2/100). Therefore, in the case of the green or red reserved symbols, at least the fluctuation type below the normal reach (the fluctuation type with low expectation) is denied, so the player's expectation for jackpot is improved. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), when the variation type is “winning normal reach”, the white reserved symbol pattern form is associated with the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is “0 to 74”. A blue reserved symbol pattern is defined in association with the range “75 to 84”, a green reserved symbol pattern is defined in association with the range “85 to 94”, For the range of “95 to 99”, a red reserved symbol form is defined in association with it. That is, the ratio set to the green and red reserved symbols is higher than in the case of outlier super reach.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), when the variation type is “winning super reach”, the white reserved symbol form corresponds to the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is “0 to 49”. A blue reserved symbol pattern is defined in association with the range “50 to 59”, and a green reserved symbol pattern is defined in association with the range “60 to 84”. , A red reserved symbol form is defined in association with the range of “85 to 99”. That is, the rate of occurrence of the hold change itself is improved and the rate of selection of the green and red hold symbol patterns is also higher than the variation type of outlier super reach and hit normal reach. Therefore, when it is set to the green or red reserved symbol aspect, the sense of expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

  Returning to FIG. 412, the description will be continued. The change point calculation table 222d is a data table that is referred to when calculating a change point that is a determination criterion when drawing whether or not to execute the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403). Although the details will be described later, at the time of lottery of the hold batch change effect, this change point is different between the variation type of each hold ball and the jackpot expectation indicated by the hold symbol form (notice the low expectation) It is configured to be set to a larger number of points as it is too much). It is configured such that an effect that improves the expectation by the hold collective change effect is more easily executed as the reserved symbol pattern with a relatively low expectation is set by the hold change effect. Thereby, an expectation degree can be alert | reported more appropriately by the holding | maintenance symbol aspect. Details of the change point calculation table 222d will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 414 (b), in the change point calculation table 222d, change points are associated with each change type of the reserved ball (prefetch result) and for each held symbol form set for the reserved ball. It is prescribed. In the first control example, when a plurality of held balls are held at the time when the start winning is detected, the change points of each held ball are calculated by the change point calculation table 222d, and the total value of the change points is calculated. Based on the above, it is configured to draw lots of whether or not to execute the hold batch change effect. That is, the higher the change point total value, the higher the execution ratio of the pending batch change effect. As a result, even if a low expectation degree is notified once in the hold change effect, an opportunity to improve the expectation can be given by the hold batch change effect, so that the expectation degree can be notified more appropriately by the hold symbol form. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 414 (b), “0” is defined as the change point in association with the variation type of short deviation and long deviation, regardless of the reserved symbol form. In addition, for the fluctuation type of outlier normal reach, “1” is defined as a change point in association with the reserved pattern mode of white reservation, and “0” is set as the change point for the other reserved symbol modes. Are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the variation type of outlier superreach, “2” is defined as a change point in association with the reserved pattern mode of white hold, and “ “1” is defined in association with each other, and “0” is defined in association with other reserved symbols as a change point. In addition, for the variation types of the hit normal reach and the hit super reach, the change point is defined as 3 as the change point with respect to the hold symbol pattern of white hold, and as the change point with respect to the hold symbol pattern of blue hold 2 is defined in association with it, 1 is defined as a change point in association with the green symbol on hold, and 0 is defined in association with the red symbol on hold as a change point.

  As described above, the first control example is configured such that the change points increase as the holding pattern mode with lower expectation is set for the holding ball of the variation type with higher expectation. In other words, the larger the room for improving the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol aspect, the greater the number of change points, thereby making it easier to allow the execution of the hold batch change effect. By comprising in this way, a more suitable expectation degree can be alert | reported by the reservation symbol aspect.

  Returning to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The batch change lottery table 222e is a data table that is referred to when a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the hold batch change effect is performed. Details of the batch change lottery table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 415 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the batch change lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 415 (a), in the batch change lottery table 222e, the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y for which execution of the hold batch change effect is determined is defined for each total value of change points. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415 (a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the total value of change points being zero. When the total value of change points is 1, the value “0-9” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with it. When the total value of change points is 2, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined. “0-24” are defined in association with each other, and the value “0-49” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the total value of change points of 3 or more. That is, if the change point is 1, the hold batch change effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and if the change point is 2, the hold batch change effect is selected at a rate of 25%, and the change point is 3. For example, the pending batch change effect is selected at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, in the first control example, as the total number of change points increases (a holding pattern mode with a low expectation is set for a holding ball of a variation type with a high expectation), the hold collective change effect. The ratio of determining the execution of is increased. As a result, the larger the room for improving the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol aspect, the greater the number of change points, thereby making it easier to allow the execution of the hold batch change effect. By comprising in this way, a more suitable expectation degree can be alert | reported by the reservation symbol aspect.

  Returning to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The chance charge lottery table 222f is a data table that is referred to in order to lottery whether or not to execute the chance charge effect. Details of the chance charge lottery table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 415 (b). FIG. 415 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the chance charge lottery table 222f. As shown in FIG. 415 (b), in the chance charge lottery table 222f, the number of reserved balls and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y determined to execute the chance charge effect are associated with each variation type. It is prescribed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415 (b), in the fluctuation pattern of outlier normal reach and outlier super reach, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 1, the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is “0 to 0”. 4 "is defined in association with it. In addition, the value range of “0-14” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the number of retained balls being 2, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined for the number of retained balls of 3 or more. The range “0 to 24” is defined in association with it. That is, if the number of held balls is 0 or 1, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the number of held balls is 2, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 15%. If the number of held balls is 3 or more, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 25%.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 415 (b), in the variation pattern of the hit normal reach, the range of “0 to 34” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the number of reserved balls being 0 or 1. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 2 or more. That is, if the number of held balls is 0 or 1, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of held balls is 2 or more, execution of the chance charge effect is determined. Absent. That is, when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, the determination rate of the chance charge effect is higher than that of the deviation variation pattern. The reason why the chance charge effect is not executed when the number of held balls is 2 or more is to suppress the problem that the big hit is started before the exhaustion of the spirit gauge is over. That is, in the case of hit normal reach, since the variation time is relatively short (the chance of performing the chance up effect is small), there is a high possibility that the spirit gauge will accumulate beyond the timing at which the chance up is possible. The number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge effect is determined according to the number of reserved balls only. That is, the greater the number of reserved balls, the higher the possibility that a greater number of feeling gauges will be set. Therefore, this control example is configured to avoid the execution of the chance charge effect when the number of reserved balls is large in a situation where the change is a hit. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the big hit is started before the exhaustion gauge number is consumed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 415 (b), in the winning super reach variation pattern, the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, and the range of values “0 to 49” of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated and defined. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 3, the range “0-9” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with it. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of reserved balls being four. That is, if the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the number of reserved balls is 3, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is 4, execution of the chance charge effect is not determined. In other words, when the number of reserved balls is 2 or less, the chance charge effect determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern of losing or the variation pattern of winning normal reach. Further, when the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution rate of the chance charge effect is low, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the chance charge effect is not executed. This is to suppress the problem that the big hit is started before the gas gauge is consumed, as in the case of the hit normal reach.

  Returning to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g is used when selecting the effect scenario of the continuation suggestion effect that is executed over the 96th to 99th variable display effects after the jackpot ends (that is, after the start of the short time state of the normal symbol). A data table to be referenced. Details of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 416 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 416, the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g includes a continuation confirmation table that is referred to when the continuation of the probability change state is confirmed until the end of the continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation suggestion effect end time. The hold ball is not held, but it is determined that the continuation rich table to be referred to when the probability variation state is maintained within the hold and the end of the continuation suggestion production are in a short time state. And at least a non-continuation table. Each table defines a plurality of combinations (scenarios) of effect modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 416, in the continuation determination table, the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined for each of the seven scenarios “01H” to “07H”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 416, a weak attack with low expectation (see FIG. 393 (a)) is executed in the 96th to 98th fluctuation display, and the expectation is high in the 99th fluctuation display. The value “0-9” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario “01H” in which the strong attack (see FIG. 393 (b)) is executed to break through the door 806. In addition, a weak attack (see FIG. 393 (a)) is executed in the 96th and 97th fluctuation display, and a strong attack (see FIG. 393 (b)) is executed in the 98th and 99th fluctuation display to break through the door 806. The value “10-19” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario “02H” of the mode to perform, and a weak attack (see FIG. 393 (a)) is executed in the 96th variation display, For the production scenario “03H” in which the strong attack (see FIG. 393 (b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken in the 97th to 99th variation display, the value “20 to 59” of the production lottery counter 223y is For the production scenario “04H” that is defined in association with each other and the strong attack (see FIG. 393 (b)) is executed in all the 96th to 99th fluctuation displays to break through the door 806. The value of the selected counter 223y "60-89" are defined in association with each other. That is, the selection scenario of the production scenario with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of the production scenario with a large number of strong attacks is high.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 416, the continuation determination table is provided with a special-type production scenario that breaks through the door 806 with a fluctuation count of less than 99. That is, the production scenario “05H” (in the range of the value “90, 91” of the production lottery counter 223y) in a mode in which a weak attack is performed in the 96th variation production and the door 806 is broken as it is, and the weak attack in the 96th production, 97 The production scenario “06H” (the range of the production lottery counter 223y “92 to 94”) in which the strong attack is made by breaking through the door 806, the 96th and the 97th weak attack, and the 98th An effect scenario “07H” (a range of the value “95 to 99” of the effect lottery counter 223y) is set in a mode in which a strong attack is made to break through the door 806. These special mode scenarios may be set only when the continuation determination table is referenced. In other words, until the time when the 99th fluctuation display ends, there is a possibility that it is executed only in a state where it is determined that the probability variation state is continuing. The interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 416, four scenarios “08H” to “0BH” are defined in the continuous rich table. The flow of the productions of the production scenarios “08H” to “0BH” is exactly the same as the production scenarios “01H” to “04H” described above, and the details are omitted here. As shown in FIG. 416, the value “0-14” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario “08H”, and the value “15-” of the effect lottery counter 223y is specified for the effect scenario “09H”. 29 ”is defined in association with the production scenario“ 0AH ”, the value“ 30 to 69 ”of the production lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the production scenario“ 0BH ”, and the value“ 30 ”of the production lottery counter 223y is provided. 70 to 99 "are defined in association with each other. That is, similar to the table for continuation determination, the selection scenario of the production scenario with a small number of strong attacks is low and the selection rate of the production scenario with a large number of strong attacks is high. If the lottery result corresponding to a fall falls during the scenario specified in the table for continuous enrichment, the effect specified in the non-continuation table is displayed from the fluctuation display resulting in the lottery result of the fall. The production scenario “0CH” is switched to one of the scenarios. Thus, even if the reserved ball for the 99th change display is not held at the start of the continuation suggestion effect, the game state at the 99th change end time can be accurately determined by switching the scenario on the way. Can be notified.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 416, four scenarios “0CH” to “0FH” are defined in the non-continuation table. The flow of the productions of the production scenarios “0CH” to “0FH” is exactly the same as the production scenarios “01H” to “04H” described above, except that the door 806 finally fails to break through. Details are omitted. As shown in FIG. 416, the value “0-39” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario “0CH”, and the value “40˜” of the effect lottery counter 223y is specified for the effect scenario “0DH”. 79 ”is defined in association with the production scenario“ 0EH ”and the value“ 80 to 94 ”of the production lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the production scenario“ 0FH ”. “95 to 99” are defined in association with each other. That is, in contrast to the table for continuation determination and the table for continuation richness, it is configured so that the selection rate of the production scenario with a small number of strong attacks is high and the selection rate of the production scenario with a large number of strong attacks is low. Yes. Therefore, as the number of strong attacks increases, the possibility that the non-continuation table is referred to and the production scenario is determined becomes low, so during the execution of the continuous suggestion production, pay attention to the contents of each attack. Can be done. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222h is a data table that is referred to in order to lottery for determining whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 399) and the effect type. Details of the interrupt continuous lottery table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 417 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the interrupt continuous lottery table 222h. As shown in FIG. 417, in the interrupt repeated lottery table 222h, for each variation type, an effect type and a value range of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 417, in the extraordinary fluctuation pattern, for the production type of the production mode that is executed during the normal fluctuation production period and can reduce the monsters to the minimum of the remaining 10 bodies. Thus, the value “0-4” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with it. For this reason, in the case of extraordinary deviation, the interrupt continuous effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of outlier normal reach, the effect lottery is performed for the effect type of the effect mode that is executed during the normal effect effect period and can reduce the monster to the remaining five at the minimum. The value of the counter 223y is defined in association with the value, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is executed for the effect type of the effect mode that is executed during the reach change and can reduce the monsters to the remaining four at the minimum. “10 to 14” are defined in association with each other. For this reason, in the deviation normal reach fluctuation pattern, the execution of the ratio interruption continuous hit effect of 15% in total is determined. In other words, the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of the extra long.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of outlier super reach, the effect of the production mode that can reduce the monsters to the minimum of the remaining five bodies as the interruption continuous hit production executed during the normal fluctuation production period. The value “0-4” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the type, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y for the effect type of the effect mode in which the monsters can be reduced to the minimum of the remaining four bodies. “5 to 9” are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interruption continuous hit effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value “10-14” of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the monster to a minimum of four bodies. The value “15-19” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode that can be specified and can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of three. That is, since the execution ratio of the total interruption continuous hit effect is higher than the normal reach, it is possible to reduce the number of monsters to a smaller number of monsters, thereby improving the player's expectation for jackpot.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of the hit normal reach, the production type of the production mode that can reduce the monsters to the minimum of the remaining five as the interruption continuous hit production executed during the normal fluctuation production period. On the other hand, the value “0” to “3” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the value “4” of the effect lottery counter 223y for the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to zero. It is defined in association. In addition, as an interruption repeated hitting effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value “5 to 24” of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the monsters to a minimum of four bodies. The value “25” of the effect lottery counter 223y is specified in association with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. That is, since the execution ratio of the total interruption consecutive hit effect is higher than the case of losing, there is a possibility of defeating all the monsters, so that the player's expectation for jackpot can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of the hit super reach, the effect of the effect mode that can reduce the monsters to the minimum of the remaining four bodies as the interrupt repeated effect that is executed during the normal change effect period. The value “0, 1” of the production lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the type, and the value “2” of the production lottery counter 223y is provided for the production type of the production mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to zero. Are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interruption repeated hitting effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value “3 to 19” of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the monsters to a minimum of four. An effect mode in which the value “20 to 39” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to three, and the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. The value “40, 41” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type. In other words, the percentage of execution of the total interruption consecutive hit production is higher than in the case of miss or hit normal reach, and the possibility of defeating all monsters is higher, so the player's expectation for jackpot is improved. Can do.

  As described above, in the first control example, the execution timing of the interrupting strike effect and the number of monsters that can be subverted are made different for each variation type. The configuration can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more actively perform the continuous hitting operation during the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt hit effect can be improved.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 412 (b). FIG. 412 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, a change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a game state storage area 223f. A short time guaranteed number counter 223g, a continuous scenario storage area 223h, a right-handed winning flag 223i, a continuous hit type storage area 223j, a chance charge standby flag 223k, a charge number counter 223m, a charge state number counter 223n, , A batch change flag 223p, a change point storage area 223q, a reserved symbol state storage area 223r, a variable time timer 223s, an operation valid period timer 223t, a stop operation count counter 223u, a continuous hit valid period timer 223v, Change period And timer 223X, and effect random counter 223Y, and the other memory area 223z are at least provided.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110 up to four times, and the special symbol 2 reserved The ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of held balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Thus, the number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol The number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after the addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e when the variable display in FIG. The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S3910 in FIG. 451). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display controller 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114. .

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be changed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The normal reserved ball number counter 223c differs from the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in that the target is changed from a special symbol to a normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description is omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3904 in FIG. 451). It is turned off when variable display is set on the display device 81 (see S4202 in FIG. 455). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3907 in FIG. 451), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4208 in FIG. 455). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The game state storage area 223f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223f is updated every time a status command is output from the main controller 110 every time a change occurs in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S3902 in FIG. 451). Note that the game state storage area 223f is configured by, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not the normal symbol is in the short state, and the least significant bit indicates whether or not the special symbol is in a probable state. Therefore, in the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol normal state”, the lower 2 bits are “00B”, and in the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, the lower bit The two bits are “01B”, and the lower two bits are “11B” in the “special symbol probability changing state” and the “normal symbol time-short state”. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223f.

  The time reduction guaranteed number counter 223g is a counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations for which the time reduction state is guaranteed. At this time, the initial value of the short-time guarantee counter 223g is set to 0, and is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S4107 in FIG. 454). In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time execution of a new variation display is set (see S4304 in FIG. 456). As described above, in the first control example, the time-short state of the normal symbol is maintained until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. By counting the number of guaranteed short times by the time guaranteed number of times counter 223g, the sound lamp control device 113 can also accurately grasp the number of guaranteed times.

  The continuation scenario storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of effect scenario determined from the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. In this continuous scenario storage area 223h, the initial value is set to 00H, and when the production scenario is determined by lottery using the continuous suggestion production selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start timing of the probability variation continuation production production, Data indicating the production scenario is stored (see S4409 in FIG. 457). During the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion, the variation display mode at the start of each variation display is determined based on the data in the continuation scenario storage area 223h (see S4415 in FIG. 457).

  The right-handed winning flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the running big hit is a big hit won during the right-handed gaming state (ordinary symbol time-short state). If this right-handed winning flag 223i is on, it indicates that it is a big win that was won during the right-handed gaming state, and if it is off, it is a big win that was won during the left-handed gaming state (ie, first win). Indicates that At the end of the big hit, the back mode is set according to the state of the right-handed winning flag 223i. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see S4109 and S4110 in FIG. 454). As described above, when a big hit is made in the left-handed gaming state (that is, a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol), only a 50% rate shifts to the probable state, while a big hit in the right-handed gaming state When it becomes (that is, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol), it shifts to the probability change state at a rate of 80%. The difference between the ratios is notified by the degree of expectation indicated by the back mode.

  The repeated hitting type storage area 223j is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the interrupted hitting effect (the execution timing of the effect and the lower limit value of the monster subtraction number). In accordance with the data in the continuous hitting type storage area 223j, the start timing of the interruption continuous hitting effect, the number of monster subtractions for pressing the PUSH button 10317, and the like are set.

  The chance charge standby flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (chance charge standby period) from when execution of the chance charge effect is determined until the chance charge effect is actually started. Indicates that it is a chance charge waiting period. The chance charge standby flag 223k is set to off when the initial value is set to off and execution of the chance charge effect is determined (see S4564 in FIG. 459), and execution of the chance charge effect is started. Is set to OFF (see S3313 in FIG. 443). When a new start prize is detected while the chance charge standby flag 223k is on, the number of gauges is added to the predetermined number of gauges stored in the chance charge effect executed thereafter. Is determined.

  The charge number counter 223m is a counter indicating the number of gauge gauges notified in the chance charge effect. The initial value of the charge number counter 223m is set to 0. When execution of the chance charge effect is determined, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is set (in FIG. 459). (See S4563). In addition, when the chance gauge effect is executed, every time the gait gauge is consumed, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated (see S3559 and S3561 in FIG. 446).

  The charge state number counter 223n is a counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until consumption of the spirit gauge accumulated by the chance charge effect is completed. The charge state number counter 223n is set to a value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect (see S3314 in FIG. 443), and the value is set every time execution of a new variable display effect is set. One is subtracted (see S4302 in FIG. 456). While the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 1 or more, every time when the chance up effect can be executed, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the chance up effect by consuming the spirit gauge.

  The batch change flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the pending batch change effect is being executed. If the flag is on, it means that the hold batch change effect is being executed. Indicates that the production is not in progress. The initial value of the batch change flag 223p is set to OFF, and is set to ON when execution of the hold batch change effect is set (see S4059 in FIG. 453).

  The change point storage area 223q is a storage area for storing the change points specified with reference to the above-described change point calculation table 222d. The change point storage area 223q is configured to be able to store change points of each holding ball separately.

  The reserved symbol state storage area 223r is a storage area for storing data indicating the reserved symbol aspect of each reserved ball number symbol. With the data stored in the reserved symbol state storage area 223r, it is possible to accurately grasp the reserved symbol form of each reserved ball number symbol.

  The fluctuation time timer 223s is a timer for measuring the fluctuation time. Based on the timer value of the variation time timer 223s, the progress status of the variation display effect can be accurately determined.

  The operation valid period timer 223t is a timer for measuring a period during which the push button 10317 is valid in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). The operation valid period timer 223t determines whether or not the operation on the push button 10317 in the press stop effect is treated as valid. In the press stop effect, separate button images and effective period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in actuality, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is enabled by a single operation effective period. Is determined. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the determination as to whether or not the stop operation for each symbol sequence is valid, so that the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The stop operation number counter 223u is a counter indicating the number of remaining stop operations that can be executed in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). If a stop operation is detected during the operation effective period when the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 3, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed during the operation effective period when the value is 2. When an operation is detected, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed. When the value is 1 and a stop operation is detected during the operation valid period, the central symbol row is stopped and displayed.

  The continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is a timer for measuring a period during which the continuous hitting operation with respect to the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 399). Whether or not to handle the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the continuous hitting effect as valid is determined by the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v.

  The batch change period timer 223x is a timer for measuring a period during which the push button 10317 is valid in the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 403 and 404). This batch change period timer 223x determines whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the hold batch change effect is treated as valid.

  The effect lottery counter 223y is a random number counter for executing the lottery of the effect mode as described above.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the other memory area 223z, for example, a winning information storage area for storing winning information based on a winning information command received from the main control device 110 is provided. The winning information storage area has a storage area composed of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Each area stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected in the main controller 110, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start win are used. , Various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, various information (whether it is determined, the stop type, the variation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the RAM 223. It is stored in a winning information storage area (not shown) which is a storage area. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, an elapsed time timer for measuring the production time, and the like. doing. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 451) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure and the like, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122, have. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 418 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S8001 in FIG. 460) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first start port 64a is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 460).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 419). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 418, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols with the numbers “1” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is generated, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 even though the changing effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background mode storage area 233k, and an interruption data storage area 233m.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, so that the electric symbol is released as a big hit of the normal symbol, and the ball enters the second As it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 421 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 421). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 422 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 422 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Data is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 422).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 422, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 422, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 419 on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S8005 in FIG. 460). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S9705 in FIG. 471 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 462 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG.) So that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 462 (b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 463 to 468) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 469 and 470) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9601 in FIG. 471 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed (see FIG. 471 (b)). If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 423), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 423) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 423), which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 462 (b) )), The pointer update process (see S9305 in FIG. 470 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 423), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 423 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 462 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S9307 in FIG. 469). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S9813 in FIG. 472). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S9814 in FIG. 472). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 462 (b)) is executed (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The background mode storage area 233k is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the currently set background mode. In addition, the interruption data storage area 233m is a storage area for temporarily holding information indicating the display mode at the time of interruption when the display mode is instructed.

  Next, the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 424 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 301 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 302 is executed. A certain RAM 303 is built in.

  The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input / output port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input / output port 305. Also, the audio data designated by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type in the audio synthesis unit 306.

  The voice synthesizer 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizer LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier 307 as synthesized voice data. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. Accordingly, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 424, the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (audio file) 302a.

  The audio file storage area (audio file) 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 are stored. When the execution of various effects is notified by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound file corresponding to the effects is read from the sound file storage area (sound file) 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the sound synthesizer 306. Is done.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 424, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a continuous hitting sound output flag 303a, a reproduction position storage area 303b, and a music output flag 303c.

  The continuous hitting sound output flag 303a is a flag indicating the type of the continuous hitting sound that has been output most recently (whether it is the first continuous hitting sound or the second consecutive hitting sound) during execution of the interrupted hitting effect. If this continuous hitting sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the last hitting sound output is the first continuous hitting sound, and if it is “02H”, it indicates that it is the second continuous hitting sound. By configuring the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a so that the type of the last hitting sound output can be grasped, a different type of repeated hitting sound can be alternately reproduced for different channels every time a hitting operation is detected. it can. Therefore, since the voice mode during execution of the continuous hitting operation can be diversified, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The reproduction position storage area 303b is a storage area for storing data indicating the reproduction position at the time when the reproduction of the music is instructed to be interrupted. When resuming the reproduction of the music, it is possible to accurately resume the reproduction from the interrupted reproduction position based on the data stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b.

  The music output flag 303c is a flag indicating whether or not a variable display effect or the like is executed and a music based on an audio file is being output. If this music output flag 303c is on, it means that music is being output, and if it is off, it means that music is not being output.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 425 to 439. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store in the corresponding buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the falling lottery counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 999, 99, 250, 999, 198, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 426 to 429.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance is performed. Execute (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431. After the through gate passing process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and then the other winning process is executed (S109). Further, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 426, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. Otherwise (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display hold in the special symbol) The number of times N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 434) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process proceeds to S208.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 is determined. It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 434) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. To store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for setting the start of variation of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed (S208), and this process is terminated. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S213). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol change start process (S208) is executed, the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b Based on the above, a special symbol lottery is performed. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2 The type is determined.

  In this control example, when the big symbol A is set as the stop symbol of the first symbol (special symbol), the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big symbol B is reached, the red symbol is red. When the LED is turned on and the jackpot C is reached, the green LED is turned on. When the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. When the jackpot E is reached, the red LED is turned on. Turn on the green LED. In addition, when it is off, the blue LED and the green LED are set to light. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process (S208) when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started. ) Is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203i is set to ON (S217). Then, a stop command is set (S218), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped, and after the process of S218 is executed, this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 426) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is selected (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and processing for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the change effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning category counter C2, the stop category counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the variation category counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area are stored. Each value is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently being probabilistic (a high probability state of a special symbol) (S302). Whether or not the probability change is being performed is determined by determining whether or not the value of the probability change flag 203h is 1 or more. Here, the probability variation flag 203h is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined in the process of S302 that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of the probability change (special symbol high probability state), so the falling lottery counter C4 acquired in the process of S301 By comparing the value with the falling lottery table 202e (see FIG. 407 (c)), a lottery (falling lottery) is performed as to whether or not the special symbol is likely to fall from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol ( S303). Specifically, the value of the falling lottery counter C4 is compared with two random numbers stored in the falling lottery table 202e one by one. As described above, two random numbers “0, 1” corresponding to the fall to the low probability state during the probability change (high probability state of the special symbol) are set, and the value of the fall lottery counter C4 When the random values corresponding to these falls coincide with each other, it is determined to fall into the low probability state. If the lottery result of the falling lottery is acquired in the process of S303, the process proceeds to S304.

  In the process of S304, it is determined whether or not it is a lottery result corresponding to the fall of the special symbol to the low probability state (S304), and when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the fall (S304: Yes), The probability variation flag 203h is set to OFF (S305), a state command indicating a fall to the low probability state is set (S306), and the process proceeds to S307.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a certain change state (high probability state of the special symbol), that is, it is in the low probability state of the special symbol (S302: No), the processing of S303 to S306 is performed. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S307.

  In the process of S307, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 407 (a)). The lottery result is acquired (S307). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with four random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a one by one. Four random numbers “0 to 3” are set as special symbol jackpots in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the value of the special bonus random number counter C1 and the random number value to win these are If they match, it is determined that the bonus is a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S309.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S304 that the lottery result does not correspond to a fall (S304: No), the process proceeds to S308. In the process of S308, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 407 (a)). The lottery result is acquired (S308). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the eight random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As the random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbols, eight values of “4 to 11” are set, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits these are as follows: If they match, it is determined that the bonus is a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S309.

  In the process of S309, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S307 or S308 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the acquired value of the special bonus random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) (S309), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S309: Yes), the values of the hour / minute counter 203g and the probability variation flag 203h are set to the initial values. (S310), and the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S311). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the big hit type selection table 202d, and the big hit types of the five types of special symbols (big hits A.about. Among the jackpots E), the current jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is within the range of “0-9” in the first special symbol jackpot, it is determined that it is a jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot), and “10-49”. If it is within the range, it is determined that it is a jackpot B (5R probability variation jackpot), and if it is within the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that it is a jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408 (b)). . In addition, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79” in the second special symbol jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot D (15R probability variation big hit) is in the range of “80 to 99”. If there is, it is determined as jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408 (c)).

  In the process of S311, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to E). In addition, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A to E) is set as the stop type. The display mode of the stop symbol set in the process of S311 is stopped and displayed by the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) described above.

  Next, referring to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIGS. 409 (a) and 410), the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning the big hit is selected. Here, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 409 (b) and FIG. 410, in order to make it easy to set a different variation pattern according to the set game state, the set game The special symbol variation time is set with reference to different data tables according to the state. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 409 (a)) in the variation pattern selection table 202b, while the gaming state is In the case of the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the probability variation / time reduction table 202b2 (see FIG. 410) in the variation pattern selection table 202b (S312). After the process of S312 is completed, the process proceeds to S318. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S312, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area of the RAM 203 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S309 that the special symbol lottery result is out (S309: No), it is next determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is greater than zero. (S313). In the process of S313, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is larger than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S313: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is decremented by one (S314), A state command indicating the value of the hour / minute counter 203g after subtraction is set (S315), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S313 that the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 (S313: No), the processes of S314 and S315 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S316.

  In the process of S316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop type selection stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol reserved ball execution area is selected. Based on the values of the counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) at the time of deviation is determined (S317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S312, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area. .

  In the process of S312 executed after the process of S312 or the process of S317 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S312 or the process of S317 is set. (S318). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S312 or S317 is set (S319). When the process of S319 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 425), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process (S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  If it is determined that there is no winning at the first entrance 64 in the process of S401 (S401: No), the process proceeds to S408, and even if there is a win at the first entrance 64 ( (S401: Yes), in the process of S403, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (that is, the upper limit of 4) (S403: No), the process of S407 Migrate to In contrast, in the process of S401, it is determined that there has been a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and in the process of S403, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is set. When it is determined that the number is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 434) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number in the RAM 223. Store in the counter 223a.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. When the process of S406 is completed, a prefetch process is executed (S407), and the process proceeds to S408. The detailed contents of the prefetching process (S407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 429. The values of various counters acquired for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 are as follows. On the basis of the above, a process of predetermining (prefetching) each lottery result executed at the start of the change is executed.

  In addition, about each process of S408-S413, only each process of S401-S406 mentioned above based on the entrance to the 1st entrance 64 was changed into the process based on the entrance to the 2nd start opening 640. Since substantially the same processing as S401 to S406 is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After performing the process of S413, a prefetch process is performed (S414 (S407)), and this process is complete | finished after that.

  In this control example, the value of each counter is configured to be acquired based on the incoming ball, but may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. In addition, a part of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be acquired at the start of the variation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to the determination of success / failure is acquired at the time of entering the ball, and a counter not related to the determination of success / failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored is maintained while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 429, the prefetch process (S407 (S414)) which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S407 (S414)).

  In the prefetching process, first, it is determined whether there is a new winning (S501). In the process of S501, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is added, it is determined that there is a new winning. . In the process of S501, when it is determined that there is no new winning (S501: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (S501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current winning is the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (S502). If it is determined (S502: Yes), the lottery result for each counter value acquired this time is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special figure jackpot table (special figure 1 jackpot type selection table) 202d1. (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. In the process of S504, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type is set as a lottery result acquired in advance (S504), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the current winning is not the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), that is, the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) (S502: No), each counter acquired this time The lottery result for the value is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special figure 2 jackpot table (special figure 2 jackpot type selection table) 202d2 (S505), and the jackpot determination is performed as the lottery result acquired in advance. As a result, a winning information command including a jackpot type is set (S504), and this process ends.

  As described above, the result of the determination as to whether or not prior to the start of the fluctuation is output as a winning information command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a holding ball is established. In addition, it is possible to recognize the determination result and the hit type in advance. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can change the color of the reserved symbol to a color that suggests the success / failure determination result for informing the player of the result of the determination of the success / failure for the reserved ball in advance based on the winning information command. Or an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination of whether or not the ball is in the holding ball can be executed. In addition, since the winning information command is output for each holding ball every time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 may recognize that the holding ball is established. it can. In the prefetching process in this control example (see S407 in FIG. 429), when it is determined that there is no new winning in the process of S501 (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. Without being limited thereto, for example, the winning information command is set again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Also good. By configuring in this way, even if it is determined that the notice effect is not executed for the winning information command received on the sound lamp control device 113 side, the notice effect is executed again for the same reserved symbol. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. Further, in this control example, a lottery result based on each counter value acquired on the main controller 110 side is determined in advance, and information for indicating the prior determination result is set as a winning information command. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, and the lottery result is discriminated in advance based on the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured. In addition, when setting information for indicating each acquired counter value as a winning information command, it is encrypted so that the counter value acquired this time is not specified to the player who illegally acquired the winning information command, It may be configured to output a prize information command at a plurality of timings.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 430, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607), and the process proceeds to S608.

  In the processing of S608, it is determined whether or not the time is short (normal probability state of a normal symbol) (S608). In the processing of S608, the value of the hour / minute counter 203g and the state of the probability change flag 203h are confirmed, and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more or the probability change flag 203h is on, If the value of the time / counter counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the time is not short. In the processing of S608, if it is determined that the time is short (normal probability of high probability) (the value of the time / short counter 203g is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203h is on) (S608: Yes). Since the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 obtained in the process of S603 and the normal hit random number table (normal symbol random number table) 202c for the high probability time (FIG. 407). Based on (b), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609), and the process proceeds to S611. In the processing of S609, specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 and the disturbance stored in the normal hit random number table (normal random number table per normal symbol) 202c (see FIG. 407 (b)) for high probability. Compare with the number. As described above, if the value of the normal random number counter C5 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, it is normal. It is determined that the symbol is off (see FIG. 407 (b)).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S608 that the time is not short (normal symbol high probability state) (the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off) (S608: No). Since the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, the value of the normal random number counter C5 acquired in the process of S603 and the normal random number table (normal symbol for low probability) Based on the winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 407 (b)), the lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table (normal code random number table) 202c (see FIG. 407 (b)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of “5, 6”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 7-239”, it is normal. It is determined that the symbol is off (see FIG. 407 (b)).

  In this control example, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is because it is possible to suppress as much as possible that the game ball intended to win the specific winning slot 65a enters the second winning slot 640.

  After executing the process of S609 or S610, the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611). Yes), the winning display mode is set (S612), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S611 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S613), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  In the processing of S614, it is determined whether or not the current time is in the short time (whether or not the normal symbol is in a high probability state) (S614). Then, the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not time-short (normal symbol high probability state) in the process of S614, that is, if the normal symbol is low probability state (S614: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30. The second is set (S616), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is discriminated (S617). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S615 or the processing of S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S617, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S617 (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is stopped and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of S612 or S613.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S619). If the current lottery result is not a normal symbol (S619: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S619: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current time is short (S620). When it is determined that the time is short (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are set to 2 times per second (S622), and the process proceeds to S623. Transition.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not short in the process of S620 (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are set to 0.2 seconds × 1 time. (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the process of S623 executed after the process of S621 or S622, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S623), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S621 or S622 of FIG.

  In this way, except for the special symbol jackpot, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the display time of the fluctuation is very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the low probability state of the normal symbol, Since the release period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In this control example, the release time and the number of times of release for a long time are set to be the same in the normal state and the latent state. Also good. Further, in this control example, the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the start of normal symbol variation (lottery). Without limitation, for example, a game at the time when the variation time of the normal symbol won by the normal symbol is determined based on the gaming state set at the start of normal symbol variation (lottery) You may comprise so that the opening operation | movement content of the 1st electrically-driven accessory 640a may be set based on a state. That is, in this control example, since the gaming state is variably set based on the special symbol lottery, the gaming state may be variably set during the normal symbol variation. In such a case, if the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the start of normal symbol fluctuation (lottery), for example, during a jackpot game or normal There is a problem that the first electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time during the high probability state of the symbol. On the other hand, the first electric combination 640a is configured by setting the opening operation content of the first electric combination 640a based on the gaming state at the time when the variation time of the normal symbol won in the win has passed. Can be executed with contents suitable for the set gaming state.

  Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the sphere has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C5.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the game ball does not pass through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the normal random number counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S705), and then this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (in this control example, a wait time of 1 second is used). Process for setting) is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S913. As will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 434, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), a state command indicating the value of the hour / minute counter 203g and the state of the probability change flag 203h (that is, the gaming state at the start-up) is transmitted (S908). Next, the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 434, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 425) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) or the start winning process (see FIG. 428) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 428) and the prefetch process (see FIG. 429) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened according to the contents of the jackpot game to be executed (the jackpot type), and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a specified number of balls are in the specific winning slot 65a. Determine if you have won. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Also, in this control example, the jackpot game content corresponding to the jackpot type (type of entrance to be opened, opening time, number of times of opening (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) is a jackpot scenario. The jackpot scenario stored in advance and corresponding to the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot is read, and the jackpot game based on the read jackpot scenario is executed.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S621 in FIG. 430 or the processing of S622 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S312 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start in devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. If the LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) or the process of S317 is completed, the first symbol display device The display of the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S311 or the processing of S316 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S615 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430) or the process of S616, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 430), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S612 or S613 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, The initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C5) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 432 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shut-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( By setting the initial value, it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 434). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203i is on (S1101). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is on (S1101: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1102), the jackpot start flag 203i is turned off, and the jackpot start flag 203j is set on (S1103). This process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the jackpot start flag 203i is off (S1101: No), then whether the special symbol jackpot is on (ie, the jackpot flag 203j is on) Whether or not) is determined (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that the current big hit is not big hit (the big hit big flag 203j is off) (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that the current big hit (the big hit flag 203j is on) (S1104: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round ( S1105).

  In the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106). ), This process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is next determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1107). . Here, in this control example, when the final round of jackpot is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1107 that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1107: No), it is next determined whether it is a big hit end timing (S1109). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where an ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S1110), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the timing of the jackpot end (S1109: No), a winning process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a is executed (S1111). An abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the winning opening 65a has been discharged normally is executed (S1112), and then this process ends. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 438 and 439.

  Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds as described above.

  When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436) is started, it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of five rounds (that is, the round in which the V combination is activated) (S1201). If it is determined in the processing of S1201 that it is the start timing of 5 rounds (S1201: Yes), the start of the action scenario of the V combination is set (S1202), and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a corresponding to the jackpot type Is set (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1205.

  As described above, in the first control example, a common operation scenario is set for the V combination regardless of the jackpot type (irrelevant). Specifically, an operation scenario is set in which the game ball is changed to an arrangement in which the game balls can be distributed to the V region until 5 seconds have elapsed and 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of 5 rounds. On the other hand, as described above, with respect to the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a, different opening patterns are set depending on whether the winning jackpot or the normal jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a probable big hit, an opening / closing pattern (the fifth round) in which the game ball can reach the V role while the V role is changed to an arrangement for distributing the game balls to the V region. While the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the lapse of 5 seconds to 9.5 seconds after the start, normally In the case of a big hit, an opening / closing pattern (4.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fifth round) that makes it impossible to reach the V character while the V character is changing the arrangement to distribute the game balls to the V region. During a period of 4.5 seconds until the time, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed with an opening / closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the fifth round in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1205 executed after the process of S1203 or S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1205), and this process is terminated.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be updated according to the number of jackpot rounds.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436), the special winning opening 65a can be opened in each jackpot round, and the player can enter the V area in the fifth round. Can do. As a result, in the big hits A, B, and D, the player only hits the right hand in the fifth round, and the game ball enters the V region almost certainly and passes through the probability change switch. It is possible to shift to a probability variation state (a probability variation state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol). In the case of jackpots C and E, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the V region even if the player hits the right side, so that after the jackpot can be set to a short time state. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol in which the jackpot C is determined at a relatively high rate (50% rate) when the jackpot is won is a disadvantageous drawing for the player and The lottery of the second special symbol in which the jackpot E is determined at a low rate (a rate of 20%) can be a lottery advantageous to the player.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end as described above.

  In the jackpot end process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203k is on (S1301). If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the probability variation setting flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch during the jackpot, so the probability variation flag 203h is set to on. Then, the state after the big hit is set to the probability variation state (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the probability change setting flag 203k is off (S1301: No), it means that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch during the jackpot, so the process of S1302 is skipped. After the jackpot, the special symbol is set to a low probability state, and the process proceeds to S1303.

  In the process of S1303, the value of the hour / short counter 203g is set to 100 (S1303), and based on the state of the probability change flag 203h and the hour / short counter 203g, a status command (a jackpot end command) for indicating the gaming state after the jackpot ends. ) Is set (S1304). The status command set here (a jackpot end command) is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the gaming state storage area 223f in accordance with the gaming state notified by the state command. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped. Next, the jackpot flag 203j and the probability variation setting flag 203k are both set to OFF (S1305), and this process ends.

  By executing the jackpot end process (see FIG. 437), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set according to whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch during the jackpot.

  Next, details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a as described above.

  In this winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S1401). Here, the round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. If it is not the round effective period in the process of S1401 (S1401: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the present is the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1402), and the specific winning opening 65a is determined. If a winning is detected (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203p and updated (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning at the specific winning opening 65a is detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the winning at the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1405.

  In the process of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405). If the value of the winning number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1405 that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has passed (S1406), and if the round time has passed ( (S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the process of S1406, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round.

  In the process of S1407, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether or not the closing of the specific prize opening 65a this time is based on the end of the fifth round (S1409). If it is determined that the closing is based on the end of the fifth round (S1409: Yes), By setting the flow path solenoid for changing the value to OFF, the state of the V combination is set to an arrangement in which the game balls are distributed to the non-V region (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, when it is determined that the closing of the specific prize winning opening 65a this time is the closing due to the completion of rounds other than the fifth round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid is set to ON. Since there is no possibility, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203q, the probability variation valid flag 203s, and the round end flag are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. If it is determined that the value of the winning counter 203p is 9 or less in the process of S1405 (S1405: No) and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), The process of S1407 to S1411 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

  In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is on (S1412). If the round end flag is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that the round end flag is on (S1412: Yes), it is then determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203s is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203s is off (S1416: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203s is on (S1416: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203t (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer 203t is the upper limit value ( S1418). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203t is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1413, and processing for monitoring the probability variation switch and updating the probability variation setting flag 203k is executed. Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203t is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation switch. Therefore, the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time of ball separation. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being granted by passing the game ball through the probability variation switch illegally.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203t is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203s and the round end flag are set to off (S1419), and the value of the probability variation valid timer 203t is reset (S1420). This process is terminated.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch (S1413). If the game ball has not passed the probability change switch (S1413: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed the probability variation switch (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203m (S1414), the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415), and this processing is performed. Exit.

  Next, the abnormality process (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormal process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been discharged normally. Process.

  In the abnormality process (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round effective period (S1501). If it is not the round effective period (S1501: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the round effective period (S1501: Yes), then whether or not the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (whether or not the game ball discharged from the variable winning device 65 has been detected) is determined. Determination is made (S1502).

  In the process of S1502, if it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball has been discharged from the variable winning device 65) (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203u. (S1503), the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the game ball has not passed the ball discharge port switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the processing of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203q is on (S1504). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203q is off (S1504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203q is on (S1504: Yes), since the ball is being thrown, the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1505). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining sphere timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1506). If the value of the remaining sphere timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of discharges (the total value of the value of the probability variation passage counter 203m and the value of the discharge number counter 203u) is won. It is determined whether or not the number matches (the value of the winning number counter 203p) (S1507).

  In the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharged items does not match the number of winning prizes (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of illegally causing a game ball to enter the V region and passing the probability change switch during the period in which the V region is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of discharged items matches the number of winning prizes (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509. In the processing of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is reset (S1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203p, the discharging number counter 203u, and the probability variation passing counter 203m are reset (S1511), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 439), there is a problem that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally discharged due to a clogged ball inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. Detection and notification can be made early.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 440 to 458. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 440, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S3119 (see FIG. 441) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 441, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 441), it executes the power-off processing in S3119. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S3119 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S3002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off process in S3119 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S3119, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S3002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S3119, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 441). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3119 is executed, the process of S3008 in the state in which the power-off flag is turned on leads to the processing of this start-up process instantaneously. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S3011). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110. When the processing of S3011 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3012). This status command is a command set in the process of S908 of the startup process (see FIG. 433) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. If it is determined in step S3012 that a status command has been received (S3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (S3013), and the main process (see FIG. 441) is performed. And migrate. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3012 that the status command has not been received (S3012: No), the process of S3013 is skipped and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441).

  On the other hand, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, through the processes of S3004 to S3006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S3010, the above-described processes of S3010 to S3013 are executed, and the main process (FIG. 441).

  In this way, when the power is turned on, a command that can determine whether or not a normal symbol is being hit for a long time is output from the main control device 110, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side can also determine the state. Can do.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S3009 is that when the process from S3004 to S3006 is reached via the process in S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S3004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 441, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3114 without performing the processes in S3102 to S3113. In S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S3102 to S3113 are mainly processes related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3114, the variable display setting process of S3115, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. In other words, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110 by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, and receiving it by the command determination process by executing the process of S3115 in a short cycle. Based on the command, the setting related to the changing effect can be performed without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later are set (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a hold lamp (not shown) is turned on according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, or the value of the normal reserved ball number counter 223c. Is done.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the lamp editing process of S3108 is executed. The sound editing / output process of S3109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S3110 ends, an effect update process for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during the execution of the variable display effect is then executed (S3111). This effect update process (S3111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the effect update process (S3111), the operation state (whether or not the push button is pressed) of the push button 10317 is then monitored, and when a press is detected, control according to the press state is executed. A pressing detection process is executed (S3112). Details of this pressing detection process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the process of S3112 ends, a counter update process is executed (S3113). In this counter update process (S3113), a process for updating the value of a counter (for example, an effect lottery counter 223y for drawing an effect mode) necessary for executing various effects is executed.

  When the processing of S3113 ends, next, command determination processing for executing control according to various commands received from main controller 110 is executed (S3114). Details of the command determination processing (S3114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the command determination process (S3114), the variable display setting process is executed (S3115). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the processing of S3115 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S3118), and the power interruption processing is executed (S3119). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S3120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 442, an effect update process (S3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing this effect update process (S3111). This effect update process (S3111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, various effects executed during the execution of the variable display effect. This is a process for updating the production mode.

  In the effect update process (S3111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3201). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S3201: No), This means that the variable display is not being executed, and that there is no possibility that the effect to be updated is being executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S3201: Yes), the value of the variable time timer is subtracted (S3202), and then A press stop effect process for updating the effect mode during execution of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is executed (S3203). Details of the press stop effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S3203 is completed, an interrupt repeated effect process for updating the effect mode during the execution of the interrupt repeated effect (see FIG. 399) is then executed (S3204). Note that details of the interrupt repeated effect processing (S3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S3204 is completed, next, a batch change effect process for updating the effect mode during execution of the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is executed (S3205). Details of the batch change effect process (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S3205 is completed, a charge consumption process for setting consumption of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 397) is executed (S3206), and this process ends. Details of the charge consumption process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 443, the press stop effect process (S3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing the press stop effect process (S3203). This press stop effect process (S3203) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is executed. It is a process for updating the production aspect in the inside.

  In this press stop effect process (see FIG. 443), it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301). In the process of S3301, when it is determined that the start timing of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is reached (S3301: Yes), the start of the press stop effect is set (S3302), and the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is set to 3. A timer value corresponding to the second is set (S3303). Next, 3 is set to the value of the stop operation number counter 223u (S3304), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3301 that it is not the start timing of the press stop effect (S3301: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3305). In the process of S3305, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3305: Yes), the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is updated (S3306), and then the updated operation valid period timer It is determined whether or not the value of 223t is 0 (S3307). In the process of S3307, when it is determined that the value of the updated operation valid period timer 223t is not 0 (S3307: No), this process is ended as it is. If it is determined that the value of the updated operation valid period timer 223t is 0 (S3307: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3308). In the process of S3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3308: Yes), a chance charge symbol stop display is set (S3309), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3308, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is OFF (S3308: No), only the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is set for the current variable display effect. This means that the operation valid period (3 seconds) has passed without a stop operation by the player in the state where the execution of the chance charge effect was not set. (S3310), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3305, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is 0 (S3305: No), it is then determined whether or not the chance charge symbol stop display period has elapsed (S3311). . If it is determined that the chance charge symbol stop display period has not elapsed (S3311: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3311 that the chance charge symbol stop display period has elapsed (S3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge effect corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223m is set (S3312). The charge standby flag 223k is set to off (S3313). Next, a value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls is set as the value of the charge state number counter 223n (S3314), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 444, the interrupt repeated effect processing (S3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 444 is a flowchart showing this interrupt repeated effect processing (S3204). This interruption continuous hit effect process (S3204) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the effect during execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect (see FIG. 399). This is a process for updating an aspect.

  When this interrupt repeated effect processing (see FIG. 444) is executed, it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of the interrupt repeated effect (S3401). In the process of S3401, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the interrupt continuous effect (S3401: Yes), whether or not the current fluctuation time is a time indicating the pre-reach from the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s. Is discriminated (S3402). In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the time is the fluctuation time before reach (S3402: Yes), after setting both the display and audio pauses, the pause flag is set to “01H” ( S3404) and the process proceeds to S3405. Specifically, in the process of S3404, the display interruption command indicating the start of the display mode stop (interruption) is set to be output to the display control device 114, and the output stop (interruption) of the BGM is started. Is set to be output to the audio output device 226.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3402 that the value of the variable time timer 223s is not the timer value indicating the pre-reach (S3402: No), only the display mode is suspended (suspended) and the suspension flag is set. Is set to “02H” (S3403), and the process proceeds to S3405. In the process of S3405, which is executed after the process of S3403 or S3404 is completed, the start of an interrupt repeated effect (see FIG. 399) is set (S3405), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that it is not the start timing of the interrupted hit effect (S3401: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous hit period (S3406). In the process of S3406, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous hit period (S3406: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223v (S3407), and this process ends. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S3406, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous hit period (S3406: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408: Yes), the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is decremented by 1 (S3409), and then the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223v after subtraction It is determined whether or not is 0 (S3410). When it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v after subtraction is 0 (S3410: Yes), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3410, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v after subtraction is not 0 (S3410: No), the display of the end image of the interrupt continuous hit effect is set (S3411). This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3408 that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is 0 (S3408: No), it is then determined whether or not it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3412). . In the process of S3412, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the temporary stop flag is “01H” (S3413). If it is determined that the value of the temporary stop flag is “01H” (S3413: Yes), it means that both the display and the sound are stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous striking effect. Both the mode and the voice mode are set to resume from the pause position (S3414). In other words, the display control device 114 is set to output a display interruption command indicating the end of the display mode interruption, and the voice output command 226 indicates a voice interruption command indicating the end of the audio mode interruption. Set the output. When the process of S3414 ends, the process proceeds to S3415.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3413, if it is determined that the value of the pause flag is not “01H” (S3413: No), it means that the value of the pause flag is “02H”, and only the display mode is temporary. To indicate that the display mode has been stopped (suspended), the display mode restart from the temporary stop position is set (that is, the display interrupt command for indicating the end of the display mode suspension is output to the display control device 114). Setting) (S3416), and the process proceeds to S3415. In the process of S3415 executed after the process of S3414 or S3416, the initial value “00H” is set in the temporary stop flag (S3415), and neither voice nor display is paused (suspended). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3412, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the interruption continuous hit effect (S3412: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 445, the batch change effect process (S3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing the batch change effect process (S3205). This batch change effect process (S3205) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is executed. It is a process for updating the production aspect in the inside.

  In the batch change effect process (see FIG. 445), first, it is determined whether or not the batch change flag 223p is on (S3501), and if it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is not on (off) ( S3501: No), meaning that it is not during the execution period of the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403), and there is no possibility of setting related to the pending batch change effect, so this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the collective change flag 223p is on (S3501: Yes), then, in the hold collective change effect, the timing when the effective period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 for changing the hold symbol pattern collectively is started. It is determined whether or not (S3502). In the process of S3502, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the effective period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 (S3502: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 3 seconds is set as the value of the batch change period timer 223x ( S3503), the validity period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is set to 3 seconds, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of 3502 that it is not the start timing of the effective period (S3502: No), then whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (that is, the operation of the push button 10317 is effective) It is determined whether or not it is within a period (S3504). In the process of S3504, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3504: Yes), the value of the batch change period timer 223x is decremented by 1 (S3505), and the batch change period timer 223x after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the value of 0 is 0 (S3506). In the process of S3506, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x after subtraction is not 0 (S3506: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S3506, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x after subtraction is 0 (S3506: Yes), the number of held balls in the reserved symbol form indicated by the data in the reserved symbol aspect storage area 223r The design is changed and displayed (S3507), the values of the batch change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the batch change period timer 223x are all reset (S3508), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3504, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3504: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 446, the charge consumption process (S3206) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 446 is a flowchart showing the charge consumption process (S3206). This charge consumption process (S3206) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is charged in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 397) as described above. This is a process for setting the consumption of the energy gauge.

  In the charge consumption process (S3206), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3551), and when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is 0 (S3551: No). This means that there is no room for consuming a spirit gauge and generating a chance-up effect, and thus the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3551 that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3551: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the charge consumption effect (S3552). If it is determined in the process of S3552 that it is not possible to execute the charge consumption effect (S3552: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3552 that the charge consumption effect can be executed (S3552: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 ( S3553). When it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 (S3553: Yes), it means that the last fluctuation display that enables the consumption of the gas gauge is made. Therefore, the process (each process of S3560 and S3561) for setting the chance up effect by consuming the spirit gauge is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3553, when it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is not 0 (S3553: No), next, the fluctuation display currently being executed (the fluctuation) has a degree of expectation higher than the super reach. It is determined whether or not the displayed display mode is a variable display (S3554). If it is determined that the fluctuation is not the degree of expectation higher than the super reach (below the normal reach production) (S3354: No), next, whether or not the hold beyond the super reach is included in the range of the charge state. Is discriminated (S3555). If it is determined that the super-reach or higher hold is included in the charge range (S3555: Yes), then the value of the charge counter 223m is a value obtained by adding 2 to the number of held balls in the charge range. It is determined whether it is larger (S3556). When it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is larger than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of reserved balls in the charge range (S3556: Yes), the number of reserved balls more than the super reach effect with many chances for performing the chance-up effect. This means that there are many gauge gauges (charges) remaining for the number of reserved balls, even if it is included in the number of held balls. Processing for consuming the gauge and setting a chance-up effect (each processing in S3558 and S3559) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3556, when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is equal to or less than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of reserved balls in the charge range (S3556: No), the variable display with the super reach effect set. The consumption gauge is consumed at the execution timing of a plurality of chance-up effects at, so that it can be sufficiently consumed within the range of the value of the charge state number counter 223n. This processing is terminated without setting the consumption of the spirit gauge at.

  Further, when it is determined in the process of S3555 that the charge state range does not include a hold higher than the super reach (S3555: No), the value of the charge number counter 223m is the hold ball within the charge range. It is determined whether or not the number is larger (S3557). When it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is equal to or less than the number of reserved balls in the charge range (S3557: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3557, when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is larger than the number of reserved balls in the charge range (S3557: Yes), the gauge number (charge number) of the feeling gauge is equal to the number of reserved balls. Since it means that many remain, the process for consuming the spirit gauge and setting a chance-up effect (each process of S3558 and S3559) is executed in order to reduce the spirit gauge in the fluctuation.

  In the process of S3558, the charge consumption effect of the effect mode according to the execution timing is set (S3558), the value of the charge number counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S3559), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3554, when it is determined that the fluctuation is equal to or greater than the super reach (S3354: Yes), the charge consumption effect of the effect mode according to the execution timing is set (S3560), and the value of the charge counter 223m is set. Is subtracted by 1 (S3561), and then this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 447, the pressing detection process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 447 is a flowchart showing the pressing detection process (S3112). This press detection process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and monitors the operation status (whether or not the press is pressed) of the PUSH button 10317. This is a process for executing control according to the state of pressing when a pressing is detected.

  In the press detection process (S3112), first, it is determined whether or not a press on the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (S3601). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that pressing of the push button 10317 is detected (S3601: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602: Yes), it means that the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (operated) during the valid period in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). Therefore, a stop operation detection process for performing control corresponding to the stop operation during the execution of the press stop effect is executed (S3603), and this process ends. Details of this stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S3602 that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is 0 (S3602: No), then, whether the value of the continuous strike valid period timer 223v is greater than 0 (that is, repeated strikes in the interrupted strike effect) It is determined whether or not the operation is valid (S3604). When it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3604: Yes), the continuous hitting operation detection process for executing the control corresponding to the continuous hitting operation during execution of the interrupted hitting effect is executed (S3605). Thereafter, this process is terminated. The details of this continuous hitting operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is 0 (S3604: No), then whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (that is, in the hold batch change effect) It is determined whether or not the push button 10317 is valid (S3606). When it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3606: Yes), a change operation detection process for performing control for setting the batch change is executed during execution of the hold batch change effect. (S3607) Then, this process is complete | finished. Details of this change operation detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3606, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Next, stop operation detection processing (S3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 448 is a flowchart showing the stop operation detection process (S3603). This stop operation detection process (S3603) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the stop operation detection process (S3603) is a stop operation during the execution of the press stop effect. This is processing for performing corresponding control.

  In the stop operation detection process (S3603), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is greater than 1 (S3701), and when it is determined that the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is greater than 1 (S3701). : Yes), the symbol string stop display corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is set (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3702, if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 3, the stop operation of the left symbol sequence is set, while if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 2, the stop operation of the right symbol sequence is performed. Set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 1 or less (S3701: No), it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3703). In the process of S3703, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3703: Yes), it means that the variable display for which the execution of the chance charge effect is set is being executed. By setting the stop display effect of the chance charge symbol, the start of the chance charge effect is notified (S3707), and the process proceeds to S3708.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3703 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3703: No), it is then determined whether or not the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704). If it is determined that the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704: Yes), execution of the chance charge production effect (see FIG. 396 (a)) is set in the remaining period (S3705), and the process proceeds to S3708. To do. By executing the process of S3705, in the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, if the press is completed three times at an early stage (within 1 second after the start) in the effective period, it is immediately released. It is possible to execute a chance charge production effect that has a longer production period than to stop the symbol. Therefore, since the production period can be varied according to the speed of the player's operation (pressing), a more suitable production mode can be realized.

  In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the operation valid period does not remain for more than 2 seconds (less than 2 seconds) (S3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set so as to be a combination of outliers. (S3706), the process proceeds to S3708.

  In the process of S3708 executed after any of the processes of S3705 to S3707 is executed, the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is reset to 0 (S3708), and the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3709 executed after the process of S3702 or S3708 is executed, the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is decremented by 1 and updated (S3709), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 449, description will be given of the continuous hit operation detection process (S3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing this continuous hitting operation detection process (S3605). This repeated hit operation detection process (S3605) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the repeated hit operation during the execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect is performed. This is processing for executing the corresponding control.

  In the continuous hit operation detection process (S3605), first, the remaining effective period (T) is specified from the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223v (S3751), and then the number of monsters corresponding to the effect type of the current interrupt continuous hit effect A lower limit (D) is calculated (S3752). In addition, the lower limit of the number of monsters is prescribed | regulated previously for every production type in the interruption continuous hitting lottery table 222h (refer FIG. 417) as mentioned above. When the processing of S3752 is completed, next, “T / 5 seconds × (100 bodies−D)” is calculated (S3753), and a value obtained by subtracting the calculated value from the current number of remaining monsters is calculated (S3754). ). In the process of S3754, the value after the decimal point is rounded off. When the processing of S3754 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit value in the effect type of the current interrupted striking effect (S3755).

  If it is determined in the process of S3755 that the number of monsters below the lower limit has been calculated (S3755: Yes), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated to the lower limit (S3756), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3755 that the calculated number of monsters is equal to or greater than the lower limit (S3755: No), the specified subtraction number is subtracted from the display of the remaining monster number and updated (S3757), and thereafter This process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the change operation detection process (S3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing this change operation detection processing (S3607). This change operation detection process (S3607) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, during the execution of the hold batch change effect, This is processing for performing control for setting a change.

  In the change operation detection process (S3607), first, a change point corresponding to each holding ball is identified from the data in the change point storage area 223q (S3801), and the state of the holding ball having one or more change points is uniformly increased by one step. In this manner, the data in the reserved symbol form storage area 223r is updated (S3802). Next, the variation type of the hold 1 is specified (S3803), and the hold symbol form is specified according to the specified change type, the hold change lottery table 222c, and the effect lottery counter (S3804). And it is discriminate | determined whether the specified holding | maintenance symbol aspect is a high expectation degree rather than the data of the reservation symbol aspect storage area 223r (S3805). If it is determined that the specified reserved symbol pattern pattern is higher in expectation than the data in the reserved symbol symbol pattern storage area 223r (S3805: Yes), the data indicating the specified reserved symbol pattern pattern is stored in the reserved symbol symbol pattern storage area 223r. (S3806), and the process proceeds to S3807.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3805, when it is determined that the specified reserved symbol pattern is not expected to be higher than the data in the reserved symbol pattern storage area 223r (S3805: No), the process of S3806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3807. Transition.

  In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the rank-up lottery of the reserved symbol pattern by the processes of S3804 to S3806 has been completed for all the reserved balls (S3807), and the lottery for all the reserved balls has not ended. If it is determined (S3807: No), the variation type of the holding ball whose time when the start winning is detected is newer than the holding ball that is the subject of the current lottery is specified (S3808), and the process returns to S3804.

  In the process of S3807, when it is determined that the rank-up lottery for all the reserved balls has been completed (S3807: Yes), the display of the reserved symbol aspect indicated by the data in the reserved symbol aspect storage area 223r is set (S3809). The values of the change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the batch change period timer 223x are all reset (S3810), and this process ends.

  Next, a command determination process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S3114). This command determination processing (S3114) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S3114), first, an unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a status command is included therein (S3901). In the process of S3901, if it is determined that the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 (S3901: Yes), the game is performed according to the gaming status notified by the received command. The data in the state storage area 223f is updated (S3902), and then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3901 that a status command has not been received (S3901: No), then a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (a variation in unprocessed commands). It is determined whether or not a pattern command is included (S3903). If it is determined in the process of S3903 that a variation pattern command has been received (S3903: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S3904), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3905). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3903 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S3903: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3906). If it is determined in step S3906 that a stop type command has been received (S3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3907), and the stop type is extracted from the received command. In step S3908, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3909, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3906: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received (S3909). In the process of S3909, when it is determined that a reserved ball number command has been received (S3909: Yes), the number of held balls is extracted from the received command and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 held ball number) The values of the counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) are updated (S3910), and this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. In addition, when a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is received, information indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter 223c. In this control example, since the information indicating the current number of reserved balls is included in the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, for example, each of the reserved ball number counters on the voice lamp control device 113 side due to a power failure or the like. Even if the value is deleted, it is possible to restore the value of each reserved ball number counter to an appropriate value by receiving the next transmitted ball number command. In this case, in the process (see S908 of FIG. 433) of transmitting the status command of the startup process (see FIG. 433) of the main control device 110, it is preferable to configure each pending ball number command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3909 that no pending ball number command has been received (S3909: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3911). In the process of S3911, when it is determined that a winning information command is received (S3911: Yes), various effects (prefetching effects) are set according to the type of winning information notified by the winning information command. For this purpose is executed (S3912), and this process is terminated. Details of the winning information command processing (S3912) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453.

  If it is determined in the process of S3911 that no winning information command has been received (S3911: No), then various commands related to winning (opening command, round number command, jackpot end command, and ending command (S3913), and if it is determined that a hit-related command is received (S3913: Yes), control according to the type of the hit-related command is executed. The hit-related command processing for executing this is executed (S3914), and this processing is terminated. This winning related command process (S3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3913, when it is determined that a hit-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S3913: No), the process is thereafter terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 452, details of the winning information command process (S3912), which is one process in the command determination process (S3114), will be described. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing the winning information command process (S3912). In this winning information command process (S3912), first, data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area (S4001), and the process proceeds to S4002. In the processing of S4001, data indicating the winning information notified by the command is stored in the empty area with the smallest number among the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area.

  In the process of S4002, it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S4002). If it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S4002: No), this means that the variable display effect with the chance charge effect set is being executed and the chance charge effect has not yet started. Therefore, according to the newly detected start prize, the number of gauge gauges (charges) charged in the chance charge effect is added to the value determined in advance at the start of the fluctuation. Execute the process. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current winning information command is a winning information command indicating winning (S4003), and when it is determined that the winning information command is winning is a winning information command (S4003: Yes). ), 2 is added to the value of the charge counter 223m and updated (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4006. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4003 that the current prize information command is not a prize information command indicating winning (a prize information command indicating failure) (S4003: No), the value of the charge number counter 223m is set. 1 is added and updated (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S4002: No), there is no possibility of adding the gauge number (charge number) of the gas gauge, so each of S4003 to S4005 The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S4006. In the process of S4006, it is determined whether or not a lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (S4006). In the process of S4006, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (S4006: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the effect mode corresponding to the scenario for continuous enrichment in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is being executed. It is determined (S4007). In the processing of S4007, when the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is any one of “08H” to “0BH” corresponding to the scenario for continuous richness, an effect mode corresponding to the scenario for continuous richness is being executed. Determine that there is.

  If it is determined in the process of S4007 that the continuation suggestion effect of the scenario for continuous enrichment is being executed (S4007: Yes), the winning information notified by the current winning information command is the probability change continuation suggestion effect. It is determined whether or not the winning information is digested during execution (S4008). That is, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the special symbol will fall from the probability variation state to the low probability state during execution of the probability change continuation suggestion based on the new winning information, and is digested during the execution of the continuation suggestion effect. (S4008: Yes), refer to the non-continuation table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416). Then, the continuation suggestion effect scenario is determined (S4009), the data indicating the selected scenario is overwritten in the continuation scenario storage area 223h (S4010), and the process proceeds to S4011. In each process of S4009 and S4010, the effect scenario “0CH” of the non-continuation table is stored in the continuation scenario storage area 223h.

  In the first control example, when the new start prize is a lottery result corresponding to a fall in the number of fluctuations within the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, an effect scenario of “0CH” is always set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one scenario is determined by lottery from among four performance scenarios (any one of “0CH” to “0FH”) defined in the non-continuation table. By comprising in this way, the production | presentation aspect at the time of a fall can be diversified more.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4006, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not notified (S4006: No), when it is determined that the probability variation continuation suggestion effect of the continuous rich scenario is not being executed (S4007: No). ), And when the new winning information notified by the current winning information command is determined not to be winning information that is digested during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion (S4008: No), the effect in the probability change continuation suggestion effect Since it is not necessary to rewrite the scenario to the scenario of the non-continuation table, the process proceeds to S4011.

  By executing each processing of S4006 to S4010, the probability change continuation suggestion start time is in the state of probability change and the probability change is not made in the situation where the reserved balls for the number of changes until the probability change continuation suggestion effect ends are not accumulated. When a continuation suggestion effect is executed, and then a start prize corresponding to a fall occurs, by switching to a non-continuation effect scenario (“0CH” effect scenario), the probability change continuation suggestion result has already fallen This can be notified. That is, since it can be suppressed that the production mode is continued even though it has already fallen, a more suitable production mode can be realized.

  Further, in the process of S4011, a pending notice lottery process for lottering whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the hold batch change effect is executed based on the winning information notified by the win information command (S4011). Exit. The details of the pending notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 453 is a flowchart showing the reservation advance notice lottery process (S4011). In this reservation advance notice lottery process (S4011), first, data indicating the reserved pattern mode of white reservation is stored in the empty area of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r (S4051). More specifically, data indicating the reserved symbol mode of white reservation is stored in the area having the smallest number among the free areas of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r. When the process of S4051 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the batch change flag 223p is on (S4052). If it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is on (S4052: Yes), the white hold is held. The symbol form is set to be displayed as a reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information (S4053), and this process is terminated. By executing the processing of S4053, the number of reserved balls changed to a mode imitating a rock by the reserved batch change effect, and the reserved ball number symbol based on the start winning newly detected after the start of the reserved batch change effect. Since the reserved symbols can be made different from each other, it is possible to make the player easily understand the range of the number of reserved balls that is the target of the pending batch change effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

  In the first control example, the reserved ball number design based on the start winnings detected after the start of the hold batch change effect is uniformly set to the white hold hold design mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs the lottery of the pending | holding symbol aspect using the pending | holding change lottery table 222c (refer FIG. 414 (a)) about the new number of reserved balls. Thereby, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that is a big hit not only for the reserved ball number symbol that is the target of the pending batch change effect but also for the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start prize. Further, for example, a new start prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect. In this case, it may be configured to always add the number of reserved balls based on the new start prize to the target of the pending batch change effect, or as a configuration to add to the target of the pending batch change effect only under a predetermined condition. Also good. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to a new start winning prize indicates a jackpot expectation degree that is beyond super reach, it may be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect. For example, as a configuration that is included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect only when the winning information corresponding to the variation type having a higher expectation than the hold ball in the range where the hold batch change effect is set is newly notified. Also good. By comprising in this way, when the reserved ball number design based on a new start winning is added to the execution object of a hold batch change production, a player's expectation with respect to jackpot can be improved more.

  If it is determined in the process of S4052 that the batch change flag 223p is off (S4052: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of retained balls is greater than 1 (S4054), and the number of retained balls is 1 or less. (S4054: No), since there is no possibility of executing the hold batch change effect, go to the processing of S4060 for drawing lots of the hold symbol form of the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4054 that the number of reserved balls is greater than 1 (2 or more) (S4054: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area and the data in the reserved symbol pattern storage area 223r The change point is calculated according to the change point calculation table 222d (S4055), and it is determined whether or not the pending batch change effect can be executed according to the values of the calculated change point, the batch change lottery table 222e, and the effect lottery counter. (S4056). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the process of S4056 is a determination result corresponding to execution of the hold batch change effect (S4057), and it is determined that the determination result is not corresponding to execution of the hold batch change effect. In the case (S4057: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4060 for drawing the reserved symbol form of the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information. On the other hand, in the process of S4057, when it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the hold batch change effect (S4057: Yes), the execution of the hold batch change effect is set (S4058), and the batch change flag 223p is turned on. (S4059), and the process is terminated.

  In the process of S4060, the pending change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414 (a)) is read (S4060), and depending on the read pending change lottery table 222c, the winning information notified by the command, and the value of the effect lottery counter To determine the reserved symbol form (S4061). Next, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the reserved symbol form storage area 223r is updated in accordance with the reserved symbol form determined in the process of S4061 (S4062), and the reserved symbol form of the aspect indicated by the updated data is updated. Display is set (S4063), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the reservation notice lottery process (see FIG. 453), various effects using the number of reserved balls can be suitably set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the contents of the hit related command processing (S3914) described above will be described. FIG. 454 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command processing (S3914). This hit-related command processing (S3914) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 451) of the sound lamp control device 113, and when a hit-related command is received from the main control device 110, This is processing for performing control according to the type of the received command.

  In the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 454), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an opening command (S4101). If it is determined that the command received this time is an opening command (S4101: Yes), a display opening command corresponding to the received opening command is set (S4102), and then this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4101 that the command received this time is not an opening command (S4101: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round command (S4103). If it is determined that there is (S4103: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S4104), and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4103 that the command received this time is not a round number command (S4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot end command (S4105). If it is determined (S4105: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223f is updated in accordance with the information indicating the game state after the jackpot end included in the received jackpot end command (S4106), and the short time guaranteed number counter 223g Is set to 100 (S4107). Next, it is determined whether or not the right-handed winning flag 223i is on (S4108). If it is determined that the right-handed winning flag 223i is on (S4108: Yes), a right-handed game is played. It means that it was a big hit during the probable change state or the short-time state (that is, a so-called consecutive resort has occurred), and it means that it was a big win in the second special symbol lottery with a high probability of probable change Then, the rear mode for high expectation (see FIG. 390 (b)) is set (S4110), and this process ends. Setting the back mode for high expectation uniformly makes it difficult to understand whether the short-time state is set or the probability variation state is set, thereby allowing the player to predict the current gaming state. This is to realize.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4108, if it is determined that the right-handed winning flag 223i is off (S4108: No), the game is a big hit in the normal state where the game is played by left-handed (so-called winning at the beginning) This means that the first special symbol lottery with a low probability variation jackpot ratio has been won, so the rear mode for low expectation (see FIG. 390 (a)) is set (S4109), Thereafter, this process is terminated. Setting the back mode for low expectation uniformly makes it difficult to understand whether the short-time state is set or whether the probability variation state is set, thereby allowing the player to predict the current gaming state. This is to realize.

  If it is determined in step S4105 that a jackpot end command has not been received (S4105: No), it is then determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S4111). If it is determined (S4111: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4112), and this process ends. If it is determined in step S4111 that an ending command has not been received (S4111: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 455, the variable display setting process (S3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S3115). This variable display setting process (S3115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S3115), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4201). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4201: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4207 is performed. Migrate to On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S4202), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command for display is stored in the RAM 223. (S4203).

  Next, a variation effect setting process for setting an effect mode to be executed with the extracted variation pattern (variation time) is executed (S4204). The contents of this variation effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4204 ends, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the effect mode determined in the process of S4204 is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control apparatus 114 ( S4205). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (S4206). In this process, data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S4207.

  In the process of S4207, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4207). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4207: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S4208), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. (S4209). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S4210), and the process proceeds to S4211.

  In the processing of S4211, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4211). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of S4211 is executed, this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 456, the contents of the variable effect setting process (S4204) which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 455) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process (S4204). In this variation effect setting process (S4204), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (notice content) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

  In the variation effect setting process (S4204), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state number counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4301), and when it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4301). : Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the charge state number counter 223n (S4302), and the process proceeds to S4303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 (S4301: No), the process of S4302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4303.

  In the processing of S4303, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving guarantee number counter 223g is larger than 0 (S4303). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving guarantee number counter 223g is 0 (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4311. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4303: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223g (S4304), and then It is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving guarantee number counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4305). In the process of S4305, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is 0 (S4305: No), the process proceeds to S4311. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4305 that the value of the time-guaranteed guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 0 (S4305: Yes), then whether the value of the time-reduced guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 4 or not. It is determined whether or not (S4306). In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the value of the short time guaranteed number counter 223g after the subtraction is larger than 4 (S4306: Yes), the process proceeds to S4312.

  In the process of S4311, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability change state (S4311). Here, based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223f, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a probability change state. If it is determined in the process of S4311 that the current state is the probability variation state (S4311: Yes), it means that the probability variation state has continued for more than 100 times after the jackpot is over, so the rear mode lottery is performed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S4312. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4311 that the current state is not the probability change state (S4311: No), the process of S4312 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4313.

  In the processing of S4312, in the gaming state (short-time state, probability variation state) in which the game is played by right-handed, one rear mode is selected from a plurality of rear modes indicating the expected degree of the probability variation state with a lottery probability according to the gaming state. Back mode lottery processing is executed (S4312), and the process proceeds to S4313. The details of the rear mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4313, the effect mode selection process for selecting the effect mode in the variable display effect is executed (S4313), and then this process is terminated. The details of this effect mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the variation effect setting process in the first control example, if it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the short time guaranteed number counter 223g after the subtraction is 4 or less (S4306: No), the probability change continuation suggestion effect is determined. Since it means the execution period (the 96th to 99th fluctuation display fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot), it is next determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (S4307). In the process of S4307, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S4307: Yes), a special jackpot effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect is set as the current variation display mode (S4308), and right-handed The winning flag is set to ON (S4309), and this process is terminated. In addition, as the jackpot effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect, for example, an effect that an adventurer who broke through the door 806 by the effect of breaking through the door 806 finds a treasure on the other side of the door 806 is executed. An effect etc. in which the jackpot is notified is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit of the special symbol (S4307: No), the continuous suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode in the execution period of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect The process is executed (S4310), and this process ends. Details of this continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 457, the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) which is one process in the change effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. To do. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310).

  When the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223g is 4 (S4401), and the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223g is not 4 (3 (S4401: No), the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is read (S4411), and it is determined whether or not the read scenario is a scenario for continuous enrichment (S4412). In the process of S4412, when it is determined that the read scenario is not a scenario for continuous enrichment (S4412: No), the process proceeds to S4415. On the other hand, in the process of S4412, when it is determined that the read scenario is a scenario for continuous enrichment (S4412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a lottery result of falling ( In S4413), when it is determined that the result is not the falling lottery result (S4413: No), the process proceeds to S4415. On the other hand, in the process of S4413, when it is determined that the result is a lottery result of falling (S4413: Yes), the effect scenario is switched to “0CH” (S4414), and the process proceeds to S4415.

  In the process of S4415, the effect mode of the number of fluctuations corresponding to the value of the short-time guaranteed number of times counter 223g is read from the scenario read from the continuous scenario storage area 223h (S4415), and the read effect mode is used as the display mode of the current variation pattern. The setting is made (S4416). Next, it is determined whether or not the last effect mode of the scenario has been set (S4417). If it is determined that the last effect mode of the scenario has been set (S4417: Yes), the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is determined. Is reset to “00H” (S4418), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4417, when it is determined that the last effect mode of the scenario is not set (S4417: No), the process of S4418 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4401 that the value of the time-saving guarantee number counter 223g is 4 (S4401: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect (see FIG. 392). A process for determining an effect scenario for the continuation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state (S4402). If it is determined in the process of S4402 that the current gaming state is a probable change state (S4402: Yes), data in the winning information storage area is read (S4403), and the winning lottery result is included in the winning information. It is determined whether or not there is (S4404). In the process of S4404, when it is determined that the winning lottery result is not included in the winning information (S4404: No), next, whether the four winning information is stored (that is, the probability variation continuation suggestion effect) It is determined whether or not the held ball until the end is already held (S4405).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that four pieces of winning information are stored (S4405: Yes), the continuation suggestion effect scenario is referred to with reference to the continuation confirmation table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416). Is determined (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4409. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that the four winning information is not stored (S4405: No), the continuation suggestion is made with reference to the continuation richness table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416). An effect scenario is determined (S4407), and the process proceeds to S4409.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4402 that the current gaming state is not a probable change state (S4402: No), and in the process of S4404, the winning lottery result is included in the winning information. (S4404: Yes), the effect scenario is determined with reference to the non-continuation table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4409.

  In the process of S4409 executed after any of the processes of S4406 to S4408 is executed, data indicating the selected effect scenario is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223h (S4409), and the first variation in the determined scenario is stored. Is set as the effect mode of the current variation pattern (S4410), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 458, the contents of the rear mode lottery process (S4312), which is one process in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the contents of the back mode lottery process (S4312).

  When the back mode lottery process (S4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern (S4501). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern (S4501: Yes), the variation display mode for jackpot is selected as the variation display mode (S4502), and the right-hand hitting winning flag 223i is set to ON. In step S4503, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4501 that the current variation pattern is not a jackpot variation pattern (S4501: No), it is then determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation state (S4504). . If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a probable change state (S4504: No), the rear mode is referred to with reference to the fallen table in the rear mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. Are lottery (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4510.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4504 that the current gaming state is a probable change state (S4504: Yes), data in the winning information storage area is read (S4506), and then the lottery result of falling in the winning information Whether or not is included is determined (S4507). If it is determined in the processing of S4507 that the winning lottery result is included in the winning information (S4507: Yes), the non-falling table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery counter 223y. The rear mode is selected by referring to the value (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4510.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4507 that the winning lottery result is not included in the winning information (S4507: No), the probability variation continuation table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery The rear mode is selected by referring to the value of the counter 223y (S4509), and the process proceeds to S4510.

  In the process of S4510 executed after any one of the processes of S4505, S4508, and S4509 is executed, the lottery result of each process is a lottery result indicating a change to the back mode different from the current back mode. It is determined whether or not (S4510). In the process of S4510, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the change of the back mode (S4510: Yes), the display back side change command indicating the back mode after the change is set (S4511), and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S4510, when it is determined that the back mode is not changed (S4510: No), the process of S4511 is skipped, and this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the contents of the effect mode selection process (S4313) which is one process in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect mode selection process (S4313).

  When the effect mode selection process (S4313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (S4551). If it is determined that a variation pattern command including an additional time command has not been received (S4551: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4551 that a variation pattern command including an additional time command has been received (S4551: Yes), the interrupt continuous lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) is read (S4552), and the effect lottery counter Whether or not to execute the interruption continuous striking effect is determined according to the value of 223y (S4553), and then it is determined whether or not a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the interrupting striking effect is obtained (S4554). In the process of S4554, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the interrupting hit effect is obtained (S4554: Yes), data corresponding to the type of the interrupting hitting effect to be executed is stored in the hitting type storage area 223j (S4555). Next, it is determined whether or not the type of the continuous interruption effect is a type executed before reaching (S4556). In the process of S4556, when it is determined that the type of interruption continuous hitting effect is performed before reach (S4556: Yes), the voice mode corresponding to the variation time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4558), and the process of S4559 is performed. Transition to processing.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4556, when it is determined that the determined type of interrupted strike effect is not the type to be executed before reach (S4556: No), the change time indicated by the basic time command and the additional time command are The voice mode corresponding to the sum of the fluctuation time shown is determined (S4557), and the process proceeds to S4559.

  In the process of S4559, the display mode corresponding to the variation time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4559), and this process ends. As described above, the first control example is configured to easily identify whether or not the fluctuation type is 7 seconds long depending on the presence / absence of an additional short time command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation type is the lottery target for determining whether or not to execute the interruption continuous striking effect only by confirming the content of the additional time command. In addition, when it is decided to execute the interruption continuous striking effect, it is possible to fill the variation time just by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation time notified by the basic time command (fluctuation time shorter by 7 seconds). it can. Therefore, since the end timing of the effect mode and the end timing of the variable display effect can be easily matched without preparing an effect mode dedicated to the interruption continuous hit effect, a suitable effect mode can be provided.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4554 that the interruption continuous hitting effect is not executed (S4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222f (see FIG. 415 (b)) is read (S4560), and the current variation type Whether or not the chance charge effect (see FIGS. 396 (b) and 397 (a)) can be executed is determined according to the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y (S4561), and then the process of S4561 It is determined whether or not the execution of the chance charge effect is determined by the determination (lottery) according to (S4562). In the process of S4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect has not been determined (S4562: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S4566), and this processing is terminated. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4562 that execution of the chance charge effect has been determined (S4562: Yes), a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of reserved balls is set as the value of the charge number counter 223m (S4563). The charge standby flag 223k is set to ON (S4564), an effect mode including a chance charge effect is determined as the current variation display mode (S4565), and this process ends. As described above, in the first control example, when execution of the chance charge effect is determined, the gauge amount (charge number counter 223m) of the spirit gauge KG stored in the chance charge effect is determined based on the number of reserved balls at the time of determination. Value) is determined. Then, after the end of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start of the chance charge effect (processing load when determining the number of gauges).

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 460 to 473, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S8001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S8102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 460). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S8001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 461, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S8102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S8101. In addition, the processing of S8103 to S8105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S8102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 460. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S8003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S8004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S8004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S8005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 471 (a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S9602 in FIG. 471 (a)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)), power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 419 (a) to (c) are drawn. As described above, the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 462 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) at the first start port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) can be displayed immediately during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 462 (a). FIG. 462 (a) is a flowchart showing command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 462 (b). FIG. 462 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 423) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 462 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S8302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S8303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, the process corresponding to the command is executed, the display demo command, When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 463 to 468.

  In the display setting process (S8303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 469 to 470.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S8304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S8303) or the simple display setting process (S8309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp controller 113, the image controller 237 is notified of the continuous notice. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S8305) are used. 423 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed at 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. In order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S8308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S8309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S8304. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 463 to 468, details of the above-described command determination process (S8302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. First, FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing (FIG. 463, S8302), as shown in FIG. 463, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401), and if there is no unprocessed new command. (S8401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S8402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S8403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S8404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S8405), the process returns to S8401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 464 (a), details of the variation pattern command processing (S8405) will be described. FIG. 464 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S8501 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S8503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S8503, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S8504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S8506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S8505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S8502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S8504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table ends. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 463. If it is determined in the process of S8404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S8406). If there is a stop type command (S8406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

  Details of the stop type command process (S8407) will be described with reference to FIG. 464 (b). FIG. 464 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S8601), the stop type table and the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)). Is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time is executed, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S8602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned on. (S8603). Thereafter, the processing returns to S8401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is described. In the task process (S8304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S8603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 463, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8406 that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display interrupt command among the unprocessed commands (S8408). When it is determined that the display interruption command is received (S8408: Yes), the interruption command process is executed (S8409). Details of the suspend command processing (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 465, the interruption command process (S8409) will be described. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the interruption command process (S8409).

  In the interruption command process (FIG. 465, S8409), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (S8701). In the process of S8701, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (S8701: Yes), the data indicating the current display data table type, pointer value, and time counter value is displayed as interruption data. The data is stored in the storage area 233m (S8702), and the interrupt repeated effect display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8703). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the interrupt repeated effect display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8704), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the interrupt repeated effect display data table (S8705). The pointer 233f is initialized (S8706), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8701 that the received command is not a command indicating the start of interruption (that is, a command indicating the end of interruption) (S8701: No), it is stored in the interruption data storage area 233m. The display data table type, the value of the pointer 233f, and the value of the time counter 233h are specified based on the stored data (S8707), and the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f, and the time counter 233h are updated based on the specified result, respectively. In step S8708, the process ends.

  By executing this interruption command processing, the progress status of the display effect that is temporarily stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupting hitting effect is held in the interrupting data storage area 233m. The display mode can be resumed from the display mode at the time of interruption held at 233 m.

  Returning to FIG. 463, the description will be continued. In the process of S8408, when it is determined that there is no display interruption command (S8408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S8410), and a display opening is performed. If there is a command (S8410: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 466 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8801 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S8805), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8801, The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of one frame to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S8802. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Returning to FIG. 463, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S8410 that there is no display opening command (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S8412). If there is a round number command for use (S8412: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S8413), and the processing returns to S8401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 466 (b), details of the round number command processing (S8413) will be described. FIG. 466 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S8901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8902).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S8905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 463. If it is determined in the processing of S8412 that there is no display round number command (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S8414). If there is an ending command for use (S8414: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S8415), and the processing returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S9001). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S9002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S9001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S9003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S9004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S9005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 463. If it is determined in the processing of S8414 that there is no display ending command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the back image is determined. If there is a change command (S8416: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 468 (a), details of the back image change command processing (S8417) will be described. FIG. 468 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S9603) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S9101). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back images corresponding to other back image types The determination flag is set to OFF (S9102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S9101 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S9102. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing, if it is specified that any one of the plurality of back surface types is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the task image is determined based on the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S9102. The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored (A resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and an address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S9102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 463. If it is determined in step S8416 that there is no rear image change command (S8416: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S8418). If (S8418: Yes), an error command process is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

  Details of the error command process (S8419) will be described with reference to FIG. 468 (b). FIG. 468 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S9201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S9202). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S9202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S9202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 463. If it is determined in the process of S8418 that there is no error command (S8418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S8420), and the process returns to S8401.

  In the process of S8401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes). ), The processing of S8402 to S8420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S8401 to S8420 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S8401 that there is no unprocessed new command, the command determination process is performed. finish.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)), the simple command determination process (S8308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 419 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 464 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 464 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 464 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in S8501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 469 to 470, the details of the display setting process (S8303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 469, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S9301). If the new command flag is not ON, that is, if it is OFF (S9301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S9302 to S9304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S9301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S9302), S9303 to S9304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S9303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S9303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S9303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S9304).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 470 (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S9401).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S9401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S9304) or in the process of S9303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S9303: No), the process proceeds to S9305.

  In S9305, pointer update processing is executed (S9305). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 470 (b). FIG. 470 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. In this pointer update process, the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9501). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S9501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S9502). As a result, if it is End information (S9502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S9503), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S9503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S9504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S9505), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S9503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S9506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S9502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S9306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S9307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S9308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S9308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S9309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S9309: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S9311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S9312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S9314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S9315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S8304), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S9315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9309, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off (S9309: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S9316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S9316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demonstration display data table is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S9317), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S9318). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S9319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S9321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In the process of S9316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S9316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (see FIGS. 419 (b) and (c)) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S8305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 471 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S9602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S9601, that is, if it is off (S9601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S9602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 471 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S9602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S9701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S9701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has been completed (S9702). In the process of S9702, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer image data and then receives a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S9702 that the transfer process has not ended (S9702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, and the resident image transfer setting process ends. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S9702: Yes), the process proceeds to S9703. Also, as a result of the process of S9701, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9701: No), the process proceeds to S9703.

  In the process of S9703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S9703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be resident for transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S9703 (S9703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 462 (b)). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 463 to 468) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 469 to 470 (a) and (b)) are executed, normal image rendering is set. The three-pattern display device 81 displays a normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) (see S9601: No in FIG. 471 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S9603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9603).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9305) of the display setting process (S8303) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S9801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S9802). If it is transfer data information (S9802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S9803, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S9804), and the process proceeds to step S9805.

  In the process of S9802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S9802: No), the process of S9803 and S9804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S9805. In the process of S9805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S9805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S9806).

  In the process of S9806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S9806 that the transfer process has not ended (S9806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, and thus this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S9806: Yes), the process proceeds to S9807. Also, as a result of the process of S9805, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S9805: No), the process proceeds to S9807.

  In the process of S9807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9807). If the transfer start flag is on (S9807: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag is present. (S9808), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S9803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S9813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9807: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S9809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S9809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S9809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after setting the back image change flag to off (S9810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S9811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S9812), and the process proceeds to S9813.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S9812, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S9813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813). The determination in the process of S9813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S9813 (S9813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S9813 (S9813: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S9814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S9814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S9815), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 473, details of the above-described drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) necessary for drawing each sprite. , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 423 is generated (S9901). That is, in the process of S9901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S 8305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S9902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S9903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 462 (b)) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Output Device in First Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 474 to 478. First, the main process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 474 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process.

  When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing control according to various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (20001). Details of this command determination processing (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S20001, an audio setting process for reproducing audio data (audio file) corresponding to the effect is executed (S20002). Details of the voice setting process (S20002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S20002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 303 (S20003). If power off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S20003 (S20003: Yes), both the power off flag and the power off processing flag are turned on (S20005), and the power off processing is executed (S20006). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S20007), and then the process is looped infinitely.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S20003 (S20003: No), whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S20004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S20004: No), the process returns to S20001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S20004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes.

  Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 474 (b). FIG. 474 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interruption process (see FIG. 474 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S20101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are read by a command determination process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 475, a command determination process (S20001) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 474 (a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process (S20001).

  In the command determination process (S20001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S20101). If there is no unprocessed new command (S20201: No), the command determination process is terminated. The process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S20201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S20202), and then the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area is set. For all processing commands, the command type is analyzed (S20203).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice variation pattern command (S20204). The voice variation pattern command is displayed when the display variation pattern command is output (see S4205 in FIG. 455) in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 455) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is set to notify the type and output timing of the audio to be reproduced corresponding to the mode.

  If it is determined that there is a voice variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands in the processing of S20204 (S20204: Yes), the music and sound effect used during the execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (S20205). ), The specified music, the output channel of the sound effect, and the output timing are set (S20206), and the process returns to S20201.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command in the process of S20204 (S20204: No), it is then determined whether or not a voice continuous hit command is included in an unprocessed command ( S20207) If a voice continuous hit command is included (S20207: Yes), it means that the player has performed a continuous hit operation. Is executed (S20208), and the process returns to S20201. Details of the continuous hitting sound command processing (S20208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S20207, when it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the voice continuous hit sound command (S20207: No), it is then determined whether the voice interrupt command is included. If it is determined that the unprocessed command includes the voice continuous hitting sound command (S20209: Yes), the interruption command processing for setting the interruption and resumption of the BGM being reproduced is performed. Execute (S20210) and return to the processing of S20201. Details of the interrupt command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S20209, if there is no voice interruption command in the unprocessed command (S20209: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S20211), and the process returns to S20201.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 476, details of the continuous hitting sound command process (S20208) will be described. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the continuous hitting sound command processing (S20208). This repeated hitting sound command processing (S20208) is executed in the command determination processing (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and as described above, is processing for setting playback (output) of repeated hitting sounds.

  In this continuous hitting sound command processing (S20208), first, it is determined whether or not “00H” is set to the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (S20301). In the process of S2031, if it is determined that “00H” is set as the value of the continuous hit sound output flag 303a (S2031: Yes), a continuous hit sound command for the first consecutive hit operation in the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) is issued. Since it means that it has been received, the process proceeds to S20305 in order to reproduce the first continuous beating sound.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that “00H” is not set in the value of the continuous hit sound output flag 303a (S20301: No), then whether or not “01H” is set in the value of the continuous hit sound output flag 303a. Is discriminated (S20302). When it is determined in the processing of S20302 that “01H” is not set as the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (that is, the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a is “02H”) (S20302: No), 1 This means that the last hit sound output in the interrupt continuous hit effect is the second consecutive hit sound. In this case as well, the process proceeds to S20305 in order to reproduce the first consecutive hit sound.

  In the process of S20305, the playback of the audio file corresponding to the first continuous beating sound is set for CN2 of the speech synthesizer 306 (see FIG. 424) (S20305), and the continuous sound output flag 303a corresponds to the first continuous sound. It is updated (set) to “01H” (S20306), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S20302 that “01H” is set as the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (that is, the last hitting sound output first time is the first consecutive hitting sound) (S20302: Yes). Then, for the CN3 of the voice synthesizer 306 (see FIG. 424), the reproduction of the voice file corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound is set (S20303), and the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a is set to “02H” corresponding to the second consecutive hitting sound. (S20304), and this process ends.

  By executing this continuous hitting sound command processing, every time a continuous hitting operation is executed, two types of voice data can be alternately reproduced for two channels, so that the voice mode can be diversified. . In addition, when the configuration is such that the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are reproduced alternately on a single channel (that is, the control for stopping the output of one sound being reproduced and outputting the other sound) Compared to the case of repeating), the other voice can be output while maintaining the state in which one voice is output (the first and second consecutive hit sounds are output in an overlapping manner). Therefore, the voice mode during continuous hitting can be made more lively. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are alternately played back on a single channel, if a player with a quick hit interval performs a continuous hit operation, the head portion of each audio data It becomes a monotonous voice mode that only repeats alternately. On the other hand, if a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of audio data is reproduced in order on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data on other channels is interrupted. Can be played. That is, a voice based on one voice data and a voice based on other voice data can be synthesized and output. Accordingly, since it is possible to easily output the sound other than the head portion in each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, every time a continuous hit operation is detected, two types of audio data (sound hit sounds) are alternately output to two channels. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced in the order of CN1 and CN2. Thereby, a voice aspect can be diversified more. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be reproduced in order for three or more channels. With this configuration, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). Therefore, the voice mode can be further diversified. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which changes the kind of audio | voice data output according to the space | interval of continuous hitting. Specifically, for example, when the player has a relatively short interval (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less) and the player is playing, three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sequentially sent to two channels. It is good also as a structure which reproduces | regenerates (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the sound output mode even in accordance with the repeated hitting interval, so that it is possible to realize the gameability of adjusting the repeated hitting interval. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the first control example, any one of the continuous hitting sounds is output in conjunction with the continuous hitting operation. However, under a predetermined condition, the continuous hitting sound may be output even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed. . More specifically, for example, when the last hit sound output in the effective period of the hit operation is the first consecutive hit sound, the second consecutive hit sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, the sound that is output last becomes the first continuous sound even though the first continuous sound and the second continuous sound are output as a set in response to the continuous operation. It is possible to prevent the voice mode from being halfway (that is, the second continuous hitting sound that is paired is not output). Therefore, the voice mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the last continuously output sound is the first continuous sound, the control for outputting the second continuous sound after the end is performed with a variable display (a lottery result) corresponding to a predetermined variation type (lottery result). For example, it may be configured to set only during execution of jackpot fluctuation. By configuring in this way, for a player who wants to know whether or not the variation type is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound that is output last during the interruption hitting effect is dared to be the first continuous hitting sound. Can be realized. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between successive hits by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a continuous hit operation is detected in a state where no sound is reproduced, the first continuous hit sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the playback of the next continuous hit operation is completed after the reproduction of one continuous hit sound is completed, only the first continuous hit sound is continuously output. It may be configured. By configuring in this way, a player who wants to diversify the voice mode can be repeatedly operated at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupted continuous hit effect is improved. be able to.

  Next, the interrupt command process (S20210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the interrupt command process (S20210). The interruption command process (S20210) is executed in the command determination process (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting interruption and resumption of the BGM being reproduced.

  In the interruption command process (S20210), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (S20401). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (S20401: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the variation BGM being played back is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (S20402), and CN1 The reproduction of the BGM for the interruption continuous striking effect is set (S20403), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S20401 that the received command is not a command indicating the start of interruption (that is, a command indicating the end of interruption) (S20401: No), The reproduction is finished (S20404), the data in the reproduction position storage area 303b is read (S20405), the reproduction of the variation BGM from the read reproduction position is resumed in the CN1 (S20406), and then this process is finished.

  Next, details of the voice setting process (S20002) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the voice setting process (S20002). This audio setting process (S20002) is executed in the main process (FIG. 474) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226.

  In the sound setting process (S20002), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the output timing of the music (S20501). If it is determined that the current timing is not the music output timing (S20501: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S20501 that the current timing is the output timing of the music (S20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (S20502), and the read audio file is played back on the corresponding channel. (S20503), the music output flag 303c is set to ON (S20504), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when winning a jackpot, regardless of the type of jackpot, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the normal symbol time is shortened. It was set as the structure which a state continues. That is, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot are configured so that the operations (the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a) until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends are common. And, when the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued after 100 times only when the gaming state is in a probabilistic state. In other words, when the short-time state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, and the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, and the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol is made within 100 times. In such a case, the normal symbol time-short state is terminated at the timing when the 100th special symbol lottery is executed, and the normal state is entered. By configuring in this way, it is a case where a relatively unfavorable time-short state is set after the end of the jackpot, or after falling into a low probability state within 100 times after the probability variation state is set. However, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the short-time state and the probable state, so at least 100 special symbol lotteries are executed. Until then, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the gaming state is in a probable state.

  In the first control example, if the normal symbol is in a short-time state at the time of winning the jackpot, the gaming state is set to the normal state at the start of the variable display to indicate the jackpot (the normal symbol in the short-time state). To end). By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the case where the short time state of the normal symbol is terminated within 100 times after the jackpot ends, to the case where the variation pattern of the jackpot is started. There is a high possibility that the short state of the normal symbol is terminated during the execution of the fluctuation display effect within the number of times (for example, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol exceeds 3 seconds or when the normal symbol is drawn by lottery) Or when the pattern of 0.2 second × 1 time is executed as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a), the player can be pleased. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the normal symbol lottery result, the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

  Further, the first control example is configured such that the player can predict the possibility of the probability change state to some extent by the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, during the gaming state in which the short state of the normal symbol is set, the cave search mode with a relatively low expectation of the probability change state, the temple search mode with a relatively high expectation of the probability change state, and the probability change state There are three types of back modes in the super temple search mode that confirm that there is no lottery result corresponding to the fall within the hold (at least the probabilistic state continues until the hold is digested). Either one is set at the time of execution of the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current gaming state from the back mode while the short time state of the normal symbol is set. Can be improved. In addition, since the super temple search mode is set, it is determined that the gaming state is a probable state, so if the player enters the super temple mode while predicting the probable state, On the other hand, it is possible to bring joy to the self-predictions. On the other hand, if the player enters the super-shrine mode despite having predicted that the special symbol has a low probability state, the player will have the pleasure of being set to a more advantageous gaming state than expected. You can make it. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of held balls can be executed with the jackpot probability of the probability change state). Therefore, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that a big hit will be made on hold.

  Further, in the first control example, regardless of the gaming state, over a specific range of variable display executed before the end of the 100 special symbol lotteries in which the normal symbol time-short state is guaranteed ( In other words, the probable change continuation suggestion effect for notifying whether or not the probable change state is continuing (over the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the jackpot is ended immediately before the 100 special symbol lottery ends). It is configured to execute. When starting the probability variation continuation suggestion production, whether or not the probability variation state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery by prefetching the 96th to 99th lottery results that are the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion When the probability variation state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the production scenario in which a highly anticipated attack pattern is likely to occur is increased. On the other hand, if the 99th special symbol lottery is run before the short-running state (or after the previous jackpot has been short-running), a low-expected attack pattern occurs. It is configured to increase the selection rate of production scenarios that are easy to do. Thus, by setting it as the structure which sets an effect aspect based on the game state at the time of the end of an effect, the game state after the end of an effect can be alert | reported more correctly. Here, when the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is executed only based on the gaming state at the start of the production, the probability change continuation suggestion effect falls during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the probability variation state is notified. In spite of this, there is a risk that the short-time state may be terminated with the start of the 100th special symbol drawing. In this case, there is a possibility that the player will be distrusted with the pachinko machine 10 or the hall by contradicting the production contents and the actual operation. In addition, as a countermeasure, a method of constructing a probable continuation suggestion effect by an effect that is completed with one change is conceivable. However, in this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient effect period, so there are various effects. It becomes difficult to convert. In contrast, in the first control example, the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is configured to be executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the short time state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is displayed. The determination is made based on the gaming state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the probability variation effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the production mode while making it possible to accurately notify the gaming state at the end of the production. If the ball is in a probable state at the start of the production and the reserved ball up to the end of the production is not on hold, a production that is likely to generate a relatively high expectation attack pattern is selected. ing. This is because the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is lower than the probability of a jackpot, and it is extremely rare that the special symbol falls into a low probability state during the production period (a relatively high probability of the probability variation state). This is because the production ends.

  Further, in the first control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, it is configured to be able to execute a press stop effect in which a stop operation of each symbol row is executed according to the operation timing of the player on the PUSH button 10317. This press stop effect is basically an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of developing into a chance charge effect. If this push stop effect does not develop into a chance charge effect, each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed in a simple combination according to the player's press timing, whereas if it develops into a chance charge effect, The charge symbol is stopped and displayed (in a pseudo manner) to inform the development of the chance charge effect. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the stop timing of each symbol row is made variable according to the player's pressing timing, the timing at which it is notified whether or not it will develop into a chance charge effect is set to the player's favorite timing. Can be adjusted. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Further, in the press stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, at least the mode at the time of stop display of the central symbol sequence is made different depending on the timing when the stop operation is performed on all the symbol sequences. More specifically, after the start of the effective period of the stop operation, if the specified number of stop operations (three times) have been completed within a predetermined period (one second) (that is, a relatively early stage), the effect is relatively While the central symbol row is stopped by a long-lived chance charge effect, if the specified number of stop operations are completed after a predetermined period (one second), the central symbol row is immediately removed. An effect that is stopped and displayed with a symbol (that is, a relatively short effect) is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the period after the stop display from becoming too long or conversely depending on the completion timing of the stop operation of the player, and conversely, regardless of the completion timing of the stop operation. The transition of the production mode up to the stop display of the off symbol can be shown in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a feeling of incongruity. In the press stop effect in the first control example, separate button images and effective period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but actually, the push button 10317 is displayed with a single operation effective period. It is determined whether or not the operation is valid. Then, depending on the number of times that the stop operation (pressing the PUSH button 10317) is executed in one operation valid period, the symbol sequence for setting the stop display is varied (determining whether the stop operation has been executed for all the symbol sequences). To be configured). As a result, it is possible to simplify the determination as to whether or not the stop operation for each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the first control example, a chance charge effect can be executed as a type of interest effect. This chance charge effect is the number of times that a specific effect mode (chance-up effect) is performed (minimum guaranteed number of times) within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all reserved balls held at the start of the effect are consumed). This is an aspect of an aspect that is suggested (notified) to the player in advance. The guaranteed number of chance-up effects (the number of accumulated gauge gauges) notified in this chance charge effect causes some chance-up effect at each timing until the reserved ball is consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. To be consumed. Here, the chance-up effect is an effect that increases the degree of expectation of jackpot, such as a change in the display mode of the number of reserved balls, the occurrence of so-called pseudo-ream, the occurrence of cut-in effects, The generation of the line of the. Note that the gas gauge is configured to be consumed until it becomes zero. That is, it is configured not to be consumed and discarded. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that it is possible to play a game while looking forward to what kind of chance-up effects will occur next. . Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In the first control example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge stored in the chance charge effect is determined mainly based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect. Then, after the end of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start of the chance charge effect (processing load when determining the number of gauges).

  Further, in the first control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, an interruption repeated hitting effect is executable. This interruption hitting effect is an effect of a display mode as if an effect of a mode different from the display effect displayed so far suddenly interrupted during normal fluctuation display or reach fluctuation, On the other hand, the push button 10317 is composed of effects in an effect mode that prompts the user to operate the push button 10317 in a specific operation mode (continuous hit operation mode). In this interruption continuous hit production, the stage of the production mode develops according to the player's continuous hitting operation (the number of displayed monsters is reduced), and the effect that the expectation level that is a big hit is higher is there. Thereby, since the player can be made to actively perform the continuous hitting operation, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting effect. This interrupted rendition effect is obtained when it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (a command indicating 7 seconds) among the basic time commands constituting the variation pattern command and the additional time commands. This is an effect that may be performed. Here, the variation time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. When it is decided to execute the interruption continuous hit effect, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for the same length of time as the additional time notified by the additional time command, and the normal variable display effect (execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect) is executed. About the production mode of periods other than a period, it is set as the structure which sets the production mode of the period of the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command. By configuring in this way, even if a variable display effect set with an interrupted repetitive effect is executed, the effect mode corresponding to the basic time command can be reused, so the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can do.

  Moreover, in the interruption continuous striking effect in the first control example, a plurality of types of voice data (voice data corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound and voice data corresponding to the second consecutive hitting sound are generated each time the continuous hitting operation is executed. 1) of audio data is reproduced. More specifically, when an odd-numbered repeated hit operation is detected during the effective period of the continuous hit operation in one interrupt continuous hit effect, the voice data corresponding to the first consecutive hit sound is reproduced to the CN 2 in the voice synthesizer 306. On the other hand, when even-numbered repeated hitting operations are detected, the voice data corresponding to the second consecutive hitting sound is reproduced to CN3 in the voice synthesis unit 306. In this way, each time a continuous hit operation is executed, any one of a plurality of different sound data is output to any one of a plurality of different channels (the first and second continuous hit sounds are sent to CN1 and CN2). With this configuration, the voice mode can be diversified during continuous hitting operations. In other words, since it is possible to suppress the sound mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the continuous hitting effective period. In addition, when the configuration is such that the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are reproduced alternately on a single channel (that is, the control for stopping the output of one sound being reproduced and outputting the other sound) Compared to the case of repeating), the other voice can be output while maintaining the state in which one voice is output (the first and second consecutive hit sounds are output in an overlapping manner). Therefore, the voice mode during continuous hitting can be made more lively. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are alternately played back on a single channel, if a player with a quick hit interval performs a continuous hit operation, the head portion of each audio data It becomes a monotonous voice mode that only repeats alternately. On the other hand, if a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of audio data is reproduced in order on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data on other channels is interrupted. Can be played. That is, a voice based on one voice data and a voice based on other voice data can be synthesized and output. Accordingly, since it is possible to easily output the sound other than the head portion in each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the interrupt continuous hit effect in the first control example, the number of monster subtraction increases as the press timing is delayed (the remaining time of the valid period decreases) in the valid period in which the continuous hit operation is valid (more in the remaining period of the valid period). It is configured so that the production mode at the stage of high expectation is easily set). Thereby, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to suppress the subjugation of the lower limit number of monsters at an early stage. That is, it is possible to suppress the subtraction of the number of monsters based on pressing with the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies that are likely to be set in the case of losing, and the loss of expectation for the player's jackpot. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In addition, even when a player with a slow pace of pressing is playing, if the pressing is performed in the second half of the continuous hitting effective period, it becomes easy to select a relatively large number of defeats, so it reaches between the lower limit number of monsters The possibility can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the interruption continuous striking effect even for a player who has a slow pace of pressing down, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, in this 1st control example, as a kind of interest production, the plurality of reserved ball number symbols that have been reserved are changed to a specific mode (a rock-like display mode) that is different from the normal reserved symbol mode. The hold batch change effect is configured to be executable. In the hold batch change effect, after the plurality of held ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode, the player performs a specific operation (pressing operation on the PUSH button 10317), whereby at least one held ball number symbol is displayed. However, the effect which is changed to the aspect with higher expectation than the reserved symbol aspect before being changed to the specific aspect is executed. By executing the hold collective change effect, it is determined that the expectation level indicated by at least one reserved ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's expectation for jackpot can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed which of the reserved ball number symbols will change (expectation will increase), the operation on the PUSH button 10317 will look forward to which of the held ball number symbols will change. Can be performed. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the push button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to a player's favorite timing. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, during the execution of the interruption continuous striking effect, every time the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected, two types of audio data are alternately reproduced for the two channels, thereby changing the audio mode. Although the configuration is diversified, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are alternately reproduced in the order of CN1 and CN2. Thereby, a voice aspect can be diversified more. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be reproduced in order for three or more channels. With this configuration, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). Therefore, the voice mode can be further diversified. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which changes the kind of audio | voice data output according to the space | interval of continuous hitting. Specifically, for example, when the player has a relatively short interval (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less) and the player is playing, three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sequentially sent to two channels. It is good also as a structure which reproduces | regenerates (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the sound output mode even in accordance with the repeated hitting interval, so that it is possible to realize the gameability of adjusting the repeated hitting interval. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the first control example, during the execution of the interruption continuous hitting effect, it is configured to output any continuous hitting sound in conjunction with the continuous hitting operation. You may comprise so that an output is possible. More specifically, for example, when the last hit sound output in the effective period of the hit operation is the first consecutive hit sound, the second consecutive hit sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, the sound that is output last becomes the first continuous sound even though the first continuous sound and the second continuous sound are output as a set in response to the continuous operation. It is possible to prevent the voice mode from being halfway (that is, the second continuous hitting sound that is paired is not output). Therefore, the voice mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the last continuously output sound is the first continuous sound, the control for outputting the second continuous sound after the end is performed with a variable display (a lottery result) corresponding to a predetermined variation type (lottery result). For example, it may be configured to set only during execution of jackpot fluctuation. By configuring in this way, for a player who wants to know whether or not the variation type is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound that is output last during the interruption hitting effect is dared to be the first continuous hitting sound. Can be realized. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, during the execution of the interruption continuous hitting effect, the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between consecutive hits by the player. is not. For example, when a continuous hit operation is detected in a state where no sound is reproduced, the first continuous hit sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the playback of the next continuous hit operation is completed after the reproduction of one continuous hit sound is completed, only the first continuous hit sound is continuously output. It may be configured. By configuring in this way, a player who wants to diversify the voice mode can be repeatedly operated at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupted continuous hit effect is improved. be able to.

  In this first control example, every time a continuous hit operation is detected, voice data (voice file) corresponding to the first consecutive hit sound and voice data (voice file) corresponding to the second consecutive hit sound are alternately switched to different channels. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the audio data playback method is changed under predetermined conditions (or predetermined processing is applied to the audio data). More specifically, for example, the playback speed may be varied (or the audio data is processed) so that the output period of each continuous hitting sound is variable according to the interval between consecutive hitting operations by the player. . That is, when the interval between successive hitting operations by the player is longer than a predetermined interval (for example, 1 second interval), the output period may be long (for example, 1.5 seconds or longer). By configuring in this way, even when a player with a long consecutive hit interval is playing a game, it is relatively easy to overlap and output the other consecutive hit sound during the output of one consecutive hit sound, The voice mode can be diversified. In the first control example, the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are alternately output (reproduced) to different channels based on the execution of the continuous hit operation. Is not limited to the case based on the continuous hitting operation. The same control may be executed when outputting the start winning sound based on the start winning, or when outputting the winning sound based on the detection of the winning to the specific winning opening 65a. By configuring in this way, the sound can be output more suitably, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. Further, this control can also be employed simply when outputting a sound effect with an output period set in advance as part of the variable display effect. By configuring in this way, when sound effects and the like are continuously output in a relatively short time, it is possible to more appropriately output the sound, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. it can.

  In the first control example, if the execution timing of the interruption continuous hit effect is before reach, both the display mode and the voice mode are interrupted to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, while the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect is being reached. If so, the configuration is such that only the display mode is interrupted and the interruption continuous hitting effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the interruption continuous hit effect executed before reach, only the display mode is interrupted. On the other hand, in the interrupt continuous hit effect executed after the reach occurs, both the display mode and the voice mode are interrupted. Good. Since the sound output before reaching is relatively plain, it is difficult to disturb the sound of the interrupting effect without interrupting the output. On the other hand, flashy sound is likely to be output after reaching, so that it is possible to prevent the sound of interruption striking effects from becoming difficult to hear by interrupting the sound mode. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably set the sound mode of the interruption continuous striking effect. Further, for example, both the display mode and the voice mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing of the interrupted continuous effect, or conversely, only the display mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing. . Moreover, it is not limited to the control which switches the object (at least one of an audio | voice aspect and a display aspect) interrupted according to the execution timing of interruption repeated striking effect, You may control to switch according to other conditions. . More specifically, for example, it may be configured to determine whether both voice and display are to be interrupted by lottery or only one is to be interrupted at the start of the interrupt continuous hitting effect. In this case, it is good also as a structure from which the probability determined that both are interrupted differs according to whether it is a big hit or it removes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether both voice and display are interrupted or only one of them is interrupted. Can improve interest in Further, in the first control example, only the effect having the effect time of 7 seconds is provided as the interrupt continuous effect, but a plurality of interrupt continuous effects having different effect times may be provided. In this case, by providing a command indicating an additional time different from 0 seconds and 7 seconds as an additional time command, an interruption repeated striking effect of an effect time corresponding to the additional time notified by the additional time command is executed. You may comprise. Thereby, since a production | presentation aspect can be diversified more, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved. Further, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of the additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the total notified by the variation pattern command (that is, the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time command) The composition of determining the effect time of the interrupting hit effect so that the difference between the variation time of the sum of the additional time notified by the above and the effect time of the interrupting hit effect becomes the basic time that can be notified by the basic time command It is good. More specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern of the out-of-bounds super-reach B with a fluctuation time of 67 seconds is notified, 37 seconds as the effect time of the interruption continuous hit effect is left so that 30 seconds as the basic time of out-of-normal reach remain It may be configured to set By configuring in this way, it is only necessary to set the effect mode for 30 seconds, which is the basic time, and to end the variable display effect at the end of the variable time, together with the effect time of the interrupted hit effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupted hit effect is set without providing a dedicated variable display mode of the interrupted hit effect. In addition, when this control (control for determining the effect time of the interrupting strike effect so that the fluctuation time corresponding to the basic time remains), even if the additional time is 0 second, the interrupting hitting effect can be executed. it can. That is, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which an additional time command does not exist in the first place. Therefore, since the execution opportunity of the interruption continuous striking effect can be increased, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the first control example, when the number of lotteries for the special symbol exceeds 100 after the big hit, and the probability variation state continues, the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained. While it is configured to fall into the probability state and end the short time state of the normal symbol, it is not limited to this. Even after the number of lotteries for the special symbol exceeds 100, the condition for ending the short time state of the normal symbol may be different from the condition for falling into the low probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, the lottery for determining whether or not to fall from the short time state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol may be executed at the start of the fluctuation separately from the falling lottery from the probability variation state. Good. In addition, for example, when a special lottery result is obtained in a special symbol lottery, only the short-time state may be terminated. By configuring in this way, even if the normal symbol time-short state is terminated, it can be configured so that the probability variation state of the special symbol may continue, so immediately after the normal symbol time-short state is terminated It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game and continue the game in anticipation that the probabilistic state of the special symbol continues. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the first control example, the number of reserved balls based on the start winnings detected after the start of the hold collective change effect is uniformly set to the reserved pattern mode of white hold, but this is not a limitation. . For example, it is good also as a structure which performs the lottery of the pending | holding symbol aspect using the pending | holding change lottery table 222c (refer FIG. 414 (a)) about the new number of reserved balls. Thereby, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that is a big hit not only for the reserved ball number symbol that is the target of the pending batch change effect but also for the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start prize. Further, for example, a new start prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect. In this case, it may be configured to always add the number of reserved balls based on the new start prize to the target of the pending batch change effect, or as a configuration to add to the target of the pending batch change effect only under a predetermined condition. Also good. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to a new start winning prize indicates a jackpot expectation degree that is beyond super reach, it may be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect. For example, as a configuration that is included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect only when the winning information corresponding to the variation type having a higher expectation than the hold ball in the range where the hold batch change effect is set is newly notified. Also good. By comprising in this way, when the reserved ball number design based on a new start winning is added to the execution object of a hold batch change production, a player's expectation with respect to jackpot can be improved more.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 479 to 516. In the first control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 411, the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), a probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, normal state) (High probability state of symbol), short-time state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) can be set, jackpot winning of special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), falling lottery of falling lottery, special The gaming state is configured to be variably set based on the number of figure fluctuations (number of special drawing lotteries).

  On the other hand, in the second control example, in addition to the normal state, the probability variation state, the short time state, and the latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set as a gaming state. It is composed. In addition, in the special drawing lottery, it is configured to win a small win in a part of the case where the big win is not won. Here, a description will be given of the small wins that can be won in the special drawing lottery.

  When a special winning lottery is won, a small winning game different from the big winning game executed when the big winning is won is executed. In the present control example, the bonus game is configured so that the bonus amount (number of award balls) given to the player is smaller in the small hit game than in the big hit game. While the round game for the opening operation is configured to be executed for five or more rounds, in the small hit game, the round game for the opening operation of the variable winning device 65 is configured to execute only one round. In addition, after the jackpot game ends, a game state corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set. In other words, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be varied, whereas if the jackpot is won, The game state at the time of winning the win and the game state set after the end of the small hit game cannot be changed.

  Furthermore, in this control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (probability variation state, short time state), the high probability state of the normal symbol is low probability based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is won. It is configured to shift to a state. That is, as a condition (short time end condition) for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, the first short time end condition (100 times of special figure fluctuations) also provided in the first control example described above. In addition to the above, the second short-term end condition (small win) is provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the normal symbol high probability state to the low probability state.

  In this control example, a plurality of small hit types (small hit A, small hit B) that are set when winning a small hit are provided, and the set small hit type is a specific small hit type (small hit A) In addition, the second short-time end condition described above is established. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state only when a specific small hit type is won, so the high probability state of the normal symbol is terminated based on the small hit winner It is possible to set whether to end or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

  Note that, in the present control example, as in the first control example described above, the normal symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and based on the small winning winning Thus, even when the normal symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state, the normal symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state at the start timing of the special symbol variation. In this way, regardless of the trigger to end the high probability state of the normal symbol, the same timing is used to end the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the player ends the high probability state of the normal symbol. It can be difficult to understand what is the opportunity for this.

  Further, the present control example is configured such that the above-mentioned second short-time end condition is satisfied when a specific small hit type (small hit A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the normal symbol high probability state to the low probability state.

  In the above description, the gaming state (short-time state, probability variation state) in which the electric accessory 640a is easily opened is generally set to a high probability state of a normal symbol. However, for the convenience of explanation, the electric accessory 640a is opened. An easy gaming state (a gaming state in which a normal high probability state is set) is also simply referred to as a short-time state.

  In addition, in this control example, when a small win is won in the special drawing lottery, a plurality of small hit types can be set. It is configured to be executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the small hit type set this time based on the small hit game mode (the opening operation mode of the variable winning device 65). Therefore, every time a small hit game is executed, a short time end condition (second short time end condition) for ending the short time state by predicting whether or not a specific small hit type (small hit A) is set. ) Can be enjoyed.

  In this control example, as the time-shortening condition for ending the time-shortening state, it is set based on the number of special figure fluctuations in the period in which the time-shortening state is set or the number of specific small hits (small hits A) winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of fluctuations of a specific special figure type (for example, the second special symbol (special figure 2)) as the number of special figure fluctuations. The number of specific special figure fluctuations that only accumulated (number of lotteries), the number of outages that the result of the special figure lottery is out of place (the lottery results other than the big wins and the small wins), and the number of times the ball passed through the specific area A short time end condition that is satisfied when the predetermined number of times is reached may be provided.

  In the first control example described above, when a probable change state or a short time state is set after the jackpot game ends, the short time state (a high probability state of a normal symbol) is guaranteed until the special figure fluctuation count reaches 100 times. In contrast, the second control example is configured such that the second short time termination condition can be satisfied before the special figure fluctuation count reaches 100 times. If the second short-time end condition is satisfied before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100, the short-time state (a normal pattern high probability state) is set based on the second short-time end condition being satisfied. It is configured to terminate.

  In the second control example configured as described above, the rear mode effect described with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391 of the first control example described above (the high probability state of the special symbol is based on the lottery result of the falling lottery). It is configured so as to notify that the time-short state has ended in an effect for suggesting to the player whether or not it has ended. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the rear mode effect according to the lottery result of the falling lottery and the gaming state variably set according to whether or not the short-time end condition is satisfied. The detailed contents of this back mode effect will be described later.

<About the production contents in the pachinko machine of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 479 to 487, the contents of effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 479 to FIG. 481, the contents of the above-described rear mode effect will be described. FIG. 479 (a) shows an example of an effect that is executed when the winning information indicating that the second short-term ending condition is satisfied (the winning information indicating the small hitting A win) is stored on hold during the temple search mode. FIG. 479 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed when the special figure 2 variation won in the small hit A is started during the temple search mode. Note that among the display elements shown in each drawing, the same display elements as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 479 (a) shows a display screen during special figure 2 fluctuation in which the special figure fluctuation frequency after the jackpot game is ended is 77th, and the display area 802 shows the special figure fluctuation frequency. “23 times” is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining variation period) until the number reaches 100 times. Then, as shown in FIG. 479 (a), if there is a special figure 2 hold (shown with the letters “small” in the figure) that has winning information indicating that a small win A is won, An effect of shaking the pillars of the temple is executed, and the word “Pinch” is displayed on the pillars of the temple. Then, in the display area 812 where a comment for suggesting a game situation is displayed, a comment “What, what !?” is displayed.

  By setting such a display mode, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving state will be established before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times, so the time-saving state as in the first control example. It is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous as compared with the case of setting the guaranteed number of times that is executed.

  Further, in this control example, when the above-mentioned second time-shortening condition is satisfied, or when a big win is won in the special drawing lottery, the special figure change count reaches 100 times after the big hit game ends. By the time, the time saving state is configured to end. Therefore, by executing the end suggestion effect that suggests that the time-short state shown in FIG. 479 (a) is ended, the big win winning in favor of the player, or the end of the time-short state in disadvantage to the player It can be suggested that either is set. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effect result of the end suggestion effect, and to suppress getting tired of the game early.

  In this control example, the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 479 (a)) is executed when winning information that satisfies the condition for ending the time reduction state is included in the special figure hold stored on hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this.For example, as in this control example, the small hitting type set at the time of winning the small hitting and the number of small hitting wins for which a specific small hitting type is set On the basis of the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to establish the second short-term end condition based on it, the end suggestion effect is executed based on the small hitting winning, or the end suggestion effect is set based on the type of the small hitting type that is set. It may be executed. Also, in this case, it is configured such that winning indications that can be the trigger for establishment of the second short-term end condition are more likely to execute the end suggestion effect than winning winning types that can not be established, Further, it may be configured such that the end suggestion effect is more likely to be executed as the number of wins of the small hitting type that can be a trigger for establishment becomes closer to the number of wins for which the second short-time end condition is satisfied.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict to the player whether or not the short-time end condition is likely to be satisfied according to the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect. The player can watch whether it is being executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. Further, the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect may be varied based on whether or not a special symbol high probability state (probability variation state) is set. For example, when the probability variation state is set, the time reduction state It may be configured to make the end suggestion effect easier to execute than in the case where is set.

  In other words, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing lottery is higher than in the case where the time reduction state is set. Even if the state ends, it becomes possible to increase the rate at which the short-time state is ended in response to the jackpot winning. Therefore, when the probability variation state is set, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation with respect to the end suggestion effect by making the end suggestion effect easier to execute than when the time reduction state is set. .

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the end suggestion effect is less likely to be executed when the probability variation state is set than when the time reduction state is set, or after the jackpot game ends. The execution frequency of the end suggestion effect is different between the case where the time reduction state is set and the case where the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the time shifts to the time reduction state based on winning the falling lottery. You may comprise so that it may. In addition, the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect is different based on the period (special figure fluctuation count) required from the time when the probability change state is set until the fall winning (special figure fluctuation count) and the elapsed period after the fall win (special figure fluctuation count). You may comprise so that it may.

  Then, when time elapses from the state shown in FIG. 479 (a) and the special figure variation that satisfies the second short time end condition is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 479 (b) is displayed. In this control example, the time-short state (ordinary symbol high-probability state) is configured to end at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation when the second time-short-end condition is satisfied, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery is a big win However, since the time-short state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is terminated at the start timing of the special figure change, the display screen shown in FIG. 479 (b) is displayed in any case. Is done.

  FIG. 479 (b) shows a scene of the effect that the character 801 as the main character falls into the pit 820. In the display area 806, a “temple” is displayed as an end notification mode 822 indicating that the short-time state has ended. A “search end” character is displayed, and a “left-handed” character is displayed as a guidance notification mode 821 for guiding the player to the gaming method after the completion of the time-saving state. Then, a comment “It is a pitfall!” Is displayed as a display mode 812 for notifying the player of the effect contents being executed. In the display area 802, “? Times” is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining variation period) until the special figure variation count reaches 100 times.

  Next, the continuation of the effect shown in FIG. 479 (b) will be described with reference to FIGS. 480 and 481. FIG. 481 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the effect displayed when the effect result of the pitfall effect is a big hit. FIG. 480 (b) shows the effect result of the pitfall effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the effect displayed when it is completion | finish of a time-short state. FIG. 480 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents displayed during the change effect corresponding to the 99th special rotation after the end of the jackpot game. FIG. 481 (b) FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen showing the effect result of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation at the 99th rotation after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the case where the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479 (b) described above has been executed based on the jackpot winning of the special drawing lottery, the display mode in which the character 801 finds the treasure box 807 as shown in FIG. 480 (a). Is displayed, and a display mode of “333” indicating the big win is displayed in the display area Ds3 indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. In the display areas 821 and 823, “right-handed” is displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating the gaming method during the big hit game, and in the display area 806, “lottery result notification mode for indicating the big win is shown”. The comment “Treasure found !!” is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479 (b) described above has been executed based on the establishment of the second short-term termination condition (establishment of the termination condition based on the small win), FIG. 480 (b) As shown, a background mode (lost child mode) in which the character 801 crawls through the forest is set. In this lost child mode, the second short-term termination condition is satisfied during the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol) Status) is set, and the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, normal symbol) due to the establishment of the second short time termination condition during short time state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) This is set when the low probability state) is set.

  As described above, when the lost child mode is set, since the normal symbol is in a low probability state, “left-handed” is displayed in the display areas 821 and 823 as a guidance display mode for showing the game method to the player. Then, in the display area 806, the character “enter lost child mode” is displayed to indicate that “lost child mode” is set as the background mode. In addition, a display mode of “341” indicating the small winning prize (small winning A winning) is displayed in the display area Ds3 indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

  This “lost child mode” is configured to continue to be set until the number of special figure fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends reaches 99 times. When the change is executed, as shown in FIG. 481 (a), an effect is performed in which the character 801 stands on the branch road and selects the traveling direction. Then, when the character 801 walks in the selected traveling direction, a game state notification mode 821 for displaying the current game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 481 (b).

  According to the example shown in FIG. 481 (b), the gaming state notification mode 821 indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state is displayed, and “unfortunately, the normal state indicating the normal state is displayed in the display area 806”. The text “to mode” is displayed, and the background mode production is terminated. On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, when the current game state is the latent state at the stage where the 99th special figure change is executed after the end of the jackpot, the character “continue” is displayed as the game state notification mode 821. It is displayed and the lost child mode continues until the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state by the falling lottery.

  In other words, this control example is configured to determine that the latent state is set when the lost child mode is set even after the 99th special figure change is executed after the end of the jackpot. . In this way, during a predetermined period (99 special figure fluctuations) after the jackpot game ends, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent state even if the time-short state is ended. It is difficult for the player to understand, and after a predetermined period (99 special figure fluctuations) has elapsed, by performing the production so that the player can easily understand the current gaming state, a predetermined period after the jackpot game ends Since it is possible for the player to make it difficult to stop the game before (the special figure change 99 times), it is possible to improve the operation of the game. In addition, after a predetermined period (99 special figure changes) has elapsed, the player is notified of the current gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby preventing the player from executing an excessively unfavorable game. can do.

  In this control example, the timing for notifying the player of the current gaming state is fixed at the timing at which the special figure variation is executed 99 times after the jackpot game ends, but this is not restrictive. For example, a plurality of timings (for example, timings at which the number of special figure changes after the jackpot game is 10, 30, 70, 90) are set as the gaming state notification possible timing, and the time is shortened when the timing is reached. It is determined whether or not the state has ended (whether or not the second short-time end condition is satisfied), and when it is determined that the short-time state has ended, an effect for informing the current gaming state (FIG. 481 (b)) may be executed. In addition, there is provided a measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations after the second short time termination condition is satisfied (after the lost child mode is set), and the measurement result of the measuring means is a predetermined number (for example, 20, 30, 40) In order to perform a lottery on whether or not to execute an effect (see FIG. 481 (b)) for notifying the current gaming state at the timing of 40), and to notify the current gaming state based on the lottery result. It may be configured to execute the effect (see FIG. 481 (b)).

  By configuring in this way, the second short-term termination condition is satisfied immediately after the short-time state (normal symbol high-probability state) is set, and is unnecessary when the short-time state (normal symbol high-probability state) ends. It is possible to prevent a game in the lost child mode from being performed for a long period of time.

  In the present control example, even when the jackpot is won while the lost child mode is set, the effects shown in FIG. 481 (a) and FIG. 481 (b) are executed, and the game state notification mode 821 is “ It is configured to be displayed with the letters "big hit". As a result, even if an effect for informing the current gaming state (see FIG. 481 (b)) is started, it is possible to wait for the effect result while expecting a big win. Can be increased.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, as in the first control example described above, the gaming state at the execution timing of the special figure fluctuation to be executed in the future is predicted based on the prefetch result of the special figure hold, and the prediction result The game state notification mode 821 may be displayed in advance based on the above.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the time-short state (ordinary symbol high probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the time-short state (normal symbol high probability state) ends at various timings. Therefore, the game state transition process differs depending on the timing at which the second short-term-end condition is satisfied and the timing of winning the fall by the falling lottery, so that the player can play in various gaming states. And can improve the interest of the game. In addition, as a background mode effect, a background mode corresponding to each gaming state is set, and a latent state is set when the time-short state (normal probability high probability state) is completed. Since the background mode (lost child mode) for making it difficult for the player to know whether the normal state is set or not is set, the player can continue to play the game.

  Also, if a big win is won during the background mode performance (during a right-handed game), “left-handed” will be notified during the special figure fluctuation period indicating the big win, and after the special figure fluctuation is stopped (determined), “Right-handed” is configured to be notified, so that the effect mode (see FIG. 479 (b)) when the time-short state is ended during the background mode effect (left-handed game) is an opportunity to end the time-short state. It can be unified regardless. In this control example, when the time shortening state ends, “left-handed” is unified and notified (displayed). However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may alert | report (display) unifying the "right-handed" period until a fluctuation | variation is stopped display (confirmation display).

  Moreover, in this control example, although the example of the effect for making it difficult for a player to understand the opportunity to end the time-saving state has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and some effect modes of the effect to be executed can be changed. Thus, it may be configured to suggest to the player the end timing of the short-time state established this time. For example, in the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 479 (a), the color of the temple pillar or the pillar is displayed. By changing the type of character to be used, the player may be configured to indicate to the player the opportunity to end the short-time state established this time. In the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479 (b), the lid of the pitfall 820 By changing the color and the display mode of the display area 812, it may be configured to indicate to the player the end timing of the short-time state established this time.

  In this control example, when the time-short state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game is finished, the first time short-time that ends the time-short state (high probability state of the normal symbol) based on the number of special symbol changes. The end condition (100 times of special figure variation) is set, and the second short-time end condition that is established when a specific number of wins is won by a special drawing lottery until the first short-time end condition is satisfied. In the case of winning or winning a jackpot, the time-short state (normal probability high probability state) is terminated at that time.

  Further, in this control example, the time-short state is terminated at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation in which various conditions are satisfied in order to end the time-short state described above. In other words, when the special figure variation count of 100 is set as the first short-time end condition, the short-time state is terminated at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, which is the 100th time in the state where the short-time state is set, and In the case of setting that a specific small hit (small hit A) is won twice as an end condition, the timing of the special figure change start when the second small hit A is won in the state where the time reduction state is set The time-short state is terminated at the time point, and the time-short state is terminated at the start timing of the special figure change that wins the jackpot in the state where the time-short state is set.

  By configuring in this way, when the time reduction state ends while the first time reduction termination condition is not established, a lottery result indicating that the special figure variation being executed indicates a big hit or a lottery result indicating a small win Since it is possible to notify the player that the display is stopped in the mode, the special figure is drawn with interest to the player until the special figure variation executed when the time reduction state is finished is displayed. It is possible to watch the variation effect executed in response to the variation.

  In addition, in this control example, a condition that is satisfied when winning a plurality of small hits is set as the second time-shortening end condition, so for example, paying attention to the special drawing lottery result that is executed during the time-shortening state. By determining whether or not the small win is won, the first short-term end condition is not satisfied, and if the short-time state ends in a state where the small win is not won, It becomes possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation is a big hit. In this way, it is difficult to specify the short-time end condition established this time only by the end timing of the short-time state, the game content (special drawing lottery result) in the short-time state (ordinary symbol high probability state), and the short-time state end timing Based on the above, it is possible to specify the short-time end condition established this time, and the player can be interested in the game content (special drawing lottery result) during the short-time state, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent the game during the short state from becoming monotonous when the game state is in a negative state.

  In this control example, the game contents of the jackpot game (for example, round game, 15 round game) executed when winning the jackpot with special figure fluctuation and the jackpot game executed when winning the jackpot The game contents (1 round game) are different from each other, so the lottery result of the special drawing lottery can be discriminated afterwards based on the contents of the winning game executed. For example, the type of jackpot game executed based on winning the jackpot in the special drawing lottery is the same as that for the jackpot game (concept including differences that are difficult for the player to identify) You may comprise so that the game classification in which a game is performed can be set.

  By configuring in this way, a part of the jackpot game that is executed based on winning the jackpot in the special drawing lottery, and the jackpot game that is executed based on winning the jackpot in the special drawing lottery Since the game content of the winning game (the opening operation content for the variable winning device 65) can be unified, the hit game executed this time based on the game content of the executed winning game is a jackpot game or small hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the game is a game.

  Also, in this case, if a big hit game with the same hit game content as the small hit game is executed, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) after the big hit game ends Should be configured to be settable. By configuring in this way, a game after the end of the small hit game (left-handed game) based on the small win winning that the second short-time end condition is satisfied, a game after the end of the big hit game (left-handed game), Can be made the same. Therefore, in the case where the time-short state is ended while the first time-short-end condition is not satisfied, the game content of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) to be executed (the opening operation content for the variable winning device 65), and the winning game Based on the game contents (left-handed game) executed after the game (big hit game, small hit game) is completed, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to understand what the short-time end condition is established.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the probability state of the special symbol and the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set based on the jackpot winning. It is configured only to be variable from a state to a low probability state. In other words, the big hit winning is a trigger that can variably set the gaming state within a range of 1, and the small win winning is configured as a trigger that can variably set the gaming state within a range of 2 narrower than the range of 1. Yes. In this way, based on the lottery result of the special drawing lottery, by predicting the game state to be set in the future when the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is grasped by varying the range of game states that can be variably set. It can be made easy.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 482 and FIG. 483, the contents of effects in the speech zone executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this control example, the speech zone can be set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. When this line zone is set, the character of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) that is first stopped and displayed among the third symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An effect is produced in which each third symbol emits a line corresponding to.

  Here, in the case of executing an effect in which each third symbol emits a line corresponding to the display mode (for example, character) of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) that is first stopped and displayed, If the same display mode is continued as the display mode (for example, character) of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) that is stopped and displayed, the same line effect is executed and the effect There was a problem that would decrease.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the character of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) stopped and displayed in the past and information (past information) indicating the set speech can be stored. Based on the stored past information, the effect mode (character, serif) of the newly-executed serif effect is set. Thereby, various production modes can be set as the production mode of the dialogue production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, when a new line production effect mode is set, the production mode is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (special drawing lottery). Thereby, for example, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, it is possible to intentionally set an effect mode (for example, an effect mode in which the same character is continuously set) that gives the player a sense of discomfort. Become. Therefore, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special drawing lottery based on the production mode of the dialogue production, it is possible to make the player gaze at the production and improve the interest of the game.

  In the second control example, a plurality of characters that can be stopped and displayed on the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) are divided into a plurality of groups (in this control example, a land creature group and a sea creature group). ), And when the third symbols corresponding to characters in the same group are stopped and displayed, and when the third symbols corresponding to characters in different groups are stopped and displayed. The content is configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to predict the displayed lines by grasping the third symbols that are stopped and displayed before the timing when the lines are displayed (timing when each third symbol is stopped and displayed). Become. Therefore, it is possible to entertain whether or not the content of the predicted speech matches the content of the actual displayed speech.

  Here, the selection method of the character used for the line production and the specific line content will be described later with reference to FIGS. 495 to 497. First, the content displayed during the line production is shown in FIG. 482 and This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 482 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the left third symbol LZ is stopped and displayed in the serif effect, and FIG. 482 (b) is a right view in the serif effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen when 3 symbols RZ carries out a stop display. FIG. 483 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the reach state is achieved by the speech effect, and FIG. 483 (b) belongs to a different group by the speech effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen when a character stopped-displays.

  As shown in FIG. 482 (a), when the speech zone is set, the display area 806 displays “Serif zone” as an effect notification mode for notifying the player that the speech zone is set. Is done. In the center of the display screen, the left third symbol LZ, the middle third symbol CZ, and the right third symbol RZ are variably displayed, and are attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when each third symbol is stopped. A line corresponding to the selected character is displayed. In the state where the speech zone is set, the third symbol is a fused third symbol that is a fusion of the number mode that is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the character mode corresponding to the number mode. In the figure shown in FIG. 482 (a), the third figure LZ on the left is displayed as the third figure LZ that is a fusion of the character form “Elephant” and the number form “1”. , the character of "Hello" is displayed as words LZ1.

  In this control example, a different character mode is associated with each of the nine types of numeric modes. Detailed description of the display mode of each fused third symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 495 (a).

  Further, in the present control example, the speech displayed in the speech production is configured to be output by the audio output device 226. As a result, the effect to be executed can be identified by hearing, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to identify the effect mode (voice mode) of the line effect even for a nearby player who is difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81. It is possible to obtain a sense of superiority when a line production with high expectation is executed.

  FIG. 482 (b) shows a state where the effect has progressed from the state of FIG. 482 (a) described above and the right third symbol RZ is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 482 (b), as the right third symbol RZ, the fusion third symbol in which the character aspect of “lion” and the numerical aspect of “2” are fused and displayed, and the character “Long time” is displayed as the line RZ1. Is displayed. Here, in FIG. 482 (b), since the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are both stopped and displayed in the fused third symbol having characters belonging to the same group (land creature group), Dialogue production is performed in which a conversation is established.

  The variation display displayed in FIG. 482 (b) is that in FIG. 483 (a), the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are both “Elephant” character mode and “1” number. The fusion 3rd symbol that is fused with the mode is displayed in a stopped state, and the reach state in which the left 3rd symbol LZ and the right 3rd symbol RZ are stopped and displayed in the same fused 3rd symbol is displayed. Then, the words “weather is nice” are displayed as the lines LZ1, and the words “hot” are displayed as the lines RZ1. FIG. 483 (b) is stopped and displayed in the fused 3rd symbol having characters belonging to different groups in the left 3rd symbol LZ and the right 3rd symbol RZ, and the line LZ1 “ Hello "is not followed by a conversation with respect to the" Bah! "comment is displayed as a dialogue RZ1 of the right third symbol RZ.

  Next, the variable operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 484 and 485. In the second control example, a variable operation effect that allows a player to operate a lever member 10340 (10310) that can move between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operation position) is configured to be executable. doing. This variable operation effect includes a preparation effect that is executed during an effect preparation processing period (2 seconds) in which the lever member 10340 (10310) that is normally positioned at the first position is moved to the second position, and the second position. An operation instruction effect executed during an operation instruction period (3 seconds) for causing the player to operate the positioned lever member 10340 (10310), and the player operates the lever member 10340 (10310) during the operation instruction period The operation corresponding effect indicating that it has been performed and the result effect that is executed during the result display period (2 seconds) indicating the effect result of the variable operation effect are configured to be executed. The lever member 10340 (10310) has been described in each of the above-described embodiments, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in this control example, for convenience of explanation, the operation means is unified with the name of the lever member 10340 and explained.

  Further, a variable operation effective period for effectively determining the player's operation on the operation means (lever member 10340) is set in correspondence with the period in which the operation instruction period (3 seconds) is set. If the player operates the lever member 10340 during this operation instruction period and the operation is determined to be effective, the operation corresponding effect is executed without waiting for the operation instruction period to elapse, and then the result effect is displayed. It is configured to be displayed. Thereby, since a result presentation can be displayed corresponding to operation to the operation means which a player performs, it becomes possible to make a player operate an operation means eagerly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the player operates the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period and the operation is determined to be effective, only the operation corresponding effect is executed, and the result is obtained after the operation instruction period elapses. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed.

  Here, the contents of various effects executed during the variable operation effect will be briefly described. First, during the preparation effect, an effect is executed that suggests that an effect that causes the player to operate the lever member 10340 is executed soon. Specifically, an image simulating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player is notified that the lever member 10340 has moved from the first position to the second position. The preparation effect is executed in the effect mode for the purpose.

  In this control example, since the operation means is operated from the second position toward the first position during the variable operation effect, the lever member 10340 is thus moved from the first position to the second position. By notifying the player of the preparation effect indicating that the player is moving, it is possible to easily grasp the direction in which the player operates the lever member 10340 by the current variable operation effect. In the case where a variable operation effect that causes the player to operate from the second position to the third position different from the first position after the operation means has moved from the first position to the second position is prepared. Informing the player that the operating means will move to the first position, the second position, and the third position during the performance, and that the operating means is located at the second position when the effect preparation process is completed. It is good to comprise so that the production | presentation aspect for alerting | reporting to a person may be set. That is, it is good to comprise so that the operation content with respect to the operation means which a player should perform with respect to an operation means is alert | reported using a preparation effect.

  Then, when the preparation effect is completed, an operation instruction effect for causing the player to operate the operation means (lever member 10340) is executed. Here, the content of the operation instruction effect will be described with reference to FIG. 484 (a). FIG. 484 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an effect screen displayed during an operation instruction effect. As shown in FIG. 484 (a), when the operation instruction effect is executed, an image simulating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the lever member 10340 is moved downward (first position). Display mode that prompts the user to push the button down, and a comment “push the lever” is displayed.

  In FIG. 484 (a), although not shown, a period gauge for indicating the elapsed period of the operation instruction period (3 seconds) and the remaining period is also displayed. Although illustration is omitted, if the player depresses the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, an operation corresponding effect (for example, display of a comment indicating operation completion) indicating that the operation means has been operated during the operation effective period. ) Is displayed, and then the effect result is displayed. Since this effect result is the same as the effect result of various effects using the operation means used in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Thus, in this control example, as the variable operation effect, the operating means (lever member 10340) located at the first position (origin position) is moved to the second position (actuation position), and then the player Thus, it is possible to execute an effect of executing an operation of moving the operating means from the second position to the first position. As a result, as in the first control example described above, it is possible to improve the player's feeling of operation and enhance the effect as compared with the case where the effect of merely pressing the push button 10317 is executed as the operation effect. Can do.

  However, in the case where the variable operation effect described above is executed, if the player does not operate the operation means (lever member 10340) during the operation effective period, the lever member 10340 remains in the second state even after the variable operation effect ends. Therefore, there is a problem that the structure of the operation device 10300 having the lever member 10340 becomes unstable. In addition to the lever member 10340, the operation device 10300 used in this control example is provided with an operation means (PUSH button 10317). If the lever member 10340 remains in the second position, another operation is performed. There is a problem that it is difficult to press the means (PUSH button 10317).

  With respect to such a problem, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation effect, and when the lever member 10340 is not positioned at the first position, the lever member is Although it is conceivable to perform operation control (return operation control) for forcibly returning 10340 to the first position, the lever member 10340 is moved to the second position in order to improve the player's feeling of operation on the operating means. In spite of the movement, there is a problem that the effect cannot be enhanced because the movement from the second position to the first position is not performed without the player's operation.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation effect, and when the lever member 10340 is not positioned at the first position, the next variable operation effect is generated. It is configured to be easily executed. With this configuration, the lever member 10340 once moved to the second position can be easily moved to the first position by the player's operation, so that the lever member can be enhanced while enhancing the effect. 10340 can be moved to the first position (origin position).

  Further, in this control example, an upper limit is set for a period during which the next variable operation effect is likely to be executed, and when the lever member 10340 is located at the second position even after the period has elapsed, the driving means ( The drive member is configured to execute return operation control for moving the lever member 10340 to the first position. Thereby, it can suppress that a variable operation effect is performed excessively with respect to a player.

  Here, when the return operation control is executed, the player gives a force to the direction against the force generated when the lever member 10340 located at the second position moves toward the first position. That is, if the player pushes up the lever member 10340 so that the lever member 10340 does not move to the first position, the lever member 10340 cannot be moved to the first position by the return operation control. .

  Therefore, if the return operation control is performed so that the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position with a force stronger than the force that can be applied by the player, the player may be injured. If the return operation control is continuously executed until the 10340 is moved to the first position, the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is excessively loaded, causing a problem.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position in the state where the return operation control for a predetermined period (5 seconds) has been completed, the initial position of the lever member 10340 is determined. Is configured to execute a process of switching from the first position to the second position, and to perform an effect in which the second position is the initial position.

  When the variable operation effect is executed in a state where the second position is the initial position, the lever member 10340 during the effect preparation period in which the effect preparation process is executed moves from the second position to the first position, and an operation instruction is issued. As an effect, an effect of operating the lever member 10340 from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 484 (b)) is executed. Thus, by varying the effect mode of the variable operation effect, the player can be interested in the variable operation effect, and the effect can be enhanced.

  When it is determined that the position of the lever member 10340 is neither the first position nor the second position after the end of the variable operation effect, that is, an origin detection flag 223ae and an operation position detection flag 223af, which will be described later, are set on. If not, the player may be holding the lever member 10340 at an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, so that the player can release his hand from the lever member 10340 as an effect mode for the next variable operation effect. Therefore, an effect mode using a touch sensor having a detection area formed at a position overlapping the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 485, an image 891 imitating the hand is displayed corresponding to the detection area 890 of the touch sensor displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the detection area 890 is touched. In this manner, the characters “touch” are displayed in the display area 892, and a comment “touch the liquid crystal” is displayed in the display area 806 to indicate the operation content of the current operation effect. By performing the effect of touching the liquid crystal in this way (touch effect), the player can release the hand from the lever member 10340 and touch the liquid crystal. And in this control example, it is comprised so that the return operation control of the lever member 10340 may be performed according to the execution period of a touch effect. Thereby, the lever member 10340 can be reliably moved to the first position.

  In the second control example, the touch sensor can be operated with one hand. In this case, the touch sensor can be operated while holding the lever member 10340 by releasing the hand from the operation handle. Therefore, in addition to the touch effect for operating the touch sensor, it may be configured to execute a launch effect that prompts the player to fire a ball by operating the operation handle. Thereby, the player's hand can be more easily separated from the lever member 10340.

  Further, only the above-described launch effect may be executed, or an effect mode using both hands as a touch effect, for example, a detection range with an interval of 20 centimeters or more provided in the game board 13 so as not to reach with one hand. A plurality of touch sensors may be provided so as to be formed, and a touch effect in which the plurality of touch sensors are operated simultaneously may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 486 to 488, the contents of the hold effect in the second control example will be described. In the present control example, as in the first control example described above, a special symbol change effect that can be executed in response to a special symbol variation for indicating a lottery result of the special symbol and a special symbol based on the start winning of the special symbol It has a hold effect that can be executed when the hold is acquired, and is configured so that an operation effect for allowing the player to operate the operation means can be set in any effect.

  As described above, the special figure fluctuation effect is executed based on the special figure fluctuation, the hold effect is executed based on the acquisition of the special figure hold, and the special effect is produced while the special figure fluctuation effect is being executed. Can be executed at various timings to improve the fun of the game, but the operation effect derived from the special drawing variation effect and the operation derived from the hold effect There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to determine which operation effect changes based on the result of the operation performed on the operation means performed by the player.

  In contrast, in this control example, when the execution condition of one operation effect is satisfied, the execution status of the other operation effect is determined, and the execution start timing of one operation effect is determined based on the determination result. It is configured to be variable. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a plurality of operation effects from being executed at the same time, and to provide an operation effect that is easy to understand for the player. Furthermore, using the period from when the operation effect execution condition is satisfied until the operation effect is actually executed, a suggestion effect suggesting that the operation effect is waiting to be executed can be executed. doing. Thereby, since it can be suggested that a new operation effect is executed after the currently executed operation effect is completed, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting an effect to be executed in the future.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 486, the contents of the standby effect that is executed when the operation effects overlap will be described. FIG. 486 (a) schematically illustrates an example of the standby effect displayed on the display screen when a condition that allows the operation effect to be executed as the hold effect is satisfied while the operation effect is being executed in the special figure variation effect. FIG. 486 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen after the end of the standby effect. In addition, since the operation effect derived from the special figure variation effect executed in the present control example is the same as that in the first control example described above, detailed description of the effect contents and the execution trigger is omitted.

  FIG. 486 (a) shows the display area on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 389), specifically, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (special symbol 1). It is the schematic diagram which expanded the display area Ds1 vicinity where the display mode (holding ball symbol) for displaying is displayed. As described above, the standby effect shown in FIG. 486 (a) is executed when the operation effect derived from the special figure variation effect is executed, and therefore, illustration is omitted in FIG. 486 (a). However, an operation effect derived from the special-figure variation effect is executed at a substantially central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In FIG. 486 (a), the fourth reserved ball symbol Hz4 is displayed on the display screen in the state where the first reserved ball symbol Hz1 to the fourth reserved ball symbol Hz4 are displayed as the reserved symbols of the special figure 1. Based on this (based on the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 has received a winning information command indicating winning information to be the fourth reserved ball in FIG. 1), the standby effect is being executed.

  In other words, when an operation effect (holding operation effect) that causes the player to operate the operating means is executed as a holding effect based on the reception of the winning information command indicating the winning information that is the fourth holding ball in FIG. If it is determined that the execution condition of the hold operation effect is satisfied, and it is determined that the operation effect (special operation effect) is being executed as the special figure variation effect at that time (the standby condition of the hold operation effect is satisfied) ), A standby effect that suggests that the hold operation effect is executed is executed.

  In this standby effect, the effect that the suggested character HC1 appears (frame-in) in the display screen while rotating the display portion (the head in FIG. 486 (a)) having a plurality of display surfaces is executed. The suggesting character HC1 has three display surfaces, and characters “PUSH”, “red”, and “chance” are displayed on each of them. Then, after the display part is rotated during the standby effect, the specific display part is stopped and displayed at a position where it is easier to visually recognize than the other display parts as the effect result of the standby effect.

  For example, when the hold operation effect is executed after the standby effect, the specific display part where the characters “PUSH” are displayed as a result of the standby effect is stopped and displayed at a position that is easier to visually recognize than the other display parts. The hold operation effect is executed.

  As described above, when the standby effect is executed, an effect of rotating the display portion of the suggested character HC1 framed in the display screen is executed, and further, the player is displayed on a part of the rotating display portion. By displaying the display mode (“PUSH”) for operating the operation means, it can be suggested to the player that the hold operation effect is in the standby state. Further, by rotating the display mode (“PUSH”) for causing the player to operate the operation means, the player is informed that the operation effective period of the hold operation effect is not set at the present time (during the standby effect). An easy-to-understand notification can be made.

  In this control example, the suggestion character HC1 shows an effect aspect in which the suggestion character HC1 is framed in the display screen while the stand-by effect is being executed. However, the suggestion character HC1 only during a part of the stand-by effect period. May be configured to frame in. In addition, as a standby effect, an effect of rotating in a state where a predetermined display mode (“PUSH”, “red”, “chance”) is displayed on a plurality of display surfaces serving as display portions of the suggesting character HC1 is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode displayed on the plurality of display surfaces serving as the display parts of the suggesting character HC1 may be varied during the standby effect, and the display mode is not displayed. You may comprise so that the production which rotates a display part may be performed.

  Further, in the effect of rotating the display part of the suggestion character HC1 executed during the standby effect, the rotation speed of the display part may be varied according to the progress degree of the standby effect. You may comprise so that a rotational speed may be reduced. With this configuration, it is difficult to understand what the suggesting character HC1 suggests immediately after the standby effect is executed, and it is easy for the player to grasp the suggested content of the suggesting character HC1 over time. can do. Therefore, the player can be interested in the contents of the standby effect.

  Furthermore, the rotation speed of the display portion of the suggesting character HC1 may be varied based on the operation content of the operating means in the special figure operation effect being executed. It may be configured to increase the rotation speed based on operating the operating means. With this configuration, the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 rotates at high speed and is displayed on the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 when the operation means is actively operated during the special figure operation effect. This makes it difficult to identify the characters “PUSH”. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to concentrate on the special drawing operation effect and play the game.

  Note that the relationship between the operation mode of the player's operation means for the special drawing operation effect and the display mode displayed during the standby effect is not limited to this, and the player may change the operation means during the special drawing operation effect. Based on the operation, the display mode displayed on each display surface of the display portion of the suggesting character HC1 may be changed.

  In this control example, when the standby effect shown in FIG. 486 (a) ends, it is determined again whether the hold operation effect can be executed. If it is determined that the hold effect can be executed, the display portion of the suggesting character HC1 is displayed. If the display of the suggestion character HC1 is “red” or “chance” when it is determined that the hold operation effect cannot be executed after the standby effect ends, the stop display is performed so that the characters “PUSH” can be identified. The display is stopped so that the characters can be identified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 486 (b), when the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 is stopped and displayed so that the characters “red” can be identified, the holding ball symbol is not executed without performing the operation effect. The display effect of changing the display mode of (in FIG. 486 (a), the second reserved ball symbol which was the blue display mode is changed to the red display mode) is executed.

  In this way, if the execution condition of the hold operation effect is established and the hold operation effect cannot be executed immediately, can the standby effect be executed and the hold operation effect be executed at the end timing of the standby effect? It is possible to simplify the determination of the execution condition of the standby effect by determining again and changing the effect result of the standby effect based on the determination result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 487 and FIG. 488, the flow of setting the operation effect in the second control example will be described. In this second control example, the effect mode of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is set at different timings in the first half period (first period) and the second half period (second period) of the special figure fluctuation period. It is configured. Specifically, the effect mode of the special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the first half period (first period) of the special figure fluctuation period is set at the start timing of special figure fluctuation (the timing at which the fluctuation pattern command is received). The effect mode of the special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the second half period (second period) of the fluctuation period is configured to be set after a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure fluctuation has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in this control example, information (first information) used for setting the effect mode (first effect mode) of the change effect corresponding to the first period of the special figure change period, and 2 of the first special figure change period The information (second information) used for setting the effect mode (second effect mode) of the variable effect corresponding to the period is made different. Specifically, the first effect mode is the main control device 110. The production mode is set based on the variation pattern command output from the second production mode, the production information stored when the first production mode is set (information stored in the production information storage area 223ak), It is configured to be set based on information indicating whether the holding effect (holding operation effect) is on standby (setting status of the effect standby flag 223aj).

  Here, a method for setting the special drawing variation effect and the hold effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 487 and 488. FIG. 487 is a diagram showing a setting method of various effects when the execution condition of the hold operation effect is established as the hold effect during the first period of the special figure change period. FIG. It is the figure which showed the setting method of the various effects when the execution conditions of the hold operation effect are satisfied as the hold effect during the second period.

  As shown in FIG. 487, a variation pattern command is output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the special figure variation is executed. On the voice lamp control device 11 side, the fluctuation pattern is based on the information indicating the special figure fluctuation time included in the received fluctuation pattern command, the information indicating the lottery result of the special figure lottery, and the information indicating the stop type of the special figure. The variation effect for the first period is set with reference to the table 222a. Specifically, the variation effect mode of the first period and the effect information indicating the length of the second period are set and stored in the effect information storage area 223ak.

  Here, when the operation effect (special drawing operation effect) is set as the variation effect mode of the set first period, the special figure operation effect is executed in accordance with the execution timing of the special figure operation effect, and the game An operation effective period for effectively determining an operation performed by the user on the operation means is set. Then, during the period in which the fluctuating effect of the first period is being executed, a special design start-up winning (a winning of a ball to the first winning port 64) occurs, and the main controller 110 reads the look-ahead result corresponding to the start winning When the winning information command including is output to the sound lamp control device 113, a determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute the holding effect based on the winning information command received on the sound lamp control device 113 side. When it is determined that the hold effect has been executed, processing for setting the effect mode of the hold effect is executed.

  Display modes other than the operation effect (hold operation effect) as the effect mode of the hold effect (for example, display of any one of the special figure reservation ball symbols Hz1 to Hz4 based on the elapsed time without using the operation of the operation means by the player When the production mode) is set, the hold production is executed without determining the production mode of the special figure variation production being executed. On the other hand, when the operation effect (hold operation effect) is set as the effect mode of the hold effect, in order to determine whether or not the present time is a situation in which the hold operation effect can be executed, the special figure variation effect (first) The special content variation effect during the period is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the operation effect is duplicated. Here, the special information variation effect is obtained by reading the production information stored in the production information storage area 223ak. Analyze the contents.

  If it is determined by this analysis that the operation effects are duplicated, that is, if the current time is within the period during which the special figure operation effect is being executed, or if the hold operation effect is executed, the special operation effect will be displayed during the hold operation effect. When it is determined that the figure operation effect will be executed, the hold operation effect is not executed within the first period of the special figure fluctuation period, and the standby effect is executed (see FIG. 486 (a)).

  Then, at the timing (the timing when 28 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special figure change) at the second period of the special figure change period (30 seconds to 60 seconds of the special figure change period), the first period The production mode during the second period based on the production results of various productions (eg, the production results for the operation production), the production information stored in the production information storage area 223ak, and the standby status of the hold operation production Set. Although detailed description is omitted, priority is given to information to be referred to when setting the production mode during the second period, and information that overlaps when setting the production mode, The production mode is configured based on information for which a high priority is set. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special figure variation being executed is a big hit, the priority for the various information for indicating the lottery result of the variation is set higher than the standby information for the hold operation effect. When the lottery result of the special figure variation being executed is out of place, the standby information for the hold operation effect may be configured to have a higher priority than the lottery result of the special figure variation being executed. By comprising in this way, the effect performed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be performed according to a player's interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 488, an effect setting method for a case where a new special figure winning occurs during the second period of the special figure fluctuation period will be described. As shown in FIG. 488, if the timing at which the winning information command is received and the hold operation effect is determined is during the second period of the special figure change effect, is the hold operation effect executable at that time? If it is determined whether or not it is possible to execute, the hold operation effect is executed as it is, and if it is determined that it is impossible (difficult), the hold effect that does not execute the hold operation effect is executed as the current hold effect. .

  As described above, in the present control example, the length of the first period and the first period are determined based on the variation time information included in the received variation pattern command at the execution start timing of the variation design effect (special diagram variation effect) of the special symbol. The length of the two periods is set, and the effect mode is set according to the set length of the period, but not limited to this, the effect mode to be executed in the first half period is set, The execution period of the set production mode may be set as the first period, and the remaining period may be set as the second period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the effect mode of the fluctuating effect that is executed in the first half period without worrying about the effect period, and therefore it is possible to easily increase the types of effects that are executed.

  Further, in this control example, the hold operation effect that is in the standby state during the first period is configured to be executable during the second period, but the effect mode of the hold operation effect that is executed from the first period. It may be configured such that (the contents of the effect, the effect period) and the effect mode of the hold operation effect executed after the second period (executed after waiting) are different, for example, executed during the first period. The effect mode of the hold operation effect to be performed may be configured so that the effect period is shorter than the effect mode of the hold operation effect executed during the second period.

  By configuring in this way, when the stand-by effect is executed and then the hold operation effect is executed, the hold operation effect using a long period is executed, so it is easy to enhance the effect of the hold operation effect. can do. Therefore, when the standby effect is executed, the game can be performed while expecting the hold operation effect to be executed.

  Furthermore, when a new special figure hold is acquired during the standby period in which the hold operation effect is on standby, a hold operation effect that reflects the prefetched result corresponding to the newly acquired special figure hold is executed. It is good to configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly while the standby effect is being executed. Moreover, since the production | presentation which can change the display mode of a some special figure holding | maintenance can be performed by the holding | maintenance operation production performed after a standby production, the production effect can be heightened.

  Next, referring to FIG. 489, a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 489 is a transition diagram showing a flow of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 489, in the second control example, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above has a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability of a normal symbol) as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. (Probability state) can be set, and in the case of winning the jackpot in the special drawing lottery, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be set after the jackpot game ends This is largely different in that a state transition for ending the short-time state (the high probability state of the normal symbol) is provided based on the fact that the special winning lottery is won.

  That is, in the first control example described above, only the normal state can be set as the gaming state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the case where the jackpot game is not executed after the short-time state has ended. However, the player can easily determine that the currently set gaming state is the normal state, but in the second control example, as the gaming state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set Since the normal state and the latent state can be set, it is difficult for the player to easily determine the set game state when the jackpot game is not executed after the short-time state ends. Can do.

  In addition, among the gaming states where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the latent state is set to the high probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. However, the latent state is configured so as to be in a gaming state in which it is easy to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, that is, a gaming state advantageous to the player. Therefore, even after the time-short state has ended, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting that the currently set game state is a latent state. The game can be made difficult to stop at the end of the game.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 489, the flow of the game state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be specifically described. Detailed description of the same flow as that of the first control example described above is omitted. First, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the normal symbol is in a low probability state, which is the trigger for starting the second special symbol (special symbol 2). Since it is in a gaming state in which it is difficult to win the ball at the second winning port 640, the ball is won at the first winning port 64, which is the trigger for the first special symbol (special drawing 1), as in the first control example described above. The special figure 1 game (left-handed game) to be executed is executed.

  Then, when the jackpot is won by the special drawing 1 lottery (the jackpot probability 1/250), a different gaming state is set after the jackpot is ended according to the jackpot type won. Specifically, if the winning jackpot type is “Big Jack A, B” (50% of the jackpot total), the probability change state after the jackpot game is over (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) Is set to "Big jackpot C" (30% of the jackpot overall), after the jackpot game is finished, the short time state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, In some cases (20% of the entire jackpot), the normal state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

  Next, when the short time state is set, the normal symbol is in a high probability state, and it is a gaming state in which it is easy to win a ball to the second winning opening 640 that is a trigger for the special figure 2, so that Similar to the first control example, a special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is executed in which a ball is awarded to the second winning opening 640 serving as a trigger for the special figure 2.

  In the special drawing 2 lottery, when a big win is won (a jackpot probability is 1/250), a different gaming state is set after the jackpot is over according to the winning jackpot type. Specifically, if the winning jackpot type is “Big Jack D” (80% of the big jackpot), the probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends, and “Big Jack E, G” is set (for the big jackpot total) 20%) is configured so that the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the probability variation state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends.

  Further, in the present control example, similar to the first control example described above, every time the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied, a lottery (so-called falling lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the special symbol is to fall into a low probability state. It is configured to execute. Furthermore, since there are a plurality of conditions for shifting the time-short state (normal probability high probability state) to the normal symbol low-probability state, the time-short state set in the first control example is set. In addition to the first short-time end condition that is established when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), a special lottery result other than the jackpot winning prize (for example, Set a second short-time end condition that is established when the number of times that the winning number is small (A win) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times), and if any short-time end condition is satisfied, The high probability state of the symbol) is shifted to the low probability state of the normal symbol.

  As described above, in this control example, when a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game is finished, the big win is aimed by a special drawing lottery during the probable change state. While executing a game, a game that shifts the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (falling lottery), and a game that shifts the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (special symbol lottery), It will be executed in parallel. In addition, the timing to shift the probability state of the special symbol based on the falling lottery and the timing to shift the probability state of the normal symbol based on the special symbol lottery, whichever timing is early Since the arrival is determined based on a predetermined lottery result, the transition of the gaming state can be set in a complicated manner for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 489, the description will be continued. When winning a small hit (1/100) in the probability variation state, if the small hit type is not a specific small hit type (small hit B) (50% of the total small hits), or the first specific small If it is a hit type (small hit A), the game state is not shifted, and if it is the second specific small hit type (small hit A), the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured to be migrated. Further, the falling lottery is executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and the winning lottery (falling probability 1/500) is made in the falling lottery at the timing when the number of special drawing lotteries after the probability variation state is set is less than 100 In this case, the state shifts to the short-time state, and if the special drawing lottery count is 100 times or more after the probability variation state is set, the state shifts to the normal state when the drop lottery is performed (fall probability 1/500). It is configured as follows.

  In this example of control, the probability variation state is continued until the big win is won in the special drawing lottery when the falling-off condition is not established during the probability variation state and the short-time end condition is not satisfied. Without being limited to this, when the number of special figure fluctuations (number of special figure lottery) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150 times), a configuration for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is provided. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to set a gaming state (probability change state) advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to suppress the excessively advantageous gaming state being provided to the player. it can. Also, in this case, if the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is also set to the low probability state. You may comprise so that it may transfer.

  Finally, when the latent state is set, the normal state is a low probability state, and it is difficult to enter a ball into the second winning opening 640 that is the trigger for starting the special figure 2, so that the normal state In the same manner, a special figure 1 game (left-handed game) is executed in which a ball is awarded to the first winning port 64, which is a trigger for the special figure 1.

  In the special drawing 1 lottery, when a big win is won (a jackpot probability of 1/125), a different gaming state is set after the jackpot ends according to the winning jackpot type. Specifically, if the winning jackpot type is “Big Jack A, B” (50% of the jackpot total), the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is finished, and “Big Jack C, F” (Big Jack) 50% of the total) is configured so that the short-time state is set after the jackpot game ends.

  In other words, it is configured so that a game state that is advantageous to the player is more easily set after the jackpot game is over when the jackpot is won during the latent state than when the jackpot is won during the normal state. . With this configuration, the latent state can be more advantageous to the player than the normal state, so even after the time-short state has ended, the current setting is made for the player. Since it is possible to play a game while expecting that the game state being played is a latent state, it is difficult to stop the game when the time-short state ends. In addition, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set during the latent state, so if you win the falling lottery and shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, the number of special symbol lotteries Regardless, it will transition to the normal state.

  As described above, in the second control example, a high probability state (probability variation state or time-short state) of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game is over, and thereafter, until the special figure variation reaches 100 times (the first variation) If the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (before the time-shortening condition is met), the time-saving end condition (second time-stopping condition) is set based on the big win in the special drawing lottery or the small win That's right. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends before the first short-time end condition is satisfied, it is possible to play the game while expecting whether or not the big win is won in the special drawing lottery.

  Further, in the present control example, as in the first control described above, even if the falling lottery is won during the period until the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times, the player is not notified of the falling winning. Yes. If the normal symbol high probability state ends in the period until the special figure variation reaches 100 times, the same back mode (lost child mode) regardless of the gaming state (normal state or latent state) ) Is set. By configuring in this way, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends, the current state is a probabilistic state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) or a short time state (special It is difficult to tell whether the symbol is a low probability state or a normal symbol high probability state, and even after the normal symbol high probability state ends, the current state is a latent state (a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the state is a low probability state) or a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol).

  Therefore, it can be easily determined that the currently set gaming state is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal state), and the game can be prevented from being stopped early.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 490 to FIG. 498, the electrical configuration in the second control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the electrical configuration of the first control example described above, the configuration of various counters included in the main control device 110, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the configuration of the RAM 203, and the sound lamp This is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113 in that a new element is added to the configuration of the RAM 223. The same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the configuration of various counters in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 490 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a counter configuration in the second control example. The second control example is configured to be able to win a small win in a special symbol lottery with respect to the first control example described above, and acquired when the big win was not won in a special drawing lottery. Based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1, the small hit random number 2 table 202ab (see FIG. 493 (a)) is used to determine whether or not a small win is won. Then, when winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery, the small hitting type selection 2 table 202ac is used based on the acquired value of the small hitting type counter C6 in order to select the winning small hitting type. The small hit type can be selected. The detailed contents of the small hit types that can be selected in this control example will be described later.

  In the second control example configured as described above, the small hitting type counter C6 described above is added to the various counters of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and the acquired value of the small hitting type counter C6 is obtained. A small hitting type counter storage area is provided in the counter buffer, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are provided with a small hit type counter storage area. It differs in the point provided. Although not shown in FIG. 490, each counter provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is also stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area. This is different from the first control example in that an area is provided and a small hit type counter storage area is also provided.

  Although the details will be described later, in the second control example, the first special symbol lottery (Special Figure 1 lottery) is not won by the small bonus, and only the second special symbol lottery (Special Figure 2 lottery) is selected. It is configured to be able to win a small hit. In this way, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area is also provided for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the special symbol (special diagram 1) that cannot be won by the small hit, as described above. The structure of 203a and the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b can be unified. Further, it is possible to unify the contents of processing (information acquisition processing) executed when an acquisition condition for acquiring the values of various counters is satisfied. In other words, the special figure 1 lottery does not win a small hit, so the processing for acquiring the value of the small hitting type counter C6 which is unnecessary and the configuration for storing the acquired value of the small hitting type counter C6 are intentionally provided. When the acquisition condition of Special Figure 1 is satisfied (when a ball is won at the first winning opening 64), when the acquisition condition of Special Figure 2 is satisfied (when the ball is winning at the second winning opening 640), , The common processing can be executed, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Further, when the gameability is changed so that even the special figure 1 lottery wins, the change process can be easily executed, so that it is possible to easily execute diversification of gameplay. If the acquisition condition of FIG. 1 is satisfied without using a configuration that simplifies the entire process by providing an unnecessary process as in this control example, the value of the small hit type counter C6 You may comprise so that it may not acquire. As a result, information that is not actually used in the game (the value of the small hit type counter C6) is not acquired, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the act of analyzing the game content based on the information acquired unnecessarily. it can.

  As described above, in the second control example, the special hit random number counter C1 is used for the lottery lottery that draws the presence / absence of the bonus hit in the special symbol lottery (special drawing lottery), and the type of the small hit is selected. In this case, the small hit type counter C6 is used. An initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol are used for setting the initial value of the small hit type counter C6. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 434). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the first winning port 64 composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) and four holding areas (holding first to first areas). And a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning in the second winning port 640 composed of (fourth area). The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is provided with a first winning port 64. In accordance with the timing of winning the prize (according to the establishment of the acquisition condition), the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the falling lottery counter C4, and the small hit type counter C6 Each value is stored.

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is satisfied, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are executed as the first special symbol. Shift to the area and start special symbol variation based on the various stored values. Further, in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, and a stop type selection are selected in accordance with the winning timing to the second winning port 640 (according to the establishment of the acquisition condition). Each value of the counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the falling lottery counter C4, and the small hit type counter C6 is stored.

  Then, when the start condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is satisfied, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are executed as the first special symbol. Shift to the area and start special symbol variation based on the various stored values.

  In this control example, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is used when the presence / absence of the small win is selected. In other words, in order not to win both jackpots and small wins in one special drawing lottery, it is first determined whether or not the big win is won in the special drawing lottery, and it is determined that the jackpot is not won In this case, it is configured so as to determine whether or not the big win is won, so that it is possible to determine the big win and the small win by using a common counter (special hit random number counter C1). doing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated counter (for example, a small hit random number counter) for determining the presence / absence of a small winning combination may be provided.

  Further, in this control example, when the acquisition condition is satisfied based on the winning of the ball in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (for example, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2). When there is a new winning when the storage area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is empty), the value of each main counter described above is acquired, and the acquired value is stored in each corresponding reserved ball storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is a new winning in a state where there is an empty space in the storage area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this case, only the right to acquire various counter values is stored in the corresponding storage ball storage area, and the various counter values are acquired based on the fact that the special symbol variation condition is satisfied. It may be configured such that only a specific counter value is acquired based on a ball winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the remaining counter value is obtained when the variation condition is satisfied. You may comprise so that it may acquire.

  As described above, in the present control example, the first control example described above is configured such that a special symbol lottery (special drawing lottery) can be won, and the acquired small hit type Various controls are executed based on the value of the counter C6. Although not shown, the acquired value of the small hit type counter C6 is configured to be used for various processes in the same manner as other counters, and S406 in the start winning process (see FIG. 428), and In the process of S413, the process of storing the value of the small hit type counter C6 obtained in the same manner as the other counters in the corresponding reserved ball storage area is executed. In the processes of S503 and S505 in the prefetch process (see FIG. 429), the result of the small lottery corresponding to the new winning is acquired, and the presence or absence of the small prize winning is used as the winning information command set in the process of S504. And a winning information command including information indicating the set small hit type is set.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, if you win a small win in the special drawing lottery, after the special figure fluctuation to indicate the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is stopped (confirmed display), A small hitting game based on a small hitting winning through a small hitting control process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 434) of the main controller 110. A process for executing is executed.

  When this small hitting control process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a flag indicating a small hitting win (small hitting start flag) is set to ON, and if it is determined that it is set to ON, it is set. The opening operation for executing the small hit game according to the small hit type is set, the small hitting medium flag is set to ON, and the small hitting start flag is set to OFF. In the present control example, when a small hit game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is opened. Specifically, the small winning game opening period (the closing period of the variable winning device 65 ( 0.2 seconds)), round game period (opening period of variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)), ending period (closing period of variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)) Is set to open.

  In this control example, the above-described opening operation is set regardless of which of a plurality of small hit types is set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being easily identified by the player based on the game content of the small game (the opening operation content of the variable winning device 65). it can.

  The game content of the small hit game is not limited to this. For example, a different game content may be set depending on the small hit type. The game content of the small hit game executed depending on the small hit type may be different. Further, as described above, in this control example, the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the small hit game is configured so that the period during which the variable winning device 65 is in the open state is shorter than the big win game. The winning game is configured such that it is difficult to win a ball in the winning opening 65. In addition, about the specific content of the small hit game in this control example, only the period when the variable prize-winning apparatus 65 becomes an open state and the period when it closes is different, and other than that is a 1st control example. It is the same as the jackpot game described above.

  Accordingly, the various processing contents executed during the small hit game are the same as the processing related to the big hit control in the first control example (see FIGS. 434 to 436), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 491 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 491 (a), in the second control example, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced with the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 408 (a)), compared to the above-described first control example. Small point random number 2 table 202ab that is referred to when determining whether or not there is a small hitting win, the small hitting type selection 2 that is referred to when selecting a small hitting type that is set when winning a small win The table 202ac is different from the table 202ac in that a short-time end condition selection table 202ad in which a short-time end condition for ending the short-time state (a high probability state of a normal symbol) is defined is added. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is used when selecting a jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot, and is defined for the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 408 (a)) of the first control example. It is different in that the jackpot type is added. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the “big hit F” can be selected as the jackpot type, and when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the “big hit G” is selected as the jackpot type. It is different in that it is configured to obtain. Further, the present embodiment is different in that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set based on the set jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 492 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 492 (a), the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is a special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 which is referred to when winning a big win in the special figure 1 lottery, and a big win in the special figure 2 lottery. And a special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202aa2 which is referred to in this case.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 492 (b). FIG. 492 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1. This special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 is a data table used in the case of winning a jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery, similar to the above special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 492 (b), in this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the jackpot types are “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot F”. Four types can be set. The contents of the jackpot game (number of round games) are defined in correspondence with the set jackpot type. Further, a game state set after the jackpot game is finished is defined for each jackpot type in correspondence with the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Specifically, “big hit A” is in the range where the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9”, “big hit B” is in the range of “10 to 49”, and “50 to 79”. “Big hit C” is defined in the range of “80”, and “Big hit F” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. When “big hit A” is set as the big hit type, “15 round (R) round game” is executed as the big hit game. Then, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the “probability change state” is set after the jackpot game ends.

  When “big hit B” is set as the big hit type, “round game of five rounds (R)” is executed as the big hit game. Then, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the “probability change state” is set after the jackpot game ends.

  Further, when “big hit C” is set as the big hit type, “five round (R) round game” is executed as the big hit game. And, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, after the jackpot game is finished, “time-short state” is set, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (latency probability state, probability variation state, time-short state) In this case, the “time saving state” is set after the jackpot game ends.

  Finally, when “big hit F” is set as the jackpot type, “5-round (R) round game” is executed as the jackpot game. And if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state, “normal state” is set after the winning of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (latency probability state, probability variation state, short-time state) In this case, the “time saving state” is set after the jackpot game ends.

  In this control example, the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state and the latent state, and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the effect mode of the effect to be executed (background mode effect), the same effect mode (lost child mode) is set when the normal state is set and when the latent state is set. It is composed.

  And, as described above, the game state (usually unfavorable to the player in the case of winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state than the case of winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state (normally) (State) is difficult to set. With this configuration, since the latent state can be more advantageous to the player than the normal state, it is possible for the player during the period in which the lost child mode is executed in the background mode effect. The game can be performed while expecting that the latent state is set. In addition, as described above, the probability state that the special symbol has a high probability state is more likely to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the normal state that has the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the gaming state more advantageous to the player in the latent state than in the normal state.

  In addition, as a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the probability change state in which the game (right-handed game) in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed (right-handed game) and the short-time state are executed, for example, it has already been acquired at the time of the big win There is a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 suspension is executed during the probability change state or the short time state set after the jackpot game ends. In the present control example, when the big win is won in the special figure 1 lottery with such a pattern, the game state is set with the same contents as the case where the big win is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the latent state. It is composed.

  By configuring in this way, immediately after the game state (probability change state, short-time state) that allows the player to perform a right-handed game is set, the winner of the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 hold is won, It is possible to suppress the setting of a gaming state (normal state) in which a left-handed game is performed after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, although a right-handed game advantageous to the player is set once, a left-handed game is set without executing the special drawing 2 lottery by the right-handed game, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 included in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. 492 (c). FIG. 492 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2. The special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 is a data table that is referred to when a jackpot type is selected when the big prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 492 (c), in this control example, when the big win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, three types of “big hit D”, “big hit E”, and “big hit G” can be set. It is configured. The contents of the jackpot game (number of round games) are defined in correspondence with the set jackpot type. Further, a game state set after the jackpot game is finished is defined for each jackpot type in correspondence with the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Specifically, “big hit D” is in the range where the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79”, “big hit E” is in the range of “80 to 89”, and “90 to 99”. In the range, “big hit G” is defined. In this control example, when a big win is won in the special figure 2 lottery, a “15 round (R) round game” is executed as a big win game regardless of the set big hit type. And it is comprised so that the game state set after the jackpot game may differ according to the set jackpot type.

  Specifically, when “big hit D” is set, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, “probable change state” is set after the big hit game is ended, and “big hit E” is set. Regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the “short time state” is set after the jackpot game is over. Then, when “big hit G” is set, if the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is “probability change state”, “normal state” is set after the big hit game ends, and other than the probability change state (normal state, In the case where the latent state, the short time state) is set, the “short time state” is set after the jackpot game ends.

  The small hit random number 2 table 202ab is a data table for determining whether or not the small win is won in the special drawing lottery, and is referred to when the big win is not won in the special drawing lottery (when winning out of winning). Is. This small hit random number 2 table 202ab determines whether or not the lottery result is a small hit in the variation process at the time of off-running (see S351 in FIG. 500) executed in the special symbol fluctuation starting process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499). Referenced when doing.

  Here, the contents of the small hit random number 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 493 (a). FIG. 493 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 2 table 202ab. As shown in FIG. 493 (a), in the small hit random number 2 table 202ab, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 that is selected for winning a small hit for each symbol type (special symbol type) is defined. When the lottery is executed, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared with the determination value defined in the small winning random number 2 table 202ab, so that the result of the special drawing lottery is a small hit. It is determined whether or not.

  Specifically, when the symbol type is “Special Figure 1”, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is a small winning prize is not stipulated. “0-4” is defined as the value of the hit random number counter C1. In other words, in this control example, it is defined that only a small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and the small win winning probability in the special figure 2 lottery is 1/100. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to make the lottery results different between the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery, so that the diversification of the game can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, in this control example, if a specific small hit (small hit A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice) in the short time state (ordinary symbol high probability state), the short time end condition (second short time) (End condition) is satisfied, and the time reduction state is configured to end. As described above, this control example does not win a small hit by special figure 1 lottery, so special figure 1 lottery based on special figure 1 suspension is executed immediately after the time reduction state is set. Based on the lottery, the second short-time end condition is not satisfied.

  Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery executed in the normal state, and the short-time state is set after the jackpot game is finished, that is, the short-time state is set in the state where the special figure 2 hold is not acquired. It is possible to prevent the time reduction state from being terminated by the special drawing 1 lottery executed in this case. Moreover, since the present control example is configured such that the time-short state ends at the start timing of the special figure variation, as in the first control example described above, for example, is executed immediately after the time-short state is set. When the time-shutdown condition is satisfied based on the special drawing lottery (the first special drawing lottery after the time-short state is set), the game during the time-short state (short-time game), that is, the operation of opening the electric accessory 640a is performed. There is a problem that the short-time state ends without causing the second winning opening 640 to play a game of winning a ball.

  On the other hand, in this control example, since it is configured so that the second short time termination condition is not satisfied by the special figure 1 lottery, the big win is won by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the normal state, If the time-short state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, if the time-short state is set in a state where the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired, the time-short state ends without causing the time-short game to be performed. Can be suppressed. Also, in this control example, the number of wins per unit where the second time-shortening end condition is satisfied is set to “2”, so that the time-shortening state is not ended by one special drawing lottery during the time-shortening state. Yes. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the end of the time-saving state without causing the time-saving game to be executed even though the time-saving state is set.

  Here, in the special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 lottery), when winning a small win, it is configured so that a winning game different from the case of winning a big win is executed, specifically, variable winning A winning game in which the device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds), that is, a winning game that can give a player a privilege less than the jackpot game is executed.

  In this control example, it is easy to win the ball from the first state (closed state) where it is difficult for the same winning port (specific winning port 65a) to win the ball in the case of winning the small win and in the case of winning the big win. The winning game for opening the variable prize-winning device 65 so as to be changed to two states (open state) is configured to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and variable depending on the big hit game and the small hit game. The winning device may be configured to open.

  In this case, the bonus (the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins) granted when the ball wins the winning slot of the variable winning device that is opened during the small win game is released during the big hit game. It may be configured so that there are fewer balls than when the winning award of the variable winning device to be won, or it is opened during the small hit game than the winning port of the variable winning device that is opened during the big win game You may comprise so that it may become difficult to win a ball | bowl with the winning opening which the variable winning apparatus to operate | moves has.

  In this control example, in the special drawing lottery, a data table (special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) for determining whether the jackpot is won and a data table (small jackpot random number 2) for determining whether the jackpot is won. Table 202ab) is used separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single data table is used to determine whether the current special drawing lottery wins a big win or a small win. May be. In this case, for example, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small win winning may be defined in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a without overlapping with the value of the special winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the big winning winning. With this configuration, the number of data tables included in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  The small hitting type selection 2 table 202ac is a data table that is referred to when selecting a small hitting type set at the time of winning a small win, and is referred to when a special winning lottery is won. is there. The small hit type selection 2 table 202ac of this control example is configured to be able to select small hits A and small hits B as the small hit types, and is executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499). When it is determined that the current special drawing lottery result is a small hit (see S371 in FIG. 500) in the deviation variation process (see S351 in FIG. 500), it is referred to in order to determine the small hit type (see S371 in FIG. 500). (See S374 in FIG. 500).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 493 (b), the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac will be described. FIG. 493 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac. In the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac, different small hit types are defined in correspondence with the acquired value of the small hit type counter C6. Specifically, “small hit A” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired small hit type counter C6 is “0 to 64”, and “small hit B” is defined in the range of “65 to 99”. Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, a predetermined small hit (for example, small hit A) is set in a state where the short-time state (ordinary symbol high probability state) is set (short-time state, probability variation state). When the number of times (for example, two times) is won, the time-short state (normal probability state with high probability) is terminated. In other words, as a condition (short time end condition) for shifting the short time state (high probability state of normal symbol) to the low probability state of normal symbol (short time end condition), the short time end condition (second short time end condition) based on the small win is set. It is configured to be.

  Here, if the short-time state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability of normal symbol) is set and the short-time end condition is satisfied, normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol) Is set. In the present control example, as in the first control example described above, the time-short state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the normal state. The game is played with the expectation that will be set.

  In contrast, in this control example, as described above, the time-shortening end condition is established based on the small win, so the player knows when the time-shortening state ends. Can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who is playing a game in a short time state to play a game with a sense of tension.

  Further, in this control example, as the same short-time end condition as the first control example described above, the number of special symbol lotteries (number of fluctuations) executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined number of times ( For example, it is configured such that a short-time end condition that is satisfied when reaching 100 times) is also set. As a result, an upper limit can be set for a period in which a gaming state in which the player is advantageous (period in which the short-time state is set) is set, so that excessive benefits are not given to the player. can do.

  Similarly, if a probability change state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability of a normal symbol) is set and a time-short-term end condition is satisfied, a latent probability state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability of a normal symbol) ) Is set. Even in this case, the probability variation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the latent probability state. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined period after the jackpot game ends (the number of times of special figure change is 100 times). The period of time until it reaches), a special mode effect is executed, and when the normal state or the latent state is set during the mode effect, the same mode (lost child) Mode) is set, and a mode effect corresponding to the lost child mode is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Such a configuration makes it difficult for the player to know whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state during the execution of the mode effect. Here, the difference between the normal state and the latent state will be described. In both the normal state and the latent state, a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, and the electric accessory 640a is opened based on the universal symbol, so that it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, a left-handed game (special figure 1 game) in which a ball is won at the first winning port 64 is executed, but the normal state is a low probability state of a special symbol, while the latent state is a latent state. Since the certain state is a high probability state of a special symbol, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery (special drawing lottery) is more latent than the normal state (big hit winning probability 1/250). / 125) is higher.

  Furthermore, in the case of winning the jackpot, the gaming state set after the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning is made different between the case where the jackpot is won during the normal state and the case where the jackpot is won during the latent state. It is configured such that a game state advantageous to the player is more easily set when the jackpot is won during the latent state than when the jackpot is won during the normal state. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, the proportion of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be 50% probability change state, 30% time-short state, 20% normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the latent probability state, the ratio of the gaming state set after the jackpot game is ended is set to 50% probability change state and 50% short-time state. Therefore, the latent state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  As described above, in the present control example, the normal state is set during the mode performance executed in a predetermined period after the jackpot game ends (the period until the special figure fluctuation count reaches 100). When the latent state is set, the same mode (lost child mode) is set, and the mode effect is executed in the same effect mode. With this configuration, while the mode effect corresponding to the lost child mode (the normal state or the mode for indicating the latent state) is being executed, the current state is the normal state or the latent state. Can be prevented from being easily identified by the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player immediately stops the game when the short-time state or the certainty change state ends.

  Further, in the present control example, at the timing when the mode effect ends (the timing when the special figure change count executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 100 times), the current gaming state is in the normal state for the player. It is configured to be able to execute a notification effect that can identify whether there is a latent state or a latent state. As a result, a game that is disadvantageous to the player by executing an effect that makes it difficult to understand whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state is performed (for example, although the normal state is set, the latent state is set). It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game in which a certain state is set is executed.

  The time saving end condition selection table 202ad is a data table for setting a condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state (ordinary symbol high probability state) set after the jackpot game ends. It is referenced at the timing to set (the end timing of the jackpot game).

  Here, the contents of the short-time end condition selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 493 (c). FIG. 493 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-shutdown condition selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 493 (c), the short-time end condition selection table 202ad is defined such that a different short-time end condition is set according to the set jackpot type. After the jackpot game with the jackpot A, E, F, G ”is set, the time-shortage counter 203g is set to“ 100 ”, and the jackpot counter 203ab is not set to a time-saving end condition. The

  As will be described in detail later, the time-shortage counter 203g is a counter whose value is decremented by 1 every time the special figure change is executed in the time-shortening state, and when the value of the counter becomes “0”, It is determined that the condition for ending the time reduction state (first time reduction end condition) is satisfied. The small hit counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 every time a specific small hit (small hit A) is won during the short-running state (every time the special figure variation won for the specific small hit is executed). When the counter value is “0”, it is determined that the condition for ending the time-saving state (second time-shorting end condition) is satisfied.

  That is, after the end of the jackpot game in which “big hit A, E, F, G” has been set, a short time state is set in which the second short-term end condition (the short-term end condition established based on the small hit win) is not set. .

  On the other hand, after the big hit game with “big hit B, C, D” set as the big hit type, “100” is set to the value of the hour / medium counter 203g and “2” is set to the value of the small hit counter 203ab A short termination condition is set. In other words, after the jackpot game with the “big jackpot B, C, D” is set, when the second jackpot A is set as the second short-term ending condition (short-time ending condition established based on the small jackpot winning), The short time state is set when the short time end condition is established.

  In this control example, as described above, the gaming state in which the short-time state (normal symbol high probability state) is set is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set. Therefore, by providing a short time state in which the second short time end condition is set and a short time state in which the second short time end condition is not set, the short time in which a game state advantageous to the player can be easily continued is provided. It is possible to set a state and a short time state that is difficult to continue.

  In the present control example, regardless of which jackpot type is set, the special symbol variation count (special diagram variation count) “100” is set as the first short-term termination condition. Although it is configured as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different first jackpot end condition may be set according to the jackpot type, or a jackpot type that does not set the first jackpot end condition may be provided. Furthermore, although the jackpot type for setting the second short-time end condition and the jackpot type not to be set are provided, different end conditions may be set as the second short-time end condition according to the jackpot type. Further, in this control example, the time reduction state is ended when either the first time reduction end condition or the second time reduction end condition is satisfied, but the first time reduction is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a time-short state may be complete | finished when an end condition and a 2nd time-short end condition are satisfied.

  In addition, in this control example, it is configured to terminate the time-short state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, regardless of which time-shortest end condition is satisfied. The time-saving state may be terminated at different timings depending on the type of the time-shortening termination condition. For example, when the first time-shortening termination condition is satisfied, the timing at which the established special figure variation is stopped or stopped is terminated. The time-short state may be terminated at the timing (the timing at which the symbol fixed display period has elapsed), or when the second time-short end condition is satisfied, the special feature corresponding to the small win winning in which the second time-short end condition is satisfied. Based on the timing at which the figure change stops, the timing at which the stop display ends (the timing at which the symbol fixed display period has passed), or the small win winning that the second time-short-end condition is met And timing the hit game is executed may be terminated time-shortening condition at a timing when the small hit game is finished. By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to make a player predict the time-short end condition established this time by grasping the timing when the time-short state ends.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 491 (b). The RAM 203 of the second control example is different from the above-described configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example in that a small hitting / measuring flag 203aa and a small hitting counter 203ab are added, and is otherwise the same. About the same element, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The small hitting flag 203aa is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hitting game is currently being played, and is set to ON when a small hitting game is being executed. Although detailed description of the specific processing contents is omitted, in this control example, it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the special figure fluctuation processing (see S104 in FIG. 426) of the first control example described above (see FIG. If it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216 in FIG. 426; No), a process for determining whether the current lottery result is a small hit is added. When it is determined that the lottery result this time is a small hit, a control process for starting the small hit game is executed and a flag indicating that the small hit game is executable (for example, Set the small hitting start flag) to on. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 434) of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above, a flag (for example, a small hit start flag) indicating that a small hit game can be executed is set to ON. In order to execute a small hit game in accordance with a predetermined release operation rule when it is determined that it is set to ON. And the small hitting / medium flag 203aa is set to ON. Then, when the small hit game executed by the control process for executing the small hit game ends, the small hit medium flag 203aa is set to OFF.

  In this control example, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be released during the small hit game. During this small hit game, the ball that won the variable winning device 65 is moved to the second area. The arrangement is such that the distribution device (V character) is maintained in an arrangement that can be distributed (arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and the ball won the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. However, it is configured not to pass through the first region (V region). As a result, there is a situation in which the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) is not given even though the ball has passed the first region (V region) during the period in which the variable winning device 65 is being opened. That is restrained.

  In this control example, the number of devices arranged on the game board 13 is reduced by making the winning device opened by the small hit game and the winning device opened by the big hit game the same, thereby reducing the cost. Although a reduction is intended, the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning device dedicated to a small hit game may be provided separately from the variable winning device 65. In this case, it is good to provide a special winning device dedicated to a small winning game (small winning device) in a position away from the second winning port 640 which is a starting condition of the special figure 2 lottery that can win a small winning. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration of the game board 13 capable of winning a ball in the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game, an area in which a ball launched by a left-handed game can flow down (right-handed game It is good to comprise so that the winning device for small hits may be arrange | positioned in the area | region where the ball | bowl launched | fired by (flow impossible) is difficult. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is executing a right-handed game to execute the special drawing 2 lottery to notice that the small hit game has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the opportunity for the above-mentioned second short-term termination condition to be satisfied. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the period during which the result of the special drawing lottery is stopped (determined display period) is extended in a part of the case where the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is out of place. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period from when the result of the special drawing lottery is stopped until the next special drawing lottery is executed. The player determines whether a predetermined period is required before the lottery is executed or whether a predetermined period is required until the next special drawing lottery is executed because the fixed display period is displayed in a stopped state. Can be difficult to grasp.

  The small hit counter 203ab is a counter for measuring the number of times that the small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery and the small hit type is set as the small hit type, and after the big hit game is ended, the short time end condition selection table 202ad is stored. A value serving as the second short-term end condition is set with reference to the above. Then, when the small hit A is set during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted from the value. Then, the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the subtraction is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time reduction state, and when the value after the subtraction becomes 0, the control for ending the time reduction state Is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 494 to 498, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that a configuration is added to the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 494 (a). FIG. 494 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in that a speech mode related table 222aa and an operation effect switching table 222ab are added. Different, otherwise the same. In FIG. 494 (a), the description of some of the same elements as those in the first control example is omitted, but the description thereof is omitted because it has the same elements.

  The serif mode related table 222aa is a data table for setting the effect mode of the serif effect that is executed when the serif mode is set. Here, the speech mode set in this control example will be briefly described. The speech mode is one of the effects that are set based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. When the speech mode is set, the “serif mode” described above with reference to FIG. 483 and FIG. "Zone" is displayed, and an effect is displayed in which lines corresponding to the stop display mode of the third symbol are displayed (output from the audio output device 226).

  Next, detailed contents of the speech mode related table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 495 (a), the display mode of each symbol variably displayed as the third symbol (the fused third symbol) when the speech mode is set will be described. FIG. 495 (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the symbols. As shown in FIG. 495 (a), the fused third symbol is formed in a display mode in which a number mode that is identification information for indicating a lottery result of the special drawing lottery and a character mode that indicates a character that emits a line are merged. In addition, a numeric mode is attached to each character mode. The image data of the fused third pattern is stored in the character ROM of the display control device 114, and the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display command indicating that the speech mode is set to the display control device 114. In this case, it is used as image data indicating identification information for indicating a lottery result of a special symbol.

  In this control example, different character modes are associated with the numeric modes 1 to 9, and the character modes associated with the numeric modes “1 to 4” and “5 to 9” are large. The fused 3rd pattern is formed so that it can be separated. Specifically, in the fused 3rd symbol corresponding to the number mode "1-4", the character mode included in the land creature group is set, and in the fused 3rd symbol corresponding to "5-9" Character modes included in the sea creature group are set.

  Next, the contents of the speech mode related table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 495 (b). FIG. 495 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the speech mode related table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 495 (b), the speech mode related table 222aa includes a speech state setting table 222aa1 for setting the current speech progress degree, a character selection table 222aa2 for selecting a character that emits speech, and an actual state. And a line selection table 222aa3 for setting the contents of the line, and referring to each table, select the fused 3rd figure that is stopped and displayed during the line mode, and each fused 3rd figure It is configured to select the type of speech to be emitted.

  First, the contents of the speech state setting table 222aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 495 (c). FIG. 495 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the speech state setting table 222aa1. This serif state setting table 222aa1 is based on the history information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac in which the history information of the merged third symbol stopped and displayed in the state where the serif mode is set is stored. This is a data table that is referred to when setting the state, and as shown in FIG. 495 (c), each line state is defined based on the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac. Based on the selected serif state, the type of the fused third symbol to be stopped and displayed and the serif contents (serif mode) displayed (output) during the serif mode are selected.

  Next, the contents of the character selection table 222aa2 will be described with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 496 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222aa2. This character selection table 222aa2 is based on the line state set using the line state setting table 222aa1, the determination result of whether or not the target special figure is changed, and the different character (based on the acquired character selection counter 223ad). The left fusion 3rd pattern to be stopped first is selected.

  Next, the contents of the dialogue selection table 222aa3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 497 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the serif selection table 222aa3. This serif selection table 222aa3 is based on the serif state set using the serif state setting table 222aa1 and the character selected by the character selection table 222aa2, and the type of the right fused third symbol, middle fused third symbol, And it is a data table for selecting the line contents (line form) of each fusion 3rd design.

  The operation effect switching table 222ab is a data table for switching the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed when the variable operation effect is set based on the variation pattern output from the main control device 110. In this control example, when the variable operation effect is set, the lever member 10340 (hereinafter referred to as the lever member 10340) of the operation device 10300 is moved from the origin position to the operating position (upward position), As shown to 484 (a), it is comprised so that the variable operation effect for operating the lever member 10340 with respect to a player (pressing down operation) may be performed.

  However, if the depressing operation is not performed on the lever member 10340 in the state in which the effect period of the variable operation effect (operation effective period) has elapsed, the effect period of the variable operation effect (operation effective period) has elapsed. Nevertheless, the lever member 10340 remains in the operating position (upward position). In this case, the lever member 10340 is moved from the operating position (upward position) to the origin position by using drive means (motor or the like) for variably operating the lever member 10340, and the lever member 10340 is in the initial state (origin position). It is possible to return the lever member 10340 to the state before the start of the variable operation effect by executing the return process for positioning to the position, but if this configuration is used, the effect is enhanced. Although the lever member 10340 is moved to the operating position for the purpose, the lever member 10340 is returned to the initial position without causing the player to operate the lever member 10340 positioned at the operating position. There was a problem that it could not be raised.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position in the state where the effect period of the variable operation effect has elapsed, the normal state (the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position). The push-down operation effect that causes the lever member 10340 to perform the push-down operation is more easily executed than in the case where the lever member 10340 is executed. That is, in order to execute one variable operation effect, an effect preparation process for moving the operation means (lever member 10340) from the first position (origin position) to the second position (actuation position) is performed, and the effect preparation process is performed. After the game is completed, the player is configured to execute a variable operation effect for moving the operation means from the second position to the first position, and the player operates the operation means during the variable operation effect. If the operation means (lever member 10340) does not move to the first position (if it continues to be located at the second position), the operation means remains at the second position even after the variable operation effect has ended. It is configured to maintain a state (state where the effect preparation process has been completed) located at (actuation position), and in a state where the effect preparation process is completed, the above-described push-down operation effect is configured to be easily performed. ing.

  With this configuration, in order to execute one push-down operation effect, the operation means (lever member 10340) on which the effect preparation process has been executed can be caused to execute a plurality of push-down operation effects. Therefore, the operation means can be easily moved to the initial position by the player's operation.

  Further, in this control example, in the state where the effect preparation process is completed (the state where the operation means is located at the operating position), the operation means is executed even though the push-down operation effect is executed a predetermined number of times (twice). Is located at the second position (operating position), the operating means is moved to the first position (origin position) using a driving means (such as a motor) for variably operating the operating means (lever member 10340). It is configured to move (execute return processing). By comprising in this way, the situation where a push-down operation effect is performed persistently can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the effect that gives dissatisfaction to the player who does not want to operate the operation means. Further, in this case, a storage unit capable of storing the execution of the return process is provided, and when the return process is executed, that is, a state in which the effect preparation process is completed (a state where the operation unit is located at the operating position). , It is stored that the state in which the operation means is located at the second position (actuation position) appears despite the execution of the depressing operation effect a predetermined number of times (twice). The variable operation effect may be difficult to execute. Thereby, the production corresponding to the player's preference can be provided.

  Here, the contents of the operation effect switching table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 498 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect switching table 222ab. The operation effect switching table 222ab is referred to when changing the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed according to the setting status of the initial position fluctuation flag 223ag, the origin detection flag 223ae, and the operation position detection flag 223af. is there.

  Specifically, when the initial position change flag 223ag is off, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the operation position detection flag 223af is off, the touch effect (see FIG. 485) is set as the effect mode of the variable operation effect. When the operation position detection flag 223af is turned on, a lever push-up effect (see FIG. 484 (b)) is set. When the initial position change flag 223ag is off and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, a lever pressing effect (see FIG. 484 (a)) is set regardless of the setting status of the operation position detection flag 223af.

  When the initial position change flag 223ag is on, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the operation position detection flag 223af is off, a touch effect is set. When the operation position detection flag 223af is on, the lever is pushed up. Production is set. Finally, when the initial position change flag 223ag is on and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, the lever pressing effect is set regardless of the setting state of the operation position detection flag 223af.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 494 (b). FIG. 494 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 494 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example is different from the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above, as a special figure fluctuation counter 223aa, Effect mode storage area 223ab, stop symbol information storage area 223ac, character selection counter 223ad, origin detection flag 223ae, operation position detection flag 223af, initial position change flag 223ag, return operation timer 223ah, operation effect flag 223ai, effect standby The difference is that a flag 223aj, an effect information storage area 223ak, a variable operation valid period timer 223am, a second variation time timer 223an, a press effect prohibition flag 223ao, and a variable effect priority flag 223ap are added. Note that as shown in FIG. 494 (b), for convenience of explanation, some of the elements of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above are omitted, but the voice lamp control of this control example is omitted. The RAM 223 of the device 113 has all the elements of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special figure fluctuation number counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of a special symbol (special figure), and when a short-time state (a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the big hit game ends, This is for measuring the period until the number of special figure fluctuations executed after completion reaches 100 times. In this control example, when the second short-time end condition is satisfied, the short-time state (ordinary symbol high probability state) is reached before the number of special figure fluctuations executed after the big hit game reaches 100 times. Since the process may end, its name and configuration are divided, but the specific contents of the special figure fluctuation counter 223aa are the same as the time-guaranteed counter 223g in the first control example described above.

  The effect mode storage area 223ab is a storage area for storing the effect mode set by the background mode effect, and temporarily stores the back mode set in the back mode lottery process 2 (see S4362 in FIG. 515). It is something to remember.

  The stop symbol information storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing stop symbol information (the type of the left symbol, the set speech) when the speech mode is set.

  The character selection counter 223ad is a loop counter that is a kind of effect counter, and the value is referred to when a character is set with reference to the character selection table 222aa2.

  The origin detection flag 223ae and the operation position detection flag 223af are flags for indicating the position of the lever member 10340. An origin detection sensor (not shown) indicates that the lever member 10340 is located at the initial position (origin position). ) Is detected, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and the operation position detection flag 223af is ON when the operation position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the lever member 10340 is located at the operation position. Set to

  When both the origin detection flag 223ae and the operation position detection flag 223af are set to OFF, it is determined that the lever member 10340 is located between the initial position and the operation position, and the origin detection flag 223ae is determined. When both the operation position detection flag 223af are set to ON, a failure of detection means (origin detection sensor, operation position detection sensor) for detecting the position of the lever member 10340, or failure of the lever member 10340 Therefore, it is determined as an abnormal state.

  Although detailed description is omitted, here, when it is determined that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state, an operation effect effect is produced using an abnormal selection table in which a variable operation effect using the lever member 10340 is not selected. The mode is set, and an error command indicating that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state is output to the outside.

  The initial position change flag 223ag is a flag for changing the initial position of the lever member 10340, and is set to OFF during a normal state in which the initial position of the lever member 10340 is the origin position. Set to ON when the position is the origin position. In accordance with the setting status of the initial position change flag 223ag, the effect mode of the variable operation effect is set.

  This eliminates the need to repeatedly execute the return process that is executed after the operation effect execution period has elapsed. Moreover, it can suppress that the operating device 10300 breaks down by performing a return process against the force which maintains an operation position.

  The return operation timer 223ah is a timer for measuring an elapsed time during the return process for driving the lever member 10340 toward the initial position. When the return process is executed, a predetermined value (for example, 5 Value indicating seconds) is set. Then, the value of the return operation timer 223ah is subtracted by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the sound lamp control device 113 that is periodically executed. The return process is executed until The value (time) set in the return operation timer 223ah is set to be longer than the time required for one return process. When the return process is executed once, the lever member The configuration is such that the return processing is executed a plurality of times for the 10340.

  The operation effect flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether the operation effect is currently being performed, and is set to ON when the operation effect is executed, and is set to OFF when the operation effect is finished. . This control example is configured so that operation effects can be set (executed) at different occasions. Specifically, when an effect corresponding to a special figure change (fluctuation effect) is set, In the case where an effect (holding effect) based on the winning of a ball is set in the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640), an operation effect can be executed.

  The effect standby flag 223aj is a flag for indicating that the operation effect is in the execution standby state, and is set to ON when the execution of the operation effect is waited. This effect standby flag 223aj is when the timing at which the operation effect can be executed as the hold effect is during the first period of the change effect and the operation effect is being executed as the change effect. Set to on.

  Then, at the timing of setting the effect mode for the second period of the variable effect, the effect mode is set based on the flag setting status.

  The effect information storage area 223ak is a storage area for temporarily storing information related to each effect. Various production modes are set using the information stored in the production information storage area 223ak.

  The variable operation effective period timer 223am measures a variable operation effective period for effectively determining an operation on the operation means (the lever member 10340) executed by the player when the variable operation effect is set as the operation effect. When a variable operation effect is executed, a value corresponding to the variable operation effect to be executed is set and the main processing 2 (see FIG. 502) of the audio lamp control device 113 executed periodically is performed. Subtraction is performed by counter update processing (see S3113 in FIG. 502). Then, a period until it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am becomes 0 is set as the variable operation effective period.

  The second fluctuation time timer 223an is a timer for measuring the elapsed period of the fluctuation effect executed in response to the special figure fluctuation, and the timing for setting the effect mode of the second period in the effect period of the fluctuation effect. This is referred to when determining whether or not it has been reached. In the second variation time timer 223an, a value calculated as the timing for setting the effect mode in the second period in the normal effect setting process (see S4351 in FIG. 513) is set (see S5215 in FIG. 513). Subtraction is performed by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the audio lamp control device 113 that is periodically executed. Then, in the effect update process 2 (see S3151 in FIG. 503), when it is determined that the value is 0 (S3255: Yes in FIG. 503), the second for setting the effect mode corresponding to the second period. A period setting process is executed (see S3256 in FIG. 505).

  The pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is a flag for indicating a period during which the pressing effect for operating the push button 10317 is prohibited as a changing effect corresponding to the special figure change, and the pressing effect is selected. It is set to ON during the period during which prohibition is prohibited.

  In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211, one operation device 10300 includes the push button 10317 and the lever member 10340, and the push button is moved by moving the lever member 10340. 10317 is also configured to move in conjunction. Therefore, in this control example, during the period in which the return process for moving the lever member 10340 to the initial position is being performed, the pressing effect that causes the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 is not performed.

  With this configuration, the push button 10317 moves smoothly in conjunction with the movement of the lever member 10340 in a state where the player tries to push the push button 10317 based on the execution of the push effect. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the push button 10317 cannot be pressed.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the operation device 10300 during the return process and giving the player a sense of discomfort with the effect by executing the press effect while the return process of the lever member 10340 is being executed. can do. In this control example, a configuration in which the press effect prohibition flag 223ao is set so that the press effect is not executed during the return process of the lever member 10340 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the press effect is executed. During this time, the return processing of the lever member 10340 may not be executed, and in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  The variable effect priority flag 223ap is preferentially variable operation when setting an operation effect (variable operation effect, pressing effect, etc.) that causes the player to operate the operation means (for example, lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317). This is a flag for indicating a period in which the effect is set, and is set to ON during a period in which the variable operation effect is preferentially set.

  This variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to ON when the variable operation effect ends with the lever member 10340 positioned at the second position (actuation position). Thereby, in a state where the lever member 10340 is located at the second position (actuation position), it is easier to set the variable operation effect than in a state where the lever member 10340 is located at the initial position (origin position). Can do. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to execute another operation effect (for example, a press effect) in a state where the lever member 10340 is located at the second position (actuation position).

  As described above, in this control example, the operation device 10300 uses a configuration having the PUSH button 10317 and the lever member 10340, and when the lever member 10340 is in the operating position, it is in the initial position. More than the case, the lever member 10340 is separated from the base of the operation device 10300. Since the push button 10317 is provided on the distal end side of the lever member 10340 (on the side opposite to the base portion of the operation device 10300), the push button 10317 is located with respect to the push button 10317 in a state where the lever member 10340 is located at the operating position. When the pressing operation is performed, in addition to the case where the pressing operation is performed on the push button 10317 in a state where the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position, various structures of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340). ), A large load may be applied to the operation device 10300. On the other hand, in this control example, when the lever member 10340 is located at the operating position, the variable operation effect is selected with priority as the operation effect. The lever member 10340 can be easily moved to the initial position by the player's operation, and failure of the operation device 10300 can be suppressed.

  In this control example, when the operation effect is set in a state where the lever member 10340 is located at the operating position, the variable operation effect is selected in preference to the other operation effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when a variable effect where no operation effect is set is set, a variable operation effect may be set instead of the effect mode of the variable effect. As long as the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position, the variable operation effect may be selected more easily than when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position. In addition to the fluctuation effects executed in response to the special figure fluctuation, for example, the normal figure fluctuation effect executed in response to the normal symbol fluctuation (normal figure fluctuation), the big hit game, and the small hit game are executed. In the hit game effect, the variable operation effect may be more easily selected when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position than when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 499 to 501. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) in the first control example.

  Among the special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) in the second control example, the special symbol variation start process in the first control example (see FIG. 427) is performed in each process of S301 to S309, S310 to 314, S318, and S319. The same processes as those in S301 to S309, S310 to 314, S318, and S319 are performed.

  In the process of S309, if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S309: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (S352), and the process proceeds to S310.

  In the process of S313, after the process of S313 is executed, the process of S315 is executed without performing the process of S314. After executing the process of S315, the process of S316 and S317 is not executed, the change process at the time of disconnection is executed (S351), and the process proceeds to the process of S318. Note that details of the out-of-run fluctuation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 500, the details of the out-of-run fluctuation process (S351) in the second control example will be described. This off-time fluctuation process (S351) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (see FIG. 499) in the second control example, and the result of the special figure lottery is other than a big win (out of or small It is executed when it is hit.

  When the deviation variation process (S351) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S371), and if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (out). (S371: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S372), the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S373), and the process proceeds to S381. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  In the process of S371, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S371: Yes), the small hit type is determined based on the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac (S374).

  Here, the value of the small hitting type counter C6 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the small hitting type selection 2 table 202ac (see FIG. 493 (b)) to determine the small hitting type. Set. Specifically, if the value of the small hit type counter C6 is in the range of “0 to 64”, the small hit A is set, and if it is in the range of “65 to 99”, the small hit B is set.

  When the processing of S374 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the determined small hit type is small hit A (S375). When it is determined that the small hit type is not small hit A (small hit B) (S375: No), the process proceeds to S381. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit type is small hit A (S375: Yes), the value of the small hit counter 203ab is incremented by 1 (S376), and then the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the addition is 2 Is determined (S377).

  When it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the addition is not 2 (S377: No), the process proceeds to S380. When it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the addition is 2 (S377: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the second short time end condition is satisfied by the current small hit winning, the short time state (normal symbol) In order to shift from the high probability state) to the low probability state, the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is reset to the initial value (S378), a state command indicating the completion of the hour / hour is set (S379), and the process proceeds to S380. To do.

  In the process of S380, a variation pattern (small hit variation pattern) corresponding to the small hit selected this time is determined. Although a detailed description is omitted, when a win is won in the special drawing lottery, a variation pattern similar to that in the case where the win is won in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is set. That is, the variation pattern to be referred to when the big win is won by the special drawing lottery in the variation pattern selection table 202b is determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern determined based on the small win winning and the fluctuation pattern determined based on the big win winning the same. Therefore, since the effect mode of the special figure variation effect executed based on the determined variation pattern can be made the same, it is difficult to know whether the player has won the big hit or the small win.

  In the process of S381, a change pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the change pattern determined in the processes of S373 and S380 is set (S381). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S382). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 434) in the first control example. Sent. When the process of S382 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1160) in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The jackpot end process 2 (S1160) is a process executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 437) in the first control example.

  Of the jackpot end process 2 (S1160) in the second control example, the processes of S1301 to S1302 and S1305 are the processes of S1301 to S1302 and S1305 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 437) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

  After executing the processing of S1301 and S1302, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is read (S1351), and the presence / absence of the short time state setting is determined based on the read gaming state and the jackpot type (S1352). Here, in the second control example, as the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the current gaming state, the gaming state at the time of winning (when the hit determination is made by the special drawing lottery), and the winning It has storage means (game state storage means) capable of temporarily storing the game state at the start of the game. And in the process of S1351 mentioned above, the process which reads the game state at the time of jackpot winning from the game state memory | storage means which the other memory area 203z has is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to set a new gaming state based on the past gaming state (the gaming state when the gaming state setting condition is satisfied) as well as the gaming state set at the present time. Therefore, various games can be provided.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a time-short state setting (S1353). If it is determined that there is a setting for the short time state (S1353: Yes), values are set in various counters based on the contents defined in the short time end condition selection table 202ad (S1354), and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot Is set (S1355), and the process proceeds to S1305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1353, when it is determined that there is no setting for the time reduction state (S1353: No), the process of S1354 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1355.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 502 to 516. In the second control example, a process for executing a variable operation effect for operating the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member, is added to the first control example described above, and a serif mode as a variable effect. Can be set when receiving a winning information command, adding a process to set the process, changing the contents of the process for setting the production aspect of the fluctuation effect to be set when the fluctuation pattern command is received In order to select the lost child mode to be executed when the latent state or the normal state is set in the process of selecting the processing content for setting a long holding effect (holding notice effect) and the process of selecting the back mode This is different from the point of adding the process of, and is otherwise the same. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the main process 2. The main process 2 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 441) in the first control example.

  Of the main process 2 in the second control example, the processes of S3102 to S3110, S3113, and S3116 to S3120 are respectively the processes of S3102 to S3110, S54143113, and S3116 to S3120 of the main process (see FIG. 441) in the first control example. The same processing as each processing is executed.

  After executing the process of S3110, the effect update process 2 is executed (S3151). Details of the effect execution process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the process of S3151, the press detection process 2 is executed (S3152). Details of the press detection process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 506 and 507. After executing the process of S3152, the operation effect management process is executed (S3153). Details of the operation effect management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S3153, the variable operation means management process is executed (S3154). The details of the variable operation means management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S3154, the command determination process 2 is executed (S3155). After executing the process of S3155, the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S3156), and the process proceeds to S3116.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 503, the effect update process 2 (S3151) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing this effect update process 2 (S3151). This effect update process 2 (S3151) is a process executed in place of the effect update process in the first control example (see FIG. 442), and sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, and periodically By updating the value, it is variable while determining the progress of the fluctuation effect (variation display effect) based on the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s that measures the fluctuation time (fluctuation elapsed time, fluctuation fluctuation period) of the special figure. The effect update process in the first control example described above is a process for updating the effect contents of the operation effect or executing the change effect corresponding to the second period (the second half period of the special figure change being executed). The processing added to (see FIG. 442) is executed.

  In addition, a process of updating the second variable time timer 223an that measures a period from the start timing of the special figure change to the setting of the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the second period in the same manner as the above-described variable time timer 223s. And when the value becomes 0 (when it is determined that it is the timing for setting the effect mode of the second period), the process for setting the effect mode of the second period is executed. doing.

  Of the effect update process 2 (S3151) in the second control example, the processes of S3201 to S3206 are the same as the processes of S3201 to S3206 of the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example. Executed.

  In the process of S3201, when it is determined that the value of the variation time timer 223s is 0, that is, when it is determined that the current drawing is not changing (S3201), the process proceeds to S3255.

  On the other hand, after executing the process of S3206, the variable operation effect process is executed (S3251), and the process proceeds to S3252. Details of this variable operation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3252, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer 223s indicates the start timing of the second period (S3252). When it is determined that the value of the variation time timer 223s indicates the second period start timing (S3252: Yes), information indicating the variation display mode of the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak is read. (S3253) A display variation pattern command is set based on the read information (S3254), and the process proceeds to S3255.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when the variation pattern command is received, the first half period is not set for the variation display production effect mode for the entire variation time period included in the variation pattern command. The production mode is configured only in the (first period). Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 487, when the received variation pattern command includes information indicating the variation time of 60 seconds (the variation effect corresponding to the variation time of 60 seconds is set. When the variation pattern command is received, the production period information indicating that the current variation time is 60 seconds, and the production period are the first period (30 seconds) and the second period (30 seconds). The period information divided into the first period effect mode information indicating the effect mode set for the first period is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak. Then, a value corresponding to the second variation time timer 223an is set in order to measure the second period effect mode setting timing (after 28 seconds from the start of variation) indicating the timing for setting the effect mode corresponding to the second period.

  By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to perform the process for setting the production | presentation aspect of a 2nd period production 28 seconds after starting a special figure change. In the exercise information storage area 223ak, the effect result for the effect executed during the first period (for example, the effect result of the operation effect executed during the first period) is also stored. The effect mode of the second period effect is set based on various information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak.

  As a result, it is possible to set the effect mode of the changing effect corresponding to the remaining period (second period) of the special figure changing period even at a timing different from the timing at which the changing pattern command is received from the main controller 110. . Furthermore, since it is possible to set the second period effect based on the information indicating the effect result of the effect that has already been executed (the effect executed during the first period), it is possible to set a special timing for the start of the special figure fluctuation. It is possible to make it easier to set a variety of effect modes than when a change effect effect mode is set for the entire period of the figure change period.

  In this control example, an example in which the special figure variation period is divided into two periods of the first period (first half period) and the second period (second half period) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may divide into a fluctuation period and the production | generation aspect corresponding to each fluctuation period may be set before reaching each fluctuation period. Further, in this control example, not the arrival timing of the second period (in the example shown in FIG. 487, the timing at which 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the special figure fluctuation), but the timing before the arrival timing of the second period (see FIG. 487). In the example shown, after setting the effect mode during the second period at the timing of the elapse of 28 seconds from the start of the special figure change), and temporarily storing it in the effect information storage area 223ak, at the arrival timing of the second period, Although it is configured to execute the variation effect in the effect mode stored in the effect information storage area 223ak, the processing executed at the arrival timing of the second period can be simplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process for setting an effect mode during the second period may be executed at the arrival timing of the second period. By comprising in this way, the process performed in the arrival timing of the 2nd period will increase, but without storing the production mode set up corresponding to the 2nd period in production information storage area 223ak, Since it can be executed as it is, it is possible to simplify the storage area for storing information indicating the effect mode of the variation effect.

  In the process of S3252, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s does not indicate the start timing of the second period (in the example of FIG. 487, the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the special figure fluctuation) (S3252: No) ), Skips the processes of S3253 and S3254, and proceeds to the process of S3255.

  In the process of S3255, it is determined whether the value of the second variation time timer 223an is 0 (S3255). When it is determined that the value of the second variation time timer 223an is not 0 (S3255: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the value of the second variation time timer 223an is 0 (S3255: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the timing for setting the production mode of the second period, the second period setting process is executed. (S3256) Then, this process is complete | finished. Details of the second period setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the variable operation effect process (S3251) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the variable operation effect process (S3251). This variable operation effect process (S3251) is a process executed in effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example.

  In the variable operation effect process (S3251), a process for setting the effect mode of the variable operation effect and a process for ending the variable operation effect are executed. As described with reference to FIGS. 485 and 486, in this control example, as an effect mode of the variable operation effect, a push-down operation effect that pushes down the lever member 10340, a push-up effect that pushes up the lever member 10340, and the lever member 10340 It is configured to be able to set a touch effect that allows the user to touch the detection range of the touch sensor, and to set the effect mode according to the position situation of the lever member 10340 at the execution timing of the variable operation effect. doing.

  By comprising in this way, the situation which contradiction arises with the production | presentation aspect of the variable operation effect performed and the position condition of the lever member 10340 can be suppressed. Specifically, it is possible to suppress a situation where the push-down operation effect is executed in a state where the lever member 10340 is already lowered.

  In the present control example, for convenience of explanation, description will be made so that a touch effect that does not allow the player to perform an operation on the lever member 10340 is included as part of the variable operation effect. As described above, this touch effect is an operation effect using the touch sensor, and an operation effect without using the lever member 10340 which is a variable operation member. However, since it is an operation effect for creating a state in which the player's hand is separated from the lever member 10340 by executing an effect for touching the detection range of the touch sensor, for example, the lever member For a player who continues to hold 10340, this is an effect for releasing the hand from the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member. Therefore, when viewed in a broad sense, it becomes part of the variable operation effect. That is, in this control example, as a variable operation effect, a push-down operation effect (FIG. 10) for moving the variable operation member (lever member 10340) located at the second position (actuation position) toward the first position (origin position). 484 (a)) and a push-up operation effect that moves the variable operation member (lever member 10340) located at the first position (origin position) toward the second position (origin position) (FIG. 484 (b)). Reference) and a touch effect (see FIG. 485) for releasing the hand from the variable operation member (lever member 10340).

  When the variable operation effect process (S3251) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601). Here, determination is performed based on the production mode information stored in the production information storage area 223ak and the value of the variation time counter 223s.

  In the process of S4601, when it is determined that the current timing is the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601: Yes), the operation mode of the current variable operation effect is set with reference to the operation effect switching table 222ab (S4602). Then, a value corresponding to the operation effect period is set in the variable operation effective period timer 223am corresponding to the set effect mode (S4603), the operation effect flag 223ai is set to ON (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4608.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the current time is not the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601: No), it is then determined whether the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is 0 (S4605). . When it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is 0 (S4605: Yes), an effect mode indicating the end of the variable operation effect is set (S4606), and the operation effect flag 223ai is set to OFF ( S4607) and the process proceeds to S4608. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is not 0 (S4605: No), the processes of S4606 and S4607 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4608.

  In the process of S4608, a display command indicating the effect mode set this time is set (S4608), and then this process ends. Accordingly, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the start timing and end timing of the variable operation effect.

  Next, the second period setting process (S3256) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the second period setting process (S3256).

  The second period setting process (S3256) is a process executed in the effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example. In the second period setting process (S3256), a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the second period (second half period) is performed among the effect periods of the change effect corresponding to the special figure change being executed. . Further, when the hold operation effect is on standby (the effect standby flag 223aj is set to on), a process for setting an effect mode for executing the hold operation effect during the second period is executed. .

  When the second period setting process (S3256) is started, first, information on the special figure fluctuation being executed (information corresponding to various information included in the corresponding fluctuation pattern command) from the effect information storage area 223ak, Information related to the effect of the first period and information related to the second period (information indicating the length of the second period) are read (S4701), and then it is determined whether the effect standby flag 223aj is on (S4702). . If it is determined that the effect standby flag 223aj is not on (is off) (S4702: No), it is then determined whether or not there is additional effect information during the first effect period (S4703). The additional effect information discriminated in the process of S4703 refers to the player operating means (for example, the PUSH button 10317, the lever member 10340) among the effects executed during the first period (first effect period). The variation effect executed during the first period (first effect period), such as information for indicating the effect result of the effect (for example, the special drawing operation effect) whose effect result varies based on the operation content executed. As the production mode, the production mode was actually selected from among the productions configured such that one production mode is selected from a plurality of production modes according to the selection condition (operation on the operation means) established during the first period. The information for showing the production mode) is shown. In the case of selecting an effect mode based on a selection condition established from a plurality of effect modes, this additional effect information is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak as additional effect information. Stored.

  If it is determined that there is additional production information during the first production period based on the information stored in the production information storage area 223ak (S4703: Yes), a variable display mode corresponding to the additional production information is set ( S4705) and the process proceeds to S4710. When it is determined that there is no additional effect information during the first effect period (S4703: No), the variable display mode is set based on the information related to the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4704). The process proceeds to S4710.

  Thus, in this control example, based on the content of the additional effect information (stored in the effect information storage area 223ak) acquired during the first period (first effect period), the second period (second effect period). Since it is configured so that the production mode can be set, the production mode of the variation production to be executed corresponding to the fluctuation time of one special figure fluctuation is divided into a plurality of production periods and set at different timings. In the case of the above configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when combining the production modes set in each production period. Therefore, the production effect in the entire variation production can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the effect standby flag 223aj is on (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not a pending batch change effect is possible during the second effect period (S4706). If it is determined that the hold batch change effect is possible during the second effect period (S4706: Yes), the variable display mode corresponding to the hold batch change effect is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709. When it is determined that the pending batch change effect is not possible during the second effect period (S4706: No), the variable display mode is set based on the information regarding the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak ( S4708) and the process proceeds to S4709.

  Here, the processing contents executed in S4706 will be specifically described. In this control example, when the special figure fluctuation of this time is a special figure fluctuation that has been won by a big hit, or the lottery result of the special figure lottery is out. If there is a variation pattern that has a high expectation of winning the jackpot as the variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set), the latter half of the special figure variation effect (corresponding to the second period) Thus, a special figure variation effect (for example, a super reach effect) for suggesting that the player is highly likely to win the special figure change this time is configured to be easily executed.

  In such a case, that is, when an effect for making the player interested in the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed is being executed, the newly acquired winning information (special figure hold) There is a problem in that the holding effect for suggesting the content is executed in the latter half period (second period) of the special figure fluctuation production, so that the interest in the special figure fluctuation production is diminished and the production effect is reduced. there were. Therefore, this control example is configured to determine whether or not the hold operation effect is executed based on information for setting the effect mode of the second period (various information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak). doing. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to understand the effects (special drawing fluctuation effect, hold effect) to be watched by the player during the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, it is simply determined whether the length of the second period is longer than the execution period of the hold operation effect (holding batch change effect), and the hold operation effect during the second period can be executed. It may be configured to determine whether or not can be secured, and an effect result indicating that the hold operation effect is not executed during the second period is displayed (executed) as an effect result of the effect executed during the first period. It may be configured to determine whether it has been performed and to determine based on the determination result.

  In addition, the process of S4708 described above, that is, the hold operation effect (holding batch change effect) during the second period cannot be executed even though the effect standby flag 223aj is set to ON during the first period. If it is discriminated, as shown in FIG. 486 (b), the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 is stopped and displayed in a display mode (display mode other than “PUSH”) in which the operating means is not operated. An effect that is changed to an effect mode corresponding to the displayed display mode is executed.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 486 (a), when execution of the hold operation effect is in a standby state, the suggestion character HC1 is displayed, and an effect of rotating the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 is executed. It is configured as follows. By rotating the display part in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the possibility that the hold operation effect will be executed later, and even if the situation where the hold operation effect is not executed as described above occurs. The game can be continued without giving the player dissatisfaction.

  In the process of S4709, the effect standby flag 223aj is set to OFF (S4709), and the process proceeds to S4710. In the process of S4710, each information set this time is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4710), and then this process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 506, the pressing detection process 2 (S3152) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the pressing detection process 2 (S3152). This press detection process 2 (S3152) is executed in place of the press detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example, and is referred to when a press operation on the PUSH button 10317 is executed. And variable operation detection processing executed when the lever member 10340 is variably operated is different in that it can be executed.

  Of the press detection process 2 (S3152) in the second control example, the processes in S3601 to S3607 are the same as the processes in S3601 to S3607 of the press detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example. Executed.

  If it is determined in step S3601 that pressing of the push button has not been detected (S3601: No), the process proceeds to step S3653. If it is determined in the process of S3606 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), it is then determined whether the value of the other pressing effective period timer is greater than 0 ( S3651). When it is determined that the value of the other pressing effective period timer is greater than 0 (S3651: Yes), an effect mode corresponding to the effect being executed is set (S3652), and then the process proceeds to S3653. If it is determined that the value of the other pressing effective period timer is 0 (S3651: No), the process proceeds to S3653.

  In the process of S3653, it is determined whether an operation on the operation means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) used for the variable operation effect is detected (S3653). When it is determined that an operation on the operation means used for the variable operation effect is detected (S3653: Yes), a variable operation detection process is executed (S3654). Details of the variable operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the processing content of S3653 is demonstrated. As described above, in this control example, the lever member 10340 is configured to be variably operated between the first position (origin position) and the second position (operation position). When a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lever member 10340 is located at the first position detects the lever member 10340, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and the lever A detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the member 10340 is located at the second position is configured such that the operation position detection flag 223af is set to ON when the lever member 10340 is detected. doing.

  Then, after the origin detection flag 223ae that has been in the on state is set to off, the operation position detection flag 223af that has been in the off state is set to on, or the operation position detection flag 223af that has been in the on state is off. When the origin detection flag 223ae that has been in the OFF state is set to ON after being set to, in the processing of S3653, it is determined that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected.

  The method for determining that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected is not limited to the method of this control example. For example, one detection flag (the origin detection flag 223ae, the operation position detection flag 223af) is set (on state, When it is determined that the (off state) has been switched, it may be determined that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected, or one of the detection flags (the origin detection flag 223ae and the operating position detection flag 223af) may be determined. When it is determined that the setting state (ON state, OFF state) has been switched, it is determined that the first operation has been performed, and the setting state (ON state) of both detection flags (the origin detection flag 223ae and the operating position detection flag 223af) , OFF state) is determined (switched according to the operation detection content in this control example). It may be determined that the second operation has been executed, and the detection result is different between when the first operation is established and when the second operation is established. . Further, when the above-described second operation is established, a period from when the setting state of one detection flag is switched to when the other setting state is switched, that is, the lever member 10340 located at the origin position is moved to the operating position. Alternatively, the detection result may be different based on the period required to move the lever member 10340 located at the operating position to the origin position.

  In the process of S3653, when it is determined that the operation on the operation means used for the variable operation effect is not detected (S3653: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, the variable operation detection process (S3654) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the variable operation detection process (S3654). This variable operation detection process (S3654) is a process executed in the press detection process 2 (FIG. 506) in the second control example.

  When the variable operation detection process (S3654) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801). That is, it is determined whether the variable operation effect is currently being executed. If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801: Yes), the operation means (lever member 10340, touch) within the variable operation effective period set for the variable operation effect. Since the sensor) is operated, an effect mode corresponding to the effect being executed is set (S4802), the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is reset to 0 (S4803), and then this process ends. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is not greater than 0 (0) (S4801: No), it is then determined whether or not the origin detection flag 223ae is on ( S4804). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4804: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to off (S4806), and the process proceeds to S4807. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4805: No), the process of S4806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4807. In the process of S4807, a lock process for fixing the variable operation means at the origin position is set (S4807), and then this process ends.

  When the lever member 10340 not moved to the origin position is moved to the origin position during the period when the variable operation effective period is not set by executing the above-described processing, the lever member 10340 is moved to the origin position. Will be locked in. Therefore, even if the lever member 10340 is left in a state where the lever member 10340 is positioned at a position other than the origin position while the variable operation effect is being executed, the lever member 10340 is simply moved to the origin position. Can be securely locked.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4804, when it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4804: No), it is next determined whether or not the operation position detection flag 223af is on (S4808). When it is determined that the operation position detection flag 223af is off (S4808: No), this process is ended as it is. If it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S4808: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the initial position change (switching) flag 223ag is on (S4809). If it is determined that the initial position change (switching) flag 223ag is on (S4809: Yes), the initial position change (switching) flag 223ag is set to off (S4810), and then this process ends. If it is determined that the initial position change (switching) flag 223ag is off (S4809: No), the process of S4810 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the operation effect management process (S3153) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing this operation effect management process (S3153). This operation effect management process (S3153) is a process executed in the main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example, and updates the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am during the variable operation effect period. Processing for this is executed.

  When the operation effect management process (S3153) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901). If it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is 0 (S4901: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901: Yes), the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is updated (S4902), and then the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is updated. It is determined whether or not the value is 0 (S4903). When it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation validity period timer 223am is not 0 (S4903: No), this process is ended as it is. If it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation validity period timer 223am is 0 (S4903: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4904). If it is determined that the initial position change (switching) flag 223ag is on (S4904: Yes), an initial return operation scenario is set (S4905), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the value of the return operation timer 223ah. (S4906), the pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is set to ON (S4907), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the initial position change (switching) flag 223ag is off (S4904: No), it is next determined whether or not the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908). . When it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4908: No), the variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to on (S4909), and then this process ends.

  Next, variable operation means management processing (S3154) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing the variable operation means management process (S3154). This variable operation means management process (S3154) is a process executed in the main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example.

  When the variable operation means management process (S3154) is started, it is first determined whether or not the value of the return operation timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001). When it is determined that the value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5001: No), this process is ended as it is. If it is determined that the value of the return operation timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the return operation timer 223ah is updated (S5002), and the updated value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0. It is determined whether or not (S5003). When it is determined that the updated value of the return operation timer 223ah is not 0 (S5003: No), the return operation corresponding to the value of the return operation timer 223ah is set (S5004), and then this process is terminated. .

  In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the updated return operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5003: Yes), the pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is set to OFF (S5005), and then the origin detection flag 223ae It is determined whether or not is ON (S5006). When it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S5006: Yes), information indicating that the variable operation means is in the normal position is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5007), and then this process is terminated. To do.

  In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S5006: No), it is next determined whether or not the operation position detection flag 223af is on (S5008). If it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S5008: Yes), the initial position change (switching) flag 223ag is set to on (S5009), and information indicating that the variable operation means is in the opposite position. It memorize | stores in effect information storage area 223ak (S5010), and this process is complete | finished after that.

  In the process of S5008, when it is determined that the operation position detection flag 223af is off (S5008: No), information indicating that the variable operation means is an unknown position is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5011). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 510, the pending notice lottery process 2 (S4031) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing the hold notice lottery process 2 (S4031). This hold notice lottery process 2 (S4031) is a process executed in place of the hold notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example.

  Of the holding advance notice lottery process 2 (S4031) in the second control example, in each process of S4051 to S4057 and S4060 to S4063, S4051 to S4057 and S4060 of the reserved advance notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example, respectively. The same processes as those in S4063 are executed.

  In the process of S4057, when it is determined that the pending batch change effect has been executed (S4057: Yes), an execution timing setting process is executed (S4081), and then this process ends. Details of the execution timing setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the execution timing setting process (S4081) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing the execution timing setting process (S4081). This execution timing setting process (S4081) is a process executed in the pending notice lottery process 2 (FIG. 510) in the second control example.

  When the execution timing setting process (S4081) is started, first, information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak is read (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the operation effect flag 223ai is on. (S5102). If it is determined that the operation effect flag 223ai is off (S5102: No), it is then determined whether or not it is possible to secure the execution period of the hold batch change effect (S5103). If it is determined that the execution period can be secured (S5103: Yes), the execution of the hold batch change effect is set (S5104), the batch change flag 223p is set to ON (S5105), and then this process is terminated. To do. If it is determined in the process of S5103 that it is not possible to secure the execution period of the pending batch change effect (S5103: No), the processes of S5104 and S5105 are skipped, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5102 that the operation effect flag 223ai is on (S5102: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current variation effect is in the effect of the first period ( S5106). When it is determined that the current variation effect is the effect of the first period (S5106: Yes), the effect standby flag 223aj is set to ON (S5107), and the display of the reserved symbol form indicating standby is set ( S5108), and then the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5106 that the current variation effect is not in the first period effect (S5106: No), next, whether or not the current variation effect is in the second period effect. Is discriminated (S5109). If it is determined that the current variation effect is not during the second period effect (S5109: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the current variation effect is the effect of the second period (S5109: Yes), the display of the reserved symbol aspect corresponding to the latest winning information is set (S5110), and then this process is terminated. .

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 512, the variable effect setting process 2 (S4254) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing the variation effect setting process 2 (S4254). This variation effect setting process 2 (S4254) is a process executed in place of the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example.

  Of the variable effect setting process 2 (S4254) in the second control example, the processes of S4301 to S4311 and S4313 are the processes of S4301 to S4311 and S4313 of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

  In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the current state is the certainty change state (S4311: Yes), the rear mode lottery process 2 is executed (S4352), and the process proceeds to S4312. Details of the rear mode lottery process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4311 that the current state is not a certain change state (S4311: No), the normal effect setting process is executed (S4351), and the process proceeds to S4313. Details of this normal effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 513 and 514.

  Next, the normal effect setting process (S4351) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing this normal effect setting process (S4351). This normal effect setting process (S4351) is a process executed in the variable effect setting process 2 (FIG. 512) in the second control example.

  When the normal effect setting process (S4351) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal state (S5201). If it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5214. If it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S5201: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current state is the speech mode (S5202). If it is determined that the current mode is the serif mode (S5202: Yes), the serif mode setting process is executed (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Details of the dialogue mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S5202 that the current mode is not the speech mode (S5202: No), the process of S5203 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5204.

  In the process of S5204, it is determined whether or not the variation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (S5204: No), a fluctuation display mode corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is set (S5205), and then the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5204, when it is determined that the variation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204: Yes), the first period (first half) corresponding to the received variation pattern is extracted (S5206), and then the operation effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not the flag 223ai is on (S5207). When it is determined that the operation effect flag 223ai is on (S5207: Yes), a change display mode is set from the effect mode group that does not use the operation effect as the effect mode of the first period (S5208), and thereafter , The process proceeds to S5214.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5207 that the operation effect flag 223ai is off (S5207: No), it is then determined whether or not the set effect mode has an operation effect (S5210). If it is determined that there is an operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the variable effect priority flag 223ap is on (S5211). When it is determined that the variable effect priority flag 223ap is on (S5211: Yes), the variable operation effect is set as the operation effect (S5212), the variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to off (S5213), and the process of S5214 Migrate to

  Also, in the process of S5210, when it is determined that there is no operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210: No), and in the process of S5211, when it is determined that the variable effect priority flag 223ap is off (S5211: No). ), The process proceeds to S5214.

  In the process of S5214, a value obtained by subtracting 2 seconds from the number of seconds corresponding to the first period is calculated (S5214), and a data value corresponding to the calculated value is set in the second variation time timer 223an (S5215). Each set information is memorize | stored in effect information storage area 223ak (S5216), and this process is complete | finished after that.

  Next, referring to a flowchart of FIG. 514, the speech mode setting process (S5203) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing the speech mode setting process (S5203). This dialogue mode setting process (S5203) is a process executed in the normal effect setting process (FIG. 513) in the second control example.

  When the dialogue mode setting process (S5203) is started, first, the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is read (S5301), and it is determined whether or not the second stop symbol information is stored (S5301). S5302). When it is determined that the second stop symbol information is not stored (S5302: No), a stop character and a line corresponding to the lottery result are randomly selected, and a line effect production mode is set (S5303). Transition to processing.

  If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the second stop symbol information has been stored (S5302: Yes), the speech state is set based on the speech state setting table 222aa1 (S5304), and the set speech state and whether or not Based on the determination result, the stop character is selected with reference to the character selection table 222aa2 (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306.

  In the process of S5306, referring to the line selection table 222aa3, the effect form of the current line effect is set (S5306), and the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is shifted by 1 (S5307). The set effect mode is stored in the previous storage area (S5308), and then this process is terminated.

  Next, the back mode lottery process 2 (S4362) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing the rear mode lottery process 2 (S4362). The rear mode lottery process 2 (S4362) is a process executed in place of the rear mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example.

  Of the back mode lottery process 2 (S4362) in the second control example, in each process of S4501 to S4504 and S4506 to S4511, S4501 to S4504 and S4506 of the back mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as that of S4511 is executed.

  In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not a probable change state (S4504: No), the rear mode setting process is executed after the completion of time reduction (S4551), and the process proceeds to S4510. The details of the rear mode setting process after the short time end will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 516, the rear mode setting process after completion of the time reduction (S4551) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 516 is a flowchart showing the rear mode setting process (S4551) after the completion of the short time. The rear mode setting process (S4551) after a short time is a process executed in the rear mode lottery process 2 (FIG. 515) in the second control example.

  When the rear mode setting process (S4551) is started after the end of time reduction, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a normal state or a latent state (S4561). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state (S4561: Yes), the back mode corresponding to the lost child mode is determined (S4562), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4561 that the current gaming state is not the normal state or the latent state (S4561: No), the rear mode is referred to with reference to the fallen table and the effect lottery counter value. Are lottery (S4563), and then the process is terminated.

<Regarding the first modification of the second control example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, an operation effect for operating the operation means as a hold effect while an operation effect for operating the operation means (special operation effect) is being executed. When the execution condition for executing (hold operation effect) is satisfied, the execution timing of each operation effect is configured not to overlap. On the other hand, in the first modification, game environment adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume level output from the sound output device 226 by the pachinko machine 10, the brightness of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the like. The player has an adjustment operation means (for example, a first button (for example, a button composed of an up arrow button and a down arrow button) on which an operation content can be selected) and a display of the third symbol display device 81 By operating the second button (for example, the button displayed as menu / decision on the button pressing surface) that is operated when displaying the menu screen on the screen or determining the selection content, the player The game environment can be set according to your preferences.

  Here, the adjustment method of the gaming environment will be briefly described. When the above-mentioned second button is pressed while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A menu screen for adjusting the gaming environment is displayed. The menu screen includes a volume adjustment display mode for adjusting the volume level, a light amount adjustment display mode for adjusting brightness, a game information display mode for confirming game information of the pachinko machine 10, and a menu screen. Is displayed, and an arbitrary display mode is selected by operating the first button described above, and when the second button is pressed, a corresponding screen is displayed.

  When the second button is pressed while the first button is operated and the volume adjustment display mode is selected, a volume adjustment screen is displayed. On this volume adjustment screen, a volume indicator showing the volume of the pachinko machine 10 in stages is displayed, and the volume level of the pachinko machine 10 can be variably operated by operating the first button and changing the volume indicator. It is configured. In this case, every time the first button is operated to change the volume indicator, the demo sound (for example, a character 801 speech) is output at a volume corresponding to the selected volume level. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to easily grasp the volume level corresponding to the currently selected volume level. Then, by operating the second button while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the currently selected volume level is determined, and the volume adjustment is completed.

  In addition, when the second button is pressed with the light amount display mode selected, a light amount adjustment screen is displayed. On this light quantity adjustment screen, a light quantity indicator showing the brightness (light quantity) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in a stepwise manner is displayed. The light amount can be adjusted based on the operation content of the button. The brightness of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the light quantity determined here (specifically, the brightness of the backlight for irradiating the display surface of the liquid crystal display constituting the third symbol display device 81) ) Can be adjusted.

  Further, when the second button is pressed while the game state display mode is selected, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 and the past game history are displayed.

  When the second button is operated in this manner and the menu screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol change effect or the special symbol hold acquired based on the special symbol start winning is held. Based on the hold effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize. Further, since it is necessary to provide a plurality of operation means in a limited space of the pachinko machine 10, the operation means (lever member 10340. PUSH button 10317) used in each control example described above and the gaming environment are adjusted. Adjustment operation means (first button, second button) must be arranged in the vicinity.

  Therefore, during adjustment of the gaming environment (while operating the first button and the second button), a special figure operation effect is executed as a special symbol variation effect, or a hold operation effect is executed as a hold effect. As a result, there is a problem that when the game environment is adjusted, not the adjustment operation means but the operation means is mistakenly operated and an unintended effect is executed.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, as in the second control example described above, an execution condition for executing an operation effect (special drawing operation effect, hold operation effect) for operating the operation means is established. In this case, it is determined whether it is during the period for operating the adjustment operation means (period during which the menu screen is displayed), and when it is determined that it is the period for operating the adjustment operation means, the execution of the operation effect is waited. It is configured as follows.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which different operating means are operated at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. Furthermore, in order for the player to adjust the gaming environment in a state in which the suggestion character HC1 (see FIG. 486 (a)) indicating that the standby effect is executed and the operation effect is being executed is displayed. When the first button is operated, the rotation speed of the display portion of the suggesting character HC1 is increased, and the high-speed rotation display is performed.

  As a result, when the standby effect is being executed while the game environment is being adjusted, if the adjustment operation means is operated to adjust the game environment, the display contents suggested by the standby effect effect mode are displayed. It can be difficult to understand. Specifically, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the character “PUSH” that prompts the user to operate the operating means displayed on the display portion of the suggesting character HC1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who has recognized the character “PUSH” rotated and displayed on the suggestion character HC1 from operating the operation means or the adjustment operation means by mistake.

  On the other hand, when an operation effect using the operation means is being executed, the player can use the operation means instead of the operation means because the effective period in which the operation on the second button can be effectively determined is not set. Even if the second button is operated by mistake, the menu screen is not displayed. As a result, the adjustment operation means is arranged in the vicinity of the operation means, and the menu screen is displayed when the second button is mistakenly operated during the operation presentation, thereby suppressing the situation that the presentation effect is remarkably reduced. Can do.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the first modified example, and the operation means (the lever member 10340, the PUSH button can be used even when the first button or the second button is operated during the period in which the operation effect is being executed. 10317) may be configured to be executed in the same manner as when the first button and the second button are operated, and the first button and the second button are displayed during a period when the operation effective period is not set for the first button and the second button. You may use the structure which provides a restriction | limiting physically so that a player cannot press two buttons.

<About Second Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, an operation effect for operating the operation means as a hold effect while an operation effect for operating the operation means (special operation effect) is being executed. When the execution condition for executing (hold operation effect) is established, the operation timing of each operation effect is configured not to overlap, thereby making it difficult for the player to understand, that is, one operation effect (for example, Although the operation means is operated with respect to the special drawing operation effect), a game in which the effect mode of the other operation effect (for example, the hold operation effect) is changed based on the operation of the operation means is not executed. Was configured. On the other hand, in the second modified example, an operation effect for operating the operation means with the special figure variation effect (special drawing operation effect) and an operation effect for operating the operation means as the hold effect (hold operation) Effect) is executed in duplicate (the operation effective period set for each operation effect overlaps), by setting a special operation effect mode, an operation effect that is easy for the player to understand Configured to be executable. Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute a fusion operation effect in which a special figure operation effect and a hold operation effect are fused.

  This fusion operation effect is an operation in which an effect mode for indicating the effect result of the special operation effect or the effect result of the hold operation effect is set as the effect mode of the effect executed based on the operation of the operating means. Specifically, for example, a special operation operation period in which an operation effective period in which an operation on the operation means can be effectively determined is set for 10 seconds from 5 seconds to 15 seconds after the start of the special figure change. As described above, in a state in which an operation effect that changes the effect mode based on the number of times the player has operated the operation unit (so-called repeated hit effect) is set, the player operates the operation unit once to produce an effect mode ( When the execution condition of the hold operation effect that changes the display pattern of the hold symbol) is established, the fusion operation effect in which 10 seconds, which is the operation valid period of the special figure operation effect, is set.

  And while the fusion operation effect is being executed, the final effect result (the effect result of the special operation effect and the effect result of the hold operation effect) is displayed at the elapsed timing of the operation effective period. Thus, every time the player operates the operation means during the operation effective period, an effect that gradually changes the effect mode of the special drawing operation effect and the effect mode of the hold operation effect is executed.

  That is, the effect result is displayed by setting it as the fusion operation effect for the operation effect that is set so that the effect result is displayed based on a single operation as in the case of the hold operation effect described above. The operation contents for the operation means required until the operation is configured to be different, and the effect result is notified with the passage of a specific effect period (operation effective period).

  As described above, when the execution timings of a plurality of operation effects having different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect results of the operation effects are duplicated, the display conditions (operation conditions) of the duplicate operation effects are specific conditions. By performing a fusion operation effect that has been corrected so that the operation effect is performed in duplicate, the operation result on the unintended side first displays the effect result, which is difficult for the player to understand Can be prevented from being provided.

  In the above-described example, when the execution timings of a plurality of operation effects with different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect results of the operation effects are overlapped, the specific conditions are set so that the display conditions are difficult to be satisfied. Configured to set. Thereby, since the period during which the fusion operation effect is executed can be made longer than the period during which the operation effect is executed alone, the player can easily recognize that the fusion operation effect is being executed. it can.

  Furthermore, in the above-described example, the operation effective period set for the fusion operation effect is configured to be the same as the operation effective period set for any of the duplicated operation effects. Thereby, since the fusion operation effect can be executed without newly setting the operation valid period exclusively for the fusion operation effect, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, you may comprise so that the operation effective period only for a fusion operation effect may be set, without restricting to this.

  The production contents of the above-described fusion operation effect will be described in detail. In this fusion operation effect, an effect that makes it appear as if each operation effect is duplicated is executed. That is, the effect in which the special drawing operation effect and the hold operation effect are respectively executed is executed. And the operation suggestion mode that suggests the operation content to the operation means for each operation effect, and the effect mode that is set when the operation is performed on the operation means, each operation effect is executed alone Are configured differently.

  Specifically, when the fusion operation effect is executed, a comment “start set operation” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display mode indicating that the fusion operation effect is executed for the player. In addition to being displayed on the screen, one display mode for operating the operating means (for example, the PUSH button 10317) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, when the player operates (presses) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation effective period of the fusion operation effect, the current operation content is determined by the operation determination means, and any effect mode of the fusion operation effects is determined. Decide whether to vary. Then, the effect mode of the operation effect that is the target of the effect mode to be varied is varied. In this case, for example, when executed alone as in the case of the hold operation effect described above, a display mode (for example, changing the color of the hold symbol from blue to red) indicating the effect result of the hold operation effect by a single operation. When a fusion operation effect including an operation effect that is configured to be displayed is executed, the currently displayed display mode (blue color) is displayed as the effect mode of the fusion operation effect. An effect of changing the hold symbol) to a display mode (for example, a blue, cracked hold symbol) different from the display mode indicating the effect of the hold operation effect (red hold symbol) is executed.

  Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player that the hold operation effect is being executed as a part of the fusion operation effect, and to delay the period until the effect result of the hold operation effect is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to eagerly operate the operation means until the fusion operation effect ends. In this case, when the effect of the operation effect to be executed is an effect that changes the specific display mode step by step, the display mode indicating the current stage, the display mode of the stage indicated by the effect result, It is preferable that the display mode at a stage located between the two is displayed during the fusion operation effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to predict the result of the fusion operation effect.

  In addition, while the fusion operation effect is being executed, notification means (for example, the third symbol) that notifies the player which operation effect effect mode can be changed when the operation means is operated next time. It is preferable to provide a notification) by bringing the position of the operation means displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 close to any of the effect positions of a plurality of operation effects being executed. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy to understand for the player. In this modified example, when the fusion operation effect is executed, only one operation means is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of operation means corresponding to the number of operation effects may be displayed, and the corresponding operation means may be alternately displayed as the notification means described above.

  Furthermore, in the second modified example described above, an example in which two operation effects are merged as a fusion operation effect has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to fuse three or more operation effects. good. In addition, using the configuration of the second control example described above and the configuration of the second modification example, a standby period after the execution condition of the operation effect is established is set for one or both of them. Then, the fusion operation effect may be executed after adjusting the execution period so that a plurality of operation effects are executed simultaneously.

<About the third modification of the second control example>
Next, a third modification of the second control example described above will be described. In the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 that can move between the first position (origin position) and the second position (actuation position) is provided as the variable operation means, and the lever member when executing the variable operation effect. By configuring the effect mode of the variable operation effect in accordance with the position status of 10340, the effect content of the variable operation effect is not different from the operation content actually executable on the lever member 10340. It was to make up. Regardless of the player's operation, the lever member 10340 that is not located at the first position (origin position) is used as a return control for returning the lever member 10340 to the first position (origin position) using the drive motor. A moving configuration was used. In addition, the lever member 10340 located at the first position (origin position) is not operated by the player (an operation for moving the lever member 10340 toward the second position) except during a period during which the variable operation effect is being executed. By using this lock configuration, the lever member 10340 positioned at the first position (origin position) is not moved unnecessarily.

  However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 located at a position other than the first position (for example, the second position or an intermediate position between the first position and the second position) is always operated by the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the lever member 10340 is moved unnecessarily.

  On the other hand, in the third modification, urging means (for example, a spring member) that constantly applies an urging force toward the first position direction to the lever member 10340 is provided, and other than the first position. The lever member 10340 located is always configured to move in the first position direction. Further, when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position, the lever member 10340 has a second lock structure for maintaining the position.

  In the third modification thus configured, the lever member 10340 can be maintained at either the first position or the second position, and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. Since the lever member 10340 located at the position is moved to the first position by the biasing means, it is possible to prevent the lever member 10340 from being located at the intermediate position when the player is not holding it. .

  Also in the third modification configured as described above, when the player determines that the player is positioned at the intermediate position by gripping the lever member 10340 (that is, the origin detection flag 223ae and the operation position detection flag 223af are When it is determined that both are set to OFF), an effect (touch effect) for releasing the hand from the lever member 10340 is performed for the player. When the player releases the lever member 10340 based on the touch effect, the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position (origin position) by the action of the urging means.

  As described above, in the third modification, when the player holds the lever member 10340 and moves the lever member 10340 located at the intermediate position to the first position, the player's hand is It is only necessary to execute an effect (for example, a touch effect) for facilitating separation from the lever member 10340, and there is no need to execute return operation control in accordance with the touch effect as in the second control example described above. A configuration for moving the member 10340 to the first position can be simplified.

  In the third modification, as a means for moving the lever member 10340 in the first position direction, a first moving means using a driving means (driving motor) and a second movement using a biasing means. The moving speed for moving the lever member 10340 is different between the first moving means and the second moving means. Specifically, the first moving unit is configured to have a higher moving speed than the second moving unit.

  Thereby, for example, when the timing for executing the variable operation effect using the lever member 10340 is already set and the lever member 10340 has to be positioned to the first position within a predetermined period, the touch effect is generated. When it is configured to move the lever member 10340 to the first position using the first moving means and then the timing for executing the variable operation effect using the lever member 10340 is not set, that is, When there is no restriction on the period until the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position, the lever member 10340 can be moved to the first position using the second moving means. . Thus, by varying the speed at which the lever member 10340 is moved according to the situation, it is possible to prevent the lever member 10340 from being loaded more than necessary.

  As in the second control example and the third modification described above, the first position is set using the variable operation means configured to be movable between the first position and the second position based on the player's operation. The first variable operation effect for moving the variable operation means from the second position toward the second position direction and the second variable operation effect for moving the variable operation means from the second position toward the first position direction can be executed. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute movement control for moving the variable operation means to the first position or the second position without being based on the player's operation, the second variable operation effect is executed. While the player is performing an operation of moving the variable operation means toward the first position direction, the variable operation means is moved toward the first position direction using the first movement means, the second movement means, or the like. Use the first moving means, the second moving means, etc. And when there is no Rukoto, it may be provided.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the variable operation means, it is possible to vary the force (pressing force) applied by the player to the variable operation means. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect by changing the player's feeling of operation when the variable operation means is moved in the same direction as the variable operation effect. In this case, it may be configured to vary the force (push-down force) applied by the player to the variable operation means in accordance with the effect of the variable operation effect. In addition, when the first variable operation effect described above is executed, the force applied by the player to the variable operation means according to the effect result of the variable operation effect using the first moving means, the second moving means, or the like ( You may comprise so that pushing-up force) may be varied.

  As described above, in the second control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (probability change state, short-time state), the normal symbol is based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is won. The high probability state is shifted to the low probability state. That is, as a condition (short time end condition) for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, the first short time end condition (100 times of special figure fluctuations) also provided in the first control example described above. In addition to the above, the second short-term end condition (small win) is provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the normal symbol high probability state to the low probability state.

  In this control example, a plurality of small hit types (small hit A, small hit B) that are set when winning a small hit are provided, and the set small hit type is a specific small hit type (small hit A) In addition, the second short-time end condition described above is established. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state only when a specific small hit type is won, so the high probability state of the normal symbol is terminated based on the small hit winner It is possible to set whether to end or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

  Further, as in the first control example described above, this control example is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the start timing of the special symbol variation, Thus, even when the normal symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state, the normal symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state at the start timing of the special symbol variation. In this way, regardless of the trigger to end the high probability state of the normal symbol, the same timing is used to end the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the player ends the high probability state of the normal symbol. It can be difficult to understand what is the opportunity for this.

  Further, the present control example is configured such that the above-mentioned second short-time end condition is satisfied when a specific small hit type (small hit A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the normal symbol high probability state to the low probability state.

  In this control example, when the above-described first short-time end condition or second short-time end condition is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when both the first short time end condition and the second short time end condition are satisfied, the normal symbol high probability state may be shifted to the low probability state. Further, the order of establishment of the first short-time end condition and the second short-time end condition may be defined. For example, when the second short-time end condition is satisfied and then the second short-time end condition is satisfied, You may comprise so that a high probability state may be changed to a low probability state.

  In addition, this control example is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state when the second short-term end condition is established based on the fact that the special figure lottery is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol high probability state may be shifted to a low probability state based on the fact that a special symbol lottery is won. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state.

  In the second control example described above, the second short time termination condition is established when a specific small hit (small hit A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice). In the state where is set, a suggestion effect that suggests that a specific small hit (small hit A) where the second short-term end condition can be satisfied may be configured to be executable, and the suggested effect that is executed When the number of wins for a specific small hit (small hit A) in which the second short-time end condition can be satisfied reaches the number of quasi-establishments less than the number of wins in which the second short-time end condition is satisfied It may be configured to be variable.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict a period until the second short time termination condition is satisfied in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed while displaying a variation of a special symbol to indicate that a specific small hit (small hit A) is won, or a specific small hit (small hit A) is won. It may be executed at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) in a display mode indicating that it has been performed, or may be executed during a small hit game corresponding to a specific small hit (small hit A), You may perform during the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol after the small hit game corresponding to a specific small hit (small hit A) is complete | finished.

  In addition, as a special symbol variation time that can be set when winning a specific bonus (small bonus A), a variation time that cannot be set in other lottery results is provided. It may be configured to suggest that the player has won a specific small hit (small hit A). In addition, as the variation time of the next special symbol won for a specific small bonus (small bonus A), a variation time that cannot be set by other lottery results will be provided and specified to the player by the length of the variation time of the special symbol It may be configured to suggest that the player has won the small hit (small hit A).

  In the second control example described above, variable operation means (lever member 10340) that can move between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operation position) is provided, and variable using the variable operation means. The operation effect can be executed. And after performing control (effect preparation control) to move the variable operation means from the first position to the second position using an electric drive means (drive motor or the like), the variable operation means is provided to the player. A variable operation effect for moving in the first position direction is configured to be executable.

  By using the variable operation effect in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that greatly displaces the operation means for the player, and thus it is possible to provide a powerful effect for the player. Further, since the variable operation means can be moved in the first position direction by the player's operation, processing for returning the variable operation means to the first position (origin position) after execution of the variable operation effect is omitted. Can be made easier.

  And the position determination means which determines the position of the variable operation means at the timing when the execution period of the variable operation effect has passed is provided, and the determination result of the position determination means determines that the variable operation means is not located at the first position. In this case, the variable operation effect is made easy to execute.

  Thereby, the variable operation means can be easily returned to the first position by the player's operation on the variable operation means. When it is determined that the variable operation means is not located at the first position even though the variable operation effect has been executed a predetermined number of times during the period in which the state in which the variable operation effect is easily executed is set. A return process for returning the variable operation means to the first position is executed using an electric drive source (drive motor).

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a player who does not want to operate the variable operation means from excessively executing the variable operation effect and reducing the game motivation. Further, in the second control example, in order to make it easier for the player to execute the above-described return process with the hand released from the variable operation means, the operation means (touch sensor) other than the variable operation means is operated. The touch production is configured to be executed.

  Thereby, since the return process can be executed while the player operates the touch sensor, it is difficult for the player to know that the return process has been executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the return process from being performed while the player is holding the variable operation means, and an excessive load is applied to the variable operation means to cause a failure.

  In the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 that can move between the first position and the second position is used as the variable operation means. However, the configuration of the variable operation means is not limited to this, and the first It may be configured to be movable between a first position, a second position, and a different third position, or can be moved to the third position only after being moved from the first position to the second position. Any configuration may be used. Further, a configuration in which the pressing operation and the moving operation are combined may be employed. For example, a configuration in which a predetermined pressing unit is pressed to move between the first position and the second position may be used.

  Further, as a drive control of the electric drive source (drive motor) for the variable operation means, the variable operation means is provided in a start-up process (start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113) executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The origin return process for moving to the origin position may be executed, or when a specific effect is being executed, an electric drive source (drive motor) is used to prevent the variable operation means from moving. Control execution may be performed. Further, as the lock control for restricting the movement of the variable operation means, a stopper (for example, a pin protruding by solenoid driving) may be provided in the movement path of the variable operation means.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 517 to 542. In contrast to the first control example, in the third control example, the image data amount of the display mode in the variation pattern displayed at the same time or during a predetermined period (for example, during one variation display), displayed during variation display of the variation pattern. When the sum of the image data amount of the notice display mode to be displayed, the image data amount in the setting image of the volume adjustment, and the image data amount of the error screen displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state becomes a predetermined value or more. Can reduce the control load on the display control by setting the low image quality with a reduced number of pixels to display a part of the image so that the amount of image data to be displayed does not become excessively large. The main difference is that control is performed. Only differences from the first control example will be described, and the illustration and description of the same contents will be omitted.

  FIG. 517 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example. In the third control example, with respect to the front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example (see FIG. 282), in addition to the frame button 22a (first operation means) as the operation means operable by the player, The difference is that selection buttons 22b and 22c are added as operation means. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, the description thereof is omitted.

  The frame button 22a is used as an operation means for changing the effect such as the display of a changing display being stopped or a notice display mode being displayed by operating the frame button 22a in a game effect or the like. used. In addition, regarding the specific configuration of the frame button 22a, the setting of a period for effectively determining the player's operation on the frame button 22a, and the processing content when it is determined that the frame button 22a has been operated effectively, Since it is the same as each control example mentioned above, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The selection buttons 22b and 22c, which are the second operation means, are composed of a left selection button 22b and a right selection button 22c, respectively, for adjusting the volume and for the LEDs provided in the third symbol display device 81 and the pachinko machine 10. This is used when game environment adjustment processing such as light amount adjustment or game content selection processing such as selecting one target effect from a plurality of candidates at the time of effect. For example, in the volume adjustment for adjusting the volume level of the sound output from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 as the game environment adjustment process, a period during which the volume can be adjusted (a special symbol variation display is not executed). By operating either the left selection button 22b or the right selection button 22c during the standby period or during the game period in which the special symbol is variably displayed, the jackpot game period in which the jackpot game is being executed), FIG. The volume control screen shown in a) is displayed. After the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the left selection button 22b or the right selection button 22c is operated, so that a variable sound is output to a volume level corresponding to the operation content.

  Here, referring to FIG. 518 (a), the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the volume adjustment, which is one of the game environment adjustment processes using the selection buttons 22b, 22c, which are the second operation means, is executed. The display mode of the display screen will be described. FIG. 518 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of one display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the volume adjustment is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 518 (a), when the player operates (presses) the left selection button 22b or the right selection button 22c during a period in which volume adjustment is possible, volume adjustment processing is started for the player. A volume adjustment display mode 8000 and volume adjustment operation display modes 8003 and 8004 are displayed as a volume adjustment screen indicating this. The volume adjustment display mode 8000 displays a display mode 8001 simulating a speaker and a volume level adjustable range as an adjustment target display mode for indicating to the player that the volume level is currently being adjusted. And a bar graph 8002.

  This control example is configured so that the volume level can be adjusted in four stages. Volume level 1 is the volume level at which the volume is the lowest, and the volume output from the audio output device 226 increases as the volume level increases. It is configured. The state shown in FIG. 518 (a) is a state in which the volume level 1 is set, and the bar graph “1” corresponding to the volume level 1 in the bar graph 8002 is blacked out.

  The volume adjustment operation display modes 8003 and 8004 are display modes imitating the left selection button 22b and the right selection button 22c, which are the second operation means described above, and the ascending operation display mode 8003 corresponding to the right selection button 22c. A descending operation display mode 8004 corresponding to the selection button 22b is displayed. On the right side of the ascending operation display mode 8003, characters “LV UP” indicating that the volume level increases when the right selection button 22c is operated are displayed. On the right side of the descending operation display mode 8004, When the left selection button 22b is operated, the characters “LV DOWN” indicating that the volume level is lowered are displayed. In the sub display area Ds, characters “Please select volume level” indicating that the current time is a period during which the volume level can be adjusted are displayed.

  Next, the flow of operation when adjusting the volume level in this control example will be specifically described. First, during a period in which the volume can be adjusted (during the waiting period when the special symbol variation display is not executed, during the game period during which the special symbol is variably displayed, the jackpot game period during which the jackpot game is being executed) When the left selection button 22b or the right selection button 22c is operated, the display mode shown in FIG. 518 (a) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the left selection button 22b is operated while the display mode (volume control display mode 8000, volume control operation display mode 8003, 8004) shown in FIG. 518 (a) is displayed, the currently set volume level is displayed. When a volume level one smaller than the level is set and the right selection button 22c is operated, a volume level one larger than the currently set volume level is set. When the volume adjustment end condition is satisfied, the volume adjustment display mode 8000 and the volume adjustment operation display modes 8003 and 8004 disappear, and the variation display of the third pattern, the display during the jackpot game, and the standby screen display are displayed. .

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, when the left selection button 22b and the right selection button 22c are operated to change the volume level, the sound output during the game at a volume corresponding to the volume level after the change. Is output as demo audio. By configuring in this way, for example, even if the volume level is changed during a standby period in which the special symbol does not fluctuate, that is, in a state where no sound is being played, the player can set an appropriate volume level. Easy to choose.

  The demonstration voice that is output during volume adjustment is to indicate that the player has won the jackpot among the voices that are output during the changing performance (during game) that is executed while the special symbol is changing. Voice without sound is used. As a result, even during the standby period, the volume can be adjusted while confirming the volume of the sound output during the game, and it is not necessary to prepare the audio data for the demo sound. Can be reduced. Furthermore, since a voice that does not suggest that the jackpot has been won is used among the voices output during the game, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the demo voice is output.

  Note that the demo sound that can be output during the volume adjustment is not limited to the above-described sound, and sound data dedicated to the demo sound may be used. Thus, it is possible to easily notify the player that the voice is a demo voice. In addition, a voice A (for example, a voice output during reach) and a voice B (for example, normal fluctuation) in which a voice is output at a lower volume than the voice A are output at a high volume even within the same volume level. Demo sound may be output using the sound output in the middle). Thereby, since the player can grasp the range of the volume that can be output at the set volume level, the volume level desired by the player can be set as appropriate.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the volume is adjusted during the standby period, the demo sound corresponding to the adjusted volume level is used. On the other hand, when the volume is adjusted during the special symbol variation display or the big hit game, the demo sound is not output. Specifically, there is provided discriminating means capable of discriminating the gaming situation (standby period, variable display period, jackpot gaming period) at the time when the left selection button 22b and the right selection button 22c as the second operation means are operated. When it is determined by the determining means that the period is not the standby period, the demo sound is not output. As a result, the volume adjustment was performed in a state where a fluctuating effect for suggesting to the player whether the special symbol lottery result was a jackpot or a jackpot game effect congratulating that the jackpot was won However, since the demonstration sound is not output, the production effect is not lowered.

  In the present control example, when the left selection button 22b is operated, the volume is reduced, and the indicator on the volume adjustment screen is also configured such that the level is lowered by one level with respect to one operation (pressing) in the left direction. . Also, the output volume is configured so that a volume corresponding to the output volume (15% with respect to one level in this control example) is output to be small. In this control example, the minimum volume level is 1 level, and it is configured not to be lower (for example, silence). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that fraud or the like is easily performed without outputting a sound such as an error sound. In this control example, the volume cannot be muted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume can be muted. Even when muted, a specific sound such as an error sound is output (for example, the maximum volume). ), It is possible to prevent damages such as fraud, while being able to adjust to the player's preference.

  Further, when the right selection button 22c is operated (pressed), the volume is increased and output by a predetermined amount (for example, 10%), so that the volume display of one level is increased and varied with respect to one operation. It is configured. With this configuration, the player can make an adjustment while confirming whether the sound volume is the preferred sound volume by checking the actual output sound volume and the level display, and can easily adjust the sound volume. Note that the volume adjustment screen is configured so that the display is canceled when the selection buttons 22b and 22c are not operated for a certain period (in this control example, 10 seconds). When this volume adjustment screen is displayed, the other display is displayed and drawn and displayed on the uppermost layer. Therefore, since the volume adjustment screen is set in addition to the normal display data by the player's operation of the selection buttons 22b and 22c, the display data to be displayed is increased and the display control load for drawing is increased. The

  In this control example, the standby period, the variable display period, and the jackpot game period are set as the period during which the volume can be adjusted as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the standby period and the variable display period Of these, the volume may be adjusted only during a period (normal fluctuation effect period) in which a specific fluctuation effect (a reach effect or a chance effect with a high expectation degree of jackpot) is not executed. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a volume adjustment screen will be displayed during the period when a player should pay attention to a change production.

  In the present control example, the third symbol variation effect and the volume control screen are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a screen and a volume control screen may be displayed using a different display apparatus.

  In this control example, the game environment adjustment process is configured to allow adjustment of the game environment in addition to the above-described volume adjustment. Specifically, the light quantity adjustment process capable of adjusting the brightness of the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be executable. The flow of executing this light amount adjustment processing will be described. First, the frame button 22a is pressed while the volume adjustment screen (see FIG. 518 (a)) is displayed. Then, the display of the volume adjustment screen (see FIG. 518 (a)) is switched to the light amount adjustment screen (not shown).

  Although the illustration of the display content of the light amount adjustment screen is omitted, the display mode (for example, display of a mark imitating a lamp) for notifying the player that the current light amount is adjustable is adjustable. A bar graph that displays a range of light quantity levels (for example, light quantity levels 1 to 4), and a display mode that informs the player of the currently set light quantity level using the bar graph (for example, the light quantity being set) A display mode in which the display mode of the bar graph indicating the level is different from the display mode of other bar graphs is displayed. Then, similarly to the volume adjustment screen (see FIG. 518 (a)), a light amount adjustment operation display mode for operating the left selection button 22b and the right selection button 22c is displayed.

  Then, by operating the left selection button 22b and the right selection button 22c while the light amount adjustment screen is displayed, the light amount level being set can be changed to a light amount level desired by the player. Thereby, the brightness of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be adjusted easily, and a player's eyestrain can be reduced.

  In the volume adjustment process and the light amount adjustment process described above, the third symbol display is performed for the sound output from the audio output device 226 and the brightness of the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Although it is configured to be based on the volume level and the light amount level set for all modes displayed on the display surface of the device 81, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the audio output from the audio output device 226 Among them, for a specific sound (for example, an error sound), the sound may be output with the same volume regardless of the volume level. With this configuration, even if the volume level is set to a low level, an error sound can be output at a constant volume level, and it is possible to easily detect an abnormality in the gaming machine at an early stage.

  In addition, it is possible to analyze the sound data of a plurality of sounds output from the gaming machine and adjust the sound volume only for sounds corresponding to a predetermined range, or the sound data of a plurality of sounds output simultaneously Of these, the configuration of the synthesized speech may be varied by adjusting the volume corresponding to one audio data. Further, the scale included in the audio data may be adjustable, or the audio playback speed may be adjustable. With such a configuration, it is possible to reproduce (output) a plurality of sounds based on one sound data, and to enhance the effect. Furthermore, by making it possible to adjust the volume corresponding to one voice data among the voice data for a plurality of voices that are output simultaneously, for example, in an effect in which a boy's voice and a girl's voice are output simultaneously It is possible to select an effect mainly based on the voice of the boy and an effect mainly based on the voice of the girl. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode of the effect can be changed based on the adjusted audio mode. Thereby, the variation of the presentation provided to a player can be made more various.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 518 (b), the display content of an error screen displayed when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In FIG. 518 (b), it is detected that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state (the front frame of the pachinko machine 10 is opened or that a game ball has entered the special winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) other than during the big hit game. It is a figure showing an example of an error screen displayed when magnetism such as a magnet is detected. In this error screen, display data is set so as to be drawn on the foremost layer in addition to the normal display mode. Since this error screen is also displayed at an unexpected timing, it causes a sudden increase in display data. However, in the third control example, it is determined that the set display data exceeds a predetermined value. In such a case, since the image quality of a specific display mode such as a background image or a notice display is set at a low image quality, the display data of the display mode to be displayed simultaneously is prevented from increasing and causing problems such as processing failures. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, an inner frame opening detection sensor (not shown) as detection means for detecting that the inner frame 12 is opened, and detection for detecting that the front frame 14 is opened. A front frame opening detection sensor (not shown) is provided as a means, and a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) is provided as a detection means capable of detecting that a magnet is brought close to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. In the other process (see S110 in FIG. 425) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) of the main controller 110, an abnormality discrimination process for discriminating the detection result of each detection means can be executed. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an abnormal state based on the determination result of the abnormality determination process.

  When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in an abnormal state, an abnormal command indicating the abnormal state and an abnormal type command indicating the type of abnormality are set, and the set various commands are displayed in the main controller 110. Is output to the outside of the main controller 110 in the external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 434) of the main process (see FIG. 434). The voice lamp control device 113 receives a voice error command for causing the voice output device 226 to output an error sound when receiving the abnormal command and the abnormality type command output from the main control device 110, and the third pattern. A display error command for displaying an error screen on the display surface of the display device 81 is set. Further, the external output process of the main controller 110 is configured to output an abnormal state command and an abnormal type command to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, so that a store clerk at the game hall can grasp the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured as follows.

  When the display error command is set by the sound lamp control device 113, the command is output to the display control device 114, and as shown in FIG. 518 (b) by the processing of the display control device 114, the main display area Dm. As an error display indicating an error, “WARNING” is displayed, and “Please call the person in charge of error” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. This error display is a layer formed on the front side of the layer on which other display modes (background, character, symbol) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed (most preferentially displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the error state without being related to the contents of the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example has, as the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, at least the display mode of the variation effect executed in response to the variation display of the special symbol. The display mode of the volume control screen that is displayed when the volume is adjusted and the display mode of the abnormal screen that is displayed when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10 can be displayed simultaneously. Yes. When a display mode (display image) displayed on the display surface is created, a plurality of display modes to be displayed at the same time are determined, and a display image is obtained based on image data corresponding to each display mode displayed at the same time. The display data amount for display is calculated.

  Further, when the calculated display data amount exceeds a predetermined upper limit amount, the image quality (resolution) of the image data is converted from the normal image quality (resolution) to the low image quality (low resolution). . Thereby, it can suppress that the amount of display data used when creating one display image becomes large. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be capable of executing an image quality changing process for lowering the image quality (resolution) on the image data, and by performing this image quality changing process, the display image is displayed. It is configured to be able to reduce the resolution. This eliminates the need to provide normal image quality (normal resolution) display data and low image quality (low resolution) display data separately, thereby reducing the capacity of the display data.

  Further, in this control example, a situation in which a display image with a low image quality (low resolution) can be easily displayed (a situation in which the display data amount is easily saturated) can be discriminated. The image quality changing process is executed in advance before the display timing of the low resolution display image. Specifically, a plurality of display modes set according to different triggers can be displayed on one display image. When one display mode (variation effect) is set, a display data amount corresponding to one display mode (variation effect) is calculated, and when the display data amount exceeds a predetermined amount, low image quality ( It is configured to discriminate that it is easy to display a display image with a low resolution) (situation where the amount of display data is likely to be saturated).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing load from being temporarily increased because the image quality changing process is executed at the timing of actually displaying a low-quality (low-resolution) display image. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the image quality changing process from being executed in a situation where it is difficult to display a display image with a low image quality (low resolution) (the image is not displayed).

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when setting the production mode (display mode) of the variable effect for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target is advantageous to the player. The upper limit of the amount of display data that can be displayed at the same time is different depending on whether it is an advantageous result (big win) or an unfavorable result (out) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous result. Yes. That is, when a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery won for the jackpot is being executed, the upper limit of the display data amount used when creating one display image can be increased. In this way, by changing the upper limit value of the display data amount in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol, the player wins the lottery result based on the image quality of the display image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Can provide fun to make you predict. Further, it is possible to play a game eagerly to simultaneously display a plurality of display modes for increasing the display data amount of the display image.

  Next, a display example of an image displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 519 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of pixels when image data such as a notice is displayed with a normal image quality (resolution) set in advance. On the other hand, FIG. 519 (b) is a diagram showing a display example when the image data shown in FIG. 519 (a) is set and displayed with a low image quality (low resolution) of 1/6. Thus, in this control example, it is set so that data converted to low resolution at the start of fluctuation is stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba of the display control device 114. With this configuration, when it is necessary to display at a low resolution, the corresponding display data is read from the low resolution data storage area 233ba and set in the drawing data table.

  Here, a display image used in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. The display surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is comprised with the liquid crystal display, and it is comprised so that one image may be displayed by the aggregate | assembly of a some pixel (pixel). A plurality of pixels (pixels) formed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display are coordinated by a coordinate axis composed of a vertical direction (Vertical (hereinafter referred to as V)) and a horizontal direction (Horizontal (hereinafter referred to as H)). A color to be displayed for each pixel (pixel) is set.

  In this control example, the upper left corner of the display surface (the upper left corner in the viewpoint of FIG. 2) is the origin (0, 0), 1920 pixels in the width direction (H), and 1080 pixels in the vertical direction (V). These pixels (pixels) are arranged so that an image composed of a total of 2,073,600 (about 2 million) pixels can be displayed. 519 (a) and (b) show a predetermined area (500 pieces in the horizontal direction (H) and 200 pieces in the vertical direction (V) in the upper left part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This is a schematic diagram enlarging a predetermined range including the pixel.

  Note that the number of pixels used on the display surface of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be larger or smaller than the number of pixels in the present control example. Further, the ratio of the length of the display surface in the width direction to the vertical direction is not limited to the configuration of the present control example, and may be selected as appropriate. Further, in the present control example, coordinates with the entire display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a range are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is divided and divided. Different coordinates may be provided so that display control is performed independently for pixels within the range.

  Next, pixels that form a display image will be described. As shown in FIG. 519 (a), one pixel is formed in a square shape, and designated values for the four types of color information for the pixel are within a predetermined range (0 to 255). It is configured to be settable, and is configured to display (emit light) colors according to the set values of various color information. Here, the four types of color information will be described. In this control example, a method (format) for expressing each pixel (color) using a so-called BGRA method is used, and B (blue), G (green), R (red), and A (transparency) are used. The designated value can be set in the range of 0 to 255 (8 bits) for the four components. Among the components of color information, B, G, and R are configured such that designated values can be set within a range of 0 to 255 as values for varying the brightness of the corresponding color (LED light emission amount). The LED is controlled to emit light so that the corresponding color becomes lighter as the specified value approaches 0, and the LED is controlled to emit light so that the corresponding color becomes darker as the specified value approaches 255.

  B, G, and R are configured such that designated values can be set in the range of 0 to 255 (8 bits), and the color corresponding to each designated value is the emission color of one pixel (pixel). In other words, a total of 24 bits (1777216) colors can be expressed by 8 bits × 3 (B, G, R). In this control example, black is set when all specified values of B, G, and R are set to 0, and white is set when all specified values are set to 255, and the corresponding pixel color (light emission). Color) is used.

  Further, A (transparency) is set to a specified value of 1 from a range of 0 to 255 (8 bits) as a specified value for changing the transparency of the color set by the specified values of B, G, and R for the pixel. It is configured to be incompletely transparent as the specified value approaches 0, and is configured to be completely transparent as the specified value approaches 255. In this control example, as described above, the light emission color (display color) can be expressed using the BGRA method. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other commonly used methods (for example, BGR, RGB, RGBA) may be used.

  As described above, in this control example, the display image displayed on the display surface of the display device 81 is 32 bits ((B, G, R (8 bits each)) × for each of about 2 million pixels. Since the light emission mode (color, transparency) for A (8 bits) can be set, a display image of about 8 Mbytes is displayed at about 2,000,000 × 4 bytes = 8,000,000 bytes. It is configured. Note that the above-described example is the data amount when the information used when setting the correspondence of the display image is used without being compressed, and the compression method generally used is used when setting the display image. Thus, the data amount of the display image may be suppressed.

  Next, in this control example, the flow in the case of displaying a display image on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 will be briefly described. In this control example, as described above, each pixel is specified by coordinates with the vertical direction (V) and the horizontal direction (H) as axes, and the emission color (display color) can be set for the specific pixel. Yes. When setting the display image, the instruction content for each pixel provided in the display area (display surface of the third symbol display device 81) formed in two dimensions is managed in a one-dimensional array. ing.

  Specifically, the order of the pixels (pixels) arranged from the pixel (pixel) provided at the origin (H (0), V (0)) toward the direction in which the value in the horizontal direction (H) increases. To store the information for setting the emission color (display color), and when reaching the end point (1920 in this control example) in the horizontal direction (H), the pixel (1) down in the vertical direction (V) ( Emission colors (display colors) in the order of pixels (pixels) arranged in the direction in which the value in the horizontal direction (H) increases from the pixels (pixels) provided in H (0) and V (1) By storing the information for setting, instruction contents (image data) for a plurality of pixels arranged two-dimensionally can be managed in a one-dimensional array.

  Further, in the instruction content (image data) for the image composed of a one-dimensional array, stride data is stored as a value for indicating the range of the instruction content for one horizontal column. Refer to this stride data. Thus, it is possible to determine which of a plurality of pixels arranged two-dimensionally is image data managed in a one-dimensional array. Specifically, in this control example, 1920 pixels are provided in the horizontal direction, and each pixel has 4 bytes of color information (B, G, R, A (4) × 0 to 255 (8 bits)). Therefore, the value of the stride data indicating the data amount for one column in the horizontal direction is 1920 × 8 bits = 15,360 bytes.

  Here, referring to the diagram shown in FIG. 519 (a) as an example, the color information corresponding to the pixels (500 (H), 201 (V)) in the BGRA 32-bit image is referred to from one-dimensional array image data. Will be explained. In this control example, since the value of the stride data is 15,360 bytes as described above, the index (first value) of (500 (H), 201 (V)) is 4 bytes (the color information for one pixel). Data amount) × 500 pixels (horizontal coordinate value of the target pixel) × 201 pixels (vertical coordinate value of the target pixel) × 15,360 bytes (stride data value) = 161,640. That is, the color information (BGRA component) corresponding to the pixels (500 (H), 201 (V)) is stored (saved) in the range of “161, 640-161, 640 + 3” of the one-dimensional array that is image data. Will be.

  Thus, in the case of storing (saving) image data in a one-dimensional array, the image data is stored in a predetermined order (an order that shifts in the horizontal direction and lowers the vertical direction by one step after reaching the horizontal end point). By determining the order of pixels to be saved and storing the value of stride data, the process for specifying a specific pixel (the process for searching for the index of a specific pixel) is managed in a one-dimensional array. The image data can be executed more efficiently than searching while counting sequentially from the top of the image data.

  Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with a sub display device (not shown) different from the third symbol display device 81, stride data corresponding to the display image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 The stride data corresponding to the display image displayed on the display surface of the sub display device is stored, whereby the image data managed in a one-dimensional array is stored on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it can be easily displayed on the display surface of the sub display device, and the display control in the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has 1920 pixels (pixels) in the width direction (H) as the display image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the vertical direction ( V) has 1080 pixels (pixels) arranged so that an image composed of a total of 2,073,600 (about 2 million) pixels can be displayed, and 24 bits per pixel. Since it is configured to be able to execute the color representation of the minute (1777216), a display image with high resolution can be displayed and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 It was possible to enhance the production effect. Furthermore, in the present control example, as in the first control example described above, a sprite (display object) to be displayed on one frame based on the contents defined in the display data table (see FIG. 421) is displayed in the drawing list. (See FIG. 423), and a display image based on the information specified in the drawing list is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and a plurality of different triggers are established. As a result, the number of sprites (display objects) defined in the drawing list (see FIG. 423) may increase.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the number of sprites to be displayed on the display image increases, the amount of data to be set in the drawing list increases, and thus processing for displaying the display image There has been a problem that increases. To solve such a problem, for example, when the same color information is set for consecutive pixels among various pixels managed in a one-dimensional array, the color information is set for each pixel. Instead, there is a first image quality reduction process (reversible compression) that suppresses a processing load for displaying a display image by setting color information for an area including a plurality of pixels. In addition, the color information of 24 bits (1777216) is gathered in a range that is difficult to identify with human vision, and the type of color information is reduced to reduce the processing load for displaying the display image. There is a low image quality processing (lossy compression).

  In the first image quality reduction processing (reversible compression) described above, when the same color information is set for each pixel corresponding to the sprite (display object) set in the drawing list (for example, an illustration displayed in a single color) However, the effectiveness is low when various color information is set. In addition, when the first image quality reduction processing (reversible compression) is executed, only the color information storage method is changed without processing the color information for each pixel set in the base image data. Therefore, since the basic image data can be created from the image data on which the first image quality reduction processing has been executed (because it has reversibility), it is effective in terms of reproducing the image data. It was a technique.

  On the other hand, in the second image quality reduction processing (irreversible compression), the color information set for each pixel is processed and the type of color information is reduced, so that the processing load for displaying the display image is suppressed. In spite of being effective processing, the display of sprites including the pixels subjected to processing is clearly of low image quality. Therefore, sprites subject to second image quality reduction processing (irreversible compression) and processing execution Timing needs to be considered. In addition, when the second image quality reduction processing (irreversible compression) is executed, new color information is created by processing color information for each pixel set in the base image data. The basic image data cannot be created from the image data that has been subjected to the image quality reduction processing (does not have reversibility).

  In this control example, when a specific trigger is established among a plurality of triggers for setting a display image (when a display variation pattern command is set), the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern And a value (image point) corresponding to the display data amount is calculated based on the content of the effect executed during the variable effect (the type of sprite to be displayed). Then, based on the calculated image points, an effect displayed when another opportunity that can be established during the change effect (for example, an opportunity that can be established when the number of reserved balls of special symbols increases) is established. It is determined whether the display data amount exceeds the upper limit value when the mode (for example, the pre-reading effect) is executed, and the determination result is determined to exceed the upper limit value. Lower than the display data corresponding to the production mode (for example, the pre-reading production) that is displayed when another opportunity (for example, an opportunity that can be established when the number of reserved balls of special symbols increases) is established. The resolution processing is executed, and the low resolution data generated by the low resolution processing is temporarily stored.

  And when another opportunity mentioned above is actually materialized, it is comprised so that the display image of the low resolution based on low resolution data may be displayed. As described above, when the display data amount actually exceeds the upper limit value, the display data amount may exceed the upper limit value instead of executing the low resolution processing so that the display data amount does not exceed the upper limit value. If it is determined that there is a display image (sprite) that can be displayed in the future, the low-resolution processing is executed in advance, thereby reducing the processing load executed at the timing of displaying a new display image. be able to.

  FIG. 519 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of a normal (original) display image in pixel units, and FIG. 519 (b) shows a normal (original) display image (display data). On the other hand, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of a low resolution image generated by executing low resolution processing in units of pixels.

  As shown in FIG. 519 (a), the original display image is formed so that color information is set for each pixel (see the enlarged view on the right side of FIG. 519 (a)), and the edge portion is smooth. A rhombus icon is displayed. Specifically, the pixels (500, 201), (500-501, 202), (500-502, 203), (500-503, 204-205), (500-502, 206), (500-501). , 207), (500, 208), the image data is configured such that specific color information (represented by black fill in FIG. 519 (a)) is set.

  Then, when the low resolution processing is executed on the original display image shown in FIG. 519 (a), the low resolution image shown in FIG. 519 (b) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as a low-resolution process, the original display image in which color information is set for each pixel is set to the same magnification (2 in the horizontal direction (H) and vertical direction (V)). A process of setting the same color information for the doubled area is executed.

  Then, when the display image generated by the low resolution processing is displayed, as shown in FIG. 519 (b), the edge portion is displayed with a rough edge with respect to the original display image (see FIG. 519 (a)). It is formed so that an aspect is displayed. Specifically, specific color information (black in FIG. 519 (a)) is applied to the pixels (500 to 501, 201 to 202), (500 to 504, 203 to 206), and (500 to 502, 207 to 208). The image data is configured such that (represented by filling in) is set.

  In this control example, in the low resolution processing, color information having the largest number is set in the enlarged area formed by four pixels (two in the horizontal direction and two in the vertical direction), and the color information is determined. Based on the determination result, common color information is set for the four pixels included in the enlarged region. With this configuration, the type of color information set for one display image can be reduced to ¼ at maximum.

  Note that the content of the low-resolution processing performed on the original display image is not limited to the above-described one. For example, the size of the above-described enlarged region is set to the number of pixels in the horizontal direction and the number of pixels in the vertical direction. May be configured to be tripled. Thus, as the size of the enlarged area is increased, the type of color information set for one display image can be further reduced. Further, an enlarged region that does not equal the number of pixels in the horizontal direction and the number of pixels in the vertical direction may be formed.

  Further, the color information set by the second image quality reduction processing is performed by executing the above-described second image quality reduction processing (irreversible compression) on the color information set for a plurality of pixels included in one enlarged region. The type of color information set for the enlarged region can be reduced based on the above.

  In this control example, the amount of display data that is fluctuating is determined at the start of fluctuation, and if it is determined that the total display data amount exceeds a predetermined value, the display data to be displayed at a low resolution is reduced to a low resolution. The conversion processing is executed and stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the low resolution is converted to the low resolution in the initial setting process upon power-on (S8002: see FIG. 460). You may comprise so that it may memorize | store in the data storage area 233ba. By comprising in this way, the malfunction which the control load of display control increases during a game can be suppressed. Also, the display data table is configured to set the resolution, and when the low resolution is set, the corresponding display image (display data specified as low resolution in the display data table) is converted to low resolution. Then, the drawing data table may be set.

  Next, an example of the display mode displayed on the actual third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 520 (a) is an example of a display mode showing a state in which the third symbol is variably displayed (dynamic display) when the display mode displayed at a low resolution is not set. In FIG. 520 (a), the third symbol is reduced and displayed in a reduced display area Ds3 on the upper right, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is set to Ds1 in the upper left reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2. The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed on Ds2. In the central portion of the display area, a variable display effect (not shown) suggesting a jackpot determination result for the changing third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is executed, and the main display region Dm A preview display mode 8100 is displayed in the lower right part of as a pre-reading effect for suggesting a pre-reading result with respect to a newly won reserved ball.

  This notice display mode 8100 is formed from a suggestion display 8101 for suggesting a pre-reading result of a reserved ball, and a suggestion effect 8102. According to the diagram shown in FIG. The effect that the character of “chance” changes the display mode imitating the reserved ball as the suggestion effect 8102 is executed. This notice display mode 8100 is executed based on the pre-reading information indicating the lottery result acquired in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 429) executed when the lottery right for the special symbol is acquired (when the reserved ball is acquired). Is.

  In other words, in this control example, the pre-reading effect is added and executed while the changing effect is being executed, and the display data amount of the display image displayed during the changing effect is the execution of the pre-reading effect. It is configured to be variable according to the presence or absence of. Further, the display data amount is variable according to the effect type in which the variable effect is also executed. Therefore, if the type of variation effect being executed is an effect type with a large amount of display data (for example, a super-reach with a high expectation level), and the prefetch effect is executed, the display data amount exceeds the upper limit. May end up.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 520 (b), a low image quality mode 8103 obtained by performing the image quality reduction processing on the image data is displayed as the notice display mode 8100. This low image quality mode 8103 is obtained by reducing the display quality of the suggestion display 8101 and the suggestion effect 8102 described above, and is displayed in a display mode imitating “V”.

  In this control example, the low-quality image 8103 is configured to be displayed in a suggestive manner having higher credibility than the suggestion of the prefetch result provided to the player using the suggestion display 8101 and the suggestion effect 8102 described above. doing. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to display a plurality of display modes so as to exceed the upper limit value of the display data amount.

  In this control example, the low image quality mode 8103 is displayed, so that it is easier for the player to grasp a specific lottery result (prefetch result) than when the low image quality mode 8103 is not displayed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the low-quality preview display mode 8100 may be configured to provide information that is more advantageous to the player than the normal-quality preview display mode 8100. For example, in the case of the normal-quality notice display form 8100, a display form based only on the result of the pre-reading process corresponding to the target reserved symbol (new winning information) is set, and the low-quality notice display form 8100 is displayed. When displaying, it is configured to set a display mode for at least two or more lottery results among the lottery results of the special symbol variation being executed and the results of all the pre-reading processes stored on hold. May be.

  On the other hand, FIG. 520 (b) is an example of a display mode showing a case where the preview display mode is displayed at a low resolution because the amount of display data to be displayed exceeds a predetermined value. In the example shown in FIG. 520 (b), the notice display mode is set and displayed at a low resolution. Note that. In the example shown in FIG. 520 (b), the preview display mode is displayed at a low resolution. However, if the display data amount exceeds a predetermined value even if the preview display mode is reduced to a low resolution, a reserved symbol display or the like is displayed. Other display modes are also displayed at a low resolution. By comprising in this way, since all the displays of the display displayed are displayed by low resolution, the visual recognition of the whole display deteriorates and it can suppress malfunctions, such as it being difficult to identify the determination result.

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third control example, an image point table 222ba is added to the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the first control example.

  The image point table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 522 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the image point table 222ba. The image point table 222ba is a data table in which point values (status information) corresponding to the display data amount of each display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The larger the display data amount to be displayed, the larger the point value is allocated. The display data amount is mainly configured so that the data amount is large depending on the display content having a high resolution, the size of the pattern to be displayed, and the number of sprites displayed simultaneously. As shown in FIG. 522, the image type is set, and the background image, the first half of the fluctuation pattern image, the second half of the fluctuation pattern image, the first notice image (fluctuation pattern), the second notice image (holding prize), and the holding symbol image. , A volume adjustment image, and an error display image are set.

  The background image is an image that is always displayed on the back side where the third symbol is variably displayed. In this control example, the cave (point value 2), the temple (point value 3), the super temple (point value 4), Sea (point value 2) and mountain (point value 1) are set. In the background image, the background of the mountain is the data with the smallest display data, and the background of the super temple is the background image with the largest display data.

  In the first half of the variation pattern image, a point value for the display data of the first half portion in the variation pattern of the special symbol (the third symbol) is set. The first half indicates the amount of display data until the third symbol is reach-displayed. Out of the figure indicates a fluctuation pattern of a deviation that does not reach reach, normal indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal reach, super A indicates a super reach A, and super B indicates a super reach B fluctuation pattern. In the second half of the variation pattern image, a point value corresponding to the display data amount after the third symbol is displayed in the reach display mode is set. In this way, by setting the point value separately for the first half and the second half of the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether the display data amount exceeds the specified value only in the first half or only the second half of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, it can be configured to display a low resolution display mode only in the first half, only in the second half, etc., and by displaying only the necessary period at low resolution, the player can identify the production and the result of the determination of success / failure, etc. Difficult periods can be shortened. In this control example, when a special symbol variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern (variation effect) for all periods (first half, second half) corresponding to one special symbol variation is set. Therefore, when setting a variation pattern (variation effect), it is possible to calculate the number of image points corresponding to the variation pattern image of the first half and the variation pattern image of the second half. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern (variation effect) corresponding to one special symbol variation may be set separately at a plurality of timings. When the symbol variation pattern command is received, the lottery result of this special symbol and the variation time are discriminated, and the first half period of the special symbol variation is determined based on the discrimination result. Only the variation pattern (variation effect) is set, and then the variation pattern (variation effect) set in the first half period at the timing when the first half period of the special symbol variation has passed (timing before the first half period has elapsed) A variation pattern (variation effect) corresponding to the second half period is set based on the type and new information acquired during the first half period (for example, new winning information, operation information on the frame button 22a). Also good. Further, the variation time of the special symbol may be divided into three or more, and the variation pattern (variation effect) for each period may be set at different timings.

  In the first preview image (variation pattern), a point value corresponding to display data is set for the display image of the preview effect displayed during the variation of the third symbol. In addition, a point value corresponding to the display data amount of the hold notice image (pending change notice or the like in which a prefetch determination result is notified) is set in the second notice image (hold prize). In the reserved symbol image, a point value corresponding to the display data amount of the reserved symbol is set. In the volume adjustment image, a point value corresponding to the display data amount of the volume adjustment image is set. In the error display, a point value corresponding to the display data amount of the error display is set.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation is set, the main variation effect (the variation effect using the third symbol) and the sub notice effect (for example, the sub display) The notice effect displayed in the area Ds) is set, and the change effect and the notice effect can be set under different conditions so that the main effect and the notice effect can be set. Various presentation displays can be executed depending on the combination. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, a display image whose display data amount temporarily increases may be displayed depending on a combination pattern of the main effect and the notice effect. Therefore, in this control example, the image points corresponding to the variation effect which is the effect mode set based on the reception of the special symbol variation pattern command and the notice effect are independently defined.

  Further, the second notice image, the reserved symbol image, the volume adjustment (adjustment) image, and the error display can be displayed regardless of the fluctuation state of the special symbol. A display image that can be set when a ball enters a special drawing starting port (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) that becomes a lottery opportunity, and the volume adjustment (adjustment) image is a player Is a display image (see FIG. 518 (a)) displayed when the left selection button 22b and the right selection button 22c, which are the second frame buttons, are operated, and an error display indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. It is a display image (see FIG. 518 (b)) displayed in this case. Even when the player operates the left selection button 22b and the right selection button 22c, which are the second frame buttons, and displays a screen for adjusting the gaming environment (light quantity, etc.) other than the volume, the volume adjustment (adjustment) image and Since display images with the same display data amount are displayed, the same number of image points as when the volume adjustment (adjustment) image is displayed is given.

  As described above, this control example is configured such that display images set at various timings can be displayed in an overlapping manner on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and each display image has the same timing. In the case of being displayed, there is a possibility that the upper limit value of the display data amount may be exceeded. In addition, when all the display images that can be displayed at the same timing are displayed at the same time, if the display data amount of each display image is set to be small so that the display data amount does not exceed the upper limit value, In the case of individual display, there is a concern that the effect of rendering is poor. Furthermore, since each display image is set to be displayed for different purposes, each display image is displayed at the same timing so that any display image is not displayed when the upper limit of the display data amount is exceeded. If controlled, the amount of display data can be suppressed, but there is a problem that the amount of information to be notified to the player is significantly reduced.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the display data amount exceeds the upper limit value, low resolution processing for reducing the display data amount is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily generate a display image with a reduced display data amount without reducing the amount of information to be notified to the player. Also, instead of storing a display image with a small amount of display data in advance, low-resolution processing is executed using display data used when generating a normal display image, and a low-resolution display image is generated. Thus, the capacity of the display image stored in advance can be suppressed.

  In this control example, at the time of starting the change of the third symbol (special symbol), if the result of the determination of whether or not to start the change is successful, the upper limit value of the total value of the point values is set to 12, and if it is off, it is set to 10. Set. Then, the maximum number of points set during the change is determined by the image point setting process (S4252: see FIG. 536) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 at the start of the change of the third symbol. This prediction is predicted according to the selected variation pattern and notice display mode, and the prediction is executed when the volume adjustment screen and the error screen are displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that the processing is lost even if a volume adjustment screen or an error display is displayed during the variation of the third symbol. When the predicted point exceeds the set upper limit value, a simple image creation command is set by turning on the simple symbol creation flag 223bd (S3252: FIG. 527), and the display control of the simple image creation command is performed. By receiving the device, the display control device 114 executes a simple image creation process (S8452: see FIG. 538), and the display image set to be converted to low resolution in advance is converted to low resolution. It is stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba. Here, the priority order is set in the order of the background image, the first notice image, the second notice image, the first half of the fluctuation pattern image, and the second half of the fluctuation pattern image. The images are converted into low-resolution images in order of priority until the upper limit value of the point value is not exceeded. Here, when the display data is converted to the low resolution, the display data is reduced to 1/6 in this control, so it is determined whether the number of points is converted to 1/6 and falls below the upper limit value.

  Next, when the variation display of the third symbol is started, every time the image point discrimination process (S3151: FIG. 527) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, When it is determined that the total number of display data points for which the setting has been determined does not exceed the upper limit, and it is determined that it has exceeded, it is displayed at a low resolution based on the difference exceeding the upper limit. The type of simple image to be designated is instructed. The display control device 114 is configured to set a simple image in the display data table based on the reception of the instruction command. With this configuration, it is determined in advance whether the display data amount exceeds the upper limit at the start of fluctuation, and low resolution display data is converted and stored, and whether the upper limit is exceeded depending on the display timing. Is displayed during fluctuation display, and the low resolution display is displayed at the timing when it exceeds the upper limit value, so that the low resolution display is displayed only when the load exceeds the upper limit value. Control load in control can be reduced. In addition, the period during which low resolution is displayed can be minimized, and the period during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the success / failure and the effects can be shortened.

  In addition, since the upper limit value of the number of points to be displayed is configured to differ depending on the result of the determination of success / failure, if the notification with low resolution is not displayed even at the time of high load where a large number of notifications etc. are displayed, A game can be performed with the expectation that the determination result is a win. In other words, it is possible to predict the success / failure determination result based on the frequency of display at a low resolution. Furthermore, when the low-resolution image is not displayed by pressing the selection buttons 22b and 22c and displaying the volume adjustment screen during a period in which a display mode with a large display data such as super reach is displayed, the result of the determination of whether or not the low resolution image is displayed. Can be expected to be a hit. That is, by operating the selection buttons 22b and 22c, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to identify the result of the determination, and the result of the determination can be predicted first at any timing of the player.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, an image point number storage area 223ba, a point upper limit value storage area 223bb, a return flag 223bc, and a simple image creation flag 223bd are added to the first control example.

  The image point number storage area 223ba is a storage area for storing a point value corresponding to a selected notice display mode or a display mode such as a reserved symbol. For the display mode selected at the start of fluctuation, such as a fluctuation pattern, the corresponding point value is stored at the start of fluctuation, and is displayed when a hold occurs while the hold symbol etc. is changing. Regarding the display mode displayed when 22 is pressed, when the display mode is set, the corresponding number of points is selected from the image point table and stored. Further, when the image display period ends, a value corresponding to the number of points is subtracted from the image point number storage area 223ba and set. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the state of the display data corresponding to the currently displayed state.

  The point upper limit storage area 223bb is a storage area in which the point upper limit value is stored corresponding to the determination result. If the determination result is not good, 10 is stored, and if it is a win, 12 is set. With this configuration, the frequency of display at a low resolution can be varied depending on the result of the determination, and the frequency of display at a low resolution and the state of display data when displayed at a low resolution (high It is possible to predict the result of the determination as to whether or not the load is displayed in an overlapping manner.

  The return flag 223bc is a flag for indicating that the initial setting at the time of power-on has been executed. When the return flag 223bc is on, it indicates that the initial setting has been completed. Further, when the return flag 223bc is OFF, it indicates that the setting for starting the variation of the third symbol has already been executed after the initial setting is completed.

  The simple image creation flag 223bd is a flag for instructing the creation of a simple image. When the simple image creation flag 223bd is set to ON, if the display data amount at the start of fluctuation exceeds the upper limit value, Indicates that it has been determined. When the simple image creation flag 223bd is set to ON, a simple image creation command is set and output to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 converts the image data into a low resolution, and the image data is stored in the low resolution data storage area 223ba.

  FIG. 523 is a block diagram of the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example. In the third control example, a low-resolution data storage area 233ba and an image switching information storage area 233bb are added to the work RAM 233 as compared to the first control example.

  The low resolution data storage area 233ba is a storage area for storing display data converted to a low resolution. The original display data converted into the low resolution is the image data stored in the character ROM, and it is not necessary to store the low resolution display data separately in advance, which increases the capacity of the stored data. Can be suppressed.

  The image switching information storage area 233bb is a storage area for storing type information of target image data to be switched to the low resolution designated by the command of the sound lamp control device 113. The image switching information storage area 233bb is configured to store the image type switched to the low resolution and the period information to be switched to the low resolution for display.

  FIG. 524 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in the third control example. In the third control example, a volume adjustment image, a volume display in which an error display image is set, and an error symbol 1 data area are added to the first control example.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 525 to 536. In the third control example, a process for executing a variable operation effect for operating the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member, is added to the first control example described above, and a serif mode as a variable effect. Can be set when receiving a winning information command, adding a process to set the process, changing the contents of the process for setting the production aspect of the fluctuation effect to be set when the fluctuation pattern command is received In order to select the lost child mode to be executed when the latent state or the normal state is set in the process of selecting the processing content for setting a long holding effect (holding notice effect) and the process of selecting the back mode This is different from the point of adding the process of, and is otherwise the same. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the start-up process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 3. This startup process 3 is a process executed in place of the startup process (see FIG. 440) in the first control example.

  Among the start-up processes 3 in the third control example, in each process of S3001 to S3013, the same processes as the respective processes in S3001 to S3013 of the start-up process (see FIG. 440) in the first control example are executed. .

  In the start-up process 3 in the third control example, after executing the process of S3013, the return flag 223bc is set to ON (S3051), and then this process ends. If it is determined in S3012 that the status command has not been received (S3012: No), the process of S3051 is executed, and then this process ends.

  Next, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing the main process 3. The main process 3 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 441) in the first control example.

  Of the main process 3 in the third control example, the processes of S3101 and S3102 to S3120 execute the same processes as the processes of S3101 and S3102 to S3120 of the main process (see FIG. 440) in the first control example, respectively. Is done.

  In the main process 3 in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S3101 that 1 msec or more has elapsed since the execution of the current process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), an image point determination process is executed ( S3151) and the process proceeds to S3102. The details of this image point discrimination process (S3151) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the image point determination process (S3151) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing this image point discrimination processing (S3151). This image point discrimination process (S3151) is executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 526) in the third control example.

  When the image point determination process (S3151) in the third control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image creation flag 223bd is on (S3251). If it is determined that the simple image creation flag 223bd is on (S3251: Yes), a simple image creation command is set (S3252), the simple image creation flag 223bd is set to off (S3253), and then the process of S3254 is performed. Migrate to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3251 that the simple image creation flag 223bd is off (S3251: No), the processes of S3252 and S3253 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3254.

  In the processing of S3254, the information stored in the image point number storage area 223ba is read (S3254), the information stored in the point upper limit value storage area 223bb is read (S3255), and the value of the image point number is the point upper limit value. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S3256). If it is determined that the value of the image point number is equal to or greater than the point upper limit value (S3256: Yes), a simple display target is set based on the difference between the value of the image point number and the point upper limit value (S3257). A simple instruction command for display including the contents of the simple display target is set (S3258), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3256, when it is determined that the value of the number of image points is smaller than the point upper limit value (S3256: No), the processes of S3257 and S3258 are skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 528, the effect update process 3 (S3152) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing this effect update processing 3 (S3152). This effect update process 3 (S3152) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIGS. 442 and 3111) in the first control example.

  Of the effect update process 3 (S3152) in the third control example, each process of S3201 to S3106 is the same as each process of S3201 to S3106 of the effect update process (see FIGS. 442 and 3111) in the first control example. Processing is executed.

  In the effect update process 3 (S3152) in the third control example, if it is determined that the value of the variation time timer 223s is 0 in the process of S3201 (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3211. In addition, after executing the process of S3206, the process proceeds to S3211.

  In the processing of S3211, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the end timing of various effects (S3211). When it is determined that the current timing is the end timing of various effects (S3211: Yes), image points corresponding to the ended effects are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S3212), and the number of extracted points is determined as an image point. Subtraction is made from the number of points stored in the number storage area 223ba (S3213), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3211, when it is determined that the current timing is not the end timing of various effects (S3211: No), the processes of S3212 and S3213 are skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 529, the press stop effect process 3 (S3253) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing the press stop effect process 3 (S3253). This press stop effect process 3 (S3253) is a process executed in place of the press stop effect process (see FIG. 443, S3203) in the first control example.

  Of the press stop effect processing 3 (S3253) in the third control example, in steps S3301 to S3310 and S3311 to S3314, S3301 to S3310 of the press stop effect processing (see FIGS. 443 and S3203) in the first control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S3311-S3314 is performed.

  In the press stop effect process 3 (S3253) in the third control example, the process proceeds to S3351 after executing the processes in S3309 and S3310.

  In the process of S3351, image points corresponding to the set mode are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S3351), and the number of points extracted from the image point table 222ba is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S3352). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the batch change effect process 3 (S3255) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing the batch change effect process 3 (S3255). This batch change effect process 3 (S3255) is a process executed in place of the batch change effect process (see FIG. 445, S3205) in the first control example.

  Of the batch change effect process 3 (S3255) in the third control example, the processes of S3501 to S3508 are the processes of S3501 to S3508 of the batch change effect process (see FIGS. 445 and S3205) in the first control example, respectively. The same process is executed.

  In the batch change effect process 3 (S3255) in the third control example, after executing the process of S3508, image points corresponding to the set mode are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S3551), and from the image point table 222ba. The extracted number of points is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S3552), and then this process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 531, the pressing detection process 3 (S3153) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing the pressing detection process 3 (S3153). This press detection process 3 (S3153) is a process executed in place of the press detection process (see FIG. 447, S3112) in the first control example.

  Of the press detection process 3 (S3153) in the third control example, the processes in S3601 to S3607 are the same as the processes in S3601 to S3607 in the press detection process (see FIGS. 447 and S3112) in the first control example. Processing is executed.

  In the pressing detection process 3 (S3153) in the third control example, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 in the process of S3606 (S3606: No), the process proceeds to S3651. Further, even after the process of S3607 is executed, the process proceeds to S3651.

  In the process of S3651, it is determined whether or not pressing of the adjustment button is detected (S3651). If it is determined that pressing of the adjustment button has been detected (S3651: Yes), a volume adjustment process is executed (S3652), and the process proceeds to S3653. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3651 that pressing of the adjustment button has not been detected (S3651: No), the process of S3562 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3563. Details of the volume adjustment process (S3652) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3563, image points corresponding to the set mode are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S3653), and the number of points extracted from the image point table 222ba is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S3654). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the volume adjustment process (S3652) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing the volume adjustment processing (S3652). This volume adjustment process (S3652) is executed in the press detection process 3 (see FIGS. 531 and S3153) in the third control example.

  When the sound volume adjustment process (S3652) in the third control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the present time is a sound volume adjustment possible timing (S3671). If it is determined that the present time is not the timing at which the volume can be adjusted (S3671: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the current timing is the volume adjustment possible timing (S3671: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the adjustment screen is being displayed (S3672). If it is determined that the adjustment screen is not being displayed (S3672: No), the current volume level is read from the volume level storage area (S3673), and a display adjustment screen command indicating the current volume level is set (S3674). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3672 that the adjustment screen is being displayed (S3672: Yes), it is then determined whether an operation of the UP button (right button) is detected (S3675). If it is determined that the operation of the UP button (right button) has been detected (S3675: Yes), the volume level is increased by 1 and stored in the volume level storage area (S3676), and then the process proceeds to S3677.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3675 that the operation of the UP button (right button) has not been detected (S3675: No), it is then determined whether or not the operation of the DOWN button (left button) has been detected. (S3679). If it is determined that the operation of the DOWN button (left button) has been detected (S3679: Yes), the volume level is lowered by 1 and stored in the volume level storage area (S3680), and the process proceeds to S3677.

  In the process of S3777, a display command indicating the current volume level is set (S3777), a voice command indicating pseudo sound corresponding to the current volume level is set (S3678), and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3679, when it is determined that the operation of the DOWN button (left button) has not been detected (S3679: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 533, the reservation notice lottery process 3 (S4041) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the hold notice lottery process 3 (S4041). This hold notice lottery process 3 (S4041) is a process executed in place of the hold notice lottery process (see FIG. 453, S4011) in the first control example.

  Of the pending notice lottery process 3 (S4041) in the third control example, in each process of S4051 to S4063, each process of S4051 to S4063 of the pending notice lottery process (see FIG. 453, S4011) in the first control example, respectively. The same process is executed.

  In the hold notice lottery process 3 (S4041) in the third control example, after executing the process of S4059, image points corresponding to the set mode are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S4071), and from the image point table 222ba. The extracted number of points is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S4072), and then this process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process 3 (S3154) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 3 (S3154). This variable display setting process 3 (S3154) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 455, S3115) in the first control example.

  Among the variable display setting process 3 (S3154) in the third control example, in each process of S4201 to S4203 and S4205 to S4211, S4201 to S4203 of the variable display setting process (see FIGS. 455 and S3115) in the first control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S4205 to S4211 is performed.

  In the variable display setting process 3 (S3154) in the third control example, the variable effect setting process 3 is executed after executing the process of S4203 (S4251). The details of the variation effect setting process 3 (S4251) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the process of S4251, the image point setting process is executed (S4252). Details of the image point setting process (S4252) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the process of S4252, the process proceeds to S4205.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 535, the variable effect setting process 3 (S4251) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing the variation effect setting process 3 (S4251). This variation effect setting process 3 (S4251) is a process executed in place of the variation effect setting process in the first control example (see FIGS. 456 and S4204), and the variation display setting process 3 in the third control example (FIG. 534). , S3154).

  Of the varying effect setting process 3 (S4251) in the third control example, the processes of S4301 to S4313 are the processes of S4301 to S4313 of the varying effect setting process (see FIG. 456 and S4204) in the first control example, respectively. The same process is executed.

  In the variable effect setting process 3 (S4251) in the third control example, the process proceeds to S4351 after executing the processes in S4310 and S4313.

  In the process of S4351, image points corresponding to the set mode are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S4351), and the number of points extracted from the image point table 222ba is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S4352). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the image point setting process (S4252) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing the image point setting process (S4252). This image point setting process (S4252) is executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIGS. 534 and S3154) in the third control example.

  When the image point setting process (S4252) in the third control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the return flag 223bc is on (S4371). When it is determined that the return flag 223bc is on (S4371: Yes), the return flag 223bc is set to off (S4372), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the return flag 223bc is off (S4371: No), it is then determined whether or not the current variation is a winning variation (S4373). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (S4373: Yes), the upper limit value = “12” is set (S4374), and the process proceeds to S4375. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current variation is not a winning variation (S4373: No), the upper limit value = “10” is set (S4376), and the process proceeds to S4375.

  In the process of S4375, the set upper limit value is stored in the point upper limit value storage area 223bb (S4375), the maximum number of points that can be set during the current fluctuation is predicted (S4376), and the predicted maximum point number value is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than the value (S4377). If it is determined that the predicted value of the maximum number of points is larger than the upper limit value (S4377: Yes), the simple image creation flag 223bd is set to ON (S4378), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4377, when it is determined that the predicted value of the maximum number of points is equal to or less than the upper limit value (S4377: No), this process is ended as it is.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 537, the command determination process 3 (S8352) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S8352). This command determination process 3 (S8352) is a process executed instead of the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 463, S8302).

  Of the command determination process 3 (S8352) in the third control example, in each process of S8401 to S8403, S8404, S8406 to S8411 and S8416 to S8420, the command determination process in the first control example (see FIGS. 463 and S8302). The same processes as those of S8401 to S8403, S8404, S8406 to S8411 and S8416 to S8420 are executed.

  In command determination process 3 (S8352) in the third control example, after executing the process of S8403, it is determined whether or not there is a simple image creation command among unprocessed commands (S8451). If it is determined that there is a simple image creation command (S8451: Yes), a simple image creation process is executed (S8452), and then the process returns to S8401. The details of the simplified image creation process (S8452) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8451 that there is no simple image creation command (S8451: No), it is next determined whether or not there is a display simple instruction command among the unprocessed commands (S8453). ). If it is determined that there is a display simple instruction command (S8453: Yes), an image switching process is executed (S8454), and then the process returns to S8401. Details of the image switching process (S8454) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8453, when it is determined that there is no simple display instruction command (S8453: No), it is next determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display variation pattern command (S8404) (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command process 3 is executed (S8455), and then the process returns to S8401. Details of the variation pattern command process 3 (S8455) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S8418, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8418). If it is determined that there is no error command (S8418: No), then an unprocessed command is executed. It is determined whether or not there is a volume related command in the command (S8456). If it is determined that there is a volume related command (S8456: Yes), the volume related command process is executed (S8457), and then the process returns to S8401. Details of the sound volume related command processing (S8457) will be described later with reference to FIG. 541 (b).

  In the process of S8456, when it is determined that there is no volume related command among the unprocessed commands (S8456: No), the process proceeds to S8420.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 538, a simple image creation process (S8452) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the simple image creation process (S8452). This simple image creation process (S8452) is a process executed in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 537, S8352) in the third control example.

  In the simple image creation process (S8452) in the third control example, first, image data corresponding to the command is read from the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 (S8471) and stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba. Information is read (S8472), and then it is determined whether or not the resolution of the current image data has been reduced (S8473). If it is determined that the resolution of the current image data has not been reduced (S8473: No), low resolution processing is executed on the read image data to create low resolution image data (S8474), and the low resolution data The data stored in the storage area 233ba is shifted to the execution area of the low resolution data storage area 233ba (S8476), and the low resolution image data created this time is transferred to the data in the low resolution data storage area 233ba in the low resolution data storage area 233ba. The free space is stored (S8477), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8473, when it is determined that the resolution of the current image data has been reduced (S8473: Yes), the processes of S8474 to S8477 are skipped, and then this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 539, the image switching process (S8454) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the image switching process (S8454). This image switching process (S8454) is a process executed in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 537, S8352) in the third control example.

  In the image switching process (S8454) in the third control example, first, information stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba is read (S8491), and it is determined whether or not the resolution of the image data to be switched has been reduced. It is determined (S 8492). When it is determined that the image data to be switched has not been reduced in resolution (S 8492: No), the image data to be switched is read from the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 (S 8493). Low resolution processing is executed on the data to create low resolution image data (S8494), and the data in the low resolution data storage area 233ba is shifted to the execution area of the low resolution data storage area 233ba (S8495). The low resolution image data is stored in the empty area of the low resolution data storage area 233ba (S8496), and the process proceeds to S8497.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8492 that the image data to be switched has already been reduced in resolution (S8492: Yes), the process of S8493 to S8496 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8497.

  In the process of S8497, the target and the period for displaying the low resolution image are stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb (S8497), and then this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 540, the variation pattern command process 3 (S8455) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern command process 3 (S8455). This variation pattern command processing 3 (S8455) is processing executed in the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 537, S8352) in the third control example, and variation pattern command processing (FIG. 464, S8405) in the first control example. This process is executed instead of (see).

  Of the variation pattern command processing 3 (S8455) in the third control example, the processing of S8502 to S8506 includes the processing of S8502 to S8506 of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 464 and S8405) in the first control example, respectively. The same process is executed.

  In the variation pattern command process 3 (S8455) in the third control example, first, a variation effect pattern indicated by a display variation pattern command and information stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb, instead of the processing of S8501. The variable display data table corresponding to is determined, the determined variable display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8551), and the process proceeds to S8502.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 541 (a), the warning image setting process 3 (S9354) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 541 (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process 3 (S9354). This warning image setting process 3 (S9354) is a process executed in place of the warning image setting process (see FIGS. 470 (a) and S9304) in the first control example.

  Of the warning image setting process 3 (S9354) in the third control example, each process in S9402 is the same as each process in S9402 in the warning image setting process (see FIGS. 470 (a) and S9304) in the first control example. The process is executed.

  In the warning image setting process 3 (S9354) in the third control example, first, instead of the process of S9401, the error determination flag and the information stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb are referred to and ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to all the error determination flags on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S9451), and the process proceeds to S9402.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 541 (b), the sound volume related command process 3 (S8457) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 541 (b) is a flowchart showing the sound volume related command processing (S8457). The sound volume related command process 3 (S8457) is a process executed in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 537, S8352) in the third control example.

  In the volume related command processing 3 (S8457) in the third control example, first, volume image data is set (developed) based on the type of the received volume related command and the information stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb. (S8591). Thereafter, this process is terminated. With this configuration, when the volume adjustment image is set to be displayed, if the display at the low resolution is set, the display can be set at the low resolution and displayed.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process 3 (S9653) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process 3 (S9653). This normal image transfer setting process 3 (S9653) is a process executed instead of the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472, S9603) in the first control example.

  Of the normal image transfer setting process 3 (S9653) in the third control example, in each process of S9801 to S9810 and S9812 to S9815, S9801 of the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472, S9603) in the first control example, respectively. -S9810 and the same process as each process of S9812-S9815 are performed.

  In the normal image transfer setting process 3 (S9653) in the third control example, after executing the process of S9810, instead of the process of S9811, the back surface in the on state among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the image determination flag and the information stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb is specified, the image data is set as transfer target image data (S9851), and the process proceeds to S9812. Transition.

  As described above, in the third control example, when the variation display of the third symbol is set, it is determined whether the display data exceeds the upper limit value by the variation pattern, the background image, the content of the selected notice mode, or the like. In the case of exceeding the resolution, the image converted to the low resolution can be facilitated, and the image corresponding to the excess of the low resolution can be displayed at the low resolution at the timing of exceeding, thereby reducing the control load in the display control.

  In this control example, the process of converting to low resolution is executed at the start of fluctuation. However, when setting the display data table, the resolution can be set, and the resolution is converted at the display timing. You may comprise so that it may display.

  In addition, the upper limit value is set larger in the case of winning than in the case of out of place, but not limited to that, the upper limit value is set smaller than in the case of out of case in hitting, and the case such as hitting when the display frequency of low resolution is high. You may comprise so that an expectation degree may be raised. In addition, if the result of the determination is a hit, it is set so that low-resolution display is not performed, and a problem such as a process failure is likely to occur. You may comprise so that it may set to a high production.

  In the third control example, the same processing content as the display control in the first control example described above, that is, a plurality of sprites (display objects) are set with different display layers for one drawing list. , Using a process that displays a set of multiple sprites (display objects) in an overlapping manner based on the hierarchy, but is not limited to this, and is configured to control display independently of a part of the multiple hierarchies. For example, the display control may be performed separately for a hierarchy with high display data update frequency and a low hierarchy.

  Further, in this control example, based on the type of the variation pattern set when setting the variation pattern, a determination process for determining whether to set a low-resolution image is executed, and based on the result of the determination process It is configured to execute a process for setting a low-resolution image, but it is sufficient that the low-resolution image can be set in advance before the timing for actually displaying the low-resolution image. For example, a determination process for determining whether or not to set a low-resolution image at the timing of changing the background image may be executed, or a low-resolution image at the timing of receiving a winning information command corresponding to new winning information. It may be possible to execute a determination process for determining whether or not to set.

  In addition, in the third control example, when the display data amount exceeds the upper limit value, the display mode (display image) based on the low-resolution display data is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (for example, big hit), the process of setting the display data of low resolution is executed regardless of the display data amount, and the third symbol display device 81 You may comprise so that the display mode (display image) based on low-resolution display data may be displayed on a display surface.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to use various processes for displaying a display mode (display image) based on low-resolution display data as a suggestive effect for suggesting a lottery result of a special symbol.

  Furthermore, in the third control example, when a low-resolution display mode is displayed, the low-resolution display mode is continuously displayed until the display period of the target display mode elapses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display data amount is equal to or less than the upper limit value, the low resolution display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the normal display mode. You may comprise. In this case, it is preferable that the suggestion contents that can be provided to the player are different between the low-resolution display mode and the normal display mode. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play a game eagerly to display both the low-resolution display mode and the normal display mode for one display mode. It is possible to make the player interested in a game in which a low-resolution display mode is displayed and a game in which a low-resolution display mode is switched to a normal display mode.

  In the third control example, it is configured to determine in advance whether or not there is a possibility that the display data amount exceeds the upper limit value based on the start timing of the change of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the timing when the background mode is switched, it may be configured to determine in advance whether or not the display data amount may exceed the upper limit value in the background mode after switching. In this case, the background mode after switching is a background mode that displays a background image with a large amount of display data, and the fluctuation pattern in which the display data amount may exceed the upper limit value while the background mode is set When there is (variation effect), low-resolution processing may be executed using display data corresponding to the variation pattern (variation effect) to generate a low-resolution display image in advance.

  Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the variation effect set corresponding to the special symbol variation is set separately for the first half period and the second half period, the variation start timing of the special symbol (the variation effect of the first half period) The processing for determining whether the display data may exceed the upper limit value may be executed not only in the execution timing) but also in the variation rendering execution timing in the second half period.

  As described above, in the third control example, the first effect mode (the effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) executed during the first period when the first condition is satisfied. The second effect mode (third symbol display) executed during the second period shorter than the first period when the second condition different from the first condition is established and the means for setting the display mode Means for setting the display mode of the effect display displayed on the display surface of the device 81, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode can be displayed simultaneously on the display means (the third symbol display device 81). Included in either the first effect mode or the second effect mode when the amount of data for generating the display mode displayed on the display unit by the display control unit satisfies a predetermined condition. The display mode to be a low-resolution display mode with a small amount of data Running configured to be able to lower resolution process. Thereby, even if the amount of data for generating the display mode displayed on the display unit is increased by a combination of a plurality of presentation modes set at different timings, it is possible to reduce the load of the display control process. .

  In addition, as a method of selecting a display mode that is a target of low resolution processing, it is preferable to select a display mode that is displayed at a late timing on the display unit. Thereby, it can suppress that the low resolution process is performed with respect to the display mode already displayed on the display means, and the effect display that is difficult to understand for the player is performed. In place of this, for example, a means for determining superiority or inferiority of visibility for a plurality of display modes displayed at the same time may be provided, and a display mode with poor visibility may be selected. A priority may be set in advance for the notification content notified to the player for the display mode, and the display mode may be selected based on the priority. In this case, the low-resolution processing may be executed for the display mode having a low priority, and any of the plurality of display modes having the same priority (the same notification content) is set. Alternatively, low resolution processing may be executed for one display mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform effect display without reducing the amount of privilege granted to the player.

  In the third control example, the upper limit value of the display data amount that can be displayed at the same time can be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, the upper limit value of the display data amount may be varied based on the variation time of the special symbol variation or the player's operation on the frame button 22a. Thereby, since each display mode displayed on the display surface of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be changed on various conditions, the production effect can be heightened.

  Further, when the display mode is changed to the low image quality mode, the display area changing process is executed to change the display area for displaying the low image quality mode from the display area for displaying the normal display mode. Alternatively, when the display data amount is smaller than the lower limit value, a high image quality mode in which the display data amount is larger than the normal display mode may be displayed.

  Further, in the third control example, when the display data amount exceeds the upper limit value, the low resolution processing is executed on the display data stored in the character ROM of the display control device 114, and the display data amount is low. By configuring so as to generate the image quality mode, it is configured to reduce the data capacity for storing display data corresponding to the low image quality mode in advance. Display data corresponding to the mode may be stored in the character ROM of the display control device 114. Thereby, the process for generating the low image quality mode can be skipped. In addition, since the low-resolution data storage area 223ba for temporarily storing display data generated by the low-resolution processing (display data for displaying the low-quality image mode) is provided, the low-quality image mode is actually displayed. It is possible to generate display data for displaying a low image quality mode in advance before the operation. Each display data stored in the low resolution data storage area 223ba is configured to be stored until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. Therefore, when the same low image quality mode is displayed a plurality of times during the period when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the second and subsequent display processes can be simplified.

  In the third control example described above, the data amount of the display image is determined according to the type of each display mode (effect mode) set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 is based on the determination result. The display control device 114 is configured to output a command for executing low resolution processing from the side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and display control that receives various display commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 is not limited thereto. The apparatus 114 may determine the display data amount of the display image, and execute the low resolution processing when the display data amount exceeds the upper limit value.

  Further, in the third control example, the cumulative value of the display data amount is calculated based on the types of various effects to be executed. However, the cumulative value of the display data amount can be calculated. For example, the cumulative value of the display data amount may be calculated based on the types of various display commands for setting the production mode and the setting status of the display data table used for display. You may comprise.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 543 to 549. In the fourth control example, the image data of the display mode set for the variation pattern of the special symbol is processed with respect to the first control example described above, the image data before processing (normal image data), and the processing The difference is that a display effect using subsequent image data (processed image data) is executed. Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute a blurring process for smoothing the focus (normal focus) on normal image data and a determination process in which black and white are reversed.

  The normal image data and the processed image data are combined (overlapped) and displayed, so that a specific image is displayed on the front side (or the back side) of the third symbol display device 81. This is mainly different in that a virtual effect (hereinafter referred to as a virtual effect) that causes an illusion is executed. Only differences from the first control example will be described, and the illustration and description of the same contents will be omitted.

  Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 10, the display effect using the third symbol is executed using the display means (liquid crystal display) as the suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol as in the first control example described above. There is something. Then, in order to suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (for example, a big win or a small bonus), a variation pattern (variation time or production mode) that differs depending on the lottery result of the special symbol By configuring so that the display effect is executed, it is possible to provide a game that does not get bored by the player until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed.

  Furthermore, in recent years, in order to enhance the effect of the display effect, there is one that can suggest a lottery result of a special symbol using a configuration other than the display means. For example, there is something on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. In order to perform the display, the pre-arranged movable accessory is displayed by moving it to the front side of the 3rd symbol display device 81, or the light guide plate is set and irradiated with light. There is a way to display.

  Further, in order to display something on the back side of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is set as a transmissive liquid crystal display or an organic EL panel, and the transmittance of the third symbol display device 81 is set. There is a method of making it possible to visually recognize an accessory or a liquid crystal panel installed on the back side by changing (or adopting a display device with high transmittance).

  By using the method described above, it is possible to suggest a lottery result of a special symbol to the player in various ways, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the display effect. In addition to the three-pattern display device 81, it is necessary to arrange a light guide plate and a movable accessory on the near side or the far side, and there is a problem that the mounting space is compressed.

  In contrast, in the fourth control example, the front side (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) and the back side (back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) of the above-described display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display effect using this area is virtually realized by using only the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to execute a display effect with a high effect without securing a space in the front and rear regions of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

<About the production contents in the pachinko machine of the fourth control example>
Here, an example of the display contents of the virtual effect described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 543 to 548. FIG. 543 (a) is a diagram showing a layer structure of image data used in the virtual effect, and FIGS. 543 (b) to (e) show examples of image data set in the respective image layers. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 543 (a), the layer structure of the image data used in the virtual effect is a total of four layers of the first image layer 2300a, the second image layer 2300b, the third image layer 2300c, and the fourth image layer 2300d. It has become. Image data is set for each image layer, and by switching display / non-display of each image layer, an image in which a plurality of images are superimposed (combined) can be displayed. By overlapping the images and switching the images, it is possible to make an illusion that an image of a specific image layer is displayed on the front side (or the back side) of the third symbol display device 81.

  Specifically, a background A image (FIG. 543 (b)), which is a background image in the mountain mode, is set in the first image layer 2300a. A background B image (FIG. 543 (c)), which is a background image out of focus in the mountain mode, is set in the second image layer 2300b. In the third image layer 2300c, an inverted image (FIG. 543 (d)) obtained by performing black and white inversion processing on an image imitating a treasure chest accessory (an accessory image) is set. In the fourth image layer 2300d, an image imitating a treasure chest accessory (an accessory image) (FIG. 543 (e)) is set.

  In FIG. 543 (a), only the image layers (first image layer 2300a to fourth image layer 2300d) used for the virtual effect described above are shown, but the background A image displayed on the first image layer 2300a. (See FIG. 543 (b)) corresponds to the type “back image” in the drawing list (see FIG. 423) of the first control example described above, on the front side of the first image layer 2300a, in FIG. Image layers corresponding to various types (designs, effects, etc.) described in the illustrated drawing list are formed. In this control example, only the image layers (first image layers 2300a to 2300d) used for the virtual effect will be described, and detailed description and illustration of the other image layer configurations will be omitted.

  In this control example, various displays used for executing the virtual effect are displayed on different image layers, and display control for switching between display and non-display for each image layer is used. For example, as in the first control example described above, the display displayed on the first image layer 2300a to the fourth image layer 2300d as various sprites for the drawing list set corresponding to the set display data table. A mode (image) is defined, and the display mode (image) displayed on the first image layer 2300a to the fourth image layer 2300d is variably set according to the elapsed time, so that a virtual effect is displayed. A data table may be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 544, a method for combining and switching image data of each of the image layers 2300a to 2300d will be described. FIG. 544 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a virtual effect display data table set when a virtual effect is executed. Similar to the various display data tables used in the first control example described above, this virtual effect display data table stores fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and determines that the virtual effect is to be executed, the virtual effect display data table is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233, and this data table is stored. It is stored in the storage area 233b. When the virtual effect display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 uses the virtual effect display data table stored in the data table storage area 233b to display the virtual effect display data table in the third symbol display device 81. The virtual effect is executed.

  The image data of each image layer is set based on the virtual effect display data table shown in FIG. In the virtual effect display data table, a drawing list corresponding to an address (hexadecimal) is defined.

  The display control device 114 updates (adds 1) the address every 20 milliseconds as in the first control example described above, and sets the image data of each image layer according to the drawing list corresponding to the updated address.

  Specifically, first, the background A is displayed by the drawing list A, and then, the display in which the focus is shifted from the background A to the background B is performed by the drawing list B. Although details will be described later, when the drawing list B is set, the display data of the drawing list B is updated so that the semi-transparency value gradually decreases with the elapsed time. Yes. As a result, a display effect is executed in which the image of the background A gradually fades out of focus as time passes.

  In this way, in the state where the focused background A is displayed, the background (B) of the same image (mountain mode background) but out of focus is displayed in an overlapping manner so that the player's focus (focus) can be obtained. Can be shifted. At this time, by gradually displaying the image of the out-of-focus background B (gradually increasing the contrast and sharpness), it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling that the image has suddenly changed. However, it is difficult to recognize that the focus is shifted. Then, by displaying the out-of-focus background B, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the mountain mode background image gradually moves in the depth direction.

  In other words, the focus position is adjusted according to the depth of the object in which the human vision is in the line-of-sight direction, and contrast adjustment is performed according to the brightness. By using this visual characteristic and displaying a display mode (blurred display mode) that is out of focus with respect to the target image (mountain mode background image) displayed on the liquid crystal display, the drawing list A It can be assumed that the display position of the background B corresponding to the drawing list B exists on the back side rather than the display position of the background A corresponding to.

  In this case, in order to make the display position of the background B exist on the deeper side, not only the focus of the target image of the background B but also the outline of the target image (for example, the ridgeline of the mountain image) is changed. In order to make it ambiguous, the image quality reduction processing used in the third control example described above may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily reproduce a state where the focus is shifted with respect to the target image of the background B.

  In this control example, the background A in focus and the background B out of focus are prepared separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only the background A in focus may be prepared, and the background B may be generated by performing image processing on the background A. In this case, as in the third control example, when the variation pattern of the virtual effect is notified from the sound lamp control device 113, the process of generating the background B may be started. Thereby, the image data capacity of the background image can be saved.

  Next, since the drawing list C and the drawing list D are alternately defined, the background B display and the reverse image display are executed alternately. That is, display / non-display of the reverse image is executed alternately, and the reverse image is blinked.

  When the inverted image is blinked and displayed with the player's focus out of focus, the illusion that the inverted image is displayed in front of the third symbol display device 81 can be given. By using this illusion, it is possible to provide a stereoscopic effect (with a sense of depth) without providing a light guide plate or the like on the front side of the third symbol display device 81.

  In other words, in a state where the target image of the background B out of focus is displayed, the focused image is displayed as the reverse image (see FIG. 543 (d)), thereby the target of the reverse image and the background B. The depth order of the object is determined from the appearance of the sharp area and the blurred area generated by the occlusion outline with the image, and the focused inverted image is displayed on the near side rather than the background B displayed out of focus. It is possible to give the player the illusion of being.

  Further, in this control example, since it is configured to be able to execute a blinking display in which a reversed image in focus is turned on at a predetermined interval, it is in front of the target image of the background B (the background image in the out-of-focus mountain mode). It is possible to make the player have an illusion that a reverse image is displayed on the side. In addition, since the reverse image is formed by executing the black and white reversal process on the image data of the accessory image displayed on the fourth image layer 2300d, the reverse image displayed on the liquid crystal display is the liquid crystal display. It is possible to easily think that the display is made by the light guide plate disposed on the front surface (front side).

  In this control example, an image obtained by reversing a black-and-white image of an object image is used as a reversed image. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be used to form a reverse image. Further, it is configured to perform color binarization processing on the inverted image subjected to the inversion processing, and generate image data for displaying the inverted image in two colors of black and other colors. Also good. With this configuration, even if the image that is the target of the inverted image is displayed in full color, it is possible to easily create a display mode that is displayed in a specific color as the inverted image. A display mode similar to the display mode using a light plate can be easily provided.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 543 (d), a reverse image is displayed so as to cover the entire display surface of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a reverse image may be displayed using a part of display surface of the apparatus 81. FIG. With this configuration, the background image in the out-of-focus mountain mode can be easily viewed by the player even during the period in which the reverse image is displayed, so the target image displayed on the liquid crystal display Focus adjustment is induced for each of (mountain mode background image and inverted image), and the inverted image is displayed in front of the mountain mode background image based on the information of eye movement at that time. It is possible to give the player more perception of depth.

  Finally, an accessory image is displayed by the drawing list E, and the virtual effect ends. At this time, the player has the illusion that a black and white-reversed character image is displayed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by displaying the normal character image, the third symbol is displayed. It is possible to make an illusion that an accessory appears on the back side of the display device 81.

  Thereby, without changing the transmittance of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to produce an effect as if an accessory appears on the back side of the third symbol display device. Providing a sense of production.

  Next, the contents of each drawing list defined in the virtual effect display data table will be described. FIG. 545 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list A, and FIG. 546 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list B. In the fourth control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, “back A image” is provided instead of “back image” as the type described in the drawing list, and “object image” is further provided. , “Reversed image” and “background B image” are added, and the content of the detailed information is partially changed. The other contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

  First, the drawing list A will be described. As shown in FIG. 545, the drawing list A defines image data for displaying only the background A. The contents defined in the drawing list A are the same as the drawing list (see FIG. 423) set in the first control example described above, and display of the background A image corresponding to the currently set background mode. The data is read from the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and detailed information is set. Although omitted from the diagram shown in FIG. 545, in the fourth control example as well, the items from “symbol” to “transfer data” which are types of the drawing list are the same as in the first control example. The detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 546 is a diagram showing the details of the drawing list B in detail. The drawing list B is an effect mode for executing a display in which the image of the background A is gradually changed to the background B, and the back A image and the background B image can be changed over time. An effect for display is executed.

  Specifically, in the drawing list B, detailed information is defined as a background A image in the same manner as the background A image corresponding to the drawing list A, and detailed information corresponding to the background B image is defined. Further, in the detailed information corresponding to the background A image of the drawing list B, a translucent value that increases in accordance with the elapsed time of the drawing list B is set, and the drawing list B is set. As the elapsed time from the time becomes longer, the rear A image is displayed in a display mode (a display mode through which it becomes transparent) that is difficult for the player to discriminate.

  The background B image set in the drawing list B is set with a translucent value that decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the drawing list B. As the elapsed time becomes longer, the rear B image is displayed in a display mode that makes it easier for the player to discriminate. With this configuration, when the display mode is shifted from the background A image to the background B image, the display mode can be shifted without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, in this control example, the background B image is created by processing the display data of the background A image (processing to shift the focus), and the background A image and the background B image are displayed based on the same display data. Therefore, the background A image and the background B image can be displayed in a superimposed manner without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, display control for gradually shifting the background A image to the background B image can be executed without a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Note that the display data of the background B image set in the drawing list B is generated by processing the base data of the background A image, and a predetermined generation condition (a condition that is satisfied when it is determined that a virtual effect is executed) ) Is executed, the background B image generation process is executed, and the display data temporarily stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba is used. The details of the background B image generation processing are the same as the simple image creation processing 3 (see S8452 in FIG. 538) in the third control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, although detailed illustration of the drawing lists C to E is omitted, detailed information is set for the type to be displayed as in the drawing lists A and B described above. Specifically, in the drawing list C, of the detailed information corresponding to the type “background B image” of the drawing list B described above, detailed information in which opacity 0 is set is defined. When a display based on the drawing list C is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display), a background B image (a background image in a completely out of focus mountain mode shown in FIG. 543 (c)) is displayed. ) Is displayed.

  In the drawing list D, detailed information is set for the type “reverse image”. The display data of the reverse image is generated by processing basic data of an object image described later, and when a predetermined generation condition (a condition that is established when it is determined that a virtual effect is executed) is satisfied, The reverse image generation process is executed, and the display data temporarily stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba is used. The contents of the inverted image generation processing are the same as the simple image creation processing 3 (see S8452 in FIG. 538) in the third control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the drawing list E, detailed information is set for the type “object image”, and the display data stored in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is read and detailed information is set. As described above, in the present control example, the inverted image and the accessory image are generated using the same basic data, and therefore the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is determined from the inverted image. In the case of switching to a physical image, it is possible to display without shifting the actual display mode from the black and white inverted display mode (a display mode in which a light guide plate effect display using a light guide plate is simulated).

  As described above, this control example is configured to display images of different display modes on the four image layers (first image layer 2300a to fourth image layer 2300d) in order to execute the virtual effect. The display / non-display of each image layer is switched at a predetermined timing in accordance with the specified contents of the display data table for virtual effect, and only on the liquid crystal display using the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display). Display, a pseudo light guide plate effect display imitating the light guide plate effect provided on the front side (front side) than the liquid crystal display, and a pseudo effect imitating the effect effect provided on the rear surface (back side) than the liquid crystal display It is configured to be an executable effect display.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute a display effect with a high effect without securing a space in the front and rear regions of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, a non-transparent liquid crystal display is used as the third symbol display device 81, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the light guide plate device is not provided on the front (front) side of the third symbol display device 81 is an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the virtual effect described above, a light guide plate device capable of executing the light guide plate effect display may be provided. It is preferable to set the display mode of the reverse image in correspondence with the display mode (light emission color, brightness) that can be emitted and displayed as the light plate effect display.

  By comprising in this way, it can be made hard to understand whether the light guide plate effect display is being performed or the pseudo light guide plate effect display is being performed for the player. In addition, the light guide plate effect display is reflected by a groove (engraved) formed on the light guide plate by marking the object to be displayed on the light guide plate and irradiating light (full color LED) from the side end surface of the light guide plate. Therefore, there is an upper limit to the types of display modes that can be displayed by one light guide plate. Also, if a plurality of light guide plates are provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display, a plurality of grooves (engraved) formed on the light guide plates overlap each other, making it difficult to see the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the type of the actual light guide plate effect display is suppressed, and the light guide plate effect display can be executed in a pseudo manner by the pseudo light guide plate effect display. can do. Moreover, since the pseudo light guide plate effect display is executed using the liquid crystal display, the size and display position of the target image (the treasure chest in this control example) to be displayed can be easily changed, and the effect effect is enhanced. Can do. In addition, the form of the target image can be easily changed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the actual light guide plate effect display and the pseudo light guide plate effect display, the composite light guide plate effect using the pseudo light guide plate effect display so as to complement the actual light guide plate effect display. For example, a part of the subject (character) can be displayed as a light guide plate effect display, and the remaining part of the subject (character) displayed in the light guide plate effect display can be simulated. It is good to comprise so that it may display using a light board effect display. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect display in which the main form and the peripheral effect of the main subject are changed only by changing the display mode of the pseudo light guide plate effect display, thereby further enhancing the effect effect. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 547 and FIG. 548, the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the drawing lists A to E defined by the display data table for virtual effect will be described. To do. In practice, as described above, display modes (designs, effects, etc.) corresponding to the plurality of types shown in FIG. 243 are displayed on the front (front) side of the first image layer 2300a. However, in FIG. 547 and FIG. 548, display contents only for the image layer used as a virtual effect are described, and detailed descriptions of other display modes are omitted.

  FIG. 547 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of the first to fourth image layers in the drawing list A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 544, the drawing list A is a drawing list that is set immediately after the virtual effect is executed, and is a drawing list for displaying the background A image that is in focus. . This background A image is a display image generated by the same display data as the background B image which is the display mode out of focus by the blurring process. Thus, by displaying the background A image immediately after the virtual effect is executed, the player is made aware that the background A image is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display). It is possible to make the player easily feel the depth in the display of the background B image executed later.

  Specifically, in the drawing list A, since only the background A image is displayed, only the first image layer 2300a in which the background A image is set is displayed, and the other second image layer 2300b to fourth image layer 2300d are displayed. It is set to be hidden.

  Next, FIG. 547 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of the first to fourth image layers in the drawing list B. FIG. The drawing list B is a drawing list that is set after the background A image is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (after setting the drawing list A), as shown in FIG. It is a drawing list for performing effects for gradually shifting the focus of the A image and displaying the background B image.

  In the drawing list B, in order to gradually display the background B image in addition to the background A image, the first image layer 2300a in which the background A image is set is displayed, and the second image in which the background B image is set. The layer 2300b is set to be gradually displayed. In order to gradually display the image of the second image layer 2300b, it is realized by gradually increasing the contrast and sharpness values for the second image layer. Specifically, in this control example, immediately after the drawing list B is set, the translucent value “0” of the background A image is set, and the translucent value “255” of the background B image is set.

  Then, as the address is updated (elapsed time), the translucency value of the background A image gradually increases (display control is performed so as to gradually transmit), and the translucency value of the background B image gradually decreases. In the end, only the background B image is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 543 (c)). ). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect display in which the display mode (mountain mode background image) displayed in common for the background A image and the background B image is gradually blurred. The player can have an illusion that the mountain mode background image is displayed behind the actual display surface of the symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, the background A image that is in focus and the background B image that is out of focus can be displayed separately, and the focus is gradually shifted by changing the transparency of each image. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the background A image may be gradually blurred and the background A image may be directly blurred.

  In this case, for example, the display control used in the above-described third control example may be used, and for example, a process of gradually reducing the resolution of the background A image may be executed. Thereby, since the clarity (sharpness) of the boundary line of each display mode displayed as the background A image gradually decreases, it is possible to visually recognize a display image that is out of focus.

  Further, in this control example, while the drawing list B is set, the process of changing the translucency values of the background A image and the background B image according to the elapsed time is executed. Without limiting to this, the drawing list B group (drawing list B1 to drawing list B255) in which different translucency values are set is configured separately, and one drawing list is selected from the drawing list B group according to the elapsed time. May be configured to set. In this case, for example, when the time for setting the drawing list B is varied (for example, when a different production period is selectable as the production period of the virtual production), the setting status of the drawing list B group is varied. For example, the rendering period can be easily varied by using a pattern in which all drawing lists are set in order and a pattern in which a drawing list is set by skipping one by one.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the background A image and the background B image are configured to be displayed in the drawing list B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background image of the mountain mode that is the background A image extends in the depth direction. A supplemental display mode for emphasizing the player with the illusion of moving may be displayed. For example, during the setting period of the drawing list B, it may be configured to continuously display a focused display mode (for example, mark display) on a part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the background B image is out of focus by comparing the supplementary display mode described above with the background B image. Therefore, the illusion that the background B image has moved in the depth direction due to the focal parallax can be easily made.

  FIG. 548 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of the first to fourth image layers when the drawing lists C and D are alternately displayed. The drawing list C is a drawing list that displays only the background B image that is out of focus, and is set when the setting period of the drawing list B has elapsed. The drawing list C is configured to be alternately set with a drawing list D to be described later, and a display mode (set in the drawing list D) by periodically displaying a background B image out of focus. This is used in order to make the (reverse image) appear to float to the front side (front side) of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  The drawing list D is a drawing list that is set to display an inverted image obtained by reversing the feature image (see FIG. 543 (e)) in black and white. By setting the drawing list D, the drawing list D is set. As shown in d), an inverted image in which only the outline portion of the object (treasure box) displayed in the accessory image (see FIG. 543 (e)) is emphasized is displayed. This reverse image is an image in which the outline portion of the object (treasure box) is displayed using a single color (for example, blue) on a black background, and is similar to the display mode displayed in the light guide plate effect display. Is a display image that is reproduced in a pseudo manner.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 544, during the period in which the drawing list C and the drawing list D are alternately displayed, the display period of the drawing list C is longer than the display period of the drawing list D. Defines a display data table for virtual effect. As a result, the inversion image in focus blinks while the background image of the out-of-focus mountain mode is displayed, so that the player who focuses on the inversion image The B image is out of focus even though it is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so the inverted image is displayed on the front side (front side) of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It can make it easy to create an illusion.

  In this control example, the virtual effect display data table is defined so that the drawing list C and the drawing list D are not displayed at the same time, and the afterimage of the drawing list C that is displayed for a longer time than the drawing list D. Using the effect, the situation where the reverse image is displayed on the near side of the background B image that is out of focus is reproduced, but not limited to this, the drawing list C and the drawing list D are You may comprise so that it may display simultaneously.

  In this control example, the reverse image is displayed in a state where only the background B image is displayed, that is, in a state where the background image in the mountain mode is completely out of focus. The reverse image may be displayed during the effect display (during the setting period of the drawing list B) in which the focus of the background image in the mountain mode is gradually shifted. With this configuration, a reverse image that is in focus is displayed in a situation in which the background image in the mountain mode is displayed so as to gradually move in the depth direction. An illusion of approaching the front side can be provided to the player, and the production effect can be further enhanced.

  The contents of the alternate display of the drawing lists C and D (that is, the back B image and the reverse image are alternately displayed) will be described in detail. The first image layer 2300a and the fourth image layer 2400d are not displayed and the back This is realized by alternately switching the display of the second image layer 2300b where the B image is set and the display of the third image layer 2300c where the inverted image is set.

  FIG. 548 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of the first to fourth image layers in the drawing list E. The drawing list E is a drawing list used when displaying an object image in focus as a real image of the target image (treasure box) displayed as an inverted image. As shown in FIG. 544, the drawing list C, It is a drawing list set after the alternate display period of D has elapsed.

  Specifically, in the drawing list E, only the fourth image layer 2300d in which the image data of the accessory image is set is displayed in order to display only the accessory image, and the first image layer 2300a to the third image layer are displayed. 2300c is set to be non-displayed. In this way, in the drawing list E, only the focused object images are displayed, so that the inversion during the period in which the out-of-focus background B image and the inversion image in focus are alternately displayed is displayed. It is possible to make the player have an illusion that an object image is displayed behind the image.

  Furthermore, in this control example, since the inverted image and the accessory image are generated based on the same display data, the target image (treasure box) displayed as the inverted image that has been reversed in black and white suddenly becomes a real image. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to make an illusion that an actual accessory (treasure box) exists on the back side of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, as shown in FIG. 548, the feature image and the reverse image are displayed at the same magnification, but instead of the target image (treasure box) of the reverse image. However, it may be configured to reduce the size and display the accessory image. By configuring in this way, the size of the target image (treasure chest) can be changed, so that it is easy to make an illusion that an object image is displayed on the back side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Can do.

  In addition, the depth of the target image is not limited to the configuration used in the present control example, by changing factors such as the shadow, overlap, size, texture gradient, etc. that are visually used by the player for depth recognition. You may comprise so that a position may be made an illusion.

  In the above control example, a total of four image layers have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or less image layers may be used, or five or more image layers may be used. May be.

  Further, the image layer may be set individually depending on the image type. For example, two image layers may be prepared for the rear image, three image layers may be prepared for the effect image, and the rear image and the effect image may be displayed in combination.

  Further, the back B image and the reverse image are alternately displayed. However, the reverse image only needs to be displayed when the player is out of focus (focus). Inverted images may be alternately displayed (flashing display) during display. Moreover, it is possible to measure that the player's focus (focus) is shifted by a camera or the like, and vary the timing of alternately displaying (flashing display) according to the measurement result. Of course, the images displayed alternately (blinking display) may not be a reverse image but may be an accessory image.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display) is used to simulate the light guide plate effect display executed on the front side of the display surface. The pseudo light guide plate effect display and the pseudo feature display that reproduces the fact that the feature (structure) exists on the back side of the display surface can be executed.

  Specifically, a display mode in which the player is out of focus and a display mode in focus are displayed on the display surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81 at the same time, and the display is performed using the principle of focal parallax. 3D display device 81 is configured to give a sense of depth, and a display mode imitating light guide plate effect display while shifting the focus of the background image displayed on the display surface of 3rd symbol display device 81 ( By displaying the reverse image) in a focused manner, a pseudo light guide plate effect display that makes the player have the illusion that the light guide plate effect display is being executed in front of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Configured to be executable.

  With this configuration, the light guide plate effect display can be executed in a pseudo manner without actually using the light guide plate structure, so that a front side space on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is secured. Even if it does not do, the production effect can be enhanced. In this control example, a non-transparent liquid crystal display is used as the third symbol display device 81, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the light guide plate device is not provided on the front (front) side of the third symbol display device 81 is an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the virtual effect described above, a light guide plate device capable of executing the light guide plate effect display may be provided. It is preferable to set the display mode of the reverse image in correspondence with the display mode (light emission color, brightness) that can be emitted and displayed as the light plate effect display.

  By comprising in this way, it can be made hard to understand whether the light guide plate effect display is being performed or the pseudo light guide plate effect display is being performed for the player. In addition, the light guide plate effect display is reflected by a groove (engraved) formed on the light guide plate by marking the object to be displayed on the light guide plate and irradiating light (full color LED) from the side end surface of the light guide plate. Therefore, there is an upper limit to the types of display modes that can be displayed by one light guide plate. Also, if a plurality of light guide plates are provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display, a plurality of grooves (engraved) formed on the light guide plates overlap each other, making it difficult to see the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the type of the actual light guide plate effect display is suppressed, and the light guide plate effect display can be executed in a pseudo manner by the pseudo light guide plate effect display. can do. Moreover, since the pseudo light guide plate effect display is executed using the liquid crystal display, the size and display position of the target image (the treasure chest in this control example) to be displayed can be easily changed, and the effect effect is enhanced. Can do. In addition, the form of the target image can be easily changed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the actual light guide plate effect display and the pseudo light guide plate effect display, the composite light guide plate effect using the pseudo light guide plate effect display so as to complement the actual light guide plate effect display. For example, a part of the subject (character) can be displayed as a light guide plate effect display, and the remaining part of the subject (character) displayed in the light guide plate effect display can be simulated. It is good to comprise so that it may display using a light board effect display. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect display in which the main form and the peripheral effect of the main subject are changed only by changing the display mode of the pseudo light guide plate effect display, thereby further enhancing the effect effect. be able to.

  In addition, in the present control example, the actual accessory is displayed from the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 by configuring the accessory image serving as the basic data of the inverted image to be displayed after the pseudo light guide plate effect display. Also, the pseudo-object display that makes the illusion that it is arranged on the back side is configured to be executable.

  By configuring in this way, there is an accessory on the back side of the display surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81 without securing the space on the back side of the display surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81. Since such an effect can be executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when an accessory is actually disposed on the back side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the accessory is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. For example, a transmissive liquid crystal display (organic EL display) that does not require a backlight must be used as the configuration of the third symbol display device 81 provided on the front side of the accessory. Although the manufacturing cost has increased, according to the configuration of the present control example, only the display of the third symbol display device 81 is used to perform the pseudo-object display, so that the third symbol is displayed. While suppressing the manufacturing cost of the display device 81, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Further, in the method of actually arranging the accessory on the back side of the third symbol display device 81, the size and type of the accessory to be provided according to the space secured on the back side of the third symbol display device 81. However, it is difficult to sufficiently enhance the production effect, but the illusion is that it is arranged on the back side of the third symbol display device 81 by using the pseudo-object display according to this control example. It is possible to set the type and size of the feature to be raised with a higher degree of freedom.

  Further, in this control example, the pseudo light guide plate effect display and the pseudo object display can be executed as a series of virtual effects, so that the front side and the back side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are configured. It is possible to execute an effect with depth in both directions. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced with respect to the depth direction, and the width in the depth direction can be relatively widened, so that the illusion of the pseudo light guide plate production display and the pseudo-object display can be made easier. it can.

  In addition, as long as it is a structure which can perform a pseudo | simulation light guide plate effect display and a pseudo-object display with respect to a player using the principle of a focus parallax, it will not be restricted to the structure used for this invention, and other structures are used. May be. For example, in the present control example, the display contents of the pseudo light guide plate effect display and the pseudo object display are described using only display modes that can be displayed on the first image layer 2300a to the fourth image layer 2300. The focus parallax principle may be applied to other display modes (for example, the third pattern, effects, etc.) displayed on the display surface of the display device 81 so as to shift the focus.

  Moreover, in this control example, since it is comprised so that a pseudo display may be performed using the 3rd symbol display apparatus (liquid crystal display) 81, without using an actual apparatus (light guide plate, an accessory), for example, Based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed, it is possible to change the display mode of the pseudo light guide plate effect display or the display mode of the pseudo-object display. Therefore, a variety of effects can be executed as compared with the case where an actual device (light guide plate, accessory) is used.

  In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit), it is preferable that a large target image is easily selected as an accessory image or a reverse image. With this configuration, the pseudo light guide plate effect display corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the pseudo-objects can be changed by changing only the reduction rate without changing the base data (display data) of the target image. Display can be performed. It should be noted that a plurality of dedicated target images used for the pseudo light guide plate effect display and the pseudo object display are prepared, and the lottery result of the special symbol, the type of the variation effect being executed, and the set gaming state. Of course, different target images may be selected, or a selection unit that allows the player to select an arbitrary target image may be provided.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The fourth control example is different from the above-described third control example in that a simple image creation command corresponding to a virtual effect can be set, and the rest is the same. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those in the third control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the variable display setting process 4 (S3174) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 549 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 4 (S3174). This variable display setting process 4 (S3174) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 3 (see FIGS. 534 and S3154) in the third control example.

  Of the variable display setting process 4 (S3174) in the fourth control example, in each process of S4201 to S4203, S4251 to S4252, and S4205 to S4211, the variable display setting process 3 in the third control example (see FIGS. 534 and S3154). ) Of S4201 to S4203, S4251 to S4252, and S4205 to S4211 are executed.

  In the variable display setting process 4 (S3174) in the fourth control example, after performing the process of S4252, it is determined whether there is a virtual effect setting (S4271). If it is determined that there is a virtual effect setting (S4271: Yes), a simple image creation command corresponding to the virtual effect is set (S4272), and the process proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no virtual effect setting (S4271: No), the process of S4272 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205.

  In the process of S4272, when the simple image creation command corresponding to the virtual effect is set, the set simple image creation command is output to the display control device 114 as in the third control example described above. When the display control device 114 receives the simple image creation command (S8451: Yes in FIG. 537), the virtual effect display data table is set in accordance with the execution timing of the virtual effect, and the display control device. Display data corresponding to the background B image (blurred image) and the reverse image is generated based on the display data stored in the character ROM 234 of 114, and is temporarily stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba.

  By configuring in this way, it is stored in advance before the timing at which the background B image is actually displayed in the virtual effect and the timing at which the reverse image is displayed, that is, when the virtual effect is determined to be executed. Since the display data for virtual effect can be generated from the displayed display data (display data corresponding to the background A image and the accessory image), the display control process when executing the virtual effect is distributed and executed. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

  In this control example, when the simple image creation command is received by the display control device 114, the above-described processing for generating the virtual effect display data is executed. What is necessary is just to comprise so that the display data for virtual productions may be produced | generated at the timing which can disperse | distribute processing load, for example, in the state which has received the simple image creation command for virtual productions (every 20 milliseconds) When it is determined that there is a free time during which the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)) that is executed is not executed, a process of generating display data for virtual effect may be executed.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the front side (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) and the back side (back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described above. The display effect using the side area is virtually realized using only the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to execute a display effect with a high effect without securing a space in the front and rear regions of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in this control example, in order to execute a virtual effect, the four image layers (the first image layer 2300a to the fourth image layer 2300d) are configured to display images having different display modes. The display non-display of each image layer is switched at a predetermined timing according to the specified contents of the display data table, and the display on the liquid crystal display using only the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display) and the liquid crystal Pseudo light guide plate effect display imitating the light guide plate effect provided on the front (front side) than the display, and pseudo object effect display imitating the effect effect provided on the rear surface (back side) than the liquid crystal display , Configured to run.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute a display effect with a high effect without securing a space in the front and rear regions of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, a non-transparent liquid crystal display is used as the third symbol display device 81, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the light guide plate device is not provided on the front (front) side of the third symbol display device 81 is an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the virtual effect described above, a light guide plate device capable of executing the light guide plate effect display may be provided. It is preferable to set the display mode of the reverse image in correspondence with the display mode (light emission color, brightness) that can be emitted and displayed as the light plate effect display.

  By comprising in this way, it can be made hard to understand whether the light guide plate effect display is being performed or the pseudo light guide plate effect display is being performed for the player. In addition, the light guide plate effect display is reflected by a groove (engraved) formed on the light guide plate by marking the object to be displayed on the light guide plate and irradiating light (full color LED) from the side end surface of the light guide plate. Therefore, there is an upper limit to the types of display modes that can be displayed by one light guide plate. Also, if a plurality of light guide plates are provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display, a plurality of grooves (engraved) formed on the light guide plates overlap each other, making it difficult to see the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the type of the actual light guide plate effect display is suppressed, and the light guide plate effect display can be executed in a pseudo manner by the pseudo light guide plate effect display. can do. Moreover, since the pseudo light guide plate effect display is executed using the liquid crystal display, the size and display position of the target image (the treasure chest in this control example) to be displayed can be easily changed, and the effect effect is enhanced. Can do. In addition, the form of the target image can be easily changed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the actual light guide plate effect display and the pseudo light guide plate effect display, the composite light guide plate effect using the pseudo light guide plate effect display so as to complement the actual light guide plate effect display. For example, a part of the subject (character) can be displayed as a light guide plate effect display, and the remaining part of the subject (character) displayed in the light guide plate effect display can be simulated. It is good to comprise so that it may display using a light board effect display. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect display in which the main form and the peripheral effect of the main subject are changed only by changing the display mode of the pseudo light guide plate effect display, thereby further enhancing the effect effect. be able to.

  In addition, in the present control example, the actual accessory is displayed from the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 by configuring the accessory image serving as the basic data of the inverted image to be displayed after the pseudo light guide plate effect display. Also, the pseudo-object display that makes the illusion that it is arranged on the back side is configured to be executable.

  By configuring in this way, there is an accessory on the back side of the display surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81 without securing the space on the back side of the display surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81. Since such an effect can be executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when an accessory is actually disposed on the back side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the accessory is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. For example, a transmissive liquid crystal display (organic EL display) that does not require a backlight must be used as the configuration of the third symbol display device 81 provided on the front side of the accessory. Although the manufacturing cost has increased, according to the configuration of the present control example, only the display of the third symbol display device 81 is used to perform the pseudo-object display, so that the third symbol is displayed. While suppressing the manufacturing cost of the display device 81, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Further, in the method of actually arranging the accessory on the back side of the third symbol display device 81, the size and type of the accessory to be provided according to the space secured on the back side of the third symbol display device 81. However, it is difficult to sufficiently enhance the production effect, but the illusion is that it is arranged on the back side of the third symbol display device 81 by using the pseudo-object display according to this control example. It is possible to set the type and size of the feature to be raised with a higher degree of freedom.

  Further, in this control example, the pseudo light guide plate effect display and the pseudo object display can be executed as a series of virtual effects, so that the front side and the back side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are configured. It is possible to execute an effect with depth in both directions. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced with respect to the depth direction, and the width in the depth direction can be relatively widened, so that the illusion of the pseudo light guide plate production display and the pseudo-object display can be made easier. it can.

  In addition, as long as it is a structure which can perform a pseudo | simulation light guide plate effect display and a pseudo-object display with respect to a player using the principle of a focus parallax, it will not be restricted to the structure used for this invention, and other structures are used. May be. For example, in the present control example, the display contents of the pseudo light guide plate effect display and the pseudo object display are described using only display modes that can be displayed on the first image layer 2300a to the fourth image layer 2300. The focus parallax principle may be applied to other display modes (for example, the third pattern, effects, etc.) displayed on the display surface of the display device 81 so as to shift the focus.

  Moreover, in this control example, since it is comprised so that a pseudo display may be performed using the 3rd symbol display apparatus (liquid crystal display) 81, without using an actual apparatus (light guide plate, an accessory), for example, Based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed, it is possible to change the display mode of the pseudo light guide plate effect display or the display mode of the pseudo-object display. Therefore, a variety of effects can be executed as compared with the case where an actual device (light guide plate, accessory) is used.

  In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit), it is preferable that a large target image is easily selected as an accessory image or a reverse image. With this configuration, the pseudo light guide plate effect display corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the pseudo-objects can be changed by changing only the reduction rate without changing the base data (display data) of the target image. Display can be performed. It should be noted that a plurality of dedicated target images used for the pseudo light guide plate effect display and the pseudo object display are prepared, and the lottery result of the special symbol, the type of the variation effect being executed, and the set gaming state. Of course, different target images may be selected, or a selection unit that allows the player to select an arbitrary target image may be provided.

  In the fourth control example described above, the various pseudo displays described above are executed using the entire display surface of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display surface of the three-symbol display device 81 may be partitioned into a plurality of sections, and the above-described pseudo display may be executed within the section. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously perform the normal effect display and the pseudo display, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, a moving means for moving the third symbol display device 81 in the depth direction is provided, and the third symbol display device is adapted to the display mode of the above-described pseudo display (pseudo light guide plate effect display, pseudo object display). You may comprise 81 so that movement control may be carried out to the front-back direction (depth direction). By comprising in this way, the effect of pseudo display can be further enhanced.

  The technical idea and configuration described in the third control example described above may be added as appropriate to the configuration of the fourth control example described above. For example, the background B image is displayed and the background A image is displayed. It may be generated by executing low resolution processing on display data for this purpose. In this case, the processing for executing the low resolution processing and the content of the low resolution processing may be appropriately selected from the plurality of technical configurations described in the third control example described above.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a opens, and the state shifts from a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Thus, the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is made easier to execute. In addition, a probabilistic state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) or a short time state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) where a high probability state of a normal symbol is set as a gaming state ) Is set, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, and a lot of lotteries for the second special symbol can be executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed, so that it is possible to provide a state advantageous to the player. However, there is a problem that the game executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes monotonous and bored by the player.

  On the other hand, in the fifth control example, when a ball enters a special entrance that makes it easier for a ball to enter when a normal symbol lottery is won, a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol or The lottery opportunity of the second special symbol is established. In other words, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a lottery opportunity of any of a plurality of special symbol types is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide pleasure that allows the player to predict which type of special symbol will be established when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set.

  In addition, the fifth control example is configured to vary the type of special symbol for which a lottery opportunity is established based on the number of balls that have entered the special entrance. Thereby, it becomes possible to vary the type of the special symbol for which the lottery opportunity is established according to the number of balls that the player has entered the special entrance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new gameability that makes it possible to consider how many balls are to be awarded in the special winning opening when a winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery.

  First, with reference to FIG. 550, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 550 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 of the fifth control example. The fifth control example is largely different from the first control example described above in that a distribution winning device 10700 is provided in the right region of the game board 13. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same configuration is denoted by the same reference numeral and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution winning apparatus 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 551 and 552. FIG. 551 is an enlarged view showing the configuration of the distribution winning device 10700, and FIG. 552 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the sphere flow in the distribution winning device 10700.

  A special through gate 10067 is provided in the right area of the game board 13, and when a ball passes through the special through gate 10067, a normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the special electric accessory 10701a is released. The special through gate 10067 is controlled by the same control processing as the through gate 67 of the first control example described above, and the special electric accessory 10701a is the same as the electric combination 640a of the first control example described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the special electric accessory 10701a is in an open state, a ball that has been fired by a right-handed game and has flowed down the right region wins a special winning opening 10730. The sphere that has won the special prize opening 10730 passes through the operation channel passage sensor 10701, and depending on the position of the switching valve 10702, either the first channel having the first operation port 10703a or the second operation port 10703b. It is distributed.

  In this control example, the number of balls won in the special prize opening 10730 is measured during the period from when the normal symbol high probability state is set to when the normal symbol low probability state is set, and switching is performed based on the measurement result. The valve 10702 is configured to operate. Specifically, the number of winning balls to the special winning opening 10730 after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is measured based on the detection result of the operation passage passage sensor 10701, and the game per special drawing (special electric role) The position of the switching valve 10702 is switched based on the measurement result at the end timing of the game 10701a to be released.

  The switching valve 10702 is configured to operate at the end timing of a game per game (per game where the special electric accessory 10701a is opened), so that a ball is present in the special winning opening 10730. Does not work. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 10702 in operation and the ball from coming into contact with each other, causing the switching valve 10702 to malfunction or to cause clogging of the ball. Further, a solenoid is used for the operation of the switching valve 10702, and when power is not supplied to the solenoid, the switching valve 10702 is positioned at a position where the ball is distributed to the flow path on the disadvantageous side for the player. It is composed.

  The first operation port 10703a is mechanically connected to the lower first entry port 10640b1, and is physically (mechanically) attached to the lower first entry port 10640b1 by a ball that has entered the first operation port 10703a. The first working combination 10640b is in an open state (a state indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 551). Similarly, the second operation port 10703b is mechanically connected to the upper second entry port 10640a1, and physically (mechanically) the upper second entry port 10640a1 by a ball that has entered the second operation port 10703b. The second actuating member 10640a associated therewith is configured to be in an open state (a state indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 551).

  Among the spheres flowing down the right region, the spheres that did not win the special prize opening 10730 pass through the respective combinations in the order of the second working combination 10640a and the first working combination 10640a while flowing down the meandering flow path. For example, when the second working combination 10640a is in the open state, the ball enters the upper second entrance 10640a1 and the first working combination 10640b is in the open state. Is configured to enter the lower first entrance 10640b1. In addition, when both the second working combination 10640a and the first working combination 10640b are in the open state, a ball that flows down is provided in the right region so as to preferentially enter the upper second entrance 10640a1. The second actuating member 10640a is configured to operate so as to block the meandering flow path formed.

  When the predetermined number (two) of balls enters the upper second entrance 10640a1, the second actuating member 10640a described above is mechanically brought into contact with the actuating unit (not shown). To the closed state (the state indicated by the solid line in FIG. 551). In addition, the first working combination 10640a also shifts to the mechanically closed state (the state indicated by the solid line in FIG. 551) when a predetermined number (two) of balls enter the lower first entrance 10640b1. It is configured to do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 552, an example of game content when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set and a right-handed game is performed in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. FIG. 552 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the status of each component provided in the right region of the game board 13 during a right-handed game. As shown in FIG. 552, when a win is made in the normal symbol lottery executed when the ball passes through the special through gate 10067, the special electric accessory 10701a is opened and the right strike is made in the right strike game. The sphere flowing down the area is in a state where it is easy to win a special winning opening 10730. When the special electric accessory 10701a is opened, the special electric accessory 10701a covers the opening of the meandering flow path in which the lower first winning port 10640b1 and the upper second incoming port 10640a1 are formed. Therefore, the ball flowing down the right region can be surely awarded to the special prize opening 10730.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, in the hit game (a hit game in which the special electric accessory 10701a is opened) executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special electric A winning game is executed in which the accessory 10701a is opened only once. And, it is configured such that any one of 1.5 seconds to 5 seconds is set as a period during which the special electric accessory 10701a is opened.

  As described above, the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a executed during the winning game is defined as one opening operation, although the opening period is different, and the special electric actor 10701a is executed during the winning game. Since the ball is configured not to be in a closed state, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down the meandering flow path in a period from when the winning game is executed until the winning game is completed. That is, the ball can be prevented from entering the lower first entrance 10640b1 or the upper second entrance 10640a1 during the winning game.

  Therefore, the ball that won the special prize opening 10730 according to the switching valve 10702 switched based on the number of balls won to the special prize opening 10730 during the normal game is the first operation port 10703a or the second operation. One entry into the entrance corresponding to the working combination (first working combination 10640b, second working combination 10640a) that entered into any of the mouths 10703b and actuated based on the entry is performed once. Since it is possible to prevent the winning game from being executed a plurality of times, each time the winning game is executed, it can be enjoyed where the switching valve 10702 is located after the winning game is completed.

  In this control example, as described above, the ball is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower first winning hole 10640b1 and the upper second winning hole 10640a1 during one hit game. After the closing condition of the actuating tool activated during the winning game is established, it is suppressed that the actuating agent is actuated by the ball that has won the special prize opening 10730 again. As a winning game to be executed when winning in the symbol lottery, it is possible to set a special winning game in which the special electric accessory 10701a is opened a plurality of times during one winning game. As an interval period between the second opening operation and the second opening operation, a period during which at least two or more balls fired by the right-handed game can flow down to the meandering flow path (for example, 1 5 seconds) may be configured to be set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, a plurality of balls can be entered into the lower first winning hole 10640b1 or the upper second winning hole 10640a1 during one hit game. Thereby, for example, when a special winning game is executed, the ball can flow down the flow path (flow path that allows the ball to flow down to the second operation port 10703b) by the switching valve 10702 that is advantageous to the player. In the case of the position, a plurality of balls can be entered into the upper second entrance 10640a1 during one hit game, and the special hit game can be a win game advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special hit game is executed, the switching valve 10702 has a disadvantageous flow path for the player (a flow path capable of causing the first working port 10703a to flow down the ball) and a position where the ball can flow down. In such a case, during a single hit game, a plurality of balls will enter the lower first entrance 10640b1, which is a lottery opportunity for the player than the upper second entrance 10640a1, so that a special hit The game can be a hit game that is disadvantageous to the player.

  In this way, when the same winning game is executed, the degree of advantage of the winning game can be varied according to the game situation (switching situation of the switching valve 10702) at the time when the winning game is executed. It is possible for the player to pay attention not only to the result of lottery of games per game, but also to the game situation at that time.

  Further, as the special winning game described above, the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a may be executed three times or more during one hit game (special winning game). Even during the opening operation, the ball may be allowed to enter the lower first winning opening 10640b1 or the upper second winning opening 10640a1. With this configuration, the ball can enter the lower first winning port 10640b1 or the upper second winning port 10640a1 during the winning game, so that the game can be executed efficiently.

  Returning to FIG. 552, the description will be continued. The special electric accessory 10701a is in an open state, and the ball that has won the special prize opening 10730 flows down the flow path f1, contacts the switching valve 10702, flows down the first flow path f2, and enters the first operation port 10703a. Sphere. When a ball enters the first working port 10703a, the first working combination 10640b is operated, and the ball enters the lower first entering port 10640b 1. In FIG. 552, the switching valve 10702 is disposed at a position closing the second flow path f3 where the ball can flow down to the second working port 10703b, and the ball enters the second working port 10703b. The state which cannot be obtained is shown.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 552, even if the ball enters the first operating port 10703a during the winning game and the first operating tool 10640b is opened, the special electric player 10701a is not played during the winning game. In order to maintain the open state and prevent the ball from flowing down the meandering flow path, the first working combination 10640b or the second working combination 10640a is activated during the winning game. A game is performed, and after the winning game is finished, a game is performed in which a ball is entered into the lower first winning port 10640b1 or the upper second winning port 10640a1.

  By configuring in this way, during the winning game, the ball enters the lower first winning hole 10640b1 or the upper second winning hole 10640a1, and the corresponding special symbol lottery (variation) is executed. Since it can suppress, it can suppress that the game incomprehensible to a player is provided by having a plurality of games played simultaneously.

  Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 552, a flow path that allows a ball to enter the lower first winning opening 10640b1 or the upper second winning opening 10640a1 is formed by a meandering flow path. ing. Thereby, since the momentum of the sphere flowing down the flow path can be weakened, the impact received by the first working combination 10640b or the second working combination 10640a can be weakened. In addition, since the ball flowing down the flow path is formed in a meandering shape so as to flow down toward the lower first winning port 10640b1 or the upper second winning port 10640a1, the first working combination 10640b or the second When the working combination 10640a is in an open state, it becomes easy to receive the ball on the base side of each working combination. Therefore, the impact received by the first working combination 10640b or the second working combination 10640a can be weakened.

  In this control example, the special through gate 10067, the special winning opening 10730, the lower first winning opening 10640b1, and the upper second winning opening 10640a1 are provided in the right region where a ball launched by a right-handed game can flow down. Therefore, in a state in which a ball can enter the lower first entrance 10640b1 where a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed, the player is allowed to enter the lower first entrance 10640b1 without entering the ball. It is difficult to make a state in which a ball can enter the second entrance 10640a1 after an advantageous lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an intentional illegal game from being performed so that only an advantageous lottery is executed.

<About the production contents in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 553 and FIG. 554, characteristic production contents executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 553 (a) shows an example of a display screen displayed during a normal game (during a game per normal game). In this control example, the change-over valve 10702 is configured to operate in accordance with the number of balls won in the special prize opening 10730 during the normal game (during a game per normal game), and when the normal game is started. In accordance with the position of the switching valve 10702 at this time, the type of the operating port to be awarded at this time is determined. In FIG. 553 (a), in order to show the number of winnings to the special winning opening 10730, which is necessary for the ball to be able to win in the operating opening (second operating opening 10703b) advantageous to the player in the next common figure. An effect during the game that displays the information is executed.

  By executing such an effect, the player can be motivated to play a game during a game per game. In addition, if the ball is in a state where a ball can be won in the operating port (second operating port 10703b) advantageous to the player at the time of the next general drawing at the present time, the effect shown in FIG. 553 (b) is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the player can win a ball in the operation port (second operation port 10703b) advantageous to the player by winning the ball too much during the normal game.

  Specifically, the number of winnings at the special winning opening 10730 at the present time is the number of advantageous winnings at which the player can win the ball at the operating opening (second operating opening 10703b) that is advantageous to the player per the next chart. If there is not, the difference between the number of advantageous winnings and the current winning number is calculated as shown in FIG. 553 (a), and the count-up display 851 is displayed in a display mode for indicating the calculated value. This count-up display 851 is a display mode in which the player can be notified in a stepwise manner of the number of winnings required to reach the number of advantageous winnings, and is displayed according to the number of winning balls in the special winning opening 10730 A count effect is performed in which is variable.

  The count-up display 851 includes a chance mode display 851a for notifying the player that the number of advantageous winnings has been reached, a first mode 851b for informing stepwise the number of remaining winnings until reaching the number of advantageous winnings, The second aspect 851c and the third aspect 851d are formed from the third aspect 851d and the second aspect corresponding to the increase in the number of winnings to the special winning opening 10730 and the decrease in the difference to the advantageous winning number. The mode is changed in the order of the mode 851c and the first mode 851b. When the number of advantageous winnings is reached, an effect of changing the display mode of the chance mode display 851a is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 553 (a), a display area Ds10 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and a combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result of the normal drawing lottery is stopped and displayed. . Since FIG. 553 (a) is a display screen during a game per game, the combination of symbols “maru” indicating the game per game is stopped and displayed. Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, there is formed a guidance display area Ds11 that visually guides a place (a specific part of the right area) that the player should aim at during a game per game, and is provided in the right area. A schematic diagram schematically showing the vicinity of the special prize opening 10730 is displayed. Further, in the secondary display area Ds, a “right-handed” comment is displayed for guiding that a right-handed game is performed during a game per game.

  In this control example, when the difference between the current winning number and the advantageous winning number is within four, the count-up display 851 shown in FIG. 553 (a) is displayed, and the ball is displayed in the special winning opening 10730. Each time a prize is won, the third mode 851d displayed as “+1”, the second mode 851c displayed as “+2”, and the first mode 851b displayed as “+3” are sequentially lit and displayed. If a ball is awarded to the special prize opening 10730 while the first mode 851b is lit, a chance mode display 851a is lit.

  In this control example, the number of winnings (the number of remaining winnings) to the special winning opening 10730 until reaching the number of advantageous winnings is directly displayed using the count-up display 851. Any configuration that can suggest to the player the number of remaining winnings until the number is reached is possible.For example, a reaching suggestion mode that indicates that the number of advantageous winnings has been reached and a remaining amount until the number of advantageous winnings is reached. It is possible to display at least a first suggestion mode that suggests that the number of winning prizes is within a predetermined number (for example, five) and a second suggestion mode that suggests that there are more remaining prizes than the first suggestion mode. What should be configured? Accordingly, the game per game can be executed while predicting the number of balls to be awarded to the special winning opening 10730 during the game per game, and the interest of the game during the game per game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 553 (b), when the current winning number is an advantageous winning number, a display mode in which a character imitating a rabbit is taking a break is displayed in the main display area Dm. A reaching suggestion effect is executed to suggest to the player that this is the case. When this arrival suggestion effect is executed, the guidance display mode Ds11 displayed in FIG. 553 (a) is erased, and the display mode for causing the player to play a right-handed game is reduced. The sub display area Ds is configured to display a “right-handed” comment in the same manner as in FIG. 553 (a) described above, so that it can be grasped that the current state is in an advantageous state (during game play). It is configured.

  In this control example, there are a plurality of driving scenarios that are referred to when the position of the switching valve 10702 is switched according to the number of balls entered into the special prize opening 10730, and depending on the type of jackpot for which the time reduction state is set. It is configured to set different driving scenarios. The plurality of driving scenarios are defined such that the number of balls entered into the special prize opening 10730 is different from the driving content of the switching valve 10702. For example, the number of balls entered reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). A driving scenario for switching the position of the switching valve 10702 every time and a driving scenario for switching the position of the switching valve 10702 every time a specific number larger than a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) is defined. Furthermore, a driving scenario that makes it easy to maintain a state where a ball enters the operating port (second operating port 10703b) advantageous to the player and a difficult driving scenario are defined.

  In this case, when a driving scenario in which the position of the switching valve 10702 is switched finely is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 554 (a) is displayed. In FIG. 554 (a), the remaining number of times in the time-saving state, the number of changes in the first special symbol executed during the time reduction, and the number of changes in the second special symbol are displayed. On the other hand, when a driving scenario is set in which a ball can easily enter the operating port (second operating port 10703b) advantageous to the player, as shown in FIG. 554 (b), it is advantageous to the player. Characters of “super temple search mode”, which is a notification mode for notifying that a driving scenario is set, are displayed, and a state advantageous to the player (the remaining number of balls entered into the special prize opening 10730) is displayed. The remaining number suggesting mode 804a to be suggested is displayed.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 555 to 560. In the fifth control example, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is partially changed from the first control example described above, and a new solenoid is added to the solenoid 209 connected to the main control device 110. The difference is that the added point is partially changed in the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  First, the electrical configuration of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 555 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 555, in the fifth control example, a lever solenoid 209a and other solenoids 209z are provided as the solenoid 209 with respect to the electrical configuration of the first control example described above (see FIG. 404). Is the same except for the above. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The lever solenoid 209a is an electric drive source for operating the switching valve 10702 provided in the distribution prize winning device 10700, and corresponds to the operation instruction executed in the normal hit control process (see S1071 in FIG. 563). Thus, switching between the on state and the off state is controlled. The lever solenoid 209a is configured to maintain a position (see FIG. 552) that closes the second flow path f3 when the power is off (non-excited state). When the power is on (excited state), the solenoid shaft center is attracted by the electromagnet, and the switching valve 10702 is maintained at the position where the first flow path f2 is blocked (see the dotted line position in FIG. 551). ing.

  The other solenoid 209z is a solenoid other than the above-described lever solenoid 209a, and corresponds to various solenoids used in the above-described control examples. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. The normal hit type counter C8 for setting the hit type of the normal symbol and the acquired normal hit type counter C8 for the counter of the first control example (see FIG. 405) described above. Is different from the normal hit type counter buffer for temporarily storing the value of the normal symbol holding ball storage area and the normal symbol holding ball execution area in the normal symbol holding ball execution area. Other than that, it is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The normal hit type counter C8 determines the display mode of the second symbol display device when the normal symbol is hit, and is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the normal hit type counter C8 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and when the ball passes through the special through gate 10067, the value is the normal value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c (or a normal symbol holding ball execution area when the normal symbol lottery is not being executed).

  Here, if the value of the normal random number counter C5 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number that hits the normal symbol, that is, if the random number is out of the normal symbol, the second symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device is the one when the normal symbol is off.

  FIG. 557 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 557 (a), in the fifth control example, in the case of winning in the normal symbol lottery with respect to the first control example described above, it is referred to when selecting the hit type. A common scenario type selection table 202da, and when a special symbol jackpot ends, a driving scenario selection table 202db that selects a driving scenario of the switching valve 10702 during the change or time reduction based on the selected jackpot type. It is different in the added point. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  The common figure type selection table 202da is a table that is referred to when selecting a hit type (hereinafter referred to as a type per common figure) when a normal symbol lottery is won. Based on the type and gaming state, the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a is determined. The detailed content of the common type selection table 202da will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The drive scenario selection table 202db is a table that defines the drive content of the drive solenoid based on the winning jackpot type. The driving scenario selection table 202db is referred to when the jackpot ends, selects a driving scenario based on the jackpot type won this time (S1371 in FIG. 564), and stores the selected driving scenario in the driving scenario storage area 203da (S1372 in FIG. 564). reference). Then, based on the drive scenario stored at the end timing per attached drawing, the drive scenario of the drive member is determined. The detailed contents of the drive scenario selection table 202db will be described later with reference to FIG. 559 (b).

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 557 (b). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM203 which MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 in this 5th control example has. The fifth control example is different from the contents of the RAM 203 in the first control example described above in that a drive scenario storage area 203da, a common winning prize counter 203db, and a common winning flag 203dc are added. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  The driving scenario storage area 203da is an area for storing and storing a driving scenario set based on the winning jackpot type. This driving scenario storage area 203da stores the driving scenario set based on the jackpot type selected at the time of the jackpot end process (see S1372 in FIG. 564), and refers to the stored driving scenario at the end timing of hitting the normal symbol. The operation content of the drive member is set (see S1612 in FIG. 563).

  The common figure winning number counter 203db is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 10730, and the driving content of the drive member is based on the scenario type set as the common figure winning number counter 203db. Is determined. When the winning symbol counter 203db wins the normal symbol and the game ball enters the special winning opening 10730, the value is incremented by 1 (see S1616 in FIG. 563). Then, at the end timing of hitting the normal symbol, the value is read (see S1610 in FIG. 563), and the drive content of the drive member is set based on the read value and the set drive scenario (in FIG. 563). (See S1613). Then, the value is reset at the jackpot end timing (see S1374 in FIG. 564).

  The common symbol hit flag 203dc is a flag for indicating that a normal symbol is won. The normal symbol hit flag 203dc is set to ON when it is determined that the normal symbol winning process is won in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 561) (see FIG. 561), and the normal symbol hit control process (see FIG. 563). ) And the common figure flag 203dc is on, the common figure flag 203dc is set to off (see S1602 in FIG. 563), and a state command indicating the common figure is set. The common symbol hit command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later (see S1001 in FIG. 562), and the process related to the normal symbol hit is executed based on this command. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 558 (a), the contents of the common figure type selection table 202da will be described. FIG. 558 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table 202da per common figure. As shown in FIG. 558 (a), the common symbol type selection table 202da is referred to when selecting a winning type (hereinafter referred to as a common symbol type) when a normal symbol lottery is won. The opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a is determined on the basis of the determined type per game and the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 558 (a), in the present control example, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the types per common figure are “A per common figure”, “B per common figure”, and “C per common figure”. These three types can be set. Then, the opening operation of the special electric accessory is determined on the basis of the set type per game and the gaming state at the time of winning (see FIG. 558 (b)). That is, since the opening operation of the special electric accessory is determined according to the type of the universal figure, the ease of entering the first operating port 10703a or the second operating port 10703b is determined according to the type of the universal figure. It is configured to be different depending on.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol and the acquired value of the per-general type counter C8 is “0”, “A per universal symbol” is defined. Has been. When the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, out of 100 counter values that can be taken by the type counter C8 per common figure, there is one counter value that is “A per common figure”. When the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol and the normal symbol is drawn in a lottery, the rate at which “A per normal symbol” is determined is 1% (1/100).

  In addition, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, “B per common symbol” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired common symbol type counter C8 is “1 to 98”. Yes. When the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, out of 100 counter values that can be taken by the type counter C8 per common figure, there are 98 counter values that become “B per common figure”. When the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol and the normal symbol lottery is won, the rate at which “B per normal symbol” is determined is 98% (98/100).

  Further, when the game state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, and the value of the acquired universal counter per category counter C8 is “99”, “C per universal symbol” is defined. . When the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, out of 100 counter values that can be taken by the type counter C8 per common figure, there is one counter value that becomes “C per common figure”. When the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol and the winning symbol is a win in the normal symbol lottery, the rate at which “C per normal symbol” is determined is 1% (1/100).

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 558 (b), when the gaming state is set to the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, any of the above-described small hit types (small hits A˜) Even when C) is won, short opening (0.2 seconds) is set as the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a. By configuring in this way, it is impossible to win a game ball in the first operating port 10703a or the second operating port 10703b in the low probability state of the normal symbol. It is possible to prevent the execution of an irregular game method, such as returning to the left hand after entering the upper second entrance 10640a1, which is the starting point for the 2 special symbol lottery. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided.

  On the other hand, when the game state is set to a high probability state (probability change state or time-short state) of a normal symbol, if the acquired value of the type counter C8 per common figure is “0 to 19”, “ “A” is defined per common figure. When the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state or short-time state), out of 100 counter values that can be taken by the type counter C8 per common figure, there are 20 counter values that are “A per common figure” Therefore, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state or short-time state), and the normal symbol lottery is won, the rate that “A per ordinary figure” is determined is 20% (20/100) It is.

  In addition, when the game state is set to a high probability state (probability change state or time-short state) of a normal symbol, when the value of the acquired common figure type counter C8 is “20 to 69”, “ “B per standard” is defined. When the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state or short time state) of a normal symbol, out of 100 counter values that can be taken by the type counter C8 per common figure, the counter value that becomes “A per common figure” Since the game state is a high probability state (probability change state or time-short state), and the normal symbol lottery is won, the percentage that “B per regular figure” is determined is 60% (60 / 100).

  Furthermore, when the game state is set to a high probability state (probability change state or short time state) of a normal symbol, when the value of the acquired universal counter per category counter C8 is “70 to 99”, “ C per standard is specified. When the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state or short time state), out of 100 counter values that can be taken by the type counter C8 per common figure, there are 20 counter values that are "C per common figure" Therefore, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state or short-time state), and the normal symbol lottery is won, the ratio that “C per ordinary figure” is determined is 20% (20/100) It is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 558 (b), the contents of the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a based on the type per game and the gaming state will be described. FIG. 558 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a based on the type and game state per common figure. In the fifth control example, as described above, the game ball passes through the special through gate 10067 and the normal symbol lottery is started. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the special electric accessory 10701a is released for a specified period, and the game ball can be entered into the first operation port 10703a or the second operation port 10703b. In this control example, the opening operation content of the special electric accessory 10701a is set on the basis of the winning common figure type and the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 558 (b), when the game state during the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a is a low probability state of a normal symbol, all the types per common figure (A per common figure, per common figure) In B, per common figure C), the opening operation content of the special electric accessory 10701a is set to “short open”. When this “short open” is set, the special electric accessory 10701a is set in an open state for 0.2 seconds (a state in which a game ball can enter the special prize opening 10730), and the game ball becomes a special prize opening 10730. When one ball is entered, it is configured to be closed (a state in which a game ball cannot enter the special prize opening 10730).

  As described above, the game balls are configured to be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and even if they continue to be fired to the right area of the game board in the low probability state of the normal symbol, they are released for 0.2 seconds. During the period, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the special prize opening 10730. In addition, when a game ball accidentally enters the special prize opening 10730, the special electric accessory 10701a is closed when one ball is entered, so that a plurality of game balls enter the special prize opening 10730. It is impossible. Therefore, executing a right-handed game in which a game ball is fired in the right area of the game board in a low probability state of a normal symbol is an inefficient game method for the player to keep the ball in hand. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent an irregular gaming method from being executed in which the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is executed even in a low probability state of the normal symbol, and an appropriate gaming method Can be urged to the player. In addition, since the same opening operation content is set regardless of which type of winning map is won, it is possible to prevent the types of opening operation content to be specified from being increased unnecessarily and increase the processing load.

  In this control example, the opening operation period of the special electric accessory 10701a in the low probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be 0.2 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be 0.2 seconds or less. . Further, the driving amount of the special electric accessory 10701a may be a driving amount at which a game ball cannot enter. With this configuration, it becomes more difficult to enter a game ball into the special prize opening 10730, and it is possible to prevent an irregular game from being executed.

  And, if the type per winning base is “A per base” and the gaming state is a high probability state of normal symbols, “Long A opening” is defined as the opening operation content of the special electric accessory 10701a. ing. When this “Long A Open” is set, the special electric accessory 10701a is in an open state for 5 seconds (a state in which the game ball can enter the special winning opening 10730). When ten balls are entered into the mouth 10730, a closed state (a state in which game balls cannot enter the special prize opening 10730) is entered.

  In the case of a normal symbol in a high probability state, “open per ordinary figure” is set to have the longest opening operation period of the special electric accessory 10701a as compared with winning per other common figure type. Therefore, the game balls are classified according to the common figure that is most likely to enter the special winning opening 10730. Further, as described above, in this control example, the number of game balls won in the special winning opening 10730 is counted, and the switching scenario of the switching valve 10702 is calculated based on the counted number (the value of the usual winning number counter 203db). Is determined. In other words, “A” is a hit type of a normal symbol that makes it easy to win a game ball in a special winning opening, and a game situation (ease of entering a first operation port, ease of entering a second operation port, (Easy to enter) is easy to change.

  Accordingly, the player can easily execute the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player (the switching valve 10702 is positioned above the first operating port 10703a and can enter the second operating port 10703b. ), The game will be executed while desiring not to win the “A” per common figure, but the lottery of the first special symbol which is disadvantageous for the player is likely to be executed (switching) When the valve 10702 is positioned above the second operating port 10703b and is capable of entering the first operating port 10703a), the player wins “A” and wins a lot of special games at the special winning port 10730. The ball is entered and the game is executed while the switching valve 10702 is desired to be driven. By configuring in this way, even when winning the same type per common figure, it becomes possible to vary the degree of advantage depending on the game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, when the type of winning base symbol is “B per base” and the gaming state is a high probability state of a normal symbol, “Long B opening” is defined as the opening operation content of the special electric accessory 10701a. ing. When this “Long B Open” is set, the special electric accessory 10701a is in an open state for 3 seconds (a state in which a game ball can enter the special prize opening 10730), and the game ball is in a special prize during the release operation. When ten balls are entered into the mouth 10730, a closed state (a state in which game balls cannot enter the special prize opening 10730) is entered. In addition, this “per normal figure B” is a type per normal figure selected at a rate of 60% when the game state is a high probability state of a normal symbol, and is selected more than the type per other general figure. The rate that is done is high.

  In addition, when the winning type is “C per common figure” and the game state is a high probability state of a normal symbol, “Long A Open” is defined as the opening operation content of the special electric accessory 10701a. ing. When this “long C release” is set, the special electric accessory 10701a is in an open state for 51.5 seconds (a state in which a game ball can enter the special prize opening 10730). When 10 balls enter the special prize opening 10730, a closed state (a state where game balls cannot enter the special prize opening 10730) is entered.

  In the case of a high probability state of a normal symbol, if this “C per common figure” is won, the opening operation period of the special electric accessory 10701a is set to be the shortest compared to other types per common figure. ing. Therefore, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes a type per ordinary figure that is most difficult to enter the game ball into the special winning opening 10730. Therefore, “C per hit” is a period during which the lottery of the first special symbol which is disadvantageous for the player is easily executed (the switching valve 10702 is positioned on the second operating port 10703b, and the game ball is positioned on the first operating port). In the case where the player can enter the ball 10703a), it is the type that is most unfavorable to the player, but in the period during which the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is easy to be executed ( The switching valve 10702 is located above the first operating port 10703a and can enter the second operating port 10703b), which is a type of hit per game that is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is configured to be able to execute a game per universal figure having different opening times and the number of entered balls as end conditions according to the type per universal figure. Therefore, it is possible to vary the number of balls that can be entered in the special prize opening 10730 in a single game per game. As a result, the number of balls to be entered into the special prize opening 10730 during a game per game can be made random, so that the player can enter a ball into any of the operation ports for the next game. It can be difficult to understand.

  Further, in this control example, even if the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 10730 reaches the number of balls indicating that the set driving scenario switches the position of the switching valve 10702, the game per game is finished. Up to this point, the operation of the switching valve 10702 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the accurate grasp of the number of balls entered into the current special winning opening 10730.

  Next, the contents of the drive scenario selection table 202db will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 559 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drive scenario selection table 202db. The drive scenario selection table 202db is referred to when the jackpot game is over (see S1371 in FIG. 564), and the drive scenario of the drive solenoid during the probability change or the short-time state is defined based on the winning jackpot type. The switching valve 10702 is configured to move based on the contents specified in this driving scenario.

  As shown in FIG. 559 (a), when the winning jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, “scenario A” is defined as the driving scenario type. When the winning jackpot type is jackpot C, “scenario B” is defined as the driving scenario, and when the jackpot type is E, “scenario C” is defined.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 560 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of this control example. As shown in FIG. 560 (a), in this control example, since there is no addition or change to the main configuration with respect to the first control example described above, detailed description thereof is omitted. Note that effect data for executing the effects shown in FIGS. 553 and 554 is stored in advance in a storage area (not shown) of the ROM 222.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 560 (b). FIG. 560 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of this control example. As shown in FIG. 560 (b), this control example is different from the above-described configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first control example in the driving scenario information storage area 223da, the winning number counter 223db, and the number of differences. The difference is that a counter 223dc is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The drive scenario information storage area 223da is a storage area for temporarily storing the drive scenario information included in the drive scenario command output from the main controller 110. The driving scenario information stored in the driving scenario information storage area 223da is used for grasping the driving scenario selected by the main controller 110 on the sound lamp controller 113 side. Specifically, drive scenario information that can be selected by the main controller 110 (information of the drive scenario selection table 202db that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has) is stored in a storage area (not shown) of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp controller 113. The driving scenario information corresponding to the received driving scenario command is read out, and the read driving scenario information is stored in the driving scenario information storage area 223da.

  Based on the driving scenario information stored in the driving scenario information storage area 223da and the number of balls won in the special winning opening 10730 during the game per game, the position of the switching valve 10702 is advantageous for the player. It is configured to be able to calculate the number of winnings (the number of remaining winnings) until switching to (the position where the first flow path f2 is blocked). Based on the number of remaining winnings calculated here, the effect display during the game shown in FIG. 553 is executed.

  The winning number counter 223db is a counter used for measuring the number of balls won in the special winning opening 10730 during the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the special winning opening 10730 from the main controller 110. Is received (added) to the value corresponding to the number of balls included in the winning number command. In the main controller 110 of this control example, while the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set, the number of balls won in the special winning opening 10730 is accumulated, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is Since the winning number is cleared to 0 when it is finished (when the jackpot game is finished), the value is updated (added) in accordance with the winning number command output from the main controller 110. Also in the winning number counter 223db, while the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set, the value is accumulated, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is ended (when the big hit game is ended) ), The value is cleared to zero.

  Then, a display for indicating the current number of winnings is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, or the position of the switching valve 10702 is switched to a position advantageous to the player (position that closes the first flow path f2). The value of the winning number counter 223db is referred to in order to execute an effect that suggests the number of winnings (remaining winning number) until the exchange.

  The difference number counter 223dc is the number of winnings (the lever solenoid 209a is switched to the position where the value of the winning number counter 223db described above and the position of the switching valve 10702 are next advantageous to the player (the position where the first flow path f2 is closed)). This is a counter for measuring the number of differences with respect to the value of the number of winnings until it is set to ON), and when selecting various display modes to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the difference number counter 223dc The value is referenced.

  More specifically, in the win-related process for each normal figure (see S3952 in FIG. 566), the difference number is calculated (S5408), and the calculated difference number is set in the difference number counter 223dc (S5409). Then, a display command for displaying the difference number on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the difference number counter 223dc (S5410). Further, according to the value of the difference counter 223dc, a display command for displaying a display mode for suppressing the right-handed game is set (S5414), or a display for displaying a display mode for prompting the right-handed game is displayed. Referenced when setting a command (S5415).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fifth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 561 to 564. The same control processes as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process 5 (S106). The normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIGS. 430 and S106) in the first control example.

  Of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) in the fifth control example, in each process of S601 to S611 and S612 to S619, S601 to S611 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIGS. 430 and S106) in the first control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S612-S619 is performed.

  In the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) in the fifth control example, when it is determined in S611 that the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611). : Yes), a type per map is set using the table type selection table 202da per map (S651), and the process proceeds to S612.

  In addition, in the process of S619, when the fluctuation display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol fluctuation process is the normal symbol. If it is determined that it is a win (S619: Yes), a release pattern corresponding to the type and game state per common figure is set (S652), the common figure flag 203dc is set on (S653), and then this process is performed. Exit.

  Next, the main process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 562. FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing the main process 5. The main process 5 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 434) in the first control example.

  Of the main process 5 in the fifth control example, the processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1015 are the same as the processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 434) in the first control example, respectively. The process is executed.

  In the main process 5 in the fifth control example, after executing the process of S1004, instead of the process of S1005, a normal hit control process is executed (S1071), and the process proceeds to S1006. The details of the universal hit control process (S1071) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 563, the normal figure hit control process (S1071) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing this normal hit control process (S1071). This common figure hit control process (S1071) is a process executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 562) in the fifth control example.

  When the normal hit control process (S1071) is started, it is first determined whether or not the normal hit flag 203dc is on (S1601). If it is determined that the common figure flag 203dc is on (S1601: Yes), the common figure flag 203dc is set to off (S1602), and a status command indicating the common figure is set (S1603). Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1601 that the common symbol hit flag 203dc is off (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not the current symbol is being hit (S1604). In the processing of S1604, if it is determined that the current symbol is not being hit (S1604: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1604, if it is determined that the current symbol is being hit (S1604: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the timing for starting the electric accessory operation (S1605).

  In the process of S1605, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the electric accessory operation (S1605: Yes), the electric accessory 640a is released (S1606), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1605 that it is not the electric accessory operation start timing (S1605: No), it is then determined whether it is the electric accessory operation end timing (S1607). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the operation of the electric accessory (S1607: Yes), the electric accessory 640a is closed (S1608), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1607 that it is not the timing for ending the operation of the electric accessory (S1607: No), it is next determined whether or not it is the end timing for the normal drawing (S1609). Here, the end timing per common figure indicates a case where the operation period of the electric accessory 640a has elapsed. In the processing of S1609, when it is determined that it is the end timing per usual figure (S1609: Yes), the value of the common figure winning number counter 203db is read (S1610), and the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 203da. Is read out (S1611), and the operation content of the drive member is set based on the read value of the universal winning prize counter 203db and the drive scenario (S1612), and the drive solenoid operation (lever solenoid) corresponding to the set operation content is set. 209a operation) is executed (S1613), a status command indicating the end of the normal map is set (S1614), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the normal figure (S1609: No), it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the special winning opening (S1615). If it is determined that there is no winning in the special winning opening (S1615: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a prize at the special prize opening (S1615: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the common winning number counter 203db (S1616), and the value of the added common figure winning number counter 203db is indicated. A winning number command is set (S1617), and then this process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 564, the jackpot end process 5 (S1170) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 564 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 5 (S1170). The jackpot end process 5 (S1170) is a process executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 437, S1110) in the first control example.

  Of the jackpot end process 5 (S1170) in the fifth control example, the processes of S1301 to S1305 are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1305 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 437, S1110) in the first control example, respectively. Processing is executed.

  In the jackpot end process 5 (S1170) in the fifth control example, after executing the process of S1303, based on the winning jackpot type, a driving scenario is selected with reference to the driving scenario selection table 202db (S1371).

  The driving scenario selected in the process of S 1371 is stored in the driving scenario storage area 203 da (S 1372), a driving scenario command including information indicating the selected driving scenario is set (S 1373), and the value of the universal winning prize counter 203 db is set to 0. (S1374).

  Next, a winning number command indicating that the value of the usual winning number counter 203db is 0 is set (S1375), the drive solenoid (lever solenoid 209a) is set to OFF (S1376), and the process proceeds to S1304. . In the process of S1376, in order to move the drive solenoid (lever solenoid 209a) to the initial value, it is temporarily set to OFF.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 565 and 566, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 565, the command determination process 5 (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 565 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 5 (S3114). This command determination process 5 (S3114) is a process executed in place of the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 451 and S3114).

  Of the command determination process 5 (S3114) in the fifth control example, the processes of S3901 to S3914 are the same as the processes of S3901 to S3914 of the command determination process (see FIG. 451 and S3114) in the first control example, respectively. Processing is executed.

  In the command determination process 5 (S3114) in the fifth control example, when it is determined in the process of S3913 that a hit-related command has not been received from the main control apparatus 110 (S3913: No), from the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether or not a command related to a win per game is received (S3951). If it is determined that a command related to a win per game is received from the main controller 110 (S3951: Yes), a process related to a win per game is executed (S3952), and then this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that a command related to a win per game is not received from the main controller 110 (S3951: No), this process is terminated as it is. The details of the winning-related process (S3952) per bonus will be described later with reference to FIG. 566.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 566, a description will be given of the win-winning related process (S3952) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. FIG. 566 is a flowchart showing the winning-winning-related process (S3952). This win-winning-related process (S3952) is a process executed in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 565, S3114) in the fifth control example.

  In the win-related processing for the usual figure (S3952), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a driving scenario command (S5401). If it is determined that the received command is a driving scenario command (S5401: Yes), the driving scenario corresponding to the received driving command is stored in the driving scenario storage area 203da (S5402) and stored in the driving scenario storage area 203da. A display command for indicating a driving scenario is set (S5403), and the process proceeds to S5404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the received command is not a drive scenario command (S5401: No), the processes of S5402 and S5403 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5404.

  In the process of S5404, it is determined whether or not the received command is a winning number command (S5404). If it is determined that the received command is a winning number command (S5404: Yes), the winning number corresponding to the received winning number command is added to the value of the winning number counter 223db (S5405) to indicate the number of winnings. A display command is set (S5406), the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 203da is read (S5407), the content of the read driving scenario is compared with the value of the winning number counter 223db, and the driving solenoid is set. The number of differences up to the number of winnings set to ON is calculated (S5408). The calculated difference value is set in the difference counter 223dc (S5409), a display command for indicating the difference number is set (S5410), and the process proceeds to S5411.

  In the process of S5411, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 holding number is 4 (S5411). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 holding number is not 4 (S5411: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number is 4 (S5411: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the difference number is smaller than 5 (S5412). If it is determined that the value of the difference number is 5 or more (S5412: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the value of the difference number is smaller than 5 (S5412: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the difference number is 0 (S5413). When it is determined that the value of the difference number is 0 (S5413: Yes), a display command for suppressing the launch of the sphere is set (S5414), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5413, when it is determined that the value of the difference number is 1 or more (S5413: No), a display command for prompting the ball to be launched is set (S5415), and then the process ends. To do.

  As described above, in the fifth control example, when the ball enters the special entrance that makes it easier for the ball to enter when winning in the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery is performed. An opportunity or a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol is established. In other words, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a lottery opportunity of any of a plurality of special symbol types is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide pleasure that allows the player to predict which type of special symbol will be established when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set.

  In addition, the fifth control example is configured to vary the type of special symbol for which a lottery opportunity is established based on the number of balls that have entered the special entrance. Thereby, it becomes possible to vary the type of the special symbol for which the lottery opportunity is established according to the number of balls that the player has entered the special entrance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new gameability that makes it possible to consider how many balls are to be awarded in the special winning opening when a winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery.

  In the fifth control example, in a winning game (a winning game for releasing the special electric accessory 10701a) executed in a state where a high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special electric accessory 10701a is released only once. A hit game is executed. And, it is configured such that any one of 1.5 seconds to 5 seconds is set as a period during which the special electric accessory 10701a is opened.

  As described above, the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a executed during the winning game is defined as one opening operation, although the opening period is different, and the special electric actor 10701a is executed during the winning game. Since the ball is configured not to be in a closed state, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down the meandering flow path in a period from when the winning game is executed until the winning game is completed. That is, the ball can be prevented from entering the lower first entrance 10640b1 or the upper second entrance 10640a1 during the winning game.

  Therefore, the ball that won the special prize opening 10730 according to the switching valve 10702 switched based on the number of balls won to the special prize opening 10730 during the normal game is the first operation port 10703a or the second operation. One entry into the entrance corresponding to the working combination (first working combination 10640b, second working combination 10640a) that entered into any of the mouths 10703b and actuated based on the entry is performed once. Since it is possible to prevent the winning game from being executed a plurality of times, each time the winning game is executed, it can be enjoyed where the switching valve 10702 is located after the winning game is completed.

  In this control example, as described above, the ball is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower first winning hole 10640b1 and the upper second winning hole 10640a1 during one hit game. After the closing condition of the actuating tool activated during the winning game is established, it is suppressed that the actuating agent is actuated by the ball that has won the special prize opening 10730 again. As a winning game to be executed when winning in the symbol lottery, it is possible to set a special winning game in which the special electric accessory 10701a is opened a plurality of times during one winning game. As an interval period between the second opening operation and the second opening operation, a period during which at least two or more balls fired by the right-handed game can flow down to the meandering flow path (for example, 1 5 seconds) may be configured to be set.

  In this example of control, a game per universal figure with different opening times and the number of entering balls as end conditions according to the type per universal figure can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the number of balls that can be entered in the special prize opening 10730 in a single game per game. As a result, the number of balls to be entered into the special prize opening 10730 during a game per game can be made random, so that the player can enter a ball into any of the operation ports for the next game. It can be difficult to understand.

  Further, in this control example, even if the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 10730 reaches the number of balls indicating that the set driving scenario switches the position of the switching valve 10702, the game per game is finished. Up to this point, the operation of the switching valve 10702 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the accurate grasp of the number of balls entered into the current special winning opening 10730.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 567 to 572. The fifth control example described above is configured to operate the switching valve 10702 according to the number of balls that have entered the special prize opening 10730 during the period in which the time reduction state is set. On the other hand, the present control example is different in that the switching valve 10702 is configured to be operated based on the number of balls that have entered the special prize opening 10730 during one game per game. Yes.

  That is, in the above-described fifth control example, since the switching valve 10702 is configured to operate according to the number of balls that have entered the special prize opening 10730 during the period in which the time reduction state is set, the special prize opening 10730 is configured. By grasping the position of the switching valve 10702, there is a problem that when the next game is executed, the player knows which operating port the ball will win.

  On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the switching valve 10702 is configured to operate during a single game per game, and a ball enters according to the position of the switch valve 10702 at the time of game end per game. The operation ports (first operation port 10703a and second operation port 10703b) are configured to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily grasp which operating port the ball will win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the game.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 567 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 567, the configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth control example is a partial change in the structure of the distribution prize winning device 10700 with respect to the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth control example described above. Is the same, otherwise it is the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 567, in this control example, a stopper 10720 that is released at the end of the game per game is provided in the special prize opening 10730, and a reservoir that can store one ball on the upper surface of the stopper 10720 10720a is formed. In the state where the ball is stored in the storage unit 10720a of the stopper 10720, a ball entrance 10063 is provided through which a ball newly won in the special prize port 10730 can enter. Then, when the stopper 10720 is released, a switching valve 10702 similar to that in the fifth control example described above, the first operation is provided in a region where the sphere stored in the storage unit 10720a can flow down (a region below the stopper 10720). A port 10703a and a second working port 10703b are provided.

  With this configuration, the switching valve 10702 is operated based on the number of balls won in the special prize opening 10730 in a state where the balls are stored in the storage unit 10720a of the stopper 10720, and the game is terminated per usual figure. The balls can be distributed according to the position of the switching valve 10702 when the stopper 10720 is released. In other words, it is configured such that a ball can enter any of the operating ports during a single game per game.

  In addition, since the switching valve 10702 is provided in an area where the ball cannot flow down due to the stopper, even if the switching valve 10702 is operated during a game per game, the ball will not collide with the switching valve 10702 in operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the switching valve 10702 is broken or a ball is clogged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 568, a part different from the above-described fifth control example in the internal structure of the allocation prize winning device 10700 in the sixth control example will be described in detail. FIG. 568 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the distribution structure in the sixth control example. In addition, about the structure same as the 5th control example mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 568, when the ball that has won the special prize opening 10730 passes through the working flow passage sensor 10701, it collides with the bent portion 10721 and is guided toward the stopper 10720. The stopper 10720 has a concave upper surface and is configured to function as a reservoir 10720a capable of holding one sphere. In a state where the ball is stored in the storage unit 10720a, even if the next winning ball collides with the bent portion 10721 and is guided in the direction of the stopper 10720, it is bounced by the ball stored in the storage unit 10720a. The stopper 10720 is configured to flow down the flow path communicating in the lower left direction and enter the entrance port 10063.

  Below the stopper 10720, a lower region in which the switching valve 10702, the first operating port 10703a, and the second operating port 10703b are provided is formed. This lower area is formed so that the ball cannot flow until the stopper 10720 is in the released state, and the switching valve is changed according to the number of winning balls in the special winning opening 10730 even during the game per game. 10702 is configured to operate.

  As described above, in the sixth control example, a ball won in the special prize opening 10730 during the game per game (the ball first won in the special prize opening 10730) is stored in the storage unit 10720a of the stopper 10720, The stopper 10720 is released when the game end condition per figure is satisfied, and the ball can flow down in the lower area.

  Further, the change-over valve 10702 is configured to operate in accordance with the number of balls won in the special prize opening 10730 during the normal game. According to the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, it is difficult for the player to predict which operation opening the ball will enter in the game per game until the game is completed per game. Can do.

  In addition, since the switching valve 10702 is configured to operate according to the number of balls won in the special prize opening 10730 in the game per the usual figure, for example, the balls are stored in the storage unit 10720a of the stopper 10720. Even if the switching valve 10702 is located in a state that is disadvantageous to the player, the switching valve 10702 may be activated by winning a ball at the special winning opening 10730. Until the game is over, the player can be actively played.

  In addition, among the balls that have won the special prize opening 10730, the player can also give award balls (three) to the ball that has entered the ball opening 10063. When the switching valve 10702 is positioned in a state that is advantageous to the player in a state where the ball is stored in a state where one ball is won in the special prize opening 10730 during the game per game, Instead of winning the above balls in the special prize opening 10730 and not winning the prize balls, a game is executed in which a ball is entered into an operating opening advantageous to the player, or balls are awarded in the special prize opening 10730. After winning the prize ball, it is possible to execute a game that expects the switching valve 10702 to be in a state that is advantageous to the player at the end of the game per game. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game executed during the game per hit.

  As shown in FIG. 568, in the sixth control example, the arrangement relationship between the first operation port 10703a and the second operation port 10703b is different from the above-described fifth control example (see FIG. 551). In the state where the switching valve 10702 is positioned at the initial position that closes the second operating port 10703b which is an advantageous operating port for the player (initial state), the ball does not collide with the switching valve 10702. ing. In addition, the ball flow bottom surface of the switching valve 10702 is positioned so as to be close to the partition wall forming the sorting prize winning device 10700 in an initial state where the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 10702 located in the initial state from being damaged, and dirt such as dust from adhering to the lower surface of the ball flow. The arrangement relationship used in the fifth control example described above may be employed. In this case, since the stopper 10720 is released and the vertically falling ball wins the second working port 10703b, the second working combination 10640a advantageous to the player can be quickly opened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 569 and FIG. 570, a description will be given of the ball flow in the allocation prize winning device 10700 in the sixth control example. FIG. 569 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a ball flow during a game per game, and FIG. 570 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a ball flow when a game per game is completed. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 569, when a game per game is executed, the special electric accessory 10701a is opened, and the ball wins a special winning opening 10730. Then, the sphere is stored in the storage portion 10720a of the stopper 10720, and the subsequent sphere flows down the flow path f1, and then flows down the discharge flow path f5 toward the ball entrance 10063 and enters the ball entrance 10063. . Further, the switching valve 10702 operates in the f4 direction in accordance with the number of balls that have passed through the operation flow path passage sensor 10701, and a ball can enter the second operation port 10703b.

  As described above, in the sixth control example, unlike the above-described fifth control example, the switching valve 10702 can be operated during the execution of the game per game, so that the player can play during the game per game. The enjoyment of predicting the operating position of the switching valve 10702 at the end of the game per game can be provided by comparing the number of balls won in the special winning opening 10730 and the operating status of the switching valve 10702.

  Although details will be described later, also in the sixth control example, the period during which the special electric accessory 10701a is in an open state in a single game per game is changed according to the type of the winning game per game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the number of balls that can be won in the special prize opening 10730 in one game per game.

  Next, when the normal game end condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 570, the special electric accessory 10701a is closed and the stopper 10720 is released. The stopper 10720 is configured to be variable between a restricted state projecting from the game board 13 and a released state buried in the game board 13, and can be changed to a restricted state when a game is started per game. The operation is incorporated in the control of the game per game so that when the end condition of the game per game is satisfied, the state is changed to the released state.

  More specifically, the operation control for changing the stopper 10720 to the restricted state is executed before the special electric accessory 10701a is controlled to open by the game per game. As a result, the special electric accessory 10701a is opened, and the stopper 10720 can be surely changed to the restricted state when the ball can enter the special winning opening 10730.

  It is to be noted that a determination means for determining whether or not the stopper 10720 has been changed to the restricted state is provided in the normal game, and when it is determined by the determining means that the stopper 10720 cannot be normally changed to the restricted state, An abnormality notification command indicating that the game is in an abnormal state may be set, the abnormality notification may be executed, and the game may be interrupted per usual figure. In addition, there is provided a discriminating means for discriminating that the ball has entered the first working port 10703a or the second working port 10703b, and the ball is in the first state although it is determined that the stopper 10720 is in the restricted state. Even when it is determined that the ball has entered the operation port 10703a or the second operation port 10703b, an abnormality notification may be executed and the game may be interrupted per normal game.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 571 and 572. The sixth control example is different from the above-described fifth control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and is otherwise the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 571 (a). FIG. 571 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 571 (a), in the sixth control example, instead of the big hit type selection table 202d, the big hit type selection 6 table 202ea is replaced with the release pattern selection table 202f in the fifth control example. The difference is that an open pattern selection 6 table is provided, and the drive scenario selection table 202db is deleted, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the sixth control example, a predetermined fixed scenario is set as a driving scenario for operating (driving) the switching valve 10702, and a special prize opening is made during one game per game. This is different from the fifth control example described above in that the switching valve 10702 is configured to always operate in a certain manner in accordance with the number of balls that have entered 10730.

  FIG. 571 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drive scenario set in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 571 (b), in the sixth control example, the lever solenoid 209a for operating the switching valve 10702 is set to OFF in the range where the value of the universal winning prize counter 203db is “0 to 2”, The switching valve 10702 is in a disadvantageous position (initial position) that blocks the flow path communicating with the second working port 10703b.

  When the value of the universal winning prize counter 203db is in the range of “3 to 7”, the lever solenoid 209a for operating the switching valve 10702 is set to ON, and the switching valve 10702 has a flow path communicating with the first operating port 10703a. When the value of the winning prize counter 203db is in the range of “8 to 10”, the lever solenoid 209a for operating the switching valve 10702 is set to OFF, and the switching valve 10702 is turned off. It will be in the state located in the disadvantageous position (initial position) which plugs up the flow path connected with the 2nd operation mouth 10703b.

  As described above, in the sixth control example, since the driving scenario for operating the switching valve 10702 is fixed, it is advantageous for the player to win the player how many balls are awarded to the special winning opening 10730. It is possible to easily predict whether the switching valve 10702 will operate at a proper position. Also, as shown in FIG. 571 (b), in this control example, when the number of balls to be awarded to the special prize opening 10730 during the game per game is less than or equal to a predetermined number (two), the switching valve 10702 is Since it is configured so as not to operate from the initial position, for example, a game per universal figure executed when winning a normal figure in a low probability state of a normal symbol, that is, a special electric accessory 10701a is short. The switching valve 10702 does not operate during a game that is opened for a time (0.2 seconds).

  As a result, when a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a gaming state, a right-handed game is performed, and a normal symbol lottery is won. Even if the winning combination is made, the switching valve 10702 can be made difficult to operate. Therefore, the consumption of parts can be suppressed by suppressing the situation where the switching valve 10702 is unnecessarily operated.

  In addition, in the present control example, the switching valve 10702 is driven so as to be in the initial position even when a special winning opening 10730 is excessively awarded a ball (when seven or more are won) during a game per game. A scenario is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to impose a penalty on a player who performs an act of trying to win many prize balls by illegally making many balls enter the special prize opening 10730 during a game per game. it can.

  Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the game is configured to be executed with different opening patterns according to the set gaming state and the type of winning winning map. , In the normal state (in the low probability state of the normal symbol), if the winning is per normal symbol, a game is executed per normal symbol where the ball is difficult to win in the special winning opening 10730, and the normal symbol such as a short time state or a probable change state is executed. In the case of winning in the high probability state, it is configured so that a game per game that allows a ball to easily win a special winning opening 10730 is executed.

  Furthermore, it is configured to be able to set two types of states (time-shortening A state, time-shortening B state) as a high probability state of the normal symbol. It is configured to be easily established. With this configuration, the number of balls that can be won in the special prize opening 10730 during a single game per game can be varied according to the game state and the type per game. Therefore, in the present control example in which a predetermined fixed scenario is set as a driving scenario for the switching valve 10702, it is possible to play a game while enjoying which operating port the ball wins.

  In the sixth control example, as described above, only one type of driving scenario for the switching valve 10702 is set in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of driving scenarios are provided as in the fifth control example described above. 1 may be selected, and the switching valve 10702 may be operated based on the selected driving scenario, or when a win is made per game or when a game is executed per game Different driving scenarios may be set in correspondence with the gaming state in FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which operating port the ball will win, and it is possible to entertain the game until the end of the game per normal figure.

  In addition, a measurement unit that measures the number of wins per universal symbol during a period when a high probability state of normal symbols is set is provided, and different driving scenarios are set based on the measurement results of the measurement unit For example, when the measurement result of the measuring means is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or less, the first operation that is disadvantageous to the player than the second operation port 10703b that is advantageous to the player is possible. When the first driving scenario that makes it easy for the ball to win a prize is set in the mouth 10703a and the measurement result of the measuring means is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more and a specific number of times (for example, 30 times) or less, A second driving scenario is set in which a ball can be equally awarded to both the first operating port 10703a which is disadvantageous and the second operating port 10703b which is advantageous to the player, and the measurement result of the measuring means is When the number of times is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), there is a third driving scenario in which a ball is likely to win a second operation port 10703b that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation port 10703a is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to be set.

  In this way, it is possible to change the type of drive scenario that is set according to the number of wins per common symbol during the period when the normal symbol high probability state is set, so that the normal symbol high probability state can be changed. Since the type of special symbol lottery executed at a time can be varied based on the passage of time, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early with respect to a game in a high probability state of a normal symbol. .

  In the above-described example, as the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (the more the number of wins per regular figure increases), the easier it is for the ball to win the second operation port 10703b which is advantageous to the player. In this case, it is possible to give a privilege (lottery of the second special symbol) that is advantageous to a player who plays a game in a high probability state of a normal symbol for a long time. In spite of having won per game during the high probability state, the ball will not win the special prize opening 10730 and the special symbol lottery will not be performed. There was a problem that an action was taken to create a state where a ball is likely to win a prize at the two operation ports 10703b.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, for example, the situation immediately after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the predetermined period has passed since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. A driving scenario may be set so that a ball can easily win the second working port 10703b.

  Also, the drive scenario may be variably set based on the number of lotteries of special symbols executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, not the number of times per normal symbol won during the high probability state of the normal symbol. well. In this case, as the measurement means for measuring the number of lotteries for the special symbol, special figure 1 measurement means for measuring the number of lotteries for the first special symbol, and special figure 2 measurement means for measuring the number of lotteries for the second special symbol, It is preferable that the driving scenario is variably set based on at least one of the measurement result of the special figure 1 measurement means and the measurement result of the special figure 2 measurement means. As a result, it is possible to give a privilege only to a player for whom a high probability state of a normal symbol is set for a long time without winning a jackpot even though the special symbol lottery is actually executed.

  Further, for example, by using the above-described configuration, the number of times of the second special symbol lottery in which the lottery advantageous to the player is executed, and the lottery that is disadvantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery is executed. A difference between the number of special symbol lotteries and the number of special symbol lotteries may be calculated, and the driving scenario may be variably set based on the calculated difference value. In this case, the number of times of the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery. When the difference value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 20), it is easy to set a driving scenario in which a ball is likely to win a prize in the first operation port 10703a that triggers the first special symbol lottery. When the number of first special symbol lotteries is greater than the number of second special symbol lotteries and the difference value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 20), the second special symbol lottery is triggered. A driving system in which a ball can easily win a prize in the operating port 10703b Rio may be configured to easily set. As a result, the special symbol lottery type (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol can be made difficult to be biased. On the other hand, when the difference value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 25), it may be configured to easily set a driving scenario that makes the difference value easier to increase.

  The other examples of the drive scenario type and the drive scenario selection method described above are not applied only to the sixth control example, and may be used as appropriate in the fifth control example described above.

  Returning to FIG. 571, the description will be continued. The jackpot type selection 6 table 202ea is a data table that is referred to when selecting the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is the jackpot type selection table 202d of the fifth control example described above. (See FIG. 408 (a)), instead of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1, the special figure 1 jackpot table 202ea1 is replaced with the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 and the special figure 2 jackpot table 202ea2. Are different in that they are provided.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 6 table 202ea will be described with reference to FIGS. 572 (a) and (b). FIG. 572 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot 6 table 202ea1, and FIG. 572 (b) shows the special figure 2 jackpot 6 table 202ea2. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content currently performed.

  The special figure 1 jackpot 6 table 202ea1 is compared with the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 (see FIG. 408 (b)) as a type of a high probability state of a normal symbol set when the jackpot game ends. The difference is that different types can be set, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the present sixth control example, it is configured such that “short time A” and “short time B” can be set as the types of high probability states of normal symbols (common figure high-accuracy type). Depending on the type, the game content (opening pattern) of the game per game is made different. It should be noted that, regardless of which normal figure high-accuracy type is set, since the normal symbol is in a high probability state, the same gaming state is set as the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 572 (a), in the range where the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9”, “big hit A” is associated and defined. This “jackpot A” has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot game is finished, a probability variation state is given (the opening / closing pattern that allows the player to enter the specific winning opening 65a is set during the period allocated to the V area). It is a jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “jackpot A” has the most rounds in the jackpot game of the first special symbol, and is given an advantageous probability change state after the jackpot game ends, so it is the most advantageous in the jackpot of the first special symbol It is a big jackpot type.

  Furthermore, in the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) set after the end of jackpot game, “Time A” is set as the type of normal symbol high probability state (common symbol high probability type) Is done. As will be described in detail later, when “time reduction A” is set, a game per universal figure in which a ball is likely to win the second operation port 10703b that is advantageous to the player is most easily executed as a game per universal figure. , It is the most common type of figure that is most advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit B” in the range of “10 to 49”. This “big hit B” has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot game is over, a probability variation state is given (the open / close pattern that allows the player to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set) It is a jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 40 counter values that are “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although the number of rounds is smaller than the “big hit A”, this “big hit B” is a relatively advantageous big hit type because a favorable probability change state is given after the big hit game ends.

  Furthermore, in the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) that is set after the end of jackpot game, "Time B" is set as the type of normal symbol high probability state (common symbol high probability type) Is done. Although the details will be described later, when “Time B” is set, the game per time when the ball is easy to win the second operation port 10703b advantageous to the player as the game per time However, it is comparatively advantageous because the game is easy to be executed per game in which the ball is likely to win the second operating port 10703b which is advantageous to the player than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. It is a big jackpot type.

  Finally, “special hit C” is defined in association with the range in which the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”. This “jackpot C” has 5 rounds and is given a short-time state after the jackpot game is over (the opening / closing pattern is set so that the player cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V area). Is a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This “jackpot C” is the most unfavorable jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol because the number of rounds is the least and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a relatively unfavorable time-short state. .

  Furthermore, in the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) that is set after the end of jackpot game, "Time B" is set as the type of normal symbol high probability state (common symbol high probability type) Is done. Although the details will be described later, when “Time B” is set, the game per time when the ball is easy to win the second operation port 10703b advantageous to the player as the game per time However, it is comparatively advantageous because the game is easy to be executed per game in which the ball is likely to win the second operating port 10703b which is advantageous to the player than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. It is a big jackpot type.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 jackpot 6 table 202ea2 will be described with reference to FIG. 572 (b). As shown in FIG. 572 (b), “big hit D” is defined in association with the range of the special hit type counter C 2 in the range of “0 to 79”. This “jackpot D” has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot game is over, a probability variation state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set that allows a player to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V area). It is a jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 80% (80/100). This “big jackpot D” is the most advantageous jackpot type because it has the largest number of rounds in the jackpot and is given an advantageous probability variation state after the jackpot is over.

  Furthermore, in the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) set after the end of jackpot game, “Time A” is set as the type of normal symbol high probability state (common symbol high probability type) Is done. As will be described in detail later, when “time reduction A” is set, a game per universal figure in which a ball is likely to win the second operation port 10703b that is advantageous to the player is most easily executed as a game per universal figure. , It is the most common type of figure that is most advantageous to the player.

  Further, in the range where the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, “big hit E” is associated and defined. This “jackpot E” has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot game is completed, a short-time state is given (the opening / closing pattern is set such that it is impossible to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V area). Is a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 20 counter values that are “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 20% (20/100). The “big hit E” is the jackpot type that is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, although it has a disadvantageous short time state after the jackpot game ends, although the number of rounds is the largest in the jackpot.

  However, in the short-time state (special symbol high-probability state, normal symbol high-probability state) that is set after the jackpot game is finished, “normal time high-probability state” is set as “short-time A”. Is done. As will be described in detail later, when “time reduction A” is set, a game per universal figure in which a ball is likely to win the second operation port 10703b that is advantageous to the player is most easily executed as a game per universal figure. , It is the most common type of figure that is most advantageous to the player.

  As described above, in the sixth control example, the lottery in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is executed as in the first control example described above. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be set to the high-accuracy type (short time A) advantageous to the player when the big win is won than the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly so that many lotteries for the second special symbol are executed.

  In addition, in the sixth control example, in addition to various game states set internally, the type of special symbol for which a lottery opportunity is established varies depending on the number of balls won in the special prize opening 10730 during a game per game. It is configured as follows. As a result, even when the common figure high-accuracy type (temporal time B) disadvantageous to the player is set, the game can be performed while expecting the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed. In the case where a common figure high-accuracy type (short time A) advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to make the game eagerly so that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 572 (c), a description will be given of the opening pattern of the special electric accessory 10701a that is set in the sixth control example and is playing per game. FIG. 572 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the details of the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a executed based on the type per game and the gaming state.

  In this sixth control example, the set per-normal figure type, the game state set at the execution timing of the game per common figure (during the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a), or the normal figure high-accuracy type, Depending on the situation, the opening operation content (opening pattern) of the special electric accessory 10701a is made different, and the balls to the operation ports (the first operation port 10703a and the second operation port 10703b) during the game are usually played. It is configured such that the ease of entering the ball and the ease of entering the ball into the second operation port 10703b, which is the trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player, are made different. Note that the control process for setting the common map type is the same as that in the fifth control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 572 (c), when the type per common figure is “A per common figure” and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols), the special electric It is defined that “short opening” is performed in which the accessory 10701a is opened for 0.2 seconds. When this “short opening” is executed, as a condition for ending the game per normal game, in addition to the period ending condition that is established when the opening period of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, one ball is placed in the special prize opening 10730. A winning end condition that is established when an individual winning is set.

  By setting the above-mentioned conditions for the game per game, in the game per game executed during the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to win the special prize opening 10730 and the ball won the special prize opening 10730. Even so, it is possible to suppress the switching valve 10702 from operating to an operating position (a position that blocks a flow path capable of entering the first operating port 10703a).

  Next, the type per common figure is “A per common figure”, the gaming state is a time state or a high probability state of a normal symbol that is a probability variation state, and the common figure high probability type is “Time A”. In this case, it is specified that “long A1 release” is executed in which the special electric accessory 10701a is opened for 5 seconds. When this “long A1 release” is executed, four balls are placed in the special prize opening 10730 in addition to the period end condition that is established when the five-second release period elapses as a condition for ending the game per game. A winning end condition that is established when winning is set.

  By setting the above-mentioned game end conditions for the game per game, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the special winning opening 10730 in the game per game played during the time A, and at the end of the game per game the switching valve 10702 can be easily operated to the operation position (position that blocks a flow path that can enter the first operation port 10703a). In addition, even if a right-handed game is continuously performed during a game per hit, the winning end condition is satisfied when four balls are won at the special winning opening 10730, so that the timing for the fourth winning is met. Even if the fifth or sixth ball wins the special winning opening 10730, the switching valve 10702 maintains the operating position (position that closes the flow path allowing the first operating opening 10703a to enter). Therefore, the game per game for which “long A1 release” is set is a game per game for which a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol is likely to be established.

  If the type per common figure is “A per common figure”, the game state is a time state or a normal symbol high probability state that is a probable variation state, and the common figure high probability type is “Time B” In addition, it is defined that “long A2 release” in which the special electric accessory 10701a is opened for 5 seconds is executed. When this “long A2 release” is executed, as a condition for ending the game per regular game, in addition to the period end condition that is established when the 5 second release period has elapsed, six balls in the special prize opening 10730 A winning end condition that is established when winning is set.

  By setting the above-mentioned game end condition for the usual figure, in the game for the usual figure executed during the short time B, it becomes easy for the ball to win the special winning opening 10730 and the switching valve at the end of the game per the usual figure. 10702 can be easily operated to the operation position (position that blocks a flow path that can enter the first operation port 10703a). However, since the timing at which the winning end condition is satisfied is the time when six are awarded to the special prize opening 10730, the seventh and eighth balls have won the special prize opening 10730 in accordance with the sixth winning timing. In this case, the position of the switching valve 10702 is changed from the operating position (position for closing the flow path that can enter the first operation port 10703a) to the initial position (position for closing the flow path that can enter the second operation port 10703b). There is a risk of being variable. In other words, a game per base figure for which “Long A2 release” is set is a game per base figure in which a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol may be established due to over-winning in the special winning opening 10730 during the game per base figure. Become. Therefore, “Long A2 release” is a game per regular figure that can be disadvantageous in the lottery opportunity, although the number of winning balls that can be acquired is larger than “Long A1 release” described above.

  Next, when the type per base is “B per base” and the gaming state is the normal state (normal probability low probability state), the special electric accessory 10701a is opened for 0.2 seconds “short” “Open” is executed. When this “short opening” is executed, as a condition for ending the game per normal game, in addition to the period ending condition that is established when the opening period of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, one ball is placed in the special prize opening 10730. A winning end condition that is established when an individual winning is set.

  By setting the above-mentioned conditions for the game per game, in the game per game executed during the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to win the special prize opening 10730 and the ball won the special prize opening 10730. Even so, it is possible to suppress the switching valve 10702 from operating to an operating position (a position that blocks a flow path capable of entering the first operating port 10703a).

  Next, the type per common figure is “B per common figure”, the gaming state is a time state or a high probability state of a normal symbol that is a probabilistic state, and the common figure high-accuracy type is “time-short A”. In this case, it is defined that “long B1 release” is executed in which the special electric accessory 10701a is opened for 5 seconds. When this “long B1 release” is executed, three balls are placed in the special prize opening 10730 in addition to the period end condition that is established when the five-second release period has elapsed as a condition for ending the game per ordinary figure. A winning end condition that is established when winning is set.

  By setting the above-mentioned game end conditions for the game per game, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the special winning opening 10730 in the game per game played during the time A, and at the end of the game per game the switching valve 10702 can be easily operated to the operation position (position that blocks a flow path that can enter the first operation port 10703a). In addition, even if a right-handed game is continuously performed during a game per hit, the winning end condition is established when three balls have won the special winning opening 10730, so that the timing of the third winning is met. Even if the fourth ball or the fifth ball wins the special winning opening 10730, the switching valve 10702 maintains the operating position (the position that blocks the flow path that can enter the first operating port 10703a). Therefore, the game per game for which “long B1 release” is set is a game per game where the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol is likely to be established.

  When the type per common figure is “B per common figure”, the game state is a time state or a normal state high probability state that is a probable change state, and the common figure high accuracy type is “Time B” In addition, it is defined that “long B2 release” is executed in which the special electric accessory 10701a is opened for 5 seconds. When this “long B2 release” is executed, in addition to the period end condition that is established when the 5-second release period has elapsed as a condition for ending the game per regular figure, five balls are placed in the special prize opening 10730 A winning end condition that is established when winning is set.

  By setting the above-mentioned game end condition for the usual figure, in the game for the usual figure executed during the short time B, it becomes easy for the ball to win the special winning opening 10730 and the switching valve at the end of the game per the usual figure. 10702 can be easily operated to the operation position (position that blocks a flow path that can enter the first operation port 10703a). However, the timing at which the winning end condition is satisfied is the time when five special winning openings 10730 are won, and the number of winnings at which the winning end condition is satisfied is set more than the above-mentioned “Long B1 release”. The position of the valve 10702 changes from the operating position (position that blocks the flow path that can enter the first operating port 10703a) to the initial position (position that closes the path that can enter the second operating port 10703b). There is a fear. In other words, a game per game with “Long B2 Open” set is more than a game per game with “Long B1 Open” set. A special symbol drawing lottery opportunity is likely to be established. Therefore, “Long B2 release” is a game per regular figure that can be disadvantageous in the lottery opportunity, although the number of winning balls that can be obtained is larger than the “Long B1 release” described above.

  Lastly, when the type of per symbol is “C per per symbol” and the gaming state is the normal state (ordinary symbol low probability state), the special electric accessory 10701a is opened for 0.2 seconds. “Open” is executed. When this “short opening” is executed, as a condition for ending the game per normal game, in addition to the period ending condition that is established when the opening period of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, one ball is placed in the special prize opening 10730. A winning end condition that is established when an individual winning is set.

  By setting the above-mentioned conditions for the game per game, in the game per game executed during the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to win the special prize opening 10730 and the ball won the special prize opening 10730. Even so, it is possible to suppress the switching valve 10702 from operating to an operating position (a position that blocks a flow path capable of entering the first operating port 10703a).

  Next, if the type per common figure is “C per common figure” and the game state is a time state or a high probability state of a normal symbol that is a probability variation state, the common figure high-accuracy type is “time reduction A”, It is specified that “long C1 release, long C2 release” that the special electric accessory 10701a is opened for 5 seconds is executed together with “time reduction B”. When this “long C1 release, long C2 release” is executed, in addition to the period end condition that is established when the 5-second release period has elapsed, A winning end condition that is established when 10 balls are won is set.

  By setting the above-mentioned game end condition for the usual game, it becomes easier for the ball to win the special prize opening 10730 in the game for the usual game executed during the short time (during the short time A, during the short time B). On the other hand, since there are ten winning end conditions, if the winning end condition is established during a game per game, the switching valve 10702 closes the flow path that allows the player to enter the second operating port 10703b. (Position). In other words, a game per game in which “long C1 release, long C2 release” is set is a game per game that is likely to be disadvantageous in the lottery opportunity, although the number of winning balls can be increased.

  As described above, in the sixth control example, the opening period of the special electric accessory 10701a in the game per game is different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. In the low probability state of ordinary symbols (ordinary accuracy), even if a game is executed per ordinary symbol, the ball can be made difficult to win the special prize opening 10730. In a high probability state (general figure high probability) of the symbol, when a game per normal figure is executed, the ball can easily win the special prize opening 10730.

  Furthermore, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, it is configured to be able to set “Time-short A” and “Time-short B” as the common figure high-accuracy type. It is configured to vary the game end conditions. With this configuration, the number of balls that can be won in the special prize opening 10730 in a single game per game can be easily changed according to the type and game state per game.

  As described above, in the sixth control example, a lottery opportunity of different special symbol types can be established according to the number of balls won in a specific winning opening during a game per game. Therefore, each time a game is executed per game, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly.

  Further, in the fifth control example and the sixth control example described above, the explanation was made using the pachinko machine 10 having the gameability aiming for the big win in the special symbol lottery, but not limited to this, for example, the special symbol Even if it is applied to the pachinko machine 10 which is provided with a variable pitching means that opens when a small win is won in the lottery and the ball passes a specific area in the variable pitching means, the jackpot game can be executed. good.

  In this case, for example, the probability of winning a small bonus in the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, 1/200) and the probability of winning a small bonus in the lottery of the second special symbol (for example, 1/2) are greatly different. In addition, the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set may be configured as a short period (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed twice). Thereby, it is possible for the player to pay attention to which special symbol lottery opportunity is established in the game per game.

  In the fifth control example and the sixth control example described above, by changing the game mode (open pattern of the special electric accessory 10701a) per game, a special prize opening during a game per game. Although the number of balls that can be won in 10730 is different, the easiness of winning a prize to the first operating port 10703a or the second operating port 10703b of the balls that have won the special winning port 10730 is different. In addition to this configuration, the first flow path in which the balls distributed by the switching valve 10702 can win any one of the operation ports, and the second flow that is harder to win any of the operation ports than the first flow path. You may provide the 2nd distribution means distributed to a road. In this case, the second allocating means has a predetermined operation pattern based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10, and the balls are easily distributed to the first flow path (not easily distributed to the second flow path). It may be configured to be always variably operated between one state and a second state that is less likely to be distributed to the first flow path than the first state (easily distributed to the second flow path). You may comprise so that a variable operation | movement may be triggered by execution of the game per figure.

  In the fifth control example and the sixth control example described above, a flow path that always enters the first operation port 10703a and a flow path that always enters the second operation port 10703b according to the operation status of the switching valve 10702, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a flow path in which a sphere can easily enter the first working port 10703a than the second working port 10703b, and the first working port Any configuration may be used as long as the sphere can be distributed to the flow path where the sphere can easily enter the second operation port 10703b than 10703a.

  Further, in the fifth control example and the sixth control example described above, the second working combination 10640a and the first working combination 10640b are formed in the same flow path, and the second working combination 10640a is in an open state. In this case, it is configured so that the ball does not reach the first working combination 10640b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first working combination 10640b and the second working combination 10640a are both open. The sphere may reach any of the actuating objects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which special symbol lottery is executed after a game per game. Further, in order to make it easier for a ball to enter the lower first entrance 10640b1 which is an opportunity to execute the first special symbol lottery which is disadvantageous to the player, the first operating combination 10640b is more than the second operating combination 10640a. Is also provided on the upstream side so that when the first working combination 10640b and the second working combination 10640a are both in an open state, the sphere can be easily reached in preference to the first working combination 10640b. Also good.

  In addition, in the fifth control example and the sixth control example described above, the same condition (two ball winnings) is set as the closing condition of the first working combination 10640b and the closing condition of the second working combination 10640a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the closing conditions may be set more easily. In this case, the closing condition of the first working combination 10640b is changed to the lower first entrance 10640b1 in order to suppress the entrance to the lower first entrance 10640b1 which is an opportunity to execute the special symbol lottery which is disadvantageous to the player. The single winning of the ball may be more easily established than the closing condition of the second working accessory 10640a, or the opposite closing condition may be set.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 573 to 638. FIG. 573 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, FIG. 574 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 575 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 573, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and is formed in an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with two metal hinges 18 on the left and right sides when viewed from the front (see FIG. 573). The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 574) having a large number of nails and entrances 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 584) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 573). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 573), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 573), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 574) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In this control example, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or the solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 574, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails and windmills, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the sorting member 660, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 573). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 573) surround the front and rear, so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a start port or the like is disposed, Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 584) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 574), and the situation where the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once returns to the ball guide path again is prevented. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part of FIG. 574) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball enters the normal entrance. When passing 67, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and at the same time, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or until seven balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are 6 types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”. After the special game state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to the results of the jackpot game Value (game value) is given to the player. Note that the three types of “big hits A to C” are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is executed in response to a ball entering the first entrance 64, and “ The three types of jackpots D to F are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is performed by a lottery executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball enters the second entrance. The special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the ball outlet 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When the normal symbol is hit, the first entrance 64 is changed by changing the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). Opened. In addition, since the electric accessory 64a is normally disposed at the closed position, the right side and the left side of the first entrance 64 are closed. Therefore, the ball rolling from the right side and the left side of the front view toward the first entrance 64 cannot enter the first entrance 64 due to being blocked by the electric accessory 64a (difficulty). ) For this reason, during normal times, basically only the sphere that has flowed down from the top vertically in the front view with respect to the first entrance 64 can enter the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball that rolls from the right side and the left side of the front view toward the first entrance 64 is opened by opening the electric accessory 64a. As a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are six types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”.

  When the “big hit A” and the “big hit D” are reached, a special gaming state (16 rounds big hit) with 16 rounds is set. On the other hand, when “Big Bonus B” is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special gaming state of 5 rounds (5 rounds of Big Bonus). When the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 7 rounds (7 rounds jackpot) and becomes a “big hit F”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 6 rounds (6 rounds jackpot). Furthermore, when a specific condition is satisfied during each of the jackpot games (when a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 passes a probability change switch 65e3 described later), a high probability state (special) of a special symbol after the jackpot ends. Moves to (during symbol change). In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the hit probability of the normal symbol is also increased (the short time state of the normal symbol is given). The high probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol continue after the jackpot ends until the next jackpot. On the other hand, if the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the special symbol has a low probability state until the next big hit, and the normal symbol hit Probability is also normal probability (normal state of normal symbol).

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called “high probability state of a special symbol” (special symbol probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol high-probability state) means a gaming state in which a normal symbol hit probability is increased and a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (ordinary symbol low probability state), which is a normal symbol hit probability normal state, that is, shorter than the short-time state Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probability change period. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in this control example, the number of rounds at the jackpot varies according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). In this control example, the “special symbol probability change state” and “ordinary symbol time-short state” given after the jackpot are continued until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the “special symbol probable state” and the “normal symbol time-short state” may be limited until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of lotteries that will be in the “special symbol probable state” may be different from the number of lotteries that will be in the “normal symbol time-short state”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which varies the number of lotteries according to the type of jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power, etc., the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol normal state” are always set. If the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the state shifts from the “special symbol low probability state” to the “special symbol probability change state” and from the “normal symbol normal state”. Move to "Normal symbol time-short state". In this case, the set “probability change state of special symbol” and “short-time state of normal symbol” continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the ball has never passed the probability variation switch 65e3 at the big hit of 1, it shifts to a “special symbol low probability state” and a “normal symbol normal state”. Although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, when “big hit A to D” is reached, the ball easily passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, and when “big hit E, F” is reached, the big hit It becomes difficult for the sphere to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If the first special symbol wins, it will be one of the “big hits A to C”. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, there is a high possibility that the “special symbol probable change state” and the “normal symbol short-time state” will occur. On the other hand, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be one of “big hits D to F”. Furthermore, although mentioned later for details, the ratio which becomes "big hit D" when it is a big win in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is 5%. Therefore, if you win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, it will be “big jackpot E, F” with a high probability (95% ratio), so “low probability state of special symbol” that is disadvantageous for the player after the jackpot ends There is a high possibility that the “normal state of normal symbols” will be obtained. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous for the player compared to the lottery of the first special symbol.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball that has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present control example, the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (a special symbol corresponding to the big hit A to F) (First symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the display of the gaming state according to the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 579, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 579 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 579 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 579 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is constituted by imitating numbers from “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 584) described later is a big hit, the variable display that the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 579 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts in the upper and lower directions, and the upper 4/5 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower 1/5 is a sub display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls, the notice character, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 0.5 seconds. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (0.5 seconds or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is It is possible to suppress overlooking whether or not it is a big hit. Further, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present control example, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to a detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stop display. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time. Further, when both a holding ball corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and a holding ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are present, the lottery based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is preferential. Executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and a sphere that has not yet been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of (reserved balls), is displayed by the number of reserved symbols indicating each reserved ball.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 579 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a maximum of four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed on the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. The reserved symbol displayed on the right side of the front view is the reserved symbol (first reserved symbol) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol, and the reserved symbol displayed on the right side of the front view corresponds to the lottery of the second special symbol. This is a reserved symbol (second reserved symbol). FIG. 579 (b) exemplifies a case where three first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank). Yes.

  In the present control example, the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is equal to the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, the symbol “O” as the symbol “2” and the symbol “×” are displayed. Fluctuation display in which symbols are alternately turned on is performed. When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the predetermined symbol (in the present control example, the symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 causes the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 to stay for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present control example, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is limited to 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The first entrance 64 is provided with a pair of electric accessories 64a that can be opened and closed on the left and right sides. When the electric accessory 64a is in an open state, the first entrance 64 is vertically above the first entrance 64. In addition to the sphere that has flowed down from the sphere, a sphere that has flowed down from the left-right direction can also enter. The first entrance 64 is a sphere (left-handed sphere) that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 regardless of whether or not the electric accessory 64a is open. On the other hand, nails or the like are arranged so that it is easier to enter the ball than the ball that flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (a right-handed ball).

  A second entrance 640 through which a sphere can enter is disposed on the upper right side in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 574, since the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, the ball that has flowed down the flow path provided in the right direction of the variable display device unit 80 basically. However, it is easier to enter the ball than the ball that has flowed down the flow path provided in the left direction of the variable display device unit 80.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally long specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed in the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed so as to become a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until seven balls have been won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. It should be noted that the specific winning opening 65a and the second entrance 640 are positions where a ball (right-handed ball) that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 can enter (easy to enter). Is arranged. In other words, the sphere that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is disposed at a position where it cannot enter (difficult to enter). Therefore, in order to receive a payout of a prize ball during a jackpot (to obtain a profit), the player has only to hit the ball to the right.

  A plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which a sphere can pass are provided inside the variable winning device 65 (see FIGS. 578 (a) and (b)). The sphere that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge channel 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a sphere. The special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass only in the first round of the big hit. Although details will be described later, in this control example, it is possible to easily enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of jackpot (the door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds at the maximum). (Big hits A to D) and big hits (big hits E and F) are difficult (the open / close door 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.2 seconds) to enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 576 to 578, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 576 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 576, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b that is arranged to protrude to the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The LED board 65d is disposed, a back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an open / close door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opened / closed unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover The switching member 65h that projects into the flow path formed by the body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, the link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. The back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, and covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m for this purpose.

  FIG. 577 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 577 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 577 (b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 577 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a that is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 577 (b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 578 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 577 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and an incomplete entry. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, in the open state of the open / close door 65f1, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65. You can win in 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 577 (a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 577 (b). As shown in FIG. 577 (a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 578, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 578 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 578 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 578 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Discharged.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, the game state after the big hit game is changed to the special change state of special symbols (by the game ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit game) ( Probability game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved even during the jackpot game. . The operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of jackpot, and the switching member 65h operates at a position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is opened simultaneously with the start of the first round of jackpot, while the jackpot Simultaneously with the end of the first round, the switching member 65h operates to a position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed. Further, the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 0.2 seconds at the shortest. ing. As described above, at jackpots E and F, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 is 0.2 seconds at the maximum, so unless the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time. The special discharge channel 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2 before the ball flows into the special discharge channel 65e2. For this reason, when the big hits E and F are reached, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during one big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 578 (b), a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 578 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a ball discharge port switch 65e4 formed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined from the sum of the ball outlet switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected early.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this control example, 11 for one ball prize). Award balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Returning to FIG. 574, the description will be continued. A substantially semicircular sorting member 660 is provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65 in front view. The sorting member 660 is provided with receiving portions on the left and right sides that can receive a ball flowing down from above. The distribution member 660 has two arrangements, one in which the right-side receiving part comes directly under the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 and the other in which the left-side receiving part comes directly under the flow path. A street arrangement may be taken. FIG. 574 illustrates an arrangement in which the right-side receiving part comes directly under the flow path.

  In a state where the right receiving part is arranged immediately below the flow path, when the sphere flowing down the flow path is received by the right receiving part, the sorting member 660 is caused by the weight of the sphere. As a result of rotating in the clockwise direction, the left-side receiving part is arranged directly below the flow path. Further, since the right receiving portion is inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front due to the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination and flows down to the lower right direction of the sorting member 660. The sphere that has flowed down to the lower right of the sorting member 660 rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. For this reason, when the open / close door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  In a state where the left receiving portion is arranged immediately below the flow path, when the sphere flowing down the flow path is received by the left receiving portion, the distribution member 660 is caused by the weight of the sphere. As a result of rotating in the counterclockwise direction, the right-side receiving part is arranged directly below the flow path. Further, since the left receiving portion is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front by the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, the sorting member 660 flows down in the lower left direction. The sphere that has flowed down in the lower left direction of the sorting member 660 flows along the flow path toward the second entrance 640, and about 80% of the sphere enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, in the seventh control example, the ball (right-handed ball) launched into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is directed to the variable winning device 65 by the distribution member 660. And the direction of the second entrance 640 are alternately distributed. For this reason, in the special game state (big hit), if a right-handed strike is made in order to win the ball to the specific winning opening 65a to obtain a winning ball, the ball will enter the second winning slot 640 during the big hit. Enter a lot. As a result, in most cases, when the jackpot ends, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored up to a value (4).

  As described above, in the seventh control example, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type (hit E, F) that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 has a high probability (95%). It is determined. The jackpots E and F are both configured so that the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in each round is extremely short (0.2 seconds), making it difficult to enter the ball during the jackpot. Therefore, if the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol, it becomes a big hit type with a high probability (95%) and hardly winning a winning ball, and also the gaming state after the big hit is disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery of the first special symbol as much as possible, because the lottery of the second special symbol is an undesirable lottery.

  However, as described above, if the player hits the right to win the winning ball by winning the ball to the specific winning opening 65a in the jackpot, the ball also enters the second winning slot 640, so at least the jackpot After the end, the lottery of the second special symbol held during the jackpot is executed. Therefore, after the big hit, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a game is played in the hope that the special symbol lottery will not be a big hit until there is no reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol. As expected by the player, if all of the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are missed, the player can make the lottery of the first special symbol only by left-handed. The game can be continued without reducing the number of balls until it becomes a relatively advantageous type of jackpot (jackpot A to C).

  In the seventh control example, when one ball enters the second entrance 640, one prize ball is awarded. When a right strike is made, one ball is distributed to two balls in the direction of the second entrance 640 by the sorting member 660, so that all balls distributed in the direction of the second entrance 640 are second. Even if the ball enters the entrance 640, only half of the ball hit by the right hand is paid out by the winning ball. Therefore, since the ball is easily reduced when the right hand is made, it is possible to eliminate the merit with respect to the right hand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn during normal times (a state other than the big hit).

  In this way, in the seventh control example, if a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big win is over, it will be disadvantageous for the player, and all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol will come off. If so, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game by paying attention to a predetermined number (4 times) of lottery results after the jackpot ends, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 573).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any prize opening is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 575, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 584). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 584). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 580 to FIG. 582, the characteristic effects of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example executed in the main display area Dm will be described. As described above, in the present control example, if the player hits the right for the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, the second special symbol is displayed before the jackpot is ended by the ball entering the second entrance 640. Is configured to reach the upper limit number. If a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be disadvantageous to the player, so the player plays the game in the hope that the lottery will be lost during the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. In the seventh control example, whether or not a lottery result that is a big hit of the second special symbol is included in the holding ball until all the change display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is completed. It is set as the structure which performs the production | presentation which suggests.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 580 (a) and (b), an effect performed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 580 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during jackpot. As shown in FIG. 580 (a), during the jackpot, the effect that the adventurer 811 searches for the cave is displayed. In addition, on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally elongated display area HR1 is displayed. In this display area HR1, the current number of rounds is displayed. In the example of FIG. 580 (a), the characters “1 round” are displayed, indicating that the current round is the first.

  On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally elongated display area HR2 having a substantially rectangular shape is displayed. In the display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry to the specific prize opening 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 580 (a), the characters “GET 0022” are displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 prize balls have been paid out (that is, two balls have been identified since the big hit has started). It is shown that the ball entered the winning opening 65a.

  In addition, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed. Although details will be described later, in these four display areas HR3a to HR3d, the degree of expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol increased by the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit is shown. An image is displayed. Note that, as described above, it is more likely that a player who is out of the lottery of the second special symbol will have a better result for the player than a big hit, so the display areas HR3a to HR3d will be out of place. An image showing the expected degree is displayed.

  FIG. 580 (a) exemplifies a state in which there is no reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, and each display area HR3a to HR3d is given a symbol “?”. An image is displayed.

  FIG. 580 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a ball entering the second ball inlet 640 is detected during the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 580 (b), when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected during the jackpot, the effect that the adventurer 811 finds the treasure chest 812 is executed. This treasure box contains a key 813, and the mode of the key 813 suggests an expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol held on the basis of the incoming ball will be lost. The more gorgeous aspect of the key 813, the higher the degree of expectation of detachment, and the poorer the aspect, the lower the degree of expectation of detachment (the higher the risk of winning in the lottery of the second special symbol).

  FIG. 580 (b) illustrates a case where the key 813 in the normal mode is displayed. When the adventurer 811 finds the key 813, the key in the same mode as the discovered mode is displayed on the upper side with respect to the display area where “?” Is displayed among the display areas HR3a to HR3d. It is displayed in order from the area. In the example of FIG. 580 (b), the case where the image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a among the display areas where the symbol “?” Is displayed is illustrated. In this way, by displaying the mode of each key 813 discovered by the adventurer 811 on the display areas HR3a to HR3d, the variable display based on each held ball executed after the end of the current jackpot is completed. The player can confirm the degree of expectation at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the seventh control example, dedicated display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the degree of expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol are provided for the main display area Dm. There is no need to provide an area. For example, it is good also as a structure which displays the holding | maintenance symbol of the 2nd special symbol displayed on the sub display area | region Ds in the aspect of the key which the adventurer 811 discovered.

  FIG. 581 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the ending effect after all the big hit rounds are completed. In the seventh control example, the jackpot E, in the second special symbol holding sphere from the jackpot ending period until the fluctuation time of all the variable display based on the second special symbol holding ball elapses. An effect of notifying the player whether or not F exists is executed. In other words, it is suggested whether or not the gaming state remains in the “special symbol probable change state” and the “normal symbol time-short state” even after all the variation display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol is finished. Production for this is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the “special symbol probability change state” and the “normal symbol time-short state”, which are game states advantageous to the player, are referred to as “probability change mode” and are disadvantageous to the player. A special game state “low probability state of special symbol” and “normal state of normal symbol” are referred to as “normal mode”.

  As shown in FIG. 581 (a), when the jackpot ending period starts, the adventurer 811 finds the door 814. In addition, a display region HR4 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is formed above the image of the door 814. In the display area HR4, characters “Start door break mode !!!! Break through the four doors !!” are displayed. With these display contents, it is advantageous for the player if the four doors can be opened using the four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected during the jackpot (the holding ball of the second special symbol). It is possible to make the player easily understand that the probability variation mode continues even after digesting. In the upper left display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, a left-pointing arrow image and a character “left-handed” are displayed. With these displays, it is possible to cause the player to launch a sphere in the left direction (to cause a sphere to be launched into the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80).

  The reason for notifying left-handed at the start of the ending period is to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being executed after the end of the jackpot. In other words, the ball launched by the player hitting the right during the ending period is the second entrance 640 after the jackpot is finished (and the change based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started). To prevent the number of lotteries for the second special symbol from increasing after the jackpot is over (the lottery for the second special symbol will be executed beyond the four times reserved during the jackpot) (To suppress). As described above, even if a big win is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the winning ball cannot be almost obtained during the big win, and the game state after the big win becomes a normal mode which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, as the number of lotteries for the second special symbol increases, the player becomes disadvantageous. Therefore, in the seventh control example, in order to prevent the player from making a right turn even after the jackpot ends and a new ball entering the second entrance 640, the game is played from the ending period. It is set as the structure which alert | reports left strike to a person. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot can be limited to the one with the holding ball of the second special symbol held during the jackpot, which is excessively disadvantageous for the player. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  When the jackpot (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, as shown in FIG. 581 (b), an effect of breaking through the door 814 using the keys collected during the jackpot is executed. FIG. 581 (b) illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through the door 814 using the key displayed in the display area HR3a. If the breakthrough is successful, an image in which the door 814 is opened is displayed, and characters “breakthrough !!” are displayed in the display area HR4. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the remaining three doors are broken through, the player is in an advantageous state (probability change mode).

  The effect of breaking through the door 814 is basically executed in conjunction with the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. That is, the effect that the adventurer 811 opens (breaks through) the first door using the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) is based on the first reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is executed in a period from when the variable display is started until the variable display based on the second reserved ball is started. Similarly, the effect that the adventurer 811 uses the second key to open the second door is that the display of the variation based on the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is started, It is executed in a period until the variable display based on the holding ball is started. The effect that the adventurer 811 uses the third key to open the third door is the fourth special ball after the variable display based on the third reserved ball of the second special symbol is started. It is executed in a period until the variable display based on the start. The effect of opening the fourth door using the fourth key is executed in the variation display variation time based on the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol. In addition, these are the operations when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the detachment, and if the big special is won by lottery, the door breaks through during the jackpot period The production is performed one or more times.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 583, in the seventh control example, it is difficult to detect whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the variable winning device 65. As described above, when the second special symbol comes off, the disengagement (so-called “small hit”) with the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 is determined. And the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the door 65f1 in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the door 65f1 in each round in the case of a big hit E, F in the second special symbol lottery Match. Further, when the jackpot is E or F, the interval period between rounds is made to coincide with the variation time (1 second) when the second special symbol lottery is missed. By configuring in this way, even if a big hit E or a big hit F occurs during execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the present is already a big hit from the opening period and opening interval of the door 65f1. It can be difficult to determine whether or not. Thereby, it can be made to pay attention to the series of effects (door break mode effect) performed with the start of an ending period to the last.

  FIG. 582 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of failing to break through the fourth door in the door breakthrough mode effect. That is, it is a figure showing an example of a display mode when either of big hits E and F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 582 (a), when the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the characters “failure ...” are displayed in the display area HR4, and the adventurer 811 possesses them. The effect that the key is broken is executed. By these display modes, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the probability variation mode has ended (either of the jackpots E or F has been won).

  FIG. 582 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the door breakthrough mode effect is successful in breaking through the fourth door. In this case, an image in which the fourth door is opened is displayed, and characters “Great success!” And characters “Probability mode entry!” Are displayed in the display area HR4. By these display modes, it can be easily understood that the game can be performed in the probability variation mode advantageous to the player.

  Thus, in the seventh control example, the door breakthrough described above is performed over the period from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol increased during the jackpot. The mode production is executed. Due to this door break-through mode effect, the variation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol will be all off, and whether the game can be played in the probability variation mode, jackpot E, F is included in the retention ball, in the probability variation mode It is possible to suggest to the player whether or not the player falls into the normal mode without drawing the first special symbol. By having a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over an ending period and a plurality of variable displays after jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the seventh control example, the game after all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed depending on whether or not the number of doors corresponding to the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be broken. Although it was set as the structure which alert | reports whether a state is probability change mode, the production | presentation aspect is not restricted to this. Eventually, any of the two types of results (success, failure, victory, defeat, finalization, losing, etc.) may be used, for example, in an aspect where the adventurer 811 is an enemy. It is good also as a structure by which probability change mode is alert | reported if it fights and it wins an enemy.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 583, a description will be given of the correspondence relationship between the change in the effect mode during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the change in the state of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing state of the open / close door 65f1). FIG. 583 (a) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the probability variation mode is notified (that is, when the lottery balls corresponding to the second special symbol all fall out). On the other hand, FIG. 583 (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the normal mode is notified (that is, when either the big hit E or F is included in the hold).

  As shown in FIG. 583 (a), when it is informed that the mode has shifted to the probability variation mode (when the lottery of the second special symbol is all off), the start screen of the door breakthrough mode effect is displayed together with the start of the ending period ( 581 (a)) is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed for the ending period of 1 second, and the start screen ends when the ending period ends and the jackpot end timing is reached. When the jackpot ends and the variable display based on the first reserved ball (hold 1) of the second special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the first door (FIG. 581 (b )) Is started. This effect continues until the start timing of the fluctuation based on the second reserved ball (hold 2). As described above, when the second special symbol is not selected, it is almost a small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 583 (a), when the 1-second fluctuation display based on the hold 1 is completed, a small hit is started and the open / close door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. It is displayed that the door has been successfully broken in accordance with the opening period.

  Thereafter, similarly, the change display for 1 second and the opening / closing of the door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small hit are repeated. In accordance with this, an effect of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and it is notified (displayed) that the door has been broken through during each opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1. . In this way, the door is broken through for a one-second fluctuation period by notifying the result of whether or not the door can break through during the small hitting opening period after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The expectation for can be further increased. In addition, since it is possible to draw attention during the small hitting period, it is difficult for the player to make an attempt to determine whether or not the hitting pattern has already been reached based on the opening pattern of the door 65f1. it can.

  After the adventurer 811 breaks through the door 814 and the transition to the probability change mode is notified (after the fourth small hit ends) in the production that breaks through the fourth door, the display mode dedicated to the probability change mode (Not shown) is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the mode has changed to the probability changing mode.

  FIG. 583 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is a big hit F. FIG. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, when it is informed that the mode has shifted to the normal mode (when either the big hit E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol), the ending period At the same time, the door break mode production will start. When the jackpot is over and the special symbol variation display based on the first reserved ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, an effect of trying to break through the first door is executed, and the small hitting opening period At the same time, the adventurer 811 breaks through the first door.

  When the change display of the special symbol based on the second reserved ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, an effect of trying to break through the second door is executed. At this time, the fluctuation display for 1 second is executed based on the second reserved ball, and the jackpot F is started after 1 second has elapsed. When the big hit F is reached and the first round is started, the open / close door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. It is notified that the adventurer 811 has succeeded in breaking through the door in accordance with the opening period. Then, with the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, an effect is made to break through the third door, and the opening period (0.2 for the second round after the interval period of 1 second has elapsed). Second), it is informed that the third door has been successfully broken through.

  In addition, when the interval period after the end of the second round is started, an effect of trying to break through the fourth door is executed, and the third round opening period (0. It is notified that the fourth door could not be broken through for 2 seconds (see FIG. 582 (a)).

  After it is notified that the door breakthrough has failed, a result display (not shown) indicating the total number of winning balls paid out in this probability variation mode is executed until the end of the jackpot. When the jackpot ends, the display mode is set to the normal mode.

  As described above, in the seventh control example, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the big hit, the state of the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 when the variable display and the small hit are repeated is repeated. The change (see FIG. 583 (a)) and the temporal change (see FIG. 583 (b)) of the state of the open / close door 65f1 when the big ball E or F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol are at least It is configured to match until the end of the door break mode production. That is, the opening period of the door 65f1 in each round of big hits E and F is configured to be 0.2 seconds, which is the same period as the small hitting opening period. In addition, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E, F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, even if any of the first to fourth reserved balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode effect ends The operation of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the probability variation mode is notified (see FIG. 583 (a)). Therefore, since it can be difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot E or F has been reached from the operation of the open / close door 65f1, it is possible to focus attention on the door breakthrough mode effect to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, in FIG. 583 (b), even if it becomes a big hit F with the second reserved ball (falls to the normal mode), an example is shown in which the third door breaks through and the fourth door fails. However, it may be configured such that an effect that fails to break through the door is executed when either of the big hits E and F is changed during digestion of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

<About the electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 584, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 584 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 589) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 589, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol And a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 608). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball opening 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 608).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 585 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state), and a high probability (special The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each of them is set differently (see FIG. 585 (b)). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number falls outside the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random numbers “0-3” are the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 585 (b)). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 4 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/100”. Note that, as shown in FIG. 585 (b), the random value (counter value) that is a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. On the other hand, random number values other than the above-mentioned jackpot random number value correspond to deviations. As described above, the special symbol removal includes a small hit. As shown in FIG. 585 (b), there are 396 random numbers “4 to 399” that are out of the lottery of the first special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability. On the other hand, 37 random numbers of “4 to 40” are lost in the lottery of the second special symbol, and random numbers that are small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol are “41 to 399”. 359 pieces.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 40 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 39” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability ( (See FIG. 585 (a)). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 40 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/10”. In addition, when the special symbol is highly probable, the random number values that are out of the lottery of the first special symbol are 360 numbers of “40 to 399”. On the other hand, only “40” is specified as the random number value that is lost in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number value that is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is “359” of “41 to 399”. Individuals are defined.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 586 (a), when the first special symbol lottery is won and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9”, the big hit type is “big hit A” ( 16 rounds probable big hit). The jackpot type when the value is “10 to 89” is “Big Jack B” (5-round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is “90 to 99” is “Big Jack C”. (2 rounds probable big hit).

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4” in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type is “big hit D” (16 rounds probable big hit). The jackpot type when the value is “5-49” is “Big Jack E” (7 round normal jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is “50-99” is “Big Jack F”. (6 rounds are usually big hits).

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that six types of hit types (big hits A to F) are determined based on the type of special symbol and the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been. As described above, in the seventh control example, when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. In other words, even if the jackpot type is determined, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. The above-mentioned “probability jackpot” means a jackpot of a type in which the ball easily passes through the probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and “normal jackpot” means a jackpot of a type in which the ball does not easily pass through the probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Means.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 604) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 587 (a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  Here, the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 587 and 588. FIG. As shown in FIG. 587 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a special figure 1 hit table 202d1 (see FIG. 587 (b)) as a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the first special symbol lottery. ), A special figure 1 out (normal) table 202d2 (see FIG. 587 (c)), and a special figure 1 out (probability) table 202d3 (see FIG. 587 (d)). Further, as a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, a table 202d4 (see FIG. 588 (a)) for special figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less) and a special pattern 2 (5 fluctuations or more) ) Table 202d5 (see FIG. 588 (b)), special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 (see FIG. 588 (c)), and special figure 2 off (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7 (FIG. 588 (d)) at least.

  First, with reference to FIG. 587 (b), the special figure 1 per table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 587 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 table 202d1. The special chart 1 per table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. Each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1 in the special chart 1 table 202d1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with variation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is associated with various types of super reach. Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range of “180 to 198”. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the special figure 1 table 202d1.

  FIG. 587 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table 1 off (normal) table 202d2. The special figure 1 out (normal) table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place in the low probability state of the special symbol. is there. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set. Set (reach out of front / rear, reach out of front / rear).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  Further, for outreach, various types of outreach normal reach (30 seconds) are within the range of the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 149”, and various types of outreach are within the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), “198” is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, and obtains it from the special figure 1 out (normal) table 202d2. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the special figure 1 out (normal) table 202d2.

  FIG. 587 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation (probability change) table 202d3. This special figure 1 deviation (probability change) table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol probability change state. . In the special figure 1 deviation (probability change) table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-described special figure 1 deviation (normal) table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. If within the range of “90 to 99”, the detachment reach (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged when the probability-changing game state in which a big hit is easily made, and the player feels bored.

  FIG. 588 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d4 for special figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less). This special figure 2 per table (4 variations or less) table 202d4 is selected when the special symbol variation count is 4 times or less after the jackpot is over, and when the second special symbol lottery is a lottery It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be defined is defined. As shown in FIG. 588 (a), after the big hit, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 or less, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, there is a short fluctuation per fluctuation time of 1 second as the fluctuation pattern. Selected.

  FIG. 588 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d5 for special figure 2 (5 variations or more). This special figure 2 per table (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d5 is selected when the special symbol variation count is 5 times or more after the big hit is finished, and when the second special symbol lottery is a big prize. It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be defined is defined. As shown in FIG. 588 (b), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the big hit, the long fluctuation per 300 seconds as the fluctuation pattern is observed regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Selected.

  FIG. 588 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation (four fluctuations or less) table 202d6. This special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 indicates that, after the big hit is finished, the special symbol fluctuation count is 4 or less, and the second special symbol lottery is off (including a small hit). It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when it becomes. As shown in FIG. 588 (c), after the big hit, when the number of changes of the special symbol is 4 or less, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern has a variation time of 1 second and a short variation occurs. Selected.

  FIG. 588 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7. This special figure 2 per table (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7 is out of the special symbol lottery (including small hits) when the special symbol fluctuation number is 5 or more after the big hit is over. It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected in this case is defined. As shown in FIG. 588 (d), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the big hit, the fluctuation time is out of 300 seconds as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a long fluctuation occurs. Selected.

  As described above, in the seventh control example, after the big hit, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of executions of the special symbol variation display is 4 times or less, the lottery result is lost (small hit) 1) is always set as the variation time regardless of whether it is a big hit or not. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot E or F has been reached from the fluctuation time during the execution of the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the jackpot. That is, it can be made difficult to determine from the variation time whether or not the game state after the variation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is all in the probability variation mode. Therefore, a player who wants to know whether or not to enter the probability variation mode can be caused to play a game by paying attention to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the seventh control example, after the big hit, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of executions of the special symbol variation display is 5 times or more, the variation time is set regardless of the lottery result. The configuration is always set to 300 seconds. As a result, if the player makes a right-hand hit in a state other than the big hit, a special symbol lottery can be executed only once every 300 seconds (5 minutes) (very low game efficiency). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from making a right strike in a state other than the big hit. If a right-handed strike is made in a state other than the jackpot, especially in the probability variation mode, only the second special symbol lottery is executed. There is an extremely high possibility of becoming. In other words, there is a high possibility that the player can hardly win the prize ball and that the player will fall into the normal mode after the jackpot. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player will be dissatisfied with the game due to the disadvantageous normal mode without being able to fully enjoy the game in the advantageous probability changing mode.

  On the other hand, in the seventh control example, the game efficiency when the player hits the right in a state other than the big hit is deteriorated, so that the player can be prevented from making the right hit in a state other than the big hit. Therefore, the game in the probability variation mode can be more enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 589, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 586 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit when it matches the value of the winning random number set by the second random number table. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 586 (b)). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 586 (b), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the value is “5 to 28”. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 while the total number of random number values is 240, so the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the obtained value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of “5-28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second As a symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 64a is released only once for "0.2 sec. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In FIG. 4, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “O” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 64a is opened “one second × three times”. Is done. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a is further shortened. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is released only “three times per second” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 596). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 604).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 584, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 582, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 608), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process at power-on (see FIG. 607). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 606) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 585 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this control example. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as a part of the fixed value data described above. ing.

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 585 (b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0-3” is defined as the range of the judgment value judged to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 585 (b)), and it is judged that the first special symbol is out of place. “4 to 399” is defined as a range of determination values (see 202a2 in FIG. 585 (b)). In addition, “4 to 40” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 585 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit in the second special symbol “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 585 (b)). In addition, in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol, “0 to 39” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a4 in FIG. 585 (b)). “40 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202a5 in FIG. 585 (b)). In addition, “40” is defined as a determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a5 in FIG. 585 (b)), and “41 to 399 as determination values determined as small hits in the second special symbol. Is defined (see 202a6 in FIG. 585 (b)). When the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning matches with one of the determination values corresponding to the jackpot defined in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 585 (b)) It is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 586 (a)) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each type of special symbol, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 586 (a), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 9” is defined in association with “big hit A”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 586 (a)). This “big hit A” is a big hit with 16 rounds. Among the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit A”. The ratio is 10% (10/100). The “big hit A” is opened until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes 30 seconds or until seven balls are won in each big hit round. Therefore, since the player continues to make a right strike in each round, the upper limit number (seven balls) can be awarded to the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed. When the jackpot is A, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. In addition, if the player continues to make a right turn in one round in which the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) can pass, the ball almost certainly passes the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, after the “big hit A” is completed, the probability variation mode is almost certainly achieved. As described above, “big hit A” is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probability variation mode.

  For the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit B” in the range of “10 to 89” (see 202b2 in FIG. 586 (a)). . This “big hit B” is a big hit with 5 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that become “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 80% (80/100). This “big hit B”, like “big hit A”, is opened until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won in each big hit round. Therefore, as with the jackpot A, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. In addition, in the first round of jackpot, since the ball almost certainly passes the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode is almost certainly set after the “big hit B” is completed. In this manner, since the number of rounds is smaller than “big hit A” (and “big hit D”, which will be described later), the number of winning balls that can be obtained is smaller than “big hit A” (and “big hit D”). However, many prize balls can be paid out. In addition, since the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probability changing mode, the game state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state for the player after the big hit like the “big hit A”.

  For the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit C” in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 586 (a)). . This “big hit C” is a big hit with two rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). The “big hit C”, like “big hit A” and “big hit B”, is opened until the open / close door 65f1 passes 30 seconds or until seven balls are won in each big hit round. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as “big hit A” and “big hit B”. In addition, in the first round of jackpot, since the ball almost certainly passes the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change mode is almost certainly set after the “big hit C” is completed. In this way, since the “big hit C” has the smallest number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is small, but the prize balls can be paid out, so that the player can have more balls. Further, since the gaming state after the jackpot is in the probability changing mode, the game state is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot, similarly to the “jackpot A” and “jackpot B”.

  In this way, if you win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, you can receive payouts of 2 to 16 rounds of prize balls, and the gaming state after the jackpot is almost certainly in the probability change mode, Regardless of which jackpot type is used, it is advantageous for the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 586 (a), for the second special symbol, a range of “0-4” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit D”. (See 202b4 in FIG. 586 (a)). This “big hit D” is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big special win is won in the second special symbol The ratio is 5% (5/100). Since the “big hit D” has the same operation as the “big hit A”, it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous for the player, like the “big hit A”.

  For the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit E” in the range of “5 to 49” (see 202b5 in FIG. 586 (a)). . This “big hit E” is a big hit with seven rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 45 counter values that become “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 45% (45/100). This “big hit E” is opened until the open / close door 65f1 passes 0.2 seconds or seven balls are won in each big hit round. Therefore, it is difficult to make one ball enter the specific winning opening 65a in each round, so that almost no winning ball can be obtained. Further, since it becomes difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the gaming state after the “big hit E” is ended is a “normal mode” which is almost disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, the “big hit E” is a disadvantageous hit type for the player because it is very likely that the player can hardly get a winning ball and shift to the “normal mode” which is disadvantageous after the big hit.

  For the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit F” in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 586 (a)). . This “big hit F” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This “big hit F”, like “big hit E”, is opened until the open / close door 65f1 passes 0.2 seconds or until seven balls win in each round of big hit. Therefore, as in the case of “big hit E”, there is almost no prize ball, and there is an extremely high possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” which is disadvantageous after the big hit, so this is a big hit type that is disadvantageous for the player.

  In this way, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is highly probable (a ratio of 95%) that almost no winning ball can be obtained, and the gaming state after the big hit is almost certainly in the normal mode. , F is likely to be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it can be expected that the player can expect all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which have been increased by the balls entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, to come off. Innovative gameplay can be provided.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 586 (b)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 586 (b)). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 586 (b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired based on the ball passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second per-random number table 202c are referred to. It is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 587 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode. Note that the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, and therefore the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 590 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 590, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, probability variation valid flag 203n , A probability variation valid timer 203o, a discharge number counter 203p, a variation time counter 203q, a big hit middle flag 203r, a small hit middle flag 203s, a round end flag 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area ( (See FIG. 589), and a special symbol lottery or the like is determined based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present control example, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b has four reservation areas. Each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the 2nd entrance 640 is memorized in this 2nd special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, which is the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area having the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 602). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 600).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 600, FIG. 602). (See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is held in the actual variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 602). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 600). Similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 605). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 604).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 605). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 of FIG. 605: No). ).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (probability variation mode). If the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (probability variation mode). If the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (normal mode). Further, as described above, in the probability variation mode, the normal symbol is in a short time state. Thus, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a certain variation state and that the normal symbol is in a short time state.

  The initial value of the probability variation flag 203g is set to off. When the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on when the jackpot ends (see S1302 in FIG. 611). In addition, the probability variation flag 203g is reset to OFF when the jackpot game is started (see S219 in FIG. 600).

  The probability variation flag 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 601). Specifically, when a special symbol variation start process (FIG. 601, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 601, S213), the probability variation flag 203g is referred to. If the flag 203g is OFF, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability first random number table 202a.

  Further, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short time state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 604). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation processing, and if the probability variation flag 203g is on, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per random number table 202c for high probability. On the other hand (see S609 in FIG. 604), if the probability variation flag 203g is off, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 604). In the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a when the normal symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 604). (See S620).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability changing state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the probability changing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. Here, when the sphere passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1415 in FIG. 612). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1304 in FIG. 611). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. It is also possible to configure such that 203h is officially set to ON and returned. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (one round in the present control example). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203p described later. The probability variation passing counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1414 in FIG. 612). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1511 in FIG. 613). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 576) provided in the variable winning device 65, one is added and updated (S1403 in FIG. 612). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (total value of the discharging number counter 203p and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are equal. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S1511 in FIG. 613). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball throwing period after one round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed. If the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, it means that the ball is in the ball throwing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, a later ball timer 203m, which will be described later, is added and updated by 1 (see S1505 in FIG. 613). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for discharging the ball in the variable winning device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203m is the time required for the game balls won in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset round 1 ends and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not elapses. In this control example, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 0.5 seconds. In this control example, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the remaining ball timer. It is set as an upper limit of 203 m. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203m has reached the upper limit (0.8 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings. (S1507 in FIG. 613). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, it is possible to suppress illegally leaving the ball in the variable winning device 65 illegally and causing the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 in anticipation of the timing of the first round of jackpot E or jackpot F.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probable state is provided improperly.

  The probability variation valid flag 203n is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203n is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is switched based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203o is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203n described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203o, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. Thereafter, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  Thereby, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, or from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a game ball is pushed up by a line or the like and passed, or a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharged number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharged number counter 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value after it is determined that the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls (S1511 in FIG. 613).

  The fluctuation time counter 203q is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. In the variation time counter 203q, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202d is set (see S311 in FIG. 601). Also, this variation time counter 203q is decremented by 1 in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 600) (see S214 in FIG. 600), and whether the variation time has elapsed based on the value of this variation time counter 203q. Determined.

  The jackpot flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203r is on, it means that the jackpot is being hit, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not being hit. The big hit flag 203r is a big hit by a special symbol lottery, and the big hit (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1103 in FIG. 609). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 611). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600), the jackpot flag 203r is referred to and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S201 in FIG. 600).

  The small hitting flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 203s is on, it means that a small hit is being made, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not being made. The small hitting flag 203s is a small hit in the special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the small hit is started (see S1603 in FIG. 614). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1610 in FIG. 614). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600), the small hitting flag 203s is referred to and it is determined whether or not the small hitting is being made (see S201 in FIG. 600).

  The round end flag 203t is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball throwing period after the big hit round ends. If the round end flag 203t is on, it indicates that the ball is off after the round, and if it is off, it indicates that the ball is off.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize the novel gameability described above in which a game is played in the hope that the second special symbol of the holding ball will be removed.

  Next, a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 591 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example.

  As shown in FIG. 591, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is roughly divided into three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 591, the door breakthrough mode shown in the middle of FIG. 591 and the probability change mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 591 are provided.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. It becomes the most unfavorable gaming state for the player. In addition, as described above, the probability variation mode indicates the probability variation state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol, and the jackpot probability is high, and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  In addition, the door break-through mode indicates a state in which there is a second special symbol holding ball acquired during execution of a probabilistic jackpot (hits A to D), and all lotteries based on the second special symbol holding ball are missed. Then, this is a state indicating that the game can be performed in an advantageous probability variation mode. This door breakthrough mode is the same state as the probability variation mode except that there is a holding ball of the second special symbol. That is, there is a high probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery (1/10), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 easily. Since the percentage of all the 2nd special symbol reserve balls accumulated during the big hits is about 65.6% (9/10 to the fourth power), the door breakthrough mode is at a rate of 65.6%. It can be said that the probability variation mode can be expected.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 591, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another mode only when the jackpot is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 591, the first special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to C), and if the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode after the big hit ends. . As described above, in the jackpots A to C, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 by simply making a right turn in one round. If the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V is not won) due to the player not hitting the ball, etc., the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode again. Is done.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 591, the door breakthrough mode is shifted to another mode when not only a big win but also when all the change displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are completed. That is, as shown in FIG. 591, when the variation display based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols is completed in the door breakthrough mode, the mode shifts to the probability variation mode.

  In addition, when the big hit D determined at a rate of 5% in the case of the big win in the second special symbol lottery, the ball almost passes through the probability change switch 65e3, so the door breakthrough mode is again performed after the big win. Migrate to If the player does not strike the ball, etc., and the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V is not won), the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. . On the other hand, if the jackpot E or jackpot F is determined at a ratio of 95% when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the ball is moved to the special winning opening 65a in the first round. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, the ball hardly passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 591, after the big hits E and F are completed, the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 591, the mode changes from the probability variation mode to another mode only when a big hit is made. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 591, if the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit (big hit A to C), if the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, the door breakthrough mode is entered after the big hit ends. Transition. Each of the jackpots A to C is a jackpot type that allows a ball to easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If the player does not strike the ball, etc., and the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (the V is not won), the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. .

  As described above, in the seventh control example, by going back and forth between the three types of modes, the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot is all removed. Thus, it is possible to realize a characteristic game characteristic that a game can be performed in an advantageous probability change mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable event for a player to make a big hit again in the hold after the jackpot ends (so-called “holding in the hold”), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, It is possible to give an advantage to the player in the hope that no recreational resort will occur. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a novel gameability different from that of a general pachinko machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 584, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a are opened and closed. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid or a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 606) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 592 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 592 (b). FIG. 592 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a variation time counter 223f. A breakthrough effect counter 223g, a game state storage area 223h, and another memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area composed of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Yes. Each area stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110 up to four times. The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter. At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol When the change display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4208 in FIG. 618). In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In addition, in order to notify the display controller 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display controller 114. Send to.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second special hold ball number counter 223b. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223 of the main controller 110. The value is changed in synchronization with 203e. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It is possible to change while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 618), and is turned off when variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4802 in FIG. 624). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 618), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4807 in FIG. 624). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display. When a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is set in variation time counter 223f.

  The breakthrough effect counter 223g is a counter that indicates the number of remaining doors to break through before the transition to the probability change mode in the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIG. 581). Based on the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has ended.

  The game state storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. This game state storage area 223h is updated each time a status command is output from the main control device 110 every time a change occurs in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S4210 in FIG. 618). Note that the gaming state storage area 223h is configured by, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not the normal symbol is in the short state, and the least significant bit indicates whether or not the special symbol is in a probable state. Therefore, in the “normal mode”, the lower 2 bits are “00B”, while in the “door breakthrough mode” and the “probability change mode”, the lower 2 bits are “11B”. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, an elapsed time timer for measuring the production time, and the like. doing. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 618) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 606).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 593 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash memory 234d) and stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set once. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a (for example, 2 kilobytes). In the NOR flash memory 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed first is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d is stored in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. The ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is first set from the NOR flash memory 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address designated by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. The instruction code at the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c from the program and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are NOR flash. The reason for storing in the memory 234d is as follows. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR flash memory is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled in the boot program When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program that is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. A program and a program in the work RAM 233 for fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 625) executed after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 625) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM 233 constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored without storing all the boot programs in the NOR flash memory 234d, and the remaining boot programs Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR type flash memory 234d. can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 598), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 627 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 625).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 594, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 594 shows that the display controller 114 turns on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. 594 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG., On the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “◯” as shown in FIG. 594 (c). A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 594 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and the entrance was detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In this case, a power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 594 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an incoming ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the hour main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 593, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 595, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the back image will be described. FIG. 595 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored for each back image in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. FIG. 595 (b) shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and the rear surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 595, the back image corresponding to each of the back surfaces A and B is prepared in the character ROM 234 as an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the rear surface type is determined and the stage is changed to “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the position between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 595 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy stage which is the initial stage is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 where all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “sand beach stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 595 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” is a part of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is resident. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 595 (a) to (b)). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 595 (a) and (b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Meanwhile, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 593) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 593, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten main symbols (see FIG. 579) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “adventurer” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. When the control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 596 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The back surface type is either a back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”), or a back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies, as the drawing target, the back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A and B when the back surface type is specified to display either the back surface A or B. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 596). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 598) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 597. FIG. 597 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 597 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (the address “0002H” in FIG. 597 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 597, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 598) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 597, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 594 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. The main process (see FIG. 625) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 625). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 636 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 627 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 627 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 627 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 628 to 632) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 633 to 635) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 636 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 636 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 637) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 598), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 598) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 598), which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 627 (b) ) (See step S6303)), pointer update processing (see step S7205 in FIG. 633) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 598) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 627 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 633). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 625) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 637) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 637). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 637). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 638).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 627 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Seventh Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 599 to 615. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 599 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and those counter values are maximum values (in this control example). When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 600 to 602.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 604 and 605. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 600 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether either the big hit / medium flag 203r or the small hit / medium flag 203s is ON. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is neither big hit nor small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display holding based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired. (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 608) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol holding-ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number) Fluctuation display hold count N1) based on lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209).

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 608) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S209), and the process goes to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q (S214). Based on the value of 203q, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has passed (S215). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter 203q updated in the process of S214 has become zero. The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to F is determined.

  In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. When the green LED is turned on and the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S219), the special symbol jackpot start is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. To do. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S219, when the jackpot control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 608) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and an opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the processes of S219 and S220 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S221.

  The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 608) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the gaming state included in the state command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 601 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S213). The special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read, and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probability variation state (S302). In the processing of S302, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the probability of the special symbol is changed, and if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not the probability variation state). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with the first per-random number table for high probability (see FIG. 585 (b)). As described above, 40 random numbers of “0 to 39” are set as the special symbol jackpot value, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variation state (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S302: No), the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. And a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 585 (b)) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0 to 3”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 586 (a)) to determine what the jackpot type is. To do. As mentioned above, if the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0-9”, the big hit A (16 rounds probable big hit) If it is determined that it is in the range of “10 to 89”, it is determined that the jackpot is B (5-round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “90 to 99”, it is a jackpot C (2 rounds probability variation jackpot). Determination is made (see FIG. 586 (a)). On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the jackpot D (16 rounds probable big hit), If it is in the range of “5-49”, it is determined that it is jackpot E (7 round normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “50-99”, it is determined that it is jackpot F (6 round normal jackpot) ( (See FIG. 586 (a)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to F). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A to F) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 587 (a)), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. (Variation time) is determined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (including small hits) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern ( (Variation time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 203q (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 608). When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 602 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 599), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for executing a hold process of values indicated by various counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  If the ball has not won the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or the ball has won the first entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 608) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S405, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. To do. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the second entrance 640 (S407). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S401, the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S409).

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 608) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S411, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. . In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S413, a prefetch process for prefetching the success / failure from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S413), and this process is terminated. The details of this prefetch process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 603 is a flowchart showing prefetch processing (S413). In this pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 has been detected in the current start winning process (see FIG. 602). (S501) If a new incoming ball is not detected (S501: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that a new ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (ie, 4). (S502: Yes), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), whether or not the timing for starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is in the special symbol probable state. Is determined (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the current game state is in a probable change state according to the current game state and the result of pre-reading the reserved ball held before the current entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the holding ball, the current gaming state coincides with the timing at which the fluctuation display based on the currently detected ball starts, so that the current gaming state is a probable state. It is determined that In addition, when the jackpot is included in the holding ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, when the probable jackpot is on hold, the system shifts to a probable change state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is held, the system shifts to a normal state after the jackpot. Taking these into account, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the fluctuation display based on the currently detected incoming ball is in a state of probability variation.

  In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the start of the variation based on the detected entry this time is the special symbol probability variation state (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance that detected the entry and the high probability The lottery result based on the current entry is acquired based on the first per-random number table (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start time is in the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), based on the type of the entrance that detected the entrance and the first per random number table for the low probability time The lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

  In the process of S506 executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that detected the current entry and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506) This process is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 608) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance and the lottery result notified by the winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 604 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and the normal symbol (second symbol) variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 or the first entrance port. 64 is a process for controlling the opening time or the like of the electric accessory 64 a attached to 64.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of the display showing the hit and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S608). Note that, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, the period during which the special symbol is probable and the period during which the normal symbol is in the short-time state coincide with each other. Therefore, in the processing of S608, if the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state, and if it is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, the random number table for the normal symbol for high probability, Based on the above, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 586 (b)).

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table for normal symbols for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 586 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S611: Yes), The display mode for winning is set (S612), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol). On the other hand, in the process of S611, if it is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S613), and the process proceeds to S614. In the processing of S611, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  When the process of S612 or the process of S613 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (whether the probability variation flag 203g is on) (S614), and if the normal symbol is in a short time state (S614: Yes), the fluctuation display fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time-short state (that is, the probability variation flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S616), the process is terminated.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is discriminated (S617). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S615 or the processing of S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S617, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S617 (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 608) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S619). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in a short time state (that is, whether the probability variation flag 203g is on) (S620), and the short time state. If it is not in the middle (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 are set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time” (S621), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S620 that the normal symbol is being shortened (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 are set to “1 second × “Twice” is set (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the process of S623, the opening time determined in the process of S621 or S622 and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening are set (S623), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 608) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S621 or S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 605 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and there has been a passing of the ball. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 606 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 607 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S914 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S914. As will be described later in the processing of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S915, S916) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S915, S916) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the process of S916 is completed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the process of S910 is completed, the probability change flag 203g is read (S911), and a status command is set based on the status of the read probability change flag 203g (S912). This state command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the current gaming state. After the process of S912 is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S913), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 608, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 608 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1009 and S1010 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-control device (peripheral External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 599) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) or the start winning process (see FIG. 602) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the gaming state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the gaming state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has passed or the ball has won the specified number. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1004 is completed, next, in the small win state, a small hit control process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the small hit control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened at the start of the small hit, and it is determined whether the maximum open time has elapsed during the small hit opening period or whether a predetermined number of balls have won. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in this control example, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the small hitting control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1005 is finished, next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 604), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S621 or the processing of S622 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 604) are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1007). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 601), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601) has ended, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 601). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the processing of S615 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 604) or the processing of S616, the second symbol display device 83 Start the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display device 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a normal symbol (2nd symbol) alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 604), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S612 or the processing of S613 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 604) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010). ) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main processing execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 399 in this control example). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 606 has been executed, the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, and the initial setting process (see S901 in FIG. 607). When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 609 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). The jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 608). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the specific winning a prize port 65a is performed. Is a process for opening or closing.

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) S220 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 608) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1102, the big hit medium flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1001 that the special symbol jackpot start timing is not reached (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1104). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1104: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes). ), A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107). Specifically, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached when a special gaming state (all rounds of jackpots) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 608) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1107 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1109: Yes), next, the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S1110), and this process is ended. To do. Details of the jackpot end process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1109: No), a winning process for performing a process according to winning a prize to the specific winning port 65a is executed (S1111). . The details of the winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After completion of the winning process (S1111), an abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been normally discharged is executed (S1112), and this process is terminated. Details of this abnormality process (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 610 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), and is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds as described above.

  When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 610) is started, first, the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1201), and then it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S1202). If it is determined that it is the start timing of one round in the process of S1202 (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1202 that the current round is not the first round, the processing in step S1203 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1204. In the process of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1204), and this process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 608) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 620). Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be updated according to the number of jackpot rounds.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 610), the special winning opening 65a can be opened in each jackpot round, and the special discharge channel 65e2 can be set to pass through in the first round. it can. As a result, in the jackpots A to D, the player hits the right hand in the first round, and the ball almost certainly passes the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the probability change mode (the probability change state of the special symbol, and , Normal symbol time-short state). In the case of jackpots E and F, although the flow path solenoid (probability varying solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, as described above, the opening period of the open / close door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds), Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during one round, the possibility that the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 is almost zero. Therefore, when the jackpot is E or F, the normal mode can be set after the jackpot. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol in which one of the types of jackpots A to C is determined in the case of a jackpot is determined as a lottery advantageous to the player, and a high probability (95% The lottery of the second special symbol in which one of the big hits E and F is determined by the ratio) can be a lottery disadvantageous for the player.

  Next, details of the jackpot end process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 611 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end as described above.

  In the jackpot end process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1301). If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Then, the state after the big hit is set to the probability change mode (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1303. Since the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off at the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 600), the probability variation flag 203g is turned off after the jackpot by skipping the processing of S1302. That is, the normal mode is set after the jackpot.

  In the process of S1303, a state command is set based on the state of the probability change flag 203g (S1303). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 608) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the gaming state storage area 223h in accordance with the gaming state notified by the state command. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped. Next, the big hit medium flag 203r and the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to OFF (S1304), and this process ends.

  By executing the jackpot end process (see FIG. 611), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  Next, details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 612 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a as described above.

  In this winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S1401). Here, the round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. If it is not the round effective period in the process of S1401 (S1401: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the present is the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1402), and the specific winning opening 65a is determined. If a winning is detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning at the specific winning opening 65a is detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the winning at the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1405.

  In the process of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405). If the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has passed (S1406), and if the round time has passed. (S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the processing of S1406, if the current big hit is a big hit A to D, it is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, and if the big hit is E or F, the start of the round is determined. It is determined that the round time has passed when 0.2 seconds have passed.

  In the process of S1407, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether or not the closing of the specific prize opening 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S1409). If it is determined that the closing is based on the end of one round (S1409: Yes), the flow path solenoid (Probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, when it is determined that the closing of the specific prize opening 65a this time is the closing due to the completion of a round other than one round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is turned on. Therefore, the process of S1410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the probability variation valid flag 203n, and the round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. If it is determined in the process of S1405 that the value of the winning number counter is 6 or less (S1405: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), S1407 Step S1411 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

  In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is on (S1412). If the round end flag 203t is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that the round end flag 203t is on (S1412: Yes), it is then determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203n is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203n is off (S1416: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203n is on (S1416: No), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is an upper limit value ( S1418). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1413, where the probability variation switch 65e3 is monitored and the probability variation setting flag 203h is updated. Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203o is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time of sphere removal. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being imparted by illegally passing the ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are set to off (S1419), and the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is reset (S1420). ), This process is terminated.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1413). If the sphere has not passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1413: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S1414), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1415), and this processing is performed. Exit.

  Next, the abnormality process (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 613 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormal process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been discharged normally. Process.

  In the abnormality process (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round effective period (S1501). If it is not the round effective period (S1501: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the round effective period (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1502).

  In the process of S1502, if it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203p (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the sphere has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504: Yes), since the ball is being thrown, 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203m and updated (S1505). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining sphere timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506). If the value of the remaining sphere timer 203m is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of discharges (the total value of the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203p) is won. It is determined whether the number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  In the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharged items does not match the number of winning prizes (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of illegally causing the ball to enter the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passing the probability variation switch 54e3 during the period when the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of discharged items matches the number of winning prizes (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509. In the processing of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203p, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S1511), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 613), there is a problem that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally discharged due to a clogged ball inside the variable winning device 65. Detection and notification can be made early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 614, details of the small hitting control process (S1005) will be described. As described above, the small winning control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the small winning state.

  In this small hitting control process (see FIG. 614), it is first determined whether or not it is a small hitting start timing (S1601). An opening command indicating the winning opening is set (S1602), the small hitting / medium flag 203s is set to ON (S1603), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, if it is determined that it is not the small hit start timing (S1601: No), then it is determined whether it is a small hit (S1604), and if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S1604). : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1604 that a small hit is being made (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the fact that the small hit is made ( If it is the start timing of the opening operation (S1605) (S1605: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (opening of the open / close door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1605 that it is not the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607), and if it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607: Yes), an ending command indicating that the small hitting ending period has started is set (S1608), and this process ends.

  Also, in the processing of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit end timing (S1609). (S1609: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 203s is set to OFF (S1610), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1609 that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), a small hitting medium winning process for determining the end of the small hitting release period is executed (S1611). The details of the small winning medium winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the small winning medium winning process (S1611) is completed, an abnormal process for determining the coincidence between the number of balls awarded to the specific prize opening 65a and the number of discharged balls is executed (S1612), and this process is terminated. To do. Since this abnormal process (S1612) is the same process as the abnormal process (see FIG. 613) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), its details are omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 615, the details of the small winning medium winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small winning release period will be described. FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing the small winning medium winning process (S1611). In the small winning medium winning process (S1611), first, it is determined whether or not it is during the small winning round effective period (S1701), and when it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1701: No), The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the period is the effective period of the round (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not a ball winning at the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S1702), and a ball winning is detected. If it is determined (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1702 that no winning for the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1704.

  In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704). If it is less than 7 (S1704: No), then the round time (0.2 seconds) has elapsed. It is determined whether it has been done (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1705: No), this process is ended as it is in order to continue the small hit release period. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1704 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and when it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the processing of S1705 (S1705: Yes). Since it means that the end condition of the small winning opening period is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1706), and this processing is ended.

  Note that it is almost impossible to win 7 or more balls into the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds, which is the round time of the small hit. After the winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds, the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Seventh Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 616 to 624. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 616 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S4116 (see FIG. 617) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 617, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 617), it executes a power-off process in S4116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S4116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S4116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

  In the process of S4002, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S4116, This was started by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S4006), the process proceeds to S4008. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 in the processing of S4005 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 617). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S4008. This is a case after the power failure has occurred and started in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  After the process of S4010, the notification contents of the state command set in the startup process (see FIG. 603) by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are analyzed (S4011), and the game state storage area 223h is analyzed according to the analysis result. Is updated (S4012). Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped since the power is turned on. After the processing of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S4008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S4009 is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is reached via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 617, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 617 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4110. In step S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S4102 to S4110 are mainly processes related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4102 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S4107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S4108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4110 ends, the process proceeds to S4111. In the process of S4111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S4111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If it is determined in the process of S4113 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S4113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are set to ON (S4115), and the power interruption is performed. The process is executed (S4116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 618, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination processing (S4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S4201). If it is determined in step S4201 that the variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S4203), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 624) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206). The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 624) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4204 that a stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), it is then determined whether a pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). . If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Value (the number N1 of the variable display hold based on the first special symbol lottery) or the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold based on the second special symbol) is extracted. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). In the process of S4208, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is set. . After the process of S4208 ends, this process ends.

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol are obtained by the process of S4208. The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are affected by noise and the like, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 is changed. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 are detected at the time of detection of the start winning prize or at the time of lottery of the special symbol even if it deviates from the value of 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S4208 is executed, the display hold ball for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol hold ball counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball counter 223c. A number command is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4207, if it is determined that a pending ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is then determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). If it is determined that a state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the gaming state storage area 223h is updated according to the received command (S4210). That is, when the probability change mode is notified based on the information according to the gaming state notified by the state command (whether or not the probability changing state), the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to “11B”. On the other hand, when the normal mode is notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to “00B”. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4209 that no status command has been received (S4209: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S4211). If it is determined in the process of S4211 that a prize information command has been received (S4211: Yes), a prize information command process for performing control according to the pre-read result of the new start prize notified by the prize information command is executed. In step S4212, the process ends. Details of the winning information command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that no winning information command has been received (S4211: No), then whether a command related to jackpot (opening command, round number command, or ending command) has been received. Is determined (S4213). If it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4213: Yes), the jackpot related processing for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S4214). The process ends. Details of the jackpot related processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4213 that a command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4213: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4215), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S4215, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 619, the details of the above-described winning information command processing (S4212) will be described. FIG. 619 is a flowchart showing the winning information command process (S4212).

  In the winning information command process (see FIG. 619), first, information notified by the received winning command (information indicating the type of the winning entrance where a new start winning is detected and the lottery result) is received in the winning information storage area 223a. (S4301). When the processing of S4301 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol is notified by the current winning information command (S4302). In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the information notified this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (the winning information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current winning information is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpots A to D are currently being executed (S4303). If it is determined that any one of A to D is being executed (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether it is during the ending period (S4304). Selects the mode of the key 813 in the effect of finding the key 813 (see FIG. 580 (b)) (S4305). In the processing of S4305, if the current winning information is winning information corresponding to a lottery result that is out of play (small hit), the ratio of selecting the gorgeous mode key 813 increases, and the current winning information becomes the big hit E, F If the winning information corresponds to, the ratio of selecting a poor key 813 is high. When the process of S4305 ends, an effect for finding the key 813 of the aspect selected in the process of S4305 is set (S4306), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4303 that the jackpots A to D are not being executed (S4303: No), and in the process of S4304, it is determined that the jackpots A to D are in the ending period (S4304: Yes). As a result of the player making a right turn during the period in which the player should make a left turn, it means that a start winning for the second entrance 640 has been detected. The warning effect for informing the person is executed (S4307), and this process is terminated. This warning effect (not shown) is more strongly left-handed to the player than the “left-handed” character and left-pointing arrow image displayed on the display area HR1 during execution of the door break-through mode effect. The effect of the mode instructing is executed. Specifically, for example, while the character “left-handed” is displayed large on the entire display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, an effect that the voice “please return to left-handed” repeatedly flows at the maximum volume is executed. Is done. By executing this warning effect, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from making a right-hand hit in a situation other than during the execution of jackpots A to D. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player continues to make a right turn during the normal mode or the probability change mode, and the lottery of the disadvantageous second special symbol is continuously executed.

  By executing this winning information command process, the mode of the key 813 to be found during the jackpot can be appropriately set based on the new winning information of the second special symbol. Therefore, during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the player can predict the expectation level of the probability change mode based on the mode of the key 813, so that the player's game during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect is performed. Can improve interest in

  In the seventh control example, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 is variable depending on whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol newly notified by the winning information command is out (small hit). The configuration of the key 813 is selected based not only on the winning information based on the new winning information command but also on the winning information of the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Also good. Specifically, for example, prior to receiving the current winning information command, winning information corresponding to one of the jackpots E and F is included in the winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If it is included, the ratio of selecting the key 813 in a poor state may be high regardless of the lottery result of the current winning information. By configuring in this way, as the poor 812 key 813 continues, there is a higher possibility that jackpot E, F is included in the second special symbol holding ball, so that the player It can be estimated more accurately whether or not the jackpot E, F is included in the holding ball. Also, for example, when all of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a before receiving the current winning information command and the current winning information command is out (small), the selection ratio is It may be configured to provide a mode (for example, a mode of the diamond key 813) that becomes higher (or selected only in this case). By comprising in this way, when the said aspect is displayed, the sense of expectation with respect to shifting to probability change mode can be raised more.

  In the seventh control example, when the winning information command corresponding to the second entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of jackpots A to D, the warning effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. Even when a new ball entering the second ball slot 640 is detected in a state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit value, a warning effect is executed if it is outside the execution period of jackpots A to D. It is good also as a structure. In particular, during the ending of jackpots A to D or during the execution of the first variation display, the possibility that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit is extremely high. In such a case, if the player is making a right turn, the second special symbol lottery may be executed five or more times after the big win due to a new start winning for the second entrance 640. There is a risk that the player may lose. On the other hand, when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the player loses by configuring the warning effect. Can be suppressed (prevented).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 620, the jackpot related process (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 620 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing (S4214).

  In the jackpot related process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4401). If an opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), a display opening command is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81. When the processing of S4402 ends, the main jackpot related processing (see FIG. 620) ends. When the opening command of this time is a command corresponding to the opening of either big hit E, F or small hit, and the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIG. 681) is being executed, the door breakthrough mode effect is displayed. Continue as it is. In this case, it is good also as a structure which does not output an opening command itself with respect to the display control apparatus 114, and it is discriminate | determined by the display control apparatus 114 side whether the door break-through mode effect is being performed, and an effect mode is selected. It is good also as composition to do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4401 that an opening command has not been received (S4401: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4403). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4403: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S4404). ). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S4404, this process ends. As in the case of receiving the opening command, the door breakthrough mode effect is continued as it is when the start timing of a new round of jackpots E and F occurs during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4403: No), it is then determined whether or not a close command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4405). If it is determined that a close command has been received (S4405: Yes), a close command process for performing control according to the situation in which the close command has been received is executed (S4406), and this process ends. Details of the close command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4405 that the close command has not been received (S4405: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S4407). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), ending command processing for performing control according to the type and status of the ending command is executed (S4408), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4407 that an ending command has not been received (S4407: No), this process ends. By executing the jackpot related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 621, details of the above-described closing command process (S4406) will be described. In this closing command processing (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of jackpot being executed is any of jackpots A to D (S4501), and if it is determined that any of jackpots A to D is ( S4501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is other than jackpots A to D (either jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is a value greater than zero. (That is, whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIG. 581) is being executed) and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed). If it is determined (S4502: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4503). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after subtraction has become 0 (that is, whether it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect) (S4504). In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this process is ended as it is to continue the door breakthrough mode effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after subtraction has become 0 (S4504: Yes), this means that it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so the remaining period until the end of the jackpot is reached. The result display is set (S4505), and this process is terminated. The result display indicates the display contents for displaying the total number of winning balls paid out by repeating the jackpot and the probability variation mode, the number of jackpots, and the like on the third symbol display device 81. By setting this result display, it is possible to easily grasp the number of jackpots won by the player, the number of winning balls acquired, and the like, so that the player can have a sense of achievement.

  Next, details of the above-described ending command process (S4408) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This ending command process (S4408) is a process for performing control according to the jackpot type, game situation, etc., when an ending command is received as described above.

  In this ending command process, first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an ending command indicating a small hitting ending (S4601). If it is determined that the command is a small hitting ending (S4601: Yes), the small hitting is determined. The small hit control process for performing the control in accordance with the timing of ending is executed (S4602), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4601 that the ending is not a jackpot (S4601: No), the current ending command is output to notify that the jackpot ending period has started. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is any of jackpots A to D (S4603).

  In the process of S4603, when it is determined that the big hit being executed is not any of the big hits A to D (S4603: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is any of jackpots A to D (S4603: Yes), the winning information of the second special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S4604), and the read winning is read. It is determined whether or not the jackpot D is included in the lottery result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol indicated by the information. As described above, the jackpot D is the only advantageous jackpot type in which a large number of award balls can be obtained and the probability variation mode is set almost after the jackpot, among the jackpots of the second special symbol.

  In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), the door breakthrough mode in a special mode that is notified that the jackpot has been hit during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. An effect is set (S4606), and this process ends. As described above, after the jackpots A to D are completed, it is advantageous for the player if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are basically removed. This is because if a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be one of the disadvantageous big hits E and F with a high probability (ratio of 95%). However, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, there may be a big hit D that is advantageous to the player with a low probability (a proportion of 5%). In this case, a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and the door breakthrough mode effect is set again after the big hit, which is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the big hit E, F is achieved. Therefore, in this case, it is configured so that the player can easily understand that the jackpot D has been set by setting a door breaking mode effect in a special notification mode.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the big hit D is not included in the holding ball of the second special symbol (S4605: No), 4 is set to the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S4607), Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol (S4608). In the process of S4608, if it is determined that the jackpot is included, it means either the jackpot E or F during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and it means that it shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends. Finally, the door breakthrough mode effect in the form of notifying the fall to the normal mode (the form of failing to break through the door) is set (S4609), and the process is terminated. In addition, as the production time of the door break mode production, the same production time of 5.8 seconds is set regardless of whether or not the jackpot is included. During this 5.8 seconds, when all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), it is between the start of the ending period and the end of the small hit based on the fourth reserved ball. It is a period. That is, in order to make it difficult for the player to guess whether there is a big hit in the holding ball from the production time, the production time of the door breakthrough mode production is set to the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result. .

  In the process of S4608, when it is determined that the big hit is not included in the holding ball (S4608: No), the door breakthrough mode effect in the form of finally informing the transition to the probability change mode is set (S4610 ), This process is terminated. By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 622), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the content of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 623, the details of the above-described small hitting end process (S4602) will be described. The small hitting end process (S4602) is a process executed when it is determined in the ending command process (see FIG. 622) that the received ending command is a small hitting ending command.

  As shown in FIG. 623, in the small hit end processing (see FIG. 623), first, whether or not the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0 (that is, whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed). (S4701), if the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, so this process is terminated as it is. Note that the case where the player makes a small hit outside the execution period of the door break mode production is a case where the player makes a right-hand hit outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D (period in which left-handing should be performed) due to intention or negligence. is there. In this case, when the start winning for the second entrance 640 is detected, the warning effect is set by the processing of S4307 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 619), so the player has already left-turned. It is thought that there is. Therefore, control such as performing a warning effect again at the end of the small hit is not performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by repeating the warning effect in spite of returning to the left hand.

  In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), then, the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4702), and the counter value after subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not (S4703). When it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g has become 0 in the process of S4703 (S4703: Yes), the door breakthrough mode effect ends with a lottery result (i.e., a door breakthrough mode effect). This means that all fluctuations have been missed), so that an effect mode indicating entry into the probability variation mode is set (S4704), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4703, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (1 or more) (S4703: No), this means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so this The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 624, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 624 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S4806. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 618). In this process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4803).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4804). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4806. In the process of S4805, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area.

  In the process of S4806, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4806: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4807), and then the process of S4206 in the command determination process (see FIG. 618). In step S4808, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223. Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4808 (S4809), and this process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, and controls the third symbol display device 81 to display the stop of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Seventh Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 625 to 638. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR flash memory 234d in the boot program, so that the NOR flash memory Is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. Therefore, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first flash memory in the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 626 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. A predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 625). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 625) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR type flash memory 234d. can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 626, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 625. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 636 (a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 636 (a)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 627 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 627 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 627 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 627 (a). FIG. 627 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 627 (b). FIG. 627 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 627 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 628 to 632.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 633 to 635.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 636 and 637.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 598 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, small hit, front / rear outreach reach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out completely) ) And the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 628 to 632, the details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 628 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 628, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 629 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 628. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 629 (b). FIG. 629 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any one of big hits A to F, small hits, missed reach, completely missed) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 627 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned on. (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in the present control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops complete disconnection. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 628, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 630 (a). FIG. 630 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 628, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 630 (b). FIG. 630 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 628, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 631. FIG. 631 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 628, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 632 (a), details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 632 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command process, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S7002. .

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either of the back A and B is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S7002 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 628. If it is determined in step S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If this is the case (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and processing returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 632 (b). FIG. 632 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 628. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. When it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 627 (b)), the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 629 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 629 (b)) are executed, and other commands are The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 629 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 633 to 635, details of the display setting process (S6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 633, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 634. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 633. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 635. FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. In this pointer update process, the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, it returns to FIG. 633 and continues description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S7206 together with the warning image developed previously, and for each sprite, Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, and thus a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 627 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 636 and FIG. 637, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 636 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 636 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 636 (b). FIG. 636 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 627 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 627 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 627 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 628 to 632) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 633 to 635) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 637) (see S7501: No in FIG. 636 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 637. FIG. 637 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  In the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, so this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed previously, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 638, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 638 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and a transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 598) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of the sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 627 (b)) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the position where the ball is easy to enter when left-handed (a game method for launching a ball toward the left-side flow path in the game board 13) is performed. If the first entrance 64 arranged at the right side and the right strike (a game method for launching a ball toward the flow path on the right side of the front view in the game board 13) are performed, the ball is easy to enter (left strike is performed) And a second entrance 640 disposed at a position where it is difficult for the ball to enter). If a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol that is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it will be disadvantageous for the player (almost no prize ball will be obtained during the big win) On the other hand, there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an unfavorable normal mode after the big hit). On the other hand, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, It is configured to increase the possibility that it will be advantageous to the player (a large amount of winning balls can be obtained at the jackpot and the mode is changed to a favorable variation mode after the jackpot). Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the lottery of the first special symbol which is more advantageous than the disadvantageous lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

  In addition, the flow path on the right side of the front face of the game board 13 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a that is opened during the big hit and from which a large number (11) of prize balls are paid out each time a ball enters. As with the second entrance 640, the specific winning opening 65a can be entered when the player makes a right strike (easy entry), and cannot enter the ball when placed left (difficult to enter). It is provided at the position. For this reason, in order to obtain a winning ball by winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right. As described above, when the player hits the right side, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the big hit, the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be stored up to the upper limit. For this reason, after the jackpot is over, it is possible to form a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is reached, can be continuously executed. A game can be performed in the hope that all of the symbols on the symbol are off (small hits). In other words, in a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable event for a player to become a big hit again in the hold after the jackpot ends (so-called holding in the hold), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, It is possible to give an advantage to the player in the hope that there will be no on-hold consecutive resort. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a novel gameability different from that of a general pachinko machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the seventh control example, every time the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases during the execution of jackpots A to D, the lottery result of the increased reserved balls is pre-read, and the aspect according to the pre-read result Is configured to execute. In other words, an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result is out of place (small hit) is executed. More specifically, an effect is provided in which the adventurer 811 acquires the key 813 in a mode corresponding to the prefetch result of the increased reserved ball lottery result. With this effect, it is possible to cause the player to infer from the aspect of the displayed key 813 whether or not to shift to the probability change mode during the jackpot. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being simply an operation for obtaining a prize ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the jackpot game.

  Further, in the seventh control example, from the ending period of jackpots A to D until the variation time of all the variation displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol elapses, the retained ball of the second special symbol An effect of notifying the player whether or not the jackpot E, F exists is executed. In other words, even after all the change display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is finished, an effect for suggesting whether the gaming state remains in the probability change mode or falls into the normal mode is executed. . By having a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over an ending period and a plurality of variable displays after jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the seventh control example, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, the small hit is made with high probability. Then, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the open / close door 65f1 in each round of the big hits E and F are configured to be the same (0.2 seconds). Further, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol. . By configuring in this way, even if any of the first to fourth reserved balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode effect ends A series of opening / closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the probability variation mode is notified (when the holding balls of all the second special symbols are small hits). That is, as the operation of the open / close door 65f1 from the end of the jackpot to the end of the door breakthrough mode effect, regardless of whether the holding ball of the second special symbol includes the jackpots E and F. It is possible to unify the operation of repeating the closing for 1 second and the opening for 0.2 seconds four times. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether the opening / closing door 65f1 after the big hit ends is an opening / closing operation due to continuous small hits or an opening / closing operation due to the big hit E or F. The door breakthrough mode production can be noticed to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the seventh control example, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the lottery of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a specification which can be performed in parallel with the fluctuation | variation display of a 1st special symbol, and the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to make a big win by the variable display of the first special symbol before the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is executed, so during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect , Can be left-active. In this case, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, a variation pattern having a long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 10%). . By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the first special symbol lottery one or more times during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, so that the chance to become a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol Can be formed.

  In the seventh control example, the left-handed notification is made from the start of the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the final round of jackpot, the remaining number of hits until the final round is displayed and the left-handed left ball is displayed. ”Or the like may be displayed so that the player can immediately switch to the left after the end condition of the final round is satisfied. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl enters into the 2nd entrance 640 after the end of jackpot.

  In the seventh control example, when the normal symbol is in a short time state, the normal symbol variation time is uniformly 3 seconds, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a when the normal symbol is hit is 1 second × Although it was set as the structure set twice, it is not restricted to this. For example, after the jackpot is ended, only the first normal symbol variation time is set to a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the period until all variations based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol are completed. Good. By configuring in this way, since the normal symbol is not hit during the execution of the door break mode production, from the opening time of the normal symbol, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol It can be difficult to determine whether it has fallen or whether the short state of the normal symbol is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the player based on the result of the door breakthrough mode effect.

  In the seventh control example, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, it is configured to be almost a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the second special symbol is out of place, instead of configuring it to be simply out of place, the variation time in the case of a big hit is varied according to the number of fluctuations after the big hit, and the door breakthrough mode The period from when the production starts until the big special jackpot of the second special symbol is started, and from when the door breakthrough mode production starts, until all the variable displays corresponding to the second special symbol release are completed. It is good also as a structure which makes a period (period until it transfers to probability change mode) correspond. More specifically, after a big hit, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the variable time is set to 4 seconds, and the second special symbol lottery is won. If the variation time is set to 3 seconds and the third special symbol lottery is won, the variation time is set to 2 seconds and the fourth second special symbol lottery is won. In this case, it may be configured such that one second is set as the variation time. By configuring in this way, 4 seconds (1 second × 4), which is the total of the variation time when all the four reserved balls of the second special symbol are missed, and a big hit on the way, The period until the jackpot is started (4 seconds) can be matched. Therefore, for 4 seconds after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the door breakthrough mode effect, even if the second special symbol jackpot is included in the holding ball, the specific winning opening 65a is not opened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is determined whether or not the operation of the specific winning opening 65a shifts to the probability changing mode before the door breakthrough mode effect is finished. It should be noted that the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode effect until the start of the second special symbol jackpot is the variable display corresponding to the 4th miss of the second special symbol after the door breakthrough mode effect is started. As long as it is longer than the period until the end, the jackpot is not started at least during the execution of the door break mode production. Therefore, when the second special symbol is just a big hit, it may be configured to set a variation time equal to or greater than the sum of the variation times of the variable display corresponding to four times the second special symbol deviation.

  In the seventh control example, the opening period of the 1 to 4 rounds of the special winning opening 65a in the big hits E and F and the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the small hit are the same (0.2 seconds). However, the player may arbitrarily determine the difference as long as it is indistinguishable whether it is a jackpot opening period or a small jackpot opening period based on the experience. Specifically, for example, in the seventh control example, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous and the lottery of the first special symbol is advantageous. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery of the second special symbol may be advantageous, and the lottery of the first special symbol may be advantageous. And if the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the door breakthrough mode production will produce an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door, and if the lottery of the second special symbol is all out, the door breakthrough will fail You may comprise so that the production to perform may be performed. Thereby, if the door breakthrough is successful, it is possible to realize a more easily understandable gameplay such as a jackpot. Furthermore, in this case, the first entrance 64 may be deleted and only the second entrance 640 may be provided. That is, only the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed.

  In the seventh control example, while the variation based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the big hit is being executed, it is difficult to understand whether the big special or the big hit was made in the lottery of the second special symbol. As described above, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set. However, it is not limited to the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol that makes it difficult to understand whether it is a big hit or a small win. For example, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type for which the jackpot and the same action as the jackpot (the same action or an action that the player cannot distinguish from the jackpot) is set is determined. Good.

  In the seventh control example, whether or not all the reserved balls of the second special symbol held during the big hit are missed (small hit) (whether to shift to the probability variation mode), the jackpot ending period is started From this, it is configured to be executed over a period until the lottery of all the second special symbols is completed, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports shifting to the probability change mode during an ending period in at least one part in the case of shifting to the probability change mode. That is, at the start of the ending period, the lottery result of the second special symbol holding ball is pre-read, and if it is determined that all the pre-read results are out of place (small hits), the probability will change with a predetermined probability during the big ending ending period. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports transfer to a mode. By configuring in this way, the player can be notified more quickly of the transition to the probability variation mode, so that the player can be pleased. When notifying the transition to the probability change mode during the ending period, an effect that breaks through four doors may be executed at once, or an effect that is different from the normal door break mode effect is executed. Also good. Here, as an effect that is different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect, for example, an effect that the theme song of the adventurer 811 flows may be executed, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is blacked out. After that, it is possible to execute an effect in which the characters “confirmed probability change mode” appear on the display screen. Furthermore, when an effect that is determined to shift to the probability change mode is executed during the ending period, the effect is changed until the change based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol ends (that is, until the probability change mode is started). ) It may be configured to continue execution. By configuring in this way, the player who knows the transition to the probability change mode at an early stage (during the ending period), the transition to the probability change mode in the remaining period until the transition to the probability change mode. Can be immersed in the afterglow. Thus, the player can be satisfied.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports shifting to a probability change mode before an ending period. More specifically, when a start winning corresponding to the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected and the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated based on the winning information command. , It is determined whether or not all the winning information of the second special symbol is out (small hit). And when all the winning information is disapproved (small hit), it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation which shows the transfer to probability change mode at that time. As an effect indicating the transition to the probability change mode, for example, an effect that the adventurer 811 finds a special (premium) mode key 813 may be executed. For example, the display mode is normal, and the jackpot It is good also as a structure which changes the music which flows into a special (premium) thing.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 639 to 656. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, the variable prize winning device 65 is provided with the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, and the probability changing switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided during the jackpot. When the ball passes, the gaming state after the big hit is configured to be set to the probability variation mode. Further, as long as the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, the probability variation mode and the jackpot are repeated without limitation.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example, the gaming state after jackpot is configured in advance for each jackpot type. In addition, it is configured so that an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive special symbol probabilities, and if the upper limit is reached, even after winning the probable jackpot, the special symbol is set to a low probability state. Yes.

  Further, in the above-described seventh control example, in order to prevent the player from making a right strike during normal times (a state other than the big hit), when the start winning for the second entrance 640 is detected during normal times It was set as the structure which performs warning production.

  On the other hand, in the present eighth control example, the electric accessory 640b is provided for the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the second entrance 640 while being normally blocked by the electric accessory 640b. It is configured to be difficult. Further, during the big hit state, the second special is performed during the big hit like the seventh control example by controlling so that the electric accessory 640b provided along with the second entrance 640 is easily opened. It is configured to store up to the maximum number of reserved balls of symbols. In addition, since the electric accessory 640b is provided in association with the second entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the first entrance 64 in the seventh control example is deleted. .

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. This is a partial change. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. 7 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the seventh control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 639. As shown in FIG. 639, in the eighth control example, the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is set in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, a variable winning device 650 and a second entrance 640 are provided on the downstream side of the normal entrance 67. The variable prize winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable prize winning device 65 in the seventh control example, and is used as a prize opening for paying 13 prize balls each time a ball wins a specific prize opening 650a of the variable prize winning device 650. It is configured. The special winning opening 650a is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can be entered (easy) and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter (difficult), and is opened in each jackpot round Set to state.

  As shown in FIG. 639, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640b. The electric accessory 640b is configured to be variable between a closed position that prevents the ball from entering the second entrance 640 and an open position where the ball can enter, and FIG. 639 is in the open position. The case where it is variable is illustrated. Although details will be described later, this electric accessory 640b performs operation control so that the ball is easier to enter in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol. Is called. More specifically, in the normal symbol high probability state, the normal symbol hit probability is slightly higher than the normal symbol low probability state (199/240 → 200/240), but the normal symbol variation time is longer. At the same time (3 seconds → 30 seconds), the opening period of the electric accessory 640b when the normal symbol is hit is shortened (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, the ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol as a total. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 even if the player hits the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent the symbol lottery from being executed. In addition, during the big hit that is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so it is possible to easily store up to the upper limit number of reserved balls during the big hit. .

  In addition, by attaching the electric accessory 640b to the second entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 in the seventh control example is deleted. A special figure 1 small winning device 655 is provided below the first entrance 64. The special figure 1 small winning prize device 655 is configured such that when the first special symbol lottery is won, the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a is set in an open state so that the ball is brought into the interior. You can enter the ball. In this eighth control example, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery greatly increases (1/1000 → 989/1000) when entering the probability variation mode, and left-handed during the probability variation mode. In this case, the number of balls to be consumed and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the special figure 1 bonus game winning hole 655a is made equal to the number of the first special symbols. It is configured. By comprising in this way, the game efficiency at the time of left-handing in the probability change mode can be improved, without using the electrically-driven accessory 64a in a 7th control example.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 639, in the present eighth control example, the distribution member 660 (see FIG. 574) provided in the seventh control example is deleted, and the downstream side of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 The flow path is branched in approximately three directions. In other words, the flow path toward the second winning entrance 640, the flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and the out opening 66 without going to any of these (the second winning opening 640 and the specific winning opening 650a). It is branched to a flow path that flows down toward the side. By configuring in this way, as in the seventh control example, it is possible to cause a part of a ball launched with a right hit during the big hit to aim at the specific winning opening 650a to enter the second entrance 640. it can. Therefore, it can be set as the structure which accumulate | stores the reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol to the upper limit number during jackpot. As a result, even in the eighth control example, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that hopes that all the lotteries based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol executed after the big hit will be missed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 639, in the eighth control example, a flow path toward the second entrance 640 by a plurality of nails, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and a flow path toward the out port 66 And form. Therefore, by adjusting the nail by the hall clerk, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the balls distributed to the second entrance 640 and the ratio of the balls allocated to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, since the adjustment according to the management policy of the hall can be performed, a more convenient pachinko machine 10 can be realized.

<Electric Configuration in Eighth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 640 to 644, an electrical configuration in the eighth control example will be described. First, the first per-random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 640 (a).

  FIG. 640 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 640 (a), in the eighth control example, the range of values that the first hit type counter C2 can take is expanded to 0-999.

  As shown in FIG. 640 (a), in the special symbol low probability state, “0-9” is defined as the range of determination values determined to be big hits (see 202a1 in FIG. 640 (a)). As in the seventh control example, the determination value that is a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, “10 to 998” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be out of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 640 (a)). “999” is defined as the range. In addition, “10, 11” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 640 (a)), and a determination value determined as a small hit in the second special symbol “12 to 999” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 640 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol, the range of the judgment value that is a big hit, the judgment value that is out of the range, and the range of the judgment value that is a small jackpot are all the first special symbol and the first special symbol. It is common to two special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 640 (a), “0 to 10” is defined as the range of determination values determined to be jackpots (see 202a4 in FIG. 640 (a)), and determinations determined to be out of place. “11” is defined as a value (see 202a5 in FIG. 640 (a)), and “12 to 999” is defined as a determination value determined as a small hit (see 202a6 in FIG. 640 (a)).

  In this way, in the eighth control example, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol. Then, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls to be consumed when left-handed in the probability variation mode and the first special symbol lottery will be a small hit, and the ball will enter the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a The number of prize balls to be paid out is configured to be equal. By comprising in this way, the game efficiency at the time of left-handing in the probability change mode can be improved, without using the electrically-driven accessory 64a in a 7th control example.

  Note that the bonuses for the second special symbol and the bonuses for the first special symbol are different in the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player. It is configured to acquire a ball. On the other hand, in the small bonus of the second special symbol, as in the seventh control example, the specific winning opening 650a is opened only for 0.2 seconds, so that it is difficult for the player to win a prize ball. Therefore, if the player hits the ball rightward during normal times, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and an unfavorable jackpot type is easily determined even if the jackpot is won, and the winning ball is played even if the jackpot is hit. Since it can hardly be obtained, it is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of making a left-handed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn at normal times.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 640 (b). FIG. 640 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 640 (b), in the eighth control example, three types of jackpots A2 to C2 are provided as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, and jackpot D2 is set as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 640 (b), for the first special symbol, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9”, “big hit A2” is associated and defined. (See 202b1 in FIG. 640 (b)). This “jackpot A2” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 16 and a probability change state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit A2”, so “big hit A2” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “big hit A2” is released until 30 seconds have passed or the six balls have won a prize in each of the big hit rounds. Therefore, since the player continues to make a right strike in each round, the upper limit number (six balls) can be awarded to the specific winning opening 650a before 30 seconds have passed. When the jackpot is A2, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

  For the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit B2” in the range of “10 to 69” (see 202b2 in FIG. 640 (b)). . This “big jackpot B2” is a big jackpot in which the number of rounds is seven and a probability variation state of a special symbol is set after the big jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 60 counter values that become “big hit B2”, so “big hit B2” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 60% (60/100). As in the “big hit A2”, the “big hit B2” is released until 30 seconds have elapsed or six balls have been won in each round of the big hit. Therefore, similarly to the “big hit A2”, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  For the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit C2” in the range of “70 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 640 (b)). . This “big jackpot C2” is a big jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and a probability variation state of a special symbol is set after the big jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 counter values that become “big hit C2”, so “big hit C2” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 30% (30/100). As in the case of “big hit A2” or “big hit B2”, this “big hit C2” is released until 30 seconds have elapsed or six balls have been won in each round of big hit. . Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as “big hit A” and “big hit B”.

  In this way, if the first special symbol wins a big win, you can receive a payout of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, or 16 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is almost certainly Therefore, even if it becomes any jackpot type, it becomes advantageous for the player. In addition, since the ratio of 7 rounds and 16 rounds having a relatively large number of rounds is determined (a ratio of 70%), when the first special symbol is a big hit, it is possible to expect a large amount of winning balls. Therefore, the player can be pleased when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 640 (b), for the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 4” is defined in association with “big hit D2”. (See 202b4 in FIG. 640 (b)). This “jackpot D2” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is four and a probability change state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that become “big hit D2”, so “big hit D2” is determined when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100). The “big hit D2” is released until 30 seconds have passed in the special winning opening 650a or until six balls have been won in each big hit round. Therefore, it is possible to receive a relatively large amount of prize balls.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 640 (b), for the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “5 to 99” is defined in association with “big hit E2”. (See 202b5 in FIG. 640 (b)). This “jackpot E2” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is four and a probability change state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 95 counter values that will be “big hit E2”, so “big hit E2” is determined when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 95% (95/100). Unlike the other jackpot types, this “jackpot E2” is released until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or six balls have been won in each of the jackpot rounds. Since it is difficult to make a ball enter the specific winning opening 650a in 0.2 seconds, “Spot Bonus E2” is an unfavorable jackpot type in which a prize ball cannot be acquired. In addition, as described above, there is an upper limit (4 times) for the number of consecutive special symbol probabilities, and if the jackpot is reached when the upper limit has been reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is determined regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to be in a disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, if it becomes “big hit E”, the winning ball cannot be obtained and the number of times until the normal mode is shifted is subtracted, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  In this way, in the eighth control example, if a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a winning ball cannot be obtained with a high probability (ratio of 95%) and the remaining big hit until the normal mode is set The jackpot type (jackpot E2) in which the number of times is reduced is determined. In other words, as in the seventh control example, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high possibility that an unfavorable result will be obtained for the player. This realizes a novel gameability in which a game can be played in the hope that the lottery result will be lost during execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol after the jackpot ends. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 641, details of the second random number table 202c in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 641 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 641, in the normal state of the normal symbol, “5-203” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 641). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 641). In other words, the normal symbol (normal probability state) (low probability state) and the normal symbol high probability state are different from each other in the number of judgment values determined to be a normal symbol hit. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the hit probability can be made substantially equal to the high probability state of the normal symbol.

  In addition, as described above, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer than that in the normal state of the normal symbol (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the electric motor in the case of hitting the normal symbol The opening period of the accessory 640b is shortened (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, the ball is less likely to enter the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol as a total. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 even if the player hits the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent the symbol lottery from being executed. Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed in situations other than during execution of door break-through mode production, and it will become an excessive disadvantage for a player. In addition, during the big hit that is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so it is possible to easily store up to the upper limit number of reserved balls during the big hit. .

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 642 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 642, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 590) in that a probability variation limit counter 203aa and a breakthrough mode counter 203ab are added. Is different. Further, the difference is that the probability variation setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the remaining ball timer 203m, the probability variation valid flag 203n, the probability variation valid timer 203o, and the discharge number counter 203p are deleted.

  The probability variation limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the remaining number of consecutive times of the probability variation state until the normal mode is set. The probability variation limit counter 203aa is set to 4 which is the maximum number of consecutive probability variation states when the normal mode is set as the state after the jackpot end (see S1314 in FIG. 650), and every time the probability variation jackpot ends. The value is subtracted by 1 (see S1311 in FIG. 650). When the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the jackpot, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends.

  The breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set as a counter value at the end of the jackpot A2 to D2 (see S1316 in FIG. 650). ) At the start of fluctuation, the value is updated by subtracting one by one (see S324 in FIG. 645). In the eighth control example, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab (the remaining number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect ends) is included in the fluctuation pattern command and transmitted. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, it reads the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab from the fluctuation pattern command and grasps the remaining number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. In particular, since the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up, if the power is cut off during the execution of the door break mode effect, the progress of the door break mode effect after the power recovery is controlled by the sound lamp. It becomes impossible to grasp on the device 113 side.

  On the other hand, in the eighth control example, information corresponding to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output to the audio lamp control device 113, so that the door breakthrough mode effect is produced. Even if the power is shut off during execution and the stored contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared, execution of the door breakthrough mode effect is performed by analyzing the first received variation pattern command after the power is restored. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is in progress and its progress. Thereby, even when the power is shut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect can be resumed from the continuation of the door breakthrough mode effect after the power is restored. Therefore, since it can suppress that the content of an effect changes before and after the interruption | blocking of a power supply, it can suppress that a player holds discomfort in the content of an effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 643, a state transition method in the eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 643, in the eighth control example, three types of states, the normal mode, the door breakthrough mode, and the probability change mode, are moved back and forth as in the seventh control example. In the eighth control example, the content of the door breakthrough mode is changed from the seventh control example. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the seventh control example described above is a special symbol probability changing state, a normal symbol time-short state, and only shows a state in which a second special symbol holding ball is present. In addition, in the eighth control example, the low probability state of the special symbol, the normal state of the normal symbol, and the state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists is also set as the door breakthrough mode. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the door breakthrough mode in which the probability change state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol are set is referred to as a door breakthrough mode 1, and the low probability state of the special symbol, and The door breakthrough mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is referred to as a door breakthrough mode 2. The door breakthrough mode 1 is illustrated on the left side of the middle stage in FIG. 643, and the door breakthrough mode 2 is illustrated on the right side of the middle stage in FIG. 643.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 643, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of transition to another state only when a big hit is made. Specifically, when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery, the mode always shifts to the door breakthrough mode. As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the special prize opening 650a is opened for a relatively long time (up to 30 seconds) in each round of the big jackpot. When a ball is launched, a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640. As a result, at the end of the jackpot, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are stored up to the upper limit value, and after the jackpot is the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1).

  As shown in the middle of FIG. 643, in the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough modes 1 and 2), the lottery of the second special symbol is basically a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol is all out 2 When the number of reserved balls in the special symbol becomes 0, there is a possibility of shifting to another state. The state of the transition destination in the case of a big hit is common in the door breakthrough modes 1 and 2, but the transition destination state when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol becomes 0 is the door breakthrough mode 1 It differs in door breakthrough mode 2. Specifically, in the door break-through mode 1, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without the big hit of the second special symbol, the mode changes to the probability change mode (see the left side of the middle stage in FIG. 643). In the probability variation mode, by left-handed, it is possible to execute only the lottery of the first special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is increased (see Fig. 1). Since the small winning winning opening 655a is easily opened), the game can be continued until the first special symbol is a big hit without reducing the ball. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. On the other hand, in the door breakthrough mode 2, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode (see the right side of the middle stage in FIG. 643). In normal mode, the probability of hitting is low, so if you make a left-handed strike to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, the ball will continue to decrease until you win a big hit. Become.

  As shown in the middle of FIG. 643, in the door breakthrough mode, if the big special E2 is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, after the jackpot ends, on the condition that the continuous number of probability variation states has not reached the upper limit Transition to probability change mode (common door break modes 1 and 2). As described above, the jackpot E2 has a short opening time of the specific winning opening 650a (0.2 seconds), and a winning ball cannot be obtained even if it is hit right. In addition, in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, the left hit is notified during the big hit E2 and during the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, unless the player deliberately makes a right strike against the notification, the reserved ball of the second special symbol will not be accumulated during the execution of the jackpot E2, so the mode shifts directly to the probability change mode after the jackpot E2 ends. To do. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa that counts the number of times the remaining probability variation state continues until the normal mode is entered. Therefore, when the jackpot E2 is reached, the winning ball cannot be obtained, and the number of probability variation states is subtracted, resulting in an unfavorable result for the player. For this reason, when the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds a plurality of times in the door break-through mode, the player wants that all the opening operations are due to the small hit of the second special symbol. Innovative gameplay can be realized.

  In addition, when the door breakthrough mode results in a big hit E2 of the second special symbol and the probability variation limit counter 203aa has become 0 (the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit), the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Because it is not possible, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect of a mode that fails to break through the door is executed to notify the transition to the normal mode.

  As shown in the middle of FIG. 643, when the jackpot D2 is won during the door breakthrough mode, the door breakthrough mode (either the door breakthrough mode 1 or the door breakthrough mode 2) is again performed after the jackpot D2 ends. Migrate to More specifically, if the continuous number of probability variation states has not reached the upper limit, door break mode 1 (special symbol probability variation state and normal symbol time-short state) is set, and the probability variation state continuous number of times is the upper limit. If it has reached, the door breakthrough mode 2 (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, it is advantageous for the player because it can shift to the probability change mode if the winning ball with the second special symbol does not win. On the other hand, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is set, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), it falls to the normal mode, so it is advantageous to make a big hit. .

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 643, in the probability variation mode, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, the game state is shifted to another gaming state. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a big hit, and the number of consecutive probability variation states has not reached the upper limit value (the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breakthrough mode is started after the big hit ends. . On the other hand, when the number of consecutive probability variation states has reached the upper limit (the probability variation limit counter 203aa has become 0), the state after the big hit is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is notified that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit during the big hit. In other words, the effect of notifying that the state after the jackpot is the normal mode is executed, for example, in the jackpot ending period.

  In this way, in the eighth control example, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode, a winning ball can be obtained with a high probability (95% which is a ratio for determining the big hit E2). This results in an unfavorable result for the player that the remaining number of times of the probability variation state (the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa) is subtracted. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, the game can be performed in the hope that the second special symbol will not be a big hit.

  In the door breakthrough mode effect of the eighth control example, when the big special E2 is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the effect that fails to break through the door is temporarily executed (see FIG. 582 (a)). The If the number of consecutive probability variation states has not reached the upper limit value (if the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 0), the adventurer 811 again tries to break through the door through the so-called revival effect. A production that succeeds is executed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot E2 and the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit value, the revival effect is not performed and the process proceeds to the normal mode as it is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize that the remaining number of continuous times has decreased when accompanied by a reviving effect even when shifting to the probability changing mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 643, in the probability variation mode, the state shifts to another state only when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a big hit, and the number of consecutive times of the probable change state has not reached the upper limit, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the door breakthrough mode 1, and the continuous number of the probable change state has reached the upper limit number of times. In this case, after the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to door breakthrough mode 2.

  In addition, when it becomes the door breakthrough mode 2, as the door breakthrough mode effect, when the reserved balls of all the second special symbols are out (small hit), the breakthrough of the door fails and the normal mode is entered. An effect informing the transition is executed. That is, an effect that is the opposite of door break mode 1 (and door break mode effect in the seventh control example) is executed. Further, when the big hit E2 in the door breakthrough mode 2, the probability change mode is notified through the revival effect as in the case where the remaining continuous number of times of the probability change state remains in the door breakthrough mode 1.

  Thus, in the seventh control example, two types of door breakthrough modes are provided. That is, the door breakthrough mode 1 that shifts when the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit and any of the big hits A2 to D2, and the state where the probability variation state has reached the upper limit (limit) The door break-through mode 2 is provided that shifts when the jackpot is any of jackpots A2 to D2. As in the seventh control example, the door breakthrough mode 1 shifts to a probability change mode that is advantageous to the player when all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol have come off (small hits). It will be more advantageous if you do not win a big prize in the lottery. On the other hand, the door breakthrough mode 2 is internally a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, and is a state in which the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is reset. Therefore, if all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed, the normal mode is entered, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this case, since the second special symbol jackpot during the door breakthrough mode 2 can be shifted to the door breakthrough mode 1 or the probability variation mode, it was a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. This is advantageous for the player. If all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit) in the door break-through mode 2 and shift to the normal mode, there is a possibility that a large amount of balls will be consumed before the big hit. It is.

  Depending on the type of door break-through mode, it may be advantageous that all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed, or it may be advantageous that the big ball is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol Therefore, when it transfers to door breakthrough mode, it can be made to predict which mode this door breakthrough mode is. Then, according to the predicted mode type, it is possible to expect a loss or a big hit, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 644 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 644, the RAM 223 of the eighth control example is different from the above-described configuration of the RAM 223 of the seventh control example (see FIG. 592 (b)) in that an after-insertion flag 223i is added. doing. Other configurations are the same as those in the seventh control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The after-insertion flag 223i is a flag indicating that the power supply is turned on again after the door breakthrough mode is turned on in the middle because the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode, and the door breakthrough mode is resumed. It is. This post-injection flag 223i is set to ON when it is determined that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and that it is a change other than the last change in the door breakthrough mode effect. (See S5012 in FIG. 654).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 645 to 651. First, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the eighth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 645. This special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (S231) is a process executed in place of the special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 601) in the seventh control example.

  Of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the eighth control example, in each process of S301 to S309 and S312, S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601) in the seventh control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S312 is performed.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the eighth control example, after the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307 or S309, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S321), and the read counter value And a variation pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 (S322).

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 645) in the eighth control example, after the process of S311 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (S323). In the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is larger than 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is decremented by 1. In step S324, the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped, This process is finished as it is.

  By this special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 645), the progress status of the door break mode production (the value of the break mode counter 203ab) is included in the variation pattern command and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. it can. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the remaining frequency | count of the actual door break-through mode effect and the effect mode performed by the audio lamp control apparatus 113 shift. In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off, all the stored contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are cleared. It becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the configuration includes the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab with respect to the fluctuation pattern command, it is easy to analyze the fluctuation pattern command that is output first after the power is restored, Can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the effect mode before the power is shut off.

  Note that, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example, the situation where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists is basically only during jackpot and during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more and it is not a big hit, it may be determined that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. However, even if the player intentionally or mistakenly makes a right turn during normal times, the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol may be 1 or more. In such a case, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, when the power is restored, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is notified by the number of held balls command to be 1 or more, so that the door on the voice lamp control device 113 side The malfunction which misidentifies that it is in execution of breakthrough mode production will arise. In contrast, in the eighth control example, the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect is output by including it in the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 1 or more when the power is restored. It is possible to grasp whether the door break-through mode is being executed or whether the player has intentionally or mistakenly made a right turn at normal times. Therefore, it is possible to accurately return the effect mode after power restoration to the state before the power is shut off.

  In the eighth control example, the number of changes until the door breakthrough mode effect is ended is grasped by the breakthrough mode counter 203ab and output in the change pattern command. However, the door breakthrough mode effect is simply output. Only the information indicating whether or not it is being executed may be included in the variation pattern command and output. And it is good also as a structure which grasps | ascertains the frequency | count of fluctuation | variation until a door breakthrough mode effect is complete | finished on the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 side based on the said information and the number of reservation balls of a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of updating the breakthrough mode counter 203ab on the main controller 110 side, so that the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 646, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S106) in the eighth control example will be described. This normal symbol fluctuation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) instead of the normal symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 604) in the seventh control example.

  Of the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 646) in the eighth control example, in the respective processes of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623, the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 604) in the seventh control example, respectively. The same processes as those in S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed.

  In the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 646) in the eighth control example, if it is determined in the processing of S614 that the current symbol is in the normal state (S614: Yes), the variation of the normal symbol is performed. The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S614, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this process ends.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 646) in the eighth control example, when it is determined in the process of S620 that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the second incoming ball The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640b associated with the mouth 640 are set to “1 second × 2 times” (S633), and the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the current state is the normal symbol time-short state (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640 are set to “ 0.2 seconds x 1 "is set (S634), and the process proceeds to S623.

  Thus, in the eighth control example, the normal symbol normal state is shorter in the normal symbol normal state than the normal symbol short-time state, and the opening time when the normal symbol hits the normal symbol is shorter. It is configured to be long. In addition, as described above, the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 641) in the eighth control example is based on the normal symbol normal state (low probability state) and the normal symbol high probability state. The number of determination values to be determined is different by one. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the hit probability is almost equal to the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the short time state of the normal symbol as a total. It becomes difficult. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed. Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed in situations other than during execution of door break-through mode production, and it will become an excessive disadvantage for a player. In addition, during the big hit that is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so it is possible to easily store up to the upper limit number of reserved balls during the big hit. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 647, the startup process 2 of the main controller 110 in the eighth control example will be described. This startup process 2 (see FIG. 647) is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, instead of the startup process (see FIG. 607) in the seventh control example.

  Of the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 647) in the eighth control example, in each process of S901 to S910 and S913 to S916, S901 to S910 of the start-up process (see FIG. 607) in the seventh control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S913-S916 is performed. In the startup process 2 (see FIG. 647) in the eighth control example, when the process of S910 ends, a state command setting process for setting a state command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. (S921), the process proceeds to S913. Details of the status command setting process (S921) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart in FIG. 648 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S921). In this status command setting process (S921), first, the probability change flag 203g is read (S1801), and a status command is set based on the status of the read probability change flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol is changing (S1803). If it is changing (S1803: Yes), the execution area data and the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q are read (S1804). . Next, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S1805), and a variation pattern command is set based on each read value (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1803 that the special symbol is not changing (S1803: No), each process of S1804 to S1807 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

  By executing this state command setting process (see FIG. 648), the game state before the power is turned off, the progress of the door break mode effect, etc. are voiced in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 647). The lamp control device 113 can be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 649, details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the eighth control example will be described. This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609) in the seventh control example.

  Of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649) in the eighth control example, in the processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609) in the seventh control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S1107-S1109 is performed.

  Also, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649) in the eighth control example, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning opening 650a is opened. The state is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and this process is terminated. In the eighth control example, a variable winning device 650 is provided instead of the variable winning device 65 in the seventh control example, and the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2 are not provided therein. Therefore, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649), it is not necessary to execute the process of switching the flow path, and these processes (S1202, S1203 in FIG. 610) are deleted.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649) in the eighth control example, when it is determined that the jackpot end timing is reached in the process of S1109 (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end process (in the seventh control example) In place of (see S1110 in FIG. 609), jackpot end processing 2 is executed (S1123), and this processing ends. Details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the jackpot end timing (S1109: No), winning processing 2 is executed instead of winning processing in the seventh control example (see S1111 in FIG. 609) (S1124). ), This process is terminated. Details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649) in the eighth control example, a process corresponding to the abnormal process (see S1112 in FIG. 609) in the seventh control example is not provided. This is because in the seventh control example, whether or not to shift to the probability change state after the big hit is determined by whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65, whereas This is because in the eight control examples, the gaming state after the jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. For this reason, in the eighth control example, the act of leaving the ball inside the variable prize-winning device 650 does not affect whether or not it will be in a probable change state. It does not hold itself. Therefore, in the eighth control example, the abnormality process (see FIG. 613) for determining whether or not an abnormality in which a ball remains in the variable winning device 650 has occurred is deleted.

  In the eighth control example, naturally, a process corresponding to the abnormality process (see FIG. 613) in the seventh control example may be executed. Thereby, when troubles, such as a ball clogging, generate | occur | produce inside the variable prize-winning apparatus 650, an error can be alert | reported at an early stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 650, details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1123) will be described. FIG. 650 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 (S1123). In the jackpot end process 2 (S1123), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa (S1311), and it is determined whether or not the counter value after subtraction has become 0 (S1312).

  In the processing of S1312, when it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), it means that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit value (limit). 203g is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1311 that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa after subtraction has become 0 (S1312: Yes), this means that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit value. Then, the process of S1313 for turning on the probability variation flag 203g is not executed (the probability variation flag 203g is kept off), the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is set to 4 (S1314), and the process proceeds to S1315. .

  In the process of S1315 executed after the process of S1313 or S1314 is completed, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is read (S1315), and the read value is set to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. (S1316). Then, a state command is set based on the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa (S1317). By including the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa in the state command, not only the game state after the big hit but also the remaining number of times until the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state reaches the upper limit (limit) is grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to. When the processing of S1317 ends, the big hit flag 203r is set to OFF (S1318), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 651, details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described. This winning process 2 (S1124) is a process executed in place of the winning process (see FIG. 612) in the seventh control example, as described above.

  Of the winning process 2 (see FIG. 651) in the eighth control example, in each process of S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1408, S1401 to S1404 and S1406 of the winning process (see FIG. 612) in the seventh control example, respectively. The same processing as that in S1408 is executed.

  In the winning process 2 (see FIG. 651) in the eighth control example, when the process of S1404 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431). If the value of 203j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1431 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process proceeds to S1406.

  In the winning process 2 (see FIG. 651) in the eighth control example, the processes of S1409 to S1420 in the winning process (see FIG. 612) in the seventh control example are deleted. These processes are processes for determining whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and for determining whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 at a normal timing. This is because the process is unnecessary for the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example in which the discharge flow path 65e2, the probability variation switch 65e3, and the like are not provided. By omitting these processes, the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Eighth Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 652 to 656. First, the start-up process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This startup process 2 (see FIG. 652) is a process executed instead of the startup process (see FIG. 616) in the seventh control example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  Of the startup process 2 (see FIG. 652) in the eighth control example, the processes in S4001 to S4013 are the same as the processes in S4001 to S4013 of the startup process (see FIG. 616) in the seventh control example. Processing is executed. In the startup process 2 (see FIG. 652) in the eighth control example, when the process of S4012 is completed, the power-on state is then based on the state command and the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. Is executed (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4013. Details of the on-loading state determination process (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 653 is a flowchart showing this on-time state determination processing (S4021). In this on-state determination process (S4021), first, it is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4901). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No). Then, a back image corresponding to the gaming state at the time of power-on is set (S4902), and this process is terminated. Here, the gaming state at the time of power-on is determined based on the data in the gaming state storage area 223h updated in the process of S4012 of the startup process 2 (see FIG. 652). The back image for the probability change state is set as the back image for the normal state in the normal state. Note that the door breakthrough mode effect is an effect executed during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and therefore there is no possibility of the door breakthrough mode when the power is turned on and the fluctuation is stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that a variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4903). ), It is determined whether or not the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed. If the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 or more, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. means.

  In the process of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is not 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough for selecting the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect is selected. A mode selection process is executed (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4907. Details of the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: Yes), the remaining fluctuation An effect mode corresponding to the time and the lottery result is determined (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. In the process of S4907, a display variation pattern command is set based on the effect mode determined in the process of S4905 or S4906 (S4907), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 654, details of the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described. FIG. 654 is a flowchart showing the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905).

  In the breakthrough mode selection process (see FIG. 654), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 1 (S5001), and the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. If there is (S5001: Yes), it is then determined whether the variation pattern is a deviation (S5002). If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the variation pattern is a deviation (S5002: Yes), it is then determined whether the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is data indicating a probable change state (S5003). If it is in a probable change state (S5003: Yes), the power supply is cut off and executed during the execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the last second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode 1 (refer to the middle left of FIG. 643). It means that the last ball in the middle was out (small hit). Therefore, in this case, the effect mode for notifying the transition to the probability change mode is determined as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining variation time (S5004), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5003, when it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is data indicating the low probability state of the special symbol (S5003: No), the door breakthrough mode 2 (middle of FIG. 643) This means that the power supply was cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last second special symbol holding ball in (see the right side) and that the last holding ball being executed was out (small hit). Therefore, in this case, the effect mode for notifying the transition to the normal mode is determined as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining fluctuation time (S5005), and this process is terminated. Even if the state at the time when the power is turned on again by the processes of S5003 and S5004 is during execution of the last variation display in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door is based on the lottery result and the gaming state. The result of the breakthrough mode effect can be reported accurately.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5001 that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is not 1 (2 or more) (S5001: No), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. When it is determined that the variation pattern being executed at the time of power recovery is a jackpot variation pattern (S5002: No), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a jackpot E2 (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot is E2 (S5006: Yes), it is then determined whether the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has reached the upper limit (limit) (S5007). Note that the remaining number of times until the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a state command together with the gaming state at the time of power-on.

  In the process of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit value (limit) of the continuous number of probability variation states has been reached (S5007: Yes), the state after the big hit is the normal mode, so that the transition to the normal mode is notified. The process proceeds to the process of S5005 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5007 that the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not been reached, the state after the big hit becomes the probability variation mode. The effect mode is determined (S5008), and this process is terminated. As mentioned above, this revival effect is that the remaining number of times until the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times in the probabilistic state has decreased despite the fact that the winning ball has not been obtained due to the big hit E2. It is an effect to show. This revival effect allows the player to recognize that he has won the jackpot E2 during the door breakthrough mode effect.

  In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot E2 is not (S5006: No), it is then determined whether the current variation pattern is a jackpot D2 (S5009). In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a jackpot D2 (S5009: Yes), it is determined to be a special effect mode indicating that it has been a jackpot in the door breakthrough mode effect (S5010). This process is terminated.

  In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the big hit D2 (S5009: No), the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a deviation (small hit) and the current fluctuation pattern. Means that it is not the last change in the door breakthrough mode, and therefore the breakthrough production effect mode corresponding to the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is determined (S5011). That is, the mode of the door 814 is determined according to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. Then, the value of the breakthrough mode in-progress counter 203ab is set in the breakthrough effect counter 223g, the post-injection flag 223i is set to ON (S5012), and this process is terminated. By turning on the post-introduction flag 223i, it is possible to determine that the effect has been resumed from the middle of the door breakthrough mode when the power is turned on even when the next variation pattern is received.

  The door breakthrough mode effect in the eighth control example is basically 5.8 seconds from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the fourth specific winning opening 650a opening period, as in the seventh control example. A series of performances of the production time are set. That is, at the start of the door breakthrough mode effect, the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is determined in advance based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, during execution of the door break-through mode effect, when a variation pattern command of the second special symbol is newly received, it is only necessary to execute a predetermined effect mode as it is. However, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door break mode production, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, and the progress of the door break mode production and the result of the production It becomes impossible to grasp etc. Therefore, in the present eighth control example, when the power is shut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the power is turned on again, the post-on flag 223i can grasp that fact. While the post-injection flag 223i is on, each time a variation pattern command is received, the breakthrough mode is determined based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the lottery result It is determined whether it is the end timing of the effect, and the effect mode according to the determination result is set. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect on the sound lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This variable display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 624) in the seventh control example. Of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) in the eighth control example, in the processes of S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809, S4801 to S4803 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 624) in the seventh control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S4805-S4809 is performed.

  In the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 655) in the eighth control example, when the process of S4803 is completed, the rough variation display mode notified by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 ( Based on the (variation time), a variation pattern determination process for determining a detailed effect mode of the variation pattern is executed (S4811). Details of the variation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing in S4811 is completed, a display variation pattern command is set based on the detailed effect mode of the variation pattern determined in S4811 (S4812), and the processing proceeds to S4805.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 656, details of the above-described variation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described. In the variation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the after-insertion flag 223i is on (S5101), and if the after-insertion flag 223i is off (S5101: No), the main controller 110 determines. Based on the rough mode of the fluctuation pattern extracted from the output fluctuation pattern command, the detailed production mode of the fluctuation pattern is determined (S5102), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the post-on flag 223i is on (S5101: Yes), the power is turned off after the power is shut off during the execution of the door break mode effect. Therefore, a process for determining an effect mode in the door breakthrough mode effect is executed according to the information of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the lottery result.

  Specifically, first, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S5103), and whether the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (that is, the last fluctuation in the door breakthrough mode effect). (S5104). In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), then whether the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is a deviation fluctuation pattern or not. If it is determined (S5105) and it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation (S5105: Yes), based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h, it is determined whether the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol. (S5106).

  In the process of S5106, when it is determined that the current state is the probability change state of the special symbol (S5106: Yes), an effect mode (see FIG. 582 (b)) for notifying the transition to the probability change mode is determined, and the process is performed. The process shifts to S5116. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, when it is determined that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol (S5106: No), the effect mode (see FIG. 582 (a)) for notifying the transition to the normal mode is determined. (S5108), the process proceeds to S5116.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5104, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. (S5104: Yes) and if it is determined that the big hit variation pattern has been notified (S5105: No), then it is discriminated whether it is a big hit E2 (S5109).

  In the processing of S5109, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot E2 (S5109: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the continuous number of probability variation states has been reached. However, if the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times has been reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the jackpot E2 cannot be set to the probability variation mode, so the transition to the normal mode is notified. The process shifts to S5108 for determining the production mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5110 that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit (limit) (S5110: No), the effect mode of the revival effect is determined (S5111), and the process proceeds to S5116. And migrate.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5109 that the current variation pattern is not jackpot E2 (S5109: No), it is then determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to jackpot D2. However, if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the jackpot D2 (S5112: Yes), a special door breakthrough mode effect presentation mode informing the jackpot is determined (S5113), and the process proceeds to S5116. And migrate.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5112 that it is not the big hit D2 (S5112: No), the current fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern (small hit) and the remaining number of fluctuations of the door breakthrough mode effect ( This means that the number of retained balls of the second special symbol) is 2 or more, so the effect mode of the door break mode effect is determined according to the value of the break mode counter 203ab extracted in the process of S5103 (S5114). Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set in the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S5115), and this process is terminated.

  Further, in the processing of S5116 executed after any of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113 is completed, the after-insertion flag 223i is reset to OFF and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( S5116), the process is terminated.

  By executing this variation pattern determination process, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off during the door breakthrough mode production, after the power is turned on again, production is performed from the middle of the door breakthrough mode production. The mode can be restored. More specifically, if the power is cut off during the execution of the door break mode production, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, thereby grasping the progress status of the door break mode production, the result of the production, and the like. It becomes impossible. Therefore, in the present eighth control example, when the power is shut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the power is turned on again, the post-on flag 223i can grasp that fact. While the post-injection flag 223i is on, each time a variation pattern command is received, the breakthrough mode is determined based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the lottery result It is determined whether it is the end timing of the effect, and the effect mode according to the determination result is set. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect on the sound lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example, the gaming state after the jackpot is configured in advance for each jackpot type. In addition, an upper limit (limit) is set for the number of consecutive special symbol probabilities, so that if the upper limit is reached, even after winning the probable jackpot, the special symbol low probability state will be set after the jackpot It is composed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to form two types of door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) in which the special symbol is in a probable change state and door breakthrough mode in which the special symbol is in a low probability state. it can. Therefore, when shifting to the door breakthrough mode, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal mode even if all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which it becomes advantageous or unfavorable to win a big hit during the door break-through mode according to the number of consecutive probable change states.

  Further, in the eighth control example, the electric combination 640b is provided for the second entrance 640, and the electric combination 640b is difficult to be released in the high probability state (time-short state) of the normal symbol. In the normal state (low probability state) of the symbol, the electric accessory 640b is easily opened. With this configuration, in the probability variation mode in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 even if the player hits the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery from being executed. Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed in situations other than during execution of door break-through mode production, and it will become an excessive disadvantage for a player. In addition, during the big hit that is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so it is possible to easily store up to the upper limit number of reserved balls during the big hit. .

  In the eighth control example, the change pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 includes information indicating the remaining number of changes in the door breakthrough mode effect (the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab). Is included. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door break-through mode effect, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 after the power is turned on again. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not the door break-through mode effect is being executed and the progress status when it is being executed simply by analyzing on the side. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect on the sound lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  In the eighth control example, the lamp pattern control is performed to determine whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power is restored, by outputting the fluctuation pattern command including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. Although it has been configured so that it can be discriminated on the device 113 side, it is not limited to this. For example, only the information indicating whether or not the second special symbol after the jackpot has ended is being included in the variation pattern command. That is, it is not necessary to include information on the remaining number of times of change display until the door breakthrough mode effect ends in the change pattern. And when the power supply is restored during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the type of variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command (whether it is a hit or not) It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines whether it is the last fluctuation | variation of door breakthrough mode production. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the eighth control example, the variation pattern command is always output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, only the first variation pattern command may be output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. Thereby, the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the eighth control example, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command for output, but it is not necessarily included in the variation pattern command. For example, a command for notifying only the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab may be separately prepared. That is, the main controller 110 may notify the sound lamp controller 113 by a command only when the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is changed. With this configuration, the data amount of the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the eighth control example, when the power is turned on, the game state is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the state command, and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is notified by the variation pattern command. The information notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, the result of prefetching of each reserved ball may be notified again by a winning information command. By configuring in this way, when the door break-through mode effect is being executed when the power is turned on, not only the fact that the door break-through mode effect is being executed, but also the result of the door break-through mode effect. When the power is turned on, the sound lamp control device 113 side can grasp this. Therefore, the production mode can be determined in consideration of the production result.

<Modification in Eighth Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 657 to 659. In the above-described eighth control example, the second accessory 640b is provided with the electric accessory 640b. The normal symbol low probability state has a shorter normal symbol variation time than the normal symbol high probability state, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b when the normal symbol hits is longer. By doing so, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a storage valve 63a capable of storing (stopping) a sphere in the upper portion of the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a sphere stored in the storage valve 63a. There is provided a general winning opening 63 through which the stored ball can enter when the stored state is released. Although the details will be described later, the second entrance 640 in the present modification is basically provided at a position where it is impossible (difficult) to enter the ball even if it is right-handed. As an exception, a ball can enter the second entrance 640 only when a right hand is made in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. More specifically, when right-handed in a state where three spheres are stored by the storage valve 63a, the sphere that has flowed down by right-handing collides with the third sphere stored. There is a possibility that the trajectory of the sphere is changed and the trajectory can enter the second entrance 640. In the present modification, the storage state is canceled at normal times and the storage state is set only during the big hit, so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 only during the big hit. .

  With this configuration, it is not necessary to attach the electric accessory 640b to the second entrance 640. Therefore, similarly to the seventh control example, the electric accessory 64 a can be attached to the first entrance 64. Thereby, similarly to the seventh control example, in the probability variation mode, the electric accessory 64a can be easily opened, so that the game can be performed without reducing the ball. In addition, with the configuration in which the electric accessory 64a is attached to the first entrance 64, the above-described control examples of “special symbol low probability state” and “normal symbol time-short state” are set. A gaming state that did not exist can be provided. More specifically, by changing the gaming state when the number of consecutive times of probability variation state reaches the upper limit (limit) to “low probability state of special symbol” and “short state state of normal symbol”, probability variation mode Is completed (after reaching the limit), a special symbol lottery can be executed while maintaining the ball (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times) (so-called special symbol lottery). (Retraction state) can be set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the probability change mode is ended, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol time-short state” will be referred to as “retraction mode”.

  First, with reference to FIG. 657, the game board 13 in a modification of the eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 657, in the present modification, the electric accessory 64a is attached to the first entrance 64, as in the seventh control example. Thereby, in the “probability change mode” and the “retraction mode” that are set to the short time state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in this modified example, as in the seventh control example, it is configured not to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Further, in addition to the second winning hole 640 and the variable winning device 650, the general winning port 63 is provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable winning device unit 80. The general winning opening 63 is configured as a winning opening from which one winning ball is paid out when a ball enters. A storage valve 63 a is provided vertically above the general winning opening 63. The storage valve 63a can be changed between a protruding state (see FIG. 658 (a)) protruding toward the front side of the front view and an embedded state (see FIG. 658 (b)) buried inside the game board 13. It is configured. In the protruding state of the storage valve 63 a, it is possible to prevent the sphere that has reached the storage valve 63 a from flowing down to the general winning opening 63 by storing (stopping) the sphere in the upper portion thereof. On the other hand, when the storage valve 63a is buried, the sphere can pass through the front side of the storage valve 63a. That is, the ball can flow down to the general winning opening 63. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 658, in this modification, the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state (see FIG. 658 (b)) at a normal time other than the big hit, and the storage valve 63a is set at the start of the big hit. Is changed from the buried state (see FIG. 658 (b)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 658 (a)). At the end of the big hit, the storage valve 63a is again changed from the protruding state (see FIG. 658 (a)) to the buried state (see FIG. 658 (b)).

  The protruding state and the buried state of the storage valve 63a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 658 is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a protruding state, and FIG. 658 (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As shown in FIG. 658 (a), when the storage valve 63a is in a projecting state with the start of a big hit, the flow path formed above the general winning port 63 is blocked by the storage valve 63a. As a result, the balls that have reached the flow path are stored (stopped) up to three above the storage valve 63a. In addition, during the jackpot, the player cannot make a winning ball unless he or she wins the ball to the specific winning opening 650a. In the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63, nails, windmills, and the like are arranged so that one out of two spheres fired by right-handing travels. Therefore, during one round of jackpot, the information of the storage valve 63a stores three balls (see FIG. 658 (a)).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 658 (a), when the upper limit number of three balls is stored above the storage valve 63a and the ball is further hit to the right, the right-handed ball is In some cases, the ball collides with the third (last tail) ball stored by the storage valve 63a. The sphere that collided with the third sphere stored is reflected in the direction opposite to the previous flow direction, and as a result, in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, On the other hand, it becomes a trajectory capable of entering the second entrance 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modified example of the eighth control example, the storage valve 63a enters the storage state based on the jackpot, and the storage state is maintained until the jackpot ends. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is made in order to make a ball enter the specific winning opening 650a during a big hit, three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a. When the player makes a right-hand hit to obtain a prize ball with three balls stored above the storage valve 63a, the newly launched ball collides with the stored ball. As a result of the change of the flow direction, the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, the player will continue to make a right-hand hit to win a prize ball during the jackpot, and at the end of the jackpot, the reserved balls of the second special symbol will be stored up to the upper limit (4) Can do. Although illustration is omitted, in the state where three spheres are stored by the storage valve 63a, some of the spheres fired by the right strike do not collide (interfere) with the stored spheres. It flows down in the direction of the specific winning opening 650a. Thereby, it is possible to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 and the specific prize opening 650a during the big hit.

  FIG. 658 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the storage valve 63a is buried. As described above, when the big hit is completed, the projecting state is changed to the buried state, and the buried state is maintained (held) until the next big hit. When the storage valve 63 a is buried, the sphere can pass (flow down) through the flow path provided above the general winning port 63. Therefore, the ball launched into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the front side of the buried storage valve 63a and enters the general winning opening 63, or the general It flows down the flow path toward the specific winning port 650a provided in the middle between the winning port 63 and the second winning port 640. In this modification, since the storage valve 63a is in the buried state until the next big hit, after the big hit is finished, it is assumed that the right-handed ball normally enters the second entrance 640 Can be prevented. Thereby, since it can suppress that the lottery of the 2nd special symbol which is disadvantageous at the time of normal is performed, it can prevent (suppress) that it becomes too disadvantageous for a player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 659, a state transition method in the present modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 659, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, probability change mode, door break mode 1, door break mode 2) provided in the above-described eighth control example, a pull back mode is provided. Is provided.

  The pull back mode is a state in which a low probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol are set. In this modification, when the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is reached, the state after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol. For this reason, in this modified example, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol is in the short time state, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol becomes 0 in the door breakthrough mode 2, the pullback mode is set. .

  As shown in the upper right of FIG. 659, the pull-back mode is a big hit, or when the special symbol lottery for the set number of times (25) is completed without a big hit, the mode is shifted to another mode. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when all of the lottery of special symbols for the number of time reductions are missed, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In addition, since the low probability state of the special symbol is set in the pull-back mode, and the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is reset, when the jackpot is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode 1. .

  In this modification, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened in the short time state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the probability change mode and the pullback mode both have the same opening control of the electric accessory 64a, so it is difficult to determine whether the mode is the probability change mode or the pullback mode. In this modification, the player can recognize that the mode is the pull-back mode when the number of time reductions ends and the mode falls from the pull-back mode to the normal mode. In other words, in the pull-back mode, when the first special symbol lottery is a big win, it is difficult to determine whether the probability change mode is a big win or the pull-back mode is a big win. Therefore, by making a big hit in the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player think as if the probability variation state continues beyond the upper limit of the number of consecutive probability variation states. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, in connection with the configuration in which the probability variation mode and the pullback mode cannot be distinguished from the operation of the electric accessory 64a and the like, in this modified example, all the retaining balls of the second special symbol are detached in the door breakthrough mode 2. Even in this case, an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door is executed. As a result, when the adventurer 811 performs an operation that successfully breaks through all doors in the door breakthrough mode production, the door breakthrough mode 1 is switched to the probability change mode, or the door breakthrough mode 2 is changed to the pull back mode. It can be difficult to tell if it has moved. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which it is not known how long the hit between the jackpot and the mode (probability change mode or pullback mode) in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set will continue.

  Thus, in the modification of the eighth control example, a sphere can be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 63a, and the right-handed sphere is determined depending on whether or not the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 63a. It is possible to switch the direction of flow. When the ball is not stored in the storage valve 63a, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, while the storage valve 63a stores the upper limit number (three) of balls. If it is, the flow direction of a part of the newly launched sphere is switched by the stored sphere, and the trajectory is changed to a trajectory that can enter the second entrance 640. did. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 even if the right hand is made at the normal time when the storage valve 63a is set in the buried state. Further, during the big hit when the storage valve 63a is set to the protruding state, the ball can be configured to be able to enter the second entrance 640 when a right-hand hit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player from being executed at normal time while allowing the reserved balls of the second special symbol to be stored up to the upper limit at the end of the big hit.

  Further, in the modified example of the eighth control example, when the number of consecutive times of the probable variation state becomes the upper limit, a short time state of a normal symbol that continues until a special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times) is set. The configuration is as follows. With this configuration, when the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state reaches the upper limit, the special symbol lottery is performed without reducing the holding ball until the predetermined number (25 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to form a state in which can be executed (retraction mode). Therefore, even when the number of consecutive probable variation states reaches the upper limit and a low probability state of a special symbol is set after a big hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Further, the pullback mode and the probability variation mode are both configured so that it is difficult to distinguish each other from the appearance of the operation of the electric accessory 64a because the time-short state of the normal symbol is set. As a result, even when a big hit is made in the pull-back mode, the player can be made to think as if the big hit was made in the probability variation mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows the user to feel as if the probability variation state is continuing beyond the upper limit of the probability variation state.

  In the modified example of the eighth control example, the storage valve 63a is provided above the general winning opening 63, and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 depending on the state of the storage valve 63a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general winning opening 63, a storage valve 63a may be provided above the second winning opening 640. In addition, while the big hit, the storage valve 63a is set in the buried state so that a right-handed ball can enter the second entrance 640. You may comprise so that a ball | bowl may become difficult to enter into the 2nd entrance 640 by making the valve 63a into the protrusion state. Thereby, since the general winning opening 63 can be omitted, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the modification of the eighth control example, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state, but instead, an upper limit may be provided for the number of lotteries for special symbols in one probability variation state. That is, when the probability variation is a big hit, the special symbol may be in a state where the probability variation state continues after the big hit, for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 130 times. With this configuration, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has been reached, so that the processing load at the end of the big hit can be reduced. Also, in this case, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached, the probability change state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol are set, while the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol is set, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, with a high probability (for example, a ratio of 95%), the winning ball can hardly be obtained and the jackpot type that shifts to the normal state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol after the jackpot is determined. . By configuring in this way, as in the case of each control example described above, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that allows a game to be played in the hope that it will not be a big hit in a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol accumulated during the big hit. be able to.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 660 to 675. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, the second entrance 640 and the specific winning opening 65a are provided in the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. There is a possibility that only the right-handed sphere will flow into the right-hand channel on the front view (the sphere will not flow into the right-hand channel on the right-hand side even if left-handed), so the second incoming ball In both the mouth 640 and the specific winning opening 65a, if the player hits the right, the ball can enter (easy to enter), and if left-handed, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). For this reason, when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery, if the ball is hit to the right to obtain a prize ball, the ball also enters the second entrance 640. It is possible to make a state where the reserved balls of symbols are accumulated up to the upper limit. Thereby, after the jackpot of the first special symbol, a state is formed in which a lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is made, is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, in the ninth control example, if the left hand is made, the ball can enter (easy to enter), and if the right hand is made, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). Two types of specific winnings, 656a, and right specific winning opening 657a, where the ball can enter (easy to enter) if left-handed and the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) if left-handed. It was set as the structure which provides a mouth. As the jackpot type of the first special symbol, only the left specific winning port 656a is opened in all rounds (the right specific winning port 657a is difficult to open) and the left specific winning port 656a in the first round. Are opened, and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other rounds (the right specific winning opening 657a is easily opened). That is, there are few opportunities to make a right hit during a big hit (it is difficult to store the second special symbol holding ball during a big hit) and there are many opportunities to make a right hit (a second special symbol holding ball during a big hit) It is configured to provide a jackpot type that is easy to accumulate. If there is little opportunity to make a right-hand hit (it is difficult to store the second special symbol holding ball during the jackpot), it is less likely that the jackpot will be included in the holding ball that exists at the end of the jackpot, The possibility of shifting to the probability change mode can be further increased. On the other hand, if there is a large number of opportunities to make a right hit (a reserve ball of the second special symbol is easy to accumulate during a big hit), the possibility that a big hit will be included in the held balls that exist at the end of the big hit increases. Therefore, the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode is relatively low. As a result, the difference in the degree of advantage according to the jackpot type can be further increased, so that when the jackpot is won, attention can be paid to that type. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation until the jackpot type is determined.

  In the ninth control example, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable display due to the larger difference in the degree of advantage corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol. It was set as the structure which suggests a jackpot classification according to the classification. More specifically, the number of rounds is small (2 rounds or 5 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened except for the first round (reserved balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate). In the case of an unfavorable jackpot type), it is informed that the jackpot has been won when three main symbols simulating an even number of the same numbers are arranged on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of rounds is large (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (it is easy to collect the reserved balls of the second special symbol). In this case, a notification that three main symbols imitating any of eight types of numbers other than “7” among the numbers “1 to 9” are arranged on the display screen is performed. Furthermore, if it is the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, the jackpot type that digests all rounds by left-handed), one of the 3 symbols that imitates the numbers "1-9" May be available. In other words, when three main symbols with an odd number other than “7” are arranged, it indicates that it is a big hit of at least 16 rounds, and when a main symbol with “7” is arranged. Means that the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and that it is a jackpot type in which a winning ball can be obtained by making a left strike in all the jackpot rounds. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while paying attention to the types of main symbols arranged on the display screen at the end of the variable display, so that it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, in the ninth control example, the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the jackpot type in which all rounds are left-handed) is used, and numbers other than “7” are arranged in the variable display effect. Then, an effect that is changed (promoted) to “7” is executed by the promotion effect executed during the jackpot. That is, the most advantageous jackpot is informed of the “7” set indicating the most advantageous jackpot during the variation display effect or the jackpot after the variation display effect. Similarly, the number of rounds is the largest (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened except for the first round (the second special symbol holding ball is easy to accumulate). When the numbers are aligned, an effect that is changed (promoted) to an odd number of numbers other than “7” is then executed by the promotion effect executed during the jackpot. That is, in the 16th round jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened except for the first round, an odd number of numbers other than “7” is notified during the variable display effect or the jackpot after the variable display effect. In addition to the opening of the right special prize opening 657a other than the first round, even with a small number of rounds (5 rounds or 2 rounds), even numbers were arranged by the variable display effect, and developed into a promotion effect. Even in this case, even numbers are kept aligned without being changed (promoted) to odd numbers. In this way, by providing the promotion effect, the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type that is once less advantageous in the variable display effect (simulating the same number of even numbers corresponding to the jackpot of 5 rounds or 2 rounds). 3 combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot type having a high degree of advantage due to the promotion effect (corresponding to the most advantageous jackpot) The player can be expected to be changed (promoted) to a combination or the like. Thereby, the interest can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The process is partly changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. 7 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the seventh control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 660, in the game board 13 in the ninth control example, instead of the variable winning device 65 in the seventh control example, the left variable winning device 656 is installed in the left channel of the game board 13. At the same time, a right variable winning device 657 is provided in the right channel. The internal structure of the left variable winning device 656 provided in the left channel of the game board 13 is the same as the variable winning device 65 in the seventh control example. In other words, the ball that has entered the left specific winning opening 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 inside the left variable winning device 656. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2 during the jackpot and the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3, the probability changing state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is finished. On the other hand, the variable right winning device 657 has only a function of paying out 11 winning balls when detecting the entering of a ball into the right specific winning opening 657a. In other words, the winning device has a simple configuration in which a switch (probability change switch 65e3) to be determined whether or not to assign a probability change state is not provided.

  The left specific winning port 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is the first round (in the case of jackpots A3 to C3 described later) or all rounds (in the case of jackpot D3 described later) when the first special symbol jackpot ). On the other hand, the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened after the second round when it becomes a big hit A3 to C3. When it becomes the jackpot type (big jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, it is possible to obtain a winning ball simply by continuing left-handing during the jackpot. That is, there is no need to make a right-hand hit that may cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that after the big hit, the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous (that is, the probability variation state is given). There is no possibility of being a big hit (low). In other words, in the lottery executed after the jackpot based on the holding ball existing at the end of the jackpot, there is no possibility of being a jackpot again (low). Therefore, when it becomes the big hit type (big hit D3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, the player can have a greater satisfaction. Hereinafter, the type of jackpot that can digest the jackpot by left-handing in all rounds is referred to as “left-handed jackpot”. On the other hand, the type of jackpot that digests the jackpot by making a right hit after the second round is referred to as a “right hit jackpot”.

  On the other hand, when the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened after the second round, the winning ball cannot be obtained unless the right round is made after the second round. (It becomes difficult), so a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Therefore, it can be made the state which the reservation ball of the 2nd special symbol accumulated to the upper limit at the end of jackpot. If there are many reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the big hit, the possibility of winning a big win in the lottery based on the reserved balls after the big win becomes higher than the left-handed big hit. For this reason, after the jackpot is over, a lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous when the jackpot is made can be formed continuously, so as in the seventh control example, It is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows a game to be played in the hope that all of the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the big hit will be missed (small hit).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 661 and 662, a promotion effect which is a kind of display effect in the ninth control example will be described. In the ninth control example, as described above, the main symbols to which the number “7” is attached may be arranged only during the variable display for notifying the left-handed jackpot. Moreover, there is a possibility that main symbols with odd numbers other than “7” are aligned during a variable display for notifying 16 round jackpots. In other words, there is a possibility that the main symbols with even numbers are arranged even in the variable display for notifying the left-handed jackpot or the variable display for notifying the 16 round jackpot. In the ninth control example, when the main symbols with even numbers are arranged in the variable display for notifying 16 round jackpots or left-handed jackpots, after the jackpot opening period to the first round is over Over the interval period, the main symbol once arranged in the variable display is changed (promoted) to a main symbol imitating the number “7” or a main symbol imitating an odd number other than “7”. Executed. As a result, even when main symbols simulating even numbers are prepared in the variable display, it is possible to expect that promotion effects are executed during jackpots and promoted to symbols simulating odd numbers. Therefore, even when the even number of symbols are arranged in the variable display, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. In addition, the promotion effect is configured such that the rate of execution when the promotion is successful is higher than when the promotion fails. Thereby, when a promotion effect is performed, a player's sense of expectation for promotion can be improved.

  FIG. 661 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot opening period in which the promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 661 (a), in the jackpot opening period in which the promotion effect is set, the third symbol arranged in the variable display (in the example of FIG. 661 (a), the main symbol imitating “2”). Continues to be displayed. In addition, a display area HR <b> 5 in which characters “promotion chance !! Further, on the left side of the display area HR5, a display area HR1 in which a character “left-handed” and a left-pointing arrow image are displayed is displayed. A cannon 815 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that an effect using the cannon 815 is executed by left-handed.

  The reason for notifying the left-handed in the opening period is that the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round. By starting left-handed during the opening period, it is possible to efficiently win the ball to the left specific winning opening 656a at the start of the first round.

  FIG. 661 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the first round. As shown in FIG. 661 (b), during the first round, when the winning of the ball to the left specific winning port 656a (entry ball) is detected, the third symbol (the main symbol imitating “2”) is displayed by the cannon 815. A directing effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 661 (b), the bombarded portion of the third symbol is in a state where the field of view is blocked by the smoke K1. Thereafter, each time a ball entering the left specific prize winning opening 656a is detected, an effect in which the third symbol is bombarded (bombarded effect) is executed, and smoke increases.

  FIG. 662 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round in the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 662 (a), at the end of one round, smoke K1 to K7 is displayed so as to cover all of the third symbol. By covering all of the 3rd symbol, the player can predict whether the 3rd symbol that appears after the smoke has cleared will remain even or promoted to an odd number. The expectation for promotion can be improved.

  FIG. 662 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the interval period after the end of one round when the promotion to left-handed jackpot is successful (that is, the current jackpot type is left-handed jackpot). . As shown in FIG. 662 (b), when the promotion to the left-handed jackpot is successful, after the smoke K1 to K7 clears, the effect that three main symbols imitating the number “7” appear is executed. Is done. In addition, a character “promoted to a super big bonus !!” is displayed on the display area HR5. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the player has left a big hit. Therefore, great satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the case of promotion to a 16-round right-hit jackpot symbol (a main symbol imitating an odd number other than “7”), the character “promotion to big bonus !!” is displayed on the display area HR5. Is displayed. In addition, if the promotion fails (that is, if this jackpot type was a right-handed jackpot other than 16 rounds), the main symbol will be changed to an imitation even after the smoke K1-K7 clears up. In addition to executing an effect that has not been performed, characters “promotion failure ...” are displayed in the display area HR5. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand whether or not the promotion is successful, and when the promotion is successful, the jackpot type. Therefore, an easy-to-understand presentation can be provided.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, a probability variation switch 65e3 is provided inside the left variable winning device 656, and the left variable winning device 656 is left in both cases of left-handed big hit and right-handed big hit. The specific winning opening 656a is configured to be opened in the first round of jackpot. With this configuration, the opening operation can be made the same until the end of the one-round interval period regardless of whether the jackpot is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the left specific winning port 656a or the right specific winning port 657a, it can be difficult to distinguish between left-handed jackpots and right-handed jackpots. Therefore, when the promotion effect is executed, the game can be played while paying attention to the contents of the effect, so that the effect effect of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the ninth control example, the promotion effect is executed in the first round in which the left variable winning device 656 in which the probability variation switch 65e3 is provided operates. Thus, when the promotion effect is executed, even if it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the left specific winning opening 656a and will be in a promising state after the big hit, it will be focused on whether or not to be promoted. The remaining games in the first round can be played.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, a game with a big hit is performed by paying the most attention to whether or not a probable change state is reached. In other words, it is common to play a game with a big hit, paying the most attention to whether or not a ball wins a winning opening with a built-in probability change switch. However, once the ball has passed the probability variation switch and it is determined that it will be in a state of probability variation, the player will be satisfied at that time, and the remaining game at the jackpot will simply be a task to obtain a prize ball. There was a case where it became.

  On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the promotion effect can be executed over the period from the jackpot opening period to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing the probability change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 and the probability variation state is established, attention can be paid to the result of the promotion effect, so the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Later, you can focus on the production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the jackpot is simply a work for obtaining a prize ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot.

<Electric Configuration in Ninth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 663 and 664, configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the ninth control example will be described. First, the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 663 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 663 (a), the ROM 202 in the ninth control example has an open scenario selection table 202e added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 585 (a)). Is different. Further, the difference is that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the seventh control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 663 (b). As shown in FIG. 663 (b), in the ninth control example, four types of jackpots A3 to D3 are provided as jackpots of the first special symbol. Also, four types of jackpots E3 to H3 are provided as jackpot types of the second special symbol. The jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots A to D in the seventh control example, respectively, and are right-handed jackpots of 16 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds, and 16 rounds, respectively. That is, it is a jackpot where the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in rounds other than the first round of jackpot. In the right-handed big hit, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened from the second round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a right ball cannot be obtained by winning the right specific winning opening 657a unless right-handed. Therefore, as in the seventh control example, by making a right-hand hit during a big hit, a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13 and the end of the big hit In some cases, the reserve ball of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous can be stored up to the upper limit. Therefore, after the end of jackpots A3 to C3 and E3, it is possible to shift to the door breakthrough mode in the same manner as after the jackpots A to D in the seventh control example. As a result, after the jackpots A3 to D3 and E3 are finished, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows a game to be played in the hope that it will not be a jackpot in the special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. it can.

  On the other hand, the jackpot D3, H3 is a left-handed jackpot with 16 rounds, and the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds. If you hit a left-handed jackpot, you can get a prize ball simply by making a left-handed hit during the jackpot. That is, there is no need to make a right-hand hit that may cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that after the big hit, the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous (that is, the probability variation state is given). (It is difficult) There is no possibility of being a big hit (it goes directly to the probability change mode without going through the door break mode). Therefore, when it becomes the big hit type (big hit D3, H3) in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds, the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  The jackpots F3 and G3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots E and F in the seventh control example, and are jackpot types in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, in each jackpot round, it is a jackpot type in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened only for 0.2 seconds. Since the right variable winning device 657 is not provided with the probability changing switch 65e3, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from passing through the probability changing switch 65e3 when the jackpot F3 or G3 is reached. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol can be made more disadvantageous. In addition, with the configuration in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each round when the big hit F3, G3 is reached, in the ninth control example, the right specific winning opening 657a is also displayed in the case of a small hit. It is configured to be opened. As a result, when the right specific winning opening 657a is opened, it may be difficult to identify whether the opening is due to the big hit F3 or G3 or the small hit. it can. Therefore, since it can be difficult to identify whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit from the operation of the right specific winning opening 657a, as in the seventh control example, attention is paid to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect. A game can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 663 (b), for the first special symbol, the range of “0-4” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “big hit A3” having 16 rounds. (See 202b1 in FIG. 663 (b)), and the range of “5-84” is defined in association with “big hit B3” with 5 rounds (see 202b2 in FIG. 663 (b)). ), The range of “85 to 94” is defined in association with “big jackpot C3” having two rounds (see 202b3 in FIG. 663 (b)), and the range of “95 to 99” includes rounds. “Big jackpot D3” of 16 rounds is defined in association with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 663 (b)). Since the value that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2 is 100 from “0 to 99”, the ratio that “big hit A3” is determined when the big hit of the first special symbol is 5% (5 / 100). Similarly, the rate at which “big hit B3” is determined is 80% (80/100), the rate at which “big hit C3” is determined is 10% (10/100), and “big hit D3” is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). That is, in the first special symbol lottery, the ratio of right-handed jackpot (big hit A3 to C3) is 95%, and the percentage of left-handed jackpot (big hit D3) is 5%. Since the ratio of left-handed jackpots is extremely low as compared to the ratio of right-handed jackpots, it is possible to make the player feel more satisfied when an advantageous left-handed jackpot is notified.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 663 (b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 3”, and “big hit E3” with 16 rounds is included. It is defined in association with each other (see 202b5 in FIG. 663 (b)), and “big hit F3” having 7 rounds is defined in association with the range of “4 to 48” (in FIG. 663 (b)). 202b6), “49-98” is defined in association with “big hit G3” with 6 rounds (see 202b7 in FIG. 663 (b)), and “99” has the number of rounds. 16 rounds of “big hit H3” are defined in association with each other (see 202b8 in FIG. 663 (b)). Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is reached, the ratio at which “Big Jack E3” is determined is 4% (4/100), and the ratio at which “Big Jack F3” is determined is 45% (45/100) The ratio at which “big hit G3” is determined is 50% (50/100), and the ratio at which “big hit H3” is determined is 1% (1/100). That is, when the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit (any one of the big hits F3 and G3) to which the probability variation state is difficult to be given is 95%. Therefore, if the second special symbol is a big hit during the door breakthrough mode, the mode is shifted to the normal mode at a very high rate (95%). In addition, the ratio of winning jackpots 656a to which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened (a probable change state is given after jackpot) is 5%, of which 4% is right-handed jackpot (jackpot E3) and 1% is left-handed jackpot ( Big hit H3). Therefore, if the player wins a left-hand jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, it can make the player feel very lucky, so that the player can feel greater joy. .

  In the ninth control example, the promotion effect may be executed even when the jackpot is E3 or H3. Since both jackpots E3 and H3 are 16 round jackpots, the jackpot is E3 and H3. When the promotion effect is executed, the effect that the main symbols simulating odd numbers other than “7” in the variable display are executed. After that, an effect of whether or not to promote to a main symbol imitating “7” is executed in the promotion effect. The jackpot H3 is a rare jackpot type that can only be selected at a rate of 1% in the jackpot of the second special symbol, but the possibility of jackpots F3 and G3 accounting for 95% at the stage when the jackpot is announced is excluded Is done. That is, at the time when the jackpot is notified in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined that the allocation is 4% jackpot E3 or the allocation is 1% jackpot H3. Therefore, since the jackpot H3 is 1/5, it is possible to make the player recognize that this is the most advantageous jackpot chance. Furthermore, as described above, since the promotion effect is set so that the rate of execution when the promotion is successful is higher, the jackpot is notified by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the promotion effect is developed. In this case, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot H3 can be further increased. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the details of the open scenario selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The open scenario selection table 202e includes, for each jackpot type, as a release scenario, the type of a specific winning opening to be released in each round of jackpot (one of the left specific winning opening 656a and the right specific winning opening 657a), and an opening period ( This is a data table that defines a long release for a maximum of 30 seconds or a short release for a maximum of 0.2 seconds. In the case of winning the jackpot, the release scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read from the release scenario selection table 202e and stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba described later. Then, during the jackpot, the opening operation for each round is set according to the scenario defined in the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

  As shown in FIG. 664 (a), as the open scenario corresponding to the jackpot types “jackpot A3” to “jackpot C3” and “jackpot E3” (that is, right-handed jackpot), the left specific winning for the first round The long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the mouth 656a is defined in association with each other, and the long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the right specific winning opening 657a is defined in association with each round after the second round (see FIG. 664 (a) 202e1). As a result, in the case of a right-handed big hit, the left specific winning port 656a is opened only in the first round, and the right specific winning port 657a is opened in each round after the second round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, the player cannot obtain a winning ball unless he / she hits the right specific winning hole 657a by right-handed and plays a big hit game, so the second winning hole provided on the right side of the game board 13 A large number of balls enter 640 during the big hit. Therefore, since the holding ball of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit value at the end of the right-handed jackpot, the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is continuously executed after the jackpot ends. Mode "can be set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a game is played in the hope that it will continue to be out of the lottery of the second special symbol after the jackpot ends.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 664 (a), as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type “big jackpot D3” and “big jackpot H3” (that is, left-handed jackpot), the length of the left specific winning opening 656a for all rounds. Opening (maximum 30 seconds) is defined in association with it (see 202e2 in FIG. 664 (a)). Thereby, in the left-handed big hit, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained only by making a left-hand strike aiming at the left specific winning opening 656a in all rounds. That is, since it is not necessary to make a right-hand hit during the big hit, there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, in many cases, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous at the end of the jackpot will be zero, and the most advantageous directly without going through the “door breakthrough mode” after the jackpot ends It is possible to shift to the “probability change mode”. Thereby, when it is left-handed jackpot, the player can have greater satisfaction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 664 (a), as an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type “big hit F3” and “big hit G3”, the right specific winning opening 657a is shortly opened (up to 0.2 seconds for all rounds). ) Are defined in association with each other (see 202e3 in FIG. 664 (a)). As a result, in the case of “big hit F3” and “big hit G3”, it is almost impossible to obtain a winning ball, and the ball passes into the left specific winning opening 656a and passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. There is no possibility of doing. In other words, it is possible to form an unfavorable jackpot without obtaining a winning ball and without being given a certain change state after the jackpot.

  As described above, in the ninth control example, by setting the release operation in accordance with the release scenario defined in the release scenario selection table 202e, the same release operation can be accurately set every time in all jackpot types. Can do.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 664 (b). FIG. 664 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 664 (b), the RAM 203 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 590) in that an open scenario storage area 203ba is added. ing. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the seventh control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The open scenario storage area 203ba is a storage area for storing (storing) the open scenario when a win is won and an open scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the open scenario selection table 202e. It is. At the start of each round in the jackpot, according to the open scenario stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba and the number of rounds of the new round, the type of the specific winning opening to be released (left specific winning slot 656a, right specific winning prize Any of the mouths 657a) and the open period (either long open for a maximum of 30 seconds or short open for a maximum of 0.2 seconds).

  Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 665 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 665 (a), the ROM 222 of the ninth control example has a promotion effect lottery table 222b added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 592 (a)). Is different. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the seventh control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Details of the promotion effect lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. The promotion effect lottery table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery). For each jackpot type, a random value (determination of the effect lottery counter 223j) that is determined to execute the promotion effect is determined. Value) ranges are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 665 (b), “0-49” is defined in association with “big hit A3” as the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j (FIG. 665). (See 222b1 of (b)). Although details will be described later, the effect lottery counter 223j is configured as a random number counter that generates a value in the range of “0 to 99”, and can take 100 values of “0 to 99”. Therefore, when the “big hit A3” is reached, the rate at which the promotion effect is determined is 50% (50/100). When the jackpot A3 (16 rounds of right-handed jackpot) was determined and the promotion effect was determined, an effect was performed in which three main symbols (third symbol) imitating the same number in the variable display were aligned. After that, an effect that promotes to a main symbol imitating the same odd number other than “7” in the promotion effect in jackpot is executed, and it is notified that it is a 16-round right-handed jackpot. On the other hand, when the promotion effect is not determined, an effect in which main symbols imitating odd numbers other than “7” are executed in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion effect is not executed during the jackpot, and the normal jackpot effect (see FIG. 580) is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 665 (b), “0-19” is associated with “big hit B3”, “big hit C3”, and “big hit E3” as the value range of the production lottery counter 223j. (See 222b2 in FIG. 665 (b)). Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223j, 20 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so “big hit B3”, “big hit C3” The ratio of the promotion effect to be determined when either of the jackpots E3 and the “big hit E3” is 20% (20/100). When the promotion effect is determined by the “Special Jackpot B3” (5 rounds, right-handed jackpot) or “Big Jack C3” (two rounds, right-handed jackpot) in the first special symbol drawing, After an effect in which three main symbols simulating the same number are executed, an effect in which the promotion fails in the promotion effect at the jackpot is executed. If the promotion effect is not determined, an effect in which the main symbols simulating even numbers in the variable display effect are executed, and then the normal jackpot effect without developing into the promotion effect (see FIG. 580). Is executed.

  Also, when the promotion effect is determined by the “Special Jackpot E3” (16 round right-handed jackpot) in the second special symbol lottery, the main number simulating the same odd number other than “7” in the variable display After the effect that three symbols are arranged, the effect that the promotion fails is executed by the promotion effect that is executed during the jackpot. If the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect that the main symbols imitating the same odd number other than “7” are displayed in the variable display is executed, it does not develop into the promotion effect, and the normal jackpot An effect (see FIG. 580) is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 665 (b), for “big hit D3” and “big hit H3” (16 rounds left-handed big hit), the value range of the production lottery counter 223j is “0 to 79”. Are defined in association with each other (see 222b3 in FIG. 665 (b)). Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223j, 80 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion effect are defined, so “big hit D3” or “big hit H3” ”Is 80% (80/100). When the promotion effect is determined with the first special symbol lottery, the promotion is determined, and after the effect that three main symbols imitating the same number of the same number are displayed on the variable display, the promotion on the jackpot An effect that promotes to a main symbol that imitates the number “7” in the effect is executed, and it is notified that it is a 16-round left-handed jackpot. In addition, when the promotion effect is determined by the “special bonus H3” in the second special symbol lottery, the effect that three main symbols imitating the same odd number other than “7” in the variable display is executed. After that, an effect of promoting to the main symbol imitating the number “7” is executed in the promotion effect of jackpot, and it is notified that it is a 16-round left-handed jackpot. When the promotion effect is not determined, an effect in which main symbols imitating the number “7” are arranged in the variable display effect is executed. In this case, the promotion effect is not executed during the jackpot, and the normal jackpot effect is executed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the block diagram in FIG. As shown in FIG. 665 (c), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 592 (b)), and the promotion lottery counter 223j. The difference is that a performance flag 223k is added. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the seventh control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used for effect type lottery, such as determination of whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery). This production lottery counter 223j. The value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. When the promotion effect is lottery, it is determined whether any of the random values (counter values) defined in the promotion effect lottery table 222b matches the value of the effect lottery counter 223j. If the values match, the promotion effect is determined. Execution is determined.

  The promotion effect flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not a promotion effect is set. When the promotion effect flag 223k is on, it indicates that the promotion effect is set, and when it is off, it indicates that the promotion effect is not set. The promotion effect flag 223k is set to ON when the promotion effect execution lottery executed at the start of the variation of the third symbol is won when the special symbol lottery becomes one of the big hits A to E, G. (Refer to S5405 in FIG. 675). In addition, it is set to OFF after the end of the promotion effect is set (see S4515 in FIG. 673).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Ninth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 666 to 669. First, the details of the special symbol variation process 3 (S121) in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 666. This special symbol variation process 3 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example.

  Of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 666) in the ninth control example, in each process of S201 to S221, each of the processes of S201 to S221 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example, respectively. The same process is executed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 666) in the ninth control example, when the process of S219 ends, the release for selecting the release scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type from the release scenario selection table 202e. A scenario selection process (S241) is executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of the open scenario selection process (S241) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 667 is a flowchart showing the above-described open scenario selection process (S241). In the release scenario selection process (S241), first, the release scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 664 (a)) is read (S1901), and the release scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified (S1902). Next, the specified open scenario is stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba (S1903), and this process is terminated.

  With the release scenario specified in this release scenario selection process (see FIG. 667) and stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba, the release operation of each round of big hit can be set to an appropriate operation according to the jackpot type. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 668, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) will be described. The jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609) in the seventh control example, and is a process for controlling the opening operation during the jackpot.

  Of the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 668) in the ninth control example, in the processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1112, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609) in the seventh control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S1107-S1112 is performed. In the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 668) in the ninth control example, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the seventh control example Instead of (see FIG. 610), the jackpot operation setting process 3 is executed (S1131), and the process ends. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 669 is a flowchart illustrating the jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131). The jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the number of jackpot rounds. Of the jackpot control process 3 (S1131) in the ninth control example, the processes of S1202 to S1204 are the same processes as the processes of S1202 to S1204 of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 610) in the seventh control example, respectively. Is executed.

  When the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 669) in the ninth control example is executed, first, the open scenario data stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba is read (S1211), and the read data is read out. Based on the above, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in the current round (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) and the opening time are specified (S1212). Next, the opening of the specific winning port (the left specific winning port 656a or the right specific winning port 657a) specified in the process of S1212 is set (S1213), and the opening time specified in the process of S1212 is started this time. The round time is set as a round time (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1202.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 669), the opening operation can be accurately set for each round according to the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Ninth Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 670, the jackpot related process 3 (S4221) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The jackpot related process 3 (S4221) is a process executed instead of the jackpot related process (see FIG. 620) in the seventh control example.

  Of the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 670) in the ninth control example, the processes of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are respectively the jackpot related process (see FIG. 620) in the seventh control example. The same processes as those in S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are executed.

  In the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 670) in the ninth control example, if it is determined that the opening command is received in the process of S4401 (S4401: Yes), then, whether or not a promotion effect is set. The opening command process for setting the corresponding opening effect is executed (S4411), and the process is terminated. Details of the opening command process (S4411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 670) in the ninth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4403 that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include a round number command (S4403: Next, it is determined whether or not a winning command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4412). In the process of S4412, when it is determined that a winning command is included (S4412: Yes), a specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 656a, or in a manner depending on whether or not the promotion effect is being executed) The winning command process for setting the winning effect when the winning for the right specific winning opening 657a) is detected is executed (S4413), and this process is terminated. Details of the winning command processing (S4413) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that no winning command is included (S4412: No), the process proceeds to S4405.

  In the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 670) in the ninth control example, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that a close command has been received (S4405: Yes), the close command process (see FIG. Instead of this, the closing command process 3 is executed (S4414), and this process is terminated. Details of the closing command process 3 (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 671, details of the above-described opening command process (S4411) will be described. FIG. 671 is a flowchart showing the opening command process (S4411).

  In this opening command process (see FIG. 671), first, it is determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5201). If it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5201: Yes), An opening effect (see FIG. 661 (a)) corresponding to the promotion effect is determined (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5204. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the promotion effect flag 223k is off (S5201: No), the opening effect of the aspect corresponding to the current jackpot type is determined (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Transition. In addition, the aspect according to jackpot type is the effect of the aspect as if the door breakthrough mode effect is continuing in the case of jackpot F3, G3. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type other than jackpot F3 or G3, the effect is an aspect in which it is notified that the jackpot has been won.

  In the process of S5204, a display opening command indicating the aspect of the opening effect determined in the process of S5202 or S5203 is set (S5204), and this process ends. By executing this opening command process, it is possible to execute an opening effect in an appropriate manner depending on whether or not a promotion effect is set.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 672, the details of the above-described winning command process (S4413) will be described. When the winning command process (S4413) is executed, it is first determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5301). If it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S5301: Yes) ), The artillery effect (see FIG. 661 (b)) of performing artillery on the main symbol with the cannon 815 is executed (S5302), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the promotion effect flag 223k is off (S5301: No), a normal winning effect is set (S5303), and the process ends. The winning effect in the normal mode indicates an effect suggesting the acquisition of a prize ball. For example, an effect of acquiring gold coins or an effect of displaying “GET” is executed.

  By executing this winning command process (see FIG. 672), each time the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a in the round of jackpot where the promotion effect is set, the main symbol is staged by the shelling effect. Can be hidden with smoke images. By performing an effect that hides the main symbol and does not know whether or not to be promoted, the player's expectation for promotion can be further enhanced.

  In the ninth control example, the notification of whether or not to promote is executed in the interval period after the end of one round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the result, and if the lottery is won, one round end condition (seven or more balls win Or 30 seconds have passed), the result may be notified. Further, for example, when the execution of the promotion effect is determined, it may be determined by lottery in addition to how many times the left specific winning opening 656a is notified of the result of the promotion effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect the promotion to be notified every time the ball wins the left specific winning opening 656a, so the game in the first round of the jackpot where the promotion effect is set Can improve the interests of the elderly. Further, in a case where the result of the promotion effect can be notified even if the end condition of the first round is not satisfied, the result may be notified before the end condition is satisfied only when the promotion is promoted. . That is, if the promotion fails, the promotion failure is always notified in the interval period after the end of the first round. On the other hand, if the promotion is successful, the left specific winning a prize mouth at a predetermined rate. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports by the number of winnings less than the upper limit number of winnings with respect to 656a. With this configuration, when the promotion fails while expecting the promotion to be notified every time the left specific winning opening 656a is won, the expectation for the promotion is longer (until the end of one round). Can be sustained.

  Next, details of the closing command process 3 (S4414) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 673. This close command process 3 (S4414) is a process executed in place of the close command process (see FIG. 621) in the seventh control example, as described above.

  Of the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 673) in the ninth control example, the processes in S4502 to S4505 are the same as the processes in S4502 to S4505 in the closing command process (see FIG. 621) in the seventh control example, respectively. Processing is executed.

  Further, when the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 673) in the ninth control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S4511). In the process of S4511, when it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is on (S4511: Yes), it means that the end condition of the first round of jackpot in which the promotion effect is set is established. That is, since it means the timing for notifying the result of the promotion effect, it is next determined whether the jackpot being executed is any one of jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512). In the process of S4512, when it is determined that none of the jackpot B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: No), the jackpot type for which the promotion effect is set this time is the jackpot A3, D3, or H3. means. In other words, since it means a jackpot type that succeeds in promotion, in this case, an interval effect (see FIG. 662 (b)) in which the promotion is notified is set (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4515. To do.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4512, when it is determined that the big hit being executed is any of the big hits B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: Yes), it means that it is a big hit type that fails to be promoted. An interval effect is set in a manner of notifying the promotion failure (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the promotion effect is set by turning off the promotion effect flag 223k (S4515), and this process ends.

  Further, in the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 673) in the ninth control example, if it is determined in the process of S4511 that the promotion effect in-progress flag 223k is off (S4511: No), then the big hit being executed Whether or not is a big hit F3 or G3 is determined (S4516). In the process of S4516, when it is determined that the big hit being executed is either the big hit F3 or G3 (S4516: Yes), the process proceeds to S4502. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4516 that the big hit being executed is neither the big hit F3 nor G3 (S4516: No), an interval effect in a mode corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S4517), and this process Exit.

  By executing the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 673), when the promotion effect end condition is satisfied (the end timing of one round is reached), the result of an appropriate mode is notified according to the jackpot type. be able to.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG. 674. This variation display setting process 3 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 624) in the seventh control example. Of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) in the ninth control example, the processes of S4801 to S4809 are the same as the processes of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 624) in the seventh control example, respectively. Processing is executed.

  Further, in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 673) in the ninth control example, when the process of S4803 ends, a promotion effect lottery process for determining (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be executed is executed (S4821). ), The process proceeds to S4804. Details of this promotion effect lottery process (S4821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 675), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for notifying which of jackpots A3 to E3 or H3 (S5401), and the jackpots A3 to H3 and E3 are determined. If it is determined that the change pattern is not a notification pattern (that is, it is out of place or a jackpot F3 or G3) (S5401: No), there is no possibility of executing a promotion effect. Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the change pattern is one of the big hits A3 to E3 and H3 (S5401: Yes), a process for lottery of execution of the promotion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the promotion effect lottery table 222b is read (S5402), and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is set within the range of the counter value (random value) corresponding to the type of jackpot of this time in the read table. It is determined (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be executed by determining whether there is a matching value (S5403). And it is discriminate | determined whether execution of a promotion effect was determined by determination (lottery) by the process of S5403 (S5404).

  In the process of S5404, when it is determined that the execution of the promotion effect has not been determined (S5404: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5404 that the execution of the promotion effect is determined (S5404: Yes), the promotion effect execution flag 223k is set to ON to indicate the execution of the promotion effect (S5405). It is discriminated whether the jackpot type is either jackpot E3 or H3 (S5406).

  In the process of S5406, if it is determined that neither the jackpot E3 nor H3 (S5406: No), it means that the promotion of the promotion effect has been decided as a jackpot of the first special symbol, so The three symbols are set as the stop symbols at the time of the fluctuation stop (S5407), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, if it is determined that it is one of the jackpots E3, H3 (S5406: Yes), it means that the execution of the promotion effect is decided as a jackpot of the second special symbol, A third symbol imitating an odd number other than “7” is set as a stop symbol at the time of variable stop (S5408), and this process is terminated.

  With this promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 675), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the promotion effect (lottery) and to set a stop symbol when the promotion effect is won.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, if the left hand is made, the ball can enter (easy to enter), and if the right hand is made, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). The left specific winning opening 656a and the right specific winning opening 657a that the ball can enter (easy to enter) if left-handed and the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) if left-handed. Two types of specific winning openings are provided. When a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a during the big hit, the special ball has a special symbol after the big win because the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 inside the left variable winning device 656 in addition to the payout of the winning ball. The probability variation state is given. On the other hand, when a ball enters the right specific winning opening 657a, the same number of prize balls as the case where the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a is paid out, but the gaming state set after the big hit Will not be affected. Further, in the ninth control example, as the type of jackpot, only the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds. The right specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in the other rounds (the right specific winning opening 657a is easily opened). In the second and subsequent rounds, it is configured to provide a jackpot that makes it easier to acquire more prize balls if the player makes a right strike than a left strike. With left-handed jackpots, there is no need to hit the right during the jackpot (there is less chance of making a right-handed hit), so it is difficult to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot, whereas with a right-handed jackpot, 2 Since the winning ball cannot be obtained unless it is made right-hand after the round, it becomes easy to accumulate the reserved ball of the second special symbol during the big hit. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, it is difficult to execute the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends (the possibility that the jackpot of the second special symbol is held at the end of the jackpot is reduced) ) On the other hand, if it is a right-handed jackpot, it will be easier for the second special symbol lottery to be executed after the jackpot ends (the possibility of the second special symbol jackpot being held at the end of the jackpot) Is higher than left-handed jackpot). Thereby, after the end of the left-handed jackpot, the game can be performed with confidence until the next jackpot is reached. On the other hand, after the right-handed jackpot is over, the game can be played with the expectation that no big hit will be made until all disadvantageous second special symbols based on the second special symbol hold ball are finished. As described above, in the ninth control example, the gameability after the jackpot can be switched according to the jackpot type, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition to the number of rounds for jackpots and the gaming state set after jackpot, the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery after jackpots (the ease of holding a retreat within the hold) must be varied according to the jackpot type. Can do. Thereby, the difference of the advantageous degree for every jackpot type can be enlarged more. Therefore, when the most advantageous left-handed jackpot is achieved, the player can have greater satisfaction.

  In the ninth control example, the promotion effect can be executed from the jackpot opening period to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing the probability change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 and the probability variation state is established, attention can be paid to the result of the promotion effect, so the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Later, you can focus on the production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the jackpot is simply a work for obtaining a prize ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot.

  In the ninth control example, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round of jackpot for both right-handed jackpots and left-handed jackpots. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the round in which the left specific winning opening 656a is opened and the number of times may be arbitrarily determined. When the right specific winning opening 656a is opened in rounds other than the first round in the right-handed big hit, the first round starts by opening the right specific winning opening 657a in the first round. The jackpot type will be known at that time. Therefore, the promotion effect may be executed during the opening period while the jackpot type is unknown.

  In the ninth control example, two variable winning devices, a left variable winning device 656 and a right variable winning device 657, are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13, respectively. A variable winning device may be provided only on the right side of the board 13. And it is good also as a structure which provides the storage valve 63a upstream of the 2nd entrance 640 similarly to the modification of the 8th control example mentioned above. Then, instead of providing a left-handed jackpot and a right-handed jackpot, the storage state of the storage valve 63a is maintained during the jackpot (that is, the ball reaches the second entrance 640 even if the right-hand hit is made during the jackpot. It is good also as a structure which provides the jackpot type which is not possible and a jackpot type which a storage state is cancelled | released (that is, if a right-hand hit is made during a jackpot, a ball can reach | attain the 2nd entrance 640). With this configuration, the number of variable winning devices can be reduced, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the ninth control example, the promotion effect is configured to execute the effect of bombarding the third symbol with the cannon 815. However, the promotion aspect of the promotion effect is not limited to this. Any effect may be set as long as it is an effect that makes it easy to inform the player of the two types of modes of successful promotion and unsuccessful modes. For example, the adventure displayed during the door breakthrough mode effect The player 811 may perform an effect of promoting the symbol by attacking the third symbol. Further, the promotion effect is not limited to the effect of promoting the third symbol. For example, the adventurer 811 and the enemy may perform a battle without displaying the third symbol, and the left hit jackpot may be notified by winning the enemy. Thereby, the freedom degree of production can be raised more.

  In the ninth control example, the timing for notifying the result of the promotion effect is set to the end timing of the first round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports the result of a promotion effect in response to a predetermined number (for example, five) of balls having won in the left specific winning opening 656a. In addition, the number of winning prizes that trigger the result notification need not be fixed, and may be determined by lottery, for example. In this case, it is possible to set a winning number with a high ratio selected in the case of a left-handed big hit or a winning number with a high ratio selected in the case of a right-handed big hit. By configuring in this way, it is left specific for a player who wants to detect the jackpot type (whether left-handed jackpot or right-handed jackpot) at an early stage according to the timing when the result of the promotion effect is notified. A game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls that have won (entered) a winning opening 656a. Therefore, the player's interest in the first round of jackpot can be further improved.

  In the ninth control example, it is configured to determine whether or not a promotion effect is executed by lottery when a big hit is made. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to always execute a promotion effect. Thereby, since the lottery process of the promotion effect can be omitted, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Also, for example, when a right-handed jackpot is made, the promotion effect is always executed in a manner in which the promotion fails, and when left-handed jackpot, the number “7” is displayed in the variable display effect by lottery To determine whether to display the 3rd symbol imitating the number, or to display the main symbol imitating an even number once, and to promote to the 3rd symbol imitating the number “7” by promotion effect It is good. By configuring in this way, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, it is possible to play a jackpot game in anticipation of promotion every time. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which carries out the fixed display of the 3rd symbol corresponding to a jackpot type by a variable display effect without performing a promotion effect in all jackpot types. Thereby, since an arbitrary effect can be executed in the jackpot opening period or the first round, the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased.

  In the ninth control example, when the first special symbol is drawn and left-handed jackpot, and the promotion effect is executed, the variable display effect always displays the third symbol imitating an even number. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol imitating an odd number other than “7” may be fixedly displayed and promoted to a main symbol imitating the number “7” by a promotion effect. Further, in the ninth control example, the promotion effect is configured to be executed over one round of jackpot from the jackpot opening period, but is not limited thereto. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a promotion effect within the fluctuation | variation period of the variable display effect which alert | reports jackpot, and it is good also as a structure which performs a promotion effect over a fluctuation period and a jackpot opening period.

  In the ninth control example, the promotion effect is configured to be performed as an effect for notifying whether the left-handed jackpot or the right-handed jackpot, but there is no distinction between the left-handed jackpot and the right-handed jackpot. It is good also as a structure applied to the machine 10 (For example, the general game machine in which a probability variation jackpot and a normal jackpot exist). More specifically, for example, when it is a probable big hit, it is configured so that the third symbol imitating an even number or the third symbol imitating an odd number is fixedly displayed by a variable display effect. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the third symbol imitating an even number is displayed in a fixed manner by the variable display effect. Then, when the 3rd symbol imitating the odd number and imitating an even number is confirmed and displayed, a promotion effect for promotion to the 3rd symbol imitating an odd number may be executed thereafter. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, it may be configured to execute a promotion effect in a mode in which promotion fails at a predetermined rate. Thereby, the versatility of a promotion effect can be improved.

  In the ninth control example, the probability variation switch 65e3 is provided only inside the left variable winning device 656, and if the ball does not enter the left variable winning device 656 during a big hit, a special symbol probability changing state is given after the big hit. It was not configured. That is, even in the case of a right-handed big hit, the first round is configured to play a game by aiming to the left variable winning device 656 by left-handed, but is not limited to this. For example, a probability variation switch 65e3 may be provided inside the right variable winning device 657 as in the case of the left variable winning device 656. And when it becomes a right hit big hit, you may comprise so that only the right variable prize-winning apparatus 657 can enter a ball in all rounds. By configuring in this way, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, only the first round is left-handed to pass the ball to the probability variation switch 65e3 and win a prize ball, and in the remaining rounds, the game is stopped. It is possible to prevent the method from being performed. That is, for the purpose of avoiding the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the right hit big hit, the ball is launched only in the round (first round) in which the left specific winning entrance 656a can enter. An irregular game method can be suppressed. When this irregular game method is executed, there are few prize balls for right-handed jackpots (only one round can be obtained), but the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is not executed, so It will not fall into mode. Therefore, there is a possibility that the probabilistic state continues semipermanently and gives an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. On the other hand, in the right-handed big hit, by adopting a configuration in which only the right variable winning device 657 is set to be able to enter a ball, the above-described irregular gaming method can be made fundamentally ineffective. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall.

  In the ninth control example, depending on the type of jackpot, by changing the easiness of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, among the held balls held at the end of the jackpot The possibility that jackpots are included (so-called “reserved in-range resorts” may occur) is variable. In other words, by changing the direction in which a prize ball can be obtained by firing a ball according to the type of jackpot, the possibility of the occurrence of a reserved villa is physically different. It is not something that can be done. For example, it is good also as a structure which makes controllable the ease of generation | occurrence | production of a pending | holding consecutive resort. More specifically, for example, in the same way as in the seventh control example, only a right side of the game board 13 is provided with a specific winning opening for winning a winning ball during the big hit, The number of lotteries to be made may differ depending on the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot with one lottery to be in a promiscuous state and a jackpot with four times are provided). By configuring in this way, in the case of a jackpot type in which the number of lotteries to be in a probable state is one, the probability of winning a jackpot in the second and subsequent special symbol lottery is reduced, so even the first lottery is missed. Then, there is a high possibility that all lotteries based on the holding ball will be missed. On the other hand, when the number of lottery times in which the probability change state is four, all the lotteries based on the second special symbol hold ball are executed in the special symbol probability change state, and are therefore held at the end of the jackpot. There is a high probability that a lottery based on the holding ball will be a big hit. Therefore, the operation similar to the ninth control example described above can be realized with only one variable winning device. In addition, when it is set as the structure which complete | finishes a probability change state by the number of lotteries predetermined according to jackpot classification like this modification, for example, all the lotteries based on the holding ball of the 2nd special symbol will be removed. As a benefit in the case of normal, it may be configured so as to be in a short time state of a normal symbol. In other words, the number of lotteries in which the special symbol is prone to change is different from the number of lotteries in which the normal symbol is in the short-time state, and, for example, 100 special symbols are drawn regardless of the number of lotteries in which the special symbol is prone to change. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may become a short state of a normal symbol until it complete | finishes. In this case, as a more advantageous jackpot type, a jackpot type may be provided in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given and only the short-time state is given. By configuring in this way, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot can be performed in a low probability state of all the special symbols, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is all out The possibility of becoming can be further increased.

  In the ninth control example, a jackpot type that is easy to store the second special symbol holding ball during the jackpot and a jackpot type that is difficult to store is provided, and the jackpot is held again at the end of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by configuring a jackpot type that easily stores reserved balls of normal symbols during jackpots and a jackpot type that does not easily store reserved balls of ordinary symbols during jackpots, the number of held balls of ordinary symbols at the end of jackpot It is good also as a structure which varies the possibility that a normal symbol hit will occur after a big hit. In addition, by changing the probability of winning a normal symbol after the jackpot depending on the type of jackpot, the normal symbol will be used for a predetermined period after the jackpot ends (for example, until all the reserved balls of the normal symbol at the end of the jackpot are consumed). It is good also as a structure which changes the ratio elected in the hit according to jackpot classification. Even in such a configuration, the player's degree of advantage can be varied according to the jackpot type, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the jackpot type.

  In the ninth control example, when the promotion effect is set, the ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a in the first round, and after it is confirmed that the special symbol is in a probable state after the big hit, Each time the player enters the left specific winning opening 656a, an effect of inspiring a sense of expectation of whether or not to promote (execution effect of bombarding the third symbol) is executed, but this is not a limitation. For example, the promotion effect may be executed in the jackpot opening period. In the first round of the jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning opening 656a is opened (for example, an effect in which an image imitating the letter “V” is displayed) may be executed. Good. With this configuration, the player is unaware that the jackpot has been started, continues to see the result of the promotion effect, and fails to enter the ball into the left specific winning opening 656a (probability jackpot Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being given after the big hit). In addition, for example, in the first round of jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning opening 656a is a round to be opened is during the first round (even after the ball has entered the left specific winning opening 656a). The configuration may be such that the promotion effect is continuously executed and the promotion effect is executed after one round is completed. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to prevent a ball from being missed into the left specific winning opening 656a, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged excessively. Furthermore, no promotion effect is executed at all (that is, the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is always stopped and displayed in the variable display), and the left specific winning opening 656a is opened during the jackpot. It is good also as a structure which continues performing during the round which shows whether or not. Thereby, it can prevent more reliably that a player will make a mistake in the direction which launches a ball.

  In the ninth control example, for a pachinko machine 10 having a spec that shifts to a probabilistic state after the jackpot is completed when a ball that has entered the left variable winning device 656 passes the probability changing switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 After winning the left specific winning opening 656a in the round and confirming the probable change state, the result of the promotion effect is informed. However, the specs to which the promotion effect can be applied are not limited to this. Absent. A promotion effect can be applied if it is a spec that may shift to either a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous compared to the advantageous state at a predetermined opportunity. For example, the promotion effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having a spec that is awarded a jackpot when a ball enters a specific area inside a variable prize device provided on the game board. That is, in the lottery based on the start prize, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the ball can easily enter the variable winning device (movability of the variable winning device). Even in such a case, if the ball is entered into the variable winning device and the ball does not enter the specific area, the jackpot is not given. In this specification, the type of jackpot given when a ball enters the specific area may be notified after the ball enters the specific area and the jackpot is confirmed. More specifically, at the time of winning the lottery of whether or not the variable winning device is movable, a lottery of a jackpot type given when entering a specific area and whether or not to execute a promotion effect are drawn. Then, when a lottery for promotion effect is won, even if an advantageous jackpot type is won, a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type (for example, the same even number) is displayed. And, when the variable winning device is moved and the ball can enter the ball, the ball is inserted into the variable winning device, and when the ball is entered into the specific area, it corresponds to the original jackpot type. An effect of displaying the combination of the third symbols (for example, being promoted to the same odd number or maintained as the even number) is executed. With this configuration, even after a ball enters a specific area, it is possible to focus on the effect in the hope that an advantageous jackpot type will be notified by the promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from entering the specific area until the jackpot ends from being simply an operation for obtaining a prize ball. That is, since it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change switch 65e3 is not provided (the gaming state after the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type), the gaming state after the jackpot is configured to be notified by the promotion effect. May be. In other words, during a big hit, the player configures whether the short-time state or the probable change state is set after the big hit, and then configures the short-time state and a part when the probable state is set. Then, when the jackpot ends, the fact that the time is short is notified. And if the probability variation state is set, the promotion effect is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the probability variation state is obtained as a result of the promotion effect based on a predetermined trigger (for example, when a predetermined number of start winnings are detected). It is good also as a structure which performs the effect to promote. In addition, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot is ended and the promotion effect is executed, an effect that fails to promote to the probability change state may be executed based on a predetermined trigger. In addition, for the pachinko machine 10 in which the same opening pattern is set for the specific winning opening by the small hit and so-called “accuracy”, the fact that the small win is informed once and the winning is won May be configured to notify the advancement to a certain chance at a predetermined opportunity by the promotion effect. Furthermore, an open pattern that cannot pass through the probability change switch is once set with a jackpot type in which an open pattern that can pass through the probability change switch is set and a jackpot type in which an open pattern that cannot pass through the probability change switch is set. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports the jackpot classification and alert | reports the promotion to the jackpot classification in which the open pattern which can pass a probability change switch is set by a predetermined opportunity.

<Modification of Ninth Control Example>
Next, a modification of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 676 and 677. In the above-described ninth control example, when the jackpot with the promotion effect set is started, the promotion effect is executed over the jackpot opening period, the first round period, and the interval period. In the promotion effect, an effect is executed to promote the combination of the main symbols confirmed and displayed in the variable display effect informing the jackpot to the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the jackpot that is more advantageous for the player. If successful, the system is configured to notify that it was a more advantageous jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, a configuration in which one variable display effect is executed in a pseudo manner in the execution period of the variable display for notifying the jackpot and the period from the start of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. It was. As a result, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won, the jackpot type (whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot) in the case of the jackpot can be notified with one variation display effect.

  FIG. 676 (a) is a display that can be displayed when a special symbol lottery results in a left-handed jackpot (one of jackpots D3 and H3), and when a special symbol lottery causes a reach condition to occur. It is the figure which showed the aspect. As shown in FIG. 676 (a), in this modification, when the reach state occurs, the characters “left-handed” and the image of the left-pointing arrow are displayed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display area HR1 in which is displayed is displayed. Further, in the upper center portion of the display screen, a display area HR5 on which the characters “Lit to the left and stop the symbol!” Are displayed. With these displays, the player can easily understand that the symbol is stopped and displayed by firing the ball to the left.

  In the case of jackpot, the display mode shown in FIG. 676 (a) is set at the timing when the jackpot opening period is started. That is, in the present modification, the third symbol is not stopped and displayed even in the jackpot opening period and remains in the reach state. Under this circumstance, if the left-handed strike is not suggested, it may be delayed in the first round that the ball is fired toward the left specific winning opening 656a. If the launch to the left specific winning opening 656a is delayed, there is a possibility that the ball cannot enter during the open period of the left specific winning opening 656a (the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3), and the probability variation is a big hit. Nevertheless, there is a possibility that the probabilistic state is not given after the big hit. In order to prevent such a situation, the present modification is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 676 (a)) that suggests left-handed when the opening period starts during the execution of variable display. Further, in order to prevent (suppress) whether or not a big hit is detected from the display mode, a predetermined timing (for example, one second before the third symbol is fixedly displayed) even during execution of the deviation fluctuation display. In the configuration, an effect (see FIG. 676 (a)) suggesting left-handed is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether the game is a big hit or miss until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be maintained for a longer time.

  FIG. 676 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when all of the third symbols are stopped and displayed, which is either jackpot D3 or H3. As shown in FIG. 676 (b), the number “7” was triggered when the player left-handed during the execution of the effect suggesting left-handed and the ball entered the left specific winning opening 656a. The effect that the 3rd design (main design) imitating is arranged is executed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the player has left-handed jackpot. In addition, paying attention to the whereabouts of the launched ball (whether or not to enter the left specific winning opening 656a) by notifying the jackpot based on the ball having entered the left specific winning opening 656a A game can be performed. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. Note that if the special symbol lottery is missed and an effect that suggests a left-handed strike is performed, the left specific winning opening 656a is not opened, and the ball fired by left-handed strikes the left specific winning opening 656a. Never do. In this case, after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the effect suggesting left-handed is executed, the stop symbols of the out-of-combination combinations (combinations other than the crests) are stopped and displayed.

  In the example of FIG. 676, the case where the jackpot D3, H3 has been described as an example, but the same effect is executed even with other jackpots. That is, when the jackpot is A3 or E3, an effect in which the third symbols (main symbols) imitating odd numbers other than “7” are executed, and when the jackpot is B3 or C3, an even number An effect is produced in which the third symbols (main symbols) imitating the numbers are aligned. In addition, even when the detachment is accompanied by the reach state, the reach state may be entered with a number other than “7”.

  FIG. 677 is a diagram showing a change over time in the effect mode after the start of the variable display effect in the case where a special symbol lottery results in a big win and when the game is out of reach with a reach state. First, with reference to FIG. 677 (a), a description will be given of the change over time in the effect mode in the case of a big hit.

  FIG. 677 (a) shows the change over time in the production mode when the game is developed to super reach and the jackpot is achieved. As shown in FIG. 677 (a), when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is started, first, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds, and then the reach state occurs at the time when 10 seconds have elapsed. . Then, after a normal reach production for 20 seconds, it develops into a super reach production when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Furthermore, after the super reach effect continues for 28 seconds, an effect suggesting left-handed (left-handed navigation, see FIG. 676 (a)) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 677 (a), when the effect suggesting left-handed is displayed, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the jackpot has actually passed, and the jackpot opening period has been entered. ing. For this reason, in the 1st symbol display device 37, the change display of the 1st symbol (special symbol) ends when 58 seconds have passed from the start of the change, and the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed.

  When one second of the opening period has elapsed and the left specific winning opening 656a has been opened and a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a, the third symbol (similar to the same number in the third symbol display device 81) An effect (see FIG. 676 (b)) in which the main symbols are aligned is executed. And it is alert | reported that it was a big hit, and the production | presentation which shows that it is a big hit is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 677 (b), even when a lottery result with a reach state is reached, the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 676 (a)) is displayed after the change display is started. The production mode is common to the case of jackpot (see FIG. 677 (a)). As shown in FIG. 677 (b), in the case of detachment, the combination of the third symbol indicating detachment is stopped and displayed one second after the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 676 (a)) is displayed. It is informed that it has come off.

  As shown in FIG. 677, the variation time when the special symbol is a big hit is set to be shorter by 2 seconds than the variation time when the special symbol is lost. This is because, when an outlier fluctuation display is executed, a special symbol lottery result is notified within the execution period of the fluctuation display, whereas when a win fluctuation display is executed, This is because the variable display is executed over the opening period and the period of the first round. If the same variation time is used for jackpot and off, the timing for generating left-handed navigation will be different between the case of jackpot and off, and the lottery result will be displayed before the end of the variation production due to the difference in variation time. There is a risk of being perceived. On the other hand, in this modified example, since the variation time is longer when the player is out of the jackpot than the jackpot, the timing for displaying the left-handed navigation can be matched between the jackpot and the jackpot. Therefore, since it becomes difficult to perceive the lottery result of the special symbol from the variation time, attention can be paid to the result of the variation display effect.

  As described above, in the modified example of the ninth control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the variation period of the variation pattern, the jackpot opening period, and the period of the first round It was set as the structure which performs 1 fluctuation | variation display effects. By configuring in this way, in addition to whether or not it is a jackpot, it is possible to notify the jackpot type in one variable display effect, so that the game is played with attention by the variable display effect. Can do.

  In this modified example, when a big win is obtained in the variable display effect, it is configured to reach a reach state with a number type corresponding to the jackpot type. It is good also as a structure to draw lots. If the execution of the promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect is used by using the remaining period after the jackpot symbol is notified in the first round of jackpot and the interval period after the end of the first round. It is good also as a structure which performs. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect the promotion effect to be executed even if the third symbols with even numbers are once prepared, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  In the present modification, an image suggesting left-handedness is displayed in the upper left display area HR1 in the last two seconds of the jackpot opening period and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation, but this is not a limitation. It is not something that can be done. For example, an effect that suggests left-handedness to the player may be performed in a manner that is more conspicuous than the changing third symbol. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the above-described modified example, the letters “Aim for V !!” and the left variable prize-winning device 656 are provided on the layer on the front side of the changing third symbol. It is good also as a structure which displays the image shown typically. When a ball enters the left specific winning opening 656a (when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit), the third symbols imitating the same numbers are all displayed in a stopped display. As a background, an image imitating the letter “V” may be displayed in front of the third pattern. The display of the image imitating the character “V” may be continued until the end of one round, for example. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to see the result of the effect without launching the ball until the variable display ends. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to make the ball enter the left specific winning opening 656a more reliably in the first round. Further, for example, the changing third symbol may be displayed in a translucent manner so that the effect of suggesting left-handedness may be more conspicuous, or the third symbol may be temporarily hidden.

<10th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 678 to 684. In the seventh control example described above, if the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, it is configured to have a small hit with a high probability, the opening period of the door 65f1 in the case of a small hit, the jackpot E, The opening period of the open / close door 65f1 in each round of F is the same (0.2 seconds). Further, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol. . As a result, whether or not the jackpot E or F is included in the second special symbol holding ball that is held at the end of the jackpot, or if it is all off, until the door breakthrough mode effect ends The series of opening / closing operations of the opening / closing door 65f1 is the same.

  On the other hand, in the tenth control example, the type of jackpot that is easy for the player to detect whether the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot ends is out of place, and the type that is difficult to detect. It was set as the structure which provides jackpot. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to determine whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed, and whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has been executed. It is possible to switch between easy-to-detect gameability.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the seventh section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the seventh control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Tenth Control Example>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 678 and 679. In the ROM 202 in the tenth control example, the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b and the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed with respect to the ROM 202 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 585 (a)). Is different. Other configurations are the same as those in the seventh control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 678 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 678, in the tenth control example, five jackpot types A4 to E4 are provided as jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, three jackpot types F4 to H4 are provided as jackpot types for the second special symbol.

  The jackpots A4, B4, D4, F4 to H4 are jackpot types that perform the same operations as the jackpots A to F in the seventh control example. That is, the jackpots A4 and F4 are jackpots with 16 rounds, the jackpot B4 is a jackpot with five rounds, and the jackpot D4 is a jackpot with two rounds. When these jackpots are reached, the door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds at the maximum in each round, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the jackpot, and the balls can be easily passed to the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Can do. The jackpot G4 is a jackpot of seven rounds, and the jackpot H4 is a jackpot of six rounds. When these jackpots are reached, the open / close door 65f1 is opened only for 0.2 seconds at the maximum in each round, so that almost no prize balls can be obtained, and there is almost no possibility that the balls will pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Absent.

  The jackpot C4 has the same action as the jackpot B4 (5 rounds jackpot), but after the jackpot ends, whether the lottery of the second special symbol is off during the execution of the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol It becomes easy to distinguish. More specifically, when the jackpot C4 is reached, if the second special symbol lottery is lost after the jackpot ends, the variation time (3 seconds) differs from the jackpot G4, H4 interval period (1 second). Second) is easily selected. Therefore, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened, it can be estimated whether or not the special symbol lottery has been missed. In other words, after the jackpot, if the player feels that the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened is more than 1 second, this opening will be out of the special symbol (small hit). It is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility of opening based on the fact.

  The jackpot E4 has the same operation as the jackpot D4 (two round jackpot), but, like the jackpot C4, is a jackpot type that makes it easy to determine whether the lottery of the second special symbol is missed after the jackpot.

  As described above, in the tenth control example, when the big hit C4 or the big hit E4 is reached, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) is opened by observing the interval. It is configured to be able to guess. Thereby, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to play the game by paying attention not only to the content of the door breakthrough mode effect but also to the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1). In particular, during the execution of an aspect in which the risk of becoming a big hit of a disadvantageous second special symbol is high (the effect of opening the door 814 using the tattered key 813) When it is felt that the opening interval of the winning opening 65a exceeds 1 second, the possibility that the current variation is a variation display corresponding to the deviation is increased, so that the player can be relieved. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the big hit (big hit C4, E4) that makes it easy to guess whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big win is missed is referred to as “special hit”.

  On the other hand, if it is a big hit A4, B4, D4, F4, as in the seventh control example, whether the lottery result of the second special symbol executed after the big hit is out (small hit) or a big hit? Can not be identified from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in this tenth control example, depending on the jackpot type, whether the second special symbol hit is included or not until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed, and whether or not it has come off. Since it is possible to switch between easy-to-detect gameability during execution of the door break-through mode effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the tenth control example, the jackpot B4 and jackpot C4 are configured so that the jackpot operation (the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81) is exactly the same. Yes. Similarly, the jackpot D4 and the jackpot E4 are configured so that the operations during the jackpot are exactly the same. For this reason, when the jackpot ends in 2nd or 5th round, whether or not the game has been missed, and it is not known whether or not the 2nd special symbol hit was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect was confirmed. It is difficult to identify which is set to be easy to detect during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, even if the same period as the interval period is continuously set as the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, was the hit of the second special symbol included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect was confirmed? It is possible to make the player think that the gameability that is unknown is set. Therefore, a game can be performed in anticipation of shifting to the probability change mode until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 678, with respect to the jackpot of the first special symbol, “big jackpot A4” is defined in association with the range of the value “0-9” of the first hit type counter C2, and “10-19” ”Is defined in association with“ big jackpot B4 ”, the range“ 20 to 89 ”is defined in association with“ big jackpot C4 ”, and the range of“ 90, 91 ”is“ big jackpot ”. “D4” is defined in association with it, and “big hit E4” is defined in association with the range of “92 to 99”. That is, in the “big hit B4” and the “big hit C4” in the five round big hit, the ratio of the “big hit C4” (special hit) is selected to be higher (seven times easier to select). . In addition, the “big hit D4” and “big hit E4” of the two round big hits are configured such that the ratio of “big hit E4” (special hit) is higher (four times easier to select). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set the gameability that makes it easy to detect whether or not the door break mode effect is being performed. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, the game can be played while paying more attention to the operation of the specific winning opening 65a.

  Note that the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each of the big hits F4 to H4 is the same as the big hits D to F in the seventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 679, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 679 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 679 (a), the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the tenth control example is different from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the seventh control example (see FIG. 587 (a)). The difference is that a hitting hit table 202d8 and a special hitting loss table 202d9 are added.

  When the special win / hit table 202d8 is a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol within the range where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the special hit (big hit C4 or E4) is 4 times or less It is a data table to be referred to. Also, the special winning / losing table 202d9 is a case in which the special symbol executed after the special winning is finished falls within the second special symbol lottery within a range of 4 or less (small hit). It is a data table to be referred to. The details of the special hit / hit table 202d8 and the special hit / hit table 202d9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 679 (b) and (c).

  FIG. 679 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit / hit table 202d8. As shown in FIG. 679 (b), in the special hitting hit table 202d8, the value “0” of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with “winning middle fluctuation” having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. In the range of “1 to 198”, “winning short fluctuation” having a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined in association with each other. For this reason, if the winning of the second special symbol is a big win after the end of the special hit, the fluctuation time of 1 second is set with a high probability (198/199), but with a low probability (1/199). In some cases, a variation time of 3 seconds is set. For this reason, when the variation time of 3 seconds is set (the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a is 3 seconds), it is not determined that the lottery result is out of play (small win), but the big win There is also a possibility of becoming.

  FIG. 679 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit / loss table 202d9. As shown in FIG. 679 (c), the special hit / loss table 202d9 corresponds to the “displacement middle fluctuation” having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds with respect to the value range “0 to 66” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, a range of “67 to 198” is defined in association with “out-of-range short fluctuation” having a fluctuation time of 1 second. For this reason, if the second special symbol is lost (small hit) after the special win, a variation time of 3 seconds is set at a rate of about 34% (67/199). That is, the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a is 3 seconds or more. As described above, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol after the special win, the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected only with a very low probability, so the fluctuation time is 3 seconds ( When the player recognizes that it has exceeded 1 second), the currently displayed variation display can be considered to have a high probability of variation display corresponding to the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to realize the gameability that the possibility of shifting to the probability variation mode can be predicted from the set fluctuation time during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 680 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 680, the RAM 203 in the tenth control example has a variation counter 203ca and a special hit flag 203cb added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 590). It is different in point.

  The fluctuation number counter 203ca is a counter that counts the number of special symbol fluctuation display (special symbol lottery) executed after the big hit. The initial value of the variation counter 203ca is set to 0, and is incremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation start timing is reached (see S2001 in FIG. 682 and S2201 in FIG. 684). In addition, when a special symbol lottery is won, the initial value is reset to 0 (see S253 in FIG. 681). When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the value of the variation number counter 203ca (FIG. 683). (See S2103 and S2109).

  The special after-hit flag 203cb is a flag indicating whether or not the previous big hit was a special hit (big hit C3 or E3). If this special hit-after flag 203cb is on, it means that the previous jackpot is a special hit, and if it is off, it means that the previous jackpot is not a special hit. The special after-hit flag 203cb has an initial value set to OFF, and is updated according to the jackpot type at the start of the jackpot (see S254 in FIG. 681). When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the special after-hit flag 203cb is referred to, and one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 683). (See S2105 and S2111). In the tenth control example, the special after-hit flag 203cb is updated when the jackpot start is set. However, the special hit flag 203cb may be set at the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Tenth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 681 to 684. First, with reference to FIG. 681, the special symbol variation process 4 (S131) in the tenth control example will be described. This special symbol fluctuation process 4 (S131) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) instead of the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example.

  Among the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 681) in the tenth control example, the special symbol variation process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 600) is performed in each of the processes S201 to 212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221. ) Of S201 to 212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 are executed.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 681) in the tenth control example, when the process of S207 is completed, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol is performed. This is executed (S251), and this process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S251) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 682 and 683.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 681) in the tenth control example, when the process of S212 is completed, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed (S252), and this process is terminated. Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 684.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 681) in the tenth control example, when it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off. At the same time, the fluctuation counter 203ca is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S253). Next, the special after-hit flag 203cb is updated according to the jackpot type won this time (S254), and the process proceeds to S220. In the processing of S254, the special winning flag 203cb is set to ON when the special winning (one of the big winnings C3 or E3) is won this time, and is set to OFF when it is another big winning type. By switching the state of the special hit flag 203cb according to the jackpot type, it is possible to switch the data table to be referenced for selecting the variation pattern according to the state of the special hit flag 203cb after the big hit. Therefore, if the special after-hit flag 203cb is on, when the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is referred to the special hit / hit table 202d8 and the special hit / hit table 202d9. Therefore, the gameability is set so that it can be relatively easily inferred whether or not the winning is based on the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, if the special winning flag 203cb is off, a gameability that is difficult to identify from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set whether the second special symbol lottery executed after the big win is won or missed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 682, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S251) described above will be described. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S251) is a process for starting the fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol as described above.

  In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 682), first, 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation counter 203ca and updated (S2001), and the execution area data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired. (S2002). Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read, and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probability variation state (S2003). In this process of S2003, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is probable, and if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state. In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (S2003: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table (see FIG. 585 (b)), a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S2004). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with the first per-random number table for high probability (see FIG. 585 (b)). As described above, 40 random numbers of “0 to 39” are set as the special symbol jackpot value, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S2006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variation state (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S2003: No), the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002. And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 585 (b)) (S2005). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0 to 3”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S2006.

  And the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process for determining the fluctuation pattern of a 2nd special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S2004 or S2005 is performed (S2006). Details of this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) is finished, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S2006) is set ( S2007). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 223f (S2008). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is set (S2009), and this process ends. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 608).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 683, details of the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing (S2006) will be described. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is a process for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol as described above.

  In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big win (S2101). If it is determined that it is a big hit (S2101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation starts. Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the process (see FIG. 682), the display mode for the big hit is set (S2102). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 682) is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 678). Determine what the jackpot type is. As mentioned above, if the second special symbol is a lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is a big hit F4 (16 rounds probable big hit) If it is in the range of “5 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot is G4 (7 round normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is a jackpot H4 (6 round normal jackpot). Determination is made (see FIG. 678).

  In the processing of S2102, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit F4 to H4). In addition, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit F4 to H4) is set as the stop type.

  When the processing of S2102 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2103), and if it is 5 or more (S2103: Yes), from the variation pattern selection table 202d, it is The table 202d5 (5 fluctuations or more) is read (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2103 that the value of the variation counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2103: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is on (S2105), and the special hit flag is determined. If 203cb is on (S2105: Yes), the special hit table 202d8 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2114. If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the special hit flag 203cb is off (S2105: No), the special pattern 2 per table (not more than 4 fluctuations) 202d4 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d ( (S2107), the process proceeds to S2114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the current special symbol lottery result is out (S2101: No), first, the display mode at the time of out is set (S2108). In the process of S2108, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2109). If it is determined that it is 5 or more (S2109: Yes), the variation pattern selection table 202d is out of the special figure 2 (5 variations or more). ) Table 202d7 is read (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2114. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2109: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is on (S2111), and the special hit If the flag 203cb is on (S2111: Yes), the special hit / loss table 202d9 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2112), and the process proceeds to S2114. If it is determined in the process of S2111 that the special after-hit flag 203cb is off (S2111: No), the special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2113). ), The process proceeds to S2114.

  In the process of S2114, the lottery result of this special symbol is obtained based on the data table read by any of the processes of S2104, S2106, S2107, S2110, S2112 and S2113 and the value of the variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation pattern to be shown is determined (S2114), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 684, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) described above will be described. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) is a process for starting the fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol as described above.

  Among the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 684), in the processes of S2201 to S2205 and S2214 to S2216, S2001 to S2005 and S2007 to the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 682) described above, respectively. The same processes as those in S2009 are executed.

  In the special figure 1 variation start process (see FIG. 684), when the process of S2204 or S2205 is completed, it is then determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired in the process of S2204 or S2205 is a big hit ( If it is determined that it is a big hit (S2206: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 (S2207). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 678) to determine what the big hit type is. As described above, if the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 9”, it is a big hit A4 (16 rounds probable big hit) If it is determined that it is in the range of “10 to 19”, it is determined that the jackpot is B4 (5-round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “20 to 89”, it is a jackpot C4 (5 rounds probability variation jackpot). If it is within the range of “90, 91”, it is determined that the jackpot is D4 (2-round probability variation jackpot), and if it is within the range of “92 to 99”, it is a jackpot E4 (2-round probability variation jackpot). Determination is made (see FIG. 678).

  In the process of S2207, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A4 to E4). In addition, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A4 to E4) is set as the stop type. When the processing of S2207 ends, the special chart 1 table 202d1 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2208), and the process proceeds to S2213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is out (S2206: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S2209). In the processing of S2209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the probability variation flag 203g whether the special symbol is in a certain variation state (S2210). If it is determined that the certain symbol variation state is in effect (S2210: Yes), the variation pattern selection table 202d is out of the special pattern 1. The (probability change) table 202d3 is read (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2210 that the special symbol is not in the state of certainty change (S2210: No), the special figure 1 off (normal) table 202d2 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2212), The process proceeds to S2213.

  In the process of S2213, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the data table read by any of the processes of S2208, S2211, or S2212, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S2213), and the process proceeds to S2214. To do.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example, the type of jackpot that allows the player to easily detect whether or not the result of the variation display of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot is ended, It is configured to provide a jackpot of a type that is difficult to detect. More specifically, if the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot is out of play, the jackpot type (special hit) in which the variation time of a period different from the jackpot interval period of the second special symbol is easily selected And a jackpot type that is difficult to select. Thereby, after the end of the special win, the player can guess whether or not the lottery result is out of focus by paying attention to the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1. That is, it is possible to cause the player to predict the possibility of shifting to the probability change mode before the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is notified. On the other hand, after the big hit other than the special hit is completed, it is determined from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 whether the opening / closing operation is due to continuous small hits or the opening / closing operation is due to the big hit G4 or H4. It becomes difficult. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to determine whether or not the second special symbol hit is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed, and whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has been executed. It is possible to switch between easy-to-detect gameability. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the tenth control example, when the second special symbol after special win is lost (small hit), it is longer than the big special interval interval (1 second) of the second special symbol (3 seconds). However, the fluctuation time (that is, the interval until the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened when it comes off) is limited to this. It is not a thing. It may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the player can determine that a period different from the interval period is set. For example, a variation time of 0.1 seconds may be easily set. With this configuration, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed at an apparently short interval, so it is highly likely that the opening / closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 for the player is a small hit. Can be thought of. Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1. In addition to the opening / closing door 65f1, a variable member capable of variable operation is provided, and depending on whether the variable member is operated after a special hit or a big hit other than a special hit. It is good also as a structure made to differ.

  In the present tenth control example, the pachinko machine 10 that is disadvantageous for the player when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery was premised. However, if the player wins a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, You may apply with respect to the pachinko machine 10 which becomes advantageous. By configuring in this way, after the jackpot ends, as the number of times the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened at intervals of 1 second continues, the expectation that an advantageous second special symbol jackpot will be increased. It is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1.

  In the tenth control example, a configuration in which a jackpot type that is likely to be different between a case where the variable operation mode of the open / close door 65f1 after the jackpot ends is different from a case of a jackpot and a jackpot type that is likely to be the same variable operation is provided. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which provides the jackpot type which is easy to be different in the aspect of the production performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the case of losing, and the case of jackpot, and the jackpot type which is easy to correspond. Also, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, if the special symbol lottery is missed, the probability of winning a small hit (that is, the door 65f1 will be unlocked for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds)) is different. It is good also as a structure to allow. Thereby, a game can be performed in anticipation that the opening / closing door 65f1 will not be opened (that is, it will be detached).

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 685 to 711. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, the variable prize winning device 65 is provided with the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, and the probability changing switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided during the jackpot. When the ball passes, the game state after the big hit is set to a probability variation mode (a special symbol probability variation state and a normal symbol time-short state) advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, instead of the variable winning device 65, a V winning device 670 having the same appearance and internal structure as the variable winning device 65 and having different functions is provided. ing. In the V winning device 670, when a special symbol lottery is made, the open / close door 670f1 is opened, and a game ball can enter. Inside the V winning device 670, a V winning switch 670e3 is provided at a position corresponding to the probability changing switch 65e3 in the seventh control example. A game ball that has entered the V winning device 670 during the opening period of the open / close door 670f1 passes through the V winning switch 670e3 described above, so that a big hit game is given after the end of the small hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 in the V winning device 670 in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery is won and the special symbol lottery is made a small hit. In this case, the jackpot is started. Further, in the eleventh control example, the small win is won with a high probability (for example, 9/10) only by the lottery of the second special symbol (the lottery of the special symbol based on the entrance to the second entrance 6400). (The lottery of the second special symbol is easier to win than the lottery of the first special symbol), and the ease of entering the second entrance 6400 depending on the gaming state The configuration is variable. That is, in this eleventh control example, the probability of winning a big symbol in the special symbol lottery is kept constant regardless of the gaming state, and the probability of opening the electric accessory 6400a associated with the second entrance 6400 (the normal symbol win Probability), normal symbol variation time, opening time, etc., depending on the gaming state, the possibility of winning a jackpot depending on the gaming state, and as a result the possibility of winning a jackpot Are different from each other (so-called specification of a type 1 type 2 mixing machine).

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is configured to provide three types of gaming states. Specifically, a short-time game state A in which it is easy to enter a game ball into the second entrance 6400, a normal game state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second entrance 6400, and There are three types of short-time game state B. In the short-time gaming state A, by playing the game aiming at the second entrance 6400, it is possible to enter the game ball at the second entrance 6400 with a high probability, and the second entrance without almost reducing the holding ball. The special symbol lottery can be executed continuously. In addition, when the jackpot is in the short-time gaming state A, the short-time gaming state A is re-entered again at a high rate (80%). It becomes easy to be repeated. For this reason, the short-time gaming state A becomes a gaming state that is extremely advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, so that it is difficult for a V winning due to small hits to occur. Therefore, the possibility of a big hit is reduced. In addition, even if the first special symbol is a big win, the rate of transition to the short-time gaming state after the jackpot ends is low (for example, 50%), so the normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous for the player. It becomes. In contrast, the short-time game state B is similar to the normal game state in that it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400, but the short-time game state B is short if the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit. Since the rate of transition to the gaming state A is the highest (for example, a rate of 100%), it becomes a state advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state.

  In the eleventh control example, when a big hit is made in the short time gaming state A, either the short time gaming state A or the short time gaming state B is set as the gaming state after the big hit. With this configuration, even if the short-time gaming state A is not set, the short-time gaming state B is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (it is easy to shift to the short-time gaming state A when a big hit is made). Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately when the short-time gaming state A ends. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the following description in the eleventh control example, the most disadvantageous normal gaming state is referred to as “normal mode”, and the most advantageous time-short gaming state A is referred to as “renso mode”. The short-time gaming state B that is easy to shift to is referred to as “retraction mode”.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110. The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially The change is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. 7 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the seventh control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 685, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 685 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 685, in the game board 13 in the eleventh control example, the electric accessory 64a provided along with the first entrance 64 in the seventh control example is deleted. In the eleventh control example, a game ball that is launched (left-handed) toward the flow path provided on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the variable display unit 80 is placed in the first entrance 64. While it is possible to enter the game, it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball launched (right-handed) toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. As such, the arrangement of nails and the like is set. Further, below the first entrance 64, there is provided a variable winning device 650 that is set in a state in which a game ball can enter in each jackpot round. The specific winning port 650a of the variable winning device 650 is configured as a winning port from which ten winning balls are paid out each time a game ball is won.

  A V winning device 670 is provided on the right side of the first entrance 64 in front view. As described above, the V winning device 670 has the same structure as that of the variable winning device 65 in the seventh control example (see FIGS. 576 to 578), but is configured to have different functions. More specifically, in the V prize winning device 670, the open / close door 670f1 on the upper surface is normally closed, and the open / close door 670f1 provided on the upper surface is used only for a predetermined period only when the special symbol is a lottery. It is opened (for example, for 1.5 seconds), and a state in which a game ball can enter the inside through the V winning opening 670a which is an opening is formed. In the V winning device 670, instead of the normal discharge channel 65e1 (see FIG. 578 (a)) and the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 578 (b)) in the seventh control example, the same structure as these The normal discharge channel 670e1 and the special discharge channel 670e2 are provided. The game balls that have flowed into the V winning device 670 flow down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 670e1 and the special discharge flow path 670e2) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The special discharge channel 670e2 is provided with a V winning switch 670e3 that starts a big hit after a small hit by passing a game ball. Although details will be described later, the game balls are basically distributed to the normal discharge channel 670e1 during the small hit, and the game ball is allocated to the special discharge channel 670e2 only for a short period (for example, 0.075 seconds). Form. For this reason, even if it is possible to enter the game ball into the V winning device 670 during the opening period (1.5 seconds) of the door 670f1 based on the small hit, the game ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 670e2. If it is not a period, the normal discharge channel 670e1 will flow down, and the big hit will not be started. In the eleventh control example, when the game ball is continuously fired aiming at the V prize winning device 670, the game ball enters the special discharge channel 670e2 at a rate of about once every 20 times per hit. Is configured to do.

  As shown in FIG. 685, a through gate 67 is provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13, and a game ball enters below the flow path. A second entrance 6400 is provided to trigger the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 685, a large number of nails are planted in an area from the upstream side of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 to the second entrance 6400. With these nails, almost all game balls that have been launched with a firing strength (for example, a firing strength of 95% or more) that collides with the return rubber 69 at least flow down to the second entrance 6400 (guidance) can do. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, an area for guiding the game ball to the second entrance 6400 is referred to as a second entrance guidance area.

  The second entrance 6400 is a horizontally-long rectangular electric accessory 6400a that covers the second entrance 6400, and an electric accessory for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the electric accessory 6400a as an axis. And a solenoid (not shown). The electric accessory 6400a is normally closed so that a game ball cannot be won. In the closed state of the electric combination 6400a, the electric combination 6400a and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass through the front side of the electric combination 6400a. Further, the electric accessory 6400a tilts downward on the front surface, thereby temporarily forming an open state in which the game ball is likely to win the second entrance 6400. For this reason, even if the game ball is fired with a launch strength that collides with the return rubber 69, the game ball is not in the second state unless the electric accessory 6400a is in the open state at the timing of reaching the second entrance 6400. Passing without entering the entrance 6400, it passes down and flows down (area where the V winning device 670, the variable winning device 650, the out port 66, etc. are provided).

  As shown in FIG. 685, the inside of the second entrance guidance area and the upstream side of the second entrance 6400 are branched into a right passage R1 and a left passage R2. Further, as shown in FIG. 685, a left gate R2 is provided with a through gate 67. Furthermore, on the upstream side of the right channel R1 and the left channel R2, a game ball that has entered the second entrance guidance area is placed in either the right channel R1 or the left channel R2. A sorting member 6600 for sorting is provided. Although details will be described later, depending on the interval at which the game balls arrive, the distribution member 6600 is likely to be biased to be distributed to one of the flow paths, or may be easily distributed to both flow paths by the distribution member 6600. It becomes variable. More specifically, when the launch interval of the game balls (interval at which the game balls reach the sorting member 6600) becomes long (for example, when the launch interval is 1.5 seconds or more and the arrival interval is reached). When the game ball is distributed only to the right flow path R1 by the distribution member 6600, the game ball launch interval (interval at which the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600) is shortened (for example, In the case of 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing interval), the game balls are alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2 by the sorting means. In addition, when a game ball is fired at a firing interval of 0.6 seconds to 1.5 seconds, depending on the arrangement of the sorting member 6600 when it reaches the sorting member 6600, the right channel R1 It is variable whether it is distributed or distributed to the left channel R2. Therefore, if the firing interval can be accurately adjusted between 0.6 seconds and 1.5 seconds, it is possible to continue to distribute the game balls only to the left channel R2. The configuration of the sorting member 6600 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 686 (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation content of the sorting member 6600. FIG. 686 (a) shows a state where the game ball has flowed down (dropped) toward the sorting member 6600 in a state where the sorting member 6600 is disposed at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 686 (a), the sorting member 6600 includes a rotation shaft 6600a, a substantially rod-shaped right receiving portion 6600R extending rightward with respect to the rotation shaft 6600a, and an upper left portion with respect to the rotation shaft 6600a. A substantially rod-shaped left receiving portion 6600L extending in the direction, a substantially rod-shaped hanging portion 6600b extending (down-hanging) in the lower left direction with respect to the rotation axis, and a right-hand side joined to the hanging portion 6600b And a substantially rectangular parallelepiped uneven portion 6600c. The distribution member 6600 is configured to be able to rotate in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front about the rotation shaft 6600a, and the hanging portion 6600b is disposed vertically below the rotation shaft 6600a. Therefore, it is configured to have a substantially “Y-shaped” shape when viewed from the front. The uneven weight portion 6600c is made of a material having a higher density than the other portions of the sorting member 6600 (the right receiving portion 6600R, the left receiving portion 6600L, and the hanging portion 6600b), and the center of gravity of the entire sorting member 6600 is There is a difference in mass with other parts to the extent that it almost coincides with the center of gravity of the uneven weight part 6600c. Specifically, for example, the uneven weight portion 6600c is made of iron and its mass is 4 g, whereas the other parts are all made of PS material, and the total mass is 0.5 g. Has been. In a state where no force other than gravity G acts on the sorting member 6600, the sorting member 6600 is finally stabilized at a position where the center of gravity is the lowest (state where the potential energy is the smallest). Even if the arrangement is movable, if there is no action other than gravity G (the action of external force), the arrangement will eventually return to the arrangement shown in FIG.

  The sorting member 6600 is configured to be able to receive the game ball flowing down from above the second entrance entrance guiding region by the right receiving portion 6600R and the left receiving portion 6600L. When the game ball flows down from above the second entrance guidance area at the initial position (rest position) of the sorting member 6600 (see FIG. 686 (a)), the game ball is mainly received by the right receiving portion 6600R. It is done. When the game ball and the right receiving portion 6600R collide, a downward force is applied to the right receiving portion 6600R. In other words, a force is applied to rotate the sorting member 6600 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front about the rotation shaft 6600a. Here, since the mass of the game ball is configured to be heavier (about 5.5 g) than the total mass (about 4.5 g) of the distribution member 6600, the game ball collides with the distribution member 6600. The right receiving portion 6600R is pushed downward, and the sorting member 6600 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the sorting member 6600 rotates until the right receiving portion 6600R forms an inclination in the direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 686 (b)). Therefore, the game ball received by the right receiving portion 6600R flows down in the lower right direction when viewed from the front along the inclination formed by the right receiving portion 6600R, and falls into the right flow path R1. That is, the game balls are distributed to the right channel R1.

  As described above, the game balls that have first reached the sorting member 6600 with the sorting member 6600 disposed at the initial position (completely stationary) are distributed to the right channel R1. Yes. As described above, the left flow path R2 is provided with the through gate 67, but the right flow path R1 is not provided with the through gate 67. Therefore, the right flow path R1 performs normal symbol lottery. This is a disadvantageous channel for the player because there is no possibility of being played. By arranging the initial position of the sorting member 6600 so that it can be distributed to the disadvantageous flow path, it is possible to prevent the initial state of the gaming machine from being in an advantageous state.

  After the game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1 (falling from the right receiving portion 6600R), a force (a load due to the weight of the game balls) is applied to rotate the sorting member 6600 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, only the gravity G acts on the sorting member 6600. Here, immediately after the game balls are distributed to the right channel, the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 is moved to the upper left side of the initial arrangement. Therefore, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction out of the gravity G acting on the sorting member 6600 becomes a force in a direction to rotate the sorting member 6600 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (right downward when viewed from the front). The distribution member 6600 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the component Gc in the rotation direction of gravity. Note that even if the sorting member 6600 reaches the initial arrangement by this rotation operation, it does not stop immediately but passes through the initial arrangement once. This is because kinetic energy is generated during the rotational operation from the arrangement of FIG. 686 (b) to the initial arrangement. Therefore, the distribution member 6600 continues to rotate counterclockwise even after passing through the initial arrangement, and temporarily stops when the kinetic energy becomes 0 (the rotation speed becomes 0) ( (See FIG. 686 (c)). If the player is continuously firing the game ball to the second entrance guidance area (that is, if the player is firing at the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds), the initial The next game ball reaches the sorting member 6600 before and after the temporary rest position (see FIG. 686 (c)), which is disposed after passing the placement. That is, the movable range in which the height of the end portion of the right receiving portion 6600R opposite to the rotating shaft 6600a is higher than the height of the end portion of the right receiving portion 6600R opposite to the rotating shaft 6600a. The next game ball reaches the sorting member 6600 while moving in the rotation range.

  As shown in FIG. 686 (d), when the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 after the distribution member 6600 has passed, the game ball mainly collides with the left receiving portion 6600L. The left receiving portion 6600L collided with the game ball is subjected to a force that is pushed down in the front view downward direction by the weight of the collided game ball. That is, a force that rotates the sorting member 6600 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front works. As described above, since the mass of the game ball is heavier than the total mass of the sorting member 6600, the sorting member 6600 rotates, and the left receiving portion 6600L is inclined downward from the upper right in the front view to the lower left. Form. The game ball received by the left receiving portion 6600L rolls along this inclination and falls to the left channel R2 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. That is, the game balls are distributed to the left channel R2.

  After the game balls are distributed to the left channel R2 (falling from the left receiving portion 6600L), the force for rotating the sorting member 6600 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (load due to the weight of the game balls) Therefore, only the gravity G acts on the sorting member 6600. Therefore, after the game balls are distributed to the right channel R1 (see FIGS. 686 (b) and (c)), the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction among the gravity G acting on the distribution member 6600. As a result, a force to return to the direction of the initial arrangement works, and as a result, the sorting member 6600 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  After that, while the game balls are continuously being fired at the shortest (0.6 second) firing interval, the sorting member 6600 causes the game ball to flow through one flow path (the right flow path R1, the left side). The operation of distributing to any one of the flow paths R2 and the operation of rotating to the position where the game balls can be distributed to the other flow path by the reaction of distributing the game balls are repeated. Thereby, by continuously firing the game balls at the shortest firing interval, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2. As described above, the left flow path R2 is provided with the through gate 67. By continuously firing the game balls at the shortest firing interval, the through gate has a ratio of 1 to 2 game balls. 67 can be passed.

  On the other hand, when the game balls are continuously fired at a firing interval of 1.5 seconds or more, the game balls can be distributed to the left flow channel R2 once by the reaction of the game balls being distributed to the right flow channel R1. However, the pendulum operation is performed centering on the initial arrangement. In this pendulum operation, the amplitude decreases with time due to air resistance, dynamic friction acting on the rotation shaft 6600a, etc., and when 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the range in which game balls can be distributed to the right flow path R1 (rotation shaft) The pendulum operation is performed (or is stationary) only in a range where the hanging portion 6600b is arranged on the left side of the perpendicular drawn from 6600a vertically downward. For this reason, if the game balls are fired at intervals of 1.5 seconds or more, the game balls are distributed only to the right flow path R1, so that the game is played against the through gate 67 provided in the left flow path R2. It is impossible to pass the ball. That is, since it becomes impossible to execute the normal symbol lottery, in particular, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 (when the normal symbol is hit, In the extended game mode in which the variation time of the normal symbol that easily enters the second entrance 6400 and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a are set, this is extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the continuous play mode, the game ball can be fired at the shortest firing interval for the player who wants to distribute the game ball to the left channel R2. That is, since the game ball can be continuously fired in the continuous play mode, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Further, the sorting member 6600 performing the pendulum operation by adjusting the firing interval according to the operation of the sorting member 6600 between the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) and 1.5 seconds. However, the game ball can reach the sorting member 6600 only at a timing at which the game ball can be distributed to the left channel R2. In order to fire a game ball at the shortest firing interval, it is only necessary to perform a relatively simple operation content of maintaining the operation handle 51 at the maximum rotation amount, but by adjusting the firing interval, In order to fire the game ball as intended at a firing interval other than the firing interval, a delicate operation on the operation handle 51 is required. Therefore, except for some players who have a high game skill, it is more game to keep firing the game ball at the shortest firing interval by keeping the operation handle 51 at the maximum rotation amount. By distributing the spheres to the left channel R2, it is possible to execute more regular symbol lotteries.

  As described above, the sorting member 6600 in the eleventh control example can change the flow path through which the game ball flows according to the operation content of the player on the handle 51. In other words, by performing an operation of maintaining the operation handle 51 at the rotation amount and continuing to fire the game balls at the shortest firing interval, the game balls are surely flown alternately into the right channel R1 and the left channel R2. Can be made. In other words, the disadvantageous flow path (the right flow path R1) in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed even if the game ball passes, and the normal symbol lottery is executed by passing the game ball is advantageous. Allocation to the flow path (left flow path R2) can be performed alternately. In addition, while the sorting member 6600 performs a pendulum operation centering on the initial arrangement (see FIG. 686 (a)) by a reaction in which the game balls are distributed to any flow path, the game is moved to the left flow path R2. By operating the operation handle 51 so as to reach the game ball aiming at a period during which the ball can be distributed, the left side where the through gate 67 is provided is operated. It is also possible to distribute to the flow path R2. That is, it is possible to realize an operation in which the flow is distributed to the flow path that is advantageous to the player. In addition, although there is no merit for the player, by operating the operation handle 51 so that the firing interval is 1.5 seconds or more, it is possible to modulate the flow path unfavorable to the player and distribute the game balls. It becomes possible. Therefore, since the operation content with respect to the operation handle 51 can be varied according to the skill of the player and the operation to be realized, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the eleventh control example, in the extended game mode (short-time gaming state A), the electric accessory 6400a is opened at a timing at which a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400. Is done. That is, an extremely short fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time. In addition, 0.2 seconds is set as the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a when the normal symbol is hit. Since it takes about 0.2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 6400, the game ball is placed in the second entrance just during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a. Reach 6400 and enter. Therefore, during the continuous play mode, all the game balls distributed to the left flow path R2 are all stored in the second entrance 6400 simply by hitting the game balls to the right with the maximum launch intensity and the shortest launch interval. You can enter the ball. That is, game balls can be made to enter the second entrance 6400 at a rate of about one in two.

  On the other hand, in the pull-back mode (time-short game state B), the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is also fired to the second entrance guidance area next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to the right channel. A variation time (0.5 seconds) of a normal symbol that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the second entrance 6400 for the game balls distributed to R1 is set. By setting the variation time of 0.5 seconds, when a normal symbol is hit, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has completely passed through the second entrance 6400 (that is, through hole). The electric accessory 6400a is opened (after 0.2 seconds, which is the flow down period of the flow path from the gate 67 to the second entrance 6400). In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 seconds as in the extended game mode, the period from 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds after one game ball passes through the through gate 67 It is impossible to enter the second entrance 6400 without allowing other game balls to reach. However, even if the game ball is continuously fired to the second entrance guidance area at the shortest launch interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and the second Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the entrance 6400, the entrance into the second entrance 6400 is made after the opening period. Therefore, even if the player makes a right-hand shot at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pull-back mode, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400, which is mischievous. It becomes a very disadvantageous state that only reduces the possession ball. Therefore, in the pull-back mode, the game method can be performed by causing the player to enter the first entrance 64 by left-handed to advance the game (to make a special symbol lottery). In other words, a game method similar to that in the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of a game method aiming at the second entrance 6400 that is easily opened despite the fact that the short time state of the normal symbol is given. Can realize a novel gameplay.

  As described above, in the eleventh control example, when the pullback mode is a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, it is more likely to shift to the extended play mode after the big hit. It becomes the composition which becomes. In addition, in the eleventh control example, after the extended-village mode ends, the pull-back mode is set at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times. More specifically, when the jackpot E5 is reached in the consecutive house mode, after the jackpot is finished, the special symbol lottery is set until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times. When the jackpot F5 is reached, the special symbol lottery is 100 The pull-back mode is set until the number of times is completed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is another jackpot type (jackpot A5 to D5), the jackpot mode is set again after the jackpot. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is not won after the consecutive house mode, the pull-back mode is maintained until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times or 100 times. In other words, the pull-back mode is maintained until the special symbol lottery ends at least 30 times after the extended-village mode ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to continue the game until the lottery of special symbols is performed at least 30 times after the end of the consecutive resort mode. That is, even after the consecutive house mode ends, the game can be continued at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine) of a specification that is awarded a big hit when a special symbol lottery is won or when a game ball enters a specific area, There are only two types of game states, a normal game state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter a specific area and a short-time game state where a game ball is easy to enter a specific area, and immediately after the short-time game state ends The specifications that shift to the normal gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous, were common. However, in this configuration, there is a risk that the player's motivation for the game will be greatly reduced when transitioning to the disadvantageous normal gaming state, and the player immediately quits the game when the short-time gaming state ends. There was a possibility.

  On the other hand, in the eleventh control example, after the extended-village mode is finished, at least until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times, the special control that makes it easy to shift to the extended-village mode when the big hit is made. The state (retraction mode) is set. As a result, even if the Renso mode ends and the game ball enters a disadvantageous gaming state in which it is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400, the player's motivation for the game is reduced. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the consecutive house mode is ended, and thus the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the eleventh control example, when the extended-village mode ends, the configuration is always shifted to the pull-back mode. In other words, in the case of a normal symbol in the short-time state, if a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, only the jackpot type that shifts to the consecutive mode after the jackpot ends and the jackpot type that shifts to the pull-back mode after the jackpot ends However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which provides the jackpot type which transfers to a normal mode after completion | finish of jackpot at a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%).

  In the eleventh control example, when the game ball is continuously fired at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval), the operation range in which the sorting member 6600 can distribute the game ball to the right channel R1, and the left side The cycle of switching to the operation range that can be distributed to the flow path R2 and the launch interval of the game balls are substantially the same. In other words, the distribution member 6600 of this control example distributes the game ball to one flow path and then passes the other flow path for 0.6 seconds until the next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . If a game ball is fired at the shortest launch interval and the game ball can be alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2, the next game ball arrives after distributing one game ball. The operation range that can be distributed to one flow path and the operation range that can be distributed to the other flow path may be reciprocated by a pendulum operation one or more times during 0.6 seconds until . In other words, an odd multiple of the half cycle of the pendulum operation of the sorting member 6600 may be configured to be substantially the same as 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing interval. Even with this configuration, every time a game ball launched at the shortest launch interval reaches the sorting member 6600, the game ball can be alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2.

  In the eleventh control example, an arrangement is provided that allows the game balls to be distributed to the right flow path R1 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is stationary by providing the eccentric portion 6600c and shifting the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 (FIG. 686). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the biased portion 6600c, the initial arrangement shown in FIG. 686 (a) is finally obtained after the sorting member 6600 performs a rotating operation by distributing the game balls using an elastic body such as a spring. You may comprise so that it may return to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 687, the operation of the V winning device 670 in the eleventh control example will be described. As described above, the V winning device 670 is in a state where the open / close door 670f1 is opened and the player can enter the ball when the special symbol lottery is won. FIG. 687 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the opening period of the open / close door 670f1 based on the small hit and the flow path through which the game ball can flow down inside the V winning device 670.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 687, the open / close door 670f1 is opened when winning a small hit. This opening period continues for 1.5 seconds, and when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the open / close door 670f1 is closed and the small hit ends. Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 687, the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 is guided to the normal discharge channel 670e1 for 0.5 seconds after the small hit is started. The flow path solenoid 670k is kept off. This makes it difficult for the game ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 670e2 for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hit, and thus it is also difficult for the game ball to pass the V winning switch 670e3. Then, when 0.5 second has elapsed since the start of the small hit, the game ball is guided to the special discharge flow path 670e2 by setting the flow path solenoid 670k to ON for 0.075 seconds. (The game ball is difficult to flow down to the normal discharge flow path 670e1). Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 for 0.075 seconds is guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 and easily passes through the V winning switch 670e3.

  After 0.075 seconds have elapsed since the flow path solenoid 670k was set to ON, the flow path solenoid 670k is set to OFF until the small hit end. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the V prize winning device 670 is set in a state in which it is easily guided to the normal discharge channel 670e1. If a game ball can enter the V prize winning device 670 and reach the special discharge channel 670e2 within 0.075 seconds, which is easily guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 by these operation contents, the game ball Passes the V winning switch 670e3, and a big hit is awarded after the small win ends. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit release period, no big win is awarded.

  While the small hitting period is 1.5 seconds, the special discharge channel 670e2 can only pass through for 0.075 seconds. The probability that the ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 is 1/20 (0.075 / 1.5). As described above, in the continuous play mode, the game ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400 unless the game ball is continuously fired at the shortest launch interval. The player basically keeps firing the game ball at the shortest firing interval. That is, since it becomes difficult to adjust the timing of game ball firing aiming at a period during which the special discharge flow path 670e2 can pass, whether or not the game ball flows down the special discharge flow path 670e2 is determined by the second special flow. It depends only on the symbol variation time and the direction of the game ball flow. That is, there is almost no room for the player's skill to intervene, and the big hit expectation degree at the time of winning the small hit is always constant (1/20). Therefore, since the jackpot probability in the extended play mode can be made almost constant regardless of the skill of the player, it is possible to cause the player who is not used to the game with the pachinko machine 10 to play the game with peace of mind. Can do.

  In the eleventh control example, when the game shifts to the extended game mode after the jackpot ends, the extended game mode continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times or the jackpot is reached. In the eleventh control example, the probability of winning a big win in the second special symbol lottery is 9/10, and the probability of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery is 1/200. The probability that the consecutive-village mode will end without winning a big win, whether a symbol lottery or a small win, is about 0.6%. That is, once the mode is shifted to the extended game mode, a very advantageous state in which the extended game mode and the jackpot are almost repeated is formed until the winning of the type of jackpot to which the pull-back mode is given after the jackpot is completed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with one goal being to shift to the extended resort mode. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 688 and FIG. 689, an effect suggesting the expected degree of the pull-back mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh control example will be described. In the eleventh control example, as described above, after the extended-village mode is finished, the pull-back mode is set at least until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times. In other words, when the jackpot is won, it is set to an advantageous state in which the mode is always shifted to the extended resort mode after the jackpot is over. For this reason, while the pull-back mode is set, the player can be reminded to continue the game. That is, motivation for the player's game can be maintained. However, if the number of lotteries for the special symbol set as the pull-back mode is increased too much, the ratio of re-entering the extended-villa mode (the ratio of pulling back the continuous-villa mode) will increase too much, which is excessively advantageous for the player. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in the eleventh control example, after selecting a lottery number for which the pullback mode is set (that is, a configuration in which either 30 times or 100 times is set), any lottery is selected. The number of times is selected is not clearly specified (hidden). And according to the classification of the back image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, it is set as the structure which suggests the number of the selected lottery times (period of the pull-back mode). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether the withdrawal mode has been completed or continued, so that even if the minimum number of lottery times of 30 when transitioning to the withdrawal mode is exceeded, a game can be played. You can make them want to continue. Therefore, since the game can be performed for a longer time after the consecutive-village mode ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. In addition, since it is possible to realize the gameability for predicting whether or not the pull-back mode is ended based on the type of the back image, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game after the end of the continuous play mode.

  In the eleventh control example, three types of back images are provided as back images suggesting the degree of expectation that the pull back mode is continuing. That is, a back image with a high expectation level (see FIG. 688 (a)), a back image with a medium expectation level (see FIG. 688 (b)), and a back image with a low expectation level (see FIG. 688). 689) are provided. When the number of lotteries for the special symbol exceeds 30 after the pull-back mode is set, a process for redrawing the back image is executed every time the special symbol is lottered ten times. The player can be made to predict whether or not the pull-back mode is continued according to the update state of the back image. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  FIG. 688 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the rear image with the highest expectation level (the rear image for high expectation level) in which the pull-back mode continues is displayed. As shown in FIG. 688 (a), when the rear image having the highest expectation is set, the character 811 is displayed in a manner of traveling through the forest. In addition, a display area HR6 on which characters “CHANCE !!” are displayed is formed in the upper center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. These display contents can indicate to the player that there is a high possibility that the pull-back mode is continued.

  FIG. 688 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a back image with a medium expectation level in which the pull-back mode continues is displayed. As shown in FIG. 688 (b), when a rear image with a medium expectation is set, the character 811 is displayed in a manner of going down the river. In addition, the character displayed in the display area HR6 is “CHANCE !?”. Due to these display contents, the expectation level of the pull-back mode is lower than that in the case where the back image for the high expectation level (the back image for the medium expectation level) is displayed (the possibility of having shifted to the normal mode is high). ) Can be suggested to the player.

  FIG. 689 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a rear image with the lowest expectation level in which the pull-back mode continues (a rear image for a low expectation level) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 689, when the rear image with the lowest expectation is set, the character 811 is in a display mode in which it proceeds in the wilderness. Further, the characters displayed in the display area HR6 are “CHANCE...?”. These display contents can indicate to the player that the expectation level of the pull-back mode is extremely low (the possibility that the mode has already been shifted to the normal mode is high).

  As described above, in the eleventh control example, whether or not the pull-back mode is continued can be suggested based on the display mode of the back image. Thereby, since it is possible to provide a game property that predicts whether or not the pull-back mode is continued from the type of the back image, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. The pull-back mode continues until a maximum of 100 special symbol lotteries are executed after the jackpot won in the consecutive-villa mode is over. In other words, when the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, the mode always shifts to the normal mode. For this reason, after the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the rear image (not shown) for the normal mode is set.

<Electric Configuration in Eleventh Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 690 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 690 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 690 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example is smaller than the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 585 (a)) and the small hit type selection table 202da. The difference is that a number selection table 202db and a general-purpose variation pattern selection table 202dc are added. In addition, in the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example, the contents of the first per-random number table 202a, the first per-kind selection table 202b, and the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed.

  First, the first random number table 202a in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 690 (b). FIG. 690 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 690 (b), two random number values (counter values) of “0, 1” are defined in the first random number table 202a in the eleventh control example as determination values determined to be big hits. (See 202a1 in FIG. 690 (b)). As in the seventh control example, the determination value that is a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, “2 to 399” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 690 (b)), and determination that is determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol The value is not defined (see 202a3 in FIG. 690 (b)). Also, “2 to 40” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 690 (b)), and the determination value determined as the small hit of the second special symbol “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 690 (b)).

  As described above, in the eleventh control example, only the second special symbol lottery can be won. Thereby, since it is possible to form a state in which it is easier to pass the V winning switch 670e3 in the extended game mode where the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, a big hit is likely to occur again in a short period of time in the extended game mode. Thereby, since the advantageous degree in extended game mode can be raised more, when it transfers to extended game mode, a big pleasure can be given with respect to a player.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 691 (a). FIG. 691 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 691 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the eleventh control example, two kinds of big hits A5 and B5 are provided as the big hit types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C5 is provided as a jackpot type of special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 691 (a), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit A5”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 691 (a)). This “big hit A5” has 5 rounds, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the big win type (5 rounds) in which the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state short time state A (long game mode) It ’s a junior college. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit A5”, so “big hit A5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

  As shown in FIG. 691 (a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined to be associated with “big hit B5” in the range of “50 to 99”. (See 202b2 in FIG. 691 (a)). This “big hit B5” is a big hit type (5-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is five and the game state after the big hit varies according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, when “big hit B5” is obtained in the normal state (normal mode) of the normal symbol, the normal state (normal mode) of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state after the big hit. When the normal symbol time-short state (withdrawal mode or extended game mode) becomes “big hit B5”, the normal symbol time-short state A (long game mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit. Note that the correspondence between the jackpot type, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the set gaming state is defined in the short-time selection table 202db (see FIG. 691 (c)) described later. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that become “big hit B5”, so “big hit B5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 691 (a), for the second special symbol, all the values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2 are defined in association with “big hit C5” (FIG. 691 ( a) 202b3). This “jackpot C5” is a jackpot type (10 round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot varies according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, when the “big hit C5” is obtained in the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode), the normal state (normal mode) of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state after the big hit. In the normal symbol time-short state (withdrawal mode or extended game mode), when the jackpot C5 is reached, the normal symbol time-short state A (long game mode) is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  In this way, by making half of the jackpot of the first special symbol a special jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal mode is set after the jackpot when winning in the normal mode, and the villa mode is set after the jackpot when winning in a mode other than the normal mode) First, it is necessary to execute the lottery of the first special symbol (the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed). In a plurality of gaming states (normal mode, pullback mode), it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage. That is, if the first special symbol jackpot is set in the normal mode, the consecutive house mode is set after the jackpot at a rate of 50%, whereas in the pull-back mode, if the first special symbol lottery is won, the rate is 100%. It can be configured so that the consecutive house mode is set after the big hit. As a result, in the normal mode and the pullback mode, the advantage level until winning the jackpot is the same (disadvantaged state that it is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400), while winning the jackpot The advantage can be configured so that the pull-back mode is higher than the normal mode. Therefore, at least during the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to continue the game, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that, as described above, in the eleventh control example, when the extended game mode ends (when a jackpot in which a mode other than the extended game mode is set after winning the jackpot is selected), the configuration is always shifted to the pullback mode. Yes. Thereby, it can be made to think that a game will be continued at least until the withdrawal mode is completed after the consecutive resort mode is completed. In other words, a player who has won a large number of prize balls by repeating the jackpot and the Renso mode in the Renso mode quits the game immediately after the last jackpot in the Renso mode is over and is satisfied with the game. Can be suppressed. That is, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and the game can be continued in an unfavorable state (retraction mode) compared to the continuous play mode, so the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Can be improved.

  Similarly to the pull-back mode, when the big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in the extended game mode, the extended game mode can be set after the big win at a rate of 100%. Thus, for example, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol remains, the mode shifts to the extended game mode, and the consecutive game mode is always set when a special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol is made. Can continue. In other words, after transitioning to the Renso mode, an absurd situation occurs in which the first special symbol lottery wins and immediately shifts to the normal mode or the pullback mode (winning once per small win) Can be suppressed), so that the player's motivation for the game during the extended game mode can be increased. In addition, even if you win a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery in the consecutive house mode, it becomes a special jackpot, and the consecutive house mode is always set again after the big jackpot. However, it is possible to more reliably eliminate the possibility that the mode will end without winning. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the motivation of the player in the extended game mode.

  Furthermore, it is possible to prevent trying to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode by setting all the big special jackpots to be special jackpots instead of all the jackpots of the second special symbol. In other words, if an irregular game method is used in which a right-hand beating is made in the normal mode and a game ball is inserted into the second entrance 6400 to play a game, even if a big win is reached, it is always the most disadvantageous. Since the normal mode can be set, a deterrent effect on the irregular gaming method can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 691 (b), the small hit type selection table 202da will be described. FIG. 691 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. This small hitting type selection table 202da is a data table in which a determination value for determining the small hitting type when a special symbol lottery is won is specified, and the determination value of the small hitting type counter C5 Is defined in association with each small hit type.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 691 (b), for the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 49”, “small hit A” is defined as being associated with the small hit type. (See 202da1 in FIG. 691 (b)). This “small hit A” is a small hit type to which “big hit C5” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. As described above, the jackpot C5 has 10 rounds, and if the player wins during the normal mode, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot is ended. When winning, the jackpot type will be set after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that is “small hit A” is 50. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is won, “small hit A” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 691 (b), for the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “50 to 79”, “small hit B” is defined in association with the small hit type ( (See 202da2 in FIG. 691 (b)). This “small hit B” is a small hit type to which “big hit D5” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the “big hit D5” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the mode is shifted to the extended play mode after the big hit, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 30 counter values that are “small hit B”. The determined ratio is 30% (30/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 691 (b), for the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “80 to 94”, “small hit C” is defined in association with the small hit type ( (See 202da3 in FIG. 691 (b)). The “small hit C” is a small hit type to which “big hit E5” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, “Big Jack E5” has 10 rounds, and regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the pullback mode is set from the end of the big win until the special symbol lottery is finished 30 times. The jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hitting type counter C5 can take, there are 15 counter values that become “small hitting C”. The determined ratio is 15% (15/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 691 (b), for the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “95 to 99”, “small hit D” is defined as being associated with the small hit type ( (See 202da4 in FIG. 691 (b)). This “small hit D” is a small hit type to which “big hit F5” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, “Big Bonus F5” has 10 rounds, and regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the pullback mode is set from the end of the big win until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. The jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are five counter values that are “small hit D”, so “small hit D” is displayed when the special symbol lottery is won. The determined ratio is 5% (5/100).

  As described above, in the eleventh control example, four jackpot types are provided, and the jackpot type executed (started) when passing through the V winning switch 670e3 differs depending on the jackpot type. It is configured. In the consecutive house mode (and the pullback mode in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set), the small winning A or the small winning B is won, and the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 during the small winning game. As a result, the jackpot C or the jackpot D is started, and the game mode (mode) after the jackpot is ended is set again. Therefore, it can be said that the small hit A and the small hit B are small hit types that are relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, since the number of big hit rounds that are executed when the small hit B passes the V winning switch 670e3, the small hit B is more advantageous than the small hit A. It can be said that there is. The percentage of winning the small hit A or the small hit B is 80% (50% + 30%) in total, and as described above, in the extended play mode, the extended play mode is ended without making a big hit even once ( The probability that 100 short-term periods will elapse) is about 0.6%, so once the villa mode is entered, the villa mode is repeated at a rate of about 80% (loops the villa mode). .

  Also, in the consecutive house mode (and the pull-back mode in which the normal symbol time-saving state is set), the small hit C or the small hit D is won, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit game. Accordingly, the jackpot E or the jackpot F is started, and the pullback mode is set as the gaming state (mode) after the jackpot is ended. Since the pull-back mode is a gaming state (mode) that is less advantageous than the extended game mode, it can be said that the small hit C and the small hit D are small hit types that are relatively disadvantageous for the player. The jackpot C and the jackpot D have the same jackpot performance (number of rounds) executed when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3, but the period of the pull-back mode set after the jackpot (Number of times) is configured to be shorter in the pull-back mode based on the small hit C. For this reason, it can be said that the small hit D is a small hit type with a higher degree of advantage than the small hit C. The ratio of winning either the small hit C or the small hit D is 20% (15% + 5%), so if you win a big hit in the villa mode, it will shift to the pullback mode at a rate of about 20% . In the consecutive house mode, when a special symbol lottery is won (when the winner is won without passing through the V winning switch 670e3), the mode is always shifted to the consecutive house mode.

  On the other hand, in the normal mode, when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 by winning a small hit other than the small hit B (small hit A, C, D), the normal mode is set as the mode after the big win ends. End up. That is, if the V winning switch 670e3 is passed in the normal mode, the normal mode is set after the big win at a rate of 70%. Therefore, an irregular game method for making the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode. Doing so would be extremely disadvantageous for the player. As mentioned above, if you win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, you will shift to the villa mode after the jackpot at a rate of 50%, whereas if you win a big winner in the second special symbol lottery, After the big hit at a rate, it will shift to the normal mode again. In addition, in the normal mode, even if the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 by lottery of the second special symbol in the lottery of the second special symbol, it shifts to the normal mode again after the big win at a rate of 70%. Therefore, when a game method that allows only the second special symbol to be drawn by performing an irregular game method is performed, the rate of transition to the extended play mode that is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example Will become low and disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, an irregular gaming method is performed in which the player is forced to enter the second entrance 6400 where it is difficult for a game ball to enter in the normal mode, and only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Since the merit can be eliminated, in the normal mode, a left-handed game can be performed in order to enter the game ball into the first entrance 64. Therefore, the implementation of irregular gaming methods will more reliably prevent unexpected damage to the hole and, on the contrary, excessive damage to the player. Can do.

  Next, the details of the time reduction number selection table 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 691 (c). FIG. 691 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time reduction number selection table 202db in the eleventh control example. The short time selection table 202db is referred to at the end of the jackpot, and sets the number of times after the jackpot ends (the number of lotteries for special symbols until the transition to the normal mode) according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the big win. This is a data table in which data for the data is defined. In this time reduction number selection table 202db, not only the time reduction number after the end of the jackpot but also data indicating the type of the time reduction state (whether it is the time reduction state A or the time reduction state B) is also defined.

  As shown in FIG. 691 (c), for jackpot A5 and D5 as jackpot types, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, 100 times are defined in association with the number of times saved, The short-time state A is defined in association with it (see 202db1 in FIG. 691 (c)). For this reason, the big win A5 is won in the first special symbol lottery (see 202b1 in FIG. 691 (a)), or the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 in the small hit B open period and the big win D5 is won. (See 202da2 in FIG. 691 (b)) Regardless of the game state at the time of winning, after the jackpot, the special symbol time-saving state A (continuous play mode) until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times ) Is set. As described above, the continuous play mode is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the normal mode in which the game needs to proceed mainly by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, and the pull-back mode, the big hit A5 Is one of the types of jackpots that are preferred (happy) for the player. Further, in the extended game mode where it is necessary to proceed with the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot D5 is one kind of jackpot type preferable for the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 691 (c), for big hit types B5 and C5, 0 times are defined in association with normal symbols in the normal state (normal mode). 100 time saving states A are defined in association with the time saving state (retraction mode, extended resort mode) (see 202db2 in FIG. 691 (c)). Therefore, in the normal mode that is set to the normal state of the normal symbol, if the big win B5 in the first special symbol lottery, the normal mode is set again after the big win, so the big hit B5 is a big hit that is not preferable for the player It is one type. On the other hand, in the pull-back mode, even if the big hit B5 is reached, it shifts to the extended resort mode that is advantageous after the big hit ends, and thus is a kind of big hit type preferable for the player. Also, in the consecutive house mode where it is necessary to proceed with the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot C5 that shifts to the advantageous consecutive house mode after the jackpot is one kind of jackpot type preferable for the player. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 691 (c), for the jackpot type E5, the jackpot E5 is defined as being associated with 0 times as the number of times shortened in the normal state of the normal symbol. 30 consecutive time reduction states B are defined in association with the “village mode” (see 202db3 in FIG. 691 (c)). In the normal mode where the game needs to proceed mainly through the lottery of the first special symbol and in the pull-back mode, the jackpot E5 is basically not won, but it is assumed that the normal mode is irregular or illegal. Even if you win lottery C for the second special symbol and win the jackpot E5, it will shift to the most unfavorable normal mode after the jackpot, so the jackpot E5 is the most unfavorable jackpot type in the normal mode One type. Further, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the pullback mode and the jackpot E5 is won, the mode is shifted to the pullback mode after the jackpot. In other words, if you win a big win in the first special symbol lottery, you will loop the pullback mode in spite of the transition to the 100% consecutive resort mode. This is one of the unfavorable (unfavorable) jackpot types. In addition, when the jackpot C is a small hit C and the jackpot E5, the player shifts to a pullback mode which is disadvantageous to the player as compared to the consecutive jackpot mode. It becomes one kind of unfavorable (unfavorable) jackpot type.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 691 (c), for jackpot F5 as a jackpot type, 0 is set as the number of times shortened in the normal state of the normal symbol, and the time shortened state of the normal symbol (retraction mode, 100 time reduction states B are defined in association with the “village mode” (see 202db4 in FIG. 691 (c)). In other words, when the jackpot F5 is reached, the mode transition similar to the jackpot E5 (see 202db3 in FIG. 691 (c)) is performed, but the length of the pull-back mode to transition when winning in the consecutive house mode (number of special symbol lotteries) However, it becomes longer than the case where the big hit E5 is won (the number of lotteries increases). Accordingly, the jackpot F5 is one of the unfavorable (disadvantaged) jackpot types, like the jackpot E5, in the normal mode and the pullback mode. Moreover, in the consecutive house mode, although it is one kind of unfavorable jackpot type, it can be said that it is a jackpot type that has a higher degree of advantage than the jackpot E5 in that the pullback mode after the jackpot continues for a long time.

  As described above, in the eleventh control example, the normal mode (the normal state of the normal symbol is triggered by the jackpot by setting the time reduction number specified in the time reduction number selection table 202db (see FIG. 691 (c)). ), Continuous play mode (ordinary symbol time-short state A), and pull-back mode (normal symbol time-short state B). Thereby, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the mode (game state) after the big hit, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 692. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 587) in the seventh control example, the variation pattern selection table 202d is referred to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol. It is a data table.

  FIG. 692 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 692 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the eleventh control example is different from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the seventh control example (see FIG. 587 (a)). Instead of the off (normal) table 202d2 and the special figure 1 out (probability change) table 202d3, a single special figure 1 out table 202d11 is provided, and per special figure 2 (four variations or less). A table for special figure 2 per 202d12 is provided instead of the table 202d4 for special figure 2 (5 fluctuations or more) 202d5, and a table for extraordinary figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less). Instead of 202d6 and special figure 2 out (five fluctuations or more) table 202d7, special figure 2 out (normal / retraction) table 202d13 and special figure 2 out And use the table 202d14 is different in that provided. The specified contents of the special figure 1 removal table 202d11 are the same as the special figure 1 removal (normal) table 202d2 (see FIG. 587 (c)) in the seventh control example. Is omitted.

  The special figure 2 per table 202d12 is a data table that is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 692 (b), the special figure 2 per table 202d12 has a variation pattern (variation time) selected for each mode (gaming state) when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It is prescribed. As shown in FIG. 692 (b), when the big win is obtained by lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode and the pullback mode, the fluctuation time exceeds 180 seconds as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Long fluctuations are determined. On the other hand, when the big win is obtained by lottery of the second special symbol in the consecutive house mode, the middle fluctuation per 10 seconds of the fluctuation time is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this way, in the normal mode or the pull-back mode where the game needs to be advanced by the lottery of the first special symbol, when the big special is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time is set. Thus, it is possible to reduce the gaming efficiency when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed irregularly or illegally in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed irregularly or illegally.

  The special figure 2 off (normal / retraction) table 202d13 determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when the second special symbol lottery is lost (including a small hit) in the normal mode and the pull back mode. This is a data table to be referred to. As shown in FIG. 692 (c), in the special figure 2 deviation (normal / retraction) table 202d13, only the extra long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds is used as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is stipulated. In this way, in the normal mode or pullback mode where the game needs to be advanced by the lottery of the first special symbol, a very long variation time is set when the second special symbol is lost (or small hit) By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further reduce the game efficiency when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed irregularly or illegally in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed irregularly or illegally.

  In addition, the special figure 2 out (renso) table 202d14 is referred to determine a fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the second special symbol is drawn (or small hit) in the consecutive house mode. It is a data table. As shown in FIG. 692 (d), the special figure 2 out (ream) table 202d14 defines a variation pattern that can be determined for each lottery result. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 692 (d), when the second special symbol is off, the fluctuation middle counter fluctuation is 10 seconds with respect to all the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the consecutive house mode, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, a variation time of 10 seconds is always set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 692 (d), for the small hit of the second special symbol, the small hit short whose variation time is 5 seconds with respect to the range where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 174”. Variations are defined in association with each other, and a small hit middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “175 to 198”. According to these provisions, in the extended game mode, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, only a relatively short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or 10 seconds is set. Can be increased. Therefore, since the superiority of the extended game mode can be further increased, the joy of the player when shifting to the extended game mode can be further increased. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the consecutive-villa mode.

  In addition, when a small hit with a high probability of winning in the consecutive house mode is set, the ratio of setting a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is increased, and a relatively low ratio (about 1/4) when the small hit is set. ), A relatively long variation time (for 10 seconds) is set as in the case of hitting or losing. Thus, each time a relatively long variation time is selected, it is possible to make the player think that there is a possibility that a big hit has been made directly in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, since the game can be performed while paying attention to the variation time in the extended game mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the extended game mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 693 (a), details of the common map variation pattern selection table 202dc will be described. This normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202dc is a data table that is referred to when setting a variation time of a normal symbol when a normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. The gaming state (mode) at the time when the symbol lottery is executed and the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol are defined in association with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 693 (a), for a normal state (normal mode) of a normal symbol, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in association with the normal pattern (FIG. 693 (a)). 202dc1). On the other hand, a short fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is defined in association with the short time state A (continuous play mode) of the normal symbol (see 202dc2 in FIG. 693 (a)). For the normal symbol time-short state B (retraction mode), a short fluctuation B having a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in association with it (see 202dc3 in FIG. 693 (a)).

  For this reason, when a normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode, the normal symbol variation time is set to be very long compared to the short-time state (long-run mode, pullback mode). The game efficiency when the game is played aiming at the gate 67 and the second entrance 6400 can be extremely deteriorated. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn in the normal mode. Also, by setting the variation time of the normal symbol in the continuous game mode (short-time state A) to 0.1 seconds, if the normal symbol is hit, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is directly entered the second. It can be configured to make it easier to enter the ball opening 6400. Therefore, during the continuous play mode, the game ball is distributed to the left flow path R2 (see FIG. 685) simply by hitting the game ball to the right at the maximum launch intensity and the shortest launch interval (0.6 second interval). The game balls can be entered into the second entrance 6400 with high probability (probability of 1 / 1.2, which is a probability of winning a normal symbol).

  On the other hand, by setting the variation time of the normal symbol in the pull-back mode (time reduction state B) to 0.5 seconds, even if the normal symbol lottery is won, the game ball (through through) The game balls that have passed through the gate 67) are also launched into the second entrance guidance area next to the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and distributed to the right channel R1 (see FIG. 685). It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second entrance 6400. That is, by setting a variation time of 0.5 seconds, when a normal symbol is hit, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the second entrance 6400 (that is, The electric accessory 6400a is opened (after 0.2 seconds, which is the flow down period of the flow path from the through gate 67 to the second entrance 6400). In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is 0.2 seconds, another gaming ball must not reach within 0.5 to 0.7 seconds after one gaming ball passes through the through gate 67. Cannot enter the second entrance 6400. However, even if the game ball is continuously fired to the second entrance guidance area at the shortest launch interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and the second Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the entrance 6400, the entrance into the second entrance 6400 is made after the opening period. Therefore, even if the player hits the right at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pull-back mode, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400, which is mischievous. It becomes a very disadvantageous state that only reduces the ball. Therefore, in the pull-back mode, the game method can be performed by causing the player to enter the first entrance 64 by left-handed to advance the game (to make a special symbol lottery). In other words, it is not a game method aiming at the second entrance 6400 that is easy to be opened despite the fact that the short time state of the normal symbol is given, but the same game method (by left-handed) as in the normal mode (normal game state) It is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a game method for playing a game aiming at the first entrance 64 can be performed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 693 (b). FIG. 693 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 693 (b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 590) in comparison with the hour / short counter 203da, the jackpot type storage area 203db, The mode type storage area 203dc, the V passing flag 203dd, and the winning mode storage area 203de are added. The difference is that the probability variation flag 203g, the probability variation setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, the probability variation valid flag 203n, and the probability variation valid timer 203o are deleted.

  The hour / mid-counter 203da is a counter for counting the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols until the normal symbol hour / hour state ends. If the value of the hour / short counter 203da is 1 or more, it means that the normal symbol is in the hour / short state (either extended mode or pullback mode). If the value of the hour / short counter 203da is 0, it is normal. It means the normal state of the symbol. The hour / short counter 203da has an initial value set to 0, and when the jackpot ends, the hour / short number of times specified in the hour / hour number selection table 202db (see FIG. 691 (c)) is set (see S1323 in FIG. 705). ). Further, the value of the hour / middle counter 203da is updated by subtracting one by one in the hour / hour number updating process (see FIG. 700) executed at the timing of stopping the change of the special symbol (see S2302 in FIG. 700). When the normal symbol lottery is executed, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short-time state based on the value of the short / medium counter 203da, and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability (see FIG. 586 (b)). 202c3, 202c4) and whether to draw a normal symbol with reference to a random symbol table per ordinary symbol (202c1, 202c2 in FIG. 586 (b)) for low probability. (See S608 in FIG. 702).

  The jackpot type storage area 203db is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the winning jackpot type when the jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203db, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when a special symbol lottery is won (see S331 in FIG. 699). In addition, when a special symbol lottery is made and the winning combination is passed through the V winning switch 670e3, data indicating the big winning type corresponding to the small winning type is stored (see S1629 in FIG. 706). The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db is held until the winning jackpot end timing, and is used to select the number of hour / hours from the hour / hour number selection table 202db when the jackpot ends (see S1322 in FIG. 705).

  The mode type storage area 203dc is a storage area for storing data indicating the current mode (game state). If “00H” is stored as data in this mode type storage area 203dc, it indicates that the current mode is the normal mode (normal state of normal symbols), and if “01H” is stored, This indicates that the mode is the continuous mode (ordinary symbol time-short state A), and if “02H” is stored, it indicates the pull-back mode (normal symbol time-short state B). When selecting and setting the normal symbol variation time from the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202dc (see FIG. 693 (a)), the variation time corresponding to the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is set. Is done.

  The V passing flag 203dd is a flag for indicating whether or not the V winning switch 670e3 has been passed during execution of the small hit game (whether or not it is determined that a big win will be made after the end of the small hit). . If the V passing flag 203dd is on at the end of the small hit, the big hit start is set at the end of the small hit, while if the V passing flag 203dd is off, the big hit is not started without starting the big hit. Is terminated. The initial value of the V passing flag 203dd is set to OFF, and is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 during execution of the small hit game (FIG. 707). (Refer to S2506). Further, after setting the jackpot start based on having passed the V winning switch 670e3, it is set to OFF (see S1630 in FIG. 706).

  The winning mode storage area 203de is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the mode (gaming state) when winning the jackpot. The winning mode storage area 203de stores data in the same format as the mode type storage area 203dc. At the start of the jackpot, the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is transferred to the winning mode storage area 203de, and the data is held until the jackpot ends. At the end of the jackpot, the mode in the jackpot winning is determined using the data stored in the winning mode storage area 203de, and the corresponding number of times is read from the hour / times selection table 202db (see FIG. 691 (c)). Is set (see S1322 in FIG. 705).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 694, a game state (mode) transition method in the eleventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 694, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example is roughly divided into three states (modes). That is, the normal mode (ordinary symbol normal state) shown in the upper part of FIG. 694, the extended mode (normal symbol time-short state A) shown in the lower left part of FIG. 694, and the pull back shown in the lower right part of FIG. Mode (normal symbol time-short state B).

  As described above, the normal mode indicates the normal state of the normal symbol, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400. Since it is difficult to shift to the game state, the game state is most disadvantageous for the player. In addition, as described above, the Renso mode indicates a gaming state in which the short time state A of the normal symbol is set, and the gaming ball easily enters the second entrance 6400. Is generated, and there are many opportunities to pass through the V winning switch 670e3. Further, since the extended game mode is easily set again after the jackpot, the gaming state is most advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the pullback mode indicates a gaming state in which the normal symbol time-short state B is set. As described above, since the gaming ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400, the first mode is the same as the normal mode. Although it is necessary to play a game aiming at the 1 entrance 64, the game is advantageous in comparison with the normal mode because the game shifts to the continuous play mode at a rate of 100% when winning the jackpot.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 694, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another mode only when the jackpot is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 694, when the first special symbol lottery is won and the jackpot A5 is determined as the jackpot type, the extended game mode is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the big hit B5 is determined, since the normal mode is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the most disadvantageous gaming state is repeated. That is, in the normal mode, if the big hit A5 determined at the rate of 50% in the case of the big win is not won, the game does not shift to another gaming state. In other words, even if a big win is won, it becomes a very disadvantageous gaming state in which the same state is looped at a rate of 50%.

  As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 694, there is a possibility of transition from the extended mode to another mode not only when the jackpot is reached but also when the number of times of the normal symbol is completed. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 694, a V-winning (event in which a game ball passes through the V-winning switch 670e3) occurs in the second special symbol lottery and a big win E5, F5 If any of the above is determined, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the pullback mode. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times without winning a big hit, the normal symbol is passed (falls) after a short time has passed. On the other hand, if the jackpot C5 or D5 is determined when the V prize is won, or if the jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the extended game mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Note that, as described above, the possibility that the variation of the 100 special symbols without losing the jackpot will be about 0.6%, so that the event hardly occurs. Therefore, the transition to the other mode in the consecutive house mode is when the jackpot E5 or F5 is won. The jackpots corresponding to the jackpots E5 and F5 (small jackpots C and D) are determined at a rate of 20% of the total jackpots. It becomes a very advantageous gaming state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the goal of shifting to the consecutive resort mode, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 694, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the pull-back mode to another mode not only when the jackpot is reached but also when the number of times of the normal symbol is completed. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 694, the game after the jackpot ends, regardless of whether the jackpot is A5 or the jackpot B5 when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery The state is set to the villa mode. In addition, when the lottery of special symbols for a short time is completed without making a big hit, the mode shifts (falls) to the normal mode. In normal mode, even if it is a big hit of the first special symbol, it only shifts to the consecutive house mode at a rate of 50%, whereas when it becomes a big hit of the first special symbol in the pull back mode, it always shifts to the consecutive house mode. Therefore, it is possible to make a game with a strong desire to win a jackpot while the pull-back mode continues. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the pull-back mode.

  Thus, the eleventh control example is configured to be able to go back and forth between three types of modes with different degrees of advantage. Thereby, since the game can be sharpened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 695, details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 695 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 695 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh control example is such that the expectation selection table 222da is added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 592 (a)). Is different. This expectation degree selection table 222da is used for lottery of back images for a predetermined period (until the change display of the special symbol is completed 100 times) after the extended-village mode ends (shifts to the pull-back mode). It is a data table. Here, as described above, in the eleventh control example, either 30 times (big hit E5) or 100 times (big hit F5) is set as the number of special symbol lotteries in which the pullback mode continues. That is, if the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 30 after shifting to the pull-back mode, there is a possibility of shifting (falling) to the normal mode. In the eleventh control example, it is not clearly notified whether the mode has been changed to the normal mode or whether the pull-back mode is continued, and whether the pull-back mode is continued depending on the type of the back image (see FIGS. 688 and 689). By suggesting the degree of expectation, gameability is provided that allows the player to predict whether or not the player is in the pull-back mode.

  More specifically, after the transition to the pull-back mode (that is, after the jackpot E5 or jackpot F5 is finished), the number of special symbol lottery is within 30 times (that is, stay in the pull-back mode) If the lottery count exceeds 30 times (that is, the pull-back mode may be terminated), the rear image for high expectation is set as the back image. When the special symbol lottery is executed ten times, the rear image is selected again using the expectation degree selection table 222da (the expectation degree is updated every ten lotteries). Yes. Details of the expectation level selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIG. 695 (b).

  FIG. 695 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the expectation level selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 695 (b), this expectation level selection table 222da has the back image for each mode (game state) at the time of executing the lottery for reselecting the back image (expectation re-lottery). The type and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223da are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 695 (b), for the normal mode, a high-expected rear image (FIG. 688 (a)) in the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is “0 to 4”. Reference) is defined in association with it, a back image for medium expectation (see FIG. 688 (b)) is defined in association with “5-49”, and low expectation is in the range of “50-99”. A rear image for use (see FIG. 689) is defined in association with it.

  Since the effect lottery counter 223da can take 100 values of “0 to 99”, when the expectation re-lottery is executed in the normal mode, the ratio at which the back image for high expectation is set is 5 % (5/100). On the other hand, the ratio at which the back image for medium expectation is set is 45% (45/100), and the ratio at which the back image for low expectation is set is 50% (50/100). Therefore, when the transition from the pullback mode to the normal mode has been completed (when the pullback mode is set to 30 times after the end of the previous jackpot), the back for the low expectation level is obtained by redrawing the expectation level. While the possibility of setting an image is the highest, the possibility of setting a back image for high expectation is extremely low.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 695 (b), for the pullback mode, a high-expected back image (see FIG. 688 (a)) is in the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223da “0-9”. The rear image for medium expectation is defined in association with the range of “10 to 79” (see FIG. 688 (b)), and the rear for low expectation is in the range of “80 to 99”. An image (see FIG. 689) is defined in association with it. Therefore, when the redrawing of the expected degree is executed in the pull-back mode, the ratio of setting the high-expected degree rear image is 10% (10/100), and the medium-expected degree rear image is set. The ratio is 70% (70/100), and the ratio at which the back image for low expectation is set is 20% (20/100). Therefore, when the pull-back mode is continued (when the pull-back mode is set to 100 times after the end of the previous jackpot), a back image for high expectation is set by redrawing the expectation. The possibility increases twice as much as the case where the transition to the normal mode has been completed, and the possibility of setting a back image for low expectation decreases to less than half. Further, the ratio of setting the back image for medium expectation is increased by 25%.

  Therefore, when the back image for high expectation is set, the possibility that the pull back mode is continued (expectation) increases, but when the back image for low expectation is set, the pull back mode ends. (Expectation) is increased (expected). Therefore, since the player can guess the mode according to the type of the back image, it is possible to improve the interest of the game until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times after the consecutive house mode is finished. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 696, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 696 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 696, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 592 (b)) in that an effect lottery counter 223da and a variation counter 223db are included. It is different in that it has been added. Another difference is that the breakthrough effect counter 223g is deleted along with the breakthrough effect not being executed in the seventh control example.

  The effect lottery counter 223da is a counter used to select one back image (expected degree) from the above-described expected degree selection table 222da. The value of the effect lottery counter 223da is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. When selecting a back image, the random number value (counter value) defined in the expectation level selection table 222da is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223da, and one corresponding back image is selected. The effect lottery counter 223da is updated every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 617), for example.

  The fluctuation number counter 223db is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of executions of fluctuation display) after the end of the jackpot. The initial value of the variation counter 223db is set to 0, and when the execution of the variation display effect is set based on a new variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the value is incremented by one. It is updated (see S5601 in FIG. 711). In addition, when the jackpot is won, the value is reset to zero. From the time when the pullback mode is set after the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, this variation counter 223db is referred to every time the variation display effect is set, and the expectation selection table 222da is used. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the expectation re-lottery (see S5604, S5606 to S5608 in FIG. 711).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Eleventh Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 697 to 707, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the eleventh control example will be described. First, the timer interrupt processing 5 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 697. This timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 697) is executed in place of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) in the seventh control example, and is similar to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) in the seventh control example. For example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds.

  Of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 697) in the eleventh control example, the processes of S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 are the same as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) in the seventh control example. The same processes as those in S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 are executed. In the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 697) in the eleventh control example, when the process of S102 ends, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, The random hit counter C4 per 2 and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S141). That is, in addition to the various counter values updated in the process of S103 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) in the seventh control example, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated. After the process of S141, the special symbol variation process 5 is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see S104, FIG. 600) in the seventh control example (S142), and the process proceeds to S105. Details of the special symbol variation process 5 (S142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 697) in the eleventh control example, when the process of S105 is completed, the normal symbol variation process (S106, see FIG. 604) in the seventh control example is then performed. The symbol variation process 5 is executed (S143), and the process proceeds to S107. Details of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (S143) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the special symbol variation process 5 (S142) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 698 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 5 (S142). This special symbol variation process 5 (S142) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example, and the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example. Similarly, this is a process for controlling a special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37, a third symbol variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  Of the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) in the eleventh control example, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example is performed in each of the processes S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221. ) Of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 are executed. In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) in the eleventh control example, when the process of S207 or S212 is completed, the special symbol variation start process (see S213 and FIG. 601) in the seventh control example is performed. Instead, the special symbol variation start process 5 is executed (S261), and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the mode type storage area 203dc After the data is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S262), the counter value of the hour / minute counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S263), and the process proceeds to S220. By transferring the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc to the winning mode storage area 203de before returning to the initial state (normal state of the normal symbol) in the process of S263 Until the end of the jackpot, the data indicating the mode (game state) at the time of winning the jackpot can be held. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, it is possible to accurately determine the gaming state when the jackpot is won, and to set the corresponding number of times.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) in the eleventh control example, it is determined in the process of S218 that the current special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (that is, a miss or a small hit). In this case (S218: No), when the time is in the short time state (that is, in the extended game mode or the pullback mode), the time reduction number update process for updating the time reduction number is executed (S264). Details of the short time update process (S264) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the time reduction number updating process (S264) ends, it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S265). A small hitting start process for setting the start of the opening operation is executed (S266), and the process proceeds to S221. Details of the small hitting start process (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S265, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (that is, out of play) (S265: No), the process of S266 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 699, details of the above-described special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) will be described. This special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601) in the seventh control example, and the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 601) in the seventh control example. Like reference), a special symbol lottery (win / no-go determination) is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, and the variable effects performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. Is a process for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

  Of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 699) in the eleventh control example, in each process of S301 to S312, each of S301 to S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601) in the seventh control example. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 699) in the eleventh control example, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol lottery result of this time is a big hit (S305: Yes), the current winning prize is determined. The data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db (S331), and the process proceeds to S306. By storing the data corresponding to the jackpot type in advance in the processing of S331 in the jackpot type storage area 203db, the jackpot type is accurately determined based on the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db at the end of the jackpot. Can be determined. Therefore, the gaming state after the jackpot can be set accurately.

  In the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 699) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S305 that the lottery result of the current special symbol is not a big hit (S305: No), next time It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (S332). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S332: Yes), the small hit type determination table 202da and the small hit type The display mode of the first special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the small hit type identified from the value of the counter C5 is set (S333), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 692). ) To determine (S334), and the process proceeds to S310. On the other hand, in the process of S332, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current special symbol is not a small hit (S332: No), this means that the lottery result of this time is out, so the process proceeds to S308. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 700, the details of the above-mentioned time-saver update processing (see FIG. 700) will be described. This short time update process (see FIG. 700) is one process in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) as described above, and is a process for updating the normal symbol short time number. As shown in FIG. 700, in the time reduction number update process (see FIG. 700), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction medium counter 203da is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S2301). When it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203da is 0 (S2301: No), the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode), and the time reduction state is not set (the time reduction number does not need to be updated). This process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that the value of the hour / minute counter 203da is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S2301: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203da is updated by subtracting one. (S2302), a remaining short time command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the updated value of the short time medium counter 203da is set (S2303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203da has become 0 (S2304), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203da has become 0 (S2304: Yes), the extended play mode or the pull-back mode ends. Therefore, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the transition to the normal mode is set (S2305), and the normal mode is set to the mode type storage area 203dc. “00H”, which is data to be shown, is stored (S2306), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203da after the update by the process of S2302 is not 0 (S2304: No), the processes of S2305 and S2306 are skipped, This process is finished as it is. By executing the time reduction number update process (see FIG. 700), the time reduction number can be appropriately updated in the extended play mode in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set and in the pull back mode.

  Next, the above-described small hitting start process (S266) will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit start process (S266) is one process in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) as described above, and is a process for setting the start of the small hit release operation.

  As shown in FIG. 701, in the small hitting start process (see FIG. 701), first, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 corresponding to the small hitting type is read (S2401). As described above, in the eleventh control example, when a small hit is made, the open door 670f1 of the V winning device 670 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the opening period, It is set so that the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass through for a period of 0.075 seconds (see FIG. 687).

  When the processing of S2401 is completed, data indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the current jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db (S2402). As described above, if the jackpot is A, the corresponding jackpot type is jackpot C5 (see 202da1 in FIG. 691 (b)), and if the jackpot is B, the corresponding jackpot type is jackpot D5 ( If the jackpot is C, the corresponding jackpot type is jackpot E5 (see 202da3 in FIG. 691 (b)). If the jackpot is D, the corresponding jackpot type is jackpot F5 (see 202da4 in FIG. 691 (b)).

  When the process of S2402 ends, the start of a small hit is set (S2403), and this process ends. By executing the small hitting start process (see FIG. 701), the corresponding small hitting operation pattern can be started when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hitting is stopped.

  Next, the details of the above-described normal symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described with reference to FIG. This normal symbol variation process 5 (S143) is executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 604) in the seventh control example in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 697). This is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, as in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 604) in the seven control examples.

  Of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 702) in the eleventh control example, the respective processing of S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 is the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 604) in the seventh control example. The same processes as those in S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 702) in the eleventh control example, after setting the display mode according to the normal symbol lottery result in the processing of S612 or S613, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202dc. (See FIG. 693) is read out (S641), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the current mode indicated by the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is read from the read table and set (S642). This process ends.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 702) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S620 that the normal symbol is not in the time-short state (the value of the time-shortage counter 203da is 0) ( (S620: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a and the number of times of opening are set to 0.1 second × 1 time (S643), and the process proceeds to S623.

  On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-short state (the value of the time-shortage counter 203da is 1 or more) (S620: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a, and the opening The number of times is set to 0.2 second × 1 time (S644), and the process proceeds to S623.

  By executing this normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 702), the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a when hitting the normal symbol are appropriately set according to the mode. be able to. As a result, in the normal mode and the pullback mode, it is possible to form a state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400 during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a, while in the continuous play mode Then, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can be easily entered into the second entrance 6400 during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a. As a result, in the pullback mode, despite the fact that the short time state of the normal symbol is set, the novel gameplay that makes it more advantageous for the player to make a left strike aiming at the first entrance 64 is provided. Can be realized.

  Next, the start-up process 5 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. This start-up process 5 is a process executed in place of the start-up process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 607). Similarly to the start-up process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 607), the power-on process is performed. It is a process that is started along with it.

  Of the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 703) in the eleventh control example, in steps S901 to S910 and S912 to S916, S901 to S910 of the start-up process (see FIG. 607) in the seventh control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S912-S916 is performed. In start-up process 5 (see FIG. 703) in the eleventh control example, when the process of S910 is completed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are read (S931). Then, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state specified from each read data is set (S912), and the process proceeds to S913. By executing the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 703), the voice lamp control device 113 can be made to accurately grasp the power-on mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 704, the jackpot control process 5 (S1031) executed in the main process (see FIG. 608) in the eleventh control example will be described. The jackpot control process 5 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (S1004, see FIG. 609) in the seventh control example, and is a process for controlling the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a. .

  Of the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704) in the eleventh control example, in the processes of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609) in the seventh control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S1107-S1109 is performed. In the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined that the start timing of a new round is determined in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening 650a is opened. It is set (S1141), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1142), and this process ends.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), then, the specific winning opening 650a It is determined whether or not the closing condition is satisfied (S1143). As described above, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when 30 seconds elapse after each big hit round is started or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 650a. In the process of S1143, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific prize opening 650a is satisfied (S1143: Yes), the specific prize opening 650a is set to be closed (S1144), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1143 that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S1143: No), the process proceeds to S1107.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S1109 that the jackpot end timing has come (the end timing of the ending effect has been reached) (S1109: Yes). ), Instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 611) in the seventh control example, the jackpot end process 5 (S1145) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process 5 (S1145) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 705 is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 5 (S1145). This jackpot end process 5 (S1145) is a process executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 611) in the seventh control example, as described above, and the jackpot end process (see FIG. 611) in the seventh control example. This is a process for setting the gaming state (mode) after the jackpot ends.

  In this jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 705), first, the time reduction number selection table 202db (see FIG. 691 (c)) is read (S1321), the time reduction number specified in the read table, and the type of the time reduction state. Among them, the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db and the mode for winning the jackpot indicated by the data stored in the winning mode storage area 203de, and the mode (time saving) (State type) is specified (S1322). When the processing of S1322 ends, the specified number of time reductions is set in the time reduction medium counter 203da (S1323), and data indicating the mode (type of time reduction state, gaming state) specified in the processing of S1322 is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc. (S1324). Next, a state command indicating the set gaming state (mode) is set (S1325), the big hit flag 203r and the winning mode storage area 203de are reset (S1326), and this process ends.

  By executing the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 705), the gaming state after the jackpot can be appropriately set according to the jackpot type and the gaming state (mode) at the time of winning.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 706, the small hit control process 5 (1032) executed in the main process (see FIG. 608) in the eleventh control example will be described. This small hit control process 5 (S1032) is a process executed in place of the small hit control process (S1005, see FIG. 614) in the seventh control example, and is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning device 670. is there.

  Of the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in the eleventh control example, in the processes of S1601 to S1604 and S1607 to S1610, S1601 to the small hit control process (see FIG. 614) in the seventh control example, respectively. The same processes as S1604 and S1607 to S1610 are executed. Further, in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the processing of S1604 that the small hit game is being executed (that is, the small hit medium flag 203s is on). (S1604: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1621). If it is determined that it is the opening timing (S1621: Yes), the V winning opening 670a is opened. (S1622), this process ends.

  In the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1621: No), then, at the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a. If it is determined that it is the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1623: Yes), the closing of the V winning opening 670a is set (S1624), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1623, when it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1623: No), the process proceeds to S1607.

  In addition, in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined that it is not the small hit end timing in the process of S1609 (S1609: No), the game ball for the V winning switch 670e3 The V passage detection process for monitoring the passage of is executed (S1625), and this process ends. Details of the V passage detection process (S1625) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in the eleventh control example, when the process of S1610 is finished, next, whether the V passing flag 203dd is on (the V winning switch 670e3 is set to the game ball during the small hit) (S1626) and if it is determined that the V-pass flag 203dd is on (S1626: Yes), each process of S1627 to S1630 for setting the jackpot execution is performed. Run. Specifically, first, the data in the mode type storage area 203dc is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S1627), and the data in the hour and middle counter 203da and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S1628). Next, the start of the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area 203db is set (S1629), the V passing flag 203dd is set to OFF (S1630), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1626, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is off (S1626: No), the big hit execution condition is not satisfied during the execution of the small hit game (V winning switch 670e3) This means that no game balls have passed through), and the processing for starting the big hit (each processing of S1627 to S1630) is skipped, and this processing is ended as it is.

  By executing this small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706), when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit game, the start of the big hit corresponding to the small hit type is accurately performed. Can be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 707, details of the above-described V passage detection process (S1625) will be described. This V pass detection process (S1625) is one process in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706), and is a process for monitoring the passing of the game ball to the V winning switch 670e3 as described above.

  In the V passage detection process (see FIG. 707), first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501). If it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501: Yes), This means that the passing of the V winning switch 670e3 has already been detected in the small hit this time, and the execution of the big win has already been confirmed after the end of the small hit, so this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2501 that the V-pass flag 203dd is off (S2501: No), it is then determined whether a game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502), and the V winning switch 670e3 is determined. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through (S2502: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2502 that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502: Yes), then the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is detected for the normal period (V It is determined whether it is a valid period (S2503). Here, the V effective period is 0.075 seconds in which the special discharge flow path 670e2 is set to be allowed to pass, and the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 670e2 just before the end of the period reaches the V pass switch 670e3. Is set to 0.2 seconds, which is a period that may be required until the end of the period.

  In the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is detected not during the V effective period (S2503: No), an illegal act of illegally passing the V winning switch 670e3 and executing the jackpot is performed. Since there is a possibility that it has been performed, an error command is set (S2504), and this processing is terminated. By setting the error command, the display of the error image is set in the sound lamp control device 113, so that the store clerk or the like of the hall who visually recognizes the error image can recognize the occurrence of the illegal act at an early stage.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the V winning switch 670e3 has passed during the V effective period (S2503: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3. A V pass command for notifying is set (S2505), the V pass flag 203dd is set to ON (S2506), and this process ends. By setting the V passing flag 203dd to ON, it is possible to set the big hit start after the small hit end.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Eleventh Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 708 to 711. First, with reference to FIG. 708, the details of the command determination process 5 (S4141) in the eleventh control example will be described. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 618). Similarly to the command determination process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 618), This is processing for executing control according to the type of command output from the main control device 110.

  Of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 708) in the eleventh control example, in each process of S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215, S4201 to S4209 of the command determination process (see FIG. 618) in the seventh control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S4213-S4215 is performed. Further, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 708) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110. (S4209: Yes), a state command process for performing control according to the gaming state (mode) notified by the state command is executed (S4221), and this process ends. Details of the status command will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 709 is a flowchart showing the above-described status command processing (S4221). This state command process (S4221) is a process for performing control according to the gaming state (mode) notified by the state command as described above. In this state command process (4221), first, the data in the game state storage area 223h is updated according to the gaming state indicated by the received state command (S5501). That is, it is updated to data indicating the gaming state notified from the main control device 110.

  When the processing of S5501 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the status command received this time is a status command for notifying that the mode has been shifted to the extended resort mode (S5502), and the fact that the mode command has been switched to If it is determined that the command is a command to be displayed (S5502: Yes), a rear image for the extended-village mode is set (S5503), and this process ends. When the mode is shifted to the villa mode, a back image (not shown) dedicated to the villa mode can be set so that the player can easily understand that the mode is the villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the transition despite the transition to the consecutive resort mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5502 that the command is not for notifying that the mode has been shifted to the extended resort mode (S5502: No), then whether the command is for notifying the gaming state when the power is restored. (S5504: Yes), the back image for the normal mode is set (S5506), and this process is terminated. A status command that is not a status command for notifying the continuous mode and that is output when the power is restored is a command indicating a pull-back mode or a normal mode. By setting the same back image in both the pull-back mode and the normal mode, especially when the mode is switched to the pull-back mode and the number of fluctuations exceeds 30 times and the power is cut off within 100 times In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the gaming state from the back image when power is restored (to make it difficult to distinguish between the normal mode and the pull-back mode). That is, it is possible to take over the game before the power is shut off (the game that predicts whether the mode has been shifted to the normal mode or the pull-back mode is continued) even after the power is turned on again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player when the power is cut off due to so-called instantaneous power interruption or the like.

  In the process of S5504, when it is determined that the current status command is not a command at the time of power recovery (S5504: No), it is then determined whether it is a command indicating a normal mode (S5505), and the normal mode is changed. If it is determined that the command is a command to be displayed (S5505: Yes), the process proceeds to S5506 in order to set the back image for the normal mode. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5505 that the command is not a command indicating the normal mode (that is, a command indicating the pullback mode) (S5505: No), a rear image for high expectation (see FIG. 688 (a)). ) Is set (S5507), and this process ends. When the pull back mode is notified, it is possible to recognize that the player is relatively advantageous by setting a back image for high expectation. Therefore, since the game can be continued even after the extended villa mode ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 710, the variable display setting process 5 (S4142) in the eleventh control example will be described. This variation display setting process 5 (S4142) is executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 624) in the seventh control example, and is similar to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 624) in the seventh control example. This is a process for executing a variation effect in the three-symbol display device 81.

  Of the fluctuation display setting process 5 (see FIG. 710), the processes of S4801 to S4809 are the same as the processes of S4801 to S4809 of the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 624) in the seventh control example. Is done. Further, in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 710) in the eleventh control example, when the process of S4805 is completed, a rear image indicating the degree of expectation as to whether or not the pull-back mode is continued is selected again. The expectation level update process is executed (S4831), and the process proceeds to S4806. Details of the expectation level update processing (S4831) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 711 is a flowchart showing the above-described expectation level update process (S4831). In this expectation level update process (S4831), first, the value of the variation counter 223db is updated by adding 1 (S5601), and then whether the current mode is the extended game mode (continuous to the game state storage area 223h). It is determined whether or not data indicating the villa mode is stored (S5602). If it is determined in the processing of S5602 that the mode is the extended-village mode (S5602: Yes), the possibility of the pull-back mode is 0, and it is not necessary to suggest the degree of expectation by the back image, so this processing is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5602 that the current mode is not the extended play mode (S5602: No), it is then determined whether a back image for the normal mode is set (S5603), If it is determined that the back image of the back is set (S5603: Yes), there is no possibility of re-drawing the back image (the system shifts to the normal mode after the big hit and the normal mode continues) This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, when it is determined that the back image for the normal mode is not set (S5603: No), the pull-back mode is set after the previous jackpot and has already fallen into the normal mode. This means that the pull-back mode is continued. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation counter 223db is 101 (S5604). If the value of the fluctuation counter 223db is 101 (S5604: Yes), it means that the number of fluctuations in the pull-back mode is completed and the normal mode is entered, regardless of whether the previous big hit is a big hit E5 or a big hit F5. A back image for the normal mode is set (S5605), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5604, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 101 (S5404: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 223db is greater than 30. (S5606), if it is determined that it is 30 or less (S5606: No), the number of fluctuations that determines that the pullback mode is continued regardless of whether the previous jackpot is a jackpot E5 or jackpot F5 is high expectation Since there is no need to change from the back image for use, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5606 that the value of the variation counter 223db is greater than 30 (S5606: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the variation counter 223db is 31. (S5607). In the process of S5607, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is 31 (S5607: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for performing the lottery of the expected degree is executed. More specifically, the expectation level selection table 222da is read (S5609), and the back image (expected level) corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is specified from the read table and set as the back image (S5610). This process is terminated. As a result, the player can be informed of the expected degree of whether or not the pull-back mode is continuing when the pull-back mode may have ended, so the pull-back mode can be relied on the back image. It is possible to predict whether or not is continuing. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the process of S5607, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 31 (S5607: No), it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608). Even when it is determined that it is (S5608: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for redrawing the expected degree is executed. In other words, after reaching the number of fluctuations that may have ended the pull-back mode, the expectation can be updated every time the fluctuation display is executed 10 times. Therefore, since it is possible to accurately predict whether or not the player is in the pull-back mode as the game continues, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the process of S5608, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is not a multiple of 10 (S5608: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, in addition to the case where a special symbol lottery is won, a V winning switch inside the V winning device 670 that can be entered when a small hit is won. Even when a game ball passes through 670e3, the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the small wins cannot be won in the first special symbol lottery, but the second special symbol lottery is won with a high probability (9/10). In other words, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, even if the lottery result does not become a big win, a big hit can be expected if the lottery becomes a big hit. It can be said that the lottery of special symbols is more advantageous to the player. In the eleventh control example, the ratio (easy to be executed) of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is varied according to the gaming state. In other words, a game state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and a game state in which it is easy to enter are provided to the second entrance 6400. More specifically, in the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery becomes lower, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer, and the normal symbol hits further. In this case, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is shortened, even if the through gate 67 is continuously aimed by right-handing, the rate at which the electric accessory 6400a is opened becomes extremely low, and the game is entered into the second entrance 6400. It is also difficult to enter the ball. On the other hand, in the consecutive-village mode in which the short-time state A of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the normal symbol hits Since the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a at the time becomes longer, it is possible to make many game balls enter the second entrance 6400 only by continuing to fire the game balls aiming at the through gate 67 by right-handing. . Therefore, the extended mode can form an advantageous state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the normal mode.

  Furthermore, in the eleventh control example, in addition to the normal mode and the extended play mode, a pullback mode in which the normal symbol time-short state B is set is provided. In this pull back mode, although the probability of hitting a normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a in the case of hitting a normal symbol are the same as in the extended mode, the variation time of the normal symbol is different from the extended mode. It is configured. In the reaming mode, the normal symbol variation time so that the electric ball 6400a is opened at a timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400. However, in the pull back mode, after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the second entrance 6400, and the next game ball reaches the second entrance 6400. The variation time of the normal symbol is set so that the electric accessory 6400a is opened only before. As a result, in the pull back mode, it is possible to frequently release the electric accessory 6400a by continuing to fire the game ball aiming at the through gate 67, but the game ball is almost released to the second entrance 6400. Since it does not enter the ball, it will be in a very disadvantageous state, only to reduce the possession ball unnecessarily. Therefore, in the pull-back mode, the game method can be performed by causing the player to enter the first entrance 64 by left-handed to advance the game (to make a special symbol lottery). In other words, a game method similar to that in the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of a game method aiming at the second entrance 6400 that is easily opened despite the fact that the short time state of the normal symbol is given. Can realize a novel gameplay.

  Further, in the eleventh control example, when the pullback mode is a big win in the first special symbol lottery, there is a higher possibility of shifting to the extended play mode after the big win ends than in the normal mode. . In addition, in the eleventh control example, after the extended-village mode ends, the pull-back mode is set at least until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times. For this reason, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to continue the game until the special symbol lottery is performed at least 30 times after the end of the consecutive resort mode. Here, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine) of a specification that is awarded a big hit when a special symbol lottery is won or when a game ball enters a specific area, There are only two types of game states, a normal game state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter a specific area and a short-time game state where a game ball is easy to enter a specific area, and immediately after the short-time game state ends The specifications that shift to the normal gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous, were common. However, with this configuration, there is a risk that the player's motivation for the game will be greatly reduced when transitioning to an unfavorable normal gaming state, and the player immediately quits the game when the short-time gaming state ends. There was a possibility. On the other hand, in the eleventh control example, after the extended-village mode is finished, at least until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times, the special control that makes it easy to shift to the extended-village mode when the big hit is made. The state (retraction mode) is set. As a result, even if the Renso mode ends and the game ball enters a disadvantageous gaming state in which it is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400, the player's motivation for the game is reduced. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from quitting immediately after the consecutive house mode is ended, and thus the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  The mode transition ratio (the ratio of each jackpot type) is not limited to the contents of the eleventh control example, and is arbitrarily determined within the range where the normal mode is the most disadvantageous and the extended game mode is the most advantageous. be able to. For example, in the eleventh control example, when the first special symbol lottery is won in the normal mode, the gaming state after the jackpot is configured to be either the consecutive mode or the normal mode. However, the retraction mode may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 10%). Further, in the eleventh control example, when the first special symbol lottery is won in the pull-back mode, the mode is always shifted to the extended mode. However, the normal mode and the pull-back mode are also lower than the extended mode. It is good also as a structure which can be set by a ratio.

  In the eleventh control example, only 30 times or 100 times are provided as the number of pull-back modes. However, the number is not limited to this, and the number of times may be further diversified. As a result, it can be made more difficult to determine whether or not the pull-back mode has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more seriously predict how long the pull-back mode has continued. In addition, it is a part of the jackpot won during the consecutive house mode, and it is configured to shift to the normal mode, and as with the case where the pull back mode is set, the degree of expectation is suggested by the type of the back image It is good also as a structure. With this configuration, even when the normal mode is set after the jackpot is over, the player can continue the game in an attempt to determine whether or not the pull-back mode is set from the type of the back image. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the eleventh control example, the state of the sorting member 6600 includes a state in which the game balls are distributed to the right channel R1 and the state in which the game balls are distributed to the left channel R2 by the passage (distribution) of the game balls. Although it was set as the structure switched, it is not restricted to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines the firing space | interval of a game ball and switches the state of the distribution member 6600 electrically. In this case, for example, the operation may be performed so that the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 are alternately distributed in the short time state A, and may be operated so as to be distributed only to the right flow channel R1 in the short time state B. . By configuring in this way, even in the short time state B, even reaching the through gate 67 is inhibited, so that the game can be performed more reliably by left-handed.

  In the eleventh control example, one state (game mode) in which a game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400 and two states in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400. (Normal mode, pullback mode). That is, in the continuous mode, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400, while in other modes (normal mode, pull-back mode), it passes through the through gate 67. The game ball that has been fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has flowed down the right flow path R1 also has a normal symbol so that it cannot enter the second entrance 6400. Although the variable time, the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a, etc. were set, it is not restricted to this. For example, two types of gaming states may be provided as a gaming state in which a game ball can easily enter the second entrance 6400. Specifically, for example, both the short-time state A and the short-time state B are configured as game states that are easy to enter the second entrance 6400. In the short-time state A, the game balls are fired at the shortest firing interval. If it continues, only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second entrance 6400 (it is fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and passes through the right flow path R1. On the other hand, in the short time state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 are fired next to the right flow path R1. It is good also as a structure which sets the open period of the electrically-driven accessory 6400a so that both the game balls which passed through can be entered. That is, in the short-time state A, an opening period is set such that the electric accessory 6400a is closed before the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 6400. In the short-time state B, it is possible to set an open period in which the electric accessory 6400a is closed after the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 6400. Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the useless balls in the time-short state B when the game ball is continuously hit to the right rather than the time-short state A. Therefore, since the time-short state B can be in a state of higher advantage, the player who is set with the time-short state B can be more pleased than the time-short state A is set.

  In the eleventh control example, by changing the variation time of the normal symbol between the time-shortening state A and the time-shortening state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 directly enters the second entrance 6400 in the time-shortening state A. On the other hand, in the short time state B, a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and a game ball that has been launched next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 cannot enter the second entrance 6400. It was set as the composition. That is, in the short-time state A, when the game ball is continuously hit to the right at the shortest firing interval, most of the game balls distributed to the left channel R2 by the distribution member 6600 enter the second entrance 6400. On the other hand, in the short-time state B, neither a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the right channel R1 nor a game ball that is allocated to the left channel R2 can enter the second entrance 6400. Although it has been configured to be possible, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the game ball enters the second entrance 6400 in the short time state B by changing the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a according to the type of the short time state. It is good also as a structure which becomes difficult to ball. Specifically, for example, in the time reduction state A, as in the above eleventh control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.1 second, and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 second. Thus, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the second entrance 6400 directly. On the other hand, in the time-short state B, after 0.1 seconds, which is a normal symbol fluctuation time, has elapsed, it is released instantaneously (for example, 0.01 seconds), and then 0.4 seconds have elapsed. The electric accessory 6400a may be opened for a relatively long time (for example, 0.19 seconds). By configuring in this way, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 6400 before and after the electric accessory 6400a is momentarily opened. It becomes impossible to enter the entrance 6400. In addition, since the game ball fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second entrance 6400 only after a relatively long opening time (0.19 seconds) has elapsed, Even if the right hand is executed, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400. Therefore, since the same operation as the eleventh control example can be realized, the game can be performed by left-handed in the time-short state B.

  In the eleventh control example, in the time reduction state A, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is always 0.1 second (the fluctuation time during which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can easily enter the second entrance 6400). In the short time state B, the normal symbol variation time is always set to 0.5 seconds (variation time that makes it difficult to enter the second entrance 6400), but the variation time varies. It may be provided. Specifically, for example, in the time reduction state A, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set with a low probability (for example, 10%), and in the time reduction state B, a variation time of 0.1 seconds with a low probability. May be configured. Thereby, the variation time of a normal symbol can be diversified.

  In the eleventh control example, when the normal symbol hits the normal symbol in the short time state A, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second entrance 6400 when it hits the normal symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation time of the normal symbol may be determined so that the game balls that are launched next to the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and distributed to the right channel R1 can enter. By configuring in this way, in the short time state A, it is not possible to enter the second entrance 6400 simply by passing the game ball through the through gate 67. You can keep firing the ball. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the eleventh control example, the center of gravity of the sorting member 6600 is biased to the lower right side by the biased portion 6600c of the sorting member 6600, so that the game ball does not reach the sorting member 6600 for 1.5 seconds or longer In this case, the distribution member 6600 is returned to the state where the distribution member 6600 is distributed to the right flow path R1, but the uneven weight portion 6600c is not necessarily provided. Regardless of the game ball firing interval, the game balls that have reached the sorting means may be alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 712 to 728. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example described above, the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is the most disadvantageous state (the ball is likely to be reduced and the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is easily executed), The extended game mode in which the short-time state A of the normal symbol is set is the most advantageous state (the state in which the holding ball is difficult to reduce and the advantageous second special symbol lottery is easily executed). Further, in the pull-back mode that may shift when a big hit is made in the consecutive resort mode, it is necessary to advance the game by making the game ball enter the first entrance 64 by left-handing as in the normal mode. However, in the pull-back mode, when the big win is made by the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of shifting to the extended mode is higher than the case where the big win is made in the normal mode. In other words, as an unfavorable mode (game state) in which the game needs to proceed by lottery of the first special symbol, two types of modes, a normal mode and a pull-back mode, are provided, and the predetermined mode after the extended villa mode ends. A relatively advantageous pullback mode is set only during the period.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, the normal symbol time reduction state B is set to the most unfavorable gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the villa mode even if the jackpot is reached, and when the normal symbol normal state is reached, Compared to the short-time state B, the transition rate to the extended resort mode in the case of a big hit is configured to be higher. More specifically, in the normal symbol short-time state B, if the first special symbol lottery wins, the gaming state after the jackpot ends up in the normal symbol short-time state B at a high rate, and the low rate in the consecutive house mode. On the other hand, when the big win is made by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the 100% extended game mode. As a result, it is easier for the normal symbol time-shortening state B to end and the normal symbol normal-state transitioning to the villa mode, so that the time-shortening state B is set when the time-shortening state B is set. It is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a game is played in the hope that it will end.

  Further, in the present twelfth control example, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, a winning combination is made with a low probability (for example, 1/200). The small bonus type for the first special symbol is the small bonus type that shifts to the villa mode after the big bonus given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3, or the small symbol that shifts to the normal state of the normal symbol. A hit type is provided. For this reason, if the winning ball is won and the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3, there is a possibility that it will shift to an advantageous state. It is possible to provide a novel gameability in which a game is played in the hope that it will be a small hit rather than a big win.

  Further, in the twelfth control example, in addition to the case where the number of lotteries for the special symbol has been completed a specified number of times (for example, 100 times) in the 1 short time state, a specific type of small hit (small hit A6) in the 1 short time state Even if the number of times of winning becomes a specified number of times (for example, once), it is configured to shift directly from the short-time state to the normal state. In other words, when a specific type of small win (small hit A6) is won in the short time state B of the normal symbol, the small win ends without the game ball passing through the V winning switch 670e3, and the remaining short Regardless of the number of times, a transition is made directly to a relatively advantageous normal mode. As a result, in the short-term state B of the most disadvantageous normal symbol, it is possible to play a game in anticipation that a specific type of small hit (A6) will be won at an early stage (the number of lotteries with a small special symbol). it can. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous while the most disadvantageous time-short state B is set, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which it is more advantageous that a V winning is not generated in a specific type of small hit (small hit A6).

  In the following description of the twelfth control example, for the sake of simplification, the most disadvantageous normal symbol time-short state B is referred to as “normal mode”, and it is a big hit than the time-short state B. The normal state of a normal symbol that is easy to shift to the consecutive resort mode is referred to as “preparation mode”. Note that the time shortening state A of the normal symbol is the most advantageous state as in the eleventh control example, and is therefore referred to as a “long play mode” as in the eleventh control example.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, an audio lamp The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The control process to be executed is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. 7 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the seventh control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 712, description will be given of a selection effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit is made in the normal mode (ordinary symbol time-short state B) in the twelfth control example. As described above, in the twelfth control example, when the big winning is made by passing the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit period, the small hit type (small hit B6, C6) that shifts to the extended play mode or the preparation mode after the big hit is reached. ), And a small hit type (small hit A6) in which the short-time state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode when the small hit ends without passing through the V winning switch 670e3. In other words, when the first special symbol is a lottery, if the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 and the jackpot is executed, it is advantageous and the V winning switch 670e3 passes. There is provided a small hit type that is more advantageous when the small hit is completed without doing so. In this selection effect, there is an effect in which the player selects whether to make a right turn to pass the V winning switch 670e3 or to make a left turn so that the game ball does not pass the V winning switch 670e3. Is done.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 712, when winning a small hit during the normal mode, “3”, “4” and “1” indicating the small hit are displayed for the display area Ds2 in the upper right part of the display screen. The third symbol of the combination with "" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into a left and right display mode, and a horizontally long and substantially rectangular display region HR7 in which characters “Choose!” Are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Is formed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 712, in the left half of the display screen, a horizontally long and substantially rectangular display region HR8 on which the letters “Chance in preparation mode with V avoidance !?” are displayed is formed below. Displays an arrow image YG1 simulating a left-pointing arrow on which the characters “left-handed” are displayed. In addition, in the right half of the display screen, there is formed a horizontally elongated display area HR9 in which characters such as “V get a big hit! , An arrow image YG2 simulating a right-pointing arrow on which characters “right-handed” are displayed is displayed.

  Depending on these display contents, there is a possibility that the player may shift to the preparation mode by making a left turn, but when a V winning is made by making a right turn, the player shifts to the extended game mode in addition to the jackpot. It can be understood that there is a possibility of doing. This allows the player to determine whether it is better to make a right strike aiming for a V prize or to make a left strike to avoid a V prize, and a game in accordance with that decision. Since the game can be played by the method, the interest of the player can be improved every time a small hit is made. In the twelfth control example, the V winning is generated while the ratio of determining the small hit type (small hit A6) to shift to the preparation mode when the V winning is avoided is 50%. The ratio of determining the small hit type (small hit B6) that shifts to the consecutive home mode after the big hit is 40%, and when the V winning is generated, the mode shifts to the preparation mode (short time state B) after the big hit. The ratio at which the small hit type (small hit C6) is determined is 10%. Also, if a V win occurs at the small hit A6, the normal mode is reset 100 times after the big win. Therefore, if a game is played aiming for a V prize and a V prize is generated as intended, a big hit will always be given, but the normal mode will be looped rather than the possibility of shifting to the consecutive resort mode. The possibility is higher. In addition, if the V winning is avoided, the mode is shifted to the preparation mode at a rate of 50%, and the normal mode is maintained at the rate of 50%, so it is more serious whether to avoid the V winning or to aim for the V winning. Can be judged. In addition, the determination of whether to win the V prize or to aim for the V prize can be made different depending on the remaining number of times (the remaining number of times in the normal mode). Specifically, for example, when the number of time reductions in the normal mode is small, the player who avoids the V prize rather than taking the risk that the player will be awarded the V prize and the normal mode is reset. Can be thought to be good. Further, when the number of time reductions is large, even if the number of time reductions is reset, there is little shock, so it can be considered that the V prize should be positively aimed. Therefore, since the game method when the selection effect is generated can be varied according to the remaining number of times in the normal mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electric Configuration in Twelfth Control Example>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 713 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 713 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth control example is the addition of a small hit number of times selection table 202ea to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 690 (a)). It is different in that it is. Further, the first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, the small hit type selection table 202da, and the short time count selection table 202db are partially changed. Since the other configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 690 (a)) in the eleventh control example described above, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 713 (b). FIG. 713 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 713 (b), in the first random number table 202a in the twelfth control example, five random numbers (counter values) “0 to 4” are defined as determination values determined to be big hits. (See 202a1 in FIG. 713 (b)). Note that, similarly to the eleventh control example, the determination value that is a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Of the 400 random number values (counter values) that the first per-random number counter C1 can take, the number of random-number values determined to be big hits is 5, so that a special symbol lottery was executed in the twelfth control example. In this case, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/80 (5/400). That is, it is set twice or more higher than the jackpot probability (1/200) in the eleventh control example. This makes it difficult to pass the number of time reductions before the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal mode. Therefore, when the mode is changed from the normal mode (normal symbol time-short state B) to the preparation mode (normal symbol normal state), the player can have a greater satisfaction. The normal mode basically continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. The chance that a special symbol lottery will be held 100 times and never won a big win is about 28.4% (79/80 to the 100th power), so the possibility of shifting from the normal mode to the preparation mode is 28. 4%.

  Further, “5 to 397” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 713 (b)), and determination that is determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol “398, 399” is defined as a value range (see 202a3 in FIG. 713 (b)). Therefore, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 1/200 (2/400). In other words, in the normal mode, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be lower than the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, it is configured such that the possibility of shifting to another mode with a big hit or the passage of a short time is higher than the shift to another mode triggered by a small hit.

  Also, “5 to 40” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 713 (b)), and the determination value determined as the small hit of the second special symbol “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 713 (b)). Thus, as in the eleventh control example, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the winning ball is won with a high probability (9/10), so that the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 670e3. More periods are set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the short time state A (the extended villa mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed.

  Next, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 713 (c). FIG. 713 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 713 (c), in the twelfth control example, the jackpot A6 and the jackpot B6 are provided as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot C6 is provided as the jackpot of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 713 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, “big jackpot A6” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 69”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 713 (c)). This “jackpot A6” is a special jackpot in which the number of rounds is five and the mode after the jackpot is varied according to the gaming state (mode) at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, when the jackpot is A6 in the time-saving state (normal mode, extended mode), after the jackpot, the normal mode with the time-saving count of 100 is set, while the normal state of normal symbols (preparation mode) ), “Large hit A6” is set, and the villa mode is set to 100 times. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with “big hit A6” is 70, so the first special symbol The percentage that “big hit A6” is determined when the big win is won is 70%.

  Since the Renso mode is a game state in which the game is progressed mainly by the lottery of the second special symbol, in most cases where the “big hit A6” is won, it is necessary to advance the game by the lottery of the first special symbol. A normal mode or a preparation mode. In the normal mode, when the jackpot is A6, the most unfavorable normal mode will be set again after the jackpot is over, and the 100 times of the number of times will be reset regardless of the number of times when the jackpot is won. Therefore, in the normal mode, “big hit A6” is the most disadvantageous big hit type. On the other hand, when the jackpot A6 is set in the preparation mode, the most advantageous consecutive house mode (short-time state A) is set after the jackpot is ended. Therefore, if the jackpot A6 is set during the preparation mode, it is advantageous for the player. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 713 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, “big jackpot B6” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “70 to 99”. (See 202b2 in FIG. 713 (c)). This “jackpot B6” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the villa mode regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, in the normal mode, it is a jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with “big hit B6” is 30, so the first special symbol In the case of winning a big hit in the lottery, the ratio of “big hit A6” being determined is 30%. In other words, in the normal mode, even if a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the “big hit A6” in which the normal mode is set again after the big win at a rate of 70% is determined. The “big hit B6” for which the consecutive resort mode is set is determined. In other words, even if it is a big hit in the normal mode, the expectation to shift to another mode is low (ratio of 30%), so in the normal mode it will be a big hit rather than a big win in the first special symbol lottery In this case, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that makes the user want to move to the preparation mode after exiting the normal mode (ending the time-saving state).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 713 (c), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, “big hit C6” is defined in association with all the values of the first hit type counter C2 (FIG. 713). (See 202b3 of (c)). This “big jackpot C6” is a big jackpot that has 15 rounds and shifts to the villa mode after the big jackpot ends. Therefore, when a big hit is made in the extended game mode in which a game is progressed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the game always shifts to the extended game mode again after the big win ends. Therefore, in the twelfth control example, as in the eleventh control example, in the consecutive-village mode, the winner of the second special symbol lottery is repeated again after the jackpot rather than the jackpot via the jackpot. There is a high possibility of going to Zhuang mode. Therefore, a player can be pleased when the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 714 (a), details of the small hit type selection table 202da in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 714 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table 202da.

  As shown in FIG. 714 (a), “small hit A6” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 49” as the small hit type of the first special symbol. (See 202da1 in FIG. 714 (a)). This “small hit A6” is a small hit type to which “big hit D6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. The jackpot D6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the normal mode is set after the jackpot is ended regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. In other words, “small hit A6” is a small hit type that is most disadvantageous in the gaming state after the big hit if V is won during the small hit game. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hitting type counter C5 can take, the counter value of “small hitting A6” is 50. Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the “small hitting A6” "Is determined at 50% (50/100). The “small hit A6” is a small hit that triggers the end of the short-time state regardless of the remaining number of short-time times. For this reason, in the normal mode, if it becomes “small winning A6” and no V winning occurs, the mode shifts to a comparatively advantageous preparation mode after the small winning, so that the V winning is not made rather than the V winning However, it is a special small hit type that is advantageous in the gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 714 (a), as the small hitting type of the first special symbol, “small hitting B6” is associated with the range of the small hitting type counter C5 being “50 to 89”. (See 202da2 in FIG. 714 (a)). This “small hit B6” is a small hit type to which “big hit B6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. As described above, the jackpot B6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the extended game mode is set after the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. In other words, “small hit B6” is a small hit type in which the game state after the big hit becomes the most advantageous state by winning V in the small hit game. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the counter value that is “small hit B6” is 40. "Is determined to be 40% (40/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 714 (a), as the small hitting type of the first special symbol, “small hitting C6” is associated with the range of the value of the small hitting type counter C5 “90 to 99”. (See 202da3 in FIG. 714 (a)). This “small hit C6” is a small hit type to which “big hit E6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. This “jackpot E6” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the preparation mode is set after the jackpot is ended regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, the “small hit C6” is a small hit type in which the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous state by making a V win during the small hit game. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hitting type counter C5 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “small hit C6”. Therefore, when a small hit is made in the first special symbol lottery, Is determined to be 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 714 (a), as the small hitting type of the second special symbol, “small hitting D6” is defined in association with the range of the small hitting type counter C5 being “0 to 29”. (See 202da4 in FIG. 714 (a)). This “small hit D6” is a small hit type to which “big hit C6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. As described above, the “hit C6” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the extended game mode is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. In other words, the “small hit D6” is awarded with a V prize during the small hit game, so that the big win that gives the most advantageous number of rounds and the gaming state after the big hit is most advantageous. Is one of the most advantageous small hit types for the player. Of the 100 counter values that the small hitting type counter C5 can take, the counter value that is “small hit D6” is 30, so when the small special lottery is won, “small hit D6” is The determined ratio is 30% (30/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 714 (a), as the small hitting type of the second special symbol, the small hitting type counter C5 is defined in association with “small hitting E6” for the range of “30 to 79”. (See 202da5 in FIG. 714 (a)). This “small hit E6” is a small hit type to which “big hit F6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. The “big hit F6” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the big hit is varied according to the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, when the jackpot F6 is reached in the time-saving state (normal mode, extended game mode), after the jackpot is completed, the extended game mode with 100 time-saving times is set, while the normal state of normal symbols (preparation) When “Big hit F6” is set in (Mode), the number of time reductions is set to 0 (the preparation mode is set). Therefore, if it becomes “big hit F6” in the consecutive jackpot mode, it will be advantageous to the player because the consecutive jackpot mode will continue even after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if it becomes “big hit F6” in the preparation mode, the lottery of the first special symbol It becomes disadvantageous compared with the case where it is a big hit. This is because when the first special symbol lottery is won in the preparation mode, the game shifts to the advantageous villa mode at a rate of 100%. Therefore, in the preparation mode in which it is necessary to play a game aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handed, when an irregular game that executes the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the degree of advantage for the player Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods. Of the 100 counter values that the small hitting type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes “small hit E6” is 50. Therefore, when the small special lottery is made, “small hit E6” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 714 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with “small hit F6” for the range of “80 to 89”. (See 202da6 in FIG. 714 (a)). This “small hit F6” is a small hit type to which “big hit G6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. This “big hit G6” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal mode is set after the big hit ends. It should be noted that the period of the normal mode (the number of times of special symbol lottery until the transition to the preparation mode) set after the “big hit G6” is completed is different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the “big hit G6” is reached during the short time state of the normal symbol, 50 normal modes (short time state B) are set after the big hit, while the “big hit” occurs during the normal state of the normal symbol. When “G6” is reached, 100 normal modes are set after the jackpot. Therefore, when “big hit G6” is set in the consecutive jackpot mode, the player shifts to the most unfavorable normal mode after the big win ends, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, since the number of times smaller than the number of times of the normal mode (100 times) set when “big hit A6” is set in the normal mode, it is easy to exit the normal mode and shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it can be made to think that it will continue playing until it shifts to a preparation mode or wins a jackpot before changing to a preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being quit immediately after the extended game mode is completed, and thus the mobility of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that the small hitting type counter C5 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “small hit F6”. Therefore, when a small hit is made in the second special symbol lottery, “small hit F6” is The determined ratio is 10% (10/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 714 (a), as the small hitting type of the second special symbol, “small hitting G6” is defined in association with the small hitting type counter C5 in the range of “90 to 94”. (See 202da7 in FIG. 714 (a)). This “small hit G6” is a small hit type to which “big hit H6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. This “big hit H6” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the normal mode is set after the big hit ends, as in the “big hit G6”. Specifically, if the “big hit H6” is reached during the normal symbol time-short state, 25 normal modes (short-time state B) are set after the big hit, while the “big hit” is set during the normal symbol normal state. When it becomes “H6”, the normal mode of 100 times is set after the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot H6 is set to “big jackpot H6”, the player shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot is over, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, the number of times of the normal mode that is set when the “big hit A6” is reached in the normal mode (100 times), and the number of times of the normal mode that is set when the “big hit G6” is set in the extended play mode (25 times) ) Is set to a smaller number of times, it becomes easier to exit the normal mode and shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it can be made to think that it will continue playing until it shifts to a preparation mode or wins a jackpot before changing to a preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being quit immediately after the extended game mode is completed, and thus the mobility of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are five counter values that are “small hit G6”. Therefore, when the small special lottery is made, “small hit G6” is The determined ratio is 5% (5/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 714 (a), as the small hitting type of the second special symbol, the small hitting type counter C5 is defined in association with “small hitting H6” in the range of “95 to 99”. (See 202da8 in FIG. 714 (a)). This “small hit H6” is a small hit type to which “big hit I6” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. This “big jackpot I6” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the normal mode is set after the big jackpot ends, as in the “big jackpot G6” and “big jackpot H6”. Specifically, if the “big hit I6” is reached during the normal symbol time-short state, one normal mode (short-time state B) is set after the big hit, while the “big hit” is set during the normal symbol normal state. When “I6” is reached, 100 normal modes are set after the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot is set to “Big Jack I6” in the consecutive house mode, after the jackpot is over, if the first special symbol lottery is missed, the mode can be shifted to the preparation mode. Then, it becomes most advantageous for the player (it becomes easy to shift to the preparation mode). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are five counter values that are “small hit H6”. Therefore, when the small special lottery is made, “small hit H6” is The determined ratio is 5% (5/100).

  In the twelfth control example, in the extended game mode, when the game shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot is over, the player does not explicitly indicate the number of time reductions in which the normal mode (time reduction state B) continues. That is, as in the twelfth control example, the configuration suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not the mode has shifted from the normal mode to the preparation mode depending on the type of the back image. By configuring in this way, the normal mode is maintained whether the mode has been shifted to the preparation mode for a predetermined period after the extended villa mode ends (in the twelfth control example, 50 times after the end of the jackpot). It is possible to provide a game that makes it possible to predict whether or not the user is present. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 714 (b), details of the time reduction number selection table 202db in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 714 (b) shows the specified contents of the time reduction number selection table 202db. The short time selection table 202db is similar to the short time selection table 202db in the eleventh control example. It is the data table in which the data for setting according to the game state of this were prescribed | regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 714 (b), as the jackpot type, for the jackpot A6, the normal state (preparation mode) of the normal symbol is defined in association with 100 time-shortening states A, and the normal symbol time-shortening state ( 100 time reduction states B are defined in association with the normal mode and the extended mode (see 202db1 in FIG. 714 (b)). Therefore, in the preparation mode that is set to the normal state of the normal symbol, if the jackpot A6 in the lottery of the first special symbol becomes A6, the extended game mode is set after the jackpot, which is one kind of jackpot type preferable for the player . On the other hand, in the normal mode or the extended game mode, when the big hit A6 is reached, the player moves to the most unfavorable normal mode, and is therefore one of the most unfavorable jackpot types for the player. In the Renso mode, it is a gaming state in which the game is progressed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, so it becomes disadvantageous when the jackpot is A6 (the disadvantageous normal mode is set after the jackpot ends). ) Is almost normal mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 714 (b), as the jackpot type, for the jackpots B6 and C6, 100 short-time states A are defined in association with each other regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (FIG. 714). (See 202db2 of 714 (b)). Therefore, even if the jackpots B6 and C6 are won in any of the gaming modes of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the consecutive-village mode, the game mode after the jackpot ends is the most advantageous consecutive-villa mode. The jackpots B6 and C6 are one of the most advantageous jackpot types.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 714 (b), as the jackpot type, for the jackpot D6, 100 times of the short-time state B are defined in association with each other regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (FIG. 714 ( b) 202db3). Therefore, the jackpot D6 is most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot. Also, as the jackpot type, for jackpot E6, 0 times are defined in association with the number of time reductions (see 202db4 in FIG. 714 (b)). Therefore, even if the jackpot E6 is won in any of the game modes of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the consecutive resort mode, the preparation mode becomes relatively advantageous after the jackpot.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 714 (b), for jackpot F6 as a jackpot type, 0 is set as the number of times to be shortened in the normal state (preparation mode) of the normal symbol. 100 time reduction states A are defined in association with (normal mode, extended resort mode) (see 202db5 in FIG. 714 (b)). The jackpot F6 is a jackpot type that will be won when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the jackpot game, and is basically a jackpot that is won only in the villa mode. . If the jackpot F6 is reached in the consecutive jackpot mode, the consecutive jackpot mode is set again after the jackpot is ended, so the jackpot F6 is one of the jackpot types in which the gaming state after the jackpot is most advantageous. In addition, when winning during the normal state of the normal symbol, the number of time reductions is set to 0 in order to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the preparation mode. . In other words, in the preparation mode, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the game shifts to the consecutive house mode at a rate of 100%. However, when the second special symbol lottery, the small bonus E6 is reached and the big bonus F6 is won. , Loop through the preparation mode. Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed irregularly, it will be disadvantageous, so that it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 714 (b), as the jackpot type, for jackpot G6, 100 time-shortening states B are defined in association with the normal symbol normal state, and 50 times in the normal symbol short-cut state. The time shortening state B is defined in association with each other (see 202db6 in FIG. 714 (b)). Therefore, when the big hit G6 is in the consecutive house mode, a relatively large number of normal modes are set, which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, when the big hit G6 in the preparation mode, the normal mode of 100 times is set, so that it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the preparation mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 714 (b), for jackpot H6 as the jackpot type, 100 time-shortening states B are defined in association with the normal symbol normal state, and 25 times in the normal symbol short-cut state. The time shortening state B is defined in association with each other (see 202db7 in FIG. 714 (b)). Therefore, when the big hit H6 in the consecutive house mode, the normal mode is set a smaller number of times than when the big hit G6, so it is easier to end the normal mode than the big hit G6. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than when the big hit G6 is reached and the extended game mode is ended. Also, when the big hit H6 in the preparation mode, the normal mode of 100 times is set as in the big hit G6, so that the irregular gaming method that tries to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation mode is suppressed. I can plan.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 714 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot I6 is defined in association with 100 time-shortening states B in the normal state of the normal symbol, and once in the time-shortening state of the normal symbol. The time shortening state B is defined in association with each other (see 202db8 in FIG. 714 (b)). Therefore, when the big hit is I6 in the consecutive house mode, the normal mode is set in a smaller number of times than when the big hit is G6 or the big hit H6. Can do. Therefore, it becomes more advantageous for the player than the case where the big hit G6 or the big hit H6 is reached and the extended game mode is ended. Also, when the jackpot is I6 in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times in the same manner as the jackpot G6 and jackpot H6, so an irregular gaming method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the preparation mode. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 715, the details of the specified small hit count selection table 202ea will be described. FIG. 715 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small hit prescribed number selection table 202ea. This small hit number-of-times selection table 202ea is a data table that is referred to in order to set an end condition in a short time state for each small hit type. As described above, in this twelfth control example, the number of wins until the time-short state is terminated is defined for each small hit type separately from the short-time count (special symbol lottery count). When the specified number of times is reached, the time-saving state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of time-savings. Thereby, every time it is a small hit in the disadvantageous normal mode, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the prescribed number of times has been reached.

  As shown in FIG. 715, in the specified number of small hits selection table 202ea, the number of winning times until the short time state for each small winning type is terminated in association with the big hitting type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big winning (prescribed Frequency). More specifically, for the big hit A6, in the normal state of the normal symbol, 100 times are specified as the specified number of times for all the small hit types. On the other hand, in the short time state of the normal symbol, 1 is defined as the specified number of times for the small hit A6, and 100 times is specified in association with the small hit type other than the small hit A6 (see FIG. 715). 202ea1). In other words, when setting the villa mode, 100 times is set as the specified number for all the small hit types, whereas when setting the normal mode (short-time state B), the big hit A6 is set. On the other hand, 1 time is set as the specified number of times, and 100 times is set as the specified number of times for other small hit types. In addition, for jackpots B6 and C6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, 100 times are defined in association with all the jackpot types as a specified number of times (see 202ea2 in FIG. 715). That is, when the big hits B6 and C6 are set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, 100 times is set as the prescribed number for all the small hit types.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 715, for the big hit D6 and the big hit G6 to I6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, it is prescribed in association with one time as the prescribed number of times for the small hit A6. And 100 times as the specified number of times for the small hit type (see 202ea3 in FIG. 715). In other words, when one of the big hits D6, G6 to I6 where the normal mode is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the specified number of times is set for the small hit A6, and for other small hit types The predetermined number of times is set to 100.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 715, for the big hit E6, 0 times are specified in association with the specified number of times for all the small hit types regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (in FIG. 715). 202ea4). That is, when the normal mode is set after the big hit, the specified number of times is set to 0 for all the small hit types. In addition, for the big hit F6, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the specified number of times is associated with 0 for the total small hit type. Is defined as 100 times as the prescribed number of times (see 202ea5 in FIG. 715).

  Thus, in the twelfth control example, when the extended play mode is set, 100 times is set as the specified number of times for ending the time-saving state for all the small hit types. In other words, the short time state is surely continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed because the time reduction state is forcibly terminated before the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times in the extended game mode, and the preparation mode is entered. Further, when the normal mode is set, the specified number of small hits for ending the time reduction state is set to one for the small hit A6. As a result, in the normal mode, if the small hit A6 is won, it is possible to forcibly end the number of time reductions and shift to the preparation mode, so even if there are many remaining time reductions in the normal mode, A game can be played in the hope that it will be A6. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game in the normal mode from being simply an operation of continuing to enter the game ball into the first entrance 64 until a short time has elapsed. Therefore, the interest of the player in the normal mode can be improved.

  In the twelfth control example, only in the normal mode, the specified number of small hits A6 is set to one, and the specified number of other small hit types is set to 100. In the extended play mode, all the small hit types are specified. Although the number of times is 100, the present invention is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the specified number of times per hit and the type (mode) of the short-time state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the consecutive house mode, it is good also as a structure which provides the small hit type with few prescription | regulation times (for example, 5 times) in the small hit of the 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this way, in the consecutive house mode, the possibility that the consecutive house mode will end increases as the V prize of about 1/20 continues to fail, so there is a sense of tension in the game in the consecutive house mode. You can have it. In addition, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the specified number of small hits for each type, the predetermined number of times may be determined by adding together one or all of the small hit types. Specifically, for example, the prescribed number of small hits A6 may be set to one, and the prescribed number of times based on the total number of winnings of the small hits B6 and the small hits C6 may be set to five. By configuring in this way, even if the V winning a prize fails and the event in which the normal mode is maintained continues, it can be positively captured that the specified number of times until the transition to the preparation mode is reduced. The motivation for the player's game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 716 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 716, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twelfth control example is such that the specified number of small hits storage area 203ea is added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 693 (b)). It is different in point.

  The small hit number-of-times storage area 203ea stores the remaining number of winning hits for each small hit type for ending the time-saving state (normal mode, extended resort mode) and shifting to the preparation mode. It is a storage area. In the short time state of the normal symbol, every time a small hit is made, the remaining winning number (specified number) corresponding to the winning small hit type is subtracted and updated (see S2412 in FIG. 722). Then, when the specified number of times corresponding to any of the small hit types becomes 0 (has reached the specified number of times), it shifts to the preparation mode regardless of the remaining number of times (special symbol lottery number). (See S2414 in FIG. 722). In the twelfth control example, in the normal mode, the specified number of small hit types other than the small hit A6 is set to 100 times. Therefore, depending on the small hit type other than the small hit A6, 100 times (or 50 times, There is no possibility that the time-saving state will be ended before the time-saving number of times (25 times, 1 time) is ended. In addition, since 100 times is set as the specified number of times for all types of small hits in the consecutive house mode, the specified number of small hits is reached before 100 hours, which is the short time number in the consecutive house mode, is completed. And there is no possibility of shifting to the preparation mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 717, a game state transition method in the twelfth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 717, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example is roughly divided into three states (modes). That is, the normal mode (ordinary symbol time-short state B) shown in the upper part of FIG. 717, the extended mode (normal symbol time-short state A) shown in the lower left part of FIG. 717, and the lower right part of FIG. A preparation mode (normal state of normal symbols) is provided.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates the short time state B of the normal symbol, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and even if it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Since it is difficult to shift to the mode, the gaming state is most disadvantageous for the player. In addition, as described above, the Renso mode indicates a gaming state in which the short time state A of the normal symbol is set, and the gaming ball easily enters the second entrance 6400. Is generated, and there are many opportunities to pass through the V winning switch 670e3. Further, since the extended game mode is easily set again after the jackpot, the gaming state is most advantageous for the player.

  The preparation mode indicates a gaming state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. As described above, since the gaming ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400, the first mode is the same as in the normal mode. Although it is necessary to play a game aiming at the entrance 64, it is a gaming state that is advantageous compared to the normal mode because the game is shifted to the consecutive resort mode at a rate of 100% when winning the jackpot.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 717, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another mode when a big win, a small win is won, or when a short time has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 717, when the first special symbol lottery is won and the jackpot B6 is determined as the jackpot type, the extended game mode is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. Further, when the number of time reductions has elapsed (the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of time reductions has been completed), a transition is made to a preparation mode (normal state of normal symbols). Further, when the small hit game is completed without generating a V win with the small hit A6, the mode shifts to the preparation mode because the specified number of small hits A6 in the normal mode has been reached. In addition, when the player wins right at B6 and the player makes a right-hand hit for V winning, and the V winning occurs, the game shifts to the villa mode after the big winning (big hit B6) based on the V winning is completed. . In addition, when the player wins a V-winning and the player has made a right-hand hit at C6 and a V-winning occurs, the player shifts to the villa mode after the winning of the V-winning (big hit D6). . On the other hand, when the big win A6 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the V winning is generated by winning the small hit A6, the normal mode is set again after the big win ends. Further, when the small wins B6 and C6 result in no V winning, the normal mode is maintained.

  Therefore, in the normal mode, when the big win is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode only at a rate of 30%, and the normal mode is looped at a rate of 70%. In other words, even if the first special symbol lottery wins, there is a higher possibility of looping the normal mode than shifting to the consecutive resort mode, so the special symbol lottery is not very happy for the player. It becomes. Therefore, in the normal mode, rather than winning a special symbol lottery, you can make you want to move to the preparation mode after a short time, so every time a special symbol lottery is executed, It is possible to provide a novel gameability that a player wishes if he / she does not want to win. Further, in the normal mode, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the small hit A6 is determined at a rate of 50% and the specified number of times until the short-time state is terminated is one. Therefore, if it becomes a small hit A6 and the V winning is not generated, the mode shifts to the preparation mode. Therefore, when the special winning lottery is won with a probability of 1/200 in the special symbol lottery, the small hit A6 is determined. The player can be expected to be. If a V win occurs at the small hit A6, the normal mode is set again after the big hit ends. For this reason, it can be said that the small hit A6 is a small hit type in which it is more advantageous not to generate the V winning than the case of generating the V winning in terms of the game state (mode) transition. On the other hand, if a small winning type other than the small winning A6 is determined in the first special symbol lottery, the gaming state (mode) is maintained unless a V prize is generated. That is, the small hit types other than the small hit A6 are small hit types that are more advantageous when the V winning is generated than when the V winning is not generated.

  In this way, it is advantageous if the V prize is not won, and the small hit type (small hit A6) that is disadvantageous if the V prize is won, and the small hit type (small hit B6, which is maintained disadvantageous if the V prize is not won). C6) can be provided to provide the gameability that allows the player to determine whether it is better to win the V prize or to avoid the V prize when winning a small hit. it can. As described above, in the twelfth control example, when the small hit is made in the normal mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 712) is executed regardless of the small hit type. As a result, it is difficult to infer the small hit type from the display mode, so that it is possible to more seriously determine whether or not to aim for the V prize. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved every time a small win is won.

  As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 717, there is a possibility of transition from the extended mode to another mode not only when the jackpot is reached but also when the number of times of normal symbols is completed. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 717, the second special symbol lottery results in a small win and a V winning (the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3) occurs, and the big win G6 to I6 When any of the above is determined, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times without winning a big hit, the number of times of the normal symbol is reduced, and the mode shifts to the preparation mode (falls down). On the other hand, if the jackpot C6 or F6 is determined when the V prize is won, or if the jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the extended game mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Note that, as described above, the possibility that the variation of the 100 special symbols without losing the jackpot will be about 0.6%, so that the event hardly occurs. Therefore, the transition to the other mode in the consecutive house mode is when the jackpot G6 to I6 is won. The jackpots corresponding to the jackpots G6 to I6 (small jackpots F6 to H6) are determined at a rate of 20% of the total jackpots. It becomes a very advantageous gaming state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the goal of shifting to the consecutive resort mode, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 717, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the preparation mode to another mode only when a big hit is made. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 717, when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game after the jackpot ends, regardless of whether the jackpot is A6 or the jackpot B6 The state is set to the villa mode. Note that the preparation mode is basically a mode in which only the first special symbol lottery is executed (the game ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400). If a game ball is entered into the ball opening 6400 to win a big hit, or a V win is generated due to a small win, the player falls to the normal mode (when the big hit is F6 to H6) The preparation mode may be looped (when the jackpot is D6 or E6). Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by the irregular gaming method, it becomes more difficult to shift to the consecutive resort mode than the case of executing the lottery of the first special symbol, so the merit of performing the irregular gaming method Can be reduced. Thereby, suppression with respect to an irregular game method can be aimed at.

  Next, the details of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 718 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 718 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twelfth control example is such that the expectation level selection table 222da is deleted from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 695 (a)). The difference is that a rank-up lottery table 222ea is added.

  The rank-up lottery table 222ea suggests the number of remaining fluctuations up to the preparation mode by the rank-up mode of the back image when the normal mode is shifted (falls) in any one of the big hits G6 to I6 in the consecutive house mode. It is the data table referred in order to set the rank up production for. Details of the rank-up lottery table 222ea will be described with reference to FIG. 718 (b).

  FIG. 718 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rank-up lottery table 222ea. As shown in FIG. 718 (b), in the rank-up lottery table 222ea, for each remaining value of the number of time reductions (J), a determination value for determining to update (rank up) a higher-expected back image. It is a data table in which (counter value of effect lottery counter 223da) is defined in association with each other. The update of the back image is selected every time the number of changes becomes a multiple of 10 in the range where the number of changes is less than 50.

  As shown in FIG. 718 (b), when the value of the short remaining time (J) is less than 20, it is determined that there is no rank increase when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is “0 to 29”. On the other hand, when the value of the production lottery counter 223da is “30 to 89”, it is determined that the rank is up by one, and when it is “90 to 99”, it is determined that the rank is up by two. Here, 1 rank-up is a back image for medium expectation, which is updated (ranked up) to a back image for medium expectation when the current back image is a back image for low expectation. In this case, it is indicated that the rear image for high expectation is updated (ranked up). That is, it means that the degree of expectation is increased by one step. Note that when a high expectation degree rear image is already set, the high expectation degree rear image remains unchanged. Further, “2 ranks up” indicates that the rear image for high expectation is updated (ranked up) regardless of the current rear image type.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 718 (b), when the value of the remaining short time count (J) is 20 or more, it is determined that there is no rank up when the value of the production lottery counter 223da is “0 to 59”. In the case of “60 to 97”, it is determined to be one rank up, and in the case of “98, 99”, it is determined to be two ranks up. In this way, when the number of time reductions is less than 20, the ratio of one rank or two rank increase is higher than when the number of time reductions is 20 or more, so whether or not to rank up at each lottery timing. It is possible to play a game paying attention to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 719, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 719 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 719, in the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth control example, a rank-up lottery flag 223ea and an expectation storage area 223eb are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 696). It is different in that it is.

  The rank-up lottery flag 223ea is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for lottery of the rear image rank-up using the rank-up lottery table 222ea. The rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot of the type transitioning from the consecutive home mode to the normal mode ends (see S5706 in FIG. 726), and the 51st variation pattern effect after the jackpot ends. (See S5624 in FIG. 728). That is, any of the big hits G6 to I6 is set to be off based on the fact that the number of times of change that determines that the transition to the preparation mode has been completed is reached. Although not shown in the figure, the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is also set to off even when a big win is won. While the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on, the rank-up lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea is executed every time the number of changes in the special symbol is a multiple of ten. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game property that makes it possible to infer whether or not the mode is changed from the rank-up mode to the preparation mode (whether or not the remaining number of time reductions until the mode is changed to the preparation mode is less than 20).

  The expectation degree storage area 223eb is a storage area for storing data indicating the expectation degree suggested by the back surface type. When the lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea (see FIG. 718 (b)) is executed, the current expectation degree is determined based on the data stored in the expectation degree storage area 223eb, and determined by lottery. Specify the back type after reflecting the rank up.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Twelfth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 720 to 723, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example will be described. First, the special symbol variation process 6 (S151) in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special symbol variation process 6 (S151) is similar to the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) in the eleventh control example, and the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Of the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 720) in the twelfth control example, the special symbols in the eleventh control example are respectively used in the processes of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265. The same processes as those of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265 of the fluctuation process 5 (see FIG. 698) are executed. Further, in the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 720) in the twelfth control example, after the process of S262, all the data in the hour / minute counter 203da, the small hit prescribed number of times storage area 203ea, and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset. Then, the process proceeds to S220 to set the start of jackpot.

  In the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 720) in the twelfth control example, after the process of S262 is completed, all of the hour / minute counter 203da, the small hit prescribed number of times storage area 203ea, and the mode type storage area 203dc are all stored. After resetting (S271), the process proceeds to S220.

  In the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 720) in the twelfth control example, when it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is not a big win of the special symbol (S218: No), the eleventh control Instead of the time reduction number update process (see FIG. 700) in the example, the time reduction number update process 6 is executed (S272), and the process proceeds to S265. Details of the short time update process 6 (S272) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the process of S265, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S265: Yes), instead of the small hit start process (see FIG. 701) in the eleventh control example, the small hit start process 6 Is executed (S273), and the process proceeds to S221. Details of the small hit start process 6 (S273) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 721, details of the above-mentioned time-shorter count update process 6 (S272) will be described. The short time update process 6 (S272) is a process executed in place of the short time update process (see FIG. 700) in the eleventh control example, and the short time update process (see FIG. 700) in the eleventh control example. Similarly, this is a process for updating the number of time reductions in the mode in which the time reduction state is set (that is, in the continuous mode or the normal mode).

  Of the time reduction number update process 6 (see FIG. 721) in the twelfth control example, the processes of S2301 to S2304 are the processes of S2301 to S2304 of the time reduction number update process (see FIG. 700) in the eleventh control example, respectively. The same process is executed. In the time reduction number update process 6 (see FIG. 721) in the twelfth control example, if it is determined in the process of S2304 that the value of the time reduction counter 203da has become 0 (S2304: Yes), the specified number of small hits is stored. All the data in the area 203ea are reset to 0 (S2311), and a state command indicating the normal state of the normal symbol is set (S2312). Next, “00H” indicating the preparation mode (normal state of the normal symbol) is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2313), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 722, the details of the small hitting start process 6 (S273) described above will be described. This small hitting start process 6 (S273) is a process executed in place of the small hitting start process (see FIG. 701) in the eleventh control example, and the small hitting start process (see FIG. 701) in the eleventh control example. Similarly, this is a process for setting the start of the small hit release operation.

  Of the small hitting start process 6 (see FIG. 722) in the twelfth control example, the processes in S2401 to S2403 are the processes of S2401 to S2403 in the small hitting start process (see FIG. 701) in the eleventh control example, respectively. The same process is executed. In the small hitting start process 6 (see FIG. 722) in the twelfth control example, when the process of S2403 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203da is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more). If it is discriminated (S2411) and the value of the time reduction counter 203da is 0 (S2411: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2411 that the value of the hour / minute counter 203da is greater than 0 (S2411: Yes), the specified number of times for each small hit type stored in the specified small hit count storage area 203ea Of these, it updates by subtracting 1 from the specified number of times corresponding to the type of small hit that has been won this time (S2412), and determines whether or not the specified number of times after subtraction has become 0 (S2413).

  In the process of S2413, if it is determined that the specified number of times after subtraction has become zero (S2413: Yes), all the data in the hour / minute counter 203da and the specified number of small hits storage area 203ea are all set to 0 in order to end the time-saving state. (S2414), a state command indicating the transition of the normal symbol to the normal state is set (S2415), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2413 that the specified number of times after subtraction in step S2412 is not 0 (S2413: No), the process ends.

  By executing this small hitting start processing 6 (see FIG. 722), when the small hit A6 (the specified number of hits is one hit) in the normal mode, regardless of the remaining number of times, It is possible to end and shift to the preparation mode.

  In the twelfth control example, only in the normal mode, the specified number of small hits A6 is set to one, and the specified number of other small hit types is set to 100. In the extended play mode, all the small hit types are specified. Although the number of times is 100, the present invention is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the specified number of times per hit and the type (mode) of the short-time state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the consecutive house mode, it is good also as a structure which provides the small hit type with few prescription | regulation times (for example, 5 times) in the small hit of the 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this way, in the consecutive house mode, the possibility that the consecutive house mode will end increases as the V prize of about 1/20 continues to fail, so there is a sense of tension in the game in the consecutive house mode. You can have it. In addition, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the specified number of small hits for each type, the predetermined number of times may be determined by adding together one or all of the small hit types. Specifically, for example, the prescribed number of small hits A6 may be set to one, and the prescribed number of times based on the total number of winnings of the small hits B6 and the small hits C6 may be set to five. By configuring in this way, even if the V winning a prize fails and the event in which the normal mode is maintained continues, it can be positively captured that the specified number of times until the transition to the preparation mode is reduced. The motivation for the player's game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 723, the jackpot end process 6 (S1151) in the twelfth control example will be described. The jackpot end process 6 (S1151) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 705) in the eleventh control example in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704). Similar to the jackpot end process 5 in the example (see FIG. 705), this is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end.

  Of the jackpot end process 6 (see FIG. 723) in the twelfth control example, in the processes of S1321, S1322, and S1324-S1326, S1321, S1322 of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 705) in the eleventh control example, respectively. , And the same processes as the processes of S1324 to S1326 are executed. In the jackpot end process 6 (see FIG. 723) in the twelfth control example, when the process of S1322 ends, the small hit number-of-times selection table 202ea is read (S1331), and the jackpot type storage area 203db is read from the read table. The specified number of small hits corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the data and the gaming state (mode) at the time of winning indicated by the data in the winning mode storage area 203de is specified (S1332). Next, the specified number of small hits for each specified small hit type is stored in the specified number of small hits storage area 203ea, and the number of hours and hours specified in the processing of S1322 is set as the value of the hour and middle counter 203da (S1333). Goes to S1324.

  By executing the jackpot ending process 6 (see FIG. 723), the number of time reductions and the specified number of jackpots can be appropriately set according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Twelfth Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 724 to 728. First, with reference to FIG. 724, the command determination process 6 (S4151) in the twelfth control example will be described. This command determination process 6 (S4151) is executed in place of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 708) in the eleventh control example, and is similar to the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 708) in the eleventh control example. This is processing for performing control according to the type of command received from the device 110.

  Of the command determination processing 6 (see FIG. 724) in the twelfth control example, in steps S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215, S4201 to S4209 of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 708) in the eleventh control example, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S4213 to S4215 is executed. Further, in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 724) in the twelfth control example, when it is determined that the state command is received in the process of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the state command process in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 709). ), The status command process 6 is executed (S4231), and this process ends. Details of the status command process 6 (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 724) in the twelfth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that a state command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4209: No), It is determined whether or not a command related to a small hit (opening command for small hits, an ending command for small hits, etc.) is received (S4232), and when it is determined that a command related to a small hit is received (S4232). : Yes), a small hit related process for performing control according to the type of the command related to the small hit is executed (S4233), and this process ends. Details of the small hit related processing (S4233) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4232 that a command related to the small hit has not been received (S4232: No), the process proceeds to S4213.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 725, details of the state command process 6 (S4231) described above will be described. This state command process 6 (S4231) is executed in place of the state command process in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 709), and is similar to the state command process in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 709). This is processing for performing control according to the gaming state (mode) notified from the control device 110.

  Of the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 725) in the twelfth control example, in steps S5501 to S5504 and S5506, S5501 to S5504 and S5506 of the state command processing (see FIG. 709) in the eleventh control example, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed. In the state command process 6 (see FIG. 725) in the twelfth control example, if it is determined in the process of S5504 that the current state command is not a command output when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored (S5504). : No), it is then determined whether or not the status command is output at the end of the jackpot (S5511).

  In the process of S5511, when it is determined that the current status command is the status command output at the time of the jackpot end (S5511: Yes), after the end to set the back image according to the gaming state after the jackpot end The rear surface setting process is executed (S5512), and this process ends. Details of the post-end rear surface setting process (S5512) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5511 that the command is not a state command output at the time of jackpot end (when the transition from the normal mode to the preparation mode due to the elapse of the number of time reductions or the arrival of the specified number of jackpots) (S5511: No), this process is terminated as it is. When the normal mode is shifted to the preparation mode without going through the big hit, a notification or a rear image is used in a small hit related process (see FIG. 727) or an expectation level update process 6 (see FIG. 728) described later. Suggestions are set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 726, details of the post-end rear surface setting process (S5512) described above will be described. This post-end backside setting process (S5512) is a process for setting a backside image after the jackpot end according to the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. In the rear setting process after this completion (S5512), first, it is determined whether or not the data in the game state storage area 223h updated based on the state command is data corresponding to the number of time reductions of 100 (S5701). . Here, the back setting process after the end (S5512) is a process that is not executed in the consecutive house mode, and therefore, when the remaining number of time reductions is 100, only when the normal mode is set after the big hit. is there. In addition, since the normal mode set after the end of the villa mode is set to 50 times or less, the fact that the normal mode is set to 100 times is a loop of the normal mode. It means that it is a case. Therefore, in the process of S5701, when it is determined that the remaining number of time reductions is 100 (S5701: Yes), the back image for the normal mode is set (S5702), and this process ends. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the normal mode has been set after the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5701 that the remaining number of time reductions is not 100 (S5701: No), then whether the remaining number of time reductions is 0 (that is, after the jackpot is in the preparation mode) (S5703). If it is determined that the remaining number of time reductions is 0 (S5703: Yes), the rear image for the preparation mode is set (S5704), and this process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the preparation mode is set after the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5703, when it is determined that the remaining number of time reductions is not 0 (S5703: No), it is the normal mode after the extended-village mode ends (either 50, 25, or 1). Therefore, the back image for low expectation is set (S5705), the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON (S5706), and the process is terminated. To do. By turning on the rank-up lottery flag 223ea, every time the special symbol lottery is executed ten times, the rank-up lottery of the degree of expectation (type of the back image) can be executed. Thereby, since the game nature which can predict the remaining number of time reductions from the rank-up mode can be realized, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 727, the details of the above-described small hit related process (S4233) will be described. This small hit related process (S4233) is one process in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 724). As described above, when a command related to the small hit is received, control according to the type of the command It is a process for executing.

  In the small hit related processing (see FIG. 727), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S5801), and it is determined that a small hit opening command has been received. (S5801: Yes), it is then determined from the data stored in the game state storage area 223h whether or not the current mode is the normal mode (S5802). If it is determined in the process of S5802 that the current gaming state is not the normal mode (short-time state B) (the preparation mode or the extended game mode) (S5802: No), then the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is turned on. (S5803) and if the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is off (S5803: No), it is in the extended-village mode or in the preparation mode and the rear image for the preparation mode has already been displayed. This means that it is in the state of switching, so execution of a right-handed navigation effect that prompts the player to make a right-handed strike with the V winning device 670 is set (S5804), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5802 that the current mode is the normal mode (S5802: Yes) and when it is determined that the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is turned on in the process of S5803 (S5803: Yes), the selection effect ( (See FIG. 712) is set (S5805), and this process ends. Even if the preparation mode is entered, it is assumed that the winning combination is performed during the rank-up effect execution period by executing the selection effect (see FIG. 712) when the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on. In addition, the display mode can be shared between the normal mode and the preparation mode. Therefore, during the rank-up effect execution period (from the end of the last jackpot in the consecutive house mode until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times), whether the normal mode is maintained or not It is difficult to distinguish what is being done. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the rank-up mode of the rank-up effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  If it is determined in the process of S5801 that a small hitting opening command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S5801: No), it is next determined whether or not a small hitting ending command has been received. It is determined (S5806). In the process of S5806, when it is determined that a small hitting ending command has been received (S5806: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a V win has already been detected in the current small hit game (S5807). ) If it is determined that the V winning is not detected (S5807: No), then, whether the specified number of small hits has been reached (small hit type of any of the small hit types in the game state storage area 223h) It is determined whether or not the data indicating the number of times is data corresponding to 0 (S5808).

  In the process of S5808, when it is determined that the specified number of small hits has been reached (S5808: Yes), the rear image for the preparation mode is set (S5809), and the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to OFF. (S5810), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5808, if it is determined that the specified number of small hits has not been reached (the data indicating the specified number of times in the game state storage area 223h is not 0) (S5808: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S5807, when it is determined that the V winning has been detected during the execution of the current small hit game (S5807: Yes), the notification of the start of the big hit is set (S5811), The process ends.

  By executing this small hit related process (see FIG. 727), it is possible to set an appropriate performance mode as the small hit effect according to the gaming state. Moreover, the notification content after the end of the small hit can be set appropriately.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 728, the expectation level update process 6 (S4841) in the twelfth control example will be described. This expectation degree update process 6 (S4841) is a process executed in place of the expectation degree update process (see FIG. 711) in the eleventh control example, and a rear image showing the expectation degree as to whether or not the mode has shifted to the preparation mode. This is a process for setting a rank-up lottery.

  Of the expectation level update process 6 (see FIG. 728) in the twelfth control example, in steps S5601, S5603, and S5608, the expectation level update process (see FIG. 711) in the eleventh control example, S5601, And the same process as each process of S5608 is performed. In the expectation level update process 6 (see FIG. 728) in the twelfth control example, when the process of S5601 ends, it is next determined whether or not the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on (S5621). When it is determined that the up lottery flag 223ea is on (S5621: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 223db is 51 (S5622).

  If it is determined in the process of S5622 that the value of the variation counter 223db is 51 (S5622: Yes), even if the previous jackpot type is any one of the jackpots G6 to I6, the process has surely shifted to the preparation mode. Therefore, the process for terminating the rank-up effect lottery period and setting the back image for the preparation mode (each process of S5623 and S5624) is executed. Also, when it is determined in the process of S5603 that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 101 (S5603: No), this means that the process has shifted from the normal mode to the preparation mode, and thus the process shifts to S5623. In the process of S5623, a rear image for the preparation mode is set (S5623), the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to OFF (S5624), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S5622 that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 51 (S5622: No), it is determined whether or not the current back image is a back image for high expectation (S5625). ) If it is determined that the back image for high expectation is set (S5625: Yes), the expectation cannot be increased any more, and the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5625, when it is determined that the currently set rear image type is not a high-expected rear image (S5625: No), the process proceeds to S5608.

  In the expectation level update process 6 (see FIG. 728) in the twelfth control example, if it is determined in the process of S5608 that the value of the variation counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608: Yes), the rank is increased. The lottery table 222ea is read out (S5626), the value of the effect lottery counter 223da and the rank-up mode corresponding to the remaining number of time reductions are specified, the specified rank-up mode is set (S5627), and this process is terminated. To do.

  By executing the expectation degree update process 6 (see FIG. 719), the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times in a predetermined period after the extended villa mode ends (until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times). Each time it is executed, it is possible to draw a rank up of the back image. Thereby, the game nature which makes a player guess the remaining number of time reductions according to the ease of rank-up can be implement | achieved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example, the normal symbol time-short state B is set to the most unfavorable gaming state (normal mode) which is difficult to shift to the extended game mode even if it is a big hit, and the normal symbol In the normal state (preparation mode), the rate of transition to the extended resort mode in the case of a big hit is higher than in the short time state B of the normal symbol. As a result, it is easier to make a big hit after shifting to the preparation mode after passing the number of times in the normal mode than a big hit in the normal mode. In this case, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a game is played in the hope that the short-time state will end. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a special symbol lottery in the normal mode is expected to be continued.

  Further, in the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the normal mode is set after the jackpot is finished as a V prize is generated as a type of small win that is won with a low probability (1/200). The jackpot type (small jackpot A6) to be reset, the jackpot type (small jackpot B6) that shifts to the villa mode after the jackpot ends when a V winning occurs, and the jackpot ends when a V winning occurs There is provided a small hit type (small hit C6) that shifts to the preparation mode later. As a result, when a small hit is made in the normal mode, it is advantageous as a case where it becomes disadvantageous as a gaming state by generating a V prize (the number of times the digested time has been reset is reset to 100). (Shift to the preparation mode or the villa mode) can be provided, so it is better to make a V prize or to avoid a V prize when a small hit is made in the normal mode. It is possible to provide a game that makes it possible to determine whether or not. In addition, when the small hit is A6 in the normal mode, the time reduction state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of time reductions. As a result, in the small hit A6, it is more advantageous as a gaming state to avoid the V winning and shift to the preparation mode than to make the V winning and reset the normal mode. Therefore, when a small hit is made, it is possible to make the player more seriously determine whether to make a right strike aiming at V winning or to make a left strike to avoid the V winning. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the case of a small hit.

  In the twelfth control example, only in the normal mode, the specified number of small hits A6 is set to one, and the specified number of other small hit types is set to 100. In the extended play mode, all the small hit types are specified. Although the number of times is 100, the present invention is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the specified number of times per hit and the type (mode) of the short-time state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the consecutive house mode, it is good also as a structure which provides the small hit type with few prescription | regulation times (for example, 5 times) in the small hit of the 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this way, in the consecutive house mode, the possibility that the consecutive house mode will end increases as the V prize of about 1/20 continues to fail, so there is a sense of tension in the game in the consecutive house mode. You can have it. In addition, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the specified number of small hits for each type, the predetermined number of times may be determined by adding together one or all of the small hit types. Specifically, for example, the prescribed number of small hits A6 may be set to one, and the prescribed number of times based on the total number of winnings of the small hits B6 and the small hits C6 may be set to five. By configuring in this way, even if the V winning a prize fails and the event in which the normal mode is maintained continues, it can be positively captured that the specified number of times until the transition to the preparation mode is reduced. The motivation for the player's game can be improved.

  In the twelfth control example, as a bonus type of the first special symbol, the normal mode is set after the big win when the V prize is won, the small bonus A which shifts to the preparation mode when the V prize is avoided, and the preparation mode after the big win when the V prize is won. However, if the V winning is avoided and the current mode is maintained, and if the V winning is the consecutive game mode is set after the big win, the current mode is maintained if the V winning is avoided. The hit type is provided with three types, but the small hit type is not limited to these three types, and the type may be arbitrarily increased or decreased. For example, by setting the small bonus type of the first special symbol to only the small bonus A6, it is determined that the player enters the preparation mode if the V prize is avoided at the time of winning the small bonus in the first special symbol lottery. The player can have great satisfaction when winning the small hit. On the other hand, in addition to the big hits A6 to C6, for example, it may be configured to provide a relatively advantageous small hit type that shifts to the preparation mode when the V winning is won or the V winning is avoided. It is good also as a structure which provides the comparatively disadvantageous small hit type in which it transfers to a normal mode when making a prize and a mode is maintained if a V prize is avoided. With this configuration, it is possible to more seriously determine whether to win a V or not to be avoided when winning a small win, so that the player's interest in games can be further improved.

  In the twelfth control example, in the normal mode, the small hit type that is more advantageous when the V winning is avoided than when the V winning is generated, and the case where the V winning is avoided when the V winning is avoided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which provides the small hit type which becomes advantageous even if it avoids V prize or generates V prize. Specifically, for example, a small hit type may be provided in which the prescribed number of times is one and a preparation mode is set after the big win ends when a V winning is generated. On the contrary, it is good also as a structure which provides the small hit type which will be in a normal mode, even if it avoids V prize or generate | occur | produces V prize.

  In the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol lottery is won in the normal mode, either the transition to the extended mode or the time-saving state B of 100 times is set. However, it is not limited to this. A case of shifting to the preparation mode may be provided, or a variation may be provided for the number of times of the normal mode after the big hit ends. Similarly, with respect to other modes, the ratio of transition to each mode and the variation of the number of time reductions in the case of a big hit can be arbitrarily determined.

  In the twelfth control example, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 in the case of a small hit is common regardless of the small hit type, but is not limited thereto. For example, an opening pattern with a short opening period of the opening / closing door 670f1 (a game ball is difficult to enter) and an opening pattern with a long opening period (a game ball is easy to enter) may be provided.

  In the twelfth control example, the display mode shown in FIG. 712 is executed as a selection effect to be executed when a small hit is made in the normal mode. However, the game determines whether or not a V prize is generated. Any mode that can be selected by a person can be arbitrarily determined. Further, the selection effect may be executed in such a manner that the small hit type can be notified or suggested at a predetermined ratio when the small hit is reached. Specifically, for example, when winning a small hit A6 where it is more advantageous to avoid the V prize, an arrow with a letter “left-handed” at a first rate (for example, a rate of 5%) While the image YG1 is displayed in red, when the other small hit type is displayed, the arrow image YG1 is displayed in red at a second ratio (for example, a ratio of 1%) lower than the first ratio. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game property that allows a hit type to be predicted and a firing direction to be determined based on a display mode of a selection effect.

  In the twelfth control example, the current mode is not specified until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times after the consecutive house mode ends, and the mode shifts to the preparation mode according to the rank-up mode of the back image. It was configured to only suggest the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols. In other words, until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times (the number of lotteries that have already been transferred to the preparation mode for any type of jackpot), the current mode is not clearly indicated to the player by the display mode or the like. Although it was configured, it is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports the present mode at the time of reaching the arbitrary number of lotteries until it reaches | attains the number of lotteries (50 times) which will be reliably shifted to the preparation mode after the consecutive resort mode is complete | finished. . More specifically, for example, after the extended game mode is completed (that is, after the big hits G6 to I6 are completed), when the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times, the normal mode remains or the mode is shifted to the preparation mode. It is good also as a structure which changes to the back image (back image for normal mode, or back image for preparation modes) according to mode. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued at least until the number of times of lottery in which the current mode is specified, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Also, even if the normal mode is notified when 30 special symbol lotteries have been completed, the remaining number of lotteries up to the preparation mode will be the remaining 20 times, and more than half of the remaining lottery times up to the preparation mode. Since it is digested, it is possible to give the player an impression that “you can move to preparation mode in a little more time”. Therefore, even when the normal mode is notified, the game can be continued aiming at the transition to the preparation mode.

<13th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 729 to 745. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example described above is configured to provide three types of gaming states. Specifically, the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal mode), the normal symbol of the normal symbol In the short-time state, the game ball enters the second entrance 6400 although it is in the short-game state A (rensou mode) when the game ball is easy to enter the second entrance 6400. There are three types of short game state B (withdrawal mode) when it is difficult to make it.

  In the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the most disadvantageous state (the state where the holding ball is easily reduced and the disadvantageous second special symbol is easily drawn) is set, and the normal symbol time-short state A is set. The continuous play mode is set to the most advantageous state (the state in which the holding ball is difficult to reduce and the advantageous second special symbol lottery is easily executed). Further, in the pull-back mode that may shift when a big hit is made in the consecutive resort mode, it is necessary to advance the game by making the game ball enter the first entrance 64 by left-handing as in the normal mode. However, in the pull-back mode, when the big win is made by the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of shifting to the extended mode is higher than the case where the big win is made in the normal mode. In other words, as an unfavorable mode (game state) in which the game needs to proceed by lottery of the first special symbol, two types of modes, a normal mode and a pull-back mode, are provided, and the predetermined mode after the extended villa mode ends. A relatively advantageous pullback mode is set only during the period.

  As described above, when the extended game mode that is the most advantageous state for the player is ended, the player does not immediately shift to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player, and a relatively advantageous pullback mode is set. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to continue the game without impairing the player's willingness to play even when the extended game mode ends.

  On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, as in the eleventh control example described above, when the most advantageous gaming state for the player has ended, the game is immediately ended and the pachinko machine 10 is operated. In order to prevent the rate from decreasing, four types of gaming states are provided. Specifically, a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state is set (normal mode), a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state, a normal symbol high probability state is set (continuous mode) Chang mode), special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state is set (super-continuous Chang mode), special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state is set, low probability state (retraction) Mode).

  As described above, in the thirteenth control example, the probabilistic state (super-continuous state) becomes a more advantageous state for the player by changing to the extended game mode in which the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set. Set (Chang mode). This probabilistic state (super continuous mode) is a state in which a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol are set, and it wins a big hit at about 1/25, which is higher than the low probability state of a special symbol. Since the jackpot is won in proportion, the probability that a lot of balls can be obtained increases, so that the player is in the most advantageous gaming state.

  In addition, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during this probability change state (in the super-continuous change mode), the jackpot type (big win) in which the probability change state (super-continuous change mode) is set again at a rate of 100% Configured to win D). Specifically, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the entrance to the second entrance 6400, and when the big win is won, the big hit D which is the big hit of 16R is set, and the probability variation state (super (Chan mode) is set. In this way, since the probability variation state (super-long chain mode), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player at a rate of 100%, is won as a jackpot to be set again, the player can continue to play the game more eagerly. It is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

  Similarly to the eleventh control example described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit. Then, when winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, the variable winning device 670 is in an open state so that a game ball can enter the V winning port 670a. When the V prize opening 670a is opened, and the game ball flows down the special discharge channel 670e2 provided in the variable prize apparatus 670 and passes through the V prize switch 670e3, a big hit is given. It is composed.

  The jackpot awarded when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 is set to be different depending on the gaming state and the type of the jackpot, which will be described in detail later. 2 If you win a small win in the special symbol lottery and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, you will receive a big hit A that sets the normal state (normal mode) after the big hit game at a rate of 50% In addition, the jackpot B is configured to be given to the jackpot B in which the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 50%.

  On the other hand, the jackpot type that is awarded when a game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 in the second special symbol lottery during the probabilistic state (super-long-chang mode) is 50%. After the game is over, a jackpot B is given to change the gaming state to the short-time state (continuous mode), and at a rate of 50%, a jackpot D is given to set the probability change state (super continuous mode) again after the jackpot game is finished. The As described above, also in the thirteenth control example, when a win is won and the game ball passes the V winning device 670e3, a big win is awarded. During the probability change state (super-continuous change mode), after the jackpot game is over, the probability change state (super-continuous change mode), which is the most advantageous game state for the player, is set again, and the relatively advantageous time-shortening state ( In some cases, the game state may change even in the most advantageous probability change state (in the super continuous mode), so the player can play the game with a sense of tension. It can be executed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the thirteenth control example, if the player wins the specified number of times (25 times) in the short-time state (during continuous chain mode) or the probability variation state (super-long chain mode), the normal pattern has a low probability from the high probability state. The game state is configured to shift to the state. That is, when the number of small hits reaches the specified number during the short-time state (continuous mode), the gaming state is configured to shift from the short-time state (continuous mode) to the normal state (normal mode). When the number of small hits reaches the specified number of times (25 times) in the super-continuous mode, it shifts to a latent state (retraction mode) in which a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol low probability state are set. It is composed. When the game state shifts to the normal state (normal mode), which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, or the latent state (retraction mode), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400 Therefore, it is an efficient gaming method to enter a game ball into the first entrance 64 and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. However, since the lottery (discrimination) of the first special symbol is configured not to win a small hit, the number of winning balls (acquisable benefits) is reduced, which is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. End up.

  Also, aiming to win a big win where the odds change state is set again only by drawing a special symbol without intentionally firing a game ball toward the V prize winning device 670 while winning the small wins during the probability change state. When a game is executed, there is a possibility that a small win is won a predetermined number of times (25 times) and the game state is shifted. Therefore, the player does not pass the game ball to the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670 by stopping firing the game ball in the probability changing state (super-continuous change mode) by winning the small hit. A gaming method and a gaming method that actively launches a gaming ball toward the V winning device 670, passes the gaming ball to the V winning switch 670e3, and expects to receive a jackpot that sets the probability variation state again. Can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the game methods in the probability variation state, and to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the thirteenth control example, as in the eleventh control example described above, when the gaming state shifts to the short-time state, the probability variation state, and the latent state, the special symbol lottery is within the specified number of times after the state transition. If the jackpot is not won (for example, 100 times), the gaming state is shifted to the normal state again.

  As described above, in the thirteenth control example, four types of gaming states are set, and the probability variation state (super-continuous change mode) becomes the most advantageous gaming state for the player among the gaming states. Also, in the probable change state (super-long chain mode), until the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times), it does not shift to the normal state (normal mode) that is the most disadvantageous to the player, Even if a win is won and a big win is awarded through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670, the probability change state is set again, or the time shortening state (repetitive advantage) is relatively advantageous to the player. (Chan mode) is set. By configuring in this way, even when the probability variation state ends, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set, so that the player can be prevented from stopping the game immediately. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the following description of the thirteenth control example, the description of each gaming state is as follows: the normal state is “normal mode”, the short-time state is “continuous change mode”, the probability variation state is “super continuous change mode”, and the latent probability state is “ This is called “retraction mode”.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, an audio lamp The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The control process to be executed is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. Other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the eleventh control example or the twelfth control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, an audio lamp The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The control process to be executed is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. Other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the eleventh control example or the twelfth control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 729, a game state (mode) transition method in the thirteenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 729, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example is roughly divided into four states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in YZ1 of FIG. 729 (low probability state of special symbol: low probability state of normal symbol) and the super continuous mode shown in YZ2 (high probability state of special symbol: high probability state of normal symbol) And continuous mode (YZ3 low probability state: normal symbol high probability state) and YZ4 pull back mode (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol low probability state) are provided. ing.

  As described above, the normal mode indicates a normal state that is a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol. In the normal mode, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is a long variation (30 seconds). Since the normal symbol low probability state is set and the probability of winning the normal symbol is also low, it is a gaming state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second entrance 6400. Therefore, it is an efficient gaming method to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

  However, even if the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult to shift to the super continuous mode, which is the most advantageous game state for the player (5%), so the game state is the most unfavorable for the player. . In addition, as described above, the super-continuous mode indicated by YZ2 in FIG. 729 shows a probability variation state in which a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol are set. Configured to win. And if the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/25, the jackpot D is again won at a rate of 100%, and this is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  729 in YZ3 in FIG. 729 is a short time state in which a low probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol are set. This continuous mode is a normal symbol high probability state, and the normal symbol variation time is also set short (0.1 seconds), so that it is easy to allow a game ball to enter the second entrance 6400. The basic game method is to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Since the special symbol has a low probability state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/200 as in the normal mode. A super-continuous mode that is most advantageous to the above is set. Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol, since it is configured to win a small hit, it is a relatively advantageous gaming state compared to the normal mode.

  The pull back mode indicated by YZ4 in FIG. 729 is a latent state in which a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol are set. Normal symbol is in a low probability state, normal symbol variation time 0.5 seconds (game ball firing interval is 0.6 seconds, variation time difficult to enter the second entrance 6400) Therefore, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and a game with the second special symbol becomes an inefficient game method. You can't expect to get a ball (to get a bonus), but because the high probability state of the special symbol is set, you win the jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/25. Therefore, when compared with the normal state (YZ1 in FIG. 729), it becomes an advantageous gaming state.

  From the normal mode indicated by YZ1 in FIG. 729, when a special symbol jackpot is won, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 729, when the first special symbol lottery is a big win, 50% wins the big hit A, and after the jackpot game is over, the normal mode is set again. Is done. On the other hand, if the jackpot B is won at a rate of 45%, after the jackpot game ends, the continuous mode shown in YZ3 of FIG. 729 is set. Then, the jackpot C is won at a rate of 5%, and after the jackpot game is over, the super-continuous mode indicated by YZ2 in FIG. 729 is set. In this way, the player wins the jackpot A where the normal mode is set again at a rate of 50%, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  In the super-continuous mode indicated by YZ2 in FIG. 729, the most efficient game method is to execute a game with the second special symbol. And, as indicated by YZ2 in FIG. 729, the high probability state of the special symbol is set in the super continuous mode, and the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/25, and in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio is 100%. Again, win the jackpot D, which is set to the super-long chain mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 729, when a V win (an event in which a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3) occurs in the second special symbol lottery, a big hit D is awarded at a rate of 50%. After the big hit game is over, the super-long chain mode is set again. Thus, since the super-continuous mode is set again with high probability, it is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. Therefore, since it is possible for the player to execute the game with one goal being the transition of the gaming state to the super-continuous mode, the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, when a V winning is generated, a jackpot B is awarded at a rate of 50%, and after the jackpot game is over, the continuous mode is set. Also, if the second special symbol lottery is won 25 times per bonus, the game state shifts from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state of the normal symbol, so the game moves to the pull-back mode indicated by YZ4 in FIG. 729. The state transitions. Furthermore, when the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the normal mode indicated by YZ1 is set. In this way, even after the game state has shifted to the super continuous mode, there is a possibility that the game state may shift to another game state, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Further, as described above, since the high probability of a special symbol is set in the super-continuous mode, it is an event that hardly occurs when the number of lotteries for the special symbol reaches the specified number without being a big hit. In addition, when the gaming state shifts other than that the number of lotteries for the special symbol reaches the specified number, the continuous mode or the pullback mode is set. With this configuration, even when the super continuous mode, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, is ended, a relatively advantageous game state is set compared to the normal state. However, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the continuous change mode indicated by YZ3 in FIG. 729, it is an efficient game method to execute the game of the second special symbol. When the special symbol jackpot is won, the jackpot D is won at a rate of 100%, and after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to the super-continuous mode. In addition, if the player wins a small win in the second special symbol lottery and a V winning is generated, the jackpot B is set at a rate of 50%, and after the jackpot game is finished, the continuous mode is set again. On the other hand, a jackpot A is awarded at a rate of 50%, and after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to the normal mode. Similarly to the super-long chain mode, when the number of wins in the second special symbol lottery wins the specified number of times (25 times), the low probability state is set from the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the gaming state shifts to the normal mode. Further, the game state is configured to shift to the normal state even when the number of lotteries for the special symbol reaches the specified number. Since the gaming state may shift from the relatively advantageous gaming state to the most unfavorable gaming state as described above, the player can execute the game with a sense of tension, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The pull-back mode indicated by YZ4 in FIG. 729 is a gaming state that is shifted when the number of small hits reaches the specified number (25 times) in the super-continuous mode, as described above. In the pull-back mode, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400, and the game is executed so that the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. It becomes an efficient game method. Moreover, since a high probability state of a special symbol is set, it is an advantageous gaming state when compared with the normal mode. In this pull-back mode, when the remaining probability variation number of the super-continuous change mode reaches a specified number, the gaming state shifts to the normal mode.

  In this control example, when the super-changing mode or the continuous-changing mode is set, the gaming state is changed when the number of small hits reaches 25 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The prescribed number of times may be 25 times or more, or the prescribed number of times may be set by lottery when the gaming state shifts to the super-changing mode or the continuous-changing mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the degree of advantage to be different every time even in the same super-continuous mode or continuous mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, when the number of small hits reaches the specified number of times, it is configured to shift from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, but not limited to this, the state of the special symbol is shifted. Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery when the specified number of small hits is reached. By configuring in this way, the player can execute the game with the expectation that it may shift to a more advantageous game state than the current game state, so that the player can participate in the game more eagerly be able to.

  Next, referring to FIG. 730 (a), in the super-continuous change mode (probability variation state) in the thirteenth control example, when the special symbol lottery is won in the third symbol display device 81, The selected effect will be described. As described above, in the thirteenth control example, if the game ball is passed through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit period (probability change state or short time state) and the big hit is made, it is based on the small hit type selected this time. After the jackpot game is over, the game state shifts. Specifically, during the super-continuous mode, the small hit type (small hit C) that shifts to the continuous mode by passing the V winning switch 670e3 and the small hit type (small hit D) that shifts to the super continuous mode. ) And are provided.

  Also, in the consecutive-chan mode, by passing the V winning switch 670e3, the small hit type (small hit B) for which the consecutive-chunk mode is set again after the end of the big hit game, and the small that the game state shifts to the normal mode. At least a hit type (small hit A) is provided. In other words, in any mode, when winning a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is advantageous that the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 and the big win is advantageous. There is provided a jackpot type that is advantageous when the jackpot is completed without passing through the winning switch 670e3. In this selection effect, an effect is performed in which the player makes a right turn to pass the V winning switch 670e3 or selects to stop firing so that the game ball does not pass the V winning switch 670e3. .

  In addition, as described above, in this control example, if the winning combination is the super-continuous mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, or the lottery of the second special symbol is selected in the continuous-changing mode, When the number of times is counted and the value reaches the specified number of times, the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. That is, the game state shifts to a disadvantageous game state for the player. Therefore, even if the game is stopped so that the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 670e3 when winning a small hit, the game method must be selected while taking into account the remaining number of small hits that the game state will change. I must.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 730 (a), when winning a small hit during the normal mode, “3” and “4” indicating the small hit are displayed for the display area Ds2 in the upper right portion of the display screen. And the third symbol of the combination of “1” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into a left and right display mode, and a horizontally long and substantially rectangular display region HR7 in which characters “Choose!” Are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Is formed. A screen dividing line HR10 is drawn at the center of the main display area Dm. In the following description, the left area from the line is referred to as a left display area Dm50, and the right area is referred to as a right display area Dm51.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 730, in the left display area Dm50 on the display screen, a horizontally long and substantially rectangular display area HR8 on which characters “V avoid and super continuous change !?” are displayed is formed below the display area HR8. Is displayed with a sign image YG5 simulating a downward triangle on which characters "STOP" are displayed. Then, a sign image YG3 in which the characters “disturbance” are displayed is displayed at the bottom of the left display area Dm50, and the game ball shown in the left area is more than the game method shown in the right display area Dm51 described later. If you choose a game method that stops firing the game, the risk is higher (If you win the jackpot, the game state is set to the most advantageous game state again at a rate of 100%, but the jackpot It is clearly shown to the player that the game state may change based on the number of small hits before winning, and the game state may shift to an unfavorable game state).

  On the other hand, in the right display area Dm51 of the main display area Dm, there is formed a horizontally long and substantially rectangular display area HR9 on which characters “V get a big hit !!!!” are displayed, and below that is called “right-handed”. An arrow image YG2 simulating a right-pointing arrow on which characters are displayed is displayed. A sign image YG4 in which the characters “stable” are displayed is displayed at the right end of the right display area Dm51, and is displayed in the right display area Dm51 rather than selecting the game method shown in the left area Dm. When the right-handed game is selected, there is less risk (a jackpot is likely to be given, but a jackpot type that may shift to an unfavorable gaming state may be given). Furthermore, the characters “20 remaining times” are displayed in the display area Ds3 of the right display area Dm51, and the remaining number of small hits until the gaming state shifts is shown. By configuring in this way, the player can easily determine how much he can afford to win, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  The display of the number of small hits is configured to indicate the remaining number of times, but may be configured to display the cumulative number of small hits. Further, not only the number of times is displayed, but also an effect mode (for example, the hourglass is decreasing) that can indicate the remaining period may be displayed, and operation means that allows the player to operate various display modes The player may be able to select a display mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  With these display contents, when the player wins a small win, the game ball is not passed to the V winning switch 670e3 by stopping the game ball firing, and the player wins the big win only by a special symbol lottery. The game state may shift to an unfavorable state if it is not possible to win a big win within the remaining number of small hits. Can show them. Also, if a V-winning occurs by making a right strike, the probability of winning the jackpot is high and the game can be executed with confidence, rather than aiming for the jackpot only in the special symbol lottery, but the gaming state shifts to a disadvantaged state. It is possible to make the player understand that there is a possibility of end.

  This allows the player to determine whether it is better to make a right strike aiming for the V prize or to stop the game ball from firing in order to avoid the V prize. Since the game can be played with the same game method, the interest of the game can be improved every time a small hit is made.

  In the thirteenth control example, when the V winning is avoided in the super-continuous change mode, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to be shifted again to the super-continuous change mode is 100%, whereas the V winning occurs. By doing so, the ratio of determining the small hit type (small hit D) that shifts to the super-changing mode after the big win is 50%, and the small shift to the continuous change mode after the big win given by the occurrence of the V prize The rate at which the hit type (small hit C) is determined is 50%. Therefore, if a game is executed aiming to win a big win only by drawing a special symbol while avoiding the V prize, there is a high possibility that the Super Chang mode will be set again, but the special symbol jackpot There is also a risk that the number of small wins will reach the specified number before winning, and the gaming state will shift to the above-described withdrawal mode.

  On the other hand, when a game is executed aiming for a V prize, the big win type is set again at a rate of 50% by the V prize, but the game state is a continuous mode at a rate of 50%. There is also the risk of moving to. Therefore, by executing the selection effect shown in FIG. 730 (a), it is possible to more seriously determine whether the V winning should be avoided or the V winning should be aimed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 730 (b), the number of remaining small hits (the remaining value up to the specified number of small hits at which the game state shifts) is small in the super-continuous-chang mode (probability variation state) in the thirteenth control example. The selection effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when it becomes will be described. As described above, in the thirteenth control example, when the number of wins in the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number in the super continuous mode or continuous mode, the normal symbol The gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. The example of FIG. 730 (b) is an example of a display mode indicating that the number of times until the number of small hits reaches the specified number is small.

  As shown in FIG. 730 (b), the display area Ds3 shown at the lower part of the right display area Dm51 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 has a small remaining hit count of “5 remaining times”. The display content for indicating is displayed so as to shine. By configuring in this way, the remaining number of times is displayed prominently, so that the player can easily grasp the game situation. The display mode is not limited to this, and the display may be made so that the number of small hits flashes. In addition, the display mode is changed according to the value, such as displaying to emit light when the number of small hits is in a certain range value, and displaying to blink when it is in another range value. You may do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  Further, the screen dividing line HR10 displayed at the center of the screen is configured to move to the left region and be displayed when the remaining small hit count is reduced. The characters “Choose !!” displayed in the display area HR7 of the main display area Dm are displayed with a variable position on the left side compared with the case where the number of remaining small hits is large, and is displayed by the screen dividing line HR10. The left display area Dm50 and the right display area Dm51 that are divided so as to be even at the center of the screen are variably displayed as the screen dividing line HR10 moves to the left area of the screen. Specifically, the display area of the left display area Dm50 is narrower than that when the screen division line HR10 moves to the left area of the screen and the remaining small hit count is large (see FIG. 730 (a)). The right display area Dm51 is displayed so that the display area becomes wider than the case where the number of remaining small hits is large as the screen dividing line HR10 moves.

  In this control example, the second consecutive mode set after the end of the jackpot game given by the V winning is the second than the pull-back mode that shifts when the number of small hits reaches the specified number during the super-continuous mode. Since the special symbol lottery can be executed efficiently, it is possible to win a small bonus and get the number of prize balls, or if the special symbol lottery is won, the rate is 100% after the jackpot game ends, Since the super continuous mode which is the most advantageous state for the player is set, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. Therefore, if you are likely to reach the specified number of small hits, if you win a small win rather than running a game while expecting to win a big win only with a special symbol lottery, avoiding the V prize Is a game method that is more advantageous for the player if he / she actively executes the right-handed game and aims for the V prize, so that the game is executed while aiming to set the super-continuous mode again.

  Accordingly, the number of remaining small hits is reduced, and the screen dividing line HR10 is variably displayed in the left area, so that the right display area Dm51 for guiding the game method aiming for the V prize is displayed widely, and the game aiming for the V prize It becomes possible to make the method more prominent. It is also possible to execute an effect such that the display area that is enlarged by moving the screen dividing line HR10 shines. By comprising in this way, an appropriate game method can be made more conspicuous and guided with respect to a player.

  That is, in the selection effect of this control example, it is possible to prompt the player to select a game method advantageous to the player by changing the display mode based on the game state and the value of the number of remaining small hits. In this control example, the screen is divided into left and right by the screen dividing line HR10. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be divided vertically. Also, a character or the like may be displayed and the game method may be guided to the character. With such a configuration, various effects can be executed, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  Further, in this control example, the screen dividing line HR10 is configured to be displayed variably on the left side of the screen. However, in the special symbol lottery, when the big win is won, the special symbol is being changed or changed. You may comprise so that presentation may be performed, such as the screen dividing line HR10 being pulled back to the screen right area at the time of a stop. By configuring in this way, the player can visually determine that the player has won a jackpot in a game other than the V prize, and can give great joy. In addition, if it is determined that there will be a winner of a special symbol lottery to be executed in the future based on the pre-read result of the special symbol, the special symbol lottery will be won from the change before the big hit variation. It is also possible to execute an effect that is displayed in a variable manner so that the guidance display of the desired game method is gradually widened. Thus, by changing the guidance display mode over a plurality of variable periods, the player can have an exciting feeling that something is happening, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the above-described example, the selection effect is executed when the super-continuous mode is set as the gaming state. However, in the case of the short-time state, the right strike shown in FIG. 730 (b) is performed. You may comprise so that the selection production | presentation strongly urged may be performed. With this configuration, an appropriate game method can be transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

<Electrical Configuration in 13th Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 731 (a), details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 731 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 731 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 690 (a)), instead of the first random number table 202a. Instead of the random number per 13 table 202la, the first per category selection table 202b, the first per category selection 13 table 202lb, the variation pattern selection table 202d instead of the variation pattern selection 13 table 202ld, and the small hit category selection table 202da The difference is that instead of the small hit type selection 13 table 202le, the short-time count selection table 202db, a probability variation / short-time count selection table 202lf and a general-purpose variation pattern selection table 202lg are provided instead of the general-purpose variation pattern selection table 202dc. Since the other configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 690 (a)) in the eleventh control example described above, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the first random number 13 table 202la in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 731 (b). FIG. 731 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number 13 table 202la in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 731 (b), the first random number 13 table 202la in the thirteenth control example has a special symbol common to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the low probability state of the symbol is set, two random values (counter values) “0, 1” are defined as determination values determined to be big hits. Further, when a special symbol high probability state is set, “11 to 35” is defined as a range of random number values (first random number counter C1) determined to be big hits.

  Next, the small hit random number table 202lh in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 731 (c). FIG. 731 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit random number table 202lh in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 731 (c), in the small hit random number table 202lh in the thirteenth control example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the random number value for the small hit is defined in common for all gaming states. Not. That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol, no win is won. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, “41 to 399” is defined as a range of random numbers that are assumed to be small hits in common for all gaming states.

  As described above, in the thirteenth control example, only the second special symbol lottery can be won. As a result, it is possible to form a super-continuous change mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, or a state in which the V winning switch 670e3 is more easily passed in the continuous change mode. Therefore, great joy can be given to the player.

  Next, the first hit type selection 13 table lb in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 732 (a). FIG. 732 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection 13 table lb in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 732 (a), the first hit type selection 13 table lb in the thirteenth control example is provided with three types of jackpots A, B, and C as jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot D is provided as the jackpot type of the second special symbol.

  In this control example, in the same way as in the seventh control example described above, when the game ball passes through the probability variable prize switch 650e3 provided in the variable prize device 650 during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends. Probability change state (high probability state of special symbol) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 732 (a), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit A”. . This “big hit A” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is five and the normal state is set again after the big hit (regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning) (the probability change winning switch 650e3 is not passed). . Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

  Further, for the first special symbol, “big hit B” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 94”. The “big hit B” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is five and a short time state (not passing through the probability change winning switch 650e3) is set as the gaming state after the big hit regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 45 counter values that become “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 45% (45/100).

  In addition, for the first special symbol, “big hit C” is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “95 to 99”). The “big hit C” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is five and the probability change state (passing the probability change winning switch 650e3) is set as the game state after the big hit regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

  On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, “big hit D” is defined in association with all the values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2. This “big hit D” has 16 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which a promising change state is set after the jackpot game is ended (enters the probable change winning switch 650e3) regardless of the game state at the time of winning.

  In this way, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, after the jackpot game is over, the jackpot that shifts to the continuous Chang mode that can efficiently execute the special figure 2 game at a rate of 50% or the super-continuous Chang mode. Is set. In the lottery of the second special symbol, the super-continuous mode is set at the rate of 100% after the jackpot game ends. First, the player executes a game with the goal of winning a jackpot for shifting the game state to the continuous mode or the super continuous mode. And once you switch to the continuous chain mode or the super continuous mode, the second special symbol lottery can be executed efficiently, so continue the game at least during the continuous chain mode or the super continuous mode. Since it is possible to make the player think that it is more profitable, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that, as described above, in the thirteenth control example, when the super-continuous-chan mode ends, a game that is relatively advantageous to the player except for the transition of the gaming state due to the fact that the special drawing has reached the specified number of times. The game state is shifted to the continuous mode or the pullback mode. Thereby, it is possible to make it seem that the game is continued at least until the end of the continuous change mode or the withdrawal mode after the super continuous change mode ends. In other words, a player who has won a large number of prize balls (privileges) by repeating the jackpot and the super-continuous mode in the super-continuous mode will be satisfied with the game at the time when the last jackpot in the super-continuous mode is over and play immediately. Can be prevented from quitting. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In addition, when the big win is made by lottery of the first special symbol in the continuous change mode or the super continuous change mode, the super continuous change mode can be set after the big win at a rate of 100%. Thereby, for example, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol remains, the mode shifts to the continuous-chang mode or the super-continuous-chan mode, and when the big symbol is drawn by lottery of the special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol, You can always continue the super-continuous mode. In other words, after shifting to the continuous mode or the super continuous mode, an absurd situation occurs in which the first special symbol lottery is made and the player immediately shifts to the normal mode or the continuous mode. In this case, the player can be more motivated to play in the super-continuous mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 732 (b), details of the probability variation / short time count selection table 202lf will be described. FIG. 732 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation / short time count selection table 202lf in the thirteenth control example. This probability variation / time reduction number selection table 202lf is referred to at the time of jackpot end (see S1371 in FIG. 741), and the number of times of probability change and time reduction after the jackpot end (the number of lottery of special symbols until the transition to the normal mode) This is a data table in which data to be set in the hour / medium counter 203da or the probability variation counter 203la is defined in accordance with.

  As shown in FIG. 732 (b), when the jackpot A is won, it is stipulated that 0 is set to the value of the hour / counter counter 203da and the value of the probability variation counter 203la after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the jackpot B is won, since the time reduction state is set, it is stipulated that the value of the time reduction medium counter 203da is set to 100 and the value of the probability variation counter 203la is set to 0. When the jackpot C or jackpot D is won, the probability variation state is set, so that both the value of the hour / minute counter 203da and the value of the probability variation counter 203la are set to 100.

  In this control example, when the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set, 100 is set as the prescribed number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number may be 100 times or less. It is good also as above. Further, after the jackpot game is over, a value to be set may be determined by lottery. By constructing in this way, it becomes possible to give a certain number of times of random change or the number of time reductions irregularly, so that the player can execute the game with a thrilling feeling and improve the interest of the game. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 733 (a), details of the small hit type selection 13 table 202le in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 733 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 13 table 202le. This small hit type selection 13 table 202le is a data table in which a determination value for determining a small hit type is defined when a special symbol lottery is won, and a gaming state is a normal state. Alternatively, a normal / short time small hit type selection table 202le1 that is referred to in the case of a short time state and a probability change / latent probability small hit type selection table 202le2 that is referred to when the game state is in a probable state are defined. Yes.

  First, with reference to FIG. 733 (b), the normal / short time small hit type selection table 202le1 will be described. The normal / short time small hit type selection table 202le1 is a data table that is referred to when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode or in the continuous mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 733 (b), for the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 49”, “small hit A” is defined in association with the small hit type. ing. The “small hit A” is a small hit type to which “big hit A” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. As described above, the jackpot A has five rounds, and if a win is made during the normal mode, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot is over (does not pass the probability change switch). Of the 100 counter values to be obtained, the counter value that is “small hit A” is 50. Therefore, the percentage that “small hit A” is determined when a special symbol lottery is won is 50% (50 / 100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 733 (b), for the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “50 to 99”, “small hit B” is defined in association with the small hit type. The “small hit B” is a small hit type to which “big hit B” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, “big hit B” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is five and the mode is shifted to the continuous mode after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes “small hit B” is 50. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is won, “small hit B” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

  Next, the probability variation / latent probability small hit type selection table 202le2 will be described with reference to FIG. 733 (c). The probability variation / latent probability small hit type selection table 202le2 is a table that is referred to when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol when the gaming state is the super-continuous mode or the pull-back mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 733 (c), for the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 49”, “small hit C” is defined in association with the small hit type. ing. This “small hit C” is a small hit type to which “big hit B” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the “big hit B” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is five and the continuous mode is set after the big hit game ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hitting type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes “small hit C” is 50. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is won, “small hit C” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 733 (c), for the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “50 to 99”, “small hit D” is defined in association with the small hit type. This “small hit D” is a small hit type to which “big hit D” is given when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the “big hit D” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and the super-changing mode is set after the big hit ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hitting type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes “small hit D” is 50. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is won, “small hit D” is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

  Thus, in the thirteenth control example, four jackpot types are provided, and the jackpot type executed (started) when passing through the V winning switch 670e3 differs depending on the jackpot type. It is configured. In the normal mode or the continuous change mode, the big hit A or the big hit B is started by winning the small hit A or the small hit B and passing the game ball through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit game. Then, the normal mode or the continuous mode is set again as the gaming state (mode) after the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the super-continuous-chang mode or the pullback mode, a small win C or a small win D is won, and when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small hit game, the big hit B or the big win D is started, and as a gaming state (mode) after the jackpot ends, continuous mode or super continuous mode is set. As described above, when a winning game is won in the lottery of the second special symbol remaining in the super-continuous mode or the transition to the pullback mode, the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. After the granted jackpot is over, the game state shifts to a super-continuous mode that is advantageous as a gaming state or a relatively advantageous continuous mode, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, even when the gaming state of the super-continuous mode has been shifted due to a V prize, since at least a relatively advantageous continuous mode is set, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after the state transition. The operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202ld in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 587) in the seventh control example, this variation pattern selection table 202ld is referenced to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol. It is a data table.

  FIG. 734 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 734 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202ld in the thirteenth control example is different from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 692 (a)). In place of the hit table 202d12, a special figure 2 hit table 202ld2 is provided. In place of the special figure 2 off (normal / retraction) table 202d13, a special figure 2 off (normal) table 202ld3 is provided. The difference is that, in place of the special figure 2 out (ream) table 202d14, a special figure 2 out (probability change / short time / latency) table 202ld4 is provided. Since other points are the same as those in the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The special figure 2 per table 202ld2 is a data table that is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when the second special symbol wins a lottery. As shown in FIG. 734 (b), the special pattern 2 per table 202ld2 has a variation pattern (variation time) selected for each mode (gaming state) at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is prescribed. As shown in FIG. 734 (b), when a big hit is made by lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode, a very long fluctuation per 180 seconds is determined as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is done. On the other hand, when the big special is won by lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, the short time state, and the latent probability state, the middle variation per variation time of 10 seconds is used as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is determined. In this way, in a normal state where it is necessary to advance the game by the lottery of the first special symbol, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, by configuring a very long variation time, It is possible to reduce the game efficiency when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed irregularly or illegally in the mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed irregularly or illegally.

  Also, the special figure 2 off (normal) table 202ld3 is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when the second special symbol is lost (including a small hit) in the normal state. It is a data table. As shown in FIG. 734 (c), in the special figure 2 off (normal) table 202ld3, only the extra long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Has been. In this way, in a normal state where it is necessary to advance the game by the lottery of the first special symbol, in the case of a miss (or small hit) in the lottery of the second special symbol, a configuration that sets a very long variation time and By doing so, the gaming efficiency when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed irregularly or illegally in the normal state can be further reduced. Therefore, it can suppress that the lottery of a 2nd special symbol will be performed irregularly or illegally.

  Also, the special figure 2 off (probability change / short time / latency probability) table 202ld4 changes the fluctuation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is lost (or small hit) in the probability change state, short time state, and latent state. It is a data table referred in order to determine (variation time). As shown in FIG. 734 (d), a variation pattern that can be determined for each lottery result is defined in the special figure 2 deviation (probability change / short time / latency probability) table 202ld4. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 734 (d), when the second special symbol is lost, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds with respect to all the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the probability variation state, the short time state, and the latent probability state, if the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, a variation time of 10 seconds is always set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 734 (d), for the small hit of the second special symbol, the small hit short with a variation time of 5 seconds is within the range where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 174”. Variations are defined in association with each other, and a small hit middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “175 to 198”. According to these provisions, in the probability variation state, the short time state, and the latency state, only a relatively short variation time of 5 seconds or 10 seconds is set when the second special symbol lottery is executed. The gaming efficiency in the state, the short time state, and the latent state can be increased. Therefore, since the superiority of the probability variation state and the short time state can be further increased, the joy of the player in the case of shifting to the probability variation state and the short time state can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the probabilistic state and the short time state.

  Even in the latent state (withdrawal mode), if the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, a variation time of 10 seconds is always set, and the lottery of the second special symbol is promptly executed. By configuring in this way, even when the second special symbol hold is accumulated, even when the probability change state (super-continuous change mode) shifts to the latent probability state (withdrawal mode), the second special symbol lottery is quickly performed. Can be executed. Therefore, the player can determine the lottery result of the remaining second special symbols in a short time even when the player has shifted to the latent state, and even if the player loses, Since it is possible to switch to a game method in which a lottery of one special symbol is executed, an efficient game can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 735 (a), details of the common map variation pattern selection 13 table 202lg will be described. This normal pattern variation pattern selection 13 table 202lg is a data table that is referred to for setting the variation time of the normal symbol when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 735 (a), The gaming state (mode) at the time when the normal symbol lottery is executed and the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol are defined in association with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 735 (a), for a normal state A (normal state) of a normal symbol, a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern (FIG. 735 (a)). ) 202lg1). On the other hand, the short time variation (probability variation state / short time state) of the normal symbol is defined in association with the short variation A having a variation time of 0.1 second (see 202lg2 in FIG. 735 (a)). The normal state B (latency state) of the normal symbol is defined in association with the short fluctuation B having a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (see 202lg3 in FIG. 735 (a)).

  For this reason, when the normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (normal mode), the normal symbol variation time is set to be very long compared to the time-short state (super-continuous mode, continuous mode). The game efficiency when a game is played by aiming at the through gate 67 and the second entrance 6400 by right-handing can be extremely deteriorated. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn in the normal mode. In addition, by setting the variation time of the normal symbol in the time shortening state A (probability changing state, time shortening state) to 0.1 seconds, if the normal symbol hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is directly It can be configured to make it easier to enter the 2 entrance 6400. Therefore, during the continuous mode or continuous mode, the left flow path R2 (see FIG. 685) can be achieved by simply hitting the game ball to the right at the maximum firing strength and the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval). It is possible to enter the game balls distributed to the second entrance 6400 with high probability (with a probability of 1 / 1.2 which is a probability of winning a normal symbol).

  On the other hand, by setting the normal symbol change time in the pullback mode (latent probability state) to 0.5 seconds, even if the normal symbol lottery is won, The game balls that have passed through the gate 67) are also launched into the second entrance guidance area next to the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and distributed to the right channel R1 (see FIG. 685). It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second entrance 6400. That is, by setting a variation time of 0.5 seconds, when a normal symbol is hit, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the second entrance 6400 (that is, The electric accessory 6400a is opened (after 0.2 seconds, which is the flow down period of the flow path from the through gate 67 to the second entrance 6400). In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is 0.2 seconds, another gaming ball must not reach within 0.5 to 0.7 seconds after one gaming ball passes through the through gate 67. Cannot enter the second entrance 6400. However, even if the game ball is continuously fired to the second entrance guidance area at the shortest launch interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and the second Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the entrance 6400, the entrance into the second entrance 6400 is made after the opening period. Therefore, even if the player hits the right at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pull-back mode, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6400, which is mischievous. It becomes a very disadvantageous state that only reduces the ball. Therefore, in the pull-back mode, the game method can be performed by causing the player to enter the first entrance 64 by left-handed to advance the game (to make a special symbol lottery). As a result, when the transition from the super-continuous mode is made to the pull-back mode, it is possible to prevent the number of the second special symbol holding balls from being newly increased, to prevent fraud and to execute an appropriate game method.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 735 (b). FIG. 735 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 735 (b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirteenth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 693 (b)), a probability variation counter 203la, and a small hit count counter. The difference is that 203lb and a pullback flag 203lc are added.

  The probability variation counter 203la is a counter for counting the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols until the high probability state of the special symbol is finished. If the value of the probability variation counter 203la is 1 or more, it means that the special symbol is in a high probability state (either super-continuous mode or pullback mode). If the value of the probability variation counter 203la is 0, the special symbol Of low probability (either normal mode or continuous mode). The probability variation counter 203la has an initial value set to 0, and at the end of the jackpot, the probability variation count specified in the probability variation / short time count selection table 202lf (see FIG. 732 (b)) is set (S1372 in FIG. 741). reference). Further, the value of the probability variation counter 203la is updated by subtracting one by one in the gaming state update process (see FIG. 737) executed at the timing of the special symbol variation stop (see S2482 in FIG. 737). When the special symbol lottery is executed, the value of the probability variation counter 203la determines whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state, and the first random number 13 table for the high probability time (FIG. 731 (b)). Refer to) and draw a special symbol.

  The small hit number counter 203 lb is a counter for counting the number of times that a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the super continuous mode or the continuous special mode. In this control example, as described above, the transition from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state of the normal symbol when the number of small hits is 25 in the super continuous mode or continuous channel mode. The determination is made based on the value set in the small hit number counter 203lb.

  The small hit number counter 203lb is incremented by 1 when the small hit is won and the small hit start process 13 (see FIG. 738) is executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (see S2496 in FIG. 738). If the value becomes 25, in the pull-back transition process (see FIG. 743), the value of the hour / minute counter 203da is set to 0 (see S2502 in FIG. 743), and the gaming state has a low probability of a normal symbol. It becomes a state. Also, the value of the small hit number counter 203 lb is won by a special symbol lottery, and when the big hit game ends (see S 1326 in FIG. 741), the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670 e 3 during the small hit game. When the big hit is started (see S1691 in FIG. 742), the value is reset when the value of the small hit number counter 203lb becomes 25 (see S2503 in FIG. 743).

  The pull-back flag 203lc indicates that the number of wins in the super-changing mode or in the continuous-changing mode has been won the specified number of times (25 times), and the gaming state has shifted from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state. It is a flag for indicating. The pullback flag 203lc is set to ON when it is determined in the pullback transition process (see FIG. 743) that the value of the small hit number counter 203lb is 25 (see S2504 in FIG. 743). If it is referred to in the small hit start process 13 (see FIG. 738) (see S2495 in FIG. 738) and it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is set to ON (see S2495 in FIG. 738: Yes), the small hit The number counter 203lb is configured not to be added. By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced because the process of adding the number of small hits is not executed even after the game state has shifted from the super-continuous mode or the continuous mode. Then, in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot is won and set to off when the jackpot game is started (see S1192 in FIG. 740), and the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 during the jackpot game. However, it is also set to off when a jackpot is awarded (see S1693 in FIG. 742).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in 13th Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 736 to 743, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. Each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the thirteenth control example is different from the control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the eleventh control example described above. Instead of the process 5 (see FIG. 698), the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 736), the game state update process (see FIG. 737) instead of the short time update process (see FIG. 700), the small hit start process (FIG. 701) Instead of the jackpot start process 13 (see FIG. 738), the boot process 5 (see 703) instead of the launch process 13 (see FIG. 739), and the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704) Instead of the control process 13 (see FIG. 740) and the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 705), the jackpot end process 13 (see FIG. 741) and the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706) ) With the difference that performs a small hit control process (see FIG. 742) in place. Moreover, it is different in that a pull-back transition process (see FIG. 743) is newly executed. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the special symbol variation process 13 (S191 in FIG. 736) executed by the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 736. FIG. 736 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 13 (S191). This special symbol change process 13 (S191) is a game state update process (S292) instead of the short time update process (S264) in contrast to the special symbol change process 5 (S142 of FIG. 698) of the eleventh control example described above. The point difference start processing 13 (S293) is executed instead of the small hit start processing (S266). Further, it is different in that a process for resetting the values of the probability variation counter 203la and the small hit count counter 203lb is added when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 13 (S191), when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S218: No), a game state update process is executed (S292). Details of the game state update process (S292) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S265). If it is determined that the game is a small hit (S265: Yes), the small hit start process 13 is executed (S293), the process of S221 described above is executed, and this process ends. Details of the small hit start process 13 (S293) will be described later with reference to FIG. 738. On the other hand, in the process of S265, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S265: No), the process of S293 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big win (S218: Yes), the above-described process of S262 is executed, and then the short / medium counter 203da, the probability variation counter 203la, and the small win The number counter 203lb and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S291). And the process of S220 and S221 mentioned above is performed, and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 737, the game state update process (S292), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 13 (S191 in FIG. 736) executed by the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 737 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process (S292). In this game state update process (S292), when a state (mode) other than the normal mode is set as the game state (mode), a process of updating the values of the probability variation counter 203la and the hour / short time counter 203da is executed. To do.

  In the game state update process (S292), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203la is greater than 0 (S2481). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203la is greater than 0 (S2481: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203la is decremented by 1 (S2482), and a command indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203la is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The setting is made (S2483), and the process proceeds to S2484. On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203la is not a value larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S2481: No), it is not necessary to subtract the value of the probability variation counter 203la. , S2482 and S2483 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2484.

  In the processing of S2484, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203da is larger than 0 (S2484). When it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203da is larger than 0 (S2484: Yes), the value of the hour / hour / hour counter 203da is decremented by 1 (S2485), and the number of remaining hours and times indicating the value of the hour / minute counter 203da after the subtraction is obtained. A command is set (S2486), and the process proceeds to S2487. On the other hand, in the processing of S2484, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203da is not a value larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S2484: No), the processing of S2485 and S2486 is skipped, and the processing of S2487 is performed. Transition to processing.

  In the processing of S2487, when the value of the probability variation counter 203la or the time reduction counter 203da is subtracted in the processing of S2481 to S2486, it is determined whether both the values of the probability variation counter 203la and the time reduction counter 203da after the subtraction are zero. (S2487). That is, it is determined whether it is the timing when the gaming state shifts to the normal mode (normal state). If it is determined that neither the value of the probability variation counter 203la after subtraction nor the value of the time reduction counter 203da is 0 (S2487: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that both the value of the probability variation counter 203la after subtraction and the value of the hour / short time counter 203da are 0 (S2487: Yes), a state command indicating a transition to the normal mode is set (S2488). A state command indicating the normal mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2489), and it is determined whether the pullback flag 203lc is on (S2490). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state before subtraction of the value of the probability variation counter 203la or the time reduction counter 203da is the pull-back mode (latent probability state). If it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is on (S2490: Yes), the gaming state shifts to the normal state, so the pullback flag 203lc is set to off (S2491), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2490, when it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is not on (S2490: No), the process of S2491 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 738, the small hitting start process 13 (S293) which is a process of the special symbol variation process 13 (S191 in FIG. 736) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example. explain. FIG. 738 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting start process 13 (S293). This small hitting start process 13 (S293) is different from the aforementioned small hitting start process 5 (S266 in FIG. 701) of the eleventh control example in that a process of adding the value of the small hit count counter 203lb is added. To do. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the small hit start process 13 (S293), first, the processes of S2401 to S2403 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether the pullback flag 203lc is on (S2495). When it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is off (S2495: No), since the gaming state is the continuous channel mode or the continuous channel mode, the value of the small hit number counter 203lb is incremented by 1 (S2496). Exit. On the other hand, in the process of S2495, if it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is on (S2495: Yes), the process is ended as it is because the pullback mode is set.

  As described above, the value of the small hit number counter 203lb is not added during the pull-back mode. With this configuration, the number of small hits does not reach 25 times again after the pullback mode is set. Therefore, during the pullback mode, the process of adding the value of the small hit number counter can be skipped. Processing load can be reduced.

  Next, the startup process 13 executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 739. FIG. 739 is a flowchart showing the contents of the startup process 13. In the start-up process 13 in the thirteenth control example, when the power-off is performed with respect to the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 703) in the eleventh control example described above, The difference is that a process of reading the values of the probability variation counter 203la and the small hit count counter 203lb is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the start-up process 13 (FIG. 739), the above-described processes of S901 to S910 are executed. Is read out (S991). Then, the above-described processes of S912 and S913 are executed, and this process ends.

  In the start-up process 13 (FIG. 739), by reading the values of the small hit count counter 203lb and the probability variation counter 203la, even when there is a sudden power interruption such as a power failure, Since a similar game state can be set, a transparent game can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 740, the jackpot control process 13 (S1091) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 740 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 13 (S1091). The jackpot control process 13 (S1091) is a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is won during the pullback mode and the jackpot end process 13 (S1091) in the eleventh control example (S1031 in FIG. 704). The difference is that S1193) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the jackpot control process 13 (S1091), first, it is determined whether it is a jackpot start timing (S1101). If it is determined that it is a big hit start timing (S1101: Yes), the processing of S1102 and S1103 described above is executed, and then it is determined whether the pullback flag 203lc is on (S1191). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the pull-back mode. If it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is on (S1191: Yes), the pullback flag 203lc is set to off, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1191 that the pullback flag 203lc is not on (that is, it is off) (S1191: No), the process of S1192 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Then, when the processing of S1104 to S1107 described above is executed and it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot ending period in the processing of S1107 (S1107: No), it is next determined whether it is the timing of the jackpot end ( S1109). If it is determined that the jackpot end timing is reached (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end processing 13 (S1193) is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing for ending the jackpot (S1109: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 741, the jackpot end process 13 (S1193), which is one process of the jackpot control process 13 (S1091) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 741 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 13 (S1193). The jackpot end process 13 (S1193) is a process for setting a value corresponding to the probability variation counter 203la based on the winning jackpot type in contrast to the jackpot end process 5 (S1145 in FIG. 705) of the eleventh control example described above. And a process of resetting the value of the small hit number counter 203 lb before the transition of the gaming state is different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the jackpot end process 13 (S1193), first, the probability variation / short time count selection table 202lf is read (S1371). Then, based on the jackpot type won this time, the corresponding values specified in the probability variation / short time reduction selection table 202lf are set in the probability variation counter 203la and the short time middle counter 203da (S1372). Then, the value of the small hit number counter 203 lb is reset (S 1373), the processes of S 1324 to S 1326 described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

  As described above, the configuration is such that the value of the small hit number counter 203 lb is reset before the big hit game is finished and the gaming state is shifted, so that the number of small hits before the big win is added, etc. Can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 742, the small hit control process 13 (S1092) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 742 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting control process 13 (S1092). This small hitting control process 13 (S1092) turns off the pullback flag 203lc when there is a V winning in the pullback mode in contrast to the small hitting control process 5 (S1031 in FIG. 706) of the eleventh control example described above. This is different in that a process for converting and a pull-back transition process are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the small hit control process 13 (S1092), when it is determined in the processing of S1607 that it is the start timing of the small hitting ending period (S1609: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 203s is set to OFF (S1610). Next, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203dd is on (S1626). If it is determined that the V-pass flag 203dd is not on (S1626: No), a pull-back transition process (S1694) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the pull-back transition process (S1694) will be described later with reference to FIG. 743, but a process of determining whether to shift to the pull-back mode or the normal mode is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1626 that the V passing flag 203dd is on (S1626: Yes), the data in the mode type storage area 203dc is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S1627). Then, the value of the hour / middle counter 203da, the probability variation counter 203la, the small hit count counter 203lb, and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S1691).

  Next, the processing of S1629 and S1630 described above is executed, and then it is determined whether the pullback flag 203lc is on (S1692). If it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is on (S1692: Yes), the pullback flag 203lc is set to off (S1693), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is not on (S1692: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 743, a description will be given of the pull-back transition process (S1964) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example. FIG. 743 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pull-back transition process (S1964). In the pull-back transition process (S1964), a process of shifting the gaming state is executed based on the value of the small hit number counter 203lb.

  In the pull-back transition process (S1964), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit number counter 203lb is 25 (S2501). That is, it is determined whether the number of wins in the small chain winning mode or the continuous chain mode is 25. If it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 20 lb is not 25 (S2501: No), this processing is ended as it is because it is not the timing at which the gaming state shifts.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 203lb is 25 (S2501: Yes), it is the timing to shift the gaming state from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state. Therefore, the value of the hour / middle counter 203da is set to 0 (S2502), and the value of the small hit number counter 203lb is set to 0 (S2503). Then, the pullback flag 203lc is set to ON (S2504).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203la is greater than 0 (S2505). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203la is greater than 0 (S2505: Yes), the gaming state is a state in which the super-continuous mode is set, and the time-shortage counter 203lb is 0 in the processing of S2502. Therefore, the gaming state is shifted to the pull-back mode (a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol low probability state). In the process of S2506, a status command indicating the shift to the latent probability state is set (S2506), and a command indicating the shift to the latent mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2507), and this process ends. To do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203la is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2505: No), the gaming state shifts from the continuous mode to the normal mode. Then, a state command indicating the transition to the normal state is set (S2508), and a command indicating the transition to the normal mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2509), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in 13th Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 744 to 745. In the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example, the command determination process 6 (FIG. 472) is different from the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example. The command determination process 13 (S4191 in FIG. 744) is executed instead of S4151), and the small hit relation process 13 (S4191 in FIG. 745) is executed instead of the small hit relation process (S4233 in FIG. 727). Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 744, the command determination process 13 (S4191) in the thirteenth control example will be described. The command determination process 13 (S4191) is executed in place of the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 724) in the twelfth control example. When a small hit related command is received, the small hit related process (see FIG. 727) is performed. Instead, the small hit related process 13 (S4291 in FIG. 744) is executed. Since other processes are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 745, the small hit related process 13 (S4291) in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 745 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 13 (S4291). The small hit related process 13 (S4291) is different from the above-described small hit related process in the twelfth control example (S4233 in FIG. 727) in that the content for setting the selection effect is different. Further, the difference is that a back image corresponding to the game state (mode) after the transition is set when the number of small hits reaches the specified number in the super-continuous mode or the continuous mode. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the small hit related process 13 (S4291), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S5801). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S5801), is the current gaming state the super-continuous mode (probability change state), that is, whether the value indicated in the mode type storage area 203dc is a probability change state? Is discriminated (S5891). If it is determined that the gaming state is the super-continuous mode (S5891: Yes), it is then determined whether the value indicated by the small hit number command included in the received opening command is 20 or more (S5892). When it is determined that the value shown in the small hit count command is not a value greater than 20 (less than 20) (S5892: No), a normal region selection effect is set (S5893), and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5892 that the value indicated by the small hit count command is greater than 20 (S5892: Yes), the case where the specified number of small hits shown in FIG. 730 (b) is small. Then, a narrow region selection effect is set (S5894), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5801 that the opening command has not been received (S5801: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S5806). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S5806), it is determined whether or not there is a V prize in the small hit game (S5807). If it is determined that there is no V prize (S5807: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit has reached the specified number of times (S5808). If it is determined that the small hit has reached the specified number of times (25 in this control example), the gaming state is shifted, so a back image corresponding to the mode effect after the transition is set. (S5895), this process is terminated.

  In this control example, in the process of setting the selection effect area, the small area selection effect is executed when the number of small hits is 20 or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be 20 or more. However, it may be 20 or less. Further, a small hit count counter may be provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 so that the area of the selection effect can be changed each time the value is added. In this way, each time a small win is won, it is visually recognized that the selection effect area is changed, so that the specified number of small hits at which the gaming state gradually shifts is reached. Can play games that are easy to understand. In addition, by changing the area of the selection effect in a short cycle, it becomes possible to easily select the super-continuous mode or the game method in the continuous mode at the player's own timing. Can be provided.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery is won, the V winning device 670 that can enter the ball in the case of a small winner is provided. A configuration in which four types of gaming states (modes) are provided in a gaming machine (so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine) configured to receive a jackpot even when a game ball passes through the provided V winning device 670e3. Yes. Specifically, it is a gaming state that is set when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is in a normal mode (normal state) that is the most disadvantageous state for the player and a gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player. A certain continuous mode (short-time state), a super-continuous mode that is most advantageous to the player (probability variation state), and a pull-back mode that shifts when the number of small hits reaches a specified number during a game in super-continuous mode (Latent state).

  In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol, since a small hit game can be executed without winning the jackpot, it is possible to expect more prize balls than when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. it can. Further, based on the gaming state, a gaming state in which it is easy to enter the second entrance 6400 and a gaming state in which it is difficult to enter the second entrance 6400 are provided. Specifically, in the normal mode where the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set low, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery is set. A game that is set to be long, and even when a normal symbol lottery is won, the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is set short, and it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second entrance 6400. It becomes a state. Therefore, since it is almost impossible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, the gaming state is most disadvantageous for the player.

  In addition, as described above, the pullback mode is a gaming state that is set when the number of wins in the special symbol lottery reaches 25 times during the game in the super-continuous mode, and the normal symbol is low. Although the probability state is set, since the variation time of the second special symbol is set short (5 seconds or 10 seconds), the lottery of the second special symbol held before the transition to the pull-back mode is It can be executed efficiently. However, since the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is set to 0.5 seconds, even if the player launches the game ball at the second entrance 6400 after entering the pull-back mode, the second entry It is difficult to enter the ball opening 6400, which is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, since the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the gaming state is more advantageous than the normal mode.

  In the continuous mode, which is a gaming state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, the probability of winning a normal symbol is set high, and the lottery time for a normal symbol is also set short. This is a gaming state in which a game ball can efficiently enter the second entrance 6400. On the other hand, there is a low probability state of a special symbol, and the jackpot awarded by V winning is set as a jackpot in which the continuous mode is set again after the jackpot game is finished, and a normal state which is a disadvantageous game state for the player Therefore, the game state is relatively advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, in the super continuous mode, which is a gaming state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, the probability of winning a normal symbol is set high, and the lottery time of the normal symbol is also set short. This is a gaming state in which a game ball can efficiently enter the second entrance 6400. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed efficiently. In addition, since a high probability state of a special symbol is set, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is high, and the gaming state is most advantageous for the player.

  Furthermore, if there is a V prize in the super-continuous mode, the super-continuous mode is set again after the jackpot game given by the V prize is completed, or the game state is relatively advantageous to the player. Move to certain continuous mode. In addition, if the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 in this control example) without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the gaming state shifts to the normal mode, but the special symbol high In the probability state, since the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/25, there is almost no transition to the specified number of special symbols. Therefore, for the player, when the game state shifts from the super-continuous mode which is the most advantageous gaming state, the super-continuous mode is switched to the continuous mode or the pull-back mode which is a relatively advantageous gaming state. Even when the game has ended, the player can be motivated to continue the game until the relatively advantageous state ends, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  It should be noted that the rate of mode transition after the jackpot game in this control example is not limited to this, and it may be configured to shift to the pull-back mode (latency state) after the jackpot game at a predetermined rate. good. By comprising in this way, the mode classification set after the end of jackpot can be increased, and the diversity of a game can be expanded.

  In addition, as described above, the game state is shifted when the lottery number of special symbols is 100 times and the winning number of small hits is 25 times from the super-chang mode or continuous mode, The present invention is not limited to this and may be diversified. For example, the specified number of times may be determined by lottery after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, the player does not know the specified number of times until the jackpot game is completed, and can thus play the game while playing. In addition, the game condition transition conditions are not limited to the number of special symbol lottery and the number of small wins, but the specified number of times is added when a specific variation pattern is selected in the special symbol lottery. May be. By comprising in this way, various production | presentation aspects can be performed.

  Furthermore, in the present control example described above, one type of normal symbol variation time is determined according to each gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and variations may be provided in the variation time. By configuring in this way, even in the same gaming state, it is possible to provide a state where it is easy to enter the second entrance 6400 and a state where it is difficult to enter, and various games can be provided.

  Note that, as described above, in this control example, when winning a small hit during a period during which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to execute (super-continuous change mode or continuous change mode), the game ball is assigned to the V winning device 670. The game is executed in the hope that the jackpot awarded by passing through the V winning switch 670e3 will be won, or the jackpot awarded in the special symbol lottery will be won before the number of bonuses reaches the specified number The selection effect which selects the game method of performing a game while desiring this is performed. Specifically, the third symbol display device 81 is divided by a screen dividing line (HR10), and a guidance of a game method aiming for a big hit by only drawing a special symbol is displayed in the left region Dm50, and the right display region Dm51 is displayed. Is configured to display the guidance of the game method aiming to be awarded a jackpot in the V prize, so that the player can easily guide the game method desired by the player himself. Can be provided.

  Then, when the remaining prescribed number of times until the gaming state shifts based on the small win is small, the display areas of the left display area Dm50 and the right display area Dm51 are variable by changing the screen dividing line HR10. Is displayed. If the specified number of times per remaining small is small, it is possible to shift to a gaming state where it is more advantageous for the player to play a game aiming for a V prize than a gaming method that expects a big win only by drawing a special symbol Since the screen dividing line HR10 is moved to the left area of the third symbol display device 81, the guidance display of the game method aiming at the V prize displayed in the right display area Dm51 is displayed more prominently. . With this configuration, the player can instantly determine that it is advantageous to execute the gaming method guided in the right display area Dm51 when the prescribed number of remaining small matches is small. It is possible to encourage the player to select a game method that is advantageous to the player.

  In this control example, the selection effect of the game method is divided into left and right by displaying the screen dividing line HR10 so as to be drawn vertically. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be divided vertically. Further, an effect such as displaying a character or the like and guiding the character may be executed. In addition, various types of effects may be selected by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a selection effect that the player himself can easily recognize, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the privilege which can be acquired by each game method is displayed on the display area etc. which each guidance is displayed. Also, information such as the total benefits that the player has acquired by selecting the game method after starting the pachinko machine 10 that day, such as when the hall starts business, may be displayed. By providing various information to the player in this way, it becomes easier for the player to consider the selection of the game method, and the game can be executed while thinking, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, it may be configured such that a pre-reading of a lottery result for which a special symbol is reserved is executed, and a selection effect is executed based on the result. By executing the selection effect based on the pre-read result, it is possible to further increase the content of the selection effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In this control example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a specific gaming state, the right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is launched toward the right region of the gaming board 13. Even in a specific game state, the game may be executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13. Further, in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is configured not to win a small hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. With such a configuration, the diversity of games can be expanded.

<14th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 746 to 761. In the first control example described above, a chance charge effect is configured to be executable as a type of interest effect. That is, the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific effect mode (chance-up effect) is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all reserved balls held at the start of the effect are consumed) It is configured to be able to execute an effect that is suggested (notified) to the player in advance according to the number of gauges of the accumulated feeling gauge KG. This chance charge effect allows the player to know the remaining number of chance-up effects in advance, thereby realizing a game that predicts what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. I was trying to improve my interest in games.

  In addition to this, in the fourteenth control example, the number of spirit gauges acquired in the chance charge effect (the remaining number of chance-up effects) is variable according to the operation content of the player's push button 10317. . More specifically, in the chance charge effect, an effect mode that prompts the player to operate (press) the PUSH button 10317 is displayed, and according to the length of the period during which the player operates (presses) the PUSH button 10317. In this configuration, the effect of increasing the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is executed. The maximum gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is determined at the start of the chance charge effect. The maximum number of gauges is determined based on the number of reserved balls at the time when the production is started, as in the first control example. By making the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG variable according to the player's operation (pressing) contents, it is possible to give the impression that the player himself determines the number of chance-up effects. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the chance charge effect.

  Further, in the first control example described above, after the jackpot is over, the state after 100 times is displayed over 96 to 99 times of variation display (the last four variation displays in which the short time state of the normal symbol is guaranteed). The configuration is such that the probability variation continuation suggestion effect for indicating whether the probability variation state or the normal state is shifted is executed. This probable continuation suggestion effect is the result of the effect (the continuation of the chance zone is notified or the end of the chance zone) depending on the gaming state at the time when the last (99th) special symbol lottery in the effect execution range ends. Is notified).

  In addition to this, in the fourteenth control example, BGM is set in units of variable display effects during execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. In other words, as a BGM for the probable change continuation suggestion effect, instead of setting the BGM over the variable display period of 96 to 99 variable displays, the variable display BGM corresponding to the variable time for each variable display is set. Yes. By configuring in this way, even when the variation stop state is entered in the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, it is suppressed that the variation display end timing and the variation display BGM end timing are deviated. can do. More specifically, the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is executed over the variation display period of the 96th to 99th variation display (that is, at a fixed timing) after the jackpot ends, regardless of the situation of the reserved ball or the like. It is a production, and it is irrelevant whether or not the reserved balls for the duration until the production end (that is, the 99th variation display) is held at the production start time (that is, the 96th variation display start time after the end of the jackpot). It is an effect that is executed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the holding ball is lost during the production, and the period from the start of the production to the end thereof becomes indefinite. Under such circumstances, when the BGM of a fixed playback period is played back with the start of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, the playback end timing of the BGM and the end timing of the effect become inconsistent, and the player May make you feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, by setting the BGM in units of variable display, the production end timing and the BGM end timing can be reliably matched, so that the audio mode and the display mode can be suitably executed. it can.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, an audio lamp control device The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 746, a display mode in the case where a long press effect (an effect that prompts the player to operate the predetermined operation mode on the PUSH button 10317) in the chance charge effect will be described. FIG. 746 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time when the long press effect is started. As shown in FIG. 746 (a), in the 14th control example, when the chance charge effect is executed, the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed at the substantially central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An image (long-pressed image NG) in a mode that prompts to continue (long press) is displayed. More specifically, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, an image of an arrow pointing the PUSH button 10317 from above, and a long press image NG composed of characters “long press!” Are displayed. Is done. In addition, in the display area 805, the characters “Let's get a hold by pressing and holding!” Are displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases by continuously pressing (holding) the PUSH button 10317 continuously.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 746 (a), the characters “remaining 10.00 seconds” are displayed on the right side in the front view in the display area 803. The display of the remaining number of seconds is counted down according to the elapsed time, and when the remaining number of seconds reaches 0.00, the long press effect is finished, and the gauge number of the feeling gauge KG at that time Is determined as the number of occurrences of subsequent chance-up effects. Thereby, since the player can easily understand the end timing of the long press effect, an effect that is easier for the player to understand can be realized. Since the other display contents are the same as the display contents of the chance charge effect in the first control example (see FIG. 396 (b)), detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 746 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode while the player is making a long press in the long press effect. As shown in FIG. 746 (b), when the player continuously presses (holds down) the push button 10317, the gauge number of the feeling gauge KG increases. In the example of FIG. 746 (b), the state in which the gauge number of the gas gauge KG is increased to 2 gauges by long pressing is illustrated. As described above, the configuration is such that the gauge number of the feeling gauge KG increases according to the length of the period during which the push button 10317 is pressed, so that the player wants to press the push button 10317 for a longer time. It can be reminiscent. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the long press effect. In the fourteenth control example, the number of gauges KG increases by one gauge each time the total pressing period for the push button 10317 in one long press effect passes one second. In addition, even if the long press is interrupted, the period of the long press until then is stored, and when the long press is resumed, the count of the long press period is also restarted from the point at which the long press was interrupted doing. Thereby, a player's convenience can be improved more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 747, a description will be given of the correspondence relationship between the audio mode and the display mode during execution of the long press effect in the fourteenth control example. FIG. 747 (a) is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship when the push button 10317 is continuously pressed in the long press effect. As shown in FIG. 747 (a), when the player continues to press and hold the PUSH button 10317 during the long press effect, the voice mode corresponding to the gauge number as the gauge number increases (synchronously). Is output. Specifically, while the number of gauges is 0 (long press period is less than 1 second), a sound mode (a sound for 0 gauge) in which the sound “ta” is output three times during 1 second. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 747 (a), while the gauge number is 1 (the long press period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds), the sound “da” is output three times during 1 second. Sound mode (1 gauge sound). This 1-gauge audio is a more loud (loud) audio mode than the 0-gauge audio.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 747 (a), while the number of gauges is 2 (long press period is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds), the sound of “do” is output 3 times during 1 second. Sound mode (2-gauge sound). This 2-gauge audio is a more loud (loud) audio mode than 0-gauge audio or 1-gauge audio. Similarly thereafter (3 gauge to 5 gauge), as the number of gauges increases, a loud (loud) voice is outputted as a voice outputted during a long press. As a result, not only the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG but also the number of gauges (number of chance-up effects) can be easily understood by the player from the sound mode, so that the convenience of the player is improved. Can do.

  FIG. 747 (b) shows the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode when the long press is interrupted during the long press effect (while the gauge number is 1 gauge) and then the long press is resumed. FIG. As shown in FIG. 747 (b), when the long press is interrupted in the middle of the long press effect, the output of the voice output (one gauge voice) is interrupted, while the display mode remains the display mode immediately before the interruption. Maintained. That is, the sound output is stopped when the gauge number of the feeling gauge KG is 1. With these sound modes and display modes, the player can easily understand that the increase in the number of gauges has been interrupted by interrupting the long press. Also, as shown in FIG. 747 (b), when the long press is resumed, the voice is output from the continuation of the voice mode that was output at the time of interruption. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the number of gauges increases and the timing at which the voice mode is switched can be matched (synchronized) regardless of the presence or absence of interruption, so that the effect mode of the long press effect is more suitable. Can be set to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 748, the transition of the gauge number of the feeling gauge KG at the time of the long press effect for each game method of the player will be described. FIG. 748 (a) shows a gauge in the case where a long press effect with an upper limit of the number of gauges of 4 gauges is performed when a long press on the PUSH button 10317 is continuously executed from the time when 1 second elapses until the end of the long press effect. It is the figure which showed transition of the number.

  As shown in FIG. 748, if the long press is continuously performed during the long press effect, the number of gauges increases by 1 every 1 second and reaches the upper limit of 4 gauges after 5 seconds. To do. Thereafter, the gauge number is maintained at 4 until the production period ends (until 10 seconds elapse from the start of the long press production).

  FIG. 748 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the number of gauges in the long press effect when the long press is interrupted during the long press and then the long press is resumed. In the example of FIG. 748 (b), after the start of the long press effect, when the long press is interrupted between 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds and 5 seconds to 9.3 seconds. Shows the change in the number of gauges. As shown in FIG. 748 (b), when the long press is continuously executed from the time when 1 second elapses until the time when 2.5 seconds elapse after the start of the long press effect, While increasing to 1 gauge, a sound for 1 gauge is output, and the state of 1 gauge is maintained until 2.5 seconds. When the player interrupts the long press at the time when 2.5 seconds have elapsed (that is, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the transition to the 1 gauge state), the number of gauges (the display mode of the feeling gauge KG) ) Is maintained in the 1 gauge state, and the sound output is interrupted. That is, in conjunction with the interruption of the long press (pressing the push button 10317), the audio output is also interrupted. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the increase in the number of gauges is interrupted by interrupting the long press without changing the display mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 748 (b), when the player resumes the long press, the output of the 1 gauge sound is resumed. At this time, the playback position of the resumed audio is set to the playback position where the previous playback was interrupted. That is, when the long press is interrupted, the playback position is stored (backed up), and when the long press is resumed, the long press sound is restarted from the backed up playback position. With this configuration, even when the long press is interrupted, the voice mode can be changed (developed) in synchronization with the change of the display mode (the gauge number of the gas gauge KG). The display mode can be suitably set. Therefore, the effect mode can be set appropriately.

  As shown in FIG. 748 (b), when the total long press period after the number of gauges increases to 1 gauge reaches 1 second (that is, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the start of the long press effect). As the number of gauges increases to 2 gauges, the sound mode is switched from 1 gauge sounds to 2 gauge sounds. That is, the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases to 2 gauges, and the sound mode is switched to 2 gauge sounds.

  As shown in FIG. 748 (b), in a state where the number of gauges is 2 gauges, the sound for 2 gauges continues to be output (reproduced) while the player continues to press and hold. Then, when the player interrupts the long press at the time when 4.9 seconds have passed since the start of the long press effect (at the time when 0.9 seconds have passed since the 2 gauge state was reached), the output of the 2 gauge audio is interrupted. On the other hand, the gas gauge KG is maintained in a 2 gauge state. This state (a state in which only the output (playback) of the voice mode is interrupted) is performed until the player resumes the long press (in the example of FIG. 748 (b), 9.3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the long press effect). To continue). Then, when the long press is resumed, the output of the voice mode is resumed again. Although details will be described later, in the fourteenth control example, when the long press is resumed, the length of the remaining period during which the long press can be executed (the long press effective period) and the upper limit in the current long press effect are set. The configuration is such that the number of gauges is discriminated and the rate of increase of the number of gauges (the playback speed of the audio mode and the update rate of the display mode) is made variable. More specifically, each time the long press is resumed, a playback speed (update speed) is set that allows the speed to be increased up to the upper limit gauge number by the end of the long press effective period up to the double speed. It is configured. By configuring in this way, the chance charge effect can be ended in a state where the number of gauges KG is larger, so the number of chance-up effects that occur after the end of the chance charge effect can be increased. . Therefore, the production effect can be further improved.

  In the example of FIG. 748 (b), when the long press is resumed (when 9.3 seconds have elapsed), the remaining long press effective period is 0.7 seconds, while the upper limit gauge number (4 gauges) is reached. It is the figure which showed the state in which the remaining number of gauges of 2 remains. Until the long press is interrupted, since the long press for 0.9 seconds is executed in the state of 2 gauge, it is originally the remaining long press period for raising the gauge to 3 gauge. .If the long press is not continued for 1.1 seconds, which is the sum of 1 second and the remaining long press period for raising from 3 gauge to 4 gauge, it will rise to the upper limit of 4 gauge. It becomes impossible to make it. That is, if the playback speed is not varied, it is impossible to increase 2 gauge in the remaining 0.7 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 748 (b), by setting the playback speed to double speed after resuming the long press, the gauge number can be increased to the upper limit of 4 gauges within 0.7 seconds. Is possible. In other words, after restarting, it increases to 3 gauge when 0.05 seconds have elapsed (when 9.35 seconds have elapsed since the start of the long press effect), and after increasing to 3 gauges, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed (start of the long press effect) Control is performed so that the gauge increases to 4 gauge at the time when 9.85 seconds have elapsed (normally, a playback speed that takes 1 second to increase 1 gauge is set to 0 to increase 1 gauge. By setting the playback speed to 5 seconds (a playback speed of double speed), the number of gauges can be increased to the upper limit of 4 gauge within the range of the long press effective period. As a result, the chance charge effect can be ended in a state where the number of gauges is larger, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, even if the playback speed is set to double speed, if it is impossible to increase the upper limit gauge number, the playback speed is set to the normal playback speed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the reproduction speed from becoming excessively high and causing the player to feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

  In the fourteenth control example, when it is impossible to increase to the upper limit gauge number even if the double speed is set, the reproduction is performed at the normal reproduction speed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, even when it is impossible to increase the upper limit gauge number, it may be configured to be set to double speed. By configuring in this way, even if the upper limit gauge number is not reached, the chance charge effect can be terminated with a larger number of gauges, so the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 749 and FIG. 750, the correspondence relationship between the sound mode and the display mode during execution of the continuation suggestion effect of the 14th control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 749 (a), all of the special symbol lottery results within the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect are out of date, and the fluctuation display for four times continues (that is, the hold is cut off halfway). It is a figure showing the correspondence in the case of being executed. As shown in FIG. 749 (a), when the variable display is continuously executed during the continuation suggestion effect, the display mode of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is synchronized with the variable display period in the variable symbol special display ( 393) is displayed. Similarly, for the audio mode, the fluctuation BGM is reproduced in synchronization with the fluctuation display periods of the four fluctuation displays. In the fourteenth control example, the variable display period when the 96th to 99th special symbol lottery after the end of jackpot, which is the execution period of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, is a fixed period of 4.5 seconds. It is comprised so that. Therefore, it is sufficient to prepare only a mode for 4.5 seconds as a display mode and a voice mode corresponding to each variable display during execution of the continuation suggestion effect. Therefore, since the variation of the display mode and the voice mode can be minimized, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the voice output device 226 can be reduced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 749 (a), during the variable stop state during the execution period of the probability variation continuation suggestion, the stop display of the third symbol is displayed as the display mode, and the variable stop sound is output as the audio mode. (Replayed). Since the fixed display period after the end of the change is uniformly set to 0.5 seconds, variations in the display mode and the change stop sound at the time of stop display can be minimized. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 749 (b), a description will be given of the correspondence between the display mode and the audio mode when the hold becomes 0 during execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. FIG. 749 (b) illustrates a case where the holding ball becomes 0 when the 96th special symbol lottery is executed, and the state of holding 0 continues even after the end of the fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 749 (b), when the 96th variation display is completed and the variation is stopped (the reserved ball is 0 and the special symbol lottery cannot be executed), the display mode is demo. The display mode is switched. In this demonstration display mode, for example, a display mode of the immediately preceding (96th) continuation suggestion effect and a display mode in which the stop symbol is displayed as it is are set. In addition, as a voice mode, there is no sound after the 96th stop sound is output. With these display modes and sound modes, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the holding ball is 0, so that the game ball can be actively launched aiming at a new starting prize. . As shown in FIG. 749 (b), when a start winning is generated during the demonstration display, the special symbol variation display is executed and the continuation suggestion effect is started from the next.

  In this way, by configuring the voice mode to be output in variable display units, the voice mode and the display mode are subsequently shifted even if the holding ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably set the production effect in the probability variation continuation suggestion production.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 750, a description will be given of the correspondence between the display mode and the audio mode in the case where the jackpot is won during execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. Here, in the first control example described above, one effect corresponding to a preset effect scenario is executed for each one variation display executed in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, regardless of the special symbol lottery result. Was configured to do. For this reason, if a big hit is made at an early stage (96th or 97th special symbol lottery) in the probable continuation suggestion effect, the jackpot will be notified immediately before the probable continuation suggestion effect is fully enjoyed. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest of the elderly.

  On the other hand, in the 14th control example, when a big hit is made during execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion, a pseudo variation display corresponding to the number of remaining probability variation continuation suggestions is executed during execution of the jackpot variation. The jackpot is notified as a result of the probable continuation suggesting effect. That is, when the door 806 is destroyed (breakthrough) in the probable continuation suggestion effect, the jackpot can be notified. By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is made in the middle of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, it is possible to execute the production for the number of times of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, so that the probability variation continuation suggestion effect can be more enjoyed. .

  FIG. 750 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the display mode and the audio mode when the 97th special symbol lottery is won after the jackpot is over. As shown in FIG. 750, in the 96th deviation, the first suggestion effect is displayed and the reproduction time for one fluctuation (4.5 seconds) as in FIGS. 749 (a) and 7 (b). The fluctuation BGM is reproduced (output). Then, in synchronization with the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds as a display mode, and the variable stop sound is reproduced (output) as the voice mode. After that, when the 97th special symbol variation display (bonus variation) is executed, as shown in FIG. 750, the suggestion effect for 3 times is pseudo-executed during the variation display period of 1 jackpot variation. At the end of each suggestion effect, the third symbol is displayed in a pseudo stop manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 750, the fluctuation display BGM and the fluctuation stop sound are pseudo-output (reproduced) in synchronization with the pseudo suggestive effect. And in the 4th suggestion production, the production which succeeds in destruction of door 806 is displayed, and a jackpot is reported. After the stoppage period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot variation has elapsed, the jackpot is made and the display mode for the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the BGM for the jackpot opening is displayed. Is output.

  In the fourteenth control example, when a big hit is made during execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion, the same period as when all the special symbols during the performance period of the probability variation continuation suggestion are missed The jackpot variation time is set so that the probable continuation suggestion effect ends. For example, in the case of winning a big win in the 97th special symbol lottery after the big hit shown in FIG. 750, the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is 3 times the fluctuation time (4.5 seconds × 3) and 2 A variation time of 14.5 seconds, which is the sum of the stop display periods (0.5 seconds × 2), is set. As a result, in the pseudo suggestion effect or pseudo 3rd symbol stop display executed during the jackpot variation, the same display mode and effect mode as in the outlier variation can be used, so the display mode and sound Variations in aspects can be minimized. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the fourteenth control example, when a big hit is not made during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect (four consecutive lapses), the voice mode (variation BGM) is output in a variable display unit. By doing so, even if the reserved ball becomes zero during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion, it is possible to prevent the voice mode and the display mode from being subsequently shifted. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably set the production effect in the probability variation continuation suggestion production. Further, in the case where a jackpot is won during execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, the suggestion effect for the number of unexecuted times at the time of winning the jackpot is pseudo-executed during one jackpot change. By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot is won, the probability variation continuation suggesting effect can be confirmed to the end, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Moreover, since it is set as the structure which alert | reports a jackpot in the aspect (an aspect which destroys the door 806) similar to the aspect which alert | reports that the probability variation state is continuing, when the door 806 is destroyed, it can be made to expect a big hit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the probable continuation suggestion effect.

<Electric Configuration in Fourteenth Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first control example only in that the specified content of the variation pattern selection table 202b is partially changed. Therefore, only the change point of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described here, and the description of other details of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

  FIG. 751 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202b in the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 751 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202b in the fourteenth control example is for suggestive effects compared to the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202b in the first control example (see FIG. 409 (a)). The difference is that a table 202m1 is added. This suggestion effect table 202m1 is referred to select a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol for indicating the 96th to 99th special symbol lottery results after the jackpot, which is the execution period of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. It is a data table. That is, in the 14th control example, when the 1st to 95th special symbol lottery is executed after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation / shortening time table 202b2, and 96 to 99 When the special symbol lottery is executed, the suggestion effect table 202m1 is referred to determine the variation pattern. After 100 times, the variation pattern is determined by referring to either the normal table 202b1 or the probability variation / shortening time table 202b2 depending on the gaming state.

  FIG. 751 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the suggestion effect table 202m1. As shown in FIG. 751 (b), the suggestion effect table 202m1 is selected for each lottery result of special symbols (result of determination of success / failure) and the number of lotteries of special symbols after jackpot (96 to 99). Are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 751 (b), the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are used for a situation where the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit and the number of special symbol lotteries is 96. Regardless of the value, a special variation A is defined as a variation pattern in association with a variation time of 19.5 seconds. The fluctuation time of 19.5 seconds is the sum of the fluctuation time of the four fluctuations (4.5 seconds × 4) and the stop display period of three times (0.5 seconds × 3) in the probable continuation suggestion effect. It is time that matches. That is, it is configured with a period during which it is possible to execute (pseudo) out-of-range fluctuation and fluctuation stop for four times including the fluctuation stop period of actual jackpot fluctuation. For this reason, after the start of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, if the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, by executing the pseudo variation display four times in the jackpot variation, Similarly, four suggestive effects can be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 751 (b), for the situation where the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit and the number of lotteries for the special symbol is 97, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are set. Regardless, a special variation B corresponding to a variation time of 14.5 seconds is defined in association with the variation pattern. The fluctuation time of 14.5 seconds is the sum of the fluctuation time of three outlier fluctuations (4.5 seconds × 3) and the two stop display periods (0.5 seconds × 2) in the probable continuation suggestion effect. It is time that matches. In other words, it includes a period during which it is possible to execute (pseudo) out-of-range fluctuations and fluctuation stops for three times, including the actual jackpot fluctuation fluctuation suspension period. For this reason, after the start of the probable variation suggestion effect, if the first special symbol lottery is missed and the second lottery is a big hit, the pseudo fluctuation display is executed three times in the big hit variation Thus, four suggestive effects can be executed together with one deviation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 751 (b), for the situation where the determination result is a big hit and the number of special symbol lotteries is 98, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set. Regardless, a special variation C is defined as a variation pattern in association with a variation time of 9.5 seconds. The fluctuation time of 9.5 seconds coincides with the sum of the fluctuation time of three outlier fluctuations (4.5 seconds × 2) and the one stop display period (0.5 seconds) in the probable continuation suggestion effect. It is time to do. That is, it includes a period during which it is possible to execute (pseudo) out-of-range fluctuation and fluctuation stop for two times including the actual jackpot fluctuation fluctuation stop period. For this reason, if the first and second special symbol lotteries are missed after the start of the probable change continuation suggestion effect, and if the big lottery is won in the third lottery, a pseudo fluctuation display is displayed in the jackpot variation. By performing it twice, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect four times together with the two deviations.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 751 (b), for the situation where the determination result is a big hit and the number of special symbol lotteries is 99, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are set. Regardless, a special variation D is defined as a variation pattern in association with a variation time of 4.5 seconds. Since the fluctuation time of 4.5 seconds is composed of the same fluctuation time as the deviation fluctuation time, by executing the suggestion effect in the same manner as the deviation time, the suggestion effect corresponding to the four fluctuations is executed without a sense of incongruity. be able to.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 751 (b), when the determination result is out of place, regardless of the number of special symbol lottery times, the fluctuation pattern is associated with a special fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 4.5 seconds. Has been. For this reason, the suggestion effect for 5 seconds can be executed every time when the special symbol lottery of 96 to 99 times after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect, is missed. Therefore, since the probability variation continuation suggestion effect can be executed every time with the same effect time, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier to understand for the player.

  As described above, in the 14th control example, the total variation time (and the stop display time) until the probability variation continuation suggestion is ended, whether or not it is a big hit during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion. Is configured to be 20 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to fix the production period of the probability variation continuation suggestion every time, and thus it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand for the player.

  In the 14th control example, the production period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is fixed to 20 seconds. However, the effect period is not necessarily limited to 20 seconds, and the specified effect (4 times) If it is feasible, it may be longer or shorter than 20 seconds.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 752 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 752 (a), the ROM 222 in the fourteenth control example has a playback speed selection table 222ma added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 412 (a)). Is different. Since the other configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The playback speed selection table 222ma starts (restarts) the remaining long press period (A) necessary to increase the maximum gauge number and the long press during execution of the long press effect (see FIG. 746). It is a data table in which data for selecting the playback speed (display mode and audio mode) of the presentation mode during the long press is defined according to the remaining long press effective period (B) at the time. The specified contents of the reproduction speed selection table 222ma will be described with reference to FIG. 752 (b).

  FIG. 752 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the playback speed selection table 222ma. As shown in FIG. 752 (b), the reproduction speed selection table 222ma includes the remaining long press period (A) necessary for increasing the maximum number of gauges and the point at which the long press is started (resumed). For each corresponding relationship with the remaining long press effective period (B), the playback speed (update speed) of the display mode and the audio mode is defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 752 (b), when B is a period longer than A (that is, the maximum gauge number is increased by continuing long press until the end of the long press effective period) 1) is selected as the playback speed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 752 (b), when B is less than A and has a period longer than 2/3 of A, 1.5 times speed is selected as the playback speed. It is configured as follows. In addition, when B is a period less than 2/3 of A and half or more than A, a double speed is selected as the playback speed. On the other hand, if B is less than half the length of A, the 1 × speed is selected as the playback speed.

  As described above, in the fourteenth control example, by setting the playback speed with reference to the playback speed selection table 222ma, the playback can be increased to the upper limit gauge number within the remaining time of the long press effective period. The speed can be set. Therefore, in the chance charge effect, the effect can be terminated in a state where the number of gauges is increased to a larger number of gauges, so that it is possible to secure a larger number of executions of the chance up effect. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 753 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 753, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 412 (b)). 223 mb, long-pressing timer 223 mc, long-press execution flag 223 md, long-press interruption flag 223 me, gas gauge counter 223 mf, gauge rise timing storage area 223 mg, pseudo fluctuation counter 223 mh, pseudo fluctuation timer 223 mj Is different in that it has been added.

  The long press effect flag 223ma is a flag indicating whether or not the long press effect (see FIG. 746) is being executed. If it is ON, it means that the long press effect is being executed. If so, it means that the long press effect is not being executed. This long press effect flag 223ma is set to ON at the start timing of the long press effect (see S5902 in FIG. 755), and is set to OFF after the long press effective period has elapsed (see S5908 in FIG. 755).

  The long press period timer 223mb is a timer for measuring the long press effective period in the long press effect, and a counter value corresponding to 10 seconds is set at the start of the long press effect (see S5903 in FIG. 755). During the long press effective period, the number of gauges KG is increased when the player performs a long press.

  The long-pressing timer 223mc is a timer for measuring a total period (long-pressing period) in which the player operates the PUSH button 10317 during one long-pressing effect. Basically, the number of gauges increases by 1 each time the value of the long-pressing timer 223mc increases by 1 second until the number of gauges KG reaches the upper limit value. When the playback speed is 1.5 times speed or 2 times speed, the number of gauges increases at a timing according to the playback speed.

  The long press execution flag 223md is a flag for indicating whether or not the player is executing a long press in the long press effect. If the long press execution flag 223md is on, it means that the player is performing a long press, and if it is off, it means that the long press is not being executed. The long press execution flag 223md is set to ON when a new operation (pressing) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected in the long press effective period (see S6101 in FIG. 757), and is OFF when the long press is interrupted. It is set (see S6002 in FIG. 756).

  The long press interruption flag 223me is a flag for indicating whether or not the long press is interrupted in the long press effective period of 1, and means that the long press is interrupted if it is on. If it is off, it means that the long press is not interrupted. This long press interruption flag 223me is set to ON when the long press is interrupted (see S6002 in FIG. 756), and is set to OFF when the long press is resumed (see S6105 in FIG. 757).

  The feeling gauge counter 223mf is a counter for counting the number of feeling gauges KG actually increased by the player performing a long press during the long press effect. The initial value of the feeling gauge counter 223mf is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the number of feeling gauges KG increases (see S6007 in FIG. 756). At the end of the long press effect, the value of the feeling gauge counter 223mf is overwritten with the value of the charge number counter 223m (see S5907 in FIG. 755). Thereby, the number of gauges actually increased by the player's operation can be reflected as the number of chance-up effects to be executed thereafter.

  The gauge rise timing storage area 223 mg is a storage area for storing data indicating the remaining period until the gauge number of the feeling gauge KG increases during execution of the long press effect. Whether or not to increase the number of gauges according to the data stored in the gauge rising timing storage area 223mg and the value of the long-pressing timer 223mc while the player is holding the long press in the long press effect Is determined (see S6005 in FIG. 756).

  The pseudo variation counter 223mh is a counter for counting the number of remaining pseudo variation effects (pseudo suggest effects) to be executed during the jackpot variation in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. This pseudo-variation counter 223mh is the value of the short-time guarantee counter 223g at the time of a big win (that is, the remaining of the probable change continuation suggestion effect when the special symbol lottery is won during the probability change continuation suggestion effect) (The number of effects) is set (see S6202 in FIG. 761), and the value is subtracted by 1 each time the pseudo-variable effect is executed (see S6206 in FIG. 758). By counting the number of pseudo-variation effects by the pseudo-variation frequency counter 223mh, it is possible to reliably execute four suggestion effects in each probability variation continuation suggestion effect. Therefore, the probability variation continuation suggesting effect can be suitably executed.

  The pseudo variation timer 223mj is a timer for measuring the remaining production period in the pseudo variation production. In the pseudo variation timer 223mj, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set every time the start of the pseudo variation effect is set (see S6203 in FIG. 761). By managing the effect period of the pseudo variation effect by the pseudo variation timer 223mj, it is possible to execute one or more times of the pseudo variation effect that matches the variation time of the jackpot variation. Therefore, the probability variation continuation suggesting effect can be suitably executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in 14th Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 754 to 761. In the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example, the effect update process (in FIG. 442) is compared to the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example. Instead of the effect update processing 14 (S3181 in FIG. 754) instead of the S3111), the change display setting processing 14 (S3182 in FIG. 759) instead of the change display setting processing (S3115 in FIG. 455), and the change effect setting processing (S4204 in FIG. 456). ) Is executed in that the variation effect setting process 14 (S4281 in FIG. 760) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 754, the effect update process 14 (S3181) in the fourteenth control example will be described. This effect update process 14 (S3181) is executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example, and in the same way as the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example, This is a process for updating the effect modes of various effects performed during execution.

  Of the effect update process 14 (see FIG. 754) in the fourteenth control example, each process in S3201 to S3206 is the same as each process in S3201 to S3206 in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example. Processing is executed.

  In addition, in the effect update process 14 (see FIG. 754) in the fourteenth control example, when the process of S3206 ends, the long press effect process (S3261) for updating the effect mode in the long press effect (see FIG. 746). Next, the pseudo variation setting process (S3262) for updating the display mode during the execution of the pseudo variation effect (see FIG. 750) is performed, and this process is terminated. Details of the long press effect process (S3261) and the pseudo variation setting process (S3262) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 755 to 757 and 758, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 755, the above-described long press effect process (S3261) will be described. FIG. 755 is a flowchart showing the content of the long press effect process (S3261). This long press effect process (S3261) is a process for updating the effect mode in the long press effect (see FIG. 746) as described above.

  In this long press effect process (S3261), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the start timing of the long press effect (S5901). When it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the long press effect (S5901: Yes), the long press effect flag 223ma is set to on (S5902), and the value of the long press period timer 223mb corresponds to 10 seconds. A counter value is set (S5903), and this process ends. Thereby, the long press effective period in the long press effect can be set to 10 seconds.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5901 that the present is not the start timing of the long press effect (S5901: No), then the long press effect flag 223ma is turned on (that is, the long press effect is executed). It is determined whether or not (S5904). If it is determined that the long press effect flag 223ma is off (that is, the long press effect is not being executed) (S5904: No), there is no possibility of updating the effect mode related to the long press effect, so that This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the long press effect flag 223ma is on (that is, the long press effect is being executed) (S5904: Yes), the value of the long press period timer 223mb is subtracted. (S5905) Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the long press period timer 223mb after subtraction is 0 (S5906). If it is determined that the value of the long press period timer 223mb after subtraction is 0 (S5906: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the long press effect. By overwriting this value, the number of gauges actually increased (reached) in the long press effect is set as the number of subsequent chance-up effects (S5907).

  When the processing of S5907 is completed, all the values of the long press effect flag 223ma, the long press timer 223mc, the long press execution flag 223md, the feeling gauge counter 223mf, and the long press interruption flag 223me are reset (S5908). The end of the production is set (S5909), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5906, when it is determined that the timer value of the long press period timer 223mb after subtraction is not 0 (not the end timing of the long press effect) (S5906: No), the long press execution flag 223md is turned on. It is determined whether or not (that is, the player is pressing and holding the PUSH button 10317) (S5910). When it is determined that the long press execution flag 223md is on (S5910: Yes), a long press execution process for updating the effect mode while the player is holding the long press is executed (S5911). This process is terminated. Details of the long press execution processing (S5911) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5910, when it is determined that the long press execution flag 223md is off (that is, the player has not pressed the PUSH button 10317 for a long time) (S5910: No), then the push button 10317 It is determined whether or not pressing has been detected (S5912). If it is determined that pressing of the PUSH button 10317 has not been detected (S5912: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5912 that a push on the push button 10317 has been detected (S5912: Yes), a long-press start process for setting control for the start of the long-press is executed (S5913). This process is terminated. Details of the long press start processing (S5913) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 756, the long press executing process (S5911) in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 756 is a flowchart showing the content of the long press execution processing (S5911). This long press execution process (S5911) is a process for updating the effect mode while the player is performing a long press as described above.

  In this long press execution processing (S5911), first, it is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (S6001). If it is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is not pressed (S6001: No), the long press is performed. The push execution flag 223md is set to OFF, and the long press interruption flag 223me is set to ON (S6002). Then, display and audio pause are set (S6003), and this process ends. More specifically, an interruption command is set for each of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6001 that the push button 10317 has been pressed (S6001: Yes), the value of the long-pressed timer 223mc is incremented by 1 and updated (S6004). It is determined whether or not the timer value corresponds to the rising timing of the gauge number of KG (S6005). In the process of S6005, when it is determined that the timer value does not correspond to the rising timing of the gauge number (S6005: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6005 that the timer value corresponds to the rising timing of the gauge number (S6005: Yes), then the value of the gas gauge counter 223mf is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223m. Is determined (S6006).

  In the process of S6006, when it is determined that the value of the feeling gauge counter 223me is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223m (S6006: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the feeling gauge counter 223me and updated (S6007). The execution of the display mode and the audio mode corresponding to the value of the later feeling gauge counter 223me is set (S6008), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6006, when it is determined that the value of the feeling gauge counter 223me is equal to or greater than the value of the charge number counter 223m (S6006: No), the gauge number cannot be increased any more in this long press effect. Therefore, the execution of the display mode and the audio mode corresponding to the current value of the spirit gauge counter 223me is set (S6009), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 757, the long press start processing (S5913) in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 757 is a flowchart showing the content of the long press start process (S5913). The long press start process (S5913) is a process for setting the control for the player starting the long press as described above.

  In the long press start process (S5913), first, the long press execution flag 223md is set to on (S6101), and then it is determined whether or not the long press interruption flag 223me is on (S6104). In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the long press interruption flag 223me is off (S6104: No), it means that the player has operated the PUSH button 10317 for the first time in the long press effect, so the gauge rising timing Data indicating an increase per second is stored in the storage area 223mf (S6102), the long-press display mode and the audio mode are reproduced at a single speed (S6103), and then this process is terminated. The first long press will set the 1x speed regardless of the cutting time. If the display and audio are played back at 1.5x or 2x from the beginning, the player may feel uncomfortable. This is intended to suppress this.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6104 that the long press interruption flag 223me is on (S6104: Yes), the long press interruption flag 223me is set to off (S6105), and the value of the charge counter 223m × 1 second A value (A) is calculated by subtracting the value of the long-pressing timer 223mc from (S6106). Next, a value (B) obtained by subtracting the value of the long press period counter from the timer value corresponding to 10 seconds is calculated (S6107), and from the reproduction speed selection table 222ma (see FIG. 752 (b)), A and B The playback speed corresponding to each value is selected (S6108). Next, the data in the gauge rise timing storage area 223mf is updated according to the playback speed selected from the playback speed selection table 222ma (S6109), and playback of the display mode and audio mode at the selected playback speed is started (S6110). ), This process is terminated.

  By executing this long press start processing (see FIG. 757), a suitable reproduction speed can be set according to the timing at which the long press is resumed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 758, the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S3262) in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 758 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S3262). As described above, the pseudo variation setting process (S3262) is a process for updating the display mode during execution of the pseudo variation effect (see FIG. 750).

  In the pseudo variation setting process (S3262), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo variation counter 223mh is greater than 0 (S6201). In the process of S6201, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo variation counter 223mh is 0 (S6201: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6201 that the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223mh is greater than 0 (S6201: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223mj is decremented by 1 (S6202), and then the pseudo value after subtraction is calculated. It is determined whether or not the value of the variation timer 223mj is 0 (S6203). In the process of S6203, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo variation timer 223mj after subtraction is not 0 (S6203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223mj after subtraction is 0 (S6203: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation effect for 5 seconds corresponding to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223mh after subtraction. Is set to start (S6204), and reproduction of the fluctuation BGM for 5 seconds is set (S6205). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223mh (S6206), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this pseudo-variation setting process (see FIG. 758), the pseudo-variation effect can be suitably executed when a big win is won during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 759, the variable display setting process 14 (S3182) in the fourteenth control example will be described. This variation display setting process 14 (S3182) is executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 455) in the first control example, and is similar to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 455) in the first control example. This is a process for executing a variation effect in the three-symbol display device 81.

  Of the fluctuation display setting process 14 (S3182), the processes of S4201 to S4203, S4205, and S4206 to S4211 are respectively S4201 to S4203, S4205, and S4206 of the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 455) in the first control example. The same processes as those in S4211 are executed. In the variation display setting process 14 (S3182) in the fourteenth control example, when the process of S4203 is completed, the variation effect setting process 14 is then performed instead of the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example. Is executed (S4281). Details of the variation effect setting process 14 (S4281) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 759) in the fourteenth control example, when the process of S4205 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223mj is greater than 0 (S4282). When it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223mj is 0 (S4282: No), the reproduction of the fluctuation BGM according to the fluctuation time is set (S4283), and the process proceeds to S4206. On the other hand, in the process of S4282, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo variation timer 223mj is greater than 0 (S4282: Yes), the process of S4283 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4206.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 760, the variable effect setting process 14 (S4281) in the fourteenth control example will be described. This variation effect setting process 14 (S4281) is executed in place of the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example, and is similar to the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example. This is a process for executing a variation effect in the three-symbol display device 81.

  Among the variation effect setting process 14 (S4281), in each process of S4301 to S4307 and S4310 to S4313, each process of S4301 to S4307 and S4310 to S4313 of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing is executed. In the variation effect setting process 14 (S4281) in the fourteenth control example, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit in the process of S4307 (S4307: Yes), during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. Since it means that the jackpot change is started, the winning process during the suggestion effect for setting the execution of the remaining suggestion effects that are not executed during the jackpot change is executed (S4381), and this process is terminated. Details of this suggestion effect winning process (S4381) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 761 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process during suggestion effect (S4381). In this suggestion effect winning process (S4381), first, the right-handed winning flag 223i is set to ON (S6201), and then the value of the short-time guaranteed number counter 223g is set to the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223mh (S6202). ). When the processing of S6202 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the value of the pseudo variation timer 223mj (S6203), and the start of the pseudo variation effect for 5 seconds is set (S6204). By setting the BGM playback (S6205), execution of the pseudo-variable effect for 5 seconds is set. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223mh (S6206), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the winning process during the suggestion effect (S4381), it is possible to complete all the suggestive effects that have not been executed during the execution of the jackpot variation, and therefore it is possible to more appropriately execute the probability change continuation suggestion effect. .

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Output Device in 14th Control Example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The fourteenth control example is different only in that the interruption command processing 14 (S20221) is executed instead of the interruption command processing (see FIG. 477) in the first control example described above. Details of the interruption command process 14 (S20221) will be described with reference to FIG. Since other control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 762 is a flowchart showing the interrupt command process 14 (S20221). This interruption command process 14 (S20221) is a process executed instead of the interruption command process (see FIG. 477) in the first control example described above, and is the same as the interruption command process (see FIG. 477) in the first control example. In addition, this is a process for performing control according to the interruption command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the interruption command process 14 (see FIG. 762) in the fourteenth control example, first, it is determined whether or not the interruption command corresponds to the fluctuation BGM (S20601), and the interruption command corresponds to the fluctuation BGM. If it is determined (S20601), the variation BGM interruption process for setting the interruption and resumption of the variation BGM is executed (S20602), and this process is terminated. In this variation BGM interruption process (S20602), the same process as the interruption command process (see FIG. 477) in the first control example is executed. Since the interrupt command process (see FIG. 477) has already been described in the first control example, detailed description of the variation BGM interrupt process (S20602) having the same contents as the interrupt command process (see FIG. 477) is omitted. To do.

  If it is determined in the process of S20601 that the command is not an interrupt command corresponding to the variation BGM (S20601: No), the sound mode (long press effect sound) reproduced (output) during the long press effect is interrupted. Or, since it means that it is an interruption command for resuming, whether this interruption command is a command indicating the start of interruption (whether it is a command based on the fact that the player has interrupted long press) or not Is determined. If it is determined in the process of S20603 that the command indicates the start of interruption (S20603: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the long press effect sound being played is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (S20604). Then, the interruption of the reproduction of the long press effect sound is set (S20605), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S20603 that the command is not an interruption command indicating the start of interruption (that is, an interruption command indicating the resumption of the long press effect sound) (S20603: No), then the reproduction position The data stored in the storage area 302b is read (S20606), and the reproduction of the long press effect sound at the reproduction speed notified by the interruption command is resumed from the reproduction position indicated by the read data (S20607). This process ends.

  By executing the interruption command process 14 (see FIG. 762), the long press effect sound is accurately interrupted and resumed in synchronization with the timing at which the player interrupts and restarts the long press during the long press effect. Can be set to Therefore, the long press effect can be more suitably executed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example is configured to be able to execute a long press effect that prompts the player to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (operation of specific operation content). When this long press effect is executed, an effect is produced in which the gauge number of the feeling gauge KG increases stepwise according to the duration of the long press. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel production mode that affects the number of gauges (the number of chance-up productions executed thereafter) according to the player's operation content (long-press duration). Can be further improved. In the fourteenth control example, the voice mode is output in synchronism with the display of the gauge number of the feeling gauge KG while the player is pressing and holding. That is, every time the number of gauges KG increases, a sound mode corresponding to the increased number of gauges is output. In the fourteenth control example, when the player interrupts the long press in the long press effect, the voice reproduction position is stored, and when the player resumes the long press after that, the memory is stored. The audio is output from the reproduction position set in advance. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the number of gauges increases and the timing at which the voice mode is switched can be matched (synchronized) regardless of whether or not the long press is interrupted. Can be set more suitably.

  Furthermore, in the 14th control example, when the long press is resumed in the long press effect, the long press effective period and the remaining gauges up to the upper limit number of gauges that can be increased in the current long press effect. The number and the update speed (reproduction speed) of the voice mode and the display mode during the long press are changed according to the determination result. That is, when the remaining long press effective period is short, by setting 1.5 times speed or 2 times speed, it is controlled so that the maximum number of gauges can be increased as much as possible within the effective period. doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end each long press effect with a larger number of gauges accumulated. Therefore, since it can be set as the state which can perform more chance improvement effects after that, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved more.

  In the 14th control example, similar to the first control example described above, a series of story-like effects (probable change continuation suggesting effects) is executed over the 96th to 99th variable display periods after the end of the jackpot. It is configured to do. In addition, during the execution period of the probability variation continuation suggestion, the voice mode and the display mode are set in units of variable display. In other words, instead of setting the display mode and sound mode over the variation time for four variations, the display mode and the sound mode are set to end at the variation time set at the start of variation for each variation. . By comprising in this way, even if a reservation ball | bowl becomes 0 in the middle of execution of a probability variation continuation suggestion effect, it can prevent that an audio | voice mode and a display mode shift after that. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably set the production effect in the probability variation continuation suggestion production.

  In the fourteenth control example, the configuration is such that the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is interrupted (a demonstration display is displayed) when the retained ball becomes 0 during execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. It is not something that can be done. For example, even when the hold becomes 0, it is possible to execute a pseudo display effect and set the display mode and the voice mode for the suggestion in accordance with this. By configuring in this way, the probability variation continuation suggesting effect can be configured so as not to be interrupted, so that an effect with a better tempo can be realized. Note that the pseudo variable display effect may be executed only when the result of the effect has already been determined. More specifically, only when the gaming state is a short-time state and the transition to the normal state is confirmed by executing the 100th special symbol lottery, the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is simulated. It is good also as a structure made to complete | finish. Thereby, since it is possible to suppress a contradiction between the content of the effect and the actual behavior, a more preferable effect mode can be realized.

<Modification of 14th Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the 14th control example mentioned above, it was set as the structure which sets an audio | voice aspect and a display mode in a variable display unit in a probability variation continuation suggestion production. On the other hand, in this modified example, at the timing when the effect is newly set, the effect modes (display mode and effect mode) up to the range that is surely continuously executed according to the status of the holding ball are collectively displayed. Configuration. In this case, it is set as the structure which sets the continuous display mode and effect mode over the range performed continuously. Thereby, since it can suppress that an effect is interrupted in a variable display unit, the effect mode with a better tempo is realizable.

  A correspondence relationship between the sound mode and the display mode in the modified example of the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 763. FIG. 763 is a diagram in which the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the voice mode when the second suggestion effect in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is set to 0 is set in this variation. As shown in FIG. 763, in the situation where there is one reserved ball at the start of the first suggestion effect, the display mode and the audio mode of the variable display and the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball are displayed. It is configured to set all at once. That is, as shown in FIG. 763, the execution of the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 is set, and the reproduction time variation BGM over the variation display for two times is set. By comprising in this way, since the story property of a probable continuation suggestion production can be emphasized more, the production effect can be heightened. After entering the variable stop state, the demonstration display is set and the voice mode is stopped, and the execution of the suggestive effect is restarted with a new start prize as in the 14th control example described above. The

  In this way, by adopting a configuration in which an audio mode is set up to the suggestion effect in the range where execution is confirmed, the story property in the probability variation continuation suggestion effect can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the above-described fourteenth control example and its modification, the BGM played during the execution period of the probability variation continuation suggestion is configured to end in units of variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, at the start of the probability variation continuation suggestion, loop playback of a predetermined BGM is set (that is, reproduction is started without setting the end timing), and it is determined that the holding ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. In the case where the final change display is completed, a clear reproduction position (for example, a reproduction position at which the melody changes) is determined in a predetermined range before and after the end timing of the last variation display (for example, a range within 1 second before and after the end). Then, the display mode may be set so that the effect is interrupted at the discriminated playback position, and the BGM interruption may be set. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set BGM in units of variable display, so that the processing load during execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect can be reduced.

  In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases, the number of retained balls). Although the case where the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above control examples, it is configured that the winning to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Moreover, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, different display means may be provided between the display means for displaying the main symbol highlighted in the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols in the third symbol. Moreover, you may use structures other than a liquid crystal display as a structure of a display means.

  In each of the control examples described above, a right-handed game that targets the right region of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (short-time state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left region of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game is configured to be executed, but it is sufficient that the target area of the game board 13 is different depending on the gaming state. May execute a right-handed game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the game in a different game state can be performed aiming at the same area | region.

  In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is determined that the operation means has been operated when the player presses down. It is also possible to use a lever-type operation means that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity Possible touch sensor type operation means, wireless type operation means capable of discriminating operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, and the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not on the main controller 110 but on the sound lamp controller 113 side.

  In each control example described above, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in an effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. The main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process for executing a game (lottery) and a game (lottery) result are displayed as effects. The processing for this may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as “setting”) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured to be able to change the setting at the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused may be used.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine having a multi-stage setting, any combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) is one of a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). A typical example is one that can be set as follows, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, it is implemented as a pachinko machine that can vary the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when the jackpot hits, according to the setting May be. That is, according to the setting, the rate at which the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player is varied, or the rate at which the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which a big jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is variable depending on the setting, or a big jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. It is good also as a structure which varies the advantageous degree for every setting by changing the ratio to change according to a setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot for which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is determined after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot for which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0) is granted The ratio at which is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot is over, the ratio at which the jackpot is determined to be shifted to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) (or easy to shift) is varied according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) ) May be varied in accordance with the setting. Alternatively, a jackpot type may be provided in which the ratio determined only with a specific setting is significantly high (almost not determined with other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as the setting 6. And in setting 6, when the jackpot is a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% It is good also as a structure. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that it is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so let the player play the game paying attention to the number of jackpot rounds be able to. Instead of this, or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of times the time-short state is completed. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, a jackpot type in which a jackpot (or an accessory in the jackpot) is activated with an operation pattern different from that of other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. The jackpot type may be configured to be easily determined with a specific setting (the ratio to be determined increases). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is varied according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probability variation state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes jackpot probability high so that it is. This configuration is of a type that tends to increase the number of possessed balls as the number of lottery special symbols increases, especially in the probability variation state (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired). It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the probability variation state wins the next big win, and is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a high probability of small winning in the probability variation state, so that the advantage of high setting The sex can be increased. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probability variation state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big win is likely to increase. Therefore, in the probable state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the number of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more special symbols are used. These special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols is determined and the gameability in which a lottery (variation) is performed independently have been described. However, each of the gaming properties described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  About each embodiment mentioned above and each control example, you may comprise it combining all or one part.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Points where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operation device having an operation means for a player to push in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operation means protrudes from the player in the first state. 2 states are provided, and biasing means for biasing the operation means from the first state toward the second state is provided, and the pushing direction of the operation means in the second state is from the back side to the player. A gaming machine A1 that is directed to the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-14421).
(See No. 8 publication). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the player performs an effect in a manner that increases the expectation of the jackpot for the player at the advanced position, so that the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. Therefore, it was necessary to design the strength of the operation means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole, and the drive means for driving the operation means is enlarged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the near side for the player. In this case, the momentum of pushing can be released by generating a portion that cannot be divided into operations as a slip between the player's hand and the operation means.

Also, in the case of pushing the operation means around the shoulder and elbow from the player's gaming posture,
Since it is difficult to apply force in the forward direction, the player can naturally weaken the force applied to the operation means.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is configured to be rotatable about a shaft bar disposed on the back side for the player, configured to be tiltable up and down around the shaft bar, and includes the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means places the operation means in a direction opposite to the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured to rotate, and the operation means is arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that in the second state, It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation of hitting the operation means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be pushed in easily, so a new push-in operation method that is difficult to push acceleration can be provided. The operation device can be prevented from being damaged by the player's pushing operation.

The new push-in operation method is, for example, by placing the outer side of the left hand little finger near the shaft and placing the hand in the vertical position so that the thumb is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating in a tilted state, a method of operating in a mode in which the palm is dropped toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is positioned facing the operating means Is done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operation device is configured such that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a drive means for generating a drive force of the automatic operation. The drive force of the drive device is a push operation by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in a direction to play and does not work in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so the driving force in the direction opposite to the player operating direction. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the push-in operation of the button is possible, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being subjected to a high load by being pulled from the player in the reverse direction when performing the operation of retracting the button.

In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and further includes a maintenance unit that operates by the driving unit, and the driving unit includes the eccentric unit via the eccentric portion. The rotating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means is capable of changing the phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase, while maintaining the maintaining means. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operation means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase,
A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state by the same rotation.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means remains in the maintenance state, and the movement to release the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By using the means, it is possible to change the movement range in which the operation device moves by the biasing means. Accordingly, a plurality of operation modes by the urging means can be configured.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means can be moved in the biasing direction of the biasing means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased or decreased according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operation means moves following the movement of the maintenance means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement in the direction of the urging force of the urging means was caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement was limited to one way. Since the movement mode of moving following the maintenance unit can be added to the operation unit, the type of movement mode of the operation unit can be increased. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game machine includes a light emitting means that is disposed inside the operation device and that emits light toward the player, and in the second state as compared with the first state. However, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, from the player's viewpoint, the area of the operation means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint compared to the first state. As the light irradiation range is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the light and improve the production effect, and it is difficult to push the operation means unless aiming By setting it as the aspect which is, it can reduce the player's power at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-permeable material, and the operating means moves close to and away from the display means between the display means and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes. Characteristic gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-permeable material, and the operating means moves to and away from the display means between the display means and the light emitting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<Points that enable repetitive strikes but have low repulsion during normal times>
In an operation device having an operation means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, the first state and a second range in which the range of operation up to the terminal position is wider than the first state.
A first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1 comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state in accordance with a player's operation.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-14421).
(See No. 8 publication). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the operation means is automatically operated by the drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operation means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operation means does not follow the player's operation, so that it is difficult for the player to perform the continuous hitting operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means, while the return of the operating means is desired to be faster. 2
Since the return can be speeded up by pushing back the operating means with the driving means, the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The gaming machine B1 includes continuous hitting determination means for determining whether or not the continuous hitting operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined based on the detection value of the continuous hitting determination means. A game machine B2 that determines whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not the second driving means is driven based on the detection value of the continuous hit determining means, the player is not performing a continuous hit operation (for example, a single press operation or a long press) It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back until the second driving means operates until the operation is performed.

In the gaming machine B2, the end detection means for detecting the position of the operation means and detecting whether or not the operation means is arranged at the end position, and whether or not the operation means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A position difference detecting means for detecting, and a movement direction determining means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detected value of the end position detecting means and the detected value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, wherein the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the step is a direction returning from the pushing end to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction returning from the push-in end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is moved from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is constituted by a voice coil motor that is oscillated and displaced along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. A gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to generate a driving force for moving the operating means by effectively using the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame that supports the operation means, and the second drive means elastically supports the drive motor that rotates an eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A support means, and the support means has a driving force that moves the operation means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state as the operation means approaches the end position. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the terminal position and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operation means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the fact that the operation means is arranged at the end position, and makes contact with the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame, so the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (a direction close to the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points where VCM is used as a braking device and vibration production device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means is provided, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measurement means for measuring the speed of the operation means from a detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measurement means A threshold value judging means for judging whether or not the measurement value measured by the above is a predetermined threshold value or more, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold value judging means The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-14421).
(See No. 8 publication). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the importance of being lightly operated by the player is emphasized, the operation resistance may be reduced and the operation means may be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of the operation means being damaged can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the operation of the player increases, and the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for a less powerful player. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determination unit determines whether the speed of the operation unit is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion unit is increased. Therefore, the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary while reducing the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value. Therefore, operability can be improved and destruction can be prevented by the repulsion means.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold. Before the voice coil motor is pushed out to the extended position, and the operating means is disposed at a position where it can contact the voice coil motor.
A gaming machine C2, wherein the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is disposed at a position where it can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before starting, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operation means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C3 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are brought into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor. The degree of braking of the operating means can be gradually improved while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact between the voice coil motor and the voice coil motor, and the discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C1, the repelling means is disposed so as to be in contact with the operating means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by movement of the operating means by spring elasticity. .

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the deformation amount by spring elasticity, so that the driving force can be driven without a time delay even when the movement speed of the operation means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the case where the value measured by the threshold determination means is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold with the case where the value measured by the threshold determination means is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold. Thus, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means opposite to the end in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable region of the end of the repulsion means opposite to the side in contact with the operation means is narrowed. The elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased when the speed is high.

<Driving means is prevented from being damaged by interrupting transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes a drive means for generating a drive force for operating the operation means, a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the operation means, Releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, and the releasing means outputs the driving force when a load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-14421).
(See No. 8 publication). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a possibility that a large load is generated in the drive system when the operation means is operated during the automatic operation when the operation means is automatically operated for the production. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the drive means and the operation means exceeds a predetermined amount via the transmission means. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means when the operation means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system is suppressed. it can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction that is opposite to the first direction, and is driving in the first direction, The game machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means,
When the operating means is operated by the player when driving the driving means in an operation direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be generated on the driving means. For this reason, the degree of freedom in rendering when operating the operating means to produce is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, or the release member moves in the release direction. Switch whether to move in the reverse direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two types of release pattern and non-release pattern), but in both cases it is necessary to discontinue the driving force.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

An example of a method for releasing transmission is that the clutch moves in a direction that intersects the operation direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction means, for example, the purpose of excluding the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a biasing unit that biases the driving unit and the transmission unit to a state where the driving force can be transmitted, and the release unit is a contact portion between the driving unit and the transmission unit And engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both surfaces opposite to the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers away from each other.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means engages the driving force in the engaged state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since the engaging teeth are inclined in such a manner that both surfaces facing the operation direction of the driving means taper away from the abutting surface, the transmitting means is separated from the driving means by the engagement of the engaging teeth. It can be made to separate, and thereby the transmission of the driving force can be released.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means is separated from the driving means, the urging force is applied in the operation direction of the driving means via the engagement teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

In addition, the size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmission unit as the transmission unit is further away from the driving unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission unit from becoming excessive when the phase difference between the transmission unit and the drive unit increases.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically restored instead of completely disappearing. Thereby, when a player releases a hand, a button can be started to operate within a short time.

In other words, when the button is driven as “production”, if the player holds the button,
One phase of button operation will elapse. And if the player releases his hand on the way, moving from the end of that one phase will increase the period that the button is stopped,
The feeling that “the player started moving because the load on the player has been released” is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player has started moving because the player's load has been solved.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is
A gaming machine D4, which is formed of sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engagement surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate from each other, the transmission means and the release means abut against each other and the transfer of the release means Stopping the movement along the direction approaching and separating from the means can be suppressed. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation unit is different between the case where the driving unit is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the driving unit is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is canceled without being limited to any of the operation modes. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation unit is the operation mode of the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive unit when there is a difference between whether the drive unit operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the predetermined period of time is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means, the operating mode of the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operation means can be improved.

Here, the difference in the operation mode of the operation means is entangled with information that will be beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation, so that the operation mode of the operation means to the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. Can watch over.

In addition, since the difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the driving means, if the operation direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation without watching the operation of the operation means. Can do. However, the driving means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound, so the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance. Can observe the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the cam rotation>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes a drive means for generating a drive force for operating the operation means, a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the operation means, A first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; Urging means for urging the operating means in the direction from the first position toward the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position toward the second position by the urging force of the urging means. And a terminal means for forming the movable terminal of the first and second movement terminals in a changeable manner, wherein the first means engages with the operation means to suppress a change in position of the operation means. 1 means of said operation Release load means for giving the first means a load for releasing the engagement with the means, and the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change of the movement end of the operating means in the end means are a single A game machine E characterized by being driven by
1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operating means operated by the cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by the releasing load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is extended. There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging operation can be changed by a termination means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the extension operation of the operation means is changed depending on the cam phase at the time of unlocking, the cam phase at the time of unlocking is changed variously. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation operate with different driving forces. Accordingly, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the arrangement space of the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. As a result, the drive means for changing the end position of the operating means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of drive means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine E1, the change of the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as position sensors that detect the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of components can be reduced.

As a method for switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is constituted by a cam and the release load means is constituted by a projection rotating coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation period between the cam and the projection, In the case where the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are removed, and in other phases, the method of synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the protrusion is
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is a load given from the first means,
The gaming machine E3, wherein the gaming machine E3 is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means, and whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously by the operation of the release load means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Therefore, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operation means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but the rotation period is different, so the second rotating means Plural types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by contacting the first means with the phase.

According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state in which the operation means is maintained at the first position and a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared when moving toward the second position. ,
The range of production can be expanded. For example, an effect of gradually separating the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In the operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes a first position of the operation means, and a second position reached by the operation means when the player operates from the first position. A gaming machine comprising: a vibrating means configured to move between and having a vibrating part that vibrates; and a receiving means arranged so as to come into contact with the vibrating part, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position Then, while the vibrating part is in a separated state incapable of coming into contact with the receiving means, when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating part is brought into contact with the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 that is in a contact state.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating means that can be operated by a player and a vibrating means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the casing of the gaming machine (for example,
JP, 2014-144218, A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the chassis of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player touching the housing of the gaming machine, when performing the effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means,
It is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means, and an operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operation means at the moment when the operation means is pressed). In some cases, the start of vibration may not be in time before releasing the hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Therefore, even when the vibration unit is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operation means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibration part occurs before the player pushes in, the vibration part can be vibrated before the player releases his hand regardless of the player's mode of operation. The vibration can be transmitted to the person.

In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position, and the operation means moves to the second position. Thus, the gaming machine F2 is changed to the contact state when the vibrating means is taken out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, so that the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibration part can be changed,
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation intensity can be performed by vibrating the vibration means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means can position the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibration means can be separated from each other to prevent transmission of vibration, and displacement generated in the vibration means during vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, in the contact state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means are brought into contact by using the elasticity of the supporting means. That is, momentum can be applied when the vibrating portion moves in a direction closer to the receiving means due to expansion and contraction of the supporting means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has a deformation resistance along the operation direction of the operation means.
The gaming machine F5 is characterized by being made lower than the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely. it can.

Thereby, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operation means is slight, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of expansion / contraction of the support means, and it is possible to make a difference in the load generated between the vibration part and the receiving means. .

In addition, as a method of varying the deformation resistance, when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operation direction of the operation means, or the support means surrounds the vibration means. When the rubber member is composed of a rubber member, a method of changing the deformation resistance in each direction by manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding, and a rail that guides the operation means in a direction along the operation direction Examples of the method include a coil spring that urges the vibration means along the operation direction of the operation means.

In gaming machine F3, gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is said receiving means, and said receiving means is configured as a means different from said operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but vibration is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibration means from being transmitted to the drive means via the operation means and the transmission means, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive means. Thereby, durability of a drive means can be improved.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the player's hand operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration during the operation from stopping the operation.

In addition, as a receiving means, for example, a part near the upper plate to which a game ball is supplied or an edge part of a glass frame, etc., without being conscious of the player during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a housing part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) possible at the mounting part>
An operation device having an operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, A driving unit that generates a driving force to be driven; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit. The transmission unit includes a deforming portion that is elastically deformed by an overload. A gaming machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, operating means operable by a player, driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means, There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, JP-A-2014-144218)
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, when the driving means generates a driving force that drives the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operating means,
There is a problem in that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and the connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operation device, the deformed portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, thereby connecting the operation means and the transmission means, or the drive means and the transmission means. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting portion.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, and the deforming portion forms a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the rotating portion is moved to the rotating shaft by the elasticity of the deforming portion. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that a fixed force is generated.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion serves as a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means, and serves as a portion that generates a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft,
Is provided. Therefore, the structure of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the function. For example, an individual fixing member such as an e-ring can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a protruding portion protruding in parallel with the rotation axis, the protruding portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is inclined.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can be performed, for example, by displacing the protruding portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to configure the cam member and the projecting portion with a single member, which may increase the number of members.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is in a mode in which the rotation shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is compared with the rotation shaft in comparison with a first rotation direction in which the cam member rotates about a straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the protruding portion. Deformation resistance is increased in the second rotation direction in which the second rotation direction is rotated about a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the protruding portion and the extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G3, by changing the deformation resistance of the deformation portion for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis direction, Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member moves, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means is reduced by the elastic deformation of the deformable portion. can do.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deforming portion. The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member abut.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member Therefore, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

Any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, comprising a detecting means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is inclined and displaced with respect to the shaft.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred based on the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is small, but the configuration of the detection means becomes complicated and expensive as the arrangement interval of the detection means is reduced. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of overload at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the shaft. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detection means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the drive means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of detection means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent ball goto with thread. Game machine H>
In a gaming machine including a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the game balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows passage of the flowing down game ball. A gaming machine H1 comprising unidirectional obstruction means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illegal act performed by placing a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding a game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball connected with the thread into the game area There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, JP-A-2015-02)
No. 4179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of launch and the thread is cut with the tension generated at that time, if the launching strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball will not be able to cut the thread completely. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
Therefore, for example, prepare a fraudulent tool with game balls connected to both ends of the thread, and launch one game ball connected to one end of the thread with low firing strength to flow into the foul ball path and return it to the player side. While holding one of the game balls, the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread is driven into the game area, so that the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball path. The game ball and the other game ball can be connected to each other with a thread, so that the other game ball is placed in the game area by applying a load to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside. There is a problem that there is a possibility that an illegal profit can be obtained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way blocking means can be used even when a fraudulent act that applies a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illegal profits by obstructing the movement of the yarn in the backward direction of the game ball.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage includes a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

In the gaming machine H2, the bent portion includes a load unit that applies a load to the object that flows backward without applying a load to the flowing game ball on the inner corner side of the bend.
.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to an object (for example, a thread-like member) that flows backward by the loading means.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion that is recessed with a width less than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding, and the loading means is broken. Can be prevented.

In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 is provided with regulation means for regulating movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball path is restricted by the restriction means, so that between the thread-like member and the load means When the load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage so that the load applied to the member on the yarn can be prevented from being weakened.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout ball is a portion that is provided with a receiving tray that is a tray that first arrives on the front side of the front door, and the receiving tray is a portion that discharges the game ball discharged from the payout device The gaming machine H6, wherein the ball discharge portion is disposed above the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the paying device passes through the front of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball path, thereby allowing the game ball to pass through the foul ball path. When an illegal act that applies a load to the other game ball using the thread guided to the game area is intentionally applied to the game ball to be paid out, the load is applied and the durability of the thread is reduced. be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is a portion for discharging the game balls discharged from the payout device, to the receiving tray that is a tray that the foul ball reaches first on the front side of the front door is The gaming machine H7 is lower than the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, an illegal act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed. In some cases, it is possible to easily damage the yarn by the game balls to be paid out.

<Structure of the panel presser. Gaming Machine I>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the game means and accepts the game means from the one side, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. It comprises state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to an usable state, which is a usable state, and the state changing means includes the gaming means in the use state. In this case, the gaming machine I1 is provided with proximity means that is close to the game means from the one side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be detached from the inner frame, which can be rotated in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means can be changed in state only after the game board is pushed into the use position, so that when the game board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means includes the proximity means that comes close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means abuts the game board and adds a pushing force,
There is an effect that the game board can be pushed to the position of use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that disables the gaming means. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. There is an effect that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means is disabled. A gaming machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retreats outward from the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the gaming means removal work can be improved and Since this process is performed in accordance with the state of disabling the means, work efficiency can be further improved.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means includes a contact means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, since the state change means changes to an available state when the contact means receives a load from the game means, the operation state can be used as a series of flows by pressing the game means against the state change means. The state can be changed.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is configured such that one side of the receiving means is supported by a shaft and the other side is approached to be received by the receiving means, and the state changing means is the receiving means. It is arranged on the other side of the game machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I4, using the width dimension of the gaming means,
A load can be efficiently applied to the contact means via the game means.

Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5 includes a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means cannot be used so that the state changing means cannot use the gaming means. When maintaining the state, a gaming machine I6, comprising a blockage restricting section that makes it impossible to block the opening on one side of the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether the gaming means can be used depending on whether the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. Whether or not to do so can be determined. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means is kept in an unusable state.

<Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire goto. Gaming Machine J>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the game means and accepts the game means from the one side, and the receiving means includes the game means and the game means. A gaming machine J1 comprising an arrangement means arranged on a path communicating with the outside, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of locations.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against an illegal act of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-2016).
No. 26573). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is only one place for preventing fraud and the effect of preventing fraud is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, since the arrangement means is arranged in a path in which the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, it prevents fraud. The effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the placement means includes first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at the first place, and second means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at the second place.
A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of members from the outside by different methods.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different in the first place and the second place because the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside is different. As compared with the case where the number of the members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

In addition, the method of suppressing the approach from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking a route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraud by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the placement means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed from a cup shape that opens toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, whereby further intrusion of the invading member can be prevented.

In the gaming machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting an electrical wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry restricting portion in a path from the outside to the game means. Characteristic gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, in addition to detecting the change (such as disconnection due to heat) that occurs in the wiring due to the high heat at the time of occurrence of fraud that penetrates the entry restriction portion due to the high heat, The effect which suppresses the approach of a member can be made easy to produce.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means includes a member entered from the outside,
A gaming machine J5, comprising a cancellation means for guiding to a resolution area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the member that entered from the outside is guided by the placement means to the cancellation area far from the gaming means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent a member entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of decorative plate with 5 sheets. Including fraud prevention. Gaming machine K>
A first means and a second means, which are opposed to each other along the first direction and have at least one side connected thereto, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. And a third means comprising a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means, and a connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction. A gaming machine K1 characterized by that.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means that are arranged opposite to each other and connected at at least one side are disposed between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing. When the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion that connects the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the vehicle. This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes connected means that is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction adjacent thereto and fitting them together.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes a coupled means coupled to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting that occurs by displacing the second means relative to the first means in the third direction adjacent to the connected means, so that the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and Resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, since one side of the first means and the second means is arranged to be exposed to the outside, the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
Thereby, even if it is a case where the fraudulent act which destroys a fitting part and decomposes | disassembles a 1st means and a 2nd means arises, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same direction as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction of the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, the light irradiating means for irradiating light toward the first means or the second means and being fixed to the connected means, and one of the first means or the second means And a light guide unit configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation unit into the inside of the game machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first means and the second means and the light guiding means.

In the gaming machine K6, the gaming machine K7 is provided with an abutting means for surface abutting in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K6, maintaining an interval corresponding to the size of the abutting means in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means. Can do.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the opposite direction. Can do.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even when the first means or the second means is illegally attempted to disassemble, even if a load is applied in the opposite direction. can do.

<Point L that utilizes light guiding means that bends. As point, it is not achieved>
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in the irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projection means for projecting light that is disposed opposite to the light guide means and passes through the light guide means, The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion that is disposed to face the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion that is disposed to face the convex portion of the light guiding means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of incident light in order to partially change the intensity of surface emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection target device includes the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing even if the intensity of light incident on the light guide device is constant. In the department,
The light emission intensity of the projection means can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projection means is configured such that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. A gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light of can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 includes an opposite projection unit that is disposed on the opposite side of the projection target unit with the light guide unit interposed therebetween, and that projects the light that has passed through the light guide unit. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion disposed opposite to the convex surface portion of the light guiding means are formed of substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, a portion of the back projection means that is disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light guide means and a portion that is disposed opposite to the convex surface portion of the light guide means are light Since the transmission is formed of substantially the same material, when the same light is incident on the light guide means, the light effect mode viewed through the projection means and the light effect mode viewed through the opposite projection means Can be different.

<Bus reflex speaker arrangement structure. Gaming Machine M>
A first means and a second means which are disposed opposite to each other and are fixed to each other and constitute an internal space in a fixed state; acoustic means disposed in a state where at least a part of the internal space enters the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: bending means for forming a bending path in the internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame, and an effect is produced by sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1).
No. 6088). And in such a gaming machine, the vibration wave that travels to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center position of the gaming machine, and sent out of the gaming machine,
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is regulated by the left and right width of the gaming machine, where the production of making the bass sound easy to be performed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, The regulation of the left-right width can be canceled and the vibration wave can travel at an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in a manner in which a load is applied in the opposing direction, and the bending means is rib-shaped from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising a projecting portion projecting from the projecting portion, and a projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts against the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the projecting tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means Is brought into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means as a result of fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening that connects the internal space and the outside, and the opening passes through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 that is blocked by the above.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, A wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed with the passage member passing from the internal space to the outside.

In the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being sandwiched between the projecting portions and being disconnected. be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and an effect means that is arranged below the support fastening means and produces an effect accompanying the game A gaming machine M5, wherein the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the presentation means from below, so that the weight of the support fastening means is reduced without compressing the space used for the presentation. Things can be adopted.

<Moveable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop along the way. Game machine N>
A base member, first displacement means supported by the base member so as to be displaceable, drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state that is displaced in the displacement direction of the first displacement means, A second switchable in a non-following state that is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means;
In a gaming machine comprising displacement means, at least when the second displacement means is in a follow-up state, third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine N1 comprising:

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacing means is displaced in a direction different from the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacing means (see, for example, JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first displacement means and the second displacement means have the same direction of displacement when the first displacement means expands / contracts, resulting in a slow performance and insufficient effect. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels as a bodily sensation can be increased compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 includes a resistance unit that generates a resistance against the displacement of the second displacement unit, and the resistance unit is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. A gaming machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, due to the action of the resistance means, a follow-up state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and a non-follow-up state that deviates from the follow-up state. Since the switching point can be changed, the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means can be increased. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is disposed so as to be visible from the front.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the player can visually recognize the resistance means with the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can be shared with the function as a production device.

The gaming machine N4 includes rod-like shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means so as to be rotatable coaxially. A gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so the first displacement means, As the posture of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the posture of the other member or means also changes so as to prevent the displacement resistance from rising excessively. Can do.

<Utilization of shell buttons and punch holes. As point, it is not achieved>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a storage means configured to be able to receive the first means, wherein the storage means is an opening that receives the first means when the first means is received. A gaming machine O1 comprising: one opening, and a second opening opened with a width equal to or greater than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes an operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, a special game machine). (See JP 2012-048970 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may cause a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 includes the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means, so that foreign substances are accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. Thereby, the situation where a foreign material remains inside can be avoided.

In the gaming machine O1, the storage means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. A gaming machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the storage means includes a low water-resistant part with low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water-resistant part.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water-resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward through the second opening. That is, it can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are configured with a shape based on a shape projected with a different direction of the solid object. A gaming machine O4 characterized by

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening is configured with a shape based on the shape of the solid object in a different direction, the solid object can be easily removed through the second opening.

In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means, the gaming machine O5.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visible to the player in a state where the solid object closes part of the second opening. Can be made. This makes it possible for the player to notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, and thus the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. .

<Points regarding the idea of the shape of the bottom of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a first support means for supporting the first means, wherein the first support means comprises a projecting shape portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which an operation handle is arranged is detachable from an outer frame on which a gaming board is arranged (for example, JP, A 2015-1559837). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding the finger on the bottom surface, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part for hooking the finger, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the situation where the first support means slides down from the hand. It can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

In addition, the arrangement of the projecting shape portion is not limited at all, and may be any projecting shape as long as it projects outward from the first support means. For example, it may be projected in the vertical direction or may be projected in the front side.

The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means, and the protruding shape portion is separated from a support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. A gaming machine P2 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion protrudes downward from the bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first support means is centrally applied as the supporting position. Therefore, the first support means can be further easily held. Thereby, the attachment or detachment operation | work to the 2nd support means of a 1st support means can be made easy.

The position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, the first
The position may be closer to the front side when the support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or closer to the other end when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end. It may be a position, or may be a position on the opposite side of the pivot support position with respect to a dish storing game balls.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed shape portion that is recessed outward from the inside, and the first means opens the gap with the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P3 that is disposed opposite to the recessed shape portion.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first support means is a gap formed by the recessed shape portion, so that the first means Powder that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub due to misalignment (scrap powder, dust)
The amount of generation can be reduced. That is, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of powder and clogging of the movable part to cause malfunction, or the accumulation of powder at the detection location of the detection device and erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed shape portion is not only in operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened for error cancellation, during maintenance, or when the glass frame is replaced), but also during operation (for example, a game It is also effective in the middle or in the game waiting state (demo screen display state).

In the gaming machine P3, the recessed shape portion is disposed inside a range in which the protruding shape portion is protruded.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent the portion where the recessed shape portion is formed from becoming extremely thin as compared to other portions and falling short of strength. it can. In addition, since the recessed shape portion is formed on the back of the protruding shape portion, the protruding shape portion can be deformed inward and outward, so that even if a large load is applied to the protruding shape portion, the protruding shape portion can be deformed. It is possible to suppress cracks in the shape portion.

The load applied to the projecting shape portion may be, for example, the weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first support means,
Examples include a load applied by a collision (such as a car box) that is moved by a player or a store clerk near the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is supported in such a manner that the first means is a part of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion and is in contact with an overlapping portion overlapping the protruding shape portion in the inside and outside directions. A gaming machine P5, comprising: a contact means; and an operation portion configured to be positioned by the contact means and operable by a player.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, while maintaining the effect of the recessed shape portion, it is possible to sufficiently secure the support thickness of the overlapping position that supports the contact means. It is possible to prevent the first support means from being deformed during operation.

In the gaming machine P5, the abutting means includes an impact attenuating means that is continuously formed between the operating portion and configured to be capable of attenuating an impact, and the impact attenuating means includes the concave shape portion. A gaming machine P6 that is formed with a width shorter than the width.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P5, in addition to being able to attenuate the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the contact means by the impact damping means, the distance between the impact damping means and the overlapping portion is increased. Thus, the impact can be attenuated also by the deformation (deflection) of the contact means.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an impact attenuation means. For example, a lump member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device may be used.

In any one of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed shape portion includes a first portion facing the first means, and a second portion extending from the first portion, and the first portion The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that it is formed with a greater degree of recessing than the second part.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small load, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the recessed shape portion while maintaining high durability.

Examples of the degree of recessing include a recessing depth (the greater the degree of recessing, the deeper) and the width of the recess (the larger the degree of recessing, the wider).

When the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portions, the concave shape corresponding to the other portions is provided. You may form the recessed degree of a part large.

Moreover, it is not limited to the magnitude of load, For example, you may design a recessed shape part based on the magnitude of the generation frequency of load. In this case, the occurrence frequency of the load may be based on the magnitude of the occurrence frequency in the entire game shop business hours, or the occurrence frequency in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined rendering state, a gaming state such as a specific gaming state). It may be based on the size of.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the protruding shape portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom surface portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. A gaming machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the load resistance of the front portion where the load concentrates when the first support means stands alone can be improved. Even in a storage method in which the single support means is placed on the floor alone, the first support means can be stored for a long time without the first support means falling down.

Note that the design of the projecting shape portion is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the projecting shape portion may be designed by considering the size of the load generated during the operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes in a direction away from the second support means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be made easy to stand on its own, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the protruding shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contamination of the portions other than the projecting shape portion.

<Points concerning deformation modes based on the support structure and shape of the collar>
A gaming machine comprising: operating means operable by a player; first supporting means for supporting the operating means; and second supporting means for supporting at least one of the first supporting means or the operating means. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction of narrowing a gap between the operation means and the second support means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which operation means such as a production button is supported by a glass frame (see, for example, JP-A-2006-106830). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, measures against misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means due to the load during operation of the operating means are insufficient, and measures against misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operation means and the operation means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the lowering distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the lowering distance of the operation means. At this time, due to the difference in descending distance,
There may be a gap between the operation means and the second support means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means descends excessively, the first support means is deformed to prevent a gap from being generated between the operation means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operating means can allow the lowering (sinking) excessively,
The support mode of the operating means can be simplified.

The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing-in direction along the front-rear direction, a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

Moreover, as an aspect contact | abutted from an operation direction, various aspects are illustrated other than the case where the normal line extended from a contact surface corresponds with an operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (cross-sectional V shape) with respect to the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be shifted toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force increases as the distance toward the center of the bottom increases. Can be done automatically.

Moreover, you may make it provide the common support means which supports a 1st support means and a 2nd support means in common. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be coupled (coupled or fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, is configured to hold a support portion that supports the operation means, and a game ball, and the operation means via the first support means. And a game ball holding unit coupled to the game machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the operation means and the gaming ball holding unit.

In addition, when the first support means is constituted by a flexible member, or when the first support means is connected to the operation means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration when the operation means is operated is retained as it is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball held by the game ball holding unit from being displaced every time the operating means is operated and the generation of abnormal noise.

Various structures are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the first
The vibration transmission may be prevented in the direction of, while the vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound and to perform an effect by sound.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operation means includes an operation unit configured to be operable by a player,
The first support means is such that the connection position with the game ball holding portion is farther from the operation portion.
A gaming machine Q3, which is arranged on the front side.

In the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is easily displaced due to the operation, the absolute amount of displacement is reduced by moving the connection position toward the rear side. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding portion and the first support means, by disposing the connection position on the front side (closer to the player) in the far side of the operation portion, which is a position that is difficult to be displaced with the operation. The design property can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operation means includes an operation portion configured to be operable by a player, a main body portion supported by the first support means, the operation portion, and the main body portion. A connecting portion to be connected, wherein the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and is attachable / detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. Even a gaming machine Q4 configured to surround the connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the first support means can be easily assembled while sufficiently securing the size of the operation portion.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a method of fixing the 1st support means formed from a division body.
For example, each of the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, or one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies and another divided body connected to the divided body. You may let them.

Moreover, various aspects are illustrated as a fixed position and fixed aspect of a division body. For example, it may be done by fitting or fastening.

In addition, when performing by fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, it is possible to distribute and handle the impact generated when the operation unit is operated at a plurality of fixed positions, Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, the occurrence of displacement of the first support means can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction to a direction intersecting (for example, orthogonal) with the operation direction of the operation unit, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operation unit and the direction of tightening the fastening screw can be made different. It can suppress that a fastening screw loosens with the impact at the time of operation.

In gaming machine Q4, gaming machine Q5, wherein the fastening direction of the fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects the operating direction of the operating portion.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load during operation of the operation unit from being applied in the fastening direction, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation,
It is possible to prevent the divided body from being released.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a direction which cross | intersects with respect to an operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined rotation axis). The direction along the rotation axis) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (in the case of a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. The direction is exemplified.

In this case, when a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high rate (frequency) in operation) are assumed during the game, at least of the plurality of planes intersecting the respective straight lines. The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or the fastening direction may be set in a crossing portion of a plurality of planes, that is, in a direction crossing any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening portion of the divided body is configured by a plurality of locations, and the first plane including one fastening location and the second plane including other fastening locations are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is simultaneously applied to other fastening points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the divided body from being displaced at the same time at both fastening locations and from being loosened.

In addition, the fastening location of a division body may be arrange | positioned in the location where load concentrates, when an operation part is operated. Even in this case, since another fastening portion is arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, it is possible to prevent the divided body from being displaced or loosened by the load during operation. Can be prevented.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes detection means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operation unit, and the detection means is arranged at a position away from the division position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7 that is provided.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the divided position, and the operation unit is moved when the operation unit is moved along with the operation of the operation unit at the divided position. Since there is a possibility that the divided body will rub and powder (dust etc.) may be generated, the detection means is arranged away from the division position, so that detection of powder (dust etc.) by the detection means is suppressed. can do. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of a misdetection can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, when the game is possible, the operation means interferes with the divided body in the divided direction view on the side separated in the dividing direction (proximity separation direction) of the divided body. A gaming machine Q8 comprising:

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the positional deviation in the dividing direction of the operating means relative to the divided body can be suppressed by the interference means.

The interference means may be formed so as to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but not interfere with the operating means before the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, when the divided body is formed of a flexible material, the divided body can be bent at the time of assembling work, so that it is easy to avoid interference with the interference means and maintain ease of assembly. can do.

Further, for example, even when the divided body is formed of a hard material, it may be configured not to interfere with the interference means during the assembly process. That is, you may form from the shape which becomes non-interfering by the assembly direction view before fastening (for example, the direction view of the direction which approaches a division body for assembly). In this case, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the divided body when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the second support means includes a receiving recessed portion that is recessed so as to receive the first supporting means.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, since the first support means is received in the receiving recessed portion, the first support means is affected by the displacement of the operation means. Even when the position is shifted, the operating means and the first support means can be quickly returned to the original positions by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which the center of the radius of curvature is disposed on the operating portion side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area where the operation unit can be arranged, and in addition, when the player holds the operation unit, it is cramped Can prevent you from feeling. Thereby, the improvement of the designability of an operation part and the improvement of the operativity of an operation part can be aimed at.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion that is processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11, which is characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaks is different in each region, so that the first support means having anisotropic rigidity Can be configured.

In addition, the design standard of the extending direction of a streak part is not limited at all. For example, it may be designed from the shape of the first support means as an extending direction with a good yield, or when the load generated during operation of the operation means acts in a different manner for each region, it is the best response to the load. The extending direction of the streaks may be designed as the direction.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the substrate>
A vibrating means, and a light emitting means arranged to emit light and arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted;
A gaming machine R1, wherein the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, JP-A-2006-16088). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effects.

Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the substrate from receiving the vibration of the speaker, and the speaker is arranged. It becomes dark because it is not possible to produce a light emission at the place where it is done. in this case,
In the front area where the gaming machine is easy to be visually recognized, the area where the effect can be enjoyed is narrowed. In the first place, game machines represented by pachinko machines etc. are roughly sized from the standard,
It is recognized that securing the light emission effect area is an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can receive the vibration of the vibrating device, and the arrangement of the light emitting means can be changed to the vibration generating location of the vibrating means. Can be approached. Thereby, the front area can be viewed brightly regardless of the vibration occurrence location of the vibration means, and therefore it can be improved from the viewpoint of the light emission effect.

In addition, the aspect of a vibration means is not limited at all. For example, acoustic means configured to be able to output sound may be used, or operation means incorporating a vibration device may be used. Further, the means is not limited to the means that can vibrate actively, and may be a means that can be vibrated (passively vibrated) with respect to a load of an external force.

Various modes are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, the diaphragm that the speaker has,
For example, a discharge port from which the back pressure of the vibration of the speaker seen in the bass reflex type speaker is discharged, a route connected from the vibration part to the discharge port, and the like are exemplified.

As a vibration device, a vibration device (for example, a vibrator) by rotation drive may be used,
A vibration device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear driving may be used.

In addition, the aspect of proximity | contact arrangement | positioning is not limited at all, What is necessary is just an aspect which a player can visually recognize the light of a light emission means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibration means,
In this case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, the direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or the direction inclined inward from the left and right ends.

The gaming machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibrating means, a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the light emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibrating means. .

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, the light emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, displacement, etc.) due to the vibration generated when the vibration means outputs the sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, since the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by changing the vibration means for outputting sound, the type of change in the effect mode of the light emitting means (variation ) Can be increased.

Note that the number of light emitting substrates may be one or more. When there are a plurality of sheets, it is sufficient that at least one light-emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibration means. In this case, since the combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated from the vibration means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided, the types of changes in the rendering mode of the light emitting means can be further increased.

The gaming machine R2 includes holding means for holding the vibration means, and the light emitting substrate is not fixed in the stacking direction with respect to the holding means, and the holding means is configured to emit the light along the stacking direction. A gaming machine R3 that is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of the circuit board.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, it is possible to suppress the light emitting substrate from being displaced and the holding means from being displaced.

The non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding unit are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, a simple retaining), it can be said that the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not fixed.

The expression “non-fixed” does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate are defined by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate to the holding means (stable front and rear positions, and small vibrations are allowed). In addition, by encircling the direction orthogonal to the front and rear with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, displacement in a direction different from the front and rear direction (up and down and left and right) can be suppressed.

This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the vibration generated from the vibration means on the light emission substrate as compared with the case where the light emission substrate is fixed to the holding means in the same manner as the vibration means. Can be increased.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing unit that fixes the first member and the second member to the holding unit, Restricting means for restricting the moving direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, and the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A gaming machine R4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the moving direction is restricted, even if the fixing means is loosened (even if some of the fixing means are loosened), it is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Thus, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

Thereby, the positional relationship between the first member and the second member can be easily maintained. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect to advance. For example, a mode in which a rod-shaped member is inserted through the through hole or a mode in which a fastening screw is fastened in the screw hole may be used.

In any one of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable and a second displacement region in which the displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement region. A gaming machine R5 characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emission mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced due to the influence of the vibration of the vibration means changes for each region of the light emitting substrate. Can be made.

Thereby, it is possible to produce an excellent effect by designing the mode of the light emission effect in the first displacement region and the mode of the light emission effect in the second displacement region in different modes. For example, as the first refracting means for receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the first displacement region, the surface light emitting means for performing uniform light emission effect by surface emission is disposed, while receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the second displacement region. As the second refracting means, an edge light emitting means is provided that allows the player to show high-intensity light by totally reflecting light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge). Thus, a novel light emission effect with different light emission modes (for example, luminance) for each region can be performed.

In addition, the aspect of suppression of displacement is not limited at all. For example, a suppression mode defined from the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means may be used, or a mode defined from the holding mode of the light emitting substrate may be used.

For example, as the positional relationship between the plurality of vibration means and the light emitting substrate, the region that is equidistant from each vibration means is such that the influence from one vibration means is offset by the influence from the other vibration means. The displacement may be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and a facing portion disposed to face the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw A gaming machine R6, wherein the portion and the facing portion are arranged so as to be able to contact each other.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated when the fastening screw is loosened by restricting the progress of the fastening screw by the facing portion. Can be prevented.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated about the response | compatibility after loosening generate | occur | produces in a fastening screw. For example, when looseness occurs in the fastening screw, it may be configured to be able to detect the looseness electrically, or the fastening screw may be loosened by forming the opposing portion on the surface of the vibration device. When it is vibrated, an abnormal noise may be generated and the looseness may be noticed, or a special notification may not be provided and the loosened part may be corrected by regular maintenance.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the first and second members disposed on both sides of the light-emitting substrate, and connection means fastened and fixed to the first and second members,
The connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the direction intersecting the connecting direction is more easily generated as compared with the deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. Characteristic gaming machine R7.

Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the connecting direction easily occurs, a change in both directions in which the interval of the connecting position extends or contracts occurs, and an advantageous effect and an adverse effect are periodically generated. This is not preferable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that only the side where the interval between the connecting positions is reduced is changed. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

Accordingly, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only in a situation where the connecting means is deformed (for example, a situation in which a load is generated in the connecting means). While the load in the opposing direction of the member and the second member is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration of the vibrating means, and the light emission It is possible to suppress shaking of the substrate.

In addition, the aspect in which a deformation | transformation arises easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed in a manner in which the thickness is different for each direction, or the magnitude of the load generated in the connecting means may be changed for each direction.

Moreover, the load switching mode in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a driving device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at an arbitrary timing by the control of the driving device.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured to be able to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. Characteristic gaming machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R7, a plurality of types of action of the vibration means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technology of the light emitting means on the side. Edge light travels to side or back of member>
A first light-guiding unit configured to guide light emitted from the light-emitting unit in a first mode; A gaming machine S1 comprising light guide means and second light guide means for guiding light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first aspect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to allow LED light to be incident from an end portion of a plate-like member and to be emitted from the surface of the plate-like member (for example, JP-A-2015-2015).
159875). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect.

More specifically, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the light emission effect is performed with the LED board formed from a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, so it is useful for reducing the cost. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the production effect tends to be reduced due to a difference in light emission mode (brightness, darkness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between a position close to the LED and a position far from the LED. In order to eliminate this, the light emission mode is weak. The number of LEDs that tend to be (darker) may be increased, but in that case, the number of LED elements necessary for production increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, leading to a result of hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it is inevitable to select whether to improve the production effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the light guide means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so that the effect is reduced even if the distance relative to the light emitting means is different. (Change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light guide means. For example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, or a member that emits light in a surface that is nearly uniform, such as rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin of milky white material or the like. It may be a white member that is used, a member that allows light to pass through a gap, similar to screen doors and shoji screens, a display that is projected on the member itself, similar to transmissive liquid crystal, and others The member of the aspect may be sufficient.

In the gaming machine S1, the light guide means is configured so that the way it shines changes step by step in accordance with the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape that forms a curved surface even when the substrate on which the light guiding means is disposed is formed from a flat plate. If
An effect of emitting light uniformly (uniformly) on the curved surface can be executed.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the game machine S1 or S2 includes a storage unit that stores the light-emitting unit, and a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting unit is disposed. The storage unit supports the light-emitting substrate, and the light guide unit Supporting means fixed at least in the first position, and shielding means configured to shield between the light guide means and the player, wherein the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized by being arranged in the direction.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still assembled, so that the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily achieved. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

In addition, the aspect of shielding by the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that a player can see while being shielded from touching the light guide means, or configured so that the player cannot touch or see the light guide means. You may do it.

When the first position is formed at a plurality of locations, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions is You may make it arrange | position outside the external shape of a shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the position of the light guide means. A gaming machine S4, which is arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine S3, the light guide means has a long plate shape,
Since the first position is arranged at the end portion in the long direction, it is possible to easily correct the misalignment of the light guide means by loosening the first position and applying a load in the short direction of the light guide means. .

Specifically, the correction of the positional deviation of the light guide means is compensated by deformation in the short direction of the light guide means,
The position of the light guide means can be compensated by loosening only one end in the longitudinal direction and compensating for the other end by making up for slippage in the presence of a strong load. Misalignment can be easily repaired.

Further, in the case of the support mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the supporting means by the light guiding means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate on the supporting means can be reduced with the bending deformation of the light guiding means.
Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, the light guide means can be bent and deformed by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending the light guide means. Thus, the positional deviation of the light emitting substrate can be corrected.

Note that the adjustment range of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, it is based on a design that is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate is not displaced so far as to be completely removed in the irradiation direction view. An adjustment width that corrects the positional deviation in the light source may be sufficient (small adjustment width), and the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means on the basis of a design that ensures a large adjustment width in advance. It may be possible to adjust the position of the light guide means to a position that is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means remain in the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect visually recognized at the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, in the case where a gaming machine having the same configuration is prepared so as to be able to play with different gaming characteristics (for example, when configuring gaming machines with different specifications)
Since the mode of the light emission effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means without largely changing the mechanical configuration of each part, it is possible to reduce the burden (for example, cost) related to the manufacture of the gaming machine.

The non-fixed aspect is not limited at all. For example, aspects other than the case of being fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixed. Moreover, an edge part is the expression of the intention which avoids being limited to an edge. That is, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the longitudinal end.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the support means, and the light guiding means and the shielding means are configured to prevent the positional deviation so that the relative positional deviation can be reduced as the mutual distance is shortened. A gaming machine S5, wherein the misalignment prevention portion includes a fixing portion with respect to the support means.

Here, it is necessary to connect a wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting substrate. Since the displacement or chipping of the wiring directly affects the malfunction of the light emitting means, the light emitting substrate is also used for the purpose of preventing it. It is preferable that the substrate and the supporting means are configured so that positional displacement does not easily occur.

Considering the production effect, it is preferable that the light guide means be easily aligned when the positional deviation occurs, on the premise that the positional deviation from the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. It is also considered that it is good to hold it on the support means side. On the other hand, if a positional shift occurs between the light guide means and the shielding means, the light guide means and the shielding means may collide with each other, and the appearance may be deteriorated.

Since the shielding means is a place that can be touched by the player, it is preferable that the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means serving as a base in consideration of strength. Thus, the support mode expected for each means was various.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S3 or S4, due to the action of the position shift prevention unit, the light guiding means and the shielding means can be easily aligned with each other without being directly fixed. In addition, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means during the game.

In addition, the aspect of a position shift prevention part is not limited at all. For example, the concave and convex portions that have the same shape and can be fitted may be used, and the concave and convex portions that can be fitted may have a shape that does not change along the assembling direction. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to an outer shape of the main body portion, a separation extending portion that extends from the main body portion toward the side away from the light emitting means, and the extension portion. And a counter-extended portion extending toward the light-emitting means in a cross-sectional shape, wherein the light-emitting means is disposed in such a manner that light incident on the counter-extending portion is totally reflected. A gaming machine S6 comprising a portion.

According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting part from entering the part other than the opposing extension part, so that the separation extension part and the opposing extension part, and other parts And the effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be executed at the short width boundary.

In addition, the aspect of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means,
And a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means is formed from a cover portion that covers the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the cover portion, and a frame shape that is similar to the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A game machine S7, wherein the opposing extension portion extends from the cover portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S6, light can be incident on the frame portion from the coupling point, so that the effect of the light emission effect of the frame portion can be improved, and the opposing extension portion can be provided. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guiding means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to produce an effect of shining the opposite side of the emission direction.

In the gaming machine S7, the facing extension portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, and is coupled to the frame portion at one end portion in the longitudinal direction, and from the frame portion at the other end portion. A gaming machine S8 that is separated.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the opposing extension portion,
Since it is possible to configure an end portion capable of entering light into the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion where the incidence is restricted, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the light emission effect using the frame portion.

In any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is disposed at a projection position of the opposing extension portion and the separation extension portion, and an inclination angle with respect to the light irradiation direction of the tip shape of the separation extension portion is set. The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the smaller, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the facing extension part and the separation extension part.

According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means can be obtained even when the tip shape of the separation extending portion is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate. It is possible to perform a light emission effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separation extending portion can be made to emit light to the same extent.

<Technology of the top light emitting means. Points that change the way the light is emitted by the distance from the light emitting means>
A first light receiving unit configured to receive light emitted from the light emitting unit in a first mode; and a light receiving unit configured to be capable of receiving light, and a light receiving unit configured to receive light. A gaming machine T1 comprising: second light receiving means for receiving light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first aspect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is incident from the edge of the planar member,
There is a gaming machine configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (for example, JP-A-2015 2015).
-1599875). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect.

More specifically, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the light emission effect is performed with the LED board formed from a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, so it is useful for reducing the cost. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the production effect tends to be reduced due to a difference in light emission mode (brightness, darkness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between a position close to the LED and a position far from the LED. In order to eliminate this, the light emission mode is weak. The number of LEDs that tend to be (darker) may be increased, but in that case, the number of LED elements necessary for production increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, leading to a result of hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it is inevitable to select whether to improve the production effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive light from the light emitting means in different manners, so that the effect is reduced even if the distance relative to the light emitting means is different (change) Can be suppressed. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light-receiving means. For example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, or a member that emits light in a surface that is nearly uniform, such as rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin of milky white material or the like. It may be a white member that is used, a member that allows light to pass through a gap, similar to screen doors and shoji screens, a display that is projected on the member itself, similar to transmissive liquid crystal, and others The member of the aspect may be sufficient.

In the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured so that the way it emits light changes step by step in accordance with the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is disposed is formed from a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape that forms a curved surface. In addition,
An effect of emitting light uniformly (uniformly) on the curved surface can be executed.

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes a housing unit that houses the light emitting unit and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting unit is disposed, and the housing unit is disposed to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that it comprises partition means for partitioning a region to be divided, and the light receiving means is configured to change the way the light is emitted for each region partitioned by the partition means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the partitioning means is arranged at the boundary where the way of light receiving means changes, so that the way of light receiving means changes rapidly. This can reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player. Thereby, even when the number of light emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of producing a light emission effect using the light emitting substrates.

In the gaming machine T3, the gaming machine T4 is aligned by the partition means supporting the light emitting board in a direction opposite to a biasing force applied to the light emitting board.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment of the light emitting board and the partitioning means, and the light emitting board during use. And the partition means can be prevented from being displaced.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means includes a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is inserted through the through hole. A gaming machine T5 comprising a portion.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting part and the light receiving means can be reduced without being affected by the size of the partition means, and the light incident on the insertion part can be reduced. It becomes easy to totally reflect, and it can prevent that the intensity | strength of the light radiate | emitted from a light emission means falls.

In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through hole that is formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting unit disposed on the light emitting substrate, and does not accept the insertion unit. ,
The gaming machine T6 is formed in such a manner that the opening is enlarged as the distance from the light emitting substrate increases, and the light receiving means is in contact with the surface from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion part is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting light emitted from the light emitting part at a wide angle, and in addition, a light receiving means The leakage of light can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is formed such that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape is larger on the side farther from the light emitting means than on the side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player can see the light through the light receiving means is made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can do.

In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and a drawing boundary surface portion intersecting with the light conducting portion, the drawing boundary surface of the light conducting portion, A gaming machine T8 characterized in that the front-rear direction surface portion in the extending direction is disposed at a position shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in a form in which the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, it is a case where the punching boundary surface portion is formed. However, the thickness of the photoconductive portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, total reflection can be easily maintained over the extending direction of the photoconductive portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including a base end portion of the insertion portion. Characteristic gaming machine T9.

According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily viewed as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from a point light source). Therefore, the feeling like a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs.

<Points composed of two directions where the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction, and the first And a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to the direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, JP-A-2016-41185). . However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the shape of the structure is defined in the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is low.

For example, when a fastening screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted through the fixing means, a light emitting member such as an LED cannot be disposed at a position that interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the region where the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than the light emitting substrate by the amount of the fixing means. The size of the light emitting substrate is limited.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, since the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction inclined with respect to each other, all the fixing means are along the front-rear direction. Compared to the case of being inserted, it is possible to ensure a wide production area on the side to be visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means includes a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction on an outer surface. Game machine U2
.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, so that even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is achieved. Force can be generated, and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the gaming machine U3 is characterized by comprising suppression means for suppressing a reduction in fixing force at at least one of the fixing points of the fixing means.

Here, if the first means and the second means are formed of a resin molded product and the removal direction of the resin mold for production is one direction, the first direction or the second direction inclined with respect to each other, and the removal direction Since it will incline, there exists a possibility that fixing force may become weak by the 1st or 2nd fixing means corresponding to the inclining side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the fixing force by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is a common part. can do.

In addition, the structure of the said suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening prevention means that prevents the loosening of the fixing from occurring, or a loosening restriction means that restricts further loosening when the loosening of the fixing occurs.

In the gaming machine U3, the suppressing means includes a notifying means capable of notifying the fixing failure of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U3, the fixing means is informed by the notifying means, so that early detection of the looseness of the fastening screw can be achieved.

In addition, the structure of an alerting | reporting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for notifying electrically such as a detection means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance.
As structural means, for example, transmission changing means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine, light effect changing means for blocking the light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen in the appearance, Examples thereof include vibration notifying means for notifying the player by making contact with the vibration location of the vibration device and generating abnormal noise or strengthening vibration.

In any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4, a third means is provided between the first means and the second means, and the third means includes a first surface and a second surface. A gaming machine U5, which is disposed between.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means have a plurality of directions in which a resistance force can be generated as a component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means. Therefore, the third means can be easily held safely.

The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured such that the player can visually recognize the first means side while the player does not visually recognize the second means side. In this case, the side on which the gap between the first surface and the second surface is widened is the first means side, and the narrowing side is the second means side. The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 includes fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means across the first surface, and the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. Game machine U
6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in the front view can be made to interfere with each other, so the third means and the fourth means A large area can be secured.

In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged in a set with a predetermined interval therebetween.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs with a predetermined interval therebetween. It is possible to avoid the deformation along the generation direction of the fixing force from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid the loosening of the fixing means.

<Supporting the rigidity reduction of the game board by the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a gaming machine comprising a gaming board and opposing means whose edge is opposed to the gaming board, the opposing means is provided with a proximity portion arranged in proximity to the gaming board at the left and right edges. The gaming machine ZA1 is characterized in that the formation of the proximity portion is asymmetrical.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a gaming board that constitutes a gaming area and a back case on which a movable unit or the like is disposed (see, for example, JP-A-2006-77627). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the space for the movable unit or the like can be sufficiently secured because the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case. There was a problem that it became difficult.

Especially in a right-handed machine that plays right-handed in a probabilistic state (high probability state) or jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight often concentrates on the right side of the game area. It has been required to secure the internal space of the back case on the back side of the flow path (the flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZA1, the formation of the proximity portion is asymmetrical,
Since the arrangement of the left and right edges of the opposing means relative to the game board can be asymmetrical, the internal area of either the left or right opposing means is secured instead of sacrificing the internal area of either the left or right opposing means. Can be made easier. As a result, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the opposing means with respect to the game board can be improved, the arrangement space of the movable unit and the like can be sufficiently secured, and the degree of freedom of effects that the player can visually recognize through the game board is improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the edge of the game board (for example, the right-handed channel) can be illuminated with the light emitting means of the moving agent or illuminated with the light emitted from the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, the aspect of formation of the proximity portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged away from the game board, or a combination thereof.

In addition, the formation aspect of a proximity part is not limited at all. For example, you may make it ensure the area | region which does not form the connection part (contact part) used for connection with a game board in a wide range,
You may make it arrange | position a connection part (contact part), after suppressing the area which a connection part (contact part) occupies.

Further, the left-right asymmetric aspect is not limited at all. For example, the area in which the proximity portion is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction of formation of the proximity portion may be asymmetrical, or the functional portion disposed in the proximity portion (the female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed) The formation position, the formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or other directions) or the number of formations may be asymmetrical.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes a placement portion in which the proximity portion is formed at an end portion on the game board side and is opposed to each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity portion has a left-right formation direction with respect to the placement portion. A gaming machine ZA2 that is configured asymmetrically.

According to the gaming machine ZA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZA1, the area between the placement portions can be configured to be asymmetrical with respect to the gaming board. In addition, the aspect by which a formation direction is left-right asymmetric is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be a direction opposite to the left-right symmetric direction (the same direction for both left and right), or may be a forming direction that intersects right and left (for example, a perpendicular direction).

In addition, examples of the forming direction include an extending direction in which the plate-like portion is extended (a direction in which the plate-like portion is extended), a concave direction in which the concave portion is provided as a notch (a direction in which the material is cut), and the like.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface that is a surface that faces the gaming board and a facing side that is a side that faces the gaming board, and is compared with a portion of the gaming board on the left side. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that a portion of the gaming board with respect to the right side portion has a higher ratio of the facing side than the facing surface.

According to the gaming machine ZA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the right and left width occupied by the proximity portion can be made narrower on the right side of the gaming board than on the left side of the gaming board.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the gaming machine ZA4 is characterized by comprising suppression means for suppressing displacement of the gaming board or facing means in the facing direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. In addition, the arrangement | positioning of a suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be disposed at a position away from the game board (including a position in contact with the facing means), or may be disposed at a position away from the facing means (including a position in contact with the game board). However, it may be disposed at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position where it abuts at least one of the game board or the facing means).

In the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is disposed on the gaming board side.

According to the gaming machine ZA5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength of the gaming unit as a whole (ensure rigidity) without providing a special member for the opposing means.

In the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, the suppression means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps with the outermost surface of the opposing means in a front view.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming board, while ensuring a space for the right-handed flow path in the gaming area, It is possible to maintain the strength of the gaming unit as a whole (ensure rigidity).

In any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means includes a non-contact portion that is non-contact with the game board at an edge of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction on the game board side. Characteristic gaming machine ZA7.

According to the gaming machine ZA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the gaming board and the non-contact portion is used as an arrangement location of the driving device for the variable prize opening, or the driving device It can be used effectively by using a wiring path connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or a place where the light emitting device is arranged.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the gaming board is formed of a resin material,
The opposing means includes presentation means arranged between the game board, and a front end of the presentation means is configured to be arranged in front of the front end of the opposing means. ZA8
.

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the arrangement space for the rendering means can be expanded to the front side.

<Various light emission modes for movable accessories>
A light emitting means for irradiating light to a predetermined light emitting area; and a displacement means configured such that a first position at least partially overlapping with the light emitting area in a predetermined direction is included in at least a part of the displacement section;
The gaming machine ZB1 is characterized in that the light emitting area includes a possible area configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that a light emitting unit and a displacement unit overlap each other when viewed from the front (see, for example, JP-A-2006-159178). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the light emitting means and the displacement means are only visually recognized separately, and the effect of using the overlapping is insufficient. That is, the light emitting means is hidden behind the displacement means by disposing the displacement means on the front side of the light emitting means,
There was a problem that the production effect was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visible in a different light emitting aspect in relation to the aspect of the displacing means, the production aspect can be diversified.

In addition, as an aspect of a displacement means, the arrangement | positioning aspect of a displacement means, the displacement aspect of a displacement means, the direction (orientation) direction of a displacement means, the light emission aspect of the light emission means arrange | positioned at a displacement means, etc., for example. Illustrated. Examples of the arrangement of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, and a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means. As a displacement mode of the displacement means,
Examples include a case where the displacement unit is displaced toward the light emitting unit, and a case where the displacement unit is displaced away from the light emitting unit. The direction (orientation) of the displacement means is when the surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means, when the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means, or when the surface between them faces the light emitting means. Illustrated.

As a light emitting mode of the light emitting unit, a mode in which a light emitting unit that emits light toward the displacement unit side is turned on, blinked, or turned off, a mode in which a light emitting unit that emits light toward the side away from the displacement unit is turned on, blinked, or turned off, etc. Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible area includes a first state in which the displacement means is disposed at the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is disposed at a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine ZB2 can be configured to have a different light emission mode viewed from the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be varied by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player while the light emission mode of the displacement means alone remains the same. Can be changed suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting unit includes a substrate on which a light emitting unit is disposed, and a refracting unit disposed to refract light emitted from the light emitting unit, and the substrate includes the predetermined unit. A gaming machine ZB3, which is disposed outside the possible region in a direction view, and wherein the refracting means includes a first refracting portion that overlaps the possible region in the predetermined direction view.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the aspect of the light visually recognized through the first refracting part is a combination of light emitted from the light emitting part and color or brightness based on the displacement means Can appear.

Further, by narrowing the formation range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region where another component member, for example, a driving device that generates a driving force of the displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced are secured.

In gaming machine ZB3, gaming machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction than at other positions.

According to the gaming machine ZB4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at a position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at a position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means while suppressing the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacement means jointly.

In addition, the magnitude | size aspect of a displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the comparison may be made with positive and negative in opposite directions, or the displacement may be compared in a predetermined direction (component), A comparison may be made including the number of members arranged in the displacement means and displaced.

In any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacing means includes: a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner that is visible from the predetermined direction; and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZB5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the position of the displacement means in the displacement section is set to the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the possible area. Can be changed.

In any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is arranged on the center side of a window portion that is opened so that the liquid crystal display area can be visually recognized.

According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emission mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area side.

In addition, the arrangement | positioning aspect of a possible area | region is not limited at all, A various aspect is illustrated.
For example, it is possible to have a mode (including the case where there is one possible area) scattered around the window,
A circle (arc) shape surrounding the window may be used.

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, comprising a substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed,
The gaming machine ZB7 is characterized in that the board has no fastening means for fastening at the end on the possible area side.

According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure the arrangement space of the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and that the shadow of the fastening means occurs in the possible area. It can be avoided.

In the gaming machine ZB7, the gaming machine ZB8 is provided with covering means that covers the space between the possible area and the substrate in the predetermined direction view.

According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB7, the boundary position between the possible area and the substrate is hidden by the covering means, so that the visibility of light near the edge of the substrate deteriorates. Even if it exists, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

The gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 includes a substrate holding unit that holds the substrate, and the substrate holding unit includes a gap forming portion that forms a gap to facilitate assembly of the substrate.
The gaming machine ZB9 is characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the substrate by the gap forming part can be achieved, and problems such as light leaking from the gap forming part can be avoided. . Further, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with another member and used for positioning of the other member.

In any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board includes a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, a load is applied to the wiring connected to the connector portion, thereby generating a moment starting from the end of the possible area side. Therefore, even in a situation where the substrate cannot be taken out directly, the substrate can be taken out easily.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, drive means for generating a drive force for displacing the displacement means, and drive force generated by the drive means to be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state In the gaming machine including the transmission means, the transmission means includes a transmission portion that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted portion of the displacement means, and in the driving state of the driving means, the transmission portion is the transmitted portion. The gaming machine ZC1 is configured to be capable of suppressing displacement of the displacement means when it is not in contact with a portion.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, JP, 2010-234152, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above,
Since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the cylindrical portion, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform other effects using the column portion while maintaining the posture of the displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission part is not in contact, the transmission part can be used for other effects in a state in which the attitude of the displacement means is maintained. Can be used.

In addition, the aspect of a transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement unit and the driving unit may be used, or a mode exemplified by a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members influence each other may be used.

In addition, the aspect which can suppress a displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by an elastic force based on gravity or a spring member, or may be locked (engaged) by a claw-like member, or restrained by contacting a member having a function as a stopper. It may be an embodiment. Further, examples of possible suppression include an aspect of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, an aspect of preventing (restricting) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a formation portion that is formed along a movement locus of the transmission portion, and the formation portion is not in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the displacement means. A gaming machine ZC2 configured to be able to contact the displacement means in a contact state.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZC1, since the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means with respect to external force is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the formation portion extends from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance between the displacement means is longer than the distance between the transmission portion and the displacement means. A gaming machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as described above.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC2, a portion where a load is generated when driving force is transmitted and a portion where a load is generated when displacement is suppressed are partially provided in the opposing direction of the displacement means and the transmission means. Can be shifted.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side function part formed on one side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part, and the other side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part. The one-side function unit is configured in the same plane as the movement locus of the formation unit, and the other-side function unit is located outside the movement locus of the formation unit. A gaming machine ZC4 that is configured.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZC3, the moving direction in which movement is suppressed by the forming unit can be set to one side direction.

In any one of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means includes the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5, characterized in that the mode of transmission to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

Note that the transmission mode switching method is not limited in any way. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means or the second displacement means, the driving force transmission to the other may be cut off, or transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. The aspect which changes the ratio of the driving force to be performed may be sufficient.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a plurality of displacement means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

In the gaming machine ZC5, the first displacement means is disposed on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is disposed on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of setting the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the combination of the displacement aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing at which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced in synchronism, or the transmission force or the cutoff of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means is reversed and synchronized. Thus, it may not be displaced.

Further, in the case of including the timing of displacement in synchronism, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be made to visually recognize each other in the common area. Even if the effect area where the means is displaced is narrow, an effective effect can be executed.

In addition, the aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. For example,
A plurality of displacement means stacked in the front and back may be extended to a common area at different timings, and the initial arrangement is configured to pass through a common range during movement of the plurality of movable members while being stacked in the front and rear. May be.

<Prevents displacement of the stop position by catching up and contacting the load generating part>
A gaming machine comprising: a first displacement means configured to be displaceable; and a second displacement means configured to be capable of displacing the first displacement means by displacing in a predetermined direction.
A load generating unit that applies a load in a direction along the predetermined direction to displace the first displacing unit; the first displacing unit includes a loaded unit that receives a load from the load generating unit; The portion is configured to be separated from the loaded portion during the displacement along the predetermined direction and to contact a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacing means. ZD1
.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, JP, 2010-234152, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above,
When the cylindrical portion is excessively moved due to a drive transmission defect, there is a problem in that the position of the displacement member is displaced from the moving end, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating portion is separated from the loaded portion during the displacement and is brought into contact with a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacing means. Even so, it is possible to avoid disposing the first displacement means at an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating unit applies a load directed from the other side of the predetermined direction to the one side in a state where the first displacement means is disposed at one end of the displaceable section. A gaming machine ZD2 that is configured to be assignable to the game machine.

According to the gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generating part is directed to the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since the load in the direction from the other side to the one side is given, the first displacement means can be pressed against the end portion on the one side in the predetermined direction by the load.

The gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a driving unit configured to be able to drive the second displacement unit, and the load generating unit is located on the other side in the predetermined direction with respect to the loaded unit.
A gaming machine ZD3, which abuts against the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating portion and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if the timing accuracy is low, the end positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily made constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from the end positions while abruptly stopping the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

Moreover, the site | part which takes a countermeasure against the rare event that the 2nd displacement means moves excessively,
By providing it at a location different from the loaded portion that receives the load by the transmission of the driving force every time, even if the loaded portion is deformed, the fail-safe function can be exhibited without problems.

In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, the gaming machine ZD4 is provided with a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacing means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZD4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, the second displacement means is changed to the second displacement means while the first displacement means is restricted at one end in the predetermined direction by the restriction means. It can be displaced independently with respect to one displacement means.

In addition, the aspect of a control means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-like member that enters and exits in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement means, may be regulated by the biasing force of gravity or an elastic member, or part of the second displacement means It may be constituted by.

In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the first displacement means includes detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is disposed at one end portion in the predetermined direction.
A gaming machine ZD5, wherein the detecting means includes a detected portion whose position is detected, and the load generating portion abuts on the detected portion.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit a portion that is damaged by a load at the time of contact to the detected portion.

In addition, by linking the life that can be calculated from the number of times of displacement (the number of times of driving) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine the second detection failure based on the detection piece being damaged. The replacement time (maintenance time) of the displacement means can be grasped.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation unit to the predetermined unit intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation unit to the loaded unit. A gaming machine ZD6 characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first
A plurality of operating directions of the displacement means can be facilitated.

In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are disposed at a predetermined interval in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, when the loaded part and the predetermined part are viewed from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction,
It is possible to narrow an area necessary for the arrangement of the loaded part and the predetermined part.

<Technical idea to hold using the flexibility of the tracking means>
In a gaming machine comprising a displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined area and a follow-up means for following the displacement of the displacement means, preventing the predetermined portion of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side A gaming machine ZE1 comprising means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured such that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, JP 2012-157474 A).
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, setting the length of the wiring in comparison with the displacing means has an advantage that the bending of the wiring is difficult to occur when the displacing means is displaced, but the wiring is caught in the displacing means. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form a temporary fixing portion for temporarily fixing the wiring so that the wiring does not relatively displace at each position of the displacement means, and in addition, the displacement means is arranged at a predetermined position while holding the wiring in the temporary fixing portion. However, it usually takes time to assemble because of the assembly.
As a result, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design and the assembly efficiency may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, since the follow-up means exemplified by the wiring or the like is prevented from being displaced toward the predetermined area by the prevention means, the follow-up means is rubbed and damaged by the displacement means. Can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions on the displacement means, and to improve the degree of freedom in design of the displacement means and the assembly efficiency.

In the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in the distance from the displacement means occurs with the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the follow-up means in a manner that can be displaced in a direction in which the distance between the prevention means and the displacement means changes with the displacement of the displacement means. Compared with the case where the position of the follower is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band, the load applied to the follower can be reduced.

In addition, the aspect of a prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar part around which the tracking means can be wound, or a claw-shaped part capable of sandwiching the tracking means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used when fastening and fixing members, or used for alignment when the members are assembled. It may be formed as a positioning part.

Moreover, the aspect of a follow-up means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or a belt-like member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is made visible to the player. It may be a belt-like effect member that assists the effect, or may be an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacing means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, it is possible to supply electricity to the displacement means satisfactorily.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting a direction in which the displacement unit is displaced, and the follow-up unit is configured to surround the prevention unit. A gaming machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the follow-up means protrudes greatly on one side. That is, since the range in which the tracking unit can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the prevention unit, the area where it is necessary to avoid the interference between the tracking unit and other members can be limited to the range around the prevention unit. .

In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need for configuring a clearance portion for allowing the follow-up means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be disposed in a space-saving manner.

Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4 includes shielding means for shielding at least part of the displacement means, and the follow-up means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. A gaming machine ZE5.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion between the follow-up means and the displacement means from being visually recognized by the player by the shielding means. In addition, inward here means the inner side direction when the edge part in front view is made into the external shape.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is disposed at an outer edge portion of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of overhang from the outer shape (outer edge) of the shielding means of the displacement means is ensured while keeping the following means from entering the player's field of view. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means around the first axis, and is arranged on a straight line that passes through the first axis. A gaming machine ZE7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the follow-up means can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means includes a guide portion that guides the follow-up means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent rubbing against the displacement means and to improve the durability of the follow-up means.

In the gaming machine ZE8, the guide portion is extended in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the tracking means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the gap through which the tracking means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved as compared with the case where the gap is large.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the follow-up means is formed in a string shape or a belt shape, one end portion is connected to the displacement means, the other end portion is connected to the gaming machine, and toward both ends. The gaming machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, it is possible to apply a load in the direction of pulling from one side of the predetermined region at both ends of the follow-up means. Thereby, the whole follow-up means can be balanced with the load applied from the guide section.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the follow-up means is configured to be wound around the prevention means in a direction in which the displacement means is loosened by displacing from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the looseness (slack) of the follow-up means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive load on the follow-up means.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, the game machine ZE1 to ZE11 include an arrangement unit in which the follow-up unit is arranged between the displacement unit, and an alignment unit that aligns the arrangement unit. A gaming machine Z that is arranged outside the movement track of the follow-up means
E12.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since the alignment unit can avoid eroding the displacement space of the follower, the load applied to the follower with the displacement of the displacer can be minimized.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the follow-up means is configured to be wound around the prevention means, and the follow-up means has a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a displacement larger than the first displacement portion. And a second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), wherein the first displacement portion is disposed between the second displacement portion and the placement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arrangement means of the follow-up means. For this reason, since it is possible to limit the places where reinforcement is required, durability can be improved at low cost.

In addition, the aspect of the magnitude comparison of the displacement of a 1st displacement part and a 2nd displacement part is not limited at all. For example, a linear distance between positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, the comparison may be limited to a displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined surface).

In the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the prevention means includes a protruding portion protruding from the arrangement means, and the follow-up means is wound around the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the positioning means from above while supporting the tracking means hanging down by its own weight by the positioning means. In addition, the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technology that changes displacement (transmission) by forward / reverse rotation>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving means; a displacing means configured to be displaceable by a driving force of the driving means; and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacing means. The driving means includes a first driving mode for generating a driving force in a first direction, and the first driving mode.
The displacement means is configured to be operable in a second driving mode that generates a driving force in a second direction different from the direction, and the displacement means is a first displacement mode driven in the first driving mode and in the second driving mode. The gaming machine ZF1 is configured to be displaceable with the second displacement mode to be driven.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with first displacement means and second displacement means that are displaced by a driving force of a common driving device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the driving direction of the driving device in the forward and reverse directions. There is a gaming machine configured as described above (for example, see JP2013-146413A)
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first is determined by the length of driving the driving device in the forward direction.
Even if the displacement modes of the displacement means and the second displacement means are changed, and the drive direction of the drive device is switched between forward and reverse, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced. For this reason, there is a problem that the degree of improvement in the rendering effect due to the adoption of a device that can be driven in the forward and reverse directions is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZF1, since the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated, a driving device capable of setting a plurality of driving force generation directions is provided. The used effect can be sufficiently improved.

The gaming machine ZF1 includes light emitting means for emitting light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in a manner of passing through an optical axis of light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine ZF2.

According to the gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so the position where the displacement means is illuminated Can produce a gorgeous production that changes over time.

The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes a displacement suppression unit that suppresses displacement of at least a part of the transmission unit, and the transmission unit includes at least one of the first driving mode and the second driving mode. A gaming machine ZF3 comprising a suppression area where transmission of driving force is suppressed, and wherein the displacement suppression means is configured to be able to suppress a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppression means displaces in an unintended displacement mode by the transmission means being unintentionally displaced when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

In addition, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained higher than when the displacement means is stopped by bringing the displacement means into direct contact with another member. Therefore, the displacement means having an appropriate displacement mode can be configured to be easily seen by the player.

In addition, the aspect of a displacement suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engagement device that generates a viscous resistance typified by a damper device, a resistance device that generates a resistance force due to its own weight, or a case where the resistance force due to its own weight tends to be insufficient (for example, displacement of the displacement means) In the case where the direction is along the horizontal direction), since the idling operation cannot be suppressed by the force of gravity, for example, a device whose resistance is variable according to the displacement mode such as a torque limiter may be used.

The gaming machine ZF3 includes detection means configured to be able to detect displacement of the displacement suppression means, and the displacement suppression means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression area is lower than a predetermined speed. The resistance is configured to be suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission unit in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection unit is a detected portion of the displacement suppression unit at a position where the displacement suppression unit generates resistance. The game machine ZF4 is arranged so as to be detectable.

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF3, whether the detection means is functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppression means and suppressing displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppression means It can be used for both detection and detection.

In any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacing means includes a first displacing means that rotates and rotates around a first axis, and a second that rotates and displaces the outside of the first displacing means about the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising a displacement means, wherein the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the first
In the driving mode or the second driving mode, the displacement of the second displacing means is configured to be restrained, and in this restrained state, the second displacing means is disposed between the player and the first displacing means and the field of view. Can be configured in two ways: a case where the second displacement means is arranged outside between the player and the first displacement means and the view is not obstructed. In addition, the second displacement means Since the displacement is possible even in the drive mode that does not suppress the displacement, the effect by the displacement means can be configured in three different displacement modes.

In any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the transmission means includes light transmitting means formed of a light transmitting material on the side of the connecting position with the displacement means.
.

According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacement means by the light transmission means, and the light emission effect by conducting the light toward the displacement means It is possible to achieve an effect that makes it possible.

In any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes: a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced about a first axis; and a transmission means that is rotationally displaced about the first axis, and the transmission means of the first displacement means. Second displacement means coupled to the transmission means outside the coupling position, and the second displacement means overlaps the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second
The displacement means can be prevented from coming off by the first displacement means. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning of the separate retaining member can be made unnecessary.

<Vibration device next to device (P9 policy 1)>
A first operating means configured to be operable by the player, a second operating means configured to be operated by the player at a position different from the first operating means, and the first operating means The second
A gaming machine ZG1 comprising: load generating means disposed on the operating means side and configured to be able to generate loads directed to the first operating means and the second operating means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a plurality of operation devices and a drive device for performing an effect of driving these operation devices (for example, JP-A-2016-159).
178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the vibration device is arranged in each operation device, the space necessary for arranging each operation device increases, and the number of operation devices that can be arranged is easily limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost increases due to an increase in the number of driving devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is the first operating means and the second operating means (that is, , A plurality of operating means) can be used in combination. Thereby, the space required for arrangement | positioning of a 1st operation means and a 2nd operation means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of operation means which can be arrange | positioned can be raised. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be reduced.

In addition, the aspect of a load generation means is not limited at all. For example, a means configured to be capable of vibration (high-speed repetitive displacement), a means for generating a load at a predetermined cycle such as a pump, or a means configured by an arm member whose posture is changed by the displacement of a cam may be used. good. Moreover, the aspect of load is not limited at all. For example, a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state or a load (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) that is transmitted in a non-contact state may be used.

In the gaming machine ZG1, the gaming machine ZG2 is characterized in that the load generating means is disposed between the first operating means and the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG1, a load can be transmitted to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operation means is operated to launch a game ball toward the game area, and the load generation means covers the first operation means at least partially from a predetermined direction. A gaming machine ZG3, wherein the gaming machine ZG3 is disposed in a setting means.

According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is disposed at a position where the finger of the player who operates the first operating means is sandwiched between the first operating means. Thus, the load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's fingers.

For example, the covering means is arranged at a position where the player's finger can easily pass in the process of moving the player's finger by operating the finger closer to the first operation means and releasing the finger from the first operation means after the operation is completed. By disposing the covering means so as to cover from the direction in which the fingers easily interfere with each other, the load of the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player during the movement of the fingers.

Further, for example, by placing the covering means at a position where the finger contacts with high probability when the player operates the first operating means, the load of the load generating means is increased during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that can be easily transmitted to the player.

This idea is different from the idea that the load generating means is provided in the first operating means.
That is, since the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is disposed at a position different from that of the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means configured to be interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means so as to be able to transmit the load to the first operating means and the second operating means. And the interposition means is configured such that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operating means.
4.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG3, load transmission can be concentrated on the first operating means side.

In the gaming machine ZG4, the intervening means is configured to be able to change the strength of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, when the load generating means is driven, the first operating means and the second operating means are controlled by the load applied to the pachinko machine by the player, etc.
It is possible to execute an effect that strongly operates (vibrates) the operating means and the second operating means.

Any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5 includes a holding means for holding the load generating means in a displaceable manner, and the holding means includes a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such that the displaced member that is displaced by the vibration of the load generating means collides with the player unintentionally.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction by guiding it in the desired direction, so the load generation employed to realize the desired action (vibration) effect The degree of freedom of the means can be improved.

In the gaming machine ZG6, the holding means is configured to allow the displacement of the load generating means in an intersecting direction that intersects the direction guided by the guide portion.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the crossing direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and at the time of switching, the driving state (stable state) The load generating means can be displaced in different ways. Thereby, the effect by the load generating means can be improved.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect which accept | permits a displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guide direction by the second holding means may be configured to intersect the guide direction of the guide portion, or the load generating means may be interposed between the holding means. It may be configured such that a flexible member is interposed, and the displacement may be caused by deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibrating means for covering means (P9 policy 2)>
Frame means configured to have a frame shape, covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and vibration means arranged on the covering means and configured to be vibrated, Means
A gaming machine ZH1 comprising a permissible portion that is allowed to displace, and configured to be able to transmit the vibration of the vibration means through the permissible portion.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a front frame and vibration means disposed on the front side of the front frame (see, for example, JP-A-2015-159837). But,
In the conventional gaming machine described above, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to a level that does not transmit the vibration of the predetermined strength or more to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration production. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, the vibration means is disposed in the covering means, and the displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that vibration can be transmitted to the player side through the covering means. On the other hand, transmission of vibration to the frame means side can be suppressed by absorbing vibration by displacement of the covering means.
As a result, it is possible to increase the degree allowed as the vibration intensity of the vibration means.

In addition, the aspect of a permission part is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode based on the assumption of displacement of slides, phosphorus, gears, etc., and the displacement may be caused by the movement of slides, links, gears, etc., or from the material or structure compared to other parts It may be configured flexibly and may be displaced by being overloaded.

In the gaming machine ZH1, the covering means is configured such that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the allowing portion is maintained in the horizontal direction, while the player places his / her hand on the covering means in the direction of gravity. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being displaced excessively and disturbing the player's posture. That is, it is possible to stabilize the structure as a product by keeping the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction small.

In the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the covering means is configured in a bag shape with the frame means side open.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in a bag shape that is open, the edge of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other.
It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means that contact and transmit vibration. Thereby, since vibration transmission to the frame means side can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid transmission of vibration to the main board, the ball passage, and the main electrical configuration disposed on the frame means side.

In any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibration means includes an arrangement portion disposed on the frame means side, and the frame means includes a support portion that supports the arrangement portion. Department
A gaming machine ZH4 characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than that of the support portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibrating means is limited while maintaining the suppression of vibration transmission to the frame means side. As compared with the case where it is configured to be hard, it is possible to cause biting by utilizing the low deformation resistance, and it is possible to ensure a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibrating means toward the frame means. As a result, the covering means on which the vibration means is disposed can be easily displaced greatly.

In any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering portion and a second covering portion having a lower deformation resistance than the first covering portion, and the vibration means includes The gaming machine ZH5 is provided with a contact portion that is connected to the first cover portion and the second cover portion and can locally contact the first cover portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the first covering portion having a high deformation resistance and the contact portion are locally brought into contact with each other, so that the contact position Can be used as a fixed point (reference point) of vibration. That is, the absolute value of the displacement of the vibration means and the second covering portion with respect to the contact position can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, a ball launching operation unit operated to launch a game ball toward a game area is provided, and the covering unit is at least between the ball launching operation unit A gaming machine ZH6 that is provided with a predetermined member.

According to the gaming machine ZH6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, vibration transmission to the ball launching operation means can be suppressed.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by the displacement of the object>
In a gaming machine including a light emitting unit and an irradiated unit irradiated with light from the light emitting unit, changing the appearance of the irradiated unit while leaving an outer shape of the irradiated unit in a predetermined direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZI1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine equipped with a light-emitting means that is mounted on a movable accessory and configured to be capable of performing a light-emitting effect (see, for example, JP-A-2015-208360).
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is no member displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the aspect of the light emission effect. However, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the method for realizing the light emission effect because the data capacity is pressed for the control or the substrate is enlarged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacing means is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacing of the displacing means may interfere with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By comprising so that it can do, the aspect of a light emission effect can be switched by the displacement of a displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the light emission effect without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to make the substrate smaller by making the data for control unnecessary or the circuit for control unnecessary. it can. Thereby, it is possible to improve the method for realizing the light emission effect.

In addition, the aspect of a displacement is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, it may be a rotation, a linear slide, or a displacement along a predetermined curve. In the case where the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the direction of the slide means coincides with the predetermined direction, compared to the case where the slide direction intersects the predetermined direction. The external shape can be easily maintained.

In addition, the aspect of a to-be-irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it is configured to rotate around a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the posture, and even if the posture does not change, the member projects from the inside and is enlarged or reduced The relative projected area may be changed by the displacement.

The mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so as to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated unit, or may slide on a plane and enter the side of the irradiated unit (between the light emitting unit).

Moreover, the aspect in the case of leaving the external shape of a displacement means is not limited at all.
For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as being stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount is made smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. An aspect may be sufficient.

Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a light emission means may face the to-be-irradiated means side at any timing of the displacement.

The mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the position may be fixed or may be configured to be displaceable. In a displaceable state, the light emitting means may be disposed on the displacement means, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The mode of displacement of the light emitting means may be such that the light axis is directed toward the irradiated means and slides in a manner close to or away from the irradiated means, or around the irradiated means with the optical axis directed to the irradiated means. It may be rotating.

The light emission mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the lighting state may always be maintained, or switching between lighting and extinguishing may be used.

In the gaming machine ZI1, the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means occurs when the irradiated means reflects light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZI1, since the difference between the irradiated means can be recognized immediately after the light emitting means emits light, the attention to the timing of light irradiation can be improved. . In addition, according to this, even if the irradiated means is a displaceable means,
Means that cannot be displaced may be used.

In the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in the appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, attention to the irradiated means can be improved in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2.

In addition, the aspect of the displacement that is the basis of the difference in the appearance of the irradiated unit is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or an irregular displacement. Further, it may be an instantaneous displacement, or may be a slow speed (so slow that the player is difficult to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm / min] or the like.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the irradiated means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to make the portions that are conspicuous by being illuminated by the light reflected through the irradiated means different from each other while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the irradiation means can be configured to reflect the light in the same direction, but at least one of the light amount or the color can be different. .

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, attention to the light emission mode of the irradiated means can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, the non-interference configured to be able to irradiate the irradiated unit with light in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis is non-interfering with the movement locus of the displacement unit arranged around the irradiated unit. A gaming machine ZI6 comprising a shielding light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, it is possible to irradiate the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacing means by irradiating light from the non-shielding light emitting means. Thus, it is possible to avoid the irradiated means being visually recognized darker than necessary.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated means includes a first irradiated means,
A second irradiated means configured to be arranged at a shielding position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded toward the first irradiated means, and the first irradiated means includes the light emitting means. The area when viewed in the optical axis direction is smaller when the second irradiated means is arranged at the shielding position than when the second irradiated means is not arranged at the shielding position. A gaming machine ZI7 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the first
Light can be made difficult to reach the irradiated means. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. The change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when light is emitted from the light emitting means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate light to the irradiated means with a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can cross the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 that is configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs). Can be made.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the irradiation unit includes a driving unit configured to be able to synchronously drive the irradiation unit and a displacement unit arranged around the irradiation unit. And a predetermined first surface is directed to the same side, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position.
.

According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emission mode of the irradiated means (due to the arrangement of the displacing means) while suppressing the visibility of the irradiated means from changing greatly. For example, the switching timing of light and dark) can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

The displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means or the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. Accordingly, the gaming machine ZI10 is configured such that the traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the player side.

According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitting means emits light when the displacement means is disposed at the first position and when disposed at the second position. The difference in the degree of light that travels to the player side can be increased.

<Feature AA group> (Lever UP control)
Operation means capable of being operated at least by the player in a first direction from a predetermined first position, and effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means. In the gaming machine, in the state where the notification means capable of reporting the operation suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated in the first direction, and the release condition is satisfied after being operated in the first direction, A gaming machine AA1 comprising: a specific effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect when the operating means is not located at a specific position.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. And, before the lottery result is notified, the operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and the period until the lottery result is notified There was something to entertain the player. In addition, in the above-described gaming machines, there is one in which the player is operated with the operating means moved from the initial position in order to further enhance the effect (for example, JP2013-090780A). In such a gaming machine, when the player does not operate the operating means even though the operating means is moved from the initial position, the operating means in the movable state is initialized regardless of the player's operation. There is a problem that it is necessary to execute the control to return to the position, and the effect of the production is lowered, and the interest of the game is lowered. An object of the above gaming machine is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, since the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting unit when the operation unit is not positioned at the specific position in the state where the release condition is satisfied, the operation unit is positioned at the specific position. It is possible to provide the player with an effect if there is not. Therefore, even if the operating means is not operated after the operating means is moved, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AA1, it is possible to move the operation means from the specific position to the first position different from the specific position, and the urging means that always urges the operation means toward the specific position. The game machine AA2 is characterized in that the game machine AA2 is located at the specific position by operating in the first direction from the first position.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, the player can move the operating means to a specific position by operating the operating means located at the first position, so that the player can operate the operating means. The act of moving the operating means to a specific position can be executed simultaneously. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation effect can be performed smoothly and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine AA2 has second operation means that can be operated by a player different from the operation means, and the specific effect includes at least a suggestion mode that suggests operating the second operation means. A gaming machine AA3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA2, a specific effect including a suggestion mode that suggests operating the second operating means is executed, so that the second operating means can be easily operated. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can release his hand from the operation means, and the biasing means can easily move the operation means to a specific position, so that the operation means can be easily located at a predetermined position, and the operation effect can be achieved. There is an effect that it can be easily executed.

  Any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3 has a fixing means for fixing the operation means so that it is difficult to operate at the specific position.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the operating means is located at a specific position, the movement of the operating means is restricted by the fixing means, It is possible to suppress the operation means from being operated regardless of the above. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the operation means from being used unnecessarily and causing a failure.

  In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, the game machine has a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, and the specific effect includes a mode for prompting the player to launch the game ball A gaming machine AA5, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, a mode for urging the player to launch a game ball as a specific performance is included, so when a specific performance is executed, The player can be actively prompted to launch a game ball. Thereby, since it is possible to execute an effect that makes it easier for the player to release his / her hand from the operation means, the operation means can be easily moved to a specific position, and thus the operation means can be easily located at a predetermined position. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation effect can be easily performed.

<Characteristics AB group> (Combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
By an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means Display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation effect that changes an effect mode by operating the operation means. An effect execution means, an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that makes it possible to vary the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, Gaming machine AB1, wherein the work director and said identification symbols effect are those having a regulating means for regulating the running in period overlap.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. And, before the lottery result is notified, the operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and the period until the lottery result is notified There was something to entertain the player. (For example, JP2013-090780A). Moreover, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there are some that provide a plurality of conditions for executing an operation effect in order to further enhance the effect. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation effects are executed in duplicate, resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the above gaming machine is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, since it can be controlled by the restricting means that the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are overlapped, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation effects from being executed redundantly. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AB1, the restriction means is configured to set a period for restricting execution of the operation effect mode during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and to execute the identification symbol effect within the period. A gaming machine AB2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a period for restricting the execution of the operation effect mode is set by the regulating means, and the identification is performed within the period. Since the design effect is executed, a plurality of operation effects can be executed smoothly. Therefore, there are effects that a plurality of operation effects can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, in a period in which the operation effect is executed, a mode variable effect is displayed in which the mode of the identification symbol is changed and displayed without the operation means being operated. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, since the mode variable effect is configured to be executable during the period in which the operation effect is executed, it is identified whether the mode variable effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the symbol effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristics AC group> (Power support end control by falling)
A variable that can be varied between a ball entry means in which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state. A member, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit, a determination unit capable of performing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the determination unit Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the display, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and for indicating the specific discrimination result of the display means When the identification information is displayed, the privilege granting means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player, the first probability as the probability of being discriminated from the specific discrimination result, and the second higher than the first probability Probability setting means capable of setting probability, and probability setting means When the second probability is set by the determination means, a determination means capable of executing the determination, and a probability control means for setting the first probability based on the determination result determined as a specific determination result; A setting means capable of setting a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the normal gaming state, and when the special gaming state is set by the setting means, In a gaming machine having an end condition determining unit for determining whether an end condition for setting a gaming state is established, the setting unit can set the special gaming state when the second probability is set The end condition determining means is based on being set from the second probability to the first probability in a state where a predetermined period has elapsed after the special gaming state is set, Gaming machine AC1, wherein the serial is intended to determine the establishment of termination conditions.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. In order to make it possible to set a high probability state that is easy to win as a gaming state and a low probability state that is difficult to win, and to shift the gaming state to a low probability state when a high probability state is set There are those that execute the lottery (so-called falling lottery). Furthermore, in the above-described gaming machines, there is a configuration in which a specific gaming state in which a game success / failure lottery is easily executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to execute can be set. (For example, JP 2010-269007 A). However, in the above gaming machine, there is no relation between the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transition from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the player can understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem that it became difficult and the interest of the game decreased. An object of the above gaming machine is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, since the normal gaming state is set when the first probability is set by the probability control means, the setting status of the probability setting means and the setting status of the setting means can be varied in association with each other. it can. Therefore, the transition state of the game state can be easily understood by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AC1, the determination unit executes the determination when a determination condition for the determination unit to execute the determination is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, since the determination by the determination unit can be executed when the determination condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress excessive determination by the determination unit in a state where the second probability is set. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine AC2, the determination means executes determination before the dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Machine AC3.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AC2, the determination by the determination means is performed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so that the determination is performed based on the determination condition being satisfied. The dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the determination made can be executed based on the determination result of the determination means. Thereby, when it determines with a specific determination result by a determination means, discrimination | determination of the discrimination | determination means performed based on satisfaction of the discrimination | determination conditions used as the determination trigger can be performed with a 1st probability. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the probability control unit determines the first probability before the start of dynamic display of the identification information when the determination unit determines that the specific determination result is obtained. A gaming machine AC4 that is to be set.

  According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, when the determination result of the determination unit is a specific determination result, the probability control unit starts dynamic display of the identification information Before the first probability is set. Therefore, since it can suppress that the dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability is executed after the specific determination result is determined, an appropriate game can be provided to the player. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal gaming state based on being determined as the specific determination result in a state where the special gaming state is set. A gaming machine AC5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the normal gaming state is set by the setting unit even when the determination result of the determination unit is a specific determination result. When the normal gaming state is set by the means, it may be difficult for the player to know whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result or whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. Can provide fun and predictable fun. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature AD group> (Burst interruption effect)
In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect and an effect period determining means for determining an execution period of the effect executed by the effect executing means, the period during which the effect is executed by the effect executing means A specific effect executing unit capable of executing a specific effect by interrupting at least a part of the effect executed by the effect executing unit, and the effect executing unit executing the specific effect when the specific effect is executed. A gaming machine AD1 comprising: setting means capable of changing and setting the effect to be interrupted in accordance with the state of the effect.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. And before the lottery result is informed, there is a thing that makes it possible to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result and entertain the player during the period until the lottery result is notified. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine in which the effect effect of the suggestion effect is further enhanced by executing various effects as the suggestion effect at various timings (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even if one suggestion effect is being executed, another suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect type can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. is there. However, since the gaming machine described above is configured to execute another suggestion effect without being related to the effect status of one suggestion effect being executed, the player can be caused by a sudden change of the suggested effect to be executed. There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced. Furthermore, when the suggestion effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), the predetermined process change mode is terminated halfway by switching the suggestion effect. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is more confused. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestive effects without causing confusion to the player.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, it is possible to change the aspect of the effect interrupted by the specific effect being executed by the setting means, so that the effect is interrupted during the execution and the player is confused. Can be suppressed. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be executed by overlapping a plurality of effects, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine AD1, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a sound effect, and the setting means interrupts the sound effect depending on the state of the effect; A gaming machine AD2, which is configured to set a case where a voice effect is not interrupted.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1, when the production is interrupted, it is configured so that only the voice can be continued and the voice can also be interrupted. It is possible to vary the interruption mode of the effect according to the content of the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of interest of the player with respect to the suspended performance can be varied, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound may be determined based on the effect mode of the specific effect and the effect mode of the interrupted effect, and the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect When the type and the audio type set as the production mode of the effect to be interrupted are the same audio type, the output of the audio is preferably interrupted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the output of the interrupted effect sound, which is confused with the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect and provides an incomprehensible effect.

  Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound in accordance with the production interruption timing. In this case, when the remaining period of the effect to be interrupted is a predetermined period or less (for example, 1 second or less), only the sound can be output to the end even if the effect is interrupted. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to understand that the production has been interrupted.

  In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, when a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, and when the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination on the display means And a privilege granting unit for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the setting unit is configured such that, among the plurality of identification symbols, one identification symbol is dynamically displayed and another identification symbol is displayed. The game machine AD3 is characterized in that the effect to be interrupted is changed and set depending on whether or not the reach display mode displayed in a combination that can be the specific combination is displayed. .

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the effect can be changed depending on whether the effect to be interrupted is before or after the reach display. In other words, the aspect of the effect set by the setting unit can be changed based on the interruption timing of the effect executed by the effect executing unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the interruption of the production.

  In the gaming machine AD3, the setting means interrupts the sound effect when the effect executed by the effect item means is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, and the reach display mode. When the game is interrupted after being displayed, the effect is set so as not to interrupt the effect by the voice.

  According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD3, if the presentation is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, the sound is interrupted, and if the presentation is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, Audio can be prevented from being interrupted. Therefore, even if the presentation is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, the sound can be continuously output. Therefore, the player may be confused that the reach display mode has been abandoned. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

<Features AE group> (Button continuous hitting sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and an effect execution means that changes the effect based on the operation of the operation means, a first operation is performed each time the operation means is operated. A gaming machine AE1 having voice control means capable of alternately outputting a sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. And, before the lottery result is notified, the operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and the period until the lottery result is notified There was something to entertain the player (for example, JP2013-090780A). Further, in the above gaming machines, when a player operates an operation means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly received. In such a gaming machine, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player was able to operate the operation means based on the output operation sound, but until the output of one operation sound was completed When the next operation is executed during the period, that is, when a continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous when the output operation sound is one sound. In the above gaming machine, it is an object to provide a game in which the game is improved by making it easy for a player to hear the output operation sound and outputting operation sounds rich in variations.

  According to the gaming machine AE1, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are alternately output, so that only one type of operation sound is output. There is an effect that operation sounds rich in variations can be output. Also, since different operation sounds are output alternately, even if the operation means is operated at a short interval (interval shorter than the output period of one operation sound), the player has operated the operation means Can be easily discriminated by the operation sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AE1, the voice control means outputs the first operation sound during the first period, and the first operation sound is output next before the first period elapses. In this case, the gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that the first operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the first operation sound is newly started.

  According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AE1, when the next first operation sound is output within the first period in which the first operation sound is output, the first operation sound being output Is stopped, and a new first operation sound is output, so that it is possible to easily notify the player that a new operation has been executed.

  In the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, the voice control means causes the second operation sound to be output during the second period, and the second operation sound is output next before the second period elapses. When the game machine E3 is output, the second operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the second operation sound is newly started.

  According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, when the next second operation sound is output within the second period during which the second operation sound is output, Since the operation sound is stopped and a new second operation sound is output, there is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player that a new operation has been performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a continuous operation effect that changes the aspect of the effect in response to the operation means being operated a plurality of times. A gaming machine AE4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, by causing the continuous operation effect to be executed in response to the operation means being operated a plurality of times in succession, the change state of the effect mode The player can be notified that the operating means has been operated. As a result, it is possible to determine from the operation sound and the effect that the operation to the operation means has been accepted. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

<Feature AF group> (Pending notice)
By an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means Display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation effect that changes an effect mode by operating the operation means. There is an effect execution means, and an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that makes it possible to change the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means. The identification symbol effect execution means executes the identification symbol effect on two or more of the identification symbols when a plurality of identification symbols are displayed on the display means. Machine AF1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays a symbol based on a winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, and notifies a player of a lottery result after the variability display ends. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is configured to be able to hold a plurality of times, and the holding symbols corresponding to the number of the holding memories are displayed, and the displayed holding symbols are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a hold notice effect that can be notified in advance of information related to the lottery that is used (for example, JP 2009-297071 A). In the gaming machine described above, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, by suggesting the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable indicator corresponding to the reserved symbol, before the variable indicator starts, It was possible to raise the expectation of the person. However, when a hold notice effect is generated, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation with respect to the hold symbols that are not subject to the hold notice, and the game motivation is lowered. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine AF1, since it is configured to execute the identification symbol effect for two or more identification symbols as one identification symbol effect, the target range of the identification symbol effect can be expanded, It is possible to reduce the number of identification symbols that are not subject to symbol production. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's willingness to play falls, and there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AF1, the game machine AF1 includes pre-discrimination means that can execute the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discrimination means. A gaming machine AF2 characterized in that the aspect of the identification symbol is varied based on the discrimination result by the previous discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AF1, the mode of the identification symbol can be varied based on the discrimination result of the prior discrimination means, so that the player is interested in the effect of the discrimination symbol effect. Can be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol effect executing means changes the mode of the two or more identification symbols based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established by operating the operation means. A featured game machine AF3.

  According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the aspect of two or more identification symbols can be varied based on the operation to the operating means, so that the effect executed for the player It has the effect of increasing the willingness to participate.

  In any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times. The gaming machine AF4 is characterized by having a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operation means is not valid during the period in which the operation is performed.

  According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times. There is a restriction period during which the operation of the operation means is not determined to be valid during the execution period. Thereby, it is possible to entertain the player at which timing to operate the operation means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AF4, the gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that a specific effect is executed in a period other than the regulation period among the period in which the identification symbol effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AF4, by executing the specific effect, whether or not the current operation is in the regulation period during which the operation of the operation means is not valid is performed during the identification symbol effect. Since the player can easily discriminate, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic AG group> (Successfully falling by winning a small hit)
A variable that can be varied between a ball entry means in which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state. A member, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit, a determination unit capable of performing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the determination unit Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the display, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and for indicating the specific discrimination result of the display means When the identification information is displayed, a privilege granting means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player, a first probability as a discrimination probability to be discriminated from the specific discrimination result, and a first probability higher than the first probability A probability setting means capable of setting two probabilities, a gaming state, And a setting means capable of setting a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the normal gaming state. The probability setting means sets the first probability when the first transition condition is satisfied in a state where the second probability is set, and the setting means sets the specific gaming state. The normal game state is set when the second transition condition is established in a state where the first transition condition is established, and different rendering modes can be set based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established. An amusement machine AG1 characterized by comprising production mode setting means and production execution means capable of producing production based on the production mode set by the production mode setting means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. In order to make it possible to set a high probability state that is easy to win as a gaming state and a low probability state that is difficult to win, and to shift the gaming state to a low probability state when a high probability state is set There are those that execute the lottery (so-called falling lottery). Furthermore, in the above-described gaming machines, there is a configuration in which a specific gaming state in which a game success / failure lottery is easily executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to execute can be set. (For example, JP 2010-269007 A). However, in the above gaming machine, there is no relation between the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transition from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the player can understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem that it became difficult and the interest of the game decreased. An object of the above gaming machine is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine AG1, since the effect is executed in different effect modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, the current gaming situation is predicted based on the effect content to be executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AG1, the determination unit can determine the special determination result different from the specific determination result, and the second transition condition is that the determination result of the determination unit is the special determination result. A gaming machine AG2 that is established based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AG1, the second transition condition is established based on the determination result of the determination means, and therefore the determination by the determination means is a determination result more advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a case where the determination result is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AG2, in the state in which the specific gaming state is set, the gaming machine AG2 has counting means capable of counting the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result, and the second transition condition is the count The gaming machine AG3, wherein the second transition condition is satisfied when the result of the counting by the means becomes a predetermined counting result.

  According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG2, the second transition condition is satisfied when the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number. By determining that the result is a special determination result, it is possible to provide pleasure for predicting the period until the second transition condition is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode setting unit is configured to generate the effect mode based on the discrimination probability set by the probability setting unit and the gaming state set by the setting unit. A gaming machine AG4, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine AG4, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, because the presentation mode is set based on the set discrimination probability and the gaming state, It is possible to provide enjoyment for predicting the current game situation and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AG4, the effect mode setting means includes a first gaming state in which the first probability is set by the probability setting means, and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means, and the probability setting means sets the first gaming state. A gaming machine AG5 characterized in that the same effect mode is set in the second gaming state in which the second probability is set and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine AG5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AG4, the first probability is set, the first gaming state in which the normal gaming state is set, the second probability is set, and the normal gaming state is set. Since the same production mode is set in the second gaming state, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current gaming situation and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AG5, when the second probability is set by the probability setting unit, the gaming machine AG5 has a determination unit capable of executing a determination, and the determination unit is a determination for the determination unit to execute the determination The game machine AC6 is characterized in that the determination is executed when a condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AG5, since the determination by the determination unit can be executed when the determination condition is satisfied, the determination unit excessively performs the state in which the second probability is set. It can suppress that discrimination is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the effect mode setting means suggests the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period has elapsed after the bonus is given by the bonus granting means. A game machine AC7 characterized in that a suggestive presentation mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, after the bonus is granted by the bonus granting means, the suggested effect mode is set when the predetermined period has elapsed, so the first gaming state Alternatively, when the second game state is set, the player can be made aware of the current game state based on the content of the suggestive effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue the game until the predetermined period elapses, and the operation of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AH group> (Composite control development with reserved PUSH and PUSH notice)
By an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means Display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation that can execute an operation effect that changes an effect mode by operating the operation means. An effect execution means, an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that makes it possible to vary the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the operation means being operated in the overlapping period when the product effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in the overlapping period; A gaming machine AH1 characterized by having the following.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. And, before the lottery result is notified, the operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and the period until the lottery result is notified There was something to entertain the player. (For example, JP2013-090780A). Moreover, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there are some that provide a plurality of conditions for executing an operation effect in order to further enhance the effect. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation effects are executed in duplicate, resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the above gaming machine is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine AH1, since the specific effect is executed when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in the overlapping period, even if the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are overlapped, the player It is possible to execute a production that is easy to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AH1, the gaming machine AH1 includes setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed when the operation means is operated during the overlapping period. AH2 characterized in that it includes a suggestion mode that indicates the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed by operating the means.

  According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player the effect that is to be changed when the operation means is operated by the effect specifying effect played by the gaming machine AH. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, in the overlapping period, the number of operations by which the operation effect or the identification symbol effect is varied is set differently based on the operation of the operation means. A gaming machine AH3.

  According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the number of operations that can be varied is different between the case where the operation effect and the variable operation effect are executed independently and the case where the operation effect is executed redundantly. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the specific production can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in a period that overlaps, at least one of them is changed by operating the operation means a plurality of times. A gaming machine AH4 having switching setting means for setting as described above.

  According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in a period overlapping, at least the number of operations corresponding to one of the operation effects Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the specific effect is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be suppressed that the specific effect is finished in a short period of time and the effect difficult to understand for the player is executed.

  In the gaming machine AH4, the specific effect includes one in which the execution period of the operation effect mode after being changed is set longer than normal.

  According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AH4, the execution period of the operation effect mode is set longer than usual during the specific effect, so the specific effect is being executed for the player. Since this can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Feature AI group> (Development of pending notice)
By an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means Display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation effect that changes an effect mode by operating the operation means. An effect execution means, an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that makes it possible to vary the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, Effect mode varying means for varying the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on the fact that a predetermined change condition is established during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed by the separate symbol effect execution unit; A gaming machine AI1 having the following characteristics.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays a symbol based on a winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, and notifies a player of a lottery result after the variability display ends. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is configured to be able to hold a plurality of times, and the holding symbols corresponding to the number of the holding memories are displayed, and the displayed holding symbols are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a hold notice effect that can be notified in advance of information related to the lottery that is used (for example, JP 2009-297071 A). In the gaming machine described above, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, by suggesting the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable indicator corresponding to the reserved symbol, before the variable indicator starts, It was possible to raise the expectation of the person. However, since the content of the hold notice effect cannot be matched to the change in the game situation after the hold notice effect occurs, the player may have a sense of expectation with respect to the content of the hold notice effect. There was a problem that it became difficult and reduced the game motivation. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine AI1, when the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the identification symbol effect, the effect mode of the identification symbol effect can be increased, so that the effect of the identification symbol effect can be enhanced. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AI1, during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed, the change condition is established based on the fact that new information is stored in the storage means. AI2.

  According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the identification symbol presentation effect mode can be varied based on the fact that new information is stored in the storage means. In this case, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to store new information in the storage means, and to improve the operation of the game.

  In the gaming machine AI2, the game machine AI2 includes pre-discrimination means that can execute the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discrimination means. A gaming machine AI3 characterized in that the aspect of the identification symbol is varied based on the discrimination result by the previous discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine AI3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AI2, the aspect of the identification symbol is made variable based on the discrimination result of the prior discrimination means, so that the identification symbol effect to be executed is interested. Can be produced and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AI3, the effect mode variable means changes the effect mode based on a determination result of the prior determination means for the information that triggers the change condition. Machine AI4.

  According to the gaming machine AI4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AI3, it is possible to vary the presentation mode of the identification symbol effect based on the result of prior discrimination for newly stored information. The identification symbols in a range wider than the range of the identification symbols indicated by the identification symbol effect can be made the target of the effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player have a sense of expectation with respect to the identification symbol effect, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect execution means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times. The gaming machine AI5 is characterized by having a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operation means is not valid during the period in which the operation is performed.

  According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times. There is a restriction period during which the operation of the operation means is not determined to be valid during the execution period. Thereby, it is possible to entertain the player at which timing to operate the operation means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AI5, the gaming machine AI6 is characterized in that a specific effect is executed in a period other than the regulation period among the period in which the identification symbol effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AI6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AI5, by executing a specific effect, whether the current operation is in a regulation period during which the operation of the operating means is not valid is performed during the identification symbol effect. Since the player can easily discriminate, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristics AJ group> (Button continuous sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and an effect execution means that changes the effect based on the operation of the operation means, every time the operation means is operated, The sound control means capable of outputting at least the first operation sound and the second operation sound different from the first operation sound, and the type of the operation sound output by the sound control means can be set Voice setting means and voice discrimination means capable of discriminating the type of the operation sound output by the voice control means, the voice setting means based on the discrimination result of the voice discrimination means A gaming machine AJ1 that sets the type of operation sound.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. And, before the lottery result is notified, the operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and the period until the lottery result is notified There was something to entertain the player (for example, JP2013-090780A). Further, in the above gaming machines, when a player operates an operation means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly received. In such a gaming machine, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player was able to operate the operation means based on the output operation sound, but until the output of one operation sound was completed When the next operation is executed during the period, that is, when a continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous when the output operation sound is one sound. In the above gaming machine, it is an object to provide a game in which the game is improved by making it easy for a player to hear the output operation sound and outputting operation sounds rich in variations.

  According to the gaming machine AJ1, since a new type of operation sound can be set based on the type of operation sound that is actually output, it is possible to output an operation sound that is easy to understand for the player, There is an effect that interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AJ1, the sound setting means sets the operation sound of a type different from the type of the operation sound determined by the sound determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AJ1, it is possible to set an operation sound of a type different from the type of the operation sound that is actually output, so various operation sounds are output. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of performances and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AJ1 or AJ2, the sound setting means sets the first operation sound when the sound determination means determines that the operation sound is not output. Machine AJ3.

  According to the gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machines AJ1 or AJ2, when no operation sound is output, the first operation sound is set by the voice setting means. Therefore, the operation sound can be output with predetermined regularity with respect to the operation of the operation means, and the effect of rendering can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the game machine has an operation status determination unit capable of determining the interval of the operation to be performed on the operation unit, and the voice setting unit has a determination result of the operation status determination unit. A gaming machine AJ4 that is capable of setting a third operation sound different from the first operation sound and the second operation sound when a specific situation determination result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine AJ4, the third operation sound can be set based on the determination result of the operation status determination means in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3. Fun to operate the means can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine AJ4, the operation status determination unit is configured to determine the specific status determination result when an interval of the operation performed on the operation unit is shorter than a predetermined period. AJ5 to play.

  According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ4, the third operation sound is output when the interval of the operation performed on the operation means is shorter than a predetermined period. There is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, the effect execution means executes the effect during a predetermined effect period, and based on the determination result of the sound determination means at the time when the effect period has elapsed. , Having a pseudo sound setting means capable of setting a pseudo sound after the production period has elapsed, wherein the sound control means is capable of outputting the pseudo sound set by the pseudo sound setting means. A gaming machine AJ6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, the pseudo sound can be output based on the type of operation sound output when the rendering period elapses, so the rendering period ends Regardless of the type of operation sound output at that time, there is an effect that the audio output control can be terminated without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine AJ6, the pseudo sound setting unit sets a pseudo sound corresponding to the second operation sound when the sound determination unit determines the type of the operation sound different from the second operation sound. A gaming machine AJ7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ6, when the type of the operation sound output when the performance period elapses is other than the second operation sound, the pseudo operation sound corresponds to the second operation sound. Since the sound is output, the end sound of the sound output by the sound control unit can be unified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine AJ7, a discriminating means capable of discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the identification information on the display means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the period, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the production period is set during a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display, The pseudo sound setting means is configured such that when the identification information that is dynamically displayed while the effect is being executed is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, the pseudo sound setting unit is not stopped and displayed in the specific display mode. , Serial gaming machine AJ8, characterized in that it is intended to easily set the pseudo-speech.

  According to the gaming machine AJ8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AJ7, the pseudo sound is generated in the effect executed during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result. Since it is easy to output, there exists an effect that a player can be interested in the completion | finish content of the audio | voice output by an audio | voice control means.

<Feature AK group> (Design Voice)
In the gaming machine having an effect execution means capable of executing an effect, and a privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Voice control means capable of outputting voice corresponding to the first effect executed by the means, voice information determination means for determining the voice information output by the voice output means from a plurality of voice information, and A gaming machine AK1 having regulation means capable of regulating the type of voice information determined by the voice information determination means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. In the case of notifying the lottery result, a configuration has been proposed in which a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-2013). -090780). In addition, in the above-described gaming machines, when a plurality of variably displayed symbol sequences are stopped and displayed, there are some which are configured to give sharpness to an effect of notifying a lottery result by outputting a sound effect. . However, the monotonous sound effect is repeated, so that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage by suppressing repeated output of monotonous sound effects.

  According to the gaming machine AK1, the type of audio information determined by the audio information determination unit is restricted, so that the type of audio information can be easily determined as intended at the time of design, and the player gets bored with the game early. There is an effect that defects can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine AK1 has storage means capable of storing the voice information determined by the voice information determination means as history information, and the restriction means corresponds to the history information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine AK2 that restricts the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AK1, the determined voice information is stored as history information in the storage means, and the voice determined by the voice information determination means corresponding to the stored history information By restricting the type of information, it is possible to control the audio information determined corresponding to the history information, and it is possible to make the determined type of audio information suitable.

In the gaming machine AK2, the regulation means regulates that the same type as the type of the voice information stored a predetermined number of times before is determined.
According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AK2, it is possible to suppress the same type of audio information from being continuously determined, and to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

  In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the regulation means regulates that the type of the voice information determined more than a specific number of times in a predetermined period is determined.

  According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, it is possible to suppress a problem that the type of the same audio information is excessively determined during a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect.

  In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a design effect in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first effect is the plurality of identifications Among the symbols, the gaming machine AK5 is an effect in which one of the identification symbols is stopped and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AK5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, various sounds are output when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so there are various effects when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, determination means capable of executing determination, and privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result; The gaming machine AK6 is characterized in that the voice information determination means can determine the voice information based on a determination result by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AK6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, it becomes possible to identify the determination result by the voice output corresponding to the first effect, so that the output voice There is an effect that the game can be performed with interest in the type.

  In the gaming machine AK6, the game machine AK6 includes an acquisition unit that can acquire information, and an information storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the determination unit stores the information stored in the information storage unit And the gaming machine has pre-determination means for performing pre-determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means, The gaming machine AK7 is characterized in that the voice information determining means is configured to be able to determine the voice information based on a result of prior determination by the prior determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AK6, the result of the pre-determination can be identified by the type of the output voice, so it is possible to give interest to the type of the output voice. There is an effect that can be done.

<Feature AL group> (Image quality control)
Display information determining means for determining display information to be displayed by the display means from a plurality of display information, and among the display information determined by the display information determining means, the amount of data in at least two of the display information Data amount determining means for determining the corresponding information, and variable control means for controlling the display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the determination result determined by the data amount determining means. A gaming machine AL1 characterized by being.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, there has been proposed one that is configured to display various images and moving images on a display device (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). However, since the notice display mode is displayed at random, there is a problem that the image data to be displayed becomes excessive and the addition to display control and the like increases. An object of the above gaming machine is to provide a game capable of reducing a control load.

  According to the gaming machine AL1, since the display mode displayed is variably controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determining means, it is possible to perform display control in accordance with the data amount, and control load. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine AL1, the data amount determination means determines whether a specific condition is satisfied based on a total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in a predetermined first period. A gaming machine AL2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AL1, it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. It is possible to suppress a problem that the control load increases at.

  In the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, when the specific effect is executed by the determination means capable of executing determination, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the effect execution means, A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege advantageous to a player, wherein the display information determination unit determines a display mode displayed in the effect executed by the effect execution unit. A gaming machine AL3.

  According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect notified by the determination result cannot be stably executed due to an increase in the data amount.

  In any one of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is that status information corresponding to the data amount is set as information corresponding to the data amount, The gaming machine AL4 is characterized in that the data amount determining means determines whether or not a total value obtained by adding the status information is a predetermined value or more.

  According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the status information corresponding to the data amount is set, so that it is possible to easily determine the data amount. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determination means so that the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed on the display means decreases. A gaming machine AL5 characterized in that the display mode to be changed is variable.

  According to the gaming machine AL5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the amount of data is suppressed, so that the control load can be reduced. In the gaming machine AL5, the variable control unit sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one display information determined by the display information determination unit is set. Game machine AL6 to do.

  According to the gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine AL5, the data amount can be suppressed by setting the number of pixels in the existing display mode to be small, and the problem that the display data becomes excessive can be suppressed. There is.

<Feature AM group> (Multiple press effects)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display unit. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player, an operation that can be operated by the player as the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit When an operation dynamic display mode in which the display mode is changed by operating the means is set, and the operation dynamic display mode is set, an effective period in which the operation of the operation unit is valid is set. Enable to set A specific production execution unit capable of causing a specific production to be executed based on the remaining period of the set valid period when the operation unit is operated within the valid period. A gaming machine AM1 characterized by having it.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for informing the lottery result, there has been proposed one that is configured so that the player can directly participate in the game by operating the operation means that can be operated by the player and changing the effect. (For example, JP2013-090780A). However, since the method of operating the operation means by the player and the method of the operation period are not constant, there is a problem that the interest is reduced in performing the performance. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine AM1, when the operation means is operated, a specific effect can be executed based on the remaining period of the effective period. Even if it is configured so that the user can operate the operation means, since a specific effect is executed based on the remaining period of the effective period, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and the interest of the game There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AM1, a suggestion mode setting unit that sets a suggestion mode that suggests that the operation unit is operated a plurality of times within the effective period set by the effective period setting unit, and a setting by the suggestion mode setting unit For the suggestion mode corresponding to one operation to be performed, an effect period setting means for setting a predetermined effect period within the effective period, and a remaining period of the effect period set by the effect period setting means A gaming machine AM2, characterized by comprising a notification means capable of reporting the remaining period mode.

  According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AM1, it is possible to make the player think as if the validity period is set for each of the plurality of operations. There is an effect that it is possible to easily notify that execution is performed.

  In the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the plurality of identification symbols and indicates the determination result. The plurality of identification symbols are stopped by a combination, and the operation dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific mode by operating the operation means on at least a part of the plurality of identification symbols. When the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the specific effect executing means, after the specific information that is displayed dynamically, is subsequent to the identification information that is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine AM3 is characterized by executing an effect corresponding to information reflected during dynamic display of the identification information for which dynamic display is started.

  According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, it is reflected during the dynamic display after the dynamic display By executing the effect, the operation means can be motivated to be operated in a short time.

<Feature AN group> (Cosmo Up)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored by the storage means, and determination means The display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the display, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means for dynamic display A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display unit. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means to be given, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and the specific effect executed by the effect executing means In Specific information storage means for storing the specific information based on the information, and based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means, the effect execution means executed by the effect execution means at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information A gaming machine AN1 characterized by comprising special effect determining means for determining a special effect as at least a part.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for informing a lottery result, a notice effect in which a lottery result is suggested in advance has been proposed before the lottery result is notified (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). ). However, further improvement of interest was required. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine AN1, since the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, the effect executed after that is changed by executing the specific effect. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing different games for each player.

  In the gaming machine AN1, based on execution of the suggestion means for suggesting a suggestion mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special effect determined by the special effect determination means And suggesting mode changing means for changing the suggesting mode, and when the suggesting mode is a predetermined mode, the residual display period of the identification information is configured to be equal to or longer than a predetermined period. A gaming machine AN2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine AN2, there is an effect that it is possible to determine that the identification information is not at a timing displayed in a mode for indicating the determination result by the suggestion mode, and it is possible to suppress problems that miss the determination result.

  In the gaming machine AN1 or AN2, the player has operation means operable by the player, and the effect determined by the special effect determining means is composed of operation effects whose effect modes are changed by operating the operation means. The game machine AN3 is characterized in that the number of times that the operation effect is executed is set corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AN1 or AN2, the number of times that the operation effect is executed by the stored specific information is set, so the number of times that the player can operate the operation means There is an effect that it is possible to suppress problems that cause misunderstanding.

<Feature AO group> (3 operations)
The operation means operable by the player, and the operation effect setting means capable of setting the operation effect that is executed based on the operation of the operation means, are set by the operation effect setting means. In the operation effects that can be performed, a plurality of operation effects are set in which specific operation effects are executed in response to a plurality of operations. The gaming machine AO1 is characterized in that the number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation effect is displayed.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for informing the lottery result, there has been proposed one that is configured so that the player can directly participate in the game by operating the operation means that can be operated by the player and changing the effect. (For example, JP2013-090780A). However, there is a problem that the interest is reduced in performing the production based on the operation of the operation means. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine AO1, when multiple operation effects are set, the number of suggesting modes corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game. is there.

  In the gaming machine AO1, when the plurality of operation effects are set, an effective period setting means for setting an effective period in which the operation of the operation means is enabled, and an effective period set by the effective period setting means And a variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed corresponding to the decrease in the effective period for each of the suggested modes.

  According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AO1, the variable display mode can make it seem as if a valid period is set for each suggestion mode, and the timing for performing each operation is variably displayed. There is an effect that the operation can be performed according to the mode, and the timing at which the operation effect is displayed can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, the operation effect that is executed according to the number of times the operation means is operated is set in advance as the plurality of operation effects.

  According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, there is an effect that it is not necessary to individually set a plurality of operation effects, and control that is operated a plurality of times can be facilitated.

<Characteristic AP group> (burst challenge)
An operation effect capable of being executed based on an operation means operable by the player, an effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, and an operation of the operation means within the effective period In the gaming machine having the operation effect execution means, the information determination means for determining information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed in a predetermined period of the effective period, and the operation means operates within the predetermined period. And an operation mode determining means for determining the mode of the operation effect to be executed based on the remaining period of the predetermined period.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for informing a lottery result, a notice effect in which a lottery result is suggested in advance has been proposed before the lottery result is notified (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). ). However, further improvement of interest was required. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine AP1, information corresponding to an operation effect that can be executed in a predetermined period within the valid period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation effect is determined based on the remaining period. Even if there is a difference in the player such as frequency and interval, the effect that the effective period can be effectively used and the interest of the game can be improved by performing the operation effect according to the player's operation and notifying the information There is.

  In the gaming machine AP1, the operation effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the operation effect every time the operation means operates within the predetermined period, and the information determination means is executed within the predetermined period. The gaming machine AP2 is characterized in that information corresponding to the final aspect of the operation effect is determined.

  According to the gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AP1, the final operation effect is determined in advance, so that every time the operating means is operated, the process until the final operation effect is executed is enjoyed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, when a specific operation effect is executed, it is indicated that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, and the operation effect executed in the predetermined period includes , A process operation effect corresponding to a process until the specific operation effect is displayed is set, and the operation mode determining means is configured to determine the specific operation when the remaining period of the predetermined period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. An operation effect is determined, and when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the process operation effect corresponding to the remaining period is determined.

  According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, the process operation effect can make the player recognize that it will gradually become the final operation effect, thereby enhancing the interest of the player. There is an effect that can be done.

  The gaming machine AP3 has update means for updating the production value based on the operation of the operation means, and the update means currently sets the value for updating the production value as the remaining period of the predetermined period. The operation mode determining means determines the mode of the operation effect corresponding to the effect value updated by the updating means. A gaming machine AP4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AP3, the mode of the operation effect can be easily determined by the effect value, and the control load can be reduced.

<Feature AQ group> (Cosmo Up derived)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored by the storage means, and determination means The display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the display, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means for dynamic display A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display unit. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means to be given, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and the specific effect executed by the effect executing means In Specific information storing means for storing specific information based on the special information for determining a special effect as at least a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means A game machine AQ1 having an effect determining means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for informing a lottery result, a notice effect in which a lottery result is suggested in advance has been proposed before the lottery result is notified (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). ). However, further improvement of interest was required. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine AQ1, since the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, the effect executed after that is changed by executing the specific effect. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing different games for each player.

<Feature AR group> (Derived from burst challenge)
An operation effect capable of being executed based on an operation means operable by the player, an effective period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, and an operation of the operation means within the effective period In a gaming machine having an operation effect execution means, an information determination means for determining information corresponding to the operation effect executable in the effective period, and when the operation means is operated within the predetermined period, The gaming machine AR1 is characterized by comprising operation mode determination means for determining a mode of the operation effect to be executed based on the remaining period of the effective period.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for informing a lottery result, a notice effect in which a lottery result is suggested in advance has been proposed before the lottery result is notified (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). ). However, further improvement of interest was required. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine AR1, the information corresponding to the operation effects that can be executed within the effective period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation effects is determined based on the remaining period. Even if there is a difference between the players, it is possible to effectively utilize the effective period and improve the interest of the game by executing the operation effect according to the player's operation and notifying the information.

<Characteristics BA group> (Gameability where it is more advantageous that no reservation is generated)
First discriminating information based on the first ball entering means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means. First discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired, and first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means are different from the first direction. Based on the second ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction is easy to enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means, the second discrimination information is obtained. Second discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired, second discrimination means for executing second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination information acquisition means After the second discrimination information is acquired by the above, based on the acquired second discrimination information Until the second determination is executed, the determination information storage means capable of storing the second determination information with the predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the position where the game ball launched in the second direction is easy to enter And a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state, and a game ball in the variable ball entry means Based on the result of the determination by the privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the ball entered and the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means, the variable entry A variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times; a game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game executing means is terminated; A second game that is more advantageous to the player than one game state Gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a state, wherein the gaming state setting means is more than the specific determination result by the first determination means. The ratio of setting the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is higher when the second determination means gives the specific determination result. A gaming machine BA1.

  According to the gaming machine BA1, the first ball entry means is disposed at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, and the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. Based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition unit, the first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination unit. Based on the fact that the second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction is easy to enter, and the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Then, the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. Based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means. After the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination information is stored by the discrimination information storage means until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed. The predetermined number of information is stored as an upper limit. A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball, the game ball launched in the second direction enters It is arranged at the position where it is easy to do. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the variable pitching unit. A variable game in which the variable pitching means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on the result of the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. . Among the plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game executing means is completed. To 1 gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The first gaming state after the execution of the variable game by the gaming state setting means is the first gaming state that is the specific judgment result by the second discriminating means, rather than the specific discrimination result by the first discriminating means. The ratio of setting becomes high.

  Thus, when a game ball is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege during execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. . When a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, since the ratio set to the first gaming state having a lower advantage than the second gaming state is high, it is stored during execution of the variable game. In the second determination based on the second determination information, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the hope that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BA1, a plurality of variable patterns of the variable ball entry means include at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is more preferable than the second variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means. The ratio of setting the first variable pattern is high, and the ratio of setting the second variable pattern is higher than that of the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit. A gaming machine BA2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA1, the following effects are produced. That is, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means. Is set by the variable pattern setting means. When the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination unit, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting unit is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means, it is easy to set the second variable pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable entry means, so that the variable game is being executed. In the second determination based on the second determination information stored in, there is an effect that it can be more strongly expected that a specific determination result will not be obtained.

  In the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable pitching means, a first variable pattern and a game ball in the variable pitching means rather than the first variable pattern Is provided with variable pattern setting means for setting any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is difficult to enter, and during the period from the start of the first variable pattern to the end of the game ball When it continues to be fired in the second direction, it is configured with a period longer than at least the period until the predetermined number of pieces of the second determination information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means. A gaming machine BA3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable pitching means, the first variable pattern and the second variable that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable pitching means than the first variable pattern. Any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start of the first variable pattern to the end, when the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction, the second determination information of the predetermined number of pieces of information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means. The period is at least longer than the period until.

  As a result, during the execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, if the player continues to fire the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege, at least a second number of information equal to or greater than the predetermined number of information. The discrimination information is acquired. Therefore, after the end of the variable game, the second determination of the upper limit number is executed each time. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the hope that all the second determinations of the upper limit number do not result in a specific determination result.

  In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second determination by the second determination unit is executed in preference to the first determination by the first determination unit. Game machine BA4.

  According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed preferentially over the first determination by the first determination means. Even if the game ball enters the first ball entry means in a state where the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means, it is possible to suppress the first discrimination from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that attention can be paid by the second determination.

  In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA4, the first flow path in which the game ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach and the reached game ball is provided with the second ball entry means. And a game machine BA5, characterized in that the game machine BA5 is provided with a distribution means for distributing to the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA4, the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means, the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means, Since the distribution means for distributing the game balls to each other is arranged at a position where the game balls launched in the second direction can be reached, the flow-down direction of the game balls launched in the second direction is biased. There is an effect that it can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine BA5, the allocating means distributes gaming balls alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path, and the gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BA5, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the sorting means, so that during the execution of the variable game, The balls can be alternately entered into the second entrance means and the variable entrance means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game balls launched in the second direction from entering the second entrance means or the variable entrance means in a biased manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, a first position where the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means compared to the first position. Variable means capable of changing to a second position where it is difficult to make a ball, and variable control means for controlling a variable operation of the variable means. In the first gaming state, the variable means causes the variable means to The second gaming state is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first gaming state. Game machine BA7.

  According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, the first position where the gaming ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and the first position compared to the first position. The variable means changes to the second position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first gaming state, it is difficult for the variable means to be changed to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second gaming state, the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first gaming state. .

  Accordingly, in the first gaming state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball can easily enter the first entry means. Therefore, since the game can be performed more efficiently in the first game state, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first game state will be entered.

  In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA7, the first gaming state is such that the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set to the first probability. Yes, the second gaming state is set such that a probability that the specific determination result is determined by the first determination means and the determination by the second determination means is a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine BA8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA7, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set as the first probability. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination unit and the second determination unit is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

  As a result, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state, so that after the variable game is finished, the variable game is easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first gaming state, it is expected that more predetermined benefits can be obtained in a relatively short period of time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristic BB group> (A specific effect is executed using a jackpot ending period and a reserved digest period)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition; a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of discrimination by the discriminating means; and the bonus A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is completed A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among the states, a dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determining means, and predetermined during execution of the privilege game Based on the establishment of the specific condition, until the end of the bonus game and the dynamic display of one or more of the identification information executed after the bonus game ends Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a period, and the specific effect can indicate to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific effect is ended is the second gaming state. A gaming machine BB1, which is a production.

  According to the gaming machine BB1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Executed by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. One gaming state among the states is set by the gaming state setting means. Identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the execution of the special game, the period until the special game ends and the dynamic display of one or more pieces of identification information executed after the special game ends. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means during the period until the end of the. The specific effect includes an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the game state after the specific effect is ended is the second game state.

  As a result, the specific effect can be executed over a period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the dynamic display of one or more pieces of identification information ends, so the period until the privilege game simply ends Alternatively, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of one identification information.

  In the gaming machine BB1, the specific effect executing means, when the game state after the execution of the bonus game is set to the second game state, the specific effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BB2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. Is executed by the specific effect execution means, so that the second game state is suggested in the specific effect unless the specific result of the determination is made during execution of the specific effect and the transition to the first game state is made. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in the expectation that a specific determination result is not obtained during execution of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means Until the determination condition for the acquired determination information is satisfied, the determination information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the determination information storage means is stored based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. Determining means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is included in the determination information, and determining the effect mode of the specific effect based on the determination result by the determination means An effect mode determining unit, and the specific effect executing unit executes a specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining unit. Game machine BB3 characterized.

  According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the following effects are produced. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination unit is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit based on a predetermined specific opportunity, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit is discriminated with respect to the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the predetermined number of information is stored as an upper limit by the discrimination information storage means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the determination unit determines whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage unit includes the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result. Based on the determination result by the determining means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determining means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining unit is executed by the specific effect executing unit.

  Thereby, since the determination result by the determination means can be determined in advance, there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode according to the determination result actually executed by the determination means.

  In the gaming machine BB3, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a first privilege game in which the game state after execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means; The determination means comprises: a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game whose game state after execution is set to the second game state; Determines whether the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means includes discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game, and the effect mode determination means includes the determination An effect suggesting that the game state after the specific effect is ended is the first game state based on the determination that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included by the means. Game machine BB4, characterized in that it is intended to determine the like.

  According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB3, the following effects are produced. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is finished is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and after the execution is finished One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types of privilege games including at least the second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. It is determined by the determination means whether the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game. An effect mode that suggests that the game state after the end of the specific effect is the first game state based on the determination means determining that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included. It is determined by the aspect determining means.

  Accordingly, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that allows a game to be played in the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB4, a gaming machine BB5 is characterized in that a specific period set in advance is set as the production period regardless of the production mode.

  According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB4, a specific period that is set in advance regardless of the production mode is set as the production period of the specific production. Thus, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the specific effect to the end.

  In the gaming machine BB5, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information based on a determination result by the determining means, and the specific game is performed after the specific condition is satisfied. The dynamic display period determining unit determines the period until the end of the period and the determination by the determining unit a predetermined number of times are all different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine BB6, which is the sum of the dynamic display periods for a specific number of times.

  According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BB5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit based on the determination result by the determination unit. The dynamic display period is determined when the period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the bonus game ends and when the predetermined number of determinations by the determination means are all different from the specific determination result. The sum with the specific number of dynamic display periods determined by the means is set as the specific period.

  Thereby, since the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for the specific number of times ends, there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended clearly.

  In the gaming machine BB6, the dynamic display period determining means, at least until the specific period ends, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means within the specific number of times after the bonus game is ended. The gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that a period longer than the remaining period is determined as the dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine BB7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BB6, after the end of the bonus game, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means within a specific number of times, at least the remaining until the specific period ends Since a period longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, when a specific determination result is obtained within a specific number of times, a bonus game is made before the specific period ends. Can be prevented from starting. Therefore, since the bonus game is started before the end of the specific effect, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific effect from being known in advance.

  In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB7, provided with an expectation suggestion effect executing means for executing an effect indicating an expectation level for the second game state being suggested by the specific effect during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine BB8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BB1 to BB7, an effect suggesting an expectation degree for the second gaming state being suggested by the specific effect during the execution of the privilege game is an expectation suggestion effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an impression as if the effect mode during execution of the privilege game and the specific effect are a series of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the privilege game.

<Characteristics BC group> (Make it difficult to determine whether or not a pending run occurs from an attacker's action)
A privilege entry means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering, a first position where the game ball can enter the privilege entry means, and a game more than the first position. Based on the variable means for changing to the second position where the ball is difficult to enter, the determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination by the determination means being the first determination result. The first variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in the first variable mode, and the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result. Based on the gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state different from the gaming state at the time when the determination is executed and the determination result by the determination means, the second determination result is obtained. All the discrimination by the discrimination means is the first The variable means is controlled to be variable in a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode of the specific number of times executed when the determination result is A gaming machine BC1 comprising: a second variable control means.

  According to the gaming machine BC1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege entry means based on the game ball entering, and the first position where the game ball can enter the privilege entry means, The variable means changes to the second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable control means is configured so that the variable means is varied in the first variable mode based on the fact that the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition and the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Controlled by. Based on the determination result by the determination means being the second determination result, it is distinguished from the specific variable number of first variable modes executed when all the determinations by the specific number of determination means become the first determination result. In a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to see, the variable unit is controlled to be variable by the second variable control unit.

  This makes it difficult to distinguish from the variable mode of the variable means whether the first determination result or the second determination result, so whether or not a different gaming state has been set. There is an effect that it can be made difficult to be discriminated by a person.

  In the gaming machine BC1, the gaming state setting means can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the determination result by the determination means is the second determination result, the ratio for setting the second gaming state is set higher than the ratio for setting the first gaming state. A gaming machine BC2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC1, the following effects are produced. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the determination result by the determination means is the second determination result, the ratio at which the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is set higher than the ratio at which the first gaming state is set.

  Accordingly, when the second determination result is obtained, an unfavorable second gaming state is easily set, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first determination result is obtained.

  In the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the gaming machine BC3 is characterized in that the ratio that becomes the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than the ratio that becomes the other discrimination result.

  According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the ratio that becomes the first determination result by the determination by the determination means is set higher than the ratio that becomes the other determination result. There is a high possibility that the first determination result is continuously obtained over the number of times. Therefore, even when the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode as the second determination result, it can be thought that the first determination result may have continued for a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not a different game state is set.

  In any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the determination unit executes determination when one of a first determination condition and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. The gaming state setting means sets a high ratio for setting the first gaming state when the second determination result is obtained based on the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the determination result based on establishment results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the second gaming state which is disadvantageous to the first gaming state is set higher. BC4.

  According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination unit executes the determination when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. When the determination result based on the establishment of the first determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the second determination result is obtained based on the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the ratio of setting the second gaming state that is disadvantageous to the first gaming state is set higher.

  As a result, when the determination result based on the establishment of the first determination condition results in the second determination result, the first game state having a higher advantage than the second game state is easily set. A game can be played in the hope that it will be established. Therefore, there is an effect that when the determination by the determination unit is executed, attention can be paid to the type of the determination condition that triggered the determination.

  In the gaming machine BC4, when the determination result by the determination means is the second determination result, and the first game state is set by the gaming state setting means, the bonus entry means is more than the second variable mode. A gaming machine BC5 comprising third variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in a third variable manner in which a game ball can easily enter.

  According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC4, the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the first game state is set by the game state setting means, than the second variable mode. Since it is controlled by the third variable control means so that the variable means is variable in a third variable mode in which a game ball can easily enter the bonus entry means, the second determination is made based on the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition. When the result is obtained, the degree of advantage can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first determination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, there are a first ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, and the first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, The second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the privilege ball entry means is provided with a game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine BC6, which is provided at a position where it is easy to ball.

  According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, while the second ball is placed at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction is easy to enter. A ball entry means and a bonus ball entry means are provided. The first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first entrance means, whereas the second discrimination condition is based on the game ball entering the second entrance means. Is established.

  As a result, when the bonus entry means is changed to the first position, when a game is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a prescribed bonus, the game ball enters the second entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is easily performed after the bonus entry means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine BC6, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information acquisition means The gaming machine BC7, further comprising: a discrimination information storage unit capable of storing the discrimination information with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until discrimination by the discrimination unit is executed.

  According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC6, the following effects are produced. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the second entrance means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is With the predetermined number of information as an upper limit, it is stored at least by the discrimination information storage means until discrimination by the discrimination means is executed.

  As a result, the discrimination information storage means can store the discrimination information used for discrimination when the entrance to the second entrance means is detected in a situation where discrimination by the discrimination means cannot be started. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the entrance into the second entrance means from being wasted.

  In any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the determination executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is performed in preference to the determination executed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. A gaming machine BC8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is based on the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. Therefore, when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is executed, the result of the determination can be focused.

<Characteristic BD group> (A configuration in which special start-up prizes are likely to occur during a big hit, and difficult to occur in normal times)
First discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the first discrimination condition, Second discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the first discrimination Or a bonus game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the second determining means, and the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means. The type determination for determining the type of one award game from among a plurality of types including at least a first award game and a second award game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first award game. And a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be established based on a result of the determination by the means and the first determination means or the second determination means. End condition is State setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be established as compared to the first state based on the standing, and the type determination means is determined by the second determination means. The ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the specific determination result is determined by the first determination means than when the specific determination result is determined. A gaming machine BD1.

  According to the gaming machine BD1, the determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. Is done. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game execution means based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a type from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of one privilege game is determined by the determining means. The state setting unit sets a first state in which the second determination condition is easily established based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination unit or the second determination unit. On the other hand, based on the fact that the award game end condition is satisfied, the state setting means sets a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state. The type determining means is configured so that the ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the specific determination result is determined by the first determining means than when the specific determination result is determined by the second determining means. It is configured.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd distinction conditions are satisfied in states other than during execution of a privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to limit the opportunity to execute the first privilege game with a low degree of advantage.

  In the gaming machine BD1, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information for use in determination by the second determination means, and the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means And a discrimination information storage means for storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine BD1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, determination information for use in determination by the second determination unit is acquired by the determination information acquisition unit. Until the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, it is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information.

  Thus, when the second determination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the determination by the second determination means is performed, the plurality of determination information acquired in response to the satisfaction of the plurality of second determination conditions. Is stored by the determination information storage means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the determination is not executed even though the second determination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine BD2, the second determination means is acquired by the determination information acquisition means during execution of the bonus game, and based on the determination information stored in the determination information storage means, after the bonus game ends. A gaming machine BD3 that performs discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BD2, the bonus is obtained by the second discriminating means based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during the execution of the bonus game and stored in the discriminating information storage means. Since the determination is executed after the game ends, the opportunity for the determination by the second determination means can be concentrated after the bonus game ends. Therefore, after the bonus game is over, the game can be performed in the hope that no specific determination result will be obtained by the determination by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the game ball entering, and a first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means, The variable means is variable from the first position to the second position, and the variable means can be changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that a specific determination condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that it is determined by the specific determination means that the first position is changed to the second position, the variable means is changed to the second position. Variable control means for controlling the specific determination means in the second state than in the case where it is determined that the variable determination means is variable by the specific determination means in the second state. By means of the variable means Better when it is determined that the cause variable is, the gaming machine wherein the varying means is characterized in that to control such period of variable becomes long in the second position BD4.

  According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the entrance means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the establishment of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether the variable unit is changed from the first position to the second position. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so as to change the variable means to the second position based on the fact that the specific determination means determines that the first position is changed to the second position. The variable means is in the second position when it is determined that the variable means is varied by the specific determination means in the second state, rather than when it is determined that the variable means is variable in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes long.

  Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily established than in the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD4, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the game ball entering, and a first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means, The variable means is variable from the first position to the second position, and the variable means can be changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that a specific determination condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that it is determined by the specific determination means that the first position is changed to the second position, the variable means is changed to the second position. Variable control means for controlling in such a way that the period from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means to the end thereof tends to be shorter in the first state than in the second state. A gaming machine BD5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the entrance means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the establishment of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether the variable unit is changed from the first position to the second position. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so as to change the variable means to the second position based on the fact that the specific determination means determines that the first position is changed to the second position. The first state is configured to be shorter in the first state than in the second state from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination unit to the end thereof.

  Thereby, the period required for the specific determination means to determine the same number of times is shorter in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, since the opportunity to change the variable means to the second position can be obtained more times, there is an effect that it is possible to easily enter the game ball in the first state.

  In any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, a ball entry means that is provided in a specific flow path and satisfies the second determination condition based on the game ball entering, and the game ball is difficult to flow down the specific flow path The opening / closing means that can be changed between a closed state that closes to be in an open state and an open state that allows the game ball to flow down, and the opening / closing means are set to the open state based on the fact that the first state has been reached. And an opening / closing control means for setting the closed state based on the second state.

  According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific flow path is provided with a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the game ball having entered. The opening / closing means is varied between a closed state in which the specific ball is closed so that it is difficult for the game ball to flow down and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening / closing means is set to the open state by the opening / closing control means based on the first state, and the opening / closing means is set to the closed state by the opening / closing control means based on the second state. .

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second determination condition from being established in the second state.

  In the gaming machine BD6, when the opening / closing means is set in the closed state, the gaming machine BD6 is configured to be able to stop a specific number of game balls upstream of the opening / closing means. Machine BD7.

  According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine BD6, when the opening / closing means is set in a closed state, a specific number of gaming balls can be stopped upstream of the opening / closing means. Therefore, when it is set to the open state, the game ball that has been stopped can be entered into the entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily established in the first state in which the open state is set.

<Feature BE group> (The information corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the specific performance is included in the fluctuation pattern command from main to sub)
In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying an effect mode, main control means for performing main control relating to a game, and slave control means for performing control related to a game based on a command output from the main control means The main control means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and a determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. Privilege game executing means, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, and movement in dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means The dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time, the information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the information corresponding to the dynamic display time are different. Command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least specific information to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means outputs the dynamic display time output by the command output means. Command receiving means for receiving a command, dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, and a predetermined specific condition Based on the establishment of the specific presentation execution means for executing, in the display means, a specific presentation that can be executed over one or a plurality of the dynamic display times, and the specification included in the dynamic display time command Based on the information, the specific effect end determining means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect, and the specific effect by the specific effect end determining means In the event that it is determined to end, until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination, A gaming machine BE1 comprising a specific production ending means for ending the specific production.

  According to the gaming machine BE1, in the main control means, discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command including at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is received by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the sub control means, the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means, and the dynamic display time is dynamically determined based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or a plurality of dynamic display times is executed on the display unit by the specific effect executing unit. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, whether or not to end the specific effect is determined by the specific effect end determination means. The dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means ends based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination when the specific effect is determined to end by the specific effect end determining means. In the meantime, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect main hot water amount means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a specific production can be ended suitably.

  In the gaming machine BE1, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be ended by the specific effect end determination unit, the specific determination is performed based on information according to the determination result by the determination unit included in the dynamic display time command. An amusement machine BE2 comprising an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the effect ending means.

  According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE1, when it is determined that the specific effect is ended by the specific effect end determining unit, the determination result by the determining unit included in the dynamic display time command is used. Based on the information, the effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the specific effect end means is determined by the effect mode determination means, so that the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the determination means. . Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode of the specific effect can be set appropriately.

  In the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, the slave control means is included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on discriminating means for discriminating the power-on to the gaming machine and the power-on discriminating means determining the power-on. On the basis of the specific information, the interruption time determining means for determining whether or not the time point when the power of the gaming machine is cut off is being executed, and execution of the specific effect by the interruption time determining means A gaming machine BE3 comprising post-throwing effect execution means for executing the specific effect based on being determined to be in the middle.

  According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, in the slave control means, whether the power is turned on to the gaming machine is determined by the power-on determination means, and the power-on determination means determines the power-on. In addition, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, it is determined by the shut-off time determining means whether or not the time point when the power of the gaming machine is shut off is being executed. Based on the fact that the specific effect is being executed by the shut-off time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the post-input effect executing means.

  As a result, even if the power is shut off during execution of the specific effect, the specific effect can be resumed, so that the effect mode is different before and after the power is turned off, and the player is prevented from being confused. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BE3, the specific effect ending means is for ending the specific effect executed by the post-input effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE3, the specific effect executed by the post-input effect executing means is terminated by the specific effect ending means, so that the power of the gaming machine is turned on during execution of the specific effect. Even if it is a case where it is interrupted | blocked, there exists an effect that a specific effect can be ended suitably.

  In the gaming machine BE4, the specific effect executing means sets a predetermined period as an effect period of the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BE5, the specific period predetermined by the specific effect execution means is set as the specific period effect period. Therefore, when the specific effect is set, simple processing is performed. There is an effect that can be set by.

  In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE5, the main control means acquires the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquisition means Discrimination information storage means capable of storing at least the discrimination information up to a predetermined number of information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the command output means stores the discrimination information in the discrimination information storage means An information number command including information corresponding to the number of information of the discriminated information is output to the sub-control unit, and the specific effect executing unit is configured to output the discriminating information included in the information number command. The gaming machine BE6, wherein the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times less than or equal to the number of information.

  According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines BE1 to BE5, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit is stored in at least the discrimination information storage unit until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. An information count command including information corresponding to the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the dynamic display of the identification information whose number is less than or equal to the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information included in the information number command.

  As a result, the specific effect can be executed within a range equal to or smaller than the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that the specific display is performed even though the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed. There is an effect that the continuation of the production can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine BE6, the information corresponding to the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information is from when the specific condition is satisfied until all discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage unit is completed. A gaming machine BE7 comprising information according to the number of information of the remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BE6, the information according to the number of pieces of information in the discrimination information is all discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied. Since it is composed of information corresponding to the number of pieces of information of the remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, the specific effect is more reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information.

<Characteristic BF group> (Variability of special drawing lottery on the disadvantaged side is varied according to the winning symbol)
First discriminating information based on the first ball entering means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The first discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired, the first discrimination information for executing the first discrimination using the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the first direction Second discriminating information based on the second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a different second direction is easy to enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information, and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination is likely to be a disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. Second discriminating means to execute, and the second discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquiring unit. Is advantageous to the player on the basis of the discrimination information storage means that can store the predetermined number of information as an upper limit and the discrimination result by the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means. It is more advantageous to launch a game ball in the first direction than in the second direction for at least a predetermined period as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means and the privilege game executing means. One of the award games out of a plurality of types including a first privilege game that is easy and a second privilege game in which it is more advantageous to fire a game ball in the second direction than in the first direction in the predetermined period. A game machine BF1, comprising: a type determining means for determining the type of the game machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a winning. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). Also, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have a difference in degree. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BF1, the first entrance means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter. First discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first entrance means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquisition means is used. The first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means. The second ball entry means is disposed at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction is easy to enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means, the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. Using the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition unit, the second discrimination unit executes a second discrimination that tends to be a disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition unit is stored in the discrimination information storage unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the result of the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, it is more advantageous to launch a game ball in the first direction than the second direction at least in a predetermined period, and in the first direction in the predetermined period. Also, the type determining means determines one type of privilege game from a plurality of types including the second privilege game that is more advantageous when the game ball is launched in the second direction.

  Thereby, since the 1st privilege game which becomes advantageous by launching a game ball in the 1st direction is difficult to perform the 2nd distinction which tends to become a disadvantageous discrimination result, the 1st privilege game and the 2nd privilege The difference in the degree of advantage from the game can be increased. Therefore, since it can be expected that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, when a specific determination result is obtained, it is possible to make the game pay attention by the type of the privilege game. There is.

  In the gaming machine BF1, the game ball launched in the first direction is arranged at a position where the game ball can easily enter, and a first state that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter. A variable ball entry means and a game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at a position where the game ball can easily enter, and the game ball can be varied between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter. Two variable entry means, and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means, The first privilege game is more easily changed to a state in which the first variable entry means can enter the ball than the second variable entry means, and the second privilege game is the first privilege game. A game characterized in that the second variable pitching means is more easily variable than a game so that it can be pitched. BF2.

  According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first variable entry means that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball is disposed at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter. Has been. A second variable entry means that can change between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is disposed at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. Yes. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means. The first privilege game is more easily changed to a state in which the first variable entry means can enter than the second variable entry means. The second privilege game is more easily changed to a state in which the second variable entry means can enter than the first privilege game.

  Thereby, during execution of the privilege game, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the launched game ball enters the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. is there.

  In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the gaming state after the bonus game is over is 1 out of a plurality including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of the first gaming state after the bonus game executed based on the fact that the specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the second judging means. A gaming machine BF3 characterized in that a ratio set as a later gaming state is higher than that in the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the following effects are produced. That is, as a gaming state after the bonus game is finished, one gaming state is a gaming state among a plurality including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. It is set by setting means. In the first gaming state, the ratio set as the gaming state after the award game executed based on the fact that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discriminating means is higher than that in the second gaming state. It is comprised so that it may become.

  Thereby, when the determination by the second determination means is executed, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in the hope that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BF3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state as a ratio of setting the second gaming state as the gaming state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game is ended. A gaming machine BF4, which is higher than the rate of playing.

  According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BF3, the ratio at which the first gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game is ended is that the first gaming state is Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination executed based on the fact that the game ball is fired in the second direction in a predetermined period, and the first gaming state Can make a player think that he wants to avoid being set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific determination result is not obtained in the second determination after the end of the second privilege game.

  In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, and the suggestion executed by the suggestion effect execution means As an effect, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, a first suggesting effect or a second suggesting effect different from the first suggesting effect is determined, and the type determining means Suggestion effect determining means for determining the first suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined, and a gaming machine BF5.

  According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the following effects are produced. That is, the suggestion effect suggesting the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. As the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is suggested. It is determined by production determining means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the first suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means.

  Thereby, when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the game is the first privilege game, so that the game can be performed in anticipation that the second suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect. There is an effect. In addition, since the first suggestion effect may be executed even in the first privilege game, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game can be performed in anticipation of being the first privilege game. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine BF5, when the suggestion effect executing means executes the first suggestion effect based on the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, after the first suggestion effect is finished, A gaming machine BF6 that executes a second suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BF5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, after the end of the first suggestion effect Since the second suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game is performed in the hope that the second suggestion effect will be executed after the end of the first suggestion effect. There is an effect that can be made.

  In any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF6, when the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction during the predetermined period, the second determination information acquisition unit obtains at least the second information number greater than the second information. The gaming machine BF7 is characterized in that it is a period of time during which the discrimination information is acquired.

  According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF6, when it becomes the second privilege game and continues to fire the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means Since the second determination information of the predetermined number of information which is the upper limit is stored, there is an effect that the second determination of the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number can be executed after the end of the second privilege game.

  In the gaming machine BF7, the game ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a position where it can easily enter, and can be changed between a first state where the game ball can enter and a second state where the game ball is difficult to enter. Possible second variable ball entry means, variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball entry means to the first state during the predetermined period, and a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the player has struck, a game ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a reachable position, and the game ball that has reached is provided by the second ball entry means. A gaming machine BF8, comprising: a first flow path that is provided and a distribution means that distributes the first flow path to either the second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine BF8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF7, the following effects are produced. Second variable entry means that can be varied between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. Is arranged. The state of the second variable entry means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period by the variable control means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second variable entry means, the privilege provision means gives a predetermined benefit. The first flow path in which the second ball entry means is provided for the game ball at the position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach, and the second flow path in which the second variable ball entry means is provided. The distribution means which distributes to either is arranged.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that it can suppress that the flow direction of the game ball launched in the 2nd direction deviates.

  In the gaming machine BF8, the distribution means distributes gaming balls alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path, and the gaming machine BF9.

  According to the gaming machine BF9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BF8, the game balls launched in the second direction during the predetermined period in the second privilege game are changed into the second entry means and the second variable entry means. The balls can be entered alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent the game ball launched in the second direction from entering the second entry means or the second variable entry means in a biased manner.

<Feature BG group> (A jackpot type is notified based on winning V)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition; a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a result of discrimination by the discriminating means; and a game ball Can be changed to a ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first position. And a variable control means for varying the means and the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during execution of the bonus game, and the bonus game is completed As a later gaming state, a first gaming state advantageous to a player is set when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the special game, and the incoming game is performed during execution of the special game. If the game ball does not enter the means, the first game state The game state setting means for setting the second game state which is disadvantageous to the player, and the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the player more than the first privilege game. A type determining unit that determines one type from a plurality of types including at least an advantageous second privilege game, and at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining unit. And a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting the determined type of the bonus game based on the game ball entering the entrance means. Machine BG1.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional type gaming machine, the display is subjected to a variable display of symbols, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a variety of interest effects are executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-26883). 2003-325886). In addition, among the conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that does not notify the gaming state after the winning when the winning is won and performs an effect suggesting the gaming state after the winning during the winning state. Are known. However, such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that the remaining winning games become monotonous after the performance suggesting the gaming state after the winning is executed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the game is executed. The variable means is varied between a first position where the game ball can enter the game entry means where the game ball can enter and a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means for a predetermined period based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game. As a gaming state after the award game is ended, a first gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the gaming state setting means when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the bonus game. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. It is determined by the type determining means. When at least the first award game or the second award game is determined by the type determining means, an effect suggesting the type of the determined award game is entered into the entering means by the suggesting effect executing means. It is executed based on that.

  As a result, even after the game ball enters the ball entry means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is confirmed, attention is paid to the type of privilege game suggested by the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means. To play games. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous after entering the game ball into the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine BG1, the determination unit includes a first determination unit that executes a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition as the determination condition, and a second determination different from the first determination condition. Second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of the condition, wherein the type determination means has obtained the specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination means. As a type of the award game executed based on the first award game, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first award game and the second award game, and the second discrimination means determines the second type As the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the determination, the entry means during execution of the privilege game rather than the first privilege game and the second privilege game The third special that game balls are difficult to enter One type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a game, and the first bonus game is more specific than the second bonus game in the predetermined period after the bonus game ends. A gaming machine BG2 that is easily discriminated.

  According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BG1, the first determination unit executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition in the determination unit. The second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A plurality of types including at least a first award game and a second award game by the type determining unit as the types of the award game executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination unit. One type is determined from the types. On the other hand, during the execution of the bonus game as compared to the first bonus game and the second bonus game as the type of bonus game executed based on the specific determination result in the second determination by the second determination means. One type is determined by the type determination unit from among a plurality of types including at least the third privilege game that is difficult to enter the ball entry unit. In the first privilege game, the second determination is more easily performed in a predetermined period after the privilege game is ended than in the second privilege game.

  As a result, when the first privilege game ends, the disadvantageous second determination is easily performed in the predetermined period, and therefore, it is more strongly expected that the second privilege game is determined when a specific determination result is obtained. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to the type of privilege game.

  In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the specific effect is executed in a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started until the game ball enters at least the entrance means. And the suggestion effect executing means executes an effect suggesting a type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the following effects are produced. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means at least during the period from the start of the first privilege game or the second privilege game until the game ball enters the ball entering means. As a result of the specific effect, the suggestion effect executing means executes an effect that suggests the type of privilege game.

  Thereby, since it can show to a series of production | presentation with the specific production | presentation and the production which suggests the kind of privilege game, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for displaying a dynamic display of identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means thereof. Identification information capable of determining one identification information from among a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information as the identification information dynamically displayed by Determining means, wherein the identification information determining means is the first identification information when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means and the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. When the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined, and the gaming machine BG4 is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is displayed by the dynamic display means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one identification information among the plurality of identification information including at least the first identification information and the second identification information different from the first identification information is the identification information. Determined by the determining means. The identification information determination means determines the first identification information when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determination means.

  Thereby, the dynamic display of identification information can be confirmed in expectation that the 2nd identification information determined only by an advantageous 2nd privilege game will be displayed by dynamic display. Further, by adopting a configuration in which the first identification information can be displayed even in the case of the second award game, when the first identification information is displayed, the player's sense of expectation for the second award game can be maintained. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine BG4, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, The types of the suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is the second information. A gaming machine BG5 characterized in that at least a second suggestion effect that can be changed to identification information is provided.

  According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine BG4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. As the type of the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information and the first identification information are changed to the second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

  Thereby, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the second suggestion effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine BG5, when the first award game or the second award game is determined by the type determining unit, the gaming machine BG5 includes a suggestion effect execution determination unit that determines whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, The identification information determination means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestion effect execution determination means determines that the suggestion effect is executed, and the suggestion effect execution means includes the type determination means. The first award game is determined, and when it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the first suggestion effect is executed, and the second determination game is determined by the type determination means. The game machine BG6 is configured to execute the second suggestion effect when the suggestion effect execution determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the suggestion effect execution determining means determines whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determination means based on the determination that the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution determination means. The first suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means when the first identification information is determined by the type determination means and the suggestion effect execution determination means determines that the suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means and the suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means executes the second suggestion effect.

  Thereby, since the second suggestion effect is executed only when the second privilege game is determined, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed.

  In the gaming machine BG6, the suggestion effect execution determination unit executes the suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined rather than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination unit. A gaming machine BG7 characterized in that the rate of discrimination increases.

  According to the gaming machine BG7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG6, the case where the second privilege game is determined by the suggestion effect executing unit is more effective than the case where the first privilege game is determined by the type determining unit. Since the ratio determined when the suggestion effect is executed becomes high, there is an effect that the expectation for the second privilege game can be improved when the suggestion effect is started.

  In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, display means capable of displaying identification information, in the display means, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display thereof Over a period of dynamic display of identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the execution means, and a period from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable means is changed to the first position. Specific suggestion execution means for executing a specific effect, and the suggestion effect execution means executes a suggestion effect suggesting a type of the bonus game as a result of the specific effect. Game machine BG8.

  According to the gaming machine BG8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the following effects are produced. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means and the time from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable means is biased to the first position 2 Over the period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. As a result of the specific effect, the suggestion effect suggesting the type of the bonus game is executed by the suggestion effect executing means.

  Thereby, since it can show to a series of production | presentation with the specific production | presentation and the production which suggests the kind of privilege game, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

<Characteristic BH group> (Variable ease of predicting whether or not there is a continuous run depending on the type of jackpot)
A determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result obtained by the determination means; Type determination for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game as a bonus game type executed by the bonus game executing means. The first variable mode and its first variable based on the result of the determination, the variable unit that can be varied in a predetermined variable mode, and the discriminating by the discriminating unit that is different from the specific discrimination result. A first variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable aspects including at least a second variable aspect different from the aspect, and the specific determination result by the determination by the determination means. The second variable control means for changing the variable means in a third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, and the first privilege game The first variable control means sets the first variable state in which the variable means is likely to be changed in the first variable mode from the end to when the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the second privilege Variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed in the second variable mode than in the first variable state between the end of the game and the establishment of the specific condition; A gaming machine BH1 comprising:

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is informed that the winning is made at the time of winning, and the winning type is also notified, so after the notification is made, it is simply notified. In some cases, the game would be a simple task, and the game would become monotonous. Also, in conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to identify whether a winning state or a small hit, which is a kind of losing, from the production mode or the opening / closing operation of the specific prize opening. There is also a known gaming machine, and there is also a gaming machine that can be expected to win after the winning game is over. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to determine whether the game is a win or a small win, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player in games will be impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BH1, discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. Based on the determination result obtained by the determination means, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. A plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode based on the determination by the determining unit that results in an outlier determination result different from the specific determination result. The variable means is varied by the first variable control means in any one of the variable modes. The variable means is controlled by the second variable control means in the third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode based on the determination result by the determination unit. Variable. The first variable state is easily changed by the first variable control means in the first variable mode from the end of the first privilege game until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Is set. On the other hand, the variable state setting means sets the second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed in the second variable mode than the first variable state between the end of the second privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition. Is done.

  As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between the case where the result of the first bonus game ends and the case where the result is a specific determination result, and at least the specific condition is satisfied. In the meantime, it can be difficult to identify whether or not the privilege game is executed from the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, if the result of determination of detachment after the end of the second privilege game is reached, the second variable mode is set. It becomes easy. Therefore, since the ease of identifying the result of determination of detachment until the specific condition is satisfied can be varied according to the type of the bonus game, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine BH1 includes a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the variable means has a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more than the first position. Is variable to the second position where it becomes difficult to enter the ball, and the first variable mode is configured such that the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period. The second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine BH2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine BH2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BH1, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is configured in a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period. The second variable mode is a second variable different from the first period. Based on the passage of the period, the variable means is configured to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  Thus, the effect that the player can easily identify whether the variable means is the first variable mode or the second variable mode by checking the interval until the variable means is changed to the first position. There is.

  In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the determination means includes a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. Second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment, wherein the first variable control means is based on the fact that the discriminating result by the discriminating by the first discriminating means is the detachment judgment result. The variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of variable aspects including at least one variable aspect and the second variable aspect, and the second variable control means is the first determining means. The gaming machine BH3 is characterized in that the variable means is varied in the third variable mode on the basis of the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the determination by (1).

  According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the following effects are produced. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode based on the result of the determination by the first determination unit. The variable means is varied by the means. The variable means is varied in the third variable manner by the second variable control means based on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determination means.

  Thereby, according to the type of the bonus game, the variable mode of the variable means in the case where the determination result by the first determination means results in an outage determination result is varied, so the first determination means until the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means each time the determination by is performed.

  In the gaming machine BH3, the type determining means determines the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the fact that the second determination by the second determination means results in the specific determination result. A gaming machine BH4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine BH4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BH3, the type of privilege game executed based on the fact that the second discrimination by the second discrimination means has resulted in a specific discrimination result is determined by the type determination means. Since it is determined, when the second determination by the second determination means is executed, it is possible to make the game play while paying attention to whether the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first determination condition is more easily established than the second determination condition until the specific condition is satisfied after the bonus game ends. A gaming machine BH5.

  According to the gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first determination condition is satisfied from the second determination condition until the specific condition is satisfied after the bonus game is ended. Since it becomes easy, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines BH3 to BH5, the game ball launched in the first direction is launched in a second direction different from the first direction, and the first ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter. A second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball can enter and a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter and predetermined based on the game ball entering Based on the start of the bonus game, the bonus ball entering means to which the bonus ball is given is changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, based on the start of the bonus game. Variable control means for varying a predetermined number of times in a possible second state, the first determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, The second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means. Gaming machine BH6, characterized in that the shall.

  According to the gaming machine BH6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BH3 to BH5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and the game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction is placed at a position where the game ball can be entered. Two entry means are provided. A privilege entry means for providing a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is easy to enter. The state of the privilege entry means is changed by the variable control means a predetermined number of times from the first state where the game ball is difficult to enter, to the second state where the game ball can enter, based on the start of the privilege game. The first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second discrimination condition is based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. It is established.

  Thereby, a game ball can be made to enter the 1st entrance means by aiming at the benefit entrance means during execution of an award game. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily established when the privilege game is executed.

  In the gaming machine BH6, first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and its first Discriminating information storage means capable of storing the first discriminating information acquired by the one discriminating information acquiring means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the specific condition is the discriminating information at the end of the privilege game A gaming machine BH7 that is established based on execution of discrimination based on all the first discrimination information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine BH7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BH6, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, the first discrimination information acquisition means acquires the first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means. The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition unit is stored by the discrimination information storage unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The specific condition is established based on the fact that the discrimination based on all the first discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means at the end of the privilege game is executed.

  Thereby, since the 1st discrimination information acquired during execution of a privilege game is memorized by discrimination information storage means, there is an effect that the 1st discrimination can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine BH7, the gaming state after the bonus game is ended is selected from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A game state determination unit for determining one game state, wherein the type determination unit is configured to use the game state as a privilege game type to be executed based on a result of the specific determination in the first determination. The first type determining means in which the ratio for determining the third award game for which the first gaming state is determined by the determining means is higher than the ratio for determining the type of another award game, and the identification in the second discrimination The second type for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least the first bonus game and the second bonus game as the bonus game type executed based on the determination result of A determination means; And the gaming state determination means determines the second gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game is ended when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is reached. A gaming machine BH8 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine BH8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BH7, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the award game has ended. Is determined by the gaming state determination means. As the type of privilege game to be executed based on the result of the specific determination in the first determination, the first type determination unit determines the third privilege game in which the first game state is determined by the game state determination unit. The ratio of being played is higher than the ratio of determining the type of other bonus game. As a type of privilege game to be executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination, one type is selected from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game. It is determined by the two type determining means. When the first bonus game or the second bonus game is reached, the gaming state determining means determines the second gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game is ended.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first determination, the first determination state stored in the determination information storage means during the execution of the privilege game is high because the ratio of the first game state being determined after the end of the privilege game is high. Based on the information, it is possible to cause the game to be performed in the hope that all the first determinations performed after the end of the bonus game will be out of place and become a determination result. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a novel game that makes it desirable to avoid a specific discrimination result, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristics BI group> (Ease of occurrence of holding ream varies according to jackpot type)
A first discriminating means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a first discrimination condition; a second discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition; Based on the determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means As a type of the award game to be executed, the first award game and the determination by the second determination means between the end of the award game and the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first award game. As a gaming state after the bonus game has ended, a type determination means for determining a type of the bonus game of one of a plurality including at least a second bonus game that is likely to be a specific determination result, and a first gaming state And its Gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality including at least a second gaming state different from one gaming state, wherein the first privilege game and the second privilege game are either The gaming machine BI1 is characterized in that, as a gaming state after the bonus game is finished, the set ratio of the first gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a winning. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). Also, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have a difference in degree. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BI1, the determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is The discrimination is performed by the two discrimination means. Based on the result of the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. As the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the determination by the second determination means between the first privilege game and the first privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied after the bonus game is completed. The type of the award game is determined by the type determining means from a plurality including at least the second award game that is likely to have a specific determination result. The gaming state setting means sets one gaming state among at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state as the gaming state after the award game is ended. . As for the 1st privilege game and the 2nd privilege game, the setting ratio of the 2nd game state becomes high rather than the 2nd game state as a game state after the privilege game is complete | finished.

  Thereby, depending on whether it becomes the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the possibility of a specific determination result in the determination by the second determination means before the specific condition is satisfied, There is an effect that a game can be played while paying attention to the type of privilege game determined by the type determination means.

  In the game BI1, the type determining means includes at least a first bonus game, a second bonus game, and a third bonus game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other bonus game types. 1 for determining the type of the award game, and the third privilege game is determined by the determination by the second determination means rather than the determination by the first determination means. A gaming machine BI2 characterized in that the ratio determined by the type determining means is high.

  According to the gaming machine BI2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BI1, the following effects are produced. That is, the type of one privilege game is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game, a second privilege game, and a third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to the player than another privilege game type. Determined by. The rate at which the third award game is determined by the type determining unit is higher when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determining unit than by the determination by the first determining unit.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means, the rate at which the disadvantageous third privilege game is determined increases, so that the determination by the second determination means does not result in a specific determination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in anticipation of becoming the first privilege game, rather than the second privilege game that is likely to have a specific determination result by the determination by the second determination means.

  In the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the first gaming state has a probability that the specific determination result is the second gaming state when the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit is executed. The second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition between the end of the second privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine BI3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine BI3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state is configured such that the probability of a specific determination result when the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit is performed is higher than that of the second gaming state. . The second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition until the specific condition is satisfied after the end of the second privilege game.

  Thereby, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state, so that it becomes easy to become a privilege game continuously at relatively short intervals. Therefore, when it becomes the 1st game state, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, a discrimination information acquisition unit that acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination unit, and the discrimination information acquisition unit that acquires the discrimination information Based on discrimination information storage means capable of storing discrimination information with an upper limit of a predetermined number of information, and the one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means being used for discrimination by the second discrimination means An erasing unit that erases the one discrimination information from the discrimination information storage unit, and the specific condition is that the number of pieces of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage unit is zero A gaming machine BI4, which is established based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine BI4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination unit is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit is stored in the discrimination information storage unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Based on the fact that one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the one discrimination information is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasure means. The specific condition is established based on the fact that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero.

  As a result, until the number of pieces of information in the discrimination information becomes zero, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is likely to give a specific discrimination result, so that the game is played by paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, a game ball launched in the first direction is launched in a second direction different from the first direction, and a first ball entry means arranged at a position where the ball can enter. Second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second bonus game is started when the bonus game is started. The gaming machine BI5 is characterized in that it is more advantageous for a player to launch a game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period thereafter.

  According to the gaming machine BI5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first entrance means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter. Second entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. The first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first entrance means, while the second discrimination condition is that the game ball enters the second entrance means. Based on In the second privilege game, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period after the privilege game is started.

  Thereby, when it becomes a 2nd privilege game, a game ball can be made to enter also into a 2nd entrance means by firing a game ball to a 2nd direction in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the second determination condition is easily established after the end of the privilege game.

  In the gaming machine BI5, the game ball launched in the first direction is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter, and a first state that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter. A variable ball entry means and a game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at positions where the game ball can enter, and the game ball can be varied between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball is difficult to enter. A bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on a game ball entering the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means; 2. The game machine BI6, wherein the two variable entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can enter during at least the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine BI6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BI5, the following effects are produced. That is, the first variable entry means that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter a game ball is disposed at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter. Has been. A second variable entrance means that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball is disposed at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. Yes. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege grant means. The second variable entry means is changed to a state in which the game ball can enter at least for a predetermined period during execution of the second scoring game.

  Thereby, in a predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game, a game ball can be fired in the second direction for a player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the second entry means during the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine BI6, the first variable entry means is configured to be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter at least during the predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game. A gaming machine BI7.

  According to the gaming machine BI7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BI6, during the execution of the first scoring game, the first variable pitching means can be changed to a state in which the gaming ball can enter at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game, a game ball can be fired in the first direction to a player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can be prevented from entering the second ball entry means during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game.

  In any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, and Discriminating information storage means capable of storing the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the predetermined period. In this case, the gaming machine BI8 is a period of a length in which at least the predetermined number of pieces of the second determination information is acquired by the determination information acquisition means.

  According to the gaming machine BI8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. The predetermined period is configured with a length at which at least a predetermined number of pieces of second discriminating information is acquired by the discriminating information storage means when the game ball is continuously released in the second direction.

  Thereby, when it becomes a 2nd privilege game, there exists an effect that discrimination | determination information can be reliably memorize | stored in the discrimination | determination information storage means to the upper limit information number.

  In the gaming machine BI8, the first flow path in which the second ball entry means is provided and the second flow path in which the second variable ball entry means are provided for the game balls launched in the second direction. A game machine BI9, characterized by comprising distribution means that can be distributed to either of them.

  According to the gaming machine BI9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BI8, the gaming balls launched in the second direction are provided with the first flow path in which the second entering means is provided and the second variable entering means. Since it is distributed to either the second flow path provided by the distributing means, the game balls launched in the second direction are biased to enter the second incoming means, or conversely, the second There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the entry into the variable entry means in a biased manner.

<Characteristic BJ group> (As a state in which a game is played in Special 1, a state where a short time is easily given and a state where a short time is hard to be given are provided)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball is harder to enter than the first position. The variable means that can be changed, and the variable means, based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, the first variable pattern and the second that the game ball is less likely to enter the entrance means than the first variable pattern. A variable control means for changing a variable pattern by one variable pattern including at least a variable pattern; a determination means for executing determination based on a game ball entering the ball entry means; and the determination means As a gaming state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on at least that a specific determination result is obtained in the determination, and the privilege game executing means. The first gaming state and its first Gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality including at least a second gaming state different from the gaming state and a third gaming state different from both the first gaming state and the second gaming state; In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than in the third gaming state. A gaming machine BJ1 characterized by being.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state upon the end of the hit state (for example, Patent Document 1: Special No. 2006-000392).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the advantageous gaming state is not set at the end of the hit state, the player's motivation for the game is reduced and the game is likely to be quit. There was a problem.

  In particular, in a type of gaming machine that does not have a so-called probability variation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a short-time gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set through the short-time gaming state. In some cases, the player could be satisfied with the game because he / she was able to play the game in the short-time game state, and there was a risk that it would be difficult to think of continuing the game in the subsequent normal game state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BJ1, the first position at which the game ball can enter the entrance means into which the game ball can enter, and the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is configured to be variable to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, the variable means includes a first variable pattern by the variable control means, and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is less likely to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. It is variable by one variable pattern among at least a plurality. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based at least on the result of the determination by the determination means executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. Is done. As the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means, the first gaming state, the second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and both the first gaming state and the second gaming state One gaming state among a plurality including at least different third gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means. The first gaming state and the second gaming state are configured such that the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than in the third gaming state.

  This makes it difficult to distinguish whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state from the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BJ1, the game in which the first gaming state and the second gaming state have a common specific probability that the specific determination result is determined by the determination unit. Machine BJ2.

  According to the gaming machine BJ2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BJ1, the probability that the first gaming state and the second gaming state will be a specific determination result by the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Since it is comprised, there exists an effect that it can make it difficult for a player to distinguish a 1st game state and a 2nd game state more.

  In the gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2, a second ball entry means different from the ball entry means, a second discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, Second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result obtained by the determination by the second determination means, and the first game state is determined by the second determination means. The third gaming state is set at a first ratio by the gaming state setting means when the specific judgment result is obtained in the judgment, and the second gaming state is judged by the second judging means. When the specific determination result is obtained, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a second rate higher than the first rate, and the gaming machine BJ3 .

  According to the gaming machine BJ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the game ball having entered the second entry unit different from the entry unit. A privilege game is executed by the second privilege game executing means based on the result of the determination by the second determining means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determining means in the first gaming state, the third gaming state is set at the first ratio by the gaming state setting means, while the second gaming state is the second gaming state. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second rate higher than the first rate.

  As a result, in the second gaming state, the third gaming state is more easily set as the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed than in the first gaming state, so that a specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be performed in anticipation of becoming more strongly.

  In the gaming machine BJ3, the third gaming state is set at a third rate that is higher than the first rate by the gaming state setting means when the bonus game is executed. A gaming machine BJ4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine BJ4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BJ3, when the privilege game is executed in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, in the third gaming state, the privilege game and the third gaming state are easily repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a great satisfaction when entering the third gaming state.

  In the gaming machine BJ4, in the second gaming state, a game in which the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition that is at least different from the specific determination result. State transition means is provided, and the third game state is one in which either the second game state or the third game state is set by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine BJ5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition unit based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition that is different from at least a specific determination result. When the privilege game is executed in the third game state, either the second game state or the third game state is set by the game state setting means.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, the first gaming state is not set. Therefore, even after the third gaming state is ended, the gaming state transition means at least performs the first gaming state. The game can be considered to continue until the game state is shifted from the second game state to the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BJ5, the gaming state transition means, as the specific condition, based on the determination by the determination means, the difference determination result different from the specific determination result continuously for a predetermined number of times, A gaming machine BJ6, which shifts from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BJ6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BJ5, as a specific condition, based on the fact that the discriminating means is different from the specific discriminating result continuously for a predetermined number of times by the discriminating means. Since the game state transition means shifts from the second game state to the first game state, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of consecutive disconnection determination results. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting unit, the gaming state transition is made based on the result of the determination of losing over the first number of times by the determining unit. Based on the first type transferred to the first gaming state by the means and the result of the determination of losing over the determination of the second number of times greater than the first number of times, the gaming state shifting means causes the first type A gaming machine BJ7 comprising a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second type to be shifted to one gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BJ7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, a discrimination result is obtained over the determination of the first number of times by the determining means. Based on the first type to be shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means, and the gaming state transition means based on the determination result of detachment over the determination of the second number greater than the first number Since one type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the second type to be transferred to the first gaming state, it is possible to continue over the determination with more second gaming states. It can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BJ7, when the first game state is set by the display means capable of displaying the effect mode and the game state setting means, the first effect mode can be displayed on the display means. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, it is possible to cause the display means to display a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The first effect mode is displayed from when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means until the result of determination of losing over the second number of times. A gaming machine BJ8, comprising: a limiting means for limiting

  According to the gaming machine BJ8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first effect mode is displayed on the display means by the first display control means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the second display mode is displayed on the display means by the second display control means, which is different from the first effect mode. The restriction means restricts the display of the first effect mode from the time when the second game state is set by the game state setting means to the time when the detachment determination result is obtained over the second number of times.

  As a result, even if the first game state is set and the discrepancy is determined for the first number of times, the first effect mode is not displayed until the second number of times. It becomes difficult to identify whether it is the one type of second gaming state or the second type of second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make it seem that the game is continued at least until the second number of times is determined regardless of the type of the second game state, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. is there.

  In the gaming machine BJ8, the third effect mode is displayed on the basis of the fact that the second game state is set by the game state setting means and the result of the determination of detachment is made over the second number of times. A gaming machine BJ9 comprising display control means.

  According to the gaming machine BJ9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BJ8, the third display is based on the fact that the second gaming state has been set by the gaming state setting means and the result of determination of detachment has been made over the second number of times. Since the first effect production mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the period in which it is unknown whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state from becoming too long.

  In any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

  According to the gaming machine BJ10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio. There is an effect that can be expected more strongly.

<Characteristic BK group> (Configuration in which special 2 is difficult to turn in time)
Based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality including at least, a entering means capable of entering a gaming ball, and a first enabling a gaming ball to enter the entering means. A variable means that can be changed to a position and a second position where the game ball is harder to enter than the first position, and a variable operation of the variable means to the ball entry means in the first gaming state. Control with the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter, and control with the second control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the entrance means in the second game state, and in the third game state, It becomes easier for a game ball to enter the entrance means than the first control and the second control. 3 control controlled by variable control means gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises a and BK1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state upon the end of the hit state (for example, Patent Document 1: Special No. 2006-000392).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the advantageous gaming state is not set at the end of the hit state, the player's motivation for the game is reduced and the game is likely to be quit. There was a problem.

  In particular, in a type of gaming machine that does not have a so-called probability variation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a short-time gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set through the short-time gaming state. In some cases, the player could be satisfied with the game because he / she was able to play the game in the short-time game state, and there was a risk that it would be difficult to think of continuing the game in the subsequent normal game state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first gaming state, the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state The gaming state setting means sets one gaming state among a plurality including at least a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position at which a game ball can enter a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second position at which the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. Yes. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means in the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the first game state, and the game ball to the ball entry means in the second game state. Is controlled by the variable control means in the second control that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and is controlled by the variable control means in the third control that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means in the third gaming state.

  Thereby, since the degree of advantage is different between the first game state in which control that makes it difficult to enter the ball entry means and the second game state are executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine BK1, the gaming machine BK2 is characterized in that the second control is such that the variable means is more easily arranged at the first position than the first control.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BK1, the second control is configured such that the variable means is more easily disposed at the first position than the first control. Although the variable means is more easily disposed at the first position than in the first control, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel operation that makes it difficult to enter the ball entry means as in the first control.

  The gaming machine BK2 includes a passing means through which a game ball can pass and a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means, wherein the variable control means is discriminated by the discrimination means. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period on the basis of the fact that a specific determination result is obtained in the first game state, and the first gaming state is determined by the determination means. The first determination result is the specific determination result, and the second gaming state and the third gaming state are determined by the determination means with a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine BK3 characterized by a specific discrimination result.

  According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BK2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. In the first gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained with the first probability as determined by the determining means, while the second gaming state and the third gaming state are higher than the first probability determined as determined by the determining means. A specific discrimination result is obtained with a probability of 2.

  Thereby, the second game state and the third game state can realize a novel operation in which the probability of entering the ball entering means is different, although the probability of a specific determination result is common. There is an effect.

  The gaming machine BK3 includes launching means capable of launching a game ball at a firing interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval, and the second gaming state is determined by the determining means and the variable means is set to the specific determination result. A period until it is changed to the first position is set as the first period, and a period from when the variable means is changed to the first position until it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the entering means is likely to be shorter than the first period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the launching means at the predetermined interval next to the passed game ball reaches the variable means is Longer than the sum of one period and the second period Gaming machine BK4, characterized in that those liable.

  According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BK3, the following effects are produced. That is, a game ball is launched by the launching means at a firing interval that is equal to or greater than a predetermined interval. In the second gaming state, the period from when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means until the variable means is changed to the first position is set to the first period, and the variable means is changed to the first position. A period from when it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means is likely to be shorter than the first period. The period from when one game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the launching means at a predetermined interval next to the passed game ball reaches the variable means is the first period and the first period. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

  Thus, even if the game ball is continuously fired to the passing means in the second gaming state, the game ball reaches the ball entering means while the variable means is changed to the first position. Can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be made into a special state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means although the variable means is easily changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine BK4, the third gaming state is a period from when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means until the variable means is changed to the first position from the first period. Is set to a long third period, and the period from when the variable means is changed to the first position until it is changed to the second position is set to the second period, The period from when the game ball passes through the means until the game ball that has passed through reaches the entrance means becomes longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period A gaming machine BK5 that is easily shorter than the sum of the above.

  According to the gaming machine BK5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BK4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the third gaming state, a period from when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means until the variable means is changed to the first position is set to a third period longer than the first period, A period from when the variable means is changed to the first position until it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the passed game ball reaches the entrance means is longer than the third period, and the sum of the third period and the second period. Easier to be shorter.

  As a result, in the third gaming state, the game ball that has passed through the passage means is directly entered into the entry means when a determination result obtained based on the passage through the passage means results in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third gaming state can be efficiently advanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK5, based on the fact that the second entry means that can enter the game ball is different from the entry means, and that the game ball has entered the entry means. A first determination means for executing a first determination; a second determination means for executing a second determination based on a game ball entering the second pitching means; and the first determination means. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination or the first discrimination result determined in advance by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and the gaming state The setting means has a first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the award game executed based on the first determination result obtained in the second determination in the second gaming state. 3 game states are set, and in the second game state, As the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the determination result of 2 being the first determination result, the third gaming state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate. A gaming machine BK6 that is to be set.

  According to the gaming machine BK6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK5, the following effects are produced. That is, the first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination unit based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means different from the entrance means, the second discrimination means executes the second discrimination. Based on the first determination result determined by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. As the gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the first gaming state, the third gaming state is set at the first rate by the gaming state setting means. Is set. The gaming state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first discrimination result in the second discrimination in the second gaming state. The third gaming state is set by the means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed with high expectation that a specific determination result is desired during the second game state.

  In the gaming machine BK6, the gaming state setting means is configured as a gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third gaming state. The gaming machine BK7 is characterized in that the third gaming state is determined at a third rate higher than the first rate.

  According to the gaming machine BK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BK6, as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first discrimination result in the first discrimination in the third gaming state Since the third gaming state is determined by the gaming state setting means at a third rate that is higher than the first rate, in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is likely to become the third gaming state again after the bonus game ends. Therefore, there is an effect that when the player enters the third game state, the player can have a great satisfaction.

  In the gaming machine BK7, the second rate is higher than the third rate. The gaming machine BK8 is characterized in that the second rate is higher than the third rate.

  According to the gaming machine BK8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BK7, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that the first determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be performed in anticipation of the game.

<Characteristic BL group> (a mechanism that can be played with a game method that makes it easy to be alternately distributed to two routes by a distribution means and a game method that is easily distributed to one route)
An operation means operable by the player, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in accordance with an operation content for the operation means, a first flow path capable of passing a game ball launched by the launch means, and a first While a second flow path different from the first flow path and a first condition that can be satisfied by performing an operation of the first operation content on the operation means are satisfied, the reached game ball is The second condition that can be satisfied by the operation of the second operation content that is different from the operation of the first operation content is established because it becomes easy to alternately distribute between the first flow channel and the second flow channel. The game machine BL1 is characterized by comprising distribution means that makes it easier to distribute the reached game balls to the first flow path than when the first condition is satisfied.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member that distributes the game balls to one of two types of flow paths provided on the board surface. In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to distribute the game balls in two types of flow paths in a well-balanced manner by distributing the game balls that have reached the sorting member into two types of flow paths one by one. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231902).

  However, in such conventional gaming machines, the game balls that have reached the sorting member are alternately distributed to the two types of flow paths regardless of the player's gaming method, so there is room for the player's skill to intervene. There is a risk that the interest of the player in the game will be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BL1, a game ball is launched by the launching means in accordance with the operation content for the operating means that can be operated by the player. A first flow path through which a game ball launched by the launching unit can pass and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition that can be satisfied by the operation of the first operation content is performed on the operation means, the state of the distribution means indicates that the game ball that has reached the first flow path and the second flow It becomes a state where it is easy to distribute alternately to the flow path. While the second condition that can be satisfied by the operation of the second operation content that is different from the first operation content is satisfied, the state of the distribution means is more than the time that the first condition is satisfied. In other words, the game balls that have arrived are easily distributed to the first flow path.

  Thereby, since the way in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means can be varied according to the operation content of the player, there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be devised.

  In the gaming machine BL1, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, a game ball is launched at a first launch interval by the launching means, and the operation of the second operation content is executed. Thus, the game machine BL2 is characterized in that a game ball is fired by the launch means at a second launch interval longer than the first launch interval.

  According to the gaming machine BL2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BL1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is fired at the first firing interval by the launching means. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is launched by the launching unit at the second launch interval longer than the first launch interval. Thereby, it is possible to easily change the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means simply by changing the firing interval, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BL2, the allocating means includes at least a first movable range in which the reached game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range that is easily distributed to the second flow path. The distribution means is configured to be movable, and the allocating means distributes the game balls to the first flow path in a state of being arranged in the first movable range. It is configured to be easily movable within the movable range and to be easily movable into the first movable range by distributing the game balls to the second flow path in a state of being arranged in the second movable range. A gaming machine BL3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine BL3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BL2, the following effects are produced. That is, the allocating means is movable within a specific movable range including at least a first movable range in which the reached game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path. To do. By allocating the game balls to the first flow path in a state of being arranged in the first movable range, the sorting means can be easily moved to the second movable range. In addition, by distributing the game balls to the second flow path in a state where the game balls are arranged in the second movable range, the sorting means can be easily moved to the first movable range.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an operation in which the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path when the game balls reach the distribution means continuously.

  In the gaming machine BL3, the sorting means is shorter than the length of the second firing interval when the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and moved to the second movable range, and A gaming machine BL4, which is movable to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the launch interval.

  According to the gaming machine BL4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BL3, when the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and the sorting means is moved to the second movable range, the length is shorter than the length of the second firing interval. In addition, since the allocating means moves to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the first firing interval, when the game ball is continuously fired at the firing interval equal to or longer than the second firing interval, the allocating means There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be surely set to the first movable range.

  In the gaming machine BL4, the distribution means is easily movable from the first movable range to the second movable range by the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path, and is distributed to the second flow path. A gaming machine BL5, which is easily movable from the second movable range to the first movable range depending on the mass of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine BL5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BL4, the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path makes it easier for the sorting means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range, Since the distribution means can be easily moved from the second movable range to the first movable range by the mass of the game balls distributed to the two flow paths, a power source for moving the distribution means can be eliminated. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine BL4 or BL5, the allocating means is configured such that a predetermined position in the first movable range is initially arranged, and returns to the predetermined position when the game ball has not reached a predetermined period. A gaming machine BL6 that is configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine BL6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BL4 or BL5, the sorting means is configured so that the predetermined position in the first movable range is initially arranged, and the game ball is used as the sorting means. On the other hand, since the allocating means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the predetermined period is not reached, the allocating means is maintained in the first movable range unless the game balls are allocated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably distribute the game ball that first reaches the distribution means to the first flow path.

  In any one of the gaming machines BL1 to BL6, passing means provided at a position through which the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass, game balls flowing down the first flow path, and the second A ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the flow path can enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position before the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the entry ball means, a determination means that executes determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passage means, and the determination means A gaming machine BL7, comprising: variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by.

  According to the gaming machine BL7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BL1 to BL6, the following effects are produced. That is, the passage means is provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass. The ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter. The variable means can be configured to be variable between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means more than the first position. Has been. Discrimination by the discriminating means is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means. Based on the determination result obtained by the determination means, the variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  Thereby, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BL7, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first gaming state, the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the player that is more advantageous than the second gaming state A game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality including at least a third game state, and the variable control means is configured to play a game to the ball entry means in the first game state. The variable means is controlled to change in a first variable manner that makes it difficult for a ball to enter, and in the second gaming state, the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means in a second variable manner. The variable means is controlled to change, and in the third gaming state, the game ball enters the ball entering means more easily than the first variable aspect and the second variable aspect in the third variable aspect. The variable means is controlled to be variable. Gaming machine BL8, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine BL8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BL7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first gaming state, the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. One gaming state among a plurality including at least a gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. In the first game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is varied in a first variable manner in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. In the second game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is varied in a second variable manner in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means. In the third game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is varied in a third variable aspect that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first variable aspect and the second variable aspect.

  Thereby, since a plurality of gaming states having different eases of entering the entering means are provided, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine BL8, the first gaming state is the specific determination result with a first probability by the determination means, and the second gaming state is more than the first probability by the determination means. A gaming machine, wherein the specific determination result is obtained with a high second probability, and the three gaming states are the specific determination result with the second probability by the determination means. BL9.

  According to the gaming machine BL9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BL8, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained with a first probability by the determination means. In the second gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained with a second probability higher than the first probability by the determination means. In the third gaming state, a specific determination result is obtained with a second probability by the determination means.

  As a result, in the 2nd gaming state and the 3rd gaming state, despite the fact that the probability which becomes the specific discrimination result is common, it realizes the novel operation that makes it easy to enter the entering means There is an effect that can be done.

<Characteristic BM group> (It is more advantageous to get through the short time)
A determination means for executing determination based on establishment of the determination condition, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based at least on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means; One of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means is completed. A gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of the game, and a specific transition condition that is different from the end of execution of the bonus game in the state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means And a gaming state transition means for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, based on the game machine BM1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state upon the end of the hit state (for example, Patent Document 1: Special No. 2006-000392).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the normal gaming state is set at the end of the winning state, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next winning state, so when the normal gaming state is entered However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition to the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, such a conventional gaming machine is provided with a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state. After the winning state, the game is configured to continue the game until at least the third gaming state ends by configuring either the advantageous gaming state or the third gaming state. There are also things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined number of lotteries are completed in the third gaming state, it is normal to shift from the third gaming state to the normal gaming state. After that, there was a problem that it became difficult to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BM1, a privilege advantageous to the player by the privilege game executing means is based at least on the basis of the determination result by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A game is executed. One of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means is completed. The game state is set by the game state setting means. From the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the fact that a specific transition condition that is at least different from the end of execution of the privilege game is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The game state is transferred by the game state transfer means.

  Thereby, since it is possible to cause a game to be performed in expectation that a specific transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a monotonous game in the first gaming state.

  In the gaming machine BM1, the specific transition condition is determined by the determining means executed after being set in the first gaming state, and is determined to be a predetermined number of times and different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine BM2 characterized by being established when it becomes.

  According to the gaming machine BM2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BM1, the discrimination by the discrimination means executed after being set to the first gaming state, the discriminating discrimination different from the specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of times. Since a specific transition condition is satisfied when the result is achieved, in the first gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which it is expected that a determination result will be obtained every time the determination by the determination means is executed. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the ball entry means rather than the first position. Variable means capable of being changed to a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter, and in the first gaming state, executing the first variable control for easily changing the variable means to the first position; Variable control execution means for executing second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position in the two gaming states than in the first gaming state, and the determination condition is to the ball entry means And a game machine BM3, which is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered.

  According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is varied between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means from the first position. In the first gaming state, the first variable control that allows the variable means to be easily changed to the first position is executed by the variable control execution means, and in the second gaming state, the variable means is changed to the first position rather than the first gaming state. The second variable control that is difficult to be performed is executed by the variable control execution means. A determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entry means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the variable means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine BM3, the gaming state setting means includes a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state. 1 in the third gaming state, the variable control execution means is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first variable control and the second variable control. A game machine BM4 that executes the third variable control.

  According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BM3, the following effects are produced. That is, one gaming state among the plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. . In the third gaming state, the variable control executing means executes the third variable control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the entrance means than the first variable control and the second variable control.

  Thereby, in the third gaming state, the determination by the determining means is easily performed, so that the game can be performed efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of entering the third gaming state.

  In the gaming machine BM4, the gaming state setting means, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the third gaming state at a first rate as the gaming state after the bonus game is ended. And the third gaming state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. Game machine BM5.

  According to the gaming machine BM5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BM4, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the first ratio as the gaming state after the award game has ended. On the other hand, when the third gaming state is set in the second gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate when a specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. The third gaming state is more likely to be set as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game when a specific determination result is obtained in the gaming state. Therefore, in the first gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which a game is played in expectation that a specific transition condition is satisfied rather than a specific determination result.

  In the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a third rate higher than the first rate as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed in the third gaming state. A gaming machine BM6 that is to be set.

  According to the gaming machine BM6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state setting means at a third rate higher than the first rate as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed in the third gaming state. Since the third gaming state is set, in the third gaming state, it becomes easy to enter the third gaming state again after the end of the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a great satisfaction by entering the third gaming state.

  In any one of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, a second bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game based on the entrance area where the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the entrance area A gaming machine BM7 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine BM7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, the bonus game is executed by the second bonus game executing means based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the entrance area. The game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BN group> (If you win in the short time, it is likely to be disadvantageous after the small hits end)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and first advantageous game execution for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being the first discrimination result 1 among a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type as a type of the first advantageous game executed by the means and the first advantageous game executing unit A type determining means for determining the type of the game, and a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on the fact that the determination by the determination means results in a second determination result different from the first determination result. As a gaming state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game executing means, the first gaming state, and the first gaming state, Has a different second gaming state, When a discrimination result other than the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the game status setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality including at least and the discrimination means executed in the first gaming state. A game state ending means for ending the first gaming state if a predetermined specific condition is established, and the specific condition becomes the first determination result by determination by the determination means; In addition, when the first type is determined by the determination unit, and when the second type is determined by the type determination unit than when the first type is determined by the type determination unit. A gaming machine BN1 that is configured to be easily established.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a entrance that can be entered by opening (or moving) the electric accessory, and the game ball enters the entrance. A game ball that has entered a V winning device opened during a specific game (such as a small hit game) executed based on a specific area (such as a winning switch) provided in the V winning device. There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can give a bonus game (a jackpot game or the like) that is advantageous to a player by passing (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if a small hit game is executed, a bonus game is not executed unless a game ball can be inserted into the V winning device. If the ball could not be entered, there was a risk of impairing the player's interest in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BN1, the first advantageous game advantageous to the player is based on the fact that the first discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. It is executed by the advantageous game execution means. As a type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, the type determining means selects one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. The type is determined. A second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the fact that the determination result by the determining means is a second determination result different from the first determination result. The A game from among a plurality including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state as a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed. One gaming state is set by the state setting means. If the determination by the determination means executed in the first gaming state results in a determination result other than the second determination result, if the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is the gaming state end means. Is terminated by The first determination result is determined by the determination means, and the first determination result is determined by the determination means, and the second type is determined by the type determination means, compared to the case where the first type is determined by the type determination means. In the case where is determined, the specific condition is more easily established.

  Thereby, when it becomes the 1st discrimination | determination result, there exists an effect that a game can be performed expecting that a 1st classification will be determined.

  In the gaming machine BN1, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state ending means, if the specific condition is satisfied, the first gaming state A gaming machine BN2 that shifts to the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BN2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN1, the following effects are produced. That is, the second gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. If the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming state ending means shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  Thereby, the game in the first game state can be performed in expectation that the specific condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine BN1 or BN2 includes a ball entering area in which a game ball can enter based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game executing means is configured to enter the ball entering area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the ball having entered, and the gaming state ending means is configured such that the first advantageous game of the first type is the first number of times in the first gaming state. The first gaming state is terminated based on the execution, and the second type of the first advantageous game is executed a second number of times less than the first number in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BN3 is characterized in that the first gaming state is ended based on the gaming machine BN3.

  According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN1 or BN2, the following effects are produced. That is, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance area where the entrance is possible based on the execution of the first advantageous game. . The first gaming state is terminated by the gaming state ending means based on the first number of times that the first type of first advantageous game has been executed in the first gaming state, while the first gaming state has the first gaming state. The first gaming state is ended by the gaming state ending means when the two types of first advantageous games are executed a second number of times less than the first number of times.

  Thereby, during execution of the first advantageous game, the game ball is entered into the entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or the specific condition is established without entering the entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a game that allows the user to select what to expect.

  In the gaming machine BN3, the gaming state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on a game ball entering the ball entering area during the execution of the first type of the first advantageous game. In this case, the gaming machine BN4 determines the first gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

  According to the gaming machine BN4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BN3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the entering area during the execution of the second type of the first advantageous game. In this case, since the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game, it is determined whether the first advantageous game is the first type or the second type. Predict more seriously and select whether to enter the game area into the entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or to expect a specific condition to be established without entering the entry area Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BN4, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the game ball entering the entry area during the execution of the first type of the first advantageous game. The gaming machine BN5 is characterized in that the second gaming state is set as a gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

  According to the gaming machine BN5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BN4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the entering area during the execution of the first type of first advantageous game. If the first advantageous game is the first type, the game state setting means sets the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the specific condition is established and the state shifts to the second gaming state. On the other hand, if it is the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by entering the entering area, and further Transition to 2 gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

  In the gaming machine BN5, a common specific effect is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination unit based on the determination by the determination unit resulting in the first determination result. A gaming machine BN6 comprising a specific performance executing means for performing the game.

  According to the gaming machine BN6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN5, the first determination result determined by the determination unit is used regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination unit. Since a specific specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means, it is difficult to distinguish whether it is the first type or the second type from the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the first type or the second type can be more seriously predicted.

  In any one of the gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the gaming state setting means has the first gaming state, the second gaming state, the first gaming state and the second gaming state that are more advantageous to the player. One gaming state among a plurality including at least three gaming states, and the gaming state setting means is a game after the end of the second advantageous game executed in the first gaming state. As the state, the third gaming state is set at the first rate, and the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the second gaming state is finished is higher than the first rate. The gaming machine BN7 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set at a rate of.

  According to the gaming machine BN7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state setting means selects one of the plurality of at least one of the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. A gaming state is set. As the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the first gaming state is ended, the third gaming state is set at the first rate by the gaming state setting means, while the gaming state is executed in the second gaming state. As the gaming state after the second advantageous game is over, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second rate higher than the first rate.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second game state.

  In the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state setting means has the third rate higher than the first rate as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state is completed. A gaming machine BN8 characterized by setting three gaming states.

  According to the gaming machine BN8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state is finished as the gaming state higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means. Since the third gaming state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third gaming state is entered, the second advantageous game and the third gaming state are easily repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a greater satisfaction when entering the third gaming state.

  In the gaming machine BN8, the second rate is higher than the third rate, the gaming machine BN9.

  According to the gaming machine BN9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BN8, the second proportion tooth is configured at a rate higher than the third rate, so that when the second gaming state is reached, the second advantageous game There is an effect that a game can be performed with a strong expectation that will be executed.

<Feature CA group> (Invincible zone for falling lottery)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the display, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and first based on the determination result State setting means capable of setting at least one of a gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the storage means before the determination is performed by the determination means A pre-determination unit capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the game machine, including an effect execution unit capable of performing an effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, Production The means is configured to be able to execute a period effect corresponding to a specific period in which the second gaming state is continuously set corresponding to the result of the determination by the prior determination means. A gaming machine CA1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. The interest in switching to a gaming state advantageous to the player and the advantageous gaming state are continuously set by setting a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a higher probability of drawing. There has been proposed one that is configured so that the interest of the game is improved by the sense of expectation (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). In such a gaming machine, using a configuration in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the gaming state advantageous to the player is continuously set at a precise and early timing, or disadvantageous. There has been a demand for a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of the game by suggesting information related to whether to switch to the gaming state. In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention first determines a period during which a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, and executes an effect based on information related to the determination result. An object is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine CA1, since the period effect corresponding to the specific period is executed according to the determination result of the prior determination means, the period in which the second game state that is advantageous to the player is set by the executed period effect. Can be identified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CA1, the period effect is executed corresponding to a period in which one piece of the identification information is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine CA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CA1, the period effect is executed corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information of 1, so the period of the dynamic display of the identification information of 1 The content of the period effect is valid (for example, if a period effect is executed that suggests that the setting of the second gaming state is continued, until the end of the period in which the one identification information being executed is dynamically displayed. It is possible to make it easier to understand that the second gaming state can be recognized at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine CA1 or CA2, the state setting means, prior to the start of dynamic display of the identification information, based on the determination result of the determination means when the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine CA3 is configured to be capable of setting the first gaming state.

  In the gaming machine CA3, since the second gaming state is set before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, each time the identification information is dynamically displayed, the player determines whether the gaming state has been changed. There is an effect that can be interested.

<Characteristic CB group> (New game characteristics with the usual count)
First information on the basis of the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the game ball entering the first ball entry means. First information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information acquisition means, second information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means, Storage means for storing the first information and the second information, respectively, a first determination based on the first information stored in the storage means, and a second determination based on the second information. The first privilege can be given based on the determination means capable of performing determination and the result of the first determination by the determination means being a specific first determination result, and the result of the second determination is a specific Giving the second privilege different from the first privilege based on the second determination result In a gaming machine having a bonus granting means capable of playing a game, the game balls flow down corresponding to the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means and the specific ball entry means into which the game balls can enter. A flow path switching means capable of switching a flow path, wherein the flow path switching means guides the game ball to the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means. The gaming machine CB1 is configured to be settable by switching the flow path to a second guidance state for guiding the game ball to the outside.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. A plurality of entrances into which game balls can enter are provided on the game board surface, and there is a gaming machine that has improved the interests of the game by making the entrance entrance different by the flow path through which the game balls flow down It has been proposed (for example, JP2013-233181A). In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the flow path through which the game ball flows is likely to be constant, and the game becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by changing the flow path through which the game ball flows according to the conditions, the entrance for the game ball to enter is switched, so that a variety of game balls can be entered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a game from becoming monotonous by entering a ball opening and suppress a player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine CB1, since the first guidance state and the second guidance state are switched depending on the number of game balls that have entered the specific entry means, the induction state is determined according to the number of game balls that enter the specific entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by arbitrarily switching between and controlling the ball entry means for entering.

  In the gaming machine CB1, variable means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the specific entrance means and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the variable means Variable control means for changing a predetermined condition from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the variable control means is variable in a period during which a first number or more balls can enter the specific ball entry means. The first opening for changing the means to the opening state and the second opening for changing the changing means to the opening state during a period when it is difficult for the first number to enter the ball can be switched and executed. A gaming machine CB2, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CB1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first number or more can be entered and a difficult state. There is an effect that the number can be controlled.

  In the gaming machine CB2, the variable control means executes the first opening when the second guidance state is set, the gaming machine CB3.

  According to the gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CB2, when the second guidance state is set, it is possible to enter a first number or more into the specific pitching means, and the player can There is an effect that the inductive state can be easily switched intentionally.

<Characteristic CC group> (Normal count control)
First information on the basis of the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the game ball entering the first ball entry means. First information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information acquisition means, second information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means, Storage means for storing the first information and the second information, respectively, a first determination based on the first information stored in the storage means, and a second determination based on the second information. The first privilege can be given based on the determination means capable of performing determination and the result of the first determination by the determination means being a specific first determination result, and the result of the second determination is a specific Giving the second privilege different from the first privilege based on the second determination result A special granting means that allows a game ball to enter, and depending on the number of game balls that have entered the specific entrance means, The gaming machine CC1 is characterized by having acquisition ratio variable means for changing the acquisition ratio of one information and the second information.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. A plurality of entrances into which game balls can enter are provided on the game board surface, and there is a gaming machine that has improved the interests of the game by making the entrance entrance different by the flow path through which the game balls flow down It has been proposed (for example, JP2013-233181A). In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the flow path through which the game ball flows is likely to be constant, and the game becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by changing the flow path through which the game ball flows according to the conditions, the entrance for the game ball to enter is switched, so that a variety of game balls can be entered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a game from becoming monotonous by entering a ball opening and suppress a player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine CC1, since the acquisition ratio of the first information and the second information can be made different depending on the number of game balls that have entered the specific entry means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CC1, variable means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the specific ball entry means and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the variable means Variable control means for changing a predetermined condition from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the variable control means is variable in a period during which a first number or more balls can enter the specific ball entry means. The first opening for changing the means to the opening state and the second opening for changing the changing means to the opening state during a period when it is difficult for the first number to enter the ball can be switched and executed. A gaming machine CC2, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CC1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first number or more can be entered and a difficult state, so that of the gaming ball entering the specific entry means There is an effect that the number can be controlled.

  In the gaming machine CC2, when the variable means is in the open state, the variable means also regulates the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Game machine CC3.

  According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CC2, when the variable means is in the open state, the entry of the gaming ball into the first entering means or the second entering means is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the specific ball entry means and the game balls from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means from occurring at the same time and executing an unintelligible game. There is an effect that can be done.

<Characteristic CDs> (advanced advance control when symbols are stopped)
In order to indicate a specific determination result by a determination means capable of executing a predetermined determination, a display control means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means and then stopping display, and the display control means When the identification information is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, the display control means dynamically displays a plurality of display modes as the identification information. A plurality of display modes that are stopped and displayed at different timings, and a voice control unit capable of outputting a sound based on the display mode being stopped and displayed by the display control unit; and The voice information determining means for determining the voice information output by the voice output means from a plurality of voice information, and the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determining means is regulated. Gaming machine CD1, characterized in that it comprises a regulating means capable Rukoto, a.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. In the case of notifying the lottery result, a configuration has been proposed in which a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-2013). -090780). In addition, in the above-described gaming machines, when a plurality of variably displayed symbol sequences are stopped and displayed, there are some which are configured to give sharpness to an effect of notifying a lottery result by outputting a sound effect. . However, the monotonous sound effect is repeated, so that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage by suppressing repeated output of monotonous sound effects.

  According to the gaming machine CD1, by restricting the type of audio information determined by the audio information determining means, the type of audio information can be easily determined as intended at the time of design, and the player gets bored with the game early. There is an effect that defects can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine CD1 has storage means capable of storing the sound information determined by the sound information determination means as history information, and the restriction means corresponds to the history information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine CD2 characterized by restricting the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determination means.

  According to the gaming machine CD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CD1, the determined voice information is stored as history information in the storage means, and the voice determined by the voice information determination means corresponding to the stored history information. By restricting the type of information, it is possible to control the audio information determined corresponding to the history information, and it is possible to make the determined type of audio information suitable.

  In the gaming machine CD2, the regulation means regulates that the same type as the type of the voice information stored a predetermined number of times before is determined.

  According to the gaming machine CD3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CD2, it is possible to prevent the same audio information type from being continuously determined, and to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

  In the gaming machine CD1 or CD2, the regulation means regulates that the type of the voice information that has been determined a specific number of times or more in a predetermined period is determined.

  According to the gaming machine CD4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CD1 or CD2, it is possible to suppress the problem that the type of the same audio information is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a design effect in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first effect is the plurality of identifications. A gaming machine CD5, which is an effect in which one of the identification symbols among the symbols is stopped and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine CD5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4, various sounds are output when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so there are various effects when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD5, determination means capable of executing determination, and privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result; The gaming machine CD6 is characterized in that the voice information determination means can determine the voice information based on a determination result by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine CD6, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD5, it becomes possible to identify the determination result by the sound output corresponding to the first effect, so that the output sound There is an effect that the game can be performed with interest in the type.

  The gaming machine CD6 includes an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information, and an information storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit. The determination unit stores the information stored in the information storage unit. And the gaming machine has pre-determination means for performing pre-determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means, The gaming machine CD7, wherein the voice information determination means is configured to be able to determine the voice information based on a result of the prior determination by the prior determination means.

  According to the gaming machine CD7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CD6, the result of the pre-determination can be identified by the type of the sound to be output. There is an effect that can be done.

<Feature CE group> (Pixel number switching control depending on display contents)
Display information determining means for determining display information to be displayed by the display means from a plurality of display information, and among the display information determined by the display information determining means, the amount of data in at least two of the display information Data amount determining means for determining the corresponding information; and variable control means for controlling the display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the determination result determined by the data amount determining means; The gaming machine CE1, wherein the display information determining means determines the display information at least at two or more timings.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, there has been proposed one that is configured to display various images and moving images on a display device (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). However, since the notice display mode is displayed at random, there is a problem that the image data to be displayed becomes excessive and the addition to display control and the like increases. An object of the above gaming machine is to provide a game capable of reducing a control load.

  According to the gaming machine CE1, since the display mode displayed is variably controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determination means, it is possible to perform display control in accordance with the data amount, and control load. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine CE1, the data amount determination means determines whether a specific condition is satisfied based on a total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in a predetermined first period. A gaming machine CE2 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine CE2, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied is determined based on the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CE1. It is possible to suppress a problem that the control load increases at.

  In the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, when the determination unit that can execute the determination, the effect execution unit that can execute the effect based on the determination result of the determination unit, and the specific effect performed by the effect execution unit, A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege advantageous to a player, wherein the display information determination unit determines a display mode displayed in the effect executed by the effect execution unit. A gaming machine CE3.

  According to the gaming machine CE3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect notified by the determination result cannot be stably executed due to an increase in the data amount.

  In any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is set as status information corresponding to the data amount as information corresponding to the data amount, The game machine CE4, wherein the data amount determining means determines whether the total value obtained by adding the status information is a predetermined value or more.

  According to the gaming machine CE4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the status information corresponding to the data amount is set, so that the data amount can be easily determined. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines CE1 to CE4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determination means so that a total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed on the display means decreases. The gaming machine CE5 is characterized in that the display mode to be changed is variable.

  According to the gaming machine CE5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines CE1 to CE4, since the data amount is suppressed, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. In the gaming machine CE5, the variable control unit sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one display information determined by the display information determination unit is set. A gaming machine CE6.

  According to the gaming machine CE6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CE5, the data amount can be suppressed by setting the number of pixels in the existing display mode to be small, and the problem that the display data becomes excessive can be suppressed. There is.

<Feature CF group> (Production can be changed at the timing of pressing the button)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display unit. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player, an operation that can be operated by the player as the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit An operation dynamic display mode in which a display mode is changed by operating the unit is set, an effective period setting unit that sets an effective period in which an operation to the operation unit is valid, and an effective period setting unit In the remaining period Gaming machine CF1, characterized in that those having a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a particular effect in Zui.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for informing the lottery result, there has been proposed one that is configured so that the player can directly participate in the game by operating the operation means that can be operated by the player and changing the effect. (For example, JP2013-090780A). However, since the method of operating the operation means by the player and the method of the operation period are not constant, there is a problem that the interest is reduced in performing the performance. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine CF1, when the operating means is operated, a specific effect can be executed based on the remaining period of the effective period. Even if it is configured so that the user can operate the operation means, since a specific effect is executed based on the remaining period of the effective period, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and the interest of the game There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CF1, a suggestion mode setting unit that sets a suggestion mode that suggests operating the operation unit a plurality of times within the effective period set by the effective period setting unit, and a setting by the suggestion mode setting unit For the suggestion mode corresponding to one operation to be performed, an effect period setting means for setting a predetermined effect period within the effective period, and a remaining period of the effect period set by the effect period setting means A gaming machine CF2, characterized by comprising a reporting means capable of reporting the remaining period mode.

  According to the gaming machine CF2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CF1, it is possible to make the player feel as if a valid period has been set for each of a plurality of operations. There is an effect that it is possible to easily notify that execution is performed.

  In the gaming machine CF1 or CF2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the plurality of identification symbols and indicates the determination result. The plurality of identification symbols are stopped by a combination, and the operation dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific mode by operating the operation means on at least a part of the plurality of identification symbols. When the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the specific effect executing means, after the specific information that is displayed dynamically, is subsequent to the identification information that is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine CF3 characterized by executing an effect corresponding to information reflected during dynamic display of the identification information for which dynamic display is started.

  According to the gaming machine CF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CF1 or CF2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, it is also reflected during dynamic display after the dynamic display By executing the effect, the operation means can be motivated to be operated in a short time.

<Feature CG group> (3 operations)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation effect setting means that can set an operation effect whose effect mode changes based on the operation of the operation means, and is set by the operation effect setting means The operation effects that can be performed are set with a plurality of operation effects that vary the effect mode in accordance with the number of operations of the operation means. The gaming machine CG1 is characterized in that the number of suggesting modes corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation effect is displayed.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for informing the lottery result, there has been proposed one that is configured so that the player can directly participate in the game by operating the operation means that can be operated by the player and changing the effect. (For example, JP2013-090780A). However, there is a problem that the interest is reduced in performing the production based on the operation of the operation means. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine CG1, when multiple operation effects are set, the number of suggesting modes corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game. is there.

  In the gaming machine CG1, when the multiple operation effects are set, an effective period setting unit that sets an effective period in which the operation of the operation unit is enabled, and an effective period set by the effective period setting unit A game machine CG2 comprising variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed corresponding to the decrease in the effective period for each of the suggested modes.

  According to the gaming machine CG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CG1, the variable display mode can make it appear as if a valid period has been set for each suggestion mode, and the timing for performing each operation is variably displayed. There is an effect that the operation can be performed according to the mode, and the timing at which the operation effect is displayed can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, the gaming machine CG3 is characterized in that the operation effect to be executed according to the number of times the operation means is operated is preset.

  According to the gaming machine CG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, there is an effect that it is not necessary to individually set a plurality of operation effects, and control that is operated a plurality of times can be facilitated.

<Characteristic CH group> (Cosmo Up)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored by the storage means, and determination means The display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the display, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means for dynamic display A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display unit. A privilege granting means for granting, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and specific information based on the specific effect executed by the effect executing means. Memory A specific information storage unit that, based on the specific information stored in that particular storage unit, the gaming machine is characterized in that with a special effect determination means for determining a special effect CH1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. As an effect for informing a lottery result, a notice effect in which a lottery result is suggested in advance has been proposed before the lottery result is notified (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). ). However, further improvement of interest was required. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine CH1, since the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, the effect executed after that is changed by executing the specific effect. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing different games for each player.

  Based on the execution of the suggestion means for suggesting the suggestion mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special effect determined by the special effect determination means in the gaming machine CH1. And suggesting mode changing means for changing the suggesting mode, and when the suggesting mode is a predetermined mode, the residual display period of the identification information is configured to be equal to or longer than a predetermined period. A gaming machine CH2, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine CH2, it is possible to determine that it is not the timing at which the identification information is displayed in a mode for indicating the determination result according to the suggestion mode, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress problems that miss the determination result.

  In the gaming machine CH1 or CH2, the player has operation means that can be operated, and the effect determined by the special effect determining means is composed of an operation effect whose effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. The gaming machine CH3 is characterized in that the number of times that the operation effect is executed is set corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CH3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CH1 or CH2, the number of times that the operation effect is executed by the stored specific information is set, so the number of times that the player can operate the operation means There is an effect that it is possible to suppress problems that cause misunderstanding.

<Characteristic CI group> (pseudo light guide plate effect)
In a gaming machine having display means and display control means capable of displaying a second display mode different from the first display mode from the first display mode, the second display mode is the first display mode. The display control unit is configured to display the first display mode and the second display mode so as to overlap each other. This is a gaming machine CI1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. After the symbol for indicating the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner on the display means, it is stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols indicating the lottery result. During the variable display, a notice effect or the like suggesting the lottery result is executed. A thing has been proposed (for example, JP2013-090780A). In such a gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game by arranging a light emitting device such as a driving object or LED on the gaming board or the like and operating it in association with the display mode. In such a configuration, the cost of the gaming machine becomes excessive, and there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game while reducing the cost. In order to solve the above-described problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of games.

  According to the gaming machine CI1, by displaying the display modes with variable focal positions in an overlapping manner, it is possible to make the player look like a display mode with a sense of perspective and to improve the interest of the game. .

  In the gaming machine CI1, the gaming machine CI2 is characterized in that the second display mode includes a mode in which the display object displayed in the first display mode is not focused.

  According to the gaming machine CI2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CI1, by including an aspect that does not focus on the display object, by overlapping the first display mode and the second display mode, This has the effect of providing a sense of perspective.

  In the gaming machine CI1 or CI2, the display control means displays the first display mode for a first period, and then displays the second display mode on the front side of the first display mode a plurality of times. A gaming machine CI3 that is configured to be able to repeatedly display the second state to be hidden.

  According to the gaming machine CI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CI1 or CI2, the second display mode is displayed on the front side of the first display mode, and the non-display is repeated in a short time, whereby the afterimage and the first display mode are displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to make it appear as if the first display mode protrudes more to the front side by combining.

<Characteristic CJ group> (Control of presentation using hold information and internal information)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the display, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and first based on the determination result State setting means capable of setting at least one of a gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the storage means before the determination is performed by the determination means In the gaming machine having a pre-determination means capable of performing pre-determination based on the information stored in the stage, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect, and the effect of the effect executed by the effect execution means An effect selection unit capable of selecting one effect mode group from a plurality of effect mode groups including at least a mode, and a group switching unit for switching the effect mode group selected by the effect selection unit. The gaming machine CJ1 is characterized in that the group switching means determines the type of the production mode group based on the determination result of the prior determination means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. Then, it is possible to set a game state that is easy to win in the winning / losing lottery and a game state that is difficult to win, and provide a player with a game with a different degree of expectation according to the set game state. Things have been proposed. (For example, JP2013-090780A). In such a gaming machine, by performing an effect to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently set gaming state, it is possible to play a game while expecting a gaming state advantageous to the player. In this case, even if a game state advantageous to the player is set, the player thinks that the game state is disadvantageous to the player, and the game There was a problem that motivation was reduced. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing an effect that can appropriately suggest the set gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine CJ1, the effect mode group is switched based on the determination result of the prior determination unit, and the effect is executed by the effect execution unit based on the switched effect mode group. Therefore, it becomes possible to predict the game situation later. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CJ1, the effect executed by the effect execution means includes a suggestion effect that suggests that the two gaming states are set, and the group switching means includes the prior discrimination means It is determined whether or not the second gaming state can be switched to the first gaming state by the prior determination according to, and the effect mode group capable of selecting the suggested effect corresponding to the determination result is determined. A gaming machine CJ2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine CJ2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CJ1, based on the effect mode group corresponding to the fact that the prior discrimination means has determined that the gaming state is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. Since the effect can be executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to predict the currently set gaming state or the game state that can be set later based on the effect mode of the effect to be executed. . Moreover, since the effect mode group is switched based on the prior discrimination information that the gaming state actually shifts, it is possible to execute an effect with high reliability for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be watched for the effect to be executed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means switches to and sets the first gaming state at the start of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the specific determination result. Machine CJ3.

  According to the gaming machine CJ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means sets the switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state at the start of dynamic display of the identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of switching the state.

  In any of the gaming machines CJ1 to CJ3, a period until at least a predetermined number of determination results are displayed based on the identification information for indicating the determination results based on the setting of the second gaming state, The advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period that is advantageous to the player, and the suggestion mode includes a gaming state set by the state setting means at a time point until the predetermined number of times of determination is displayed. A gaming machine CJ4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine CJ4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CJ1 to CJ3, the suggestion mode is displayed based on the progress of the set advantageous period, so that the suggestion immediately after the advantageous period is set It can suppress that an aspect is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play immediately and to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature CK group> (Meter sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player and an operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect based on operating the operation means, the operation effect execution means is for a specific period. In addition, when the operation means is operated, a specific operation effect is configured to be executable, and the specific operation effect corresponds to the operated period when the operation means is operated during the specific period. Thus, the gaming machine CK1 is configured to execute different modes.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. And, before the lottery result is notified, the operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and the period until the lottery result is notified There was something to entertain the player. In addition, in the above-described gaming machines, there is one that causes the player to operate the operation means in order to further enhance the effect (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). In such a gaming machine, the same operation effect is executed no matter what timing the operation means is operated, resulting in a problem that the effect of the effect is reduced and the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the above gaming machine is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine CK1, when the operating means is operated, the specific operation effect can be executed in a different manner corresponding to the operated period, so that the specific operation executed when the operating means is operated There is an effect that the variation of the production can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CK1, the specific operation effect includes at least a display effect whose display mode changes stepwise corresponding to a period during which the operation means is operated, and a sound effect corresponding to the changed display effect. A gaming machine CK2 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CK1, a display effect whose display mode is changed step by step as a specific operation effect and an audio effect corresponding to the changed display effect are executed. There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine CK2, the sound effect is such that when the operation means is operated, a reproduction process is started in which reproduction of the corresponding sound data is started. The reproduction is continued for a predetermined reproduction period, or the reproduction of the audio data is stopped or performed when the operation means performs a predetermined operation before the reproduction period is continued. The game machine CK3 is characterized in that a process for stopping the output of the game machine CK3 is executed.

  According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CK2, the sound effect in which the sound data is reproduced is stopped when the operation means is operated in advance. There is an effect that it is possible to execute a production with a sense of unity and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine CK3, after the process for stopping the reproduction of the audio data or the output of the audio is executed, the reproduction is stopped or the output of the audio is stopped based on the operation means being operated. The gaming machine CK4 is characterized in that the reproduction is started or the sound output is executed from the position where it has been.

  According to the gaming machine CK4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CK3, the reproduction of the audio data stopped based on the operation of the operating means can be resumed, so that the display effect and the sound effect provide a sense of unity. It is possible to execute an effect with a game and to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature CL group> (Variable voice control)
A discriminating unit capable of executing discrimination, a display unit for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result of the discriminating unit, a dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display unit, and A privilege that can execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display period determining unit dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having a game execution means, a display effect execution means capable of executing a display effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a period during which the display effect is executed by the display effect execution means. A sound effect executing means capable of executing a sound effect, wherein the display effect executing means performs one display effect in a period until the identification information for indicating the determination result a predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed. Specific display to execute The voice effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing a specific sound effect corresponding to a period in which the specific display effect is executed, and when executing the specific sound effect. Is a process for stopping the reproduction of the specific sound effect based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displaying, and restarting the reproduction in response to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine CL1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start opening provided on the surface of the game board, if the game is won or not, a lottery is won, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player There was a game that would be executed. (For example, JP2013-090780A). Further, in the above-described gaming machines, there is a configuration in which a specific effect can be executed in a specific period until a predetermined number of determinations of the validity lottery are executed, and different effects depending on the period in which the validity lottery is executed There are things that enhance the production effect by providing the player. However, in the above-described gaming machine, there are cases where the lottery is executed without interruption during the specific period, and cases where the lottery is interrupted during the specific period, and an effect for showing the result of the lottery and during the specific period There is a problem that it is not possible to give a sense of unity with the performance to be performed, and it is not possible to enhance the production effect. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest by enhancing the effect.

  According to the gaming machine CL1, the specific sound effect executed during the period in which the specific display effect is executed is stopped based on the stop display of the identification information, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Therefore, the specific display effect and the specific sound effect can be integrated. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CL1, the sound effect executing means is configured to output a special sound when the reproduction of the specific sound effect is stopped. According to the gaming machine CL2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CL1, a special voice is output when the specific voice effect is stopped. Therefore, after the identification information is stopped and displayed, the next identification information is dynamically displayed. When the period until the start is short, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the specific sound effect is interrupted, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Note that the special sound output by the sound effect executing means may be sound that is continuously output until at least a predetermined period elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player easily think that the specific sound effect is continuously executed across the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times.

  In the gaming machine CL1 or CL2, the specific display effect is a game machine CL3 in which an effect corresponding to the end of the dynamic display period of one identification information is preset.

  According to the gaming machine CL3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CL1 or CL2, an effect corresponding to the end of the dynamic display period of one identification information is preset as the specific display effect. There is an effect that the production corresponding to the end can be surely executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines CL1 to CL3, the display effect executing means displays the specific display effect based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped during the period in which the specific display effect is executed. A gaming machine CL4, which is to be interrupted.

  According to the gaming machine CL4, in addition to any of the effects played by the gaming machines CL1 to CL3, the display of the specific display effect can be interrupted based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. It is possible to execute an effect with a sense of unity by the effect and the specific sound effect, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (3)

Display information determining means for determining display information of a display mode to be displayed by the display means from a plurality of display information;
A data amount determining means for determining information corresponding to a data amount in at least two or more of the display information among the display information determined by the display information determining means;
Variable control means for variably controlling the display mode displayed on the display means based on the determination result determined by the data amount determination means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display information determining means determines the display information at least at two or more timings.   The data amount determining means determines whether a specific condition is satisfied based on a total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in a predetermined first period. Item 1. The gaming machine according to Item 1. Determination means capable of executing determination;
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the determination result of the determination means;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the display information determining means determines a display mode to be displayed by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

Images